ICCMS Proceeding

PROCEEDINGS
SIXTH INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS ON

COMPUTATIONAL MECHANICS AND
SIMULATION
27TH JUNE - 1ST JULY
IIT Bombay, Powai, Maharashtra, India
EDITORS
Sandeep Pendhari
Prakash Nanthagopalan
Vivek Deshmukh
Abhay Bambole
Yogesh Desai
Organizers Under the Aegis of
IIT BOMBAY VJTI

Sixth International Congress on
Computational Mechanics and
Simulation
Proceedings
Editors
Sandeep Pendhari
Prakash Nanthagopalan
Vivek Deshmukh
Abhay Bambole
Yogesh Desai
Indian Institute of Technology Veermata Jijabai Technological

Bombay Institute
Powai, Mumbai, Maharashtra 400076 Matunga East, Mumbai, Maharashtra 400019
EDITORIAL
It is our proud privilege to welcome you all to the Sixth International Congress on
Computational Mechanics and Simulation (ICCMS2016) which is being held at Indian
Institute of Technology Bombay (IIT Bombay), organized and hosted jointly by Department
of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay and Department of Structural Engineering, Veermata Jijabai
Technological Institute (VJTI) Mumbai.
The aim of ICCMS2016 is to provide a forum for scientists, academicians, analysts,

designers and practicing engineers from around the globe to interact and exchange ideas
and establish relationships from all areas of theoretical and applied mechanics including
theoretical, computational and experimental aspects, as well as theoretical modelling,
methods of analysis and instrumentation besides setting directions for future growth. It
includes basic discipline-oriented as well as inter-disciplinary areas such as Solid and
Structural Mechanics, Non-linear Mechanics, Composite Structures, Fracture and Damage
Mechanics, Bridge Structures, Material Modelling, Multi-body Dynamics, Computational Fluid
Dynamics, Heat Transfer and many more. The event is being held under the aegis of Indian
Association for Computational Mechanics (IndACM).
The ICCMS2016 has five plenary speakers, who are eminent researchers from different
parts of the world. Apart from the plenary sessions, six concurrent technical sessions have
been scheduled on each day of the congress for the oral presentation of all accepted
papers. Keynote speakers and session chairmen are leading researchers from the thematic
areas of the respective sessions.
We wish to extend our heartfelt acknowledgment to the authors, peer-reviewers and

committee members whose diligent work put into shape the ICCMS2016. We are grateful to
Professor Devang V. Khakkar (Director, IIT Bombay), Professor Omprakash G. Kakde
(Director, VJTI, Mumbai) and Professor Tarun Kant (IIT Bombay) for providing guidance,
encouragement and support.
Lastly but not the least, we would like to thank all the volunteers for their dedication and hard
work for making ICCMS2016 a huge success.
Sandeep Pendhari
Prakash Nanthgopalan
Vivek Deshmukh
Abhay Bambole
Yogesh Desai
~................•
'f1'~' ~
-
~
'11'('11<1 l'Il~1 I ~ ~,,~
Office 2572 3488, 2576 7001
tu
~, ~ 400076, m«f
Res.
EPABX
2572 3738. 25768000
2572 2545. Extn.: 7001 (0). 8000 (R) e
Indian Institute of Technology Bombay Fax 91-22-2572 3546 (Direct). 2572 3480
3
Powai, Mumbai -400076, India E-mail director@iitb.ac.in
khakhar@iitb.ac.in
c-
Website: www.iitb.ac.in l»
Devang V. Khakhar,
~fct.~,~
Director <
Message
I am delighted to note that liT Bombay has taken the initiative, way back in the year
2000, in founding the Indian Association for Computational Mechanics (IndACM), an
affiliate of International Association for Computational Mechanics (IACM) to bring
together researchers, especially young researchers, working in the area of
Computational Mechanics on a common platform and has been conducting the
International Congress on Computational Mechanics and Simulation (ICCMS) on a
regular basis. I am also happy to note that liT Bombay and the VJTI have joined
hands to organize the Sixth ICCMS2016 at liT Bombay on 27 June to 1 July 2016.
A distinct discipline of Computational Mechanics which could stand alone on its own
merit started growing its roots in the nineteen hundred sixties with the development of
a revolutionary computational method - the finite element method and the
simultaneous innovations in the design of digital computers. In simple terms,
Computational Mechanics is concerned with application of discrete numerical methods
to describe the behaviour of real life physical phenomena governed by the principles of
mechanics. Computational Mechanics has enabled transformation of much of the
classical Newtonian mechanics into practical discrete numerical procedures and tools
to understand complex natural physical phenomena. These tools are now used
extensively in both developed and developing world for design and simulation in
manufacturing, transportation, communication, defence and may allied fields. Recent
innovations in Computational Mechanics are already making great strides in quantum,
molecular and biological phenomena. Computational Mechanics has made profound
impact on many facets of life, including medicine, energy conservation and national
security. It is well-recognized that scientists and engineers of India and of Indian origin
outside the country have played a very significant role in this development.
I wish the congress great success.
~
Devang Khakhar
VJTI
Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute
(Central Technological Institute, Maharashtra State, INDIA)
H. R. Mahajani Marg, Matunga. Mumbai 400019
Tel.No. +91 2224198101-02 Fax:+91 2224102874
www.vjti.ac.in
Message
Computational Mechanics which makes use of Physics, Mechanics, Mathematics,

and Computer Science emerged as a discipline that provides deeper understanding
of the systems by simulating complex events and use these simulations to design
engineering systems, and its scope includes kilometer scale problems to nanoscale
problems.
Hosting the sixth international congress jointly with the premier institute of the
country, the liT Bombay is a matter of pride for my Institute, the VJTI. This four days
event will provide a platform to the researchers, academicians, and the practitioners
to share their experiences, discuss the recent developments and the trends, and I
am sure it will definitely be a value adding experience for all.
I wish the congress the great success.
D.G. Kakde
Sixth International Congress on
Computational Mechanics and Simulation
Patrons
Devang Khakhar, Director, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Omprakash G. Kakde, Director, VJTI Mumbai.
Mentor
Tarun Kant, Institute Chair Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Congress Chairs
Yogesh Desai, Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai
Abhay Bambole, Professor and Dean R&D, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Organizing Secretaries
Prakash Nanthagopalan, Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Sandeep S. Pendhari, Associate Professor, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Vivek B. Deshmukh, Associate Professor, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Members
Sauvik Banerjee, Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Deepankar Chaudhary, Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
T. I. Eldho, Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai
Subimal Ghosh, Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
K.K. Sangle, Professor and Head, Structural Engineering Department, Dean Infrastructure and Planning, VJTI
Mumbai.
M. A. Chakrabarti, Professor, Structural Engineering Department, VJTI Mumbai.
Nissar Khan, Sr. Tech. Superintendent, Heavy Structures Lab, IIT Bombay, Mumbai.
Advisory Committee
Sondipon Adhikari, Swansea, UK | Satya Atluri, Irvine, USA
Sudhir K Barai, Kharagpur, India | Romesh Batra, Blacksburg, USA
Mallikarjuna Bennur, Detroit, USA | Atul Bhaskar, Southampton, UK
S K Bhattacharyya, Roorkee, India | Gautam Biswas, Guwahati, India
Erasmo Carrera, Torino, Italy | C S Desai, Tucson, USA
Subhasish Dey, Kharagpur, India | B K Dutta, Mumbai, India
A J M Ferreira, Porto, Prtugal | Ranjan Ganguli, Bengaluru, India
Somnath Ghosh, Baltimore, USA | S Gopalakrishnan, Bengaluru, India
Ramana Grandhi, Dayton, USA | Vijay Gupta, Los Angeles, USA
Thomas J R Hughes, Austin, USA | Nagesh Iyer, Chennai, India
C S Jog, Bengaluru, India | Shailendra Joshi, Singapore
Rakesh Kapania, Blacksburg, USA | Santosh Kapuria, Delhi, India
B L Karihaloo, Cardiff, UK | Ashwini Kumar, Gandhinagar, India
Jyant Kumar, Bengaluru, India | G R Liu, Cincinnati, USA
Sudhakar R Marur, Pune, India | Vasant Matsagar, Delhi, India
Sanjay Mittal, Kanpur, India | R Narasimhan, Bengaluru, India
P Nithiarasu, Swansea, UK | J Tinsley Oden, Austin, USA
Nimal Rajapakse, Burnaby, Canada | L S Ramachandra, Kharagpur, India
Manas Chandra Ray, Kharagpur, India | J N Reddy, College Station, USA
Debasish Roy, Bengaluru, India | Anand V Singh, London, Canada
Ram Kumar Singh, Mumbai, India | N Swaminathan, Cambridge, UK
Ramesh Talreja, College Station, USA | Tayfun Tezduyar, Houston, USA
Contents
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
Plenary Sessions
1 Robust Finite Element Modelling Approaches to Systemic Circulation Flow and Heat 1
Transfer
Hasan H., Cocckerelli A. and Nithiarasu P.
2 Parallel Partitioned Simulations of Real World's Coupled Problems 2

Yoshimura S. and Yamada T.
3 Multiscale Modeling of Failure in Composite Materials 3

Ramesh Talreja
4 St Venant Torsion and Bending of Prismatic Composite Shafts 4

Bhushan Lal Karihaloo and Qi-Zhi Xiao
Keynote Sessions
1 Long Waves in Lattice Waveguides 5

Bhaskar A., Cuan-Urquizo E.
2 Three-Dimensional Numerical Study of Conjugate Heat Transfer in Diverging 6

Microchannel
Duryodhan V. S., Singh A., Singh S. G., and Agrawal A.
3 Solidification With Buoyancy Induced Convection: Evaluation of Different Mushy 7

Zone Formulations
Verma S. and Dewan A.
4 Physics Based Finite Element Interpolation Functions for Rotating Beams 8

Ranjan Ganguli
5 Free Edge effects in Sandwich Laminates Under Tension, Bending and Twisting Loads 9
Dhanesh N. and Santosh Kapuria
6 Finite Element Computations of Complex Flows 10

Mittal S., Chopra G., Furquan M., Navrose, VMK Kotteda and Bhatt V.
7 Tuned Sloshing damper in Response Control of Tall Building Structure 11

Bhattacharyya S.K.
8 Advanced Methodologies for Fracture Analysis and Damage Tolerant Evaluation 12

Iyer N. R., Palani G.S. and Ramachandra Murthy A.
i
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
9 Atomistic and Continuum Modelling of Fracture Strength and Adhesion Properties of 13

Graphene
Dewapriya Nuwan and Nimal Rajapakse
10 Numerical Studies of Piezoelectric Composites Using Nurbs for Geometry and Field 14
Functions
Singh A.V. and Raj V.
11 Clean Water and Clean Energy Production: simulation Using Finite Element Method 15
Seetharamu K.N., Spandana K.R., Parikshit B.
12 Two-Temperature Continuum Model for Metal Plasticity 16

Chowdhury S. R. and Roy D.
13 Microstructure Evolution in Metal Nanostructures Under Extreme Conditions of 17

Temperature and Strain Rate
Gupta V., Ghoniem N. M, Crum R, PO G., Seif D., Prikhodko S. V. ,Colorado H. A.,
Ramirez B., Gámez C.
14 Nonlinear Stability Characteristics of Composite Cylindrical Panel Subjected to Non- 18

uniform In-plane Mechanical and Localized Thermal Loadings
Kumar R., Ramchandra L. S. and Banerjee B.
15 A Fast-Multipole Unified Technique for the Analysis of Potential Problems with the 19
Boundary Element Methods
Ney Augusto Dumont and, Hélvio De Farias Costa Peixoto
16 Multi-fidelity Design Optimization: Challenges in Complex Physics-based 20

Computational Mechanics
Ramana V. Grandhi
17 An Overview Of Computational Modeling At Material Chemistry And Micro Scales In 21

Cement Paste
Ram Mohan, Wayne Hodo and Rajendran A.
Bio-Mechanics
001 Vibrational Characteristics of Femur Bone 22

Priyadarshi B.K. and Parhi D.R.
002 Analysis of Implants Used for Stabilization of Fractured Bone 25

Dash A. K., Agarwalla D. K., Das H. C., Sahoo J. and Rath A.
003 Influence of Drilling Effect on Bone Stresses by Finite Element Analysis 29

Mahajan A.N. and Kadam B.K.N.
ii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
004 Effects of Heat and Mass Transfer on MHD Flow of Blood Through an Artery With 33
Stenosis Having Variable Viscosity
Tripathi B. and Sharma B.K.
005 A Novel Computer Model for Bone’s Adaptation to Mechanical Environment 36

Goyal A. and Prasad J.
006 Fabric Based Characterization of Microstructural Anisotropy of Trabecular Bone 40

Singh A.K., Srivastava P.K. and Mahajan P.
007 Analysis of Internal Fixation Plates 44

Tanweer Alam, Babu M.N. and Pawan Kumar
008 A Study on Accidental Injury & Human Biomechanics in Bangladesh: An Approach to 47

Reduce Accidental Injury & Increase Health Safety
Khan R.R. and Zahin M.M.
Bridge Structures
009 Numerical and Analytical Modelling of Reinforced Concrete Circular Columns Under 50
Torsion
Mondal A., Ghosh T., Gangan A. and Suriya Prakash S.
010 Analysis of Spherical Dome with Openings Using Finite Element Method 54
Khan S., Bambole A.N., and Murgudkar H.C.
011 Expert System for Bridge Truss Design 58

Bambole A.N., Murgudkar H.C. and Thakur P.
012 Free Vibration Analysis of a Simply Supported Beam 62

Kamble S. D., Shindade A.B. Salokhe N. and Bambole A.N.
Composite Structures
013 Finite Element Modeling of Functionally Graded Material Plates: An Assessment of a 66

New Shear Deformation Theory for Free Vibration Response
Gupta A. and Talha M.
014 Experimental and Numerical Simulation Of ECC Strengthened Masonry Structures in 70

Flexure
Singh S. B., Munjal P. and Patil R.
015 Two-Dimensional Static Analysis of Composite Plate Subjected to Arbitrary Boundary 75

Conditions Using Extended Kantorovich Method
Kumari P., Yadav P., and Singh A.
016 Finite Element Modelling of FRP Composite Joints Considering Bolt Torque 79
Mandal B. and Chakrabarti B.
iii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
017 Thermal Stress Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates and Open Cylindrical Shells 83
Punera D. and Kant T.
018 Bending and Buckling Analyses of Composite Laminates with and Without Presence 87
of Damage and its Passive Control with Optimized Piezoelectric Patch Location
Maiti D.K. and Sreehari V.M.
019 Static Response of Wind Turbine Blade Under Actual Loading Effect 91
Choudhury S., Sharma T. and Shukla K.K.
020 Steel-Concrete Composite Structure- An Advanced Material 95

Suresh Sahu
021 Orthogonal Cutting Process Modeling of Idealised CFRPs 99

Kubher S. and Gururaja S.
022 Numerical Studies on Flange Buckling Behaviour of FRP Box-Beams 103

Kasiviswanathan K. and Upadhyay A.
023 Theoretical Study on Basalt Fiber Reinforced Composite (BFRC) Sandwich Panel 107
Under Flexure
Raj S., Bharathkumar B. H. and Ramesh Kumar V.
024 Effect of Delamination Size and Location on the Dynamics of Thin Pretwisted Strips 111
Salunkhe S.B. and Guruprasad P.J.
025 Stiffened Plates of CNT Reinforced Composites: Static Response Using FEM 115
Bhar A. and Shakya R.
026 Coating Effect on Engine Piston Thermal Behaviour 120

Babu M. N, Tanweer Alam and Kumar P.
027 Static Analysis of Functionally Graded Beam for Power-Law Variation of Elastic 124
Modulus
Pendhari S. S., Mahajan M., Dhangare P. M. and Gujar P.
028 Optimization of Sandwich Core FRP Bridge Deck 128

Gangwar T., Mandal B. and Chakrabarti A.
029 Slenderness Effect on Behaviour of CFRP Wrapped RC Circular Column 132

Narule G., Bambole A. N., Raut G., Rathod A., and Lendave Y.V.
030 Modal Analysis of Composite Beam Using Abaqus (FEA) 136

Nawale H.H, Roy S. and Jagtap K.
031 Seismic Analysis of Multistorey Building Using Steel Concrete Composite Columns at 140
Soft Storey
Patil S., Jangave S.K and Patil R.S
iv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
032 Ballistic Impact Response of Laminated GFRP Composite Plate: Experimental and FE 144
Analyses
Ansari M.D.M. and Chakrabarti A.
033 Analysis of Laminated Composite Orthotropic Plates Under Bi-directional Bending 148
Subjected to Concentrated Loads
Raval D. and Bambole A. N.
034 Vibration Damping Capacity of Carbon Nanotubes Based Hybrid Composite Spherical 153
Shell Panel
Swain A. and Roy T.
035 Buckling Analysis of Composite Laminated Skew Plate of Variable Thickness Under 157
Biaxial Compression
Priyanka Dhurvey
036 Prediction of Spring-in Deformation for L-Shaped CFRP Components 161

Shah D.B., Patel K.M., Joshi S.J. and Lav K.
037 A Method for Accurate Transverse Normal Stress Evaluation in Laminated Composites 165
Using Simple HSDT
Deshmukh M.B. and Bhar A.
038 Tensile and Compressive Buckling Analyses of Stiffened Laminated Composite Panels 169
Rajanna T., Banerjee S., Desai Y.M. and Prabhakara D.L.
039 Stress and Failure Analysis of Functionally Graded Adhesively Bonded Tubular Socket 173
Joint of Laminated FRP Composites
Nimje S.V. and Panigrahi S.K.
040 Non-Linear 3D Finite Element Analysis of Adhesively Bonded CFRP Lap Joint 177
Lavjiit Singh., Mahesh M. S. and Nimje S.
041 Stochastic Natural Frequency of Composite Plates Using Kriging Model 181
Dey S., Mukhopadhay T., Chakrabarty S., Chowdhury R., Adhikari S., Karmakar A.
and Spickenheuer A.
Computational Fluid Dynamics
042 Numerical Modeling of Flow Around Cylindrical Bridge Piers With and Without Pile- 185
Cap
Gautam P., Vijayasree B.A., Eldho T. I., Behera M. R. and Mazumder B. S.
043 Modified Kinetic Streamlined-Upwind Petrov Galerkin Method for Euler Equations of 189
Gas Dynamics
Jagtap Ameya D.
044 High Enthalpy Simulations for Shock Wave Boundary Layer Interaction 193
Desai S., Kulkarni V. and Gadgil H.
v
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
045 Design and Testing of Axial Fans for Cooling Engines 197
Abdulazeem D., Baruah A. and Kumar S.
046 Aakalan - A Third Order Finite Volume Solver for Unstructured Meshes 201
Bapat C. J.
047 Unsteady Flow in a Rectangular Lid-Driven Cavity 205

Dalai B. and Laha M. K.
048 Numerical Simulation Of The Turbulent Air Flow In The Narrow Circular Channel 209
With Centre-Cleared Rib Vortex
Bhattacharyya S., Chattopadhyay H., Biswas N., Rakshit A. and Roy A.
049 Cost Effective CFD Methodology to Predict the Free Surface Movement Inside Tank 213
Periyasamy S., Shinde G., Joshi A. and Nikam K.
050 Numerical Simulation of Mixed Convection in a Complicated Porous Enclosure 216

Chattopadhyay A. and Pandit S. K.
051 Development of Bhism for Performance Based Blast Resistant Design of Reinforced 220
Concrete (RC) Structures
Kumar S. and Sharma H.
052 CFD Simulation of Stratification/Dispersion of Helium Layer by Two Heat Sources 224
and Their Interaction in a Thermally Stratified Vessel
Gera B., Ganju S. and Patel R. J.
053 An Experimental and CFD Based Study to Improve Thermal Performance of Car 228
Radiator Using Twisted and Wire Mesh Inserts by Varying Mass Flow Rate
Jain S. K., Sharma M., Saini D., Sharma V., Dadhich M. and Prajapati O.S.
054 GPU Implementation of DSMC Simulation Using DSMCFOAM Solver 232

Aggarwal S. and Bansal A.
055 CFD Simulation of Hydrogen Distribution in Dry/Steam Condensing Environment in 235

Kaiga Containment
Gera B., Ganju S. and Patel R. J.
056 CFD Simulation and Experimental Validation of a Vertical Intake System 239
Samhitha C. D. and Eldho T. I.
057 Numerical Simulation of an Amphibian Aircraft: Estimation of Hydrodynamic Forces 243

and Stability During Take-off and Landing
Saini A. and Bansal A.
058 Numerical Study of Effect of Density and Aspect Ratio on Oscillatory Exchange Flow 246
Through a Circular Opening in Horizontal Partition
Singh R. K., Alam M. and Gera B.
vi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
059 Numerical Modelling of Laminar Diffusion Flames Over a Hybrid Unstructured Grid 250
Preetirekha B., Amaresh D., Gadgil H. and Ganesh N.
060 Thermal Comfort Analysis of a Room Using Radiant Cooling System: A CFD Based 253
Study
Sharma N.K., Gunjan G., Dhakara M., Choudhary M., Gupta N. and Gupta P. K.
061 Study of Natural Convection in a Wavy Porous Enclosure in Presence of Magnetic 257
Field
Sarkar C., Pandit S. K. and Dalal D. C.
062 Vortex Structure of Incompressible Viscous Flows in a Lid(s) Driven Cavity With 261
Wavy Wall
Karmakar H. and Pandit S. K.
063 Optimization of Simple Air Duct Heat Exchanger by Perforated Plates : A CFD Based 265
Study
Mittal S., Sharma V., Sharma V., Jain S. K., Dadhich M. and Jangid A. K.
064 ADPI Calculation for Thermal Comfort in Operation Theatre With Angular Diffuser 269
Rahate S.D., Waghmare S. A. and Deshmukh P.D.
065 CFD Simulation of Combined Buoyancy and Pressure Driven Hot Gas Flows Through 273
Square Opening Using Salt Water Analogy
Gera B., Singh R. K. and Alam M.
066 Computational Study of Hypersonic Flow Past a Spherically Blunted Nose Cone 277
Ashish Narayan, Rakesh Kumar and Narayanan S.
067 Energy Deposition in Supersonic Flow Past a Hemisphere Using OpenFoam 280
Dhurandhar S. N. and Bansal A.
068 Assessment of Pulsatile Waveforms on the Blood Flow Dynamics in Intracranial 283
Aneurysm
Basumatary M. , Natarajan G. and Mishra S. C.
069 Flow Modelling Around an Amphibian Aircraft Using Openfoam 287

Joshi K. and Bansal A.
070 Numerical Study on Effect of Airfoil Pin-Fin Location in Tube Fin Heat Exchanger 291
Jaganathan A., Deepakkumar R. and Jayavel S.
071 A Sharp Interface Immersed Boundary Method for Inviscid Compressible Flows 295
Brahmachary S., Natarajan G., Kulkarni V. and Sahoo N.
072 Lattice Boltzmann Simulation of Mixed Convection Around a Heated Square Cylinder 299
Placed in a Lid Driven Cavity
Gera B. and Singh R. K.
vii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
073 An Immersed Boundary Method for Mixed Convection Flows With Large Temperature 303
Gradient
Kumar M. and Natarajan G.
074 Genuinely Multidimensional Cure for Numerical Shock Instability in a Contact 307
Preserving Riemann Solver
Simon S. and Mandal J. C.
075 Numerical Simulation of Lid-Driven Square Cavity Using Staggered Grid Based Finite 311
Volume Method
Varma I. J., Maniyeri R. and Kang S.
076 Numerical Investigation of NACA 0025 and NACA 0021 of straight blade Darrieus 315
turbine for Hydrodynamic Application
Patil B.S., Kumar K., Thakare H.R. and Narkhede M.M.
077 Water-Gas Two Phase Flow Characteristics in Horizontal Pipeline-A CFD Study 320
Senapati S. K and Dewangan S. K.
078 Numerical Investigation of Flow Through Steam Turbines Using the Mixing Plane 324
Method
Shukla S., Mishra R., Chaudhary N. and Suman S.
079 Thermohydraulic Transport Characteristics of Inclined Ribs in Micro Channel 328

Bhattacharyya S., Laha S., Basu S., Das S.G. and Chattopadhyay H.
080 Steady Flow Computations Using HLL-CPS Scheme With Low Mach Number 332
Correction
Gogoi A. and Mandal J.C.
081 Investigation of 3-D Flows in a Tandem Compressor Cascade With Various Chord 336
Ratios
Sherin S. B., Manas M. S. and Shine S. R.
082 Prediction of Flow Parameters for a Flow Past Rows of Staggered Cylinders Using 340
Artificial Intelligence Methods
Sharma N. and Singh U.
083 Effect of Corrugation Geometry on Power Consumption and Friction Factor in a 344
Channel
Bharath Ram R. , Sudharsan T. S. and Naren P. R.
084 Numerical Study of Flow Distribution in a Parallel Channel Manifold 348

Aswin R., Shravan Raaghav K R. and Naren P.R
085 Experimental and Numerical Study on Wake Evacuation Effects in Expansion 352
Deflection Nozzles
Mohan K., Munjal P., Vishak S. and Vaidyanathan A.
viii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
086 Numerical studies of a shell-and-tube PCM based heat storage unit 356
Samanta H., Roy P.C. and Barman N.
087 Heat Transfer Augmentation of Helixchanger Using CFD 360

Raje N., Tandale M. and Manjunath C.
088 Numerical Investigation of Evolving Flow Structure Around Ahmed Body Mounted 364
with Solar Panel of Different Configuration
Mohammad Rafiq B. Agrewale and Maurya R.S.
089 Investigation of Acceleration Effects on Rocket Aerodynamics 368

Kumaravel G. and Rathakrishnan E.
090 Effect of Winglet Corrugation for Improved MAV Aerodynamic Performance 371
Dwivedi Y. D. and Donepudi Jagadish
091 CFD Analysis of Perfusion Kinetics in Brain Tumor with DCE-MRI Derived Model 375
Bhandari A., Bansal A., Singh A. and Sinha N.
092 Numerical Investigation on Effect of Moving Vanes and Vehile Velocity on Exhaust 379
Flow of Engine in Armoured Combat Vehicle
More R.R., Patil B.S., Lagad R.B. and Trikande M.W.
093 CFD Simulation of Cascade Fin Flow at Low Subsonic Speeds and High Angles of 383
Attack
Tripathi M., Mahesh M.S. and Misra A.
094 Boyancy Driven Heat Transfer Effect in Room Ventilation due to Discrete Heat 387
Sources
Gupta N. and Nayak A. K.
095 Evaluating Differences in Airflow Patterns for Similar Rural Kitchens using CFD 391
Ronita Bardhan, Ramit Debnath and Rangan Banerjee
Fluid Mechanics
096 Hydraulic Performance Analysis on Corrugated Type Plate Heat Exchanger 396
Kumar B., Singh D. and Singh S. N.
097 Effect of rotation and baroclinicity on heat transport and turbulent convection in 400
annular flow
Banerjee A.K., Bhattacharya A. and Balasubramanian S.
098 On Bubble and Spike Evolution in Rayleigh-Taylor Instability 404

Ghosh Brindaban
099 Thermo-Hydraulic Simulation of Oxidizer Booster Pump for Semi-cryogenic Engine 407
Thomas B.G., Unnikrishnan Nair P., Sarangi S.K. and Narayanan V.
ix
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
100 Noise Radiation from Compressible Reacting Mixing Layers 411

Chary P. S. and Samanta A.
101 High Fidelity Simulation of Flow Over a Flapping Wing Using Parallel Computing 415
Bose C., Gupta S. and Sarkar S.
5102 Reduction of Secondary Flow Losses in Linear Turbine Cascade by Boundary Layer 419
Fence
Kiran K. N. and Anish S.
Fluid-Structure Interaction
103 3D Coupled CFD-FEA Dynamic Stall Analysis of 5 MW NREL Wind Turbine 423
Baseline Rotor
Fatima N. and Gopal K.V.N
104 Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis of Inlet Distortion Measuring Rake for Fighter 427
Aircraft
Vashistha R. and Gogoi A.
105 Investigation of Vibration Transmission in Cantilevered Structures Submerged in Fluid 432

Considering Fluid-Structure Interaction
Sumathi V., Jalaldeen S., Selvaraj P. and Murugan S.
106 Fluid-Film Dependent Added Mass and Added Damping for Parallel Plates 436
Verma G., Eswaran M., Sengupta S., Ram Reddy G., Mammen S. and Bhattacharya S.
107 Effect of Heat Transfer in Supersonic Flow Reattachment 440

Vidyarthi N. K., Sreejith K. and Deepu M.
108 Explicit Time Marching Coupling Schemes for Fluid-Structure Interactions 444
Hoskoti L. and Mahesh M. S.
109 Aeroelastic Stability of Delta Wing Configuration 449

Aravinth A.D. and Mahesh M.S.
Fracture and Damage Mechanics
110 Sequential Experimental Design Based Uncertainty Quantification 453

Bhattacharyya B. and Ray S.
111 Damage Detection in Composite Beams Using Vibration Based Method 457
Joshi S.P. and Dawari V. B.
112 Fatigue Analysis of Concrete Members Under Variable Amplitude Cyclic Loading 461
Jeshna C. C., Bhowmik S. and Ray S.
x
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
113 Mixed Mode Stress Intensity Factor and Crack Growths Modeling of Double Edge 465
Cracks Laminated Composite Plate Subjected to Tensile and Shear Loadings Using
XFEM
Lal A., Mulani S. B., Kapania R. K. and Singh B. N.
114 Mechanics of Fracture of Porous Bulk Metallic Glasses 469

Hajare R. and Tandaiya P.
115 Meshfree Analysis of Cracked Panel Repaired by Bonded Composite Patch 473
Pathak H., Singh A. and Singh I.V.
116 Determination of Size Independent Fracture Energy for Various Grades of Concrete 476
Beams- Three Approaches
Hemalatha T., Ramachandra Murthy A. and Aravindan M.
117 Obtaining Fracture Properties of FRC by Inverse Analysis Using the PGSL 480
Optimization Algorithm
Stephen S. J., Raphael B. and Gettu R.
118 A Linearized Toughness Model for Concrete by Considering Toughening Mechanisms 484
Simon K. M. and Kishen J. M. C.
119 Meshfree Analysis of Beams and Columns in the Presence of Initial Damage 488
Gupta A. and Arun C. O.
120 Numerical Analysis of Electro-Chemical Model for Pitting Corrosion 492

Vagbharathi A. S. and Gopalakrishnan S.
121 Edge Crack Simulation Using T-Spline Based Xiga 496

Singh S.K., Bhardwaj G., Singh I.V. and Mishra B.K.
122 Stochastic Fracture Analysis of Laminated Composite Panel With Elliptical Crack 500
Subjected to Biaxial Load Using X-Fem
Palekar Shaiesh P. and Achchhe Lal
123 Numerical Studies on the Influence of Notch Depth and Location on the Natural 505
Frequency of Indeterminate Beams
Stuti M., Varun K., Kalyana Rama J. S. and Ramachandra Murthy A.
124 Influence of Notch to Depth Ratio on Fracture Process Parameters of Plain Concrete 509
Beam Using Concrete Damaged Plasticity Model
George J., Kalyana Rama J. S., Siva Kumar M. V. N., Vasan A. and Ramachandra
Murthy A.
125 Damage Development During Single Fiber Fragmentation 513

Parambil N. K. and Gururaja S.
xi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
126 Analysis of Fatigue Crack Propagation in Plate Girder 517

Das R. and Thakkar B.
127 Analysis of Crack Propagation in a Welded Lap Joints 521

Patel Y. and Thakkar B.
128 Analysis of Crack Propagation in Gusset Plates 525

Chapani M. and Thakkar B.
129 Analysis of Crack Propagation in a Plate Girder 528

Patel R.H. and Thakkar B.
130 Failure Assessment in Aluminium Plate Using Continuum Damage Mechanics 531
Nawab S. and Thakkar B.
131 Effect of Flexural Cracks on Behaviour of RCC Beams Under Torsion 535
Bariya M. and Thakkar B.
132 Nonlinear Analysis of Fiber Wrapped Reinforced Concrete Beams With Cohesive 539
Model
Chakraborty S., Jha D. K., Reddy G. R. and Srinivas K.
133 Numerical Simulation of SPT Data Using GTN Material Damage Model to Evaluate J- 542
R Curve
Kumar P., Dutta B. K., Chattopadhyay J. and Shriwastaw R. S.
134 Study of Various Damage Indices Under Seismic Loading- A Review 547
Parekar S. D. and Datta D.
135 Characterization of Near Crack Tip Stresses for Fracture Testing Specimens from 551
Strength Mismatch Weld
Kumar S. , Singh P. K. and Patel R. J.
Geo Mechanics
136 Effects of Intermediate Principal Stress on Shear Localization During Tunnel 555
Excavation
Sisodiya M. and Das A.
137 A Numerical Study on a Rock Slope Failure with the Rate, State, Temperature and Pore 559
Pressure Friction (RSTPF) Model
Singh A. K. and Singh T. N.
138 Redistribution Principle Approach for Evaluation of Seismic Active Earth Pressure 563
Behind Retaining Wall
Maskar A.D., Madhekar S. N. and Phatak D. R.
xii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
139 Three Dimensional Computer Simulation of Laterally Loaded Monopile Foundation 567
for Offshore Wind Turbine
Deshmukh R.R. and Sharma V. K.
140 Effect of Soil Structure Interaction on Vertical Irregularity in Framed RC Structure 571
Dhadse G. and Mohod M.
141 Numerical Modeling of Reinforced Copper Slag Embankment using Plaxis 3D 575
Athulya G.K., Choubey M. and Mandal J. N.
142 Evaluation of Soil Deformation Modulus 579

Wagh J.D., Joshi P.H. and Bambole A.N.
Heat Transfer
143 Solution of Stochastic Heat Conduction Problem Using Galerkin Based Polynomial 582
Correlated Function Expansion
Chakraborty S. and Chowdhury R.
144 Dynamic Characteristics of Printed Circuit Boards: A Parametric Study 586

Jayaraman S., Trikha M., Somashekar V.N., Kamesh D., Venkatesh K. and Ravindra
M.
145 Comparison of Flow and Heat Transfer Characteristics in Triangular and Sinusoidal 590
Shaped Wavy Channels
Harikrishnan S. and Tiwari S.
146 Thermal Behaviour Analysis of V-Through Flat Plate Solar Water Collector: An 594
Experimental and CFD Based Study
Jangid A.K. , Sharma N. K., Jain S. K., Dadhich M., Sharma V. and Agarwal D.
147 Effect of Location of Heat Source and Rayleigh Number on Natural Convection in A 598
Square Cavity Using Thermal Lattice Boltzmann Method
Patil M.Y., Patil A.J. and Sewatkar C.M.
148 Computational Analysis of Flow and Thermal Characteristics of Pin-Fin Heat Sink 602
Manogna J., Deepakkumar R. and Jayavel S.
149 Visualization of Thermal Transport in Discretely Heated 2-D Complex Solid 605
Geometries
Narasimha Suri Tinnaluri and Jaya Krishna Devanuri
150 Numerical Simulation of Natural Convection With Radiative Heat Transfer in a Cavity 609
Parmananda M., Khan S. and Dalal A.
151 LBM Simulation of Free Convection in an Enclosure Containing Heat Generating Low- 613
Pr Fluid
Gera B. and Singh R.K.
xiii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
152 Natural Convection in an Open Cavity With Surface Mounted Electronic Components 617
Muthukrishnan S. and Madhusudhana R. Gavara
153 Design, Manufacturing and Performance Analysis of Different Thermoplastic Gears in 621
the Gearbox for Moped
Gupta A.R., Aloni S.N. and Datey S.N.
154 Study of Condensation Heat Transfer in Helical Coil 625

Rashed Ali., Gulhane N. P., Kanase A. and Date P.
155 Numerical Analysis Off low Boiling Heat Transfer in Single Horizontal small diameter 628
channel using VOF Multiphase Model
Jignesh R. and Kumar K.
156 Numerical Study on Convective Mass Transfer Enhancement by Baroclinic Torque 631
Induced Vortex
Aravind G.P., Muhammed Rafi K. M., Fahd Bin Abdul Hasis and Deepu M.
157 Thermohydraulic Study of V - Corrugated Heat Exchanger 636

Dutta P., Das A. and Dutta P. P.
158 Numerical Analysis of Natural Convection Around a Pair of Heated Cylinders inside a 640
Cold Square Enclosure
Chauhan S. P. and Thakur H.
159 Parametric Investigation of Performance of Portal Frame At Elevated Temperature 644

Sharma S., Bhatt P., Singh T., Matsagar V. and Reddy G. R.
160 Thermal Design and Analyses of Lithium-Ion Battery for Rover of an Interplanetary 648
Missions: Modelling and Simulation
Jayaraman S.., Channi A., Bindagi S.V., Srinivasan M.S., Satyanarayana, Ravindran
R., Barve S.G. and Sharma A.K.
Hydrodynamics
162 A Study on River Bed Degradation Due to Mining of Coarser Top Sediment 652
Barman Bandita and Sarma A. K.
163 Two Phase Interface Model for Transport Phenomena During Sublimation of Crystals 656
and Vapor Phase Reaction
Sawant R., Inamdar S.R., Karimi I. A. and Kulkarni B. D.
164 Flood Plain Simulation of an Urban River Catchment: A Case Study 660
Zope P.E., Eldho T. I. and Jothiprakash V.
Material Modelling
xiv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
165 Ballistic Studies of Boron Carbide Tiles against 7.62 mm AP Projectile 664
Savio S. G., Srivathsa B. and Madhu V.
166 Inclusion Modelling in Concrete With the Extended Finite Element Method 668
Thirumalaiselvi A., Anandavalli N. and Rajasankar J.
167 Mathematical Model for Reinforced Concrete Problems 672

Ramana P. V. and Kunal B.
168 Material Modeling and Simulations of Highly Flexible Structures 676

Pawar V.S., Guruprasad P. J. and Pant S.R.
169 Analysis and Optimization of Multi-Plate Wet Clutch With Different Friction Materials 681
Shaha U. and Tembhare G.U.
170 Numerical Evaluation of Flexural Strength of NBG-18 Graphite 685

Bansal M., Singh I.V., Mishra B.K. and Sharma K.
171 FE Based Investigation of Heat Effected Zone and Temperature Distribution in Copper 688
and AISI 304 Stainless Steel Weldment
Singh G., Saxena R.K. and Pandey S.
172 Mechanical Behaviour of Epoxy Matrix Under Tension, Compression and Shear Using 692
DIC: Experiments and Numerical Modeling
Gupta M. and Mahajan P.
173 Study of Agglomerate Breakage in a Shear Flow Using Numerical Simulations 696
Akiti N., Hapgood K. and Khakhar D.
174 Prediction of Compressive Strength of Concrete with Natural Aggregates and Recycled 700
Aggregates Using M5’ Model Tree Algorithm
Jain S. and Barai S.V.
175 Evaluation of Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Geofoam Creep Using Plaxis 3D 704
Beju Y.Z. and Mandal J. N.
176 Simulation of Soil Subjected to Underground Blast Using Flac3D 708

Kumar R., Choudhury D. and Bhargava K.
177 Microstructure-Guided Constitutive Modelling for Design and Development of 712

Sustainable Next Generation Infrastructure Materials
Sumanta Das, Xianghui Xiao, Nikhilesh Chawla and Naryanan Neithalath
Micro and Nano-Mechanics
178 Buckling of Nanobeams Using Different Nonlocal Continuum Theories 716

Babu B. and Badri P.P.
xv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
179 Size Dependence in Mechanical Behaviour of Polystyrene Micropillars Under 720

Compression
Guruprasad T., Bhattachary S. and Basu S.
180 Length Scale Effect on the Deformation Behaviour of Bio-Inspired Nanocomposites 724
using Molecular Dynamics
Mathiazhagan S.and Anup S.
181 Dispersion Properties of Linear Microelastic Peridynamic Bar 728

Mutnuri V.S. and Gopalakrishnan S.
182 Evaluating Thin Film Mechanical Properties Applying Nanoindentation: 732

Computational, Experimental and Analytical Study
Mallikarjunachari G. and Ghosh P.P.
Multi Body Dynamics
183 Kinematic and Dynamic Analyses of 3-Link Cooperative Manipulators Handling 736
Hazardous Chemicals
Ranjan R. and Dwivedy S. K.
184 Pendulum Impact Test on Thermally Damaged Reinforced Concrete Frames 740
Singh Tarvinder, Sharma Shailesh, Parmar R. M. and Reddy G.R.
185 Response of Fire Damaged RC Slab Under Impact 744

Sharma S., Tarvinder Singh., Parmar R.M. and Reddy G. R.
186 Stroke and Tolerance Stack Up Analysis of an Automotive Side Door Latch 748
Vinod Kumar R., Elango M. and Udupa N.
187 Effect of Nonlinearities in the Suspension of Heavy Goods Vehicles on Vehicle Road 751
Interaction
Joshi S., Vichare C., Pable M.J. and Seshu P.
188 Inverse Dynamic Analysis of Axial Piston Pump Using Augmented Newton-Euler 755
Formulation
Milind T. R. and Mitra M.
189 Numerical Rigid and Flexible Multibody Dynamic Modeling of an Axial Piston Pump: 759
Validation, Comparison and Parametric Studies
Milind T. R. and Mitra M.
190 Boundary Element Modeling of the Acoustic Radiation of an Axial Piston Pump: 764
Numerical Implementation
Milind T.R. and Mitra M.
xvi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
191 Numerical Modeling of the Structural Acoustic Radiation and Sound Pressure Fields 768
of an Axial Piston Pump
Milind T.R. and Mitra M.
192 Displacement & Arrest of Occupant on Automotive Seat System in Frontal Dynamic 772
Crash Condition: Anti-Sub Feature on Seat Cushion
Dharmadhikari V. D. and Chougule V.N.
Multi-Phase Flow
193 Modelling and Simulation of Cyclic Oxidation of Thermal Barrier Coatings using 776
FEM
Srivathsa B., Meena Kumari V., S. Gokul Lakshmi and Das D.K.
194 Numerical Study of Effects of Particle Diameter and Particle Volume Fractions on 781
Dispersed Gas-Particle Flows Through Vertical Channels
Kotoky S., Dalal A. and Natarajan G.
195 CFD Modelling of Gas Bubble Formation in a Stagnant & Co-Flowing Liquid Medium 785
Prasad V. K., Singh S. P. and Chatterjee D.
196 The Role of Consistency in the Simulation of High Density Ratio Flows 789
Patel J.K. and Natarajan G.
197 Three-Dimensional Deformation of a Droplet on a Square Duct Wall Considering 793

Wetting Effects
Bhardwaj S. and Dalal A.
198 Analysis of Droplet Solidification During FCI in Severe Accident of Nuclear Reactors 797
Ghosh B. and Mukhopadhyay D.
199 Numerical Analysis of Micromixer With Flow Disturbing Ribs 800

Srikarthikeyan K.K., Krishnah S., Arunkumar S. and Venkatesan M.
200 A Multi-Phase Closed Pipelines Simulation Approach for Transportation of Heavy Oil 805
With Open foam in HPC
Alomoy Banerjee and Barman S.
201 Numerical Heat Transfer Analysis of Pin Fin With Ellipsoidal Beads 810
Madhumitha R., Arunkumar S., Balachandar C. and Venkatesan M.
202 Topology Optimization of Pre-Mixing Zone in a T Shaped Micromixer for Enhanced 814
Mixing
Madhumitha R., Arunkumar S., Ravichandran V. and Venkatesan M.
203 Comparative Study of Coal Combustion in Air and O2/CO2 Environment 818
Rajneesh Vachaspati, Om Prakash Singh, and Ray T. K.
xvii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
Multi Scale Modelling
204 Mechanical Properties of Concrete Exposed to Burning 823

Ramana P.V., Bisht K., Pathak D. and Gupta R.
205 The Waste Materials as Partial Replacement of Fine Aggregate in Concrete-Outlet 827
Ramana P.V., Manish M. and Kunal B.
206 Molecular Mechanisms in Self-Folding Behaviour of Hydrogel Nanocomposite 831

Mathesan S., Rath A. and Ghosh P.
207 An Efficient Locking Free Multiscale Finite Elements for Free Vibration Analysis of 834
Carbon Nanotubes
Singh S. and Patel B.P.
208 Displacement Analysis of a Compliant Micro-Gripper Using PRBM & FEA Method 838
Darawade P.B., Shendge M.P., Deshmukh A.S., Jain S.S., Joshi R.S. and Mitra A.C.
209 Adaptive Multiscale Finite Element Method for Simulation of Heterogeneous Material 842
Patil R., Mishra B.K. and Singh I.V.
Non-Linear Mechanics
210 Inelastic Seismic Response of Asymmetric Buildings 846

Raut R. and Madhekar S.
211 Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of RC Frames Using Fragility Curves 850

Bhende S. and Pednekar S.
212 Impact Test on Reinforced Concrete Slabs 854

Parmar R.M., Tarvinder Singh. and Reddy G.R.
213 Geometric Nonlinear Analysis of Cable Domes 858

Sudarshan Krishnan
214 Numerical Analysis of Scaled Containment Model 862

Parthesh Parekh P., Parmar R. M., Singh R. K. and Reddy G.R.
215 Effect of Circular Web Perforation in Rectangular Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) 865
Tubular Beams – A Finite Element Study
Sonu J.K. and Singh K.D.
216 Structural Performance of Elliptical Hollow Steel Tubular Braces Under Ultra Low 869
Cycle Fatigue Loading
Narendra P.V.R. and Singh K.D.
xviii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
217 A Comparative Study on Effect Fibre Volume Fraction on Ex-Situ BMG Composites 873
Through Unit Cell Simulations
Gouripriya S., Sinha S.A. and Tandaiya P.
218 Finite Element Analysis of Plain Cement Concrete 877

Joshi A.D., Gujar P.S. and Pendhari S.S.
219 Estimation of Local Stresses and Strains for Notched Geometries Using Non-Linear 881
Analysis
Khatawate V.H., Dharap M.A. and Moorthy R.I.K.
220 Frictional Hysteresis in an Elastic Body With Microcracks 885

Biswas S., Jana P. and Chatterjee A.
221 Analysis of a Nonlinear Flexural Wave-Breathing Crack Interaction in A Slender Beam 889
Using Wavelet Spectral Finite Element Method
Joglekar D. M. and Mitra M.
222 Buckling Behaviour of Inelastic Castellated Beam 893

Baskar K., Aarthy E. and Cyril Thomas A.
223 Non- Linear Behaviour of Laterally Restrained Beams With Sinusoidal Corrugated 897
Web
Baskar K. and Sadananda H.I.
224 Non-Linear Behaviour of Girders with Horizontal Web Splice 901

Baskar K. and Sawant R.
225 Non-Linear Analysis of Castellated Beams 905

Baskar K., Shobana R. and Cyril Thomas A
226 Nonlinear Computational Analysis of Multi Strand Helical Wire Rope Isolators 909
Patel N. and Kumaraswamy A.
227 Energy Harvesting from Oriented Piezoelectric Beam 914

Garg A. and Dwivedy S.K.
Novel Computational Techniques
228 An Improved Approximation Strategy for Multi Objective Evolutionary Optimization 918
Chatterjee T. and Chowdhury R.
229 Design and Optimization of Brake Slack Adjuster for Light Commercial Vehicle 922
Braking System
Karwande S.V.
xix
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
230 Stability Preserving Runge Kutta Method Using Genetic Algorithm 925
Neelan A. G. And Nair M. T.
231 A Refined Time Series Model for Structural Health Monitoring 929
Lakshmi K. and A. Rama Mohan Rao
232 A Novel Technique for Solving Three Dimensional Problems 933

Ramana P.V.
233 Computational Mechanism on Large Deformable Bodies Using Novel Technique 937
Ramana P.V.
234 An Innovative Method for Solving Structural Engineering Problems 941

Ramana P. V., Kunal B., Gupta R., Agrawal N. and Singh A.K.
235 A review on Applications of Meshless Methods to Flow and Transport Processes in 942
Porous Media
Boddula S. and Eldho T.I
236 The Equality of Partial Solutions for Nth Order Differential Equations Using Novel 946
Technique
Ramana P.V. and Gupta S.
237 Modelling and Analysis of Metal Drilling Process Using Experimental Study and Finite 951
Element Method
Ponnusamy Pandithevan and Vinayaga Muruga
238 Fatigue Analysis of ABS Mould 955

Addanki Sambasiva Rao, Dharap M.A. and Venkatesh J. V. L.
239 Finite Element Simulation of PZT Induced Guided Wave Modes in Isotropic 959
Cylindrical Shells
Jayesh P. and Bijudas C.R.
240 A Computer Numerical Simulation Study Between System Level and Component 963
Level Model of a System Under Design
Hariram Shanmuganathan
241 Optimizing the Design of Engine Timing Chain System of Passenger Car 967
Shinde A.P.
242 Novel Algorithms for Simulation of Free and Moving Boundary Problems 971
Rangarajan R.
243 GA Based Thickness Optimization of Flat Slab 975

Raje S. S. and Doiphode G.S.
xx
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
244 Optimization of Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers by Minimizing the Entropy 978
Generation Using Bat Algorithm
Tharakeshwar T.K., Seetharamu K.N., Durga Prasad B. and Kumar B.
245 Computational Performance of Isogeometric Analysis in Exterior Acoustics Using 982

Perfectly Matched Layer
Dinachandra M. and Raju Sethuraman
246 A Study on the Behaviour of the Basis Functions in Differential Quadrature Method 986
for Elasto-Static Problems
Durga Rao S.S. and Sethuraman R.
247 Multi-Block Structured Grid Generation using Algebraic Techniques for Complex 990
Rocket Models
Kumaravel G. and Unnikrishnan C.
248 Effect of Friction Between Punch & Die on Springback in 60 Degree V Bend 994
Sayyad V.M., Phalle V.M., Vishwadeep C. H. and Patil S. S.
249 A Computer Simulation Model for Smartly Actuated Dorsal Fin With Compliant 998
Mechanism and Shape Memory Alloy
Govindarajan G. and Sharma R.
250 Comparative Study of Metallic and Composite Belly for Belly Landing of a Light 1002
Banakar P. and Akshatha H. T.
Porous Medium Mechanics
251 Heat Transfer Enhancement of Heat Exchanger Using Porous Medium: A CFD Based 1006
Study
Sharma V., Mittal S., Sharma N.K., Jain S.K., Sharma V. and Dadhich M.
252 Simulation of Advective-Dispersive Transport in a Porous Medium Using the Operator 1010
Splitting Technique
Tinesh Pathania
253 Characterization of Flow and Thermal Behaviour of Product Gas Constituents in the 1015
Throat-Less Downdraft Gasifier
Kane A. A., Maurya R. S., Tiwari I. and Lobo S.
254 Flow of Grains Through an Orifice in a Rectangular Silo 1019

Bhateja A. and Khakhar D. V.
255 Design and Development of Energy Efficient Cold Storage Interior Using 1023
Computational Techniques
Maradkar R. R. and Maurya R. S.
xxi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
256 Effect of Field Parameters on Saltwater Ingression in Coastal Aquifers 1028

Ukarande S. K. and Sonawane S. B.
Smart Structures
257 Dynamic Response of an Asymptotically Correct Piezoelectric Sensor With a Tip Mass 1033
Banerjee S. and Roy S.
258 Notch-Type Damage Detection in Plate Structures Using a Refined Time-Reversed 1037
Lamb Wave Method
Kapuria S. and Agrahari J. K.
259 FE Modeling of Sandwich Beam With Two-Plane Edge Debonding of Piezoelectric 1042
Shear Actuator
Venkat Rao K., Raja S. and Munikenche Gowda T.
260 Critical Buckling Analysis of Spherical Shells 1047

Desai D. J., Chauhan N. H. and Doiphode G. S.
261 Impact of Irregularity on the Propagation Behavior of Surface Wave in a Layered 1051
Piezoelectric Structure
Singh A. K., Kumar S. and Mahto S.
262 Detection of Damage in Surface-Mounted PZT Transducers using Voltage Amplitude 1055
Spectrum
Ashwin U., Sathyanarayana C.N. and Raja S.
263 Magnetically Coupled Broad Band Piezoelectric Energy Harvester b 1059

Malaji P. V. and Ali S. F.
264 Finite Element Analysis of a Piezoelectric Plate Based on First Order Shear 1063
Deformation Theory
Pendhari S. S., Jadhav S.S., and Patil V.
265 Behaviour of Polypropylene Fibre Reinforced Concrete Pavement Under Static Wheel 1067
Load
Mohod Milind and Kadam K. N.
266 Accurate Modelling of Shear Monomorph Sensors 1071

Raveendranath P. and Sulbhewar L. N.
267 An Experimental Study of a Novel Energy Scavenger Cum Vibration Absorber 1075
Vishvanath Allamraju K. and Srikanth K.
268 An Energy-Based Approach for Extracting the Dynamic Instability Parameters of 1079
Dielectric Elastomer Actuators With Unequal Biaxial Prestress
Bajpayee S., Joglekar D. M. and Joglekar M. M.
xxii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
269 Radial and Thickness Mode Calculations of PZT-5H Disc by Using Ambient 1084
Vibrations
Vishvanath Allamraju K.
270 Vibration Based Hybrid Energy Harvester for Broadband Harvesting 1088
Rajarathinam M. and Ali S. F.
Solid and Structural Mechanics
271 Correlations Between Stiffness and Microstructure of a Species of Bamboo 1092

Mannan S. and Basu S.
272 Rayleigh Wave Propagation in Liquid Layer Lying over a Pre-Stressed Orthotropic 1097
Half-Space
Chudhary S. and Sahu S. A.
273 Thermostructural Design of an Unconventional Section with Stiffened and Unstiffened 1100
Panels
Jayanthi G. and Jain P.C.
274 An Experimental Study on Slender Hollow Circular Stainless Steel Columns with 1104
Single Circular Perforation Subjected to Axial Compression
Lalthazuala R., Konjengbam D. Singh
275 Gauge Widening/Condemning of Parabolic Profile Locomotive Wheels While Braking 1008
with Composite Brake Blocks
Vineesh K.P., Vakkalagadda M.R.K and Racherla V.
276 Flexure of Fixed Thick Beam Using Trigonometric Shear Deformation Theory 1112
Dahake A. G., Manal S. S. and Sawant R. M.
277 Micromechanical Modelling of Spiral Wound Gasket Under Uniaxial Compression 1116
Rino Nelson N., Siva Prasad N. and Sekhar A. S.
278 Analysis of Prestressed Hollowcore Slabs With Openings: A Numerical Study 1120
Sameer K. Sarma P. and Surya Prakash S.
279 HDMR Based Model Updating in Structural Damage Identification 1124

Naveen B.O. and Balu A.S
280 Static Analysis of Doubly Curved FGM Panel on Rectangular Plan-form 1127
Bahadur R., Upadhyay A. K. and Shukla K. K.
281 Static Analaysis of Doubly Tapered Thin Walled Composite Box Beam Under Axial 1131
Loading
Tushar Sharma, Murari V. and Shukla K.K.
xxiii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
282 Strength and Vibration Analysis of Transmission Housing of a Tractor 1135

Ahuja M., Deshpande N. V. and Patil S.
283 Study of Rayleigh Wave in Orthotropic Layer Lying Over an Orthotropic Half-Space 1139
With Initial Stress
Singhal A. and Sahu S. A.
284 Energy Absorption Characteristics of Aluminium Alloy 6061 Square Corrugated Tubes 1142
Under Axial and Oblique Impact Loading
Rawat S., Upadhyay A.K. and Shukla K.K.
285 Moment-Rotation Behavior of Stainless Steel Beam-Column Bolted Connection 1146

Bhavsar V. S. and Dawari B. M.
286 Fragility Based Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of Reinforced Concrete Framed 1150
Structures b
Veerendra Kumar P. and Siva Kumar M. V. N.
287 On Plane Strain Problems of Eccentric Elastic Rings in Bipolar Coordinate Systems 1154
Desai P. and Pandya V.
288 Comparative Study of Outrigger Structural System 1158

Senghani J.S. and Mistry P.B.
289 Design of Acetone Vapour Sensor Using Microcantilever 1162

Kamble C. and Panse M.S.
290 Structural Analysis Using Affine Arithmetic 1166

Ch Raveendra Babu, Ajay Kumar N. and Balu A. S.
291 Buckling Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates Using Inverse Hyperbolic Shear 1170
Deformation Theory
Kulkarni K., Singh B.N and Maiti D.K.
292 Evaluation of Coupled Partial Models Using Graph Theory and Sensitivity Analysis 1174
Naik A. and Balu A. S.
293 Damage Detection of Structures Using Wavelet Analysis 1178

Srinivas P. and Balu A.S.
294 Adaptive Refinement Strategy for Crack Propagation Analysis Using EFG Method 1182
Bhavana S. S. Patel, Babu K. S. N., Katta V.
295 Study on Analysis of RC Slabs Under Concentrated Loading 1186

Katrodiya D.G., Chauhan N. H. and Chauhan R. L.
xxiv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
296 Experimental Investigation of Hollow Stainless Steel Square Stub Column With Single 1190
Perforation Under Axial Compression
Sanasam Vipej Devi, Konjengbam Darunkumar Singh
297 Large Deformation Analysis of Point Supported Conoidal Shells Using Element Free 1194
Galerkin Method
Watts G., Pradyumna S. and Singha M.K.
298 Non-Linear Finite Element Analysis of ESP Hopper 1198

Patel P., Jadhav S.S. and Kushwaha R.
299 B-Spline Wavelet Finite Element Method for 1D Bi-Material Problems in Elasto- 1202
Statics
Vadlamani S. and Arun C.O.
300 Floor Response Spectra Considering Structural Nonlinearity Effect: Experiments and 1206
Analysis
Kothari P., Parulekar Y. M., Reddy G. R. and Shenai G.V.
301 Probabilistic Flutter Analysis: A Perturbation Approach 1211

Kumar S., Kumar Onkar A. and Manjuprasad M.
302 Layerwise Solution for Nonlinear Static and Dynamic Stability of Laminated 1215
Composite Plates Using B-Spline Finite Element Method
Susmita Mondal and Ramachandra L.S.
303 Strength of Fixed Ended Circular, Square, and Flat Oval Hollow LDSS Slender 1219
Columns Under Axial Compression
Sachidananda K., Singh K. D.
304 Effect of Cross-Sectional Shape on Compressive Strength of LDSS Stub Columns 1223
Brahma J., Singh T.G., and Singh. K. D.
305 Static and Free Vibration Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates: Mechanical, Thermal 1227
and Hygrothermal Loading
Dhinde M. and Desai Y.M
306 Study of Indentation of an Elastic Layer Substrate by a Rigid Wedge Indenter Under 1231
Plane Strain Conditions
Karuriya A.N. and Bhandakkar T.K.
307 Second Gradient Approach for Modelling Damage 1235

Kakarla S. S. and Rajagopal A.
308 Effect of Damping on the Dynamic Response of a Beam With Non-Ideal Boundary 1239
Supports
Mahapatra Kavikant, Panigrahi S.K. and Gaur Abhishek
xxv
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
309 Retrofitting and Rehabilitation of Elevated Water Tank After Investigation of 1244
Corrosion Status by Using Nondestructive Techniques
Nayak C.B. and Thakare S.B.
310 Validation of Theoretical Stress Concentration Factor for Varying Notched Geometries 1248
Using FEA
Khatawate V.H., Dharap M.A. and Moorthy R.I.K.
311 Force Based Linear Static Analysis of 2-D Curved Tapered Timoshenko Beam 1252
Elements
Rajapakse R.M.C.M., Wijesundar K.K. and Dissanayake P.B.R.
312 Effect of Cover to Longitudinal Reinforcement of Square RC Column for Axially 1256
Compression Testing.
Narule G. and Bambole A.N.
313 Non Local Analysis of Laminated Plates using Third Order Shear Deformation Theory 1260
Considering Surface Stress Effects
Raghu P. and Rajagopal A.
314 Numerical Simulation on Performance Evaluation of Chemical Anchors Embedded in 1264

Concrete
Sasmal S., Lieberum K.H. and Koenders E.A.B.
315 Growth of Yield Front in Statically Indeterminate Bar by Using Domain 1268
Decomposition Method
Nayak P. and Saha K.N.
316 Behaviour of RC Shear Wall With and Without Opening Using Concealed Bracing 1272
Mahadik S. N. and Bhagat S. R.
317 Design and Testing of Compressor Mapping Test Cell for High Horse Power 1276
Turbocharger
Kumbhalkar S. and Khairnar H.P.
318 Acceptable External Loads on Nozzle of a Pressure Vessel by Non-Linear Finite 1280
Element Method
Pranitha Prabhakaran and Jadhav P.A.
319 Simplified Approach for Seismic Analysis of Base Isolated Multi-Storeyed Structure 1284
Nagender T., Parulekar Y. M. and Reddy G .R.
320 Free Vibration Analysis of Isotropic Skew Plate 1288

Mohd Abrar Abdul Alim and Bhattacharyya B.
321 Large Deflection Analysis of Leaf Spring Under Three Point Bending 1291
Ghuku S. and Saha K.N.
xxvi
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
322 Linear Static Analysis of a Structural Member by Finite Element Method 1295
Bandgar S. and Kshirsagar S. D.
323 Crashworthiness and Multiobjective Optimization of Axially Loaded Aluminium 1299

Elliptical Tapered Hollow Sections
Narayanan A., Rawat S. and Upadhyay A.K.
324 Semi-Analytical Solutions for Functionally Graded Smart Plate in Cylindrical Bending 1303
Sawarkar S., Pendhari S. and Desai Y. M.
Transient Dynamic Problems
325 Incremental Dynamic Analysis of RC Building Frames 1308

Sabharanjak K.G. and Dawari B.M.
326 Inverse Problem on a Timoshenko Beam Using Time Domain Spectral Finite Element 1312
Method
Kulkarni R.B., Gopalakrishnan S. and Trikha M.
327 Study of Thermal Behaviour of Brake Disc Materials 1315

Panda D. and Timmaraju M.V.
328 Inspection of Adhesively Bonded Lap Joints Using Spectral Finite Element Method 1319
Paunikar S. and Gopalakrishnan S.
Vibration and Control
329 Response Analysis of Adjacent Structures Connected by Friction Damper 1323

Patel C.C.
330 Simulation of Quarter Car Model for the Shock Absorber Compliance with Rubber 1327
Bush and Washers
Barethiye V., Pohit G. and Mitra A.
331 Bispectral Analysis for Nonlinear Identification of Structures 1331

Prawin J. and Rama Mohan Rao A.
332 Numerical Investigation into Effect of Cell Size of Honeycomb Core on the Free 1335
Vibration Behaviour of Polymer Nano-Composite Sandwich Beams
Royal Madan, Rajesh Kumar Bhushan, Santosh Kumar Sahu and Rama Sreekanth P.S.
333 A FE Model for Dynamic Behavior of a Functionally Graded Rotor-Bearing System 1339
Debabrata G., Debabrata C. and Rajiv T.
xxvii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
334 Seismic Behavior of LNG Tank Isolated by Double Variable Curvature Friction 1343
Pendulum System
Patel F.V., Soni D.P. and Chauhan N.H.
335 Seismic Response of Short-Period Buildings With Special Reference to Response 1347
Reduction Factor
Pingale O., Madhekar S.N. and Pore S.M.
336 Dynamic Behaviour of Communication Antenna for Space Missions: Modeling and 1351
Simulation
Jataraman S., Trikha M., Somashekar V.N., Kamesh D, Venkatesh K. and Ravindra M.
337 Nonlinear Analysis of Active Vibration Absorber With Self Sensing and Actuating 1355
PZT Actuator by Acceleration Feedback
Mohanty S. and Dwivedy S K
338 Identification of Crack Advancement in Gearbox by Application of Entropy 1359

Measures on Acoustic Emission Signal
Ram Bihari Sharma and Anand Parey
339 Use of Top Weak Storey of Multistoreyed Building as a Tuned Mass Damper for 1363
Seismic Response Mitigation
Deshmukh S., Ghadage J., Gunjal K., Hoke A., Kawle D. and Madhekar S.
340 Seismic Vibration Control for 20-Story Non-Linear Benchmark Building: A State-of- 1367
The-Art Review
Moyade R. and Madhekar S.
341 Optimization of Passive Vehicle Suspension System by Genetic Algorithm Using 1371
Matlab/Simulink
Mitra A C , Desai G.J., Patwardhan S.R. , Shirke P.H., Kurne W. M. H. and Banerjee
N.
342 Comparitive Study Between Non-Parametric Magneto-Rheological (MR) Damper 1375

Model With Parametric Bouc-Wen Magneto-Rheological Model
Hemantha K., Kumar H. and Gangadharan K. V.
343 Simulation and Analysis of Tool Chatter in Turning Operation 1379

Shrivastava Y., Kumar S. and Singh B.
344 Harmonic Response of CFPI-Isolated Elevated Liquid Storage Tanks 1383

Patel J.M. and Panchal V.R.
345 Free Vibration Analysis of Isotropic Moderately Thick Spherical and Conical Shell 1387
Panels Using a Four Node Discrete Kirchhoff Quadrilateral Flat Shell Element.
Kulkarni S.D., Chopade V.S , Badhe A.S. and Dagade V.A.
xxviii
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
346 Free Vibration Analysis of Functionally Graded Sandwich Plates Using Four Node 1391
Discrete Kirchhoff Quadrilateral Element Based on Reddy'S Third Order Shear
Deformation Theory.
Deshpande G.A. and Kulkarni S.D.
347 Dynamic Analysis of Flat Slab RC Structure 1395

Dhangar A. and Narule G.
348 Analysis of Multi-Storey Building Under Biaxial Excitation. 1399

Kalshetty P. and Narule G.
349 Flow Induced Vibration Design of Heat Exchanger Tubes Subject to Cross Flow 1403
Patil G.V., Dharap M.A., Moorthy R. I. K. and Khot T. K.
350 Dynamics of a 2D Curved Cantilever Timoshenko Beam Element Using Force Based 1407
Finite Element Formulation
Kasun Dharmasiri, Wijesundara K.K., Dammika A.J. and Dissanayake P.B.R.
351 Seismic Analysis of Buildings With Stiff Bottom Storeys 1411

Pingale O., Manohar S.N. and Madhekar S.N.
352 Influence of the Poisons Ratio on the Eigen Values of PZT Discs for Uniaxially Loaded 1415
Energy Harvesters
Viswanath K. Allamraju and Srikanth K.
353 Enhancing Suspension Behavior Using Design of Experiments 1418

Mitra A.C., Kiranchand G. R., Snehal Dhakare and Mukul Jawarkar
354 Application of Energy Harvester for Controlling the Propeller Induced Vibration and 1422
Generating the Electricity
Viswanath K Allamraju and Srikanth K.
355 Smart Base-Isolation Using Fuzzy Control 1426

Lakhani M. T. and Soni D. P.
356 Evaluate the Performance of Quarter Car Suspension System With Nonlinear 1431
Hysteresis Magnetorheological Damper
Hemanth K., Lohit S. K., Hemantha Kumar and Gangadharan K. V.
357 Dynamic Modeling & Simulation of Dual Clutch Transmission With Mechatronics 1435
Unit
Deotarey Rahul
358 Analysis of Natural Frequencies and Loss Factors in Sandwich Composite Plates With 1438
Magnetorheological or Electrorheological Elastomer Core
Gopal K.V.N., Sharma P., and Garg M.
xxix
Page
Sr. No. Description
No.
359 Seismic Risk and Loss Assessment of Open Ground Storey RC Structures 1442
Gautham A. K. and Gopikrishna
360 Vibrational Analysis and Detection Crack Parameter in Clamped-Clamped Beam 1446
Using Cascade Artificial Neural Network
Banerjee A. and Pohit G.
361 Base Excited Random Vibration Analysis of Thin Shells 1450

Kiran Kumar P., Rama Krishna D. and Subrahmanyam
362 Structural Identification on Beam Structures Using OKID/ER Algorithm 1454

Jacob J. and Nandakumar P.
363 Fault Diagnosis of Anti Friction Bearing Using Daubechies Wavelet 1458
Patil Sangram S. and Phalle V.M.
364 Effect of Centre Distance Variation on Performance of Spur Gear 1462

Sayyad V.M., Patil S.S., Vishwadeep C. H. and Phalle V.M.
365 Response of an Elastic Plate With a Constrained Interior Point Under the Effect of 1466
Grazing Sound
Swapnil Sapkale,.Sucheendran M. M. and Shakti Gupta
367 Dynamic Characteristics of Retrofitted RC Frame Building with Yielding Type X- 1470
Shaped Metallic Elasto-Plastic Damper
Madheswaran C.K., Prakashvel J., Sathishkumar K. and Ashmimonisha I.
368 Application of Friction Dampers for Improving the Seismic Performance of Structures: 1474
An Overview
Pednekar S.C., Iwalekar A.A. and Bambole A.N.
369 Earthquake Analysis Of Concrete Gravity Dams: Some Recent Development 1479
Maity D. and Mandal A.
370 Free Vibration Finite Element Analysis of a Circular Cylindrical Shell 1483
Rawat A., Matsagar V. and Nagpal A.K.
xxx
ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1, 2016
ROBUST FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING APPROACHES TO

SYSTEMIC CIRCULATION FLOW AND HEAT TRANSFER
HASAN H.1, COCCKERELLI A. 2 and NITHIARASU P. 1*
1
Biomedical Engineering and Rheology Group, Zienkiewicz Centre for Computational Engineering,
Swansea University, Swansea SA2 8PP, United-Kingdom
2
Cardiff University School of Medicine, Institute of Molecular and Experimental Medicine, Wales Heart
Research Institute, Cardiff CF14 4XN, United-Kingdom.
Abstract: In this paper an overview of various finite element algorithms to robustly

solve flow and heat transfer equations of a human systemic circulation is presented.
Several novel methods of solution are investigated and compared. A novel locally
conservative Galerkin method coupled with Newton-LU decomposition, Global
Galerkin method, and explicit method are investigated to address the behaviour of
blood flow in a one-dimensional human arterial network. Unlike explicit methods,
proposed techniques result in stable and robust computational strategies for non-linear
system of equations and achieve a fast convergence. The proposed methods are
compared against each other and also with other methods to demonstrate their validity
and stability for studying systemic blood flow and heat transfer characteristics.
Keywords: Finite element method; Global Galerkin; locally conservative
Galerkin; implicit; explicit; systemic circulation; blood flow; bio-
heat transfer.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:P.Nithiarasu@swansea.ac.uk 1

ICCMS2016
PARALLEL PARTITIONED SIMULATIONS OF REAL WORLD’S

COUPLED PROBLEMS
YOSHIMURA S.*1 and YAMADA T.2
1
Department of Systems Innovation, School of Engineering, The University of Tokyo, Japan
2
RACE, The University of Tokyo, Japan
Abstract: We have been developing a parallel partitioned simulation system to solve large
scale real world’s coupled problems. This paper describes some key technologies of the
system, and demonstrates its practical performance and effectiveness through solving
various kinds of real world’s problems.
Keywords: Coupled analysis; Partitioned approach; Parallel computing; FSI.
_______________________________
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: yoshi@sys.t.u-tokyo.ac.jp

2
ICCMS2016
MULTISCALE MODELING OF FAILURE IN COMPOSITE MATERIALS

RAMESH TALREJA
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Department of Materials Science and Engineering Texas A&M
University, College Station, USA.
Department of Engineering Science and Mathematics Luleå University of Technology, 971 87 Luleå,
Sweden.
Abstract: Failure in composite materials is known to initiate at the level of
constituents. Further development of the failure process and ultimate failure of the
composite structure depend on the fiber architecture and other geometrical details. A
composite failure analysis must therefore be at multiple length scales. This paper will
outline a multiscale modeling scheme and illustrate the approach with two examples:
tensile fiber failure and transverse matrix cracking. For the case of fiber failure, a five-
cylinder axisymmetric finite element model containing an initially broken fiber at the
center will be used to conduct stress analysis and formation of a failure plane will be
simulated by a crack growth procedure. The transverse crack formation will be
analyzed as a linking up of fiber-matrix debond cracks. Formation of these cracks will
in turn be analyzed by an energy-based criterion. The local scale modeling will take
account of the manufacturing induced irregularities and defects by appropriate
representation of these in the failure analysis. Finally, an assessment of the multiscale
approach as a rational alternative to the currently used failure theories, which are
formulated on homogenized composites, will be presented and the challenges
remaining to address in future will be outlined.
Key words: Composite failure; Multiscale modeling; Failure theories.
______________________
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: talreja@aero.tamu.edu 3

ICCMS2016
ST VENANT TORSION AND BENDING OF PRISMATIC COMPOSITE SHAFTS
BHUSHAN LAL KARIHALOO1 and QI-ZHI XIAO2

1
School of Engineering, Cardiff University, Cardiff, UK.
2
LUSAS FEA Ltd, Forge House, 66 High Street, Kingston-upon-Thames, UK.
Abstract: This paper discusses the use of high-performance incompatible,

enhanced-strain and hybrid stress elements for the St Venant torsion and bending of
composite prismatic shafts, formulated in terms of the warping function. The
properties of the shaft are uniform along its length but piece-wise constant and
orthotropic across its cross-section. In order to analyse composite shafts whose
microstructural details are difficult to be modelled directly by finite element
discretisation, the two-scale asymptotic (or mathematical) homogenisation
approach is also discussed; the resulting equilibrium equations can be readily
solved by the aforementioned high-performance elements.
Keywords: Composite Shaft; Enhanced-strain Element; Homogenisation;
Hybrid Stress Element; Incompatible Element; Bending; Torsion
4
ICCMS2016
LONG WAVES IN LATTICE WAVEGUIDES

BHASKAR A.* and CUAN-URQUIZO E.
University of Southampton, SO30 7QF, UK.
Abstract: Long elastic waves in lattice waveguides having woodpile architecture,

such as those encountered within 3D printed materials, are studied. Two stacking
arrangements are considered—when alternating layers have filaments aligned over
each other and when they are staggered. Axial, thickness-shear and flexural wave
propagation in waveguides made of such material is analysed. Propagation
characteristics of bulk waves that result from coupled bending-shear motions are
analytically derived. The effect of porosity on wave propagation is analytically
examined. Coupled shear-flexure motion is found to be strongly dependent on the
microstructure of the lattice. The wavelength is assumed to be significantly larger than
the characteristic periodicity of the lattice. Illustrative examples are given.
Keywords: Lattice waveguides; Dispersion relations; Timoshenko beam;
Bending-shear coupling
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: a.bhaskar@soton.ac.uk 5

ICCMS2016
IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India, June 27-July 1,
2016
THREE-DIMENSIONAL NUMERICAL STUDY OF CONJUGATE HEAT

TRANSFER IN DIVERGING MICROCHANNEL
DURYODHAN V. S.1, SINGH A.1, SINGH S. G.2, and AGRAWAL A.1*
1
Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, Powai, Mumbai, India.
2
Indian Institute of Technology Hyderabad, Hyderabad, India.
Abstract: Increase in applications of varying cross sectional area microchannels in

microdevices has provided the need to understand fluid flow and heat transfer through
such flow passages. This study focuses on conjugate heat transfer study through a
diverging microchannel. Three-dimensional numerical simulations are performed
using commercially available package. Diverging microchannels with different
geometrical configurations (i.e. varying angle: 1-8°, depth: 86-200 µm, solid-to-fluid
thickness ratio: 1.5-4) are employed for this purpose. Simulations are carried out for
varying mass flow rate (3.3x10-5-8.3x10-5 kg/s) and heat flux (2.4-9.6 W/cm2)
conditions. Heat distribution along the flow direction is studied to understand the
effect of wall conduction. Wall conduction number (M) varies from 0.006 to 0.024 for
the range of parameters selected in the study. Wall conduction is observed to be a
direct function of depth and solid-to-fluid thickness ratio, and varies inversely with
angle of diverging microchannel. It is observed that the area variation and wall
conduction contribute separately towards redistribution of the supplied heat flux. This
leads to reduced temperature gradients in diverging microchannel. The results
presented in this work will be useful for designing future microdevices involving
heating or cooling.
Keywords: Wall conduction; Diverging microchannel; Heat flux gradient
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: amit.agrawal@iitb.ac.in 6

ICCMS2016
SOLIDIFICATION WITH BUOYANCY INDUCED CONVECTION:

EVALUATION OF DIFFERENT MUSHY ZONE FORMULATIONS
VERMA S.1, 2 and DEWAN A.2*
1
Solid State Physics Laboratory, DRDO, Timarpur, Delhi India.
2
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, Hauz Khas, New Delhi India.
Abstract: A comparative assessment is performed between purely porous formulation

of the mushy zone controlled by permeability and the hybrid formulations controlled
by both permeability and viscosity of the mushy zone during solidification of a binary
alloy. The Darcy's Carman-Kozeny equation is used to model the permeability of the
mushy zone in porous formulation for all the models. The first hybrid model employs
switching functions to simultaneously control the permeability and viscosity of the
mushy zone up to a critical solid fraction and thereafter it switches to a purely
permeability controlled porous formulation. The second hybrid model assumes mushy
zone to be non-newtonian slurry with the liquid viscosity following a power law up to
the critical solid fraction and a permeability controlled porous medium thereafter. A
two-dimensional computational domain of aqueous ammonium chloride (NH4Cl-H2O)
solution employing continuum mixture approach is considered for the analysis. Model
with purely porous mushy zone formulation showed higher solutal gradients in the
mushy zone resulting in higher solutal buoyancy driven convection in mushy zone
along with higher bulk macrosegregation effects in comparison to the hybrid models.
Both the hybrid models showed potential of capturing the settled free floating
particles and broken dendrites with the non-newtonian slurry hybrid model showing
potential of capturing the liquidus irregularities.
Keywords: Phase change; Mushy zone; Porosity; Permeability; Columnar:
dendritic morphology; Equiaxed morphology.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: adewan@am.iitd.ac.in 7

ICCMS2016
PHYSICS BASED FINITE ELEMENT INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

FOR ROTATING BEAMS
RANJAN GANGULI
Department of Aerospace Engineering Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore India.
Abstract: Rotating beams are ubiquitous members of industrial structures such as

wing turbine rotors, helicopter rotors, turbomachinery, robotic systems and aerial
robots. Typically, finite element analysis is used to solve the vibration problem for
these structures. We show that it is possible to significantly enhance the efficiency of
the finite element methods for rotating beams by creating basis functions which more
closely satisfy the governing differential equation of the structure. Since the rotating
beam equation cannot be solved as an exact solution, different approximate strategies
are explored to improve finite element convergence, especially at higher rotating
speeds where the centrifugal stiffening terms become dominant.
Keywords: Finite element method; Basis functions; Shape functions; Collocation
method; Free vibration
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ganguli@aero.iisc.ernet.in 8

ICCMS2016
FREE EDGE EFFECTS IN SANDWICH LAMINATES UNDER TENSION,

BENDING AND TWISTING LOADS
DHANESH N.2 and SANTOSH KAPURIA1,2*,
1
CSIR- Structural Engineering Research Centre, Taramani, Chennai, India.
2
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi, India.
Abstract: An accurate analytical solution for predicting the free edge effects in
sandwich laminates under tension, bending and twisting loading is presented. The
recently developed mixed-field multiterm extended Kantorovich method (MMEKM)
has been used to obtain the solution of the governing equations, which are developed
using the Reissner-type variational principle. The present mixed-field approach
enables the exact and point-wise satisfaction of traction-free edge and interlaminar
continuity conditions for displacements and stresses. The numerical results presented
for different loadings and lay-up show rapid convergence of the iterative series
solution. The comparison of the present results with the detailed FE solution shows
good agreement. The present solution captures the singularity of stresses in the free
edge region by showing the rise in its peak magnitude with the number of terms in the
solution. The presented accurate 3D elasticity based solution can act as a useful
benchmark for assessing the accuracy of solutions obtained from other approximate
methods.
Keywords: Free edge stresses; Sandwich panel; Extended Kantorovich method
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: kapuria@am.iitd.ac.in 9

ICCMS2016
FINITE ELEMENT COMPUTATIONS OF COMPLEX FLOWS

MITTAL S.*, CHOPRA G., FURQUAN M., NAVROSE, VMK KOTTEDA and BHATT V.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur, India.
Abstract: A brief review of our research activities is presented. Stabilized finite

element methods are used to solve two and three-dimensional, unsteady turbulent
flows past complex bodies at various Reynolds (Re) and Mach (M) numbers. The
stabilized finite element methods that are being used are robust, accurate and able to
handle complex geometries including those that deform with time. Flow problems
involving fluid-structure interactions as well as aerodynamic shape optimization for
superior aerodynamic performance are also presented.
Keywords: FEM; Fluid Dynamics; Transition; Vortex Induced Vibrations;

Fluid Structure Interaction; Shape optimization.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: smittal@iitk.ac.in 10

ICCMS2016
TUNED SLOSHING DAMPER IN RESPONSE CONTROL OF TALL

BUILDING STRUCTURE
BHATTACHARYYA S. K.
Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Kharagpur, India.
Abstract: The paucity of space and requirements of building infrastructure has

driven us to explore for taller building systems. Also a large number of construction
materials has emerged and are being used extensively in buildings. The usage of
light weight high strength materials reduces the space requirement and also
becomes economical. However, such structures have structurally become
susceptible to the lateral loading generated due to wind or earthquake. Attempts are
made to control the response of tall building systems by introducing control
mechanisms in the form of active, passive or hybrid system. Usage of liquid storage
tanks in tall building system in the form of a passive control device proves
effective. Several works have been carried out in the past to understand the efficacy
of such system, which popularly is known as tuned liquid dampers or tuned
sloshing dampers (TSD). The present paper deals with the development of a
numerical code to demonstrate the efficacy of such tuned sloshing damper
considering fluid structure interaction effect.
Keywords: Sloshing; Damper; Response control; Building; Passive system;

Tuned Sloshing Damper (TSD)
________________________________
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: srimankb@gmail.com 11

ICCMS2016
ADVANCED METHODOLOGIES FOR FRACTURE ANALYSIS AND

DAMAGE TOLERANT EVALUATION
IYER N. R.*, PALANI G. S. and RAMACHANDRA MURTHY A.
Academy of Scientific & Innovative Research (AcSIR) & former Director, CSIR-Structural Engineering
Research Centre (CSIR-SERC)
Abstract: The objective of the paper is to present the advanced methodologies for
fracture analysis and damage tolerant evaluation of metallic structural components
for efficient and safe design of structural systems meeting the functional criteria. An
efficient and novel Numerically Integrated-Modified Virtual Crack Closure Integral
(NI-MVCCI) technique has been demonstrated for 4-noded bilinear, 8-noded (regular
& quarter-point), 9-noded Lagrangian and 12-noded cubic isoparametric family of
finite elements. Another advanced numerical method, Extended Finite Element
Method (XFEM) for fracture analysis of cracked stiffened panels has been discussed.
Methodologies for crack growth and remaining life assessment of structural
components under constant and variable amplitude loading have been presented.
Brief description on residual strength evaluation has been provided. Numerical
studies on fracture analysis to compute Strain Energy Release Rate (SERR), G and
stress intensity factor (SIF) and remaining life assessment and residual strength
evaluation have been conducted and the results are compared with the respective
analytical/experimental results.
Keywords: Crack closure; Linear elastic fracture mechanics; Stress intensity
factor; Strain energy release rate; Damage tolerant design;
Remaining life; Residual strength; Extended finite element method
_____________________________
12
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: nageshiyer@acsir.res.in
ICCMS2016
ATOMISTIC AND CONTINUUM MODELLING OF FRACTURE

STRENGTH AND ADHESION PROPERTIES OF GRAPHENE
DEWAPRIYA NUWAN 1 and NIMAL RAJAPAKSE 2*

1
School of Engineering Science, Simon Fraser University, Burnaby, BC, Canada V5A 1S6.
2
Department of Civil Engineering, Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada K1S 5B6.
Abstract: We developed a computationally efficient atomistic model to predict the

fracture strength of pristine and defective graphene under various processing
conditions (e.g., temperature, strain-rate), which is critically important in designing
graphene-based systems. Furthermore, we developed a continuum-based spring model
to characterize the influence of surface defects on the adhesion properties of graphene
interfaces. These models have been extensively validated using molecular dynamics
simulations. Results reveal that temperature highly degrades the strength of graphene,
and the strength is strain rate dependent. We also found that defects significantly
reduce the strength and interfacial adhesion of graphene.
Keywords: Graphene; strength; adhesion; molecular dynamics.
___________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: Nimal.Rajapakse@carleton.ca 13
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDIES OF PIEZOELECTRIC COMPOSITES USING

NURBS FOR GEOMETRY AND FIELD FUNCTIONS
SINGH A. V.* and RAJ V.
Mechanical and Materials Engineering Western University, London, Ontario, Canada.
Abstract: This paper deals with the response studies of piezoelectric sandwich
composites by the energy method. The equation of motion is deduced from the
principles of minimum potential energy. To do this displacement and electrical fields
are required as a priori. Hence, the above said field functions are described by Non-
Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) in two and three dimensional domains and
applied against static and free vibration analyses of thin and very thick sandwich plates
and piezoelectric prismatic bar. Nonlinear variation of the electric potential is
considered through the thickness and modelled by a discrete layer-wise linear scheme.
The present formulation is successfully validated against a finite element code.
Keywords: Energy method; Piezoelectric composites; Sandwich plates and

beams; Electro-elastic composites; NURBS.
__________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: avsingh@uwo.ca

14
ICCMS2016
CLEAN WATER AND CLEAN ENERGY PRODUCTION: SIMULATION

USING FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
SEETHARAMU K. N.*, SPANDANA K. R. and PARIKSHIT B.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, PES University, Bangalore, India.
Abstract: One Dimensional Finite Element Method (FEM) is used to develop an

analysis model for Pressure Retarded Osmosis (PRO), Direct Forward Osmosis (FO)
and Reverse Osmosis (RO). A 1 D FEM model is developed and simulated on
MATLAB. The predictions of the present method are compared with those available
in literature, both numerical and experimental. In addition, for the first time in
literature, the variation of concentration of solute on the feed and draw side as well as
the variation of water permeate flux along the length using the variable mass transfer
coefficient is predicted. There is a need to introduce new non-dimensional parameters
to make the ɛ-MTU model a more generalised model (applicable to FO, PRO and RO)
and to aid the design of the mass exchangers.
Keywords: Pressure Retarded Osmosis (PRO); Forward Osmosis (FO); Reverse
Osmosis (RO); Concentration Polarisation; Finite Element
Method (FEM); Salt flux; Non-dimensional parameters
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: knseetharamu@yahoo.com 15

ICCMS2016
TWO-TEMPERATURE CONTINUUM MODEL FOR METAL PLASTICITY

CHOWDHURY S. R. and ROY D.*
Computational Mechanics Lab., Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Science,
Bangalore, India.
Abstract: A physically based continuum plasticity model for metals from the
consideration of non-equilibrium thermodynamics is presented. The modeling is
accomplished in a two-temperature framework that appears naturally by considering
the thermodynamic system to be composed of two weakly interacting subsystems,
namely the kinetic vibrational and configurational subsystems. While the atomic
vibrations of plastically deforming metals form the kinetic vibrational subsystem,
much slower degrees of freedom in terms of the motion of defects constitute the
configurational subsystem. Both subsystems assume their own temperatures and fall
out of equilibrium from each other because of the externally imposed driving.
Dislocation density characterising the configurational subsystem is considered to be
the state variable for the present development. The continuum model accommodates
finite deformation and describes plastic deformation in a yield-free framework via a
microforce balance along with the conventional macroforce balance.
Keywords: Metal viscoplasticity; Non-equilibrium thermodynamics; Two-
temperature framework; Dislocation density
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: royd@civil.iisc.ernet.in 16

ICCMS2016
MICROSTRUCTURE EVOLUTION IN METAL NANOSTRUCTURES

UNDER EXTREME CONDITIONS OF TEMPERATURE AND STRAIN
RATE
GUPTA V.1,2, GHONIEM N. M.1,2, CRUM R.1, PO G.1, SEIF D.1, PRIKHODKO S.
V.2,COLORADO H. A.1, RAMIREZ B.1 and GÁMEZ C.1
1
Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, UCLA.
2
Department of Materials Science and Engineering, UCLA.
Abstract: This paper explores a fundamental connection between ductility and

domain size in metallic solids under extreme conditions of cryogenic temperatures
and strain rates (108s-1). A series of novel experiments, backed by multiscale
modelling and transmission electron microscopy (TEM) analysis, are presented that
involve loading of TEM-ready single crystal nano-pillar samples of Cu of varying
lengths (50 nm to 1 m) and aspect ratios (50 nm to 100 nm in diameter) by laser-
generated stress waves of sub-nanosecond rise times, under extreme conditions of
strain rate (>108s-1) and temperature (100K). The nucleation stress for Shockley
partials, which can be taken as a proxy for the onset of ductile deformation, was
measured to be only 1 GPa. This is an order of magnitude lower than the previously
measured values of 35 GPa in bulk geometries. TEM observations show remarkable
ability of the material to re-arrange itself through motion of dislocations to form
subgrain boundaries within a very short duration of only few nanoseconds.
Keywords: Ductility; Shock loading; FCC metals; TEM; MD Simulations.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:vgupta@ucla.edu 17

ICCMS2016
NONLINEAR STABILITY CHARACTERISTICS OF COMPOSITE

CYLINDRICAL PANEL SUBJECTED TO NON-UNIFORM IN-PLANE
MECHANICAL AND LOCALIZED THERMAL LOADINGS
KUMAR R. RAMACHANDRA L. S. and BANERJEE B.
Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Kharagpur, India.
Abstract: The non-linear stability analysis of composite cylindrical panel subjected

to non-uniform in-plane mechanical and thermal loadings are reported here. The
buckling of composite panel subjected to non-uniform mechanical / localized
thermal loads is solved in two steps as the prebuckling stress distribution within the
panel is not known a priori. In the first step, the semi-analytical expressions for the
pre-buckling stresses within the composite cylindrical panel under non-uniform in-
plane mechanical / thermal loadings are developed by solving in-plane elasticity
problem. Subsequently, using these in-plane stresses within the cylindrical panel,
the governing equations for nonlinear stability of layered composite panel are
formulated using variational principle. The cylindrical panel is modeled based on
Donnell’s shell theory considering higher order shear deformation theory and
incorporating von-Kármán geometric nonlinearity. The Galerkin’s method is used
to solve the non-linear governing partial differential equations. The influence of
different types of mechanical and thermal loadings, initial geometric imperfections,
and biaxial loadings on the postbuckling equilibrium paths is investigated.
Keywords: Composite cylindrical panel; Non-uniform mechanical loading;
Localized thermal loading; Galerkin method; Nonlinear stability
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: lsr@civil.iitkgp.ernet.in

18
ICCMS2016
2016
A FAST-MULTIPOLE UNIFIED TECHNIQUE FOR THE ANALYSIS OF

CONTINUUM MECHANICS PROBLEMS WITH THE BOUNDARY
ELEMENT METHODS
NEY AUGUSTO DUMONT* and HÉLVIO DE FARIAS COSTA PEIXOTO
Civil Engineering Department, Pontifical Catholic University of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.
Abstract: The proposed developments are based on a consistent implementation of

the conventional, collocation boundary element method (BEM) – with concepts taken
from the variationally-based hybrid BEM. A scheme is used to expand a generic (not
problem-dependent) fundamental solution about hierarchical levels of source and field
poles, which is particularly advantageous to make the technique seamlessly applicable
to 2D and 3D problems of elasticity or potential, in terms of different types of curved
elements for generally complicated topology. The proposed compact algorithm is
more straightforward to lay out and seems to be more efficient than the ones available
in the technical literature – particularly because the outermost loop refers to field
nodes and geometry, in what may be called a reverse implementation. Owing to space
restrictions, the basic features of the recursive algorithm for both the simplified hybrid
and the conventional BEM are left to an expanded version of the paper. Some
numerical results are shown for the conventional BEM, with validation and
assessment for a few simple, but very large-scale, 2D potential problems with
complicated geometry and topology for constant, linear and quadratic elements. Since
iterative solvers are not required in this first step of numerical simulations, an isolated
assessment of accuracy, computational effort and storage allocation of the proposed
fast multipole technique becomes possible.
Keywords: Boundary elements; Fast multipole methods; Variational methods.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dumont@puc-rio.br 19

ICCMS2016
MULTI-FIDELITY DESIGN OPTIMIZATION: CHALLENGES IN

COMPLEX PHYSICS-BASED COMPUTATIONAL MECHANICS
RAMANA V. GRANDHI
Wright State University, 3640 Colonel Glenn Hwy., Dayton, OH 45435 USA.
Abstract: Engineering systems development design is currently pushing the envelope of

traditional multidisciplinary design capabilities. Bringing multiple physics into the design
loop earlier in the design process has shown promise in handling the strict requirements
constantly being placed on various areas of computational mechanics, such as the design
of next generation military aircraft. The goal in multi-fidelity design is to aid in this
process to expand traditional design capabilities through the implementation of techniques
developed to mitigate inadequacies and/or obstacles associated with various levels of
complex physics in a single design process. Achieving a desired level of accuracy while
maintaining a low computational cost may very well be the greatest obstacle combating
computational design. However, other hindrances exist such as determining the
appropriate physics (i.e. acoustic, thermal, structural), level of physics (i.e. Potential
Flow, Euler, Navier Stokes), and mesh refinement to utilize in any given computational
model. This work focuses on leveraging higher fidelity information to correct lower
fidelity models so as to take advantage of the speed associated with the latter without
compromising accuracy. Corrections are implemented via a custom Hybrid Bridge
Function (HBF) while the design aspect is governed through the implementation of a
special Trust Region Model Management (TRMM) methodology. Multi-fidelity design
optimization is demonstrated on a thermal plate demonstration problem consisting of four
differing levels of fidelity. Results show that employment of the described methodology
succeeds in obtaining a design at a lower cost while maintaining a necessary level of
accuracy.
Keywords: Hybrid Bridge Function; Multi-Fidelity; Optimization; Physics-based

Simulation; Trust Region Model Management.
_________________________________
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ramana.grandhi@wright.edu 20

ICCMS2016
AN OVERVIEW OF COMPUTATIONAL MODELING AT MATERIAL

CHEMISTRY AND MICRO SCALES IN CEMENT PASTE
RAM MOHAN 1*, WAYNE HODO 2 and RAJENDRAN A. 3
1
Department of Nanoengineering, North Carolina A&T State University.
2
Engineering Research and Development Center, Vicksburg.
3
University of Mississippi at Oxford
Abstract: Complex, heterogeneous material and morphological nature of cement

paste requires starting from their material chemistry and microstructural morphology
through appropriate scale relevant computational models. These enable capturing
multi-scale material features that influence their properties and behavior at
engineering scales. An overview of such modeling starting from nanoscale material
features through material chemistry level modeling via molecular dynamics (MD);
finite element based repeated volume element (RVE) models of complete three-
dimensional virtual microstructure including evolution of microstructure due to
hydration in cement paste is presented. Predictive constitutive material models for
hydrostatic compression that is solely based on material chemistry structure for a key
hydrated cement paste material constituent calcium silicate hydrate (CSH) is
summarized. Micro-scale RVE finite element based predictive effective modulus
properties, as well as results from our modeling work to understand shock wave
propagation in a cement microstructure is briefly presented. Multi-scale modeling that
links across various length scales and material features in complex heterogeneous
material systems such as cement paste provides an effective way of coupling material
science and engineering towards their better understanding and tailored material
design. These present a new direction for integrated material science and engineering
approaches for development and understanding of complex materials and structures.
Keywords: Multi-Scale Modeling; Molecular Dynamics; Cement Paste; Calcium
Silicate Hydrate; Repeated Volume Element
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rvmohan@ncat.edu 21

ICCMS2016
VIBRATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FEMUR BONE

PRIYADARSHI B. K.* and PARHI D. R.
Robotics Laboratory, Department of Mechanical Engineering National Institute of Technology,
Rourkela Odisha, India.
Abstract: Implementation of mechanical principles to the activities performed by the

biological tissues to obtain their biomechanical behaviour is included under the
branch of science called as Biomechanics. To have sufficient information about the
response of different body parts under various loading conditions, the vibrational
modelling of the bone type structures is required. By the three-dimensional modelling
of the biological structures, the resonant frequencies of various modes can be found
out and safe ranges of frequencies for operation can be suggested.
Keywords: Biomechanics; Femur; Frequencies of Operation
INTRODUCTION Out of them, some approaches are

Biomechanics is the applications of concepts Ultrasound, Stress wave propagation, X-ray
of mechanics into the analysis of structures tomography, vibration analysis etc.
and functions of biological systems of plants, Vibration analysis is a non-destructive and
animals, human beings, etc. Nikolai relatively low-cost method for analyzing
Bernstein coined the word “Biomechanics” mechanical and physical properties of bones.
from two ancient Greek words “Bios” The steps involved in the vibration analysis
meaning life and “Mechanike” meaning are forced excitation of the object, analysis of
mechanics. So Biomechanics is the study of output signals, recording frequencies and
living structures using laws of Mechanics. mode shapes. The output response of a
Biomechanics is an integral part of system depends on the input signals or the
engineering. The traditional forms of nature of excitation provided and the
Mechanics like Newtonian Mechanics and properties of the system that is excited. The
Material Science can be applied to the system properties include mass, density and
analysis of biological structures. Biological structure of the system. By mechanical
systems are much more complex than stimulation of the bones and analyzing the
mechanical systems. Various numerical response, information about various
method techniques can be applied to all parameters can be collected. These factors
studies of biological systems. Biomechanics are fractures, postures, osteoporosis and
may involve calculation of stresses, strains, loosening of artificial hip joint etc. To
mode shapes and frequencies of vibration. By perform the vibrational analysis, various tools
analyzing the mechanical and physical are available out of which most widely used
properties of bones, their abnormalities can one is the Finite Element Analysis (FEA).
also be studied. Various techniques have FEA is an effective tool that can perform
been developed to study in vitro and in vivo both static and dynamic loading analysis of
properties of bones over past few decades. various human organs such as the structure of
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:p.biplabkumar@gmail.com 22

Priyadarshi and Parhi
the bone. To analyze the structures of discussed physical principles associated with
complicated geometry and materials which forced oscillations to determine its impact on
are not homogeneous, FEA is used. FEA is vibration exercises. (Gupta and Tse, 2014)
primarily based on a computer interface. For studied about the vulnerability of the femur
modelling of the complicated shapes and bone to fracture as it is the highest load
inhomogeneous material properties, FEA is carrying bone of the human body.
accepted widely and considered as an
alternative tool in the field of Biomechanics. VIBRATIONAL ANALYSIS OF
The femur is considered as the largest and FEMUR
longest bone of the human skeletal system. It For analyzing various characteristics of the
is also called as the thigh bone. The hip joint femur bone, finite element modelling is
is formed by the femur in connection with the considered as the best tool as it exactly
pelvis at the proximal end and knee joint is approximates the result. The accuracy of
formed in connection with the tibia at the finite element modelling depends mostly on
distal end. The highest percentage of the the consideration of geometry, loading
weight of the body is taken by the femur; conditions and boundary conditions. The
hence it carries the maximum chances of geometry of femur bone varies from person
bone fracture. Some previously available to person. Practically the bones are
literature on vibrational behaviour of femur anisotropic and nonlinear materials. But for
bone can be cited as follows. the ease of analysis, they are taken as
Koch (1917) analyzed the structural isotropic and linear in nature. Their
mechanics of the femur and examined properties are also taken as elastic for
various loads applied to the femur and the analysis.
response of the femur to these loads. Toridis The various properties of the femur bone
(1969) studied about determination of are approximated as below:
mechanical stresses developed in the femur
Material density ρ = 866 Kg/m3
under various loading conditions. Piotrowski
and Wilcox (1971) developed a computer Poisson’s ratio γ = 0.4
operated program for the calculation of Young’s modulus E = 7.585 GPa
torsional and bending stresses developed in
the femur. (Rybicki, Simonen and Weis, For restriction of motion created by the
1972) used a mathematical model to examine adjacent bones during normal sitting or
the effects of muscle forces on the femur and standing, a fixed-fixed boundary condition is
the stresses thus developed (Khalil, Viano taken for the analysis at both knee joint and
and Taber, 1981) identified the resonant hip joint. In order obtain the responses of the
frequencies and mode shapes of the femur by femur, modal analysis is performed by finite
applying both analytical and experimental element tools. The governing equation of
methods. (Gdoutos, Raftopoulos and Baril, dynamic response is given as follows:
1982) critically reviewed about the  M x  C x   K x  0 (1)
mechanical behavior of human femur.
(Stenfelt, Hakansson and Tjellstrom, 2000) Where [M] = Mass Matrix
examined about patterns of vibration in bone [C]= Damping Coefficient matrix
conducted sound using a skull added with
[K]= Stiffness matrix
damping material. (Rittweger, 2010)
23
Vibrational Characteristics of Femur Bone
For undamped free vibrations [C] = 0 biomechanical stress analysis of the

So, the solution can be approximated as human femur Biomaterials 3(1) 2-8.
x   X  eit (2)

Gupta A and Tse K 2014 Vibration analysis
of femur bone using ELMER Journal of
In the above solution, {X} represents the Engineering Science and Technology
respective amplitudes of masses and variable ICMTEA Conference 12-19 School of
ω represents the corresponding frequency of Engineering Taylor’s University
each Eigen vectors. Now the governing December 2013.
equation thus reduces to Khalil T B Viano D C and Taber L A 1981
 K     M   X   0
2
(3) Vibrational characteristics of the
embalmed human femur Journal of
The above problem is considered as an Eigen Sound and Vibration 75(3) 417-436.
value problem in matrix algebra, and it can
Koch J C 1917The laws of bone
be considered as linear by replacing ω2 by λ.
architecture American Journal of
The system is then solved by using ANSYS
Anatomy 21(2) 177-298.
software to find out natural frequencies and
mode shapes of vibration. Piotrowski G and Wilcox G A 1971 The
stress program: a computer program for
RESULTS the analysis of stresses in long bones
Bones are complex three-dimensional Journal of biomechanics 4(6) 497-506.
structures. To explain the output response of Rittweger J 2010 Vibration as an exercise
bones to mechanical impact, an modality: how it may work, and what its
understanding of the basic vibratory motions potential might be European journal of
is important. The vibratory motion analysis applied physiology 108(5) 877-904.
of bones provides an idea about the various
Rybicki E F Simonen F A and Weis E B
types of load that are acting on the bones.
1972On the mathematical analysis of
stress in the human femur Journal of
DISCUSSIONS
biomechanics 5(2) 203-215.
Vibration analysis of the biological structures
Stenfelt S Hakansson B and Tjellstrom A
gives us reliable information about designing
2000 Vibration characteristics of bone
of the replicas if any damage occurs to the
conducted sound in vitro The Journal of
systems. The finite element modeling can be
the Acoustical Society of America 107(1)
used as the best tool for the analysis because
422-431.
it improves the accuracy of the results
obtained. The modeling provides us the Toridis T G 1969 Stress analysis of the femur
various frequencies and mode shapes of bone Journal of biomechanics 2(2) 163-174.
type structures. The resonant frequencies are
to be kept in observation to avoid damage.
REFERENCES
Gdoutos E E Raftopoulos D D and Baril J D
1982 A critical review of the
24
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF IMPLANTS USED FOR STABILIZATION OF

FRACTURED BONE
DASH A.K.1, AGARWALLA D.K.2*, DAS H.C.3, SAHOO J.4 and RATH A.5
1,2,3,5
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering, ITER, SOA University, Bhubaneswar, Odisha, India
4
Dept. of Orthopaedics, IMS and SUM Hospital, SOA University, Bhubaneswar, Odisha, India
Abstract: The fixation of fracture of a bone can be done by using different implants
such as screws, plates and nails. The bone in human body is usually exposed to axial
compressive load, torsional load (Twisting moment) and bending load. Among these
three types of loadings, axial compressive force and torsional load are being exerted
Therefore the objective of this research work is to deduce the stability against axial
compressive, torsional load and combination of both the loads following
instrumentation of implants such as plate and screws (Only screws or plate with
screws). Over and above, the stresses due to the axial compressive force and twisting
moment are usually seen to play in bones exposed more for movements (as seen in
upper limb) as lower limb is required for stability. So the objective of this work is to
find out the effectiveness of screw with plate and screw following fracture fixation in
consideration to axial and torsional loading. Plate and screws are commonly used in
upper limb fracture fixation where emphasis is laid down on mobility. From the Finite
Element Analysis (FEA) of the bone, plate, screw model (using MIMICS & Solid
Works) and theoretical analysis, it is observed that the screw and plate arrangement
provides maximum resistance to the fracture site for maintaining stability following
compression of the fracture site. The deformations and the magnitude of stress were
also found to be less in comparison to the independent screw arrangements for
fracture fixation.
Keywords: Screw; plate; stability; fracture; FEA; theoretical.
INTRODUCTION is supposed to influence fixations of fracture

The fracture in human bone can be fixed by and union as well. The screw being used
both internal and external fixators. independently for fixation of fracture play a
Technically internal fixation renders vital role in bringing apposition of fragments
anatomical reduction with perfect apposition with perfect anatomical reduction and
and no doubt it brings pre-fracture state of the simultaneously it takes part in bearing the
bone. Different means such as screw, screw load along with the respective bone.
with plate as extra medullary and Therefore the performance of the screw with
intramedullary nails are use for internal respect to its position in the bone seems to be
fixation of bone following fracture. Thus the matter of great concern and obliviously
mechanical behavior of implants during load requires biomechanical analysis. The 3-D
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:deepak.cet08@gmail.com 25

Dash et al.
finite element solid model [Zhang et al., that 3-D finite element solid model of femurs
2013] of femurs in partial has been analyzed In partial volume is more close to the real
by exposing the volume using the CT scan bone and fit for FEA when compared to the
data and conducted the finite element analysis results by rendering the whole volume. A
(FEA) considering different materials for parametric study [Haase and Rouhi, 2013]
cortical bone, cancellous bone and pulp have been performed based on finite element
cavity. The compressive stress was found to analysis on the bone-screw models to
be in the medial surface of the femur i.e. in evaluate the stress shielding of the stimuli by
the calcar femorale. They have concluded comparing the stress and strain.
energy density (SED). It has been found from Theoretical Analysis
the study that, stress and SED have been The stress and strain developed in the bone
transferred between the bone and screw can be formulated considering the internal
which can be attributed to the stimuli transfer energy as function [Ciarlet and Ayache,
parameters. However, it has been observed 2004]. The stress matrix has been presented
that transfer of both stimuli has been in equation (1), where the components are the
increased with the screw with angle thread combination of normal stresses and shear
and small diameter and transfer of stress has stresses acting along the X, Y and Z
been increased with the reduction of the directions.
screw's elastic modulus. In both the cases
σ =  xx , yy , zz , xy , xz , yz 
t
SED has been found to decrease which [1]
signifies that, the bone-screw model analysis
requires the proper assessment of SED. A The strain and the external stress are related
comprehensive study of the different fixation as per the equation (2) exhibiting a linear
techniques [Taljanovic et al., 2003] have been elastic model.
[2]
performed and from the study, it has been σ=Ce
observed that the internal and external Considering the equilibrium conditions of the
fixators are basically used for bone fracture system under consideration and following
healing. Even bone grafts are also adopted by laid down boundary conditions, the
surgeons for stabilization of fractured bone. equilibrium equations can be described as;
MATERIALS AND METHODS  xx  xx  xx [3.1]
   Fx  0
x x x
The different materials involved in the
 xy  yy  yz [3.2]
analysis are bone and stainless steel. The    Fy  0
x y z
material properties for the bone has been
 xz  yz  zz
considered with respect to the grey scale    Fz  0 [3.3]
x y z
value obtained from MIMICS software. For Through finite element method, the stiffness
stainless steel the material properties such as and the force can be related as per the
density, Young's modulus and Poisson's ratio equation (4).
are considered as 7750 kg/m3, 193 GPa and
 K U    F 
0.31 respectively. [4]
Where, U is the vector containing the
The bone and implant assembled models are displacement of the pth node and expressed as
analyzed using two methods such as equation (5).
Theoretical analysis and Finite element
analysis (FEA). U= u 1, x , u u
1, y , u u u
1, z , .................... n, x, n, y, n, z t [5]
26
Analysis of Implants used for Stabilization of Fractured Bone
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS assembled models have been subjected to

In recent times, various problems and combining loading pattern 500 N (Axial
situations in bio-mechanics have been compressive loads) & 20 N-m (Torques).
analyzed by developing computerized model Using the static analysis module of the
for better understanding of the underneath analysis software, maximum deformations
phenomena which subsequently assist the and maximum equivalent stress have
bio-medical engineers and medical determined for each scenarios.
practitioners for carrying out their research RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
and practice effectively. In such scenarios,
The stress and deformation results obtained
finite element analysis (FEA) has played a
from theoretical and FE analysis for the bone
significant role for analyzing the
and implant models for three different
computerized model to obtain the various
orientations have been presented in table 1
parameters such as deformation, stress for
(three screws fixed normal to the long bone
better understanding of the model under
axis), Table 2 (three screws fixed inclined to
various loading and boundary conditions. In
the long bone axis) and Table 3 (plate and six
the current research, a cortical section of the
screws fixed normal to the long bone axis).
bone of a middle aged man has been modeled
From the data presented in the tables it is
using the CT scan data and MIMICS
observed that the equivalent stress value is
software. An oblique crack has been
maximum for the combined loading case for
generated in the same model to simulate the
the scenario where screws are fixed inclined
fracture condition of the bone. The
to the long bone axis both for theoretical
orthopedic screws and plates for the fixation
analysis and FEA whereas minimum stress
of the fractured bone model have also been
was found to be for screws fixed normal to
modeled using the same modeling software
the long bone axis. The stress value found for
with the standard dimensions available. The
plate and screw assembly was little higher as
bone, plate and screws have been assembled
compared to screws fixed normal to the long
in three different scenarios i.e. bone with
bone axis.
plate and six screws, three screws normal to
the long bone axis and inclined at 45º to the As far as deformation is concerned it is least
long bone axis separately. The assembled for the plate and screw arrangement for both
models have been separately imported to the theoretical and FEA analysis of magnitude
computerized analysis software and 0.12081 mm and 0.12750 mm respectively.
discretized subsequently. The number of
CONCLUSIONS
elements generated during meshing of the
assembled models of bone with plate & Though both the screw placements normal to
screws and bone with only screws are 152237 the bone axis and inclined to the bone axis
and 67621 respectively. The quality of add to the strength of the bone at the fracture
meshing has been found to be good site, but deformity to axial and rotational
(Skewness of all elements is less than 0.53). loading is very high. Among the two
The boundary conditions for the assembled methods, oblique screws has still less
model have been laid down. Finally, the resistance to deformity in both axial and
models have been subjected to load of 500 N torsional loading. So only screw placement in
(Axial compressive loads) and 20 N-m fracture fixation is insufficient in terms of
(Torques) separately. Also at the end, the stabilization of fracture. Screws can be
27
Dash et al.
applied for temporary fixation and REFERENCES

compression at the fracture site. Screws Ciarlet P G and Ayache N 2004 Handbook of
placed normal to the fracture line and applied Numerical Analysis XII Elsevier North
in a compression manner (overall Drilling the Holland 556-558.
proximal cortex) gives the maximum Haasea K Rouhi G 2013 Prediction of stress
compression at the fracture site. Screws shielding around an orthopedic screw:
Using stress and strain energy density as
placed normal to the bone axis produce
mechanical stimuli Computers in
overriding of the fragments while Biology and Medicine 43(11) 1748-1757
compressing the fracture. Taljanovic M S Jones M D Ruth J T
Benjamin J B Sheppard J E Hunter T B
NOTATION
2003 Fracture Fixation Joint
(upx, upy, upz) = Displacement of the pth node.
Arthroplasties and Prosthese 23 1569-
σ = Applied external stress
1590.
σxx, σyy, σzz = Normal Stresses along the
Zhang Y Zhong W Zhu H Chen Y Xu L and
coordinate axes
Zhu J 2013 Establishing the 3-D finite
σxy, σxz, σyz= Shear stresses along the surfaces
element solid model of femurs in partial
e = Material strain
by volume rendering International
A= Axial Compressive Load
Journal of Surgery 11 (9) 930-934.
T= Twisting load or Torsional load
Table 1. Equivalent stresses and total deformations obtained from
theoretical analysis and FEA of three screws fixed normal to the long bone axis
Equivalent Stress (Mpa) Total Deformation (mm)
Load
Theoretical FEA Theoretical FEA
500 (A) 74.390 77.993 0.79547 0.83769
20 (T) 394.242 412.56 0.05622 0.05915
500 (A) + 20 (T) 396.367 414.22 0.88728 0.93211
Table 2. Equivalent stresses and total deformations obtained from theoretical

analysis and FEA of three screws fixed inclined to the long bone axis
Load
500 (A) 173.178 181.13 0.80706 0.84704
20 (T) 912.063 954.74 0.06147 0.06486
500 (A) + 20 (T) 922.842 956.71 0.86692 0.91120
Table 3. Equivalent stresses and total deformations obtained from theoretical

analysis and FEA of plate and six screws fixed normal to the long bone axis

Load
500 (A) 21.236 22.274 0.03555 0.03741
20 (T) 366.288 384.07 0.06103 0.06446

28
500 (A) + 20 (T) 518.379 539.36 0.12081 0.12750
ICCMS2016
INFLUENCE OF DRILLING EFFECT ON BONE STRESSES BY FINITE

ELEMENT ANALYSIS
MAHAJAN A. N.* and KADAM B. K. N.
Vishwatmak Om Gurudev College of Engg, aghai, Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: The purpose of this paper to understand the complicated structural

relationship between bone components and twist drill tool by investigating the effect
of drilling on the stress distribution using a three dimensional finite element analysis.
The aim is to achieve stresses at different depth with the consideration of actual shape
of the bone model, choice and size of element. The mandible bone of an actual patient
with drilling hole for single unit implant is created using Mimics, NX (UG),
Hypermesh software and evaluating the stress distribution using Ansys software at top
surface, 5mm and 10mm bone depth.
Keywords: Implant, Mandible, Cortical and Cancelleous bone, Anisotropic, 3D
FEM
INTRODUCTION optimization of implants, analysis of the

implant insertion process, design
The structural performance of a structure
optimization of prostheses, the effect of
involves identification of the loads which act
clinical factors such as bone quality on
upon a structure, and the forces and stresses
implant success, the distribution of forces and
which arise within the structure due to these
stresses on implant supported bridge,
loads and then designing the structure to
irregular geometry, complex material
successfully support and resist these loads.
properties and complicated loading
Bone is a structural foundation for a load
conditions involved in dental structures
carrying implant. The stresses on bone due to
[Salles et al., 2010]. The magnitude of this
drilling, surrounding implants, are as well
temperature rise is determined by a number
important to evaluate. A dental implant is a
of factors, including drill geometry and
small titanium screw that serves as an
diameter, rotational speed, feed rate, axial
artificial replacement for the root portion of a
thrust force, initial drill tool temperature and
missing natural tooth. These structures, being
internal or external cooling [Bertollo and
the stiffest components of an implant system,
Robert].
bear a great amount of stress and are
responsible for transmitting the load to the
bone. In recent years, therefore understanding
of stress pattern in dental structures has been
of great interest [Elia et al., 2008]. The main
metallic biomaterials are stainless steels,
cobalt alloy, and titanium and titanium alloy
used for biomedical applications with
specific properties such as biocompatibility,
corrosion resistance etc. [Werner et al.,
2011]. In implant dentistry, Finite Element
Analysis (FEA), the most suitable technique,
has been used extensively for investigating a Figure1. Actual position of
number of aspects including shape implant in bone
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anm_sejal@yahoo.com 29

Mahajan and Kadam
The dental implant placed into the bone well as geometry [Frisardi et al., 2012].
serves as an anchor for the prosthetic device Cortical Bone is outer shell of bone is 2mm
as shown in Figure.1 and it is one of the thick and inner bone is called as cancelleus
better preventive maintenance procedures in bone. The elastic material properties of the
dentistry. Bone is a complex anisotropic, cancellous and cortical bones have used in
porous, viscoelastic and composite. It is also the study are shown in Table 1.
non homogeneous in material properties as
Table 1. Elastic Material properties
Materials Modulus of elasticity Poisson's ratio
Ex = Ey = 12600, Ez = 19400 µ xy = 0.3, µ xz = µ yz = 0.253
Cortical Bone
Gxy = 4850, Gxz = Gyz = 5700 µ yx = 0.3, µ zy = µ zx= 0.39
Ex = Ez = 1148, Ey = 210 µ xy = 0.055, µ xz = 0.322, µ yz = 0.010
Cancellous Bone
Gxz = 434, Gxy = Gyz = 68 µ yx = 0.010, µ zy = 0.055, µ zx= 0.322
Twist Drill Tool, E = 104000 G = 38806 0.34
Titanium Ti- 6al-4V
Bone structure of a patient is has a complex

geometry and complex material interaction,
thus, a detailed image processing is needed
before stress analysis. A CBCT scan of the
patient has been taken to obtain its image in
DICOM (Digital Imaging and
Communications in Medicines) format as
shown in Figure.2. The requirement of actual
shape, size, and location of implant is
obtained by DICOM images and are then Figure 2. DICOM Figure 3. 3 D
used to produced 3D model using Image model in
Mimics11.11 software (Interactive Medical Hypermesh
Image Control System, Materialise Inc.,
Leuven, Belgium) supported by Imaginarium
(India) Pvt. Ltd. Mimics software is used to
convert DICOM image into STL.file format.
The length of bone, approximately 25 mm, is
to be considered for modelling and stress
analysis. Hypermesh is used to create
surfaces by joining all grid nodes and forms
isocontour with the help of segmentation as
shown in Figure.3. The bone have irregular
geometry so it's very difficult to create
surface. NX (UG) software is used to process
model of bone into solid (refer Figure.4) Figure 4. Solid Figure 5. Cad
without changing the geometrical shape of model in NX UG Model
patient's bone. The drilling tool with 2.8mm
diameter inserted in the outermost bone and
yellow colour indicates inner region of bone
shown in Figure.5.
30
Influence of Drilling Effect on Bone Stresses by Finite Element Analysis
Convergent study shows that good converges

for mesh size of 0.5mm. The mesh controls
as 0.5 x 0.5mm and density of bone for this
patient as 750 kg/m3 are considered. The
Number of element calculated at top surface
of bone is 116064, at 5mm deep from top
surface of bone is 188945, and at 10mm deep
from top surface of bone is 188744. Actual
size of bone could not be possible to measure
due to uneven surface, but volume of bone
Figure 6. Figure 7. Meshing element considered for analysis is
Tetrahedron Model 6561.8927mm3. The finite element analysis is
Meshing done using Ansys software using solid 185
The bone geometry is highly complicated, elements. The ranges of insertion torque and
also the materials interacting in this analysis axial force applied are 300 Nmm to 600Nmm
are both isotropic as well as anisotropic and and 0 to 110 N respectively. The stress values
hence a 3D analysis of structure is are presented at three bone depth, namely,
recommended. Hypermsh software (refer 5mm, and 10mm level from top surface of
Figure 6) is used for mesh generation. 3D bone in Graph 1, 2, 3.
four noded tetrahedron element is chosen.
Graph No 1. Stress Variation at insertion Torque 300 Nmm
Graph No 2. Stress Variation at Insertion Torque 400 Nmm
31
Mahajan and Kadam
Graph No 3. Stress Variation at Insertion Torque 600 Nmm
Element Analysis of Bone Loading

CONCLUSIONS
Caused by No passively Fitting
The finite element analysis has been Implant-Supported Dental Restorations
conducted for the drill tool with combination Quintessence International 42(6) June
of different axial loads and Insertion torques. 2011.
The present study shows that the stress
Bruno Salles Sotto-Maior, Eduardo Passos
increases for bone depth upto 5mm, at
Rocha, Erika Oliveira de Almeida,
increasing the insertion torque and axial load.
Amilcar Chagas Freitas- Junior,
The stress is higher in the cancellous bone
Rodolfo Bruniera Anchieta Altair
i.e. at 5mm depth than in the cortical bone i.e.
Antoninha Del Bel Cury 2010
at top surface, with greater stress variation
Influence of High Insertion Torque on
among the insertion torques. The stress is
Implant Placement An Anisotropic
observed at 10mm depth increases with the
Bone Stress Analysis. Braz. Dent J.
decreasing of load and increases with the
21(6) 2010.
insertion torque. The result of the present
study demonstrated that bone depth is Nicky Bertollo and William Robert Walsh
directly proportional to stress upto 5mm from Drilling of Bone: Practically,
top and bone depth is inversely proportional Limitations and Complications
to stress for 10mm depth of bone from top Associated with Surgical Drill- Bits
surface. www.intechopen.com
Gianni Frisardi Sandro Barone Armando V
REFERENCES Razionale Alessandro Paoli Flavio
Elias C N Lima J H C Valiev R Meyers M A Frisardi Antonio Tullio Aurea Lumbau
2008 Biomedical Applications of and Giacomo Chessa 2012
Titanium and its Alloys Biological Biomechanics of the Press-Fit
Materials Science March 2008. Phenomenon in Dental Implantology:
An Image-Based Finite Element
Werner Winter Paul Steinmann Stefan Holst
Analysis Frisardi et al. Head & Face
Matthias Karl 2011 Effect of
Medicine 8(18).
Geometric Parameters on Finite
32
ICCMS2016
EFFECTS OF HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER ON MHD FLOW OF

BLOOD THROUGH AN ARTERY WITH STENOSIS HAVING
VARIABLE VISCOSITY
TRIPATHI B.* and SHARMA B. K.
Department of Mathematics, BITS Pilani.
Abstract: In this paper, the effect of heat and mass transfer on blood flow through
a stenosed artery subject to the action of external magnetic field is investigated.
Effects of viscosity variation and variable hematocrit at the arterial wall have been
duly taken care of in the study. Governing equations have been modeled by taking
blood as incompressible magneto hydrodynamic (MHD) Newtonian fluid. The
highly nonlinear momentum equations are simplified under the assumption of mild
stenosis. Homotopy analysis method (HAM) is used to solve nonlinear equations of
momentum, temperature and concentration profile. The effects of Hartmann
number, variable hematocrit parameter on velocity, temperature and concentration
have been analyzed with the help of graphs.
Keywords: Newtonian Fluid; Incompressible fluid; Stenosis; Magneto hydro
dynamical fluid (MHD); Hematocrit; Homotopy analysis method
(HAM).
INTRODUCTION under the corresponding boundary

conditions we modelfor
Today’s industrialized world blood flow
velocity, temperature and concentration
in our body through arteries pose grave
profile. For solving these nonlinear
health risks and are a major cause of
differential equations we use homotopy
mortality and morbidity. It is believed that
analysis method and plot the graph for
abnormal growth of arterial thickness is an
concentration, velocity and temperature
early process in the formation of
profile using MATLAB code.
atherosclerosis and one of the most
widespread diseases in humans. The
accumulation of substances in arteries is
known as stenosis and it changes the flow
pattern and hemodynamic conditions that
exist in the artery before catheterization.
The aim of this present paper is to study
the influence of heat and mass transfer on
blood flow when external magnetic field is
present and stenosis is narrowing of
an artery. In this paper we assume blood as Figure1 Geometry of an axially non
symmetrical stenosed artery
a incompressible Newtonian biomagnetic
fluid and stenosis as mild stenosis. So
taking care of all these assumptions and
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:bhaviiitr2013@gmail.com 33

Tripathi and Sharma
MATHEMATICAL MODEL RESULTS

We consider the cylindrical coordinate In the following figures, we present
system (r, θ, z) in such a way that 𝑢
�⃗, 𝑣⃗ and computer simulation results for the
��⃗ are the velocity component in 𝑟⃗, 𝜃⃗ and
𝑤 proposed model by using MatLabR2014a.
𝑧⃗ directions. Here we consider variable
viscosity of the blood which is represented
axially where
µ(r) = µ 0 (1+βh(r))(1)
𝑟 𝑚
where h(r)=H[1-� � ].
𝑅0
Ro is the initial radius and r is the distance

from the centre. H is the maximum
hematocrit at the center of the artery. M is
magnetic field, T is temperature and C is
Figure 2(a). Velocity variation with
concentration.
The model is given by following non- Change in height of stenosis𝛿
dimensional governing equations:
∂w
=0, (2)
∂z
∂p
= 0, (3)
∂r
∂p 1 ∂ ∂w 1
= [r ( )] + 𝑎2 [( − (𝑚 +
∂z r ∂r ∂r 𝑟
𝑚−1 ∂w 1 ∂ ∂w
1)𝑟 ) + (1 − r m ) ( )]
∂r r ∂r ∂r
1 1−𝑟 𝑚
–[(M2 + ) +𝑎2 ( )]w (4)
Z 𝑍
Figure 2(b). Velocity variation with
1 ∂ ∂θ ∂w 2 change in Magnetic field M
[r ( )] +𝐸𝑐 𝑃𝑟 � � =0(5)
r ∂r ∂r ∂r
1 1 ∂ ∂σ 1 ∂ ∂θ
[ (r ( ))] + 𝑆𝑟 [ (r ( ))] =0(6)
Sc r ∂r ∂r r ∂r ∂r
The corresponding boundary conditions

are
∂w ∂T ∂C
= 0, = 0, = 0 at r=0,
∂r ∂r ∂r
w=0,𝑇 = 0, and 𝐶 =0 at r= h(z).
where
h(z) = (1 + 𝜉𝑧)[1 − η ((z − σ)

Figure 3.Variation in shear stress at
− (z − σ)n ) ] the stenosis throat.
34
Effects of Heat and Mass Transfer on MHD Flow of Blood through an Artery with Stenosis Having
Variable Viscosity
field shear stress increases. In figure 4 it is

observed that temperature profile increases
as we increase porosity parameter. In
figure 5 it is clear that as we increase value
of Schmidt number concentration profile
increases.
REFERENCES
Liao S J1995 An approximate solution
technique not depending on small
parameters a special example
International Journal of Nonlinear
Figure 4. Variation in temperature with Mechanics 30(3) 371-380.
change in porosity parameter Z
Mekheimer Kh S EI Kot M A
2008Themicropolar fluid model for
blood flow through a tapered artery
with a stenosis. Acta MechSin 24
637-644.
Nadeem S Akbar Noreen Sher Hayat T
Hendi Awatif A 2011Influence of
heat and mass transfer on Newtonian
biomagnetic fluid of blood flow
through a tapered porous arteries with
a stenosis Journal Transport in
Porous Media 91 81-100.
Sinha A and Mishra J C 2014 MHD flow
of blood through a dually stenosed
artery effects of viscosity, variable
Figure 5. Variation in concentration hematocrit and velocity-slip The
with change in Schmidt number
Canadian Journal of Chemical
CONCLUSION Engineering 92 23-31.
The quantitative effects of the magnetic Srivastava N 2014 Analysis of flow

field M, porosity parameter Z, Schmidt characteristic of the blood flowing
number Scin nontapered arteries for through an inclined tapered porous
Newtonian fluid are observed. In figure artery with mild stenosis under the
2(a) it is observed that decreasingly when influence of an inclined magnetic
we change the height of stenosis velocity field Journal of Biophysics.
profile decreases and from figure 2(b) it is
clear that as we increase applied magnetic
field velocity profile decreases
respectively.Figure.3 shows variation of
shear stress at the stenosis wall, as we
increase the value of applied magnetic
35
ICCMS2016
A NOVEL COMPUTER MODEL FOR BONE’S ADAPTATION TO

MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT
GOYAL A. and PRASAD J.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Ropar, Rupnagar, Punjab, India.
Abstract: Mechanical environment is a key factor in bone adaptation. Computer

models of bone adaptation reported in the literature were not able to fit all the
available in-vivo experimental data on loading induced osteogenesis (i.e., new bone
formation). It may be due to the fact that the exact relationship between mechanical
environment and site specific osteogenesis has not been well understood. Most of the
models have not considered the effect of important loading parameters (such as
frequency, number of cycles/mice, and time) on new bone formation. Accordingly, in
this study, we attempt to build a computational model which incorporates in-vivo
experimental data and loading parameters. All the data used in the present study was
taken for in-vivo loading of tibia of C57Bl/6 mice. The model was trained and tested
with step-wise regression method. The model identifies the correlation between new
bone thickness and loading parameters. The model’s predictions were found close to
in-vivo experimental results. The relationship identified from the model may be used
to develop an invertible computer model to predict loading for a desired site-specific
new bone formation.
Keywords: Bone adaptation; mechanical environment; stepwise regression
model; New bone thickness.
INTRODUCTION predict the amount of new bone formation,

however, closely predicted the location of
It has been observed from various animal
new bone formation. Accordingly, this study
experiments [LaMothe and Zernicke 2004;
proposes a model to predict the location and
Srinivasan 2002] that new bone formation
the amount of new bone formation. The
may also happen at the sites of minimal strain
model includes the site specific new bone
magnitude especially near the neutral axis of
thickness and the loading parameters as
bending in long bones. In these cases most of
inputs. Regression model has been developed
the computer models failed to predict the
to identify correlation between the site
location of new bone formation as they have
specific new bone thickness and the loading
considered that osteogeneses may occur only
parameters. Models predictions were found in
at the sites of elevated normal strain. A few
accordance to experimental studies.
computational studies have attempted to
explain such anomalies [Tiwari and Prasad MATERIALS AND METHOD
2012] however the explanation were limited
to single experiment. In addition, these Data Collection
studies have not considered the effect of
The experimental data for the model were
loading parameters (load time, rest time,
loading frequency, age etc) on new bone extracted from the studies of Lynch (2011);
formation. As a result, these models failed to Sakai (2011); Sugiyama (2009); Weatherholt
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: jprasad@iitrpr.ac.in 36

Goyal and Prasad
(2013), etc. In these studies, murine tibiae of RESULTS

C57Bl/6 mice were loaded in cantilever We have compared the model’s prediction
bending, axial compression, and four point with the experimental results of in-vivo
and three point bending. The bone formation studies where mouse tibiae were loaded in
was noticed at mid-diaphysis. Hence the cantilever bending and axial loading
reported histological cross-section were taken separately. It can be observed from figure 1
from these studies and has been divided in 36 that the model closely predicts the site
equal sectors with radial lines (each 10° specific new bone formation at endocortical
apart) passing through centroid. These lines and periosteal surfaces. However, the
intersect the periosteal and endocortical coefficients of parameters used in modeling
surface at 36 circumferential points. The equation to predict periosteal new bone
scaled new bone thickness and radial distance formation in cantilever loading case has been
from the centroid have been computed at presented in table 1. New bone thickness can
these points and have been taken as inputs in be measured from table 1 using Eq.1. Other
the model. Applied loads and moments in the equations will be provided in the full length
experiment were resolved in x-y-z direction. paper.
These forces and moments along with
frequency, loading time, cycles, and age were 
j[1,78]
Parameterj  Coefficient j   (1)
also included as inputs.
Modeling DISCUSSION
The entire data was divided in two sets This model not only predicts the location but
according to cantilever bending and axial also the amount of new bone formation. The
compression models for periosteal and equations in the model are quadratic in nature
endocortical surfaces. Various regression thus allows easy inversion which will help in
techniques such as Least Square Error development of a model to predict
method, Stepwise regression, Elastic Net and mechanical environment when a site specific
LASSO were used. Stepwise regression was
new bone formation is desired.
found suitable to closely fit the experimental
data. This regression analysis provides an
empirical relation to estimate the site specific
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
new bone thickness ( t pi ) as a function of The authors acknowledge Department of
forces in x-y-z direction ( Fx , Fy , Fz ) ,moments Science and Technology for research
fellowship. We also thank Abhishek Tiwari,
in x-y direction ( M x , M y ) ,sine and cosine of
PhD Research Scholar, IIT Ropar for his help
angles (Si , Ci ) , age of mice ( Age) , cycle in writing the manuscript.
load time (CLT ) , cycle rest time (CRT ) ,
frequency of loading excluding rest time ( F ) REFERENCES
, total cycles in experiment (TCE ) , and net LaMothe JM and Zernicke RF 2004 Rest
loading time of experiment ( NLTE ) where I inserted combined with high frequency
ϵ [1,36]. Coefficients of these parameters in loading enhances osteogenesis J. of
the equation are given in table 1. Applied Physiology 96 1788-1793.
Lynch M E Main R P Xu Q Schmicker T L
The model has been used to predict the site Schaffler M B Wright T MMeulen
specific new bone thickness for different MCH 2011 Tibial compression is
loading cases to test the accuracy. anabolic in the adult mouse skeleton
37
A Novel Computer Model for Bone’s Adaptation to Mechanical Environment
despite reduced responsiveness with

aging Bone 49 439–446. (a)
Sakai DKii I Nakagawa K Matsumoto H N
Takahashi M Yoshida S Hosoya T
Takakuda K Kudo 2011 A remodeling
of actin cytoskeleton in mouse
periosteal cells under mechanical
loading induces periosteal cell
proliferation during bone formation
PLOS One 6 1-11.
Srinivasan S Weimer D A Agans S C Bain
SD Gross TS 2002 Low magnitude
mechanical loading becomes osteogenic
when rest is inserted between each
loading cycle ASBMR 17 1613-1620.
Sugiyama T Price J S Lanyon LE 2009 (b)
Functional adaptation to mechanical
loading in both cortical and cancellous
bone is controlled locally and is
confined to the loaded bones Bone 46
314–321.
Tiwari AK and Prasad J 2012 Investigating
role of shear strain in bone adaptation
International Conference on Design of
Biomaterials (BIND-12) December
2012 IISC Banglore.
WeatherholtAM Fuchs RK Warden SJ 2013
Cortical and trabecular bone adaptation
to incremental load magnitudes using
the mouse tibial axial compression Figure 1. Blue and red curves
loading model Bone 52 372–379. represent bone surfaces before and after
loading in order. Calculated bone
thickness at various locations are shown
by black *. (a) Mid section tibia with
cantilever bending (Srinivasan et al
2002). (b) Mid section tibia with axial
compression loading (Weatherholt et al
2013).
38
Goyal and Prasad
Table 1: Coefficients of various parameters responsible to predict new bone formation thickness at various locations
of mid section tibia of C57BLJ6 mice in case of cantilever bending at periosteal  =-22.8
Para. (1-6) Fx Mx Si Ci R pi 1/ Age
Coeff. (1-6) 209355 20217 -4.5 9.3 0.6 -88
Para. (7-12) CRT F TCE NLTE M xCi M y Ci
Coeff. (7-12) 0.7 -0.34 0.011 -0.001 -338109 -411995
Para. (13-18) Si Ci Si Rpi Ci Rpi Fx M y Ci M x M y Ci M x Si Ci
Coeff. (13-18) -220 0.05 0.6 1426600 137739 18251
Para. (19-24) M y Si Ci M y Ci Rpi Si Ci Rpi Fx Rpi Fx M y Si Ci M xCRT
Coeff. (19-24) 22190 -0.2 -9 0.4 66 0.04
Para. (25-30) Si / Age Si CRT Si NLTE C Rpi i
2
FxC Rpi i
2
Rpi / Age
Coeff. (25-30) 17 0.1 -0.0003 4.7 -14.5 1.2
Para. (31-36) Rpi F Si Ci / Age Rpi Ci / Age Fx Rpi Ci / Age M x SiCi / Age Rpi Si Ci / Age
Coeff. (31-36) 0.005 889 -4 11 291 4
Para. (37-42) CRTSi Ci CRTCi Rpi CRTSi Ci Rpi FM x Si Ci FM y Ci Rpi TCESi Ci
Coeff. (37-42) 37 0.003 0.3 0.1 -0.002 0.9
Para. (43-48) TCESi Ci Rpi NLTEM xCi NLTESi Ci NLTECi Rpi NLTEFx M y Ci NLTEFxCi Rpi
Coeff. (43-48) 0.006 -0.0025 -0.04 -0.00015 -0.007 0.0003
Para. (49-54) NLTEM x SiCi NLTESi Ci Rpi M y Si C i
2
M y SiCi Rpi M x M C 2
y i
2
Si2Ci Rpi
Coeff. (49-54) 0.008 -0.0007 -33 1.3 5 -0.09
Para. (55-60)
Si C Rpi
i
2
M x M y Si C i
2
M y S C i
2
i
2
S C Rpi
i
2
i
2
Si Ci R 2
pi
M x M y SiCi Rpi
Coeff. (55-60) 1.3 -4.4 12 -0.6 0.03 0.05
Para. (61-66)
M y S Ci Rpi
i
2
M y Si Ci R 2
pi S Ci R
i
2 2
pi M x M y C Rpi i
2
M y Si C Rpi i
2
M y Ci2 Rp2i
Coeff. (61-66) -0.008 -0.005 0.0014 -0.11 0.3 0.0115
Para. (67-72)
Si C R i
2 2
pi M x M Si C
2
y i
2
M SiC Rpi
2
y i
2
M y S C R i
2
i
2 2
pi M y Si C R i
2 2
pi Ci2
Coeff. (67-72) -0.02 -0.1 -0.08 -0.13 0.002 -136
Para. (73-78)
( M y Ci ) 2
( Si Rpi ) 2
(Ci Rpi ) 2
(M x M y Ci ) 2
(M y Ci Rpi ) 2
(SiCi Rpi )2
Coeff. (73-78) 26 -0.005 -0.04 0.3 -0.001 0.006
39
ICCMS2016
FABRIC BASED CHARACTERIZATION OF MICROSTRUCTURAL

ANISOTROPY OF TRABECULAR BONE
SINGH A. K.*, SRIVASTAVA P. K.1 and MAHAJAN P.2
1
Applied Mechanics Department, IIT Delhi, New Delhi, India
2
Snow & Avalanche Study Establishment, Chandigarh, India
Abstract: Relationship between microstructure and anisotropic elastic properties of snow

have been investigated in this study. Morphology based Zysset-Curnier elasticity model is
used to compute the elasticity tensor of all bone samples. Zysset-Curnier elasticity model
has been used to compute the elasticity tensor for all bone samples. Micro-finite element
(µFE) models of the bone samples was built from the tomographic data to compute the FE
based orthotropic stiffness and compliance tensor of the bone samples. Homogenization
was done over these µFE models to evaluate the effective properties of each bone sample.
Representative volume element size of the samples is predicted using these effective
properties. At last morphology based stiffness and compliance matrix components are
compared with the stiffness and compliance matrix components obtained from the µFE
analysis. It has been found that morphology (trabeculae volume fraction and fabric tensor)
based stiffness and compliance components are comparable with the µFEA based
compliance and stiffness matrix. Therefore anisotropic elastic behaviour of trabecular bone
can be determined by considering the morphology of the microstructure.
Keywords: Trabecular Bone; Anisotropy; Morphology; Homogenization; RVE
INTRODUCTION For a direction dependent microstructure,

directional quantities are required for the
Trabecular bone is a matrix of trabeculae characterization of the microstructure and
where trabeculae are randomly oriented this could be done by the fabric tensor
which is responsible for the structural [Cowin, 1985], where fabric tensor is the
anisotropy. Pores in the trabecular bone measure of local architectural anisotropy in a
microstructure are filled with marrow which material [Cowin, 1985; Odgaard et al., 1997].
is a fluid like material. Solid part (trabeculae) A morphology based Compliance tensor (E)
is deformable and respond to load and relation was given by Zysset et al., (1998)
therefore modelling is done considering the that is the fabric (Mi) and volume fraction (ρ)
trabeculae matrix only (marrow excluded). dependent (Eq. (1)).
To predict the anisotropic behaviour of a 3
1
material one can perform the experiments in ( ,M )=  Mi  Mi 
i 1  0  k mi2l
different directions. But trabecular bone is a 3
0
fragile material and performing experiments 
i  j 1  0  mi m j
k l l
(M i  M j  M j  M i ) (1)
especially under multi-axial loading is very )
difficult and time consuming. Another 3
1
alternative is to use the image based finite
  2G 
i  j 1
k l l
mi m j
(M i  M j  M j  M i )
0
element modelling anisotropic behaviour can
be predicted for such materials.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anuragkrsingh.etw@gmail.com 40

Singh et al.
In Eq. 1, ε0, ν0 μ0, k and l are Zysset-Curnier QUANT3D [Ketchman and Ryan, 2004].
(ZC) model constants, ρ is the volume These values are put in Eq. 1 to compute the
fraction and mi is the eigenvalues of the compliance matrix of all samples. A
fabric tensor. ZC constant can be evaluated comparison for stiffness components
using the linear regression analysis over a obtained from FE and ZC model is shown in
number of sample data. figure 1.
The main aim of this paper is to present the Bounds for each sample have been evaluated
two different methods for finding out the using the anisotropic composite materials
anisotropic elastic behaviour of trabecular bounds relations [Cowin et al., 1999; Yoon et
bone. Both the methods are applicable to any al., 2002] to compute the effective properties
random oriented porous media (e.g. snow). (isotropic effective Young’s moduli and
First method is finite element method based isotropic effective Poisson’s ratio) of each
and is commonly used to find anisotropic sample. RVE size for sample 1185 and sub-
elastic behaviour of porous materials. samples (1185_1 to 1185_8) have been
Whereas the second method is Zysset- predicted considering isotropic effective
Curnier model based which is microstructure Young’s moduli (Eeff) and isotropic effective
based. Poisson’s ratio (νeff) as a deciding parameter.
Table 1. µ-CT image details of five
SAMPLE DETAILS AND FEA
different trabecular bone samples.
FE simulation on image based finite element Sample Resolution Cubic size Cube side
models built from μ-CT images is carried out (µm) (pixels) length
on 29 trabecular bone samples. These 29 (mm)
samples are extracted from 5 samples out of 1003 59.9 301 16.77
which three are bigger samples (1003, 1185 1224 30.0 301 8.38
and 1289) that are partitioned into eight parts 1185 59.9 301 16.77
making the physical dimension equivalent to 1122 30.0 301 8.38
other two samples (1122 and 1224) making a 1289 59.9 301 16.77
total 29 samples (8.38 mm). Micro-CT details Table 2. ZC model constant
of 5 samples is shown in table 1.
ZC parameters
Compliance matrix for each sample is Sample
ε0 ν0 µ0 k l
computed using the homogenization All 0.85 0.18 0.29 2.20 -0.91
technique. Periodicity mixed uniform
boundary condition [Pahr and Zysset, 2008]
are imposed on all μFE models for the
computation of compliance tensor. The
Young’s modulus and Poisson’s ratio of
trabeculae are assumed to be 1 GPa and 0.22
respectively.
RESULT AND DISCUSSION
The components of compliance matrix are

used to evaluate the ZC model constant using
the Turner-Cowin log transformation model
relation [Turner et al., 1987] (A1). ZC model Figure 1. Comparison of ZC and FE
constant are tabulated in table 2. stiffness components
Fabric tensor and volume fraction These properties are evaluated for concentric
measurement for all samples are done in cubic volume of increasing size. Isotropic
41
Fabric Based Characterization of Microstructural Anisotropy of Trabecular Bone
effective property vs. volume (%) is drawn as has the knowledge of microstructural
shown in figure 2 and figure 3 to predict the parameters.
correct RVE size. From figure 2 effective RVE size is within the range as given in
property are getting converge at 40% of the previous literature (3-5 mm of side length)
cubic volume size. for trabecular bone.
Appendix I
Turner-Cowin model with log transformation,

1987
Figure 2. Modulus based RVE analysis
A1
Figure 3. Poisson’s ratio based RVE

analysis
Similarly in figure 3 effective property
converges at 60% of the cubic volume size Zysset-Curnier compliance matrix
(under some tolerance).Therefore RVE size
can be can be taken as the 60% of the cubic
volume (5.03 mm3) and mechanical response
of the overall structure can be determine by
performing numerical simulation on this
RVE. A2
CONCLUSION
ZC model stiffness components are
comparable with the FE based stiffness
components with a coefficient of
determination 0.7792. ZC model is
morphology based and therefore this REFFERENCE
approach can well predict the anisotropy of a
porous material. This approach can be Cowin Stephen C 1985 The relationship
applied to any porous random media, if one between the elasticity tensor and the
42
Singh et al.
fabric tensor Mechanics of Materials modeling in mechanobiology 7(6) 463-

4(2) 137-147. 476.
Cowin S C G Yang and M M Mehrabadi Turner Charles H and Stephen C Cowin 1987
1999 Bounds on the effective Dependence of elastic constants of an
anisotropic elastic constants Journal of anisotropic porous material upon
elasticity 57(1) 1-24. porosity and fabric Journal of materials
Ketcham R A and T M Ryan 2004 science 22(9) 3178-3184.
Quantification and visualization of Zysset Philippe K 2003 A review of
anisotropy in trabecular bone Journal of morphology–elasticity relationships in
Microscopy 213(2) 158-171. human trabecular bone: theories and
Odgaard Anders et al 1997 Fabric and elastic experiments Journal of biomechanics
principal directions of cancellous bone 36(10) 1469-1485.
are closely related Journal of Yoon Y J G Yang and S C Cowin 2002
biomechanics 30(5) 487-495. Estimation of the effective transversely
Pahr Dieter H and Philippe K Zysset 2008 isotropic elastic constants of a material
Influence of boundary conditions on from known values of the material's
computed apparent elastic properties of orthotropic elastic constants
cancellous bone Biomechanics and Biomechanics and modelling in
mechanobiology 1(1) 83-93.
43
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF INTERNAL FIXATION PLATES

TANWEER ALAM1*, BABU M. N.2 and PAWAN KUMAR2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, Jharkhand, India
2
Department of Mining Machinery Engineering, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, Jharkhand, India
Abstract: In the present work an analysis has been made on internal fixation plates.
For analysis purpose, bone, screws and metal plates are chosen. Finite Element
analysis is made using ANSYS software. Parametric and validation models are
considered and their results are compared. The models discussed reveals insight into
the nature of applied fixation plates. Axial compressive loading are stable in nature
but may cause stress shielding in bones and hence resulted in bone loss, screw tear
and fixation failure. Parametric study, gives the possibility to reduce the problem by
decreasing the plate thickness and angle.
Keywords: Internal Fixation; Bone; Cantilever; Stress
INTRODUCTION
METHODOLOGY
Internal fixation is a process that involves Present study is done with finite element
surgical implementation of implants for the software ANSYS. Analysis is done on stress
purpose of repairing a bone. Internal fixators shielding of two bone plate models, one is
include bone, screws and metal plates. Metal parametric model and other one is validation
plates for internal fixation of bones are being
model. Validation model deals with a range
used for more than 100 years. Although
of static loading conditions on a three
initial shortcomings such as corrosion and
dimensional model of a self-compressing
insufficient strength have been overcome,
stainless steel plate applied to an Plexiglas
more recent designs have not solved all
tube which represents of bone post-union.
problems. It is the goal of researcher to Subsequent parametric models involve the
develop a plate that accelerates fracture changes in plate thickness, position of
healing while not interfering with bone
screws, and angle of coverage of plate over
physiology [Rouhi G., 2006].
the bone surface.
The introduction of rigid plates had by far the
Initial observations reveal that with the
greatest impact on plate fixation of fractures.
increase in thickness of plate and the angle of
It has been suggested scientifically that bone
coverage of plate over the bone surface
loss is mainly caused by stress shielding but
reduces the stresses that develop on the
not with the interference with the cortical
underlying bone. Comparison is made
perfusion secondary to bone plate contact. In
between two models one is the ideal case and
internal fixation of bone the bone plates are
the other represents a practical situation i.e.
fastened to the bone on its tensile surface.
fixed bone model and control bone model.
The main problem in the internal fixation of
The fixed bone model is modelled as the
bone is the difference in stiffness of plate and
plate is rigidly fixed to the surface of the
bone which causes alteration in normal
bone this result in the elimination of
loading conditions of the bone [1985-2006].
separation of plate and the bone. This also
allows the transfer of normal and shear
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tanweer.amu@gmail.com 44

Alam et al.
stresses from the plate to the bone and vice r0 is the distance from neutral axis when a
versa. Under different loading conditions the force F is applied Practically the bone is not
Von Mises stresses are observed in each case rigidly fixed to the surface of the bone but
as it is one of main failure criteria in any instead it is fixed with screws. A model
material [Cheal et al. 1983]. Three types of representing this situation is made in and is
loading conditions are used for the fixed plate being analyzed. The stainless steel plate is
model; fixed to the bone surface with four titanium
1. The axial stress which acts along the axis screws. There is also change in the
of the bone. parameters the thickness of the plate is
changed from 3 to 4.5 mm and the angle of
2. The bending moment that place in the coverage is also changed from 60 to 90
first case. degrees. A four-point bending moment
3. Eccentric force which is similar to the produces high value of stress in the model, as
axial force but the axial of loading is not symmetry exists in the model only one-half
along the central axis of the bone. of the models are used for the analysis.
MODELING AND VALIDATION

Bending takes place when a force is applied
on the bone on its top surface i.e.
perpendicular to the axis of bone if one side
of the bone is fixed it simply behaves as a
cantilever beam. Taking hand as an example
axial loading occurs when an effort is made Figure 1 Showing three different loading
to push things, same is the case with condition; F1 is axial compressive load,
eccentric loading but the axial varies from F2 is eccentric and M represents the
that of axial loading. A self-compressing moment
316L stainless steel plate and a Plexiglas
tube, symbolizing the bone, is modeled using RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
ANSYS. The material properties used in this Theoretical and validation results are similar
study are as follows: Plexiglas tube: E = 3.1 as eccentrically axial loading application
GPa, and ν = 0.2, Plate: E = 196 GPa, and ν = caused the bending of plated-bone
0.3. The use of Plexiglas, results in a construction. There is a discrepancy between
tendency for higher bending and lower axial the values obtained from that of finite
rigidities, and is most comparable to the element method and that of composite beam
canine femur. As there is symmetry in the theory.
model therefore only one-fourth of the model
is used to analyze as it reduces the solution
time. The axial load applied is 342 N,
bending moment applied is 9.34 Nm and the
eccentric load applied is 342 N. The stresses
in the bone from a distance from the neutral
axis is given by Perren S M (2002).
PE B E B Mt B
B    Figure 2 (a)Model developed for analysis
E A AB  EP A P E B I B  E P I P
purpose and (b) Equivalent stress due to
(1)
axial compressive load
M  F (r0  y) This is due to the fact that there is a rigid

(2) contact between the plate and the bone but as
for composite beam theory it can only find
45
Analysis of Internal Fixation Plates
the resultant stress at the cross section of the CONCLUSION

Centre for externally applied axial load and
From above analysis, we can conclude the
bending moments. For the determination of
following:
 Theoretical and validation results are
similar as eccentrically axial loading
application caused the bending of plated-
bone construction.
 Since the relative motion between the
bone and plate is not considered hence
theoretical and parametric results have
differences in values.
 For all loading conditions, rigidly fixed
Figure 3 (a) Equivalent stress due to plate application to a fractured bone
eccentric loading and (b) Equivalent reduces the levels of bone strain and
stress due to bending
longitudinal stresses immediately below
the plate.
REFERENCES
Cheal E J Hayes W C White A A 1985. Stress
analysis of a compression plate
fixation system and its effects on
long bone remodelling Journal of
Biomechanics 18(2) 141-150
Cheal E J Hayes W C White A A Perren S M
Figure 4 Effect of applied bending 1983. Stress analysis of a simplified
moment (a) Equivalent strain distribution compression plate fixation system for
and (b) Equivalent Stress distribution fractured bones Computers and
Structures 17(5/6) 845-855
stresses due to plate and screw tensions
requires complex models such a model is Perren S M 2002. Review Article: Evolution
designed in ANSYS to analyze the stresses. of the internal fixation of long bone
fractures Journal of Bone and Joint
The application of axial stress results in Surgery 84-B(8) 1093-1100
bending moment of the composite fixed bone Rouhi G 2006. Theoretical aspects of bone
model and its magnitude is maximum at the remodelling and resorption processes:
fracture plane. It was observed that the PhD Thesis, University of Calgary,
application of eccentric axial stress results in
2006.
increase of equivalent stress at the outer edge
of bone contact region and its value is not
significant if a bending moment is applied.
However, all the three loading conditions
result in the increased value of stresses at the
fracture site.
46
ICCMS2016
A STUDY ON ACCIDENTAL INJURY & HUMAN BIOMECHANICS IN

BANGLADESH: AN APPROACH TO REDUCE ACCIDENTAL INJURY &
INCREASE HEALTH SAFETY
KHAN R. R. and ZAHIN M. M.
IUT-OIC,Gazipur, Boardbazar, Bangladesh
Abstract: Bangladesh has a very high road accident fatality rate with official figures
indicating more than 60 deaths per 10,000 motor vehicles. Everyday around eight
persons die in road accidents. The actual rate of fatality is likely to be even higher. As
a result, it is a matter of concern to deal with the after effects of accidents. Without
understanding the biomechanics of a human body that falls victim to an accident, it’s
difficult to take proper actions to mitigate the effect. This paper focuses on the
accidental injury & Biomechanics analysis with a view to increase health safety.
Keywords: Accident; Biomechanics; Fatality.
INTRODUCTION
The problems related to the accident
reporting system and the data derived from it,
as reported by Quium (1995), have not been
resolved and official statistics are prone to
under reporting. The number of accidents has
increased by 43% between 1982 and 2000,
while the number of fatalities has increased
by around 400% within the same period
[Louis Burger, 2005]. In Dhaka City, 15 to Figure 1. Stress Strain curve of a human
20% of accidents involve minibuses, cars or bone
buses. In Bangladesh as a whole, buses and
trucks are each involved in more than 20% of THE MECHANISM OF WHIPLASH
accidents [Maniruzzaman and Raktim Mitra] INJURIES
So it’s important to understand the after In a normal human’s neck, the cervical spine
effects and biomechanics of a human body has a lordotic shape [Galasko et al., 1993] In
during an accident. Necessary actions can be rear-end collisions, the passenger seat moves
taken by understanding the phenomena. towards the impact, and the back part of the
seat applies force to the body of the
ACCIDENT AND BIOMECHANICS
passenger. As the seat pushes the result of
When an accident occurs & a person falls to this force the lower part of the neck moves in
victim, shockwaves occur in the body & the same direction. At the moment of the
cause stress and strain in the organ. If the impact, the lordotic shape of the neck
type & size of stress exceed the strength of disappears, and the cervical spine straightens
the tissue, the injury occurs. As the body of the passenger continues to be
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: 47

Khan and Zahin
pushed, the head moves backwards, and the guideline for Roads transport authority to
extension starts. establish road safety in Bangladesh
Figure 2. The phases of the mechanism

of whiplash injury: Phase1: Reaction
Phase2: Extension
METHODOLOGY Figure 3. Biomechanics Simulation

 Important Accident data is to be
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ROAD
collected including acceleration, force &
SAFETY
distortion that occurs during an accident.
 Vertical horizontal & longitude data has  Using Smart Caps to avoid accident
to be used for computational modelling,  Energy absorbing infrastructure has to be
musculoskeletal models and dynamic built in important roads.
simulations of movement using Kinovia  Emergency efficient brake system has to
& Opensim software. be ensured during vehicle manufacture
 Biofedality (characteristics of dynamics process
close to human being) can be understood
through this. CONCLUSION
 Virtual Crash 3 software has to be used Bangladesh is a country which is accident-
for simulation purpose. prone and day by day the death toll is
 Toyota Sedan car series models will be increasing for it. The earlier the
used for analysing the accident situations biomechanics can be understood properly, the
for different conditions. quicker the proper steps to reduce injury
effects after accident can be taken.
 All the values will be selected based on
the condition & guideline by BRTA, REFERENCES
Bangladesh standard.
Galasko C S B Murray P M Pitcher M
ANALYSIS & RESULT Chambers H Mansfield S Madden M
Jordon C Kinsella A Hodson M 1993
 The simulation result will indicate the Neck sprains after road traffic accidents:
after effects of an accident that a person A modern epidemic. Injury 24(3) 155-
falls to a victim. 157
 The result would be used for establishing
Louis Burger 2005 Group-BCL. Strategic
energy consuming wall in risky roads in
Transport Plan. Dhaka Transport
Bangladesh.
Coordination Board, Ministry of
 The result would also help to set up a
48
A Study on Accidental Injury & Human Biomechanics in Bangladesh: An Approach to Reduce Accidental
Injury & Increase Health Safety
Communications, Government of Bangladesh University of Engineering

Bangladesh. (2005). (draft). and Technology, Bangladesh.
Maniruzzaman K M and Raktim Mitra Road Quium A S M A 1995 Road Accidents in
accidents in Bangladesh Department of Bangladesh. IATSS RESEARCH 19 Turk
Urban and Regional Planning, Neurosurg 2014 24(4) 466-470.
49
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL AND ANALYTICAL MODELLING OF REINFORCED

CONCRETE CIRCULAR COLUMNS UNDER TORSION
MONDAL A., GHOSH T., GANGAN A. and SURIYA PRAKASH S.*
Dept. of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Hyderabad, India.
Abstract: This paper compares the efficiency of tension stiffened softened truss
model (TS-STM) and a nonlinear finite element (FE) model to predict the behaviour
of reinforced concrete (RC) circular columns under torsional loading. Predictions of
the models are calibrated with test data on two circular columns taken from literature.
Overall torque – twist behaviour and average strain in the transverse reinforcements
were parameters for comparison. It is observed that both the models predicted the
overall torsional behaviour of the test specimens reasonably well. However, the peak
twist and post peak behaviour were better captured by the TS-STM. Average strain in
transverse reinforcements predicted by the TS-STM was also closer to the measured
values compared to the FE predictions. On the whole, it can be concluded that, TS-
STM performs better than nonlinear FE model in capturing the overall response of
circular RC columns subjected to torsional loading.
Keywords: Circular RC columns; Torsion; Nonlinear finite element analysis;
Softened truss model.
INTRODUCTION experimental data on local as well as global

behaviour of two circular columns tested in
Reinforced concrete bridge columns are
the University of Missouri under torsional
subjected to torsional loading during seismic
loading. Overall torque – twist behaviour and
vibration due to various reasons. Neglecting
strain in the transverse reinforcements
this torsional moment in the design process
predicted by the models were compared with
may lead to sudden catastrophic failure of the
experimental data. It is observed that both the
entire bridge structure. So, it is of primary
models predicted the overall torsional
importance to accurately predict the torsional
behaviour of the test specimens reasonably
strength of the bridge columns. However,
well. However, the peak twist and post peak
very few studies in the past focused on the
behaviour were better captured by the TS-
understanding of torsional behaviour of RC
STM. Average strain in transverse
members from analytical or FE perspective.
reinforcement predicted by the TS-STM was
This study aims at filling this knowledge gap
also closer to the measured values compared
existing in this important area of research by
to the FE predictions. On the whole, it can be
presenting a comparative study on the
concluded that, TS-STM performs better than
efficiency of TS-STM and nonlinear FE
nonlinear FE model in capturing the overall
approach in predicting the overall torsional
response of circular RC columns subjected to
response of circular RC columns. Predictions
torsional loading.
of the models were calibrated with
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail suriyap@iith.ac.in 50

Mondal et.al.
EXPERIMENTAL PROGRAM concrete after cracking. However, Mondal

and Prakash (2015) showed that tension
Experimental data of two circular columns
stiffening significantly influence the
(H/D(3)-T/M()-1.32% and H/D(6)-T/M()-
behaviour of concrete under torsion and
0.73%)(Figure. 1) tested at University of
proposed tension stiffened (TS) STM. The
Missouri (Prakash, 2009) was used in this
same TS-STM is used in this study for
study for validation of the developed model.
analytical calculations. It adopts a
Cyclic torsional loading was generated in the
displacement controlled iterative technique to
tested specimen by controlling two horizontal
calculate torque – twist behaviour of RC
servo-controlled hydraulic actuators. The
members.
axial compressive load was applied by a
hydraulic jack on top of the load stubs. BACKGROUND ON NONLINEAR
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL
A full scale nonlinear finite element model
was developed in this study using
commercial finite element code ABAQUS.
Damaged plasticity approach [Jankowiak and
Lodygowski, 2005; SIMULIA, 2011] was
used as a material model for concrete. Elastic
– perfectly plastic material model for steel
reinforcement. Perfect bonding was assumed
in the steel – concrete interface. Bond
behaviour (slip) was approximately modelled
Figure. 1 Cross section of tested by specifying tension stiffening relationship
specimens of concrete. Explicit integration scheme was
adopted owing to its numerical stability and
BACKGROUND ON SOFTENED robustness in convergence [Zimmermann,
TRUSS MODEL 2001]. The bottom of the columns was fixed
and a monotonic time dependent rotation was
Softened truss model (STM) was developed applied on the top in addition to a fixed axial
in the University of Huston [Hsu, 1968] in compression. Concrete was modelled by
order to estimate the torsional response of three dimensional brick elements (C3D8R)
reinforced concrete (RC) members. The and reinforcing bars were modelled by linear
model assumes that, an RC member under truss (T3D2) elements.
torsional loading behaves as a thin tube with
an effective thickness ( t d ) which is known as RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
the thickness of shear flow zone. The thin Overall Torque – Twist Behaviour
tube is an assembly of membrane elements
Overall torque – twist behaviour of the tested
which are subjected to bi-directional state of
columns were predicted by the developed FE
stress. The STM is formulated based on three
model and TS-STM and were compared with
basics tenets of mechanics, i.e. equilibrium
experimental data as shown in Figure. 2. It
equations, compatibility equations and
can be observed that, predictions of both the
constitutive laws. Original STM was
models are more or less close to observed
developed by ignoring the tensile capacity of
behaviour. However, Peak twist and post
51
Numerical and Analytical Modelling of Reinforced Concrete Circular Columns under Torsion
peak behaviour are more accurately captured

by the TS-STM compared to the proposed FE
model.
STRAIN IN REINFORCEMENT
Strain in the transverse reinforcement of
specimen H/D(3)-T/M()-1.32% measured
during experiment is compared with
predicted values as shown in Figure. 3. It was
observed that, TS-STM predicted strain
values are closer to the experimental data
compared to FE predictions.
Figure.3 Strain in transverse
reinforcement
CONCLUSIONS
The FE model developed in this study
efficiently predicts overall torsional response
reinforced concrete circular columns
including the strain in reinforcement.
However, TS-STM was found to outperform
the proposed FE model in regards to accuracy
of prediction. Peak twist and post peak
torsional response was better captured by the
a) H/D(3)-T/M()-1.32% TS-STM. Besides, local behaviour like strain
in transverse reinforcement predicted by TS-
STM showed better correlation with
measured values compared to FE predictions.
On the whole, it may be inferred from this
study that, TS-STM is relatively more
accurate than the proposed FE model in
predicting overall torsional response RC
circular columns.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This analytical work is carried out as part of
the project funded by SERB, Department of
b) H/D(6)-T/M()-0.73%) Science and Technology, India. Their
financial support is gratefully acknowledged.
Figure.2.Overall torque - twist
Experimental data used in this study was
behaviour
carried out as a part of a project funded by
NEES-NSF-NEESR, USA, the National
University Transportation Centre, and the
Intelligent Systems Centre of Missouri S&T,
52
Mondal et.al.
USA. Their financial support during the PhD Mondal T G and Prakash S S 2015 Effect of
work of second author is also gratefully Tension Stiffening on the Behavior of
acknowledged. Reinforced Concrete Circular Columns
under Torsion Engineering Structures
REFERENCES Journal Elsevier 92 186-195.
Abaqus Analysis User's Manual 6.11 Prakash S S 2009 Seismic Behavior of RC
Dassault Systèmes Simulia Corporation, Circular Columns under Combined
Providence RI USA. Loading Including Torsion PhD Thesis
Department of Civil Engineering
Hsu T T C 1968 Torsion of Structural Missouri University of Science and
Concrete - Behavior of Reinforced Technology Missouri USA.
Concrete Rectangular Members
Torsion of Structural Concrete SP-18 Zimmermann S 2001 Finite Elemente und
American Concrete Institute Detroit MI. ihreAnwendung auf physikalisch und
geometrischnichtlineareProbleme
Jankowiak T and Lodygowski T 2005 Report TUE-BCO 01. 05. Technische
Identification of Parameters of Universitat Eindhoven Niederlande.
Concrete Damage Plasticity
Constitutive Model Foundations of
Civil and Environmental Engineering 6.
53
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF SPHERICAL DOME WITH OPENINGS USING FINITE

ELEMENT METHOD
KHAN S1., BAMBOLE A. N.1 and MURGUDKAR H. C.2
1
Veermata Jeejabai Technical Institute, Mumbai, India
2
Padmabhooshan Vasantdada Patil Institute of Technology (PVPIT), Budhgaon, Sangli, India
Abstract: Dome structures are widely used in the field of construction technology
such as nuclear reactors, pressure vehicles, space vehicles, roofs of industrial
buildings, etc. Domestic applications includes domes in mosques, auditorium, igloos,
etc. The dome structure require certain number of openings which are essential for
services like maintenance, ventilation etc. The main aim of this study is to perform
finite element analysis of Spherical Dome with openings under static loading which
result from the self-weight of dome and a concentrated load at the crown to obtain the
most economical size of opening that can be provided at different locations and to
obtain the optimum location (in terms of angle with horizontal) at which an opening
of a particular size can be provided. Equations have been developed for most
economical aspect ratio and optimum angle at which openings should be provided for
various cases of Spherical Dome with 2/4/6 number of openings. Variations in
maximum stress intensity produced in the dome due to increase in aspect ratio and
increase in angle of opening have been shown.
Keywords: Spherical dome; most economical aspect ratio; Optimum location of
openings; Maximum stress intensity; Maximum stress zones;
ANSYS.
INTRODUCTION water tanks and commented on its optimum

Dome can be defined as a thin shell generated design. Hani Aziz Ameen (2011) performed
by the revolution of a regular curve about one the Finite Element Analysis of Large
of its axes. The shape of the dome is Diameter Concrete Spherical Shell Domes.
governed by the type of the curve and the Authors investigated the behaviour and
direction of the axis of revolution. In case of strength of modern thin spherical shell domes
Spherical Dome, the curve is circular in of large diameter (50-100 m) made of
shape. The wide applications of domes in concrete with and without ribs (5-10 cm
construction technology can be credited thick). Present study is focused on the effect
primarily due to their high strength capacity of the openings in Spherical dome under
to resist loads at low cost, aesthetic view, static loading. An attempt is made to develop
architectural shape. There were many equation for the most economical aspect ratio
investigations carried out to assess suitability and the angle of opening. General purpose
of Spherical domes. Steven James Hoggan Finite Element Package Ansys version 12.1 is
(1982) studied the feasibility of using used for the analysis.
reinforced concrete in the design of spherical
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: hrishimurgudkar@gmail.com 54

Khan et al.
OBJECTIVE OF STUDY Table 1. Maximum stress intensities - 4

openings
The Spherical dome once constructed,
requires a certain number of openings. These Maximum stress intensity (N/mm2)
are essential for the various services like Aspect Ratio 30⁰ 40⁰ 45⁰ 50⁰ 60⁰
ventilation, access etc. Primary objective of
0.02 3.50 3.49 3.48 3.48 3.47
this study is to carry out a study on the effect
0.03 3.50 3.49 3.48 3.48 3.47
of these openings subjected to its variation in
0.04 3.51 3.49 3.48 3.47 3.47
terms of angle of opening and its aspect ratio.
0.05 3.52 3.49 3.48 3.47 3.46
The numbers of openings considered are
0.06 3.54 3.49 3.48 3.47 3.45
2/4/6, the angle of opening with respect to
0.07 3.68 3.49 3.48 3.46 3.44
horizontal is varied between 30⁰ to 60⁰.
0.07 3.87 3.50 3.48 3.46 3.44
Subsequently the equations for the most
0.08 4.05 3.50 3.48 3.46 3.43
economical aspect ratio and the optimum
0.08 4.24 3.50 3.48 3.46 3.43
location (in terms of angle with horizontal)
0.09 3.58 3.48 3.45 3.42
are developed based on the obtained results.
0.10 3.87 3.48 3.45 3.40
The aspect ratio is termed as 0.11 4.16 3.63 3.44 3.39
𝐷𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 opening 0.12 3.88 3.44 3.38
𝐴𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 =
𝐷𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑑𝑜𝑚𝑒 0.13 4.01 3.44 3.37
0.13 4.07 3.45 3.36
PROBLEM FORMULATION AND 0.13 4.13 3.49 3.36
MODELING 0.14 3.74 3.34
In this study, Spherical Dome of span 10m 0.15 3.97 3.34
and thickness 100mm is considered. 0.16 4.08 3.33
Variations in maximum stress intensity 0.16 3.32
produced in the dome due to increase in 0.17 3.31
aspect ratio and increase in angle of opening 0.18 3.30
are compared for various angles of openings 0.19 3.28
and aspect ratios respectively. The different 0.20 3.34
cases for which the dome was modelled and 0.21 3.47
analyzed are: 0.22 3.51
• No. of openings considered: 2openings 0.23 3.59
/ 4openings / 6openings 0.24 3.65
• Aspect ratio of openings 0.25 3.76
- Ranging from 0.02 ~ 0.28 0.26 3.92
• Location of openings
- 30° / 40° / 45° / 50° / 60° w.r.t. DESCRETIZATION OF THE
horizontal SYSTEM
Material Properties considered Free meshing option available within
• Grade of concrete: M30 ANSYS is used for meshing of the dome
• Density of concrete: 25KN/m3 structure. A convergence study was carried
• Young’s Modulus E: 27386 N/mm2 out in order to optimize the mesh size.
• Poisson’s ratio ν:0.2 Element used for descretization is SHELL99
55
Analysis of Spherical Dome with Openings Using Finite Element Method
ANALYSIS RESULTS AND

DISCUSSION
The analysis results were extracted and
plotted using ANSYS post processor. The
maximum stress intensity near openings is of
primary importance in this study (Figure. 1)
Sudden increase in stress beyond the certain
aspect ratio is observed (Figure. 2). It is also
observed that this threshold value differs for
the different number of openings. This
threshold value of aspect ratio value is Figure 1 Stress Intensity contours of
Spherical Dome with 4 openings at 45⁰
termed as the most economical aspect ratio.
In addition to the stress near opening, the
maximum stress intensity and its locations
are also identified.
Governing stress is observed to be the stress
at bottom till the intersection point (Figure.3),
beyond which the stress at opening is the
governing stress i.e. the maximum stress in
the structure. Based on these results the
equations have been developed for the most
economical aspect ratio and the angle of
opening. The optimum location (or angle) of
the openings can be determined using these
equations. Figure 2 Variation of stress intensity near
opening for Spherical Dome with 4
For 2openings,
openings at, 30⁰,40⁰,45⁰,50⁰,60⁰, for
different aspect ratios
𝒚 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟏𝒙𝟑 − 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟏𝟏𝟓𝒙𝟐 + 𝟎. 𝟎𝟒𝟔𝟓𝒙
− 𝟎. 𝟓𝟕 Table 2. Most economical aspect ratio for
4 openings
For 4 openings,
𝒚 = 𝟒 ∗ 𝟏𝟎−𝟕 𝒙𝟑 + 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟎𝟒𝒙𝟐 − 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟐𝒙 Angle of Most economical Aspect
+ 𝟎. 𝟎𝟕𝟖 opening Ratio
For 6 openings, 30⁰ 0.06
𝒚 = −𝟏. 𝟔𝟔𝟕 ∗ 𝟏𝟎−𝟔 𝒙𝟑 + 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓 ∗ 𝟏𝟎−𝟒 𝒙𝟐 40⁰ 0.085
− 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟕𝟎𝟖𝟑𝒙 + 𝟎. 𝟏𝟏 45⁰ 0.1
y indicates the most economical aspect ratio 50⁰ 0.1275
for the particular location
x indicates the angle at which openings are 60⁰ 0.19
provided.
56
Khan et al.
6. Stress at the bottom of the dome

remains constant with respect to the
aspect ratio or the angle of opening.
7. Most economical aspect ratios for 2/4/6
number of openings are derived.
8. The most economical size of the
opening is derived for the 2/4/6 number
of openings.
9. The equation developed can be used to
Figure 3 Variation of stress vs. Aspect determine the location of the opening
Ratio for 4 openings at 30⁰
for a particular angle.
Similarly, equations for optimum location (or
angle) of openings have also been developed: REFERENCES
For 2openings,
𝐱 = −𝟒𝟕𝟔𝟏𝟗. 𝟎𝟓𝐲 𝟑 + 𝟏𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟐. 𝟖𝟔𝐲 𝟐 Al-Azzawi Hammad D 2011 Compression
− 𝟔𝟕𝟑. 𝟖𝟏𝐲 + 𝟑𝟕 between Numerical and Modified
For 4 openings, Methods for Analysis and Design of
Spherical Domes Subjected to Static
𝐱 = 𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟔𝟖𝐲 𝟑 − 𝟕𝟎𝟑𝟒𝐲 𝟐 + 𝟏𝟏𝟖𝟒𝐲
Distributed Loads Per Surface Area of
− 𝟏𝟗. 𝟏𝟖
Shell European Journal of Scientific
For 6 openings,
Research 63(3) 428-438
𝐱 = 𝟑𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟑. 𝟎𝟑𝐲 𝟑 − 𝟖𝟔𝟑𝟔. 𝟑𝟔𝐲 𝟐
+ 𝟏𝟏𝟒𝟔. 𝟗𝟕𝐲 − 𝟏𝟐 Ameen H A 2012 Finite Element Analysis of
x indicates the optimum location (or angle) at Large Diameter Concrete Spherical Shell
which the openings should be provided. Domes Dirasat: Engineering Sciences
y indicates the aspect ratio of the openings 38(1)
Ray W C and Edward L W 1999 Early Finite
CONCLUSION Element Research at Berkeley Fifth U.S.
1. The maximum stress intensity in the National Conference on Computational
zone around the opening increases Mechanics University of California
Berkeley August 1999
linearly with the increase in aspect
ratio. BucalemM L and Bathe K J1997 Finite
2. For aspect ratios less than the most Element Analysis of Shell
economical aspect ratio, the maximum Structures Archives of Computational
stress is produced at the bottom of the Methods in Engineering 4(1) 3-61
dome. Timoshenko S P and Woinowsky K S 1959
3. For aspect ratios greater than or equal to Theory of plates and shells McGraw-hill
the most economical aspect ratio, the Bairagi N K1990 Shell Analysis Khanna
maximum stress is produced at the Publisher New Delhi
periphery of the opening.
4. As the aspect ratio of the opening
increases, the maximum stress intensity
near opening increases
5. Maximum stress near opening reduces
as the angle of opening increases with
respect to angle.
57
ICCMS2016
EXPERT SYSTEM FOR BRIDGE TRUSS DESIGN

BAMBOLE A. N.1*, MURGUDKAR H. C.2 and THAKUR P.3
1
V.J.T.I., Mumbai, India.
2
PVPIT, Bubdgaon, Sangli, India.
3
Executive Engineer, CPWD, India.
Abstract: Design of the bridge truss possesses a very high degree of complexity, due
to involvement of large number of parameters. Such design process comprises many
challenges and in order to carry out design, a designer requires knowledge expertise,
capability to take intuitive decisions. To carry out the efficient design, a large
database generated is used interactively with the conventional methods, which in turn
can optimize the design process. The said database comprises of knowledge from
different experts, books, rules etc. An algorithm which uses the knowledge or
database, and carry out the design in similar manner in which an expert, with all the
necessary knowledge is termed as an Expert system. In present work, an Expert
system is developed which aims for the optimum design of the bridge trusses for the
IRC loading.
Keywords: Truss bridge design; Expert system; Artificial Intelligence;
Optimization
INTRODUCTION systems were developed in these areas

Design of the bridge structures is a complex e.g. MYCIN, developed by Stanford
process, which involves many parameters. University which was applied successfully in
Considering the level of complexity, the areas diagnosis, RTEXPERT develpoed by
design process necessitates the requirement Adeli and Al Rijlesh, was applied in area of
of very large database/ knowledge. Although trussed bridge design. The artificial
this database / knowledge is present, a human intelligence techniques can be applied to
expertise is required to take decisions and to solve any design problem because of its
choose the appropriate design parameters in heuristic nature, but at same time it remains
such a way that the design is optimized. In challenging task since design is an open
such a scenario, computer generated ended problem. The Expert system lessens
programs are becoming an aid to the the involvement of human, by emulating the
engineers. The conventional programming decision making ability of the human expert.
techniques cannot provide solution since it In broad sense, Expert system is an electronic
requires a very large database, intuitive/ replacement for the human expert. In present
judgemental knowledge. In such domain, study, an Expert system is developed for
knowledge based Expert systems has been optimum (minimum weight) design of bridge
applied successfully. Expert systems are truss subjected to moving load as per Indian
finding its application in the areas of Road Congress (IRC) loadings.
interpretation, diagnosis and design. Expert
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anbambole@vjti.org.in 58

Bambole et al.
OPTIMIZATION with the help of numerical machine

The Expert system provides the optimum experimentation. Wide ranges of parameters
design of the four types of the bridge trusses, were considered for the process of numerical
viz. Pratt, Parker, curved chord K, and experimentation. The classification of the
parallel chord K truss. The span range truss members is carried out based on the
considered is between 20 to 200 m. The results obtained, and according the shape of
design loads are as per Indian Road Congress the ILD (Figure 1). The classification is
(IRC). The developed Expert system consists based on the load reversal characteristic of
of sophisticated optimization algorithms in the member. Such classification is carried out
addition to the heuristic and knowledge base. for all types of trusses.
Optimization is carried out by two types of

penalty functions viz. interior penalty
function and exterior penalty function.
ANALYSIS OF TRUSS
Stiffness matrix method is used for the truss
analysis by the. Skyline method is used for
the matrix formation.
HEURISTIC ANALYSIS OF BRIDGE

TRUSS UNDER MOVING LOAD
The truss design is carried out for the uniform
lane loading and moving load as per IRC
loads. In order to obtain the maximum Figure.1: ILD Classification for the truss
response, influence line diagram are obtained
Figure 2: Architecture of the Expert System
OPTIMIZATION OF THE TRUSS The design process has broadly four steps,
MEMBERS conceptual design, preliminary design,
analysis for the dead and live loads, and the
59
Expert System for Bridge Truss Design
final detailed design. Conceptual design knowledge base. The inference can work
consisting of selecting the type of truss, and both forward and backward ways in order to
its configuration in terms of height, number achieve the desired goal. The GUI can plot
of panels etc. The type of bridge is selected the truss configuration, loads, influence line
based on the heuristic and knowledge base. diagrams (Figure.2). The developed Expert
Number of panels are selected based on the system has provision to the user to override
machine experimentation. The preliminary the values suggested by the system. User can
design process is selection of the initial cross alter the design parameters based on his/her
section of the truss members. Expert system judgement, in addition to the suggestions by
initially classifies the members in 4 groups Expert system. A numerical study is carried
viz. bottom chord members, top chord out on a 52 m span truss bridge
member, inclined members, vertical
members. Constant cross section is assumed
as a starting point and subsequently the
optimization is carried out based on the
experimentation study. The minimization
function is as follows
𝑊 = 𝑤 𝑥 ∑(𝑥𝑖𝐿𝑖)
The minimization of the above equation is
subjected to following equations,
𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 𝜎𝑖𝑎𝑡 … 𝑗 ∊ 𝑗1
𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ 𝜎𝑖𝑎𝑐 … 𝑗 ∊ 𝑗1
⃒𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 ⃒ ≤ 𝜎𝑠𝑡𝑟 𝑟
𝑖 = 1,2,3 … . 𝑛
𝐾𝑖 𝐿𝑖
≤ 𝑆𝑖
𝑟𝑖
𝛿𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 𝛿𝑎 Figure.3: Tree Diagram for Machine
The relationship between minimum radius of Experimentation
gyration and the area of cross section is
worked out for optimization. W14 section is DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION
used for the reference. It is observed that the The Expert system developed can provide an
piece wise linear regression fit approximates optimum truss design for four types of truss
the minimum radius of gyration. based on the IRC loading. The knowledge is
obtained through machine experimentation.
ARCHITECTURE OF EXPERT
The recommended truss for a particular range
SYSTEM
of the truss is divided into number of spans.
The interactive Expert system is developed in Several design alternatives consisting
the C language. The architecture of the different number of panels and heights
Expert system comprises of Knowledge Base, pertaining to constraints are carried out. The
Parameters, Rules, Control Boards (CB), optimization is carried out subsequently. The
Inference System and GUI. (Figure. 2) The most optimum shape of the truss among the
parameters comprises of main parameters spans is obtained. A linear regression
like length, truss type etc. The rules define between span length and key layout
the conditions. The control blocks are main parameter is established as
building blocks which interact with the
60
Bambole et al.
𝑲𝒆𝒚 𝒑𝒂𝒓𝒂𝒎𝒆𝒕𝒆𝒓 = 𝒂 ∗ 𝒔𝒑𝒂𝒏 𝒍𝒆𝒏𝒈𝒕𝒉 + 𝒃 - Expert system has capability to

provide important parameters like,
Key parameters: Ho – Optimum height, NPo number of panels, and height of truss
Optimum number of panels, a & b are the etc. These serves as the starting point
constants obtained by linear regression fit. for the design process.
(Figure. 4)
REFERENCES
Richhard Forsyth et al. 1984 Expert system
principles and cases. Cham and Hall
publications
S S Rao 1991 Optimization, Theory and
application, second edition Wiley
Eastern Ltd. New Delhi
Figure. 4: Result from Expert System Melaragno M. 1981 Simplified Truss Design
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. New York
 For bottom chord and top chord member
Adeli H and Balasubramaniyam K V 1998 A
of Pratt truss stress and/ slenderness
knowledge Based system for design of
constraints are active. Bridge Trusses: ASCE Journal of
 For bottom chord and top chord member Computing in Civil Engg. 1 1-202
of Parker truss only stress constraints are IRC 6 1966 Standard Specification of code of
active. practise for road bridges; section.
Loads and stresse Indian Road
 For first and last vertical members of Congress 1984 New Delhi
Pratt truss, stress/ slenderness constraints
are active. For the remaining vertical NOTATION
members, and inclined members of Pratt W Weight of the truss
truss, slenderness constraints are active. w specific weight of the truss material
 For the vertical and inclined member of xi cross sectional area of the member i
Parker truss, slenderness and/ or Li Length of the member i
fabrication constraints are active.
𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑥 Max. stress in member (tensile)
 The Expert system is advantageous due
𝜎𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑛 Min. stress in member (compressive)
to:
𝜎𝑖𝑎𝑡 Allowable tensile stress in member i
- Design of the bridge involves many
complexities, and in such a case Allowable compressive stress in
𝜎𝑖𝑎𝑐
human expert is required who member i
𝑟
possesses required knowledge, 𝜎𝑠𝑡𝑟 𝑖 Allowable stress range in fatigue
intuitive decisions making skills etc. 𝐾𝑖 Effective length of member
to carry out efficient design.
Minimum radius of gyration of
𝑟𝑖
- Human expert has limitations e.g. member i
may get fatigue, rare breed, etc. Allowable slenderness ratio of i
𝑆𝑖
- Expert system can emulate the human member
expert which has capability to take 𝛿𝑚𝑎𝑥 Maximum displacement
intuitive decision using knowledge
𝛿𝑎 Allowable displacement
base.
61
ICCMS2016
FREE VIBRATION ANALYSIS OF A SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM

KAMBLE S. 1, SHINDADE A. B. 1, SALOKHE N. 2 and BAMBOLE A.N. 1
1
Structural Engineering Department, VJTI, Mumbai, India.
2
Electrical Engineering Department, VJTI, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: In this paper free vibration analysis is carried out on a simply supported steel
beam of I cross section. Experimentation is carried out on a steel beam of 6m span. The
BDI (Bridge Diagnostics, Inc.) system is used for data acquisition. Accelerometers were
used to catch the vibration response of the beam. The Natural frequency values were
obtained using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm. FE modelling is carried out
using ABAQUS software. Block Lanczos method is used to perform modal analysis.
For theoretical validation the Euler-Bernoulli beam theory is used. The theoretical,
experimental and analytical values are compared. Good agreement between the
theoretically calculated natural frequency, analytical and the experimental natural
frequency is seen after comparison.
Keywords: Natural frequency; Euler-Bernoulli; ABAQUS; Modal analysis; Block
Lanczos
INTRODUCTION In the present study, vibration analysis is carried

out on a simply supported beam to study the
Beams and beam like elements are principal
response characteristics. Steel beam is used for the
constituents of many civil as well as numerical analysis. The results obtained
mechanical structures. Vibration analysis can numerically are validated with the results obtained
be used to predict the behaviour of a structure from the simulation and experimentation. The
using the modal or vibration data. It helps in simulations have done with the help of ABAQUS
understanding and evaluating the behaviour of software. Experimentation is carried out on a 6 m
a structure in actual scenario. A major concern span steel beam having I-cross section. The BDI
is given to vibration analysis of a structure (Bridge Diagnostics, Inc.) system is used for data
now a days because the intention is to avoid acquisition. Uniaxial Accelerometers were used to
the vibration related malfunctioning or let- catch the vibration response of the beam.
Frequency Analysis Based on the Fast Former
downs of the structure. The main reasons that
Transform (FFT) Algorithm is the tool of choice
the vibration analysis is given a prime
for measurement and diagnostic of vibration.
importance is due to the fact that the actual
working environment and working conditions THE EQUATION OF MOTION IN FREE
are changing day by day as the technological VIBRATION
advancement is taking place. It has become an
𝜕4𝑦
effective way of recognizing, understanding For free vibration (p(x,t)=0), eqn. 𝐸𝐼 +
𝜕𝑥 2
and forecasting the dynamic behaviour of a 𝜕2 𝑦
𝑚
̅ = 𝑝(𝑥, 𝑡) Reduce to the homogeneous
structure. 𝜕𝑡 2
differential equation
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shrirang1975@gmail.com 62

Kamble et al.
𝜕4𝑦 𝜕2 𝑦 The substitution of the roots of eq. (11) into

𝐸𝐼 2 +𝑚
̅ =0 (1)
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑡 2
eq.(10) provides a solution of eq.(5). The
The solution of eq.(1) can be found by the general solution is then given by the
method of separation of variables. It is superposition of these four possible solutions,
assumed that the solution may be expressed as namely
the product of a function of position ф(x) and 𝛷(𝑥) = 𝐶1 𝑒 𝑎𝑥 + 𝐶2 𝑒 −𝑎𝑥 + 𝐶3 𝑒 𝑖𝑎𝑥 + 𝐶4 𝑒 −𝑖𝑎𝑥
a function of time f (t), that is, ………… (12)
Where C1, C2, C3, and C4 are constants of
𝑦(𝑥, 𝑡) = ɸ(𝑥)𝑓(𝑡) (2)
integration. The exponential functions in
The substitution of eq. (2) in the eq. (1), leads eq.(13) may be expressed in terms of
to trigonometric and hyperbolic functions by
𝜕4 ɸ(𝑥) 𝜕2 𝑓(𝑡)
means of the relations
𝐸𝐼𝑓(𝑡) +𝑚
̅ɸ(𝑥) =0 (3)
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑡 2
𝑒 ±𝑎𝑥 = cosh 𝑎𝑥 ± sinh 𝑎𝑥
This last equation may be written as
𝑒 ±𝑖𝑎𝑥 = cos 𝑎𝑥 ± 𝑖 sin 𝑎𝑥 (13)
𝐸𝐼 ɸ𝐼𝑉 (𝑥) 𝑓̈(𝑡)
=− (4)
̅ ɸ(𝑥)
𝑚 𝑓(𝑡) Substitution of these relations in to eq. (13)
We designate the constant by ω2 which yields
equated separately to each side of eq.(4) 𝛷(𝑥) = 𝐴 sin 𝑎𝑥 + 𝐵𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑎𝑥 + 𝐶 sinh 𝑎𝑥 + 𝐷 cosh 𝑎𝑥
results in the two following differential (14)
equations: Where A, B, C, D are new constants of
𝐼𝑉 (𝑥) 4
ɸ − 𝑎 ɸ(𝑥) = 0 (5) integration. They are evaluated by considering
the boundary conditions at the ends of the
and
beam.
𝑓̈(𝑡) + 𝜔2 𝑓(𝑡) = 0 (6)
FOR BOTH ENDS SIMPLY SUPPORTED
4 ̅ 𝜔2
𝑚
Where 𝑎 = (7)
𝐸𝐼 In this case the displacements and bending
It is particularly convenient to solve eq.(7) for moments must be zero at the both ends of the
ω and to use the following notation, namely beam: hence the boundary conditions for the
simply supported beams are
𝐸𝐼
𝜔 = 𝐶√ ̅ (8) 𝑦(0, 𝑡) = 0, 𝑀(0, 𝑡) = 0,
𝑚𝐿4
In which 𝐶 = (𝑎𝐿)2 . 𝑦(𝐿, 𝑡) = 0, 𝑀(0, 𝑡) = 0.

𝑓(𝑡) = 𝐴 cos 𝜔𝑡 + 𝐵 sin 𝜔𝑡 (9) 𝜕2𝑦
In view of eqs 𝑀 = 𝐸𝐼 and 𝑦(𝑥, 𝑡) =
𝜕𝑥 2
Where A and B are constants of integration. 𝛷(𝑥)𝑓(𝑡), these boundary conditions imply
Equation (5) can be solved by letting the following conditions on the shape function
ɸ(𝑥) = 𝐶𝑒 𝑠𝑥 𝛷(𝑥).
(10) At x=0,
The substitution of eq.(10) into eq.(5) results 𝛷(0) = 0, 𝛷" (𝑥) = 0 (15)
in (𝑠 4 − 𝑎4 )𝐶𝑒 𝑠𝑥 = 0
At x=L,
Which, for a nontrivial solution, requires that
𝛷(𝐿) = 0, 𝛷" (𝐿) = 0 (16)
4 4
𝑠 −𝑎 =0 (11)
63
Free Vibration Analysis of a Simply Supported Beam
The substitution of these boundary conditions EXPERIMENTAL APPROACH

into equation (14)
A simply supported steel I beam was used for
𝛷(𝐿) = 𝐴 sin 𝑎𝐿 + 𝐶 sinh 𝑎𝐿 = 0 experimental purpose. The BDI (Bridge
𝛷"(𝐿) = 𝑎2 (−𝐴 sinh 𝑎𝐿 + 𝐶 sinh 𝑎𝐿) = 0 Diagnostics, Inc.) system was used for data
acquisition. Accelerometer was used to
(17) measure the vibration response (i.e.,
Which, when added, give 2𝐶 sinh 𝑎𝐿 = 0. acceleration, velocity and displacement). Data
acquisition system acquires vibration signal
From this last relation, C = 0 since the
from the accelerometer, and encrypts it in
hyperbolic sine function cannot vanish except
digital form. It takes encrypted data from the
for a zero argument. Thus eqs.3 reduce to
data acquisition system and after processing
𝐴 sin 𝑎𝐿 = 0 (18) (e.g., FFT), it displays frequency as output by
Excluding the trivial solution (A=0), we using analysis software.
obtain the frequency equation.
sin 𝑎𝐿 = 0 (19)
Which will be satisfied for
AnL = nπ; n=0, 1, 2 . . .
Substitution of this roots into eq. 8 yields
𝐸𝐼
𝜔𝑛 = 𝑛2 𝜋 2 √ (20)
𝑚𝐿4
Where the subscript n serves to indicate the Figure 1. Lab Setup

order of the natural frequencies.
THEORETICAL APPROACH
DIMENSIONS OF BEAM
Flange Width = 50mm
Flange Thickness = 5mm
Beam Height = 100mm
Web Thickness = 4mm
Length of Beam= 6000mm
Figure 2. Frequency Plot from FFT
By using equation (20) the theoretical values
obtained for the first three modes are shown The experimental values obtained for the first
in Table 1. two modes are shown in Table 2.
Table 1. Theoretical Natural Frequency Table 2. Experimental Natural Frequency
Mode No Theoretical Frequency (Hz) Mode No Experimental Frequency (Hz)

1 8.8 1 8.95
2 35.19
2 33.77
2 79.17
64
Kamble et al.
ANALYTICAL APPROACH CONCLUSIONS

MODAL ANALYSIS By comparing the theoretical and
experimental natural frequency it is observed
The Finite Element Modelling was done using
that the percentage error for the first and the
ABAQUS software. A 2-node linear beam
second mode is 1.7% and 3.84% respectively.
(B21) element in a plane was used. Block
Lanczos method is used to perform modal Similarly, by comparing the analytical and
analysis. Properties of the steel beam are as experimental natural frequency it can be seen
follows: Modulus of elasticity (E) = 200 GPa, that the percentage error for the first and the
Poisson’s ratio = 0.3, Density = 7850 kg/m3. second mode is 4.8% and 0.6% respectively.
The analytical values obtained for the first Good agreement between the theoretically
three modes are shown in Table 3. calculated natural frequency, analytical and
the experimental natural frequency is found.
REFERENCES
Chopade J P Barjibhe R B Free Vibration
Analysis of Fixed Free Beam with
Theoretical and Numerical Approach
Method International Journal of
Innovations in Engineering and
Technology (IJIET).
Figure 3. Mode 1
Mario Paz Structural Dynamics Theory and
Computation ISBN: 81-239-0978-0.
Vigneshwaran K and Behera R K 2014
Vibration Analysis of a Simply Supported
Beam with Multiple Breathing Cracks 1st
International Conference on Structural
Integrity, ICONS-2014
Akhilesh Kumar Mahto J N Experimental
investigation of crack in aluminium
Figure 4. Mode 2 cantilever beam using vibration
monitoring technique International
Journal of Computational Engineering
Research 4
Figure 5. Mode 3
Table 3. Analytical Natural Frequency
Mode No Analytical Natural Frequency(Hz)

1 8.529
2 33.974
3 75.911
65
ICCMS2016
FINITE ELEMENT MODELING OF FUNCTIONALLY GRADED

MATERIAL PLATES: AN ASSESSMENT OF A NEW SHEAR
DEFORMATION THEORY FOR FREE VIBRATION RESPONSE
GUPTA A.* and TALHA M.
School of Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Mandi, Himachal Pradesh, India.
Abstract: In this paper, a finite element modeling of recently developed cosine

function based shear deformation theory is formulated and implemented for free
vibration of functionally graded material (FGM) plates. The shear deformation is
expressed in terms of a cosine function of thickness coordinate. The theory inherently
satisfies the zero transverse shear conditions on top and bottom surfaces of the plate.
The material properties of plate are assumed to vary according to power law
distribution of the volume fraction of the constituents. The governing equations are
obtained for the free vibration of FGM plate. The results are compared with the exact
three-dimensional (3-D) solutions. Finally, the influences of power law index, aspect
ratio, thickness ratio, geometric configuration and various boundary conditions on the
frequency parameter of the FGM plates have been investigated.
Keywords: Cosine function; Shear deformation theory; Free vibration; Boundary
condition.
INTRODUCTION rectangular thin plates was investigated by

Functionally Graded Materials (FGM) are the Abrate (2008) using the CPT. Talha and
microscopically inhomogeneous composite Singh (2010) modified transverse
materials in which the mechanical properties displacement in the consideration of HSDT to
vary smoothly and continuously from one investigate the vibration response of FGM
surface to the other. This is achieved by plates. Ferreira et al. (2006) considered
gradually varying the volume fraction of the collocation method with multiquadric radial
constituent materials. These novel materials basis functions along with the FSDT and
which were first introduced by Koizumi in third-order shear deformation plate theory
1984 in Japan (1997). (TSDT). A three-dimensional solution has
been presented for free and forced vibrations
Functionally graded materials seized much of simply supported rectangular plates by Vel
attention towards the structural application and Batra (2004). Gupta and Talha (2015)
due to their extraordinary mechanical presented a detailed review on recent
attributes. Plates and shell are assumed to be development in modeling and analysis of
most important constituent of structure. In an functionally graded materials and structures.
open literature, it is observed that a wide
range of researches has been carried out on It is observed that in several non-polynomial
free vibration of the FG plates. Free vibration theories, transverse normal strain is
of FG simply supported and clamped neglected. The main objective of present
study is to propose a new theory which
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:erankit04@gmail.com 66

Gupta and Talha
incorporates both, transverse shear strain and nonzero linear strains associated with the
transverse normal strain. To implement this displacement field in Eq. (1) are:
theory, a suitable C0 continuous 𝜕𝑢𝑜 𝜕2 𝑤𝑏 𝜕2 𝑤𝑠
εx = −𝑧 + 𝑔(𝑧)
isoparametric finite element with 8 degrees of 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑥 2
2 2
freedom (DOFs) per node is considered to 𝜕𝑣𝑜 𝜕 𝑤𝑏 𝜕 𝑤𝑠
εy = −𝑧 2
+ 𝑔(𝑧)
minimize the computational exercise without 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 2
′ (𝑧)𝑤
affecting the solution accuracy. The material ε𝑧 = 𝑓 𝑠 (2)
properties of functionally graded material 𝜕𝑢𝑜 𝜕𝑣𝑜 𝜕2 𝑤𝑏
𝛾𝑥𝑦 = + − 2𝑧 +
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥𝜕𝑦
plate are assumed to vary continuously 𝜕2 𝑤𝑠
through the thickness of the plate, according 2𝑔(𝑧)
𝜕𝑥𝜕𝑦
to a power-law distribution of the volume 𝜕𝑤𝑠
𝛾𝑦𝑧 = (𝑔′ (𝑧) + 𝑓(𝑧))
fraction of the constituents. The effect of the 𝜕𝑦
plate parameters such as aspect ratios, side to 𝜕𝑤 𝑠
𝛾𝑥𝑧 = (𝑔′ (𝑧) + 𝑓(𝑧))
thickness ratios, and volume fraction index 𝜕𝑥
on the natural frequencies of FGM plates is It is evident from Eq. (2) that in the present
presented for various boundary conditions. theory both, transverse shear strain and
The comparative and convergence study of transverse normal strain exist which is the
proposed theory is also accomplished with novelty of the present theory. Further
assumption is made to ascertain the Co
the available published results available in
continuity as ϕ x =w b , x ϕ y = w b,y , 𝜃 x = w s , x
R
open literature.
, 𝜃 y = w s,y.
R
STRUCTURAL KINEMATICS GOVERNING EQUATIONS OF THE

The structural kinematics of the plate is PLATE
expressed with the help of newly developed The finite element formulation has been
cosine function based shear deformation employed to obtain the generalized
theory (CFSDT). The transverse eigenvalue problem for the free vibration of
displacement components (w) possess the the FGM plates. A nine-noded isoparametric
through-thickness variation in terms of element is used in the analysis.
trigonometric function of thickness
coordinate. After splitting the transverse STRAIN ENERGY OF THE PLATE
displacement ‘w’ into bending 𝒘𝒃 and shear
The strain energy of the plate is given as,
𝒘𝒔 parts, the displacement field can be 1 (𝑒)𝑇 [𝘬](𝑒) {ℛ}(𝑒)
expressed as shown in Eq(3). . ∏ = ∑𝑁𝐸
𝑒=1{ℛ} (3)
2
𝜕𝑤𝑏 𝜕𝑤𝑠
𝑢 = 𝑢𝑜 − 𝑧 + 𝑔(𝑧) Where [𝘬](𝑒) and {ℛ}(𝑒) are the linear
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 stiffness matrix and displacement vector for
𝜕𝑤𝑏 𝜕𝑤𝑠 the element, respectively.
𝑣 = 𝑣𝑜 − 𝑧 + 𝑔(𝑧)
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
𝑤 = 𝑤𝑏 + 𝑓(𝑧)𝑤𝑠 (1) KINETIC ENERGY OF THE PLATE
𝜒 𝜒𝑧 Kinetic energy of vibrating plate for total
Where, 𝑔(𝑧) = Ϛcos( )𝑧 2 , 𝑓(𝑧) = 𝑧cos( ) .
2 ℎ number of element NE is given as
The values of parameter Ϛ and 𝜒 is evaluated
𝑇 = ∑𝑁𝐸
1
̇ (𝑒)𝑇 [𝑚](𝑒) �ℛ̇ �(𝑒) 𝑑𝐴 (4)
𝑒=1 ∫𝐴(𝑒) �ℛ �
in the post processing step and ascertained as 2
-0.5 and 0.1 respectively. Clearly, it is seen (e)
Here [m] is the inertia matrix of element.
that the displacement fields in Eq. (1) handle
only four unknowns, i.e. u o ,v o ,w b ,w s. The
67
Finite Element Modelling of Functionally Graded Material Plates: An Assessment of a New Shear
Deformation Theory for Free Vibration Response
GOVERNING EQUATION NATURAL FREQUENCY OF

FUNCTIONALLY GRADED PLATE
The governing equation of motion for free
vibration of FGM plate is developed through Non-dimensional natural frequencies are
the variational principle, it may be given as evaluated using proposed cosine function
follows, based shear deformation theory. In the
[𝐾]{∆} = 𝜆[𝑀]{∆} (5) succeeding section, an investigation is carried
out to find the influence of different aspect
where [M], [K],and {∆𝑖 } are global mass ratios (a/b), side to thickness ratios (a/h), and
matrix, global linear stiffness matrix and
volume fraction index on the vibration
global displacement respectively. 𝜆 = 𝜔𝜔2,
where 𝜔𝜔 is defined as frequency of natural characteristics of FGM plate. Four boundary
vibration. conditions (CCCC, SSSS. SSCC.CCFF) are
used in the analysis. The non-dimensional
NUMERICAL EXAMPLES AND frequency parameter is assumed as 𝜔𝜔 �=
RESULTS 𝜔𝜔(a ⁄h) √(ρ c /E c ) . The material properties of
2
the constituent material are E m = 207.78 GPa,

CONVERGENCE AND COMPARISON
𝜌 m = 8166 kg/m3 for Stainless steel
OF FUNDAMENTAL FREQUENCIES
R
OF FG PLATES (SUS304) and E c = 322.27GPa, 𝜌𝑐 = 2370

kg/m3 for Silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ).
Example 1.This example is performed for
Table 2 shows the frequency parameter for
Al/ZrO 2 square FGM plates with all edges
square SUS304/Si 3 N 4 FGM plate with
clamped (CCCC) boundary condition for
various side to thickness ratio (a/h) and
different values of the power law index ‘n’.
volume fraction index (n) with fully clamped
The non-dimensional frequency parameters
(CCCC) boundary conditions. Aspect ratio is
are obtained by applying three dimensional
considered as 1 and √2 . It is observed from
continuum model as 𝜔𝜔 � = 𝜔𝜔√(12(1 −
2 2 2 4 2 the table that by increasing a/h ratio, the
𝜈 )𝜌𝑐 𝑎 𝑏 /π 𝐸𝑐 ℎ . It is evident from the
frequency parameter decreases. It is also
comparison study that the present results are
perceived that the frequency parameter
in good agreement with those generated by 3-
decreases as the volume fraction index
D exact solution for all volume fraction
increases from 0 to higher value. This is due
indexes ‘n’.
to fact that the larger volume fraction index
Table 1. Comparison of frequency means the plate has a smaller ceramic
parameter 𝜔𝜔
� for Al/ZrO 2 FGM plate with component and hence the stiffness is reduced.
all edges clamped (CCCC) The natural frequencies of rectangular plate
Volume fraction index ‘n’
Mesh Size
0 .5 1 2 10 100 with 𝑏 = √2𝑎 are smaller than the other one,
4 2.920 2.662 2.532 2.411 2.222 2.114 b = a.
9 2.902 2.627 2.494 2.382 2.221 2.104
16 2.988 2.702 2.568 2.459 2.296 2.168 Tables 3-5 show the frequency parameter of
25 2.709 2.447 2.323 2.222 2.078 1.966 FGM plate made of SUS304/Si 3 N 4 for
36 2.673 2.416 2.294 2.193 2.049 1.939 Simply (SSSS), Simply supported-Clamped
Uymaz
et al 2.740 2.491 2.370 2.256 2.083 1.964 (SSCC) and Clamped –Free (CCFF)
(2007) boundary conditions, respectively. The top
It is also clear from the convergence study surface of the plate is assumed to be ceramic
rich, whereas the bottom one is metallic rich.
that the performance of the present theory is
The similar trend is observed in the
good in terms of solution accuracy and frequency parameter as discussed in table 2.
convergence.
68
Gupta and Talha
Highest frequency parameter is seen in the the available exact 3D elasticity solutions.
case of all edges clamped boundary condition The results reflect that the fundamental
(CCCC), whereas, the lowest frequency frequencies decrease with increasing the
parameter is observed for Clamped –Free volume fraction index as well as side-to-
boundary condition (CCFF).
thickness ratios.
Table 2. Frequency parameter ω� for
SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with all edges Table 5. Frequency parameter ω
� for
clamped (CCCC) SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with Clamped
-Free (CCFF) boundary condition
b/a a/h Volume fraction index ‘n’
0 0.5 2 10 100 b/a a/h
5 0.7385 0.5089 0.3982 0.3435 0.3225 0 0.5 2 10 100
1 10 0.2314 0.1595 0.1252 0.1082 0.1011 5 0.4325 0.2967 0.2331 0.2023 0.1891
20 0.0647 0.0446 0.0351 0.0303 0.0283 1 10 0.1214 0.0836 0.0657 0.0569 0.0531
5 0.6685 0.4608 0.3602 0.3108 0.2919 20 0.0319 0.0219 0.0173 0.0150 0.0139
√2 10 0.2078 0.1432 0.1124 0.0971 0.0908 5 0.3094 0.2122 0.1666 0.1447 0.1353
20 0.0578 0.0398 0.0313 0.0271 0.0253 √2 10 0.0866 0.0596 0.0468 0.0406 0.0379
20 0.0227 0.0156 0.0123 0.0107 0.0195
Table 3. Frequency parameter ω
� for
SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with Simply REFERENCES
supported (SSSS) boundary condition
Abrate S 2008 Functionally graded plates
Volume fraction index ‘n’ behave like homogeneous plates
b/a a/h
0 0.5 2 10 100
5 0.4890 0.3359 0.2651 0.2291 0.2138 Composites Part B—Engineering 39
1 10 0.1567 0.1080 0.0849 0.0733 0.0685 151–158.
20 0.0463 0.0319 0.0251 0.0216 0.0202
5 0.3786 0.2605 0.2050 0.1771 0.1655
Ferreira A J M Batra R C Roque C M C Qian
√2 10 0.1164 0.0803 0.0630 0.0544 0.0509 LF Jorge RMN 2006 Natural
20 0.0341 0.0236 0.0185 0.0160 0.0149 frequencies of functionally graded plates
Table 4.Frequency parameter ω
� for by a meshless method Composite
SUS304/Si3N4 FGM plate with Simply Structures 75 593–600.
supported –Clamped (SSCC) boundary Gupta A and Talha M 2015 Recent
condition development in modeling and analysis
of functionally graded materials and
b/a a/h structures Progress in Aerospace Sci.79
0 0.5 2 10 100
5 0.6903 0.4753 0.3719 0.3212 0.3015 1-14.
1 10 0.2130 0.1468 0.1152 0.0996 0.0931
20 0.0589 0.0406 0.0319 0.0276 0.0258
Koizumi M 1997 FGM activities in Japan
5 0.6282 0.4327 0.3383 0.2922 0.2743 Compos Part B 28 1–4.
√2 10 0.1923 0.1325 0.1040 0.0899 0.0840 Talha M and Singh B N 2010 Static
20 0.0529 0.0364 0.0286 0.0248 0.0231
Response and Free Vibration Analysis
CONCLUSION of FGM Plates using Higher Order
Shear Deformation Theory Appl. Math.
In this article, the cosine function based shear Model 34(12) 3991–4011.
deformation theory is proposed for Uymaz B and Aydogdu M 2007 Three-
investigating the free vibration response of dimensional vibration analysis of
FGM plates. This theory account for both the functionally graded plates under various
transverse shear and normal deformations of boundary conditions J. Reinf. Plastic
the plate. Free vibration of FGM plates with Compos.26(18) 1847–1863.
various boundary constraints are carried out Vel S S and Batra R C 2004 Three-
assuming the variation of material properties dimensional exact solution for the
follows power law distribution. The present vibration of functionally graded
rectangular plates J Sound Vibr.272(3)
computational solutions are compared with
703–30.
69
ICCMS2016
EXPERIMENTAL AND NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF ECC

STRENGTHENED MASONRY STRUCTURESIN FLEXURE
SINGH S. B.*, MUNJAL P. and PATIL R.
Department of Civil Engineering, BITS Pilani, Pilani, India.
Abstract: Innovative composite materials for strengthening of deficient concrete and

masonry structures have been recently proposed by construction sector. Precast
Engineered Cementitious Composite (ECC) sheet has been used to strengthen the
masonry structure. An experimental investigation has been carried out to predict the
flexural response of masonry beam strengthened with precast ECC sheets. The precast
ECC sheet is bonded using epoxy to the masonry beams in tension as well as both on
the tension and compression faces to make sandwich composite beam. The
experimental results are compared with the numerical results obtained by commercial
finite element software, ABAQUS 6.11. Furthermore, a parametric study has been
performed. The parametric study incorporates the effect of various parameters such as
span-to-depth ratio of tension strengthened as well as sandwich composite masonry
beams. The present study demonstrates that applying precast ECC sheets increased
the load carrying capacity and ductility, while validating the numerical results with
those of experimental results. The numerical results obtained using ABAQUS closely
capture the experimental response of ECC strengthened clay-burnt brick masonry
beam.
Keywords: Engineered Cementitious Composite (ECC); Flexural strength;
Masonry beam; Numerical modelling; Sandwich beam
INTRODUCTION cement mortar as bed joint for improving the

In recent years, research investigation have flexural response of the masonry structures.
focussed on rehabilitation, retrofitting and [Lin 2010] tested unreinforced masonry walls
strengthening of existing deficient structures retrofitted with ECC shotcrete and concluded
with the use of new strengthening materials that ECC is effective material to resist in-
such as fiber reinforced polymers (FRP), plane loading of retrofitted unreinforced
ductile fiber reinforced composite (DFRCC), masonry but additional reinforcement is
engineered cementitious composite etc. In the required to resist out of plane loading.
past, numerous investigations have been [Kyriakides 2012] proposed the two-
carried out on strengthening of masonry dimensional non-linear finite-element micro-
structure with FRP [Triantafillou TC, 1998; modelling approach to simulate unreinforced
Hamed and Rabinovitch, 2007; Singh et al., masonry beams retrofitted with a thin layer of
2015]. The ECC material and technology ECC. The study concluded that both a
came into existence in early nineties. [Singh detailed and simplified micro-modelling
et al. 2015] used ECC in replacement of approach is able to capture the experimental
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:sbsinghbits@gmail.com 70

Singh et al.
performance of the ECC retrofitted masonry depicts the nomenclature and descriptions of
beams. beams used in the study. All beams were
tested under four-point loading and subjected
The objective of the present study is to
to monotonic load till failure. The schematic
analyse the flexural response of clay brick
of 4-point loading arrangement for beam is
masonry beams externally strengthened with
shown in Figure 1.
precast ECC sheet on tension face and/ or
both on tension as well as compression face Table 1.Mix proportion of ECC in Kg/m3
of masonry beams. Moreover, numerical
Super Recr
modelling has been done for validations and Cem Silica Fly-
Water Plastici on
parametric study to predict the effect of span- ent Sand ash
zer Fiber
to-depth ratio using commercial finite 620 620 620 290 8.5 26
element software ABAQUS.
Table 2. Details of beam specimens
EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS
Specimen
A total of 7 clay-burnt brick masonry beams Specimen Details
ID
of size 230 mm (width) x 110 mm (depth) Numerically modelled masonry
CB-A
and 860 mm length were cast. The masonry control beam
beams have nine brick units with eight mortar Experimentally tested masonry
CB-E
joints, each of approximately 20 mm control beam
thickness. Out of the 7 beams, 2 beams were Numerically modelled sandwich
SB-A
masonry beam
strengthened on bottom (tension face) with
Experimentally tested sandwich
ECC sheet of 35 mm thickness and 2 beams SB-E
masonry beam
were strengthened on both the compression Numerically modelled tension
TSB-A
and tension faces like sandwich beam with strengthened masonry beam
ECC sheet of 35 mm thickness. The other Experimentally tested tension
TSB-E
three beams acted as control beams (i.e., strengthened beam
unstrengthened). Epoxy was used as bonding
material for strengthening purpose. The mix
proportion of cement mortar used for casting
of masonry beams was 1:3 (cement: sand).
The beams were cured for 28 days before
testing. The five-brick prisms compressive
strength of masonry and the compressive Figure1. Schematic loading arrangement
strength of 70.7 mm cubes of cement mortar
are 2.85 MPa and 21.67 MPa, respectively. NUMERICAL MODELLING
Generally, ECC mix consists of cement,
Numerical modelling was performed using
micro silica sand, fly-ash, water, super
commercial finite element software,
plasticizer, and polymeric fibers to reinforce
ABAQUS (2011). All the parts were created
the mix. Present study used polyester fibers
as a three dimensional (3D) deformable solid
of triangular shape with a trade name Recron
part.The concrete-damaged plasticity model
3s CT-2424 supplied by Reliance, India. The
of ABAQUS was used to model ECC and
mix proportion of ECC is presented in Table
masonry as it precisely accounts the
1. The 28-days compressive strength of the
nonlinear behaviour. This nonlinear material
150 mm ECC cube is 55 MPa. Table 2
71
Experimental and Numerical Simulation of ECC Strengthened Masonry Structures in Flexure
properties reflect the material behaviour experimental result (TSB-E) and shown in
beyond elastic range. The plasticity figure 4. The nature of load versus deflection
parameter such as dilatation angle have been curve is observed to be similar.
taken as 30° and 37° for masonry and ECC,
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
respectively. Solid elements C3D8R, i.e.,
linear 8 nodes iso-parametric three The effect of span-to-depth ratios (L/d) on
dimensional brick elements with reduced the flexural response of strengthened beams
were examined by the numerical modelling
integration were used for masonry and ECC.
using ABAQUS.
The element type COH3D8, i.e., 8 nodes
three dimensional cohesive elements was 12
used for epoxy and cement mortar. The
10
cohesive elements were finely meshed
compared to solid elements. 8
Load (kN)
Num (SB-A)
6
2.5 Exp (SB-E)
4
2 2
Num (CB-A)
Exp (CB-A) 0
1.5
Load (kN)
0 1 2 3 4
Mid-Span Deflection (mm)
1
Figure3. Numerical validation of
0.5 sandwich masonry beam response
0 8
0 0.5 1 1.5 7 Num (TSB-A)
6 Exp (TSB-E)
5
Load (kN)
Figure 2.Numerical validation of control

masonry beam response 4
3
VALIDATION OF NUMERICAL 2
MODELS 1
Figure2 shows the comparison of flexural 0

0 1 2 3
responses of control masonry beam obtained Mid-Span Deflection (mm)
using ABAQUS and experimental four point
flexural tests. It is observed that the flexural Figure4.Numerical validation of tension
response of the control masonry beam is in strengthened masonry beam response
close proximity to the corresponding
experimental response with maximum
deviation of 12.8% in the peak load while the
deflections corresponding to the peak loads
are the same. Similarly, it is shown in Figure.
3 that numerically and experimentally
obtained flexural responses of the sandwich
beam are in close agreement. The ABAQUS
results for beam strengthened in tension
(TSB-A) is validated with the corresponding
72
Singh et al.
12 concluding remarks and recommendations

could be made for the effective design and
10 fabrication of low cost clay-burnt bricks
8 masonry structures externally strengthened in
Load (kN)
L/d=4.3
6 L/d=12 tension and/ or compression with precast ECC
strips.
4 i. The numerical responses obtained using
2 ABAQUS closely capture the experimental
responses of ECC strengthened clay-burnt
0
0 1 2 3 brick masonry beam.
Mid-Span Deflection (mm) ii. For a given bonding agent of particular
thickness, the load carrying capacity of
Figure 5. Effect of L/d ratio on flexural sandwich beam is higher in comparison to the
responses of sandwich beams (SB) corresponding tension strengthened beam.
The span-to-depth ratios of the beams were iii. The effect of span- to-depth ratio on the
changed from 4.3 to 12 for sandwich beam flexural response of masonry beam depends
and from 5.4 to 12 for tension strengthened on the type of strengthening. The load
beams. While changing the span-to-depth capacity of tension strengthened as well
ratio, the depth of tension strengthened or sandwich beams decreases while deformation
sandwich beams were kept constant while capacity increases with increase in L/d ratio.
length was varied.As observed from Figure. 5
for sandwich beams the peak load is obtained ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
for the smaller span-to-depth (L/d) ratios, i.e.,
for 4.3 and similar response is observed for This project is a part of Department of
tension strengthened beams also (Figure. 6). Science and Technology (DST), Govt. of
However, the maximum deformation India sponsored research project (No.
capacity with reduced load carrying capacity SR/S3/MERC/0051/2012).The financial
is observed for the larger span to depth ratio support of DST is highly appreciated.
for L/d=12.
REFERENCES
7
6 Dassault Systèmes Simulia Corporation
5
L/d=5.4 2011Abaqus analysis user’s manual 6.11
Load (kN)
L/d=12 ABAQUS Inc. Providence RI.

4
3 Hamed E and Rabinovitch O 2007 Out-of-
2 plane behavior of unreinforced masonry
1 walls strengthened with FRP strips
0
Composites Science and Technology
0 2 4 6 67(3-4) 489-500.
Kyriakides M A Hendriks M A N and
Figure6.Effect of L/d ratio on flexural
Billington S L 2012 Simulation of
responses of tension strengthened
beams unreinforced masonry beams retrofitted
with engineered cementitious
CONCLUSION composites in flexure Journal of
The flexural response of tension strengthened Materials in Civil Engineering 24(5)
masonry beam as well as sandwich beam was 506-515.
studied experimentally and numerically.
Based on the above study, the following
73
Experimental and Numerical Simulation of ECC Strengthened Masonry Structures in Flexure
Lin Y Ingham JandLawley D2010Testing of

unreinforced masonry walls seismically
retrofitted with ECC shotcrete In
Shotcrete: CRC press 191-200.
Singh S B Munjal P and Thammishetti N
2015 Strengthening of masonry beam
with ECC as bed joint Journal of
Engineering Science & Technology829-
39.
Triantafillou TC 1998 Strengthening of
masonry structures using epoxy-bonded
FRP laminates Journal of composites for
construction 2 96-104.
74
ICCMS2016
TWO-DIMENSIONAL STATIC ANALYSIS OF COMPOSITE PLATE

SUBJECTED TO ARBITRARY BOUNDARY CONDITIONS USING
EXTENDED KANTOROVICH METHOD
KUMARI P.*, YADAV P. and SINGH A.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Guwahati, Guwahati, Assam, India
Abstract: This paper presents a closed-form analytical method to analyse the

rectangular composite plate with an arbitrary boundary condition at all edges. A mixed
formulation is used to formulate the governing equation. Using the basic equation of
equilibrium and plate constitutive relation, a set of 16 equation are formulated in the
weak form. Two sets of ordinary differential equations are obtained using the extended
Kantorovich method. A single-term (n=1) EKM solution yields reasonably good
results for 2D plate/3D plate problems. In this study, the numerical results are
presented using the single-term solution and its convergence is achieved in two
iterations. The EKM solution is computationally efficient not only for levy-type
boundary condition plate but also show excellent accuracy for the arbitrary boundary
conditions. As the span-to-thickness ratio increases, the percentage error value
decreases.
Keywords: Laminate composites; Kantorovich method; Analytical, Zigzag
INTRODUCTION boundary conditions can provide a real

Laminated structures are extensively used in picture of corner effect and boundary layer
the field of lightweight construction and effect. In this direction, the solution can be
aerospace engineering. Due to the presence obtained through Ritz/Galerkin methods
of material and geometric discontinuities at [Reddy, 2006] but the solution accuracy and
the boundaries in these laminated structures, convergence depend upon the initial choice
stress concentration occurs near the of the functions. These limitations can be
arbitrarily supported edges [Horgan, 1989]. eliminated by using extended Kantorovich
For practical design, analysis 2D laminate method which was initially proposed by Kerr
theories are preferred due to their simplicity (1966). Kerr and Alexander [1968] proved
and applicability over a wide range. A large it’s efficiency by conducting stress analysis
number of 2D models have been presented of a clamped rectangular plate. Since then it
for analysing the laminated plate structures, a has been applied to bending, vibration and
comprehensive review of which is available buckling of rectangular plates, circular plates,
in [Kapuria et al. 2010]. Recently, Levy-type sector plates and curved panel [Kapuria and
solution for laminated plates using the Kumari, 2011]. Most of the research work are
advanced Zigzag theory is presented by conducted using displacement based
Kumari and Kapuria (2011) under static formulation using CLT, FSDT and TOT
bending. But the analytical solution of theory. The mixed formulation approach
laminated plates with all edges arbitrary ensures the same order of accuracy for all
field variable than displacement based
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: kpmech@iitg.ernet.in 75

Kumari et al.
solutions. As per the author’s knowledge, mid-surface of the plate. The plate is
there is no solution exist for an orthotropic subjected to arbitrary boundary conditions
rectangular plate with arbitrary boundary with all the edges having different types of
condition using zig-zag theory. In this support. Transverse deflection and in-plane
paper, a closed-form analytical solution for displacements u x and u y are expressed as
rectangular composite plate with an arbitrary (Kumari and Kapuria, 2011)
boundary condition at all edges is presented
w( x, y, z)  w0 ( x, y); (1)
here.
u( x, y, z)  u0 ( x, y)  zw 0d ( x, y)  R k ( z) 0 ( x, y)for zk 1  z  zk (2)
THEORETICAL FORMULATION where
Consider a laminated rectangular plate u 0 =[u 0 x u 0 y ]; w0 d =[w 0, x w 0, y ]; 0 =[ 0 x  0 y ]
(Figure 1) of total thickness h, made of L and Rk(z) is 2x2 matrix dependent on
perfectly bonded layers of cross-ply material properties. Using the plate constitute
composite materials. The composite material equation and governing equilibrium equation
is orthotropic with respect to the principal of plate, weak form of governing equations is
material directions x1, x2 and x3, where the expressed as:
plane of symmetry x1-x2 is parallel to the
  [( A
a b
u
21 0 x , x  A22u0 y , y  A24 w0,xx  A25 w0, yy  A27 0x ,x  A2,10 0 y , y  N y ) N y
( A33 (u0x , y  u0y ,x )  2 A36 w0,xy  A38 0x , y  A39 0 y ,x  N xy ) N xy
( A83 (u0x , y  u0 y ,x )  2 A86 w0,xy  A88 0x , y  A89 0 y ,x  Pyx ) Pyx (w0, y  [w0, y ]) w0, y
( A10,1u0x ,x  A10,2u0 y , y  A10,4 w0,xx  A10,5 w0, yy  A10,7 0x ,x  A10,10 0 y , y  Py ) Py (3)
( A51u0x ,x  A52u0 y , y  A54 w0,xx  A55 w0, yy  A57 0x ,x  A5,10 0 y , y  M y ) M y ( N x, x  N xy , y ) u0x
(M xx, xx  (Vy  M xy , x ), y  pz ) w0 ( Pxy , x  Py , y  Qy ) 0 y (w0,x  [w0,x ]) w0,x ( N xy , x  N y , y ) u0 y
( Px, x  Pyx, y  Qx ) 0x ( A11u0  A12u0  A14 w0,  A15 w0,  A17 0  A1,10 0  N x ) N x
x ,x y,y xx yy x ,x y,y
( A41u0x ,x  A42u0 y , y  A44 w0,xx  A45 w0, yy  A47 0x ,x  A4,10 0 y , y  M x ) M x

( A71u0x ,x  A72u0 y , y  A74 w0,xx  A75 w0, yy  A77 0x ,x  A7,10 0 y , y  Px ) Px ]dydx  0
The additional equations any one of them at time is used for solution as follows:
  (M
a b x, x  (Vx  M xy , y )  2 A63 (u0x , yy  u0 y ,xy )  4 A66 w0,xyy  2 A68 0x , yy  2 A69 0 y ,xy ) (Vx  M xy , y )dydx  0
  (M
a b y, y  (Vy  M xy , x )  2 A63 (u0x ,xy  u0 y ,xx )  4 A66 w0,xxy  2 A68 0x ,xy  2 A69 0 y ,xx ) (Vy  M xy , x )dydx  0
Out of which, one is used as primary variable Depending upon boundary condition, at
and other is calculated after the solution. particular direction (x or y), maximum 6
Total we have 17 equations out of which 16 variables at one edge can be prescribed. For
will be used for obtaining solution. The example along x axis (0, a), maximum 12
boundary variables specified at particular variables can be prescribed, there we can
edge. solve only 12 ODE equation at a time.
u0 n / N n , u0 s / N ns , w0 / (Vn  M ns , s )
w0,n / M n , 0 n / Pn , 0 s / Pns
76
Two-Dimensional Static Analysis of Composite Plate Subjected to Arbitrary Boundary Conditions using Extended
Kantorovich Method
EXTENDED KANTOROVICH individually. This results in the following set

SOLUTION of 16 differential-algebraic equations for  gl
The solution of the field variables, ˆ ˆ Q
MG,2  AG  AG (7)
p
Xm  [u0 ,u0 , w0 , w0 , w0 , 0 x , 0 y , N x , N y , N xy ,
x y ,x ,y ˆ  MG  AG where M, A, A
KG ˆ ,K,M, A
,ξ 2
(Vx  M xy , y ) / (Vy  M xy , x )], M x , M y , Px , Py , Pxy ] T
and Q p are 12 12 , 12 12 , 12  4 , 4  4 ,

is assumed in terms of the products of two
separable functions in the two independent 4 12 , 4 12 and 12 1 matrices.
variables 1 and  2 . The solution of the l th These set of equations can be solved by
th
standard procedure given in (Kapuria and
variable X l of X or the k layer takes the Kumari, 2011)
following form independent variables 1 and
SECOND ITERATION STEP
 2 . The solution of the l variable X l of X
th
Now that gl ( 2 ) have been obtained in the
for the k th layer takes the following form:
previous step, these are considered as known,
X ( ,  )  f ( ) g ( )for l  1, 2,16 (4)
l 1 2 l 1 l 2 and new estimates of fl (1 ) are determined.
wherein fl (1 ) and gl ( 2 ) are unknown
In this case, the variation  X i is obtained as
univariate functions of 1  x / a and
 X l   fl (1 ) gl (2 ), l  1, 2,16 (8)
2  y / b to be determined iteratively, Similarly fl (1 ) are divided into two groups
satisfying all homogenous boundary F which contains 12 variables that appear in
conditions. The repeated index l does not boundary conditions at x= 0, 1 and remaining
mean summation here. The functions are
four variable under F̂ . Substituting equation
valid for all layers.
(9) into the governing equations, integrating
FIRST ITERATION STEP over  2 direction and considering that the
In this step, functions fl (1 ) are assumed, for variations  fl are arbitrary, the coefficients
which the variation  X i is obtained as of  fl (l  1,,16;) are equated to zero

individually. This results in the following set
 X l  fl (1 ) gl , l  1, 2,16 (5)
of 16 differential-algebraic equations for  fl
Functions gl ( 2 ) are partitioned into a
NF,1  BF  BF  Pm ; LF  NF,1  BF (9)
column vector G of those twelve variables
Eq. (9) is solved by same procedure as Eq.
that appear in the boundary conditions
(7).
(y=0,b) and a column vector Ĝ consisting of
the remaining four variables:
G  [ g1, g2 , g3 , g5 , g6 , g7 , g9 , g10 , g12 , g14 , g16 , g17 ]
ˆ  [g g ,g ,g ]
G (6)
4, 8 13 15
Substituting Eq. (5) into the governing Eq.

(3), integrating over 1 direction and
considering that the variations  gl are
arbitrary, The coefficients of Figure1. Geometry of laminated plate
 gl (l  1,,16;) are equated to zero
77
Kumari et al.
NUMERICAL RESULTS of span-to-thickness ratio S=5, 10 and 20.

The obtained results are compared with the
A solution for the plates with all edges
Levy solution (SSFF) and for CCCF 3D FE
having arbitrary boundary conditions are
solution (ABAQUS). It is remarkable that
presented in this section. For study, the
one term solution is in good agreement with
composite plate made of graphite-epoxy
3D FE results. As the span to thickness ratio
(Gr/Ep) with layup (0/90/90/0) is considered
increases the percentage error value
(Kumari and Kapuria, 2011). The results are
decreases. There is more error near the
nondimensionalised with S=a/h and Y0=6.9
clamped support due to boundary layer
GPa as follows: w  100wY0 / p0 hS 4
effect. It has been verified in earlier study
( x ,  y ,  xy )  ( x ,  y ,10 xy ) / p0 S 2 . Typical that two-term solution will capture this
results are obtained for two set of boundary boundary layer effect.
conditions (SSFF and CCCF) for three values
Kumari P and Kapuria S 2011 Boundary

CONCLUSIONS
layer effects in rectangular cross-ply
First time, a closed-form analytical solution Levy-type plates using zigzag theory
for all edges arbitrary supported rectangular ZAMM 91(7) 565-580.
composite plate is presented using the Reddy J N 2006 Theory and Analysis of
efficient zig-zag theory. One-term EKM Elastic Plates and Shells CRC press.
results predicts the deflection and stress very Kerr A D 1966 An extension of the
well except at very near to clamped support. Kantorovich method DTIC Document.
This issue can be solved by using multi-term Kerr A D and H Alexander 1968 An
application of the extended Kantorovich
solution.
method to the stress analysis of a
clamped rectangular plate Acta
REFERENCES Mechanica 6(2-3) 180-196.
Horgan C O 1989 Recent Developments Kapuria S and Kumari P 2011 Extended
Concerning Saint-Venant’s Principle: An Kantorovich method for three-
Update Applied Mechanics Reviews dimensional elasticity solution of
42(11) 295-303. laminated composite structures in
Kapuria S Kumari P and Nath J K 2010 cylindrical bending Journal of Applied
Efficient modeling of smart piezoelectric Mechanics 78(6) 061004-061004
composite laminates- A Review Acta
Mechanica 214(1-2) 31-48.
78
ICCMS2016
FINITE ELEMENTMODELLING OF FRP COMPOSITE JOINTS

CONSIDERING BOLT TORQUE
MANDAL B. and CHAKRABARTI B.*
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee India.
Abstract: Three-dimensional finite element models have been developed for the
analysis of single-lap single-bolt and double-lap multi-bolt composite joints using
finite element code ABAQUS. Solid brick element has been used to model the joints.
The present finite element model has been validated by comparing the load-
displacement behaviour and the surface strains with numerical and experimental
results available in literatures. The effects of element types and variation in mesh
density have been studied. The effect of including the grip area has also been studied.
A parametric study has been performed considering different values of bolt torque in
each bolt of the double-lap multi-bolt composite joint.
Keywords: Finite element analysis; Laminated composite; Bolted joint; Bolt

tension; Joint stiffness.
INTRODUCTION of bolt-hole clearance on the structural

Bolted joints are used in several fiber behaviour of composite bolted joints
reinforced plastic structures due to it’s McCarthy et al. (2002) presented an
simplicity during installation and ease in experimental study on the effects of variable
maintenance. Joints are very critical part for bolt-hole clearance in highly torqued joints.
any structure, because initial damage Lawlor et al. (2005) performed an
generally starts from these locations which experimental study on multi-bolt, double-lap
may leads to failure of the whole structure. composite joints on load distribution, quasi-
Also, location of the joints represent week static strength and fatigue life.
points for a structure and greatly influence McCarthy et al. (2005b) developed a three
the load carrying capacity of the whole dimensional finite element model to study the
structure. Stresses and strains vary three effects of bolt–hole clearance on the
dimensionally due to several factors like bolt mechanical behaviour of bolted composite
torque, bending and tilting of the bolts etc. joints. McCarthy et al. (2005a) presented a
Therefore, a three dimensional finite element three dimensional finite element progressive
model is essential for analysing these type of damage model of multi-bolt, double-lap
structures. composite joints using ABAQUS. Gray and
In conjunction with experimental McCarthy (2011) presented a user-defined
investigations of the composite bolted joints, finite element model for large scale bolted
analytical models and finite element models structures. The study on effect of bolt torque
are available in literature.Lawlor et al. on multi-bolt composite joints is rare in
(2002)experimentally investigated the effects literature.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:anupam1965@yahoo.co.uk 79

Mandal and Chakrabarti
In this paper, 3D finite element models have have been defined, namely, (1) between
been developed for the analysis of laminated laminated plates, (2) between bolt and plate
composite bolted joints. Solid brick element holes, (3) between bolt and washer holes, (4)
available in finite element code ABAQUS between laminate and washers and (5)
has been used to model the joints. The effects between washers and bolt head/nut.The bolt
of element types and variation in mesh pre-load has been incorporated using the
density have been studied. The effect of BOLT LOAD option available in ABAQUS.
including the grip area has also been studied.
A parametric study has been performed RESULTS
considering different values of bolt torque in Joint stiffness, out-of-plane displacement,
each bolt of the double-lap multi-bolt and surface strains have been calculated for
composite joint. single-lap single-bolt and double-lap multi-
bolt composite joints. The present results are
FORMULATION compared with those obtained by McCarthy
A3D finite element model of the laminated et al. (2005b).The effect due to change in
composite bolted joint is required to model a element types and variation in mesh density
laminated composite bolted joint. Solid brick have been studied. The effect of including the
element available in ABAQUS has been used grip area has also been studied. A parametric
to develop the three dimensional FE model. study has been performed for the double-lap
For the joint portion of the plate near the multi-bolt composite joint considering
bolt-hole, finer meshing is provided as shown different values of bolt torque in each bolt.
in Figure 1.The mesh size has gradually The joint geometry considered for the single-
became coarser away from the hole to match lap single-bolt joint is shown in Figure 2. The
with the remaining parts of the plate, carbon/epoxy material (HTA/6376) with
modelled with coarser mesh size. unidirectional material properties (Table 1)
has been used for the laminated plates as
described in McCarthy et al. (2005b). Two
different lamination schemes have been
considered: (i) quasi-isotropic with [45/0/-
45/90]5s lay-ups, (ii) zero-dominated with
[(45/02/-45/90)345/02/-45/0]s lay-ups.
Figure 1. Finite element model of a

single-lap single-bolt composite joint.
In ABAQUS the contact between different

components have been defined by master- Figure 2. Geometry of the single-lap
slave algorithm. Stiffer materials are defined single-bolt composite joint.
as master surface. Forthesingle-lap single-
bolt joint shown in Figure 1, five contacts
80
Finite Element Modelling of FRP Composite Joints considering Bolt Torque
Titanium bolts with nominal diameter 8 mm torque which represents a ‘finger-tight’

and steel nuts together with steel washers condition. A bolt pre-stress of magnitude 7.2
have been used. The isotropic material MPa was applied for this 0.5 N-m torque as
properties used for titanium bolt and steel suggested by McCarthy et al. (2005b).
washers are: Eb= 110 GPa, νb= 0.29 for the
bolt and Ew= 210 GPa, νw= 0.3 for the
washers. The bolt was subjected to 0.5 N-m
Table 1. Unidirectional material properties of carbon/epoxy material (HTA/6376).

E11(GPa) E22 (GPa) E33(GPa) G12 (GPa) G13 (GPa) G23 (GPa) ν12 ν13 ν23
140 10 10 5.2 5.2 3.9 0.3 0.3 0.5
The joint stiffness and maximum out-of- The plot of out-of-plane displacements along
plane displacement obtained from the present edge 1 obtained from present analysis and
analysis considering quasi-isotropic layup are available in literature are presented in Figure
compared with the results reported in 3.The results for the validation purpose have
McCarthy et al. (2005b) in Table 2. The been generated using eight nodded C3D8R
results match quite well. elements. The variation in results due to
change in element type will also be reported
Table 2. Joint stiffness (kN/mm) and in full length paper. The effect of modelling
maximum out-of-plane displacement the grip area has also been studied.
(mm)of the composite joint. The joint geometry considered for the
double-lap multi-bolt joint is shown in Figure
Present McCarthy et 4. The double-lap multi-bolt joint consists of
al. (2005b) three bolts with 36 mm center to center
Joint stiffness 31.62 31.5 distance.
Maximum out-of- 0.49 0.47

plane displacement
Figure 4.Geometry of the double-lap multi-

bolt composite joint.
Only one fourth of the joint has been

modelled to save the computational time as
shown in Figure 5. Three type of torques
have been considered in this study as, finger-
Figure 3. Plot of out-of-plane tight torque condition with torque value 0.5
displacement of the composite joint. N-m, torque-tightened with 8 N-m torque and
16 N-m.
81
Mandal and Chakrabarti
2002 Experimental study on the effects

of clearance on single-bolt, single-shear,
composite bolted joints Journal of
Plastics, Rubber and Composites31
405–411.
Lawlor V P McCarthy M A and Stanley W F
2005 An experimental study of bolt–
hole clearance effects in double-lap,
multi-bolt composite joints Composite
Structures71 176–190.
Figure 5.Finite element model of the
double-lap multi-bolt composite joint. McCarthy C T McCarthy M A and Lawlor
VP 2005a Progressive damage analysis
The effect of torque on the mechanical
of multi-bolt composite joints with
behaviour of the bolted joint has been studied
variable bolt–hole clearances
considering different torque values. Three
Composites Part B: Engineering36 290–
different torque values have been considered
305.
and total twenty seven combinations have
been studied by applying different torque in McCarthy M A Lawlor V P Stanley W F and
each bolt. McCarthy C T 2002 Bolt-hole clearance
effects and strength criteria in single-
CONCLUSION bolt, single-lap, composite bolted joints
Composites Science and Technology62
In this paper, three-dimensional finite
1415–1431.
element models have been developed for the
analysis of single-lap single-bolt and double- McCarthy M A McCarthy C T Lawlor V P
lap multi-bolt composite joints. Solid brick and Stanley W F 2005b Three-
element available in ABAQUS has been used dimensional finite element analysis of
to model the FRP joints. The results obtained single-bolt, single-lap composite bolted
from the present finite element model has joints: part I—model development and
been validated with there results available in validation Composite Structures71 140–
literature. The effects of element types, 158.
variation in mesh density and effect of
including the grip area has been studied. A
parametric study has been performed
considering bolt torque values in each bolt
for the double-lap multi-bolt composite joint.
REFERENCES
Gray P J and McCarthy C T 2011 A highly
efficient user-defined finite element for
load distribution analysis of large-scale
bolted composite structures Composites
Science and Technology71 1517–1527.
Lawlor V P McCarthy M A and Stanley W F
82
ICCMS2016
THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS OF FUNCTIONALLY GRADED

PLATES AND OPEN CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
PUNERA D.1 and KANT T.2*
1
National Institute of Technology, Uttarakhand, India.
2
Department of Civil Engineering, Institute of Technology Bombay, India
Abstract: A higher order shear and normal deformation theory (HOSNT) is presented
to study the thermoelastic behaviour of functionally graded (FG) plates and open
cylindrical panels with diaphragm supported ends. Present theory considers the effect
of transverse shear strains as well as thickness stretching of the shell structure. A
refined thickness criterion with consideration of first power term of thickness to
radius of curvature ratio is used to extend the theory to moderately thick shells.
Material volume fraction is assumed to be following simple power law gradation in
thickness direction for elastic modulus while Poisson’s ratio is considered to be
constant throughout the thickness. Analytical solution for one dimensional heat
conduction equation is used to consider the variation of temperature through the
thickness of the shell. Principle of minimum total potential energy is used to derive
the system of equations along with necessary boundary conditions. A trigonometric
variation is assumed for displacement and thermo-mechanical loading terms which
reduces system of partial differential equations (PDEs) to ordinary differential
equations (ODEs) in terms of Fourier amplitudes. The orthogonality condition of
trigonometric functions further generates system of algebraic equations with constant
coefficients. Results for FG isotropic cylindrical panel are presented and compared
with available solutions in the literature. An excellent agreement is met with the
available solutions and present theory qualifies to be the closest to the three
dimensional (3D) solutions. Also, FG plates are considered as a special case of shell
structures and results are compared with available 3D solutions.
Keywords: HOSNT; Functionally Graded (FG) plates and shells; thermo-
mechanical.
INTRODUCTION Deficiency of homogeneous single phase

material to serve all required functions and
Shells have always been considered to be
stress concentrations in laminated
efficient structures compared to plates due to
composites, developed the understanding for
their membrane action in addition to bending
continuously graded material forms. With the
and shear behaviour. Cylindrical shells find
advances in the manufacturing processes and
application in various civil, mechanical and
increasing necessity of function specific
aerospace structures and their analysis has
materials; continuously graded or
also been a fascinating field of study.
functionally graded (FG) materials have
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tkant@civil.iitb.ac.in 83

Punera and Kant
become important to analyse. Functionally can be because of fabrication error causing

graded materials have a continuous variation internal impurity or while using as pressure
of material properties in thickness direction. vessel for volatile liquids. These moisture
Initial developments in the field of FG effects are also very similar to temperature
materials were carried by Japanese effects and they should also be analysed
researchers while studying excellent thermal carefully.
resistance required for outer core of space Present paper extends the higher order shear
structures. and normal deformation theory with through
Mathematical difficulty of three dimensional thickness temperature variation for thermal
(3D) solutions initiated the understanding of stress analysis of FG open cylindrical panels.
two dimensional (2D) shell theories, where The method uses separation of variables
thickness dimension was reduced to a surface approach to describe temperature variation
considering its small magnitude. Classical and applies Fourier coefficient determination
Love shell theory neglected transverse shear form to incorporate temperature field in
and normal strains while Naghdi improved it Navier solutions.
by including the transverse shear strains in a
simplistic manner. Further improvements in PROBLEM FORMULATION
the theory were made by including effects of Present study considers material properties
transverse shear and normal deformations for i.e. elastic moduli, thermal coefficient,
more accurate analysis and these coefficient of heat conductivity to be graded
developments were given the name ‘higher in thickness direction as per simple power
order theories’. Hilderbrand et.al. (1949) law. Poisson’s ratio is assumed constant due
were the first to start work in the field of to its small variation for metal and ceramic
higher order theories. They removed all the phases. Material property P(z) at a point, ‘z’
assumptions of Love and Naghdi shell distance away from reference (mid) surface is
theories and took a three-term Taylor series given in terms of material property at top
expansion for displacement field. surface P t and material property at bottom
The effect of temperature on FGMs is further surface of the shell P b .
essential field of study. Functionally Graded
 2z + h 
N
Materials are manufactured through heating P( z ) =

( Pt − Pb )   + Pb (1)
 2h 
and metallurgical molding methods, so they
generate residual stresses during processing N is power law index.
itself. These stresses can cause initial damage The displacement model adopted in this study
to FGM elements, affect their functioning is similar to the one introduced by Kant and
during lifetime and can also further propagate
Manjunatha (1988), with twelve middle
these damages. Secondly most of the times
surface parameters and considering
these FGMs are used as thermal barrier and
transverse shear and normal strain effects.
other high temperature environments. These
all factors demand for a precise and u ≈ u0 + zθ1 + z 2u0* + z 3θ1*
satisfactory analysis of FGM shells under v ≈ v0 + zθ 2 + z 2 v0* + z 3θ 2* (2)
temperature loadings. Similar to the
w ≈ w0 + zθ3 + z w + z θ
2 * 3 *
temperature conditions, many a times 0 3
functionally graded materials can generate Small strain and small displacement
moisture potential within their structure. This relationship in curvilinear coordinates with
84
Thermal Stress Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates and Open Cylindrical Shells
NT = { N1T , N 2T , AT , M 1T , M 2T , BT , P1T , P2T , DT , C1T , C2T }

T
material constitutive relation for isotropic
system, are expressed to further use
The temperature terms can be described as
minimum potential energy principle. System following.
of partial differential equations in terms of
 z
displacement parameters is derived. One of ( N1T=
, M 1T , P1T , C1T ) ∫ (1, z , z 2 , z 3 ) 1 +  Q1 j α j Tdz
 R
the important part of present study is the
relaxed thickness criteria which considers (N T
2 , M 2T , P2T , C2T ) = ∫ (1, z , z 2 , z 3 ) Q2 j α j Tdz
 z
2
 h 
  << 1 , instead of the conventional ( A=
, B , D ) ∫ (1, z , z ) 1 +  Q
T T T
 R
2
3j α j Tdz
 Rmin 
(4)
 h 
approach of taking   << 1 . Where Q ij refers to coefficient of compliance
 Rmin  matrix, α i denote coefficient of thermal
Stress resultants can be expressed in expansion and T is the thermal variation
simplified manner for thermal effect through the thickness.
inclusion.
SOLUTION APPROACH
N   FN 0 0  ε   NT  The set of above thermal stress resultants
  0    
= N ij   FIS 0  γ ij  − 0  (3) contribute to non-homogeneous part of
  FTS  γ iz  0 
Qi   0 0 partial derivative equations with
displacement parameters as dependent
Here N represents all normal stress resultants
variables. Separation of variables approach
and couples, N ij represents in-surface shear
can be applied to convert given PDEs to
stress resultants and couples and Qi ordinary differential equations assuming
represents transverse shear stress resultants double trigonometric series solution for
and couples. Following the similar displacement parameters. With these simply
representation FN denotes rigidity matrix for supported boundary conditions are also
normal stress resultants/ couples; FIS denotes satisfied. Non homogeneous terms i.e.
external loading and temperature change are
in-surface shear stress resultants/couples
also expressed in double trigonometric series
while FTS denotes transverse shear stress
following eigen function expansion approach.
resultants/couples. NT represent contribution ∞ ∞
of thermal change on the constitutive model. T = ∑∑ (T ( z )) mn sin α m x sin β nφ (5)
=
m 1=
n 1
N = { N1 , N 2 , A, M 1 , M 2 , B, P1 , P2 , D, C1 , C2 }
T
,
Temperature distribution through thickness is
ε = {ε10 , ε 20 , ε 30 , κ1 , κ 2 , κ 3 , ε1* , ε 2* , ε 3* , κ1* , κ 2* , κ 3*}

T derived from solving one dimensional heat
conduction equation and is expressed as:
N ij = { N12 , N 21 , M 12 , M 21 , P12 , P21 , C12 , C21}
T
, h
Tt − Tb dξ
γ ij = {γ 120 , λ120 , χ12 , κ12 , γ 12* , λ12* , χ12* , κ12* }
T 2
T ( z=
) Tt − h ∫ λ (ξ ) (6)
Qi = {Q1 , Q2 , S1 , S 2 , T1 , T2 , J1 , J 2 }
T 2 z
dz
∫ λ ( z)
,
γ iz = {ε130 , ε 230 , κ13 , κ 23 , ε13* , ε 23* , κ13* , κ 23* }

T h
−
2
85
Punera and Kant
Hereλ (z) denotes coefficient of thermal direction following power law.

conductivity and it is also graded in thickness
Table 1. Thermo-mechanical Analysis of FG Square Plates (N=2)
Pure Thermal u w
L ×10−6 L ×10−6
Bottom Middle Top Bottom Middle Top
L/h= 3D 0.08492 -0.7862 -1.699 5.522 5.635 6.021
10
Present 0.04813 -0.82684 -1.74455 5.53719 5.65856 6.06212
NUMERICAL PROBLEM REFERENCES

A functionally graded plate with uniform Hildebrand F B Reissner E Thomas G B 1949
thermal load on the top surface is studied. Note on the foundations of the theory of
Results are compared with 3D solutions small displacements of orthotropic
given by Reddy and Chen and a good shells National Advisory Comm. Aero.
agreement is obtained even for general power (NACA) Tech. Note No 1833.
law gradation instead of Mori-Tanaka Kant T Manjunatha B S 1988 An
gradation used in reference paper. unsymmetric FRC laminate C0 finite
Normalized results are given in table 1. element model with 12 degrees of
freedom per node Engineering
Computations 5(4)300-308.
Love A E H 1888 On the small free
vibrations and deformations of thin
elastic shells Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc.17A
491-546.
Naghdi P M 1956 A survey of recent
progress in theory of elastic shells
ASME J Applied Mechanics Rev
9(9)365-388.
Figure1. Temperature Distribution
Through Thickness (N=2) Reddy J N Cheng Z Q 2001 Three-
dimensional Thermomechanical
CONCLUSION Deformations of Functionally Graded
Present theory accounts for transverse shear Rectangular Plates Eur. J. Mech
strains and transverse normal strains. The A/Solids 20 841-855.
results obtained from the present formulation
show good agreement with the results
available in literature. The difficulty of 3D
solutions reinforce the requirement of present
solution technique which is easy to apply and
precise in results.
86
ICCMS2016
BENDING AND BUCKLING ANALYSES OF COMPOSITE

LAMINATES WITH AND WITHOUT PRESENCE OF DAMAGE AND
ITS PASSIVE CONTROL WITH OPTIMIZED PIEZOELECTRIC PATCH
LOCATION
MAITI D. K.* and SREEHARI V. M.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT, Kharagpur, WB, India.
Abstract: This work presents an efficient technique to enhance the bending and
buckling characteristics of a smart composite plate. This paper discusses about the
employment of piezoelectric fibre composite patches (PFCP) in their optimized
location using unified particle swarm optimization (UPSO) for enhancing the
performance and thereby reducing the effects of internal flaws. A finite element
formulation based on Inverse Hyperbolic Shear Deformation Theory (IHSDT) for
handling bending and buckling analysis of a smart composite plate is used in the
present work. The obtained results are matched with those existing in the literature
and various parametric studies are performed. In addition to the best performance,
reduction in weight of piezoelectric material is obtained as we employ a segmented
piezo patch to overcome the degradation in buckling strength due to damage in a
composite plate, which indeed addresses the design issues.
Keywords: Composite plate; Finite element method; Piezoelectric fibre
composites; Optimization.
INTRODUCTION manufacturing, and physical incorporation

Researchers have a keen interest in the area into structures are currently going on. Some
of smart structures in recent years. The main advantages of AFCs over monolithic ceramic
reasons behind it are limitations in weight, actuators are conformability to curved
space, and positioning in many applications. surfaces, high performance,
Active Fiber Composites (AFCs) was made manufacturability, increased robustness to
from the researches at MIT in 1992. AFCs damage, etc. Specific strength and directional
contain PZT (lead zirconatetitanate) fibers sensitivity of fine ceramic fibers are higher
and epoxy resin. For the purpose of poling than monolithic materials. These
and to direct the electric field along the characteristics of AFCs make them
longitudinally oriented PZT fibers, interesting components for structural control
interdigitated electrodes (IDEs) are used. applications in various fields. A detailed
Understanding the superiorities of PFC study on AFC properties can be seen in
material to existing actuators PFCs became a literature [Bent, 1997].But, some weaknesses
significant focus of a number of researchers. may arise in their application, say, when
Broad elementary research into various composite structure experiences large
aspects of AFCs like modelling, deformation and/or the surface of the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dkmaiti@aero.iitkgp.ernet.in 87

Maiti and Sreehari
composite structure is geometrically in the above displacement field, u0, v0and w0

unconformable. In such cases fibers may are the midplane displacements while θx, θy
break (because they are thin, brittle and are the shear displacements.
continuous piezoelectric). Subsequently it The electric potential field of the
will affect the actuation capability of piezoelectric patches are assumed to be given
actuator. So an effective method is to use by:
these piezoelectric fibre actuators in the form
of patch instead of complete layer. z  hk (3)
 ( x, y, z, t )  0 ( x, y, t )
hk 1  hk
Currently researchers are applying
The z co-ordinates of laminates
optimization schemes for enhancing the
corresponding to the top and bottom surface
performance of smart structures. [Correia et
of layer k relative to the midplaneare denoted
al. 2003] obtained the optimal location of
by hk and hk+1.
piezoelectric actuators (PZT) and also the
optimal fiber reinforcement angles employing By considering a parameter, the anisotropic
simulated annealing optimization method. damage is parametrically incorporated into
Finite element models using higher order the buckling formulation. This parameter is
shear deformation theories were used. essentially a representation of reduction in
Parsopoulos and Vrahatis (2002) presented a Ai - Ai*
i  (4)
review of recent results concerning the Ai
Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) method. effective area and is given by
They concluded that PSO seems to be a very Where Ai* is the effective area (with unit
beneficial method and a worthy substitute in normal) after damage and i denotes the three
cases where other methods fail. Yet more orthogonal directions. For a thin plate, only
exploration is vital to completely understand Γ1 and Γ2 need to be considered. Γ1 represents
the values and limitations of this technique. the damage in the direction of the fibre while
In the present investigation, optimal locations Γ2 refers to orthogonal damage (in same
for PFCPs are found out for a composite plate plane). The effects of a region of damage are
with and without damage. introduced by the use of an idealized model
MATHEMATICALFORMULATION having a reduction in the elastic property in
the damage zone. This method which
Authors had explained the buckling of
parametrically models damage in any
composite structures earlier (Sreehari and
anisotropic material was used recently
Maiti, 2015). The chosen displacement field
[Sreehari et al., 2015] for finding the effects
for structural analysis of the piezo attached
of damage in a smart plate.
laminated composite plate is on the basis of
IHSDT given by:  rz 
 x  w, x ;  y  w, y ; g ( z )  sinh -1  
h
u ( x, y, z )  u0 ( x, y ) - z x ( x, y )   g ( z )  z  x ( x, y ) (2)
(1)  
v( x, y, z )  v0 ( x, y ) - z y ( x, y )   g ( z )  z  y ( x, y ) 
- 2r 
  
 h r 2  4 
w( x, y, z )  w0 ( x, y )
The maximum thermal buckling load is
where, computed through a Unified Particle Swarm
Optimization method. The PSO is a
population-based computation method. The
concept of bird flocking is used in developing
88
Bending and Buckling Analyses of Composite Laminates with and without Presence of Damage and its
Passive Control with Optimized Piezoelectric Patch Location
each solution and is referred to as a particle. they are near the fixed end in a cantilever
Mathematically, the positions of ith particle plate. Obviously, once the actuator patches
(xi) in a swarm of S particles is a D- are optimally placed, the effects due to
dimensional search space, provides a damage are suppressed and the bending and
candidate solution for the problem. The buckling capacity of composite laminates are
position and velocity of the particles at tth enhanced. The detailed results are omitted
iteration can be represented by xi(t) = (xi1, xi2, here for sake of brevity.
xi3, ……….., xiD) and vi(t) = (vi1, vi2, vi3…….., viD) 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
; where i  S. Motion of each particle to new 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
positions during the search process is based 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
on the previous best position of itself and the
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
best position so far found by any individual
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
of the population. Here the population and its
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
individuals are referred respectively as
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
swarm and particles. The swarm is updated
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
by velocity and position update. Algorithm
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
will lead to a converged solution after several
iterations. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 1. Optimal positioning of

piezopatches in a simply supported plate.
Presently, an optimization analyses for
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
composite plates using an UPSO algorithm
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
have been done. The governing equations are
solved by using Finite element method 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
(FEM) considering an eight noded, 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
isoparametric, quadrilateral element. A code 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
is developed for the computer 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

implementation of the finite element 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
formulation in MATLAB environment. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A (0/90/90/0) plate with piezopatches on the
top is considered. The size of PFCP is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
equivalent to size of a single element in the

Figure 2. Optimal positioning of
finite element mesh. Here we have used a piezopatches in a cantilever plate.
10*10 meshing to discretize the whole plate
and the center 4 elements are considered to CONCLUSION
have a mild damage. Figure 1 and Figure 2
For optimum designs, the structures should
show the optimal locations of 8 PFCPs for
be capable of withstanding maximum
simply supported and cantilever boundary
possible forces acting on them. Also the
conditions respectively. Even though there
structure should be able to overcome the
are a lot of locations possible for these PFCPs
effects of small damages occurring in them.
over the substrate, the locations are restricted
To enhance this capability we can use smart
for maximizing the buckling load. The
materials along with structural components in
optimized patch locations are near the central
order to make them withstand more forces
damage in a simply supported plate while
89
Maiti and Sreehari
than what they are expected to. In addition to Franco Correia V M Mota Soares C M and
other reasons, if we use segmented PFCPs Mota Soares C A 2003 Buckling
over a composite substrate considerable optimization of composite laminated
weight reduction is obtained. The present adaptive structures J Compos Struct 62
work provides the optimal placement of 315–321.
PFCP actuators. Investigations are carried out Parsopoulos K E Vrahatis M N 2002 Recent
on application of optimized piezo locations in approaches to global optimization
strengthening structures, thereby controlling problems through Particle Swarm
the deformations (due to external forces or Optimization Nat Computing 1 235-306.
caused as an effect of a flaw present in the
system) and increasing the critical buckling Sreehari V M Linju Joseph George and Maiti
load. It is observed from this work that UPSO D K 2015 Bending and buckling analysis
is a very promising optimization technique of smart composite plates with and
and can be successfully applied to find the without internal flaw using an inverse
maximized buckling loads of smart hyperbolic shear deformation theory J
structures. ComposStruct.doi:10.1016/j.compstruct.20
15.11.045
REFERENCES Sreehari V M and Maiti D K 2015 Buckling
and post buckling analysis of laminated
Bent A A 1997 Active Fiber Composites for
composite plates in hygrothermal
Structural Actuation Ph. D. Thesis,
environment using an Inverse hyperbolic
Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
shear deformation theory J Compos
Cambridge.
Struct 129 250-255.
90
ICCMS2016
STATIC RESPONSE OF WIND TURBINE BLADE UNDER ACTUAL

LOADING EFFECT
CHOUDHURY S.*, SHARMA T. and SHUKLA K. K.
Department of Applied Mechanics, MNNIT Allahabad India.
Abstract: The paper presents the static analysis of realistic wind turbine blades. A
modern 9.2m long rotor blade of NPS-100 is modelled with different order of
polynomial variation of twist throughout the span of blade. The variation of aerofoil
(NREL S821, S825 and NACA 2412) is also employed in the present work. The
actual load acting on wind turbine blade is been extracted through Blade Element
Momentum (BEM) theory. The blade models have been generated using NuMAD and
analysis is performed using FE simulation tool ANSYS.
Keywords: Realistic Wind Turbine Blade; Blade Element Momentum (BEM)
Theory; FE Simulation.
INTRODUCTION hybrid composite rotor blade made up of

glass and carbon fiber plies, having a light
The wind energy is a renewable source of
weight and analyzed it with FEM for extreme
energy available in enormous amount with
offshore wind conditions. Lee et, al., (2012)
cost benefit. Wind turbine installation has
developed an iterative procedure for FRP
made a significant technological advancement
wind turbine blades taking into account the
in the recent times with a focus on the choice
aerodynamics due to wind pressure and also
of materials and design of turbines as well as
the fluid structure interaction due to the
in the manufacturing process. Wind turbines
rotation of the aerofoil sections causing
are rotating device which extracts kinetic
changes in the wind load. [Singh et. al.,
energy from the wind and converts it to
2015]observed the effect of aerofoil and taper
useful work (mostly electricity). These
on static and dynamic response of wind
devices use both the drag and lift forces to
turbine blade for the point load acting at tip.
generate torque and subsequently generate
Hamdi et. al., (2014) studied the dynamics of
power. Among wind turbine components,
a HAWT rotor blade by combining the
blades are generally regarded as the most
classical Blade Element Momentum (BEM)
critical component. (Locke and Valencia,
theory with the FEM. Staino et. al., (2012)
2004) developed a structural finite element
used the Blade Element Momentum theory to
model for the determination of static,
find the actual load acting on the rotor and
dynamic and twisting response of a pre-
developed a new control scheme for
twisted blade (ERS-100) and compared the
suppressing the wind induced edgewise
responses of the blade for different
vibrations using actuators/active tendons
reinforcements such as e-glass unidirectional
mounted inside the blade. Koh et. al., (2016)
fibers and carbon hybrid designs. McKittrick
compared the performance of two tidal
et. al., (2001) used finite element analysis to
turbines using the BEM theory by changing
predict the static and dynamic response of the
the lift and drag coefficients for varying
AOC 15/50 blade. [Cardenas et. al., 2012]
Reynold’s numbers and using different
developed thin-walled beam finite element
correction models applied to the BEM theory.
model of a realistic wind turbine rotor blade.
In the present work, static response of wind
Cox and Echtermeyer, (2012) designed a
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:ram0213@mnnit.ac.in 91

Choudhury et al.
Figure 1: Wind turbine blade (a) NuMAD model (b) Meshed rotor blade in ANSYS
turbine blade is obtained by applying the
1.2
actual load which is computed through BEM
theory. A realistic 9.2 long rotor blade is 1 root transition body
modelled with different aerofoil and twist
Chord (m)
0.8
variation throughout the span of blade.
0.6
MODELLING & SIMULATION
0.4
Sandia National Laboratories has developed a
user friendly preprocessor software NuMAD 0.2
(Numerical Manufacturing and Design Tool),
0
which is used to model realistic three
0 Blade Length
5 (m) 10
dimensional wind turbine blades as shown in
Figure. 1(a).The external and internal
geometry, material layup and stacking
sequence are provided by NuMAD (Berg &
Resor, 2012).The output file from NuMAD is
an ANSYS code which is imported in
ANSYS to create the FEM model of the rotor
blade. The variation of material properties
along the span is also taken into account. The
material chosen for each segment is taken
from the literature (Locke and Valencia,
2004). The meshing of the rotor blade is Figure 3: Different order polynomial
created using SHELL 281 element (Figure. curves for twist variation along the span
1b). The blade is modelled as cantilever i.e.
blade element theory, the total span is
fixed at root ends and free at the tip end.
discretized into N segments. The rotor is
The realistic load acting on the wind turbine
assumed to have an infinite number of blades.
blade is complicated due to irregular shape of
A correction factor known as the Prandtl’s tip
the aerofoil and varying air pressure
loss factor is taken into account.
throughout the aerofoil along the span. Thus,
to have an estimate of the actual static load The BEM theory provides an iterative
acting on the rotor blade, a simplified theory procedure to determine the axial and
known as the Blade Element Momentum rotational induction factors. Estimation of the
(BEM) theory is implemented. The BEM induction factors allows us to compute the
theory combines the integral momentum aerodynamic forces per unit span which can
theory to the blade element theory. An be integrated throughout the span to find the
actuator disc model is considered in the load distributions. The local lift and drag
momentum theory and the flow is assumed to forces per unit span can be computed as
be steady, incompressible and laminar. In the
92
Static Response of Wind Turbine Blade under Actual Loading Effect
Figure 4: (a) Actual load acting on the rotor (b) Flap wise deformation after solution
(Hansen, 2008); tangential aerodynamic loads computed from
pL = Cl (α ) * (1 2 ) * ρVrel2 c(r ) (1) the BEM code is linearly distributed
throughout the span. The gravity load is
pD = Cd (α ) * (1 2 ) * ρV c(r )
2
(2)
rel maximum when the rotor is horizontal. The
These forces can be projected along the combination of above loads is applied to the
normal and tangential direction to the rotor rotor blade in ANSYS as shown in Figure.
plane to obtain the flap wise and edgewise 4(a).The actual loading condition causes the
aerodynamic forces. These are; rotor to bend mainly in the flap wise direction
=pN pL cos φ + pD sin φ (2) as shown in Figure. 4(b).Thus, for the design
=pT pL sin φ − pD cos φ (4) of wind turbines, the aerofoils and twist
orders which give the minimum flap wise
Same aerofoil profile and twist variation is deformations are considered to be better.
implemented in BEM code, as used in Maximum deformations for S821 aerofoil
modelling to compute the actual aerodynamic with different order of twist variations is
loads acting on rotor blade. given in Table 2. It has been observed that
the linear twist distribution for the aerofoils
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION showed better results compared to the other
A realistic 9.2 m long NPS-100 rotor blade order of twist variations for S821 profile.
which uses NREL S821 aerofoil with loading Furthermore, the blade having constant twist
at tip is chosen as a case study for validation. throughout the span produces least tangential
The span wise chord variation is shown in force and thus least power. Also, the flap
Figure.2.The results obtained show a good wise deformations for the constant twist are
agreement with the results previously somewhat higher compared to the other twist
reported in literature and are shown in Table order variations.
1.In the present work, three different
aerofoils vizS821, S825 and NACA2412 has CONCULSION
been analyzed for different order of A realistic rotor blade having 9.2m span and
polynomial for twist variations along the span different material layup along the span has
(Figure. 3)subjected to actual loading. The been modelled and analysed in ANSYS.
actual load consists of the aerodynamic (flap Different order of polynomials for twist
wise and edgewise), centrifugal and gravity variation along the span has been
loads. The centrifugal load for each blade implemented. The blades were subjected to
elements is computed from the mass distribution realistic loading computed from the BEM
for each section. The actual normal and theory. The effects of twist variation are
93
Choudhury et al.
Table 1: Validation of tip displacement

Loading UX (mm) UY (mm)
Conditions (Cardenas et. al., 2012) Present study (Cardenas et. al., 2012) Present study
Flapwise 37.2 37.938 309 311.95
Edgewise 89.6 95.111 37.2 37.714
Table 2: Maximum deformations for S821 aerofoil for different order of twist variations
Twist Variation Flapwise (mm) Edgewise (mm) Axial (mm) Twist (rad)
Constant 408.603 -3.839 4.588 0.018773
Linear 340.194 -33.089 4.231 -0.033069
Quadratic 365.879 -34.022 4.113 -0.031732
Cubic 383.7 -29.839 4.214 -0.030853
Fourth order 416.809 -23.539 4.606 -0.04277
appreciable on the maximum deformations. Koh W X M Ng E Y K 2016 Effects of
The blade with linear order of twist variation Reynolds number and different tip loss
produced lower flap wise and edge wise models on the accuracy of BEM applied to
deflection. The tangential force produced tidal turbines as compared to
with linear twist variation is also higher and experiments Ocean Engineering 111 104-
thus the blade will generate more power. The 115.
constant twist rotor produced the maximum Lee Y J Jhan Y T Chung C H 2012 Fluid–
flap wise deflection and the least tangential structure interaction of FRP wind turbine
force which is not desirable. blades under aerodynamic effect
Composites Part B: Engineering 43(5)
REFERENCES
2180-2191.
Berg J Resor B 2012 Numerical Locke J Valencia U 2004 Design studies for
manufacturing and design tool (NuMAD twist-coupled wind turbine blades Sandia
V2. 0) for wind turbine blades: User’s Report SAND2004-0522.
guide Sandia National Laboratories
Albuquerque NM Technical Report No. Mc Kittrick L R Cairns D S Mandell J
SAND2012-728. Combs D C Rabern D A Van Luchene D
V 2001 Analysis of a Composite Blade
Cardenas D Escarpita A A Elizalde H Design for the AOC 15/50 Wind Turbine
Aguirre J J Ahuett H Marzocca P Probst O Using a Finite Element Model Sandia
2012 Numerical Validation of a finite Report Sandia National Laboratories
element thin-walled beam model of a SAND 2001–1441.
composite wind turbine blade Wind
Energy 15 203-223. Singh S K Sharma T Murari V Shukla K
K2015 Effect of airfoil shape and taper
Cox K Echtermeyer A 2012 Structural design along the blade span on static and dynamic
and analysis of a 10MW wind turbine behaviour of wind turbine blades
blade Energy Procedia 24 194-201. Proceeding of 2nd Indian Conference on
Hamdi H Mrad C Hamdi A Nasri R 2014 Applied Mechanics (INCAM 2015)230-
Dynamic response of a horizontal axis 235 IIT Delhi India July 2015.
wind turbine blade under aerodynamic Staino A Basu B Nielsen S R 2012 Actuator
gravity and gyroscopic effects Applied control of edgewise vibrations in wind
Acoustics 86 154-164. turbine blades Journal of Sound and
Hansen M O L 2008 Aerodynamics of wind Vibration 331(6) 1233-1256.
turbines Earthscan Book Co 2 45-54.
94
ICCMS2016
STEEL-CONCRETE COMPOSITE STRUCTURE-

AN ADVANCED MATERIAL
SURESH SAHU
Supreme Engicons, Mumbai, India
Abstract: This paper discusses about Composite framing system consisting of steel
beams acting interactively with metal deck-concrete slab and concrete encased
composite columns, which has been as a viable alternative to the conventional steel
or reinforced concrete system in the high-rise construction. It also talks about its
advantages and construction methods. Composite structure is made with the help of
composite beams, composite slabs and composite columns which is different from
the conventional ones. To support this information some images and few examples
have been given.
Keywords: Composite beam; composite slab; composite column.
INTRODUCTION number of storeys can be added and the

Construction time of Composite Structure is
In the old era the design of a building, the
very less as compared to construction time
choice was normally between a concrete
of R.C.C which will result in appreciable
structure and a masonry structure. But the
saving in labour cost.
failure of many multi-storeyed and low-rise
R.C.C. and masonry buildings due to COMPOSITE MATERIALS
earthquake has forced the structural
engineers to look for the alternative method The most upcoming composite material in
of construction. Use of composite or hybrid India is Steel- Concrete. Both the materials
material is of particular interest, due to its are different from one another in all aspects
significant potential in improving the but they also complete one another when
overall performance through rather modest they are used together like concrete is
changes in manufacturing and efficient in compression and steel in tension,
constructional technologies. concrete encasement restrain steel against
buckling, protection against fire and
Composite materials are formed by the corrosion and steel brings ductility into the
combination of two or more materials that structure.
retain their respective characteristics when
combined together to achieve properties ADVANTAGES
(physical, chemical, etc.) that are superior to
those of individual constituents. Steel Concrete Composite structure benefits
in following ways Faster construction for
The composite construction was found to be maximum utilization of rolled and/or
more economical than Reinforced Concrete fabricated components (structural steel
Construction in ways like the total weight of members) and hence quick return of the
super structure was found to be very less for invested capital, Quality assurance of the
Composite Construction than in case of steel material , Ability to cover large
R.C.C which will result in lighter footing column free area in buildings and longer
for same number of stories in Composite span for Bridges/flyovers, better seismic
Structure or in case of equivalent footing as resistance, reduced beam depth reduces the
for Reinforced Concrete Construction, more
* Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sahu@supremeengicons.com 95

Suresh Sahu
story height and consequently the cost of Advantages of constructing in steel: High
cladding in a building and lowers the cost of ratio between bearing capacity and weight,
embankment in a flyover (due to lower prefabrication and high accuracy.
height of embankment). Cost of formwork Its disadvantages are low fire resistance and
is lower compared to RCC construction, need of higher educated personal.
Easy structural repair/ modification/
maintenance. Reductions in overall weight Comparing these two methods a
of structure and thereby reduction in combination of both presents the most
foundation costs. economic way i.e. higher bearing capacity,
higher stiffness and plastic redistribution.
These make the advantages for the
composite structures. In composite
construction the two different materials are
tied together by the use of shear studs at the
interface having lesser depth which saves
the material cost considerably. Thermal
expansion (coefficient of thermal
expansion) of both, concrete and steel being
is nearly same.
CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS
Figure 1. Typical Composite Floor
System
Figure 2. Composite Members

Figure 3. Composite Structure Members
COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
The elements that comprise a composite
Traditionally two counteracting methods of structure are Composite Beam, Composite
construction could be observed both Slab and Composite Column.
connected with special advantages but also
disadvantages worth mentioning. The most common type of composite beam
is one where a composite slab sits on top of
Advantages of Conventional concrete a Downstand beam, connected by the use of
construction method: Freedom of form and a through deck welded shear studs. This
shape, easy to handle and thermal form of construction offers a number of
resistance. advantages - the decking acts as external
Its disadvantages are time consuming reinforcement at the composite stage, and
shuttering and sensitive on tensile forces. during the construction stage as formwork
96
Steel-Concrete Composite Structure
and a working platform. It may also provide deep, in which case it is known as deep
lateral restraint to the beams during decking. Additional reinforcing bars may be
construction. Another common type of placed in the decking troughs, particularly
composite beam is one where, as with a for deep decking. The profiled decking is
traditional non-composite steel framed often designed to be continuous over two
solution, a precast concrete slab sits on top spans when acting as formwork. Composite
of the top flange of the steel beam. The slabs are normally designed to be simple
effective span range for this type of solution spanning at room temperature, but
is around 6 to 12 m, which therefore makes continuous under fire conditions.
it a competitor to a number of concrete
flooring options.
Advantages of composite beam are:
Keeping the span and loading unaltered, a
more economical steel section (in terms of
depth and weight) is adequate in composite
construction compared with conventional
non-composite construction, reduction in
beam depth and Encased steel beam sections
have improved fire resistance and corrosion. Figure 6. Re-entrant decking
Figure 7. Trapezoidal decking
Figure 4. Conventional & Innovative

composite beam
Figure 5. Types of shear connectors

Figure 8. Types of composite columns
Composite slabs comprise reinforced
concrete cast on top of profiled steel A steel-concrete composite column is a
decking, which acts as formwork during compression member, comprising either a
construction and external reinforcement at concrete encased hot-rolled steel section or
the final stage. The decking may be either a concrete filled hollow section of hot-rolled
re-entrant or trapezoidal, as shown below. steel. It is generally used as a load-bearing
Trapezoidal decking may be over 200 mm member in a composite framed structure.
97
Suresh Sahu
Advantages of Composite columns are

increased strength for a given cross
sectional dimensions. Increased stiffness
Good fire resistance, Corrosion protection in
encased columns, Erection of high rise
building in an extremely efficient manner.
Formwork is not required for concrete filled
tubular sections.
EXAMPLES
MILLENIUM TOWER, VIENNA,
AUSTRIA
Figure 10. Final Executed Building
CONCLUSION
From the above information and supporting
examples it is proved that composite
structures has more advantages in
comparison to the conventional steel or
reinforced concrete system in the high-rise
construction, in ways of economy, architecture,
functionality and service and flexibility.
REFERENCES
Panchal D R 2014 Int. Journal of
Figure 9. Final Executed Building Engineering Research and
Applications July 2014 124-138
No. of storey in the building is 55, with a
height of 202m. Ground floor area is www.steel construction.info for composite
38000sq.m and a capital expenditure is of structures.
about 145 million euro. Total time taken for Technology Information, Forecasting and
the erection was 8 months having maximum Assessment Council, Department of
speed of 2 to 2.5 storeys per week. Science and Technology website.
BHURJ KHALIFA, DUBAI
Over 45,000 m3 (58,900 cu yd) of concrete,
weighing more than 110,000 tonnes were
used to construct the concrete and steel
foundation, which features 192 piles buried
more than 50 m (164 ft) deep. Burj Khalifa's
construction will have used 330,000 m3
(431,600 cu yd) of concrete and 39,000
tonnes (43,000 ST; 38,000 LT) of steel
rebar, and construction will have taken 22
million man-hours. The amount of rebar
used for the tower is 31,400 metric tons -
laid end to end this would extend over a
quarter of the way around the world.
98
ICCMS2016
ORTHOGONAL CUTTING PROCESS MODELING OF IDEALISED

CFRPs
KUBHER S.* and GURURAJA S.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore India
Abstract: An improved finite element model (FEM) of orthogonal cutting of

Idealized carbon fiber reinforced plastics (I-CFRP) is presented in this work. I-CFRP
samples captures the heterogeneity of CFRP composites, which are prepared by
embedding carbon fiber tows at different orientations in epoxy matrix with center to
center distance of 5mm. The present numerical model aims to improve the cutting
force predictions during orthogonal cutting by considering a pressure sensitive yield
criteria, Drucker-Prager yield criteria instead of commonly used von Mises yield
criteria for matrix phase and damage model for fiber breakage. For validation, cutting
forces predictions are compared with experimental data from orthogonal experiments.
Keywords: I-CFRP; Drucker-Prager yield criteria; Orthogonal cutting
INTRODUCTION Figure 1. I-CFRP samples with

FRPs are extensively used in engineering different fiber bundle orientations
applications due to their enhanced strength, [Agarwal et al. 2015]
increased stiffness, lower weight, reduction
in production costs among other benefits NUMERICAL MODELING
[Renton, 2004]. Although FRP parts are A symmetric FE model was developed to
made to near net shape, machining, simulate the machining response using the
operations are required during assembly. To commercial FEA software,
ensure fewer part rejections and save ABAQUS/EXPLICIT [Karlsson and
production time, it is required to understand Sorensen, 2002] (see Figure 2.). The
the complex failure mechanisms during symmetry is taken along the thickness
machining and define efficient cutting direction of work piece. The FE mesh for
parameters which eliminate part damage. fiber bundles and matrix is constructed using
Typical machining damage mechanisms eight-noded linear brick elements with
include fiber breakage, matrix cracking, fiber reduced integration (C3D8R). The tool is
pull-outs & interface debonding, assumed to be a rigid surface and is
delamination, etc. constructed using three-dimensional rigid
elements (R3D4) that are constrained to a
reference point to apply tool displacement.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:sagarkrvce@gmail.com 99

Kubher and Gururaja
The Quadratic stress-based criteria was used

to model matrix damage initiation in matrix
material [Camanho, 1999, Davila, 1993]. The
damage initiation criteria is given by:
2 2 2
 < t n >   t s   tt 
  +  +  = 1 (4)
 tno   tso   tto 
Figure 2. Orthogonal machining FE The damage evolution was modeled using
model [Agarwal 2014] Benzeggagh - Kenane (BK) law
[Benzeggagh, 1996] with linear softening
MATERIAL DAMAGE MODELS
response. The fracture energy criteria is given
EPOXY DAMAGE by:
The matrix material used for FEA is assumed η
G 
to obey Drucker-Prager yield criterion [Chen, Gc =G + (G − G )  s 
c
n
c
s
c
n (5)
1988] to behave like elastic- plastic (i.e.,  Gt 
work hardening) with time-independent
response. The yield function is given by:
1
φ (σ ij ) = σ e + σ m tan α − (1 − tan α )σ c = 0 (1)
3
such that,
m −1
tan α = 3 (2)where m is expressed in
m +1
terms of yield stress in tension and
compression as:
σc
m= (3) The Drucker- Figure 4. Stress/Strain curves on
σt
compressive tests (neat resins) [Fiedler
Prager material parameters for epoxy were 2001]
evaluated using the uni-axial tension and
compression test data conducted by Fiedler et INTERFACE DEBONDING
al. shown in Figure 3. and 4. respectively. The behavior of fiber-matrix interface is
modeled using Cohesive Zone Modeling
(CZM) [Hillerborg, 1976]. The damage onset
is initiated when the stress at the interface
region reaches a critical value known as the
cohesive strength followed by damage
evolution which is based on fracture
mechanics approach i.e., energy release rate
or displacement criteria. The interface
properties are shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Interface element properties
Figure 3. Stress/Strain curves on [Camanho, 2001]
tensile tests (neat resins) (Fiedler, 2001)
tno tto = tso Gnc Gtc = Gsc
100
Orthogonal Cutting Process Modeling of Idealised CFRPs
30 MPa 40 MPa 268 N/m 1450 N/m CONLUSIONS AND FUTURE WORK
FIBER BREAKAGE In present numerical model, pressure

sensitivity in matrix material is included by
The fiber bundles were modeled as an using Drucker-Prager yield criteria to
orthotropic material. The orthotropic material simulate orthogonal machining . Preliminary
properties are shown in Table 2. The fiber cutting force predictions for matrix cracking
breakage occurring during machining process only, i.e., the tool just in contact with fiber
is modeled using a damage initiation criteria are presented for 900 fiber orientation. Figure
based on ultimate tensile strength of carbon
6.shows the comparison of cutting force
fiber bundles followed by element deletion.
between numerical predictions and
Table 2. Carbon fiber material properties experimental studies. There seems to be some
[Camanho, 2011] improvement in cutting force predictions due
to the use of pressure sensitive yield criteria
E11 E22 = E33 G12 = G13 G23 υ11 = υ13 υ23 as compared to von Mises yield criteria.
Moving ahead, the Drucker-Prager material
235 14 28 5.6 0.2 0.25
parameters will be evaluated for the material
Elastic modulus units in MPa
system used in the experimental studies. In
addition, complete cutting force predictions
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS similar to orthogonal experiments [Agarwal,
For work piece, the bottom face is rigidly 2015] for all fiber bundle orientations i.e., 00
fixed (displacements and rotations are set to , 450 , 900 and 1350 will be presented.
zero). The front and rear face is constrained
along the cutting direction. The tool
displacement along the cutting direction is
specified using the reference point with all
other displacements and rotations
constrained. The boundary conditions
similar to above is used in earlier studies
[Nayak 2004, Rao 2007, Venu 2007].Figure
5.shows the boundary conditions.
Figure 6. Cutting force comparisons
REFERENCES
ABAQUS theory manual version 6.3
Pawtucke Hibbitt Karlsson and
Sorensen Inc. 2002.
Agarwal H Amaranath A Jamthe Y Gururaja
S 2015 An Investigation of Cutting
Figure 5. Orthogonal model with Mechanisms and Strain Fields during
boundary condition (Benzeggagh 1996) Orthogonal Cutting in CFRPs
101
Kubher and Gururaja
Machining Science and Technology 19 In AIP Conference Proceddings 712

416–439. 327-331.
Agarwal H Gururaja S 2014 Modeling of Rao G Mahajan P and Bhatnagar N 2007
orthogonal cutting of Idealized FRP Micro-mechanical modeling of
composites, Proceedings of ASME 2014 machining of FRP composites–cutting
International Mechanical Engineering force analysis Composites Science and
Congress & Exposition (IMECE 2014) Technology 67(3) 579–593.
Montreal Canada 14-20. Renton W Olcott D Roeseler W Batzer R
Benzeggagh M and Kenane M 1996 Baron W and Velicki A 2004 Future of
Measurement of mixed-mode flight vehicle structures Journal of
delamination fracture toughness of Aircraft 41 986–998.
unidirectional glass/epoxy composites Venu Gopala Rao G Mahajan P and
with mixed-mode bending apparatus Bhatnagar N 2007 Machining of UD-15
Composites Science and Technology GFRP composites chip formation
56(4) 439–449. mechanism Composites Science and
Camanho P and de Moura M 2001 Technology 67(11) 2271–2281.
Simulation of interlaminar damage
using decohesion elements NOMENCLATURE
SIMULATION 501 1214.
Gnc Critical Fracture energy in normal
Camanho P and Matthews F 1999 direction (Mode I)
Delamination onset prediction in
Gsc Critical Fracture energy in first shear
mechanically fastened joints in
direction (Mode II)
composite laminates Journal of
Composite Materials 33(10)906–927. Gtc Critical Fracture energy in second
shear direction (ModeII)
Chen W F Han D J 1988 Plasticity for
structural engineers Springer-Verlag tno Normal Interfacial Strength
New York Inc 94-95.
tso Shear Interfacial Strength in 1-
Davila C G and Johnson E R 1993 Analysis direction
of delamination initiation in postbuckled
dropped-ply laminates AIAA journal tto Shear Interfacial Strength in 2-
31(4) 721–727. direction
Fiedler B Hojo M Ochiai S Schulte K and β Cohesive parameter used in B-K law
Ando M 2001 Failure behavior of an
σe von Mises equivalent stress
epoxy matrix under different kinds of
static loading Composites Science and σm Hydrostatic stress
Technology 61(11)1615–1624.
Hillerborg A Modéer M and Petersson P-E σc Compressive yield strength
1976 Analysis of crack formation and
σt Tensile yield strength
crack growth in concrete by means of
fracture mechanics and finite elements, α Pressure sensitivity index
Cement and concrete research 6(6)
773–781.
Nayak D Singh I Bhatnagar N and Mahajan P
2004 An analysis of machining induced
damages in FRP composites: a
micromechnics finite element approach
102
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDIES ON FLANGE BUCKLING BEHAVIOUR OF FRP

BOX-BEAMS
KASIVISWANATHAN M. and UPADHYAY. A.
Department of civil engineering, IIT Roorkee, India
Abstract: The inherent high specific strength and stiffness of FRP increased their
application in various engineering fields. Further, the tailoring ability of physical and
mechanical properties helps to meet the specific design requirements. Meantime, the box-
beam applications also have been increased due to their high torsional rigidity. The
combination of FRP and box-beam is ideal for lightweight bridges. But, being a thin-
walled structure, stability is governing the design. In the FRP box-beam two type of
buckling is possible, i.e. Flange and web. To study the flange buckling, a lot of
researchers have applied the uniform compression load over the panel edges. But, when
panels become a part of the beam the state of stress will be changed which finally affect
the buckling behaviour. The number of works carried out for flange buckling behaviour
as a part of beam is meager. In this paper, flange buckling behaviour of simply supported
box-beams subjected to lateral load has been studied with the help of finite element tool
‘ANSYS 15’ by changing geometry and fiber orientation of various elements. Attempts
are made to extract various trends which are affecting the buckling behaviour; it will be
helpful to the designer.
Keywords: Flange-buckling; FRP box-beam; Stability problem.
INTRODUCTION box beam increased the performance of

bridges, but being a thin-walled structure the
Fiber reinforced plastics (FRP) applications
design is often governed by stability.
have been increased in the various engineering
Although, having many advantages, FRP has
fields i.e. civil, aerospace and marine because
an orthotropic nature because it is fabricated
of their high strength, stiffness, corrosion
by stacking a number of lamina with various
resistance and design flexibility. The main
orientations in the thickness direction, and it
advantage of FRP is elastic tailoring; it helps to
make the design very involved. The study
achieve the specific design requirements by
related with buckling of FRP plate and various
selecting appropriate fiber orientation, ply
FRP shapes already attracted many researchers
stacking sequence and blending material.
attention. The proposed mathematical model
While, box beam applications also have
tends to be implicit and computationally
increased in the various engineering fields,
expensive. Some explicit and simple model
especially in civil and aerospace due to their
also proposed by the researchers, but those are
inherent high torsional rigidity and aesthetic
limited to particular loading and boundary
appearance. The combination of both FRP and
conditions.
____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: kasivdce@iitr.ac.in 103

Kasiviswanathan and Upadhyay
The discrete plate method is the simplest As aforementioned many researchers have
approach to find the local buckling strength of studied the buckling of plates with various
various FRP shapes. In that, various element of unloaded edge boundary restraints and
FRP shapes treated as an individual plate and different type of load to understand the
analyzed with idealized and appropriate buckling behaviour of various FRP shapes.
boundary restraints from the adjacent plate. Some of them have studied the flange buckling
Under plate loaded by linearly varying in-plane behaviour of various FRP shapes with
load, Lopatin and Morozov (2011) studied consideration of rotational restraints, but they
with one unloaded edge is free and other is treated flange and web element as an
clamped. Zhong and Gu (2007) studied with individual plate, but when it is a part of
unloaded edges are clamped and others are structure the state of stress will be changed and
simply supported. Qiao and Shan (2005) it will affect the buckling behaviour. In this
studied various boundary restraint of unloaded paper, parametric study based on finite element
edges rotationally restraint (RR) and analysis has been conducted by changing the
rotationally free (RF) under uniform geometry and fiber orientation of various
compression load. Qiao et al. (2001) studied elements. In addition, attempt is made to
various boundary and elastic restraint extract various trends which are affecting the
condition under uniform compression and in- buckling behaviour of beam, it will helpful to
plane shear load. Housner and Stein (1975) the designer.
have studied the simply supported and clamped
plate under shear and compression load. They MODEL GEOMETRY
developed the buckling equation by using In this step, geometry of various element of
newly developed trigonometric finite- box-beam has been defined. The length and
difference method. Stroud and Agranoff (1976) cross section details of box beam as shown in
have studied the hat-stiffened and corrugated Figure 1.
panel subjected to longitudinal compression
and shear loading. Kollar (2003) developed the
explicit closed-form solutions to obtain the
buckling strength of various FRP shapes based
on proposed formula by past researchers under
axial load and bending. Kuehn et al. (2014)
have developed the analytical model to analyze Figure 1. Schematic view of the analyzed
various FRP shapes under compressive load girders
with consideration of shear deformation
effects. The developed model is based on first- NEED FOR STUDY
order shear deformation theory. They
The study of box-beam gives an opportunities
employed classical Reissner-Mindlin plate
to study the buckling behaviour of flange of
theory to analyze various FRP shapes.
the beam under true state of stress of box
Additionally, they used Rayleigh-Ritz method
beams. The simulation of these things is not so
to find the web and flange buckling load. Liu
easy in isolated plate study.
et al. (2014) have developed the analytical
In present study geometry of box-beam as well
model for plate with rotational restraint unload
as fiber orientation in various elements are
edge boundary restraints under combined in-
varied. During these studies geometrical
plane shear and linearly varying load. The
parameters of box-beam i.e. width and
influence of rotational restraint on buckling
thickness are varied along with variation of
load is also shown with the help of parametric
fiber orientation in flange and webs. Three
studies.
104
Numerical Studies on Flange Buckling Behaviour of FRP Box-Beams
fiber orientation 0°, ±45° and 90° are flexural stiffness of the flange. Further, there is
considered to cover extreme cases of a major increase in buckling stress where
orthotrophy. flange fiber orientation kept as constant and
web fiber orientation is increased from 0° to
EFFECT OF FIBER ORIENTATION 90°. This shows the effect of rotational
Fiber orientation plays very significant role in restraint offered by web to flange. Web with
deciding strength and stiffnesses properties of 90° fiber orientation gives better rotational
the laminate. Buckling depends on stiffness restraint and as a result major increase in
parameters so it gets affected substantially by buckling stress can be observed.
[VALUE [VALUE
change of fiber orientation in flange of box
Web fiber orientation (θw)

Flange buckling stress (σb,f)
] ]
beams. Further, the state of stress in various
elements will also be affected by change in 8.0
fiber orientation in various elements of box- 6.0
[VALUE
beam and buckling stress depends on the state ]
of stress of the element. The variation in the 4.0
state of stress of FRP box-beam with change in 2.0
fiber orientation of flange of the beam is
shown in Figure.2, considerable variation in 0.0 0
state of stress can be observed. In Figure.2, 0 45 90

two extreme fiber orientation i.e. 0° and 90°
are considered in flange. While fiber Flange fiber orientation (θf)
orientation in flange (90°) and over all
geometry are kept as constant Figure.3, shows Figure 3.Flange buckling stress (σ b,f )
the effect of web and flange fiber orientations versus flange fiber orientation (θ f ) for
on buckling stress of flange of FRP box- different web orientation (θ w )
beams.
a) b)
θw - 0º
4.50 3.96
Flange buckling stress
bf*tw
3.50 3.30
3.00
2.50 3.05
(σb,f)
2.50
1.50
2.14
0 45 90
Flange fiber orientation (θf)
Figure 4. Buckling stress (σ b,f ) versus

Figure 2. Contour plot - X axis - flange fiber orientation (θ f ) for different
Bending Stress variation: θ w - a) 0°; b) slenderness ratio of flange by web (δ)
90°
It can be observed that change in fiber EFFECT OF GEOMETRY
orientation of flange from 0° to 90° brings a
substantial increase in buckling stress as the For δ =2.14, change in fiber orientation of
compression buckling load of panels is very flange from 0° to 90°, increases buckling stress
sensitive to both transverse and longitudinal slightly however for δ=3, change in fiber
orientation brings considerable change in
105
Kasiviswanathan and Upadhyay
buckling stress. Further, it shows that with compression and shear panels NASA TN
increase in δ buckling stress increases due to D-7996.
rotational restraint provided by web to flange. Stroud W J and Agranoff N 1976 Minimum-
Figure. 4, shows the influence of slenderness mass design of filamentary composite
of flange/web ratio (δ). panels under combined loads: design
procedure based on simplified buckling
CONCLUSION
equations NASA TN D-8257.
In the present work web buckling behaviour of
Kollar LP 2003 Local buckling of fiber
FRP box-beam was studied. Numerical studies
reinforced plastic composite structural
carried out by using ‘ANSYS 15’. True state of
members with open and closed Cross
stress and boundary conditions of web of FRP
Sections Journal of structural
box-beams can be simulated easily by this
engineering 129 1503-1513.
approach. The results clearly brings out the
significance of fiber orientation in various Kuehn T et al 2014 Local buckling of shear-
elements of box-beam as well as the deformable laminated composite beams
significance of rotational restraint provided by with arbitrary cross-sections using
web to flange buckling. discrete plate analysis Composite
Structures 113 236-248.
REFERENCES Liu Q et al 2014 Buckling analysis of
Lopatin A V and Morozov E V 2011 Buckling restrained orthotropic plates under
of the SSCF rectangular orthotropic plate combined in-plane shear and axial loads
subjected to linearly varying in-plane and its application to web local buckling
loading Composite Structures 93 1900- Composite Structures 111 540-552.
1909.
NOTATIONS
Zhong H and Gu C 2007 Buckling of
symmetrical cross-ply composite bf, bw - width of the flange and web
rectangular plates under a linearly
varying in-plane load Composite δ - Slenderness ratio of flange and
Structures 80 42-48. web
Qiao P and Shan L 2005 Explicit local q - Uniform lateral pressure load of
buckling analysis and design of fiber- beam
reinforced plastic composite structural θf, θw - Fiber orientation of flange and
shapes Composite Structures 70 468-483. web
Qiao et al 2001 Local buckling of composite t f ,t w - Thickness of the flange and web
FRP shapes by discrete plate analysis
σ b,f - Flange buckling stress of flange
Journal of structural engineering 127
245-255. E1, E2, - Lamina modulus
G 12
Housner J M and Stein M 1975 Numerical
analysis and parametric studies of the υ 12 , υ 21 - Lamina major and minor poison
buckling of composite orthotropic ratio
106
ICCMS2016
THEORETICAL STUDY ON BASALT FIBER REINFORCED

COMPOSITE (BFRC) SANDWICH PANEL UNDER FLEXURE
2
RAJ S.1, BHARATHKUMAR B.H1 and RAMESH KUMAR V.
1
Advanced Material Laboratory, Academy Of Scientific And Innovative Research, CSIR- SERC,
Taramani, Chennai, Tamilnadu, India
2
Computational Structural Mechanics Group, Academy Of Scientific And innovative Research, CSIR-
SERC, Taramani, Chennai, Tamilnadu, India
Abstract: In this paper, analytical and finite element model has been validated with
experimental study on flexural behaviour of Basalt Fiber Reinforced Composite
(BFRC) sandwich panel subjected to two point loading. The sandwich panel
comprises of top and bottom skin, both composed of BFRC mix and flanges of profile
sheet entwined together to act as composite, whereas the core is constituted by the
web portion of profile sheet. For the analytical study, model has been proposed
adapting relative stiffness as in Euler bending theory. The finite element model has
been created as elasto plastic model along with interaction property using cohesion
and friction. The results from the finite element study and analytical model have been
compared with the experimental results of BFRC sandwich panel and are found to be
in good agreement. The model proposed can be generalised for sandwich panels
pertaining to same configuration and test setup.
Keywords: BFRC; profile sheet; skin; core; composite; bending equation;
relative stiffness; finite element; elasto-plastic model.
INTRODUCTION studied (Toma et al, 1993), (Yu, 2000).

Effect of adhesive joint between the
In the present study, Basalt fiber reinforced honeycomb core and face sheet on the load
composite (BFRC) sandwich panel (1500 × transfer and static response of sandwich panel
650 ×70 mm) was designed to act like a has been investigated through finite element
flexural member having both strength and models (Burton, 1997). Experimental study
ductility. BFRC sandwich panel comprises of has been done for whole shear wall system
top and bottom skin, both composed of subjected to monotonic and cycling loading
BFRC mix (Raj et. al, 2014), and flanges of related with the behaviour of screwed
profile sheet entwined together to act as connection with a self-drilling screw,
composite, whereas the core is constituted by scotched connection using a bi-component
web portion of profile sheet. structural adhesive, bonded connection using
For any composite sandwich panel, a bi-adhesive band, mixed connection with
connection mechanism used to connect skin both screws and the bi-adhesive bands
to the core ensures composite behaviour. (Mattes, 1999).
Different types of fastening techniques In BFRC sandwich panel, connection is
encompassing on mechanical fasteners, achieved as internal bonding (adhesion)in top
welding and adhesive bonding have been skin by cast-in situ concreting and as external
* Address of correspondence: E-mail: smritirajdeo@serc.res.in

107
Raj et al.
bonding (shear interaction)in the bottom skin experimental stress strain data of material
by attaching prefabricated segment to profile used in the panel.
sheet (Prabha et. al, 2013) using self-tapping Compositeness in the panel has been
screws(Wei et. al, 2012).The prefabricated modelled in terms of cohesion and friction at
segment is made of BFRC mix (Raj et. al, the interface between of BFRC segment and
2014) reinforced with basalt mesh. profile sheet. The FE model (Top and Bottom
Combination of both prefabrication and cast- partial tied) assuming 70% friction in both
in-situ construction technique has been top and bottom skin was found to depict the
adopted in aiming at reduced construction behaviour as obtained in the experiment. The
cost and time. A detailed and cross sectional deflected profile of the panel is shown in
view of BFRC panel is shown in Figure 1. Figure 2, for load of 36kNand 10 mm
deflection is compared with experimental
behaviour of BFRC sandwich panel (Raj et.
al, 2013) as shown in Figure 3.
Figure1 Detailed View of BFRC Sandwich

Figure 2Deflection Profile
Panel
The numerical and analytical studies have ANALYTICAL STUDY
been carried out on the BFRC panel to assess
the efficiency of the connections i.e. external The analytical model is based on relative
connection mechanism (self tapping screws) stiffness concept (IS-456, 2000), where
as well as internal connection mechanism change in flexural stiffness is based on
(adhesion bonding) in ensuring full change in effective area of the panel
composite action of sandwich panel under depending on different strain limit. Till the
flexural behaviour tensile strain limit of BFRC mix (140µstrain),
full section of panel is assumed to be un-
FINITE ELEMENT STUDY cracked (fully composite). For full composite
behaviour, the composite section is converted
For the BFRC panel, finite element (FE)
into equivalent section of stiffness equal to
study was conducted in which 3-Dimensional
the stiffness of the least stiff material i.e
8 noded brick element (C3D8R) was used.
BFRC mix material constituting the panel. In
FE model was created reflecting the flexural
the compressive strain limit of BFRC mix
behaviour under two point loading. Non-
(140 to 2000µstrain), bottom skin of the
linear solution technique based on direct
panel is assumed to be failed making the
method "Full Newton Solution Technique"
panel as partial composite, the composite
has been used to get the desired results. For
section is converted into combination of
this study, a total of 61061 C3D8R elements
equivalent least i.e., BFRC mix and
with aspect ratio in the range of 5 to 10 were
equivalent most stiff material i.e steel, such
created. Material nonlinearity was considered
that depth of the section and strain
in the elastic-plastic model using
compatibility are ensured. After the
108
Theoretical Method to Predict Flexural Behavior of Basalt Fiber Reinforced Composite (BFRC)
Sandwich Panel under Flexure
compressive limiting strain of BFRC mix d2y

K= = Curvature
(>2000µstrain), steel section in the panel is dx2
assumed to be yielded, and both top, bottom 𝜖 = Strain
skin are assumed to be failed, composite
y = Neutral axis depth
section is assumed to be deboned and panel
shows non-composite behaviour. Y = Deflection corresponding to load P at
any length x
For the equivalent composite section, load
equation has been derived from simple
DISCUSSION
bending theory (Euler) as given by Eq(1)
𝐾′′ ×𝑓(∈)×𝑓5 (𝐼) The numerical model is found to have better
𝑃= (1) correlation with experimental behaviour of
𝑓4 (𝑦)
′′ 𝐾4 ×𝐾5 the panel as compared in Figure 3, indicating
𝐾 = (2)
𝑓(𝐿) the behaviour of the panel was due to the
P = Load taken by composite section partial frictional interaction of the top and
bottom skin with the core in the elastic
f(𝜖)=Strain value depending on compressive region. In numerical studies, a semi rigid
and tensile strain limit connection was provided which also defines
f5 (I) = Moment of inertia of equivalent connection so opted in making of panel is not
composite section as per the limiting strain sufficient to provide full rigid connection.
value about neutral axis depth In the analytical model, in the elastic tensile
f4 (y) = Neutral axis depth of equivalent strain limit of BFRC mix its corresponding
composite section from tensile /compressive load is computed as 8.10 kN for a deflection
region in tensile/compressive limiting strain of 0.76 mm as denoted by region OB as
respectively shown in Figure 3. In the elastic compressive
strain limit of BFRC mix i.e 140 to 2000
K 4 = Constant depending on loading
microstrains, maximum load taken by the
arrangement and support conditions.
panel at strain of 2000 micro strain is
K 5 = Chord modulus of elasticity of material computed to be 79.5 kN at deflection of
for which strain is being considered 13.95 mm. Corresponding to the
f(L) = Length of composite section experimentally obtained maximum load of
26.33kN (Raj et. al, 2013), at strain of 660
Deflection 'δ' at mid length for equivalent micro strains, load is computed to be 26.29
composite section has been computed kN at deflection of 4.61 mm as marked by
assuming vertical deflection 'Y' as a function region BC as shown in Figure 3.After 660
of length variable 'x' in terms of sinusoidal micro strains itself, both top skin and bottom
function. Corresponding to curvature K, mid- skin (BFRC mix), is assumed to be
deflection δ is computed, as given by Eq (6) debonded. For post peak behaviour of BFRC
𝜋𝑥
sandwich panel, BFRC mix has been
𝑌 = 𝛿𝑠𝑖𝑛 (3) assumed to be completely yielded and the
𝐿
𝜖
𝐾= (4) ductility in the panel was contributed by
𝑦
2 profile sheet alone. At 2000 micro strain,
𝐿 𝑑𝑦 𝜋2
𝐾 �𝑎𝑡 𝑥 = � = =𝛿 (5) load has been calculated as 21.46 kN with its
2 𝑑𝑥 2 𝐿2
𝐾 ×𝐿2 corresponding deflection as 14.64mm marked
𝛿= (6)
𝜋2 by point E in the graph as shown in Figure 3.
After 2000 micro strain, considering elastic
δ = Deflection corresponding to load P at mid
plastic behaviour, stress in the profile sheet is
length
constant and taken as f y = 279 MPa. At 3500
x = length variables micro strain Load has been calculated as
14.97 kN and its corresponding deflection
109
Raj et al.
was calculated as 25.63 mm which has been Mechanics Group, Advanced Material Lab.
marked by point F in the graph. For the same This paper is being published with the kind
load of 14.97 kN, deflection was computed to permission of the Director, CSIR-SERC
be 43.94 mm for 6000 micron strain which
has been marked by point G in the graph. REFERENCES
Through analytical model, full composite Burton W S & Noor A K 1997 Structural
behaviour shown by OBCEFG of Figure 3 is analysis of the adhesive bond in a
predicted till the failure of the panel based on honeycomb core sandwich panel Finite
change in effective cross sectional area as per Elements in analysis and design 26(3)
the panel behaviour in the strain limiting 213-227.
range
I.S 456-2000 Indian Standard Plain And
30 Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practise
(Fourth Revision).
C
25 Matteis De G & Landolfo R 1999 Structural
behaviour of sandwich panel shear
20 E walls: An experimental analysis
Materials and structures 32 (5)331-341.
Load kN
15
F G Prabha P Marimuthu V Saravanan M Palani
10 Experimental Values G S Lakshmanan N Senthil R 2013
B Effect of confinement on steel-concrete
5 FE Model (Top and
Bottom partial tied)
composite light-weight load-bearing
Analytical model 2 wall panels under compression Journal
0 O of Constructional Steel Research 81 11-
0 20 40 60
19.
Deflection mm
Raj Smriti 2013 Development of Basalt Fiber
Reinforced Sandwich Panel M. Tech.
Figure 3 Numerical& Analytical Model Thesis Academy of Scientific and
Vs Experiment Innovative Research CSIR-SERC
Chennai.
CONCLUSION
Raj Smriti Smitha Gopinath Nagesh R Iyer
Through analytical and numerical studies, it 2014 Compressive behavior of basalt
can be concluded that bonding mechanism so fiber reinforced composite International
opted in making of BFRC panel (internal Journal of Structural Analysis & Design
bonding at top skin by cast-in situ and 1(1) 49-53.
external bonding in the bottom skin through Toma A Sedlacek G & Weynand K
self-tapping screws) was not able to ensure 1993Connections in cold-formed steel
full composite behaviour inside the panel. Thin-walled structures 16(1) 219-237.
The connection mechanism has to be
improved to increase the flexural capacity of Wei Lu Zhongcheng Ma Pentti Makelainen
the panel. Although, with the adopted Jyri Outinen 2012 Behaviour of shear
connections and construction methodology connectors in cold-formed steel sheeting
resulted into flexural strength of 26 kN with at ambient and elevated temperature
reduction in construction cost and time. Thin Walled Structures 61229-238.
Yu W W& La Boube R A 2000 Cold-formed
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT steel design John Wiley & Sons.
The author's thank the support rendered by
the staff of Computational Structural
110
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF DELAMINATION SIZE AND LOCATION ON THE

DYNAMICS OF THIN PRETWISTED STRIPS
SALUNKHE S. B.* and GURUPRASAD P. J.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Bombay
Abstract: An asymptotically exact cross-sectional model coupled with geometrically

non-linear one-dimensional (1D) theory of modeling delamination in pretwisted,
initially curved and anisotropic strips is proposed. This model is based on the
dimensional reduction of laminated shell theory to nonlinear 1D theory using the
variational asymptotic method. Delamination is included in the model by following
the sublaminate approach. As an application, the ability of the model to capture the
trapeze effect, in healthy and delaminated strip, is demonstrated and the results are
compared with experimental observations. The stiffness terms obtained from the
nonlinear analysis was used in the dynamic analysis. As a first step, only linear
stiffness quantities are used within the 1D linear finite element method to investigate
the modal behavior of the strip. The utility of the model is demonstrated by
determining the natural frequencies and mode shapes for a healthy and delaminated
anisotropic strip with initially curvature and pretwist.
Keywords: composite beam; delamination; dynamic analysis; finite element
method; variational Asymptotic method
INTRODUCTION problem of non-linearity coupled with

material anisotropy increases the complexity
Recent times have witnessed a paradigm shift of the design. Moreover if compounded with
in rotorcraft industry in terms of enhanced damages typical in laminated composites,
use of hingeless and bearingless rotors. The viz. delamination, matrix cracks, etc. the
hinge and bearing assemblies have been design itself turns outto be a herculean task.
replaced by composite material spindle called A delamination or matrix crack may not be
exbeams. Flex beams may be described as the visible or be barely visible to external
pretwisted anisotropic strips that possess
inspection. However, they reduce the
varying stiffness parameters along different stiffness of the structure and consequently
directions. The elastic tailoring properties of affect its load carrying ability and the modal
these composite pretwisted beams offer
behavior. In this work we focus on the effect
potential for creating significant weight of delamination on the modal behavior of a
savings making it an attractive structural pretwisted, initially curved and anisotropic
configuration. The design of such composite
strip. Numerous researchers have studied
flexible structures, however, is challenging various aspects of delamination process
owing to the non-linearity that arises due to analytically and experimentally. Most of
the presence of large displacements and
these studies were focused on either the
moderate rotations they undergo. The initiation or the propagation of delamination
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: Santosh@ aero.iitb.ac.in 111

Salunkhe and Guruprasad
under in-plane static or fatigue loading. A theory to nonlinear 1D theory using the
considerable amount of analytical models and variational asymptotic method. Delamination
numerical techniques have also been reported is included in the model by following the
on the modal behavior of composite sublaminate approach. The _nal results from
structures with delaminations. A detailed this approach will include linear as well as
review about delamination modeling in nonlinear stiffness terms that account for the
beams and its effects on the structural delamination length and location in closed
dynamics are provided by Della and Shu form. Subsequent to the 1D analysis it is
(2007). Majority of the available possible to completely recover the 3D stress
methods/techniques can be categorized into and strain fields along with the in-plane and
two classes: (a) region approach - the out-of-plane warping fields. As a first step,
delaminated laminate is divided into sub- only linear stiffness quantities are used within
laminates or segments and the continuity the 1D linear finite element method (FEM)
conditions are imposed at the delamination that is adopted to investigate the modal
junctions, each of these sub-laminates is behavior of the strip. The utility of the model
analyzed using the equivalent single layer is demonstrated by determining the natural
theories; (b) layerwise approach - the frequencies and mode shapes of a pretwisted
laminate is modeled using the layerwise and initially curved delaminated anisotropic
theories, which are based on piecewise, layer- strip and, where possible, compared to full
by-layer approximations of the response 3D FEM and experimental results in order to
quantities in the thickness direction, in this validate the present approach. The approach
approach delamination is modeled as an shows good agreement with experimental and
embedded layer or by introducing 3D FEM results available in the literature.
discontinuity functions in the displacement
fields. Shen and Grady (1992) have RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
performed experiments to investigate the The material and geometric properties of the
modal behavior of delaminated composite composite cantilever beam used for the
beams. They also presented an analytical purpose of validation of the present models
model based on the Timoshenko beam theory are given in the Table 1. The stacking
and the cracked beam theory. These sequence used in the analysis is (0/90) 2s .
experimental and analytical results are widely Experimental, analytical and numerical
used as benchmark values by in literature. results are available in the literature for this
More recently, Kumar et al. (2013) developed type of configuration; hence it is useful .The
a generic model of modeling partial first bending natural frequency of cantilever
delamination in composite beams and delaminated beam for the case of full width
implemented using the finite element method. delamination and for different lengthwise
In the present work, an asymptotically exact delamination at different interfaces are shown
cross- sectional model coupled with in the Figure. 1. It is seen that the bending
geometrically non-linear one-dimensional natural frequency decreases as delamination
(1D) theory of modeling partial delamination size increases, irrespective of the
in composite beams is proposed and delamination location in the composite beam.
implemented using the finite element method. Similar trends are seen from the experimental
This analytical model is based on the and the 3D FEM results shown in Figure. 1.
dimensional reduction of laminated shell It is noted that at small delamination length
112
Effect of Delamination Size and Location on the Dynamics of Thin Pretwisted Strip
the natural frequency predictions from the

present model and 3D FEM are in close interface 1, 5% and 0.6% for interface 2 as
agreement with the experimental compared to experimental and 3D FEM
observations. However, the predictions of simulations, respectively. The results have
natural frequencies from the present and the been validated for the other cases as well. To
3D FEM results show deviation from the demonstrate the efficacy of the present model
experimental observation for large for prediction of modal behavior of a
delamination lengths. At large delamination delaminated strip, a graphite/epoxy
length even experimental results wide scatter. composite material configuration with
Bending natural frequencies of present model properties given in the Table 1 was
are considered.
approximately within 3% and 1% for
Table 1 : Material properties
Materials E 11 (GPa) E 22 (GPa) G 12 /G 13 (GPa) ʋ 12
134.44 10.34 4.9 0.33
Geometry Length (m) Width(m) Height (m) ρ(Kg/m3)
0:127 0:0127 0:00127(per ply) 1477.46
Table 2 : Numerical results of natural frequency (Hz) along widthwise delamination for
graphite/epoxy without pretwist and initial curvature (B – Bending , T - Torsional , E –
Extensional , Tr - Transverse)
Healthy 50 % delamination 75 % delamination

Mode 3D 3D 3D %
Present % error Present % error Present
FEM FEM FEM error
1B 11.67 11.66 0.0857 11.64 11.66 0.1718 11.55 11.66 0.9524
2B 73.33 73.13 0.2727 72.67 73.12 0.6192 72.27 73.12 1.1761
3B 206.45 204.75 0.8234 202.60 204.73 1.0513 197.83 204.73 3.4878
1TE 190.66 187.99 1.4004 156.14 154.97 0.7493 132.85 132.70 0.1129
2TE 576.32 564.16 2.1099 470.18 465.08 1.0847 400.75 398.23 0.6288
3TE 974.91 940.90 3.4885 789.57 775.65 1.7630 675.10 664.16 1.6205
1ET 3873.6 3880.3 0.1730 3698.1 3726.4 0.7653 3600.5 3647.6 1.3082
1 Tr 252.27 256.58 1.7085 237.61 238.57 0.4040 236.15 236.22 0.0296
The model was first validated by comparing with dynamic characteristics and the results
the static deformation characteristics of a obtained are compared with the results
delaminated strip made up of Winckler's type computed using 3D FEM. The comparative
study is done for various frequencies and it is
anti-symmetric layup considered in [4] (α 2 /
(α – 90) 4 / α 2 / - α 2 / (90 - α) 4 / -α 2 ). tabulated in Table 2. It is observed that the
This layup exhibits strong extensional-twist present model is able to produce the results
coupling. Later, the same model is computed
113
Salunkhe and Guruprasad
with fewer errors for various frequencies in delamination on the overall modal behavior
very less time frame compared to 3D FEM. of the pretwisted anisotropic strip with initial
curvature.
It can be observed that performance of
material drops, and the % elongation
decreases steadily as the elongation rates are
increased.
Figure.2 First bending natural frequency

(Hz) of graphite/epoxy for different
lengthwise delamination at interface 2 in
the laminate.
Figure.1 First bending natural frequency
(Hz) of graphite/epoxy for different
REFERENCES
lengthwise delamination at interface 1 in
the laminate. C N Della and D Shu 2007 Vibration of
delaminated composite laminates review
SUMMARY Applied Mechanics Reviews 60(1)1-20.
In this work, an attempt was made to analyze E A Armanios A Makeev and D Hooke 1996
the modal behavior of pretwisted, initially Finite-displacement analysis of
curved and anisotropic strips in the presence laminated composite strips with
of delamination. The model development was extension-twist coupling. Journal of
based on the dimensional reduction of a 3D Aerospace Engineering 9(3) 80-91.
strip to a 1D problem based on the M-HH Shen and J E Grady 1992 Free
mathematical framework of VAM. vibrations of delaminated beams AIAA
Delamination was accounted for in the model journal 30(5)1361-1370.
by following the sublaminate approach. S Keshava Kumar R Ganguli and D
Linear and nonlinear stiffness terms for the Harursampath 2013 Partial delamination
strip were derived in closed form with
modeling in composite beams using a
delamination size and location as variables. finite element method. Finite Elements
The results obtained using the framework in Analysis and Design 76 1-12.
were validated by comparing with those
available in the literature; more-over the
results were also compared with those
obtained using a commercial finite element
solver. Model predictions showed good
agreement with in both the cases. It was then
extended to investigate the effect of
114
ICCMS2016
STIFFENED PLATES OF CNT REINFORCED COMPOSITES: STATIC

RESPONSE USING FEM
BHAR A.* and SHAKYA R.
Department of Applied Mechanics, MNNIT Allahabad, India
Abstract: Structural elements made of fibre reinforced composites have caused

considerable impact on different engineering applications. Advent of Carbon Nano
Tubes (CNT) has further increased the possibilities. Such CNT reinforced composites
(CNTRC) have the potential of becoming a good alternative for conventional fibre
reinforced composites. On the other hand, plate / panel type structures that act as
primary load bearing component in many applications, are frequently appended with
ribs / stiffeners. Hence, analysis of such structural systems, known as Stiffened Plates
/ Shells, made of CNTRC, is becoming an important issue for relevant engineering
applications. In this work, static response of different CNTRC stiffened plates is
found out using the finite element method (FEM), based on first-order shear
deformation theory (FSDT).Four types of CNTRCs, made of single-walled CNTs
dispersed into a matrix in four different type of volume fraction distribution varying
across the thickness of the plate, are considered. However, the stiffeners attached at
one side of the plate are considered to be made always of uniformly dispersed CNTs
into the matrix. The formulation developed for the stiffened-plate finite element for
this purpose, is implemented through a computer program developed in-house.
Results are validated first, for bare CNTRC plates. Then the effects of stiffening the
CNTRC plates and the effects of different parameters like CNT volume fraction,
number & dimensions of stiffener(s), plate aspect ratio etc. are brought out through
new results obtained from parametric studies.
Keywords: CNT Reinforced Composite; Stiffened Plate; Finite Element Analysis.
INTRODUCTION stiffened plate / shell structures are very

important for their widespread application as
The concept of stiffening a plate / panel type
primary load bearing components in many
structural element with one or more beam /
engineering applications. The scientific /
rib / stiffeners is quite an old idea. However,
engineering community have become
accurate analysis of such stiffened structures
equipped with some alternatives in recent
is not a trivial issue even today. Analytical
couple of decades, thanks to the development
models for closed-form solution for such
of numerical methods like the FEM. From the
stiffened plates / shells are either non-existent
material point of view, the structural
or quite scanty, to the best of these authors’
engineers are seeing a sea of changes caused
knowledge. This is perhaps due to the
due to the developments of newer advanced
inherent geometric complexity involved with
materials like fibre reinforced laminated
such structures. Analysis of such thin-walled
composites, functionally graded materials etc.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anindyab@mnnit.ac.in 115

Bhar and Shakya
The advent of Carbon Nano Tubes (CNT) THEORETICAL FORMULATION

some time back has brought CNT reinforced
composites (CNTRC) as a potential The four different types of CNT distribution
alternative for conventional carbon / glass considered within the plate matrix, as per Zhu
fibre reinforced composites. Hence, finite et al (2012), are shown in Figure-1.One may
element analysis of such stiffened structures, note that amongst those types, the ‘UD’
made of different advanced materials indicates ‘uniform distribution’, whereas the
including the CNTRC, is becoming an other three types of CNT distribution makes
important prerequisite for appropriate design the plate ‘functionally graded’ (FG) through
and fabrication of such structures. the thickness, with the related Letters (V / O /
Regarding analysis of stiffened plates, one X) indicating qualitatively the types of
can find a considerable amount of literature distribution. The middle plane of the plate is
on FE analysis of such structures made of considered as the reference plane of a typical
isotropic homogeneous materials. Even, a stiffened plate system. Other assumptions
reasonable amount of literature on FE related to the formulation can be found in
analysis of fibre reinforced laminated Bhar (2011). It should be mentioned that
stiffened plates has appeared in literature. A CNT is assumed to be uniformly distributed
comprehensive picture on the developments within the stiffener matrix.
in this direction can be found in Bhar
(2011).Regarding analysis of CNTRC plates,
some literature is found to have appeared in
recent times. Zhu et al (2012) presented
bending and free vibration analysis of thin-to-
moderately thick CNTRC plates using FEM
based on FSDT. They have investigated the (a) UD (b) FG-V
static and dynamic behaviour of such
CNTRC plates on a wide range of geometric
and material configurations. Wu and Chang
(2014) presented three-dimensional buckling
analysis of simply-supported, functionally
graded CNTRC plates with surface-bonded
piezoelectric actuator and sensor layers under
(c) FG-O (d) FG-X
bi-axial compression. Zhang et al (2015)
presented nonlinear bending analysis of FG- Figure 1.Different Types of CNT
CNTRC thick plates resting on paste rnak Distribution within Plate Matrix
foundations, using an element-free Ritz
method. Further description of literature on Kinematics of Plate and Stiffener
analysis of CNTRC plates using different The spatial displacement components are
methods is escaped here for brevity. expressed in terms of the reference plane
However, one may note that, though some displacements as per standard FSDT
works on the analysis of bare (un-stiffened) kinematics, within both of the plate as well as
CNTRC plates has been published in attached stiffener domains. These
literature, work on analysis of such stiffened descriptions are escaped here for space
plates are quite scanty in literature. constraint and can be found in Bhar (2011).
In present work, static response of different Description of standard strain-displacement
CNTRC stiffened plates is found out using relations are also escaped here, for the sake
the FEM, based on FSDT. of brevity. Interested reader can found the
same in previous mentioned reference.
116
Stiffened Plates of CNT Reinforced Composites: Static Response using FEM
Constitutive Relations  2z  *
V=
cnt ( z )
*
Vcnt ; 1 +  Vcnt ;
The well-known reduced stress-strain  h 
(3)
relations for the material behaviour is  2z  * 2 z  *
2 1 −  Vcnt and 2   Vcnt
} [Q ]{ε} (1)
{σ=  h   h 
*
Where the elements of the [Q] matrix are where Vcnt represents some critical volume
fraction, calculated from the mass fraction of
E11 , E22 , CNT and mass density of CNT & matrix.
Q11 = Q22 =
1 − ν 12ν 21 1 −ν 12ν 21
Finite Element Formulation
ν 21 E11 ,
Q12 = Q44 = G23 , Q55 = G13 , Q66 = G12
1 −ν 12ν 21 The stiffened plate finite element developed
and used in present work consists of the
The standard symbols used at the right hand combination of a nine noded quadrilateral
sides represent the effective material plate element and a three noded beam /
properties of the CNTRC considered. It stiffener element. Further description of the
should be mentioned that these effective same may be found in Bhar (2011).
properties are determined from those of the Finally, the standard form of discretized
constituent CNTs and the matrix used, based system of governing algebraic equations for
on Molecular Dynamics theory. the static analysis of the system may be
derived using Variational procedures as
Effective Properties of CNTRC
[K ]{d } = {F } (4)
Following Zhu et al. (2012), the effective
material properties of the CNTRC are NUMERICAL EVALUATIONS
E11 =η1Vcnt E11cnt + Vm E m
Validation (Bare CNTRC Plate):The
η2 Vcnt Vm
= cnt
+ (2) details of the problems presented here can be
E22 E22 Em found in Zhu et al(2012).The plates clamped
η3 Vcnt Vm at all edges (CCCC) are considered here.
= + Further, the materials properties considered
G12 G12cnt G m *
are for the case of Vcnt =0.11, η1 =0.149 and
whereE 11 cnt, E 22 cnt and G 12 cntindicate the η2 =0.934.The results are obtained in terms
Young’s moduli and Shear modulus of
SWCNT S , respectively. Em and Gm represent of non-dimensional central deflection (w* =
corresponding properties of the isotropic w o /h), where w o is the central deflection of
the plate.
matrix. η j (j= 1, 2, 3) represent CNT
efficiency parameters. Further, Vcnt and Vm 95 CCCC, V*CNT=0.11
UD
Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
dimensional
are the volume fractions of the CNT and FG-V

central…
matrix, sum of which is unity at every point. Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
Non-
FG-O
It is important to note that because of the Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
different CNT distributions within the matrix, FG-X
Ping Zhu et. al., 2012
as described in Figure 1, both of Vcnt and Vm
-5
vary across the plate thickness. Expressions 0 b/h 50
of Vcnt as function of the thickness coordinate
Figure 2.Non-dimensional central
(z) for the four types of CNT distributions, in deflection (w* = w o /h) of bare CNTRC
same order as in Figure-1, are given by plates
117
Bhar and Shakya
The non-dimensional central deflections by Zhu et al (2012), as shown in Figure-2. It

obtained for different types of CNT is observed from Figure-2, that the present
distributions and different width to thickness results match quite closely with those from
ratios (b/h = 10, 20, 50) from present Zhu et al (2012).
computation are plotted with those provided
Table 1. Variation of non-dimensional central deflection of CNTRC stiffened platehaving
one stiffener in Y-direction, with varying geometric configurations, keeping the total
mass unchanged
Plate Non-dimensional central deflection(×10-3)
Stiffener
Thick
cross-
Distribution ness
section CCCC SSSS SCSC SFSF
(mm)
(mm × mm)
1.600 0.0 × 0.0 3.703 7.257 6.608 6.682
1.562 1.5 × 0.5 3.454 6.837 6.595 7.230
1.450 3.0 × 1.0 3.344 6.339 5.223 9.244
UD 1.262 4.5 × 1.5 3.328 5.753 4.857 14.723
1.000 6.0 × 2.0 3.538 5.477 4.823 33.322
0.662 7.5 × 2.5 4.358 6.099 5.585 152.887
0.250 9.0 × 3.0 8.943 11.768 11.123 6874.083
Parametric Study (Stiffened CNTRC

Plate)
In this case a square plate with single
eccentric stiffener aligned with centre line
*
parallel to Y-axis (Figure 3), having Vcnt
=0.11 for both plate and stiffener,is
considered. Different geometric Figure 3.Stiffened CNTRC plate
configurations, obtained varying the plate
thickness and stiffener C/S dimensions,
REFERENCES
tokeep the total mass of CNTRC stiffened Bhar A 2011 Finite element analysis of
plates unchanged, are considered as shown in stiffened laminated composite and
Table 1. Material properties of plates and functionally graded plates using a
stiffeners are kept same. From Table-1 it is higher-order shear deformation theory
found that as there is no stiffener present in PhD Thesis IIT Kharagpur India-
the plate, CCCC and SSSS boundary 721302.
condition give minimum and maximum Wu C-P and Chang S-K2014Stability of
value. But in presence of stiffener SFSF and carbon nanotube-reinforced composite
CCCC boundary conditions give maximum plates with surface-bonded piezoelectric
and minimum values, respectively. layers and under bi-axial compression
Composite Structures 111 587–601.
CONCLUSION Zhang LW Song ZG and Liew KM 2015
Further results on the effect of presence of Nonlinear bending analysis of FG-CNT
stiffener for such CNTRC plates are being reinforced composite thick plates resting
omitted for space constraints. The same on Pasternak foundations using the
would be presented in the full paper. element-free IMLS-Ritz method
Composite Structures 128165–175.
118
Stiffened Plates of CNT Reinforced Composites: Static Response using FEM
Zhu P Lei Z X and Liew K M 2012Static and

free vibration analyses of carbon
nanotube reinforced composite plates
using finite element method with first
order shear deformation plate theory
Composite Structures 94 1450–1460.
119
ICCMS2016
COATING EFFECT ON ENGINE PISTON THERMAL BEHAVIOUR

BABU M. N., TANWEER ALAM.* and KUMAR P.
Department of Mining Machinery Engineering, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, Jharkhand, India.
Abstract: In this paper an analysis is made on internal combustion engine piston by

observing temperature distribution in order to estimate the maximum stresses and
deformation of the piston. Finite Element analysis for thermal behaviour study of
piston is made using ANSYS for aluminium alloy piston as well as on ceramic coated
piston. It is found that the maximum surface temperature of the coated piston increases by
28% and hence thermal barrier coatings (TBC) provided by low thermal conductivity
ceramic materials on the piston head, helps to increase the thermal efficiency of the
engine as well as improves the combustion and reduces the emission.
Keywords: Engine Piston; Thermal Barrier Coating; Temperature Distribution
INTRODUCTION days to provide them suitable environment at

high operating temperature. Combustion
It is important to make an analysis of
chamber of IC engine are coated with TBC in
temperature distribution in a piston of
order to simulate the adiabatic engines as
internal combustion engine in order to
well as for possible reduction of engine
estimate the maximum stresses and
emission and brake specific fuel consumption
deformation. Aluminum alloy is generally
along with the reduction in in-cylinder heat
used for piston due to high thermal
rejection and thermal fatigue protection of
coefficient of expansion, about 80% more
underlying metallic surfaces[Muchai et al.,
than that of cylinder bore which is made up
2002; Poola et al., 1994].
of cast iron. The maximum temperature of
the piston should not exceed 66% of its
melting temperature and this limits the
temperature of the piston to around 3700C. In
real conditions the case is not similar; the
piston temperature may exceed the
permissible limit and causes the deformation
and mechanical failure of the engine.
Thermal Barrier Coatings (TBC) are applied Figure 1. Different layers of thermal
on the top surface of metallic body and can barrier coating
operate at high temperature. TBC basically
Figure. 1 shows that TBCs basically
provide the components to operate at higher
comprises of four layers: the base is metal
temperature without any deformation as well
substrate then metallic bond coat, thermally
as improve their life by reducing oxidation
grown oxide, and ceramic as the topcoat. The
and thermal fatigue and hence act as an
ceramic topcoat, desirable for having very
insulator and prevents the components from
low conductivity while remaining stable at
large and prolonged heat loads [Buyukkaya,
nominal operating temperatures. The ceramic
1997; Cerit, 2011].
layer keeps the lower layers at a temperature
Internal combustion engine (IC engine) lower than the surface as it creates the largest
components are coated with TBC now these thermal gradient of the TBC.
________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tanweer.amu@gmail.com 120

Babu et al.
In the present work, a comparison has been

made for temperature distribution between
uncoated and coated piston. The maximum
temperature of the normal aluminum silicon
(AlSi) piston and ceramic coated piston is
being analyzed. Coating materials used are
partially oxidized zirconia with magnesium
oxide (MgZrO 3 ), mullite (3Al 2 O 3 2SiO 2 ) and
alumina (Al 2 O 3 ). It was observed that the
maximum surface temperature of coated Figure 2. Thermal circuit used for
piston is increased by 28% in comparison to analysis purpose
uncoated piston. Further the stabilized
zirconia coated piston gives the better
thermal performance in comparison to other
coating materials.
Figure 3. Different parts of the piston

METHODOLOGY
In the present work, thermal behavior
investigation was made for functional graded
coatings on AlSi alloy piston material. In
order to make the analysis FEM based
software tool, namely ANSYS is used. Table
1 represent the properties of the base material
and the coating materials properties used for
analysis purpose.
Thermal circuit perspective is used to make
the thermal analysis as shown in Figure 2. R Figure 4. Temperature Distributions: (a)
symbolises the conductive and convective Uncoated Piston (AlSI alloy) and (b)
resistance, while suffix 1, 2, and 3 represents Zirconia coated piston (MgZrO 3 )
ring, oil film and liner respectively. R 4
represents the convective resistance between RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
the liner and water used for engine cooling
purpose. Conductive resistance of oil film is Finite element analysis were performed to
neglected. Top surface temperature and skirt evaluate temperature gradients of the
temperature is taken as 400oC and 110oC uncoated Aluminum alloy piston and ceramic
respectively as an initial condition, while for materials such as partially stabilized zirconia
boundary conditions, the heat transfer with magnesium oxide, Mullite and Alumina
coefficient values for crevice, piston crown coated Aluminum alloy piston. The
and skirt, as shown in Figure. 3, is taken as temperature distributions of an uncoated
230 w/m2k, 672.41 w/m2k and 179.31 w/m2k aluminum alloy piston and zirconia coated
respectively. piston are shown in Figure 4, while Figure 5
121
Coating Effect on Engine Piston Thermal Behaviour
shows the temperature distribution for mullite A comparative evaluation was made between
and alumina coated piston. the temperature distributions of the uncoated
aluminum alloy piston and the ceramic
coated piston. The maximum surface
temperature of the ceramic coated piston is
improved approximately 28% for zirconia
stabilized with magnesium oxide coating,
22% for mullite coating and 21% for alumina
than the uncoated piston by means of ceramic
coating. It is observed that the use of ceramic
coating for aluminum alloy piston increases
the temperature of the combustion chamber
of the engine and the thermal strength of the
base metal. Finally the combustion chamber
temperature increases the thermal efficiency
of the engine also increases.
Figure 5. Temperature Distribution: (a)
Mullite coated piston (3Al 2 O 3 2SiO 2 ) and CONCLUSION
(b) alumina coated piston (Al 2 O 3 ) From above analysis, we can conclude the
The maximum surface temperature on the following:
piston crown of the Aluminum alloy piston is • With the use of TBC maximum surface
determined as 295.86 °C. The maximum
temperature raised by 28% and hence
surface temperature on the piston crown for
zirconia coated aluminum alloy piston is helps to increase the thermal efficiency of
determined as 377.07 °C, for mullite Coating engine as well as improves combustion
it is 360.6 °C and for Alumina coating it is and reduce the emission.
357.45 °C.
• Zirconia coated piston have maximum
surface temperature in comparison to other
coating. Hence a better choice for TBC for
IC engines.
REFERENCES
Buyukkaya E 1997 Effects of thermal barrier
coating on a turbocharged diesel engine
exhaust emissions Sakarya University
Figure 6. Comparison of surface Mechanical Engineering Department
temperature variation for uncoated and Ph. D. thesis Institute of Sciences and
coated piston Technology Turkey.
Figure 6 represents the temperature Cerit M 2011 Thermo mechanical analysis of
distribution comparison curve of uncoated a partially ceramic coated piston used in
Aluminum surface temperature of coated an SI engineSurface & Coatings
pistons is more than that of uncoated piston. Technology 205 3499–3505.
While among the coated piston the zirconia Muchai J G Kelkar A D Klett D E and
coated piston has maximum surface Jagannathan S 2002 Thermal–
temperature. Mechanical Effects of Ceramic Thermal
122
Babu et al.
Barrier Coatings on Diesel Engine

Piston Mat. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. 697.
Poola R B Nagalingam B Gopalakrishnan K
V 1994 Performance of Thin Ceramic
Coated Combustion Chamber with
Gasoline and Methanol as Fuels in a
Two-Stroke S I Engine SAE Paper
941911.
123
ICCMS2016
STATIC ANALYSIS OF FUNCTIONALLY GRADED BEAM FOR

POWER-LAW VARIATION OF ELASTIC MODULUS
PENDHARI S.S.*, MAHAJAN M., DHANGARE P.M. and GUJAR P.
Department of Structural Engineering, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai, India
Abstract: Mixed semi-analytical formulation for functionally graded (FG) beam

under simply supported end conditions along with general stress boundary conditions
is presented in this paper. Elastic modulus is varied according to power-law and
Poisson’s ratio is kept constant. Uniformly distributed load for side to depth ratio 5
with material gradation index (k) 0, 1 and 10 is considered for numerical studies and
the effectiveness, simplicity and accuracy of present solutions is presented by
comparing obtained results with available shear deformation theories.
Keywords: FG Beam; Semi-analytical method; Power Law; Boundary value

problem.
INTRODUCTION load by assuming variation of material

properties in thickness direction according to
Functionally Graded Material (FGM) belongs
exponential law and power law. Li et al.
to a class of advanced materials with varying
(2010) presented higher-order shear
properties over a changing dimension which
deformation (HOST) theory for FG beam. By
avoids the stress peaks at interfaces and
considering parabolic distribution of the
therefore, the delamination failure which is
transverse shear strains through the thickness
associated with laminated materials can be
of the plate, HOST model is presented by
eliminated. FGM has wide application in
Reddy (1984). Touratier (1991) have
aerospace, mechanical, defence, biomedicine,
considered cosine shear stress distribution in
nuclear, electronics, optics etc. due to their
HOST theory and free boundary conditions
novel thermo-mechanical tailor made
for shear stress upon the top and bottom
properties.
surfaces of domain have been satisfied.
Pendhari et al. (2010) have presented mixed In this paper reformulation of mixed semi-
semi analytical formulation for two- analytical model developed by Kant et al.
dimensional (2D) stress analysis of (2007) for FG beam whose elastic modulus
exponentially varied FG beams under plane vary according to power-law is presented.
stress condition of elasticity. Mohanty et al. The available solutions based on shear
(2012) have studied the static and dynamic deformation theories are used during
behaviour of simply supported FG sandwich numerical studies to show the accuracy and
beam for various material distribution laws. effectiveness of the present formulation.
Kadoli et al. (2008) studied the static
deflection and stresses under different FORMULATION
ambient loading conditions of metal ceramic A FGbeam of length ‘L’ and thickness ‘h’
FG beam for power las variation using supported on two opposite edges, x = 0 and L,
HOSDT. Simsek and Kocaturk (2009) is considered as shown in Figure (1). The
investigated free vibration and dynamic beam is assumed to be in a state of 2D plane
responses of a FG simply supported beam stress in x–z plane.
subjected to a concentrated moving harmonic
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sspendhari@vjti.org.in 124

Pendhari et al.
The reduced material coefficients, Cij for a

FG beam are,
E( z) E( z)
C11  C22  C33 
(1  2 ) 2 1  
(6)
 E( z) 
C12  C21   2 
 1  
The Equations (2)–(5) have a total of eight

Figure 1.3D beam domain under
transverse load unknowns u, w,  x ,  y ,  xz ,  x ,  y , xz in eight
equations. After a simple algebraic
The downward distributed transverse load is manipulation of the above sets of equations, a
applied only at the top beam surface which set of PDEs involving only four primary
can be expressed as, dependent variables u, w, zx ,  z are obtained
m x
p( x)   p0 m sin
as follows,
(1)
L u  zx w
m
 
z C33 x
where, m = 1, 3, 5…,
w 1  u 
From the linear theory of elasticity, the 
z C22  z  C21 x 
general strain-displacement relationships in
(7)
2D can be stated as under,  xz   C C    2u C  z
u w u w   C11   12 21   2  12  Bx
x  , z  ,  xz   (2) z   22  
C x C x
x z z x
22
 z 
and the 2D equations of equilibrium are,   xz  Bz
z x
 zx  z
  Bz  0 The above PDEs defined by Eq. (7) can be
x z reduced to a coupled first-order ODEs by
(3)
 x  xz
  Bx  0 using Fourier trigonometric series expansion
x z for primary dependent variables satisfying
Further, it is assumed that the Poisson’s ratio the simple support end conditions at x = 0
is constant through the thickness and and L.
m x
variation of Young’s modulus through the u ( x, z )   um ( z ) cos
beam thickness is given by, m L
(8)
 2z  h  m x
k
E ( z )  EM  ( EC  EM )   (4) w( x, z )   wm ( z )sin
 2h  m L
Where EM and EC are the elastic modulus at Substituting Eq. (8) and its respective
the bottom and top surface of beam, derivatives into Eq.(6) and further, use
respectively. And k is the material gradation orthogonality conditions of trigonometric
index ( k  0 ).Also, it is assumed here that functions, the following ODEs are obtained,
FG material is isotropic at every point.
Therefore, material constitutive relations for
FG beam can be written as,
 x   C11 C12 0   x 
     
 z   C21 C22 0  z  (5)
   0 C33   xz 
 xz   0
125
Static Analysis of Functionally Graded Beam for Power-Law Variation of Elastic Modulus
dum ( z ) m 1 100 Em h3  L  100h3 Em

u  0, z 
 wm ( z )   xz m ( z ) w w  , z  ; u 
dz L C33 p0 L4 2  L4 q0
dwm ( z ) C21 m h L  h (10)

1 x   x  , z  ;  xz   xz  0, z 
 um ( z )   z m ( z) Lq0  2  Lq0
dz C22 L C22
d xz m ( z )   C C   m 2 2
 C11   12 21   2 um ( z ) (9) Non-dimensional deflections and stresses of
dz   C22   L FG beams under UDL for moderately deep
C m beam (L/h=5.0) and for various volume
 12  z m ( z) fraction exponent (k=0, 1 and 10) have been
C22 L presented in Table 1. Moreover, through
d z m ( z ) m thickness variation of normalized inplane
  xz m ( z )
dz L displacement ( u ) and inplane normal stress (
 x ) for aspect ratio (L/h=5.0) have been
Equation (9) defines the two-point boundary
value problem (BVP) in ODEs through depth depicted in Figure 2. From the table and
of beam with known stress components at the figure, it is shown that present formulation
top and bottom surface of the beam. Fourth- are in good agreement with available
order Runge-Kutta method have been solution. It is observed that increasing power-
adopted for numerical integration after law index helps to reduce the stiffness of FG
transformation of BVP into a set of initial beam and consequently leads to increase in
value problem (IVP). deflection and axial stresses.
NUMERICAL INVESTIGATION CONCLUDING REMARKS

Numerical studies have been performed to Static analysis of simply supported FG beams
establish the accuracy and effectiveness of subjected to UDL under plane stress
the developed formulation in the preceding conditions of elasticity have been presented
section. Pure materials with different values by using semi-analytical formulation.
of volume fraction exponent (k) for Excellent correlation of the present numerical
aluminium-alumina FGM is considered for results with the available shear deformation
the analysis. Modulus of elasticity at the top theories solutions validate accuracy and
surface is 380 GPa (alumina) and at bottom effectiveness of semi-analytical model.The
surface is 70 GPa (aluminum). Poisson’s presented semi-analytical model is simple,
ratio for both aluminum and alumina is efficient, accurate and free from any
0.3.Volume fraction exponent (k) have been simplified assumptions through the thickness
varied from 0 to 10. Only moderately deep of plate.
beam (L/h=5) is considered in present
numerical studies. Uniformly distributed load REFERENCES
(UDL) is considered at the top surface of Kadoli R Kashif A and Ganesan N 2008
beam and all other surfaces are free from any Static analysis of functionally graded
loading pattern. beams using higher order shear
Normalizations coefficients expressed in Eq. deformation theory Appl Math Model 32
(10) are used for the uniform comparison of 2509–2525.
the results.The available analytical solutions Kant T Pendhari S S and Desai Y 2007On
based on different beam theories Li et al. accurate stress analysis of composite
(2010),Reddy (1984), Touratier (1991), and sandwich narrow beams Int J
Soldatos (1992), Karama et al. (2003) are Comput Meth Engg Sci Mech 8(3) 165-
used here for comparison purpose. 177.
Li XF Wang B L and Han J C 2010A higher-
order theory for static and dynamic
126
Pendhari et al.
analyses of functionally graded beams Reddy J N 1984 A simple higher-order

Arch Appl. Mech 80(10) 1197–212. theory for laminated composite plates J
Appl. Mech 51(4)745–52.
Mohanty S C Dash R R and Rout T 2012
Static and dynamic stability analysis of Simsek M Kocaturk T 2009 Free and forced
a functionally graded Timoshenko beam vibration of a functionally graded beam
International Journal of structural subjected to a concentrated moving
stability and dynamics 12 (4). harmonic load Composite Structures 90
465–473
Pendhari S S Kant T Desai Y M and Venkata
C2010 Deformation of functionally Touratier M 1991An efficient standard plate
graded narrow beams under transverse theory Int J Eng.Sci 29(8) 901–916.
loads Int J Mech Mater Des 6 269–282.
Table 1Inplane and transverse displacements ( u ) and stresses (  xx ) of FG beam

under uniformly distributed transverse loading for side to depth ratio 5.0
k Variables Present analysis Li et al. (2010) Reddy (1984) Touratier (1991)
w  0 3.1395 3.1657 3.1654 3.1649
0  xx  h 2  3.7855 3.8020 3.8020 3.8053
 xz  0  0.7133 0.7500 0.7332 0.7549
w  0 6.2388 6.2599 6.2594 6.2586
1  xx  h 2  5.8734 5.8837 5.8836 5.8892
 xz  0  0.7104 0.7500 0.7332 0.7549
w  0 10.9183 10.8979 10.9381 10.942
10  xx  h 2  9.6325 9.7063 9.7122 9.7238
 xz  0  0.6436 0.6436 0.6467 0.6708
Figure 2 Through thickness variation of Figure 3 Through thickness variation of

normalized inplane displacement  u  for normalized normal stress  xx  for FG
FG beam with UDL beam with UDL
127
ICCMS2016
OPTIMIZATION OF SANDWICH CORE FRP BRIDGE DECK

GANGWAR T., MANDAL B. and CHAKRABARTI A.*
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Roorkee, India.
Abstract: An efficient and robust design methodology is presented for sandwich core
Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) bridge decks by integrating finite element analysis
(FEA), design of experiments, response surface methodology (RSM) and genetic
algorithm. The sandwich core bridge deck considered in this study consists of
composite laminated plates at faces and isotropic material as core which is fixed on
two opposite edges whereas other two edges are assumed to be free. The panel is
subjected to self-weight and imposed live load according to IRC loading conditions.
The ply thicknesses of top and bottom face plate, depth of core and fiber orientation
of different layers are considered as basic design parameters for structural
optimization. The most important parameters influencing governing criteria (i.e.,
deflection) are determined using FE analysis results based on D-optimal design of
experiment algorithm and analysis of variance (ANOVA). Optimum dimensions are
finalized using genetic algorithm interfaced with response surface model while
satisfying strength and serviceability criteria.
Keywords: Laminates; Finite element analysis; Statistical properties/methods;
Response surface methodology.
INTRODUCTION components to structural behaviour. Qiao et

al. (2000) presented an analysis and design
FRP laminated composites find increased
approach for single span FRP deck using first
applications in bridge structures both in
order shear deformation theory. Adali et al.
repairs, strengthening and new constructions
(1994) gave optimal design of thick
using all-FRP or hybrid FRP structures.
laminated sandwich plate based on higher
Although high initial construction cost posits
order theory of plates for two design
obstacles in the adoption of FRP in
problems minimum deflection and minimum
construction market. Hence, there is a need
weight design considering fiber volume
for simple and robust methodology for
content and total depth of bridge deck as
optimization of sandwich core FRP panel.
design variables. However, there is paucity of
Studies have been performed to investigate general methodology for material,
the behaviour of FRP laminated sandwich geometrical and structural optimisation of
rib/core composite structures. Aref et al. sandwich core FRP bridge deck. Hence a
(2005) studied structural behaviour of FRP simple and robust methodology is presented
rib core skew super structure in two parts. In in this paper to deal with optimisation for
the first part they presented bridge structural sandwich core bridge deck.
configurations and field test results. In the
second part, using finite element model, a METHODOLOGY
parametric study was also considered to In the present study, a methodology is
evaluate the contributions of the individual proposed for the optimisation of sandwich
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anupam1965@yahoo.co.uk 128

Gangwar et al.
core Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) bridge of the panel. Usage of response surface
decks/panels as illustrated in a flowchart in instead of computationally cumbersome finite
Figure 1. The proposed optimization element analysis for optimization engine
methodology is simple, robust and efficient accounts for time saving characteristics of the
due to its time saving characteristics. Nature methodology. Optimum configurations are
of proposed methodology enables to use it for checked against failure and serviceability
material, geometrical and structural criteria.
component optimizations of sandwich core
bridge deck/panels for different boundary and MODELLING
loading conditions. Initial configurations and
The various components of bridge deck i.e.
range of design parameters conforming to the
bottom face plate, sandwich core and top face
design constraint specifications and
plate are generated in the part module of
manufacturing constraints are decided by trial
ABAQUS/CAE and assembled. Elements used
and error using GUI of ABAQUS/CAE.
for face plates and sandwich core foam are
conventional 4 node shell elements (S4R:
Conventional Stress/Displacement Shell, 4-
node linear element geometry) and 8 node
brick elements (C3D8R: standard 3D
stress/Displacement solid element, 8-node
linear brick element) respectively.
The interaction between the adjacent
components is defined using tie constraint
which ensure the perfect bond between the
adjacent components. As model has two
different types of elements i.e. one solid
linear brick element and other is shell
element. Therefore, it is important to define
interaction between the two different element
types. The interaction is defined using shell
to solid coupling in interaction module. The
analysis is done using the general static
loading option. The model is validated with
refined higher order shear deformation theory
(RHSDT) as proposed by Khandelwal et
Figure 1.Flow chart for proposed al.(2012) (Table 1).
optimization methodology Table 1.Model verification
Responses i.e., deflections for design points Case(span 2 m) Deflection(mm)
generated from D-optimal code are obtained
using modified python script of Top ply thick./core ABAQUS RHSDT
ABAQUS/CAE. Non-significant parameters depth/bottom ply
affecting deflection are screened out by thick.
performing Analysis of variance (ANOVA).
18/150/18 2.64 2.53
A predictive model for deflection in terms of
critical design parameters is created using 14/200/14 2.50 2.43
response surface methodology (RSM). The
response surface is coupled with genetic 10/250/10 2.64 2.44
algorithm to find the optimum design 6/300/6 2.67 2.44
parameters corresponding to minimum cost
129
Optimisation of Sandwich Core FRP bridge Deck
RESULTS addition to self-weight, panels are loaded

with live load according to IRC 70R track
In the present study full scale bridge decks of vehicle loading with an impact factor of 25%.
width 7.5 m with different free spans are In absence of specification for permissible
considered for optimization. The bridge deck deflection in Indian standards, a reasonable
panels consists of FRP laminates at top and permissible deflection limit of span (L)/500 is
bottom faces(𝐸𝐿 =23GPa, 𝐸𝑇 = 18 GPa, 𝐺𝐿𝑇 = adopted in the present study. Out of the initial
9GPa, 𝜈𝐿𝑇 =0.25) and PVC foam as design parameters, significant design
sandwich core (E=130 Mpa, G=35 Mpa, ν parameters are identified based on the results
=0.4). Initially ply thickness of top face plate, obtained from the analysis of variance
ply thickness of bottom face plate, thickness (ANOVA) using the Design Expert.
of foam and fiber orientation of each lamina Screening of non-significant terms enhances
are considered as design variables. Bridge the quality of response surface (as shown in
deck panels are loaded in accordance with Table 2) and reduces the computational
Indian loading conditions as specified in efforts in optimisation process.
Indian Roads Congress (IRC) 6-2010. In
Table 2a. ANOVA for Response Surface Linear Model

Source Sum of Squares DOF Mean Square F Value p-value
Model 52.44 6 8.74 41.89 < 0.0001
A-h 28.20 1 28.20 135.15 < 0.0001
B-t 3.55 1 3.55 17.02 0.0003
C-b 26.02 1 26.02 124.72 < 0.0001
D-theta1 0.006 1 0.006 0.029 0.8647
E-theta2 0.021 1 0.021 0.101 0.7525
F-theta3 0.067 1 0.067 0.322 0.5744
R-Squared0.8902 , Pred- R-Squared0.8256, Adeq Precision23.0189
Table 2b.ANOVA for Response Surface Reduced Quadratic Model

Source Sum of DOF Mean Square F Value p-value
Squares
Model 58.38 8 7.30 396.79 < 0.0001
A-h 27.81 1 27.81 1512.36 < 0.0001
B-t 4.90 1 4.90 266.41 < 0.0001
C-b 27.81 1 27.81 1512.08 < 0.0001
AB 1.02 1 1.02 55.43 < 0.0001
AC 3.74 1 3.74 203.39 < 0.0001
BC 0.29 1 0.29 15.89 0.0004
A^2 0.10 1 0.10 5.59 0.0250
B^2 0.84 1 0.84 45.61 < 0.0001
R-Squared 0.9909 , Pred- R-Squared 0.9829, Adeq Precision73.746

*
Deflection = 17.10415 - 0.07×h - 0.390×t - 0.42×b + 7.23×10-4×h×t + 1.37×10-3×h×b + 2.57×10-3×t×b +
9.14×10-5×h2 +0.01×t2
130
Gangwar et al.
In the present study, following objective MATLAB and optimisation is performed for
function equation is used: minimum cost incorporating four different cost
weightage parameters i.e. N as 1, 0.25, 0.4, 0.6.
𝐶 = 𝑉𝑓𝑟𝑝 + 𝑁 × 𝑉𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 Table 3 summarise the optimum design
configurations for span 2 meter.
Obtained response surface from reduced model is
integrated with genetic algorithm toolbox of
Table 3.Summary of Optimum Design of FRP Sandwich Core Bridge Deck

of Dimensions 2 × 7.5m
Case Cost Depth of Top ply thickness, Bottom ply thickness,
Weightage Foam, h (mm) t(mm) b(mm)
factor
1 1 140 4.8 15
2 0.25 225 4 2
3 0.4 225 4 2
4 0.6 140 5.4 14.6
CONCLUSION polymer web core skew bridge

superstructure Composite Structures
In this paper, an optimisation methodology 69(4) 491–509.
for sandwich core FRP bridge deck by
integrating finite element analysis (FEA), Khandelwal R P Chakrabarti A Bhargava P
statistical design of experiment method, 2012Analysis of Laminated Soft Core
response surface methodology (RSM) and Sandwich Plate Having Interfacial
genetic algorithm is presented. The bridge Imperfections by an Efficient C0 FE
deck is modeled using ABAQUS and the Model Journal of Solid Mechanics 4(4)
model is validated with results available in 355-371.
literature. The bridge deck is optimized for Qiao P Davalos J F Brown B 2000 A
minimum cost considering strength and systematic analysis and design approach
serviceability criteria. The preliminary for single-span FRP deck/stringer
screening of non-significant parameters using bridges Composites: Part B 31593-609.
design of experiments and ANOVA and
usage of approximate model for response
instead of tedious finite element calculations
make the methodology computationally
efficient and robust. A parametric study has
been performed considering different span of
bridge deck and design curves are obtained
which can be used for design of short span
sandwich core FRP bridge deck.
REFERENCES
Adali S Summers E B Verijenko V E 1994
Minimum weight and deflection design
of thick sandwich laminates via symbolic
computation Composite Structures 29
145-160.
Aref A J Alampalli S He Y 2005
Performance of a fiber reinforcement
131
ICCMS2016
SLENDERNESS EFFECT ON BEHAVIOUR OF CFRP WRAPPED RC

CIRCULAR COLUMN
NARULE G.*, BAMBOLE A.N., RAUT G., RATHOD A. and LENDAVE Y.V.
Abstract: In construction industry, CFRP composites are widely used for retrofitting
and rehabilitation of columns and bridge piers so as to enhance the service life of
structures. The slenderness of the column largely influences the confining strength of
FRP wraps. The main objective of this paper is to study the slenderness effect on
reinforced concrete circular columns confined with fiber reinforced polymer
composites on strength parameter and compare the results with the variable
slenderness ratio unwrapped RC circular column specimen. The experimental
program included twelve RC circular column specimens which consisted unwrapped
and wrapped columns with slenderness ratio in the range of two to four. The
slenderness effect study was established through the comparison of experimental and
modelling results in terms of the ultimate axial strength, axial and lateral strain. The
experimental results showed that for RC circular concrete specimens, the variation in
slenderness ratio significantly affect on the confinement effectiveness when compare
with unwrapped and wrapped column specimens. The results of experiments and
computational modelling comparison clearly demonstrate that the strength
performance and ductility behaviour of unwrapped and CFRPC wrapped reinforced
circular columns are predominately influenced by change in slenderness ratio.
Keywords: Carbon fiber reinforced polymer; Circular columns; Slenderness
ratio; Rehabilitation
INTRODUCTION structural deficiencies and enhance its

The use of Fiber Reinforced Polymer strength as per expected demand.
Composites (FRPC) for Civil Engineering The slenderness of the column largely
applications, especially in structural influences the confinement action of FRP
upgradation has become increasingly popular wraps. In this present work, the columns of
in construction industry because of its ease variable slenderness ratio were casted and
of application, cost effectiveness, high wrapped with FRPC tested to establish
corrosion resistance, high strength to weight relationship in between strength capacity and
ratio and in addition to this its ability to shape slenderness of column.
to the existing structure, stiffness to weight
ratios and such other salient traits. CFRP MATERIAL AND METHODOLOGY
composites are also considered as an Twelve RC circular column specimens were
excellent substitute for retrofitting and cast as per test matrix of concrete grade M20
rehabilitation of columns so as to reduce and Fe415 steel of 200 mm diameter but with
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: giridharnarule@yahoo.co.in 132

Narule et al.
different lengths. Out of these, six specimens compression testing machine with loading
were control specimens and remaining were rate of 2.5 KN/sec. Data acquisition (DAQ)
confined with one layer of CFRP sheet. system was used to measure the readings
Strain gauges were pasted to measure strains from the instrumentation. The strain gauge
in steel, concrete and CFRP. To find load and readings were taken and established
deflection, load cell and LPs were installed. relationship between effect of slenderness
All the specimens were tested on a 300T ratio and strength parameters.
Figure 1. Experiential set-up

RESULTS
Table 1. Results of axial loading on RC columns
Avg. max. Avg. max. % increase in load % increase

Specimen
load (ton) stress (MPa) carrying capacity in strength
U400-1
U400-2 62.3 19.45
U400-3
84.54 82.42
W400-1
W400-2 114.97 35.48
W400-3
U800-1
U800-2 58.27 18.19
U800-3
90.1 90.16
W800-1
W800-2 110.77 34.59
W800-3
133
Slenderness Effect on Behaviour of CFRP Wrapped RC Circular Column
Figure 2. Comparison of 400 mm long Figure 3. Comparison of 800 mm long

test specimens and finite element model test specimens and finite element model
Table 2. Evaluation of ductility
Pmax Δmax
Specimen Py (ton) Δy (mm) μ % increase in μ
(ton) (mm)
U400-1 62.57 -0.396 76.04 -1.56 3.94

U400-2 49.46 -0.372 59.86 -1.97 5.3
54.55
W400-1 57.52 -0.258 109.3 -1.91 7.41
W400-2 57.66 -0.345 110.4 -2.37 6.86
U800-1 47.82 -0.659 53.29 -2.05 3.12
U800-2 50 -0.758 59.43 -1.79 2.37
U800-3 50.14 -0.632 62.08 -1.43 2.25
41.09
W800-1 77.24 -1.58 125.9 -6.52 4.12
W800-2 70.96 -1.21 104.9 -4.05 3.35
W800-3 67.57 -1.24 101.4 -4.29 3.46
CONCLUSIONS 4. The decrease in ductility due to

increase in slenderness ratio of test
1. For all the wrapped specimens tested,
specimens by two was 14%.
significant increase in strength was
observed as compare to unwrapped 5. To avoid premature failure of
sections. columns rather than wrapping top and
bottom surface of column with double
2. The enhancement in ductility of test
layer of wrap, a single layer is
specimens was significant in case
sufficient.
wrapped RC circular column.
6. Stress-strain curve from FEA of
3. For the test specimens due to increase
unwrapped RC columns was close to
in slenderness ratio by two caused
that of actual test specimens.
decrease in strength by 3 to 4%.
134
Narule et al.
REFERENCE
Chikh N Gahmous M and Benzaid R 2012

Structural performance of high strength
concrete columns confined with CFRP
sheets Proceedings of the World
Congress on Engineering III.
Etman E 2002 Efficiency of strengthening of
RC columns with different slenderness
ratios using CFRP wraps 27th
Conference on OUR WORLD IN
CONCRETE & STRUCTURES
Singapore.
Hadi M N S 2006 Behaviour of FRP wrapped
normal strength concrete columns under
eccentric loading Composite Structures
72 503–511.
Lam L and Teng J G 2003 Design-oriented
stress-strain model for FRP confined
concrete Construction and Building
Materials 17 471-489.
Theriault M and Simon Claude 2004 Fibre-
reinforced polymer-confined circular
concrete columns: investigation of size
and slenderness effects Journal of
Composite for Construction ASCE 8
323-331
135
ICCMS2016
MODAL ANALYSIS OF COMPOSITE BEAM USING ABAQUS (FEA)

NAWALE H. H.1, ROY S.2* and JAGTAP K.1
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Sinhgad Institute of Technology and Science, Pune, India.
2
Composite Research Centre, R&DE(E), Defence Research and Development Organization, Pune, India.
Abstract: Composite materials are very light in weight with higher strength and
stiffness, and are very helpful in applications like aerospace, aircraft, automotive,
energy, infrastructure etc. Though composite materials are strong enough, but
sometimes when subjected high impact loading or shocks, they lacks in the stiffness
which changes the dynamic responses of the structure, which modifies the modal
parameters like natural frequencies, mode shapes, damping etc. So these modal
parameters can be used to judge the variation in stiffness or damage occurrence in the
composite structures. This paper deals with the modal analysis of composite
cantilever beam using ABAQUS (FEA) software. Model of composite cantilever
beam for two different fibre orientations, for quasi isotropic [0/45/-45/90] s and for
unidirectional with all layers of 0⁰orientation has be made in ABAQUS finite element
analysis software and modal analysis of the beam is performed for both the fibre
orientations. Natural frequencies for first five modes of bending from ABAQUS
(FEA) software are compared with natural frequencies by analytical method for
validation of ABAQUS (FEA) results. It is observed that there is good agreement
between the natural frequencies obtained from ABAQUS (FEA) and analytical
calculation.
Keywords: Composite beam; Modal analysis; ABAQUS (FEA).
INTRODUCTION of structures, based on the concept of

resonance.
Composite structures get delaminated with
reduction in stiffness, when subjected to high MATERIAL
impact loading or shocks. Due to stiffness
degradation there is change in dynamic Carbon fibre- Unidirectional-T-700
responses of the structures which modifies
the modal parameters like natural frequency, METHODOLGY
mode shapes, damping etc. So these modal Modal analysis of composite cantilever beam
parameters can be used as damage indicator
with 8 plies is performed using ABAQUS
tools for health monitoring of composite
structures. Finite element analysis has wide (FEA) software for two different types of
scope in solving difficult and complex fibre orientations, [0/45/-45/90] s and
engineering problems, which can be used to unidirectional with all layers with 0⁰
perform various types of modal analysis. orientation. Natural frequencies for
Natural frequency results from modal composite cantilever beam are obtained from
analysis can be used to get the idea of failing ABAQUS (FEA) and also calculated using
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: roysajal@rde.drdo.in 136

Navale et al.
analytical formula with same beam ABAQUS (FEA) results for beam with fibre
dimensions and material properties used in orientation [0/45/-45/90]s for first three
ABAQUS (FEA) modelling. Comparison of modes are shown in Figure.1 to Figure.3
results from both methods i.e. ABAQUS
(FEA) as well as analytical method is done to
check whether the results obtained from
ABAQUS (FEA) are in the range of results
from analytical method. For analytical
calculations of natural frequencies, formula
used is given in equation (1) and value of
modulus of elasticity in equation (1) is taken
as equivalent modulus of elasticity calculated
from nine engineering constants of carbon
fibre using MATLAB code for quasi
isotropic beam.
Figure 1. Mode 1 for [0/45/-45/90]s
𝑐𝑛 𝐸𝐼
𝑓𝑛 = � (1)
2𝜋 𝑚𝐿4
Where,
f n = Natural frequency of cantilever beam
n= No of modes, n=1, 2, 3…..
E= Modulus of elasticity
L=Length of cantilever beam
I= Moment of inertia of cantilever beam
m=Mass per unit length of cantilever beam
C n = Constant (changing) for every mode
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

Natural frequency results for cantilever beam Figure 2. Mode 2 for [0/45/-45/90]s
with fibre orientation [0/45/-45/90] s for first
five modes by both methods are shown in
Table.1
Table 1. Natural frequencies for [0/45/-
45/90] s
Mode Analytical ABAQUS
No natural (FEA) natural
frequencies(Hz) frequencies(Hz)
1 29.61 29.435
2 185.60 184.25
3 522.021 515.31
4 1018.40 1008.3
Figure 3. Mode 3 for [0/45/-45/90]s
5 1683.51 1663.6
Natural frequency results for cantilever beam
with unidirectional fibre orientation with all
137
Modal Analysis of Composite Beam Using ABAQUS (FEA)
layers of 0⁰ for first five modes by both

methods are shown in Table 2.
Table 2. Natural frequencies for UD
with all 0⁰
Mode Analytical ABAQUS
No natural (FEA) natural
frequencies (Hz) frequencies (Hz)
1 46.5286 46.048
2 291.58 287.89
3 820.07 803.10
4 1599.86 1565.3
5 2644.73 2569.6 Figure 6. Mode 3 for UD with all 0⁰
ABAQUS (FEA) results for the beam having CONCLUSION

unidirectional orientation with all layers of 0⁰
Modal analysis of composite cantilever beam
for first three modes are shown in Figure.4 to
with 8 plies for two different fibre
Figure.6
orientations, [0/45/-45/90]s and
unidirectional with all layers of 0 is ⁰
performed using ABAQUS (FEA) software

and these FEA results are compared with
analytical results and it is observed that there
is good agreement between both the results.
For more accuracy in ABAQUS (FEA)
results and their good match with analytical
results, more fine mesh is required while
modelling. Also natural frequencies for quasi
isotropic beam [0/45/-45/90]s are smaller
than unidirectional beam with all layers of 0⁰
Figure 4. Mode 1 for UD with all 0⁰
for all modes of bending.
REFERENCES
Shahdin A Mezeix L Bouvet C Joseph M and

Gourinat Y 2009 Monitoring the effects
impact damages on modal parameters in
carbon fibre entangled sandwich beams
Engineering Structures 31 2833-2841.
Jamadar N I Kivade S B Dhande K K and
Pedada Sudhakara Rao 2014 Vibration
based damage inspection in composite
Figure 5. Mode 2 for UD with all 0⁰ structures- A critical review
International Journal of Engineering
138
Navale et al.
Science and Innovative Technology

(IJESIT) 3(5) 201-208.
Tate I V Roy Sajal and Jagtap K R 2014
Delamination detection of composite
cantilever beam coupled with
piezoelectric transducer using natural
frequency deviation Procedia
engineering 97 1293-1304.
Rao Singiresu S 2010 Mechanical Vibrations
5th ed. University of Miami Chennai.
Daniel M. Issac and Ishai Ori
2007Engineering mechanics of
nd
composite materials 2 ed. Oxford
University press New York.
139
ICCMS2016
SEISMIC ANALYSIS OF MULTISTOREY BUILDINGS USING STEEL

CONCRETE COMPOSITE COLUMNS AT SOFT STOREY.
PATIL S. S.*, JANGAVE S. K. and PATIL R. S.
Deogiri Institute of Engineering and Management Studies, Aurangabad, Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: Due to increase in population, car parking space is major concern. Hence
trend has been set up to use ground floor for parking purpose. Literature shows that,
large number of reinforced concrete (RC) building with soft storey damaged by
earthquake shaking due to many structural deficiencies such as, column with
insufficient confinements, strong beam weak column, formation of plastic hinge at
beam-column joint, opening of 90 degree ties, poor detailing in beam-column
connection joint etc. This paper includes seismic analysis of multistorey frame
structures using steel concrete composite column (SCC) section in soft storey. The
structure with SCC column section is analyzed and compare with general RCC frame
structure by using response spectrum and pushover analysis method. The parameters
compare from analysis are displacement, base shear, plastic hinges, time period of
mode shapes and performance point. Commercial software SAP2000 v16 is used for
analysis. The result shows that plastic hinge formation during earthquake at beam-
column joint can improved performance with use of steel reinforced composite
column section at soft storey.
Keywords: Pushover analysis; Soft storey; Steel reinforced composite column.
INTRODUCTION during earthquake shaking, and hence the

columns in the ground storey and beams are
Now a day increase in the population in the
heavily stressed. In such condition building
population car parking space is major
needs to perform well is the main aim behind
concern hence trend has been set up to use
this analysis. In present study the result of
the ground floor as parking purpose. The
response spectrum and pushover analysis are
presence of infill walls in the entire upper
discussed for building in Zone IV.
storey except for the ground storey makes the
upper storey much stiffer than the open RESPONSE SPECTRUM
ground storey (OGS). From the past
earthquakes it was evident that the major type The representation of the maximum response
of failure that occurred in OGS buildings of idealized single degree freedom systems
included snapping of lateral ties, crushing of having certain period and damping during
core concrete, buckling of longitudinal earthquake shaking. The maximum response
reinforcement bars etc. Almost upper storey’s is plotted against the undamped natural
of building move together as a single block period and for various damping values, and
and most of the horizontal displacement of can be expressed in terms of maximum
the building occurs in the ground storey absolute acceleration, maximum velocity, or
itself. In other words, this type of buildings maximum relative displacement.
sway back and forth like inverted pendulum
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sumit.patil121291@gmail.com 140

Patil et al.
PUSHOVER ANALYSIS analysis. Target displacement is calculated as

per equation given in fema-356, Equation is
The pushover analysis of structure is static
non-linear analysis under permanent vertical δ t = C 0 C 1 C 2 C 3 S a (T e 2 /4Π2) g …(1)
load and gradually increasing lateral load. Where,
This lateral load represents forces induced by
earthquake. C 0 = Modification factor for SDOF to MDOF.
C 1 = Modification Factor to relate expected
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT maximum inelastic displacements to
displacements calculated for liner elastic
Buildings G+14 and G+20 with open ground response.
storey are modelled in SAP. The details are C 2 =Modification factor to represent the
shown in table 1. effect of hysteresis shape on the maximum
Table 1. displacement response.
C 3 =Modification Factor.
Description Value S a = Response spectrum acceleration.
Live load 3kN/m2 T e = Characteristic period of the response
spectrum.
Floor finish 1kN/m2
Wall thickness 0.23 m PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS
Beam size 0.4m*0.23m FREE VIBRATION ANALYSIS
RC column size 0.6m*0.6m The time period of the idealized SDOF
system is,
Composite column size 0.6m*0.6m
𝑀
I-sec in composite column ISHB 350,450 𝑇 = 2𝜋�
𝐾
16 No’s of
Rebar
20dia 1.2
Grade of concrete M30 1
0.8 G+14 RC col
Grade of reinforcement Fe 500 0.6
G+14 Compo col
Storey height 3m 0.4
0.2 G+20 RC col
0 G+20 Compo col
Mode i Mode ii Mode iii
Time Period
Figure 2. Time period for various model
RESPONSE SPECTRUM
For Zone IV, medium soil and 0.05% of
Figure 1. Plan of building G+14 and damping response spectrum graph is as,
G+20
This models are analysis by response
spectrum method. From this we take time
period for mode shape and calculate target
displacement for each storey given in fema-
356. This displacement is use for pushover
141
Seismic Analysis of Multistorey Buildings using Steel Concrete Composite Columns at Soft Storey
12000
1 2 0 00
10000
8000
8000
6000
4000
4
4000
00
2000
2 0 0..02 0..04 0 ..0 6 0..08
0 0..02 0 ..0 4 0 ..0 6 0..08 0..1
Figure 4. G+20 Base shear v/s

Figure 3. G+14 Base shear v/s Displacement
Displacement
Table 1. Plastic hinges
General column Composite column General column Composite column
PUSHOVER ANALYSIS RESULT AND DISCUSSION

From the response spectrum graph spectral 1. It is seen that from analysis time period
acceleration calculated and from this spectral is reduce for mode shape in composite
acceleration target displacement found for column model which shows the
model are: stiffness has been increases of building.
Model Target displacement 2. From base shear v/s displacement graph
G+14 136 mm for particular displacement base shear
G+20 132 mm resisting capacity has been improved.
142
Patil et al.
3. Also the ductility at the open ground frames Journal of Structural

storey of column is increases which Engineering 25(2) 95-102 1998-07-01.
improved performance building as soft
storey in earthquake shaking. Lakshmi B and Shanmugam N E 2001 State
of the art report on steel–concrete
4. From pushover analysis shows building
composite columns Journal of
with composite column model are less
susceptible to earthquake as shown in Constructional Steel Research 57 1041–
table 1. 1080.
Murthy C V R Why are Open-Ground Storey
CONCLUSION
Buildings vulnerable in Earthquakes?
In this study building are analyze by response Earthquake tip 21 Indian Institute of
spectrum method and nonlinear static Technology Kanpur, India.
pushover analysis is done in both cases
structure with composite column which Mwafy A M and Elnashai A S 2001 Static
provided only at open ground storey are less pushover versus dynamic collapse
susceptible to earthquake and perform well. analysis of RC buildings Engineering
Structures 23 407–424.
REFERENCES
Nevzat Kirac Mizam Dogan and Hakan
Ari Wibowo John L Wilson Nelson T K
Ozbasaran 2011 Failure of weak-storey
Lamb Emad F Gad 2010 Collapse
during earthquakes Eskisehir Osmangazi
modelling analysis of a precast soft
University Turkey. Engineering Failure
storey building in Australia Engineering
Analysis 18 572–581.
Óscar Martínez-Ramos, David Hernández-
Ehab M Hanna and Abd El-Moniem M Amin
Figueirido and Ana Piquer 2015
2006 Strength assessment of axially
Analysis of Steel-Encased Composite
loaded partially encased composite
Columns Subjected to Concentric Axial
columns Proceeding 31st Conference on
Load Using Artificial Neural Networks
our world in concrete & structures
Proceedings World Congress on
Singapore.
Engineering London U.K.
Huanjun Jiang Xiaojuan Liu and Junjie Mao
Sezen H Whittaker A S Elwood K J and
2015 Full-scale experimental study on
Mosalam K M 2003 Performance of
masonry infilled RC moment-resisting
reinforced concrete buildings during the
frames under cyclic loads Tongji
August 17, 1999 Kocaeli, Turkey
University Shanghai 200092 China.
earthquake, and seismic design and
Engineering Structures 91 70–84.
construction practise in Turkey
Jaswant N Arlekar Sudhir K Jain and Murty Engineering Structures 25 103–114.
CVR 1997 Seismic Response of RC
ZHAO Gen-tian et al. 2009 Behavior of
Frame Buildings with Soft First Storey’
slender steel concrete composite
proceedings CBRI Golden Jubilee
columns in eccentric loading J Shanghai
Conference on Natural Hazards in
Univ (Engl Ed) 2009 13(6) 481–488.
Urban Habitat New Delhi.
Kodur V K R Erkl M A and Quenneville J H
P 1998 Seismic analysis of infilled
143
ICCMS2016
BALLISTIC IMPACT RESPONSE OF LAMINATED GFRP COMPOSITE

PLATE: EXPERIMENTAL AND FE ANALYSES
ANSARI M. D. M.* and CHAKRABARTI A.
Civil Engineering Department, Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, India.
Abstract: In the present work, impact behaviour of laminated GFRP composite plate
has been studied with experimental work as well as FE analysis. Material
characterization of GFRP based on material stress/strain criteria has been carried out
and implemented in the present FE model to study the progressive damage evolution
in composite plate due to ballistic impact. Experimental impact tests on GFRP
laminate is performed by pneumatic gun. Numerical results obtained from the present
FE model in terms of residual velocity and damage pattern in composite plate are
compared with the results from experimental impact tests which show good
agreement. Shock effect due to impact is also considered in the material model of
composite plate. Pressure wave generation in composite plate due to impact is studied
in detail. Results from the present FE model show, delamination is the dominant mode
of damage in laminated composite plate under impact due to matrix failure in tension.
Many new results are presented which should be useful for the researches in this field.
Keywords: GFRP; Material characterization; FE analysis; Ballistic impact.
INTRODUCTION performed by Cantwell and Morton (1989,

1990) and Bilingardi and Vadori (2003).
There is steady demand of FRP composite in
Ballistic impact analysis on composite plate
aircraft, automobiles, marine structures,
to study the penetration behaviour was
defence, military, sports and many structural
conducted by Sabet (2011) and Sevkat
applications where high stiffness and light
(2012).
weight are the major concerns [Namala et al.
2014]. Fibre reinforced composite beam is Variation of pressure wave in addition to
used as energy absorber in vehicle [Yang progressive damage analysis of laminated
2013] and for fluid transfer laying on the composite plate due to ballistic impact is still
ground or beneath [Perillo et al. 2015]. in queue. In this present work, ballistic
impact behaviour of laminated GFRP
In spite of that, these materials are
composite plate is studied with experimental
susceptible to damage under impact because
work as well as FE analysis. Material
of their low ductility and orthotropic nature.
characterization of GRRP is carried out and
Therefore, the need of impact analysis of
implemented in the present FE model to
FRP materials attracts the researchers in this
study the progressive damage behaviour of
field. Some relevant researches regarding
composite plate due to ballistic impact.
impact behaviour of FRP composite are
discussed here in brief. Dynamic behaviour
of composite plate under low velocity was
MATERIALS AND METHODS
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: muslimdecivil@gmail.com 144

Ansari and Chakrabarti
To study the damage pattern and modes of

damages in laminated composite plate,
material characterization of GFRP is carried Clamped BC
out and implemented in the present FE model
developed in AUTODYN hydro code.
Specimen dimensions, manufacturing and
testing procedure are followed according to
ASTM D3039/D3039M and AUTODYN Fine mesh
manual. Material properties of GFRP
composite as calculated from tensile test are Figure. 1. Numerical model
listed in Table 1. A mesh division of 70 x 70 is used to the
quarter plate after mesh convergence study.
Table 1 Material properties of GFRP.
Equation of state Orthotropic RESULTS AND DISSCUSSIONS
Sub-Equation of State Polynomial Experimental impact tests on laminated
Reference density (gm/cm3) 1.800 GFRP composite plate of size 140 x 140 x
Young’s modulus 11 (kPa) 6.000e+006
3.12 mm3 with blunt impactor of diameter 19
Young’s modulus 22 (kPa) 1.971e+007
Young’s modulus 33 (kPa) 1.971e+007 mm and mass 52 gm is performed under fully
Poisons ratio 12 0.150 clamped condition. Numerical results in
Poisons ratio 23 0.130 terms of residual velocity and damage pattern
Poisons ratio 31 0.492 obtained from the present FE model are
Strength Elastic compared with the results from experimental
Shear modulus (kPa) 1.790e+006 impact tests.
Failure Material
Stress/Strain 500
Tensile failure Stress 22 (kPa) 4.318e+005
Residual velocity (m/s)
Maximum Shear Stress 23 8.0e+004 400

(kPa)
Tensile Failure Strain 11 0.009 300
Tensile Failure Strain 22 0.02
200
Tensile Failure Strain 33 0.02 Experimental
Post Failure Response Orthotropic 100 FE model
NUMERICAL MODELING 0
0 200 400 600
Three dimensional numerical models of Incidence velocity (m/s)
composite plate of size 140 x 140 x 3.12 mm3
Figure. 2. Variation of residual velocity
and blunt impactor (steel 4340) of diameter
with incidence velocity
19 mm and mass 52 gm are made in
It is observed that the residual velocity
AUTODYN (Figure. 1). Hexahedron brick
obtained from the present FE model is more
element is assigned to the numerical models
than that obtained from the results of
with Lagrangian process. Interaction between
experimental impact tests (Figure. 2). This
plate and impactor is defined by gap
difference may be due to the frictional loss of
interaction method with gap size of 0.05 mm
energy of impactor. However, frictionless
and frictionless contact.
contact is defined between impactor and plate
145
Ballistic Impact Response of FRP Composite Plate: Experimental and FE analyses
in the present FE model because of unknown

0.2
value of friction coefficient. Time (ms)
Evolution of damages in laminated composite 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
plate due to ballistic impact at different time -0.2
Acceleration (m/s.s)
frame is presented in Figure. 3. It is observed
that most of the damage occurs due to -0.4
Vi=40 m/s
delamination i.e. failure of matrix in tension. Vi=100 m/s
-0.6
Due to high incidence velocity, some part of
composite plate flown off with impactor -0.8
(called Plug).
-1
Figure. 4 shows the acceleration-time
histories of impactor at different incidence Figure. 4. Acceleration-time histories of
velocities during penetration in laminate. At impactor
lower incidence velocity (Vi=40 m/s), Figure. 5 shows the pressure wave variation
fluctuation in acceleration of impactor is on the back face of composite plate from
observed which means that the penetration centre to the boundary along x axis at
resistance offered by laminated composite is different time frame. It is observed that as the
more at lower incidence velocity. time passes, magnitude of pressure decreases
but concentration area of pressure increases.
Nature of pressure also changes from positive
t=0.015 ms
to negative during penetration process of
impactor.
800
700
Delamination t=0.04 ms 600
500
Pressure (MPa)
400 t=0.015 ms
300 t=0.027 ms
Plugs erosion t=0.041 ms
t=0.068 ms 200
100
0
-100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
-200
-300
Distance (mm)
Figure. 3. Progressive damage evolution
in composite plate at Vi= 274.5 m/s
Figure. 5 pressure wave on the back face
Pressure applied by impactor at impact point of composite plate at Vi=274.5 m/s
appears like a wave that travels throughout
the body of composite. This pressure wave
causes the generation of various stresses in
laminate.
146
Ansari and Chakrabarti
impactor fluctuates rapidly at lower

(a) incidence velocity.
 Variation of pressure wave near impact
point is more which causes breakage of
fibre.
REFERENCES
ANSYS/AUTODYN 14.5 2012 User’s
Delamination Fibre breakage manual ANSYS Inc. South Pointe.
Bilingardi G and Vadori R 2003 Influence of
(b) the laminate thickness in low velocity
impact behaviour of composite material
plate Composites Structures 61 27–38.
Cantwell W J and Morton J 1989 A
comparison of the low and high velocity
impact response of CFRP Composites
20(6) 545-551.
Cantwell W J and Morton J 1990 Impact
perforation of carbon fibre reinforced
plastic Composite Science and
Figure. 6 Damage pattern on the back Technology 38 119-141.
Namala K K Mahajan P and Bhatnagar N
face of composite plate; (a)
2014 Digital Image Correlation of Low-
Experimental, (b) FE model Velocity Impact on a Glass/Epoxy
This variation in pressure leads to the matrix Composite International Journal for
failure in tension and causes delamination. Computational Methods in Engineering
Science and Mechanics 15 203–217.
Damage pattern in composite plate due to Perillo G Vedivik N P and Echtermeyer A T
impact by blunt impactor at incidence 2015 Numerical and experimental
velocity of 274.5 m/s from both experimental investigation of impact on filament
test and the present FE model are presented wound glass reinforced epoxy pipe
in Figure. 6. Damage occurred mostly due to Journal of Composite Materials 49(6)
723-738.
delamination; however, breakage of fibre
Sevkat E 2012 Experimental and numerical
appears at the contact point of impactor. approaches for estimating ballistic limit
CONCLUSIONS velocities of woven composite beams
International Journal of Impact
Some important conclusions about ballistic Engineering 45 16-27.
impact behaviour of laminated composite Sabet A Fagih N and Beheshty M H 2011
plate obtained from the present experimental Effect of reinforcement type on high
tests as well as FE model are discussed velocity impact response of GRP plates
below: using a sharp tip projectile International
 Damage in laminated composite plate Journal of Impact Engineering 38 715-
722.
occurs mainly due to matrix failure and
Yang Y Wu X and Hamada H 2013
causes delamination. Application of fibre-reinforced
 Some part of delamination also occurs composites beam as energy absorption
due to in plane shear failure. member in vehicle International
 Due to penetration resistance offered Journal of Crashworthiness 18 103–
by composite plate, retardation of 109.
147
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED COMPOSITE ORTHOTROPIC PLATES

UNDER BI-DIRECTIONAL BENDING SUBJECTED TO
CONCENTRATED LOADS
RAVAL D.1 and BAMBOLE A. N.2
1
Applied Mechanics Department, L. D. College of Engineering, Ahmedabad India.
2
Structural Engineering Department, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai India.
Abstract: 3-D elasticity formulation for simply supported orthotropic laminated

composite plates under bi-directional bending subjected to concentrated load have
been developed. From literature review it has been observed that the available
formulations do not model concentrated load exactly. In most of the formulations
concentrated load has been modelled as distributed load over a small patch area.
Whereas in the present formulations the concentrated load has been modelled
accurately with the help of Fourier transformation. Formulation is applicable to ‘N’
lamina cross-ply rectangular plate subjected to concentrated load at any location
within top surface. Results obtained from the present formulation have been compared
with available results. Accurate3-D response for orthotropic plates subjected to
concentrated loads for different laminate stacking sequence are presented. Present
formulation provides through thickness variation of all stress and displacement
components. A few benchmark solutions developed can be used for validation of
new/refined plate theories and finite element formulations. The response of plate
subjected to uniformly distributed load and concentrated load has also been compared.
Few results for transition from bi-directional bending behaviour to cylindrical bending
behaviour for plates subjected to line load has been investigated. Present study
highlights limitations of CLPT and the aspect ratio range from which CLPT results
converges to elasticity solutions for laminated composite plates under bi-directional
bending subjected to point load.
Keywords: 3-D elasticity solution; bi-directional bending; concentrated load;

laminated composite orthotropic plates;
for laminated composite plates based on

INTRODUCTION
equations of anisotropic elasticity are
Simplified 2-D analysis technique developed
presented here which accounts distributed
for laminated composite plates do not yield
and concentrated load. Simply supported
accurate description of state of stress for
orthotropic laminated plates subjected to
thick plates as well as plates subjected to
concentrated, distributed as well as line load
concentrated loads. Accurate prediction of
has been investigated. Formulation presented
inter-laminar stresses is also very important
here is applicable to laminate with any
to understand de-lamination failure of
number of plies and any position of
laminated composite plates. 3-D formulations
concentrated load.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:raval.deepa@gmail.com 148

Raval and Bambole
Pagano (1969) elasticity solutions for through thickness variations of stresses and
laminate under cylindrical bending under deformations has been presented which can
sinusoidal load were extended for uniformly be considered as benchmark solution.
distributed and line load by Pagano and
Wang (1971) modelling line load as FORMULATION
uniformly distributed load over narrow strip. A laminated composite orthotropic plate
Pagano (1970) elasticity formulation for bi- consists of ‘N’ no. of unidirectional laminae
directional bending under sinusoidal load was with material symmetry axis parallel to the
extended by Savithri S. and Varadan T. plate axes x, y, z as shown in figure-1(a) has
(1992) to bi-directional bending of laminated been considered for formulisation. The plate
composite plates for uniformly distributed is considered to be simply supported as
and concentrated loads (small patch load). shown in figure-1(b). The concentrated load
Savithri and Varadan (1992) used Fourier ‘Q’ is positioned on the top surface of
formulations that simulates concentrated load laminate is also shown in figure-2.
as uniformly distributed loading over a small
square area of width=0.05a. However exact
formulation for concentrated load has not
been presented yet.
In present work 3-D elasticity formulation for
bi-directional bending of simply supported
laminated composite plates subjected to
concentrated load modelled with the help of
double Fourier series is presented. Present
formulation is based on Pagano’s (1970)
formulation for bi-directional bending of
laminated composite plates subjected to
sinusoidal loading.
As the concentrated load could not be
represented by continuous loading function
Savithri and Varadan (1992) has observed
that Fourier series do not converge at the
point of discontinuity. In the present
formulation as the point load has been Figure 1. General laminate plate
modelled as exact point load thereby number
of discontinuity has been reduced to one.
In order to avoid the mathematical
disturbance and get reliable results the
response of the plate is evaluated at a short
distance away from the location of point load.
Since the load has been formulated with
single discontinuity convergence of results is Figure 2. Laminate subjected to
achieved with significantly less no. of concentrated load
harmonics as compared to formulations
presented by Savithri and Varadan (1992). A generic load qz(x ,y) expressed as Fourier’s
Solutions for few problems in detail with series approximation:
149
Analysis of Laminated Composite Orthotropic Plates Under Bi-directional Bending Subjected to
Concentrated Loads
Graphite-Epoxy Lamina; Pagano [Pagano

and Wang, 1971]
EL = 172.40 GPa;ET = ET = 6.89 GPa
For concentrated load coefficient qmn is
GTT = 1.378 GPa;LT = TT =0.25
evaluated as,
4Q m xo n yo Normalisation factors considered are,
q mn  sin( ) sin( ) , m, n  1, 2,...n
ab a b Z 
Z a
, S  , ( x ,  y ,  xy )
1
( x ,  y ,  xy )
where, (xo, yo) is location of concentrated on h h qo S 2
z 1
the plate. z  , ( xz ,  yz )  ( xz ,  yz ),
qo qo S
ET u ET v 100 ET w
NUMERICAL STUDY u  ,v  , w
qo h S 3 qo h S 3 qo h S 4
Various numerical examples have been Simply supported symmetric three-ply
solved to investigate: (i)Response of Square (0°/90°/0°) laminated plate with equal
and Rectangular(b=3a) plates subjected to thickness of each layer subjected to central
concentrated load at the centre of the plate concentrated load has been considered for
considering three different laminate  , y
investigation. The normalized stresses x
schemes(0°-single ply, 2 coupled ply-
τ xz ,τ yz
90°/0°,3-ply 0°/90°/0°).(ii)to compare of the and the displacements w , u have
response plate subjected to line load and been compared in Table-1 for aspect ratios
uniformly distributed load. S=4, 10, 20 and 50. Excellent agreement of
Material Properties: results has been observed with Savithri and
Varadan (1992) results as shown in Table-1.
Table 1. Normalized stresses and displacement of 3-layered(0o/90o/0o) orthotropic plate
Aspect Sou x y  xy (0,0,h/2)  xz ( o, b / 2, 0)  yz ( a / 2, 0, 0) w( a / 2, b / 2, 0)

Ratio ‘S’ rce ( a /2, b/2/,-h/2)
4 ♦ -6.0909 -0.8381 -0.1679 0.9056 0.2821 12.8770
(m=n=101) {-12.423} {1.3530} {-.0238}
* {-12.42} {1.3493) {-0.0224} 0.8949
0.8959(0) 0.2821 12.8742
10 ♦ -7.1762 }-0.9561 -0.0875 1.1570 -0.1618 4.8047
(m=n=101) {-11.709} {1.3698) {-0.0225}
* {-11.61} {1.3881} {-0.0236} 1.1575 -0.1717 4.7121
20 ♦ -8.0278 -1.07226 -0.0656 1.1415 -0.2254 2.9266
(m=n=151) {-10.01} {1.3632} {-0.02019}
* {-10.753} {1.3382} {-0.0222} 1.1423 -0.2213 2.9239
50 ♦ -9.122 -1.2263 -0.0575 1.0474 -0.3720 2.2869
(m=n=151)
CPLT * -2.55 0.3098 -0.0186 -- -- 2.1302
CLPT + -5.00 -0.5322 -0.0559 -- -- 2.1257
{ }-bracket indicates values at (a/2,b/2,h/6) ( )-bracket indicates ‘z’ distance
♦ Present Analysis *Savithri S and VaradanT K (1992) ‘+’ Reddy J N (1997)
150
Raval and Bambole
S z z
w( a2 , b2 , 0)  x(0.45a,0.45b, z)  y (0.45a, 0.45b, z )

(a) (b) (c)
z z
z
(d) (e) (f)
 xz (0, 0.45b, z)  yz (0.45a, 0, z) u(0, 0.45b, Z)
Figure 3. Through thickness variation of the stresses and displacements
ratios suggests that a 3-D formulation is

Stresses and deformation values at the bottom
must for analysis of both thick and thin
face as well as the laminate interface have
laminated plates subjected to
been presented in Table-1.Variation of the
concentrated loads. Such variation
stresses  x ,  y , τ xz ,τ yz and displacements
cannot be predicted by the CLPT.
w , u through the thickness of the plate for 2. Formulation allows accurate estimation
aspect ratio S= 4, 10 and 20 at critical of interlaminar stresses and its location
locations has been presented in Figure-3[(a) which are crucially important for de-
to (f)]. lamination study.
CONCLUSIONS 3. 3-D behaviour is governed by not only
the aspect ratio but also by type of
3-D elasticity solution of laminated
loading, plate geometry and stacking
composite plates subjected to concentrated
sequence.
loads using simple double Fourier
transformation is obtained. 4. Inspection of response of rectangular
(b=3a) laminated plates revealed
1. Non-linear through thickness variation of
significant reduction stresses in y
stress and displacement at lower aspect
ratios and in the zone of stress
direction i.e.  y , xy and  yz in
concentration under the concentrated comparison to square plates and
load for lower as well as higher aspect convergence to CLPT at lower aspect
151
Analysis of Laminated Composite Orthotropic Plates Under Bi-directional Bending Subjected to
Concentrated Loads
ratios with faster Fourier convergence is

also observed.
REFERENCES
Pagano N J 1969 Exact solutions for
composite laminates in cylindrical
bending Journal of Composite Materials
3 398-411.
rectangular bidirectional composites and
sandwich plates Journal of Composite
Materials 4 20-34.
Pagano N J and Wang A S D1971 July
Further study of composite laminates
under cylindrical bending Journal of
Composite Materials 5 521-528.
Reddy JN 1997 Mechanics of Laminated
Composite Plates: Theory and Analysis
CRS Press Florida.
Savithri S and Varadan T K 1992 Laminated
plates under uniformly distributed and
concentrated loads ASME Journal of
Applied Mechanics Brief notes 59(1)
211-214.
152
ICCMS2016
VIBRATION DAMPING CAPACITY OF CARBON NANOTUBES BASED

HYBRID COMPOSITE SPHERICAL SHELL PANEL
SWAIN A. and ROY T.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology Rourkela, Rourkela, India.
Abstract: The present work proposes a numerical model to evaluate the elastic
properties as well as to analyse dynamic responses of hybrid composite shell
structures which consists of conventional carbon fiber (CF) as reinforcing phase and
multiwalled carbon nanotubes (MWCNTs) based polymer as matrix phase. The Mori-
Tanaka based strength of material method has been implemented to determine the
elastic properties of such hybrid composite structures. An eight noded shell element
having five degrees of freedom at each node has been used for modeling and analysis
of such hybrid shell structures. Stress resultant-type Koiter’s shell theory has been
used and no restriction has been imposed on the magnitude of curvature components
to capture the deep and shallow shell cases. Twist curvature component has also been
incorporated to keep the strain equations complete. The transverse shear effect has
also been considered according to the Mindlin’s hypothesis. The Rayleigh damping
model has been implemented in order to study the effect of carbon nanotubes (CNTs)
on damping capacity of such hybrid composite shell structures. Different types of
shell panels (such as cylindrical, spherical, elliptical and doubly curved) have been
analyzed in order to study the time and frequency responses. Results indicate that the
elastic properties as well as damping properties of such hybrid composite structures
improved with the addition of CNTs as compared to conventional carbon fiber
reinforced composites (CFRCs) laminates and effects of some important parameters
on the vibration characteristic of such hybrid composite shell structures have also
been presented.
Keywords: Carbon fibre; Polymer-matrix composites (PMCs); Nano-structures;
Vibration; Finite element analysis (FEA); Numerical analysis
INTRODUCTION the important literatures regarding damping

in composite materials due to inclusion of
Conventional CFRCs laminates are well
nanoparticles and presented that the
known for their use in various industries
dissipation of energy occurs mainly due to
ranging from home appliances to aerospace
the mechanism of frictional sliding between
and defense applications which regularly
nanoparticle (like carbon nanotube) and
experience loading under service conditions.
matrix. Koratkar et al. (2002, 2003, 2005)
Due to the presence of cracks, failure occurs
found that a sublayer of nano-film in a piezo-
as the crack propagates caused by vibrations
silica composite beam can enhance 200%
due to low damping capacity of conventional
damping level and 30% bending stiffness
CFRP structures (Chandra et al. 1999).
without increase in weight of structure
Treviso et al. (2015) encapsulated some of
______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tarapada@nitrkl.ac.in 153

Swain and Roy
whereas few studies presented that addition (PMNC) have been obtained by using the
of 2% CNT in matrix phase can lead to Mori-Tanaka method. In second phase,
1000% increase of the loss modulus of a bar effective properties of the hybrid composite
under axial cyclic loading (2005). which is a combination of CNT based
polymer matrix and carbon fiber is
From the literatures review, it is cleared that
determined using strength of material
strength, load bearing as well as wear and
method.
fatigue resistance capacity increases when
CNTs is blended in the polymer matrix phase
in the proper ratio. Research work in this
field is already initiated but detail modelling
and analysis of CNTs based hybrid composite
structures is still unrevealed. So, the present
work focuses the effects of randomly oriented
CNTs, carbon fiber on vibration
characteristics of hybrid composite shell Figure 1. Various constituents of CNT
structures. The Mori–Tanaka method based based hybrid composite.
strength of material method is implemented
to obtain the elastic properties of hybrid FINITE ELEMENT (FE)
composite material which is made up of FORMULATION AND ANALYSES
sixteen layers with stacking sequence of [0 /-
The stress-resultant type Koiter’s shell theory
45/ 45/ 90]2s. An eight noded shell element
has been considered in the present finite
considering shear deformation effect
element formulation of the hybrid composite
according to the Mindlin’s hypothesis has
shell structures. The effect of shear
been formulated for finite element modelling.
deformation to the Koiter Shell theory based
Obtained elastic properties have been used to
on the Midlin’s hypothesis (2010) has also
study the impulse responses of such hybrid
been considered in the present FE
shell structures. The damping characteristics
formulation.
of such hybrid composite shell structures has
been implemented based on the Rayleigh The shell geometry used for the present
damping model in order to study the effects formulation has been developed using an
of CNTs on the settling time i.e. how fast the orthogonal curvilinear coordinate system
system responses reach to steady state under with the mid-plane of the shell assumed to be
impulse loading. Frequency response the reference surface as shown in Figure. 2
analyses have also been carried out to study
the effects of CNTs on the resonance
frequencies and absolute amplitudes of
frequency responses of such various hybrid
shell structures.
MODELLING FOR MATERIAL

PROPERTIES
A mathematical model has been implemented
to obtain the mechanical properties of this
hybrid nanocomposite based on the strength
of material approach in conjunction with the Figure 2. Geometry of shell structure in
Mori-Tanaka method. Figure. 1 shows the Cartesian coordinates.
various constituents of CNT based hybrid The eight nodes shell element has been used.
composite. In first phase the effective The shell mid-surface in the cartesian
properties of polymer nanocomposite coordinate system has been first mapped into
154
Vibration Damping Capacity of Carbon Nanotube based Hybrid Composite Spherical Shell Panel
a parametric domain through the suitable to verify the present shell finite element code
exact parameterization. Two independent developed, the static and free vibration
coordinates (1 ,  2 ) in the parametric space analysis has been performed for the
have been considered as the mid-surface laminated spherical composite shell and
curvilinear coordinates of the shell. The validated.
normal direction coordinate to the middle
surface of the shell has been represented by z TRANSIENT RESPONSES OF THE
. The reference surface or the shell mid- HYBRID COMPOSITES DUE TO
surface can be described in the global IMPULSE LOADINGS
cartesian coordinates in terms of the position Various simple supported spherical
vector as composite shell structures on the square base
r (1 ,  2 )  X (1 ,  2 )iˆ  Y (1 ,  2 ) ˆj  Z (1 ,  2 )kˆ (1) (a = b) have been analyzed under the impulse
loading. In all the cases, the shell panel has
Where, iˆ , ĵ and k̂ are unit vectors along the been subjected to an impulse load of 10 N at
X, Y and Z axis, respectively. the center up to 10 time steps and impulse
responses of the panels have been calculated
EQUATION OF MOTION with a time step of  /10 where  the time
The dynamic finite element formulation has period is corresponding to first natural
been derived by using the Hamilton’s frequency of the system. In all the cases, the
principle as follows global responses are calculated considering
t2 first ten modes. The main purpose of this
 [ (T  U )   W ]dt  0 (2) present study is to analyze the effects of
t1 CNTs on the maximum response and settling
time of the shell panel. The settling time is
T is the kinetic energy of the system, U is the calculated as the time required to reach the
elastic strain energy and W is the external amplitude of vibration to 5% of maximum
work done by the force on the structure. After amplitude. The Figure. 3 shows the transient
putting the energy expressions in Equation responses of such shell panel for R/a = 5 and
(2) and taking first variation, the equation of a/h = 10.
motion can be written as
 
 M uue  d e   Kuue  d e   F e  (3)
MODELLING FOR DAMPING

PROPERTIES
The damping in large systems can be
modeled using the Rayleigh damping or
proportional damping model. Calculating
Rayleigh damping coefficients for large
degree of freedom system has been provided
with detail in Chowdhury and Dasgupta
Figure 3. Transient responses of the
(2003).
composite shell panel for R/a = 5 and a/h
= 10 for a particular vcf with variation of
CNTs
Based on the above formulations, a complete
It is observed from the Figure. 3 that the
MATLAB code has been developed. After
settling and maximum amplitude of response
validation of present developed FE code,
decreases with the more inclusion of CNTs in
various results have been presented.In order
the hybrid composite shell structures and
155
Swain and Roy
these are more in case of conventional influenced by CNT. Maximum absolute

composites (without CNTs) than that of displacement of the said structure is more
hybrid composites. decreased by CNTs than that of carbon fiber
volume fractions. Resonance frequencies of
FREQUENCY RESPONSES the said structure is more increased by
ANALYSIS OF VARIOUS HYBRID inclusion of MWCNTs that implies that such
COMPOSITE SPHERICAL SHELL hybrid structures can be used under more
STRUCTURES excitation frequency or can be operated at
higher excitation frequency than that of
For frequency response analysis magnitude conventional laminated composites.
of applied load is considered as 10 N to
obtain frequency responses of hybrid shell REFERENCES
structures considering different %age CNTs. Chandra R Singh S P and Gupta K 1999
The Figure. 17 depicts that the frequency Damping studies in fiber-reinforced
responses of hybrid composite spherical shell composites – a review Composite
structures considering 25% vfwith different % Structures 46 41–51.
age of CNTs for a/h = 10. Chowdhury I Dasgupta S P 2003
Computation of Rayleigh damping
coefficients for large systems. Electronic
Journal of Geotechnical Engineering 8
Bundle 8C.
Koratkar N A Suhr J Joshi A Kane R S
Schadler L S Ajayanand P M Bartolucci
S 2005 Characterizing energy
dissipation in single-walled carbon
nanotube polycarbonate composites
Applied Physics Letters 87 063102.
Figure 4. Frequency responses of hybrid Koratkar N A Wei B Q Ajayan P M 2002
shell structures considering 25% vcf with Carbon nanotube films for damping
different % age of CNTs applications Advanced Materials14 997-
1000.
Figure. 4 depicts that the inclusions of CNTs
Koratkar N A Wei B Q Ajayan P M2003
in the conventional composites significantly
Multifunctional structural reinforcement
increases the resonance frequencies as well as
featuring carbon nanotube films
decreases amplitude of responses of the
Composites Science and Technology63
hybrid composite spherical shell structures.
1525-1531.
CONCLUSIONS Roy T Manikandan P Chakraborty D 2010
Improved shell finite element for
A mathematical model has been proposed to
piezothermoelastic analysis of smart
obtain the effective elastic properties of a
fiber reinforced composite structures
MWCNTs reinforced hybrid composite
Finite Elements in Analysis and
laminates using the Mori-Tanaka based
Design46 710-720.
mechanics of material method. Studies on the
Treviso A Genechten B V D Mundo M
impulse and frequency responses of the
Tournour2015 Damping in composite
various hybrid composite shell structures
materials: Properties and models
have also been carried out. Settling time of
Composites Part B78 144-152.
the said structure is influenced by CNTs than
that of carbon fiber volume fractions that
implies that the damping in such hybrid
composite is dominated by MWCNTs. It has
also observed that stability of the system is
156
ICCMS2016
BUCKLING ANALYSIS OF COMPOSITE LAMINATED SKEW PLATE

OF VARIABLE THICKNESS UNDER BIAXIAL COMPRESSION
PRIYANKA DHURVEY
Department of Civil Engineering, Maulana Azad National Institute of Technology, Bhopal, India.
Abstract: Tapered composite plates are increasingly being used in various

engineering applications. In variable-thickness laminate, the material and geometric
discontinuities at ply drop-off locations leads to significant discontinuities in stress
distributions. Elastic stability of variable-thickness composite laminated skew plate
subjected to biaxial in-plane compressive forces has been studied. The buckling
analysis of the skew laminate plates of variable thickness are carried out by the
bifurcation buckling implemented in finite element program ANSYS. A parametric
study on tapered composite skew plate is conducted, considering the effects of skew
angles, laminate layups, taper angles, boundary conditions on the buckling resistance
of skew composite laminate plates are presented.
Keywords: buckling; finite element method; skew plate; variable thickness;
biaxial
INTRODUCTION includes staircase arrangement as in figure 1.

As a rule of thumb, the taper angle varies
The laminated plates with variable thickness with the change of ply drop ratio, Th/L
are increasingly being used in engineering (where, Th is total thickness of ply drops and
applications, such as turbine blades, L is the total length of ply drop-off). So the
helicopter blades and yokes, robot arms and three ply drop ratio are considered (1/16,
satellite antennas where in the stiffness of the 1/18, 1/20).Element SHELL181 is used for
structure needs to be varied along the length the analysis. SHELL181 is a four-noded
of the beam or plate. Such tapered structures element with six degrees of freedom at each
can be made by terminating some plies at node: translations in the x, y, and z
discrete locations so as to change the directions, and rotations about the x, y, and z
stiffness of the plate. In the present work, a axes’ making total of 48 degrees of freedom
finite element formulation that includes the per element with element edge length of 5
buckling response of laminated composite mm was selected based on convergence test
skew tapered plate with staircase-dispersed and used throughout the study. Mapped
type taper configurations arrangement is meshing is used for all cases, so that more
considered. A parametric study on tapered elements are employed near the junction of
composite plate with ply drop-off has been thick-taper and taper-thin section, where
conducted using ANSYS software. plies are dropped. The laminates are made up
of NCT /301 graphite-epoxy composite
MATERIAL AND METHODS material with following mechanical
To study the buckling response of composite properties: E 1 is 113.9 GPa, E 2 is 7.985 GPa,
laminated skew plates with ply drop off ν 21 is 0.0178, ν 21 is 0.288, G 12 is 3.137 GPa.
under in-plane biaxial compression load, a The mechanical properties of epoxy resin
rectangular fibrous composite plate is are: E is 3.930 GPa, G is 1.034 GPa, ν is
modelled with five layers and two plies 0.37. Geometry of laminated skew composite
dropped internally. The taper configuration plate with ply drop-off is shown in figure 1.
157
Priyanka Dhurvey
Simply supported and clamped supported of these plies are different along the
boundary conditions are considered for the laminate’s axis. When theses plies are
analysis. dropped at different locations in a laminate,
the rise of out of plane stresses at each drop-
off may be different to the stiffness of the
dropped plies. The global-local approach has
been used for analyzing the laminates with
variable thickness. So, the location of the ply
drop-off was kept away from both load and
constraint locations to avoid their
interference. The laminate is assumed to be
linearly elastic until the point of delamination
[Varughese et al., 2001]. A five layer
composite laminated plate 120mm long and
100mm wide with two ply drops has been
Figure 1 Geometry of Laminated Skew
analyzed under biaxial in-plane compression
Composite Plate with Ply Drop
load as shown in figure 1. The thickness of
So for the analysis five different layup each lamina is taken as 0.75 mm. Detail of
configurations are selected including 00, 450 five different layup configurations
and 900 fibres as they are most commonly considered for analysis are given in Table-1.
used practically. The stiffness contributions
Table 1. Layup Configurations
Stacking sequence and Lengths for the laminated composite with ply
Layup drop-off (mm)
configurations Thick Taper section Thin
Thick section Thin section
section (1/20 ply ratio) section
LC 1 [(0/90] 2 /0] [0/90/0] 60 15 60
LC 2 [(90/0] 2 /0] [90/0/0] 60 15 60
LC 3 [(-45/45] 2 /0] [-45/45/0] 60 15 60
LC 4 [-45/45/0/90/0] [-45/90/0] 60 15 60
LC 5 [-45/45/90/0/0] [-45/0/0] 60 15 60
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION the laminate undergoes positive (upward)

deflection. In both boundary conditions it is
INFLUENCE OF SKEW ANGLE ON being observed that LC4 layup configuration
BUCKLING LOAD is the strongest of all and LC2 layup
The effect of variation of buckling load with configuration is the weakest. In simply
skew angle for different layup configuration supported, LC4 is followed by LC5, LC3 and
for simply supported and clamped supported LC1 and in clamped support LC4 is followed
boundary conditions under in-plane bi-axial by LC5, LC1 and LC3. The buckling load of
compression loading are shown in figure 2. layup configuration LC4 is 7 (ave.) times
In both boundary conditions, it can be than the buckling load LC2, in simply
observed that, the buckling load decrease supported boundary condition. But for
with decrease of skew angle from 900 to 500. clamped condition, the buckling load of
The associated transverse displacement also layup configuration LC4 is 3 (ave.) times
decreases with decrease of skew angle and it than the buckling load LC2.
occurs at thin section. It is also observed that
158
Buckling Analysis of Composite Laminated Skew Plate of Variable Thickness Under Biaxial
Compression
(c)
(a)
(d)
(b)
Figure 2- Variation of buckling load with
skew angle for different layup
configuration for simply supported and
(b) clamped supported
(e)
Figure 3- Variation of buckling load with
skew angle for different ply drop ratio for
(a)LC1, (b)LC2, (c)LC3, (d)LC4 and(e)
LC5 layup configuration
(a)
EFFECT OF TAPER ANGLE ON
BUCKLING LOAD
The effect of taper angle on buckling load is
investigated by considering three different
ply drop ratio (Th/L) for analysis as 1/20,
1/18 and 1/16 for simply supported boundary
condition for different layup configurations
are shown in figure 3. It is observed that as
ply drop-off ratio changes from 1/20 to 1/16,
the buckling load increases for all layup
configuration, it is because the laminate
(b)
159
Priyanka Dhurvey
become stiff as the length of stagger II: Parametric study Composite

distance/tapered section reduces, due to Structures 306-318.
increase of taper angle.
He K Hoa SV Ganesan R 2000 The study of
CONCLUSION tapered laminated composite structures:
a review Compos Sci Technology 60(14)
In the present work, buckling analysis of
laminated composite skew plate of variable 2643–57.
thickness is investigated. Modelling process Hu H T Lin B H 1995 Buckling optimization
and solutions were done with FEM using of symmetrically laminated plates with
ANSYS software. Internally-tapered various geometries and end conditions
composite plates with different layup
Composites Science and Technology 55
configurations have been considered. A
parametric study on tapered composite skew 277-285.
plate is conducted, considering the effects of Hu HT Tzeng WL Buckling 2000 Analysis
skew angles, laminate layups, taper angles, of skew laminate plates subjected to
boundary conditions on the buckling
uniaxial in-plane loads J. Thin-Walled
rsistance. It is being observed under biaxial
compressive loading that with decrease of Structures 38 53–77.
skew angle from 900 to 500 the buckling Mukhejee A Varghese B 1999 Developed of
angle also decreases. For bi-axial a specified finite element for the
compression LC4 layup configuration
analysis of composite structures with
laminate is the strongest of all and LC2 layup
configuration laminate is the weakest. In ply drop-off. Composite Structures 46
simply supported, LC4 is followed by LC5, 1-16.
LC3 and LC1 and in clamped support LC4 is Reddy JN 2003 Mechanics of Laminated
followed by LC5, LC1 and LC3. The Composite Plates and Shells: Theory
buckling load of layup configuration LC4 is
and Analysis Book 2003.
7(ave.) times than the buckling load LC2 in
simply supported condition. Varughese B Mukherjee A 2001 Design
guidelines for ply drop-off in laminated
REFERENCES composite structure Composite
ANSYS Mechanical User's Guide. structures
Ganesan R Liu DY 2008 Progressive failure Varugheses B Mukherjee A1997 A ply drop-
and buckling response of tapered off element for analysis of tapered
composite plates under uniaxial laminated composites composite
compression Composite Structures 159- structures 39 123-144.
176.
Vidyashankar B R Murty AV 2001 Analysis
Ganesan R Zabihollah 2007 A Vibration of laminates with ply drops, Composite
analysis of tapered composite beams Science and Technology 749-758.
using a higher-order finite element Part
I: Formulation Composite Structures
306-318.
Ganesan R Zabihollah 2007 A Vibration
analysis of tapered composite beams
using a higher-order finite element Part
160
ICCMS2016
PREDICTION OF SPRING-IN DEFORMATION FOR L-SHAPED CFRP

COMPONENTS
SHAH D. B.*, PATEL K. M., JOSHI S. J. and LAV K.
Mechanical Engg. Department, Nirma University, Ahmedabad, Gujarat, India
Abstract: Composite materials are extensively used in Aerospace and Space

application for their high specific strength and stiffness. Composite of low void
content which offers good mechanical properties are manufactured using Autoclave.
After completion of process composite part is recovered from the mould, due to
relaxation of residual stress, part experience a spring back. In this paper, spring-in
deformation of L-shape Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer (CFRP) component is
determined using analytical and numerical approach. The analytical equation for
calculation of spring-in has been considered from various literature study. The Hexcel
AS4/8552 prepreg system as part material and aluminium as mould (tool) material is
selected to predict spring-in using both approach. The geometry modelling and finite
element (FE) analysis has been carried out using ABAQUS software. FE simulation
of curing process for 2D L-shaped laminate with layup sequence [0/90]6s is performed
using COMPRO plug-in with ABAQUS software. The lay-up sequence, thickness and
geometry for the L-shaped part as well as tool material has been considered as fixed
parameter for this study. The thermo-chemical, flow compaction and stress
deformation analysis have been. Thermochemical and stress deformation analysis has
been performed to obtain deformed shape of the laminate. Both analytical and
numerical results are found in good agreement with each other.
Keywords: CFRP; Spring-in; Finite Element Analysis; Residual stress
INTRODUCTION component as compared with other out of

Composite materials are widely used in autoclave processes. But, the major issue
industries for their various advantages over with the autoclave processing is that the
conventional metal. Among all composite manufactured component does not exactly
materials, Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer resembles with the desired shape. The
(CFRP) composites are extensively used in deformation in the manufactured component
aerospace, automobile, sports and space is due to various intrinsic and extrinsic
applications because of very high specific process parameters such as resin shrinkage,
strength and stiffness properties. Autoclave mould (tool) and composite part interaction
processing is preferred for obtaining high condition, autoclave curing cycle, coefficient
quality CFRP components from available of thermal expansion (CTE) of mould
various processing of composite material, lay-up sequence, etc. These process
manufacturing. Autoclave process gives least induced deformations are broadly classified
void content in manufactured CFRP into spring-in and warpage. The warpage is
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dbshah@nirmauni.ac.in 161

Shah et al.
defined as the deformation caused on the flat Using Eq. (1), spring-in has been calculated
parts due to tool-part interaction whereas for the considered CFRP part with predefined
spring-in is the difference in angle caused lay-up sequence, thickness and geometrical
during process in angled components such as dimension as 0.57° analytically.
in L and C shaped components. Various
studies have been conducted so far to NUMERICAL APPROACH
determine the effect of various parameters on The geometry modelling and finite element
deformation of the composite part during the simulation has been carried out using
autoclave processing. In cured thermoset ABAQUS software. Various analysis like
composite part, enclosed angle is changed thermo-chemical, flow compaction and stress
from original angle due to material deformation have been performed for L-
anisotropy. During curing process in shaped 2D laminate to predict spring-in
autoclave machine, chemical shrinkage takes deformation using COMPRO plug-in with
place due to polymerization. Extrinsic factors ABAQUS. The AS4/8552 Hexcel prepreg
such as tool-part interaction condition, tool system considered as a composite part
material used may also have major impact on material with symmetric lay-up sequence
spring-in [Fernlund et al., 2002]. [0/90]6s and aluminum as a tool material used
in simulation. The composite part and
ANALYTICAL APPROACH metallic tool is meshed with 420 and 527
The spring-in deformation has been elements using 3D-stress hex elements with
determined for L-shaped CFRP component quadratic geometric order. Tool part
using analytical approach by considering interaction properties are assigned in which
various assumptions. The lay-up sequence, coefficient of friction is kept as 0.15 and
thickness and geometry for the L-shaped part limiting shear stress as 40000 N/m2. The
as well as for the aluminum tool has been methodology adopted for the numerical
considered as fixed parameter for the approach as a flow chart format as shown in
calculation for spring-in deformation. Figure 1.
An analytical model as given in Eq. (1) have In the thermo-chemical module, heat transfer
been developed for determining spring-in of coefficient of 80 W/m2 K on top of composite
L shape laminate [Radford and Diefendorf, and 20 W/m2 K on bottom of the tool is
1993]. The anisotropy components such as applied as boundary conditions. The degree
longitudinal coefficient of thermal expansion of cure vs. time plot is obtained for the given
can be determined using laminate plate curing cycle of the composite part as shown
theory [Albert, 1997] and transverse in Figure 2. The deformed shape of L-shape
coefficient of thermal expansion can be composite part is gained from stress-
calculated from lamina properties using the deformation analysis. During tool removal
methods described by Pagano [Pagano, step, symmetric boundary conditions are
1974]. applied on the composite part which results
into spring-in deformation. The deformed and
un-deformed shape for the L-shaped part is
shown in Figure 3. From that, spring-in angle
is calculated as 0.66° using simple
mathematical calculations.
162
Prediction of Spring-in Deformation for L-shaped CFRP Components
Figure 1. Methodology for Numerical Simulation using ABAQUS with COMPRO plug-in
Figure 2. Degree of Cure vs. Time Plot Figure 3. Deformed and Undeformed
Shape of Composite L-shaped Part
163
Shah et al.
CONCLUSIONS geometry and layup on the dimensional

The spring-in deformation for L-shaped fidelity of autoclave-processed
CFRP components have been predicted using composite parts Composites: Part A 33
analytical and numerical approach. The layup 341-351.
sequence, thickness and geometry for Twigg G Poursartip A and Fernlund G 2004
composite part has been considered as fixed Tool–part interaction in composites
parameters. The hexcel AS4/8552 as processing. Part II: numerical modelling
composite part material and aluminum as tool Composites: Part A 35 135–141
material has been taken because of large
Zhu Q and Geubelle P H 2001 Dimensional
difference in CTE value. The spring-in
Accuracy of Thermoset Composites:
deformation has been found 0.57° using
Simulation of Process-Induced Residual
analytical approach. The FE simulation has
Stresses Journal of Composite Materials
been carried out using ABAQUS software
35 No. 24/2001.
with COMPRO plug-in. The spring-in
deformation has been predicted as 0.66° by Kappel E Stefaniak D and Fernlund G 2015
performing thermo chemical and stress Predicting process-induced distortions in
deformation analysis. The measured spring-in composite manufacturing – A pheno-
using analytical and numerical approach has numerical simulation strategy Composite
been compared and found as good agreement Structures 120 98–106.
with each other. Roozbehjavan P Tavakol B Ahmed A
Koushyar H Das R Joven R and Minaie
ACKNOWLDGEMENT
B 2014 Experimental and Numerical
The authors express their deep gratitude to Study of Distortion in Flat, L- shaped,
the Convergent Manufacturing Technologies, and U- shaped Carbon Fiber- Epoxy
CANADA for their technical support and Composite Parts. Journal of Applied
guidance. Polymer Science.
Mezeix L Seman A Nasir M N M Aminanda
REFERENCES
Y Rivai A Castanie B Olivier P and Ali
Johnston A 1999 An Integrated Model Of K M 2015 Spring-back simulation of
The Development Of Process-Induced unidirectional carbon/epoxy flat laminate
Deformation In Autoclave Processing Of composite manufactured through
Composite Structures Ph. D. Thesis autoclave process Composite Structures
Graduate School -The University Of 124 196–205.
British Columbia.
Johnston A Vaziri R and Poursartip A 2001
A Plane Strain Model for Process-
Induced Deformation of Laminated
Composite Structures Journal of
Composite Materials 35.
Fernlund G Rahman N Courdji R Bresslauer
M Poursartip A and Nelson K 2002
Experimental and numerical study of the
effect of cure cycle, tool surface,
164
ICCMS2016
A METHOD FOR ACCURATE TRANSVERSE NORMAL STRESS

EVALUATION IN LAMINATED COMPOSITES USING SIMPLE HSDT
DESHMUKH M. B. and BHAR A.*
Department of Applied Mechanics, MNNIT Allahabad, India
Abstract: Transverse shear and normal stresses play important role in causing
delamination of laminated and sandwich plate / panel structures. Conventionally, in
the post-processing phase of a displacement based finite element analysis (FEA), the
transverse shear stresses are recovered by integrating the first two of the stress
equilibrium equations and then the transverse normal stress is recovered from these
transverse shear stresses, by integrating the third stress equilibrium equation.
However, a new method for transverse shear stress recovery using a least square of
error (LSE) method and a semi refined higher-order shear deformation theory
(SRHSDT7), based on simple equivalent single layer approach, was developed earlier
by the second author. The present work is an extension of the same, for recovery of
transverse normal stresses in such laminated plates. The novelty of the method lies
with the fact that, instead of recovering transverse normal stress from transverse shear
stresses, it is obtained directly from the primary displacement solutions obtained from
the FEA, by using the LSE method and the third stress equilibrium equation. The
present method is found to yield very accurate results, when compared to elasticity
solutions due to Pagano, as well as FE or other numerical solutions based on
computationally costly layerwise theory or complex mixed Variational theorems. Due
to the simplicity and robustness of the method, it can be used for accurate transverse
normal stress recovery in any arbitrary laminate configuration, including in sandwich
plates, for which it is an important factor.
Keywords: Laminated Composite, Transverse Normal Stress Recovery, Least
Square of Error Method, Semi Refined HSDT, Finite Element
Analysis
INTRODUCTION delamination failure. Hence, delamination
FRP laminated composites, due to their failure analysis of such laminated composites
advantages like high strength-to-weight ratio, is an essential part of their proper analysis
design flexibility, ease of replacement etc.; and design processes. The transverse stresses
have found widespread application in are known to have considerable influence on
different engineering industry, especially for the delamination failure and hence accurate
weight-critical structural applications. Such evaluation of the transverse stresses is
laminated composite plate/panels frequently important for delamination analysis of such
act as important load bearing components. composites.
However, because of inherent weakness of Generally, for laminated composites,
laminae interfaces, such laminated displacement based analyses are more
composites are highly susceptible to popular over the stress based mixed analysis
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anindyab@mnnit.ac.in 165

Deshmukh and Bhar
procedures, due to relative simplicity of the method of transverse shear stress recovery at
former. Within these displacement based the post-processing phase, using a least
procedures, the two-step approach of using a square of error (LSE) method applied to the
simple two dimensional ‘equivalent single stress equilibrium equations based on the
layer theory’ (FSDT or some HSDT) to semi refined HSDT (SRHSDT7), also
obtain the primary displacement solution and proposed by them.
inplane stresses and then recovering the
This work extends the last mentioned work,
transverse stress components applying the
particularly for computation of transverse
stress equilibrium equations is quite common.
normal stress using the LSE method
For this purpose, superiority of the HSDTs presented therein, along with the same
over the FSDT and simplicity of such HSDTs SRHSDT7. However, since the formulations
over layerwise and zigzag theories is well here are little bit different than those used for
known. Naturally, a number of different the transverse shear stress recovery, they
HSDTs have been put forward by the deserve to be presented separately. In this
research community over the years, on which work, the transverse normal stress field
a comprehensive review can be found in Bhar
through the thickness at a point of the
(2011), wherein a semi refined HSDT
laminate is considered as a cubic polynomial.
(SRHSDT7) was also proposed.
Then it is computed through the thickness
The approach of recovering the transverse somewhat similarly as in Bhar and Satsangi
stresses at the post-processing phase of a (2011), as briefed in next section.
displacement based analysis, using the three
dimensional stress equilibrium equations, THEORETICAL FORMULATION
was discussed perhaps for the first time in Since the same HSDT (SRHSDT7) is used
open literature by Pryor and Barker (1971) for describing the plate kinematics, as can be
and then by Lo et al. (1978). Later, some found in Bhar (2011) or Bhar and Satsangi
other variants of such approach were also (2011), the process of obtaining the primary
presented by Chaudhuri (1986) and some displacement solution remains the same. So
others. The important similarity amongst all here we start directly with discussion on
these works, and many at later times, is that recovery process particularly for the
the second stage solution for the transverse transverse normal stress ( ). Notations for
stresses are obtained by through the thickness symbols used, are those used conventionally,
integration of the 3D stress equilibrium unless mentioned otherwise.
equations, performed layer by layer.
The well-known third stress equilibrium
Towards some new developments, Kant and equation, using which is to be recovered,
Menon (1991) developed a finite difference is given by
based method applied to the 3D equilibrium
equations, for obtaining the transverse (1)
stresses at the post processing phase. After Here we assume the to be recovered
more than a decade, Hossain et al. (2004) through the thickness of an arbitrary point
briefly presented a transverse stress recovery P(x,y) at the reference plane, as a cubic
technique from the equilibrium equations polynomial of the thickness coordinate (z)
based on a weighted residual method, for corresponding to p-th layer, as
laminated shell panels. More recently, Bhar
and Satsangi (2011) formulated a new (2)
166
A Method for Accurate Transverse Normal Stress Evaluation in Laminated Composites Using Simple
HSDT
where are some unknown obtainable for transverse normal stress

constants associated to the p-th layer and are computation using the present formulation.
evaluated using the least square method, Problem-2: This problem is taken from
similarly as indicated in Bhar and Satsangi Manjunatha and Kant (1992), wherein a
(2011). Accordingly, a set of four equations, simply supported (0/90/0) square plate under
consisting of four unknowns can be formed sinusoidal transverse load is considered. The
laminate is again considered to be of very
in matrix form as
high thickness aspect ratio ( ).
[ ]{ } { } (3) Through the thickness distribution of ( )
at plate centre has been computed by them
These can be assembled for all the layers, using direct integration of the third
analogous to an one dimensional finite equilibrium equation. Results have been
element assemblage, and eventually obtained by them using an HSDT with six
degrees of freedom per node, for finite
expressed for the whole laminate as
element analysis. Further details of the
[ ]{ } { } (4) problem may be found therein. The results
obtained from present computation along
Solution of these set of linear algebraic with those from Manjunatha and Kant (1992)
equations is used to obtain the desired and elasticity results computed following
distribution of through the thickness. Pagano (1970), are presented in Figure 2.
Further detail of theoretical formulation is Results due to Wu and Kuo (1993), who used
skipped here for brevity required due to space mixed FE analysis, are also included. Careful
constraint. perusal of Figure 2 further confirms the
ability of the present formulation for accurate
NUMERICAL EVALUATIONS evaluation of transverse normal stress, even
for very thick laminate.
Formulations presented in previous section
are implemented into an FE analysis
computer program written in FORTRAN.
The developed program is evaluated for
computation of through the thickness
distribution of transverse normal stress ( ),
from problems published previously.
Problem-1: A simply supported square
(0/90/0/90) laminate of thickness aspect ratio
Figure 1. Through the Thickness
( ) subjected to transverse sinusoidal Distribution of Non-dimensional
load is considered. Through the thickness Transverse Normal Stress in (0/90/0/90)
distribution of non-dimensional transverse Laminate
normal stress ( ), where is the load
intensity at plate centre, is computed. Present
results are plotted along with those from
elasticity solutions, obtained following
Pagano (1970), in graph shown in Figure 1.
Material properties and other details can be
found therein and omitted here for space
constraint. It is clearly observed from Figure
1, that the present results obtained even for
this very thick laminate are in very close Figure 2. Through the Thickness
conformity to the elasticity solutions. This Distribution of Transverse Normal Stress
strongly indicates the high level of accuracy in (0/90/0) Laminate
167
Deshmukh and Bhar
Problem-3: To further investigate the solutions based on mixed FEM / layer-wise

capability of the present approach, a theorem are found to indicate little difference
symmetric square sandwich plate (0/core/0), at some places along the thickness, for the
simply supported on all the four sides and problems considered herein. These cases
subjected to bi-sinusoidal load is considered
deserve further investigation in future. But
from Ramtekkar et al. (2003), who presented
mixed FE analysis. The material properties overall, it can be concluded that the present
and boundary conditions are considered as approach allow quite accurate evaluation of
given therein. The comparison of present transverse normal stress for all type of
results with theirs is as shown in Figure 3. laminate configuration, using simple
displacement based HSDTs.
REFERENCES
Bhar A 2011 Finite element analysis of

stiffened laminated composite and
functionally graded plates using a
higher-order shear deformation theory
PhD Thesis IIT Kharagpur India-
721302.
Figure 3. Through the Thickness Bhar A and Satsangi S K 2011 Accurate
Distribution of in (0/core/0) Laminate transverse stress evaluation in
composite/sandwich thick laminates
Problem-4: Another (0/90/0) laminate of using a C0 HSDT and a novel post-
rectangular shape (b=3a) is considered, processing technique European Journal
boundary conditions and material properties of Mechanics A/Solids 30 46-53.
for which can be found in Carrera (2000). Carrera E 2000 A priori vs. a posteriori
Comparison of present results with those evaluation of transverse stresses in
from Carrera (2000), who presented FE multilayered orthotropic plates
analysis using layer-wise theorem, is shown Composite Structures 48 245-260.
in Figure-4. Manjunatha B S and Kant T 1992 A
comparison of 9 and 16 node
quadrilateral elements based on higher-
order laminate theories for estimation of
transverse stresses J. Reinforced Plastics
and Composites 11 968-1002.
rectangular bidirectional composites and
sandwich plates Journal of Composite
Materials 4 20-34.
Figure 4. Through the Thickness Ramtekkar G S Desai Y M and Shah A H
Distribution of Transverse Normal Stress 2003 Application of a three-dimensional
in (0/90/0) Laminate mixed finite element model to the
CONCLUSION flexure of sandwich plate Computers
and Structures 81 2183–2198.
The present formulation is found to produce Wu Chih-Ping and Kuo Hsi-Ching 1993 An
through the thickness distribution of interlaminar stress mixed finite element
transverse normal stress, very close to method for the analysis of thick
elasticity solutions, as evident from Figures 1 laminated composite plates Composite
and 2. However, comparison with some FE Structures 24 29-42.
168
ICCMS2016
TENSILE AND COMPRESSIVE BUCKLING ANALYSES OF

STIFFENED LAMINATED COMPOSITE PANELS
RAJANNA T1,2*, BANERJEE S.1, DESAI Y. M.1 and PRABHAKARA D. L.3
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay, Mumbai, India.
2
Department of Civil Engineering, B.M.S College of Engineering, Bengaluru, India.
3
Sahyadri College of Engineering and Management, Mangalore, India.
Abstract: The vibration and buckling characteristics of stiffened laminated composite

panels subjected to in-plane compressive or tensile edge loading are studied using
finite element analysis. Towards this, a nine-node heterosis plate element with four
degrees of freedom at interior node and five degrees of freedom at all exterior nodes
has been used to model the panel and the three-node isoparametric beam element with
four degrees of freedom at each node has been used to model the stiffener. The plate
and the stiffener elements are modelled separately and then the displacement
compatibility between them is maintained by using transformation matrix. The tensile
and compressive buckling loads and vibration frequencies are determined for different
edge load length, position of load, ply-orientations, and stiffener parameters.
Keywords: Stiffened panel; Stability; Vibration; heterosis element; Laminates.
INTRODUCTION 2016]. In many situations, these partial edge

Stiffened laminated panels are structural loads are tensile in nature. However, upon the
components consisting of panels reinforced action of such loads, the nature of stress
by a system of ribs, widely used in aircraft, distribution need not be only tensile, but also
ship, bridge, building, and some other compressive in nature over a certain region
engineering activities. These structural away from the application of loads. These
components subjected to in-plane loads many compressive stresses may cause local tensile
a time during their service life. The panel buckling, thereby exhibiting wrinkles on
with in-plane load is susceptible to buckle at certain region of the panel. This phenomenon
low stress levels, and hence is the subject of is generally termed as local buckling. Leissa
interest for researchers for many years. The and Ayoub (1988) studied the buckling
buckling of stiffened or unstiffened panels behaviour of plate subjected to a pair of
under the action of uniformly distributed tensile concentrated forces acting opposite to
edge loading has been the subject of each other. Kumar et al. (2003) have
extensive investigations [Satish Kumar and published some results on tensile buckling
Mukhopadhyay 2000]. However, in many and vibration behaviour of laminated
practical stability problems, particularly in composite plates and shells subjected to
aircraft structures, the applied edge load is localised patch load and concentrated loads.
partial in nature. For this class of problems, As seen from the literature, it has been
the internal stress field is non-uniform in observed that a large number of references
nature throughout the panel which has not deals with the vibration and buckling
received much attention [Rajanna et al. behaviour of rectangular stiffened/unstiffened
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: t.rajanna@gmail.com 169

Rajanna et al.
plates subjected to in-plane uniform edge matrix form by considering either tension or
loading. A relatively less number of papers compression in-plane edge loads (Kumar et al.
deal with the vibration and stability problems 2003):
under the action of non-uniform in-plane
edge compressive loads. However, the tensile
 M q   K   P  KG  q  0 (1)
buckling characteristics of a panel are where [K], [KG] and [M] are assembled
sparsely treated in the literature. It is worth system stiffness, geometric stiffness and mass
mentioning that to the best of the authors’ matrices respectively.
knowledge, no comprehensive work has been The governing equations for the buckling and
carried out on the tension buckling of vibration problems can be obtained by
stiffened laminated composite plates reducing Eq. (1) as follows:
subjected to partial edge loading. In this Static Buckling problem: When {𝑞̈ } = {0}
work, the tensile and compressive buckling Eq. (1) reduces to a static case as
of laminated stiffened panels are investigated
with the influences of various parameters like  K q  Pcr  KG q  0 (2)
partial edge load length and its position, ply- Vibration problem: When the plate vibrates
orientations and stiffener parameters. under the action of in-plane compression or
tension edge loads, Eq. (1) reduces to
THEORETICAL ANALYSIS
 K q  P  KG q -  2  M q  0 (3)
In the above Eq. (3), if P is equal to zero, the
equation represents a free vibration problem
without in-plane load. If the in-plane load
exists, then for a particular value of P, the
square of the frequency (ω2) becomes zero
Figure 1. Geometry of the stiffened and then the corresponding load represents
panel. the critical buckling load.
P/2 P/2 c/2
b
P P
P P c P/2 P/2 c/2 c FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION
(a) (b) (c)
In this study, a 9-node heterosis plate element
Figure 2. (a) Partial edge load from one is employed with five degrees of freedom
edge;(b) Partial edge load from two (DOFs) u, v, w, θx, and θy at all edge nodes
adjacent edges.
and four DOFs such as u, v, θx, and θy at the
The stiffened laminated composite panel interior node. In order to develop heterosis
considered in this work is simply supported element, the serendipity shape functions are
on all four sides. The geometry of the used for transverse displacement w, and
stiffened panel of length a, width b, thickness Lagrange shape functions for remaining
h along x, y and z axes respectively is shown DOFs that includes u, v, θx, and θy as shown
in Fig.1. The typical loading cases considered in Fig. 3. This type of element exhibits
in this study are shown in Fig. 2. improved characteristics as compared to 8-
node serendipity and 9-node Lagrange
GOVERNING EQUATIONS elements (Butalia et al. 1990). A computer
The governing differential equation of motion code is developed using FORTRAN language
for a discretized structure can be written in to perform all the necessary computations.
170
Tensile and Compressive Buckling Analyses of Stiffened Laminated Composite Panels
8-N Serendipity 9-N Heterosis 9-N Lagrange and attains minimum γcr at c/b = 0.5 and θ =
(±90o)2. The similar phenomena is again
observed at c/b = 0.0. It may be due to the
higher restraints at c/b = 0.0 and 0.5.
Node with u, v, w, θx, θy degrees of freedom
Node with u, v, θx, θy degrees of freedom 140
130 c/b
Figure 3. Different types of plate 120 bp p
0.0
Buckling load parameter cr )

110 c 0.1
elements.

100 0.2
90 0.3
80 0.4
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS 70 0.5
60
The stiffener dimensions are decided 50
40
according to the non-dimensional parameters 30
20
( δ = nAs /bh ), where n is the number of 10
0
stiffeners and As is the cross-sectional area of 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Ply orientation (+/+/-)
each stiffener; similarly, β = nE2Is /bD, where
Is is the moment of inertia of the stiffener Figure 4. Variation of γcr for different c/b
about the plate centroidal axis and D is the and ply-oriented simply supported
flexural rigidity of the plate. The stiffener stiffened panels
parameters, δ = 0.1 and β = 10 are considered 14000
13000 c/b
for all problems unless otherwise specified. 12000 b 0.0
0.1
11000 P c
P 0.2
The ratio of thickness of plate to the width of 10000
0.3
9000
0.4
the plate (h/b) is considered as 0.01, the 8000 0.5
7000
length to breadth ratio (a/b) is 1.0 and the 6000
5000
material properties E11/E22 = 25, G12/E22 = 4000
G13/E22 = 0.5, G23/E22 = 0.2, υ12 = 0.25 are 3000

2000
considered, unless otherwise stated. The 1000
0
buckling loads and frequencies are presented 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Ply orientation (+/+/-)
in the following non-dimensional forms:
 
Non-dimensional frequency,   abs b 2 

2
(9) γcr for
Figure 5. Variation of tensile
 E22 h  different edge load length from one end
Pcr b 2 and ply-orientations.
Non-dimensional load,  cr 
E22 h3
9500
where, Pcr and ωabs are the absolute critical 9000

8500 P/2 P/2 c/2
c/b
0.0
8000
loads and frequencies respectively. 7500
b
P/2 P/2 c/2
0.1
0.2
7000
6500 simply supported panel 0.3

6000 0.4
5500 0.5
COMPRESSIVE BUCKLING OF 5000
4500
STIFFENED PANELS 4000
3500
3000
The effect of concentrated edge load from 2500
2000
one end and ply-angles on γcr is shown in Fig. 1500

1000
500
4. It is observed that as the position of point 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
load changes towards the centre of panel, the Ply orientation (+/+/-)
value of γcr generally increases and attains Figure 6. Variation of tensile γcr for
maximum γcr at c/b = 0.5 and θ = (±0o)2. different edge load length from both ends
However, the value of γcr continuously and ply-orientations.
decreases with the further increased ply-angle
171
Rajanna et al.
80
75
b
P/2 P/2 c/2
F formation of compressive zone at some
70
Non-dimensional frequency (  ) 65
P/2
simply supported panel
P/2 c/2 E locations of panel.
60
55 D
50
45
40
CONCLUSION
35
30
c/b In case of tensile load, the frequency initially
A 0.0
25
B 0.1
20 C
C 0.2
increases with the load and starts decreasing
15
D 0.3
10
5
B E 0.4 at certain values of load. But, when the load
A F 0.5
0
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400
is compressive, the natural frequency keeps
Non-dimensional load (  decreasing. As expected, the fundamental
Figure 7. Variation of (ω
̅ ) vs. tensile load frequency becomes zero at respective
for (15/-15)2 layup stiffened panel. buckling load. The compressive buckling
load is more pronounced at θ = (±0)2 for c/b
TENSILE BUCKLING OF STIFFENED = 0.0 and 0.5 and θ = (±30)2 to (±45)2 for c/b
PANELS = 0.1 to 0.4. In case of tensile load, the γcr is
It is observed from Fig. 5 that the tensile significant at (±0)2 layup and it is keep on
buckling load γcr increases with the increased decreasing with the increased ply-angles.
c/b and found to be significant at higher c/b
(= 0.5) and insignificant at c/b = 0.0. It may REFERENCES
be due to the fact that the buckling load Butalia T S Kant T and Dixit V D 1990
depends on the strength and area of Performance of heterosis element for
compressive zone. This compressive zone bending of skew rhombic plates
rapidly decreases with the increased tensile Computers and Structures 34(1) 23-49.
zone at higher c/b ratio and resulting rapidly Kumar L R Datta P K and Prabhakara D L
increase of tensile buckling loads. 2003 Tension buckling and dynamic
stability behaviour of laminated
The same phenomenon can also be observed
composite doubly curved panels
for the stiffened plate with edge load from subjected to partial edge loading
both ends as shown in Fig. 6. In this case, the Composite structures 60(2) 171-181.
tensile buckling loads are comparatively less
Leissa A W and Ayoub E F 1988 Vibration
as compared to that of the previous case and buckling of a simply supported
(tensile load from one edge). It may be rectangular plate subjected to a pair of
attributed to the formation of compressive in-plane concentrated forces Journal of
zone nearer to the weaker portion of the panel Sound and Vibration 127(1) 155-171.
i.e., central zone of the panel. It is also Rajanna T Banerjee S Desai Y M and
observed from Figs 5 and 6 that there is no Prabhakara D L 2016 Effect of partial
appreciable variation in the buckling load edge loading on vibration and buckling
beyond (30o)2 ply-orientation. characteristics of stiffened composite
plates Latin American Journal of Solids
and Structures, an ABCM Journal
VIBRATION OF STIFFENED PANELS 13(5) 854-879.
It is observed from Fig. 7 that the natural Satish Kumar Y V and Mukhopadhyay M
frequency initially increases with the load. As 2000 A new triangular stiffened plate
the load further increases, the frequency element for laminate analysis
starts decreasing and becomes zero at the Composites Science and Technology
onset of tensile buckling load. The deceasing 60(6) 935-943.
nature of frequency is mainly due to the
172
ICCMS2016
STRESS AND FAILURE ANALYSIS OF FUNCTIONALLY GRADED

ADHESIVELY BONDED TUBULAR SOCKET JOINT OF LAMINATED
FRP COMPOSITES
NIMJE S. V. and PANIGRAHI S. K.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Defence Institute of Advanced Technology (Deemed
University), Pune, Maharastra, India.
Abstract: The present work deals with three-dimensional geometrically non-linear

finite element analyses of functionally graded adhesively bonded tubular socket joint
made of laminated Fiber Reinforced Polymeric (FRP) composites. The out-of-plane
stress components have been computed along the various interfacial surfaces of bond
layer of tubular socket joint. Based on detailed stress analyses, critical location for
damage/failure onset is identified. It has been observed that free edges of the coupling
region of the socket joint are vulnerable for failure initiation. Further, efforts have
been made to reduce peel and out-of-plane shear stress concentration by implementing
functionally graded adhesive (FGA) with appropriate smooth and continuous
gradation function profile. Further, effects of graded joint with varied modulus ratios
on out-of-plane stresses are observed along the interfacial surfaces. Series of
simulation results indicate potential reduction in peak values of stress levels. This
situation leads to increase in strength and will delay the failure initiation by which
structural integrity of tubular socket joint will get improved.
Keywords: Functionally Graded Adhesive; Tubular Socket Joint; FRP
Composites.
INTRODUCTION corrosion free as compared to mechanical

fasteners. Drawbacks associated with the
Adhesively bonded composite pipe joints are
mechanical joining of composite tubes lead to
widely used to mate various structural
the present research towards adhesive
components in aerospace and oil-and-gas
bonding of tubular sections.
industries due to their ease of construction
and superior mechanical performance. Pipe In view of review of literature, it is observed
structures play a vital role for energy and that almost all the bonded joints present
construction industries. The complex layout stress peaks or stress singularities at the
of industrial piping systems, along with edges of the bond line, due to elastic
limitations associated with composite pipe mismatch or due to peel stresses in all kinds
manufacturing, demands repeatable and of tubular joints. Several approaches were
durable joining mechanisms. Mechanical proposed in literature to mitigate and
joining methods of composite tubes such as decrease the degree of singularity of these
trimming, bolting and fastening enhance peaks, such as relief grooves [Cognard J Y,
stress raisers in the joint structure. In 2008] scarf joints or rounding edges [Zhao X
addition, adhesive bonds are generally et al. 2011]. Even though these approaches
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail panigrahi.sk@gmail.com; 173

Panigrahi and Nimje
can be exploited for testing purposes, their The geometry and configuration of bonded
applicability in an industrial context is not tubular socket joint analyzed is shown in
straightforward. The recent development of Figure 1. The socket and both the tubes of
nanotechnologies and their applications in the tubular socket joint are made of Gr/E
adhesives lead to strong improvements in laminated FRP composites (T300/934) with
terms of mechanical properties of the ply configuration [0/90] s. The material
polymer and of the joint. It is possible to vary properties along with their strength values
continuously the elastic modulus of the for tubes/socket and adhesive are shown in
adhesive by controlling the percentage of Table 1 and 2. The adhesive thickness (δ =
reinforcement, obtaining so called 0.1 mm), total length of the structure (2L =
functionally graded adhesives (FGA) 178 mm), outer radius of tube (r1 = 14.4
[Spaggiari A et al. & Stapleton S et al. 2012]. mm), outer radius of socket (r2 = 16 mm),
Kumar and Scanlan (2010) also provided an tube thickness (t1 = 1 mm), coupling
analytical framework study for stress analysis thickness (t2 =1.5 mm), coupling length (2c
of a shaft-tube bonded joint using a = 26 mm) and gap between the tubes (g =
variational technique. Functionally modulus 0.2 mm) have been adopted from literature
graded bond line (FMGB) adhesives were [Das and Pradhan, 2011]. The adhesively
employed in order to reduce peak peel and bonded tubular socket joint structure
shear stress levels. Those investigators found subjected to axial loading of 10 MPa is
that there was a significant decrease in peak considered for stress analysis. Two types of
peel and shear stress levels in FMGB adhesives namely mono-modulus and
compared to those of mono-modulus functionally graded adhesives are used to
adhesive materials. However, their research bond both the tubes with socket. The
was limited to tubular joint made of isotropic material gradation profile for functionally
adherends. graded bond line is expressed as:
FE MODELLING AND ANALYSIS

(1)
OF TUBULAR SOCKET JOINT
for ( 0 ≤ z ≤ ± c/2 )
(2)
for (± c/2 ≤ z ≤ ± c)
and modulus ratio ‘R’ is expressed as
(3)
where E1 and E2 are lower bound and upper

bound Young Moduli of adhesives,
respectively. ‘z’ is the distance measured
Figure 1. Geometry and configuration of along the bond length ‘2c’. The detail
functionally graded adhesively bonded distribution of gradation properties with
socket joint of laminated FRP composite varied modulus ratios for bond line (2c) is
tubes. exhibited in Figure 2.
174
Stress and Failure Analysis of Functionally Graded Adhesively Bonded Tubular Socket Joint of Laminated
FRP Composites
Based on the detailed FE analyses, it is

observed that free edges of the coupling
region are more vulnerable zones for failure
initiation. It is important to note that the peel
stress at the interface of tube and adhesive
attains maximum value as compared to other
two critical regions. Further, efforts have
been made in order to reduce peak levels of
out-of-plane normal and shear stresses by
implementing functionally graded adhesive
along the bond layer. Series of numerical
Figure 2. Gradation of elastic simulations are carried out in tubular socket
modulus (E) along bond length of the
joint with FGA with varied modulus ratios
tubular socket joint for different modulus
ratio ‘R’. (R= 1, 2, 5, 8).
Table 1. Layer wise orthotropic

material properties of Gr/E (T300/934)
composite plates
Elastic properties Value
Ez 127.50 (GPa)
Er 4.80 (GPa)
Eθ 9.00 (GPa)
Gzr= Gzθ 4.80 (GPa)
Gθr 2.55 (GPa)
υzr = υzθ 0.28
υθr 0.41
Figure 3. Peel stress (σrr) distribution
along the interface of tube and adhesive
Table 2. Elastic properties of epoxy
with varied modulus ratios 'R' for graded
adhesive
tubular socket joint.
E 2.8 (GPa)
υ 0.4 The peel and shear stress distributions at the
interface of tube and adhesive are shown in
Figures 3 and 4. Modulus ratio 'R=1' refers
to mono-modulus adhesive. Figures 3 and 4
show that peel and shear stress magnitudes
Adhesively bonded tubular socket joint are maximum at both the free edges of
experiences two vital modes of mechanical coupling region and at the centre of the
failure; failure onset at the tube/socket- joint. However, highest magnitude of
adhesive interfaces due to excessive peel stresses are observed at both the free ends of
and shear stresses and cohesive failure coupling region. Further, effects of graded
within adhesive bond layer. Such failure adhesive on magnitudes of peel and shear
occurs/propagates from the stress singularity stresses are clearly reflected from Figures 3
points which are called interfacial failures. and 4. Results indicate that when there is
175
Panigrahi and Nimje
increase in modulus ratios, peak values of assemblies application to the

peel (σrr) and out-of-plane shear (τrz) determination of the adhesive
decrease significantly. Figures 3 and 4 behaviour Computers and Structures
exhibits 20-60% reduction in peel and shear 86 1704–1717
stresss levels at both the free edges of Zhao X Adams R D da Silva L F M 2011
coupling region and also at the centre of the Single lap joints with rounded adherend
joint. Above discussed results are in corners: stress and strain analysis
Journal of Adhesion Science and
qualitative agreement with numerical
Technology 25 819–836
evidences found by Kumar [Kumar and
Scanlan, 2010; 2013]. Overall, the above Spaggiari A Dragoni E 2014 Regularization
results indicate that stress concentrations can of torsional stresses in tubular lap
bonded joints by means of functionally
be reduced by employing graded adhesive
graded adhesives International Journal
along the bond layer of tubular socket joint. of Adhesion and Adhesives 53 23–28
It leads to improve the strength of tubular
Stapleton S E Waas A M Arnold S M 2012
joint structure.
Functionally graded adhesives for
composite joints International Journal
of Adhesion and Adhesives 35 36-49
Kumar S Scanlan J P 2010 Stress analysis of
shaft-tube bonded joints using a
variational method Journal of Adhesion
86 369-394
Das R R and Pradhan B 2011 Finite element
based design and adhesion failure
analysis of bonded tubular socket joints
made with laminated FRP Composites
Journal of Adhesion Science and
Technology 25 41-67
Kumar S Scanlan J P 2013 On axisymmetric
Figure 4. Out-of-plane shear stress (τrz) adhesive joints with graded interface
distribution along the interface of tube stiffness International Journal of
and adhesive with varied modulus ratios Adhesion and Adhesives 41 57-72
'R' for graded tubular socket joint.
CONCLUSIONS
Tubular socket joint with functionally
graded adhesive will retard the possibility of
failure initiation by reducing peak levels of
out-of-plane stresses by which structural
integrity of joint can be improved
significantly.
REFERENCES
Cognard J Y 2008 Numerical analysis of
edge effects in adhesively-bonded
176
ICCMS2016
NON-LINEAR 3D FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ADHESIVELY

BONDED CFRP LAP JOINT
LAVAJIIT SINGH*, MAHESH M. S. and NIMJE S.
Defence Institute of Advanced Technology, Pune, India
Abstract: Conventional metallic structural joints with mechanical fasteners and weld
joints are rapidly being replaced with composite bonded joints for the last few decades
in the aerospace industry. This is because of their high strength to weight ratio, lesser
cost and low stress concentrations. Slowly, such joints are getting adapted in various
industries including automotive sector. Experimental evaluations require specialized
equipment and skilled technicians which are time consuming and costly. Analytical
methods are too idealistic as various assumptions are involved. Finite Element
Method overcomes these limitations and evaluates precise results. Accurate modeling
of adhesively bonded joints remains a challenging task. In this paper geometrically
non-linear 3D models are used for both the adherend (CFRP) and the adhesive
(epoxy) in the lap joint which is subjected to tensile loads to analyse the de-bonding
behaviour, loads and stresses. The results are compared with the experimental data
available.
Keywords: FEA; CFRP; lap joint; geometric non-linearity.
determined stresses in adhesive lap-joints. He

INTRODUCTION
assumed that the two lap-joint plates act like
Since a few decades adhesively bonded joints simple beam and the more elastic adhesive
are playing a crucial role in aerospace and layer is an infinite number of shear and
automotive applications. These joints offer tension springs. In Hart-Smith’s (1973)
advantages over mechanical and welded model, the most important breakthrough was
joints like less time and cost consumption, the important milestone was the
higher strength to weight ratio, corrosion and simplification of the complicated stress–
fatigue resistance, lesser residual stresses, etc. strain behavior by bilinear or elasto-plastic
Boeing 787 and Airbus A350 contain more curve. This method has been proven as an
than 50% bonded structure. Evaluating stress effective tool in the joint design of
fields in the bond line is still a challenging aeroplanes. Banea and da Silva (2009) et al.
task. Analytically, the adhesive joints are provided a detailed review on the bond
studied by Volkersen (1938) which says that strength and analytical models of adhesively
adhesives deform in shear and adherend in bonded CFRP joints. Khalili (2008) et al.
tension. Then Goland and Reissner (1944) established a 3D FE model of the single lap
took into consideration the rotation of joint, and found that the largest values of
adherend as well. They assumed that the peel shear and peel stresses occur near the ends of
and shear stresses remain constant. Cornell the adhesive region. Hoang-Ngoc and
(1953) carried their work forward and Paroissien (2010) studied the single-lap and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: lavajiit@rediffmail.com 177

Singh et al.
hybrid (bolted/bonded) joints with flexible bonded joints are being included in the global
adhesives. They did 2D plane strain and 3D models where adhesive layer is discretised
analyses, and used the hyper-elastic Mooney– with very fine meshes resulting in high
Rivlin potentials to model flexible adhesives. degree of freedom model.
Campilho (2012) et al. developed a FE model In this paper finite element model of a single
of single-lap joint based on cohesive zone lap bonded joint with composite adherend is
model (CZM), and discussed the influence of modeled with the aim of establishing the
the cohesive law parameters of a triangular model as accurately as possible. The model
CZM. and properties are referred from the work of
Nowadays, as we have achieved a good Jianfeng Li et al. (2015).
progress in computational capabilities, the
Table 1. Properties
CFRP (T300 /QY8911) J116B
E 1 =135 GPa, E 2 =8.8 GPa, E=1 GPa
E3=8.8 GPa, G 12 = 4.5 GPa, G=0.38 GPa
G 23 = 4 GPa, G 13 = 4.5 GPa, ν=0.3, σ =14 MPa
ν 12 =0.33, ν 23 =0.35, ν 31 =0.0216 τ =14 MPa
ρ = 1414 kg/m3 ρ = 600 kg/m3
load is applied at 0.5mm/min at the end cross

MATERIALS AND METHOD
section of the lower adherend (Figure 1).
The lap joint configuration is shown in
The boundary conditions at the loaded end(B)
Figure 1 which is based on ASTM standard
restrict all the degrees of freedom, except for
D5868-01. The composite material of the
the longitudinal displacements, while at the
adherend is carbon/BMI unidirectional
unloaded end(A), none of the displacements
prepreg (T300 /QY8911, nominal thickness
or rotations are allowed. It is strongly
0.12 mm). The adhesive thickness of the joint
recommended to use symmetry conditions in
is 0.15 mm (J116B, epoxy film), produced by
order to reduce the time of data preparation
Institute of Petrochemistry Heilongjiang
and computer runs. For this specimen, half of
Academy Sciences. Material properties at
the specimen in the longitudinal direction
room temperature are listed in Table 1.
could be modeled by defining appropriate
It should be pointed out that in Table 1, σ and boundary conditions
τ represent the peel strength and the shear
The analysis was done in ABAQUS/Standard
strength of the adhesive film respectively.
using a solid model having eight node linear
The layup is [45/0/-45/90]s and the overlap
brick elements with incompatible modes and
length is 10 mm. Adherend width is 25 mm
three degrees of freedom per node have been
and length is 90 mm. The properties of each
used.
material are presented in Table 1. The tensile
178
Non-linear 3D Finite Element Analysis of Adhesively Bonded CFRP Lap Joint
The adhesive layer was meshed using 10 Figure 3 shows the load vs. displacement
elements through its thickness to capture the curve from finite element analysis which
stresses and deformations accurately. The shows that the failure load is 7.5 kN. Curves
meshing in the adherends in the joint region for different adherend thicknesses are not
was same as that of adhesive layer in loading shown here.
direction and width wise. Figure 2 shows the
meshing in x and y axis in which area in
contact with the adhesive layer is densely
meshed. Since the most important effects
occur at the overlap ends, refinement of the
mesh in this region would improve the
accuracy of the model. In this example a
uniform mesh models the whole overlap;
however, the use of finer meshes in those
regions where stress concentrations are
expected is recommended.
Figure 3. Load-Displacement curve

Shear stress curves and peel stress curves
along the adhesive length from the finite
element model are not shown here.
CONCLUSION
The finite element model of the joint is
established. We can see that the behaviour of
the graph is non-linear and this non-linearity
increases with increase in adherend thickness.
We can easily plot shear stress curve and peel
stress curve along the adhesive length of the
Figure 1. Lap Joint joint.
REFERENCES
Banea M D da Silva L F M 2009 P I Mech
Eng L-J Mater 223(1) 1.
Campilho R D S G Banea M D Neto J A B P
da Silva L F M 2012 Modelling of
single lap joints using cohesive zone
models: effect of the cohesive
parameters on the output of the
Figure 2. FE mesh of the joint simulations Journal of Adhesion Science
and Technology 88 513–33.
RESULTS
179
Singh et al.
Cornell R W 1953 Determination of stresses

in cemented lamp joints. J Appl Mech
20 355-364
Goland M and Reissner E 1944 The Stresses
in Cemented Joints ASME Trans
Journal of Applied Mechanics 11 17–27.
Hart-Smith L J 1973 Adhesive-Bonded
Single Lap Joints NASA-CR-112236.
Hoang-Ngoc C T Paroissien E 2010
Simulation of single-lap bonded and
hybrid (bolted/bonded) joints with
flexible adhesive. Int Journal of
Adhesion and Adhesives 30 117–29.
Khalili S M R, Khalili S, Pirouzhashemi MR,
Shokuhfar A Mittal R K 2008
Numerical study of lap joints with
composite adhesives and composite
adherends subjected to in-plane and
transverse loads. Int. Journal of
Adhesion and Adhesives 28(8) 411–8.
L Jianfeng Y Ying Z Taotao and L Zudian
2015 Experimental study of adhesively
bonded CFRP joints subjected to tensile
loads International Journal of Adhesion
and Adhesives 57 95.
Volkersen O 1938 Die Niektratve-rteilung in
Zugbeanspruchten mit Konstanten
Laschenquerschritten.
Luftfahrtforschung 15 41–47
180
ICCMS2016
STOCHASTIC NATURAL FREQUENCY OF COMPOSITE PLATES

USING KRIGING MODEL
DEY S.1*, MUKHOPADHYAY T.2, CHAKRABARTY S.3, CHOWDHURY R.3, ADHIKARI S.2,
KARMAKAR A.4 and SPICKENHEUER A.5
1
National Institute of Technology Silchar, India.
2
Swansea University, United Kingdom.
3
Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, India.
4
Jadavpur University, India
5
Leibniz-Institut für Polymer for schung Dresden e. V., (IPF), Germany
Abstract: In this paper, the stochastic natural frequency for laminated composite
plates is mapped by using Kriging model. The Kriging model is employed as
surrogate and is trained by using Latin hypercube sampling. Subsequently the
stochastic first three natural frequencies are quantified with Kriging based uncertainty
quantification algorithm. The convergence of the proposed algorithm for stochastic
natural frequency analysis of composite plates is verified and validated with original
finite element method (FEM). The sample size and computational cost are reduced by
employing the present approach compared to traditional Monte Carlo simulation
(MCS).
Keywords: Composite plate; Kriging; uncertainty quantification; stochastic
natural frequency
INTRODUCTION coupled with finite element formulation of

Composite materials are extensively composite plates for the proposed analysis.
employed in aerospace, civil, naval and other Due to the involvement of large number of
engineering applications because of their uncertain input parameters in complex
light weight, high specific strength, high production and fabrication processes of
stiffness-to-weight ratios, excellent fatigue laminated composite plate, the system
strength and tailoring of properties. Hence properties can be random in nature resulting
this subject has attracted ample attention in in uncertainty in the response of the
last couple of decades [Qatu and Leissa, laminated composite plate. Therefore, to well
1991a, 1991b]. Recently researchers have define the original problems and enable a
shown profound interest to quantify the better understanding and characterization of
material and geometric uncertainties the actual behaviour of the laminated
associated with different responses of composite structures, it is of prime
laminated composites [Dey et al., 2015a, importance that the inherent randomness in
2015b, 2016a and 2016b]. This article system parameters is incorporated in the
presents a computationally efficient analysis. Application of historical
framework for uncertainty quantification in uneconomic uncertainty factors may not be
natural frequencies of composite plates based sufficient to provide adequate safety.
on Kriging model. The Kriging model is Conversely, the trend to design for all
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:infosudip@gmail.com 181

Dey et al.
possible unfavourable events occurring authors’ knowledge, there is no literature

simultaneously could produce an covering the uncertainty quantification of
unacceptable dynamic response. Moreover, natural frequencies in laminated composite
composite materials have more intrinsic structures using the artificial neural network
variables than metals due to their model considering both individual and
heterogeneity and are subjected to more combined variation of random input
manufacturing process sources of variation. parameters.
GOVERNING EQUATIONS
A laminated composite cantilever plates is
considered as shown in Figure 1. An eight
noded isoparametric quadratic element is
considered in finite element formulation.
Using Hamilton’s principle and Lagrange’s
equation, the dynamic equilibrium equation Figure 1. Laminated composite plate
for the equation of motion of free vibration
system can be expressed as KRIGING MODEL
(1)
[ M (ω )] [δ] + [ K (ω )] {δ } = 0 The Kriging model [Cressie, 1990] postulates
In the above equation, M( ω ) and [K( ω )] are a combination of a known function employed
the mass and stiffness matrix, respectively for simulation of required output (natural
and {δ} is the vector of generalized frequency) is expressed as,
coordinates. The governing equations are (3)
y ( x) = y0 ( x) + Z ( x)
derived based on Mindlin’s theory
incorporating transverse shear deformation. where y(x) is the unknown function of
For free vibration, the random natural interest, x is an m dimensional vector (m
frequencies [ω n (ω ) ] are determined from the design variables), y0 ( x) is the known
standard eigenvalue problem using QR approximation (usually polynomial) function
iteration algorithm. For the composite plate, and Z(x) represents is the realization of a
the natural frequencies of are obtained as: stochastic process with mean zero, variance,
1 (2) and nonzero covariance. The covariance
ω 2j (ω ) =
λ j (ω ) matrix of Z(x) is given as
(4)
Cov[ Z ( x ) , Z ( x )] = σ R [ R ( x , x )]
i j 2 i j
where j = 1, 2, 3, . . . . . . . . , nmod e
where R is a (p × p) correlation matrix and
Here λ j (ω ) is the j -th eigenvalue of matrix
R(xi, xj) is the correlation function between
A = K −1 (ω ) M (ω ) and nr indicates the any two of the p-sampled data points xi and
number of modes retained in this analysis. xj. R is an (p x p) symmetric matrix with ones
along the diagonal. The correlation function
To implement the effects of material and
R(xi, xj) is specified by the user, and a variety
manufacturing uncertainties, a set of random
of correlation functions exist. Using Gaussian
variables representing laminate mechanical
correlation function
properties, density and orientation angles is
 n 2
chosen. The randomness in these variables R( x , x ) = exp − ∑ θ k xki − xkj 
i j
(5)
can be quantified either experimentally or  k =1 
using simulation codes. To the best of the
182
Stochastic Natural Frequency of Composite Plates using Kriging Model
where n is the number of design variables, θ k considered in the present analysis are as
is the unknown correlation parameters used to follows:
fit the model, and xki and xkj are the k-th (a) Variation of ply-orientation angle only:
components of the sample points x i and x j ,
θ (ω ) = {θ1 θ 2 θ 3 ........θ i ......θ l }
respectively. The predicted estimates, ŷ of (b) Combined variation of ply orientation
the response y (x) at random values of x are angle, elastic and shear modulus and mass
density:
defined as Kriging predictor
g {θ (ω ), E1 (ω ), E 2 (ω ), G12 (ω ), G23 (ω ),
yˆ ( x) = βˆ + r T ( x) R −1 [ y − f βˆ ] (6) µ12 (ω ), ρ (ω )} = { Φ 1 (θ1 ..θ l ), Φ 2 ( E1(1) ..E1(l ) ),...
.....Φ 3 ( E 2 (1) ..E 2 (l ) ) ,Φ 4 (G12 (1) ..G12 (l ) ),
The estimate of variance between underlying ......Φ 5 (G23(1) ..G23(l ) ), Φ 6 ( µ12 (1) ..µ12 (l ) ),
global model β̂ and y is estimated by
.......Φ 7 ( ρ1 ..ρ l )}
where θ i , E 1(i) , E 2(i) , G 12i , G 23(i) , μ 12(i) and
1
σˆ 2 = ( y − f βˆ ) T R −1 ( y − f βˆ ) (7) ρ i are the ply orientation angle, elastic
p moduli, shear moduli, Poisson ratio and mass
where y is the column vector of length p that density, respectively and ‘l’ denotes the
contains the sample values of the frequency number of layer in the laminate. In present
responses and f is a column vector and study, three layered graphite-epoxy
βˆ = ( f T R −1 f ) −1 f T R −1 y and symmetric angle-ply laminated composite
r T ( x) = [ R( x, x1 ), R( x, x 2 ),....R( x, x p ) ]T with cantilever shallow plate is considered with
deterministic length, width and thickness of
the sample data points {x1 , x 2 ,...............x p } .
1 m, 1 m and 5 mm, respectively. Material
Now the model fitting is accomplished by properties of graphite–epoxy composite [Qatu
maximum likelihood (i.e., best guesses) for and Leissa, 1991a] considered with
θ k . The maximum likelihood estimates (i.e., deterministic mean value as E 1 = 138.0 GPa,
“best guesses”) for the θ k in Eq. (5) used to E 2 = 8.96 GPa, G 12 = 7.1 GPa, G 13 = 7.1
fit a Kriging model are obtained as GPa, G 23 = 2.84 GPa, μ = 0.3, ρ=1600 kg/m3.
Max. Γ (θ k ) = −
1
2
[
p ln(σˆ 2 ) + ln R ]
(8) Table 1 presents the finite element mesh
convergence study for non-dimensional
where the variance σ2 and |R| are both fundamental natural frequencies validated
functions of θ k , is solved for positive values with results obtained by Qatu and Leissa
of θ k as optimization variables. After (1991b). Figure 2 represents the probability
obtaining Kriging based surrogate, the density plot for validation of results obtained
random process Z(x) provides the by Kriging model with traditional Monte
approximation error that can be used for Carlo simulation (MCS). Figure 3 shows the
improving the surrogate model. scatter plot for validation of Kriging model
with original finite element model.
STOCHASTIC APPROACH BY
KRIGING CONCLUSIONS
The layer-wise stochasticity in material and This presents a Kriging based approach for
geometric properties are considered as input uncertainty quantification in natural
parameters. The individual and combined frequencies of laminated composite plates.
cases of layer-wise random variations The computational cost is reduced by using
Kriging compared to MCS. The results are
183
Dey et al.
presented for fundamental natural frequency geometric properties to illustrate the proposed
considering individual and combined approach.
stochasticity in ply orientation, material and
Figure 2. Probability density function plot Figure 3. Scatter plot
Table 1 Convergence study for non-dimensional fundamental natural frequencies

[ω=ω n L2 √(ρ/E 1 t2)] of three layered (θ°/-θ°/θ°) graphite-epoxy untwisted composite
plates, a/b=1, b/t=100, considering E 1 = 138 GPa, E 2 = 8.96 GPa, G 12 = 7.1 GPa, ν 12 =
0.3.
Present Present Present Present Qatu and
Ply angle, FEM FEM FEM FEM Leissa
θ
(4 × 4) (6 × 6) (8 × 8) (10 × 10) (1991b)
0° 1.0112 1.0133 1.0107 1.004 1.0175
90° 0.2553 0.2567 0.2547 0.2542 0.2590
REFERENCES Kriging model approach Composites

Part B: Engineering 70 99–112.
Qatu M S Leissa A W 1991a Natural
frequencies for cantilevered doubly Dey S Mukhopadhyay T Spickenheuer A
curved laminated composite shallow Adhikari S Heinrich G 2016b Bottom up
shells Composite Structures 17 227–255. surrogate based approach for stochastic
frequency response analysis of laminated
Qatu M S Leissa A W 1991b Vibration
composite plates Composite Structures
studies for laminated composite twisted
140 712-727.
cantilever plates Int. J. of Mechanical
Sciences 33(11) 927–940. Dey S Mukhopadhyay T Sahu S K Li G
Rabitz H Adhikari S 2015b Thermal
Dey S Naskar S Mukhopadhyay T Gohs U.
uncertainty quantification in frequency
Spickenheuer A Bittrich L Sriramula S
responses of laminated composite plates
Adhikari S Heinrich G 2016a
Composites Part B: Engineering 80 186-
Uncertainty natural frequency analysis of
197.
composite plates including effect of
noise - A polynomial neural network Cressie N A C 1990 The origins of Kriging
approach Composite Structures 143 130- Math Geol 22 239–252.
142.
Dey S Mukhopadhyay T Adhikari S 2015a
Stochastic free vibration analyses of
composite doubly curved shells - A
184
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL MODELING OF FLOW AROUND CYLINDRICAL

BRIDGE PIER WITH AND WITHOUT PILE CAP
GAUTAM P.*, VIJAYASREE B. A., ELDHO T. I., BEHERA M. R. and MAZUMDER B. S.
Civil Engineering Department, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India
Abstract: A three-dimensional numerical simulation model ANSYS FLUENT is used

to model the flow field around a uniform cylindrical bridge pier as well as a
cylindrical pier with an elliptical pile cap attached to its base. The motive behind
modelling the two pier shapes is to analyse the effect of using elliptical pile cap in
controlling the vortex formation leading to reduction of excessive sediment scour
around the pier. The computations are done using standard and realizable 𝑘 − 𝜀 model
to simulate three dimensional flow around the piers. From the results obtained, it is
seen that the inclusion of elliptical pile cap in the pier structure reduced the strength of
vortices near the bed. The results obtained from FLUENT are compared with
experimental results and found to be in good agreement.
Keywords: Flow simulation; Turbulence; Complex piers; FLUENT.
INTRODUCTION are presented here, viz, cylinder without pile

Bridges have contributed to the development cap and cylinder with elliptical pile cap
of civilization since ages. But constructing a attached to it. Both the models were solved
bridge on river (Column Bridge) changes the for same flow conditions and flow domain.
flow pattern of river or stream around it. The The experiments were conducted in
three-dimensional flow field around a pier is Hydraulics Laboratory, IIT Bombay, India.
extremely complex due to separation and
FLOW DOMAIN DESCRIPTION
generation of multiple vortices (Salaheldin et
al., 2004). The action of this generated vortex The flow domain and pier models were
system causes scour around the pier which developed using Design Modeler and
may weaken its foundation. Thus, it becomes meshing was done using Ansys Fluent itself.
very important to understand the change in Table 1 below gives the flow domain
flow around such structures in rivers dimensions adopted for both the cases. They
(Beheshti and Ataie, 2010). Cylindrical pier were selected in conjunction with the
is the most commonly used shape of pier experimental setup in the laboratory for
(Ali, 2002). But these days, pile caps are quantitative comparison of results. The
constructed to support the main pier for dimensions of the pier with and without pile
structural safety and geotechnical reasons. cap were also taken same as those taken in
experimental study, as given in Table 2.
The objective of the present study is to
Figures 1 and 2 show the flow domain and
understand the change in flow pattern around
generated grid for cylinderical pier model
a cylindrical pier in rigid bed by three-
with and without pile cap, respectively.
dimensional numerical simulation in ANSYS
Single phase domain of water was designed
FLUENT (Fluent Manual, 2012). Two cases
for both the models. Fine mesh was
__________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: priyankagautam.ce@gmail.com 185

Gautam et al.
developed with high smoothing and atleast

15 cells across each gap.
Table 1. Flow Domain dimensions
Length Breadth Depth
3m 0.3 m 0.2 m
Table 2. Pier Model dimensions

(b)
Pier without Figure 2. (a) Isometric view of
Diameter of pier: 0.03 m
pile cap computational domain for cylinder with pile
Diameter of pier: 0.03 m cap; (b). Zoomed in view of mesh.
Pier with
Length of pile cap: 0.12 m
elliptical pile
Breadth of pile cap: 0.04 m BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
cap
Depth of pile cap: 0.05 m
Appropriate and same boundary conditions
were specified for both the cases. The inlet
was specified as velocity inlet with an
average uniform velocity of 0.33 m/s. The
outlet was specified as pressure outlet. The
side walls and the bottom of the domain were
set to “wall” condition, meaning ‘no slip’ at
(a) the solid boundaries. The top surface was set
to symmetry. The pier surface was also set as
“wall”. The inlet to pier distance was
carefully chosen to ensure fully developed
flow in the domain.
SOLUTION METHODS
Steady state and pressure-based solution for
absolute velocity formulation was done for
(b) both the cases.
Figure 1. (a) Isometric view of The turbulence models solved for the domain
computational domain for uniform cylinder; were viscous standard and realizable 𝑘 − 𝜀
(b) Zoomed in view of mesh
models. In general, 𝑘 − 𝜀 turbulence model is
the most commonly used two-equation model
for the simulation of turbulent characteristics
of flow. It gives the description of turbulence
by solving two partial difference ‘transport’
equations.
The simulation for all the cases were done for
an average velocity 0.33 m/s applied on the
(a)
inlet boundary. For pressure-velocity
coupling, SIMPLE scheme was adopted.
186
Numerical Modelling of Flow Around Cylindrical Bridge Piers with and Without Pile Cap
Figure 3. Velocity contour at the center

Figure 4. Velocity contour at the level of
of the piers in the lateral (z-) direction
pile cap top around the pier without and
for pier without and with pile cap,
with pile cap, respectively
respectively.
Figure 3 and 4 show the average velocity
Second-order Upwinding Scheme was done
contour for both the cases (in z- and x-
for spatial discretization of pressure,
direction, respectively). As can be seen from
momentum, and turbulent kinetic energy and
the contour figures, for the case without cap,
turbulent dissipation rate as well.
the velocity values and variations around the
Corresponding to the both cases discussed
pier is more predominant. For the case with
above, physical model experiments were
pile cap, the velocity values at the bottom of
carried out at Hydraulics Laboratory, IIT
the pier is reduced. The inclusion of pile cap
Bombay in a flume 7.5m long, 0.3m wide
in the pier seemed to reduce the strength of
and 0.6m deep, by placing the pier at the
vortices near the bed, as can be seen in fig. 3
center of the test section in the flume. The
and 4.
flow depth was set at 20 cm for a discharge
of 0.21 m3/s. For the defined flow conditions CONCLUSION
in the flume, the velocities were measured at
As observed, for the case without cap, the
various locations surrounding the pier using
velocity values and variations around the pier
Acoustic Doppler Velocimetry (ADV).
is more predominant. For the case with pile
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS cap, the velocity values at the bottom of the
pier were reduced. The inclusion of pile cap
In the Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) in the pier seemed to reduce the strength of
analysis, model results were obtained using vortices near the bed. The velocity around the
standard 𝑘 − 𝜀 model as well as realizable pile cap is also observed to be unchanged as
𝑘 − 𝜀 model. While standard 𝑘 − 𝜀 model compared to that around cylindrical pier case.
converges faster than realizable 𝑘 − 𝜀 model, The velocity values obtained in the CFD
the latter gives more agreeable results in both analyses were compared with the
the cases and are presented in this paper.
187
Gautam et al.
experimental results at few locations and dimensional flow field around circular
found to be in reasonable agreement. piers Journal of Hydraulic Engineering
130 91-100
Beheshti A A and Ataie-Ashtiani B 2010
Experimental study of 3-dimensional
flow field around a complex bridge pier
Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 136
143-154
Fluent Manual 2012 Manual of FLUENT
ANSYS FLUENT
(a)
(b)
Figure 5. Comparison of Stream-wise
velocity profiles obtained in Numerical
Simulation and Experiments: (a) For
Uniform Cylinder; (b) For Cylinder with
Pile Cap.
REFERENCES
Ali K H M 2002 Simulation of flow around
piers Journal of Hydraulic Research 40
161-174
Salaheldin T M, Imran J and Chaudhry M H
2004 Numerical modeling of three-
188
ICCMS2016
MODIFIED KINETIC STREAMLINED-UPWIND PETROV GALERKIN

METHOD FOR EULER EQUATIONS OF GAS DYNAMICS
JAGTAP AMEYA*
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India.
Abstract: Kinetic Streamlined-Upwind Petrov Galerkin (KSUPG) method is a robust

method developed for solving hyperbolic PDEs like Burgers equation and Euler
equations. Due to the presence of computationally expensive error and exponential
functions this scheme becomes less efficient. In this paper, the modified KSUPG
scheme is proposed for Euler equations which is less computationally expensive than
its predecessor KSUPG. The efficiency of the proposed scheme is shown by solving
various test cases.
Keywords: KSUPG method; Euler equations; modified KSUPG method.
INTRODUCTION KSUPG over SUPG method is, it does not

require additional diffusion terms in multi-
Finite element method is a powerful
dimensional Burgers equation. Also, the
mathematical tool to solve partial differential
expression for intrinsic time scale for vector
equations (PDEs). It can optimally solve the
equations is obtained directly from weak
self adjoint differential equations where the
formulation of scalar equation. The diffusion
differential operator is symmetric. Standard
terms in KSUPG scheme involves
finite element method produces oscillations
exponential and error function which makes
while solving non-self adjoint differential
it computationally very expensive. In this
equations like Euler equations of fluid
paper, a modified KSUPG (m-KSUPG)
dynamics which are the governing equations
scheme is formulated which removes
of high speed flows. Stabilized finite element
computationally expensive exponential and
methods like SUPG, Taylor Galerkin,
error functions from the diffusion terms.
Discontinuous Galerkin etc. are used to solve
Various test cases are solved and compared
such equations which gives stable results.
with KSUPG scheme for Euler equations
Among all methods, SUPG is a famous
which shows the robustness, accuracy and
stabilized method. In SUPG scheme there is
efficiency of the proposed scheme.
no unique way to define intrinsic time scale
(stabilization parameter), especially, for In m-KSUPG method the velocity space is
multidimensional vector equations. On the divided as v>0 and v<0, and v = 0 has no
other hand, kinetic schemes are attractive physical meaning which is assumed to be a
alternative which exploits the connection preferential rest frame. One can also take any
between Boltzmann equation and Euler arbitrary value as origin. Considering u
equations [Deshpande, 1986; Mandal et. al., which is the fluid velocity at origin, the
1994]. The main advantage of kinetic velocity space is then divided as v>u and
schemes is, instead of dealing with nonlinear v<u. Thus, defining c = v - u which is the
PDEs one needs to deal with linear PDEs. velocity of the molecule relative to the fluid
Kinetic scheme is developed in SUPG which is also called as thermal velocity.
framework called as Kinetic SUPG or Consider the advection part of one
KSUPG [Jagtap, 2015] for hyperbolic partial dimensional Boltzmann equation
differential equations. The advantage of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ameya.aero@gmail.com 189

Jagtap Ameya
respectively, where ‘h’ is element length.

Using thermal velocity c = v - u one can Basis function .
rewrite the above equation as In matrix form,
Upon taking moments with suitable moment Taking moments with suitable moment
function vector one can recover the Euler
equations of gas dynamics. function and using the
linearity property of moment operator one
GOVERNING EQUATIONS can obtain
The governing 1D Euler equations in

conservation form are given as
where
where
are solution and flux vectors and

are density, velocity, pressure and
Assuming which is the Maxwellian
total energy.
distribution written in terms of the thermal
velocity
m-KSUPG WEAK FORMULATION
The standard Galerkin finite element
approximation for molecular velocity where and are the internal energy
distribution function is variable and average internal energy variable
corresponding to the non-translational
degrees of freedom given by
where the domain is divided into

the moments are evaluated as
elements. and
Defining the test and trial functions spaces as
The intrinsic time scale and are

defined as
190
Modified Kinetic Streamlined-Upwind Petrov Galerkin Method for Euler Equations of Gas Dynamics
Finally, the semi-discretized equations are temporal discretization.

fully discretized by using forward difference
Figure 1. Sod’s shock tube problem Figure 2. Lax’s shock tube problem
191
Jagtap Ameya
NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS the accuracy and robustness of the proposed

scheme is demonstrated by solving various
SOD'S SHOCK TUBE PROBLEM
test cases of Euler equations involving shock,
(LANEY, 1998)
contact and expansion waves.
Sod's shock tube problem consists of a right
shock wave, a left rarefaction and a contact REFERENCES
discontinuity which separates the shock wave Deshpande S M 1986 Kinetic theory based
and rarefaction. The number of node points
are 100 and CFL number is 0.15. Final time new upwind methods for inviscid
is t = 0.01. Figure 1 shows density, velocity, compressible flows AIAA-86-0275 24th
pressure and Mach number plots for both Aerospace Science Meeting Neveda
KSUPG and m-KSUPG schemes. m-KSUPG USA 6-9 Jan. 1986.
scheme can resolve all the essential features
Jagtap Ameya D 2015 Kinetic Streamlined-
of the flow accurately.
Upwind Petrov Galerkin methods for
SHOCK TUBE PROBLEM OF LAX Hyperbolic Partial Differential
(TORO, 1999)
Equations, PhD thesis Indian Institute of
The number of node points are 100 and CFL Science Bangalore.
number is 0.1. Final time is t = 0.13. Figure 2
shows density, velocity, pressure and internal Laney C B 1998 Computational Gas
energy plots for both KSUPG and m-KSUPG Dynamics Cambridge University Press.
schemes. The accuracy of m-KSUPG scheme Mandal J C Deshpande S M 1994 Kinetic
is as good as KSUPG scheme.
Flux Vector Splitting for Euler
COMPARISON OF COMPUTATIONAL Equations Comput. Fluids 23(2) 447-
COST 478.
Table 1 shows the comparison of Toro E F 1999 Riemann Solvers and
computational cost for KSUPG diffusive flux Numerical Methods for Fluid Dynamics
and m-KSUPG diffusive flux. The Springer-Verlag.
computational cost required for m-KSUPG is
much lesser than that of KSUPG scheme.
Table 1: Computational Cost in ‘sec’
h KSUPG Modified
KSUPG
200 0.002411 0.000035
400 0.004780 0.000063
800 0.009988 0.000130
1600 0.019307 0.000239
3200 0.039285 0.000506
6400 0.077437 0.000954
12800 0.154049 0.001943
CONCLUSION
In this paper a modified KSUPG (m-KSUPG)
scheme based on thermal velocity is
proposed. Proposed scheme is free from
computationally expensive error and
exponential functions and hence it is more
efficient than the KSUPG scheme. Moreover,
192
ICCMS2016
HIGH ENTHALPY SIMULATIONS FOR SHOCK WAVE BOUNDARY

LAYER INTERACTION
DESAI S.1, KULKARNI V.1* and GADGIL H.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Guwahati, Guwahati, Assam, India.
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: Shock wave boundary layer interaction (SWBLI) along with real gas
effects is studied numerically in the present work. Both the phenomena have
potential to influence strongly the aerothermodynamics of the flow. For present
numerical investigations, a finite volume unstructured solver is employed to solve
coupled Navier Stokes and species continuity equations. Convective fluxes are
calculated using well known AUSM scheme and tested in high enthalpy ramp
induced SWBLI case. All flow features like separation shock, reattachment shock,
separation region, plateau pressure etc. were found very well captured by present
solver. In present study, the effects of wall condition and leading edge bluntness on
SWBLI are also examined. Adiabatic wall condition is found to show more
upstream influence, separation bubble size and high plateau pressure and hence,
strong interaction is observed in comparison with isothermal wall condition. Efforts
are made herein to verify mitigation of SWBLI by providing leading edge
bluntness. For present free stream conditions, leading edge bluntness made SWBLI
strong rather than weak. Therefore, prior study is required for effective
implementation of blunt leading edge SWBLI mitigation technique.
Keywords: Real gas effects; Shock wave boundary layer interaction; blunt
leading edge
INTRODUCTION to flow separation due to adverse pressure

gradient offered by the ramp. This adverse
Hypersonic aerodynamics offers many gradient leads to boundary layer thickening
challenging issues due to high temperature which in turn generates separation and
effects. Initially, change in specific heat of reattachment shocks. A slip line emanates
the air and onwards endothermic chemical from interaction point of separation and re-
reactions are among those effects which attachment shocks. These shocks and
bear potential to change the aerodynamics. extreme viscous dissipation adjacent to wall
Existence of chemical non-equilibrium may cause molecular collisions in the gas
further complicates the dynamics of fluid and can chemically excite them to initiate
flow. Therefore, shock wave boundary layer chemical reactions. This phenomenon may
interaction (SWBLI), a widely studied topic affect boundary layer thickness, heat flux,
of high speed flows, is undertaken here to surface pressure, entropy layer and various
analyse in the presence of high temperature other design parameters. Therefore, whole
effects. aerothermodynamics can be different from
Ramp induced SWBLI is one the most perfect gas flow assumptions. Hence, to
studied geometric configuration in this area, make more reliable aerodynamic design
as it resembles various separated flow structure, essence of real gas effects is vital
regions of hypersonic vehicle. It may lead in SWBLI studies.
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: vinayak@iitg.ernet.in 193

Desai et al.
Some of the earlier findings in SWBLI deal real gas effects in SWBLI cases.
with perfect gas assumption [John et al.,
2014; Marini, 1998; Coët and Chanetz, RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
1993] wherein various flow features like To assess SWBLI with real gas effects,
upstream influence location, separation freestream Mach number M ∞ =7, static
bubble size, peak pressure and peak heat temperature T ∞= 600 K and pressure
transfer rate are predicted with assumption P ∞= 1600 Pa are considered. For present
of ideal gas flow. Later few studies are laminar conditions, a sharp leading edge
concentrated on high enthalpy effects in flat-plate geometry of length 50 mm
their SWBLI investigations [Tchuen et al. followed by a 15o inclined compression
2008; Davis and Sturtevant, 2000] and ramp is taken for investigations. This
various other cases [Desai et al., 2016]. freestream and geometry conditions are
Some of the studies verified the earlier tested in various cases for different gas
literature reported co-relations for the models.
upstream influence location, separation
bubble size, peak heat flux and plateau EFFECT OF WALL CONDITION
pressure by the numerical simulation based
results [John and Kulkarni, 2014]. In present studies, adiabatic and isothermal l
(T w - 500K) wall conditions are tested for
In view of such limited findings for SWBLI earlier described conditions. A Mach
at high enthalpy conditions, present contour obtained from numerical simulation
investigations are planned to analyse the is shown in Figure. 1 for adiabatic wall
proposed interaction for 15° ramp attached conditions. In this figure, all flow features
to a flat plate. Reacting flow version of in are found very well captured. Wall skin
house developed solver USHAS friction coefficient and pressure distribution
(Unstructured Solver For Hypersonic are plotted in Figure. 2 (a) and Figure. 2 (b)
Aerodthermodynamic Applications) has for both cases. More upstream influence,
been employed herein. This version of the high plateau pressure and high re-
solver accounts for five species (N 2 , O 2 , attachment shock are evident from Figure. 2
NO, O and N) with temperature dependent (b) for adiabatic wall condition. Here, skin
properties and eleven prominent friction coefficient plot is used for accurate
dissociation-recombination reactions among estimation of separation bubble size. The
them. There is a provision in this version of stream wise negative region length of skin
USHAS by which reaction part of the solver friction coefficient gives idea of separation
can be made silent to simulate the frozen bubble size. The obtained separation bubble
flow condition. For present simulations, sizes are tabulated for all gas models in
AUSM scheme is used for inviscid flux Table 1. It was noticed that adiabatic wall
computations. Studies with perfect, frozen condition shows much larger separation
and non-equilibrium flow solvers are region in comparison to isothermal wall
conducted to evaluate the prominence condition which is consistent in all gas
between thermal and chemical non- models. Higher upstream influence, thicker
equilibrium in this SWBLI. Such hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer,
investigations are found essential in case of larger wall gradients are the main reasons
SWBLI in the presence of high temperature for the same.
real gas.
CONCLUSIONS
NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY SWBLI with high enthalpy free stream
Governing equation of two dimensional conditions have been demonstrated in
(2D) N-S equations and species continuity present study. It was found that frozen and
equations are solved for investigation of non-equilibrium flow shows almost same
194
High Enthalpy Simulations for Shock Wave Boundary Layer Interaction
trend whereas differences have been upstream influence, large separation bubble
observed with respect to perfect gas flow. It size, high plateau pressure are noticed in
is noticed that the real gas tend to reduce the adiabatic wall case in comparison to
size of the separation bubble. High isothermal case.
Figure 1. Mach number contour for SWBLI simulations for reacting gas flow
with adiabatic wall condition.
b).
Figure 2. Effect of wall conditions on distribution of wall parameters (Reacting
gas model). a).Surface skin friction coefficient & b). Surface pressure.
Table1. Separation bubble size (m) for various conditions

Wall condition Perfect gas Frozen gas Reacting gas
Isothermal
0.0125 0.0083 0.0083
(T w = 500 K)
Adiabatic 0.0514 0.0373 0.037
195
Desai et al.
hypersonic flow with artificially

REFERENCES
upstream flux vector splitting (AUFS)
Blazek J 2001 Computational Fluid schemes International Journal of
Dynamics: Principles and Applications Computational Fluid Dynamics 22(4)
Elsevier Chapter 5. 209–220.
Coët M and Chanetz B 1993 Experiments Venkatakrishanan V 1995 Convergence to
on shock wave/boundary layer steady state solutions of the Euler
interaction in hypersonic flow Rech. equations on unstructured grids with
Aerosp. (English edition) 1 61-74. limiters Journal of Computational
Davis J P and Sturtevant B 2000 Separation Physics 118(1) 120-130.
length in high-enthalpy
shock/boundary layer interaction
Physics of Fluids 12(10) 2661–2687.
Desai S Kulkarni V and Gadgil H 2016
Delusive influence of nondimensional
numbers in canonical hypersonic
nonequilibrium flows Journal of
Aerospace Engineering 04016030 1-
10.
Dunn M G and Kung S W 1973 Theoretical
and experimental studies of re-entry
plasmas NASA CR-2232.
Gordon S and Mcbride B 1994 Computer
program of calculation of complex
chemical equilibrium composition and
applications NASA.
John B and Kulkarni V 2014 Numerical
assessment of correlations for shock
wave boundary layer interaction
Computers and Fluids 90 42-50.
John B Kulkarni V and Natarajan G 2014
Shock wave boundary layer
interactions in hypersonic flows
International Journal of Heat and
Mass Transfer 70 81-90.
Marini M 1998 Effects of flow and
geometry parameters on shock-wave
boundary-layer interaction phenomena
AIAA 98-1570.
Tchuen G Burtschell Y and Zeitoun D E
2008 Computation of non-equilibrium
196
ICCMS2016
DESIGN AND TESTING OF AXIAL FANS FOR COOLING ENGINES

ABDULAZEEM D. 1*, BARUAH A.2 and KUMAR S.3
1
CAD/CAM, Vellore Institute of Technology Chennai
2
CFD, Altair Engineering India
3
School of Mechanical and Building, Science, VIT University, Chennai
Abstract: This project aims to establish the correlation between test results and CFD
simulation. Also sensitivity of different turbulence models has been studied. To
establish comparative results (±10% test result) exact modelling of wind tunnel is
must. Experimental test has been performed in Air flow performance tester and CFD
simulation is carried out with FEM based CFD solver ‘Acusolve’. The inputs for the
axial fan are volumetric flow rate (m3/hr) and speed (rpm). Final answer is pressure
difference between outlet and inlet. By changing volume flow rate and rpm the graph
between pressure difference (Pa) and rpm is drawn. Different cases by changing mesh
and zone refinement are compared and also different turbulence model such as Spalart
Allmaras (SA), SST model are discussed. Modelling of fan done by using solid
works, for surface meshing ‘Hypermesh’ had been used.
Keywords: CFD; Sensitivity; FEM; Volumetric flow rate; Zone refinement;
Volume meshing; Boundary condition.
INTRODUCTION increasing efficiency of axial fan for this

application.
Axial fans are used for active cooling of
machines and systems. Axial fans mostly OBJECTIVES
used in radiator fans, factory assembled
cooling tower, field erected cooling tower, To improve CFD analysis methodology for
evaporative condenser, closed circuit cooling, radiator Axial Fans. To establish a correlation
air cooled heat exchanger, air cooled between test results and simulation results
condenser, industrial ventilation etc. the (range of 10%). Also to compare different
frequent use of axial fan is in automobile turbulence model and finalizing best model
cooling in radiator. In recent years the for this particular application.
competition in the automobile industry has
spurred the industries to increase the METHODOLOGY
efficiencies of their products. A correlation EXPERIMENTAL SETUP
between test results and simulation results are
to be made. Different models of fan are to be The Experiment setup is called Air Flow
tested so that the common method of Performance tester which has a blower
simulation for axial fan is to be established connected to the 4.8m test chamber at the one
for this particular air flow performance tester. end and at the other end the fan model which
If test and simulation results are not matching is to be tested is mounted. The airflow from
then different parameters need to be changed the blower in to the test chamber is controlled
for getting better results. Also different by opening and partial closing of some
turbulence equations are used for nozzles which can be controlled by the knobs
comparison. CFD simulation can be used for in the control panel and the air flow rate and
*Author for correspondence: Email: azeem.dafedar@gmail.com 197

Abdulazeem et.al.
the pressure inside the chamber can be

monitored at the monitor.
Figure 3 Axial fan with back mount
Figure 1 Experimental Setup
Figure 2 Air Performance tester Figure 4 CAD model for simulation

dimensions
Table1 Test results with relative pressure DISCRETIZATION (GRID
value DEVELOPMENT)
Since fan has fillets and curves surfaces it is
Test
sr no speed Volume Mass Flow Pressure Torque
laborious to do the mapped meshing so the
flow rate (ῤair=1kg/m3) (Relative) (Relative) free meshing is preferred in this project.
Unit RPM m3/hr Kg/sec Pa Nm Volume meshing is created at Inlet Outlet region
1 3370 4010.35 1.2254 1 1 and MRF region. Boundary layers are created
2 3326 3737.56 1.142 3.045 1.5858 around fan blades. 4 number of boundary layers
3 3273 3431.19 1.0484 5.005 1.6462 are created around fan blade for capturing the
4 3236 3114.31 0.9516 7.04 1.71 flow.
5 3211 2791.08 0.8528 9.02 1.902
6 3100 2008.75 0.6138 13.52 2.3298
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Table 2 Boundary conditions
3D MODEL FOR SIMULATION
Exact dimensions of blade, hub and blade Inlet Outlet MRF Wall
angle is considered. Also outlet sides and fan Mass flux Pressure Rotating domain
back mount represents exact replica of test No slip
(kg/sec) 0 Pa around fan
setup. Multiple reference frame (MRF)
introduced around fan which is used as NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY
rotating domain. MRF cylinder should have
10 mm more diameter and 2 mm more The governing equations are solved in FEM
thickness on each side of the fan. MRF does based CFD AcuConsole. In this solver
not affect the actual flow around fan. The Galerkin/ Least squares (GLS) is used. This
inlet and the outlet also should be bigger solver provides fast and efficient solution for
enough to facilitate the simulation. Figures steady and transient state solution. The
show CAD geometry and actual fan model following Navier-Stokes equation is solved
by AcuConsole for solution of axial fans.
𝜕ῤ
+ ∇ (ῤu)=0
𝜕𝑡
𝑑𝑢
ῤ + ῤu. ∇u + ∇p = ∇. τ + ῤb
𝑑𝑡
198
Design and Testing of Axial Fans for Cooling Engines
Where: ῤ-density, u-velocity vector, p- introduced. This case uses SA as turbulence

pressure, τ -viscous stress tensor, b- equation.
momentum source vector. Table 3 Mesh sizes
The Spalart-Allmaras model (Spalart and Coarse mesh Fine mesh
Allmaras, 1992) involves one additional Nodes=2338960 Nodes=5379411
transport equation for the turbulent kinematic Elements=12585211 Elements=28948255
viscosity, v ̃. The (dynamic) turbulent Time=7hr13mins for 84 Time=18hr26mins for 100
viscosity is defined as time steps with 5 CPU’s ts with 5 CPU’s
u t =ῤ ῠf v1
x3
f v1= The main aim of this work is to match test
x3+ Cv13
results with CFD simulation results by
ῠ
x= changing parameters like rpm and flow rate
𝑣
and getting results in the form of pressure
The wall-damping function, fv 1 , is a damping difference at inlet and outlet. From figure6 it
factor between zero and one. At high is clear that with refinement of mesh around
Reynolds numbers the function tends to unity fan and also because of adding zone mesh at
and is equal to the kinematic turbulent downstream for SA answers are within 10%
viscosity. The viscosity affected region of the range to test results. But still for higher rpm
boundary layer must be solved, which at 3370 and 3326 answers are not acceptable.
requires a y+-value of approximately one. So for this reason SST is used for finer mesh
by keeping all other conditions same.
KW SST MODEL
Because of changing turbulence equation
The k-ω SST turbulence model, proposed by from SA to SST answers are within range of
Menter (1993), combines the stable 10% of actual test results (see figure7). From
performance of the k turbulence model in the this is understood that by SA is predicting a
free stream region with the k-ω model which flow for lower rpm and for higher rpm SA is
is characterized by the simplistic yet accurate not as accurate as SST. So to validate this
prediction of the near-wall region. These two point rpm kept constant at 3150 only mass
models are added together by a blending flux is changed and this is solved by using
function which activates the appropriate SA as turbulance equation (see graph
model in the separate regions. It also allows figure8). For rpms lower than 3250 SA is
for smooth transition between the two giving answers which are within 10% of the
models. Furthermore, performance in flows actual test results. But for rpms more than
with adverse pressure gradients and wake 3250 SA is not as accurate as SST. From this
regions are improved by limiting turbulent it is clear that for CFD analysis of axial fan
viscosity. This model proves to be reliable for this air performance tester actual
and accurate for a wide variety of flows. modelling of test setup, with proper meshing
at critical regions and selection of turbulence
SOLUTION PROCEDURE equation creates big impact on final
Actual modelling of fan is to be done by simulation answer.
considering inlet same as that of tunnel From figure6 it is clear that SA is giving
dimensions and outlet to replicate same test predicting good results except for two rpms
conditions. Also in actual case fan is tested that is at 3370 and 3326rpm. So for these two
with back mount (shroud) which is also to be cases velocity magnitudes are generated to
added in geometry. First grid independence compare the flow capture around fan in SA
study is to be done with two different types and SST. For convergence the solution is run
of mesh, coarse and fine. In finer mesh, zone for 100 iterations at 20 CPU’s for 2hrs. SST
mesh and finer mesh around fan is
199
Abdulazeem et.al.
is combination of Kw and K it is more accurate than SA. Upto certain rpm range SA
accurate for higher speeds than the SA predicts well but after that limit it is difficult
model. From following figure it is clear that to get accurate solution, so SST can be used
SA is not capturing the flow seperation which above those levels. Here pressure drop is
is occuring at the back mount, which is easily increases as mass flux is decreasing, this is
capturable by the SST. If rpm is below 3250 because of vaccum effect created by fan.
SA is predicting good flow and giving
answers within range of 10% of actual test
results.
20
Test_resul
10 ts
Pressure difference
Coarse_m
esh
Fine_mes
0 h
3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 Figure 9 Velocity magnitude comparison

-10 RPM
between SST and SA for 3326 rpm
Figure 6 Graph rpm vs pressure for finer
and coarse mesh by using SA
20
15 Error band
Pressure_difference
Test_results
10 Finemesh_SA
5 Finemesh_SST
Figure 10 Velocity magnitude comparison
0 between SST and SA for 3370 rpm
3000 3100 3200 3300 3400
-5 RPM REFERENCES
Figure 7 Graph rpm vs pressure Jain S and Deshpande Y 2009 CFD
difference for finer mesh by using SA and modelling of a Radiator Axial Fan for
SST Air Flow Distribution International
12 Journal of Mechanical, Aerospace,
10
Industrial, Mechatronic and
Manufacturing Engineering 6.
Pressure difference
8
Test_results
6 Dushyant D. Devendra Singh D. 2013 CFD
Simulation_
4 SA Analysis of Axial Flow Fans with
2
Skewed Blades International Journal of
Emerging Technology and Advanced
0
0 0.5 Mass_flux 1 1.5 Engineering 3(10).
Mohd Yusoff S Azraai S B Wan Mokhtar
Figure 8 Graph mass flux vs pressure Wan Abdullah 2009 CFD Modelling of
difference at constant rpm by using SA Air Flow Distribution from a Fan
International Conference on
CONCLUSION Applications and Design in Mechanical
The flow of axial fan around region is studied Engineering 11 – 13
numerically and through simulation. By using Tushar C A Shivprakash B 2014 Design and
AcuSolve it is easy to match test results with Analysis of Engine Cooling Fan
simulation results. Also efficiency of International Journal of Current Engg
simulation can be controlled within range of and Technology ISSN 2277 INPRESSO.
10% efficiency. From work it is clear that for
such type of applications SST is more
200
ICCMS2016
AAKALAN- A THIRD ORDER FINITE VOLUME SOLVER FOR

UNSTRUCTURED MESHES
BAPAT C. J.
Founder and Principal Developer at Aakalan India.
Abstract: Aakalan is a new numerical solver for applications that require high
accuracy. It has been designed to work with structured, unstructured or polyhedral
meshes. Aakalan maintains high accuracy of the numerical solutions by using
quadratic interpolations for spatial reconstruction of all variables and their gradients.
Numerical problems involving incompressible and compressible fluid flow and heat
transfer are solved using a segregated pressure based finite volume method.
Additionally, a series of new higher order limiters have been developed to solve
problems involving discontinuities and extremely high gradients. Aakalan can thus
become a very effective tool for engineers, designers and researchers working in
many different areas like aerodynamics, multiphase reacting flows, aero-acoustics,
electro-magnetics etc.
Keywords: Computational Fluid Dynamics; CFD; Unstructured mesh; High accuracy;
Higher order scheme; Quadratic interpolation;Higher order limiters.
INTRODUCTION eg. [Harten et al. 1987, Leer, 1979, Barth and

Most of the engineering simulations are Frederickson, 1990; Shu, 2003] among many
performed using lower order schemes others.
(second order or less). However, there is a In spite of the large amount of research in
growing realization that these schemes are developing higher order schemes, these
not able to simulate many problems in methods have not found widespread
aerodynamics, aero-acoustics, electro- acceptance in commercial CFD environment.
magnetics etc. with sufficient accuracy. It is generally believed that these methods
Therefore, there has been an increasing require a lot of computing power and
amount of interest in higher order and high memory and they do not work well with
accuracy numerical schemes over the last few meshes made up of many different types of
years. Many different kinds of high accuracy cells (hexahedra, tetrahedra, triangular
schemes have been developed over this prisms, triangles, quadrilaterals etc.). It is
period. The spectral method [Gottlieb and also believed that it is difficult to get a
Orszag, 1977] is generally considered to be converged solution using these methods.
the most accurate. Numerical methods based Aakalan was developed to address these
on finite volume, finite difference, finite problems so that the wider engineering and
element and discontinuous Galerkin research community is able to gainfully use a
techniques were also developed for structured higher order CFD solver.
and unstructured meshes by many researchers
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:chaitanya.bapat@aakalan.com 201

Bapat C.
HIGHER ORDER INTERPOLATION NUMERICAL SCHEME

Aakalan uses quadratic interpolation for Majority of the higher order schemes were
spatial reconstruction of all the variables and developed by researchers working on
their gradients. The quadratic interpolation complex problems in aerodynamics, interface
for a variable in three dimensions involves tracking, wave propagation etc. Most of these
determination of ten coefficients. These schemes use coupled solution of all the
coefficients can be easily related to the variables as a part of their solution technique.
spatial derivatives of the variable by using In general, higher order schemes require
the Taylor series expansion. Aakalan uses more memory for their operation than lower
face centered interpolations for all the order schemes. Using a coupled solution
variables. Additionally, the numerical scheme techniquefor all variables increases the
used in Aakalan (see Section 4) provides the memory requirements even further. Aakalan
solution at the centers of all the cells in a uses a segregated pressure based scheme
mesh. In order to determine the coefficients (Patankar 1980) with co-located variable
of the interpolation, approximately fourteen arrangement for the solution of balance
to fifteen cells closest to the center of the face equations. Using a segregated solution
are selected. A distance weighted least technique reduces the memory required by
squared curve fit is then used to determine the solver as compared to the coupled
the coefficients of the quadratic polynomial. solution of all variables.
Also, quadrature formulae are used to
RESULTS
determine higher order face and volume
integrals whenever they are required. This It is generally believed that a segregated
method of determining the quadratic solution method similar to the one employed
reconstruction does not depend on the type of in Aakalan does not work well for supersonic
cell or the aspect ratio of the cells the mesh. flows. The numerical solution for the flow of
air over a bump at an inlet Mach number of
HIGHER ORDER LIMITERS 1.65 is presented in Fig. 1. A grid of size 160
A higher order numerical scheme generates x 80 made of quadrilaterals was used for the
spurious oscillations and can even diverge if simulation. It can be seen that all shocks are
the solution includes sharp discontinuities or resolved pretty well. This shows that the
extremely high gradients of the variables. In segregated solution scheme and the flux
order to solve this problem, a special class of limiters used in Aakalan can effectively
mathematical functions called flux limiters capture the discontinuities in a compressible
were developed which reduce the order of the flow.
numerical scheme near a discontinuity or
high gradient region (Leer 1979). Flux
limiters reduce the order of the scheme near a
discontinuity and hence reduce the spurious
oscillations. Aakalan provides a series of six
flux limiters that can be used to get
converged solutions for problems involving Figure 1.Mach 1.65 flow over a bump.
discontinuities and high gradients. The solution for the flow of air at an inlet
Mach number of 2.0 over a 15° wedge is
shown in Fig. 2. The computational mesh is
202
AAKALAN- A Third Order Finite Volume Solver for Unstructured Meshes
made of triangles only. The solver is able to The next problem is chosen to demonstrate
resolve the shock very well. This problem the performance of the solver on a
shows that the flux limiters used in Aakalan computational mesh made of different cell
work equally well with unstructured meshes. types. Figure 4 shows contours of x-direction
velocity for flow over a sphere with Reynolds
number of one hundred. The computational
mesh used for solution of this problem is
made of triangular non-uniform prisms near
the solid boundary and non-uniform
tetrahedra away from the boundary. Some of
the cells in this mesh are highly non-
orthogonal and skewed. The drag coefficient
due to the flow around the sphere is
calculated to be 1.2 using this mesh. This
Figure 2.Mach 2.0 flow over a wedge. value is slightly higher than the
experimentally determined value of
The next problem is chosen to test the
approximately 1.0 (Munson et al. 1990).
working of the solver with high aspect ratio
However, the error in the drag coefficient can
cells. The variation of skin friction
be reduced by using a computational grid
coefficient (c f ) with Reynolds number for
R R
with higher orthogonality and lower

incompressible turbulent flow of a fluid over
skewness.
a flat plate is shown in Fig. 3. The
computational mesh is made of quadrilaterals
with a maximum aspect ratio of
approximately one thousand. The standard k-
ω model is used to model turbulence. The y+ P P
value for the first cell near the wall is

maintained at one to resolve the boundary
layer properly. The predicted variation of the
skin friction coefficient closely matches the
experimentally determined values (Kulfman
1998).
Figure 4. Contours of x-direction velocity

for Re D = 100.
R R
CONCLUSIONS
Figure 3.Variation of skin friction A new third order finite volume solver for
coefficient (c f ) with Reynolds number for
R R
generic unstructured meshes has been
turbulent flow over a flat plate. developed. All variables and gradients are
203
Bapat C.
reconstructed using a consistent quadratic Shu C W 2003 High-order finite difference

interpolation technique. A series of new and finite volume WENO schemes and
higher order flux limiters have also been discontinuous Gakerkin methods for
developed. These flux limiters can be used to CFD Int. J. Comput. Fluid Dyn.17 107-
118.
resolve sharp discontinuities correctly.
Unlike many other higher order
computational solvers, Aakalan can also
work well with non-orthogonal and skewed
meshes. Thus, Aakalan can be an effective
tool in the hands of engineers and researchers
for their high accuracy computational
requirements.
REFERENCES
Barth T and Frederickson P 1990 High-order

solution of the Euler equations on
unstructured grids using quadratic
reconstruction Proceedings of 28th
Aerospace Sciences Meeting Reno
Nevada USA January 1990 (AIAA
Paper 90-0013)
Gottlieb S and Orszag A 1977 Numerical
Analysis of Spectral Methods: Theory
and Applications SIAM Philadelphia.
Harten A Engquist B Osher S and
Chakravarthy S 1997 Uniformly high
order essentially non-oscillatory
schemes III Journal of Computational
Physics 131 2-47.
Kulfan R M 1998 Historic background on flat
plate turbulent flow skin friction and
boundary layer growth HSR Airframe
Technical Review Los Angeles
California February 1998.
Leer B V 1979 Towards the ultimate
conservative difference scheme V A
second order sequel to Godunov’s
method Journal of Computational
Physics 32 101-136.
Munson B R Young D F and Okiishi T H
1990Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics
Wiley N Y.
Patankar S V 1980 Numerical Heat Transfer
and Fluid Flow Hemisphere Publishing
Corporation USA.
204
ICCMS2016
UNSTEADY FLOW IN A RECTANGULAR LID-DRIVEN CAVITY

DALAI B. and LAHA M. K.
Mechanical Engineering, BPUT, Rourkela, Odisha, India, Aerospace Engineering, IIT Kharagpur,
WB, India
Abstract: The numerical solution for the unsteady incompressible viscous flow in a
rectangular cavity [Dalai, 2014] is obtained by solving the time dependent
incompressible Navier-Stokes equation. The stream function (ψ ) -vorticity (ω ) form of

the Navier-Stokes equation is discretised using backward in time and central in space
method [Roache, 1987] in a finite difference grid mesh. The solution at successive
grid points is advanced using Gauss-Seidel iteration techniques with relaxation
parameter. The solutions are computed up to the Reynolds number 20,000 in the
aspect ratio range 0.1 to 0.9. The flow properties are studied using stream function
and vorticity contour plots at different Reynolds numbers.
Keywords: Rectangular cavity; Aspect ratio; BTCS; Reynolds number
INTRODUCTION components along x and y-directions

respectively. The non-dimensional boundary
The rectangular cavity is a derived cavity
conditions for the Eq.(1) and (2) are:
from the lid-driven square cavity where the
aspect ratio that cavity is less than one. The ψ = u = v = 0 for x = 0,1 & 0 < y < 1;
aspect ratio of the rectangular cavity is ψ = u = v = 0 for y = 0 ; ....................(3)
defined as the ratio of the height of the cavity
and u = 1, v = 0 for y = A
to the width of the cavity. The fluid flow in
the cavity is set up due to the motion of the
Where A is the aspect ratio of the cavity. The
lid in the rightward direction.
aspect ratio A is defined as the ratio of height
FORMULATION OF THE to width of the cavity. The aspect ratio of the
cavity is taken from 0.1 to 0.9 in the interval
PROBLEM
of 0.1. Using the boundary condition Eq.(3),
The non-dimensional Navier-Stokes equation the equations for the vorticity along the
is represented by: boundary walls are computed as:
∂ω ∂ω ∂ω 1 ∂ ω ∂ ω
2 2
∂ 2ψ
+u +v =  2 + .(1)For x = 0,1 & 0 < y < A ; ω = −
∂t ∂x ∂y Re  ∂x ∂y 2  ∂x 2
and is coupled with stream function by: ∂ 2ψ
For y = 0 , A & 0 ≤ x ≤ 1; ω = − ....(4)
∂ 2ψ ∂ 2ψ ∂y 2
+ = −ω.................(2)
∂x 2 ∂y 2 The Eq.(1) and (2) are discretised using
1 second order accurate central differencing
Where Re = is the Reynolds number, ν is scheme in a finite difference mesh. The
ν vorticity and stream function value after
the kinematic viscosity of the fluid and
discretisation of Eq.(1) and (2) are:
 ∂ψ   ∂ψ 
u  =  and v  = -  are the velocity
 ∂y   ∂x 
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: banamali.2000@gmail.com 205

Dalai and Laha
ω n +1
=
(d x ) ( )
− c xij ω ijn++11 + d x + c xij ω ijn−+11 solution is obtained when
ij
1 + 2d x + 2d y ψ ij − ψ ij ≤ 10 and ω ij − ω ij ≤ 10 .
n +1 n −10 n +1 n −10
+
(d y ) ( )
− c yij ω in++11j + d y + c yij ω in−+11j + ω ijn
...(5)
First the results are obtained in the lid-
driven square cavity for validation purpose.
1 + 2d x + 2d y These results are validated with Erturk et al.
(2005). The Figure 1 shows that the
and computed u and v-velocity profiles along the
ψ ijn+1 + ψ ijn−1 ψ in+1 j + ψ in−1 j center of the cavity match very well with
+ + ω ijn Erturk et al. (2005) velocity profiles at
∆x 2
∆y 2
Reynolds numbers 1000 and 20,000. The
ψ ijn +1 = ..(6)
2 2 present result is computed using grid sizes
+ 2
∆x 2
∆y 1002x1002 whereas the Erturk et al. (2005)
result is computed in the grid sizes 601x601.
∆t ∆t
Where d x = , c x ij = , The number of grid points for the rectangular
Re ∆x 2
Re ∆y 2 cavity along x-direction is 257, 513 and 1002;
∆t ∆t and the number of grid points along y-
c xij = u ijn , c yij = v ijn and Δx and Δy are
2∆x 2∆y direction is computed by multiplying the
the grid sizes along the x and y-directions aspect ratio (A) with the corresponding grid
respectively. points along the abscissa. Using these grid
sizes, the solutions were computed up to
The vorticity value along the boundary walls maximum Reynolds number 20,000. The
are evaluated from Eq.(4) using Taylor series results have been computed for aspect ratio
expansion. The coupled Eq.(1) and (2) along range 0.1 to 0.9. The study of flow properties
with boundary conditions, Eq.(3) & (4) are includes the observation of stream function
solved using Gauss-Seidel iteration and vorticity contours in the cavity and
techniques in a single loop. The time step thorough visualization of location of main
chosen for the solution is the CFL time step. sub-eddies in the first primary eddy and
Though the discretised Eq.(1) is implicit in counter rotating primary eddy.
nature but the time step chosen for that
scheme is explicit in nature. The steady state
Figure 1(a) u-
Figure 1 (b) v-
Figure 1©u- Figure 1(d) v-
velocity, Re=1000
velocity, Re=1000.
velocity, velocity, Re=20000
Re=20000.
Figure.1 Validation of u and v-velocity profiles at Reynolds number 1000 and 20,000.
206
Unsteady Flow in A Rectangular Lid-Driven Cavity
Figure 2(a) stream function contour at Figure 2(b) Stream function contour at
Re=100. Re=20,000.
Figure 3(a) The stream function contours Figure 3(b) The stream function contours
at Re=100. at Re=5000`
Figure 4 (a) The stream function contours Figure 4(b) The stream function contours
at Re=1000. at Re=15000.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION wall of the cavity. This counter rotating

primary eddy also contains a separatrix. This
There is a thin closed structure named as
separatrix vanishes with increase of Reynolds
separatrix in the middle of the cavity of
number. At Reynolds number 20,000, the
aspect ratio 0.1 at Reynolds number 100 as
right sub-eddy become primary eddy which
shown in Figure 2(a) which contains two sub-
is located near the right vertical wall of the
eddies. With gradual increment of Reynolds
cavity as shown in Figure ure 2(b) and the
number, the right sub-eddy in the separatrix
counter rotating primary eddy becomes full
grows to bigger size and the left sub-eddy
grown primary eddy. This type of flow
diminishes gradually. At Reynolds number
patterns are continued in the cavity up to
10000, there is a development of counter
aspect ratio 0.3. This type of development of
rotating primary eddy due to merger of the
secondary eddies along the lower horizontal
207
Dalai and Laha
counter rotating primary eddy can be said as downstream corner eddies with increase of
first type. Reynolds number in a particular aspect ratio
which shows the reverse trend to that of lid-
The Figure 3(a) shows a cavity of aspect ratio
driven square cavity.
0.4 in which the primary eddy does not
contain separatrix up to Reynolds number REFERENCE
1000. At Reynolds number 1000, the counter
Jagadish B S 1977 Numerical study of
rotating primary eddy is developed due to the
transient and steady induced symmetric
growth of left corner eddy along the lower
flows in rectangular cavities Journals of
horizontal wall of the cavity. This second
Fluids Engineering 526-530.
primary eddy is located near the left vertical
wall of the cavity. This counter rotating Dalai B Laha M K 2014 Chapter 4
primary eddy does not contain separatrix and Incompressible viscous flows in two and
it becomes full grown primary eddy at three dimensional lid-driven cavity PhD
Reynolds number 5000 as shown in Figure 3 thesis, Indian Institute of Technology
(b). This type of flow patterns are continued Kharagpur.
up to aspect ratio 0.6. This type of Erturk E Corke T C and Gockol C 2005
development of counter rotating primary Numerical solutions of 2-D steady
eddy can be said as second type. incompressible driven cavity flow at
From the Figure 4(a) and (b), the separatrix is high Reynolds numbers International
totally absent in the primary eddies in the Journal of Numerical Methods in Fluids
cavity of aspect ratio 0.7. Here the counter 48 747-774
rotating primary eddy is formed due to the Roache P J 1987 Chapter 8: Semidirect
growth of the left corner eddy and the methods for nonlinear equations of
secondary eddy along the left vertical wall of fluidynamics114 - 115 in Elliptic
the cavity. The number of counter rotating Marching Methods and Domain
primary eddies become two at Reynolds Decomposition CRC Press New York
number 15000. By that time the first primary
eddy has grown to a big circular primary
eddy as shown in Figure 4(b). It is also
observed that the appearance of the number
of counter rotating primary eddy increases as
the aspect ratio of the cavity is increased up
to 0.7 and that decreases suddenly when the
cavity reaches the aspect ratio 0.8. This type
of development of counter-rotating primary
eddy can be said as third type.
CONCLUSION
From the above discussion, it is clear that
there are essentially three types of
development of counter rotating primary
eddies within the aspect ratio range 0.1 to 0.9
and their appearance in aspect ratio ranges
are: (1) 0.1-0.3 for first type, (2) 0.4-0.6 for
second type and (3) 0.7-0.9 for third type.
Their location also varies for three ranges of
aspect ratios. Another close observation will
also ensure that the growth of the upstream
corner eddies become faster than the right
208
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF THE TURBULENT AIR FLOW IN THE

NARROW CIRCULAR CHANNEL WITH CENTRE-CLEARED RIB
VORTEX GENERATOR
BHATTACHARYYA S.1*, CHATTOPADHYAY H.1, BISWAS N.2, RAKSHIT A.2, ROY A.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, West Bengal, India.
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, MCKV Institute of Engineering, Howrah, West Bengal, India
Abstract: Heat transfer behaviour in centre-cleared ribs swirl generator inserted in

circular channels are investigated numerically. This work presents the configuration
optimization of a typical centre-cleared rib in a circular tube for turbulent heat transfer
in air using computational fluid dynamics (CFD) modelling. In the present paper,
transition - SST model which can predict the change of flow regime from laminar
through intermittent to turbulent has been used for numerical simulations. The
configuration parameters include the, rib angle (α) and non-dimensional clearance
ratio (C). The computational results are in good agreement with experimental data.
The results indicate that the larger angle yields a higher heat transfer value and a
greater flow resistance of Reynolds. The computations based on the finite volume
method with the SIMPLE algorithm have been carried out with Reynolds number
ranging from 10,000 to 1,00,000. The using of centre-cleared ribs supplies
considerable increase on heat transfer and pressure drop when compared with the
literature. The Nusselt number increases with the increase of Reynolds number. This
result is useful for the design of solar thermal heaters and heat exchangers.
Keywords: Turbulent flow, forced convection, heat transfer enhancement, swirl
flow.
INTRODUCTION transition which is also viable for purely

laminar and purely turbulent flow.
Heat transfer characteristics under
transitional flow conditions in most of Three-dimensional geometry of the channel
thermal problems are of considerable interest. with centre-cleared ribs insert was used as
Predicting transition of laminar regime to computational model. At the inlet of the
turbulent in heat transfer augmentation channel, uniform velocity profile was used.
techniques will be highly useful to design any Uniform wall temperature boundary
heat transfer equipment. There is constant
condition is considered with no slip. The
thrive in the studies on transition from
laminar to turbulent flow. Abraham et al. range of Reynolds number employed is
(2009), studies the theory which is capable of 10,000 to 80,000. The governing equations
providing quantitative results for the heat are discretized on a non-uniform structured
transfer coefficients in round pipes for the grid using finite volume method and
three possible flow regimes: laminar, transition - SST model has been used from
transitional, and turbulent. The theory is Menter et al. (2002), and it predicts the
based on a model of laminar-to-turbulent
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: suvanjanr@gmail.com 209

Bhattacharyya et al.
change of flow regime from laminar through In the present investigation, at constant
intermittent to turbulent. angular ribs of Ɵ = 60⁰ with six different
centre clearances were considered, i.e. C = 0,
0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 and 0.6. The geometrical
configuration of the circular tube with centre
cleared angular ribs discussed in the present
work is shown in Figure 1. Air enters the
channel at an inlet temperature, T in of 300 K
and wall temperature, T wall of 500 K.
Uniform wall temperature boundary
condition is considered with no slip. The
range of Reynolds number employed is
Figure 1 Schematic diagram of 10,000 to 1,00,000. At inlet, a uniform profile
computational domain is used with a level of turbulent intensity of
Varun et al. (2007) reviewed the geometry of 5% even in the laminar regime following
roughness used in heat exchangers and Abraham et al. (2009).
reported the optimum geometry of roughness The governing equations are discretized on a
that is adapted in case of solar air collectors. non-uniform structured grid using finite
Hans et al. (2009) studied the basic geometry volume method and transition - SST model
of roughness element employed by various has been used which predicts the change of
researchers to enhance the thermal efficiency flow regime from laminar through intermittent
of solar air heaters. In view of the search for to turbulent. The velocities and pressures
optimal roughness pattern, few decent were predicted using semi implicit pressure
roughness geometries have been compared linked equations (SIMPLE) scheme. The
on the basis of thermo-hydraulic interpolation of the gradients of velocities
performance. Bhushan et al. (2010) presented and temperature used the third-order accurate
their attempt to classify and examine the scheme. While the gradients for intermittency
geometry of artificial roughness used in the (γ), turbulent kinetic energy, specific
ducts of solar air collectors. Chandra et al. dissipation rate, and momentum thickness
(2003) explained the thermal characteristics used second order accurate upwind scheme.
in a square channel with continuous ribs on The discretized equations are then linearized
one, two, three, and four walls and found that using an implicit scheme and solved
the heat transfer and pressure drop increase iteratively using Ansys Fluent 15, 3d double
with the rise in the number of ribbed walls. precision solver. The convergence criteria for
It is evident from the review above the continuity, momentum and energy are set at
arrangement of inclined ribs inside a circular 10-4, 10-5, and 10-7 respectively.
duct provide better mixing; this new type of
ribs with holes could provide even better RESULT AND DISCUSSION
enhanced heat transfer from the wall. The
By doing computations, the result obtained
aim of this work will be to put forth the
findings of heat transfer and thermal for heat transfer and friction factor
performance of this novel inclined ribs characteristics in the plain channel are
attachment. verified in terms of Nusselt number and
friction factor. The predicted results from the
MATHEMATICAL MODEL proposed correlations are shown in Figure 2-
210
Numerical Simulation of the Turbulent Air Flow in the Narrow Circular Channel with Centre-Cleared
Rib Vortex Generator
3. According to this figures, the present heat transfer enhancement with similar trend
results are in good agreement with the Dittus pattern in comparison with the plain channel
Bolter correlation for Nusselt number and and thus, the Nu increases with the rise of
Blasius correlation for friction factor with Reynolds number. One can see from the
tolerances of ± 1.3 % and ± 1.5%, Figure 4 that the small centre cleared ribs
respectively. shows some promising result in terms of
Nusselt number. The rib with no centre
clearance gives the best result.
Figure 2. Validation of wavy channel

model: Heat transfer as a function of
Reynolds number Figure 4. Variation of Nusselt Number with
Reynolds Number
Figure 3. Validation of wavy channel model:

Fluid friction as a function of Reynolds
number.
Figure 5. Variation of friction factor with
The present results on the heat transfer and Reynolds Number
pressure drop in a circular channel fitted with
centre cleared angular ribs, presented in It is visible in Figure 5 that the use of the
terms of Nusselt number (Nu) and friction circular channel fitted with centre cleared
factor (f) against Reynolds number as angular ribs leads to a substantial increase in
depicted in Figure 4 and Figure 5. In Figure friction factor above the plain channel and
4, the circular channel fitted with centre the friction factor shows the decreasing
cleared angular ribs yields the considerable tendency with the increment of Reynolds
number. Presence of ribs in the channel,
211
results in a swirl of the flow. The flow trough solar collector used in environmentally
blockage due to the presence of the ribs is a sound and increasingly cost effective solar
vital factor to cause a high pressure drop. The thermal electric power plants. Expecting that at
ribs nature causes a regular boundary layer higher Reynolds number the performance will
separation and re-attachment. be better also.
REFERENCES
Abraham J P Sparrow E M Tong J C K 2009
Heat transfer in all pipe flow regimes:
laminar, transitional/intermittent, and
turbulent International Journal of Heat
and Mass Transfer 52557–563.
Menter F Esch T Kubacki S 2002 Transition
modelling based on local variables
Proceediing of Fifth International
Symposium on Engineering Turbulence
Figure 6. Variation of Turbulence Modeling and Measurements Mallorca
Intensity with Reynolds number for Spain.
different centre clearance Varun S R P Singal S K 2007 A review on
Turbulent Intensity at the exit of the channel roughness geometry used in solar air
is shown in Figure 6. Turbulent dies out for heaters Solar Energy 81 1340–50.
low Reynolds number (Re = 1000) and
Hans V S Saini R P Saini J S 2009
increases with increasing Reynolds number.
At the entry of the tube the turbulent intensity Performance of artificially roughened
is given 5%. From the Figure 6, it can be seen solar air heaters—A review Renewable
that the highest level of turbulent intensity is and Sustainable Energy Reviews 13
about 15% at Reynolds number of 80,000 – 1854–1869.
1,00,000.
Bhushan B Singh R 2010 A review on
CONCLUSION methodology of artificial roughness used
in duct of solar air heaters Energy 35
The numerical friction factor and Nusselt 202–212
number data for turbulent flow through a
circular channel fitted with centre cleared ribs Chandra P R Alexander V R Han J C 2003
have been presented. The heat transfer in term Heat transfer and friction behaviour in
of Nusselt number has been evaluated. Centre rectangular channels with varying number
cleared ribs performs significantly better than of ribbed walls International Journal of
the plain channel. This research finding is Heat and Mass Transfer 46 481–495.
useful in designing tubes carrying solar
thermal air preheater mass of air in parabolic
212
ICCMS2016
COST EFFECTIVE CFD METHODOLGY TO PREDICT THEFREE

SURFACE MOVEMENT INSIDE TANK
PERIYASAMY S.*, SHINDE G., JOSHI A. and NIKAM K.
Engineering & Industrial Services, Tata Consultancy Services, Sahyadri Park, Pune, India.
Abstract: Free surface movement of fluid inside a tank has a significant impact on
the stability of an aerial vehicle and high speed automobiles. Another challenge is to
configure a tank to ensure a continuous fluid supply from tank to pickup line. Multi-
Phase Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) Simulation helps engineers in better
visualization of free surface movement of fluid inside a tank caused by the
translational/rotational motion of the vehicle and assists in designing an anti-sloshing
tank of required payload capacity. 2D and 3D Simulation of a Rectangular tank of
dimensions (175x 175x 550 mm) with translational motion has been carried out in two
different methodology Grid movement method and Body force method . Water level
considered as 50% by volume.
Establishing a cost effective CFD methodology to predict the free surface movement
is the main focus of this paper. Grid movement method requires input as transient
velocity profile as against acceleration for Body force method. Although body force
method gives some ease in numerical point of view, Grid movement method
apparently mimics translational/rotational motion of a tank as in reality. Numerical
simulation is performed using open source solver OpenFOAM® and commercial
finite volume solver ANSYS Fluent. Computed results are in good agreement with
experimental observations available in literature.
Keywords: Sloshing; Grid Movement Method; Body Force Method; Correlation;
Open Source Solvers
INTRODUCTION and water is tracked using Volume of fluid

(VOF) method. VOF method identifies the
Free surface movement of the fluid inside a
volume of fluid in a cell using a
tank in a high speed automobile or in an
characteristics function F whose value varies
aerial vehicle pose various issues such as
from 0 to 1. F=1 means water and F=0 means
supply cut off from tank to pickup line,
air. 0<F<1 means free surface.
stability of the vehicle gets affected and
hydrodynamic load acts on the tank walls. Convection equation of F is,
Tank should be configured to suppress 𝑑𝐹 𝜕𝐹
= + (𝑢. 𝛻 )𝐹 = 0 (1)
sloshing. Advancements in Computational 𝑑𝑡 𝜕𝑡
Fluid Dynamics (CFD) help in building Sloshing can be mathematically represented
models to capture the flow physics in by incompressible viscous flow with a free
complex geometries. Interface between air
*Author for Correspondence: Email: sakthivel2.p@tcs.com 213

Periyasami et al.
surface which is governed by the Navier Where u is the velocity, p the pressure, ρ the
Stokes equation and continuity equation. density, g the acceleration of gravity, Fs is
𝜕𝑢 1 body force, and µ is Viscosity of the mixture.
+ ∇. (𝑢𝑢) = − ∇𝑝
𝜕𝑡 𝜌
𝜇
+ ∇. [ (∇𝑢 + ∇𝑢𝑇 )] + 𝜌𝑔
𝜌
+ 𝐹𝑠
𝛻. 𝑢 = 0 (2)
Figure 1. Computational domain
Figure 2. Qualitative Comparison of Free surface movement
stationary tank with respect to inertial frame

SOLUTION METHODS of reference is applied as an external term to
Two different Numerical approaches are the momentum equation Eq. (2). Acceleration
carried out to capture the free surface as a function of time is the input for body
movement: Body force method and Grid force method. In Grid movement method the
movement method. VOF method by Hirt et computational grid points are moved with the
al., (1981) is used to track the interface in velocity of the tank. No slip boundary
both the methods. In Body force method the condition is applied on the tank walls in both
force subjected by the fluid inside the the methods.
214
Cost Effective CFD Methodology to Predict the Free Surface Movement Inside Tank
Mathematical point of view Body force and also validated with the experimental
method gives some ease whereas Grid results.
movement method apparently mimics the
reality. It is observed that before impact the fluid
inside the tank oscillates without any intense
SIMULATION CONDITIONS change in the centre of mass and the kinetic
energy of fluid is very minimal too. Peak
The tank is filled 50% by volume and
kinetic energy occurs at the time of impact
allowed to follow a rectilinear motion for
and extreme change in centre of mass
1.98 seconds and suddenly comes to a stop.
observed for few seconds post impact.
Please refer Khezzar et al.,(2009) for detailed
experimental procedure. The motion data To get the cost effective solution simulation
captured experimentally is shown in the is set up in Open Source solver:
Table.1. OpenFOAM®. Results from open source
simulation are also in line with the
Table 1. Operating conditions of the Tank
experimental and computational results by
Water level (%) 50 the commercial solver.
Displacement (m) x(t) = 0.407t1.89 REFERENCES

Velocity (m/s) v(t) = 0.768t0.89 Hirt C W and Nichols B D 1981 VOF
Acceleration (m/s2) a(t) = 0.68t-0.11 method for the dynamics of free
boundaries Journal of Computational
Travel time (sec) 1.98 Physics 39 398-411.
Terminal velocity(m/s) 1.41 Hou L Li F and Wu C 2012 A Numerical
Study of Liquid Sloshing in a Two-
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION dimensional Tank under External
Excitations J. Marine Sci. Appl. 11 305-
2D simulation is performed using cartesian
310.
mesh of 90x150. Results generated from the
three-dimensional simulation are also in line Khezzar L Seibi A C and Goharzadeh A 2009
with the 2D results. Time evolution of liquid Water Sloshing in Rectangular Tanks –
volume fraction inside the 2D computational An Experimental Investigation &
domain computed using different methods by Numerical Simulation International
commercial and open source solvers is shown Journal of Engineering 3 174-184.
in Fig.2 along with experimental results by Watanabe T 2011 Simulation of Sloshing
Khezzaretal.,2009. It is evident that the free behaviour using Moving Grid and Body
surface movement is captured exactly by both Force Methods International Journal of
the methods accurately. Mathematical, Computational, Physical,
Electrical and Computer Engineering 5
CONCLUSION
969-973
2D multiphase simulation to track the free
surface movement inside a rectangular tank
subjected to rectilinear motion is performed
by Body force method and Grid movement
method. Both the methods give similar result
215
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF MIXED CONVECTION IN A

COMPLICATED POROUS ENCLOSURE
CHATTOPADHYAY A.* and PANDIT S. K.
Integrated Science Education and Research Centre (ISERC), Institute of Science,Visva-Bharati,
Santiniketan, India.
Abstract: Mixed convection in a square enclosure filled with porous medium having
two wavy vertical walls is studied numerically using our recently proposed higher
order compact (HOC) scheme proposed by Pandit and Chattopadhyay (2014). The top
and bottom walls of the enclosure are allowed to move in its own plane at a constant
speed, the bottom wall is heated nonuniformly while all other walls maintained at
constant cold temperature. The relevant parameters in the present study are Darcy
number ( Da ) ( 10 −3 ≤ Da ≤ 10 −1 ), Grashof number ( Gr ) = 10 4 , Prandtl number ( Pr )
( Pr = 0.71 ) and Reynolds number ( Re ) ( 10 ≤ Re ≤ 1000 ). Three cases are considered
depending on the direction of moving horizontal walls. The objective of this study is
to examine the flow field and heat transfer inside the cavity for different cases and
different values of parameters especially Darcy numbers, Reynolds numbers. The
results show that decreasing Darcy numbers and Reynolds numbers decrease the
strength of convection.
Key words: Mixed convection; Porous medium; HOC scheme; Nonuniform
heating.
INTRODUCTION Adjlout et al. (2002) studied numerically

laminar natural convection flow in an
The study of mixed convection flow in an
inclined cavity which has a heated wavy wall.
enclosure has been rapid progress due to their
They explained that the heated wavy wall
wide application in the field of engineering
causes a decrease of heat transfer rate as
and science such as cooling of electronic
compared with the square cavity. Das and
devices, oil extraction, solar collectors,
Mahmud (2003) studied numerically free
nuclear reactors, crystal growth, etc. These
convection in a cavity which has a two
studies considered different shapes of
insulated vertical walls and a two horizontal
enclosures similar to cylindrical, rectangular,
isothermal wavy walls. They concluded that
trapezoidal and triangular. To understand the
the wavy shape of the walls affects the fluid
flow physics in the systems of crude oil
flow phenomena. Dalal and Das (2005)
production, separation processes in
investigated natural convection in an inclined
industries, geothermal reservoirs, and
right wavy wall enclosure with three flat
insulation of building etc., the convection
walls. One of the four walls was having a
motion in a complicated cavity is studied.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: animath81@rediffmail.com

216
Chattopadhyay and Pandit
sinusoidal temperature profile while for other wall is moving left. In case 3, both walls are
three walls including the wavy wall are moving in right direction. Bottom wall is
maintained at constant cold temperature. Al- heated sinusoidally with the expression
T ( x ) = [1 − cos( 2πx )]
Amiri et al. (2007) examined the momentum
and energy transport processes in a lid-driven
1
(3)
2
cavity with a wavy bottom surface. The The velocity boundary conditions are
cavity is exposed under a vertical temperature assumed to be no-slip on solid boundaries.
gradient by subjecting the bottom wall to a The fluid is assumed to be incompressible,
relatively higher temperature than the top lid. Newtonian and laminar. Here, fluid is air
with the Prandtl number 0.71.
Review of these previous studies indicates
that there are a very few studies with the The governing equations for unsteady mixed
effect of the moving walls during mixed convection flow using conservation of mass,
convection in the wavy enclosure to transport momentum and energy can be written in
of energy and momentum. The aim of the terms of non-dimensional streamfunction-
present study is to present a numerical model vorticity (ψ , ς ) formulation as follows:
to investigate the characteristics of flow and
∂ 2ψ ∂ 2ψ
thermal fields in wavy vertical surfaces with − − =ς (4)
∂X 2 ∂Y 2
horizontal moving walls. We have considered ∂ς 1 ∂ 2ς 1 ∂ 2ς ∂ς ∂ς 1
three different cases depending on the − − +u +v + ς
∂t Re ∂x 2
Re ∂y 2
∂x ∂y Re Da
direction of moving walls. The bottom wall Gr ∂T
= 2 (5)
heated sinusoidally while the other walls are Re ∂x
maintained at a constant cold temperature. ∂T 1 ∂ 2T 1 ∂ 2T ∂T ∂T
− − +u +v =0 (6 )
We have computed the results using our ∂t Re Pr ∂x 2 Re Pr ∂y 2 ∂x ∂y
recently proposed fourth order accurate The dimensionless boundary conditions are
compact scheme [Pandit and Chattopadhyay, as follows: u = 0, v = 0 and T = 0 for x = 0
2014] on nonuniform grids. and 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION u = 0, v = 0 and T = 0 for x =1 and

The physical domain under investigation is a 0 ≤ y ≤1
two-dimensional square cavity with two
1
vertical wavy walls, filled with a fluid u = 1 or (u = −1), v = 0, T= (1 − cos(2πx))
2
saturated porous medium. The left and right
for y = 0 and 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 ;
vertical wavy walls with amplitude λ are
given by (1) and (2), respectively, u = 1 or (u = −1), v = 0, and T = 0 for y = 1
f 1 ( y ) = 1 − λ + λ cos( 4π ( 1 − y )) (1) and 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 .
f 2 ( y ) = 1 − λ + λ cos( 4πy ) (2)
The bottom wall is sinusoidally heated while
the other walls maintained at a constant cold To asses the numerical accuracy of our in
temperature. Three different cases were house computer code, we have compared the
considered as shown in Figure. 1. In case 1, results of the problem described in Al-Amiri
the upper wall is moving left while the et al., (2007). The results are in good
bottom wall is moving right. In case 2, the agreement with them and the comparisions
upper wall is moving right while the bottom
217
Numerical Simulation of Mixed Convection in a Complicated Porous Enclosure
are not shown for the brevity of the Figure. 5 shows the heat transfer rates in
manuscript. terms of local Nusselt number on the bottom
wall for different Darcy numbers in all cases
Results are shown for various parameters
with Re=1000. It is observed that local heat
such as Darcy number ( Da ), Prandtl number
transfer rates increase with increases of
( Pr ), Grashof number ( Gr ) and Reynolds
Darcy number for mixed convection
number ( Re ). We have considered Da and
dominant regimes. It is also seen that due to
Re are within 10 −3 ≤ Da ≤ −10 −1 and sinusoidal temperature distribution, the local
10 ≤ Re ≤ 1000 respectively for the nusselt number curve is in sinusoidal type.
numerical simulations. The effect of Darcy
number for Pr =0.71, Re =1000 and CONCLUSIONS
Gr = 10 4 is shown in Figure. 2, Figure. 3 and Mixed convection flow within a wavy square
Figure. 4 for case-1, case-2 and case-3 enclosure filled with porous medium has
respectively. been studied in the present investigation.
Three cases are considered depending on the
In case-1, for Da = 10 −3 , as the Reynolds
direction of moving horizontal walls. The
number increases, the inner rotating cells
natural and forced convection effects are
moving more closely to the left top corner
prominent at higher Da ( Da = 10 −1 ). The
and right bottom corner which is shown by
streamline contours. With the increase in effect of mixed convection on the
Darcy number, streamlines show that the temperature distributions is further quantified
main circulation (anti-clockwise direction) by Nusselt number (Nu). The lid velocity
fills the entire cavity and minor cells effects significantly in all the cases for
(clockwise direction) visible near the middle different Darcy number and Reynolds
of wavy vertical walls of the enclosure (see numbers. It is also found that Nusselt
Figure. 2). It is noticed here that the strength numbers are quite small and having fewer
of the circulation increases as Darcy number variations with distance for low Darcy
numbers. Local heat transfer rates increase
increases. For Da = 10 −3 the value
with high Darcy number for mixed
ofψ max = 0.0254 , while for Da = 10 −1 , the convection dominant regimes. It is noted here
value ofψ max = 0.1126 , indicating more heat that in the full length paper we have
transfer within the cavity. In case-2 since the discussed more results in detail.
physical configureration is just opposite of REFERENCES
case-1, we see the mirror image of case-1
(see Figure. 3). In case-3 (see Figure. 4), we Adjlout L Imine O Azzi A and Belkadi M
observed that for all Darcy number two 2002 Laminar natural convection in an
inclined cavity with a wavy wall
symmetric circulation occur with respect to
International Journal of Heat and Mass
horizontal central line in which a clockwise Transfer 45 2141-2152.
rotating cell is induced by shear force near Al-Amiri A Khanafer K Bull J and Pop I
the upper wall and an anticlockwise rotating 2007 Effect of sinusoidal wavy bottom
cell near the bottom wall. As Da number surface on mixed convection heat
increases to Da = 10 −2 and Da = 10 −1 we see transfer in a lid-driven cavity
that, together with the symmetrical
Transfer 50 1771-1780.
circulations, two small circulations attached Dalal A and Das M 2005 Laminar natural
near the middle of right wavy wall. convection in an inclined complicated
218
Chattopadhyay and Pandit
cavity with spatially variable wall Pandit S K and Chattopadhyay A 2014

temperature International Journal of Higher order compact computations of
Heat and Mass Transfer 48 3833–3854. transient natural convection in a deep
Das P and Mahmud S 2003 Numerical cavity with porous medium.
investigation of natural convection International Journal Heat and Mass
inside a wavy enclosure International Transfer 75 624-636.
Journal of Thermal Sciences 42 397-
406.
Figure 1. Wavy enclosure configurations with boundary conditions in three

cases.
Figure 2. Case-1: Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr =0.71,
Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
Figure 3. Case-2: Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr =0.71,
Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
Figure 4. Case-3 Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr =0.71.
Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
Figure 5. Variations of local Nusselt number at bottom wall with Re =1000, Gr = 10 4 .
219
ICCMS2016
DEVELOPMENT OF BHISM FOR PERFORMANCE BASED BLAST

RESISTANT DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE (RC)
STRUCTURES
KUMAR S.1* and SHARMA H.2
1
Civil Engineering Department, NIT Meghalaya, Meghalaya, India
2
Civil Engineering Department, IIT Guwahati, Assam, India
Abstract: Terrorist attacks world-wide have demonstrated the vulnerability of critical

infrastructure to threats in the form of conventional and improvised explosives. Such
threats have mandated the development, validation, and deployment of blast and
impact resistant new construction and hardening retrofit procedures for existing
structures. The development of blast and impact resistant structure requires extensive
field testing. Reliable real-time field data are often very difficult to obtain and the
fireball associated with the explosive charge renders visual and high-speed video
viewing of failure processes virtually impossible. The central theme of this research is
to provide safeguard against blast and impact threat by creating a facility for readily
and effectively testing of structures subject to blast and impact loading. This research
tries to address the above mentioned issues by developing an indigenous Blast and
Heavy Impact Simulating Mechanism (BHISM) so that full scale blast experiments
can be performed without the use of explosive materials, and without a fireball.
Keywords: Concrete Structures; Blast Load; Improvised Explosives; Hardening
Retrofit; Fireball; Shock Tube; Bhism; Blast Wave; Shock Wave.
INTRODUCTION In order to mitigate these threats there is need

of development, validation, and deployment
Increase in terrorist activities and accidental
of blast resistant new construction and
events in recent years causes vulnerable
hardening retrofit procedures e.g.
threat to critical infrastructure (e.g. Central,
Performance – based analysis and design
State, and Local governments, Law
procedure for concrete structures subject to
enforcement, Military Installations, etc.) from
blast loading. In order to development of
the explosion as shown in Figure1.
blast resistant analysis and design
methodologies, we required high fidelity data
which should be repeatable, available in
sufficient quantities and affordable with great
safety. These data are collected by
conducting experiments using either live
Figure1: Instances of bridge collapse explosive or laboratory based blast load
(left) and building damage in India (right) simulator. Reliable real-time field data are
due to blast (Agrawal et al. 2009 and The often very difficult to obtain and the fireball
Hindu News, March 12, 1993). associated with the explosive charge renders
visual and high-speed video viewing of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:sum92anith@gmail.com

220
Kumar and Sharma
failure processes virtually impossible. In the diaphragm station coalesce to form the
order to conduct experiments frequently and shock front which propagates in to the low
tackle above situation, the design and pressure section (Anderson, 2003). As the
development of laboratory based blast shock front moves in to the low pressure
simulation without use of explosive is section, simultaneously, an expansion wave
indispensable. In order to design and propagates in the opposite direction of the
development of blast simulator there are two shock front until it reflects back from the end
methods: (a) Impact based, (b) Shock tube wall of the BHISM. This reflected expansion
based. There is limitation of impact based wave will move faster than the shock front
blast simulator, negative phase of the blast and at particular location expansion wave
wave will be not achieved but Shock tube will interact with the shock front in the driven
based blast simulator is simulating blast wave section of the BHISM. After interaction of
properly. reflected expansion wave with shock front we
will achieve similar profile as the above
This research deals with the design and
stated blast wave.
development of shock tube based blast and
heavy impact simulation mechanism
(BHISM) in laboratory condition which can
be used for the testing and validation of RC
structures and design methodologies.
BHISM: BASIC PRINCIPLE AND

BLAST WAVE SIMULATION
An explosion is a phenomenon resulting from
a sudden release, however, must be a sudden
one, happening so rapidly that there is local Figure 2: Typical Blast wave for 1000 kg
accumulation of energy at site of the of TNT and 1.5 m scaled distance
explosion. This accumulated energy is then
suddenly dissipated in various ways such as ARCHITECTURE OF BHISM
in blast waves, by propulsion of missiles, or The major challenge in developing BHISM is
perhaps by thermal or ionizing radiation testing of full scale size RC member who
(Kinney and Graham, 1985). If we neglect requires very large reference area for the test
thermal effect (Mainly considered in nuclear setup and corresponding high shock
explosion) then an explosion can be entirely overpressure ratio. This problem is handled
modeled as blast wave using basic principle in BHISM by gradual increase in cross
of shock tube. Since a shock tube creates a section of driven part up to desired reference
planar 1-dimensional wave, shock tubes can area, while kept constant cross section of
only replicate far-field blast waves, where the driver part. The test gas proposed for desired
shock front can be considered planar test condition is He (gas), N 2 (Gas), and Air.
[Kleinschmit and Feng, 2011]. The pressure – The guidelines are prepared for the use of
time history of a typical blast wave for 1000 different test gases for various requirements
kilogram of TNT explosive in air at 15˚ C of test conditions. The driven gas is Air for
and 101.325 kPa and 1.5 m scaled distance is all test gases which is always at ambient
as shown in Figure 2[Kinney and Graham, condition. The design of final geometry is
1985]. done on the basis of desired flow properties
The basic layout of a BHISM consists of two which we will get from the CFD simulation.
zones at different pressure, one is at higher The 3D view of the BHISM facility is as
and other is at lower pressure inside a rigid shown in Figure3. The driver section is6 m in
chamber and both of them are separated by total length and driven section is 8 m long of
diaphragm. On abrupt rupturing of the varying cross – section. The driver consists of
diaphragm, pressure waves emanating from 3 cylindrical tube of length 2 m each which
221
Development of BHISM for Performance Based Blast Resistant Design of Reinforced Concrete (RC)
Structures
can be used to adjust the length of driver of compressible flow. Inviscid viscous model
from 2 m to maximum up to 6 m to achieve is selected to neglect viscous dissipation in
proper Friedlander’s profile for particular current research. The boundary of shock tube
shock-over pressure. Carbon steel is selected is set as wall including end wall of the driver
for manufacturing of BHISM (This is due to section. The two zone of the shock tube is
the availability of large diameter pipe in this created using interior boundary condition.
material grade only). The cylindrical tube is End wall of the driven section is set as non-
mounted with flanges for connecting with reflecting surface in outlet boundary
each other using 32 no. of 30 mm diameter condition to make it open type shock tube
bolts. The end wall of shock tube is welded to which is requirement of BHISM. For the
circular tube and there is provision for filling tracking of transient shock wave explicit
gas in driver. The thickness of end wall is 50 formulation (four stage Runge – Kutta is
mm. The cross-section of driver is uniform of used) and AUSM flux type is selected for the
external diameter of 600 mm and thickness computation of flux vectors. For spatial
38 mm. The cross-section of driven section discretization least squares cell based
changes from 600 mm diameter circular gradient and to account convective terms 2nd
section to 3 m × 3 m square section. The order upwind scheme is selected. The CFL
material and thickness of diaphragm may number is set as 1 for the calculation of time
vary on the basis of test requirements but the step for stable solution and convergence
ultimate strength of choosen diaphram (also [Lamnaouer, 2010], (Fluent theory guide,
called bursting pressure) will never exceed release 15, 2013).
the maxium factored pressure (FOS = 3)
withstand by the wall of driver tube.
Figure 4: Mesh details of BHISM at

different location (Meshing is structured
mesh with initial size 25 mm
From CFD simulation variation of pressure
along the length of BHISM is calculated and
Figure3: 3D View of BHISM which shown in Figure 5 (for a particular time t).
consists of 2 m driver and 8 m driven These plots are used to find the maximum
section shock pressure of the shock front, which will
be maximum peak pressure of a blast wave.
NUMERICAL SIMULATION:BHISM Also, these plots are used in determining the
geometrical configuration of BHISM and
The CFD simulation of BHISM is done using
selection of driver gas. For the same at
Ansys Fluent (Finite Volume Approach) to
various position of shock front with its
determine the flow properties of BHISM and
corresponding pressure is shown in Figure 6.
subsequently used in deciding the
Simultaneously, Friedlander’s profile at
geometrical dimensions of BHISM. For the
various locations is also investigated for the
modeling of geometry and meshing design
optimal simulation of blast wave. The
modeler and ICEM CFD respectively is used.
simulated blast wave is as shown in Figure 7,
Flow simulation is carried as 2 dimensional
and Figure 8.
axisymmetric problems to reduce the
computational time. Meshing is structured
CONCLUSION
quad mesh as shown in Figure4.
The extensive field testing required is
Density based coupled solver is used to solve
achieved by developing blast load simulator.
Navier Stokes equation. Transient
Blast load simulator is developed on the basis
formulation is done for the transient behavior
222
Kumar and Sharma
of shock tube. The Blast and Heavy Impact

Simulating Mechanism (BHISM) can do full
scale blast experiments. The main feature of
BHISM is conducting blast load experiment
without use of any fireball and explosives.
Figure 8: Simulated Blast waves at the

end (i.e. 8 m from diaphragm) of BHISM
REFERENCES
Agrawal A K and Yi Z 2008 High Precision
Analysis of Blast Events on Highway
Figure 5:Variation of Pressure and shock Bridges University Transportation
front along longitudinal direction inside Research Center CCNY New York NY
BHISM after bursting of diaphragm at 10031.
time t= 5.50049 ms.
Anderson J D 2003 Modern compressible
flow with historical perspective.
McGraw – Hill New York 007 100665 6
206-213.
Ansys Fluent theory guide Release 15.0
Nov.2013 628-644
Gilbert F Kinney and Kenneth J Graham
2013 Explosive shocks in air Springer
Science & Business Media 978-3-642-
86682-1 1-17 88-106.
Figure 6: Variation of Pressure and shock Kleinschmit N and Feng R 2011 A Shock
fronts along longitudinal direction inside tube technique for blast wave simulation
BHISM after bursting of diaphragm and studies of flow structure Interactions
in shock tube blast experiments M. S.
thesis graduate school - University of
Nebraska-Lincoln 10-11.
Lamnaouer M 2010 Numerical modellig of
the shock tube flow fields before and
during ignition delay time experiments
at practical conditions Ph. D. thesis
Graduate school- University of Central
Florida Orlando and Flor 12-17.
Figure 7: Simulated Blast wave at various
location of driven section of BHISM
223
ICCMS2016
CFD SIMULATION OF STRATIFICATION/DISPERSION OF HELIUM

LAYER BY TWO HEAT SOURCES AND THEIR INTERACTION IN A
THERMALLY STRATIFIED VESSEL
GERA B.*, GANJU S. and. PATEL R. J
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Trombay, Mumbai, India
Abstract: 3D transient CFD simulations have been performed to quantify the effect
of heat sources on the distribution of a cold helium pocket in a thermally stratified
vessel using the commercial code CFD-ACE+. These tests were planned to assess the
capability of the convective flow induced by the two heat sources to eliminate a
helium pocket which could form in the lower region of the vessel made of stainless
steel. Three different heaters, installed on the vessel wall were used to heat the upper,
middle and lower part of the facility. The facility has compartments consisting of an
inner cylinder and a ring plate. The temperature of upper and middle heater was
increased linearly to 413 K while lower heater was maintained at 295 K during heat
up phase lasting about 7 hours to create thermal stratification. In the next phase, a
helium rich mixture was injected in the colder, lower region of the vessel and a
stratified helium pocket was created in the lower half of the vessel inner compartment.
In the third phase the power of two box type heaters (representing the recombiner)
placed at higher elevation was raised linearly, while injection of helium was
continued. In fourth phase helium injection was stopped and the power of box type
heaters (BTH) was linearly decreased. The fifth phase of experiment was the
evolution of stratified atmosphere. The effect of BTH on stratification/ dispersion of
helium layer has been compared with the results of no BTH.
Keywords: Recombiner; Containment; Reactor Safety; CFD.
INTRODUCTION below the PAR level, thus a rich hydrogen

A number of passive autocatalytic layer remains in the lower part of the
recombiners (PARs) are installed in water compartment and a stable stratification in the
cooled nuclear power reactor containment to containment atmosphere is created. The
mitigate the consequences of hydrogen remaining hydrogen is removed by diffusion
releases during a postulated severe accident. only and time required to remove this layer is
Hydrogen in presence of oxygen recombines quite high compared to upper layer. This
at the Platinum catalyst surface to form water phenomenon has been illustrated in the
vapour. PARs produce heat during PARIS numerical benchmark exercise. The
recombination process and create a natural results of such simulations are available in
convection loop in the upper portion from its Babić et al., (2006), Gera et al., (2011).
elevation level. This week convective loop Dedicated experiments have been planned in
does not penetrate in the hydrogen layer an experimental facility shown in figure 1 to
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:bgera@barc.gov.in 224

Gera et al.*
quantify the effect of heat source on the rich CFD MODEL

helium layer formed in the lower part. For The transient calculations were performed
these tests a stratified atmosphere has to be with CFD-ACE+, a commercial general-
set-up in the experimental facility to create purpose CFD package supplied by ESI
the initial conditions. Air/helium mixture Group. In all calculations, complete 3D
without steam is considered in this test at geometry of the test facility is modelled.
constant pressure. The pressure is kept Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model was
constant during the test by opening a vent applied. The fluid in the vessel is modelled as
line in the lower part. Three different heaters, a composition and temperature dependent
installed on the vessel wall were used to heat ideal gas mixture of its constituent
the upper, middle and lower part of the components (helium and air). The geometry
facility. The upper and middle heaters are was discretized by 472447 unstructured cells
heated-up to create a hot air cloud in the with average cell size of 0.2 m and fine mesh
upper part of the facility. Finally, the setup of near wall, injection and vent location. The
the helium pocket in the lower half of the grid used for computation has chosen
inner compartment of the experimental judiciously to make a compromise between
facility was made by slowly injecting cold accuracy and computational resource. Second
air/helium mixture through the lower central order upwind scheme in space and first order
injection device. implicit scheme in time was adopted.
The effect of heat source on the distribution Variable time steps from 0.1-1 second were
of the helium in the vessel was quantified in used. The heater section of BTH containing
these experiments. Heat source tests planned SS plates was modelled as fluid. The pressure
in the experimental facility aim to provide a loss across the plates was modelled as a sink
database on natural circulation flow and on term in momentum equation through user
the overall distribution of helium in the coding. All the solid plates have been lumped
different regions of the compartmented at heater section. Separate energy equation
volume of the experimental facility. In was solved through user coding for heat
particular, they would reveal the capability of transfer to solid plates from power supplied
the convective flow induced by the heat and from solid plates to fluid media.
source to eliminate a helium pocket which RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
could form in the lower region.
Thermal stratification was obtained by
numerical simulation as observed in
experiments. Temperature of the upper part
of outer compartment air remains high
compared to the temperature of the air in the
inner vessel. After the heating phase cold
helium was injected from the injection
located at the bottom centre of the inner
compartment for next 2 hours. In test 0 BTH
was not used and in test 1, 2 and 3two BTH
were used during injection phase after 1 hour.
The temperature contours and helium mole
Figure 1. Schematic of experimental
facility. fraction contours after helium injection phase
225
CFD Simulation Of Stratification/Dispersion Of Helium Layer Effect By Two Heat Sources And Their
Interaction In A Thermally Stratified Vessel
for all these tests are shown in figures 2 and 3

respectively.
(a). Test 0
(a). Test 0
(b). Test 1
(b). Test 1
(c). Test 2
(c). Test 2
(d). Test 3
(d). Test 3 Figure 3. Helium mole fraction at the end

of helium injection.
Figure 2. Temperature at the end of
helium injection. A helium rich mixture is formed in the lower
part of the compartment. The helium mole
226
Gera et al.*
fraction contour at the end of relaxation Due to operation of BTH some quantity of
phase for all these tests are shown in figure4. helium moves from inner compartment to
outer compartment during injection
phase.After the helium injection is stopped,
helium diffuses very fast in next phases of
experiment. In test 1, 2 and 3 BTH power
was linearly decreased in 1 hour and
relaxation phase was continued for next 2
hours.
CONCLUSION
(a). Test 0 3D transient CFD simulations were
performed to analyse the effect of two heat
source located at upper region on elimination
of helium pocket formed in lower region of
the vessel. The important conclusions from
this study is summarized here.
• The heat sources are not able to
efficiently displace the rich helium cloud
formed in lower region of a thermally
stratified vessel as the position of the heat
(b). Test 1
source is at higher elevation.
• It is required to judicially place the
PAR (simulated as heat source) to remove all
the hydrogen present in the vessel. For this,
simulations will be performed with different
locations of heat sources in future.
REFERENCES
Babic M Kljenak I and Mavko B
(c). Test 2 2006Numerical study of interaction
between npp containment atmosphere
and passive autocatalytic recombiners
Proceeding of International Conference
Nuclear Energy for New Europe
Slovenia.
Gera B Sharma P K Singh R K and Vaze K
K2011CFD analysis of passive
autocatalytic recombiner interaction
with atmosphere Kerntechnik 76 98-103
(d). Test 3
Figure 4. Helium mole fraction at the end

of experiment.
227
ICCMS2016
AN EXPERIMENTAL AND CFD BASED STUDY TO IMPROVE

THERMAL PERFORMANCE OF CAR RADIATOR USING TWISTED
AND WIRE MESH INSERTS BY VARYING MASS FLOW RATE
JAIN S. K.1, SHARMA M.2, SAINI D.2, SHARMA V.3, DADHICH M.3 and PRAJAPATI O. S.3
1
Apex Institute of Engineering and Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan, India.
2
Global Institute of Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan, India.
3
Grob Design Pvt. Ltd, Jaipur, Rajasthan, Kota, Rajasthan, India.
Abstract: A car radiator is used to perform cooling by circulating fluid in it and

dissipates the waste heat generated after the combustion process. The effectiveness of
radiator depends upon heat dissipation rate and mass flow rate. Generally the various
studies have been carried out on engine radiators focusing primarily on optimizing
their performance. The aim of present study is to improve thermal performance of car
radiator using wire mesh in its tubes. Wire mesh improves heat transfer coefficient by
increase turbulence in fluid (coolant) in inner tubes. In present study both
experimental and CFD simulation is done. In experimental setup Maruti 800 car
radiator is used. All experiments are done on water. Total three types of inserts are
applied in this study, first is simple plain insert, second is twisted insert and last is
twisted wire mesh insert. The experiment and CFD study are carried under different
mass flow rates about 0.003- 0.006 kg/s. This study deals with heat transfer co-
efficient and Nusselt number (Nu) also. The Nu is increased when twisted tap insert is
used as compare to simple tubes. The obtained results shows the increment in Nusselt
Number 48% in case of twisted insert, 39% in case of wire meshed insert as compare
to simple plain radiator tube.
Keywords: Car Radiator; Twisted and Wire Mesh Insert; CFD modelling
INTRODUCTION thermal conductivity. As a result there is a

need for new and innovative heat transfer
Car radiator cools the engine at high speed/
fluids for improving heat transfer rate in an
maximum load condition to burn it. Car
automotive car radiator. In this study heat
radiator is a heat exchanger, which cool down
transfer rate improves by using twisted and
coolant by using air movement. Lots of
wire mesh inserts. Enhance heat transfer rate
research is carried out on this device like
and decrease the size and cost of equipment
application of fins, mass flow rate of coolant,
using twisted tape inserts. The heat transfer
coolant type and many more. However,
coefficient and friction factor of 0.5%
traditional approach of increasing the cooling
volume concentration of Al2O3 nanofluid
rate by using fins and micro channel has
with twist ratio five is 33.51% and 1.096
already reached to their limit. In addition,
times respectively higher compared to flow
heat transfer fluids at air and fluid side such
of water in a tube. Thermal conductivity,
as water and ethylene glycol exhibit very low
viscosity, and density of the nanofluid
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:sheetaljain91@gmail.com 228

Jain et al.
increased with the increase of volume Where m. is the mass flow rate, Cp is the
concentrations and specific heat of nanofluid specific heat, To isoutlet temperature and Ti
was decreased with the increase of is inlet temperature of fluid
nanoparticles volume concentrations overall The average temperature inlet and outlet of
heat transfer co-efficient increases temperature of fluid for the calculation of
comparison with water up to 9%. To increase heat transfer coefficient is
the heat transfer rate using twisted tape
To +Ti
radiator dissipate the west heat generated Tbulk = (2)
2
during combustion process. Heat transfer
mechanisms are use in many industries in And heat flux is
cooling application. Q
𝑞= (3)
𝐴
EXPERIMENT SETUP
A = DL (4)
A simple line diagram is presented in figure 1
of experimental setup. The set up consist a Where A is the surface area of heat transfer
water tank, a fan and a centrifugal pump. The
water is heated by a heating rod up to50oC The heat transfer coefficient is determined by
and then centrifugal pump is used to inlet the using is
hot water in radiator. Total three type of 𝑞
ℎ= (5)
study is done by using this set-up first use Twall –Tbulk
simple radiator tubes, second insert twisted

Where Twall is the heated wall temperature.
tape in car radiator tubes, and last is using
wire mesh twists and we recorded data is The Nusselt number, Reynolds number and
water inlet, water outlet, temperature Prandtl number is calculated by following
difference etc. formula.
VDh
𝑅𝑒 = (6)

h.Dh
𝑁𝑢 = (7)
k
Cp
Pr = (8)
k
MODELING OF THE SYSTEM
The ANSYS FLUENT is used for CFD

Figure 1: Experimental setup of Car calculations to solve steady-state mass,
Radiator. momentum and energy conservation
equations. The k - ἐ turbulence model is used
EQUATIONS USED for different mass rates 0.003kg/sec,
0.004kg/sec, 0.005kg/sec and 0.006kg/sec.
The heat transfer from heated wall to fluid is
Boundary conditions are mass flow inlet,
calculated as the amount of heat which is
pressure outlet, heat convection apply on
gained by fluid is
tubes. In the CFD modelling the fluid is
described to flow through a simple plain
Q = m. CP ( To – Ti ) (1)
tubes, twisted tape and wire mesh insert. The
229
An Experimental and CFD Based Study to Improve Thermal Performance of Car Radiator using
Twisted and Wire Mesh Inserts by Varying Mass Flow Rate
inlet of the fluid flow is designed as mass insert. The Nusselt number increases as the
flow inlet to the normal direction of wall Reynolds number increases for both of fluids.
surface boundary. The mass flow rate is
varied 0.003-0.006 kg/sec at 323 K. The
outlet is described as the pressure outlet. The
heat convection applies on wall of tubes and
with the convective coefficient 70W/m2k
calculated experimentally and free stream
temperature is taken 300K.
The comparative study of heat transfer

coefficient is done for simple radiator tube, Figure3. Variation in heat transfer rate
twisted tape insert tube and wire meshed with Reynolds number
insert tube
(1).The heat transfer coefficient is found to
be maximum through twisted tape insert and
minimum through simple radiator in these
study cases.
(2).The heat transfer coefficient is found to
be maximum for water through wire mesh
insert and minimum for the water through
twisted insert in these study cases.
REFERENCES
Figure 2. Variations in Nusselt number Ahmad Azari Masoud Derakhshandeh 2015
with Reynolds number An experimental comparison of
convective heat transfer and friction
In the case of wire mesh, it is observed that
factor of Al2O3 nanofluids in an insert
the Nusselt numbers are maximum but in the
tube with and without twisted tube
case of simple flow we obtained the Nusselt
inserts Journal of the Taiwan Institute of
numbers are minimum which is shown in
Chemical Engineers 1–9.
figure 2.
Bodius Salam Sumana Biswas Shuvra Saha
From figure 3 it is observed that heat transfer
Muhammad Mostafa K Bhuiya 2013
rate is higher as compare to simple design
Heat transfer enhancement in a tube
and Re is also increased in case of wire mesh
using rectangular-cut twisted tape insert.
insert.
Procedia Engineering 56 96 -103.
CONCLUSION Changzhao Pana Yuan Zhoua Junjie
The present CFD and experiment based study Wanga2014When volume concentration
is carried out to measure heat transfer increases specific heat decreases
coefficient, heat flux for water through Computers and Chemical Engineering
simple radiator, twisted tape, wire mesh 69 59–65.
230
Jain et al.
Devendra Vashist Sunny Bhatia Ashish Kalra

2014in this study radiator dissipate the
west heat generated during combustion
process Journal of Basic and Applied
Engineering Research Print ISSN:
2350-0077 1 (3) 41-46.
Erika Y Rios-Iribe Maritza E Cervantes-
Gaxiola Eusiel Rubio-Castro Jose M
Ponce-Ortega Marcos D Gonzalez-
Llanes Cuauhtemoc Reyes-Moreno
Oscar M Hern and ez-Calderon 2015
Over all heat transfer rate increase in
case of water Applied Thermal
Engineering 84 225-236.
Gunnasegaran P N H Shuaib M F Abdul Jalal
and E Sandhita 2012 Numerical Study
of Fluid Dynamic and Heat Transfer
using twisted insert increase heat
transfer rate .International Scholarly
Research Network ISRN Mechanical
Engineering Article ID 585496.
NOTATION
Cp Specific heat of air at constant pressure
(J/kg.K)
Dh Hydraulic diameter (m)
H Heat transfer coefficient (W/m2.K)
K Thermal conductivity of air (W/m.K)
L Effective plate length for heat transfer (m)
m. Mass flow rate (kg/s)
Q Heat transfer rate (W)
Ti Inlet temperature of air (K)
To Outlet temperature of air(K)
Tatm Atmospheric temperature (K)
Tbulk Bulk temperature(K)
Vm Mean velocity (m/s)
Nu Nusselt number (-)
Re Reynolds number (-)
p Pressure drop(N/m2)
231
ICCMS2016
GPU IMPLEMENTATION OF DSMC SIMULATION USING

DSMCFOAM SOLVER
AGGARWAL S.* and BANSAL A.
Mechanical and Industrial Department, IIT Roorkee, Roorkee, India
Abstract: The Direct Simulation Monte-Carlo (DSMC) is a widely used particle-based

method to simulate gas flows in rarefied gas regime. It allows molecular movement
and collision phase to be decoupled. This gives DSMC lot of potential for
parallelization. The dsmcFoam solver already allows parallelization using domain
decomposition approach, where entire domain is decomposed into smaller domains
and each domain is assigned to a different processor. With a large number of cores
(up to 2500 cores), cell based calculations and individual particle tracking can be done
much more efficiently on a graphical Processing Unit (GPU). GPU parallelization is
implemented at the level of molecular movement and inter-molecular collisions. The
accuracy and efficiency of the new GPU implemented code is assessed with the
simulation of three-dimensional rarefied gas flow around a space crew capsule
returning into the atmosphere of Earth.
Keywords: Dsmc; Gpu; DSMCFOAM; Cuda; Parallel
INTRODUCTION open-source code, developed under GNU

The DSMC method is a particle-based general public licence. The code is based on
method for solving the Boltzmann equation Bird’s original formulation. The main
and it is widely used to simulate gas flows in features of the dsmcFoam code include:
the rarefied gas regime [Bird, 1961]. 1. Capability to perform both steady and
Computation at the molecular level is transient DSMC simulations for multi-
necessary for studies in rarefied gas dynamics species conditions
as the continuum fluid assumptions don’t 2. Model arbitrary 2D/3D geometries
apply here and so the transport terms in the using unstructured polyhedral meshes
Navier-Stokes equations are not valid in this 3. Unlimited parallel processing (using
rarefied flow regime. domain decomposition)
Direct Simulation Monte Carlo (DSMC) There are two major stages involved in
approach, originally proposed by Bird, is simulation using DSMC method at each time
undoubtedly the most successful specialised step:
computational technique, derived from a 1. Move: Move all particles in ballistic
statistical mechanical representation of the motion
behaviour of individual particles comprising 2. Collide: Collisions of particles within
the flow. cells
The software used for simulating our problem

is dsmcFoam [Scanlon et al., 2011,2010], an
*
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sagg7.ume2014@iitr.ac.in 232
Aggarwal and Bansal
Since it requires modelling of every created by NVIDIA. Since the platform is

molecule, DSMC method proves to be accessible with C/C++ language and
computationally expensive model. OpenFOAM is C++ based package, CUDA is
used in this paper for data parallelisation of
The expense can be reduced by distributing
DSMC method in dsmcFoam.
the computational process among multiple
processing units, i.e., cores. This The GPU device used for running our
parallelisation can be achieved in two ways: simulations is CUDA enabled Tesla K40cof
1. Domain decomposition Compute Capability x3.5 and 2880 stream
2. Data parallelism cores. Initially, we have exploited the
tremendous computing capabilities of the
In domain decomposition, as the name
suggests, complete simulating domain is GPU for parallelisation on the level of
decomposed into domains equal to number of molecular collisions. The parallelization at
processors assigned. dsmcFoam is capable of the level of molecular/particle movement
allowing domain decomposition and is would also be implemented.
implemented in OpenFOAM using OpenMPI
TEST CASE RESULTS
[Su C C et al., 2012]. This technique allows
unlimited parallelization as we can divide the The above implementation of Variable Hard
domain in any number of domains as per the Sphere (VHS) collision model was tested on
number of CPU cores available. However, tutorial case, simulating flow around a
the efficiency of this approach is limited by wedge. Table 1 shows time taken by collision
excessive communication overhead with model for each time step when run serially on
large number of domains and limited number a single CPU and run in parallel on a GPU
of cores available on each CPU. with 1400 cores.
As compared to CPUs, we get large number The accuracy and efficiency of the new GPU
of processing units in GPUs. GPUs are now implemented code would be assessed with
easily available in computers. Graphical the simulation of three-dimensional rarefied
Processing Unit, developed by NVIDIA gas flow around a space crew capsule
corporation, provides a large number of cores returning into the atmosphere of Earth
(up to 2500 cores). The cell based [Hollis, 2010; Shang and Chen, 2013]
calculations and individual particle tracking
can be done much more efficiently on a GPU. Table 1. Collision Model Runtime
In this paper, the GPU parallelization is GPU CPU 1
implemented at the level of molecular
movement and inter-molecular collisions. 0.006 sec (approx.) 0.07 sec
The accuracy and efficiency of the new GPU (approx.)
implemented code would be assessed with
the simulation of rarefied gas flow around a CONCLUSION
space crew capsule returning into the The test on tutorial case has given promising
atmosphere of Earth. result at initial stage. The discussed method
of implementation would reduce
CUDA IMPLEMENTATION computational expense of dsmcFoam, using
Compute Unified Device Architecture CUDA platform. This significantly reduces
(CUDA) is a parallel computing platform time taken for simulation of rarefied gas
233
GPU Implementation of DSMC Simulation Using dsmcFoam Solver
flows around a space crew capsule return

vehicle by DSMC method.
REFERENCES
Bird G A 1961 Molecular gas dynamics and
the direct simulation of gas Oxford:
Clarendon Press 1961.
Hollis B R Blunt-body Entry Vehicle
Aerothermodynamics: Transition and
Turbulence on the CEV and MSL
Configurations 40th Fluid Dynamics
Conference and Exhibit Chicago 4984
June 2010
NVIDIA CUDA C Programming Guide
Version 7.0 NVIDIA Corporation 2015.
Scanlon T and Roohi E. and White C. and
Darbandi M and Reese J 2010 An open
source, parallel DSMC code for
rarefied gas flows in arbitrary
geometries Computers & Fluids 39
2078-2089 2010
Scanlon T White C Schuebler M Brown R
and Reese J 2011 Thermochemistry
Modelling in an Open-Source DSMC
Code28th International Symposium on
Shock Waves Manchester UK July 2011
145-151
Shang Z and Chen S 3D DSMC Simulation
of Rarefied Gas Flows around a Space
Crew Capsule Using OpenFOAM Open
Journal of Applied Sciences 3 35-38
2013.
Su C C Smith M R Kuo F A Wu J S Hsieh C
W and Tseng K C 2012 Large-scale
simulations on multiple Graphics
Processing Units (GPUs) for the direct
simulation Monte Carlo method
Journal of Computational Physics
7932–7958
234
ICCMS2016
CFD SIMULATION OF HYDROGEN DISTRIBUTION IN DRY/STEAM

CONDENSING ENVIRONMENT IN KAIGA CONTAINMENT
GERA B.*, GANJU S. and PATEL R. J.
Abstract: Detailed CFD based simulations are required to be performed for assessing
the hydrogen distribution behaviour in steam condensing environment in the multiple
compartment geometry of the containment. An accurate prediction of the hydrogen
distribution behaviour is important for the management of hydrogen in the
containment under accident conditions. Hydrogen distribution studies for a reactor
containment (Kaiga) in dry air and in presence of condensing steam environment have
been performed. 3D model of Kaiga containment was used along with concrete
structural model. Parametric studies have been performed by changing the location
and orientation of hydrogen release in fuelling machine vault and its effect on
hydrogen distribution was studied in dry environment. After that CFD analysis has
been performed for hydrogen distribution in steam condensing atmosphere. Time
varying hydrogen release obtained from accident analysis code has been considered in
this analysis. Containment environment temperature, pressure and steam
concentration conditions after loss of coolant accident (LOCA) obtained from
accident analysis code has been provided as initial conditions to CFD code
FLUIDYN.
Keywords: Hydrogen Distribution; Steam Condensation; Containment; CFD.
INTRODUCTION condensation phenomenon is important from

During a severe accident in water-cooled hydrogen distribution point of view to locate
power reactors, large quantities of hydrogen the flammable region in the containment. The
can be released in steam condensing prediction of hydrogen behaviour at severe
atmosphere of nuclear reactor containment. accident conditions may help in devising
The main source of hydrogen generation is adequate accident management procedures
clad oxidation in presence of steam. The [Royl et al., 2000].
generated hydrogen got distributed in the To estimate the quantity and location of
containment and due to low density it has the suitable mitigating system, it is necessary to
potential to form high concentration have a reliable knowledge of hydrogen
hydrogen-air mixture in the containment. The distribution in the containment. The lumped
integrity of the containment could be parameter (LP) and the computational fluid
threatened due to hydrogen combustion. If dynamics (CFD) approach are being used for
composition of the hydrogen–steam–air this purpose. The LP codes are very useful
mixture lay within a certain limits, the and practical since they predict the
combustion would occur. The steam distribution in large size geometry very fast
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:bgera@barc.gov.in; 235

Gera et al.*
and model the relevant phenomenon. CFD governing equations for mass, momentum,
codes give detailed distribution, energy and species conservation and
concentration profile and derived quantities, turbulence in the fluid domain have been
but are highly time consuming and modelling solved using FVM. The species equations
various processes like spray, direct contact have been solved for individual gaseous
condensation is difficult. However efforts are species. The phase change, evaporation and
being made to model various phenomenon condensation are modelled by adding the
relevant to nuclear reactor containment in appropriate source or sink term to the species
CFD codes and to use them for detailed equations for the liquid phase and the
safety calculations [Heitsch et al., 2010, equation for the corresponding vapour. For
Prabhudharwadkar et al., 2011]. The steam modelling wall condensation, the convective
condensation model is incorporated in heat transfer coefficient is obtained by using
commercial CFD code FLUIDYN. In the Reynolds analogy formulation and the mass
present work the commercial CFD code transfer coefficient is calculated based on
FLUIDYN has been used to simulate Chilton-Colburn empirical analogy between
hydrogen distribution in dry atmosphere and heat and mass transfer. In the simulation
condensing steam atmosphere. complete 3D geometry of the Kaiga
containment is modelled. Typical
CFD MODEL containment system of Indian PHWR is
FLUIDYN-MP is a general purpose multi- depicted in figure 1. Isotropic Reynolds
physics CFD code with capability to handle averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) turbulence
single/multi-phase, multi-component, multi- models was applied. The fluid in the vessel is
fluid, transient incompressible and modelled as a composition and temperature
compressible flows with heat transfer, dependent ideal gas mixture of its constituent
turbulence, chemical reactions, free surfaces, components (hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen and
etc. It uses finite volume method (FVM) steam). The solid walls and solid internal
based fluid flow solver and finite element structures of the containment are modelled to
method (FEM) based solver for stress and take into account the effect of heat
thermal analysis of structures. The flow and conduction and heat capacity.
structural solvers are coupled by exchanging
the forces, heat flux and mesh movement at
each time step. In order to handle two phases,
specifically arising due to steam
condensation, models have been built in the
code based on homogenous equilibrium
model (HEM). The bulk condensation model
is based on the concept of thermodynamic
super saturation of the steam in gaseous
environment with an empirical relaxation
constant for incipient bulk condensation
initiation. The wall condensation is based on
wall condensation theory in conjunction with
the gas mixture transport towards the wall by
Figure 1. IPHWR containment system.
diffusive and convective modes. The
236
CFD Simulation Of Stratification/Dispersion of Helium layer effect by two heat sources and their
interaction in a Thermally Stratified Vessel
Hydrogen is released from a break in reactor were obtained from the accident analysis
header located in fuelling machine vault (FM code ASTEC have been used to define the
vault). Three different configuration and initial conditions for the simulation. The time
orientation of injection source has been varying hydrogen mass flow rate injecting
considered. Vertically upward injection from downward has been specified at the source
the bottom of the FM Vault, horizontal located in the top of FMV. The hydrogen
injection from the centre of the FMVault and mole fraction contour at vertical mid plane of
vertically downward injection from the top of Kaiga containment after 5000 seconds for
the FM Vault have been considered. The this case is shown in figure 3. The
mesh of the model is shown in figure 2.The concentration of hydrogen is high in fuelling
geometry is discretized by unstructured cells machine vault i.e. injection room.
and a constant time step was used. Second
Apart from this the performance of
order upwind scheme in space and first order
FLUIDYN has been compared with other
implicit scheme in time was adopted.
code. For this a reported case of dry
hydrogen distribution in Kaiga containment
was simulated. 4%v/v hydrogen corresponds
to free air volume of Kaiga containment was
injected from a source of size 0.5 m X 0.5 m
in 3 different configurations and orientation
in fuelling machine vault for 1200 seconds.
After that injection was stopped and
simulation was continued for next 3600
seconds. An inter-code comparison was
Figure 2. Mesh and geometry of Kaiga performed against the results reported in open
containment. literature and a good agreement was
observed.
Detailed CFD based simulations have been
performed for assessing the hydrogen
distribution behaviour in the multiple
compartment geometry of the containment.
These calculations are required to be
performed for the post-accident condensing
steam conditions prevalent in the
containment. With the augmentation in the
capability of CFD code FLUIDYN at BARC
to model condensing steam atmospheres, Figure 3. Hydrogen distribution in
hydrogen distribution studies for Kaiga condensing steam environment (H 2 Mole
containment in presence of condensing steam Fraction at 5000 s).
environment has been performed. A 3D The results of hydrogen distribution in dry
model of the Kaiga containment has been environment for the case of vertically
used. As a first step, post-LOCA temperature, downward injection from the top of the FM
pressure and steam concentration conditions Vault are shown in figure 4. The hydrogen
in various compartments of the containment layer stratifies in top of the FM Vault,
237
Gera et al.*
thehydrogen moves towards the dome region including condensation Nucl. Eng.
and stratification occurs in that region. Design 240 2176–2184
Prabhudharwadkar D M Iyer K N Mohan N
Bajaj S S Markandeya S G 2011
Simulation of hydrogen distribution in
an Indian nuclear reactor containment
NuclEng Design 241832–842
Royl P Rochholz H Breitung W Travis J R
and Necker G 2000 Analysis of steam
and hydrogen distributions with PAR
mitigation in NPP containments Nucl.
Eng. Design 202 231–248
(a). 300 s
(b). 1200 s
Figure 4. Hydrogen mole fraction

contours in dry case.
CONCLUSION
In the present study, the general purpose CFD
code has been used to study hydrogen
distribution in Indian PHWR containment in
dry and condensing steam environment. An
inter code comparison exercise was done to
evaluate the performance of FLUIDYN for
hydrogen distribution in dry environment
against other commercial code. Later
FLUIDYN has been used to simulate
hydrogen distribution with time dependent
hydrogen release in hypothetical accident
scenario in presence of steam condensation.
REFERENCES
Heitsch M Baraldi D and Wilkening H 2010
Simulation of containment jet flows
238
ICCMS2016
CFD SIMULATION AND EXPERIMENTAL VALIDATION OF A

VERTICAL INTAKE SYSTEM
SAMHITHA. C. D.* and ELDHO T. I.
Department of Civil engineering, IIT Bombay, India.
Abstract: Pump sump has its applications in many fields like thermal power plants,
lift irrigation, water supply etc. Hence the need for proper design and analysis of
pump sumps is increasing. For the efficient performance of the pumps, proper
design of pump sump is necessary as the flow entering the pump is a key factor.
Though there are many guidelines for the design of pump sumps as each system is
situation specific, appropriate model study is required. Studies are carried out on
scaled models by conducting experiments to check the design and modifications to
the intake geometry are done depending on the extent of deviations. But physical
model studies are expensive, time consuming and complex. Hence numerical
modelling of the pump sump using CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics) software
can be done to get appropriate design. In this study the numerical modelling is
carried out using ANSYS FLUENT and the results obtained are found to be in good
agreement with the experimental ones.
Keywords: Computational Fluid Dynamics; Physical Modelling; Vertical
Intake; Sump; Vortex; Numerical Investigation; FLUENT
INTRODUCTION in the Hydraulic laboratory of IIT

Bombay. The model is constructed with a
The main aim of pump sump is to provide scale ratio of 1:12 (shown in Figure1).
water with uniform velocity during the
pump operation because of abnormal flow
phenomena such as cavitation, flow
separation, pressure loss, vibration and
noise occur often by flow unsteadiness and
instability. No single set of guidelines are
available for the design of these pump
sumps. Commonly adopted guidelines are
based on HIS or BHRA.
Using numerical models, we can know the

flow complexity at various locations and
various boundary conditions can be
imposed with ease. The location of various
surface and subsurface vortices can also be
Figure 1: Experimental setup for the
predicted. [Constantinescu and Patel,
study on sump pumps
1998; Desmukh and Gehlot, 2010; Jie et
al., 2012; Pratap and Chavan, 2012]. Model parameters are obtained by
following Froudian similarity as the flow
In our present discussion, model studies
occurring in the model is open channel
are carried out by conducting experiments
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: samhitha.divya@gmail.com 239

Samhitha and Eldho
flow. The intake system consists of a For the CFD analysis of pumps the
leading channel, forebay and a sump following governing equations are used
consisting of 6 pumps. Experiments were 1. Mass Conservation Equation
carried out for the critical conditions i.e at
minimum water level for three different set 𝜕𝑝 𝜕( 𝜌𝑢𝑗 )
+ =0 (1)
of discharges at various pump operating 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑗
conditions. For each run of the experiment, 2. Momentum Conservation equation
the velocities were noted at the inlet, 𝜕 𝜕
(𝜌𝑢𝑗 )+ (𝜌𝑢 𝑗𝑢𝑖 + 𝑝𝛿𝑖𝑗 − 𝜏𝑖𝑗 ) +
transition zone, forebay and the sump 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑗
chambers to observe the flow 𝜌𝑔→ +𝐹 = 0 →
(2)
phenomenon. Flow visualization studies Where and gravitational and external body
are carried out to observe the formation of forces respectively.
surface vortices if any. Vortimeters are
installed in the pumps to know the 3. Energy conservation equation
formation of vortices in sump chambers. 𝜕𝑒 𝜕
+ (u (e+p) - u i𝜏𝑖𝑗 − 𝑞𝑗 )=0 (3)
The number of rotations made by the 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑗
vortimeter in one minute were noted down
in order to calculate the swirl angle. Where ρ is fluid density, u is flow velocity
Velocities are measured using vector field, p is pressure,𝜏𝑖𝑗 is normal
Programmable Electro Magnetic System stress, e is energy, t is time, 𝛿𝑖𝑗 is
(P-EMS) and discharge is measured using Kronecker symbol (𝛿𝑖𝑗 = 1 when i =
flow meter. Obtained velocities and swirl j,𝛿𝑖𝑗 = 0 when i ≠ j), q is heat flux.
angle are checked for acceptance criteria
according to Hydraulic Institute Standards RESULTS
(1998). If there are any deviations from the
In this section CFD results obtained from
acceptable limits, necessary modifications
ANSYS Fluent are presented. Numerical
to be made in the model like installation of
analysis is done for a static case. The aim
baffle plates, flow splitters, guide vanes,
of the analysis is to understand the flow
ramps etc to improve the flow conditions
behaviour. The results which are obtained
can be suggested.
experimentally are compared with that of
Further for the physical model discussed the numerical ones. Boundary conditions
above, a CFD model has been developed. are given as close as possible to get the
Numerical simulation is carried out using simulated results near to the experimental
FLUENT software (Hong and Jia, 2007; ones. The closeness of the results depends
Gerard and Abir, 2010; Meena et al., upon the meshing, material property. cell
2013). The 3D geometry of the model was zone and boundary conditions and local
constructed in SOLIDWORKS and the conditions which are prevailing.
model was imported to FLUENT and the Simulations are carried out for various
simulation has been carried out by operating conditions of the pumps at
imposing appropriate boundary conditions varying discharges of 15.592(2F) and
Simulation is done in steady state using 7.792 lps (1F).
𝑘−∈ model for the estimation of variables
At some points there is much variation
like velocity distribution, swirl angle and
from that of experimental results. It is
stream line patterns (shown in Figure 2).
because of various local factors in the
The velocities obtained numerically were
experimental run, which cannot be
compared with that of experimental ones
included in the software, due to the lack of
and found to be near satisfactory (shown in
options as the software packages are
Figure 3).
considering many ideal boundary
MODELLING
240
CFD Simulation and Experimental Validation of a Vertical Intake System
conditions which may differ from actual

experiments. 120
Velocity (cm/s)
100
The geometry of the flow domain is 80
constructed in solid works, meshing is 60
40
done in ANSYS workbench and post 20
processing of the results is carried out in 0
CFD post. Simulation is carried out at two 1 2 3 4 5 6
different discharges for 2F and 1F Grid points
conditions. experimental numerical
Figure 4: Comparison of velocity

profile at the entrance for 2F condition
Figure 3 and Figure 4 shows the velocity
profiles inside the sump chamber and at
the entrance of the intake.
CONCLUSION
The integrated experimental and numerical
study is useful in understanding the flow
behaviour in the forebay, sump, turbulent
conditions, satisfactory flow conditions
required for safe pump operations and
necessity of any remedial measures
Figure 2. Velocity streamlines for required for safe pump operations.
2times discharge conditions
REFERENCES
Above figure gives the velocity stream
lines for the sump intake at a discharge of Constantinescu G S and Patel V C 1998
93.55 kg/s. Velocity in this case varies Numerical model for simulation of
from 0 to 146.6 cm/sec. Maximum pump-intake flow and vortices ASCE
velocity seems to be at the entrance then it Journal of Hydraulic Engineering
decreases and gets distributed uniformly in 124(2) 123-124.
the forebay region then the velocity again Desmukh & Gehlot 2010 Simulation of
increases in the pump bay region Flow through a Pump Sump & its
Validation International Journal of
Recent Research and Applied Studies
(IJRRAS) 4(1) 164-176 July 2010.
Velocity (cm/s)
25
20 Gerard Bois and Abir Issa 2010 Numerical
15 simulation of flow field in water
10 pump sump and inlet suction pipe
5
0
25th IAHR symposium on Hydraulic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 machinery and Systems September
Grid points 2014 Timisoara Romani 272-281.
experimental numerical
Hong Xun and Jia Hong 2007 Numerical
Figure 3: Comparison of velocity simulation of 3D turbulent flow in the
profile inside sump chamber P1 for 2F multi intake sump of the pump station
Journal of hydrodynamics 19 42-47.
241
Samhitha and Eldho
Hydraulic Institute Standard (HIS) 1998

American National Standard for
Pump Intakes Design ANSI/HI 9.8.
Jie Min Zhan and Beng Chang Wang 2012
Numerical investigation of flow
patterns in different pump intake
systems Journal of Hydrodynamics
24 873-882.
Meena Vikas Ajay Bhat and Eldho T I
2013 Numerical simulation of pump
sump flow characteristics Journal of
Engineering and Technology 2(3)
Pratap K M and Chavan D S 2013 CFD
Analysis of flow in pump sump to
check suitability for better
performance of pump International
Journal of Mechanical Engineering
and Robotics 1(2) 283-300
242
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF AN AMPHIBIAN AIRCRAFT:

ESTIMATION OF HYDRODYNAMIC FORCES AND STABILITY
DURING TAKE-OFF AND LANDING
SAINI A.* and BANSAL A.
Mechanical and Industrial Engineering Department, IIT Roorkee
Abstract: In this work, CFD simulation of an Amphibian Aircraft is done, using CFD
package ANSYS Fluent 15.0. French single engine amphibian aircraft LISA Akoya is
taken as example. A three dimensional transient model with dynamic mesh feature is
used to enable movement of aircraft across space. The take-off and landing require
motion on air-water interface, hence Volume of Fluid method is used. Hydrodynamic
pressure and viscous forces on aircraft body are recorded with time during those
processes. The drag results are compared with available experimental and empirical
data. The amphibian model is made without wings for simplification. Instead their
effect is simulated using user-defined functions to simulate aerodynamic lift and drag
forces. Another objective is to test the stability during take-off and landing. Grid
independence test is performed to test the correctness of simulation.
Keywords: Seaplane, Dynamic mesh, VOF.
INTRODUCTION amphibian aircrafts are now more suitable in

carrying passengers and cargos in remote
Amphibian aircrafts, as the name suggests,
areas and adventure sports.
are specialized airplanes capable of taking off
Often Amphibian aircrafts are categorised as
and landing from and on water surface as
Floatplanes and Flying boats. Floatplanes
well as conventional runways. Modern
have floats that are interchangeable with
amphibian aircrafts can even operate on
wheeled landing gear. However in flying
snow. Their development started in 1910
boats fuselage is shaped like a ship hull.
with the invention of seaplane. In early days,
Hence its design requires the fundamental
they found extensive applications in warfare.
study of ship motion and challenges related
Notable examples like Short Sunderland,
to them. A Canamar, L Smrcek (2012) used a
Kawanishi 8HK, and Consolidated PBY
combination of both these configurations to
Catalina served in World War II. American
create a Trimaran boat hull.
amphibious aircrafts are described by E.R.
Johnson (2010). Classical British seaplanes CFD provides a very effective tool in
of the Second World War are compared in analysing fluid flow problems. A number of
terms of aerodynamic efficiency and drag by commercial CFD packages are available
A.G. Smith (1959). which provide environment to simulate fluid
flow. They provide a good alternative to
Conventional aircrafts had to take-off from
experiments which would require wind
runways far away from coast, thus amphibian
tunnels and exact replica of aircrafts models.
aircrafts saved time and fuel. Today,
For experimenting on amphibian requires a
however, due to developments in fighter jet
combination of wind and water tunnel, with
planes, whose sole purpose is warfare,
* Author for Correspondence: E-mail: abhishek.saini38892@gmail.com

243
Saini and Bansal*
capabilities to simulate waves. Experiments VOF method for tracing water surface and
require careful controlled environment and a dynamic mesh for motion of aircraft is used,
number of equipment for setup. Although VOF equations due to Thien et. al. (2015) are
initial validation of such packages is based on shown in Eq. 1, with C as volume fraction.
experiments, but once they are validated, they
can be used for every phenomenon that has
anything to do with fluid flow.
Designing an amphibian aircraft requires (1)
additional components which produces Proper value of time step and solvers are to
certain difficulties like additional drag and be selected so the solution doesn’t have
weight. Also special pilot training is required divergence and negative mesh volume errors.
to acquaint them with water surface Simulation results can be used to calculate
characteristics to make landing and take-off coefficient of drag and compare with
safe. available data.
Landing on water surface provides many
GEOMETRY
problems so these should be taken care of as
pointed by Snorri Gudmundsson (2013). 3D model of LISA Akoya aircraft is created
Excessive impact forces from water, using SOLID WORKS. Its Isometric view is
excessive water spray are some challenges shown in following Figure 1. As discussed
that appear during landing. Hence vehicle before, only fuselage part is created for
should be controllable and in hydrostatic simplification of problem. Details of tail are
stability in this process. not modelled as mostly external flow over
aircraft’s front body is to be studied.
Although take-off is comparatively easier (in
terms of stability), but it must be kept in mind Computational domain is created in ANSYS
that take-off distance should be preferably around the main body of aircraft. Whole
below 1.5 km, and vehicle must take-off domain is meshed using ANSYS Fluent
before 60 seconds. mesh in tetrahedral elements as shown in
Figure 2. Mapped meshing is avoided as it
In this work, a French aircraft LISA Akoya is
offers problems to dynamic mesh. Certain
used for simulation. Its details are briefly
aspects of dynamic mesh are to be taken care
shown in table 1. ANSYS Fluent is used as
of to prevent negative mesh volumes error.
the CFD package. Model of aircraft is created
in modelling software SOLID WORKS. To CONCLUSION
simplify the problem, only fuselage is
This work includes motion of amphibian
modelled and analysed. Wings are not
aircraft during take-off and landing and the
created, in fact, their functions like stability
forces it experiences in those conditions.
and providing lift are provided using external
Different techniques like dynamic mesh,
loads and restricting degrees of freedom.
VOF are key features in this FSI problem.
Complicated geometry features and details of
tail part are omitted for simplification.
Aircraft velocity and other features are taken
from its available data sheet.
This is quite a complex case of fluid structure
interaction as motion of aircraft through air
and water is to be traced. So care is to be
taken in choosing correct parameters during
simulation setup. Transient flow and K-ω
SST turbulence model is used.
244
Numerical Simulation of an Amphibian Aircraft: Estimation of Hydrodynamic forces and Stability during
take-Off and Landing
Figure 1. Isometric view of LISA Akoya

Figure 2. Mesh on aircraft surface
Created in SOLID WORKS
Table 1. Geometric features of LISA Akoya.
Quantity Value
(i) Max Take-off weight 650 kg
(ii) Length 7m
(iii) Wing Span 10.9 m
(iv) Height 2.9 m
(v) Max Velocity 250 km/hr
REFERENCES Mechanical Engineering and

Canamar A and Smrcek L 2012 Advance Applications 41-46.
seaplane conceptual design adapting Smith A G 1959 The Full-Scale Air Drag of
trimaran boat hull concept 28th Some Flying-Boat Seaplanes London
International Congress of the Her Majesty’s Stationary office Thien.
Aeronautical Sciences
Gudmundsson S 2013 General Aviation
Aircraft Design: Applied Methods and
Procedures Elsevier Inc.
Johnson E R 2010 American Flying boats
and Amphibious aircrafts an Illustrated
history McFarland and company Inc.
Publishers
P Q Hieu N K and Vuong P M 2015
Numerical simulation of floating
airboat: Estimation of hydrodynamic
forces International Journal of
245
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDY OF EFFECT OF DENSITY AND ASPECT RATIO

ON OSCILLATORY EXCHANGE FLOW THROUGH A CIRCULAR
OPENING IN HORIZONTAL PARTITION
SINGH R. K.1 ALAM M.2 and GERA B.3*
1
1
Department of Mechanical & Industrial Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Roorkee, India
3
Jawaharlal Nehru Centre for Advanced Scientific Research, Bangalore, India
Abstract: An interesting transport phenomenon is observed through openings

between two compartments separated by a thin, vented, horizontal partition. A heavier
fluid located on the top of a lighter fluid and separated by a horizontal vent constitutes
a gravitationally unstable system and produces flow, which are unstable with irregular
oscillatory behaviour. In the present work CFD simulations have been performed to
simulate such type of flow across a circular opening in a horizontal partition. The
effect of density ratio and opening aspect ratio on the oscillation frequency and flow
coefficient through the opening has been investigated. An in-house FVM based CFD
code was developed to solve unsteady, axisymmetric Navier-Stokes equations along
with realizable k-ε turbulence model and species transport for salt water mass
fraction. In terms of temporal differencing a second order accurate Crank-Nicolson
scheme was used. Interpolation to cell faces for the convective terms was performed
using a third order QUICK scheme and a second order central differencing was used
for the viscous terms. The upper chamber was filled with salt water and the lower
chamber with fresh water, creating a density differential between the two chambers.
The code was validated against reported experiments of this nature. The flow
coefficients and pulsation frequency have been determined. Various cases were
studied by varying the density ratio from 1.012 to 1.2 while the opening aspect ratio
was varied from 0.008-0.9. The effect of these parameters was investigated on
oscillation frequency and flow coefficient.
Keywords: Salt Water; Partition; CFD; Oscillation; Opening.
INTRODUCTION and partly from the difference in temperature.

The buoyancy driven exchange flow through Vents in horizontal partitions are important in
the large openings in horizontal partitions many situations particularly in multiple room
occurs in many practical situations. Mixing compartments and in containment buildings.
processes in large enclosures by buoyancy Flow through an opening in a horizontal
driven fluid motion through vents are partition is unstable, turbulent and bi-
important in many applications. The density directional. Several experiments and
difference between two compartments arises numerical studies have been performed to
partly due to the difference in concentration characterize such type of flow through large

Gera et al.
openings. A lot of research has been done to the water plume in the upper compartment
study this buoyancy exchange flow across the using a 2-D three beam LDV system.
opening using salt water/fresh water. It is
difficult and very expensive to do study with NUMERICAL DETAILS
a full-scale model, therefore the salt To simplify the numerical computation a
water/fresh water experiment is not only an cylindrical geometry was chosen, the
effective way but also an economical compartment diameter was evaluated so that
approach to study this mixing phenomenon. the compartment volume remains the same as
The liquid system has its advantage over a in the experiments. The simulations were
gas filled system in performing a heat carried out with a 2D axisymmetric
transfer experiment: there is no need to cover assumption. The geometry consisted of a
the test section with insulation as the density cylinder of radius (R) 0.215 m and height
driven flow is isothermal and flow 0.316 (H 2 ) and 0.265 m (H 1 ) of lower and
visualization is very easy. upper chambers respectively separated by a
In-house buoyancy modified turbulent CFD thin partition, containing a hole of diameter
code for a buoyant pulsating exchange flow (D) 0.0508 m (2 inches). A sketch of the
through a circular opening in a horizontal simplified geometric configuration used for
partition of small thickness have been used. CFD computation is shown in Figure 1.
In the present work, the effect of L/D and
∆ρ/ρhas been studied by investigating
numerically the pulsating exchange flow for
partitions of finite thickness over the range
0.008<=L/D<=0.9 and 0.012<=∆ρ/ρ<=0.2.
The flow coefficient as suggested by Epstein,
(1988) was numerically computed and
compared with the experimental results for
validation of the code. The frequency of
oscillation was determined from Figure 1. Simplified geometric
configuration for CFD computation.
instantaneous velocity at the opening
location. The axisymmetric, incompressible, unsteady
The geometry was chosen from the momentum, species, turbulence and
experimental setup of Conover et al., (1995). continuity equations were solved using in-
The setup consisted of two compartments house CFD code based on the well-
separated by horizontal partition plate was established pressure-based FVM using
made of transparent material for ease in flow SIMPLE algorithm. For modelling the
visualisation. The lower compartment was turbulence realizable k-ε model has been
0.381 m square by 0.316 m high. The upper used with standard wall function and
compartment was 0.381 m square by 0.265 buoyancy modification. Interpolation to the
high. An insertion plate with a 0.127 m cell faces for the convective terms was
diameter hole at the centre was sealed to the performed using a third-order QUICK
partition plate by an O-ring. Holes 0.0508 m scheme. Second-order central differencing
(2 inches) in diameter were served in the was used for the diffusive terms. Second-
plates of varying thickness to be used as order-accurate Crank-Nicolson scheme was
vents. Velocity measurements were made in used for the temporal differencing.
247
Numerical Study of Effect of Density and Aspect Ratio on Oscillatory Exchange Flow Through a Circular
Opening in Horizontal Partition
At time zero seconds the density of the water CONCLUSION

in the upper chamber was set to salt water Pulsation frequency increases with increase
density and that of the lower chamber was set
in ∆ρ/ρ. The effect of ∆ρ/ρ is significant on
to fresh water density. The fluid was assumed
axial velocity and pulsation frequency.
initially quiescent and therefore the velocity
components were initialized to zero. The
cylindrical wall and partition has been REFERENCES
modeled as no-slip walls. The mixture Conover T A Kumar R and Kapat J S 1995
density has been modeled as volume Buoyant pulsating exchange flow
weighted mixing law. The equations were through a vent Journal of Heat
Transfer117641-648.
iteratively solved using Gauss-Seidal method.
Epstein M 1988Buoyancy driven exchange
Initial conditions corresponding to zero
flow through small opening in
velocity were set, however the density
horizontal partitionsJournal of Heat
difference creates instability at the interface a
Transfer 110885-893.
small perturbation is required to start the
oscillating flow. The transition of the flow NOTATION
from a steady to an unsteady condition is
L thickness of the partition
automatically initiated by computer round-off
errors, and thus eliminated the need to D diameter of the opening in the partition
perturb the solution. density difference between salt water
∆ρ
and fresh water
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION ρ density of fresh water
The results were evaluated in terms of flow k turbulent kinetic energy (m2/s2)
coefficient, variation of flow coefficient with ε turbulent dissipation rate (m2/s3)
time, axial velocity at opening location and 0.15
Axial Velocity at a Point (m/s)
pulsation frequency. Numerically obtained 0.10
flow coefficient was compared with Epstein, 0.05

0.00
1988for validation exercise. To capture the
-0.05
pulsation frequency, the vertical velocity
-0.10
component was monitored at opening -0.15
0 50 100 150 200
location as a function of time and shown in Time (s)
figure 2for different ∆ρ/ρ. A random
(a). ∆ρ/ρ=0.012
oscillatory pattern was observed that consist
0.15
of various frequencies. The numerical results
0.10
showed that the flow velocities are highly
0.05
transient and unstable. The FFT analysis has 0.00
been performed to evaluate the dominant -0.05
pulsation frequency and shown in figure -0.10
3.The non-dimensional density contour in -0.15

0 50 100 150 200
Time (s)
both the compartments are shown in figure 4.
(b). ∆ρ/ρ=0.05
248
Gera et al.
0.15 20

0.10
15
0.05
Magnitude
0.00 10
-0.05 5
-0.10
0
-0.15 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
0 50 100 150 200 Frequency (Hz)
Time (s)
(d). ∆ρ/ρ=0.2
(c). ∆ρ/ρ=0.1
0.15 Figure 3. Typical FFT analysis results for
0.10 different ∆ρ/ρ.

0.05
0.00
-0.05
-0.10
-0.15
0 50 100 150 200
Time (s)
(d). ∆ρ/ρ=0.2
Figure 2. Axial velocity at the center of (a). ∆ρ/ρ=0.012
opening location for different ∆ρ/ρ.
8
6
Magnitude
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
(b). ∆ρ/ρ=0.05
Frequency (Hz)
(a). ∆ρ/ρ=0.012
15
12
Magnitude
0
(c). ∆ρ/ρ=0.1
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Frequency (Hz)
(b). ∆ρ/ρ=0.05
20
15
Magnitude
10
(d). ∆ρ/ρ=0.2
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Frequency (Hz)
Figure 4. Non-dimensional density

(c). ∆ρ/ρ=0.1
contour for different ∆ρ/ρat 200 s.
249
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL MODELLING OF LAMINAR DIFFUSION FLAMES OVER

A HYBRID UNSTRUCTURED GRID
PREETIREKHA B.1*, AMARESH D.,GADGIL H.2 and GANESH N.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Guwahati,India.
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Bombay India.
Abstract: A full conservative mathematical framework has been developed for the
numerical simulation of quasi-incompressible flows including reaction kinetics in
open domains. In the present work a low Mach number formulation has been adopted
to simulate the flow physics associated with the variation in density associated with
the gradients of temperature and species concentration. For the reaction kinetics only
single step reaction mechanism has been adopted. Discretization of the governing
equations is carried out using finite volume method (FVM) on unstructured grid. A
first order Euler implicit scheme is used for the time discretization. The spatial
discretization is carried out on a collocated grid system. To avoid the checker-board
problem of pressure distribution, momentum-interpolation technique is used. The
developed solver is used to study the flame configuration of a coflowing laminar
diffusion flame in a vertical channel. Both finite rate and infinite rate chemistry model
is incorporated in the solver and the results are compared. It has been found that the
solver is able to predict quite correctly the flow physics for this type of flow
problems.
Keywords: Finite Volume Method; Low Mach Number Flows; Laminar
Diffusion Flames.
INTRODUCTION conservation of individual species mass

The importance of energy in almost every fractions.
aspect of life cannot be understated. Since Inspite of the inherent complexity associated
ancient times the fossil fuels have provided with reacting flows, both experimental and
for the majority of our energy needs. The numerical studies have been going on since
most common method of extracting this decades. The numerical models should be
energy is through combustion. able to predict the coupled effects of
The interactions of different physical and transport phenomena with complex chemical
chemical processes make the study and processes, and at the same time it should
analysis of combustion phenomena very permit easy implementation to complex
complex. The complexity is further enhanced geometric configurations.
by the additional large systems of strongly There are many different formulations
coupled, highly nonlinear partial differential available in literature for the computation of
equations (PDEs) that describe the reacting flows. One of the most extensively
* *Author for Correspondence:E-mail: preetirekha@iitg.ernet.in

250
Preetirekha et al.
used numerical formulations is the low Mach incompressible algorithm as well and
number approximation to handle the quasi- concluded that the incompressible model
incompressible flow regime of fluid results in a much smaller flame height.
mechanics. This flow regime is generally The objective of the present work is to
encountered in situations where although develop an indigenous, in-house generalized
Ma< 0.2, the flow field cannot be assumed to 3D basic solver for the numerical study of the
be incompressible. The major difference of laminar low Mach number reacting diffusion
this near incompressible limit with that of flames. The developed solver has been
incompressible methods is that the validated against two different flame
divergence free condition of velocity field is configurations: under ventilated and over
not satisfied in the quasi-incompressible ventilated diffusion flames.
limit. This field of fluid mechanics has
immense applications in various fields, for LOW MACH NUMBER APPROACH
example, natural convection with large The inherent idea behind this approximation is to
temperature difference, combustion in energy decouple the acoustic speed from the flow
conversion devices, meteorological flows etc. velocity. This decoupling allows a substantial
The pioneering work low Mach formulation relaxation on time step constraint which is
was carried out by Paolucci (1982). limited by Courant-Friedrich-Lewy (CFL)
Following the work of Paolucci, Ru Li (2012) condition.
in his thesis work performed numerical The basic outcome is that in the zero
simulations of naturalor mixed convection for Mach number limit (Ma→0), the pressure
small or large temperature differences in field can be decomposed into two parts as
vertical channels. Pember et al. (1998) p (x, t ) = P(t ) + ∏(x, t )
(1)
presented an adaptive projection algorithm
for modelling un-steady, low-Mach reacting where 𝑃�(𝑡) is referred to as the
flow in an unconfined region using simplified thermodynamic pressure whereas π (x,t) is
kinetics. They used a model based on low called hydrodynamic pressure since it is
Mach approximations that consists of directly related to modifications of the
evolution equations coupled with a constraint velocity field. All the thermodynamic
on the divergence of the flow.Day and Bell quantities are not dependent on π. As such a
(2000) extended the work of Pember et al. new unknown (𝑃�(𝑡)) comes into the picture
and needs some special treatment for the
(1998) by introducing the use of a symmetric
numerical treatment. The divergence
operator-split approach for the simulation of constraint on the velocity field is given by:
laminar reacting flows with complex
 
∇ ⋅ (λ∇T ) + ∑ ρDk ∇Yk ⋅ ∇hk  +
1
chemistry. They reported that although ∇ ⋅u =
ρC p ,mixT  k 
variable-coefficient pressure poison equation
W 
∇ ⋅ (ρDk ∇Yk ) +
1 W 1 hk
is somewhat more expensive but it can
ρ
∑W ∑
ρ W
− ω k
C p ,mixT 
handle high density contrast supto k k k  k
(800:1).Lee et al. (2006) presented a two-  R −C  DP

(2) +  P C 
u p , mix
 Dt
distribution lattice Boltzmann equation  p , mix 
algorithm to successfully reproduces the � are density, specific heat
where ρ,C p,mix ,λ,T,𝑊
buoyant jet diffusion flame with Burke- at constant pressure, thermal conductivity,
Schumann flame sheet model. They also temperature, average molecular weight of the
compared the results by using an mixture; D k , W k ,h k and ω k are mass
251
Numerical Modelling of Laminar Diffusion Flame Over A Hybrid Unstructured Grid
diffusivity, molecular weight, total enthalpy Both the two methods of treating the
(chemical+sensible), source term for species chemical reaction rate i.e., finite rate and
k respectively. infinite rate chemistry models are tested with
the present formulation and the results are
NUMERICAL METHOD
compared. Also the capability of the
For the discretization of the governing developed solver is checked for predicting
equations, finite volume method(FVM) with the different flame configurations, i.e.,
unstructured meshes is used. The advantage underventilated and overventilated, for
of unstructured meshes is observed in laminar coflowing diffusion flames.
complex geometries where generation of
structured meshes is too complex. The ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
variables are collocated in space. The This Study is funded by a grant from DAE-
pressure-velocity decoupling has been BRNS, Government of India.
overcome by the momentum interpolation
method proposed by Rhie & Chow (1983).A REFERENCES
variable coefficient pressure-poison equation Dalal A Eswaran V and Biswas G 2008 A
is used. The discretization procedure used in Finite Volume Method for Navier-
the present work has been adopted from the Stokes Equations on Unstructured
work of Dalal et al. (2008). Meshes Numerical Heat Transfer Part
B 54 238-259
PROBLEM DEFINITION Day M and Bell J 2000Numerical simulation
For the validation of the present solver, a of laminar reacting flows with complex
coflowing methane-airlaminardiffusion flame chemistry Combustion Theory
configuration has been selected. The Modelling4 535-556
schematic of the problem is given below. Lee T Lin C and Chen L 2006)A lattice
boltzmann algorithm for calculation of
the laminar jet diffusion flame Journal
of Computational Physics215 133-152
Li R2012 Numerical simulations of natural or
mixed convection in vertical channels-
Comparisons of Level-Set numerical
schemes for the modeling of immiscible
incompressible fluid flows Ph.D Thesis
Université PARIS-EST
Pember R B Howell L H Bell J B Colella P
Crutchfield W Y Five land W A and
Figure 1. Schematic of overventilated Jesse J P 1998 An adaptive projection
laminar diffusion flame method for unsteady, low-mach number
combustion Combustion Theory
A single-step reaction mechanism with 5
Modelling 140 123-168
species has been taken for the present work.
Rhie C and Chow W 1983 Numerical study
The stoichiometric reaction for methane-air
of the turbulent flow past an airfoil with
mixture can be written as:
trailing edge separation The American
𝐶𝐶𝐻𝐻4 + 2(𝑂𝑂2 + 3.76𝑁𝑁2 ) Institute of Aeronautics and
→ 𝐶𝐶𝑂𝑂2 + 2𝐻𝐻2 𝑂𝑂 + 7.52𝑁𝑁2 Astronautics21 1525-1532
252
ICCMS2016
THERMAL COMFORT ANALYSIS OF A ROOM USING RADIANT

COOLING SYSTEM: A CFD BASED STUDY
SHARMA N. K.*, GUNJAN G., DHAKARA M., CHOUDHARY M., GUPTA N., and GUPTA P. K.
Abstract: A perfect level of thermal comfort is crucial parameter for the building
designing and environment. Natural ventilation is the best phenomena for obtain the
perfect level of thermal comfort in buildings. This Research presents the results of a
Computation Fluid Dynamic (CFD) study of 3 D room model of straight pipe radiant
cooling system which has installed in Jaipur, Rajasthan. The dimension of radiant
cooling system is vertical height; width and length are 500mm, 500mm, 700mm
respectively. In this system, piping system having 1-inch diameter pipes. An attempt
has been made to study the effect of different mass flow rates varies between 0.07
kg/s to 0.10 kg/s, different position like as upper, middle, bottom of piping system
into the ceiling part and examine the effect of water and nano fluid with different
volume fraction 0.3%, 0.6%, 1%.
Keywords: CFD; Nano Fluid; Volume Fraction; Radiant cooling system.
INTRODUCTION Khan]. Proper maintenances and control of

radiant cooling systems gives the optimum
In the present scenario, an energy-efficient
thermal comfort conditions and in order to
come up for building air-conditioning is very
take full advantage of their specific features
necessary. In the fast developing the building
[Simos 2013]. Radiant cooling system is
industries, radiant cooling systems is the
more popular because of high thermal
growing and innovative process. Radiant
comfort level, reduced energy consumption,
cooling system reduces 40 to 45% electrical
quiet operation, and space saving [Kyu-Nam
consumption as compared to other air-
Rhee 2015]. Heat and Moisture transport
conditioning systems. For improving indoor
model is used to solves heat and moisture
thermal comfort and energy efficiency using
transfer within the porous building walls and
radiant cooling system in the sub-tropical
a radiation model is used to solve which
region of Taiwan [Tiberiu 2009]. Radiosity
determines the radiative heat exchange
method was used to calculate the mean
between the surfaces for radiant cooling
radiant temperature for different positions
system [Saba 2012]. Relation between
along different axes of radiant cooling system
temperature non-uniformity coefficient and
[Wei-Hwa 2012]. Main supply jet properties
temperature of coldinlet water, water
and draft risk create problem into occupied
velocity, pipe diameter was negatively
zone which affect the cooling capacity of
correlated and with tube spacing positively
radiant cooling system. [Corgnati 2009].In
and linearly correlated [Dong 2016].
order to Comparison between conventional
and radiant cooling system, radiant cooling DESCRIPRATION OF THE MODEL
system 17.5% more efficient than a
conventional air system and 30%savings was Figure. 1 show that system of 3 D room cad
achieved by using a radiant cooling system model of radiant cooling with piping system
compared with a conventional system [Yasin at top place. A glass window is providing at
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sharmanaveenajmer@gmail.com 253

Naveen et al.*
south direction, radiation enter through different position lower, middle, upper
window and create a temperature difference. respectively. Assume that wall of room is
In the CFD study, assume that ceiling is made by concrete material. Table 1 resumes
made by gypsum power and piping system the fluid properties that can be used into CFD
can be assembling into ceiling section with study.
Figure 1. Ceiling zone for different piping system location

Table 1. Fluid Properties
the final meshing process results composing
Nano fluid Nano fluid Nano fluid
with 0.03% with 0.06% with 0.1%
Fluid Properties Water
volume volume volume
faction faction faction
Density (Kg/m3) 998.2 1006.31 1014.14 1025.22
Specific Heat (J/kg k) 4187 4145.58 4109.74 4062.03
Thermal Conductivity (W/m k) 0.6 0.6069 0.6138 0.6231
Viscosity (Kg/ m s) 0.001003 0.00101 0.00102 0.00103
CFDMODELING FOR RADIANT of 807064 cells. Discretization Parameters
like aselement quality, aspect ratio, skewness,
COOLING orthogonal quality is 0.88, 1.03,0.10, and
The CFD model boundary conditions were 0.97 respectively. Following predominant
provided by the literature review of the propositionis using for solution: the
radiant cooling model. Temperature of cold diffusionterms are second-order central-
water which is flowing into copper tube is differenced, and the first-order upwind
equal to 287 k at inlet with different mass scheme for convective terms is used toreduce
flow rate like as 0.07 kg/s, 0.08 kg/s, 0.09 the numerical diffusion. The velocity–
kg/s, 0.10 kg/s. Assume that temperature of pressure coupling method is the SIMPLE
room is 300 K. Radiant Cooling model algorithms.
simulate for true blue summer plan RESULTS OF CFD MODEL
conditions. For mesh using the workbench
14.5 pre-processor and the discredited the3D
room domain into finite volume of control
sets. The cell contains triangular elements,
254
Thermal comfort analysis of a room using radiant cooling system: A CFD based study
increase the room temperature and 0.08 kg/s

is the optimum mass flow rate at which
maximum cooling occur. Increase the volume
percentage of nano fluid like as 0.03%,
0.06%, 0.1%, increase the maximum
temperature at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate, In
case of 0.1% nano fluid case, maximum
cooling temperature occur which is 294.61 k
at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.
Figure 2 Variation of temperature with
mass flow rate at ceiling zone- lower
piping system
Figure. 2 shows the variation of room
temperature with mass flow rate at ceiling
zone- lower piping system. Increase the mass
flow rate, first decrease the room temperature
than increase the mass flow rate, increase the
room temperature and 0.08 kg/s is the
optimum mass flow rate at which maximum
mass flow rate at ceiling zone- upper
cooling occur. Increase the volume
piping system
percentage of nano fluid like as 0.03%,
Figure. 4 shows the variation of room temperature
0.06%, 0.1%, increase the maximum
with mass flow rate at ceiling zone- upper piping
temperature at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate, in
system. Increase the mass flow rate, first decrease
case of 0.1% nano fluid case, maximum
the room temperature than increase the mass flow
cooling temperature occur which is 294.46 k
rate, increase the room temperature and 0.08 kg/s
at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.
is the optimum mass flow rate at which maximum
cooling occur. Increase the volume percentage of
nano fluid like as 0.03%, 0.06%, 0.1%, increase
the maximum temperature at 0.08 kg/s mass flow
rate, In case of 0.1% nano fluid case, maximum
cooling temperature occur which is 295.11 k at
0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.

mass flow rate at ceiling zone- middle
piping system
Figure. 3 shows the variation of room
temperature with mass flow rate at ceiling
zone- middle piping system. Increase the
mass flow rate, first decrease the room Figure 5 Variation of cooling capacity
temperature than increase the mass flow rate, with mass flow rate at ceiling zone
255
Naveen et al.*
Figure. 5 shows the variation of room office for subtropical region Building
temperature with mass flow rate at ceiling and Environment 48
zone for different piping system like as Corgnati S P Perino M Fracastoro G V
lower, middle, upper. In case of 0.1% nano Nielsen P V 2009 Experimental and
fluid is maximum cooling capacity at 0.08 numerical analysis of airand radiant
kg/s mass flow rate for ceiling zone- lower cooling systems in offices Building and
piping Environment 44 801–806.
Dong Xie Yun Wang Hanqing Wang
CONCLUSION Shunquan MoMaili Liao 2016
This paper showed the result of CFD study Numerical analysis of temperature non-
for radiant cooling system. Radiant cooling uniformity and cooling capacity for
system is the efficient way of cooling in capillary ceiling radiant cooling panel,
building industries. The results yield the Renewable Energy871154-1161.
following conclusions: Khan Y R Khare R Mathu J Bhandari M
 In the case of ceiling zone- lower Performance Evaluation of Radiant
piping system, nano fluid with 0.1% Cooling System Integrated with Air
volume fraction gives the maximum System under Different Operational
cooling temperature which is 294.46 Strategies S03787788(15)00239-X.
K at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.
Kyu-Nam R K Woo K 2015 A 50 year
 In the case of ceiling zone- middle
review of basic and applied research in
piping system, nano fluid with 0.1%
radiant heating and cooling systems for
volume fraction gives the maximum
the built environment Building and
cooling temperature which is 294.61
Environment 1-25.
K at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate.
 In the case of ceiling zone- upper Saba S Peter M Thijs D Dominique D Jan C
piping system, nano fluid with 0.1% 2012 Coupled CFD radiation and porous
volume fraction gives the maximum media transport model for evaluating
cooling temperature which is 295.11 evaporative cooling in an urban
K at 0.08 kg/s mass flow rate. environment J. Wind Eng. Ind. Aerodyn
 Cooling Capacity of radiant cooling 104–106 455–463.
system is maximum in case of lower Simos O Agis M Papadopoulos 2013
piping system with 0.1% volume Performance of radiant cooling surfaces
fractionnano fluid gives the maximum with respect to energy consumption and
cooling temperature at 0.08 kg/s mass thermal comfort Energy and Buildings
flow rate. 57 199–209.
REFERENCE
Catalina T Virgone J Kuznik F 2009
Evaluation of thermal comfort using
combined CFD and experimentation
study in a test room equipped with a
cooling ceiling Building and
Environment 44 1740–1750.
Chiang W H Wang C Y Huang J S 2012
Evaluation of cooling ceiling and
mechanical ventilation systems on
thermal comfort using CFD study in an
256
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF NATURAL CONVECTION IN A WAVY POROUS

ENCLOSURE IN PRESENCE OF MAGNETIC FIELD
SARKAR C.*¹, PANDIT S. K.² and DALAL D. C.³
¹˒³Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Assam India.
²Integrated Science Education and Research Centre (ISERC), Institute of Science, Visva-Bharati,
Santiniketan, India.
Abstract: A numerical investigation has been performed to study natural convection

in a square cavity filled with fluid saturated porous media with both vertical
sinusoidal wavy walls in presence of magnetic field. The modeled equations are two-
dimensional (2D) unsteady Navier–Stokes (N–S) equations representing
incompressible viscous flows. We have used streamfunction-vorticity formulation of
Brinkman-extended Darcy model to simulate the momentum transfer in the porous
medium. The bottom wall is heated nonuniformly while all other walls maintained at
constant cold temperature. Effects of the parameters of Darcy number ( Da )
( 10 −4 ≤ Da ≤ 10 −1 ), Prandtl number ( Pr = 0.71, 10 ), Rayleigh number
( Ra = 10 3 , 10 5 ) and Hartmann number ( Ha =1,10,70) are discussed in this study.
Keywords: Natural convection; Porous medium; Magnetic field.
INTRODUCTION (2003) studied numerically free convection in

a cavity which has a two insulated vertical
The past few decades have witnessed the walls and a two horizontal isothermal wavy
study of fluid flow and heat transfer problem walls. They reported that the amplitude-
in the irregular surfaces as these surfaces are wavelength ratio affected local heat transfer
encountered in many engineering rate, but this does not influence significantly
applications such as flat-plate solar on average heat transfer rate. Dalal and Das
collectors, flat-plate condensers in (2005) studied numerically natural
refrigerators, underground cable systems, convection in a vertical wavy wall cavity
cooling system of micro-electronic devices, heated from below. Their results reported that
etc. Moreover, in the nuclear components local heat transfer rate and flow field as well
and cooling of electrical machinery as thermal field are affected by the presence
roughened surfaces could be used. It is of undulation in the right wall. The free
worthwhile mentioning that natural convection inside a cavity made of two
convection inside a wavy enclosure was vertical wavy walls and filled with a fluid-
carried out in most of the previous studies in saturated porous medium was numerically
the absence of porous medium. In addition, investigated by Misirlioglu et al. (2005) using
most of the previous studies considered the Darcy model. Their results showed that the
enclosure containing only one vertical wavy flow and thermal structures was found to be
wall. Adjlout et al. (2002) studied highly dependent on surface waviness.
numerically laminar natural convection flow Khanafer et al. (2009) numerically
in an inclined cavity which has a heated wavy investigated the natural convection heat
wall. They showed that the heated wavy wall transfer inside a porous enclosure with a
affects heat transfer rate. Das and Mahmud sinusoidal vertical wavy wall. Apart from
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail : c.sarkar@iitg.ernet.in 257

Sarkar et al.
these studies, it is noted here that the study of where the nondimensional parameter
electrically conducting fluid flow has many Pr, Da , Ra , Ha are the Prandtl number,
applications in magnetohydrodynamic Darcy number, Rayleigh number and
(MHD) generators, plasma studies, nuclear Hartman number respectively. u, v are the
reactors, geothermal energy extraction, velocity components along x − and
boundary layer control in aerodynamic. y − direction respectively, and T is the
Raptis et al. (1982) have analysed
temperature.
hydromagnetic free convection flow through
a porous medium between two parallel plates. The dimensionless boundary conditions are:
Chamkha (2000) has considered MHD free
u = 0, v = 0 , T = 0 for x = 0 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
convection flow from a vertical plate
embedded in a thermally stratified porous
u = 0, v = 0 , T = 0 for x = 1 and 0 ≤ y ≤ 1
medium with Hall effects.
The aim of the present study is to investigate u = 0, v = 0, T = sin( 2πx ) for y=0 and
the characteristics of flow and thermal fields 0 ≤ x ≤1
in a square enclosure with wavy vertical
walls having fluid saturated porous medium u = 0, v = 0, T = 0 for y = 1 and 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 .
in presence of magnetic fields.
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION
The investigated domain is a two dimensional
square cavity with wavy walls on both the
left and right sides. We have used
transformation technique to find the grid
structure shown in Figure. 1. The left and
right vertical wavy walls with amplitude 0.05
are given by (1) and (2), respectively, Figure1. (a) Schematic diagram of
the cavity and boundary conditions (b)
f 1 ( y ) = 1 − 0.05(1 − cos(4π (1 − y )) (1)
Mesh structure.
f 2 ( y ) = 1 − 0.05(1 − cos(4πy ) ) (2)
The fluid considered here is Newtonian,
The governing equations representing the 2D incompressible, electrically conducting and
unsteady incompressible viscous fluid flows laminar in the enclosure filled with a porous
and heat transfer are Navier-Stokes (N-S) medium. All the walls are maintained with
equations which in nondimensional constant cold temperature except the bottom
streamfunction-vorticity (ψ − ζ ) formulation wall which is heated sinusoidally. A
of the conservation of mass, momentum and magnetic field has been applied in the
energy as follows: perpendicular direction of the domain.
 ∂ 2ψ ∂ 2ψ  NUMERICAL RESULTS AND

−  +  =ζ (3)
 ∂x
2
∂y 2  DISCUSSIONS
∂ζ ∂ 2ζ ∂ 2ζ ∂ζ ∂ζ Pr
− Pr − Pr +u +v + ζ We have presented our results for various
∂t ∂x 2
∂y 2 ∂x ∂y Da
nondimensional parameters. In order to obtain
∂T ∂u
= Ra Pr + Ha 2 Pr ( 4) grid independent solutions for the problem
∂x ∂y described in this work, a grid refinement
∂T ∂ 2T ∂ 2T ∂T ∂T study has been performed on three grid sizes
− − +u +v =0 (5)
∂t ∂x 2
∂y 2 ∂x ∂y 31 x 31, 61 x 61 and 121 x 121 though the
results are not shown due to brevity of the
manuscript. In Figure. 2, Figure. 3 and Figure.
258
Study of Natural Convection in a Wavy Porous Enclosure in Presence of Magnetic Field
4, we have shown streamline contours for attached to the left wall. Again at Da=0.1 this
Darcy numbers 0.0001, 0.001 and 0.1. It is secondary left wall vortex breaks down into
seen that for a fixed Rayleigh number (Ra) two different size vortices. It is also seen that
=1000, as Darcy number (Da) increases the keeping fixed Ra at 100000, as Hartman
centre of the primary vortex moves upwards number (Ha) increases to 70, the left wall
and the size of the secondary vortices at the vortex remains attached to the left wall
bottom left and right corners decreases while without breaking down into several vortices
the size of the vortices at the top left and right but the size of this vortex increases.
corner increases. It is interesting to note that In Figure. 5, Figure. 6 and Figure. 7, we have
as Ra increases say for Ra=100000 at lower presented the corresponding isotherm
Da (=0.0001), the size of the secondary vortex contours. It is seen that for Ra=1000, there is
at the bottom right corner decreases and the no such significant variations in the isotherm
size of the vortex at the bottom left corner contours for increasing Da numbers but there
increases. At Da=0.001, the bottom left and is a significant change in isotherm contours
the top left secondary vortices coalesce to for higher Ra=100000 and higher Ha.
form a bigger secondary vortex in size
z
Figure 2.Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=1000,
Figure 3.Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=1.
Figure 4.Streamline contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=70.
259
Sarkar et al.
Figure 5 contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=1000, Ha=1.
Figure 6.Isotherm contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=1.
Figure 7.Isotherm contours for various Darcy numbers with Pr=0.71, Ra=100000, Ha=70.
CONCLUSION of Numerical Methods for Heat and

Fluid Flow 10 142-162.
Natural convection flow within a wavy square
Dalal A and Das M 2005 Laminar natural
enclosure filled with porous medium in
convection in an inclined complicated
presence of magnetic field has been studied.
cavity with spatially variable wall
Effects of the parameters of Darcy number,
temperature International Journal of
Prandtl number, Rayleigh number and
Heat and Mass Transfer 48 3833–3854.
Hartmann number are studied.
Das P and Mahmud S 2003 Numerical
REFERENCES investigation of natural convection inside
a wavy enclosure International Journal
A Misirlioglu A C Baytas I Pop 2005 Free of Thermal Sciences 42 397- 406.
convection in a wavy cavity filled with a
porous medium International Journal of Khanafer K Al-Azmi B Marafie A and Pop I
Heat and Mass Transfer 48 1840–1850. 2009 Non-Darcian Effects on natural
convection heat transfer in a wavy
Adjlout L Imine O Azzi A and Belkadi M porous enclosure International Journal
(2002) Laminar natural convection in an of Heat and Mass Transfer 52 1887-
inclined cavity with a wavy wall, 1896.
Transfer 45 2141-2152. Raptis A Massias C and Tzivanidis G 1982
Hydromagnetic free convection flow
Chamkha A J 2000 Non-similar solutions for through a porous medium between two
heat and mass transfer by hydro- parallel plates Physics Letters A 90 288-
magnetic mixed convection flow over a 289.
plate in porous media with surface
suction or injection International Journal
260
ICCMS2016
VORTEX STRUCTURE OF INCOMPRESSIBLE VISCOUS FLOWS IN A

LID(S) DRIVEN CAVITY WITH WAVY WALL
KARMAKAR H.* and PANDIT S. K.
Integrated Science Education and Research Centre (ISERC), Institute of Science and Visva-Bharati,
Santiniketan India.
Abstract: A numerical study is performed to analyze flow phenomena in a double lid-

driven cavity with different orientations of the walls except wavy bottom wall. We
have used extension of our recently proposed [Pandit and Karmakar, 2015] biharmonic
formulation in streamfunction on nonuniform grids for computing incompressible
viscous flows governed by Navier-Stokes (N-S) equations. We have considered four
different cases depending on the movement of the walls. We have presented
streamfunction contours for Reynolds number ( Re ) ( 100  Re  1000 ).
Key words: Incompressible Unsteady Viscous Flows; Non-Uniform Grid; Lid-

Driven Problem.
INTRODUCTION which the differences are taken resulting in a

formula involving a 9-point compact stencil.
The governing equations of two-dimensional To the best of authors knowledge the non-
incompressible, viscous, unsteady fluid facing, parallel and anti-parallel lid driven
flows in stream function-vorticity cavity flows with wavy bottom wall is the
formulation can be written as: first one to consider in this investigation.
(1) The aim of the present study is to get a
numerical model to investigate the
(2)
characteristics of the laminar flow in a
where is the Reynolds number and cavity with non-facing, parallel and anti
u  v are the velocity components along x- parallel wall motion. We have computed the
and y- directions respectively and the stream numerical results in the computational
function ( ) is related with the plane (    ) using extended form of our
velocity component as recently proposed second order accurate 5-
(3) point compact scheme [Pandit and
Karmakar, 2015] on non-uniform grids
and the vorticity  ( x , y ,t ) is defined by [Pandit et. al., 2007].
 v u 
   . The Problem: The physical domain
 x y  considered here, is a two-dimensional square
By substituting equation (1) in equation (2), cavity with wavy bottom wall. Four different
we have a semilinear biharmonic equation in cases are considered as shown in Fig. 1. In
streamfunction . The stream function- cas-1, the top wall is moving towards right.
velocity or the purely stream function In case-2, the top wall moves towards right
formulation based methodology for the while left wall moves downwards. Case-3
solution of the 2D incompressible fluid consists with the antiparallel motion of the
flows has been carried out by Stephenson et vertical walls. In case-4, we have considered
al. (1984), Ben-Artzi et al. (2005) and Pandit parallel motion of the vertical walls. In all
(2008) for solving Navier-Stokes equations. the cases the moving walls are having the
These schemes utilize grid points located same nondimensional uniform velocity (=1).
only directly adjacent to the node about
____________________________________
*Author for Correspondence E-mail: 1987hemanta@gmail.com 261

Karmakar and Pandi
The bottom wavy wall with amplitude  CONCLUSION
and undulation d is given by
In this paper we have studied numerically
(4)
fluid flows within a cavity with wavy
RESULT AND DISCUSSION bottom wall. We have used fourth order
To assess the numerical accuracy of our semilinear differential equation in
computed solutions, firstly we have streamfunction. Four cases are considered
validated our in house code with Ghia et. al depending on the direction of moving
(1984) with zero undulation presented in horizontal and vertical walls. It is seen that
Fig. 2 for horizontal velocity along vertical the vortex formation strongly affected by the
centerline and vertical velocity along different lid motions.
horizontal centerline. It is seen that our REFERENCE
results matches nicely with their results.
Ben-Artzi M Croisille J P Fishelov D and
The flow characteristics in the cavity are
Trachtenberg S 2005 A pure-compact
examined by exploring Reynolds number scheme for the stream function
effects with Re =100, 400 and 1000, formulation of Navier-Stokes equations
undulation number 3, and amplitude of the J. Comput. Phys. 205 640-664.
wavy bottom surface 0.05. The streamline Ghia U Ghia K N and Shin C T 1982 High
contours in Fig. 3 shows that the primary Re-solution for incompressible Navier-
vortex occupies almost the entire cavity. Stokes equation and a multigrid
With the increase in Re , several secondary method J. Comput. Phys. 48 387-411.
vortices appear along the bottom wall and Pandit S K 2008 On the use of compact
the center of the primary vortex tends to streamfunction-velocity formulation of
move to the geometric centre of the cavity. steady Navier-Stokes equations on
In case-2 for movement of the non facing geometries beyond rectangular J. Sci.
Comput. 36 219-242.
walls, the flow structure (see Fig. 4) reveals
that for each Re the centre of the vortex is at Pandit S K and Karmakar H 2015 An
the geometric centre of the cavity and efficient implicit compact stream
function velocity formulation of two
interestingly there is no formation of the
dimensional flows J. Scientific
secondary vortices at the bottom left and Computing DOI: 10.1007/s10915-015-
right corner of the cavity while at Re =1000, 0154-9.
one small vortex is attached to the top wall of
Pandit S K Kalita J C and Dalal D C 2007 A
the cavity. Fig. 5 in case-3 for anti parallel transient higher order compact scheme
vertical wall motion shows that a large for incompressible viscous flows on
vortex is attached to the left wall while with geometries beyond rectangular J.
the increase in Re , the size of the secondary Comput. Phys. 225 1100-1124.
bottom wall decreases and the primary Stephenson J W 1984 Single cell
vortex increases in size. The streamline discretizations of order two and four
contours for case-4 in Fig. 6 for parallel lid for biharmonic problems J. Comput.
motion shows that two symmetric vortices Phys. 55 65-80.
exist in the flow domain. With the increase
in Re , it is seen that two small symmetric
vortices attached to the top wall.
______________________________________________________________________________
262
Vortex Structure of Incompressible Viscous Flows in A Lid(S) Driven Cavity with Wavy Wall
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the cavity with boundary conditions for different orientations
of the walls.
.
(a) (b)
Figure 2. (a) Horizontal velocity profile (b) vertical velocity profile for undulation zero.
Figure 3. Case-1, Streamlines contour for undulation three for Re number 100 – 1000.
263
Karmakar and Pandi
Figure 4. Case-2, Streamlines contour for undulation three for Re number 100 –
1000.
1000
1000.
264
ICCMS2016
OPTIMIZATION OF SIMPLE AIR DUCT HEAT EXCHANGER BY

PERFORATED PLATES: A CFD BASED STUDY
MITTAL S.1, SHARMA V.3, SHARMA V.1, JAIN S. K.2, DADHICH M.3, and JANGID A. K.4
1
Global Institute of Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan India.
2
Apex Institute of Engineering and Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan India.
3
Grob Design Pvt. Ltd, Jaipur, Rajasthan India.
4
Poornima College of Engineering, Jaipur India.
Abstract: The air heat exchangers are widely used device in industries to save the
energy by improving performance. The finned tube heat exchangers are important
because of the direct impact of fluid on energy. In the present research, experiments
were designed to study the optimization of simple duct type air heater by applying
perforated plate structure in it for various designs and therefore we employ three basic
designs that are experimentally investigated and results are also compared with simple
duct type air heat exchanger. The first design is simple duct, second design in single
hole perforated plate, third design is double hole perforated plate. The results are
investigated for two and three number of perforated plates for single hole and double
hole. All the designs are installed in two or three parallel installation combinations.
Like inclined installation in duct type heat exchanger which are not investigated in
experimental work are also solved using CFD modelling tool. The energy input to the
heat exchanger was taken from the sun and the practical application of this type of
device is also known as solar air heater. The results show that the heat transfer of
perforated plate air heat exchangers are found more 10-15% as compare to simple
duct type air heater. The major problem of applying perforated plate structure in cross
section in path of air movement is pressure drop but this problem is resolved by
considering design parameters like hole diameter, gap between hole and others.
Keywords: Perforated plates; CFD; Heat Exchanger
INTRODUCTION flow duct is the effective method for good air

Solar Air Heaters has many engineering flow and the reduction of dead zones in
applications such as in space heating system, collector. The thermal efficiency is generally
in agriculture drying devices, etc. [Esen increased by increasing the mass flow rate of
Hikmet 2008]. The efficiency of SAH is air. The efficiency of SAH is affected by
generally low due to low heat transfer many factors viz. Dimension of collector,
coefficient between absorbing plate and the type of absorber plate, glass cover plate, etc.
flowing air. Therefore, perforated plates are On increasing the shape area of absorber
used to increase the heat transfer coefficient, plate, heat transfer rate increases but due to
which minimizes the heat losses to the this pressure drop also increases and the
environment. The use of obstacles in the air required power consumption will also
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shubhamsm03@gmail.com 265

Mittal et al.
increase [Esen H 2008]. Roughness and solar The analysis is performed on five designs, the
insulation are the two important parameters first design is simple duct, second design in
on which the point of maximum effective single hole perforated plate, third design is
efficiency depends. Several configurations of double hole perforated plate. The results are
SAHs have been developed in literature. investigated for two and three number of
Various designs, with different shapes and perforated plates for single hole and double
dimensions of the air flow passage in plate hole. The diameter of hole for single hole
type solar air collectors have been tested perforated plate and double hole perforated
[Hachemi 1995,Yeh HM 1999]. The thermal plates are 25mm and 20mm respectively. The
performance of SAH is increased by different absorber plate and perforated plate is made of
pitch of 90o broken wire rib roughness [Sahu aluminium having dimensions 1000mm x
MM 2005]. The use of fins and corrugated 500mm and 500mm x 100mm respectively as
surface inside the channel increases the shown in figure 1 and 2. The glass is
convective heat transfer rate by increasing the mounted on the perforated plate solar air
heat transfer area and turbulence [Youcif-Ali heater to absorb solar radiation.
2006,Wenxian L 2006]. The maximum
thermo hydraulic efficiency of the Double MODELING EQUATIONS
pass V-corrugated plate solar air heater is
The heat transferred from heated absorber
17.4% higher than that of the Double pass
plate to air is calculated as the amount of heat
finned plate solar air heater [A.A. El-Sebaii
which is gained by air that is
2011].The natural convection inside the
channel formed by a flat cover and a Q = m. Cp( To – Ti )
.
Where m is the mass flow rate, Cp is the
wavelike absorbing plate was numerically
specific heat of air, T o isoutlet temperature
simulated [Gao WF 1996].
and T i is inlet temperature of air.
SIMULATION MODEL The bulk temperature of air for the
calculation of heat transfer coefficient is
To + Ti
Tbulk =
2
The heat transfer coefficient is determined by
using
𝑄
ℎ=
A(Tap – Tbulk )
Where T ap is absorber plate temperature,
Figure 1. Layout of simulation model
T bulk is bulk temperature and A is total
convective heat transfer area.
The Reynolds number and Nusselt number is
calculated by using
ρVm Dh
𝑅𝑒 =
µ
h. Dh
𝑁𝑢 =
k
Figure 2.Different Simulation model of where D h is hydraulic diameter, V m is mean
solar air heater velocity of air, ρ is density of air, µ is
266
Optimization of Simple airDuct Heat Exchanger by Perforated Plates: A CFD based study
dynamic viscosity and k is thermal The Reynolds numbers are found in the range
conductivity of air. The calculation of friction of 7000 to 14000 for air that shows the
factor is turbulent flow. The Nusselt numbers for all
2Dh ∆p the configurations are found in the range of
𝑓=
ρ(Vm )2 L 170 to 315 as shown in figure 3. Where S,
2p1h, 2p2h, 3p1h and 3p2h shows the Simple
Where ∆p is the pressure drop along the tube
duct case, 2 perforated plates with 1 hole, 2
length and V m is the average velocity of the
perforated plates with 2 hole, 3 perforated
fluid in the tube.
plates with 1 hole and 3 perforated plates
CFD ROLE AND OBSERVATIONS with 2 holes respectively.
The commercial software ANSYS FLUENT

is used for three dimensional calculation of
effective heat transfer coefficient for the
different perforated plate models of solar air
heater using computational fluid dynamics
(CFD). The results are observed by solving
the state mass, momentum and energy
equation. In this study the whole domain of
solar air heater with perforated plates are
Figure 3. Variation in Nusselt numbers
discredited into 1000000 to 1500000
with Reynolds numbers
numbers of elements and 90000-97000
numbers of nodes with higher relevance
centre. In this CFD modeling the fluid is
allowed to flow through a simple duct, two
and three number of perforated plates for
single hole and double holes. The inlet is
considered as mass flow rates, which vary
from 0.04 to 0.07 kg/s in a normal direction
to the boundary at the ambient temperature
(300K). The outlet is described as the
Figure4. Variation in heat transfer
pressure outlet. The perforated plates and the
coefficient with Reynolds numbers
absorber plate have to be made at coupled
contact region so that there is no mass The maximum heat is transferred to the air in
interaction takes place. The fluid is allowed the case of 3 perforated plates with 2 holes
to flow through perforated plate solar air and minimum for the simple duct air heater
heater(PPSAH) for 7 hours. as shown in figure 4.
The results show that the Reynolds number The outlet temperature of air decreases as the
increases as mass flow rate increases from Reynolds number increases because of the
0.04 kg/s to 0.07 kg/s due to increase in the increment in mass flow rate.The friction
mean velocity. factor continuously decreases as the
Reynolds number increases as shown in
The Nusselt numbers are found maximum in
figure 5 due to pressure drop.
the case of 3 perforated plates with 2 holes
and minimum for the simple solar air heater.
267
Mittal et al.
Gao W F 1996 Analysis and performance of

a solar air-heater with cross-corrugated
absorber and back-plate,M.Sc. Thesis,
Yunnan Normal University, China.
Hachemi 1995 A Thermal performance
enhancement of solar air heaters, by fan-
-blown absorber plate with rectangular
fins. International Journalof Energy
Resources 19(7) 567–578.
Figure 5. Variation in friction factor with Sahu M M Bhagoria J L 2005 Augmentation
Reynolds numbers of heat transfer coefficient by using
90_broken transverse ribs on absorber
plate of solar air heaterRenewable
CONCLUSION
Energy 30(13)2057–2073.
The present CFD based study is carried out to Wenxian L Wenfeng G Tao L 2006 A
measure heat transfer coefficient and friction parametric study on the thermal
factor through simple air duct and perforated performance of cross-corrugated solar
plate air duct heat exchanger. It is found that air collectorsApplied Thermal
the Nusselt number increases as the Reynolds Engineering 26 1043-1053.
number increases. Yeh H M Ho CD Hou JZ 1999 The
- The heat transfer coefficient is found to be improvement of collector efficiency in
solar air heaters by simultaneously air
maximum for 3 perforated plates with 2
flow over and under the absorbing plate.
holesand minimum for the simple duct heat Energy 24(10)857–871.
exchanger.
Youcif-Ali S Desmons J Y 2006 Numerical
- The friction factor is found maximum for
and experimental study of a solar
the 3 perforated plates with 2 holes as equipped with offset rectangular plate
compare to all design configurations. fin absorber plate. Renewable
Energy312063-2075.
REFERENCES
El-Sebaii A A Aboul-Enein S I Ramadan M NOMENCLATURE
R Shalaby S M Moharram B M 2011 Cp Specific heat of air (J/kg.K)
Thermal performance investigation of Dh Hydraulic diameter (m)
double pass-finned plate solar air heater F Friction factor
Energy 36 1076-1086. H Heat transfer coefficient (W/m2.K)
K Thermal conductivity of air (W/m.K)
Esen H 2008 Experimental energy and L Effective plate length for heat transfer
energy analysis of a double-flow solar (m)
air heater having different obstacles on m. Mass flow rate (kg/s)
absorber plates Building and Q Heat transfer rate (W)
Environment 43(6)1046–5104. Ti Inlet temperature of air (K)
To Outlet temperature of air(K)
Esen H 2008 Experimental energy and T bulk Bulk temperature(K)
exergy analysis of a double-flow solar Vm Mean velocity (m/s)
air heater having different obstacles on Nu Nusselt number (-)
absorber plates Building and Re Reynolds number (-)
Environment 43 1046–1054. ∆p Pressure drop(N/m2)
268
ICCMS2016
ADPI CALCULATION FOR THERMAL COMFORT IN OPERATION

THEATRE WITH ANGULAR DIFFUSER
1 3
RAHATE S D. *, WAGHMARE S. A.2 and DESHMUKH P. D.
1
LTCoE, Navi Mumbai; 2V.J.T.I., Mumbai; 3 DMCE, Navi Mumbai, India.
Abstract: This paper describes the computational fluid dynamics (CFD) analysis of
Operation Theatre (OT) with inlet angular diffuser which is the major requirement
of heat ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) in medical applications. Angular
diffuser system gives laminar airflow, uniform temperature and velocity distribution
throughout the critical zone of OT. The air velocity, temperature with air diffusion
performance index (ADPI) values are determined by testing 7 angular diffuser
systems with same inlet air condition and the room geometry. The inlet air and
room environment conditions follow ASHRAE and NABH standards. It was
observed that angular diffuser provides better cooling and flow distribution
throughout OT with desired ADPI value for human comfort. Angular diffuser with
different angles shows different ADPI values with and without overhead lamp but in
acceptable range. Best angle for diffuser is selected on the basis of distribution of
temperature, velocity and corresponding ADPI values.
Keywords: Air diffusion performance index; Computational fluid dynamics;
Angular diffuser; Operation theatre.
INTRODUCTION mainly intended to benefit to patient

HVAC system has wide range of application operation theatre is heart of any hospital.
in biomedical sector especially in operation As per NABH, the standard OT size is (20 x
theatre, because it is directly related to 20 x 10) ft. The height of OT is considered
patient and surgeon health. The growth of below the false ceiling level. Standard
patient health is depending on the indoor occupancy of 5-8 people at any given point
condition around the patient and in hospital. of time inside the OT is considered.
This indoor condition is maintained by In this paper angular air distribution system
proper air distribution system. Operation is designed by considering the ASHRAE
theatre required effective ventilation system and NABH standard to maintain even
suitable for air condition specified in HVAC cooling and reduced the bacteria dispersion
standards. The selection and designing of air by laminar air flow. The main objective of
distribution system for operation theatre is this research is to design the OT and supply
depend on many factors such as room angular air diffuser in such way that there
interior, heat load, inlet and outlet location, must be laminar airflow, even cooling and
humidity, velocity, temperature to achieved human comfort in critical zone by
thermal comfort and bacteria free maintaining indoor air quality. The detail
environment in OT room. Designing the study includes computational fluid
operation theatre is major exercise and is dynamics (CFD) simulation of designed air
__________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: swati.rahate363@gmail.com 269

Rahate et. al
flow pattern and comparison to get the best maintaining the above requirements. The
value of flow angle and analytical Air conditioned air is discharge from ceiling and
Diffusion Performance Index (ADPI) reached to surgical bed (Figure 2). The
approach for human comfort in terms of laminar airflow can be maintained by its
temperature and velocity in critical zone. inlet low velocity but it gets disturbed by
obstacles and is converted in turbulent.
In designed OT the inlet velocity is given as
In OT the most important requirement is to 0.4 m/s and outlet considered as zero
maintain the health of patient and surgeons. pressure gradient. These inlet condition
The highly bacteria contaminated space in formed positive pressure inside the
OT is above surgical site since this it is operation room. Velocity plots of 7 OT and
usually close to contaminated source like flat diffuser are given in following figures.
patient, surgical instruments etc. as shown
in figure 1.
Figure 3. Velocity plot for OT with flat

diffuser with lamp.
Figure 1. Critical zone in operation
theatre
Figure 4. Velocity plot for OT with 45o

angular diffuser with lamp
Figure 2. Layout of OT with inlet diffuser

angle
The primary requirement in OT design is to
maintain the air quality in critical zone. Air
quality included air temperature, relative
humidity and air velocity. The temperature
and airflow pattern in critical zone should
be 22oC and laminar airflow respectively. Figure 5. Turbulence energy plot for
The critical zone should be bacteria free by OT with flat diffuser with lamp
270
ADPI Calculation for Thermal Comfort in Operation Theatre with Angular Diffuser
is the number of locations at which the

effective draft temperature is within –1.7oC
to +1.1oC.
The objective of air distribution system
design is to select and place the supply air
diffusers in such a way that the ADPI
approaches 100 %. The ADPI provides a
Figure 6. Turbulence energy plot for OT rational way of selecting air diffusers. A
with 45o angular diffuser with lamp large value of space cooling load per unit
area tends to reduce the value of ADPI.
Temperature measurement is taken at 10
preset positions in critical zone. The
position is numbered from top left to bottom
right and illustrate in figure 8 and Table 1.
Figure 7. Temperature Plot for OT with

45o angular diffuser with lamp
Draft is defined as the localized feeling of
cooling or warmth. Draft is measured above
or below the controlled room condition of
Figure 8. Shows the 10 preset point for
24.4oC and an air velocity of 0.15 m/s at the
temperature measurement in OT
centre of the room. The effective draft
temperature (EDT) for comfort is given by: Table 1. Coordinate position of
temperature measuring points
EDT = (T P -T R ) - 8 x (V P - 0.15)
(1) Point no. X (m) Y (m)
T P = Local Air stream temp. (k) 1 -1.5 2.4
T R = Avg. room temp. (Taken 291ok as 2 -0.34 2.4
per NABH standard) 3 0.34 2.4
V P = Local air velocity (m/s) 4 1.5 2.4
For comfort, the EDT should be within 5 -1.5 1.2
–1.7oC to +1.1oC and the air velocity should 6 -0.34 1.2
be less than 0.36 m/s. 7 0.34 1.2
8 -1.5 1.2
Air Distribution Performance Index:- 9 1.5 0.28
10 -1.5 0.28
The ADPI is defined as the percentage of
measurements taken at many locations in
the occupied zone of space that meets EDT
criteria of–1.7oC to +1.1oC, that is: In this work we have studied the flat and the
angular diffuser system. In both scenario
𝑁𝜃
ADPI = 𝑋 100 (2) velocity, turbulence energy, and temperature
𝑁
were evaluated with CFD analysis. Angular
Where N is the total number of locations at
diffuser system has proven to be efficient in
which observations have been made, and N θ
avoiding the presence of the airborne
271
Rahate et. al
particle in critical zone which reduced risk

for patient and surgeon of surgical site
infection. The velocity and ADPI values for
different angles of OT diffuser are shown in
fig. 9 and 10 respectively.
Figure 10. ADPI for 30o to 55o diffuser

REFERENCES
ASHRAE standards 170 P 2006 Ventilation
of health care facilities American
Society for heating, refrigerating and
air conditioning engineers Inc. Atlanta
Balaras C A Dascalaki E and Gaglia A 2007
HVAC and indoor thermal conditions
in hospital operating rooms Elsevier
Energy and Buildings 39 454-470.
Chow T T and Yang X Y 2004 Ventilation
performance in operating theatres
against airborne infection: review of
research activities and practical
guidance Elsevier Journal of Hospital
Infection 56 85-92.
Dascalaki E G Lagoudi A Balaras C A and
Gaglia A G 2008 Air quality in
hospital operating rooms Elsevier
Building and Environment 43 1945-
1952.
Guide book to NABH standards for
hospitals 25 August 2010 114-115.
Figure 9. Velocity vs. Room height for
30o to 60o and flat diffuser Rahate S D Waghmare S A and Deshmukh
P D 2015 Design of angular diffuser
system and flow analysis of
conditioned air in operation theatre
Proceedings of International
Conference on Current Research in
Engineering and Technology Pune
India May 2015.
Rahate S D Waghmare S A and Deshmukh
P D 2015 Review of flow analysis of
conditioned air in operation theatre
JIAATS 16 2.
272
ICCMS2016
CFD SIMULATION OF COMBINED BUOYANCY AND PRESSURE

DRIVEN HOT GAS FLOWS THROUGH SQUARE OPENING USING
SALT WATER ANALOGY
GERA B.1, SINGH R. K.2 and ALAM M.3
1
2
3
Jawaharlal Nehru Centre for Advanced Scientific Research, Bangalore, India
Abstract: Movement of hot gases/smoke generated from accidental fire through

openings in the horizontal partition between two compartments is crucial for proper
ventilation design. Current transport calculations often uses vent flow model and
consider it as pressure driven flow and do not account the effect of buoyancy on the
flow. Use of salt water/fresh water analogy to model such type of flow is an excellent
alternative approach as this system requires less cost and flow visualization is easy. In
the present work CFD simulations of such experiments have been conducted. In the
reported experiments scaled compartment of size 0.375m X 0.25m X 0.25m was
placed in a large compartment connected through a square opening in horizontal
partition. Both the compartments were filled with fresh water; a plume of salt water
was injected vertically downward in small compartment to simulate the heated plume.
Salt water layer height, flow rate through opening, stratification in the compartment
was recorded. Various experiments were conducted by varying the size of opening
and density of injected salt water. 3D transient CFD simulations have been performed
to validate the in-house CFD code against this experiment. Standard k-ε model was
used for modelling turbulence. Salt water layer height, exchange flow coefficients
were determined through CFD simulations and compared with available experimental
data.
Keywords: Salt Water; Layer Height; Partition; CFD; Square Opening.
INTRODUCTION can be very difficult and expensive due to the

build-up of soot within the enclosure and on
Openings in horizontal and vertical partition
equipment, as well as the high temperatures
are provided in domestic and commercial
involved. Due to generation of heat the
buildings, if fire occurs in a building these
medium inside the enclosure is lighter
opening serve as outlet to smoke and inlet to
compare to ambient fluid, thus an unstable
fresh air. Accurate prediction of the
interface is created at the opening in
movement of smoke within an enclosed space
horizontal partition and a pulsating exchange
is essential information for the design and use
flow occurred through the opening in
of these buildings. Like many natural
horizontal partition from one compartment to
phenomena, the flow of smoke is complex
another. If the intensity of fire is high the
and measurements in smoky environments

Gera et al.
pressure generated inside the room will also intrusive techniques i.e. Planar Laser Induced
govern the flow through opening in Fluorescence (PLIF) technique can easily be
horizontal partition. In this case fire induced used and can provide concentration data at all
smoke flows are driven through the outlet points in a plane throughout the flow.
vent by both, pressure and buoyancy forces, CFD simulations of such experiments have
the first due to the finite volume flux of the been conducted. In the reported experiments
source, and the second due to the unstable [Le Quesne, 2010] scaled compartment of
stratification across the outlet vent. Thus the size 0.375 m X 0.25 m X 0.25 m was placed
nature of flow through opening whether in a large compartment 1.075 m X 0.675 m X
unidirectional or bidirectional, is governed by 1.05 m connected through a square opening
both pressure and density difference across in horizontal partition. Both the
the opening. Zone based fire model calculates compartments were filled with fresh water; a
the smoke transport using standard vent plume of salt water was injected vertically
models based on pressure difference using downward in small compartment to simulate
flow coefficient that do not accurately take in the heated plume. Salt water layer height,
to account the buoyancy component of the flow rate through opening, stratification in
flow. Openings in horizontal partitions are the compartment was recorded. Various
also widely used in ceiling for natural experiments were conducted by varying the
ventilation and produce flow, which are size of opening and density of injected salt
unstable with irregular oscillatory behaviour water.
even the temperature difference is low. A sketch of the geometric configuration used
for CFD computation is shown in Figure
Salt water modelling technique is a useful
1.An inner compartment (IC) is placed in a
tool to simulate fire induced flows, which
large compartment. Both the compartments
takes into account most of the flow
were filled with fresh water initially and salt
characteristics, allows for good flow
water was injected in the inner compartment
visualization [Yao, 2006]. In salt water
from top wall (IC_T). A square hole was
modelling, turbulent buoyant salt water
made in IC_T for salt water injection. The
moving in fresh water is used to substitute for
location of injection can be varied (side,
turbulent buoyant hot gas moving in cold gas.
centre and corner). The inner compartment is
Since it is difficult and very expensive to do
connected through outer compartment by
study with full-scale model, therefore the salt
opening in side wall (IC_S) and/or opening in
water/fresh water experiment is not only an
bottom wall (IC_B). The IC_S opening size
effective way but also an economical
was varied from door (0.2mX0.1m), window
approach to study this mixing phenomenon.
(0.1mX0.1m) and slot configuration
The liquid system has its advantage over a
(0.3mX0.1m). The opening in IC_B was
gas filled system in performing a heat
square shape of various size 50, 75, and 100
transfer experiment: there is no need to cover
mm.
the test section with insulation as the density
driven flow is isothermal and flow
NUMERICAL DETAILS
visualization is very easy. The salt-water
flows have features consistent with fire- The computer code has been developed in
induced flows and provide an excellent test- order to predict the 3D behaviour of the
bed for CFD turbulence models used in such movement of salt water in fresh water in a
applications. Due to transparent set up non- large enclosure. The 3D time dependent
274
CFD Simulation of Combined Buoyancy and Pressure Driven Hot Gas Flows through Square Opening
using Salt Water Analogy
Navier-Stokes equation with the species analogy. The behaviour of buoyant turbulent
transport was solved by using Patankar’s plume, ceiling jet, effects of horizontal and
SIMPLE algorithm. In the present CFD vertical opening has been investigated in an
model, high Re k-ε model with standard wall integrated manner.
function and buoyancy modification has been
incorporated for modelling turbulence. The k-
ε model was chosen because it has been
thoroughly validated, handles buoyancy
effects and has minimum computational
requirement. The governing conservation
equation for mass, momentum, species
transport, turbulent kinetic energy and
dissipation rate has been solved.
(a). 5 seconds
IC_T
IC_S
IC_B
(b). 10 seconds
Figure 1. Schematic configuration for

CFD computation.

The density contours for one such case where
saltwater of density 1030 kg/m3 was injected
from an orifice of 10 mm X 10 mm and a 50
mm square opening was present in the (c). 20 seconds
horizontal partition are shown in figure
2.Initially a turbulent plume is developed due
to release of salt water in fresh water tank.
Once the plume impinges on ceiling, it turns
to form a radially expanding ceiling jet. The
flow behaviour becomes more complicated
compared with the initial plume. Due to the
viscous interactions with ceiling, there is a
competition between turbulent mixing and
(d). 50 seconds
stable stratification along the ceiling. Salt-
water modelling provides an easy way to Figure 2. Density contours (salt water
simulate the complicated turbulent behaviour density 1030 kg/m3, 50 mm square
in such scenarios based on the hydraulic opening).
275
Gera et al.
CONCLUSION
The numerical model accurately predicts the
movement of salt water plume in fresh water.
The opening creates a restriction in flow of
salt water to outer compartment and layers of
salt water are formed in inner compartment.
The analogy simulates the filling of smoke
due to fire in a chamber having an opening in
ceiling.
REFERENCES
Le Quesne M A 2010 Saltwater modelling of
fire gas flow through a horizontal
ceiling opening ME Thesis University of
Canterbury Christchurch New Zealand.
Yao X and Marshall A W2006Quantitative
salt-water modelling of fire-induced
flow Fire Safety Journal 41 497–508.
276
ICCMS2016
COMPUTATIONAL STUDY OF HYPERSONIC FLOW PAST A

SPHERICALLY BLUNTED NOSE CONE
ASHISH NARAYAN∗, RAKESH KUMAR and NARAYANAN S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, ISM Dhanbad
Abstract: This paper numerically investigates the flow past a spherically blunted nose
cone at a Mach number of 5.8. The effect of different nose cone geometries on the
aerodynamic (i.e., flow/shock) characteristics such as pressure coefficient,
aerodynamic drag, shock detachment distance, location and shape of bow shock
formed ahead of the nose cone are studied in detail. The shock detachment distance,
location and shape of bow shock, etc have numerous applications in the design of high
speed aerodynamic vehicles such as space shuttles, missiles, rockets etc. The pertinent
parameters that play a significant role in affecting the aerodynamic characteristics of
nose cones are semi-cone angle (θ c ), bluntness ratio (i.e., ratio of nose cone radius to
cone base radius (r/R)) etc. The two different semi-cone angles (5o, 60o) and bluntness
ratios (0.4, 0.8) will be investigated in the current study to ascertain the effect of nose
cone geometries on the aerodynamic characteristics and hence an attempt will be
made to enhance its performance. The velocity vector (Figure. 3) indicates
deceleration near the nose, re-acceleration through the sideways of the nose cone as
well the formation of recirculation zone. The Mach number contour (Figure. 4)
depicts the shape and location of the bow shock formed ahead of the nose as well as
the shock detachment distance. These features are expected to be highly dependent on
r/R and θ c which will be discussed in detail in the full length manuscript.
Keywords: Nose cone, shock detachment distance, pressure coefficient, Aerodynamic
drag.
INTRODUCTION The generation of high temperature at the

cone surfaces in re-entry vehicles due to
The spherically blunted nose cones are
aerodynamic heating forms one of the major
amongst the configurations of interest with
design considerations of nose cone
numerous applications in the design of high
geometries. The prediction of aerodynamic
speed aerodynamic vehicles (i.e., entry
drag and its reduction by making proper nose
vehicles) such as space shuttles, rockets etc.
cone geometry is highly challenging.
These configurations have been under
investigation for the last few decades in order Albeit several researchers have investigated
enhance the performance by reducing the the flow past a spherically blunted nose cone
drag and to alleviate the aerodynamic at hypersonic Mach numbers but the detailed
heating. The shape of bow shock formed computational study to compare the effect of
ahead of the nose cone, shock detachment different parameters such as semi-cone
distance etc play a significant role in
angles (5o, 60o) and bluntness ratios (0.4, 0.8)
controlling the performance (i.e., drag
reduction characteristics) of the nose cones. on the aerodynamic behaviours (i.e.,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ashishnarayan2007@gmail.com 277

Ashish Narayan et al
flow/shock) such as drag, pressure Cw1 = 3.21 , Cw 2 = 0.3 , Cw3 = 2.0 , Cv1 = 7.1 )
coefficient, detachment distance etc are are used for modelling turbulence.
scarce. Thus, an exhaustive numerical
simulation is carried out in the current study
to predict the aerodynamic characteristics of
spherically blunted nose cones of different
configurations, which forms the key
objective of the present study.
COMPUTATIONAL DOMAIN AND (a)

GRID
The physical geometry, domain of
computation, and boundary conditions for the Figure 2. (a) Computational Grid, (b)
problem are shown in Figure 1. The Enlarged View of the Grid near the Nose
computational domain (Figure 1) is fixed as Cone
600 and 420 mm in the axial and radial
The velocity vector as shown in Figure.
directions in order to capture the complex
flow/shock structures and the aerodynamic 3clearly depicts the flow features such as
characteristics. deceleration near the nose and re-acceleration
through the sideways of the spherically
blunted nose cone. It also reveals the
formation of recirculation zone behind the
base of the nose cone shown in the Figure. 3
Figure 1. Computational Domain

The grid is constructed using ANSYS CFD.
The computational grid with varying mesh
size is shown in Figure. 2. Fine
grids were used in the regions of large
gradients so as to accurately capture the
complex shock structures. A steady
axisymmetric simulation is carried out using Figure 3. Velocity Vector
the commercial software ANSYS FLUENT The Mach number contours shows the shape
15 with an implicit density based solver. The
and location of bow shock fromed ahead of
fluid is considered as a compressible (i.e.,
the nose cone in Figure. 4 (a). The enlarged
ideal gas) for the present simulations with no
slip boundary condition enforced at the walls. view of Mach contour shown in Figure. 4 (b)
A total of about 70,000 cells are used in the depicts the detachment distance of the bow
present simulations. The simple one equation shock. It is expected that the shock
Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model with detachment distance is a function of nose
2 radius and cone angle and its role in affecting
standard values of model constants ( σ v = ,
3 the aerodynamic characteristics will be
Cb1 = 0.1355 , Cb 2 = 0.622 , k = 0.42, presented in detail in the full length paper.
278
Computational study of hypersonic flow past a spherically blunted nose cone
Hankley WL 1989 Re-entry aerodynamics,

AIAA Education Series, 1- 22.
Julius E Hawis 1967 Aerodynamic
Characteristics of a Spherically Blunted
25o Cone at a Mach number Of 20
National Aeronautics and space
administration.
William T O’Bryant 1956 an experimental
Figure.4: (a) Mach Number Contour, (b) investigation of hypersonic flow an over
Enlarged View of Mach Contour Showing blunt nosed cone at Mach number of
5.8.
Shock Detachment Distance
CONCLUSIONS
The influence of different nose cone
geometries such as semi-cone angles,
bluntness ratios on the aerodynamic
characteristics of the spherically blunted nose
cones at a Mach number of 5.8 are studied in
detail. The two different bluntness ratios (0.4,
0.8) and semi-cone angles (5o, 60o) will be
investigated in the current study to determine
the influence of nose cone geometries on the
aerodynamic characteristics such as
aerodynamic drag, shock detachment
distance, location and shape of bow shock
etc., which finds immense applications in the
design of entry vehicles such as space
shuttles, missiles etc. The velocity vector
(Figure. 3) obtained from the preliminary
studies represents the flow deceleration
ahead of the nose followed by re-acceleration
through the sideways. It also portrays the
existence of flow recirculations behind the
nose cone. The detachment distance as well
as the structure of bow shock formed ahead
of the nose cone are well represented by the
Mach number contour (Figure. 4).
REFERENCE
By Marvin I Kussoy 1967 Hypersonic
Viscous Drag on Cones in Rarefied
Flow. National Aeronautics and space
administration.
279
ICCMS2016
ENERGY DEPOSITION IN SUPERSONIC FLOW PAST A HEMISPHERE

USING OPENFOAM
DHURANDHAR S. N.* and BANSAL A.
Mechanical and Industrial Engineering department, IIT Roorkee, Roorkee, India.
Abstract: In this project effect of energy deposition in the supersonic flow past a
hemisphere is studied using OpenFoam software. Energy deposition in front
hemisphere disturbs the shock waves and pressure distribution around the hemisphere.
Drag coefficient changes as the pressure distribution changes. The purpose of this
study is to figure out changes in drag force applied on the hemisphere due to energy
deposition in front of the hemisphere. During energy deposition process the
temperature of the source goes more than 5,000K, at this temperature energy emitted
or absorbed by the species around the hemisphere due to chemical reaction between
the species present and radiation heat transfer are modelled in the simulation. Most of
the deposited energy lost in vibrational energy and dissociation etc. Energy deposition
source is modelled as energy added in the form of pulse. For simulation purpose fluid
is assumed as inviscid and reacting gas. Euler’s equation with ideal gas will be
applied to simulate.
Keywords: Energydeposition; Radiative heat transfer; Chemical reaction; Drag.
INTRODUCTION Energy is deposited in front of the

In this project experimental study of Russell hemisphere in the form of energy pulse at the
G. Adelgren (2001) is simulated assuming centerline. The blast wave is formed because
fluid as inviscid and reacting gas. Drag of energy deposition. Shock wave is formed
reduction in the supersonic speed vehicle by in front the hemisphere because of
energy deposition in the upstream direction is compressible fluid and supersonic speed.
done by modelling laser discharge as an Figure (1) shows the discharge of laser and
instantaneous heated region added to the shock wave in front of hemisphere.
previous steady state solution and the fluid is
assumed as inviscid and perfect gas
[Mortazavi, 2014]. The energy deposition
source is modelled as low density, high
temperature filament by Anderson et al.
(2011). The model of a heated rarefied
filament and a combined filament are used
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of setup
for the approximation of the shape and
parameter of the “heated spot” by METHOD OF SOLUTION
Azarovaetall (2015).
The hemispherical shaped body is moving
with 3.45 Mach no speed. Laser discharge is
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:sheshdhurandhar@gmail.com; 280

Dhurandhar and Bansal
modeled as energy added to the previous The specific heat at constant pressure (C p ) for
steady state solution to the centerline. Flow is this study is assumed to the function of
simulated using Euler’s equation with ideal temperature. The species contains in the
gas shown in Eq. (1): atmosphere have different C p value for
∂ρ different temperature.
+ ∇.( ρ u ) = 0
∂t Simulation is performed using OpenFoam
∂ ( ρ u)
∇.(u ⊗ ( ρ u )) + ∇p = 0 software. Mesh file is created using the
∂t Gambit-2.4.6 software and total number of
∂e cells in the mesh is 10,368. Axis symmetry
+ ∇.(u (e + p )) = 0
∂t mesh is created to reduce the simulation time.
p = ρ RT (1) Domain size of the mesh made big enough to
properly visualise the shock wave formation
Where e is internal energy per unit volume, ρ and the interaction of shock wave with the
is density (kg/m3), u is velocity (m/s), p is blast wave. Mesh used for the study is shown
pressure (pas), t is time (s), R is universal gas in figure 2.
constant and T is temperature (K).
During the energy deposition chemical
reaction take place as the temperature of the
region goes more than 5,000K. In the
simulation species present at the atmosphere
during the process are 5 (N 2 , O 2 ,NO, O and
N) and 11 chemical reactions for dissociation
and recombination of air are considered from
Shuen (1990).The ions, free electrons and
associated reaction steps are not included in
the reaction. The chemical reactions between Figure 2. Mesh
the species are:
AB considered as inlet, CD considered as
O 2 +M=2O+M
outlet, EFG is considered as hemispherical
N 2 +M=2N+M wall and axis symmetry condition is applied
for BD. Flow is taking place from AB to CD.
NO+M=N+O+M
Condition for the simulation are:
O+NO=N+O 2 Free stream Mech number = 3.45
O+N 2 =N+NO Free stream static pressure = 13.1 kPa
N+N 2 =N+N+N Free stream static temperature = 77.8 K
O 2 +O=2O+O Pulse Energy = 13, 127 and 258 mJ
O 2 +O 2 =20+O 2 Distance L = 25.4 mm

Pulse duration= 10 ns
O 2 +N 2 =2O+N 2
Hemisphere Diameter= 25.4 mm
N 2 +N 2 =2N+N 2
NO+M=N+O+M (2)
281
Energy Deposition in Supersonic Flow Past A Hemisphere Using Openfoam
CONCLUSION
It can be concluded when energy is deposited
in front of the hemisphere for drag reduction
by considering radiative heat transfer and
heat transfer due to chemical reaction. This
method will give result, nearly equal to
realistic result.
REFERENCES
Adelgren R G Elliott G S and Knight D D
2001 Energy Deposition in Supersonic
Flows AIAA Paper 885 1-33
Anderson K and Knight D D 2011 Thermal
and aerodynamic effect of energy
deposition on blunt body in supersonic
flow AIAA Paper 1024 1-12
Azarova O A Knight D D 2015 Drag force
control for hemisphere-cylinder under the
action of laser energy deposition European
drag reduction and flow control meeting
(EDRFCM2015)105-106
Mortazavi M and Knight D 2014 Numerical
simulation of energy deposition in a
supersonic flow past a hemisphere AIAA
Paper 944 1-18
Shuen J S Liou M S and Leer B V 1990
Inviscid flux-splitting algorithms for
real gases with non-equilibrium
chemistry Journal of computational
physics 90 371-395
282
ICCMS2016
ASSESSMENT OF PULSATILE WAVEFORMS ON THE BLOOD FLOW

DYNAMICS IN INTRACRANIAL ANEURYSM
BASUMATARY M.*, NATARAJAN G. and MISHRA S.C.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India
Abstract: The effect of the pulsatile waveforms on the hemodynamics of intracranial

aneurysm is investigated when the blood is modelled with Newtonian and non-
Newtonian fluid. Numerical simulations are performed to quantify the local and
global flow dynamics including: velocity vector, vorticity contour, instantaneous wall
shear stress and oscillating shear index on the aneurysm wall with the aforementioned
effect. The present work utilizes in-house computational framework based on the
hybrid staggered/non-staggered finite volume method (FVM). Two pulsatile
waveforms are constructed from a baseline waveform by scaling process to obtain two
different pulsatility index (PI), particularly low and high within the human
physiologic range. The flow in the low PI case resembles a cavity mode similar to
steady results where parent artery is delineated from the circulation dome. On the
other hand, at high PI the flow is dominated by vortex formation and transport
through the aneurysm neck. The global dynamics of the flow is influenced marginally
by the choice of the fluid model either Newtonian or non-Newtonian.
Keywords: Aneurysm; Newtonian; Non-Newtonian; Pulsatility Index.
INTRODUCTION experimental study of this problem is difficult

due to the complex geometry and fluid flow.
The Blood flow in the cardiovascular loop is
inherently unsteady (pulsatile) owing to the Numerical simulation is the other option for
action of the heart that pumps blood investigation of this type of flow while
periodically. The pressure and velocity pulse requiring touse hybrid or unstructured
waveforms triggered by the heart advances meshes. However, most of the known
down the arterial network and are damped numerical frameworks in unstructured
out with time and space. In other words, meshes are only first order accurate
pulsatile waveform of blood flow varies with especially in unstructured staggered mesh
the diameter of the arteries [Ku, 1997]. framework that has lower error in discrete
Furthermore, hemodynamics diseases also mass conservation as opposed to the
play a role to affect the pulsatility of flow collocated mesh framework in the
[Lindegaard et al., 1985]. Intracranial incompressible flow regime [Perot, 2000]. It
aneurysm is one of such disease which is the is demonstrated in [Natarajan and
abnormal outward bulging of the cerebral Sotiropoulos, 2011] and [Basumatary et al.,
artery due to weakening of arterial wall. It is 2014] for Newtonian and non-Newtonian
life-threatening and even cause death when fluid respectively that lower order accurate
ruptures. Furthermore, blood is a non- staggered framework on unstructured meshes
Newtonian fluid however it can be also be leads tonon-physical results and devise a
treated as Newtonian fluid in the large second order accurate unstructured staggered
arteries [Shibeshi and Collins, 2005]. In-vitro mesh framework. [Le et al., 2010] have
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:mantulal@iitg.ernet.in 283

Basumatary et al.
investigated numerically the effect of Convective flux is obtained using a second

pulsatile waveforms on the blood flow order accurate upwind scheme whereas
dynamics in three-dimensional saccular viscous flux is obtained by computing face
aneurysm modelling the blood as a gradient that avoids odd-even decoupling
Newtonian fluid. In view of the
from cell gradient computed by suitable
aforementioned information, the current work
presents the investigations of the pulsatile method [Blazek, 2001]. The spatially varying
flow effect in a two-dimensional aneurysm dynamic viscosity associated with the viscous
when the blood is modelled with Newtonian flux is computed at the cell face using
and non-Newtonian using the hybrid suitable constitutive relationship. A uniform
staggered/non-staggered mesh framework. velocity profile varying in time is prescribed
NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY at the inlet in accordance with the pulsatile
waveform while at the outlet Neumann type
The present work involves solving of the
incompressible Navier-Stokes equations in boundary condition is specified for the
primitive variable form and are given by, velocity component. At the artery wall
𝜕𝑢𝑖 (1) boundary, no-slip and no flux conditions are
=0
𝜕𝑥𝑖 prescribed.
𝜕𝑢𝑗 𝜕𝑢𝑗 𝜕𝑝 1 𝜕 𝜕𝑢𝑖 𝜕𝑢𝑗 (2) The pulsatile waveforms used in this work
+ 𝑢𝑖 =− + µ� + � are characterised by the pulsatility index (PI)
𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥𝑖 𝜕𝑥𝑗 𝑅𝑒 𝜕𝑥𝑖 𝜕𝑥𝑗 𝜕𝑥𝑖
and is defined as,
where, Eqs.(1) and(2) represent continuity 𝑃𝑆𝑉 − 𝑀𝐷𝑉 (3)
𝑃𝐼 =
and momentum equations respectively in �
𝑈
normalized form.u j , t, p, μ and Redenote where, PSV and MDV denote the peak
Cartesian velocity components, time, systolicand minimum diastolic velocity
pressure, viscosity and Reynolds number respectively and 𝑈 � represents the mean
respectively. Re is defined as ρU ∞ L ∞ /μ ∞ ,for velocity. PI is the parameterthat measures the
Newtonian fluid, where ρ is the density of the variability of velocity in arteryover one
fluid, U ∞ , L ∞ and μ ∞ re the reference cardiac cycle. Eq.(3) can be expressed
quantities of velocity, length and viscosity equivalently in terms of the Reynolds
respectively. Blood flow is isothermal, number,
laminar, two-dimensional and cerebral artery 𝑅𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝑅𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑛 (4)
𝑃𝐼 =
wallis non-distensible are the assumptions ��
𝑅𝑒
made by the present study. where, Re max is the peak systolic Reynolds
Fractional step method is used to solve the number, Re min is the minimum diastolic
Reynolds number and �� 𝑅𝑒 is the time-
incompressible Navier-Stokes equations
averaged Reynolds number over a cardiac
implicitly. The momentum equation for the cycle.
normal face velocity arising from the hybrid
staggered/non-staggered framework based on The two different waveforms (low and high
FVM is solved using Newton-Krylov solver PI) in non-dimensional form are constructed
[Natarajan and Sotiropoulos, 2009]. The from the baseline waveform 𝑢 = 𝑢(𝑡) by a
pressure correction equation is solved using scaling process defined by (Gosling and
algebraic multigrid reconditioned GMRES King, 1974)
��))-a)b+c
𝑢 = ((1 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(4𝛼 2 𝑡/𝑅𝑒 (5)
solver. The aforementioned non-line a rand
where, a, b and c are the scaling factors to
linear systems of equations are solved
obtain low and high PI, and α is the
employing the open source libraries (PetSc) Womersley number. Parameter α is the
and (LiS) respectively. measure of the ratio of unsteady inertia force
284
Assessment of Pulsatile Waveforms on the Blood flow Dynamics in Intracranial Aneurysm
to the viscous forces and is defined as hybrid meshes (unstructured cells inside the
𝐷
𝛼 = � � �ωρ/µ∞ , where ω is the frequency aneurysmdome and quadrilateral cells in the
2
of the cardiac cycle. parent artery).The setting of flow parameters
for the low (a) andhigh (b) PI waveforms
The solution domain is shown is Fig. 1 with ��= 96, α = 3.3, PI=
flow simulations are (a)𝑅𝑒
boundary conditions and is discretised with
�� = 96, α = 3.3,PI= respectively.
and (b) 𝑅𝑒
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the aneurysm geometry with boundary conditions. D

is the diameter (depth in 2D) of the artery, W = 2.1D is the width of the aneurysm
neck and H = 2.2D is the height of the aneurysm.
Figure 2 Instantaneous velocity vector and vorticity magnitude contour using

Newtonian fluid. Early systolic phase (first row), peak systolic phase (second row),
early diastolic phase (third row) and peak diastolic phase (fourth row).
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION high PI cases at different time points of the

simulated cardiac cycle when the Newtonian
Simulations have been performed for three
fluid is used. In the high PI case, a vortex
cardiac cycles to ensure periodic solution.
ring is formed at the proximal wall near the
Figure 2 depicts the instantaneous velocity
peak systolic phase separating the parent
field and vorticity magnitude for the low and
artery flow and entrains the flow from the
285
Basumatary et al.
parent artery into the dome of the aneurysm. by transcranial Doppler ultrasound J.
Consequently, this is referred to as the Neurosurg.63 890-898.
“vortex ring mode”, where the dome does not Shibeshi S S and Collins W E 2005 The
exhibit a single pattern of vortex and intense rheology of blood flow in a branched
unsteadiness is observed at different phases arterial system Appl. Rheo.15 398-405.
of the cardiac cycle. However, the low PI Perot B 2000 Conservation properties of
case resembles to the driven cavity flow, a unstructured staggered mesh schemesJ.
steady flow and is referred to as the “cavity Comput. Phys.159 58-59.
mode”, where parentartery flow is delineated Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2011
from the recirculation flow at all instants of IDeC(k): A new velocity reconstruction
the cycle. Furthermore, a thin layer of algorithm on arbitrary polygonal
vorticity is emanated from the proximal end staggered meshes J. Comput. Phys. 230
of aneurysm into the dome at all time of the 6583-6604.
cardiac cycle. The present results collectively Basumatary M Natarajan G and Mishra S
reproduce the global flow dynamics in (Le et C2014 Defect correction based velocity
al., 2010) however the simulations are reconstruction forphysically consistent
performed on realistic three-dimensional simulations of non-Newtonian flows on
unstructured grids J. Comput. Phys.272
configuration.
227-244.
CONCLUSION Le T B Barazjani I and Sotiropoulos F 2010
The global flow dynamics in the intracranial Pulsatile flow effects on the
aneurysm is strongly affected by the nature of hemodynamics of intracranial aneurysm
pulsatile inlet waveform while it is J. Biomech. Eng. 132 1-11.
marginally influenced by the choice of fluid Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2009
to model blood. The results of non- Adaptive finite volume incompressible
Newtonian fluid, additionally the Navier-Stokes solver for 3D flows with
complex immersed boundaries
investigations of instantaneous wall shear nd
Proceedings of the 62 APS-DFD
stress and oscillating shear index will be Annual Meeting, Minneapolis 2009.
presented in the full length article. In
addition, a follow-up study is underway in http://www.mcs.anl.gov/petsc 2013
Accessed20-02-2013.
presence of the externally applied magnetic
field. http://www.ssisc.org/lis 2013 Accessed 20-
02-2013.
REFERENCES
Blazek J 2001 Computational Fluid
Ku D N1997 Blood flow in arteries Ann. Rev. Dynamics Principles and Applications,
of Fluid Mech.29 399-434. volume 1. Eslevier Switzerland 152-192.
Lindegaard K-F Bakke S J Grolimund P Gosling R G and King D H 1974 Arterial
Aaslid R Huber P and Nornes H 1985 assessment by Doppler shift ultrasound
Assessment of intracranial Proceedings of the Royal Society of
hemodynamics in carotid artery disease Medicine 67 447-449 197
286
ICCMS2016
FLOW MODELLING AROUND AN AMPHIBIAN AIRCRAFT USING

OPENFOAM
JOSHI K. and BANSAL A.
Mechanical and Industrial Engineering Department, IIT Roorkee India.
Abstract: Fluid structure interaction during take-off of an amphibian aircraft is

modelled, the drag forces are analysed and optimized using the CFD package
OpenFoam. The hydrostatic and hydrodynamic stability of the amphibian aircraft is
also studied. The amphibian aircraft which is selected for this problem is Grumman
G-21 Goose. In this problem only half part of the aircraft is modelled and for the
remaining half, symmetry boundary condition is applied. In this paper, only the hull
part is modelled, and empirical drag and lift relation are used to model the
aerodynamic forces on the amphibian. This approach would simplify the problem and
also reduce the computational time. The result of this study would help to understand
the complicated flow and fluid structure interaction effect on the performance and
stability of the amphibian and open avenues for the optimization of the shape of the
hull.
Keywords: CFL; VOF; FSI; Dynamic mesh; Amphibian
INTRODUCTION retractable wheels for landing on dry land,

are called amphibians.
An amphibian or amphibious aircraft is an
aircraft that can land and take-off on both Hydrodynamic forces acting during operation
water and land. American aviation pioneer of an airplane on water are more complex
and inventor Glenn Hammond Curtiss is than those created on land or air. These
generally acknowledged as the “father” of the forces act along the entire length of a
flying boat and also developed the first seaplane’s floats or hull, and vary constantly
amphibian. There are two main types of depending on the pitch attitude, changing
seaplane: flying boats (often called hull motion of the float or hull, and action of the
seaplanes) and floatplanes. The bottom of a waves, Canamar (2012).
flying boat’s fuselage along with additional Compared to operations from typical hard-
smaller floats near the wingtips helps in surface runways, taking off from and landing
landing a flying boat on water. There may be on water presents several difficulties. Waves
some short, wing like projections, called and swell not only create a rough or uneven
sponsons to stabilize the hull from rolling surface, their movement creates significant
motion when the flying boat is on the water, challenges to amphibian operation. Even
Langley et al. (1935). relatively small waves and swell can
Floatplanes typically are conventional complicate seaplane operations. Takeoffs on
landplanes that have been fitted with separate rough water can subject the floats to hard
floats (sometimes called pontoons) in place pounding as they strike consecutive wave
of their wheels. The fuselage of a floatplane crests. Operating on the surface in rough
is supported well above the water’s surface. conditions exposes the seaplane to forces that
Flying boats and floatplanes, equipped with
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: kamleshjoshi91@gmail.com 287

Joshi and Bansal
can potentially cause damage or, in some mesh motion tetrahedral re-meshing based on
cases, overturn the seaplane. edge swapping may be used.
The main problem with amphibians, in spite Moving mesh FVM is based on the integral
of their ability to fly, move on water and form of the governing equation over an
land, is that it is limited in speed. Their air arbitrary moving volume, V, bounded by a
performance is compromised due to the closed surface, S. For a general tensorial
increase of the water components added to property φ it states:
the aircraft. There is lack of efficient and
economical floating ideas for a modern 𝑑
� 𝜌𝜑 𝑑𝑉 + � 𝜌𝑛. (𝑣 − 𝑣𝑠 )𝜑 𝑑𝑆
seaplane design. 𝑑𝑡
𝑉 𝑆
There are a number of challenges in − � 𝜌𝛾𝜑 𝑛. ∇𝜑𝑑𝑆 (1)
computational modelling of the fluid
𝑆
structure interaction effects during take-off
and landing of an amphibian. These = � 𝑠𝜑 𝑑𝑉
challenges occur mainly in modelling the 𝑉
multiphase flow along with complicated

dynamic mesh motion and deformation.
where 𝜌 is the density, n is the outward
There are only a few studies available in
pointing unit normal vector on the boundary
literature on computational fluid dynamics of
surface, v is the fluid velocity, 𝑉𝑠 is the
an amphibian aircraft; however, significant
velocity of the boundary surface, 𝛾𝜑 is the
research literature exits on design and
analysis of ship and boat hulls. The design diffusion coefficient and 𝑠𝜑 the volume
and optimization of hull is common part in source/sink of 𝜑 . As mentioned by I.
both boat and amphibian aircraft. Demirdzic and M. Peric (1988), the
relationship between the rate of change of the
In the field of naval hydrodynamics Hrvoje volume V and the velocity 𝑣𝑠 of the boundary
Jasak, Vuko Vukcevic and Dominik Christ surface S is defined by the space
(2014) described a novel method to calculate conservation law (SCL) in Eq. (2):
resistance force at steady forward motion
with free surface simulation using the viscous 𝑑 (2)
turbulent flow model and Volume of Fluid � 𝑑𝑉 + � 𝑛. 𝑣𝑠 𝑑𝑆 = 0
𝑑𝑡
formulation (VOF). The approach uses a 𝑉 𝑆
quasi-steady-state approximation, which
allows separation of time-scale for free- The main focus of this paper is to
surface movement and fluid flow. This demonstrate the capabilities of mesh motion
overcomes the CFL-number limit for the solvers in OpenFOAM in simulating fluid
fluid flow and allow simulation at CFL max structure interaction and flow around an
=1000(approx.). amphibian aircraft, and asses the
In this project, we are using CFD package hydrodynamic efficiency for various hull
OpenFOAM for the simulation purpose. geometries.
According to H. Jasak (2009) for complex
cases of time-varying geometry, mesh GEOMETRY
deformation is obtained by solving a mesh
motion equation. For extreme deformation, The amphibian aircraft model which is
automatic motion is combined with chosen to perform an initial study for this
topological changes, where the number or work is Grumman G-21Goose. It was
points, faces or cells in the mesh or its designed by Grumman to serve as an eight-
connectivity changes during the simulation. seat “commuter” aircraft. Table 1 shows the
Finally, in cases of extreme and arbitrary Design Weights of this aircraft. Figure 1. is
288
Modelling and Optimization of an Amphibian Aircraft using OpenFOAM
created in solidworks which shows the half DYNAMIC MESH HANDELLING

bottom part of the hull.
The defining feature of a moving mesh
simulation is temporal variation of the
external shape of the domain. One can
distinguish between boundary motion and
internal point motion as mentioned by
H.Jasak and Z. Tukovik (2010). Boundary
motion can be considered as given, either
prescribed by external factors or a part of the
solution. The role of internal point motion is
to accommodate boundary motion and
preserve the validity and quality of the mesh.
Figure 1. Front view of the hull of
Grumman G-21 Goose. As mentioned by H. Jasak and Z. Tukovic
(2010) depending on complexity of boundary
motion, mesh deformation cases may be
Table 1. Design weight handled either by simple algebraic expression
or by more complex functional forms like
Details Weight(kg) Laplacian and Pseudo-Solid Smoothing and
motion using Radial Basis Function.
Max. Gross Take-Off Weight 5,670
Max. Landing Weight (Land) 5,440 Figure 2 shows the mesh which is used for
Max. Landing Weight (Water) 5,670 this problem. It is an unstructured tetrahedral
mesh with mesh refinement near the aircraft.
Basic Empty Weight 3,175
Useful Load 2,450
VOLUME OF FLUID (VOF)

The multiphase flow around the amphibian
aircraft would be modelled using the VOF
method. The Volume of fluid method is a
free surface numerical modelling technique
for tracking and locating the free surface.
B.D. Nicholas and C.W. Hirt (1975) defined
a function F whose value is unity at any point
occupied by fluid and zero otherwise. The
average value of F in a cell would then
represent a fraction volume of the cell
occupied by the fluid. In particular, a unit
value of F would correspond to a cell full of
fluid, while the zero would indicate that the
cell contained no fluid. Cells with F values
between zero and one must then contain free
surface.
Figure 2. Mesh
289
Joshi and Bansal
REFERENCES
Canamar A and Smrcek L 2012 Advance
Seaplane Conceptual Design Adapting
Trimaran Boat Hull Concept 28th
International Congress of the
Aeronautical Sciences
Demirdzic I and Peric M 1988 Space
Conservation law in finite volume
Calculation of fluid flow International
Journal of Numeric Method in Fluids 8
1037-1050
Jasak H 1996 Error analysis and estimation in
the Finite Volume method with
application to fluid flows PhD Thesis
Imperial College University of London
Jasak H 2009 Dynamic Mesh Handling in
openFOAM 48th AIAA Aerospace
Sciences Meeting Orlando Florida
Jasak H and Tukovic Z 2010 Dynamic Mesh
Handling in openFoam applier to fluid
Structure interaction simulations V
European conference on Computational
Fluid Dynamics ECCOMAS CFD 2010
Lisbon Portugal 14-17 June 2010
Jasak. H and Vukcevic V and Christ D Rapid
2014 Free Surface Simulation for
Steady-State Hull resistance with FVM
Using OpenFOAM 30th Symposium on
Hydrodynamics Hobart Tasmania
Australia November 2014
Langley M Seaplane 1935 Float and Hull
Design Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons LTD
London UK
Weller H G and Tabor G and Jasak H and
Fureby C 1998 A tensorial approach to
Computational continuum mechanics
using object oriented techniques
Computers in physics 12 620-63
290
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDY ON EFFECT OF AIRFOIL PIN-FIN LOCATION

IN TUBE FIN HEAT EXCHANGER
JAGANATHAN A., DEEPAK KUMAR R. and JAYAVEL S.*
IIITD&M Kancheepuram
Abstract: Compact heat exchangers are used in many domestic and industrial systems
such as electronic cooling, refrigeration, automobile engine cooling, etc. Even a small
increase in the effectiveness of heat exchanger considerably reduces the total energy
consumption. Heat transfer enhancement may be classified as active, passive or
compound. Active methods require additional power whereas passive methods make
use of the spatial surface geometry and compound methods simultaneously use more
than one method. In this paper, a spatial surface geometry (airfoil pin fin inserts) has
been employed to enhance heat transfer. The objective of the project is to enhance the
heat transfer of the heat exchanger using airfoil pin fin inserts and to study the effect
of location and orientation of the airfoil pin fin inserts on overall performance of the
heat exchanger. To enhance the heat transfer and overall performance of the heat
exchanger, symmetric airfoil fin pins as secondary fins are inserted symmetrically
between the tubes. Three-dimensional numerical simulations are carried out in the
laminar flow regime (in the velocity range 0.5 to 2.0m/s). Finite volume based solver,
ANSYS FLUENT 15.0 is used for the flow computations. The position of airfoil pin
fin insert has been varied along flow and transverse direction and their performance
characteristics are studied.
Keywords: Numerical investigation; Fin and tube heat exchanger; Secondary
fin; Airfoil pin fin inserts; Fin location.
INTRODUCTION such as reducing maximum skin temperature

and improving operational reliability. The
Compact heat exchangers are the current
convective heat transfer can be enhanced by
demand, where low heat transfer coefficient
various modifications such as, flow
of air is the primary restriction for heat
turbulators on the surface, developed surfaces
transfer. Pin-fin inserts plays a vital role in
due to finning, flow swirling by spiral fins,
developing energy-efficient compact finned-
swirlers mounted at the channel entrance,
tube heat exchangers that are predominantly
rotation of a heat transfer surface, surface
used as energy conversion devices in several
vibration, inserts, rough surfaces, etc., The
areas such as heating, ventilating, air
heat transfer coefficient depends on
conditioning and refrigeration systems. The
temperature difference, surface condition,
performance of the heat exchanger
geometry and orientation.
significantly affects the overall performance
and operating cost of the entire system. Fins with special surfaces and modified tube
Enhancing heat transfer can solve problems geometries are the commonly used techniques to
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:sjv@iiitdm.ac.in 291

Jaganathan et al.
enhance air-side heat transfer coefficient. C=0.25D [Deepakkumar et al. 2015] in

Numerous theoretical and experimental studies velocity range of 0.5m/s to 2.0m/s. The study
have been carried out to analyze the performance is extended to observe the effect of airfoil pin
of finned-tube compact heat exchanger focusing fin position along the flow and transverse
on the air-side heat transfer performance. Chen
directionon heat transfer and pressure drop
and Lai (2012) have observed the heat transfer
characteristics
coefficient value increases with the increase in air
velocity and fin spacing for the staggered
arrangement of two tube rows. From the work of
PROBLEM STATEMENT
Iniguez et al. (2015) it is observed that the fluid
velocity plays an important role in heat transfer
Staggered tube arrangement of fin-and-tube
rate. At low velocity, 99% of the heat transfer
heat exchangers with plain fin configuration
rates occur closer to the fin inlet region whereas
is taken for numerical simulation. In order to
in case of high velocity it will be influenced by
entire region Leu et. al. (2004) used inclined improve the energy performance of the heat
block like vortex generator behind the tube and exchanger an airfoil shaped pin fin has been
investigated various mounting angles, among inserted in the plate fin as shown in Figure. 1.
them they have identified the block at 45 degree The range of inlet velocity considered in the
provide the best heat transfer enhancement. present study is 0.5 to 2.0 m/s which is
Jacobi and Shah suggested that when the cylinder coming under practical situation. The flow in
is introduced in the plate it produces the the domain is assumed to be steady, laminar
horseshoe vortices at the interface.These vortices and incompressible with constant fluid
are highly effective in heat transfer enhancement properties. The computational domain is
and its strength is controlled by the height of the
extended in upstream and downstream side of
protuberance. Geo et al. (1997) suggested that
the fin region, hence the boundary effect can
heat transfer can be enhanced by providing
special inserts that will enhance the included
be minimized. The geometry details are given
angle between velocity and ΔT instead of below.
promoting turbulence.
Transverse pitch (P t ) 25.4 mm
In our previous work, we have studied the
Longitudinal pitch (P l ) 19.05 mm
performance of the fin and tube heat
Tube diameter (D) 10 mm
exchanger using airfoil pin-fin inserts and
Chord (C) 0.25D
observed that the air side performance of the
Number of rows 2
heat exchanger found to be good for
Figure 1.Schematic of tube geometry and airfoil pin fin in the computational domain
292
Numerical Study on Effect of Airfoil Pin-Fin Location in Tube Fin Heat Exchanger
VALIDATION
The numerical solution methodology and
(a)
computational domain of the present work
has been validated with the experimental
results of Wang et al. (2000) The validated
results of present work in terms of pressure
drop closely match with the experimental
results of Wang et al. (2000) as shown in
Figure. 2. With this validation, the further
study of airfoil pin inserts in the plain fin
region (b)
is
carried Figure.3 Flow field corresponding to SWT
out C=0.25D top position v=2.0m/s
(a) Streamline plot (b) Velocity contour
The airfoil pin fin insert has been placed at
the 0.25Pt from the bottom of the
computational domain. Since airfoil has not
Figure.2. Validation results
obstruct the flow of air directly the pressure
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION drop has been found to be lesser for the case.
Due to the provision of airfoil pin fin insert
To study the effect of position of airfoil pin-fin closure to the tube 2 the wake region near the
insert along transverse direction the simulation tube 1 was not disturbed so the heat transfer
has been carried out for two different positions coefficient has been reduced for SWT
SWT C=0.25D Top and SWT C=0.25D bottom. C=0.25D bottom position case. Hence the
The airfoil pin-fin insert has been placed at overall performance of this case is found to
the 0.25Pt from the top of the computational be lesser than SWT C=0.25D case. As the
domain. Since airfoil pin-fin insert has not velocity increases the effect of wake region
obstruct the flow of air directly the pressure around tube 1 increases therefore the overall
drop has been found to be lesser for the case. performance of SWT C=0.25D bottom
Due to provision of airfoil pin-fin insert position case decreases. The wake region can
closure to the tube 1 the large wake region be witnessed from Figure 4.
was found near the tube and airfoil pin-fin
insert. So heat transfer coefficient has been
dropped for this case. Further overall
performance is found to be lesser than the
SWT C=0.25D case. As the velocity (a)
increases the effect of wake region increases
therefore the overall performance of SWT
C=0.25D top position case decreases. The
wake region can be witnessed from Figure 3.
293
Jaganathan et al.
REFERENCES
Chen H T and Lai J R 2012 Study of heat-
transfer characteristics on the fin of two-
row plate finned-tube heat exchangers
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 55 4088-
4095.
(b) Deepakkumar R A Jaganathan and Jayavel S

2015 Performance assessment of heat
Figure.4 Flow field corresponding to SWT exchanger with airfoil pin-fin inserts
C=0.25D bottom position v=2.0m/s Proceeding of 5th Biannual Conference
(a) Streamline plot (b) Velocity contour on International Conference on
Advances in Energy Research (ICAER
PERFORMANCE COMPARISION
2015) 278IIT Bombay India December
The comparison of performance between 2015.
SWT C=025C, SWT C=0.25D top position
and SWT C=0.25D bottom position is shown Guo Z Y Li D Y and Wang B X 1997 A
in Figure 4.14.Among the cases SWT novel concept for connective heat
C=0.25C has the higher performance. In transfer enhancement Int. J. Heat Mass
contrary to the expectation SWT C=0.25C Transfer41221-2225.
bottom has the higher performance than the Iniguez J C Wu A Dugast F and Vega A P
SWT C=0.25C top in all range of velocities. 2015 Numerically-based parametric
analysis of plain fin and tube compact
heat exchangersAppl. Therm. Engg. 861-
13.
Jacobi A M and Shah R K 1995 Heat transfer
surface enhancement through the use of
longitudinal vortices: A review of recent
progress Exp. Therm. Fluid Sci.11 295-
309.
SUMMARY Leu J S Wu Y H and Jang J Y 2004 Heat

transfer and fluid flow analysis in plate-
A three dimensional numerical simulation of
fin and tube heat exchangers with a pair
flow and heat transfer characteristics in fin
of block shape vortex generatorsInt. J.
and tube heat exchanger with airfoil pin fin
Heat Mass Transfer47 4327-4338.
insert has been carried out in the velocity
range of 0.5 to 2.0 m/s. The study has been Wang C C and Chi K Y 2000 Heat transfer
extended to identify the optimized location of and friction characteristics of plain fin-
the airfoil pin fin with improved overall and- tube heat exchangers, part I: new
performance. The results are presented in the experimental data Int. J. Heat Mass
form of pressure drop, average heat transfer Transfer432681-2691.
coefficient, Colburn factor, friction factor,
synergy angle and Performance Evaluation
Criteria (PEC).
294
ICCMS2016
A SHARP INTERFACE IMMERSED BOUNDARY METHOD FOR

INVISCID COMPRESSIBLE FLOW
BRAHMACHARY S.*, NATARAJAN G., KULKARNI V. and SAHOO N.
Department of Mechanical Engineering; Indian Institute of Technology, Guwahati India.
Abstract: A hybrid Cartesian Immersed Boundary Method is constructed which is a

variant of sharp interface method, to simulate inviscid compressible flows, that allows
the use of Cartesian grid for complex geometries. The solid boundary of the body in
consideration is composed of sharp interfaces and boundary conditions are enforced
precisely at the interface. The present numerical investigation concerns itself with
external inviscid compressible flow past simple and complex geometries and suitable
comparison are drawn against theoretical and experimental data. Following validation
test cases, the efficacy of the present fluid solver was established for inviscid
compressible flows.
Keywords: Immersed Boundary Method (IBM); Inviscid Compressible flows
INTRODUCTION downside of using the same is the difficulty

Ever since the upsurge of Computational in imposing the boundary condition. Peskin
Fluid Dynamics (CFD) as a tool to better (1972) coined the term immersed boundary in
understand the physics of fluid, it has seen relation to fluid and its motion, while trying
wide expansion in its application; viz. low to simulate the flow of blood in the leaflet of
speed flow in a channel, high speed flow past a human heart valve. After attaining
bodies etc. With greater application, the sufficient maturity, various variant of the
complexity involved in the process also methods were proposed and implemented,
enlarged e.g. difficulty in creating quality some of which include cut cells approach
computational grid for flows with proposed by Ye et al. (1999), ghost cell
complicated geometry. Researcher have approach by Majumdar et al. (2001),
resorted to meshless methods, which interpolation technique suggested by
eliminate the difficulty related to mesh Gilmanov et al. (2003), volume of body
generation, however it has inherent function variant by Pan 2006, etc. In this
disadvantage of boundary condition work, we focus on implementing a relatively
imposition and additional requirement of a simple IB technique, where the
highly accurate integration scheme, which reconstruction procedure does not incorporate
makes the overall process computationally the difficulty involved in cut cells, or
quite expensive. Yet another technique used additional consideration of ghost cells. We
in conjunction to traditional body conforming adopt the sharp interface variant of IB
based CFD method is the Immersed technique, where solid boundary of the body
Boundary Method, which relies on the use of in consideration is composed of sharp
a Cartesian grid, and as a result completely interfaces and boundary conditions are
removes the difficulty with grid. On the enforced precisely at the interface, unlike
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: b.shuvayan@iitg.ernet.in 295

Brahmachary et al.*
diffused interface variant of IBM. For coefficients were evaluated as a function of

validation test cases, flow past a sphere and inverse radial distance. IDW was then
double ellipse is adopted, and the obtained implemented in conjunction to CFD by Tseng
results are compared with theoretical and and Ferziger (2003), Tullio et al. (2007), Gao
experimental data. et. al. (2007), to reconstruct the boundary
condition at immersed cell.
COMPUTATIONAL BACKGROUND
For the present inviscid compressible flow
As iterated earlier, we numerically study, since the only information available at
investigate the external inviscid compressible the boundary is non-penetration boundary,
flow past bodies by making use of an in- thus rest all quantities of interest and their
house developed Hybrid Cartesian Immersed gradients are evaluated using IDW. Density
Boundary (HCIB) method flow solver, a is calculated using equation of state. The
variant of sharp interface IB. A background residual are calculated on pressure term while
Cartesian grid is generated and the body, the convergence criterion is fixed at 10-6. The
whichin two-dimensions, is discretised using in-house Finite Volume based fluid solver
linear segments (and surfacetriangulated in evaluates the convective fluxes using 2nd
3D), is immersed into it. A simple Ray order accurate VANLEER scheme while
Casting Algorithm is used to classify cells implementing 1st order accurate Euler
into solid, fluid and immersed (figure 1). The scheme for temporal discretisation.
Euler equations are solved only at the fluid
cells and reconstruction scheme are then used
at immersed cells to evaluate the flow
properties at immersed cell centroid. This
procedure of reconstruction can be further
elucidated from figure 2.From fluid cells and
the boundary conditions provided at solid
boundary point b, fluid properties are linearly
interpolated along the local normal at
immersed cell centroid, using the 1st order
Taylor series expansion.
IB  b  b .rIB b (1) Figure 1. Fluid, solid and immersed cells
where, IB and b are values at immersed cells

and solid boundary, whereas rIB b represents
the distance between immersed cell centre
and solid boundary point b. Following the
absence of prescribed boundary condition at
the boundary, the properties are calculated
using inverse weighted distance method,
from neighbouring node sharing points.
Inverse Weighted Distance (IDW) method Figure 2. Implementation of
was first proposed by Franke (2001), as an
boundaryconditions at Immersed cells
interpolation method, where the weighting
296
A Sharp Interface Immersed Boundary Method for Inviscid Compressible flow
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION For the second test case, we numerically

investigate flow past double ellipse, which
The efficacy of a fluid solver can be
forms not only as a complex geometry
established with validation test cases
problem, but also as a relevant application
covering wide spectrum. Considering this, we
with regard to aeronautical industry. The free
evaluate the fluid solver performance for
stream condition are M∞=5 while the pressure
simple and complex geometries at hypersonic
and temperature at freestream conditions are
flow conditions. For the first test case, we
kept atmospheric. Upon juxtaposition of Cp
take flow past 2D axisymmetric sphere at
plot, it can be discerned that the present IB
M∞=8 while pressure P∞=89Pa and
solver performs very well with regard to both
temperature T∞=113K. Coefficient of
experimental data (Gustaffson et al.1991) and
pressure, Cp plot are compared with body
(Natarajan et al. 2009). It can thus be said
fitted solver [John, 2014] and theoretical
that the present solver is capable of handling
results. It can be observed that there is a very
both simple and complex geometries while
good match between results from IB and
bringing out the novelty of IB method in
body fitted flow solver. At the same time, the
eliminating computational grid related
Stagnation point pressure coefficient Cp,0 also
complexities.
agrees well with theoretical prediction i.e.
Modified Newtonian Theory. The overall
deviation of present IB method and
theoretical result can be attributed to the fact
that the latter is based on local inclination
technique, which has its own inherent
limitations.
Figure 5: Cp plot comparison
Figure 3. Cp plot comparison
Figure 6. Pressure contour for flow

past double ellipse at M∞=5
CONCLUSIONS
Figure 4. Pressure contour for flow past In this present work, we develop a hybrid
sphere at M∞=8 cartesian immersed boundary method based
flow solver for simulating inviscid
297
Brahmachary et al.*
compressible fluid flow solver. A simple Natarajan G Shende N V and Balakrishnan

IDW method based reconstruction technique 2009 Ɍ-Parameter: A local Truncation
is used to calculate the fluid properties at the Error based Adaptive Framework for
immersed cell. To test the efficacy of the Finite Volume Compressible Flow
fluid solver, two test cases viz. flow past Solvers Computers and Fluids 38
sphere and 2D flow past double ellipse was 17999-1822
attempted. It was observed that the present Pan D 2006 An Immersed Boudnary Method
solver was able to generate results which for Incompressible Flows Using
agrees very well with existing literature i.e. Volume of Body Function International
numerical and experimental.
Journal for Numerical Methods in
REFERENCES Fluids 50 733-750
Franke R 2001 Scattered Data Interpolation: Peskin C S 1972 Flow Patters Around Heart
Tests of Some Methods Mathematics of Valves: A Numerical Method Journal of
Computation 38 181-20 Computational Physics 10 252-271
Gao T Tseng Y H and Lu X Y 2007 An Tseng Y H and Ferziger J H 2003 A Ghost
Improved Hybrid Cartesian/Immersed Cell Immersed Boundary Method for
Boundary Method for Fluid-Solid Flows Flow in Complex Geometry Journal of
International Journal of Numerical Computational Physics 192 593-623.
Methods on Fluids 55 1189-1211
Tullio M D Palma P D Iaccarino G Pascazio
Gilmanov A Sotiropoulos F and Balaras E G and Napolitano M 2007 An Immersed
2003 A General Reconstruction Boundary Method for Compressible
Algorithm For Sumulating Flows with Flows Using Local Grid Refinement
Complex 3D Immersed Boundaries on Journal of Computational Physics 225
Cartesian Grids Journal of 2098-2117.
Computational Physics 191 660-669
Ye T Mittal R Udaykumar H S and Shyy W
Gustaffson B Eva P and Sjogreen B 1999 An Accurate Cartesian Grid
1991Solving Flow Equations for High Method for Viscous Incompressible
Mach Numbers on Overlapping Grids Flows with Complex Immersed
Springer-Verlag 2 585-599 Boundaries Journal of Computational
John B and Kulkarni V 2013 Investigation of Physics 15 209-240
Energy Deposition Technique for Drag
Reduction at Hypersonic Speeds
Applied Mechanics and Materials 367
222-227
Majumdar S Iaccarino G and Durbin P 2001
RANS Solvers with Adaptive Structured
Boundary Non-Conforming Grids
Annual Research Briefs NASA
Research Centre/Stanford University
Centre for Turbulent research Stanford
CA 353-366
298
ICCMS2016
LATTICE BOLTZMANN SIMULATION OF MIXED CONVECTION

AROUND A HEATED SQUARE CYLINDER PLACED IN A LID DRIVEN
CAVITY
GERA B.1 and SINGH R. K.2
1
2
Abstract: Mixed (forced–natural) convective heat transfer around a heated square

cylinder located inside a lid driven cavity has been studied numerically using the
lattice Boltzmann method for Reynolds number (Re)=100-1000 with the
corresponding Richardson number (Ri) 0.1≤Ri≤10. The size of heated square, D and
the enclosure height, H define the aspect ratio of the geometry test case (aspect ratio,
B = D/H). In present study, the aspect ratio was fixed at 0.2. The top wall of the cavity
moves to the right at a constant velocity and is kept at a low temperature of T C ,
whereas the stationary bottom wall is kept at a constant high temperature of T H .The
lattice Boltzmann formulation was used as the governing equation for flow field while
energy equation was solved explicitly on same lattice using finite difference method.
Two dimensional nine-velocity model was used for the computation of the velocity
field. The results are presented in the form of isotherm plots as well as the average
Nusselt number at the top surface of the heated square cylinder. The computational
results quantify the influence of Reynolds number and Richardson number on flow
pattern and Nusselt number. The results were also compared with other reported
numerical results.
Keywords: Mixed convection; Lid driven cavity; LBM; Laminar flow.
INTRODUCTION publications on natural convective heat

Mixed convection combines natural transfer from a heated circular cylinder, the
convection, which is driven by sustained mixed convective heat transfer problem from
temperature gradients with enforced flow of a heated body has not been investigated to the
the working fluid. It plays a key role in many same extent. Mixed convection, in which,
technological problems such as natural both natural convection and forced
ventilation, optimal and energy-efficient air convection are dominant and are in a balance
conditioning in buildings, cars, and aircrafts. condition, arises in many technological
Significant work has been done for a long processes. Mixed convection heat transfer
time on heat transfer from a heated body plays a dominant role in many engineering
inside an enclosure. But most of the studies applications such as the cooling of electronic
were limited to either natural convection or equipment, nuclear and chemical reactors,
circular cylinder inside an enclosure. In thermal storage system, etc. [De and Dalal,
contrast to the overwhelming number of 2006]. In the present work laminar mixed
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bgera@barc.gov.in 299

Gera and Singh
convection around a heated square cylinder temperature of T C , whereas the stationary

placed in lid driven cavity has been studied bottom wall is kept at a constant high
numerically using lattice Boltzmann method temperature of T H . The different Reynolds
(LBM). numbers 100, 400, and 1000 and Richardson
number (Ri=Gr/Re2) 0.1≤Ri≤10 has been
In the last few years, LBM has become as an
considered, where Gr is Grashof number.
important alternative computational tool to
conventional computational fluid dynamics The enclosure side length is H and the left
(CFD) methods. LBM describes the fluid and right walls areno-slip adiabatic
behaviour in a mesoscopic model whereas boundaries. The variation in density of liquid
conventional CFD tools model the metal was modeled with Bossinesque
macroscopic fluid properties. LBM uses a approximation and all other properties were
simple kinetic model obeying fundamental assumed to be constant. The Grashof
conservation laws in order to simulate numbers was defined as
macroscopic hydrodynamics. LBM lies in= Gr ρ g β (TH − TC ) H / µ . Where g is
2 3 2
between the microscopic and the gravitational acceleration ρ is fluid density,

macroscopic levels by modelling the fluid
µ is viscosity, k is thermal conductivity, β is
behaviour with the evolution of averaged
distributions of particles. The governing coefficient of thermal expansion. It was
equation of particle distribution function is assumed that the fluid is Newtonian and
solved using explicit finite-difference method incompressible, the flow is laminar and the
in the nearly incompressible limit with the effect of viscous dissipation is negligible.
second order accuracy in both time and space The gravity acts in the vertical direction and
[Chen and Doolen, 1998, Nourgaliev et al., fluid density variations are neglected except
2003]. Various formulations have been in the buoyancy term and radiation heat
developed of this method to simulate verity transfer is negligible.
of engineering and industrial flows like
Moving Isothermal Wall T , U
H wall
turbulent flow, compressible flow etc. LBM
has several intrinsic features like low
Adiabatic Adiabatic
numerical diffusion, scalable performance in
g
parallel computing environment, coding H
simplicity, and robustness in dealing with Isothermal Square Cylinder

T =(T +T )/2
complex boundary conditions [Zhou et al., S H C
Isothermal Wall T C
2004]. During the last few years, many
academic and industrial problems have been H
Y
successfully solved using LBM and it plays X
an increasingly important role in engineering
Figure 1. Problem definition along with
research and applications. boundary conditions.
The geometry of the enclosure considered for
the analysis is depicted in figure 1. In the
NUMERICAL DETAILS
present study, fluid flow and heat transfer in
a lid-driven cavity with a square cylinder has For the present computation a D2Q9 lattice
been investigated. The topwall of the cavity has been chosen, where 2 represents the
moves to the right direction at constant spatial dimension and 9 represents the
velocity and is kept at a constant low number of velocities in the truncated velocity
300
Lattice Boltzmann Simulation of Mixed Convection Around A Heated Square Cylinder Placed in A Lid
Driven Cavity
space. The D2Q9 lattice has the geometry of CONCLUSION

a regular Cartesian grid. The fluid dynamics A LBM model was developed to simulate the
part (mass and momentum evolution) is 2D mixed convection from a heated square
represented by LBM while energy evolution cylinder in a lid driven cavity. Governing
is determined by additional energy equation for temperature was solved
conservation equation. Flow and energy explicitly where LBM was used for evolution
evaluation are coupled through body force of flow field on the same lattice. The Nusselt
term in LBM. This approach provides much number is strongly influenced by Richardson
number.
improved numerical stability and has been
used widely by many researchers (Zhou et
al., 2004).The energy scalar transport
equation has been solved explicitly using
Lax-Wendroff method on the same lattice.

The present simulation was validated against
the results available from Cheng, 2011 for the
(a). Isotherms for Re = 300 (left) and Re =
mixed convection in lid driven cavity without
900 (right) at Ri =1 (Cheng, 2011)
heated cylinder inside the cavity. The
simulations were performed at Re =300 and
900 and Ri =1 and isotherms obtained from
the present simulation are shown in figure 2
along with the results of Cheng, 2011. It is
clear that the present simulation results are in
good agreement with published literature.
Figure 3 show the isotherms for various (b). Isotherms for Re = 300 (left) and Re =
values of Rayleigh numbers for the 900 (right) at Ri =1 (present work)
configuration considered in the present work.
At low Ri , the heat transfer is dominant by Figure 2. Comparison of isotherms with
forced convection. As Ri increases the literature.
distribution of isotherms becomes symmetric
while at low Ri isotherms are denser near
right wall due to velocity of top wall. For a
given Ri , if Re increases the Grashof
number increase is very high. At high Re the
influence of natural convection increases for
a similar Ri . The rate of heat transfer
decreases with increase in Ri at a given Re
for all Re considered in the present analysis.
The heat transfer rate from cylinder is highly
influenced by Ri as compared to Re . (a). Ri =0.01
301
Gera and Singh
enclosure Int J Heat and Mass Transf 49

4608-4623.
Nourgaliev R R Dinh T N Theofanous T G
and Joseph D The lattice Boltzmann
equation method: theoretical
interpretation, numeric and implications
International Journal Multiphase Flow
29 117–169.
(b). Ri =0.1 Zhou Y Zhang R Staroselsky I and Chen H
2004 Numerical simulation of laminar
and turbulent buoyancy-driven flows
using a lattice Boltzmann based
algorithm Int J Heat and Mass Transf47
4869–4879.
(c). Ri =1
(d). Ri =10
Figure 3. Isotherms for different Rayleigh

number at Re = 400.
REFERENCES
Chen S and Doolen GD 1998 Lattice
Boltzmann method for fluid flows Annu
Rev Fluid Mech 30329–364.
Cheng T S 2011 Characteristics of mixed
convection heat transfer in a lid-driven
square cavity with various Richardson
and Prandtl numbers Int J Therm Sci 50
197-205.
De A K and Dalal A 2006 A numerical study
of natural convection around a square,
horizontal, heated cylinder placed in an
302
ICCMS2016
AN IMMERSED BOUNDARY METHOD FOR MIXED CONVECTION

FLOWS WITH LARGE TEMPERATURE GRADIENT
KUMAR M.* and NATARAJAN G.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Guwahati India.
Abstract: We propose an immersed boundary method to solve mixed convection

flows in enclosures with large temperature differences. The present algorithm is based
on a staggered/non--staggered finite volume framework for incompressible flows
which is modified to capture the fluid-solid interface by Volume-of-Solid method for
flows with heat transfer. The framework solves a single equation for normal
momentum as opposed to the standard collocated approach, but avoids complexities
of the staggered framework by computing fluxes as in the collocated approach. The
Volume-of-Body function method is used to invoke Dirichlet boundary condition for
both velocity and temperature. The resulting pressure correction equation is a variable
coefficient Poisson equation which is solved efficiently with the help of an algebraic
multigrid preconditioned GMRES solver. The energy equation is discretely solved, in
a segregated manner, using a high-resolution convective scheme with second-order
temporal differencing as are the momentum equations. Numerical studies are carried
out for flows with small and large temperature difference in enclosures. Studies show
that proposed method can successfully simulate Boussinesq convection.
Keywords: Solid-fraction; Finite Volume Method; Staggered/non-staggered.
INTRODUCTION body where the extrapolation near the

immersed boundary is also extended for the
Immersed boundary method is widely used in temperature. Diffuse interface method has
complex geometries for solving been studied by different researchers (Pan,
incompressible flows and heat transfer. 2006; De, 2016), where volume of body
Conventional approach in body fitted mesh function is used as a parameter that relates
has its own limitation and this has promoted a the flow velocity inside and outside of the
new class of methods collectively called body.
Immersed boundary method. Peskin, (1973); Our aim is to develop a diffuse interface
Lai and Peskin, (2000) developed the immersed boundary method which is capable
continuous body force approach to simulate of solving both Boussinesq and non-
interactions between fluid flow and elastic Boussinesq mixed convection in a
structure. Yang and Stern (2012) proposed staggered/non-staggered framework. The
discrete imposition of boundary conditions to efficacy of proposed method is demonstrated
remove the numerical difficulties associated by carrying out detailed investigation of
with direct forcing method. Sharp interface natural convection flows in closed enclosure
method was proposed by Choi et.al. (Choi with small and large temperature differences.
et.al. 2014) for simulating natural convection
in enclosures while Zheng et. al. (2008) NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY
computed forced convection over a moving
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: mukesh.kr@iitg.ernet.in 303

Kumar and Natarajan
The governing equations for fluid flow and order convection scheme while central
heat transfer which are non-dimensionlised differencing is adopted for the viscous terms.
with suitable length (L), velocity (U), and An implicit solution approach which is first
temperature (∆T) scales, for two dimensional order accurate in time is employed and the
quasi-incompressible flows can be written as, resulting non-linear system of equations is
solved using the Newton-Krylov approach.
∂ρ
+ ∇ ⋅( ρu) = 0 (1) The momentum field at the cell centroids is
∂t
∂( ρ u) then reconstructed using a defect--correction
+ ∇ ⋅( ρuu) = −∇p + C1 (∇ ⋅τ ) + C2 (1 − ρ)eˆ y (2) algorithm as described in Natarajan and
∂t
∂( ρT ) Sotiropoulos (2011). The auxiliary
+ ∇ ⋅( ρuT )= C3∇2T (3) momentum equations are then used to define
∂t
a source term for the pressure--correction
Poisson equation, which is a variable
where, u and T are non-dimensional velocity
coefficient equation with a source term also
in Cartesian directions and temperature
derived from the divergence condition. This
respectively. Non-dimensional coefficientC 1 , equation is again linear and is solved using
C 2 and C 3 are tabulated in Table 1 where SAAMG--preconditioned GMRES via the
LiS library. This is a segregated approach,
non-dimensional parameters Prandtl,
which is popularly employed for genuinely
GrashofGay-lussac, and Reynolds number
incompressible flows, and we have extended
are defined as follows.
the methodology to handle quasi--
ν g β L3 (T − Tc ) UL
incompressible flows such as those
Pr = , Gr = 2h , β(Th − Tc ),
Ga = Re = encountered in natural convection with large
α ν ν
temperature differences in the present work.
Table 1.Non-dimensional coefficient of The velocity V b, temperature T b, and position
governing equations of immersed body are defined by appropriate
governing equations. The cells inside and
C1 C2 C3 outside the body are identified in a suitable
1 1
manner and the volume fraction of the solid
Force convection
- (VOS) is computed and then used to identify
Re RePr
Pr 1 1 fluid cells (Φ b =0), the solid cells (Φ b =1),

Natural convection Ra Ra Pr and immersed cells (0<Φ b <1).
1 Gr 1
Mixed convection Re GaRe2 PrRe
RESULTS & DISCUSSIONS
The governing equations derived are In order to assess the performance of
discretized using a finite volume method proposed method, we consider natural
employing a hybrid staggered/non--staggered Boussinesq convection in a rhombus
framework (Natarajan and Sotiropoulos, enclosure consists of heated cylinder of
2009). The conservation laws are solved for diameter 0.2L placed at vertical offset of 0.2
the conserved quantities, with the key from centre of enclosures. All walls are
difference in the present framework being isothermal and no-slip boundary condition is
that only a single momentum equation for imposed on wall.
normal momentum at the faces is solved.
This equation is discretized using a second--
304
An Immersed Boundary method for Mixed convection flows
(a) (b)
5
Figure 1:Isotherms (a) and streamlines (b) at Ra=10 and offset distance is (0.2).
(a) (b) (c)

Figure 2: Isotherms (a), streamlines (b), comparison of local Nusselt number distribution
along cold walls at Ra=106.
Table 2: Comparison of average Nusselt and having bottom and top walls that are
number on cylinder with other adiabatic with the cold side walls that are
computations. isothermal is considered. No-slip boundary
conditions are imposed for all walls.
Present De (2016) Choi Numerical simulations are performed at
et.al(2014) Ra=106, Pr =10 with time step ∆t =5X10-
3
and the domain is discretised using
Avg. Nu 9.110 9.144 8.950 a100X100 uniform Cartesian mesh. Figure
(2) (a, b) show the symmetric isotherms and
Computations are performed at Ra=105, Pr streamlines in the enclosure. Nusselt number
=10 with ∆t=5X10-3, on 200X200 uniform distribution along cold wall is presented in
Cartesian grid. Figure 1 shows the symmetric Figure 2(c) and its shows good agreement
pattern of isotherms and streamlines in the with the computational results of
rhombus enclosure. Average Nusselt number Pachecoet.al (Pacheco et.al. 2007, despite the
on cylinder wall is tabulated in Table 2 which coarseness of the mesh used in the study.
shows good agreement with other These simulations give credence to the ability
computations. of the proposed algorithm and flow solver for
The algorithm is also applied to study natural simulations of convective flows.
Boussinesq convection in an enclosed cavity
consisting of a heated cylinder placed at point CONCLUSION
(0.5, 0.6). A square cavity of unit dimension
305
Kumar and Natarajan
A diffuse interface immersed boundary Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2011 IDeC

method to handle mixed convection flow is (k): A new velocity reconstruction
proposed. The algorithm employs hybrid algorithm on arbitrarily polygonal
staggered/non-staggered framework for the staggered meshes J. Comput. Phys 230
solution of the governing equations, which
6583–6604.
are solved everywhere in the domain. A
single equation is solved throughout, with the Pacheco V Pacheco A and Rafael J 2007
boundary conditions embedded into the General scheme for the boundary
equation through the volume fraction of the conditions in convective and diffusive
body.Studies on flow with a heated cylinder
heat transfer with immersed boundary
in square and rhombus demonstrate the
capability of the algorithm is capable to methods Int. J. Numer. Methods Fluids
simulate Boussinesq flows. Non-Boussinesq 50 733-750.
convective flows and their simulations shall Pan D 2006 An immersed boundary method
be discussed in the full length manuscript. for incompressible flows using volume
REFERENCES of body function Int. J. Numer. Methods
Choi C Jeong S Ha M Y and Yoon H S 2014 Fluids 50 733-750.
Effect of a circular cylinders location on Peskin C S 1972 Flow patterns around heart
natural convection in a rhombus valves: a numerical method
enclosure Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer J.Comput.Phys 2 252–271.
7360–73.
Yang J and Stern F 2012A simple and
De A 2016 A diffuse interface immersed efficient direct forcing immersed
boundary method for convective heat boundary framework for fluid structure
and fluid flow Int. J. Heat Mass interactions J. Comput. Phys 231 5039–
Transfer92 957-969. 5061.
De A 2016 A diffuse interface immersed Zhang N Zheng Z and Eckels S 2008 Study
boundary method for convective heat of heat-transfer on the surface of a
and fluid flow J. Heat Transfer129 circular cylinder in flow using an
1560. immersed-boundary Int. J. Heat Fluid
Lai M C and Peskin C S 2000An immersed Flow 29 1558-1566.
boundary method with formal second-
order accuracy and reduced numerical
viscosity J Comput Phys 160705–719.
Mittal R and Iaccarino G 2005 Immersed
boundary methods Annu Rev. Fluid
Mech 37239–261.
Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2009
Adaptive finite volume incompressible
Navier–Stokes solver for 3D flows with
complex immersed boundaries
Proceedings of the 62nd APS-DFD
meeting Minneapolis.
306
ICCMS2016
GENUINELY MULTIDIMENSIONAL CURE FOR NUMERICAL SHOCK

INSTABILITY IN A CONTACT PRESERVING RIEMANN SOLVER
SIMON S. and MANDAL J. C.*
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India
Abstract: Numerical shock instabilities plague the most advanced contact preserving
Riemann solvers available today in one form or the other. The contamination of
physical quantities produced by these instabilities may have catastrophic
consequences in engineering applications if left unresolved. For example carbuncle
phenomenon could cause errors in the prediction of maximum heat transfer rate at
stagnation point of blunt body in hypersonic flow. Some studies have indicated a
connection between the inaccuracies arising from dimensionally split extensions of
such intrinsically one dimensional schemes to multidimensions and these instabilities.
The present investigation has shown that genuinely multidimensional modelling of an
otherwise shock unstable scheme might act as a possible cure.
Keywords: Carbuncle phenomenon; Riemann solvers; Genuinely
multidimensional schemes; Numerical shock instability.
INTRODUCTION produce unwanted diffusion and unphysical

oscillations [van Leer, 1992]. To overcome
Accurate and robust computing of high speed
this issue, several researchers have proposed
flows is still an active area of research. Crisp
genuinely multidimensional formulations of
resolution of nonlinear waves like shocks
such schemes [Balsara, 2010, Brio et al.,
pose a major challenge in this area. The
1997, Wendroff, 1999]. These schemes
problem is further complicated by the
incorporate a coupling between the transverse
presence of various intermediate
and longitudinal fluxes across interfaces.
characteristic fields like contact waves, shear
Another problem that plagues contact
waves, ignition fronts etc [Toro et al 2012]
preserving Riemann solvers in particular is
and their interaction with the nonlinear
the occurrence of numerical shock
waves.
instabilities [Quirk, 1994]. These instabilities
The advent of contact capturing characteristic primarily arise during computing of flows
based upwind schemes is considered a with strong normal shocks [Dumbser, 2004].
milestone in this regard. Riemann solvers of In their prominent forms, namely the
Roe [Roe 1981] and HLLC [Toro et al 1994] Carbuncle phenomenon [Peery et al., 1988],
and the AUSM scheme [Liou et al, 1993] are the standing normal shock instability
some of the popular schemes of this type. [Dumser, 2004] and the odd-even decoupling
However, their inherent one dimensional phenomenon [Quirk, 1994], these instabilities
construction poses a serious lacuna in their produce unphysical shock structures,
extension to practically significant two and contaminate flow field values and affect
three dimensional problems. The convergence [Kitamura et. al., 2007]. Off
conventional way of using these schemes to late, a contact preserving Riemann solvers
solve one dimensional Riemann problems developed for Euler equations named
along Cartesian directions has been found to HLLCPS [Mandal et al., 2012] has been
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: mandal@aero.iitb.ac.in 307

Simon and Mandal
shown to be free of such instabilities. This 25 X 25 Cartesian grid. Although a steady

scheme splits the Euler equations into state solution that preserves the initial shock
convective and pressure components based structure is expected, instabilities develop
on AUSM scheme or Zha-Bilgen scheme and and lead to contaminated field values.
discretize them independently. While the
convective terms are upwinded based on an
interfacial Mach number parameter, a HLL
type of discretization is applied on the
pressure terms. Toro has analytically
validated such a treatment [Toro et al., 2012].
They also introduced a new PDE splitting
strategy and suggested that intermediate
wave resolution is the most accurate when
the pressure terms are discretized using a
Riemann solver. By combining the
convective and pressure discretization of
Mandal (2012) with the PDE flux splitting of
Toro (2012). Xie (2015) has introduced a
contact preserving Riemann solver named K-
CUSP-X which is claimed to be free of
instabilities. As yet there is no general Figure 1.Density contours showing
consensus either on the cause of the presence of instability in original K-
instability or its cure. Literature is aplenty CUSP-X scheme
with ad-hoc fixes to cure the instability.
However increasing evidence has exposed a
definite relation between the treatment of
transverse fluxes through interfaces normal to
a shock wave and the instability. Based on
this several researchers have demonstrated
that multidimensional dissipation is indeed a
promising cure [Pandolfi et. al., 2001].
Nevertheless, there is no study yet about the
effect of genuinely multidimensional
schemes on the instability. The aim of this
work is twofold. Firstly it is demonstrated
that K-CUSP-X scheme may not be free of
instabilities in all situations. Later it is shown
that the instability that arises in this scheme
can be cured by a corresponding genuinely
multidimensional formulation similar to that Figure 2. Density contours showing lack
found in [Mandal et al JCP]. of instability in genuinely
multidimensional K-CUSP-X scheme
NUMERICAL EXPERIMENT
The result for first order K-CUSP-X scheme
One of the simplest test cases to ascertain the showing 50 density contours from 1.0 to 5.4
presence of shock instability in a scheme is shown in Figure 1 exposes the susceptibility
the standing normal shock instability of the scheme to the instability. Figure 2
proposed by Dumbser et. al., (2004). The shows similar density contours for the same
problem deals with simulation of a steady problem solved using a genuinely
normal shock wave corresponding to a Mach multidimensional extension of K-CUSP-X
number of 7 on a domain of 1.0 X 1.0 with a scheme. For such an extension, framework of
308
Genuinely Multidimensional Cure for Numerical Shock Instability IN A Contact Preserving Riemann
Solver
Mandal et al (2012) was adopted because of Euler equations of gas dynamics J

its lucid strategy for introducing contact Comput Phys 167(1) 177-195
waves. It is evident from the result that a Dumbser M Morschetta J M Gressier J 2004
genuinely multidimensional extension has A matrix stability analysis of the
indeed cured the scheme of its undesirable carbuncle phenomenon J Comput Phys
proneness for instabilities. 197 647-670
CONCLUSION Kitamura K Roe P Ismail F 2007 An
evaluation of Euler fluxes for
Many contact preserving Riemann solvers are
hypersonic flow computations AIAA
vulnerable to numerical shock instability.
2007-4465
Although no exact cause for this has been
identified, studies suggest a possible link Liou M S Steffen C J 1993 A new flux
between the lack of multidimensional splitting scheme J Comput Phys 107 23–
coupling between fluxes in the conventional 39
application of such solvers and the Mandal J C Panwar V 2012 Robust HLL-
occurrence of instabilities in higher type Riemann solver capable of
dimensional problems. The current work resolving contact discontinuity Comput
focussed on investigating the effect of a and Fluids 63 148–64
genuinely multidimensional modelling of one
such scheme on its instability tendency. To Mandal J C Vinay S 2015 A genuinely
this end, a conventional version of the multidimensional convective pressure
instability prone K-CUSP-X scheme was flux split Riemann solver for Euler
extended to a genuinely multidimensional equations J Comput Phys 297 669-688
framework. Based on the result from a steady Pandolfi M DAmbrosio D 2001 Numerical
normal shock problem, it may be inferred that instabilities in upwind methods: analysis
a genuinely multidimensional framework and cures for the Carbuncle
which embodies cross coupling between the Phenomenon J Comput Phys 66 271-
longitudinal and transverse fluxes might be a 301
cure for the unfavourable instabilities.
Peery K M Imlay S T 1988 Blunt-body flow
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT simulations AIAA 88-2924
The authors wish to thank Vinay Sharma for Quirk J J 1994 A contribution to the great
his active involvement in the code Riemann solver debate Int J Numer
development. Meth Fl 18 555-574
Roe P L 1981 Approximate Riemann solvers,
REFERENCES parameter vectors and difference
Balsara D S 2010 Multidimensional HLLE schemes J Comput Phys 43 357-372
Riemann solver: application to Euler Toro E F Spruce M Speares W 1994
and magneto-hydrodynamic flows J Restoration of the contact surface in the
Comput Phys 229(6) 1970-1993 HLL- Riemann solver Shock Waves 4
Bram van Leer 1992 Progress in 25–34
multidimensional upwind differencing Toro E F Vázquez-Cendón M E 2012 Flux
Proceedings of the 13th International splitting schemes for the Euler equations
Conference on Numerical Methods in Comput and Fluids 70 1–12
Fluid Dynamic 1-26 Rome July 1992
Wendroff B 1999 A two-dimensional HLLE
Brio M Zakharian A R and Webb G M 1997 Riemann solver and associated
Two dimensional Riemann solver for Godunov-type difference scheme for gas
309
Simon and Mandal
dynamics Comput Math Appl 38 175-

185
Xie W J Hua L Pan S Tian Z Y 2015 On the
accuracy and robustness of a new flux
splitting method Acta Physica Sinica
64(2).
310
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF LID-DRIVEN SQUARE CAVITY USING

STAGGERED GRID BASED FINITE VOLUME METHOD
VARMA I. J.1*, MANIYERI R.1 and KANG S.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology Karnataka, Surathkal, India
2
Microfluidic Flow and Mixing Lab Department of Mechanical Engineering Dong-A University, Saha-
Gu, Busan Republic of Korea
Abstract: Numerical study of two-dimensional lid-driven square cavity is a bench

mark problem in the field of computational fluid dynamics. Inspired by this, in this
paper, we present a numerical model to study the two-dimensional lid driven square
cavity problem using a staggered grid based finite volume method. Accordingly, the
continuity and momentum equations are solved to capture the fluid dynamic features
inside the cavity for two cases-one in which only the top wall is moving and the
second in which both top and bottom walls are moving in same direction. In the
present numerical model, the pressure Poisson equation is solved by using successive
over-relaxation method and the first order Euler explicit method is used for time
discretization to obtain the fluid velocities. First of all, the code developed in
FORTRAN is validated by comparing our numerical results with other researcher’s
results. Later, numerical simulations are performed to explore the physics of
formation of different vortices for one-sided and two-sided lid-driven square cavity
for different Reynolds numbers.
Keywords: Finite volume method; Staggered grid system; Continuity and momentum
equations; Successive over-relaxation method
INTRODUCTION review it is found that the numerical

Study of lid-driven square cavity is a simulations are done widely by using Lattice
fundamental problem in fluid dynamics Boltzmann method and finite difference
which finds immense applications in method for lid-driven square cavity [Blohm
industries. Although the physical problem is and Kuhlmann, 2002; Kuhlmann, 1997;
simple, the flow behavior possesses a Perumal and Dass 2010]. Finite volume
complex flow feature which involves the method based numerical simulations on lid-
vortex dynamics, flow stability, and driven square cavity using staggered grid
bifurcation etc. Perumal and Dass (2010) system are not much reported in the
have done numerical simulations on two- literature. Motivated by this, the present
sided lid-driven square cavity using Lattice paper deals with the development of a
Boltzmann method. Lemee et al. (2015) numerical model to simulate the flow in a
studied two-dimensional symmetrical two lid-driven square cavity using staggered grid
sided lid-driven square cavity at different based finite volume method. Firstly, the
Reynolds numbers using second order finite developed code in FORTRAN will be
difference method. Through the literature validated using bench mark results of Ghia et
311
Varma et al.
al. (1983). Secondly, numerical simulations

will be performed to capture the vortex
dynamics in lid-driven square cavity for
different Reynolds number with motion of
top wall alone and then the motion of top and
bottom walls simultaneously in the same
direction. Figure 2. Staggered grid system
[Mohammed Hasnat et al., 2015].
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING
AND NUMERICAL PROCEDURE In figure 2, a general node on staggered grid
system is taken as (i,j). The velocity in x-
Figure 1 shows the schematic diagram of the
direction is defined at nodes w and eas u i-1, j
physical domain involving one sided lid-
and u i, j . Similarly velocity in y-direction is
driven square cavity with top wall moving
defined at the nodes n and s as v i, j and v i,j-1 .
with finite velocity where as the remaining
The pressure is defined at the center of grid
walls are stationary. For the case of two sided
as P i, j at the point P.
lid-driven square cavity both top and bottom
walls move simultaneously with constant RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
velocity in the same direction. We use the
non-dimensional form of continuity and First of all, a code developed in FORTRAN
Navier-Stoke equations to study the fluid is used to study the flow behavior in a lid-
dynamics in a two-dimensional lid-driven driven square cavity for Re=100 with top
square cavity given by wall moving. The code is validated by
comparing our numerical results with that of
∇. 𝐮 = 0(1) Ghia et al. (1983).
𝜕𝐮 1
� + 𝐮. ∇𝐮� = −∇p + ∇2 𝐮(2)
𝜕𝑡 𝑅𝑒
In the present work, staggered grid based

finite volume method is used for
discretization of continuity and momentum
equations. In the numerical solution strategy,
the pressure Poisson equation is solved using
successive over-relaxation method. First
order Euler explicit method is used for time
discretization to obtain the fluid velocities. Figure 3. Variationof u velocity along y-
direction Re=100.
Figure 1.Schematic diagram of the

physical domain representing lid-driven Figure 4. Variation of v velocity along x-
square cavity. direction Re=100.
312
Numerical Simulation Of Lid-Driven Square Cavity Using Staggered Grid Based Finite Volume Method
Figures 3 and 4 shows the steady state x-

component velocity along the vertical
centerline and the y-component velocity
along the horizontal centerline in the cavity
at Re=100. The agreement between present
results and those of Ghia et al. (1983) is
excellent. This proves there liability of our
developed numerical model.
Secondly, the developed code is used to
perform numerical simulation for the case of Figure 7. Stream lines for parallel wall
motion Re=1000.
two sided lid-driven square cavity with top
and bottom walls moving in the same
direction with constant velocity. The
simulations are done for Reynolds number
100 to 2000. Figures5-8 shows the stream
line patterns for Re = 100, 400, 1000 and
2000 which are in good agreement with the
results of Perumal and Dass (2010).
Figure 8. Stream lines for parallel motion

Re=2000.
It is found that both walls moving in same
direction generate their own primary
vortices. At Re=100, figure 5 shows the
stream line patterns with two rotating
primary vortices symmetrical to each other
are formed from the center line of y axis. At
Figure 5. Stream lines for parallel wall Re=400, figure 6 shows the stream line
motion Re=100.
patterns in which it can be observed that a
pair of counter-rotating secondary vortices
are symmetrically placed about the horizontal
centerline near the center of the right wall.
Also, figures 7 and 8 shows the stream line
patterns for Re=1000 and 2000 respectively.
It is noticed that with increase in Reynolds
number primary vortices move towards the
centers of top and bottom halves of cavity
and the secondary vortices grow in size.
CONCLUSION
Figure 6. Stream lines for parallel wall
motionRe=400. In this paper, we have numerically studied
the fluid dynamics of lid-driven square
313
Varma et al.
cavity using staggered grid based finite Patil D V et al 2006 Lattice Boltzmann
volume method. The numerical model is simulation of lid-driven flow in deep
validated by comparing our numerical results cavities computers and fluids 35 1116–
with that of the other researcher’s results for 112
the case of single wall (top wall) motion. An Perumal A and Dass A K 2011 Multiplicity
excellent agreement is obtained between our of steady solutions in two-dimensional
numerical result and that of other lid-driven cavity flows by Lattice
Boltzmann method Computers &
researcher’s results proving the reliability for
Mathematics with Applications 61
our code. Further, numerical simulations are 1051-1061
carried out using the same developed model
to capture the vortex dynamics of two sided Perumal D A 2012 Simulation of flow in two
sided lid-driven deep cavities by finite
lid-driven square cavity for different
difference method Journal of Applied
Reynolds numbers. We strongly believe that Science in the Thermodynamics and
the developed code can be easily extended to Fluid Mechanics61-6
study the fluid dynamic features of various
Perumal D A and Dass A K 2010 Simulation
cases like effect of aspect ratio, effect of of incompressible flows in two-sided
oscillatory lid motion, effect of anti-parallel lid-driven square cavities Part I – FDM
wall motion, etc. The above mentioned CFD Letters 1(2) 13-24
works are under progress. Perumal D A and Dass A K 2010 Simulation
of incompressible flows in two-sided
REFERNCES lid-driven square cavities Part II – LBM
Blohm C H and Kuhlmann H C 2002 The CFD Letters 1(2) 25-38
two-sided lid-driven cavity experiments
on stationary and time dependent flows
Journal of Fluid Mechanics 450 67-95
Ghia U et al 1983 High-Re solutions for
incompressible flow using the Navier–
Stokes equations and a multi grid
method Journal of Computational
Physics 48 387-411
Kuhlmann H C et al 1997 Flow in two-sided
lid-driven cavities: non-uniqueness,
instability and cellular structures
Journal of Computational Physics 336
267-299
Lemee T et al 2015 Multiple stable solutions
in the 2D symmetrical two-sided square
lid-driven cavity Computers & Fluids
119 204–212
Mohammed Hasnat et al 2015 A numerical
Technique Finite Volume Method for
Solving Diffusion 2D Problem
and Science 4 35-41
314
ICCMS2016
NUMUMERICAL INVESTIGATION OF NACA 0025 and NACA 0021 OF

STRAIGHT BLADE DARRIEUS TURBINE FOR HYDRODYNAMIC
APPLICATIONS
PATIL B. S.1, KUMAR K.2, THAKARE H. R.3*, NARKHEDE M. M.4
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, SardarVallabhbhai National Institute of Technology, Surat. India.
2
Mechanical Engineering Department, Shri Sad Vidya Mandal Institute of Technology, Bharuch, India.
3
Mechanical Engineering Department, SNJB’s Late Sau. K. B. Jain College of Engineering, Chandwad,
India.
4
Electronics Engineering Department, Pimpari Chinchwad College of Engineering Nigadi Pune, India.
Abstract: This paper presents CFD analysis carried out to study effect of two NACA
blade profiles and various number of blades on coefficient of power of straight blade
Darreius turbine for hydrodynamics applications. Results of study are noticed to be in
good agreement with published literature. CFD analysis has been carried out using
RANS unsteady calculations for three, four and five-bladed rotor configuration of
NACA 0025, NACA 0021. Also, characteristics of flow field have been investigated
for different values of tip speed ratio, to find out the influence of various blade number
and two blade profiles on flow geometric features and dynamic quantities, such as
rotor torque and power. The profiles of torque and power have been compared for the
three analyzed configurations of NACA 0025 taking as reference and the effect of
various blade numbers and two blade profiles on overall rotor performance has been
investigated. After that optimise design of straight blade Darreius turbine (vertical-axis
water turbine) for hydrodynamics applications has been proposed.
Keywords: Straight blade Darreius VAWT, CFD, NACA 0025, NACA 0021
INTRODUCTION Troposkien shape (2006). After that,

vertical axis designs, consisting of straight
Presence of rivers or canals is observed in
bladed configuration, were discovered
most of the parts of India almost throughout under different titles, such as “H-Darrieus”
the year with full of water current. Hence or “Squirrel Cage Darrieus” turbines Khan
there is a need for a simple hydro-turbine (2006). Hill et al. studied physics of self
which can take advantage of these naturally starting of H rotor Darrieus for steady
available sources. Strong candidate for the atmospheric conditions. Islam et al. (2008)
utilization of these hydropower sources is studied essential aerodynamic models
Darrieus turbine which does not require which are used to predict the performance
as well as to design Darrieus-type Vertical
dam. Because of its high performance
Axis Wind Turbine (VAWT) in straight-
coefficient and simplicity in fabrication. bladed configuration. They proposed five
G.J.M Darrieus (1931) invented a new aerodynamic models namely single stream
turbine with the objective to generate tube, double stream tube, multiple stream
electrical power from wind energy and he tube, cascade model and vortex model.
patented this in 1931. His patent made use Howell et al. suggested that straight turbine
of a set of curved blades having the shape rotor blade which was operated with an
of a perfectly flexible cable, known as aspect ratio of 4:1. The problem with water
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:thakare.hitesh@gmail.com 315

Patil et al.
turbine is that cavitations can be present variation. The essential geometrical

prominently. Also, for Troposkien-shaped characteristics used during analysis listed in
blades used in case of water, dynamic Table 1 below. The value of solidity  has
forces are larger than centrifugal forces been taken as 0.5, 0.67 and 0.83 for 3, 4 and
which put the blade in compression and 5 bladed rotor configurations respectively
thereby buckle on the upstream pass Kirke
Table1. Essential geometrical features of
et. al. Khan et al. (2006) compared hydro
the analyzed rotor
and wind turbines. The power of VAWT
means straight bladed Darrieus type rotor is Parameter Value in mm
influenced by turbine solidity, tip speed
ratio, inlet velocity, and main number of D rotor 1030
blades. The coefficient of power Solidity H rotor 1 (2D simulation)
(  ) is defined as the ratio of product of
Blade profile NACA0025, NACA0021
number of blades (N) and (C) chord length
of aerofoil of each blade divided by twice c 85.8
the product of radius of turbine R and it is Spoke to blade
NC 0.25c
given by   connections
2R
Howell et al. observed that rotational DESCRIPTION OF THE
velocity of turbine is influenced by solidity, NUMERICAL FLOW FIELD
for which the turbine can reach its Here, mesh has been divided into three parts:
maximum performance. Castelli et al. 1. The rectangular outer zone depicting the
(2012) carried out numerical analysis and overall computational domain and having
observed that with increase in number of a circular opening cantered on the turbine
blades, maximum power coefficient was rotational axis. This has been identified as
reached for lower angular velocities. Domain sub-grid, as shown in Figure 2.
However, turbine efficiency decreased by 2. The circular inner zone indicating the
some magnitude. This work has been Rotor sub grid, which consists of moving
considered as reference for validations mesh which is rotating with rotor angular
present CFD study. velocity ω as shown in Figure 3and 4.
3. Control circle around hydrofoil with
MODEL GEOMETRY AND interface boundary conditions as shown in
BOUNDARY CONDICTIONS Figure 6. In the present work, inlet and
In the present study, 2D CFD analysis of outlet were located respectively 37 rotor
flow field around 3, 4 and 5 bladed Darrieus diameters upstream and 60 rotor diameters
rotors has been performed. The objective is to downstream relative to the rotor test
determine the influence of number of blades section shown in Figure 2. Time step size
on the performance of the turbine. All taken as the period of time taken by the
geometry and boundary conditions are taken rotor to make 1° rotation. Convergence
from Castelli (2012) The solution is criterion for residuals for each physical
calculated using unstructured moving mesh time step was set to 10-5.The SST k-ω
which is having the same angular velocity as model has the capability to capture proper
that of rotor blades. The characteristics of behaviour in the near wall layers and
flow field were investigated for different separated flow regions. A 2D pressure
values of tip speed ratio. Analysis is carried based implicit solver was selected,
out about the changes in the curves of rotor suitable to solve incompressible flows. For
power due to influence of blade number this purpose pressure based implicit
unsteady solver with Standard k-ω SST
316
Numerical Investigation on Effect of Moving Vanes and Vehicle Velocity on Exhaust Flow of Engine in
Armoured Combat Vehicle
turbulence model with PRESTO second VALIDATION

order upwind scheme for constant inlet The validation of present work results has
velocity 2 m/s for all three cases. All
been done by comparing with those of Raciti
simulations have been done in Fluent 6.3. Castelli (2012). As can be clearly seen from
next page Figures and graphs, the results of
present work are in good agreement with of
results of Castelli (2012). and that the
maximum magnitude of power coefficient
increases with increase in tip speed ratio upto
certain point. Then it reduces with increase in
tip speed ratio (means rotor solidity). It is
also observed that maximum power
coefficient ( CP max ) decreases with increase
Figure 2. Main dimensions in mm of the in blade number for lower angular speeds.
domain sub-grid area with boundary
conditions
Figure 7 Ct of blade No. 1 with change in

Figure 3. rotor Figure 4. azimuthal angle position from
sub-grid area [mm] Mesh of rotor sub 0 to3600optimal tip speed ratio (λ=2.70
0
for 3-bladed VAWT grid mesh for 3 for N=3, λ=2.43 for N=4, λ=2.16 for N=5)
blades in M Raciti Castelli
Figure 5. Graph of rotor Cp with change in

λ M Raciti Castelli [RacitiCastelli et al., 2012]
Figure 8 Ct of blade No. 1 as a Fun

position from 00to3600optimal λ (λ=2.70
for N=3, λ=2.43 for N=4, λ=2.16 for N=5)
in present work
Determination of the CP for the 3, 4 and 5

Figure 6. Graph of rotor Cp with change blades analyzed rotor configurations, defined
in λ present work as: CP  P / (1 2   AV3 ) With the change in tip
317
Patil et al.
speed ratio, for an incident velocity of water Table 4 Comparison of CP and

current of 2 m/s and tip speed ratio of turbine corresponding λ for the 3, 4 & 5blades
is defined as   R , this parameter gives the architectures of NACA0021
V
N cp max CPmax
tip speed Rω as factor of the free stream
velocity V . From above table and graphs it 3 2.70 0.28
4 2.70 0.24
has been observed that percentage of error
5 2 0.23
occur for CP max for 3, 4, 5 blade architecture
respectively is 7.69 %, 5.88% and 9.765%. INVESTIGATION FOR NACA0021
And for Ct  avg , Ct ,max , Ct ,max values are closely Another campaign of complete two
match. dimensional unsteady RANS CFD analysis
has been done for NACA 0021 for 3, 4 and 5
blade rotor configuration for same boundary
conditions and same geometric conditions.
And determination of the power coefficient
for the 3,4 & 5 blades rotor architectures is
analyzed. And comparison of NACA0021
with NACA0025 has been done for all three
configurations. All simulations have been
Figure 9. Absolute velocity contours (m/s) done for 10 rotations of turbine.
near the blade No. 1, for maximum CT for
CONCLUSION
(θ=92°), N=3,λ=2.70 in present work
In order investigate the effect of blade
number and blade profile on the performance
of a straight-bladed VAWaterT, a complete
full campaign of two dimensional unsteady
numerical analyses was performed and it
shows that adoption of a higher number of
blades allowed reaching the maximum power
coefficient for lower angular velocities, but
efficiency of turbine was decreased. It
Figure 10. Absolute velocity contours observed results obtained by present work for
(m/s) around the blade No. 1, for whole peak-power coefficients similar to that
rotor for the angular position maximum Ct obtained by Raciti Castelli et al. (2012) for
for (θ=92°), N=3λ=2.70 in present work. NACA0025 for all three rotor architecture.
After that investigation has been done for
Table 2 Comparison of CP and λ NACA0021 blade three rotor architecture. It
corresponding for the 3 blades is observed that for NACA 0021 and NACA
architectures 0025 three bladed rotor configuration shows
maximum power coefficient other than four
cp max cp max CPmax CPmax and five bladed and it has been found that
Error
N (RacitiCastelli (Present (RacitiCastelli (Present
%
blades profile and blade number affects
et al., 2012) work) et al., 2012) work) performance of vertical axis water turbine. It
3 2.70 2.70 0.36 0.39 7.96 also seen that NACA0025 with three rotor
4 2.43 2 0.34 0.32 5.88 configurations show highest CP max among
5 2.16 2 0.31 0.28 9.67 all blade profile and blade number.
318
REFERENCES
Parschivoiu I 2002 Wind Turbine Design:
With Emphasis on Darrieus Concept
Presses Internationales Polytechnique
Montreal.
Darrieus G J M 1931 Turbine having its
Rotating Shaft Transverse to the Flow
of the Current U.S. Patent No. 1 835
018 December 1931.
Khan M J Iqbal M T and Quaicoe J E 2006
Design Considerations of a Straight
Bladed Darrieus Rotor for River
Current Turbines IEEE International
Symposium on Industrial Electronics
Montreal (Quebec) 9-13 July 2006.
Hill N Dominy R Ingram G and Dominy J
Darrieus Turbines: The Physics Of
Self-Starting Proc. I Meche 223 Part A:
J. Power And Energy.
Mazharul Islam David S K Ting Amir Fartaj
2008 Aerodynamic Models For
Darrieus Type Straight-Bladed Vertical
Axis Wind Turbines Renewable And
Sustainable Energy Reviews 12 1087–
1109.
Howell R Qin N Edwards J and Durrani N
2010 Wind tunnel and numerical study
of a small vertical axis wind turbine
Renewable Energy 35
Kirke B K and Lazauskas L Limitations of
fixed pitch Darrieus hydrokinetic
turbines and the challenge of variable
pitch Renevable Energy 36 893-897
Raciti Castelli M De Betta S and Benini E
2012 Proposal Of A Means For
Reducing The Torque Variation On A
Vertical-Axiswater Turbine By
Increasing The Blade Number World
Academy Of Science, Engineering And
Technology 64 206-211.
319
ICCMS2016
WATER-GAS TWO PHASE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS IN HORIZONTAL

PIPELINE-A CFD STUDY
SENAPATI S. K. and DEWANGAN S. K.
Mechanical Engineering Department, National Institute of Technology, Raipur (CG), India.
Abstract: Gas liquid two phase flow is encountered in many practical applications such
as in the transportation pipe line of oil industries, nuclear industries, automobiles etc. The
experimental and the analytical treatment for such flows are limited in number due to the
complex nature of flow. Also the analytical solutions for such flows are found for very
simple situations which are far from reality. Thus the use of multi-phase Computational
Fluid Dynamics (CFD) has become popular. The present work deals with the numerical
simulation of Water-gas two phase flows in a horizontal pipe line using Eulerian
modeling approach in ANSYS Fluent. The two phase flow of water with each of these
gases namely Air, Carbon Dioxide, Methane and Nitrogen Dioxide has been investigated
separately. The study focuses on the parameters affecting the solution. The effect of pipe
inclination, surface tension and pipe diameter on the volume fraction and velocity profile
has been investigated. The inclination angles used are 00, 25.8410, 36.8690, 59.3220, 900.
The surface tension values used are 0.02963, 0.04602 and 0.07182.The pipe diameter
used are 30 mm, 45 mm and 50.3 mm. It is observed that for completely horizontal pipe
volume fraction is symmetrically distributed showing peak at both top & bottom
positions of the pipe. Effect of inclination is insignificant for the horizontal velocity
distribution and has little effect on the vertical distribution of velocity. Similarly variation
in the surface tension causes changes in the velocity profile and the volume fraction.
Keywords: Two phase flow; CFD; Eulerian model; velocity profile; volume fraction
profile; pipe inclination; pipe diameter; surface tension.
INTRODUCTON Case-1:V sg = 0.42; Vsl=4.67; α=0.085

Case-2: V sg = 0.8; V sl =5.1; α=0.139
Gas-Liquid two phase flow has many practical
Where,
applications which includes oil industries,
V sg =Superficial velocity of gas (phase-2)
nuclear industries etc. The complex nature of
V sl = superficial velocity of water (phase-1)
such flows demand for the use of
α = volume fraction of Water
Computational techniques to analyze them.
The effect of inclination of pipe, pipe diameter
The present work focuses on the analysis of
and the surface tension has been investigated
water-gas two phase flow through a cylindrical
for both the cases. Then the flow of water with
pipe (diameter=50.3mm, length=9mm) using
four different gases namely Air, Carbon
the Eulerian model in ANSYS Fluent. At first
Dioxide, Methane and Nitrogen Dioxide
two cases of water-air flow has been
through the same pipe has been investigated.
considered.
_____________________________
*Author for correspondence: Email:senapatis431@gmail.com 320

Senapati and Dewangan
Eulerian multiphase model with implicit

scheme has been used. Water and air (Carbon
Dioxide, Methane and Nitrogen for other
cases) have been considered as primary and
secondary phase respectively. Standard k-є
model turbulence model has been chosen.
SIMPLE algorithm has been used for pressure-
velocity coupling. Power law scheme has been
used for momentum; turbulent kinetic energy
and turbulent dissipation rate whereas power
law scheme has been used for volume fraction.
Boundary conditions: -Inlet: Velocity; outlet:
outflow; wall: no slip.
Figure-1Contour of volume fraction RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

(phase-2) It is observed that for completely horizontal
pipe volume fraction is symmetrically
distributed showing peak at both top & bottom
positions of the pipe. Effect of inclination is
insignificant for the horizontal velocity
distribution and has little effect on the vertical
distribution of velocity. Similarly variation in
the surface tension causes changes in the
velocity profile and the volume fraction. Some
results obtained have been shown below.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors are thankful to the authorities of
NIT Raipur for providing infrastructure
facility, Library facility and other resources for
Figure-2Contour of velocity magnitude writing this article.
(phase-1)m/s. (Volume Fraction contours REFERENCES
for case-1)
Iskandrani A Kojasoy G 2001 Local void
MATHEMATICAL AND NUMERICAL fraction and velocity field description in
MODELLING horizontal bubbly flow Nucl. Eng. Des.
204 117–128.
The water-gas two phase flows are governed
by the continuity and the Navier Stokes Chesters A K Hoffman G 1982 Bubble
equations. coalescence in pure liquids Appl. Sci. Res.
38 353–361.
Meshes with 838246 hexahedral cells have
been used for the simulation purpose. Steady Tomiyama A. Tamai H Zun I Hosokawa S
state pressure based solver has been used with 2002 Transverse migration of single
absolute velocity formulation. The effect of bubbles in simple shear flows Chem. Eng.
gravity has been considered in the y-direction. Sci. 57(11) 1849–1858.
321
Water-Gas Two Phase Flow Characteristics in Horizontal Pipeline-A CFD Study
Launder B E Spalding D B Mathematical Rotta J C Turbulente Stromungen, B.G.

Models of Turbulence Academic Press Teubner Stuttgart 1974.
London G B. Li J Kwauk M 1994 Particle Fluid Two-phase
Suzanne C Ellingsen K Risso F Roig V 1998 Flow Metallurgical Industry Press
Local measurement in turbulent bubbly Beijing.
flows Nucl. Eng. Des. 184 319–327. Jeremy O Mc Caslin Olivier Desjardins
Drew D A Passman S L 1999 Theory of (August 2014 Numerical investigation of
Multicomponent Fluids Springer-Verlag gravitational effects in horizontal annular
New York 73 NY. liquid–gas flow.
Barnea D 1987 A unified model for predicting Ohba K Itoh T 1978 Light attenuation
flow pattern transitions from the whole technique for void fraction measurement
range of pipe inclination Int. J. in two-phase bubbly flow II. Experiment
Multiphase Flow 13 1–12. Tech. Rep. Osaka Univ. 28 495–506.
Beattie D R H 1996 Flow characteristics of Lopez de Bertodano M A 1992 Turbulent
horizontal bubbly pipe flow Nucl. Eng. bubbly two-phase flow in a triangular
Des. 163 207–212. duct Ph.D. dissertation, Rensselaer
Polytechnic Institute.
G Kocamustafaogullari Z Wang 1991 An
experimental study on local interfacial Ishii M Zuber N 1979 Drag coefficient and
parameters in a horizontal bubbly two- relative velocity in bubbly, droplet or
phase flow Int. J. Multiphase Flow 17 particulate flows AIChE J. 25 843–855.
553–572. Prince M J Blanch H W 1990 Bubble
Govier G W Aziz K The flow of complex coalescence and break-up in air sparged
mixtures in pipes Van No strand Reihold bubble columns AIChE J. 36 1485–1499.
72 Company New York 1972. M Lance J M Bataille 1991 Turbulence in the
Anglart H Nylund O 1996 CFD application to liquid phase in a uniform bubbly air-water
prediction of void distribution in two- flow J Fluid Mech. 222 95–118.
phase bubbly flows in rod bundles Nucl. Thomas N H Auton T R Sene K R Hunt J C
Sci. Eng. 163 81–98. 1983 Entrapment and transport of bubbles
Luo H Svendsen H 1996 Theoretical model for by transient large eddies in turbulent
drop and bubble break-up in turbulent shear flow in: BHRA International
dispersions, AIChE J. 42 1225–1233. Conference on the Physical Modelling of
Zun I 1980 The transverse migration of Multiphase Flow.
bubbles influenced by walls in vertical Andreussi P Paglianti A Silva F S 1999
bubbly flow Int. J. Multiphase Flow 6 Dispersed bubble flow in horizontal pipes
583–588. Chem. Eng.Sci. 54 1101–1107.
Zun I 1990 Mechanism of bubble non- Lahey R T Jr. Drew D A 2001 The analysis of
homogeneous distribution in two-phase two-phase flow and heat transfer using
shear flow Nucl. Eng. Des. 118 155–162. Multi-dimensional four field two-fluid
model Nucl. Eng. Des. 204 29–44.
Joshi J B 2001 Computational flow modeling
and design of bubble column reactors S K Wang S J Lee Jones O C Jr. RT Lahey Jr.
Chem. Eng.Sci. 55 (21/22) 5893–5933. 1987 Three-dimensional turbulence
structure and phase distribution
322
Author for Correspondence: E-mail:___________________
Senapati and Dewangan
measurements in bubbly two-phase flow

Int. J Multiphase Flow 23 327–340.
Lo S 1996 Application of the MUSIG model to
bubbly flows AEAT-1096 AEA
Technology.
Antal S P Lahey R T Flaherty J E 1991
Analysis of phase distribution in fully
developed laminar bubbly two phase flow
Int. J. Multiphase Flow 7 635.
Shimpei Ojima Kosuke Hayashi, Shigeo
Hosokawa Akio Tomiyama did CFD
simulation of bubbly two-phase flow in
horizontal pipes.
Hibiki T Ishii M 1999 Experimental study on
interfacial area transport in bubbly two-
phase flows Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 42
3019–3035.
Hibiki T Hogsett S Ishii M 1997 Local
measurement of interfacial area,
interfacial velocity and liquid turbulence
in two-phase flow, in: LOECD Meeting
on Instrumentation Santa Barbara CA.
Liu T J Bankoff S G 1993 Structure of air-
water bubbly flow in a vertical pipe I
Liquid mean velocity and turbulence
measurements Int. J. Heat Transfer 36
1049–1060.
Liu T J Bankoff S G 1993 Structure of air-
water bubbly flow in a vertical pipe II.
Void fraction, bubble velocity and bubble
size distribution Int. J. Heat Transfer 36
1061–1072.
Holmes T L Russell T W F 1975 Horizontal
bubble flow Int. J. Multiphase Flow 2 51–
66.
Sato Y Sekoguchi K 1975 Liquid velocity
distribution in two-phase bubbly flow,
Int. J. Multiphase Flow 2 79–95.
323
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL INVESTIGATION OF FLOW THROUGH STEAM

TURBINES USING THE MIXING PLANE METHOD
SHUKLA S.1*, MISHRA R.1, CHAUDHARY N..2 and SUMAN S.1
1
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi
2
Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited
Abstract: With the increased usage of alternate sources of energy in recent years,
steam-turbine based power plants have been forced to operate under prolonged low
load conditions. This has motivated a renewed interest in examining and
understanding the differences in the behaviour of steam at low load conditions and
that at design conditions for the existing operational turbine designs. In this context,
there is a strong need of develop the capability of performing robust and high-fidelity
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) simulations of steam flow over a range of
conditions with a low-turnaround time. In this paper we employ the Mixing Plane
Model (MPM) approach to simulate steam flow through a typical low-pressure
turbine (LPT) stage.
Keywords: Steam Turbine, Stator-Rotor Cascade System, Mixing Plane Model,
Turbulent Flow, Computational Fluid Dynamics.
INTRODUCTION such massively off-design conditions

undergoes a substantial loss in axial velocity
With the increasing use of renewable sources and concurrently the radial velocity increases.
of energy and their time-varying energy With the development of a dominant radial
output, grid demand for steam-power plants component of the steam velocity, several
are becoming increasingly more variable. secondary vortices are formed and the high
This poses a constraint on the conventional shear associated with vortices results into
power plants (relying on steam turbines) to significant frictional heating as well.
frequently operate under low load conditions Unfortunately, the exact response of the
for prolonged durations. turbine hardware and the extent of
deterioration in the performance of the
Stator and rotor blades of a steam turbine are
existing operational turbines is largely
designed to work under a favourable pressure
unknown. Evaluation of steam behaviour
gradient field. Low-load operation of turbine
under low load conditions has thus become
involves a low throughput mass flow rate.
an imperative exercise not only for the power
However, angular velocity of the rotor has to
plant operators but for the steam turbine
be maintained constant. Under such
designers and manufacturers as well.
conditions, the pressure drop across the last
stage rotor blades may diminish, and Simulation of the flow field under low-load
subsequently these later stages may start conditions existing inside a multi-stage
working as compressors leading to pressure turbine has always been challenging mainly
rise across these rotor stages. The adverse because of the existence of multiple-
pressure gradient fields thus created, in turn, reference frames and narrow, boundary-layer
may lead to flow separation downstream of dominated flow paths. These challenges are
the last stage rotor accompanied by the expected to further aggravate for a turbine
formation of recirculation zones. Steam under operating under low load conditions. During
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shrishiitd@gmail.com 324

Shukla et al.
the last two decades several different generation, hybrid mesh method is adopted to
approaches to handle multiple reference create blade passages and maintain the proper
frames of steam turbines have been proposed. aspect ratio near tip of the blades. A view of
Among these the Mixing Plane Method the grid is shown in Fig. 2. A mixing-plane
(MPM) is one of them. The MPM approach interface was made to link the stator-rotor
provides several computational advantages cascade system.
by giving a steady-state approximation to the
time-averaged flow field with relatively less
computational cost. Generally, time accurate
calculations of rotary domain require
substantial expanses of computational time
whereas, MPM implementation reduces the
computational time considerably. It also
removes the constraint of providing the same
periodic angle for each blade row – a feature
which gives an advantage during modelling
of a large number of blade passages with
different periodic angles. Due to these
advantages, the MPM approach can offer to
be a viable method to perform several low-
load simulations of the existing turbines with
acceptable accuracy and low-turnaround
time.
The MPM model was first conceptualized
and proposed by Singh and Denton, (1979).
They included the mixing flow between the
rotor-stator axial gaps and named it as the
Figure 1. Schematic of Computational
Mixing Plane Model (MPM). Though in the
Domain.
past application MPM approach has been
reported in literature, to the best of authors’
knowledge very few evaluations have been
performed under low load conditions over
three dimensional (3D) domains.
Thus the overarching goal of our work is to
systematically evaluate the performance of
the MPM approach in simulating full three
dimensional RANS simulations of multi-
stage turbine at low-load conditions. Toward
this goal, in this paper we present an
evaluation method on a typical low-pressure
turbine (LPT) stage. Figure 2. Schematic of grids across the
blades.
COMPUTATIONAL METHODOLOGY
Modelled LPT flow condition across the
The study presented in this paper focuses on
stage is compressible in nature hence,
a stator-rotor pair of a typical low pressure
velocity-inlet condition with u = 60 m/s at P
turbine stage. A view of the blade geometry
=100 bar pressure is set at the inlet. At outlet
and the computational domain is provided in
of the domain, pressure-outlet boundary
Fig. 1. The computational domain is created
condition is imposed. No-slip boundary
considering unequal periodic angle. For grid
325
Numerical investigation of flow through steam turbines using the Mixing Plane Method
conditions are imposed at the blade nodes.

Rotor speed (N) is set as 3000 RPM.
Additionally, inline the rotor domain to be
stationary wall in the absolute frame the rotor
hub is considered as moving boundary with
zero velocity. The stator hub, shroud and
remaining domain wall are considered as no-
slip boundaries. Periodic boundary condition Figure 3. Schematic of Pressure
is imposed on parallel planes perpendicular to contour across blade to blade position
the azimuthal direction. Steam proprieties are at 0.5 h.
computed using standard IAPWS-IF-97
database.
Our simulations are performed with the
commercially available CFD package Fluent
15.0TM. All numerical simulations are carried
out considering rated design load conditions
at full-scale three dimensional (3D) geometry
with use of hybrid grids. RANS approach has
been used with combining k-ε turbulence
model and mixing plane model. A grid
independence study has been performed, and Figure 4. Schematic of Pressure contour
a grid size of 4.5 million nodes has been across the set of full rotor blades.
found to be optimum.
RESULTS
Pressure contours on a plane perpendicular to
the radial direction and located at the mean
radius of the rotor blade are presented in Fig.
3. A smooth field can be observed at the
interface of the stator and rotor domains
indicating that the MPM approach is
satisfactorily approximating the actually
continuous pressure field in this zone.
In Fig. 4, we present pressure contours on the Figure 5. Schematic of Temperature
surfaces of the entire blade set. Clear contour across the set of full rotor blades
variation in the pressure field can be
observed from hub to shroud position along CONCLUSIONS
the blade height. Subsequently, variation of
We have evaluated the performance of the
the temperature field across the set of full
mixing plane model (MPM) approach in
rotor blades is also shown in Fig. 5.
simulating a stator-rotor pair of a typical low-
A quantitative validation of our simulation pressure turbine cylinder at rated design load
results has been done by comparing pressure conditions. The performance of the MPM
and enthalpy values against the heat balance approach has been found to be satisfactory in
diagram data available for the turbine under terms of general qualitative features and the
consideration. Plane-averaged value of plane-averaged quantitative values of flow
pressure field from our simulation at the variables. Based on this evaluation, the
mixing plane has been found to be within 7% authors intend to employ the MPM approach
of the reference data. in the modelling of multi-stage steam turbine
326
Shukla et al.
cylinders working under severe low-load Sasao Y Monma K Tadashi T Yamamoto S

conditions. 2009 Numerical prediction of unsteady
flows through whole nozzle-rotor
REFERENCES cascade channels with partial admission
Beevers A Havakechian S and Megerle B International Journal of Fluid
2015 On the prediction and theory of Machinery and Systems 2(3) 248-253.
the temperature increase of low pressure Sigg R Heinz C Casey M V and Surken N
last stage moving blades during low 2009 Numerical and experimental
volume flow conditions and limiting it investigation of a low-pressure steam
through steam extraction methods turbine during windage Journal of
Journal of Turbo-mach 137 101002-1- Power and Energy 223 697–708
11.
Singh U and Denton J 1979 Time Marching
Gerolymos G A and Hanisch 1999 Methods for Turbo-machinery Flow
Multistage three-dimensional Navier– Calculation von Karman Institute Sint-
Stokes computation of off-design Genesius-Rode Belgium.
operation of a four-stage Proceeding of
Song L Jun L and Kesong W 2015
Third European Conference on
Aerodynamic performance analysis of
Turbomachinery 213 243–261.
partial admission dual row control stage
Jia W and Huoxing L 2013 Computational at different working conditions Journal
study of the effects of shroud geometric of Mechanical Science and Technology
variation on turbine performance in a 30(1) 157-169.
1.5-stage high-loaded turbine Journal of
Thermal Science. 22(5) 439–446. NOTATION
Karakurt A. S and Gunes U 2015
Performance analysis of a steam turbine P Static Pressure
power plant at part load conditions Pt Total Pressure
international conference on energy
systems International Conference on u Axial Velocity
Energy Systems Proceedings 107-112. V Resultant Velocity
Megerle B Rice T S Mcbean I and Ott P. 𝑚̇ Mass Flow rate
2013 Numerical and experimental
investigation of the aerodynamic N Rotational Speed
excitation of a model low-pressure w Circumferential Length
steam turbine stage operating under low
h Blade Height
volume flow Journal of Engineering for
Gas Turbines and Power 135 012602-1- n Number of Blades
7. a Axial Gap
Neuimin V M 2014 Methods of evaluating n Number of Blades
power losses for ventilation in stages of
steam turbines of TES Journal of k Turbulent Kinetic Energy
Thermal Engineering 6(10) 765–770. ε Turbulent K.E Dissipation Rate
Sakai N Harada T and Imai Y 2006 I Turbulence Intensity
Numerical study of partial admission
stages in steam turbine JSME
International Journal Series. B 49(2)
212–217.
327
ICCMS2016
THERMOHYDRAULIC TRANSPORT CHARACTERISTICS OF

INCLINED RIBS IN MICRO CHANNEL
BHATTACHARYYA S.1*, LAHA S.1, BASU S.1, DAS S. G. and CHATTOPADHYAY H.2
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, MCKV Institute of Engineering, Howrah India.
2
Mechanical Engineering Department, Jadavpur University, Kolkata India.
Abstract: A two-dimensional CFD numerical simulation is carried out successfully

on thermo-hydraulic transport characteristics of turbulator (inclined ribs) in micro
channel. The working fluid air (Pr 0.7) is passed through a 2-D micro-channel of an
isothermal-fluxed wall with inclined ribs type micro mixer. The laminar flow model is
used for formulation, since the flow is considered as laminar. The simulation is
conducted in order to gain an understanding of physical behaviour of the thermal and
fluid flow in the micro channel fitted with inclined ribs under constant wall
temperature conditions. Some important parameters have been examined in this study.
The configuration parameters include the, ribs angle (Ɵ) and pitch ratio (p). Reynolds
number varies from 10 – 800 in this particular study. The effects of Nusselt number,
friction factor, outlet temperature and efficiency is examined and discussed. It is
highly possible to be implemented in the practical application like micro channel heat
sink.
Keywords: Micro channel; Turbulator; Heat transfer enhancement; Laminar
model; CFD; simulation.
INTRODUCTION Two-dimensional geometry of the channel

Over the years a common region of interest in with ribs inserted at different angles was used
major thermal problems are heat transfer as computational model. Air velocity was
characteristics under cases such as laminar introduced at inlet of the channel and a
flow conditions. The small sizes of the heat pressure outlet condition was applied at exit.
dissipating devices and the very stringent Air at inlet temperature of 300 K was
operational temperature requirements make assumed in direction of flow. The wall
thermal management of micro-electronic temperature of 500 K is applied and
devices a challenging problem. Shah and maintained throughout the experiment. The
London (1978) predicted how different physical properties of the air were assumed to
geometries increase the rate heat transfer for remain constant at mean bulk temperature.
the case of ribs. He also studied, the Nusselt The wall is considered at impermeable
number shows a definite trend – increase boundary conditions and it is considered that
with increase in Reynolds number. The the wall has no-slip condition.
addition of ribs at certain angles effectively The discipline of micro fluidics has been
increases the heat transfer rate by disrupting developed as a major area of research due to
the development of the boundary layer and its various applications in various forms. The
also by creating local turbulence and swirl recent technologies developed in the field of
flow.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: suvanjanr@gmail.com 328

micro-fluidics have application ranging from BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

pharmaceuticals and biomedical industries.
The full length micro-channel as shown in
The continuous enhancement in the
Figure 1, of inlet diameter (D) with rib
functionality and reduction in size of micro-
electronics has opened the requirement for roughness of angle (Ɵ) and pitch, (p) is
new ways for effective removal or dissipation employed. Air velocity was introduced at
of high heat fluxes in order to enhance its inlet of the channel and a pressure outlet
performance. condition was applied at exit. Air inlet
temperature of 300K was set in the direction
The initiation in study of micro channels of fluid flow. The temperature of wall was
happened in 1981 when Tuckerman and kept constant of 500 K throughout the
Pease published a work that dealt with the experiment. At mean bulk temperature, the
advantageous effects of using channels which thermal and the physical properties of air
are small in diameter for heat dissipation were taken to be invariant. The channel walls
purposes of very-large-scale integrated were assumed to be impervious and no-slip
circuits. It was shown that the hydraulic condition was implemented.
diameter of the channel varies inversely to
the heat transfer coefficient. Some of the
initial results obtained by means of
experiment for fluid flow in micro channel
trace its source to Wu and Little (1983) for
gas flow. In this experiment the friction
factors in the laminar region were more than
expected, and they found that 350 to 900 was
the transition regime. The results obtained by Figure 1 Schematic diagram of
them exhibited dissimilar characteristics from computational domain
that indicated by conventional models of
fluid flow. The reason for this cause was MATHEMATICAL MODEL AND
attributed widely to the surface roughness of NUMERICAL SOLUTION
the micro channels.
The basic form of continuity, energy and
The investigations by Choi et al. (1991) on momentum equations for a two dimensional,
the friction factor, coefficient of convective incompressible, steady state flow and laminar
heat transfer and the consequential effects of forced convection of transfer of heat minus
inner wall surface roughness for flow in viscous dissipation are as follows:
laminar and turbulent regime in micro
channels. The results of experimentation Continuity Equation
obtained by them were significantly 𝜕𝑢 𝜕𝑣
+ =0 (1)
dissimilar from the correlations in the 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
classical theories.
Momentum Equation
It has been observed from the literature
𝜕𝑢 𝜕𝑢 𝜕𝑝 𝜕2 𝑢 𝜕2𝑢
review that the inclined ribs as micro-mixers 𝜌 �𝑢 +𝑣 �=− + 𝜇( + ) (2)
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
have not been reported in the past. In this
paper, therefore, the laminar flow numerical 𝜕𝑣 𝜕𝑣 𝜕𝑝 𝜕2 𝑣 𝜕2𝑣
𝜌 �𝑢 +𝑣 �=− + 𝜇( + (3)
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
heat transfer and pressure drop results of
circular micro mixer of different diameter in Energy Equation
circular micro-channel will be presented.
𝜕𝑇 𝜕𝑇 𝜕2 𝑇 𝜕2𝑇
𝑢 +𝑣 = 𝛼( + ) (4)
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
Grid sizes of various dimensions were tested

as a part of study for grid independence.
329
Thermohydraulic Transport Characteristics of Inclined Ribs in Micro Channel
After a rigorous grid independence check, a accounts for the increase in Nusselt number
mesh consisting of 684,321 elements and that is clearly seen. It is also evident from the
58,835 nodes were used for the present Figure 3 that there is a significant increase in
computation. enhancement which is noticed for Reynolds
Theoretical equations for laminar model in a number 300 and above for the Ɵ = 90 and Ɵ
2-D geometry of diameter 0.5 mm and = 60.
0.5
length, 10 mm, were solved numerically for Shah and
London
heating of the working fluid which was air Plain
0.4
(Pr = 0.7). The 2-D geometry-data file was Channel
Tend (Plain
generated in ANSYS Design Modeller 16.0. Channel)
0.3
f
0.2
Correlations provided by Shah and London
(1978) were used to compare and validate the
0.1
results of the simulation. The values of the
data found from CFD simulation of the plain
0
micro-channel are quite close with the 0 500 1000
predicted results from the proposed Re

correlations with little margin of error Shah Figure 3. Verification of the plain micro-
and London (1978) with data range of +6.0% channel: Friction factor
to +8.5% and +2.2% to +2.7% for the Nusselt
number, Nu, and friction factor, f, Ɵ = 30 Ɵ = 45
7 Ɵ = 60 Ɵ = 90
respectively as revealed in Figure 2 and
Plain Channel
Figure 3 6
10 5
Shah and London

4
Plain Channel
3
Trend (Plain
Channel) Nu
2
5
1
Nu
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Re
0
Figure 4. Variation of Nusselt number
0 500 1000 with Reynolds number
Re
Figure 2. Verification of the plain micro- The influences of ribs on friction factor
channel: Nusselt number characteristics are represented in Figure 5.
One can see from the figure that the friction
From the Figure 4, the Nusselt number shows factor was in the similar trend both for the
a definite trend – increase with increase in plain channel and the channel with ribs. The
Reynolds number. The addition of ribs at friction factor of the ribbed channel gradually
certain angles effectively increases the heat decreases with increasing Reynolds number.
transfer rate by disrupting the development of At a particular Reynolds number, the ribbed
the boundary layer and also by creating local channel led to higher friction factors over
turbulence and swirl flow. This phenomenon those of the plain channel. This was because
330
of the flow blockage, larger contact surface significant increase in the outlet temperature
areas, the act caused by the turbulent flow as is perceived.
well as the dissipated dynamic pressure of the
fluid due to the viscosity loss near the tube CONCLUSION
wall.
6
Thermohydraulic transport characteristics of
Ɵ = 30 Ɵ = 45
Ɵ = 60 Ɵ = 90
inclined ribs in micro channel were
5
Plain Channel investigated numerically. The simulation was
4
conducted for the micro channel with micro
inclined ribs of different angle.
3 The use of ribs provided significant
f augmentation of heat transfer with a
2
corresponding increase in friction factor. In
1 general observations, it was found that the
heat transfer, outlet temperature and friction
0
0 200 400 600 800 1 factor increased at Ɵ = 90 and Ɵ = 60. In
Re
addition, the Nusselt number increased with
Figure 5. Variation of Nusselt increasing Reynolds number while the
number with Reynolds number opposite trends were found for the case of
friction factor. The Nusselt number for the
micro channel with micro ribs has a
1.4
reasonable enhancement than those of the
Ɵ = 30 Ɵ
1.38 plain micro channel values.
1.36
Ɵ = 60 Ɵ
REFERENCES
1.34
Shah R K London A L 1978 Laminar Flow
1.32
Forced Convection in Ducts Academic
T/T0
1.3
New York.
1.28
Tuckerman D B and Pease R F W 1981
1.26
High-performance heat sinking for VLSI
1.24
0 200 400 600 800
IEEE Electron Device Letters EDL-2(5)
Re
126-129.
Figure 6. Variation of non- Peiyi W Little W 1983 A Measurement of

dimensional (T/T 0 ) with Reynolds friction factors for the flow of gases in
number very fine channels used for micro
miniature Joule – Thomson
The non-dimensional ratio of outlet
temperatures of the channels fitted with ribs refrigerators. Cryogenics 23 273 - 277.
to the outlet temperatures of a plain channel. Choi S B Baron R R Warrington R O 1991
From Figure 6, the same inference can be Fluid flow and heat transfer in micro
made – with increase in angle of ribs there in
tubes. ASME DSC 40 89 – 93.
an increase in heat transfer which makes it
easier to carry more hot fluid through the
outlet. For Reynolds number near 300, a
331
ICCMS2016
STEADY FLOW COMPUTATIONS USING HLL-CPS SCHEME WITH

LOW MACH NUMBER CORRECTION
GOGOI A. and MANDAL J.C.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay, India
Abstract: A modification to the HLL-CPS scheme based on low Mach number

correction is proposed here. The present scheme is free from checkerboard and
inaccuracy problems at low Mach number, free from numerical shock instability at
high Mach number. A set of numerical test cases are solved to demonstrate the
efficacy of the present scheme.
Keywords: HLL-CPS scheme; Low Dissipation; Numerical shock instability;
Low Mach number.
INTRODUCTION Thornber et al. (2014) and Li et al (2013). In

the present work, the approach of Thornber
In recent years, methods based on Riemann
(2014) is followed for reduction of
problem solution has become the very
numerical dissipation. The right and left
popular for solving the Euler and Navier
velocities at face are modified with the
Stokes equations. The HLL-CPS [Mandal
following equation
and Panwar, 2012] scheme is one such
Riemann solver which is free from shock (𝑈𝐿 +𝑈𝑅 ) (𝑈𝐿 −𝑈𝑅 )
𝑈𝐿𝐿𝑀 = +𝑧 (1)
2 2
numerical instabilities at high speeds and is
capable of resolving stationary contact (𝑈𝐿 +𝑈𝑅 ) (𝑈𝑅 −𝑈𝐿 )
𝑈𝑅𝐿𝑀 = +𝑧 (2)
2 2
exactly. However, the HLL-CPS scheme was
found to be dissipative for low speed in where 𝑧 = min(max(ML , MR ) , 1.0) (3)
viscid flows and viscous flows. Hence,
From the above equations, it is clear that the
modification is incorporated in the HLL-CPS
scheme becomes central difference as Mach
scheme to improve accuracy for low speed
number approaches zero and fully upwind at
and viscous flows.
Mach numbers above unity.
THEORETICAL DETAILS
RESULTS
In the HLL-CPS scheme, the convective and
In order to demonstrate capability of the new
pressure fluxes are split following Zha-
scheme to accurately predict low Mach
Bilgen (1993) formulation. The convective
number flows, first order inviscid
fluxes are evaluated by simple up-winding
computations are carried out on circular
while the pressure fluxes are evaluated by
cylinder at Mach numbers 0.1, 0.01 and
HLL-type discretization [Harten et al., 1983].
0.001. Results of the HLL-CPS scheme is
The upwind schemes based on HLL-type
shown in figure 1 and it can be seen from the
formulation are known to be dissipative for
figure that the HLL-CPS method is very
low Mach number flows. Methods of
dissipative and results resemble Stokes flow.
reduction of numerical dissipation of
It is also seen in figure 1 that numerical
Riemann solvers have been proposed by
dissipation increases with decrease in Mach
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: mandal@aero.iitb.ac.in 332

Gogoi and Mandal
number. Results of the modified HLL-CPS

scheme is shown in figure 2. It can be seen
from figure 2 that results resemble potential
flow for all the three Mach numbers.
(a) Mach 0.10
(a) Mach 0.10
(b) Mach 0.01
(b) Mach 0.01
(c) Mach 0.001

Figure 2. Static Pressure Plot for
modified HLL-CPS scheme
(c) Mach 0.001
In order to demonstrate that the modified
Figure 1. Static Pressure Plot for HLL- scheme retains the robustness of the original
CPS scheme scheme, first order inviscid computations are
carried out on a blunt body with a free-stream
Mach number of 20. Density contour plots
333
Steady Flow Computations using HLL-CPS Scheme with Low Mach Number Correction
for HLL-CPS and modified HLL-CPS and 6. It can be seen in the figures that results
scheme are shown in figure 3. It can be seen of the present scheme match well with
from figures 3 that both the HLL-CPS and analytical results. On the other hand, for
the modified HLL-CPS schemes are free HLL-CPS scheme, differences with
from carbuncle phenomenon, thus retaining analytical results of Blasius are higher at
high speed abilities. The static pressure plot Mach 0.20, which show that numerical
along the centerline is shown in figure 4 and dissipation of the HLL-CPS increases with
it can be seen that the solution of the decrease in Mach number.
modified scheme is perfectly monotone, just
like the HLL-CPS scheme.
600
500
400
HLL-CPS Scheme
Pressure
300
Modified HLL-CPS
200
Scheme
100
0
-1.6 -1.4 X -1.2 -1
Figure 4. Pressure Plot along Centerline
10
Blasius Solution (Analytical)
8
HLL-CPS
6 Present Scheme
η
4
(a) HLL-CPS (b) Modified 2

Scheme HLL-CPS
0
Scheme
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Figure 3. Density Contour for HLL-CPS U/U∞
and Modified HLL-CPS Scheme for Figure 5. Result for Laminar Flat Plate
M ∞ =20 (M ∞ =0.20)
Laminar computations are carried out on a CONCLUSION

flat plate with HLL-CPS and present scheme
The HLL-CPS scheme is modified for low
for Mach numbers of 0.20 and 0.70. The
Mach correction based on the idea proposed
Reynolds number for both the cases was
by Thornber et al. (1998). With this
500,000. Second order computations are
modification, the new HLL-CPS scheme
carried out and equations are solved by TVD
produces accurate results for inviscid flow
method of Gottleib (1998). The comparison
over circular cylinder at Mach number as low
with analytical results of Blasius for Mach
as 0.001. For blunt body problem, the scheme
0.20 and Mach 0.70 are shown in figures 5
334
Gogoi and Mandal
is free from carbuncle at Mach number of 20. Resolving Contact Discontinuity

For laminar flat plate test case, the scheme is Computers & Fluids 63 148-164.
capable of accurately resolving wall Zha Ge-cheng and Bilgen E 1993 Numerical
boundary layer. The results demonstrate that Solutions of Euler equations by using a
the scheme produces satisfactory results for a new flux vector splitting scheme Int J
wide range of Mach numbers. Numerical Meth Fluids 17 115-44.
10
Blasius Solution (Analytical)
8 HLL-CPS
Present Scheme
6
η
4
0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
U/U∞
Figure 6. Result for Laminar Flat Plate

(M ∞ =0.70)
REFERENCES
A Garcia-Uceda Juarez A Raimo E Shapiro
and B Thornber 2014 Steady Turbulent
Flow Computations using a low Mach
Fully Compressible Scheme AIAA
Journal 52 (11).
Felix Rieper 2008 On the Behaviour of
Numerical Scheme in the Low Mach
Number Regime PhD Dissertation.
Gottlieb S and Shu Chi-Wang 1998 Total
Variation Diminishing Runge-Kutta
Schemes Mathematics of Computation
67(221)73-85.
Harten A Lax P B and Leer B 1983 On
Upstream Differencing and Godunov-
type Methods for Hyperbolic
Conservation Laws SIAM Rev 25 35-61.
Li Xue-Song and Gu Chun-Wei 2013
Mechanism and Improvement of Harten-
Lax-van Leer Scheme for All-Speed
Flows Computers and Fluids 86(5) 56-
70.
Mandal J C and Panwar V Robust 2012 HLL
type Riemann Solver Capable of
335
ICCMS2016
INVESTIGATION OF 3-D FLOWS IN A TANDEM COMPRESSOR

CASCADE WITH VARIOUS CHORD RATIOS
SHERIN S. B., MANAS M. S. and SHINE S. R.*
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology, Kerala, India.
Abstract: The concept of tandem blade arrangement for axial compressors has been
proposed to increase the work per stage without incurring large losses. The present
work examines the 3D-flow field of NACA 65 tandem cascades with varying chord
ratios ranging from 0.43 to 1.337. A 3-D computational model using finite volume
formulation has been developed and validated against available experimental data.
Design rules such as the aerodynamic load splitting and the spacing of the forward-
and aft-blades, etc. are taken into account for finalising the cascade geometry. Flow
phenomena at different locations of the airfoils are examined.
Keywords: Tandem Blade; Axial Compressor; Cascade; Computational.
INTRODUCTION flow near the sidewall of NACA 65 tandem

configuration with a flow turning of around
Tandem blade arrangement is an effective
50° and a load split of 50%. It is observed
boundary layer control mechanism proposed
that the flow is affected by the position of the
to obtain high loading and turning in axial
rear airfoil with respect to the front, however
compressors. The method involves placing
could not predict the corner stall at the rear.
two distinct airfoils nearby instead of a single
Hertel et al. (2014) examined the secondary
solid airfoil of an equivalent chord length.
flow of subsonic tandem cascades for three
The aft airfoil of the tandem configuration
different incidences, and results showed that
allows formation of a fresh boundary layer
front airfoil secondary flows are significantly
and leads to higher overall loading with
affected by the aerodynamic loading, whereas
lower losses. This method has been
that of the rear airfoil is almost unchanged.
employed in axial and centrifugal
Investigations by Tesch et al. (2014) on 3-D
compressors, examples of the axial type
flow field of a tandem stator revealed that the
include J-17 compressor of GE and a low
gap nozzle flow created higher losses at the
pressure compressor built by Honeywell.
hub. Separation of the wake flow at the mid-
Studies by Douglas and Suresh (2002),
section of both airfoils was noticed and was
Josuhn-Kadner and Hoffmann (1993) etc
affecting the shape of the loss zones in the
showed that tandem centrifugal impeller
hub, tip corner and end-wall locations. Lei et
could improve surge margin over a single
al. (2008) have proposed a new diffusion
blade row.
factor to define diffusion limit for unstalled
Majority of the previous studies on tandem operation of compressor blades. They
cascades are 2-D studies and very few deals observed that hub-corner stall can occur well
with 3-D flows in the hub, tip and end wall below the limit proposed by Lieblein (1965)
regions of a tandem cascade. Many recent (DF=0.6) and a new parameter might be
publications have highlighted the importance required to account for this in the preliminary
of a 3-D study and emphasized secondary design stage.
flow phenomena near the front and rear
airfoils. Frey and Bohle (2013) investigated
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shine@iist.ac.in 336

Sherin et al.
In the present computational study, the

aforementioned criterion is applied to the
flow in tandem cascades with various chord
ratios. Different cascades are designed for
various interferences and chord ratios and
tested under various incidence angles.
Secondary flows and flow topology of front
and rear airfoils are examined under the
above situations. Flow separation,
overturning of the streamlines near the hub, Figure 1. Computational domain
corner stall etc. are examined in detail.
Streamline pictures of the 3D-CFD
LOADING AND LOSS PARAMETERS simulations close to the sidewalls and
The main loading and loss parameters experimental results obtained by Bohleand
considered in the study are explained below. Frey 2014are compared for the validation of
Loading parameters gives an idea about the the model. Experiments consist of NACA-65
relative work done by the two blades. airfoil cascades with circular camber lines.
Lieblein 1965 had demonstrated that Cascades were mounted on a rotating device
diffusion factor provided a satisfactory in order to adjust the inlet flow angle. The
limiting-loading factor for NACA 65 flow measurements were obtained with a
compressor blades and is independent of inlet five-hole probe measuring technique. The
air angle. It is defined as measured 3 D flow losses at midspan from
the experiments are compared with numerical
𝑤22 𝑤𝜃,11 −𝑤𝜃,22 results in Figure 2. Comparison is done for a
𝐷𝐹 = �1 − �+� � (1)
𝑤11 2𝜎𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑤11 cascade having chord ratio (CR) of =0.43 for
Where the two terms represent velocity the given inlet angle 50°.Flow is maintained
diffusion and turning respectively. The loss at an inlet velocity of 29 m/values of loss
parameter for tandem cascades is defined as coefficient was taken along the Y-axis at
𝑃𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 −𝑃𝑖𝑛𝑙𝑒𝑡 trailing edge of the aft blade. The numerical
𝜔= (2) results are predicting the experimental
0.5 𝜌𝑉 2
observations reasonably well and the
NUMERICAL MODEL DETAILS differences between the two may be due to
the short comings in turbulence modelling.
A 3-dimensional steady, incompressible
turbulent model which solves RANS
equations is used in the present study.
Transitional simulation using SST k-ω
transport equation is used for modelling
turbulence. NACA 65 airfoil geometry was
selected for studying the present tandem
configuration. Cascade geometry was
generated using the design rule proposed by
McGlumphy et al. (2009), Lieblein’s
diffusion factor (1973) and blade Mellor
diagram 2014. A program was developed to Figure 2. Computational model
generate the coordinates of the airfoils which validation
use the chord length, stagger angles, axial
overlap, and percentage pitch of the tandem RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
configuration as the input. Figure 1 shows the
Computational models were generated to
details of computational domain used for the
compare tandem cascades with different
present study.
337
Investigation of 3-D Flows in a Tandem Compressor Cascade with Various Chord Ratios
chord ratios. Fig 3 shows the variation of loss

coefficient for two cascades with chord ratio
of1 and 1.337.
Figure 4. Flow losses in the wake at

midspan for cascades with different
chord ratio
Loss coefficient plots along blade height
normalised with the width of the domain is shown
Figure 3. Flow losses in the wake at in Figure 5.
midspan for cascades with different
chord ratio
The flow losses determined by the 3D-CFD

results at mid-span are different for different
cascades. The first peak in loss coefficient
corresponds to the effect created by the aft
blade and second peak is related to the effects
of the forward blade. When CR >1 i.e. the
forward blade has longer chord, the wake
created by it is stronger and the 2nd peak is
higher for this case. For blades with equal
chord ratio, pressure loss near the vicinity of
the blade is more, which is confirmed by the Figure 5. Loss coefficient plots along
higher values of the pressure loss coefficient blade height
corresponding to the first peak. Similar It shows a loss variation with highest value of
behaviour can be seen for chord ratio of 0.43 0.501 at the tip and a value of 0.38 at the hub
and is shown in Figure 4. portion. There is an irregular variation of loss
For the case of CR=1, wake effect is felt coefficient at the hub portion. The loss levels
stronger for the aft blade whereas for are almost constant and maintain a value less
CR=0.43 the loss for the aft blade is higher than 0.1 for y/t ranging from 0.025 to 0.16.
because of its larger chord length. After a height of 0.16 there is a huge
Comparison of loss coefficients for all chord increment in loss levels. The tip portion with
ratios showed that maximum loss coefficient a y/t of around 0.2 is experiencing highest
for CR=1 is always less than other cascade loss. This gives light to the tip effect which
designs (for both the cases where CR>1 or needs to be studied in detail. Figure 6 shows
CR <1). It is also noted that the flow the velocity contours at various locations
separates near the trailing edge of forward along the blade height for the front and aft
blade but the presence of aft blade makes the airfoils. The tip and hub effects are from
flow to reattach reducing the overall losses. these plots.
338
Sherin et al.
Figure 6. Velocity contours near the front and aft airfoil at various locations
CONCLUSIONS loading limits of subsonic compressor

tandem cascades End wall flow ASME
The performance of tandem NACA airfoils
with various chord ratios has been Turbo Expo Turbine Technical
investigated numerically. A 3-D, steady, Conference and Exposition.
incompressible model developed using finite Horlock J H 1973 Axial Flow
volume based formulation was used for the Compressors.Kreiger Publishing Co.
study. Simulations used RANS and
Transitional simulation using SST k-ω Josuhn-Kadner and Hoffmann B 1993
transport equation to compute performance Investigation on a radial compressor
for chord ratios ranging from 0.43 to 1.337. It tandem-rotor stage with adjustable
is observed that the chord ratio has strong geometry.
effect on the losses of tandem configuration
and the best overall performance of tandem Lei VM Spakovszky Z S and Greitzer E M
cascades is found to be at a chord ratio of 1. 2008 A criterion for axial compressor
These first results indicate the losses near the hubcorner stall ASME J
hub and tip are very high compared to the Turbomach130031006–1–10.
mid span. It should be emphasised that the
shown results and conclusions represent a Lieblein S 1965 Aerodynamic Design of
first approach that `has to be analysed further. Axial-Flow Compressors Tech. rep
The simulations were restricted to Chapter VI NASA SP-36.
incompressible flow and have to be extended
in order to account for compressibility effects. McGlumphy J Ng W F Wellborn S R and
Kempf S 2009 Numerical investigation
REFERENCES of tandem airfoils for subsonic axial-
Douglas A R and Suresh C K 2002 flow compressor blades ASME J
Numerical investigation of tandem- Turbomach131021018– 1–8.
impeller designs for a gas turbine TeschA Lange MVogele K Ortmanns J
compressor ASME J Turbomach 124 Johann E and Gmmer V 2014An
36–44. experimental investigation of a tandem
Frey T and Bohle M 2013 Flow structure of stator flow characteristic in a low speed
tandem cascades in the region of the axial research compressor ASME Turbo
sidewalls ASME 2013 Fluids Expo 2014 Turbine Technical
Engineering Division Summer Meeting. Conference and Exposition.
Hertel C Bode C Koulovic D and Schneider

T 2014 Investigations on aerodynamic
339
ICCMS2016
PREDICTION OF FLOW PARAMETERS FOR A FLOW PAST ROWS OF

STAGGERED CYLINDERS USING ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
METHODS
SHARMA N.* and SINGH U.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology Rourkela, Rourkela, India.
Abstract: The flow of a fluid past bluff objects is of great interest in the subject of
industrial aerodynamics. Specifically, there has recently been much interest in the
flow past multiple rows of staggered square cylinders. In this paper, artificial
intelligence (AI) methods of adaptive network fuzzy inference system (ANFIS) and
multi-gene genetic programming (MGGP) are used to predict the flow parameters of a
fluid in such a flow. Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) technique is implemented
to obtain the basic database under the conditions of varying geometrical and flow
parameters of the system. A numerical study is initially performed using the
commercial finite element method (FEM) solver software COMSOL Multiphysics
3.3a. The input parameters taken into consideration are transverse spacing (X/a),
stream-wise gap (L/a) and inlet velocity (u) to predict the flow parameters i.e.
vorticity and velocity field. The prediction will be used to characterise the transition
of flow to chaotic state.
Keywords: Flow past square cylinder; CFD; Neuro-fuzzy; artificial intelligence
INTRODUCTION vorticity at four points A, B, C and D as

shown in Figure 1. Also, using transient
As literature suggests, the characteristics of
analysis, the time series data for these values
the flow in a system where fluid flow takes
are also obtained for time, t (0s ≤ t ≤ 1s).
place past a square cylinder depends
These values are used to establish the basic
predominantly on transverse spacing (X/a),
database of 100 different arrangements in
stream-wise gap (L/a) and the Reynolds
space and at 176 different instances of time.
number, characterized here by the inlet
velocity, u of the fluid (where X denotes the
transverse spacing between the cylinders, a
denotes the side length of the square
cylinder) (Chatterjee and Biswas, 2015).
METHODOLOGY
The geometry taken into account to simulate
the flow past two rows of staggered cylinders
is shown in Figure 1. The values of input Figure 1. Schematics of the problem
parameters are continuously varied as (1 ≤ under consideration. In this figure L/a = 3
X/a ≤ 5),(1 ≤ L/a ≤ 10) and(1 m/s ≤ u ≤ 100 and X/a = 1
m/s) to obtain the values of velocity field and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: naushita.dodo96@gmail.com 340

Sharma and Singh
Around 3/4th of the data is used for training RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
and 1/4th of the data is used for testing for
The performance of the ANFIS and MGGP
both the artificial intelligence methods.
approaches for predicting velocity field and
For the ANFIS modelled system, the hybrid vorticity parameters are analysed. For the
optimization method is used with the ANFIS approach, the average testing error is
Gaussian input membership functions and found to be close to 5%, which is a
linear output membership functions in the reasonably accurate. Figure 2 shows the plot
Sugeno fuzzy inference system. The MGGP of actual and predicted training data and
system uses a population size of 250, number testing data, while figure 4 shows the almost
of generations to be 150 and maximum tree linear relationship between the two with an
depth of 4. R2 value of 0.9984, which shows an
The results of the ANFIS prediction are extremely large degree of correlation. Figure
obtained using the Neuro-Fuzzy Design 3 shows the surface plots obtained using the
toolbox of MATLAB R2014a software, and ANFIS system.
that of the MGGP using the GPTIPS 2.0
toolbox of MATLAB (Searson, 2015).
(a) (b)
Figure 2. Distribution of (a) training data and (b) testing data, in the Neuro-fuzzy
design for variation of velocity at point C with time.
(a) (b)
Figure 3. Surface Plots of (a) velocity at point C against t and u (b) velocity at point
C against L/a and u.
341
Prediction of Flow Parameters for A Flow Past Rows of Staggered Cylinders using Artificial Intelligence
Methods
150 of training and 44 sets of testing data are used

in case of time based analysis. The mean
Preicted Value
absolute error is found to be 2.8560. Figure 6

100
shows the distribution of actual and predicted
training and testing data, and Figure 7 shows
50 almost a linear relationship between the same
R² = 0.9984
with R2 values of 0.9893 and 0.96754 for
0 training and testing data respectively, which
0 50 100 150 shows a large degree of correlation as well.
Actual Value
Figure 4. Correlation of actual and

predicted testing data for data in Figure 2.
Similar results are obtained for varying space
configurations at a static time (t = 1 s) as
shown in Figure 5. The R2 value is obtained
as 0.9924, which again shows a substantially
high degree of correlation.
(a)
(a)
(b)
Figure 6: Distribution of the actual
and predicted data for the variation of
velocity at point C with time, (a) training
data and (b) testing data.
(b)
Similar plots are obtained for varying space
Figure 5: Distribution of (a) training
configurations at a specific time (t=1s), with
data and (b) testing data, in the Neuro-
75 sets for training data and 25 sets for
fuzzy design for variation of velocity at
testing data is used. The mean absolute error
point C with space.
is found to be 3.4239 and a correlation (R2)
Taking a similar approach, we obtain the of 0.9871 and 0.9819 is obtained for training
results of MGGP prediction, wherein 132 sets and testing data respectively.
342
Sharma and Singh
ratios and three dimensional computations

can be done to achieve the flow parameters.
Since, three dimensional computations
require much more time than two-
dimensional computation; AI predictions are
expected to lead to a significant advantage in
terms of drastically low estimation times of
the flow parameters.
REFERENCES
Chatterjee D Biswas G 2015 Journal of Wind
(a) Engineering and Industrial
Aerodynamics 136 1-11.
Sahu M Singh P Mahapatra S S Khatua K K
Expert Systems with Applications 39
4545-4557.
Searson D P 2015 GPTIPS 2: An Open-
Source Software Platform for
Symbolic Data Mining, In: Gandomi
A H Alavi A H and Ryan C (eds.)
Handbook of Genetic Programming
Applications Springer Switzerland.
(b)
Figure 7: Correlation of actual and
predicted (a) training and (b) testing data
for data variation of velocity at point C
with time.
CONCLUSION
This paper predicts the flow parameters i.e.
the variation of velocity field and vorticity
for a flow past an arrangement of staggered
cylinders. The translation of a computational
fluid mechanics study to an AI system
considerably reduces the time in predicting
the actual output with reasonable accuracy.
The large amount of time that is required in
geometry drawing, mesh generation and final
solution will be brought down, especially in
the case of flows dealing with high velocity
(Sahu et al, 2015). Chatterjee and Biswas
(2015) state that for a flow through staggered
cylinders, two dimensional computations
may be questioned at smaller separation
343
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OFCORRUGATION GEOMETRY ON POWER

CONSUMPTION AND FRICTION FACTOR IN A CHANNEL
BHARATH RAM R.1, SUDHARSAN T. S.1 and NAREN P. R.2*
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, SASTRA University India.
2
School of Chemical and Biotechnology, SASTRA University India.
Abstract: Corrugated channels are preferred for their enhanced heat transfer rates and
better mixing abilities. The turbulence, induced locally by the corrugation element and
increased surface area per length results in increased energy (heat) dissipation.
However, the presence of corrugation results in increased pressure drop and power
consumption per mass of fluid pumped into the system. The objective of the present
work is to simulate the hydrodynamics in 2D corrugated channels of different
corrugation geometries under a range of operating conditions and estimate the effect
of corrugation geometry on power consumption, friction factor and flow distribution.
Keywords: Corrugation; Turbulence; Power Consumption; Friction Factor.
INTRODUCTION found that the friction losses enhanced by a

factor of 1.9–2.6 relative to that for parallel
Two techniques, namely active and passive,
plate channel, depending on both phase shift
are extensively used by industries to facilitate
and spacing of the corrugated channel.
heat transfer enhancement [Webb, 1994].
Corrugated channels are a classification of The influence of rectangular corrugation on
the simple and less expensive passive friction factor was analyzed by varying the
category, Corrugations induce recirculation height and length of grooves [Henrique de
of flow which disrupts the thermal boundary Azevedo, 1980]. It was found that the friction
layer through its separation and reattachment. factor increases for a given Reynolds when
This in turn enhances the momentum transfer the grooves length increases. This work aims
between the fluid layers aiding the process of at studying the effect of corrugation
convective heat transfer. But the penalty for geometries, namely triangular and wedge
enhanced heat transfer is increase in pressure shaped, on power consumption and friction
drop required to drive the flow through the factor through numerical simulations.
channel.
GEOMETRICAL DESIGN AND
It was found through experiments that heat
NUMERICAL PROCEDURE
transfer from the corrugated channel was 3.5
times higher than that from a smooth one. The 2D geometry was created and meshed in
However, the pressure drop was 5–6 times ANSYS-Workbench12.1. The geometries
larger than that of a smooth channel [Sunden created include smooth channel, family of
and Skoldheden, 1985]. channels with triangular corrugation and
channels with wedge shaped corrugation. The
The effects of channel spacing and phase
dimensional details of base case smooth
shift variations on heat transfer and pressure
channel are given in Table.1 followed by the
drop were analyzed [Elshafei, 2010]. It was
details of a corrugation elements in Table 2
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: prnaren@scbt.sastra.edu 344

Bharath Ram et al.
and Table 3. The flow was analysed using result for smooth channel was validated with
water (liquid) as the fluid medium. No-slip analytical solution obtained from literature.
boundary was specified at walls. Inlet and The inlet parameter, namely velocity, was
outlet boundary was specified as velocity varied and simulation was carried out for
inlet and outflow respectively. Fluent aforementioned geometrical configurations
software was used to carry out the simulation from which appropriate results were inferred.
where in time averaged Navier-Stokes
Table 1. Geometrical details of Smooth
equations were solved. Standard K- model
Channel
was used for turbulence modelling. SIMPLE
algorithm was used for Pressure-Velocity Design Notation Value
Coupling [Patankar, 1980]. Least Squares Parameter
Cell Based method was used to discretize the Length L 120mm
convection and diffusion terms in the flow
Channel Width D 10mm
conservation equation. Normalized residual
value of 10-7 was set as convergence criteria.
Grid independence analysis was carried out
and optimal number of grid cells, found to be
58800, was arrived at. The computational
Table 2. Geometrical details of Triangular Corrugation.
Corrugation Element Geometrical Details

120mm
Length of Channel L
Channel Height D 10mm
Corrugation Width w 2mm
Corrugation Height h 1mm

Pitch P 4mm
Table 3. Geometrical details of Wedge Shaped Corrugation.
Corrugation Element Geometrical Details

Length of Channel L 120mm
Channel Height D 10mm
Corrugation Width w 2mm
Corrugation Height h 1mm

Pitch P 4mm
345
Effect of Corrugation Geometry on Power Consumption and Friction Factor in a Channel
increase in friction factor value was

observed followed by a drop in its value
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION after a critical number of corrugations.
The pressure drop, calculated

computationally between inlet and outlet of
the smooth channel enabled the prediction
of friction factor.
𝛥𝑃
𝑓= (1)
𝜌𝑣 2
For a corrugated channel, it was observed
that the value of friction factor was mainly
affected by spacing between the corrugation
elemeznts. Upon analysis, it was inferred
that, increase in Reynolds Number resulted
in overall decrease in friction factor value
for both corrugation geometries. The plot of
Friction Factor vs. Number of Corrugations
for a given Reynolds Number value is
shown in Fig 1.
Triangular Corrugation Figure.2 Pressure Drop (Pa) vs
Wedge Shaped Corrugation Reynolds Number for channel with 25
1.4 corrugation/side.
1.2 It was inferred from Fig.2 that the pressure
drop value for channel with wedge shaped
Friction Factor
1.0
corrugation was considerably less when
0.8 compared to channel with triangular
0.6 corrugation. This can be construed as
reduced power consumption in wedge
0.4
shaped corrugation as compared to
0.2 triangular corrugation when the value of
0.0 Reynolds Number increases.
0 20 40 60
No of Corrugations/side of The comparison of velocity contours for
channel wedge shaped and triangular corrugations, is
shown in Fig.3.
Figure.1 Friction Factor vs Number of

Corrugations for Reynolds Number
value of 19802
It was seen that in case of wedge shaped
corrugation there was a gradual increase in
the value of friction factor as number of
corrugations increased. But in the case of
triangular corrugation, initially, as the
number of corrugations increased an
346
Bharath Ram et al.
Figure 3. X-Velocity (m/s) contour for Engineering and Sciences Belo

channel with Wedge Shaped and Horizonte MG November 10-14.
Triangular Corrugation, Re=19802 Patankar S V 1980 Numerical heat transfer
It is evident that wedge shaped design and fluid flow McGraw-Hill New York
facilitates lesser recirculation in corrugation 123-130.
pockets than triangular corrugation. This Sunden B Skoldheden T 1985 Heat transfer
reflects in overall power consumption. and pressure drop in a new type of
corrugated channels. Int Commun Heat
CONCLUSION
Mass 12 559–566.
Corrugated channels are extensively used
Webb R L 1994 Principles of enhanced heat
for their enhanced heat dissipation but at the
Transfer John Wiley & Sons Inc. New
cost of increased power consumption per
York 3-10.
mass of fluid flow. In this work, friction
factor and pressure drop were used to NOTATIONS
quantify the power consumption in the
corrugated channels. From simulations, it f Friction Factor
was inferred that channels with wedge
∆P Pressure Drop between inlet and
shaped corrugations had lesser power
outlet of the channel (Pa).
consumption values compared to channel
with triangular corrugation. Further work is ρ Density of fluid (kg/m3).
in progress regarding the design and
analysis of different corrugation geometries. v Inlet velocity of fluid (m/s).
This study would guide the better design of
corrugated channels.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Two of the authors (Sudharsan T S and
Bharath Ram R) thank ISHRAE-Student
Chapter, SASTRA University and CAD-
CAM lab, SoME, SASTRA University for
the opportunity provided to learn CFD that
resulted in this mini-project.
REFERENCES
Elshafei E A M Awad M M El-Negiry EAli
A G January 2010 Heat Transfer and
Pressure Drop in Corrugated Channels
Energy 35(1) 101-110.
Henrique de Azevedo S Rigoberto Morales
E M Admilson Franco T Silvio
Junqueira L M Raul Erthal H Marcelo
de Albuquerque Lima Goncalves 2008
Numerical Simulation of Turbulent
Flow in Corrugated Pipes 12th
Brazilian Congress of Thermal
347
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDY OF FLOW DISTRIBUTION IN A PARALLEL

CHANNEL MANIFOLD
ASWIN R.1, SHRAVAN RAAGHAV K. R.1 and NAREN P. R.2*
1
School of Mechanical Engineering, SASTRA University, India.
2
School of Chemical & Biotechnology, SASTRA University, India.
Abstract: Manifold design with milli-channels are typically used in electronic

devices for heat dissipation, scaling-up (numbering-up) of milli-channel reactors, fuel
cells and many other industrial devices. Uniform flow distribution across channels in
a manifold is of significance in design and use of manifolds. The present work
focusses on the flow distribution in manifold design with rectangular channels
through Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) model. A pressure-based solver using
control volume approach was used for this purpose. In addition to predicting the flow
pattern, the simulated results gave significant insight on fluid dynamics of rectangular
channels in a manifold. The CFD model was used to qualitatively assess the
performance of different configurations of the manifold and choose the best design
configuration.For a given manifold and channel dimension, it was found that there
were an optimum number of channels for which the mal-distribution was minimal.
Moreover for a given manifold design, beyond a certain operating flow rate, the flow
distribution pattern was found to be invariant of the operating condition. The results
obtained in this work will provide insights for identifying manifold configurations
that assures the best flow distribution.
Keywords: Milli-channel; Flow distribution; Manifold; CFD; Configurations.
INTRODUCTION [Maharudrayya, 2006]. Manifold with

multiple bifurcated channels hasbeen
Uniform distribution of flow is the basis for suggested to give good uniformity in flow
many engineering and industrial processes distribution [Li, 2008]. Uniform flow
such as in micro/milli-channel reactors, static distribution in minimum space timehas
mixers, fuel cells and heat sinks for cooling further been improved by shape optimization
electronic devices. Uniform flow distribution of manifolds [Tonomura, 2004].
plays an important role in providing better
In the present study, numerical investigation
heat transfer, less pressure loss and
of shape optimized rectangular channel
minimizing flow-related stresses due to non-
manifoldwas performed.The objective is to
uniformity [Liu, 2010].
arrive at a methodology to identify manifold
Parallel channel manifolds with different configuration that can offer the best flow
arrangements such as U-type, Z-type, distribution. A 2D geometry was considered
serpentine and interdigitated channelshave for the present numerical study.
been studied and addressed in the past
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: prnaren@scbt.sastra.edu 348

Aswin et al.
COMPUTATIONAL MODEL AND purpose of this work. The distribution is

PROCEDURE characterized using a flow distribution
The base case manifold geometry consisting parameter defined as:
of four channels is illustrated in Figure1. The ∑𝑁
𝑖=1(𝑄𝑐 −𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑔 )
𝑃𝑓 = (1)
channel of length 0.3 m and hydraulic 𝑁𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑔
diameter of 0.02 m was considered. The flow The deviation of Pf from 0 indicates the
rates were chosen such that the flow extent of non-uniformity in flow distribution
remainedturbulent and manifold Reynolds in the manifold. Pf value of 0 denotes the
numberwas in the range of 8000 to 120000. idealflow distribution.
Different configurations of the manifold were
considered including the variation of channel
width and variation of manifold width for the
same ratio of inlet manifold width to the
entire manifold width.
The geometries of the manifold were built
and the numerical simulations were carried
out usingcommercialCFD toolFLUENT (Ver.
12.1, ANSYS Inc., USA). Water was
considered as the working fluid and the flow
was assumed to be incompressible. The k-ε
turbulence model with standard wall Figure 1. Parallel channel manifold
functions was considered for predicting the It was obviously evident from the simulated
turbulence of the flow. Pressure-based solver results that the flow in the manifold was more
was used for the simulations with gravity uniform at the lowest flow rate of 240 lpm
considered to be acting in the downwardy- (Figure 2). The mal-distributionwas found to
direction (gy = -9.81 m/s2).The manifold increase with flow rate up to a point, after
inlet was modelled as uniform velocity inlet which the change in flow distribution
and pressure was imposed at the manifold parameter (Pf) becomes insignificant.The
outlet. No-slip condition was specified at the variation of flow distribution parameter with
walls. The SIMPLE algorithm was used for flow rate was found to be similar for various
the coupling of velocity and pressure fields. manifold configurations as shown in Figure
Spatial discretization of the grid was 3. The uniformity of flow distribution in 3-
performed using second order upwind channel and 8-channel manifold
scheme. The grid independent single channel configurations was found to be insensitive to
geometry having the same dimensions was all the flow rates considered. For 4-channel
validated using the available theoretical and 5-channel manifold configurations, the
correlations [Teng, 2012]. Accordingly, all non-uniformity increased up to a flow rate of
simulations of the manifold were performed 1800lpm beyond which the change became
with mesh having a total of 168000 cells. insignificant. It was alsoobserved that 4-
channel manifold resulted in the least value
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION of flow distribution parameter (Pf) and hence
Themethodology to ascertain better better flow distribution of all the manifold
uniformity in flow distribution is the main configurations and across all operating
conditions. Any increase or decrease in
349
Numerical Study of Flow Distribution in a Parallel Channel Manifold
number of channels in the manifold lead to

substantial upsurge in flow mal-distribution.
The contours of static pressure and velocity
in x-direction for the best configuration of the
manifold is shown in Figure 4.
0.25
Flow Distribution Parameter (-)
0.2
0.15
(a)
0.1
0.05
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Flow Rate (lpm)
Figure 2. Variation of flow parameter with

flow rate for 4-channel manifold
4-channel 3-channel
5-channel 8-channel (b)
0.6 Figure 4. Contours of(a) Static
Flow Distribution Parameter (-)
Pressure(Pa) and (b) X-Velocity (m/s) for

0.5
4-channel manifold at a flow rate of 240
0.4
lpm
0.3 CONCLUSION
0.2 Uniform flow distribution plays a significant

role in increasing the effectiveness of many
0.1 industrial devices and processes. In the
present work, a single parameter based on
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 flow rate was used to quantify the uniformity
Flow Rate (lpm) of flow in the parallel channel manifold. The
simulations indicated that for a given
manifold geometry, 4-channel
Figure 3. Variation of flow parameter with manifoldgavebetter flow distribution over the
flow rate for various manifold structures range of operating conditions. It seemed that
350
Aswin et al.
for the given manifold geometry, there exists

a certain channel geometry that would give Tonomura O Tanaka S Noda M Kano M
better flow distribution across operating Hasebe S and Hashimoto I 2004 CFD-
conditions. Further work is in progress to test based optimal design of manifold in
plate-fin microdevices Chemical
this hypothesis with different manifold
Engineering Journal 101 397-402.
dimensions. The methodology adopted in this
study would guide the better design of NOTATIONS
parallel channel manifolds.
i Channel Number
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS N Number of Channels
Two of the authors (Aswin and Shravan Qavg Theoretical Flow Rate, lpm
Raaghav) thank ISHRAE-Student Chapter, Qc Channel Flow Rate, lpm
SASTRA University and CAD-CAM lab,
Pf Flow Distribution Parameter
SoME, SASTRA University for the
opportunity provided to learn CFD that
resulted in this mini-project.
REFERENCES
Li P Coopamah D and Ki J P 2008 Uniform

distribution of species in fuel cells using
a multiple flow bifurcation design
Proceedings of 6th International
Conference on Fuel Cell Science,
Engineering and Technology 897-902
Denver Colorado USA June 16-18 2008.
Liu H Li P and Lew J V 2010 CFD study on

flow distribution uniformity in fuel
distributors having multiple structural
bifurcations of flow channels
International Journal of Hydrogen
Energy 35 9186-9198.
Maharudrayya S Jayanti S and Deshpande A

P 2006 Pressure drop and flow
distribution in multiple parallel-channel
configurations used in proton-exchange
membrane fuel cell stacks Journal of
Power Sources 157 358-367.
Teng J T Chu J C Liu C Xu T Lien Y F

Cheng J H Huang S Jin S Dang T Zhang
C Yu X Lee M T Greif R 2012 Fluid
dynamics in microchannels Fluid
dynamics computational modelling and
applications Dr. Juarez L H (Ed.)
INTECH Open Access Publisher.
351
ICCMS2016
EXPERIMENTAL AND NUMERICAL STUDY ON WAKE EVACUATION

EFFECTS IN EXPANSION DEFLECTION NOZZLES
MOHAN K., MUNJAL P., VISHAK S. and VAIDYANATHAN A.*
Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology, Trivandrum, India.
Abstract: Altitude compensating nozzles are designed to adjust its effective area ratio
to the pressure ratios to which it is exposed to using active or passive mechanisms.
This would ensure ideal performance of rocket nozzles at all altitudes, thereby
improving its payload capacity tremendously. Expansion Deflection nozzles use a
stationary pintle, designed and optimised, to achieve altitude compensation. The
performance of these nozzles largely depends on the setting up of the wake region
downstream of the pintle, and achieving near ambient wake pressure. Though altitude
compensating capability of ED nozzles have been proved beyond doubts, the
anomalies reported in the achieved wake pressures points to the under ideal
performance and hence underutilisation of its real capabilities.
The work reported in the paper attempts to explore the wake evacuation effect using
experimental and numerical techniques. Experimental techniques including Schlieren
photography and wall pressure measurements are carried out on a planar ED nozzle
and the data obtained is used to validate the results from the numerical analysis. The
nozzles are subjected to NPR ranging from 2 to 5 and the results obtained are
compared to those obtained numerically. Dependence of wake pressure on the pintle
geometry is also analysed. Using the above study the mode of evacuation of the wake
isstudied and the characteristics of wake evacuation effect are deduced. Possible
methods for analyzing this effect and further steps to improve the nozzle performance
are also discussed in the current paper.
Keywords: ED Nozzle; Altitude compensation; Wake evacuation effect.
INTRODUCTION is indeed a great achievement for a rocket

Altitude compensating nozzles have always industry both in terms of technological
been a dream of Rocket Engineers. A nozzle advancement and in turnover. Recent works
which can adapt itself to the NPR at various by Taylor et al (2004, 2011, 2007) and
altitudes, is expected to deliver ideal Wagner et al (2011) have proved the
performance throughout the working regime, capabilities of altitude compensating nozzles.
unlike the conventional nozzles that are Among the available concepts of altitude
designed for a fixed NPR. This would compensation nozzles, the concept of
improve the nozzle performance and hence Expansion Deflection nozzle stands out due
increase the payload carrying capacity of the to its passive mode of operation, simplicity in
rockets. Any small improvement in payload design and lower hardware mass. Though the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:aravind7@iist.ac.in 352

Mohan et al.
altitude compensation capability of ED on the analysis of wake evacuation effect

nozzles have been debated, recent studies using data obtained from Schlieren
have been successful in demonstrating the photography technique, pressure
relative advantages of these type of nozzle in measurements and CFD models.
both altitude compensation and length (and
thereby mass) reduction. METHODOLOGY OF STUDY
ED Nozzles are special kind of altitude The methodology adopted for study includes
compensating nozzles with an inner pintle both the experimental and numerical
that deflects the flow from the throat to the simulation using available commercial
walls of the nozzle. This not only aids the packages. In the present study, the nozzle
flow to be attached to the nozzle but also contour designed using the method of
imparts altitude compensation capabilities by characteristics is subjected to NPR varying
creating a wake region which communicates from 1 to 5 in steps of 1 and ramp from 1 to 5
with the ambient conditions, thereby NPR. The ramp test ensured the simulation of
adjusting the AR automatically to the ideal the exact conditions to which the nozzle
value. The establishment of a wake region in would be subjected to while in actual
constant communication with the ambient operating environment. The steady state tests
allow for continual adjustment of nozzle AR on the other hand are used to obtain the
compensating for the effects of change in steady state conditions in all these cases. The
altitude. The wake area in fact acts like a Schlieren images and pressure measurements
physical boundary. The nozzle AR can be at the walls and the wake region are obtained
varied up to the physical limits of the nozzle for each of the above mentioned conditions.
itself. These nozzles, by virtue of its design, The CAD model of the ED nozzle contour
remained free of separation even at lower used for studies is detailed in Figure1 and the
altitudes. In such conditions, the wake region test matrix used for experimental
controls the AR, and the nozzle physical AR investigation is as furnished in Table 1.
is controlled by the weight and other
considerations. In regions where the achieved
AR is less than the physical AR of the nozzle,
the nozzle is considered to be operating in the
open wake mode. As the altitude increases,
the NPR also increases, and the open wake
transitions towards the closed wake mode
where the achieved AR is constrained by the
physical AR of the nozzle. Figure 1. ED Nozzle Contour
However many phenomena related to these

types of nozzles are yet to be completely Table 1. Test Matrix
analyzed and understood. One such
phenomenon is termed as wake evacuation 1 Steady State Test 3bar abs
effect. This refers to the reduction in wake
2 Steady State Test 4bar abs
pressure that is observed during the actual
firing of such engines. This reduction has 3 Steady State Test 5bar abs
been reported to vary from predictions in
many literatures. The present study focuses 4 Up Ramp Test 1 to 5bar abs
353
Experimental and Numerical Study on Wake Evacuation Effects in Expansion Deflection Nozzles
Numerical simulations are performed on a 2D 6% is observed between the experimentally

mesh using CFD++ software package. The and numerically obtained wall pressures.
grid is generated using Point wise software The CFD simulation could as well capture all
with the parameters furnished in Table 2. A the phenomena observed in the experimental
gird independence study is conducted with C f results. Figure 3 represents the sample
value as the reference value to identify the comparison between the Schlieren image
optimal grid. Simulations are carried out obtained experimentally and that
using the selected grid with various corresponding to numerical Schlieren. The
turbulence models like SA, SST, Realisable image to the left is the experimental, and the
K-Epsilon and Goldberg model. On right image is numerically obtained.
comparison of the wall pressure data obtained
from numerical model and experimental data 0.9
it is noted that the SST turbulence model 0.8

CFD Data
Expt. Data
produced better results and hence is
Pwake (bar abs)
0.7
employed in further simulations. All
simulations are performed assuming steady 0.6
state conditions, and number of iterations is

0.5
decided by the reduction in residuals by five
orders of magnitude. 0.4
2 3 4 5 6
Po (bar abs)
Table 2. Grid Parameters Figure 2. Wake Pressure Plot

Sr.
Mesh Parameter Attribute
No
1 Mesh type Structured Mes

2 No of cells 2,82,350
3 Avg. Skewness 0.1
4 Avg. Aspect Ratio 5.02

Figure 3. Comparison of experimental
The Schlieren images obtained clearly
and numerical Schlieren images.
captured all the flow features that are
expected to occur in ED nozzles. The
variations in the flow features with variation The CFD analysis yielded data which could
in NPR are also noticeable. The wall pressure be subjected to post processing so as to
measurements are matched with these images obtain the stream line profiles. These profiles
and were found to be matching qualitatively. clearly demonstrate the setting up of a vortex
The wake pressures at different NPR showed bubble inside the wake region as shown in
a clear trend as can be observed from Figure Figure 4. This bubble reduces in size with an
2. The experimental results obtained matched increase in NPR.
with the numerical simulations to a high level On analysis of the data obtained it is found
of accuracy. A maximum deviation of only that the wake pressure varied inversely to rise
in NPR. However it is observed that the fall
354
Mohan et al.
in wake pressure is not exactly corresponding ambient so as to ensure ideal performance of

to the expected fall in ambient ED nozzles under all conditions of NPR.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to thank and
acknowledge Workshop Team & APLD Lab
Team at IIST, Valiamala, Trivandrum and
Mr. Rahul Nair for their sincere efforts and
supports which lead to the realization of this
Figure 4. CFD result showing vortex work.
inside wake region
REFERENCES
pressure with altitudes corresponding to the
Taylor N and Hempsell C 2004 Optimizing
respective NPR. This indicates that the expansion deflection nozzles for vacuum
nozzle may not be delivering ideal thrust The Aeronautical Journal
performance at all altitudes. The CFD 108(1088) 515-522.
analysis shows the formation of a wake Taylor N and Hempsell C 2004 Throat flow
bubble which in fact restricts the modeling of expansion deflection
communication of the wake with the ambient. nozzles Journal of the British
The wake bubble seems to reduce in size with Interplanetary Society 57 242-250.
increase in NPR owing to the transformation Taylor N Johan Steelant Robert Bond 2011
of the nozzle operating mode from open Experimental comparison of Dual Bell
wake to closed wake mode. This effect has to and Expansion Deflection nozzles AIAA
be studied in details and any possible 2011-5688.
methods like secondary fluid injection to the Taylor N T Sato 2007 Experimental
wake or establishment of communication of measurements of an expansion deflection
wake and ambient has to be developed so as nozzle in open wake mode Journal of the
to extract maximum benefit out of these British Interplanetary Society 60(10)
nozzles. 377-386.
Wagner B and Schlechtriem S 2011
CONCLUSION Numerical and experimental study of
The experimental and numerical investigation flow in a planar expansion deflection
into the wake evacuation effect reported in nozzle AIAA 2011-5942.
ED nozzles yielded many valuable results. Wagner B Stark R and Schlechtriem S 2011
The results from CFD analysis is found to Experimental Study of planar expansion
match with experimental data. The inverse deflection nozzle flow field In 4th
relation of wake pressure with rise in NPR is European Conference for Aerospace
Sciences EUCASS.
demonstrated. The reduction in wake
pressure is however observed to be higher
than expected. The setting up of the wake
bubble and related vortex bubble is captured
in CFD simulation. Studies in future needs to
concentrate on developing techniques to
ensure adjustability of wake region to the
355
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDIES OF A SHELL-AND-TUBE PCM BASED HEAT

STORAGE UNIT
SAMANTA H., ROY P. C.* and BARMAN N.
Department of Mechanical engineering, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, India.
Abstract: The enthalpy based 2D numerical model of shell and tube PCM heat
exchanger unit has been used to study the melting and solidification characteristics.
The numerical model has been validated with experimental data for melting and
solidification with fin configuration. Temporal variation and melt fraction distribution
in the numerical domain with time during melting and solidification at different
locations in the numerical domain of PCM has been studied. Model predicted result
shows well agreement with results available in literature.
Keywords: Phase change material; Enthalpy based numerical model; Melting
and Solidification.
INTRODUCTION studies on a shell-and-tube PCM based heat

In recent years thermal energy storage plays a storage unit has been carryout out to study
greater role in the era of energy storage. The heat transfer behavior, charging and
Phase Change Materials (PCMs) based discharging behavior of calcium chloride
thermal energy storages are used in melting hexahydrate. The enthalpy based 2D
and solidification process. Due to the high numerical model of shell and tube PCM heat
energy storage density and constant phase exchanger unit has been developed to study
change temperature, phase change thermal the melting and solidification characteristics
energy storage (PCTES) has gradually [Chakraborty and Dutta]. The numerical
become one of the preferred thermal energy model has been validated with experimental
storage systems [Al-Abidi et al.]. PCMs store data for melting and solidification with fin.
the energy in the form of latent heat during Temporal variation, melt fraction distribution
phase change and this energy is being used in the numerical domain with time during
afterwards for different and several purposes melting and solidification at different
like cooling of building, storing of medicines locations in the numerical domain of PCM
and beverages, cooling of electronic devices, has been studied for fin configuration.
domestic hot water, heating and cooling
MODEL DESCRIPTIONS
systems, electronic products, drying
technology, waste heat recovery, refrigeration The present work considers the melting and
and cold storage, and solar cookers with a solidification phenomenon of the CCHH
prospective of pollution free agreement with (CaCl 2 , 6H 2 O) in a cylindrical annulus axi-
the sufficient utilization [Brent et.al]. The symmetrically heated at constant temperature
experimental set up is always an essential from the left face of the rectangular cavity.
parameter for any practical study. In the The chemical is experimented with the
present work, experimental and numerical normal tube and the tube fitted with fin.
Initially the PCM is assumed at ambient
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: prokash.roy@gmail.com 356

Samanta et al.
temperature above the melting temperature. shown in Figure. 1. Detailed model

In order to create thermal convection in the formulations, governing equations, system
cavity the left face or the left wall is data and the thermo physical properties used
maintained at constant temperature (T c ) for the simulation are presented in our recent
below the melting temperature (T melt ) when literature [Samanta et. al].
other walls (right side wall, the top side,
bottom side) of the cavity are assumed to MODEL VALIDATIONS
adiabatic. The present boundary condition After successful grid independent test, the
develops a thermal gradient ( ∇T /H) along developed model has been validated with the
the length of the cavity. The solidification experimental results performed in the heat
begins from the left face due to thermal power laboratory in the Department of
cooling. During solidification a Rayleigh- Mechanical Engineering. Multiple sets of
Bernard convection is developed in the experimental data have been used to show the
transition zone (solid-liquid phase) which repeatability of the results and though there is
indicates a sudden temperature fall in the a slight variation which is due to the variation
PCM. As well as in case of melting when the in the position of the thermocouple within the
left wall maintained at a higher temperature PCMs.
than the melting temperature the solid PCM
starts melting. The fin configuration added a
heat addition and as well as subtraction from
the top wall and the bottom wall also.
Figure 2. Variation of temperature with

time during solidification of calcium
chloride hexahydrate with fin
configuration
Figure 1. Schematic of the problem

domain with fin
The present model is based on a 2-D
rectangular cavity to investigate the transport
phenomena during melting and solidification
of the above aqueous solution and the re-
melting of solid-liquid interface due to Figure 3. Variation of temperature with
time during melting of calcium chloride
thermal convection. The schematic of the 2-D
with fin configuration
cavity with fin fitted tube configuration is
357
Numerical Studies of a Shell-And-Tube PCM Based Heat Storage Unit
The experimental plots of temperature suppression of the upper layer molten PCM
variation of thermocouple at different at higher temperature as well as the high
location are showing a good agreement with temperature gradient over the solid layer
the numerical data generated from the resides below in the cavity. The conduction
numerical model has been shown in figure 2 heat influence is much less compared to the
and figure 3, during solidification and high convective heat transfer. Though, the
melting respectively. Variation of upper section of the melt front advances
temperature with time during solidification of rapidly. The lower section moves relatively
calcium chloride hexahydrate with fin slower than the upper part shown in Figure. 5
configuration shows close agreement with the
experimental results.
The melting of calcium chloride hexahydrate
is plotted with fin configuration shown in
Figure.3. There is a fluctuation of
temperature during melting in the numerical
results at 30°C occur due to its melt near the
wall and fluctuates due to circulation. But in
the experiments, it shows gradual increase of
temperature with time and raises its sensible
heat. The experimental temperature data
Figure.4 Distribution of temperature with
available from the experimental procedure is fin at T=35°C, t=100; 1000; 3000;
showing a good agreement with the 6000sec
numerically available temperature data for
different thermocouple at different location
of the experimental domain.

After successful validation of the developed
model during solidification and melting,
temperature distribution and melt fraction in
the computational domain have studied. The
isotherm plots give an idea of temperature
distribution. With the enhancement of the fin,
the heat is generating from the three sides of Figure.5. Melt fraction with fin at T=35°C,
the working domain. So the heat t=100; 1000; 3000; 6000sec
accumulation in the PCM is more shown in The solidification process morphology is
Figure.4. The natural convection field grows different from the melting process. The
and plays an important role for propagation Figure. 6 shows the isotherm plots in the
of the melt front and over all energy numerical domain. In fin arrangement i.e.
transport. The propagation of the melt front three walled heat transfer the PCM solidified
becomes more acute as melting progress with along the three surfaces. Similar observations
the time and heat generation in the cavity. have been made for melt fractions shown in
This is mainly due to convection heat figure 7. Model predicted results shows
generation in the numerical domain for the similar agreement the results available
358
Samanta et al.
literature [Ismail et. al., 2001; Lorente et. al., Authors deeply acknowledge for utilizing the
2014 ] experimental facilities procured through the
research grant by SERB, DST (Sanction No.
SERB/F/2534/2012-2013 dated 08/08/2012)
under Fast Track Scheme for Young
Scientist.
REFERENCES
Al-Abidi A A Mat S Sopian K Sulaiman M Y
and Mohammad A 2013 Internal and
external fin heat transfer enhancement
technique for latent heat thermal energy
storage in triplex tube heat exchangers
Applied Thermal Engineering 53(1)
147-156
Figure.6. Isotherm plot with fin at Brent A D Voller V R and Reid K J 1988
T=20°C, t=30; 100; 200; 500sec Enthalpy porosity technique for
modeling convection –diffusion on
phase change: application to the
melting of pure metal Numerical Heat
Transfer 13(3) 297-318
Chakraborty S and Dutta P 2001 A
generalized formulation for evaluation
of latent heat functions in enthalpy-
based macroscopic models for
convection-diffusion phase charge
processes Metallurgical and Materials
Transactions B 32(3) 562-564
Figure.7. Melt fraction with fin T=20°C,
t=30; 60; 200; 500sec Samanta H Roy P C Barman N 2015
Modeling of Solidification of CCHH
CONCLUSIONS (CaCl2, 6H2O) in a Shell-and Tube
Numerical studies of a shell and tube PCM PCM based Heat Storage Unit Procedia
heat exchanger unit has been done based on Engineering 127 816–823
enthalpy based 2D numerical model to study Ismail K A R Alves C L F and Modesto M S
the melting and solidification characteristics. 2001 Numerical and experimental
The model has been validated with study on the solidification of PCM
experimental data for melting and around a vertical axially finned
solidification with fin configuration. isothermal cylinder, Applied Thermal
Temporal variation and melt fraction Engineering 21(1) 53-77
distribution in the numerical domain has been
Lorente S Bejan A and Niu J L 2014 Phase
studied at different locations in the numerical
change heat storage in an enclosure
domain of PCM.
with vertical pipe in the center
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS International Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer 72 329–335.
359
ICCMS2016
HEAT TRANSFER AUGMENTATION OF HELIXCHANGER USING CFD

RAJE N.*, TANDALE M. and MANJUNATH C.
Dr Babasaheb Ambedkar Technological University, Lonere, Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: Fluid flow and heat transfer performance of ¼ sector non-continuous helical
baffled shell and tube heat exchanger (HBSTHEx) with 30° baffle inclination angle is
numerically simulated using multi-block structured mesh, which exhibits an
approximate spiral pitch. The results obtained with CFD. Expert-Lite, are showing well
coalescence with previous work, showing a difference of 3% in pressure drop and 7%
in heat transfer coefficient. In the present study, the mesh and CFD code, are validated.
The results of the study have been used for further investigations. One of the objectives
of the study was determination of an optimum mass flow rate for lower pressure drop
and higher heat transfer coefficient, for the same configuration by trying some
alternatives such as, (1) Changing baffle inclination angle to 40°. (2) Current geometry
shows some leakages through V-Notch (triangular region) between two adjacent
baffles. Blocking V-Notch directly, by putting wall, can suppress the leakage region.
(3) Another way of improvisation would be by putting holes on baffle leading to
decreased pressure drop and reduced velocity drop behind baffle wall, but its effect on
the heat transfer coefficient is worth studying.
Keywords: Structured mesh; CFD Expert-Lite; Mass flow rate; Pressure drop;
Heat transfer
INTRODUCTION any design change to reduce one type of loss

is going to have an opposite effect on other.
Heat exchangers are devices that facilitate
So, it is very difficult to decide whether the
the exchange of heat between two fluids that
proposed design will give net improvement
are at different temperatures while impeding
in its performance. Based on this,
them from mixing with each other. Shell and
Salahuddin (2015) reviewed that, by
tube heat exchangers are applicable for wide
increasing turbulence intensity, flow
range of operating temperature and pressure.
resistance can be increased which enhances
They have larger ratio of heat transfer
heat transfer. Flow resistance enhances heat
surface to volume than double pipe heat
transfer but leads to increased power
exchanger and they are easy to manufacture
consumption. To increase turbulence
in large variety of sizes and flow
intensity, helical baffles were suggested by
configurations.
Cong Dong (2014) over segmental baffles.
Adrian Bejan (1978) reported that heat
Developed plug flow conditions result in
transfer and pressure losses are coupled. So,
enhanced heat exchanger performance.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: nikhilsraje@gmail.com

360
Raje et al.
Literature survey so far gives an idea that

the pressure drop in heat exchanger with
segmental baffles is more compared with
helical baffles.
Mihua Zhang (2015) carried out
computational work on different baffle
inclination angles ranging from 10o – 30o.
Whereas, various studies reported better Turbulent kinetic energy,
performance with 40o baffle inclination
angle.
In present study, computational fluid Turbulent dissipation energy,
dynamics method is employed to
systematically study thermo-hydraulic
performance of helixchanger with 40o helix
Where,
inclination angle and respective
modifications to enhance heat exchanger
performance.
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING
Shell side flow of heat exchanger is
analysed in this paper. Configurations of
geometry are shown in Figure.1. Warm
water flows through tubes while cold water
flows on shell side.
RNG k-epsilon model is adopted for
numerical simulation, as it considers spin
and vortex in flow, and its effect on Whereas,
turbulence. C µ = 0.0845; σ k = 0.7194; σ ε = 0.7194; C ε1
The governing equations for continuity, = 1.42; C ε2 = 1.68; η 0 = 4.38; β = 0.012.
momentum, energy, in the computational
domain can be expressed as follows,
Figure 1. Configuration of heat exchanger
361
Heat Transfer Augmentation of Helix Changer using CFD

In this paper the heat exchanger with 30o
helix inclination (Blocked V-notch) and
with 40o helix angle are simulated with
CFDExpert-Lite.
Figure 2. Typical mesh topology Figure 4. Bypass flow generating eddy

Multiblock structured mesh is generated in model with 30o helix angle
using GridZ as shown in Figure. 2 as it The finding while validating the problem
reduces the mesh count than unstructured shows eddy formation in the flow as shown
mesh for same conditions. in Figure. 4. So, to eliminate that, V-notch
was blocked. Which resulted in increased
pressure drop by 6% and almost no change
in outlet water temperature.
Results show that, the pressure drop in case
of 40o helix inclination angle is smaller than
that of 30o (with and without blocked V-
notch) by around 16-17% and almost no
Figure 3. Internal structure of geometry change in heat transfer coefficient. Also, the
with 30o helix angle temperature at outlet is approximately the
same, showing difference of around 0.2%.
Steady incompressible flow is considered,
no-slip and no-penetration boundary REFERENCES
conditions are applied on walls, and uniform Bejan A 1978 General Criterion for Rating
tube wall temperature of 358 K is assumed. Heat-Exchanger Performance Int J.
Velocity inlet (2.366533 m/s) and pressure Heat Mass Transfer 21 655-658.
outlet (0 Pa, gauge pressure) boundary
Dong C Chen Y P & Wu J F 2014
conditions are adopted for inlet and outlet.
Comparison of Heat Transfer
Helical baffle heat exchanger with 30o baffle
Performances of Helix Baffled Heat
inclination is simulated in this paper. The Exchangers with Different Baffle
difference between simulation results is Configurations Chinese Journal of
around 3% for pressure drop and 4% for Chemical Engineering Energy
heat transfer coefficient. So, numerical Resources and Environmental
method in this paper is reliable. Technology.
362
Raje et al.
Farhad N T Sirous Z M Kazem R and Reza tube heat exchangers with different
T A 2012 Baffle space impact on the baffles International Journal of Heat
performance of helical baffle shell and and Mass Transfer 84 990–997.
tube heat exchangers Applied Thermal Zhang M Meng F & Geng Z 2015 CFD
Engineering 44 143-149. simulation on shell-and-tube heat
Gao B Bi Q Nie Z and Wu J 2015 exchangers with small-angle helical
Experimental study of effects of baffle baffles Front. Chem. Sci. Eng. 9(2)
helix angle on shell-side performance 183–193
of shell-and-tube heat exchangers with
discontinuous helical baffles
Experimental Thermal and Fluid.
Lei Y G He Y L Li R and Gao Y F 2008
Effects of baffle inclination angle on
flow and heat transfer of a heat
exchanger with helical baffles
Chemical Engineering and Processing
47 2336–2345.
Muhammad M A B Nasir H Muhammad H
B Ahmer R K Kanwar N A and
Sarfaraz K 2012 CFD applications in
various heat exchangers design: A
review Applied Thermal Engineering
32 1-12.
Saeedan M and Bahiraei M 2015 Effects of
Geometrical Parameters on
Hydrothermal Characteristics of Shell-
and-Tube Heat Exchanger with Helical
Baffles: Numerical Investigation
Modeling and Optimization Chemical
Engineering Research and Design.
Salahuddin U Bilal M & Ejaz H 2015 A
review of the advancements made in
helical baffles used in shell and tube
heat exchangers International
Communications in Heat and Mass
Transfer 67 104–108.
Wen J Yang H Wang S Xue Y and Tong X
2015 Experimental investigation on
performance comparison for shell-and-
363
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL INVESTIGATION OF EVOLVING FLOW STRUCTURE

AROUND AHMED BODY MOUNTED WITH SOLAR PANEL OF
DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION
MOHAMMAD RAFIQ B. AGREWALE* and MAURYA R. S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Sardar Patel College of Engineering, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Vehicle aerodynamics plays a vital role in the design and development of a
vehicle. With increasing environmental concern and depletion of conventional fuel,
solar panel mounted vehicles are gaining popularity. Roof top mounting disturb the
aerodynamics of vehicle and it needs designer’s attention to understand its impact on
vehicle performance so that corrective measures can be taken to over the problem.
Drag and lift forces are parameters of great concern which effects vehicle
performance. Using Ahmed body, a generic model of a vehicle, for aerodynamic
investigations in wind tunnel is a conventional practice. Paper deals with a numerical
analysis to assess the emerging flow configuration around different proposals of solar
panel mounting over Ahmed body. The work is executed using CFD software
ANSYS Fluent.
Keywords: Ahmed Body; Solar Panel; CFD; Aerodynamic and Vortex.
INTRODUCTION The simplified vehicle shape employed by

In last two decades the international concern Ahmed et al. (1984) generates fully three
about environmental issues has increased due dimensional regions of separated flow which
to increasing use of fossil fuels and their may enable a better understanding of such
depleting reserve. Solar energy has been flows. The Ahmed body is made up of a
identified as potential source of energy for round front part, a movable slant plane in the
transport application which can help to get rear of the body to study the separation
rid of such problem. Easy conversion of solar phenomena at different angles, and a
energy into power through PV cell panel rectangular box, which connects the front and
mounted on vehicle roof top is a convenient the rear slant plane. The experimental result
and practical approach. Installation of solar shows the wake structure analysis with
panels on a well designed vehicle is expected different rear slant angle from 00 to 300.
to disturb the flow structure around it which Lienhart et al. (2000) performed some
may lead to deterioration in its performance. experiments on it. They measured the mean
Coefficient of drag and lift are key and fluctuating velocity components by
performance indicator of an automotive means of LDA and obtained surface oil-flow
vehicle which can be assessed either by pictures for two rear vehicle body slant
experimentation or numerical investigation. angles 25° and 35°. Emmanuel Guilmineau
To avoid geometrical complexity of a real (2008) studied flow around Ahmed body
vehicle, most of the early investigators were with several turbulence models with 250 and
based on experimental study on a highly 350 rear slant angles. Result showed for the
simplified model known as Ahmed Body as larger slant angle, with or without the stilts
depicted in Fig. 1. give similar results. G. Vivo et al. (2005)
investigated near-and far-wake of Ahmed
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: engg_rafiq@yahoo.co.in 364

Agrewale and Maurya
body geometry, along with Reynolds number the vehicle aerodynamics. This would be
behaviour. It showed, drag coefficient because of solar panel shape & mounting,
exhibited some sensitivity to changes in gives flow separation at the rear. Also it
Reynolds number. Parandhamaiah Gorre et contributes the development of turbulence
al. studied CFD Simulations of underbody and flow separation which affect the vehicle
electric car for drag reduction with different fuel economy and stability. So it is necessary
add-ons using Realizable k-ε turbulence to investigate the air flow analysis over solar
model. With these add-ons, coefficient of panel mounted vehicle to improve vehicle
drag reduced by 9.6%. Teddy Hobeika et al. economy and dynamic performance.
investigated various CFD solver parameters The objective of this work is to investigate
for road vehicles using different turbulence the aerodynamic analysis of solar panel
models. Result indicated that k-epsilon mounted ground vehicle. This work deals
models is more accurate for solving the with a numerical analysis to assess the
aerodynamic problems. Ranjeet Singh et al. aerodynamic parameters and emerging flow
explained past, present and future solar configuration around different proposals of
energy applications, issues, parameters and solar panel mounting over Ahmed body. The
the model structure of solar car. Neal A. modelling of Ahmed Body done by using
Allgood studied the aerodynamic CATIA and the simulation carried out by
optimization of a solar – bio-diesel hybrid using CFD software ANSYS Fluent.
vehicle. These tests proved that the designed
vehicle is aerodynamically sound with drag
coefficients 12.8% less than that of the most COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH
aerodynamic hybrid vehicle currently in use. The physics of road vehicle aerodynamics
Muhammad (2010) described CFD analysis problem involved mass and momentum
of solar car by using COSMOS floworks. variation, turbulence flow, flow separation
Result showed that frontal area, shape and and vortex formation. It is assumed that flow
material of the solar car’s body are the most is incompressible, steady state and
important parameter in order to design an isothermal. The governing equations can be
aerodynamics car. Peteris K. Augenberges written as:
(2005) discussed Aerodynamics optimization
of Solar Electric Vehicle using Wind Tunnel Continuity Equation:
using parameters such as angle of attack, ride Momentum Equation:
height, wheel fairing length, surface finish,
sealing and rear view mirror. These test
achieved net reduction in drag, as increase in
stability due to lift force reduction.
Based on literature it is observed that Ahmed
body is the best bluff body for ground In this model, turbulent viscosity is modelled
vehicle aerodynamics analysis which as:
demonstrates all characteristics involved in
an actual case of a moving car. CFD play
vital role for vehicle aerodynamics analysis In this study realizable k-epsilon model
in less time and low cost with multiple turbulence model is used. The transport
iteration as compared to wind tunnel testing. equations can be expressed as
Also it has been observed that most of the
fitment of solar panels over the vehicle body
are done only to capture the solar energy but
study and behavior of the vehicle is missing
under same condition. Any additional fitment
over vehicle body such as solar panel, affect
365
Numerical Investigation of Evolving Flow Structure Around Ahmed Body Mounted with Solar Panel of
Different Configuration
Figure 6. Ahmed body with external

attached tri-angular shape solar panel
(Velocity Vector Plot)
Figure 1. Schematic of the Ahmed
Body model Table 1. Validation of simulation with
Ahmed Body model with 250 rear slant
angle
(C d ) From Experiment[Ahmed, 1984] 0.285
(C d ) From Simulation 0.311
Table 2. Summary of Computational

Figure 2. Domain with Ahmed Body Result
C d From
Cases Condition
Simulation
Ahmed Body
1 0.311
without Solar Panel
Ahmed Body with
2 external attached 0.488
Figure 3. Flow over Ahmed body with Flat Solar Panel
external attached flat solar panel Ahmed Body with
(Velocity Vector Plot) external attached in-
3 0.406
line body shape
Solar Panel
Ahmed Body with
4 roof in-build Solar 0.327
Panel
Ahmed Body with
Figure 4. Ahmed body with external 5 external attached tri- 0.337
attached in-line body shape solar angular Solar Panel
panel (Velocity Vector Plot)
NUMERICAL MPLEMENTATION
Ahmed body with 250 rear slant angle used
as a generic model for investigation. The
different cases are considered such as Ahmed
body with roof in-build solar panel, with
external attached flat solar panel, in-line
body shape solar panel and tri-angular solar
Figure 5. Ahmed body with in-build
panel.
solar panel (Velocity Vector Plot)
The domain has been selected to capture flow
separation and vortex formation at rear side
as shown in figure 2. The Ahmed body is
located 50 mm above ground level.
366
Agrewale and Maurya
The air is considered as working fluid in Emmanuel Guilmineau 2008 Computational

domain with constant density 1.225 kg/m3. study of flow around a simplified car
At inlet, the velocity magnitude is given as body Journal of Wind Engineering, and
40m/sec. The pressure outlet is considered as Industrial Aerodynamics 96 1207–1217.
ambient pressure with backflow turbulent Vino G Watkin S Mousley P Watmuff J
intensity and viscosity ratio are taken as 5% Prasad S 2005 Flow structures in the
and 10 respectively. To solve the problem, near wake of Ahmed model Journal of
Pressure based Steady state solver with Fluids and Structures 20 673-695.
SIMPLE pressure-velocity coupling and
second order upwind method is used. Gorre P Prasad P Kumbhar M Kale G et al.
Underbody Drag Reduction Study for
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Electric Car Using CFD Simulations
SAE Technical Paper doi:10.4271/2015-
The validation of simulation with basic
26-0211.
Ahmed body model and summery of
computational result is depicted in table 1 Teddy Hobeika Johan Zaya Road Vehicle
and 2 respectively. The result shows that Aerodynamic Thesis Chalmers
flow over Ahmed body with external University.
attached flat solar panel (figure 3) and in-line Ranjeet Singh Manoj Kumar Gaur Chandra
body shape solar panel (figure 4), is more Shekhar Malvi Study of Solar Energy
separated at rear which gives more Operated Hybrid Mild Cars: A Review
turbulence. Also the coefficient of drag is International Journal of Scientific
high which affects the fuel economy and Engineering and Technology (ISSN:
stability of vehicle. Whereas flow over the 2277-1581) 1(4) 139-148
Ahmed body with in-build solar panel (figure
5) and with external attached tri-angular solar Neal A. Allgood Aerodynamic Optimization
panel (figure 6) remains attached at rear of a Solar – Bio-Diesel Hybrid Vehicle
which gives less turbulence. Also the American Institute of Aeronautics and
coefficient of drag is reasonable which may Astronautics.
give optimum fuel economy and better Muhammad Syafiq Bin Ayob 2010 Upper
stability of vehicle. Body Structure Design for Solar Car
It is concluded that shape and mounting of Thesis-University Malaysia Pahang-
solar panel on ground vehicle play significant December 2010.
role to improve vehicle performance and fuel Peteris K Augenberges 2005 Aerodynamics
economy. The best concept can be utilized to Optimization of Solar Power Race Car
build an energy efficient ground vehicles in Massachusetts Institute of technology.
practice.
Mulugeta Biadgo Asress and Jelena Svorcan
REFERENCES 2014 Numerical investigation on the
aerodynamic characteristics of high-
Ahmed S Ramm G and Faltin G 1984 Some speed train under turbulent crosswind J.
Salient Features of the Time-Averaged Mod. Transport 22(4) 225–234 DOI
Ground Vehicle Wake SAE Technical 10.1007/s40534-014-0058-7.
Paper 840300 doi: 10.4271/840300.
Lienhart H Stoots C and Becker S 2000 Flow
and Turbulence Structures in the Wake
of a Simplified Car Model (Ahmed
Model) DGLR Fach Symp. der AG STAB
Stuttgart University November 15-17
2000.
367
ICCMS2016
INVESTIGATION OF ACCELERATION EFFECTS ON ROCKET

AERODYNAMICS
KUMARAVEL G.* and RATHAKRISHNAN E.
Vikram Sarabhai Space Centre, Thiruvananthapuram, India
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Kanpur, India
Abstract: In the present study, numerical simulations over rocket models are carried
out in acceleration frame of reference in Eulerian approach to include the effect of
acceleration, which is generally neglected in simulations carried out at constant Mach
numbers in inertial frame of reference. Acceleration and retardation effects are studied
on a typical rocket model with cone-cylinder-flare configuration in the Mach number
range, 0.6 to 5. This study revealed that in the transonic flow regime, both
acceleration and retardation influence the transonic shock movement, but it is more
pronounced in high levels of retardations. In the supersonic regime, the influence of
acceleration is found to be negligible.
Keywords: Free-stream acceleration; Acceleration frame of reference;
Turbulence model; Transonic and supersonic.
INTRODUCTION [Kumaravel 2012]. Using this approach,

In conventional experimental and numerical study of few benchmark problems were
studies of flow over a rocket model, carried out to validate the formulation in the
simulations are carried out at constant free- previous studies. Formation and dissipation
stream velocities and therefore the flow of Karman Vortex Street was captured in a
characteristics will be available only at single simulation by accelerating the flow
discrete points in the trajectory of the rocket. past a circular cylinder [Kumaravel, 2015].
But, in an actual rocket flight, from lift-off to Transonic shock wave patterns over
an orbit, the rocket undergoes continuous NACA0012 airfoil were studied in
acceleration. The features of accelerated flow accelerating flow [Kumaravel, 2015]. In the
cannot be captured by conventional studies present study, acceleration effects on a
with frozen free-stream velocity. The present typical rocket model with cone-cylinder-flare
study aims at investigating fluid flow over segments is studied in the Mach number
rocket models with external or free-stream range of 0.6 to 5 to investigate transonic and
acceleration, by solving Navier-Stokes (N-S) supersonic characteristics. The problem set-
equations in acceleration frame of reference up is given next section, followed by results
[A. Sharma 2011, Roohani 2008, Munoz and discussions.
2010, I M A Gledhill 2009]. A mathematical
PROBLEM SETUP
formulation is obtained by writing the
Navier-Stokes equations in accelerated frame The rocket model considered in the present
study is shown in Figure 1. The aft-cylinder
of reference for solution in Eulerian approach
is extended upto 50D in the downstream. A
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: gnanakumaravel@gmail.com 368

Kumaravel and Rathakrishnan
structured single-block grid is generated modified Riemann solver. The non-linear k-ε
using algebraic techniques. The model combines the linear time-scale
computational grid over the model is shown realizable k-ε model with extra quadratic
in Figure 2. Simulations are carried out using terms for an anisotropic representation of
a commercial code, CFD++ with cubical k-ε Reynolds stresses. Grid independent studies
turbulence model. In this code, the Reynolds and validation studies are carried out for
Averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations steady state computations. Initially steady
are discretized in space using a second order state simulations are carried out at various
multi-dimensional vertex-oriented Total Mach number from 0.6 to 5. Using M = 0.6
Variation Diminishing (TVS) scheme solution as initial solution, accelerated flow
coupled with a pointwise implicit first order simulation is carried out with proper
time integration or an explicit second order boundary conditions at different levels of
Runge-Kutta (RK) integration. The finite acceleration. Similarly, using M = 5.0
volume framework adopted for the integral solution as initial solution, simulations are
conservation laws updates cell averages in carried out at different levels of retardation.
time insuring correct signal propagation via a
Figure 1. The Rocket model used for computations (D = 12mm)
the acceleration due to gravity. It can be seen

from these figures that the high levels of
retardation shows marked difference as
compared to acceleration and steady state
cases. It is observed the difference is due to
the movement of transonic shock over the
model. The difference is observed in the
freestream Mach number regime 0.8 to 1.15.
Figure 2. Axi-symmetric computational

domain used for simulation at Mach
number 0.95

The computed results of acceleration/
retardation cases are compared with steady
state simulations to investigate the influence
of acceleration. Figure 3 shows the Figure 3. Variation of surface pressure
comparison of surface pressure distribution at co-efficient (c p ) along the axis for steady
Mach number 0.95 and Figure 4 shows that and acceleration cases
of Mach contours for steady state and 100g
acceleration and retardation cases, where g is
369
Investigation of Acceleration Effects on Rocket Aerodynamics
Beyond this regime, all the three cases regime at different levels of acceleration and
(steady state, acceleration and retardation) are retardation. This study revealed that in the
identical. Besides quantifying acceleration transonic flow regime, both acceleration and
effects, the numerical simulations in retardation influence the transonic shock
acceleration frame of reference can be used movement, but it is more pronounced in high
to study the physics of accelerating flow and levels of retardations. In the supersonic
also to quantify aerodynamic characteristics regime, the influence of acceleration is found
of a Mach number regime in a single to be negligible.
simulation, without loss of continuity. They
are discussed in detail in the main paper. REFERENCES
Arjun Sharma and Sanjiva K Lele 2011
Sound generation due to unsteady
motion of a cylinder Physics of Fluids
23 046102
Roohani H and Skews H W 2008 Unsteady
aerodynamics effects experienced by
airfoil during acceleration and
retardation Proc. IMechE Part G J.
Aerospace Engineering 222 631-636
(a) Steady state
Gledhill I M A Forsberg K Eliason P Baloyi
J and Nordstrom J 2009 Investigation of
acceleration effects on missile
aerodynamics using computational fluid
dynamics Aerospace Science and
Technology 13 197-203
Kumaravel G 2012 Investigation of
acceleration effects on rocket
aerodynamics Ph.D. Thesis Department
(b) Acceleration (100g) of Aerospace Engineering IIT Kanpur
Kumaravel G Jeyajothiraj P and E.
Ratharishnan 2015 Formation and
dissipation of Karman Vortex street in
an accelerating flow past a circular
cylinder International Review of
Aerospace Engineering 8(2) 43-55
Kumaravel G Jeyajothiraj P and
Rathakrishnan E 2015 Transonic shock
(c) Retardation (-100g) wave patterns over an airfoil in an
accelerated flow International Review of
Figure 4. Mach contours of steady and Aerospace Engineering 8(2) 56-70
accelerated flow over the rocket model at
Munoz G and Jones P 2010 The equivalent
Mach number (M) 0.95
principle, uniformly accelerated
reference frames, and the uniform
CONCLUSIONS gravitational field American Journal of
In this study, acceleration effects on a rocket Physics 78(4) 377-383
model are studied in transonic and supersonic
370
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF WINGLET CORRUGATION FOR IMPROVED MAV

AERODYNAMIC PERFORMANCE
DWIVEDI Y. D.1* and DONEPUDI JAGADISH2
1
VFSTR University, Vadlamudi, Guntur, Andhra Pradesh, India
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Narasaraopeta Engineering College, Narasaraopet, Andhra
Pradesh, India.
Abstract: This paper describes the experimental and computational work carried out at
the university facility. The experimental winglet model made of Medium Density Fiber
(MDF) board while computational model was created using CATIA V6 software
adopting NACA 0012 airfoil. The experimental work was performed in open loop Low
Speed Subsonic Wind Tunnel at Reynold Numbers 3.94x104. The CFD simulation was
performed using 3-D structured hexahedral mesh generated in ICEM CFD software. In-
viscid Euler and laminar RANS k-ω turbulent model with Finite volume method were
used. The various aerodynamic characteristics were measured and analyzed. The result
shows that the corrugation winglet produces better lift and reduced drag compared to
other two configurations tested and hence the significant performance improvement is
obtained.
Keywords: Corrugated Winglet; MAV; CFD Analysis; RANS k-ω; ICEM CFD.
INTRODUCTION Roche La U and Roche H.L., 2004] and more

recently by Smith M.J et al. (2001) and
The aircraft manufacturers are under immense
Catalano and Cerom-Munoz (2005), Okamato
pressure to improve efficiency due to rising
et al. (1996). Numerical investigation to find
operating cost and environment issues and
the effect of winglets on drag has been well
have initiated to develop innovative induced
illustrated by Smith S.C. (1996). A wind tunnel
drag reduction technology. One of the methods
analysis by Mohammad, I.I et al. (2010), Ajlin
to reduce this drag is to use wingtip devices
M.A (2011) and Hossain A (2012) of different
called winglets. The first concept of winglet
winglet shapes were carried out to demonstrate
known as end plat was developed and patented
induced drag reduction for modern aircraft.
by F.W. Lancaster in 1897. A winglet using
advanced airfoil concept to reduce induced The dragonfly wings are not smooth and have
drag was designed and tested by Whitecomb R. a well-defined corrugated configuration. The
(1976; 1981). A variety of multiple winglet aerodynamic effects of corrugation in wings
have been experimentally investigated by models of dragonfly and some other insects are
many authors in the past [Spillman J.J, 1979; investigated by Rees C.J.C (1975a,1975b),
Spillman J.J et al; 1979; Zimmer H., 1987; Kessel A.B et al (1998), Kessel A.B (2000),
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: yddwivedi@gmail.com 371

Dwiwedi and Donepudi
the experimental study on corrugation wing spatial discretization for the computational
was also performed by Kwok and Mittal model is done by first producing surface grids
(2005), Guovu and Mao Sun (2005), Hu and using ICEM CFD figure 4 & 5. The three
Tamai (2008), Murphy and Hu (2010) also dimensional structured hexahedral mesh was
gathered quantitative results in a wind tunnel utilized for computing the flow around the
and compared a corrugated model against the model. The blended winglet meshing &
profiled airfoil. The numerical study on domain meshing is shown in figure 4 & 5. In-
corrugation on wing also carried out by Hord viscid Euler and laminar RANS k- ω turbulent
and Lian (2010), Vergas and Mittal (2004). finite volume method was used for the flow
simulation. Boundary condition is shown in
The present study is to investigate the effects
figure 6.
of winglet corrugation on the performance of
Micro Air Vehicles (MAV) wing which
normally fly in the Reynolds Number ranges
from 104-105. The experimental and The wind tunnel tests and CFD simulations of
computational work performed result shows all three types of wing were performed at the
that the corrugation winglet produces higher Reynolds Number 3.94 x 104. The analysis
lift and better drag reduction compared to other focused on the aerodynamic characteristics CL,
two. CD and performance (L/D).
Coefficient of Lift (CL) verses AOA (Figure 8)
MATERIALS AND METHODS and CL/CD verses AOA ((Figure 8)) shows the
The wing and the winglet geometries were experimental results., at 50 angel of attack the
modeled in CATIA V6. The airfoil used was plain wing shows lowest lift coefficient and
NACA 0012 The airfoil coordinates are other two shows almost equal. However, at 100
obtained by using MATLAB. The obtained angle of attack (AOA) the plain wing is
profile of blended and corrugated are shown in outperformed other two wings. For 15o AOA
figure 1 and 2 and 3D models is shown in the lift coefficient of blended wing is better
figure 3. The wooden rectangular wing, than the corrugated winglet. The experimental
blended wing with winglet and corrugated result for CL/CD shows that at 50 AOA, the
winglets were made by using different plain wing has least ratio and the corrugated
carpentry hand tools. The experimental wing has the highest among other two wings.
analysis was performed in an open loop wind The computational results shows that CL/CD
tunnel of test section of 0.6m x0.6m x 2 m. The for plain wing at 50 AOA and 100 AOA is
six component balance was used to get the better than remaining two, however at AOA
forces and moments with Reynold number 150 AOA the blended winglet outperformed
3.98x104 and for angle of attacks (AOA) other two.
ranging from 0o to 15o. The different winglets
configurations were tested at different angles CONCLUSION
of attack in difference of 5 degrees and the Computational and experimental analysis was
aerodynamic characteristics such as the lift and performed to understand the aerodynamic
drag their coefficient were obtained. The performance characteristics of plain wing,
372
Effect of Winglet Corrugation for Improved MAV Aerodynamic Performance
blended winglet and corrugated winglet. It was Bird Feather like winglet International
observed that the corrugated winglet lift to Journal of Aerospace and Mechanical
drag ratio found to be superior with other Engineering 6 8-13.
winglets at different AOA. Azlin M A Mat Taib C F Kasolang S
Muhammad F H 2011 CFD Analysis of
Winglets at Low Subsonic Flow World
Congress on Engineering 1 1-5.
Catalano F M Ceron-Munoz H D 2005
Experimental Analysis of Aerodynamic
characteristic of Adaptive Multi- Winglets
43rd AIAA Aerospace Sciences Meeting
and exhibits AIAA 2005-1231 Reno
Navada.
Figure 1. Corrugated Profile
Guoyu L and Mao Sun 2005 The Effect of
Corrugation and Wing Planform on the
aerodynamic Force Production of
Sweeping Wing Model Insect Wings Acta
Mech Sinica 21 531-541.
Hord K and Lian Y 2010 Numerical
Investigation oacteristics of a Corrugated
Figure 2. Blended Profile Airfoil AIAA 40th Fluid Dynamics
Conference 28 June-1 July Chicago,
Illinois.
Hu H. and Tamai M 2008 Bio-inspired
Corrugated Airfoil at Low Reynolds
Number Journal of Aircraft 45 2068-2077.
Kesel A Philippi U Nachtigall W 1998
Figure.3.3D Model corrugated Biomechanical aspects of insect wing: an
winglet analysis Using the finite element method
Computers in Biology and Medicine 28
423-437.
Kesel A B 2000 Aerodynamic Characteristics
of Dragonfly Wing Sections Compared
with Technical Aerofoil Journal of
Experimental Biology 203 3125-3135.
Kwok M. and Mittal R 2005 Experimental
Figure 4. 3D Meshing of winglet Investigation of the Aerodynamics of a
Modeled Dragonfly Wing Section AIAA
REFERENCES Region-I MA Students Conference AIAA
Reston
Hossain A Rahman A Iqbal P Ariffin M
Mohammad I I Mohammad M Abdullah A N
Mazian M 2012 Drag Analysis of an
Selim S M S 2010 Induced Drag
Aircraft Wing Model with and without
373
Dwiwedi and Donepudi
Reduction for Modern Aircraft without Whitecomb R 1981 Method for Reducing
Increasing the Span of the Wing by using Aerodynamic Drag NASA CP 2211
Winglet International Journal of Dryden Symposium.
Mechanical & Mechatronics IJMME- Zimmer H 1987 The Aerodynamic
IJENS 10 69-74. Optimization of Wings at Subsonic Speeds
Murphy J Hu H 2010 An Experimental and the Influence of the Wingtip Design
Investigation on a Bio-inspired Corrugated NASA Technical Memorandum NASA
Airfoil Experiments in Fluids 49 531-546. TM-88534.
Okamoto M Yasuda K and Azuma A 1996
Aerodynamic Characteristics of the Wings
and Body of a Dragonfly The Journal of
Experimental Biology 199 281-294.
Rees C J C 1975 Aerodynamic Properties of an
Insect Wing Section and a Smooth
Aerofoil Compared Nature 258 141-142.
Rees C J C 1975 Form and Function in Figure 5. Meshing Figure 6. Boundary
Corrugated Insect Wing Nature 256 200- of Domain condition
203.
Roche La U Roche H L 2004 Induced Drag
Using multiple Winglets, looking beyond CL vs AOA at Re=3.98x104
the Prandtl-Munk Model AIAA 2120.
0.25 plain wing
Smith M J Komerath N Ames R and Wong O 0.2
coefficient of liftCL
2001 Performance Analysis of a Wing 0.15

blended
with Multiple Winglets AIAA 24 2-3. 0.1 winglet
0.05
Smith S C 1996 A Computational and corrugated
0
Experimental Study of Nonlinear Aspects winglet
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516
of Induced Drag NASA Technical Paper
Angle of Attack, AOA (deg)
3598.
Figure 7. Coefficient of Lift curve verses AOA
Spillman J J 1978 The Use of Wingtip to
reduce Vortex Drag Aeronautical Journal
88 387-395.
Spillman J J and McVitie A M 1978 Wing Tip CL/CD vs AOA at Re=3.98x104
sails which Give Lower Drag at all 10
Normal Flight Speeds. Aeronautical plain wing
CL/CD
Journal 88 362-369. 5
blended
Vargas A and Mittal R 2004 A Computational winglet
Study of the Aerodynamic Performance of 0 corrugated
a Dragonfly Wing Section AIAA 2004- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516 winglet
2319 2nd Flow Control Conference Angle of Attack AOA (deg)
Portland Oregon.
Figure 8. Ratio of CL/CD Vs AOA
374
ICCMS2016
CFD ANALYSIS OF PERFUSION KINETICS IN BRAIN TUMOR WITH

DCE-MRI DERIVED MODEL
BHANDARI A1, BANSAL A.2, SINGH A.3 and SINHA N.1*
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur, India
2
Department of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Roorkee, India
3
Centre for Biomedical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi, India
Abstract: In this study, a dynamic contrast enhanced-magnetic resonance imaging

(DCE-MRI) based voxelized model of human brain tumor is studied. Various
transport and perfusion parameters of the kinetics of the contrast agent are evaluated
and incorporated into a porous media computational fluid dynamics model. The
model takes into account the realistic heterogeneous vasculature of tumors and
accurate arterial input function (AIF) for determining interstitial fluid pressure (IFP)
and interstitial fluid velocity (IFV) in tissues. All the calculated values were validated
with the experimental values. The model allows to simulate the forecast of the flow,
leakage and retention of the contrast agent in different parts of the tissue at different
times from the MRI images. In future, a patient specific model could be developed to
tailor the diagnosis and treatment plan for the cancer treatment.
Keywords: Voxelized model; Human brain tumor; Arterial input function;
Perfusion; IFP; IFV; Tracer transport; DCE-MRI
INTRODUCTION four major unusual properties: accumulated

solid stress, abnormal and heterogeneous
Despite significant advances in therapeutic
blood vessel networks, elevated interstitial
anti-cancer agents, cancer remains one of the
fluid pressure, and a dense interstitial
leading cause of death all over the world. The
structure. These abnormalities result in
transport of macromolecular therapeutic
barriers to systemic drug delivery, leading to
agents in tumor microvasculature plays a
low and non-uniform perfusion rates in
vital role in the treatment of solid tumors.
tumors [Jain, 1994]. Although several
However, a major obstacle to systemic
mathematical models of transport in tumors
transport in tumors is inadequate and uneven
have been developed, they have neglected
uptake, which is widely attributed to the
vascular heterogeneity. Computational fluid
heterogeneous architecture of the tumor
dynamics (CFD) can act as an important tool
microvasculature. Tumors are known to
to predict the fluid flow interactions inside
contain highly tortuous, fenestrated,
the tumor and also the transport and
discontinuous vessels, and large vascular
accumulation of drugs within various parts of
areas. The resulting heterogeneous
tissue. In this work, we have studied a
vasculature leads to irregular perfusion,
voxelized model for the systemic transport of
which causes heterogeneous extravasation of
the tracer in realistic human brain tumors.
therapeutic agents into tumor tissue. The
Earlier groups like Magdoom et al. (2012)
abnormal physiology of tumors gives rise to a
have reported CFD approaches in animal
set of transport barriers that limit the rate and
models by calculating perfusion parameters
extent of drug delivery to tumors. The
by simple tofts model ignoring intravascular
pathophysiological state of tumors consists of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: nsinha@iitk.ac.in 375

Bhandari et al
term and using global AIF. However, to the temporal resolution approximately of 4
best of our knowledge no group has reported seconds for each time point. From DCE-MRI
the CFD analysis of realistic human brain images, concentration of contrast on each
tumors based on general tracer kinetic model voxel was calculated from signal intensity by
(GTKM) which includes intravascular term
using a non-linear relationship between the
and is widely used for estimation of perfusion
kinetic parameters. Accurate estimation of two mentioned in equation (i) in Table 1
AIF is necessary to get correct perfusion [Singh, 2007]. T10 was estimated using 3
maps so in this study local AIF has been used FSE image (T1W, T2W, and PDW) as
to obtain the kinetic parameter maps and to described previously [Singh, 2007]. Local
do the computational study. A comparative AIF was estimated using method described
study has been conducted between the by Singh et al (2009). These concentration
experimental and simulated results. values obtained from equation (i) were used
to fit equation (ii) to get kinetic parameter
maps ( 𝐾 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠 , 𝑣𝑒 , 𝑣𝑝 ) at each voxel by
In this study, GTKM that is basically
Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm in
extended Tofts model [Tofts, 1997] was used
MATLAB. Pre-contrast and post-contrast
to obtain the permeability and porosity maps
image of brain of one slice along with
for the human brain tumor and normal tissue
zoomed portion of tumor are shown in Figure
with the help of DCE-MRI experiments.
1.
These maps were later used in the
computational model made in openFoam
software for determination of fluid flow
parameters like interstitial fluid pressure
(IFP), interstitial fluid velocity (IFV). GTKM
has been used in this study since it takes into
account the intravascular term which is
relevant for highly perfused areas like
tumors.
(a) (b)
MR IMAGING
DCE MR imaging was performed on a 3.0T
Ingenia MRI scanner (Philips Healthcare,
The Netherlands). Written consent from each
patient was obtained before MRI study.
Imaging was performed using a fast field (c)
echo (T1-FFE) sequence (TR/TE = 4.38 Figure 1. MR Images of brain (a) Pre-
msec/2.3 msec, flip angle = 10°, field of view contrast (b) Post-contrast (c) Zoomed
(FOV) = 240 × 240 mm, slice thickness = 6 portion of tumor.
mm, matrix size = 256 × 256. A dose of
0.1mmol/kg body weight of Gd-BOPTA COMPUTATIONAL METHOD
(Gadobenate Dimeglumine) (Multihance,
Out of the twelve slices of human brain MRI
Bracco, Italy) was administered
images, only three slices contained tumor.
intravenously with the help of a power
Computation was done for all the twelve
injector. A total of 384 images at 32 time
slices. To reduce the computation time, only
points for 12 slices were acquired with a
376
CFD Analysis of Perfusion Kinetics in Brain Tumor with DCE-MRI derived Voxelized Model
the tumor part and the surrounding brain convergence criterion was set to be 1×10−6 .
normal tissue was taken as the computational As the flow in tissue is source sink driven
domain. A rectangular volume of size flow, therefore, a zero fluid pressure and
40×36×72 𝑚𝑚3 enclosing the tumor and the velocity boundary conditions were applied at
normal tissue was created and meshed using two ends and remaining other boundaries
the OPENFoam software as shown in Figure were assigned as wall.
2. The voxel size in the rectangular volume
was in accordance with the MRI resolution
(0.9375×0.9375×6 𝑚𝑚3 ). The Continuity
and Darcy equations were coded in the
software. Values of parameters coming in
72
these equations other than perfusion
parameters were taken from literature
[Pishko, 2011]. The values of tracer kinetic
parameters obtained earlier from equation (ii)
were put at each voxel in openFoam by
declaring the variables as non-uniform field
to solve for IFP and IFV. The discretization 40
of the governing equations described above 36
was done by finite volume method. The
SIMPLE (semi implicit method for pressure Figure 2. CFD mesh enclosing tumor and
linked equations) algorithm was used and normal tissue (all dimensions in mm).
Table 1.Equations used in paper
Name of Equations Equations

(i) SPGR/FFE Signal 1 − exp(−𝑇𝑅𝑇1−1 )
𝑆 = 𝐺𝜌exp(−𝑇𝐸𝑇2 )sin(𝜃)
Equation 1 − cos(𝜃)exp(−𝑇𝑅𝑇1−1 )
𝑡
(ii) General tracer 𝐾𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠
𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠 (𝜏−𝑡)
kinetic model 𝐶𝑡 = 𝑣𝑝 𝐶𝑝 (𝑡) + 𝐾 � 𝐶𝑝 (𝜏)𝑒 𝑣𝑒 𝑑𝜏
0
RESULTS values were completely reverse of IFP with

Permeability and porosity maps were higher values of 0.06µm/s at the tumor
obtained at each voxel. With the help of these periphery and minimum value inside the
IFP, IFV was simulated. IFP when simulated tumor. These values were also consistent
came with a maximum value of 1530 Pa with those present in literature [Jennifer
(1.53kPa) within the tumor which rapidly 2014]. Contour plots of IFP and IFV are
decreased at the tumor boundary. This value shown in Figure 3.
is consistent with the values previously
reported in the literature measured
experimentally [Navalitloha, 2006]. IFV
377
Bhandari et al
(a) REFERENCES
Jain RK 1994 Barriers to Drug Delivery in
Solid Tumors. Sci.Am.271 58-65.
Jain RK 1994 Transport Phenomena in
Tumors. Adv. Chem. Eng.19 130-200.
Magdoom K N 2012 Evaluation of a
voxelized model based on DCE-MRI for
(b) tracer transport in tumor Journal of
Biomechanical Engineering 134091004
Figure 3. Contour plots of IFP & IFV
Tofts PS 1997 Modeling tracer kinetics in
(a) IFP (b) IFV dynamic Gd-DTPA MR imaging.
Journal of Magn Reson Imaging 3 91-
DISCUSSIONS 101.
In this work, a voxelized model of human Singh A 2007 Quantification of Physiological
brain tumors has been studied based on MRI and Hemodynamic indices using T1
images. The model has been used to calculate DCE-MRI in Intracranial Mass Lesions
the fluid flow parameters like IFP and IFV JMRI 26:871-880
inside brain tumors. These two parameters Singh A 2009 Improved Bolus Arrival Time
might add diagnostic values to tracer kinetic and Arterial Input Function Estimation
parameters obtained using GTKM. This type for Tracer Kinetic Analysis in DCE-
of image based model can be made patient MRI.J Magn Reson Imaging 29:166–
176.
specific and this model can be extended to
any type of tumor like cervical, breast and Pishko GL 2011 Sensitivity analysis of an
lung tumors. image based solid tumor computational
model with heterogeneous vasculature
CONCLUSION and porosity. Annals of Biomedical
Engineering 39(9) 2360-2373.
This study provides us a good understanding
Navalitloha Yot 2006 Therapeutic
of the fluid flow within human brain tumors. implications of tumor interstitial fluid
This model also provides a good platform for pressure in subcutaneous RG-2 tumors
patient specific diagnosis. After Society for Neuro-Oncology.
determination of the perfusion kinetic Jennifer M Munson 2014 Interstitial fluid
parameters, we can employ them in the flow in cancer: implications for disease
computational model for estimating IFP and progression and treatment Journal of
IFV parameters, which might have some Cancer Management and Research
diagnosis value. 6317-328.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors thanks Dr. RK Gupta for providing
clinical data; Prof. RKS Rathore and Dr.
Prativa Sahoo for technical support in DCE-
MRI data analysis.
378
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL INVESTIGATION ON EFFECT OF MOVING VANES

AND VEHILE VELOCITY ON EXHAUST FLOW OF ENGINE IN
ARMOURED COMBAT VEHICLE
MORE R. R.1, PATIL B. S.2, LAGAD R. B.3 and TRIKANDE M. W.4
DRDO(VRDE), Ahmednagar, India
Abstract: DRDO has developed wheeled armoured platform. Due to use of high
power engine, thermal signature needs to be reduced. Pull type forced cooling system
has been used in prototype. To reduce the thermal signature engine exhaust gases are
mixed with cooling air. During development of trials of this prototype, it was
observed that these exhaust gases with air were passing over the turret which is not
desirable in operational scenario. The work presented in this paper has the aim to
investigate effect of ‘S’ shaped vanes, which are fitted on exhaust system to exit the
exhaust with cooling air away from the vehicle, when vehicle is in motion. Therefore,
CFD analysis was carried out for different speed of vehicle with different lengths of
fixed and moving vanes combination. Further comprehensive and complete campaign
of CFD analysis & different grid independent study carried out to divert exhaust flow
outside the vehicle. Different stream line pattern has been observed for different fixed
and moving vanes combination with respect to vehicle velocity. Most effective
solution has been suggested to divert the flow of exhaust system away from turret and
vehicle.
Keywords: Exhaust system design, Combat vehicle, Moving vanes and fixed
vanes, Exhaust cooling.
INTRODUCTION on varying length of fixed and moving vanes

so as to divert gas flow away from the
Exhaust system of armoured wheeled vehicle vehicle. Finally, optimized design has been
is main interest of study for comfort of suggested for exhaust system. Very less work
gunner. Exhaust gas pipe delivers the burned has been done to divert in this case. In
gases through holes provided along the length literature study Zhang, X. et al. (2008) has
of pipe in mixing duct. Duct profile consists done work on exhaust simulation of multiple
of induced blower fan, to force cooing air and catalytic converters substrate and effect of
exhaust gases upward. Outlet box comprises exhaust flow, pressure loss, heat loss, Skin
of series of patterns of fixed and moving temperature prediction on substrate. Merkisz
vanes placed at specific distance from each et al. (2011) has done performed analysis of
other. The fix vanes have been designed in the PM emission based on the measurement
solid rectangular shape and moving vanes of the size of the particulate matter and
with S shaped outer profile to guide the flow counting of the particles for 8 x 8 combat
properly outside the vehicle. Full campaign vehicle. A Kumarasamy et al. (2005) has
of CFD analyses for exit flow has been done work on the configuration, design,
carried out for different vehicle speed. Also optimization and development of twin circuit
different investigations have been carried out coolant heat exchanger for cooling a combat
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rrmore@vrde.drdo.in 379

More et al.
The front face of box has been taken as

vehicle engine and transmission. Also
velocity inlet and bottom side of box has
Charles Raffa el at (2005) suggested combat
been taken as wall boundary conditions.
vehicle engine selection methodology based
remaining faces are taken as pressure outlet
on an overall propulsion system power
boundary conditions as shown in fig 3.
density perspective.
Bottom face of exhaust system domain been
GEOMETRY AND BOUNDARY taken as mass flow inlet and all other face are
taken as wall boundary conditions, will
CONDITIONS:
exactly capture flow physics near exhaust
The dimension of hull and exhaust system system and turret.
has been shown in fig 1, 2 & 3. To determine
the flow pattern two shape of moving vanes PARAMETRIC STUDY:
are proposed out which best shape which
When the flow comes from exhaust, it strikes
totally divert flow of exhaust outside of
first to fixed vanes and then strikes to the S
vehicle has been selected when vehicle is in
vanes. S vanes guide the flow inside or
motion. CFD analysis has been carried out
outside as their configuration. So basically
for this work. A large rectangular domain of
these two shapes of S vanes have been
size 20 times upstream and 15 times
studied with the combination of rectangular
downstream of hull domain has been
fixed plates. In present work four different
generated of hull.
combinations has been studied as follows.
1. Series of fixed vane & Inward S shaped
moving vane having end to end length
=53.40 mm with distance between them is
27.40 mm. (refer fig no-4 )
2. Series of fixed vane & outward S shaped
Figure 1. Hull top view with exhaust 33.23 mm. (refer fig no-5 )
system and turret. 3. Series of fixed vane & outward S shaped
43.27 mm. (refer fig no-6 )
4. U shaped curved Front plate at distance of
0.2m in front of Exhaust system & 3rd
combination (refer fig. no-7).
Fig 2 Exhaust system side view with

dimensions with boundary conditions
Figure 4. Cross Fig no 5 Cross

section of Inward S section of outward
Fig 3 –3-D view of rectangular outer
shaped moving S shaped moving
domain mesh with boundary conditions.
vane vane
380
has been measured. 1st combination is basic

combination for study, so by taking 1st
combination as reference other properties has
been calculated. It has been observed that
2nd combinations divert 26.24 % flow away
from turret taking 1st as references. From case
1 and case 2 also it is observed that 3rd
combination diverts 95.5 % flow away from
Figure 6 Cross Figure 7 Combination turret taking 1st as references.
section of of 1st series of fixed
outward S vane & Inward S Table 1. Table for combination used
shaped moving shaped moving vane and distance of steam line away from
vane turret and towards turret for vehicle
velocity 60kmph.
CFD ANAYLSIS Last Stream First Stream
line distance line distance Total
CASE 1 ALL FOUR COMBINATION Com
from turret from turret distance
HAVING INLET VELOCITY 60 KMPH used of wake
(away from (towards
CFD analysis has been performed for all four turret ) turret )
combinations for vehicle velocity 60 kmph. 1st 1.074m 1.002 m 1.958m
Mass flow from bottom face of exhaust 2 nd 1.336m 0.983 m 1.3645 m
system are considered 11 kg/m3 for present 3 rd 1.453m 0.823 m 1.5394 m
case. 4 th 1.325m 0.623 m 1.1453 m
Table No 2. Table for combination used

with reference to 1st combination and
percentage of flow divert away from turret
Combination used with % of flow
reference to 1st divert away
combination from turret
2 26.24
3 92.5
4 28.27
Figure 9.
Figure 8. It has been also observed that 4th combination
Combination 2nd combination 3rd
diverts 28.27 % flow away from turret taking
with fixed vane &
with fixed vane & 1st as references. From results obtained and
outward S shaped suggested
also from stream line plot (refer fig 10,11 ,12,
moving vane outward S shaped
and 13). It is clearly seen that 3rd
moving vane
combinations divert flow away from turret
The following models were involved in the more than any other combination.
problem setup: Three-dimensional, Implicit
steady, Turbulent, Gravity, Reynolds
Averaged Navier Stokes-K-Epsilon
Turbulence -Realizable K-Epsilon with Two-
Layer All y+ Wall Treatment -Coupled Flow
Simulation has been done till it converges.
Our major intension is to divert the flow
away from turret, when vehicle is in motion.
For that concern stream lines flow from Fig no -10 .stream line pattern of
exhaust system has been plotted and distance combination 1 with vehicle velocity 60
of 1st stream line from starting point of turret kmph of hull
381
More et al.
is 20.07 %. Also it has been observed that for

vehicle velocity 80 kmph percentage
decrease in flow away from turret 54.7 %. It
has been observed that for vehicle velocity 90
kmph percentage decrease in flow away from
turret is 67.4%.
Fig no -11 .stream line pattern of

CONCLUSION
combination 2with vehicle velocity 60 In present work investigation has been
kmph of hull carried out for effect of ‘S’ shaped moving
vanes, which are fitted on exhaust system to
divert the exhaust, when vehicle is in
motion.CFD analysis for different speed of
vehicle has been carried out for investigation
of different shapes of fixed and moving vanes
combination for exhaust system for comfort
of soldier. The four combinations has been
tried for vehicle velocity of 60 kmph,
parametric study also been carried out on 3rd
Figure 12. Stream Figure13. Stream combination for different vehicle velocity 70,
line pattern of line pattern of 80, &90 kmph. It has been observed that 3rd
combination 3with combination 4 with combination is best suited to divert flow
vehicle velocity 60 vehicle velocity 60 away from turret when vehicle is motion.
kmph of hull kmph of hull Here for higher speed also exhaust gases is
flowing away from turret.
Table No 3. Table for 3rdcombination REFERENCES

used with reference vehicle velocity 60
Zhang X and Romzek M 2008 Computational
kmph and percentage of flow divert away
Fluid Dynamics (CFD) Applications in
from turret
Vehicle Exhaust System SAE Technical
Vehicle % of flow divert away Paper 2008-01-0612 2008.
velocity from turret Merkisz, J Pielecha I Pielecha J and
70 kmph -20.07 Szukalski M 2011 The Analysis of the
80 kmph -54.51 Exhaust Emission Level in Combat
90kmph -67.4 Vehicles Under Real Operating
Conditions SAE Technical Paper 2011-
CASE 2 COMBINATION 3 HAVING 26-0041.
INLET VELOCITY= 70, 80, 90 KMPH
Kumarasamy A. and Sathyanarayanan P 2005
As mentioned later on section CFD analyses Development of Compact Twin Circuit
has been performed for 3rd combination at Heat Exchanger in the Cooling System
different vehicle velocity 60, 70, 80 and 90 of a Combat Vehicle SAE Technical
kmph. All other boundary conditions are Paper 2005-26-34.
taken as same as above. And the effect of
different vehicle velocity on stream line Raffa C Schwarz E and Tasdemir J 2005
pattern which is coming from exhaust system Combat Vehicle Engine Selection
has been observed. For parametric study Methodology Based On Vehicle
vehicle velocity 60 kmph vehicle is taken as Integration Considerations SAE
reference, from above table 3 it has been Technical Paper 2005-01-1545
observed that for vehicle velocity 70 kmph
percentage decrease in flow away from turret
382
ICCMS2016
CFD SIMULATION OF CASCADE FINFLOW AT LOW SUBSONIC

SPEEDS AND HIGH ANGLES OF ATTACK
TRIPATHI M.*, MAHESH M. S. and MISRA A.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Defence Institute of Advanced Technology, Pune, India.
Abstract: Grid fins are unconventional lifting and control surfaces consisting of an
outer frame supporting an inner grid of intersecting small chord planar surfaces.
Cascade fins are a new category of grid fins wherein, they do not have cross members
unlike grid fins. In thepresent work, a sequence of simulationresults obtained for
cascade fins at different angles of attack is presented. The preliminary results indicate
an increase in lift force at high angles of attackand reduction in flow separation in the
inner members. The results are in agreement with the experimental data and indicate
that cascading effect leads to a delay in flow separation.
Keywords: Cascade fins; CFD; Aerodynamic coefficients; Grid fins; Stall
INTRODUCTION cost of materials. Their small chord results in

low hinge moments, thereby mitigating the
While designing control devices for missiles,
requirements for control actuators and also
the designer needs to optimize parameters
high aerodynamic control at high angles of
like weight, actuator requirement, and
attack and Mach number ranges. Their design
stowability. These along with the enhanced
makes them efficient aerodynamic control
aerodynamic efficiency requirement pose an
from a stowability point of view without
additional hindrance towards creating an
changing the grid dimensions.
optimized design. Introduced in 1980s by the
Russians [Belotserkovskiy S et al 1987,
Zaloga S 2000] grid or lattice fins are a
relatively new aero-mechanical technology
for tail controlled missiles. These have been
used as control and stability devices in many
Soviet borne missiles and bombs for steering
and as drag brakes on the SOYUZ TM-22
spacecraft. Recently, these fins were usedby
the Falcon 9 Reusable Launch Vehicle
developed by SpaceX (USA) [2015] for
manipulation in the final stage of re-entry. Figure 1. Hypersonic grid fins on
A grid fin is an unconventional lifting and Falcon 9 (SpaceX)
control surface that consists of an outer frame Interest in grid fins is primarily based on its
supporting an inner grid fin of intersecting potential use on highly manoeuvrable
planar surfaces of small chord. Unlike missiles owing to their lack of conventional
conventional fins, they are aligned normal to stalling at high angles of attack. They don’t
airflow allowing the air to pass through. show a sharp break in lift at high angles, even
Their honeycomb structure provides high up to flow angles of 50º. Their aerodynamic
strength to weight ratio thereby allowing efficiency has been found to be more than the
them to be made thinner, reducing weight and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:manish.tripathi1189@gmail.com 383

Tripathi et al.
conventional fins [Munawar S 2010] at chord ratio (g/c) of 0.5, thus giving it a gap
supersonic speeds and comparable at (g) of 0.05m between the plates.
subsonic speeds making them ideal for
missiles and munitions. The major
disadvantage related to these fins is increased
drag force and thus reduced aerodynamic
efficiency (C L /C D ). Thus to make them more
efficient, a lot of research has gone into
reducing their drag mostly using thin
members, sweptback configuration etc.
[Miller M S and Washington W D1998,
1993]
Thus to increase the aerodynamic efficiency,
Misra (2009) proposed a new category
termed as the Cascade fins. A cascade fin has Figure 2. Cascade of three plates
planar members placed parallel to each other
at an optimized gap-to-chord (g/c) ratio SOLUTION METHODOLOGY
[Miller M S and Washington W D1998]. It is Preliminary results (as shown in further
the absence of these cross members that sections) was obtained using the commercial
make them different from grid fins. This also CFD++ solver by solving the compressible
results in reduced drag. Theoretical study Navier-Stokes equations. In order to capture
[Belotserkovskiy S et al 1987,Miller M S and the flow separation and producing efficient
Washington W D1993] and experimental results at adverse pressure gradient
observations [Munawar S 2010, SpaceX conditions, we used the RANS based
2015] point to an enhanced lift at higher realizable k-ε turbulence model.CATIA was
angles and deviation from the conventional used to create the computational domain
stall of a flat plate making them a viable which is a cylinder of radius 0.5m and length
candidate for highly manoeuvrable devices. 1m in front and 1.4m at the rear of the fin in
In the present work, a sequence of order to capture the flow variations at the tail
simulations were carried out at velocity of 40 portion. The mesh is created using MIME
m/s for varying angles of attack. The results mesher. The mesh used is hybrid mesh
were firstly validated against experimental consisting of tetrahedral cells away from the
results obtained from the National Wind body and 8 prismatic layers and mesh
Tunnel Facility [Misra A et al. 2008] refinement close to the walls of the fins to
available in the Department of Aerospace efficiently capture the variation in flow
Engineering at the Indian Institute of parameters close to the fin walls. The mesh
Technology, Kanpur. Consequently to get quality has been increased by using the
insight into the physics of the flow regarding curvature-based refinement feature of the
stall delay, visualisation of the pressure mesher. The mesh consists of 411545
coefficient (C p ) and velocity contour will be tetrahedrals, 1573 pyramids and 50653
used. triangular prisms. The boundary conditions
are taken to be ambient conditions i.e.
FIN GEOMETRY pressure of 101325 Pa, temperature 288.16K.
The flow is maintained at 40m/s i.e. at Mach
Our cascade fin consists of a three flat plates 0.1176, and varying angles of attack of 0º to
placed parallel to each other bounded by two 50 ºin steps of 5º, and 53º. Characteristic
vertical end plates as shownin figure 2. The based inflow/outflow boundary conditions at
plates have a span (b) of 0.2m and chord the farfield, with adiabatic no-slip conditions
length (c) of 0.1m, thus an aspect ratio of 2. with a solve to wall function for the fin walls
Thickness of the plate is 0.0025m and gap-to- have been used in the simulation.
384
CFD Simulation of Cascade Fin Flow at Low Subsonic Speeds and High Angles of Attack
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS between upper and lower surfaces in middle

and bottom plates as compared to the upper
a) VARIATION OF AERODYNAMIC one. It seems the high pressure of the lower
COEFFICIENT C L WITH ANGLE surface negates the low pressure created on
OF ATTACK the upper surface of the plate below it. Thus
flow remains attached due to reduction of the
Figure 3 shows the variation of coefficient of
adverse pressure gradient and stall gets
lift for cascade fin of three parallel plates at
delayed. Moreover, due to the end plates the
different angles of attack. It can be observed
flow gets constrained and thus normal flow is
that the simulation results tend to be within
also restrained. The enclosed cells lead to
15% of the experimental results and it
flow getting energized and hence assisting in
follows the same trend as that of the
delayed stall by encouraging attached flow.
experimental data.
Figure 3. Variation of C L with α

As pressure on lower and upper surfaces for
all the three plates is same at 0º angle of
attack, no lift is generated and hence lift
coefficient is zero. As the angle of attack
increases the lift coefficient increases linearly
but unlike conventional fins, it lacks a sudden
drop in lift even until 30º. Interestingly even
after such high angles of attack the lift
coefficient tends to become constant, again
displaying deviation from the conventional
lift characteristic of planar fins and thus
enhanced lift at high angles of attack is
produced making them suitable for highly
manoeuvrable ammunitions. Upon
comparison with experimental results it can Figure 4. C P Contours at different
be established that the results from CFD angles of attack (α)
show deviation in the range 15º to 40º.
b) PRESSURE CONTOURS AT
CONCLUSIONS
DIFFERENT ANGLES OF ATTACK Preliminary results have been derived using
(0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 DEG.) numerical study of a cascade of three
parallelplates and are compared with the
The C P contours over the upper and lower experimental results. Following are the
surface can be seen in figure 4. Observation conclusions:
of these preliminary results tend to show a
stark difference in pressure difference
385
Tripathi et al.
1. Results show a delay in stall and hence to conventional planar fins 27th
prove its efficiency of cascade fins at high International Congress of the
angles of attack. Aeronautical Sciences.
2. Cascade effect leads to attached flow
on the top surfaces of middle and Space X Falcon 92015
bottom plates leading to increased lift http://www.spacex.com/falcon9.
at high angles of attack.
Zaloga S 2000 The Scud and other Russian
3. Further investigation is required to
find the cause for deviation between Ballistic Missiles New Territories Hog
experimental and simulation results Kong: Concord Publications Co.
for angle of attack between 15º and
40º. NOTATION
C L Coefficient of lift
REFERENCES
α Angle of attack
Belotserkovskiy S et al. 1987 Wings with
C P Coefficient of pressure
internal frameworkMachine Translation
FTD-ID (RS) -1289-86 Foreign g Gap between Plates
Technology Division. c Chord of plates
Ledlow T I Burkhalter J E and R J Hartfield b Plate Span
2015 Integration of grid fins for the g/c Non-Dimensional gap–to-chord ratio
optimal design of missile systems AIAA
Miller M S and Washington W D 1993
Curvature and leading edge sweep back
effects on grid fin aerodynamic
characteristics AIAA.
Miller M S and Washington W D 1998
Experimental investigations of grid fin
aerodynamics: a synopsisof nine wind
tunnel and three fight tests Proceedings
of the NATO Research Proposal Page
21 RTO-MP-5 Missile Aerodynamics
NATO Research and Technology
Organization.
Misra A 2009 Investigation of Grid and
Cascade fins for Missile Flight
Stabilization and Control Ph.D. Thesis
Indian Inst. of Technology Kanpur
India.
Misra A Ghosh A K and Ghosh K2008
Cascade fins- an alternate tail
stabilization unit AIAA 6884.
Munawar S 2010 Analysis of grid fins as
efficient control surface in comparison
386
ICCMS2016
BUOYANCY DRIVEN HEAT TRANSFER EFFECT IN ROOM

VENTILATION DUE TO DISCRETE HEAT SOURCES
GUPTA N. and NAYAK A. K.
Department of mathematics, IIT Roorkee, Roorkee, India
Abstract: The human comfort in room ventilation by natural ventilation process in

buildings is an emerging area in the field of ventilation systems. Cooling and heating
in buildings are carried out by placing some external sources by movement of internal
air. In the present work, a numerical study is carried out to investigate the laminar
mixed convection process in a ventilated enclosure with discrete heat sources. Inlet is
considered on the bottom of right vertical wall and the chimney (outlet port) is
considered as a vertical channel along the upper wall. The effect of different positions
of heat source are studied using a fixed inlet and outlet port. Steady governing
equations for an incompressible laminar fluid is considered. A Finite volume method
based approach is used to analyse the flow and heat transfer effects by varying Prandtl
number, Richardson number and Reynolds number.
Keywords: Buoyancy driven flow; Mixed convection; Vertical chimney as outlet
port; Discrete heat sources.
INTRODUCTION chimney inlet size and the flow pattern in the

room as well as in the chimney to discuss the
Natural ventilation occurs because of wind
ventilation effects. Further, a numerical and
driven force or buoyancy driven force (due to
analytical study is carried by Bassiouny and
temperature difference between the indoor
Koura (2009) to investigate the effect of
and outdoor air temperatures) and is achieved
chimney inclination angle on air change per
by using solar chimney concept in buildings.
hour and indoor air flow pattern and
A solar chimney is a vertical shaft device in
concluded that optimum air flow rate value is
which solar energy heats the chimney during
achieved when the chimney inclination is
the day and the air within it creates an up
between 45 ° and 70 ° . Harris and Helwig
draft of air inside the solar chimney. Solar
(2007) investigated the design of a solar
chimney is used in both commercial and
chimney for room ventilation process and
residential buildings to achieve natural
concluded that for a south-facing chimney, an
cooling or heating. In buildings, solar
inclination angle of 67.5° from the horizontal
chimney can be attached vertically or
is optimum. Khanal and Lei (2015)
inclined on the walls or roofs. This concept is
numerically investigated the buoyancy
considered as an energy efficient method for
induced turbulent air flow in an inclined
cooling and heating.
passive wall solar chimney attached to a
Buildings, energy and the environment are room for a building ventilation and
key issues facing by the architects for design concluded that both the turbulent kinetic
in all around the world. Different energy and turbulent intensity decrease with
configurations for solar chimney in buildings the increase of the inclination angle of the
for ventilation have been studied passive wall can increase the effective
experimentally and numerically. Bassiouny comfort.
and Koura (2008) studied the effect of the
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: nehagupta3192@gmail.com 387

Gupta and Nayak
Based on the above studies and discussions it equation (Conservation of energy). The flow
is observed that there is a lack of studies for is driven due to the buoyancy effects created
room ventilation using solar ventilation by by the temperature differences inside the
changing different heat source locations and cavity. The density variation is assumed by
inlet air sources. In the present study a roof the Boussinesq approximation:
top solar chimney concept is used for room 𝜌 = 𝜌𝑜 �1 − 𝛽𝑇 (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑜 )� (1)
ventilation process by using an air inlet
1 𝜕𝜌
source along the lower portion of the right where 𝛽𝑇 = − ( ) is the thermal
𝜌 𝜕𝑇
vertical wall. The discrete heat sources are expansion coefficient.
placed along the left vertical wall and bottom
wall to minimize or maximize the
temperature level inside the room. The flow
is governed by two mechanisms, the
buoyancy driven flow due to inlet air and the
natural convection due to heat sources along
the vertical and bottom wall. Our aim is to
find the maximum heat and flow transfer rate
by changing the flow parameters like
Reynolds number, Richardson number with
the different placement of heat source.
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION Configuration-A
The physical model considers a steady two

dimensional mixed convective laminar flow
within a ventilated square cavity of length L
attached with a rectangular chimney of height
h(0.75L) and width 0.15L filled with a
condensed vapour solution as shown in
figure-1. A portion ℎ𝑖𝑛 (0.15L) on the bottom
of right vertical wall is used as an inlet zone
where a uniformly distributed fluid is
entering with a uniform velocity U 0 . The
outlet port of width 0.15L is considered along
the cross section of the vertical chimney
where the thermally activated or heated air
Figure 1. Configuration-B
will exit. A discrete heat source of length
𝑙 𝑇 (0.5L) is attached along the bottom wall in Non-dimensional governing equations for
the first case (configuration-A) and in second mass, momentum and energy are:
(Configuration-B) the heat source is attached Continuity equation
along left vertical wall. 𝜕𝑢 𝜕𝑣
+ =0 (2)
GOVERNING EQUATIONS 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
The fluid is assumed to be Newtonian, U-momentum equation

viscous and incompressible and the flow is 𝜕𝑢 𝜕𝑢 𝜕𝑝 1 2
𝑢 +𝑣 = − + ∇ 𝑢 (3)
assumed to be laminar. The governing 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝑅𝑒
equation for flow and heat transfer includes
the conservation of mass i.e. continuity, V-momentum equation
Navier-Stokes equations for momentum 𝜕𝑣 𝜕𝑣 𝜕𝑝 1 2 𝐺𝑟
(conservation of momentum) and energy 𝑢 +𝑣 =− + ∇ 𝑣 + 2 𝑇 (4)
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝑅𝑒 𝑅𝑒
388
Buoyancy Driven Heat Transfer Effect in Room Ventilation due to Discrete Heat Sources
Energy equation numerically using a control volume approach

𝜕𝑇 𝜕𝑇 1 based on FVM [Fletcher, 1991]. The
𝑢 +𝑣 = ∇2 𝑇 (5) discretized equation are solved by SIMPLE
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑅𝑒 ∗ 𝑃𝑟
(semi implicit method using pressure linked
where u, v, T are non-dimensional velocities
equation) algorithm based on finite volume
and temperature.
approach. For any set of input parameters, the
Prescribed boundary conditions for flow and solution is considered to be converged if
heat transfer are:
𝑛+1 𝑛
�Φ𝑖,𝑗 − Φ𝑖,𝑗 � ≤ 10−5 , where Φ = (u, v, T)
along inlet: u = −1.0, v = 0, T = −0.5 (6)
and (i, j) denote the computational node
𝜕𝜑
along outlet: = 0, (𝜑 = 𝑢, 𝑣, 𝑇) (7) points, n is the iteration number.
𝜕𝑛
at all solid boundaries: u = 0, v = 0 (8) The cooling efficiency is given by

𝑇𝑜𝑢𝑡
𝜖 =1−� � (10)
𝑇𝑖𝑛
for the heat source: T=1, and elsewhere
𝜕𝑇 The stream-function (ψ) is computed from
= 0, where n the direction normal to the
𝜕𝑛 the velocity components as
wall. (9) 𝜕ψ 𝜕ψ
− = 𝑣, 𝑎𝑛𝑑 =𝑢 (11)
The nonlinear governing equations with the 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
specified boundary conditions are solved
Configuration-A Configuration-B
389
Gupta and Nayak
RESULTS Harris D J Helwig N 2007 Solar chimney and

The fluid structure and heat transfer is building ventilation Applied energy 84
generated due to the induced buoyancy 135-146
effects and mixed convection due to discrete Rakesh Khanal Chengwang Lei 2015 A
heat sources. The main fluid governing numerical investigation of buoyancy
parameters are Ri and Re which measures the
induced turbulent air flow in an
importance of natural convection compared
to forced convection. In the computation inclined passive wall solar chimney for
process we have considered Pr=0.71, Re=200 natural ventilation. Energy and
and Ri is varied from 0.4 to 4. Buildings 93 217-226
Configuration A: Fletcher C A J 1991 Computational
The flow pattern inside the enclosure is techniques for fluid dynamics-II
mainly determined by the interaction Springer Series in Computational
between buoyancy due to temperature and Physics Springer Berlin
the forced convection due to injected air. For
Suhas V Patankar Numerical Heat Transfer
Ri<1, two eddies are formed along the core
section of the stream and upstream eddy and Fluid Flow CRC Press
vanishes at Ri=4 due to forced convection Zhai X Q Song Z P Wang R Z 2011 A
effect. review for the applications of solar
Configuration B: chimneys in buildings Renewable and
The isotherms are dominated by the forced Sustainable Energy Reviews 15(8)
3757-3767.
convection effect and for Ri=4, a
downstream eddy is found along the upper
NOMENCLATURE
right corner. As Ri increases, the cooling
efficiency also increases. Gr = Grashof number
Pr = Prandtl number
CONCLUSION
Re = Reynolds number
The cooling efficiency is found to be more in
Ri = Richardson number (Gr/𝑅𝑒 2 )
configuration B compare to configuration A.
As Ri is increasing, the flow is dominated by
forced convection effects and heat transfer is
found to be maximum.
REFERENCES
Bassiouny Ramadan Koura Nader S A 2008
An analytical and numerical study of
solar chimney use for room natural
ventilation Energy and buildings 40
865-873
Bassiouny Ramadan Koura Nader S A 2009
Effect of solar chimney inclination
angle on space flow pattern and
ventilation rate Energy and buildings
41 190-196
390
ICCMS2016
EVALUATING DIFFERENCES IN AIRFLOW PATTERNS FOR

SIMILAR RURAL KITCHENS USING CFD
RONITA BARDHAN1, RAMIT DEBNATH2 and RANGAN BANERJEE3
1
Centre for Urban Science and Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India
2
Centre for Technology Alternatives for Rural Areas, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India
3
Department of Energy Science and Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India
Abstract: Household air pollution (HAP) affects over 3 billion people globally.
Sufficient air exchanges within the cooking space in rural kitchens can help in HAP
mitigation. Multiple built parameters like opening to wall ratio (OWR), opening area,
floor area etc. are assumed to play a significant role in airflow distribution within an
indoor environment. It is generally assumed that higher OWR enables in better air
exchange. However, given that airflow exchange is a cumulative function of built
parameters, there might be a case where similar OWR can result in varied air
exchanges. To confirm this hypotheses we compare airflow patterns in two similar
rural kitchens having same OWR, with solid fuel cookstoves. A field based survey
combined with computational fluid dynamics simulations using steady state RANS
model was used to compute the air-flow patterns. Results show that even with similar
OWR the placement of openings and their respective positioning within the indoor
space plays a significant role in improving the air flow distribution, thus increasing
the air exchange rate. The larger implication of this study is in realizing the potential
of building de-sign and its contribution to long term public health sustainability in
rural and low income areas. This study shows the explanatory power of such
engineering techniques like CFD for sustainable development.
Keywords: Computational Fluid Dynamics; Household Air Pollution; Opening
to Wall Ratio; Sustainable Development
INTRODUCTION such that wind driven natural ventilation can

Household air pollution (HAP) is one of the be optimally utilized for HAP removal
most immediate global threat affecting 1.2 (World Health Organization 2014). However,
billion people globally [Lim et al. 2012]. It is National building Code of India (NBC-2005)
generally caused by burning of solid fuels in lacks such sustainable habitat design
rural and lower economic zones for cooking guidelines for rural habitats. Hence, the rural
and space heating. In India, it affects 2/3rd of kitchens are often built without any
women and children with chronic lungs and standardization with very low or restricted air
respiratory diseases [Smith 2000]. flow path.
HAP mitigation strategies include addition of In this study, the air flow distribution is
chimneys to the cookstoves, shifting to analysed with the help of CFD simulations in
cleaner fuels and effective design of kitchens similar kitchens. It is generally perceived that
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ronita.bardhan@iitb.ac.in 391

Bardhan et al.
opening to wall ratio (OWR) is a critical spatial discretization scheme was of second
design parameter for regulating the air order: ‘UPWIND scheme’. In order to save
distribution and air exchanges within a space. time on computation, every model is
Such generalizations often overshadows the simulated for state-state RANS model
importance of the relative positioning of [Baharvand et al. 2013; DesignBuilder 2012;
openings that might also have a significant Designbuilder 2011].
role in air distribution changes, especially in Unidirectional steady state flow of wind is
rural buildings. assumed across the kitchens. The indoor air
Field survey of houses using solid fuel flow is considered to be completely-wind
cookstoves, was conducted in a village in driven. The indoor air is assumed to be at
western India. It was observed the kitchens steady state and well mixed. The indoor and
lacked compliances to basic design principles outdoor walls temperatures are assumed to be
like positioning of doors and windows for isothermal in all the directions. The kitchens
facilitating cross ventilation. Therefore, it is were assumed to have high air infiltration in
essential to employ bottom-up design the form of cracks and gaps. Both the models
techniques to address this issue, which may were simulated with Mumbai, ISHRAE, 2002
pave way towards the much needed climate file. The cookstove is assumed to be
sustainable rural habitat bye-laws. a heat source of 15000W/m2 [Li & Drysdale
1992]. It is also assumed that cookstove only
To understand the significance of airflow
effects the circulation of air in the cooking
distribution two kitchens having similar
zone.
OWR were chosen. Airflow computation is
performed between two kitchens which has
THE KITCHEN MODELS
OWR of 5%. It is hypothesised that even
under same OWR, the strategic positioning of The two kitchens chosen as study models had
openings can significantly affect the air similar OWR but varied in their other built
distribution in the functional space which can characteristics. Table 1 shows the variation in
lead to better indoor environment. built characteristics of the two kitchen
models. Figure 1 and Figure 2 illustrates the
METHODOLOGY 3 dimensional representation of the two
kitchen models.
Built environment field survey was
performed to understand the built 5%
characteristics of rural kitchens. This was

followed by CFD analysis using Design
Builder v4.3 and EnergyPlus v8.0. Model
validation was performed in-situ using HTC-
AVM-06 handheld anemometer with an
accuracy of ±2.0% reading + 50 characters.
The governing Navier-Stokes equation Figure 1. Kitchen Model –A
combined with RANS standard turbulence k- CFD meshing was done as per the AIJ
ɛ model, is solved in Design Builder v4.0 till guidelines of aspect ratio <10 (Tominaga et
convergence, which uses three dimensional, al. 2008). For model –A the CFD grid is of
parallel, finite volume-solver. The fluid, air uniform spacing of 0.01m, with 96*10*19 or
was regarded as incompressible ideal gas. All 18,240 cells. The mesh for Model-B is also
392
Evaluating Differences in Airflow Patterns for Similar Rural Kitchens Using CFD
uniformly spaced at a distance of 0.01m with

23*33*20 cells or 15,180 cells. The equations
were solved until convergence with a residue
of 10-6 in 5000 iterations.
Table 1 Built Parameters
Kitchen Models
Built Parameters A B
Length (m) 10.33 4.04
Breadth (m) 1.61 3.07
Height (m) 2.12 2.03
OWR 5% 5%
No. of Windows 1 2 Figure 2. Kitchen Model- B
Floor Area (m2) 16.64 12.4
RESULTS
Aspect Ratio: 1:0.16:0.21
Airflow (m/s)
OWR: 5% 0.0
0.18
0.36
0.55
0.73
0.91
Orientation: North 1.09
1.27
1.46
1.64
Model: A Model: B
1.82
2.00
Figure 3. Airflow patterns in the two models
The air-flow distribution was found to be Typical summer week of May 14-20th, 2002
different in the two models in spite of having is used for the climate based airflow
same OWR of 5%. Model B showed more air simulation, which is illustrated in Figure 4. It
movement in the form of cross ventilation is evident that despite the kitchens being
around the kitchen space. Model A similar having same OWR, there is a drastic
experienced almost no or very little air difference in the air exchange rates between
movement throughout the space (see Figure them. The Model-B enables cross ventilation
3). This means Model B experiences better in the functional space, which resulted in 10
air exchanges throughout the cooking space, times more air exchanges in it. Experimental
thus enabling faster removal of stale air, and validation is shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6,
hence, better indoor air quality. This may be the simulation was performed for May 16,
attributed to the other built characteristics 2002 (A typical hot day in western India).
like the positioning of the windows, aspect The simulated values were extracted from a
ratio and height. It is evident that Model-B point in space which represented the user
had windows positioned to stimulate natural height during cooking in respective kitchen
cross ventilation. models (CFD monitoring point).
393
Bardhan et al.
12.00 90.00
Air change rates (ach)- Model A
Air change rates (ach)- Model B

80.00
10.00
70.00
8.00 60.00
50.00
6.00
40.00
4.00 30.00
20.00
2.00
10.00
0.00 0.00
14/05/2002 00:30
14/05/2002 05:30
14/05/2002 10:30
14/05/2002 15:30
14/05/2002 20:30
15/05/2002 01:30
15/05/2002 06:30
15/05/2002 11:30
15/05/2002 16:30
15/05/2002 21:30
16/05/2002 02:30
16/05/2002 07:30
16/05/2002 12:30
16/05/2002 17:30
16/05/2002 22:30
17/05/2002 03:30
17/05/2002 08:30
17/05/2002 13:30
17/05/2002 18:30
17/05/2002 23:30
18/05/2002 04:30
18/05/2002 09:30
18/05/2002 14:30
18/05/2002 19:30
19/05/2002 00:30
19/05/2002 05:30
19/05/2002 10:30
19/05/2002 15:30
19/05/2002 20:30
20/05/2002 01:30
20/05/2002 06:30
20/05/2002 11:30
20/05/2002 16:30
20/05/2002 21:30
Model-A Model-B
Figure 4. Simulated air change rates between the two kitchen models from May 14-20,
2002
0.40
0.35
0.30
Airflow (m/s)
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
10:30
10:31
10:32
10:32
10:33
10:34
10:35
10:36
10:37
10:38
10:39
10:40
10:41
10:42
10:43
10:44
10:45
10:46
10:47
10:48
10:49
10:50
10:51
10:52
10:53
10:54
10:55
10:56
10:57
10:58
10:59
Time (hh:mm) AM
Measured Simulated
Figure 5. Experimental validation of indoor airflow in model-A for 30 min.

1.80
1.60
1.40
Airflow (m/s)
1.20
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
11:30
11:31
11:32
11:32
11:33
11:34
11:35
11:36
11:37
11:38
11:39
11:40
11:41
11:42
11:43
11:44
11:45
11:46
11:47
11:48
11:49
11:50
11:51
11:52
11:53
11:54
11:55
11:56
11:57
11:58
11:59
Time (hh:mm) in AM
Measured Simulated
Figure 6. Experimental validation of indoor airflow in model-B for 30 min.
CONCLUSION but the placement of windows and doors in

The variation in the air exchange rates among the space is more important in terms of the
the kitchen A and kitchen-B, inspite of effective fresh air exchanges.
having same OWR, revealed an important Therefore, tools like CFD can aid in
paradigm between perceived efficacy vs applicable decision making in designing
actual efficacy. The perceived efficacy being, sustainable built environment, by visualizing
sufficient OWR is enough for a ‘fresh and airflow in a space. Such technique can help
healthy’ living environment. Actual efficacy extract latent information, which may appear
is, although appropriate OWR is important, obvious. Thus, it can help in deciding design
394
Evaluating Differences in Airflow Patterns for Similar Rural Kitchens Using CFD
and visual based indicators for sustainable Guidelines for Indoor Air Quality:
built-environment. Household Fuel Combustion p.172.
REFERENCES
Baharvand M et al. 2013 DesignBuilder
Verification and Validation for Indoor
Natural Ventilation Journal of Basic and
Applied Scientific Research 3(4) 182–
189.
DesignBuilder 2012 An Inter-program
Analysis of Computational Fluid
Dynamics Based on PHOENICS and
DesignBuilder Software 1–26.
Designbuilder S 2011 DesignBuilder
Simulation + CFD Training Guide 1–
224. Available at:
http://www.designbuilder.co.uk/downlo
adsv1/doc/DesignBuilder-Simulation-
Training-Manual.pdf.
Li Y & Drysdale D 1992 Measurement Of
The Ignition Temperature Of Wood
AOFST Symposiums 1(4) 380–385.
Lim S S et al. 2012. A comparative risk
assessment of burden of disease and
injury attributable to 67 risk factors and
risk factor clusters in 21 regions 1990–
2010: a systematic analysis for the
Global Burden of Disease Study 2010
The Lancet 380(9859) 2224–2260.
Available at:
http://linkinghub.elsevier.com/retrieve/p
ii/S0140673612617668.
Smith K R 2000 National burden of disease
in India from indoor air pollution
Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences of the United States of America
97(24) 13286–13293.
Tominaga Y et al. 2008 AIJ guidelines for
practical applications of CFD to
pedestrian wind environment around
buildings Journal of Wind Engineering
and Industrial Aerodynamics 96(10-11)
1749–1761. Available at:
http://linkinghub.elsevier.com/retrieve/p
ii/S0167610508000445.
World Health Organization 2014 WHO
395
ICCMS2016
HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS ON CORRUGATED

TYPE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
KUMAR B., SINGH D. and SINGH S.N. *
Heat Transfer Laboratory, Department of ME, Indian School of Mines Dhanbad. Jharkhand,
India.
Abstract: This paper presents an experimental study on the flow

distribution and pressure drop in port to channel of chevron u-type plate
heat exchanger for different set of plate, Reynolds number, flow rates and
for fixed port size using water as the working fluid. Pressure drop and
friction factor in the plate heat exchanger are found to be dependent on flow
rate and number of plates. Results are presented for a wide range of
Reynolds number for different set of plates. Based on experimental data,
correlation has been developed for friction factor. These experimental
results are verified with analytical results Bassiouny and Martin (1984). The
measurements indicate the existence of flow maldistribution of non-uniform
flow distribution that increases with flow rate. Results clearly show that it is
important to consider the flow maldistribution for better design of plate heat
exchanger.
Keywords: Plate Heat Exchanger, Reynolds Number, Pressure Drop,
Friction Factor
INTRODUCTION exchanger. They have purposed the

discrete model matching the real
In recent times, the plate heat
physical phenomena, to predict the
exchangers are extensively used for
pressure distribution in headers. Tereda
heating, cooling, heat-regeneration and
et al. investigated the port-to-channel
chemical processing industries due to its
flow maldistribution for a fixed number
favorable characteristics, such as high
of plates, corrugation angle and varying
overall heat transfer coefficients, easy
port diameter Division of a fluid stream
maintenance, compact size, convenient
into parts by means of a manifold is
to increase the heat transfer area,
accompanied by fluid pressure changes
suitability in hygienic application and
owing to wall friction and to the
ease of cleaning.
changing fluid momentum have been
Mulley and Manglik (1999) presented by Acrivos et al. (1969).
experimentally investigated the Gulenoglu et al. (2014) experimentally
turbulent flow heat transfer and pressure studied the thermal and hydraulic
drop in a plate heat exchanger for performance with three different plate
different corrugation angle. Their geometries and developed the new
analyses are based on the assumption of correlation for Nusselt number and
equal flow rate in all the channels. Fang friction factor.
et al. (2000) investigated the flow
After critical review of the literature, it
distribution in manifolds of heat
is clear that works on flow distribution
__________________________
Author to correspondence:E-mail: kbhupal246@gmail.com 396

Kumar at al.
in a chevron type plate heat exchanger were connected using flexible pipes and
have not been done in detail. The these flexible pipes were fixed to the
present experimental study aims to bring pressure valve panel, where the inlet and
out a clear picture about how the outlet of the measured channel were
pressure drop is affected by the flow connected to the pressure transmitter. A
distribution in a high corrugated U-type multi-meter is used to record the
PHE in presence of different sets of pressure signal from the pressure
plate packages and a wide range of transmitter in the form of voltage, mV.
Reynolds number. These pressure transmitters are
calibrated with a standard pressure
EXPERIMENTAL SETUP AND meter and the maximum uncertainty is
PROCEDURE about ±0.25%.The experiments are
The experimental set-up as shown in carried out for an adiabatic condition at
Figure 1 having heating unit (1) where Tm = 25oC.
desired hot water temperature obtain.
Cooling unit (2) as shown in Figure
consists of a maximum of 27 plates. It is
considered to investigate the flow
distribution for 21 plates (20channels)
and 27 plates (26 channels) from the
first to last channel. The digital flow
meter (3&4) has been provided in hot
and cold fluid stream, having a
maximum deviation of 2.0% from the
standard flow meter. Thermometers
(5&6) have been used at the inlet and
Figure. 1 Experimental set-up
outlet of both cold and hot fluid streams,
having a maximum deviation of 0.15%
from standard thermometer. Four
pressure transmitters (7) have been
provided near the inlet and outlet port of
cold and hot fluid stream. The digital
flow meters and thermometers are Figure. 2 Pressure tap fixed at top
connected to Programming Logic and bottom port of the channel in the
Controller (PLC) which is further tested plate of phe
connected to Human Interface (HMI)
unit, through which temperature and DATA REDUCTION
flow rate are measured and controlled.
The Reynolds number for plate heat
In addition to these, external pressure exchanger is defined on the basis of
transmitters (range from 0 kPa to 500 hydraulic diameter Dh,as
kPa) are used to measure the pressure
u ch Dh
drop along the channels connected to Re  Dh = 2bLw/(b+Lw φ)

small pressure copper tube taps having a
.Since b<<Lw, Dh =2b/φ.
2 mm internal diameter which is shown
in Figure 2. The fixed pressure taps (1)
397
Hydraulic Performance Analysis on Corrugated type Plate Heat Exchanger
The enlargement factor of the chevron number. This could be due to

plate is tremendous increase in turbulence at
p 2 2 2x
p
1 c
higher Reynolds number within plates.
  1  ( ) cos ( )dx
pc 0
pc pc Also at higher Reynolds number, fluid
molecules get lesser time to interact
(2) with plate surface, hence lower friction
The pressure drop due to friction in the between plates and molecule.
corrugated passage is calculated based
on the flow rate by using an empirical 90
27 Plates
formula:
80
L v 2 chm
Pch  f ch ch 
Static Pressure, kpa.

Mass Flow Rate Inlet : 0.7223
dh 2 (3) 70 Mass Flow Rate Inlet : 0.9270
Mass Flow Rate Inlet : 1.654
The non-dimensional pressure drop can be
60
written as
Pin  Po
P  50
(4) W 2 in
The total non-dimensional pressure drop of U- 40
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
type plate heat exchanger is Distance along port, mm.
m2 Ap  c
pin  p o  ( 2
)( ) Figure 4. variation of static pressure
tanh m nAc 2 (5) drop along the inlet and outlet port
with different mass flow rate for 27
1.05 plates PHE
Correlation line
1.00 Experimental data
Figure. 4 shows variation of static
pressure along the inlet at different mass
Friction factor, f
0.95
flow rate for 27 plates. Static pressure at

0.90
inlet increases with increase in mass
0.85
flow rate. It is also observed that static
0.80 pressure increases along the port with
0.75
different mass flow rates in PHE. The
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 inlet port pressure increases along the
Reynolds number, Re
port because the momentum gain from
decrease in flow rate, which is higher
Figure 3. Variation of Channel
than the sum of friction and turn around
Friction Factor with Reynolds
losses. Momentum change in inlet port
Number
is due to flow branching in the channel,
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION hence fluid velocity decreases along the
inlet port. Figure. 5 shows variation of
Figure. 3 shows variation of friction static pressure along the port with
factor with Reynolds number. After different mass flow rate for 21 plates.
analysing experimental variation of Figure. 6 shows the variation of static
friction factor, a theoretical frictional pressure along the inlet port with fixed
co-relation is derived which clearly mass flow rate in PHE for both 21 and
follows a similar trend. Frictional factor 27 plates. The inlet static pressure drop
is observed to decrease with Reynolds increases with decrease in number of
398
Kumar at al.
plates due to increase in momentum in Fantu A Tereda N Srihari Bengt Sunden

port. & Sarit K Das Experimental
Investigation on Port-to-Channel
130
21 Plates
FlowMaldistribution in Plate Heat
120
Exchangers ASME Journal of heat
110
transfer engineering 28(5) 435-
Static Pressure, kpa
100
443.
90
80
Gulenoglu C Akturk F Aradag S Uzol N
Mass Flow Rate Inlet :0.6148
Mass Flow Rate Inlet: 1.568
S Kakac S 2014 Experimental
70
Mass Flow Rate Inlet : 1.9526 Comparison of performance of
60
three different plates for gasketed
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 plate heat exchangers International
Distance along port, mm. Journal of Thermal Science 75
Figure.5 variation of static pressure 249-256.
drop along the inlet and outlet port LU Fang LUO Yong-hao YANG Shi-
with different mass flow rate for 27 ming 2000 Analytical and
plates PHE Experimental Investigation of Flow
21 Plate Mass Flow Rate: 1.57
Distribution in Manifolds for Heat
86 27 Plate Mass Flow Rate: 1.57 Exchangers journal of
15 Plate Mass Flow Rate: 1.54
84 hydrodynamics 20(2) 179-185.
82
Static Pressure, kpa
Muley A and Manglik R M 1999

80
Experimental Study of Turbulent
78
Flow Heat Transfer and Pressure
76
Drop in Plate Heat Exchanger with
74
Chevron Plates ASME Journal of
72
Inlet port Pressure Profile Heat Transfer 121(1) 110–117
70
0 20 40 60 80 100
Distance along port, mm.
Figure 6. Variation of Static

Pressure Drop Along the Inlet Port
with Same Mass Flow Rate for
Different Sets Plates PHE
REFERENCES
Acrivos A Babcock B D and Pigfords R
L 1969 Flow distributions in
manifolds Chemical Engineering
Science 10 112 to 124.
Bassiouny M K and Martin H 1984
Flow distribution and pressure
drop in plate heat exchangers-I
Chemical Engineering Science 39
693-700.
399
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF ROTATION AND BAROCLINICITY ON HEAT

TRANSPORT AND TURBULENT CONVECTION IN ANNULAR FLOW
BANERJEE A. K.*, BHATTACHARYA A. and BALASUBRAMANIAN S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, Mumbai, India
Abstract: Turbulent thermal convection in the presence of background rotation is an

important fluid dynamic problem which has got wide attention in recent decades. Heat
transport in rotating fluid with radial temperature gradient leads to baroclinic
instability which is the main mechanism of heat transport in planetary atmosphere.
Atmospheric general circulation is difficult to study in the real atmospheric situations
due to random variation of different atmospheric parameters (e.g. temperature,
pressure, density etc.). But these large-scale atmospheric flow phenomena can be
studied in laboratory in a differentially heated rotating cylindrical annulus so that
governing parameters (rotation rate, radial temperature difference) can be controlled.
Moreover, there exists very little work on the convective dynamics with background
when both vertical and radial temperature gradients coexist. ANSYS Fluent was used
to simulate the flow dynamics in a 2-D axisymmetric plane to better understand the
flow dynamics.
Keywords: Simultaneous radial and vertical temperature gradient; Rotation;
Baroclinic instability; Thermal plume
INTRODUCTION temperature difference between the poles

(cold) and equator (hot) as well as the
Detailed understanding of heat transport in
vertical temperature gradient in the rotating
the presence of rotation is important from a
earth gives rise to turbulent thermal
geophysical view point to model the
convection that plays a pivotal role in
atmosphere and oceanic large scale
governing the global wind pattern, and large
circulation that impacts the weather and
scale weather system. An experimental set up
climate system. In general, two variants of
comprising differentially heated rotating
this problem have been studied extensively,
cylindrical annulus (Figure 1) was used to
(i) Convective dynamics in rotating fluid
study heat transport and turbulent thermal
with vertical temperature gradient (i.e.
convection.
Rotating Rayleigh-Benard convection
(RBC)) and (ii) Convective dynamics in PHYSICS OF THE PROBLEM
rotating fluid with radial temperature
gradient (i.e. Classical Hide-Mason The main governing non-dimensional
experiment). However, the convective numbers for this problem are: Thermal
dynamics of a rotating fluid due to Rossby number (R OT ) which is the ratio of
simultaneous radial and vertical temperature buoyant force to Coriolis force, and the
gradient is poorly understood. The present Taylor number (Ta) which is the ratio of the
study attempts to fill this gap, which would Coriolis force to viscous forces, and
provide a better understanding of synoptic characterizes the earth’s rotation. The
processes and various heat transport rotation inhibits the onset of convective
mechanisms in atmosphere and ocean. The turbulence as turbulence in such rotating
____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ayanbanerjee1@gmail.com 400
Banerjee et. al.
flows is two-dimensional. The flow regime is Laboratory experiments were conducted

classified as: (a) Axisymmetric flow, (b) using a Coriolis table consisting of a
Non-axisymmetric flow (i.e. Regular cylindrical annulus filled with water. The
baroclinic wave and Irregular baroclinic inner wall was maintained at a constant cold
wave). Different numbers of lobes are also temperature, while at the outer wall, a higher
formed depending on the values of Ta and temperature was maintained at the bottom
R OT . The R OT –Ta regime diagram for fluid using a thin Aluminum strip at the periphery.
like water shows the well investigated anvil Such an arrangement ensures a thermal
shape of the ‘transition curve’. The gradient in both radial and vertical directions.
‘transition curve’ indicates the transition In other words, the radial temperature
from azimuthally symmetric (i.e. difference decreases along the direction of
axisymmetric, no waves present) to non- rotation (+z-axis) as shown in Figure.1.
axisymmetric wavy regime, finally to Multiple thermocouples at different vertical
irregular, chaotic flow (geostrophic positions on both inner and outer wall
turbulence). captured the temperature time series.
EXPERIMENTAL SET UP EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS

Flow field image for Ta=1.9×107 and
Ra=3.6×108 is shown below:
(1a)
Figure.2: Flow field on bottom; Both green
and red (or orange) dyes were put close to
the bottom, but at different radial locations.
It is found that increasing the rotation rates
(Ω) for a fixed ΔT increase the wave number
(i.e. decreases of the scale of cells). It is
assumed that these eddies are produced by
the same mechanism responsible for
atmospheric weather systems especially at
mid latitude.
COMPUTATIONAL MODELLING
The problem is symmetric with respect to the
axis of rotation. Flow phenomena on the
(1b) vertical plane in between central cold
Figure.1: Schematic of experimental set cylinder and periphery (Figure. 3) is
up simulated in ANSYS-Fluent.
401
Effect of Rotation and Baroclinicity on Heat Transport and Turbulent Convection in Annular Flow
Simulations are done for constant heating at

303 K and constant cooling at 288 K. Top,
left side wall and rest of the bottom (refer
Figure.3) are kept in adiabatic condition.
Simulations are done for two different cases -
stationary case and 8.5 rpm.
(a) (b)
Figure.5: (a): Relative axial velocity; (b):
Relative radial velocity
B) Rotation at 8.5 rpm
(a) (b)
Figure.6: (a): Stream function; (b): Static
temperature
Figure.3: Schematic of vertical plane

which is simulated in ANSYS-Fluent
SIMULATION RESULT
A) Stationary (i.e. 0 rpm) -
(a) (b)
Figure.7: (a): Relative axial velocity; (b):
Relative radial velocity
(a) (b)
Figure.4: (a): Stream function; (b): Static
temperature
402
Banerjee et. al.
investigations are under way to understand the

nature of this coexistence.
REFERENCES
Larcher Egbers 2005 Experiments on
trasition of baroclinic waves in
differentially heated rotating annulus
Nonlin. Processes Geophys 12.1033–
1041.
Harlander U Wenzel J Alexandrov K Wang
Figure.8: Relative azimuthal velocity
Y and Egbers 2012 Simultaneous PIV
Simulation results hint at the coexistence of and thermography measurements of
thermal plume and baroclinic waves in case partially blocked flow in a differentially
of rotating case. It also shows that impact of heated rotating annulus. Exp. Fluids 52
heating decreases with elevation. Figure.7 1077–1087.
(Left) indicates at the existence a plume
aligned parallel to the rotation axis (Taylor Vincze M Harlander U von Larcher Thand
columns) as in the case of rotating RBC. Egbers 2013 An experimental study of
These plumes aid in vertical heat transport. regime transitions in a differentially
Additionally, the inclined isotherms in heated baroclinic annulus with flat and
Figure.6 (Right) also suggests simultaneous sloping bottom topographies. Nonlin.
existence of baroclinic instability. Processes Geophys.
Furthermore, Figure.8 indicates existence of
helicity in the azimuthal velocity. On the Harlander U von Larcher Th Wang Y and
other hand, Figure.4 and Figure.5 show that Egbers C 2011 PIV and LDV-
for stationary case, although thermal plume measurements of baroclinic wave
exists but baroclinic instability does not exist. interactions in a thermally driven
rotating annulus. Exp. Fluids 51 37–49.
CONCLUSIONS
Simulations along with experiments show Seelig et.al 2012 Irregularity and singular
coexistence of thermal plume and baroclinic vectorgrowth of the differentially heated
waves This however needs to be quantified. rotating annulus flow Theor Comput.
Further simulation and experimental Fluid Dyn.
403
ICCMS2016
ON BUBBLE AND SPIKE EVOLUTION IN RAYLEIGH-TAYLOR

INSTABILITY
GHOSH BRINDABAN
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: During late phase of sever accident in nuclear reactor core possibility exist
for unstable density stratification of molten corium. This leads to growth of Rayleigh-
Taylor Instability. The effects of surface tension and viscous drag on the nonlinear
two fluid interfacial mixing process induced by Rayleigh-Taylor instability are
analysed. Numerical integrations of the relevant system of nonlinear equations
describing the temporal development of the bubble and spike have been carried out. It
is seen that the magnitude of the suppression of the terminal growth rate of the tip of
the bubble height depends only on the viscous coefficient of the denser fluid through
which the bubble rises and surface tension of the interface.
Keywords: Rayleigh-Taylor Instabiity; Corium Stratification; Severe accident
INTRODUCTION pulse and drop fragmentation [Fishburn

1974; Leclerc and Berthoud, 2003].
In the late stage of in-vessel severe accident
event of nuclear reactors, the degradation This is an extension of the earlier work
and melting of the fuel elements and carried out by the present authors [Ghosh et
al., 2013]. In this work, the effects of
reactor internal structural materials and
surface tension and viscous drag on the
may lead to formation of the molten-fuel nonlinear two fluid interfacial mixing
pools within the core or at the lower process induced by Rayleigh-Taylor
plenum. The composition of the molten instability are analysed. Numerical
layers may be stratified. During the integrations of the relevant system of
formation process of stratified phasic nonlinear equations describing the temporal
layers, possibility exists, that a heavier development of the bubble and spike have
corium layer is formed on the top of a been carried out.
lighter one. Such configuration is very
MATHEMATICAL MODELING
unstable and leads to rapid mixing of the
layers. This is a classic case of Rayleigh- The fluid domain is assumed to be abruptly
stratified in the vertical direction with
Taylor Instability (RTI) and resulting
infinite expanse in the horizontal directions.
mixing phenomenon. Layzer (1955) was The unperturbed interface between the
first to describe the bubble formation in a heavier fluid of density ρh (region z > 0)
potential flow model. and lighter fluid of density ρl (region z <
It is an important mechanism for fuel- 0).is located at the x-y plane (z = 0).
coolant interaction [Cooper and Dienes, Gravity g is taken to point along negative z-
1978] in severe accidents of nuclear axis.
reactors. In steam explosion phase of For incompressible, irrotational flow (i.e.,
severe accidents in nuclear reactors RTI of potential flow) the condition of continuity
the vapour films surrounding hot melt applied to both the domains gives,
droplets lead to generation of pressure
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bghosh@barc.gov.in 404

Brindaban Ghosh
fluid increases, the steady-state value of

2 = 0. for z > 0 and z < 0 (1)
growth rate decreases.
Following Layzer (1955), we express the
interface amplitude η near the tip of the
0.30
bubble (localised at the point {x, z} = {0, η
Normalised Bubble Growth Rate

(0, t)} upto the second order in x, 0.25
η(x, t) = η0(t) + η2(t)x2 (2)

0.20
The kinematical interfacial conditions

0.15
conforming to interfacial surface  = 1.5,  = 1.2, (/c) = 0.5
2
perturbation can be expressed as, 0.10

h
c = 0.0
h
wh – uhηx = wl – ulηx 2 c = 0.1
h
(3) c = 0.2
0.05 h
ηt + uhηx = wh, c = 0.3
0 5 10 15 20
For a fluid with uniform viscosity, the Normalised Time
integral of the momentum equation (i.e., Figure 1: Bubble Tip Growth Rate
Bernoulli relation) gives In order to study the effect of surface, the
fixed parameter are chosen as, ρ = 1.5, ch =
1
⟦𝜌 (𝜙𝑡 + 2|𝐮|2 + 𝑔𝜂) + 𝑝⟧ = 𝑓(𝑡) (4) 0.001 and μ = 1.2. The viscosity parameter
has been varied as (k/kc)2 = ½, 5, 10, 15.
where ⟦𝑄⟧ = 𝑄ℎ − 𝑄𝑙 ,. f (t) is an arbitrary The initial conditions are taken as using ξ0
function. = 0.1, ξ2 = − 0.1 and ω = 0.1. The results
for evolution of non-dimensional bubble
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION growth rate (ω) are presented in figure 2.
The evolutions of the bubble and the spike It is obvious from Figure 2 that the
are modelled by initial value problem of qualitative behaviour of RTI bubble growth
two systems of nonlinear ordinary
rate is qualitative different for different
differential equations. These equations
have been integrated numerically by values of non-dimensional surface tension
application of fourth-order Runge-Kutta considered hare.
method.
Nondimensional Bubble Growth Rate
0.3
In order to study the effect of viscosity, the h
 = 1.5,  = 1.2, c = 0.001
fixed parameter is chosen as, ρ = 1.5, (k/kc)2 0.2
2
(/c) = 1/2,
2
(/c) = 5
2 2
= 0.5 and μ = 1.2. The viscosity parameter (/c) = 10, (/c) = 15
has been varied as ch = 0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3. The 0.1
initial conditions are taken as using ξ0 =

0.1, ξ2 = − 0.1 and ω = 0.1. The result for 0.0
non-dimensional bubble growth rate is

-0.1
presented in figure 1.
0 10 20 30 40
Figure 1 show that the growth rate of RTI Nondimensional Time
bubble initally increases and then reaches Figure 2: Bubble Tip Growth Rate
asymptotic values. It is evident from this
For (k/kc)2 = ½, the growth rate
figure that as the viscosity of the heavier
monotonically reaches a steady state value;
405
On Bubble and Spike Evolution in Rayleigh-Taylor Instability
while for (k/kc)2 = 5; it goes through a bit of NOTATION

oscillatory mode before attaining steady p Pressure
state. On the other hand, for (k/kc)2 = 10
and 15, it continues to show the oscillatory η Interface height
behaviour throughout the time domain u, w Velocity components
considered here. x, z Coordinate directions
ρ Density
CONCLUSION
The evolutions of bubble and spike during  Stream function
Rayleigh Taylor instability have been
studies. Parametric study has been carried
out to illustrate the effect of viscosity and
surface tension.
It is seen that the magnitude of the
suppression of the terminal growth rate of
the tip of the bubble height depends only on
the viscous coefficient of the denser fluid
through which the bubble rises and surface
tension of the interface. However, in regard
to spike it is shown that in an inviscid fluid
spike does not remain terminal but
approaches like a free fall.
REFERENCES
Layzer D 1955 On the Instability of
Superposed Fluid in Gravitational
Field Astrophys. J. 122 1-12.
Cooper F and Dienes J 1978 The Role of
Rayleigh-Taylor Instabilities in Fuel-
Coolant Interactions Nucl. Sci. Eng.
68 308-21.
Fishburn B D 1974 Boundary Layer
Stripping of Liquid Drops Fragmented
by Taylor Instability Acta Astronautica
1 1267-84
Leclerc E and Berthoud G 2003 Modeling
of Melt Droplet Fragmentation
Following Vapor Film Destabilization
by a Trigger Pulse Nucl. Technol 144
58-74.
Ghosh B Lele H G and Dutta B K 2013
Analysis of Effect of Viscosity on
Rayleigh-Taylor Instability FMFP-
2013-024 Dec.12-14 NIT Hamirpur
India.
406
ICCMS2016
THERMO-HYDRAULIC SIMULATION OF OXIDIZER BOOSTER PUMP

FOR SEMI-CRYOGENIC ENGINE
THOMAS B. G.1*, UNNIKRISHNAN NAIR P.2, SARANGI S. K.1 and NARAYANAN V.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Rourkela, Odisha, India.
2
CryoPropulsion Engines and Stages, Liquid Propulsion Systems Centre, Valiamala, India.
Abstract: Liquid Propulsion Systems Centre is developing the 2000 kN thrust Semi-
cryogenic engine for Indian Space Research Organisation to power the core stage of
the Unified Launch Vehicle and the Reusable Launch Vehicle. Turbo pump is a major
system which is responsible for the continuous supply of propellants from stage tanks
to the thrust chamber at required pressure and flow rate. Cavitation occurring within
the main pump is a serious issue which may lead to the failure of mission, so to avoid
cavitation a booster pump is employed. In the present study the performance of
oxidizer booster pump for semi-cryogenic engine at nominal operation, de-rated
condition and up-rated condition is analysed using the commercial ANSYS CFX
package. The pressure, temperature and velocity distribution throughout the pump is
analysed and the pump efficiency is calculated for each operating condition.
Keywords: Semi-cryogenic oxidizer booster pump; Inducer; Turbo machinery.
INTRODUCTION provided by them represents a non negligible

part of the total head of turbopump [Herda et
Semi-cryogenic propellants are eco-friendly, al., 1995].
nontoxic and are having better performance
The 2000 kN semi-cryogenic engine needs to
than solid propellants. These propellants have
be operated between 60 % and 105% of the
advantage over cryogenic propulsion in terms
designed engine thrust as per various mission
of design complexity, cost for space
requirements. So here the objective is to
exploration of and safety issues with storage
simulate the flow through booster pump at
and handling. So, Liquid Propulsion Systems
nominal (100% engine thrust), derated (60%
Centre is developing a 2000 kN thrust semi
thrust) and up rated (105% thrust) operation
cryogenic engine which uses liquid oxygen
conditions and to find the pressure,
and isrosene (grade of kerosene) to power the
temperature and velocity distribution
future launch vehicles of India.
throughout the pump and the corresponding
Turbopump is one of the critical component efficiency.
in any liquid propulsion engine and cavitation
occurring within these are a major issue METHODOLOGY
which needs to be given at most care.
Turbopump failures may account to 50-70% The oxidizer pump consists of mainly three
of all engine failures during development domains: inlet branch (stationary domain),
tests [Demyanenko et al., 2005]. The booster the inducer (rotational domain) and the
pump provided ahead of the inlet to main straightening device (stationary domain). The
pump reduces the chances of cavitation non axisymmetric geometry of the pump does
within main pump and the pressure rise not allow any reduction of computational
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: basilgeorgethomas@gmail.com 407

Thomas et al.
volume so the entire 3D geometry of pump is Table 1. Parameters at various operating

modelled and the fluid flow path is extracted conditions
as shown in Figure (1).
60% 100% 105%
Parameters
thrust thrust thrust
Rotational
5200 7000 7220
speed (rpm)
Mass flow rate
266 442 464
(kg/s)
Inlet pressure
0.49 0.47 0.47
(MPa)
Inlet
91.0 91.0 91.0
temperature (K)
Figure 1. Fluid domain for pump.
The inlet branch has an axial inlet which is
inline with the flow pipelines and inducer, Geometry complexity allows only
thus providing an unobstructed flow into unstructured mesh so the domain is made of
inducer. It has 6 ribs for structural support. tetrahedrons, wedges and pyramids. Grid
The inducer consists of 3 blades of constant sensitivity analysis is conducted and the mesh
tip diameter and tapered hub. The is finalised as given in Table 2.
straightening device has 16 profiled ribs to Table 2. Mesh statistics
straighten the swirling flow leaving the
inducer. No. of Total No. of
Domain
nodes elements
Commercial package ANSYS CFX is used
for the simulation. Working fluid (liquid Inlet branch 7,00,260 24,95,407
oxygen) is assumed to be incompressible
because majority of literature are based on Inducer domain 20,00,504 62,55,863
incompressible flow conditions [Kim H et al., Straightening
2013 and Kiris et al., 2006] and the properties 20,59,220 70,86,818
Device
of fluid are taken at 91 K, 4.7 bar from the
standard thermodynamic database available
from National Institute of Standard and
Technology (NIST) for pure fluids. The RESULTS
operating parameters for various condition of
The results for each operating condition are
engine are prescribed in Table 1. To
minimise the resource requirement a domain expressed in the form of tables and charts.
wise analysis is conducted and the exit Efficiency is calculated using Eq. 1
boundary condition of each domain is .
exported as the inlet condition for the
=
Q  P OUT  PIN 
 (1)
downstream domain. Incompressible steady Torque 
state analysis is done by choosing the SST
turbulence model inclusive of viscous work
term and the Total energy model for heat
transfer.
408
Thermo-Hydraulic Simulation of Oxidizer Booster pump for Semi-Cryogenic Engine
Table 3. Nominal operation (100% engine thrust) performance
Parameters Pump Inlet Inducer Inlet Straightening Pump Outlet

device Inlet
Pressure (MPa) 0.470 0.444 1.759 1.858
Total pressure (MPa) 0.511 0.509 2.284 2.001
Temperature (K) 91.0 91.001 91.162 91.292
Velocity (m/s) 7.952 10.489 29.733 15.360
Torque (Nm) 930.101
Table 4. Derated operation (60% engine thrust) performance

device Inlet
Pressure (MPa) 0.489 0.480 1.230 1.278
Temperature (K) 91.0 91.00 91.136 91.186
Velocity (m/s) 4.739 6.266 27.014 11.20
Torque (Nm) 433.033
Table 5. Uprated operation (105% engine thrust) performance

device Inlet
Pressure (MPa) 0.469 0.442 1.799 1.815
Temperature (K) 91.0 91.001 91.168 91.286
Velocity (m/s) 8.267 10.931 29.213 16.905
Torque (Nm) 959.706
CONCLUSION negligible so we can conclude of lower

viscous dissipation.
The simulation showed a smooth flow
throughout the booster pump and the pressure Within the inducer, pressure on the blades
increases as we move along the axial
rise is found to match with the design
direction. Near to the inlet region of inducer,
requirements. The inlet branch provides a a local pressure drop occurs at the blade tip.
smooth unobstructed flow into the inducer. The temperature variation depicts a small and
Some losses occur as frictional losses at the smooth increase along the flow direction. The
walls and the ribs. The temperature rise is
409
Thomas et al.
streamlines show a smooth flow within the

inducer. Temperature v/s Axial distance
91.4 60% 105% 100%
In the straightening device, area of flow
91.3
Temperature (K)
increases along flow direction hence static
pressure recovery occurs and the velocity 91.2
reduces. It is seen that there is a
comparatively lower pressure recovery and 91.1
higher losses in off design conditions than 91
nominal design; this is due to the fact that the
profiled ribs are designed for nominal 90.9
condition. 0 200 400 600
Axial distance (mm)
The simulation proves that the oxidizer
booster pump for semi-cryogenic engine will
Figure 3. Temperature along axial plot
meet the head rise and efficiency for nominal
as well as off design engine conditions.
REFERENCES
Demyanenko Y et al 2005 Turbopumps for
Table 6. Efficiency at various conditions
Gas Generator and Staged Combustion
Cycle Rocket Engines AIAA 2005-3946
Operating condition Efficiency (%)
Herda D A Gross R S 1995 HPOTP Inducer
Nominal (100 % thrust) 84.89 Dynamic Design Environrnent NASA
Derated (60 % thrust) 82.43 Technical Paper 3589.
Uprated (105 % thrust) 82.65 Kim H et al 2013 Efficient and Accurate
Computations of Cryogenic Cavitating
Flows around Turbopump Inducer AIAA
2013-2594.
Pressure v/s Axial distance Kiris et al 2006 High-fidelity simulations for
60% 105% 100% unsteady flow through turbopump and
20 flow liners, 44th AIAA Aerospace
Science Meeting Reno Nevada.
Pressure (bar)
15
NOTATION
10  - efficiency
𝑄 - flow rate (kg/s)
5
POUT - total pressure at outlet (bar)
0 PIN - total pressure at inlet (bar)
0 200 400
Axial distance (mm)
600
 - angular velocity (rad/s)
Figure 2. Pressure along axial plot
410
ICCMS2016
NOISE RADIATION FROM COMPRESSIBLE REACTING MIXING

LAYERS
CHARY P. S.* and SAMANTA A.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India
Abstract: Combustion noise, as a component of overall sound from turbofan engine

typically dominates over the fan and jet noise sources at broad levels of moderate
frequencies during an aircraft approach. So, a better understanding of the sound sources
and sound propagation due to combustion process helps in designing efficient modern
combustors to curb noise levels. It is very well known that farfield sound is sensitive to
the density variation in mixing layers. But, effect of heat release and with density
variation on sound is not understood very well. In this work, a spatial stability analysis
using a linear-version of the Parabolized Stability Equations (PSE) is being used to
quantify the effects of heat release in mixing layers. It is used to calculate the near field
hydrodynamics while an acoustic analogy is used to predict the far field sound from
reacting mixing layers.
Keywords: Parabolised Stability Equations; Far-field sound; Acoustic analogy
INTRODUCTION based on large-scale structures, do not

account for the smaller scales that are
It has now been well-established that flows
captured in a typical DNS, it has been shown
with shear layers are dominated by large-
elsewhere that their role on the far-field noise
scale coherent vortical structures [Brown and
signature is unimportant. Recently, non-linear
Roshko, 1974], which play pivotal roles in
PSE coupled with Lilley's acoustic analogy
noise generation. These large-scale
Cheung and Lele, (2009) has been shown to
structures could be modeled via a linear-
provide good far-field predictions for
stability mode (Kelvin-Helmholtz instability),
isothermal supersonic and subsonic mixing
which essentially represents a velocity
layers. More recently Gudmundsson and
discontinuity across parallel streams. How
Colonius, (2011) found sound radiation
these modes radiate sound to far-field is a
predicted from LPSE of jet agreed very well
question of great practical importance. In the
with experiments. In the ongoing work, the
past, direct numerical simulations (DNS) and
above analysis is projected to be extended to
large eddy simulations (LES) were used in
reacting shear layers, where the effect of heat
studying sound radiation from shear layers.
release and density variation on sound
Later, hybrid methods comprising of a DNS
radiation is expected to be important.
[Colonius et. al., 1997], LES coupled with an
acoustic analogy type formulation was used Therefore, the first aim of the present work is
to predict accurate far-field pressure to validate the LPSE and Lilley Goldstein
fluctuations; but the computational cost analogy. Another aim is to quantify the role
associated with such studies prohibited its of the heat release and density variation in the
casual studies. In this work, linearized sound generation from reacting shear layers
Parabolised Stability Equations (PSE) is in a multi-parameter space. Preliminary
proposed as a faster alternative to the direct studies toward that goal are described in this
computation of sound sources at the near paper. We use linear PSE (LPSE) to model
field. Although PSE, like other methods the evolution of the shear layer modes, at a
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: kanthchary@gmail.com 411

Chary and Samanta
computational cost that is negligible where 𝑈1∗ , 𝑈2∗ and 𝑎1∗ , 𝑎2∗ represent velocities
compared to DNS, yet at a resolution and and speeds of sound of fast and slow streams,
accuracy that allows us to make important respectively. Dimensional quantities are
conclusions. indicated by an asterisk. Parameters used to
METHODOLOGY FLOW characterize the reacting shear layer include
CONFIGURATION equivalence ratio φ, free stream velocity ratio
𝑟 = 𝑈2∗ /𝑈1∗ and density ratio 𝑠 = 𝜌2∗ /𝜌1∗ .
Focus of this investigation is to study the
sound generation from two dimensional PSE FORMULATION
reacting mixing layers shown in figure 1. In
the figure, streams of oxidizer and fuel get The variables of compressible Navier Stokes
mixed at the splitter plate edge; this gives rise equations (NSE) are non-dimensionalized
to instability due to velocity discontinuity. using their respective values on the high
Here, high speed stream on upper side of the speed side of the mixing layer, with length
splitter plate is the Oxidizer, denoted by scale as the initial vorticity thickness
subscript 1 and slow speed stream on the
lower side of the splitter is fuel, denoted by
subscript 2. 𝑌𝑜,∞ and 𝑌𝑓,−∞ are mass fractions
of oxidizer and fuel respectively. The
terms 𝑈1 , 𝑈2 represent velocities and 𝜌1 , 𝜌2
represent densities of fast and slow streams,
respectively. Here, y varies from −∞ to ∞
with no solid boundaries and the flow
evolves in x direction. In this investigation,
the downstream evolution of the meanflow is
modeled apriori to accommodate the use of
Linear PSE. 𝜌1∗ 𝑈1∗ 𝛿1∗
where, µ is viscosity, 𝑅𝑒𝑜 = is
𝜇1∗
Reynolds number. Here, M 1 denotes high
speed flow Mach number, Sc represent
Schmid number and assumed as unity. Here
u, v represent the streamwise velocity, cross
stream velocity, ρ the density, T the
temperature, p the pressure and Z the passive
Figure 1. Mixing layer configuration scalar used in combustion modelling. The
The chemical reaction in the mixing layer is formed flow variables vector q=[u,v,w,T,ρ,Z]
simplified by assuming a single, infinitely from the equations is decomposed into q= 𝑞�
fast step reaction + q′, where 𝑞� is the mean and q′ is the
perturbation quantity. For linear PSE, the
perturbation equations are obtained by
where F, O, P & n indicate fuel, oxidizer, linearizing the compressible Navier-Stokes
products formed and stoichiometric mass equations (3) about the meanflow, neglecting
ratio, respectively. Convective Mach number the higher order nonlinear fluctuating terms
M c is used as a generalized measure for (q′q′). An ansatz for the PSE is substituted
compressibility: into the perturbation equations to obtain the
Parabolised Stability equations [Bertolotti
and Herbert, 1991]. Ansatz (4) is defined as,
412
Noise Radiation from Compressible Reacting Mixing Layers
To solve the equations, they are transformed

into frequency and wavenumber space
where 𝑞� is slowly varying shape function and
A denotes rapidly varying wave-like part. The
real and complex part of α represents, and by assuming the mean flow to be parallel
respectively, the axial wave number and the throughout the mixing layer, reduces the
growth rate while ω represents the equation (7) into an ordinary differential
disturbance frequency. The slow evolution of equation.
shear layers assumption allows for neglecting
second-order streamwise derivatives which
aids in the parabolization of the stability
equations. As a result the equations can be
solved by marching in x. The viscous terms
were simplified using a thin shear layer
approximation. The final stability equations
can be organized into matrix form as
The solution to the ordinary differential
equation can be found in terms of green’s
function. Here, we use the method detailed in
(Cheung and Lele, 2009) where a shooting
where A to E are matrices composed of method was used to obtain the green’s
meanflow quantities. function solution, while the source terms are
While the mean flow quantities ( 𝒒 � ) are evaluated from the near field solutions
obtained from similarity solutions obtained obtained from Linear PSE.
from steady compressible reacting mixing
layers. The PSE is solved on stretched Grid. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
Grid stretching is done in y direction to Here, results from the present LPSE
cluster the grid points to better capture the simulations both with corrected mean flow
shear layer. PSE is solved using a backward and uncorrected meanflow obtained from
implicit first order scheme. And, a norm Day are validated against existing PSE and
based iterative convergence is used to DNS results from Day et.al, (2001). The case
determine α considered for validation is for a non-reacting
mixing layer with parameters M c =0.5, s=1,
r=0.6 and Re o =5000. In figure 2, the
vorticity thickness δ w which governs the
(6)
A tolerance of 10−9 is employed for meanflow evolution in x is plotted, where the
convergence of α. solid-line represents the corrected mean
obtained from Day and dotted-line
LILLEY’S ACOUSTIC ANALOGY corresponds to uncorrected laminar flow. It is
found that the growth of vorticity thickness
(Goldstein, 2001) proposed an exact equation plays a vital role in evolution and sound
that can be derived from NSE that leads to a generation from mixing layers. Initial
third order convective wave equation with a conditions used in the LPSE computations,
simple source term that consists of both obtained from linear stability results are listed
velocity quadrupole and fluctuating in table 1. Reynolds number Re o , real
temperature dipole. We express the Lilley- frequencies (ω) and azimuthal, complex
Goldstein acoustic analogy in terms of wavenumbers β, α, initial amplitudes 𝜖 and
parallel shear flow as initial phase’s 𝜑𝑖 at the inlet of the
fundamental mode are specified. Next, the
(7) integrated disturbance kinetic energy is
computed and its evolution tracked along the
(8) streamwise direction to ascertain how
413
Chary and Samanta
faithfully LPSE is able to capture the modal saturation and eventual evolution of mixing
energy content. layers. In figure 4, the validation of Lilley-
Goldstein analogy (LGE) is presented, where
pressure calculated using LGE method from
sources (LPSE) obtained from corrected
mean (solid-line) is compared with the data
(dash-dot-line) obtained from Cheung.et.al at
y = −14. In the figure we can see the pressure
calculated in the current investigation
matches perfectly with the data obtained. In
our future investigations we propose to use
vorticity thickness which replicates a real
Figure 2. Vorticity thickness variation in x. mixing layer and study effects of heat release
on farfield sound using Lilley Goldstein
analogy.
Table 1. Inlet parameter
REFERENCES
Bertolotti F P and Herbert T 1991 Analysis of
the linear stability of compressible
Figure 3. Modal energy evolution in x boundary layers using the PSE Theor.
Comput. Fluid Dyn 3 117–124.
Brown G and Roshko A 1974 On density
effects and large structure in turbulent
mixing layers Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 64 775.
Cheung L C and Lele S K 2009 Linear and
nonlinear processes in two-dimensional
mixing layer dynamics and sound
radiation J. of Fluid Mechanics 625.
Colonius T Lele S K and Moin P 1997 Sound
Figure 4. Pressure predicted from LGE. generation in a mixing layer Journal of
Fluid Mechanics 330 375–409.
For the fundamental mode, as shown in
figure 3, the integrated energy from LPSE of Day M J Mansour N N and Reynolds W C
corrected meanflow shows excellent 2001 Non-linear stability and structure
agreement with Day’s DNS, while LPSE of compressible reacting mixing layers
from uncorrected meanflow shows good Journal of Fluid Mechanics 446 375.
agreement until (x ≈ 75) when non-linearity Goldstein M E 2001 An exact form of
in DNS starts to correct the mean and plays Lilley’s equation with a velocity
an important role. It is found that saturation quadrupole/temperature dipole source
of the modes plays a vital role in sound term Journal of Fluid Mechanics 443
generation. And, LPSE with a corrected 231–236.
meanflow correctly predicts the point of
Gudmundsson K and Colonius T 2011
saturation correctly as compared to DNS. We
Instability wave models for the near-
can conclude that LPSE with correct
field fluctuations of turbulent jets
meanflow can correctly predict the point of
Journal of Fluid Mechanics 89 97–128.
414
ICCMS2016
HIGH FIDELITY SIMULATION OF FLOW OVER A FLAPPING WING

USING PARALLEL COMPUTING
BOSE C.1*, GUPTA S.1 and SARKAR S.2
1
Department of Applied Mechanics, IIT Madras, Chennai, India.
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Madras, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Numerical simulations of flow over a flapping wing with pitch and plunge
kinematics have been carried out in this research by a finite volume based
incompressible Navier-Stokes solver using parallel computing. The present study
aims to understand the unsteady aerodynamics of the pitching-plunging motion of an
NACA0012 airfoil investigating the transition in the flow topology with increasing
plunge amplitude keeping the pitch amplitude constant. A circular computational
domain has been used with unstructured meshes. Radial basis function (RBF)
interpolation based moving mesh mechanism has been utilized to implement the
motion of the airfoil. The bifurcation analysis with the plunge amplitude (ℎ ) as
thecontrol parameter reveals interesting dynamics in the trailing edge wake pattern.
The transition from periodic to chaotic wake topology with the increase of the control
parameter has been explored with the help of phase averaged vorticity contours,
frequency spectra of aerodynamic loads along with the 𝐶𝑙 - 𝐶𝑑 phase plots. The
studylooks into the parallel performance of OpenFoam package on the present
simulations as well inthe full paper.
Keywords: Flapping wing; Navier-Stokes solver; Unsteady flow field;
Bifurcations; Parallel computing.
INTRODUCTION The large variety of wake patterns can be

categorized into three broad groups as a
In recent years, biologically inspired flapping
function of non-dimensional stroke amplitude
wing micro air vehicles (MAVs) have
(ℎ) and reduced frequency (𝜅). The first one
attracted a lot of research attention due to
is periodic wake pattern, with the average
their immense potential to be used as
wake velocity profile being parallel to a
reconnaissance and surveillance device [Shyy
horizontal mean line. Lai et al. (1999) were
et al. 2010]. The flow field past a flapping
one of the first to observe a variety of such
wing in two dimensions is characterized by
patterns for an oscillating airfoil in plunge.
interesting flow patterns which directly
The wakes were classified as Karman,
influences the aerodynamic performance.
reverse Karman or neutral patterns. More
Flapping wing generates widely different
recently, Lentink et al.(2010) have conducted
vortex patterns in their wake ask in ematic
soap film experiments on a plunging airfoil
parameters vary. The more commonly used
and a variety of wake patterns such as 2P,
parameter is the non-dimensional stroke
P+S, 2P+2S, 2P+S etc. have been reported.
amplitude or the Strouhal number, which is
Here, Prefers to the number of vortex pairs
function of the amplitude and frequency of
shed per cycle and S refers to the number of
oscillation of the wing.
single vortices shed per cycle. Similarly
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:cb.ju.1991@gmail.com 415

Bose et al.
Koochesfahani et al. (1989) have depicted Solver details

different vortical patterns in the trailing edge
wake of a pitching airfoil. In the second The simulations are performed using a finite-
category, the transition involves a deflection volume based CFD solver OpenFOAM®,
of the wake about the mean line but the with the dynamic mesh motion based on RBF
periodicity of the wake pattern is still interpolation. The present solver uses a spatial
retained losing its spatial symmetry. In the discretization with second order accuracy.
third category, the periodicity in the wake is The temporal discretization is carried
lost and a periodic wake transitions to outusing a second order implicit backward
aperiodicity. This has been reported for high differencing scheme along with a variable
values of dynamic plunge velocity (𝑘ℎ) in time stepping based on a maximal Courant
periodic flapping [Mackowski and number. The pressure-velocity coupling is
Williamson 2015]. The present study is achieved through PISO (Pressure implicit
focused to the transition from periodic to with splitting of operator)algorithm. The
aperiodic wake topology in the flow over a convergence criterion for pressure and
wing with both pitch and plunge kinematics velocity is set to 10-6. The whole
varying the non-dimensional plunge computational domain was decomposed to 16
amplitude (ℎ) as the control parameter. The processors by open MPI to reduce the
flow field for higher amplitude of pitch and computational time.
plunge has not yet been studied Computational domain and mesh
systematically computationally. However,
there are only a few instances of In the present study we have considered a
experimental evidence. Hence, there is a circular computational domain as shown
crucial need to build and test a solver in this inFigure.1 (a). The radius of the
regime in order to be able to study the computational domain is taken to be 25c to
dynamics in detail which is not easy with minimize the boundary effects. The circular
expensive experimental techniques. domain is discretized using only unstructured
triangular grids as shown in Figure.1 (b). The
COMPUTATIONAL mesh has been finalized by performing a grid
METHODOLOGY in depend encetest comparing the
Flapping kinematics aerodynamic load (𝐶𝑙 ) using grids of different
resolutions subject to the increased number of
A sinusoidally pitching and plunging NACA gridpoints on the airfoil shown in Figure.1
0012 airfoil in an incompressible flow has (c).
been chosen here for our investigation. The
kinematic equations are given by: a) b)
y(t) = Asin(2πft), ẏ (t) = 2πfAcos(2πft) (1)

α(t) = αsin(2πft), α̇ (t) = 2πfAcos(2πft) (2)
Governing equation
The flow is governed by the incompressible
Navier-Stokes (N-S) equation. The FSI
problem requires a solution over a time c)
varying computational domain. In the present
study, we use the arbitrary Lagrangian
Eulerian (ALE) formulation for solving the
N-S equation on a moving grid. The N-S
equation is cast into ALE form as,
𝛻 .𝑢 ⃗ =0 (3) Figure 1. (a) Computational doman, (b)
𝜕𝑢
⃗ 𝛻𝑝 close-up view of mesh and (c) grid
+ (𝑢 ⃗ 𝑚 ). 𝛻𝑢
⃗ − 𝑢 ⃗ = − + 𝜈 𝛻2𝑢
⃗ (4)
𝜕𝑡 𝜌 convergence
416
High Fidelity Simulation of Flow Over A Pitching-Plunging Wing using Parallel Computing
Flow solver validation confirm the validity of the present solver.

Having validated the unsteady solver, it can
The flow solver has been validated beeffectively used to vary the dynamics in
qualitatively for pure pitching kinematics by the higher amplitde regime as well.
comparing the vortical contours with the
LDV measurements performed by RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
Koochesfahani (1989) for k = 0.84 and A = 4 After validating the solver, the unsteady flow
deg as shown in the Figure. 2(a).The trailing field has been explored by varying the plunge
wake patterns obtained from the present amplitude as the bifurcation parameter at a
computation is in good agreement with the
fixed frequency (𝜅 = 2) and at 𝑅𝑒 = 1000.
dye flow visualization. The solver is
The parametric analysis for ℎ = 0.5,
validated quantitatively by comparing the
0.0851 & 1.25 has revealed a qualitative
thrust coefficients obtained from the present
change from periodic to chaotic wake
computations with that of obtained by the
topology as the amplitude has been increased.
experimental measurements by
Koochesfahani (1989) and Williamson et al. h = 0.5
(2015) for a pitching airfoil with kinematic
parameters A = 2 deg, 0 < k < 14 and Re =
12000 as shown in Figure. 2(b). The
computational results agrees reasonably well
with the direct force measurements by a
three-axis force/torque
h = 0.851
a)
h = 1.25
b)
Figure 3. Flow topology for different ℎ at
t/T = 25
The near field vorticity contours for ℎ = 0.5,
0.0851 & 1.25 at 25th cycle has been
presented in Figure.3. The frequency spectra
and the 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase portraits for different ℎ
are shown in Figure. 4 and Figure. 5
respectively. At ℎ = 0.5 the wake topology is
periodic which dictates the aerodynamic
loads also to be periodic. The presence of a
Figure 2. Validation of flow solver
dominant frequency and their harmonics in
Sensor as obtained by Williamson et al. the frequency spectra confirms the
(2015) for moderate to high values of periodicity as shown in Figure. 4. Hence a
reduced frequencies. However, for lower clean 1-dimensional attractor has been
values of reduced frequencies all three observed in the 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase portrait as
measurements corroborate each other which shown in Figure. 5(a). Howeverat ℎ = 0.851
417
Bose et al.
the flow field is no more periodic. A toroidal the computation time. The periodic flow field
structure is observed in the 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase and the chaotic flow field has been
portrait in Figure. 5(b) along with addition of categorized by the help of phase averaged
new frequencies in the frequency spectra as vorticity field, frequency spectra and 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑
shown in Figure. 4. At 𝒉 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 the flow phase portraits.
topology became completely chaotic which is
confirmed through a chaotic 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase REFERENCES
portrait along with broadband frequency Shyy W Aono H Chimakurthi S K Trizila
spectra as shown in Figure. 5. Kang C K Cesnik C E S & Liu H
Phase averaged flow-field images are 2010Recent progress in flapping wing
presented to identify periodic and chaotic aerodynamics and aeroelasticity Progress
wake topology in Figure.6. The crisp pattern in Aerospace Sciences 46284-327.
represents periodicity at ℎ = 0.5 whereas it Lai J C S & Platzer M F 1999Jet
gets blurry in the chaotic regime at ℎ = 1.25. Characteristics of a Plunging AirfoilAIAA
The phase averaged vorticity field at ℎ = journal 37No. 12.
0.851is neither as crisp as the periodic phase Lentink Van Heijst GertJan F Muijres
nor as blurry as the chaoticphase which Florian T & Van Leeuwen Johan L
denotes the transition phase. 2010Vortex interactions with flapping
wings and fins can be
CONCLUSIONS unpredictableBiology letters p. rsbl
The high fidelity viscous incompressible N-S 20090806.
solver, used in the present study, is able to Koochesfahani M M 1989 Vortical patterns
capture the near field flow topology along in the wake of an oscillating airfoilAIAA
with the leading edge separation over the journal 27(9)1200-1205.
pitching-plunging wing. Transition of the Mackowski A W Williamson C H K 2015
trailing edge wake topology from periodic to Direct measurement of thrust and
chaotic wake pattern has been investigated in efficiency of an airfoil undergoing pure
the present paper. Parallel computing pitching Journal of Fluid Mechanics
techniques have been implemented to reduce 765524-543.
h = 0.5
h = 1.25
Figure 4. Frequency spectra of 𝐶𝑙
h = 0.851
(a) ℎ = 0.5(b)ℎ = 0.851(c)ℎ = 1.25

Figure 6. Phase averaged vorticity
Figure 5. 𝐶𝑙 − 𝐶𝑑 phase portrait field
418
ICCMS2016
REDUCTION OF SECONDARY FLOW LOSSES IN LINEAR TURBINE

CASCADE BY BOUNDARY LAYER FENCE
KIRAN K. N. and ANISH. S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology Karnataka, Surathkal,
Mangalore, India.
Abstract: It is well known that secondary flow loses account about one third of the
total loss in any axial turbine. Modern gas turbine height is smaller and have longer
chord length, which might lead to increase in secondary flow. In order to improve the
efficiency of the turbine, it is important to understand the behaviour of secondary flow
and device mechanisms to curtail these losses. The objective of the present work is to
understand the effect of a stream wise end-wall fence on the aerodynamics of a linear
turbine cascade. The study is carried out computationally by using commercial
software ANSYS CFX. The effect of end-wall on the flow field are calculated based
on RANS simulation by using SST transition turbulence model. Durham cascade
which is similar to high-pressure axial flow turbine for simulation is used. The aim of
fencing in blade passage is to get the maximum benefit from flow deviation and
destroying the passage vortex in terms of loss reduction. It is observed that, for the
present analysis, fence in the blade passage helps reducing the strength of horseshoe
vortex and is capable of restraining the flow along the blade passage. Fence in the
blade passage helps in reducing the under turning by 70 in comparison with base case.
Fence on end-wall is effective in preventing the movement of pressure side leg of
horseshoe vortex and helps in breaking the passage vortex. Computations are carried
for different fence height whose curvature is different from the blade camber. The
optimum fence geometry and location reduces the loss coefficient by 15.6% in
comparison with base case.
Keywords: Boundary layer fence; Horseshoe vortex; Linear cascade; Passage
vortex; Secondary flow.
INTRODUCTION curtail these losses. Secondary loss is three-

dimensional in nature due to the vortical flow
Decrease in the fossil fuel over recent years
structure in the blade passage. Especially gas
motivates on efficiency improvement by
turbine blade with high camber exhibits flow
decreasing the loss. It is stated that 0.1%
separation and vorticial structure in the flow.
improvement in specific fuel consumption
was worth around $22k a year on a Boeing Secondary flow is always transverse to the
747 [Rose, 1994]. primary flow caused due to the cross passage
pressure gradient in the boundary layer in the
In any gas turbine about one third of the total
blade passage [Kumar and Govardhan, 2011;
losses is attributed to secondary flow losses.
Brachmanski et. al., 2014; Denton, 1993;
It is therefore very essential to understand the
Langston, 2001]. The detailed description of
underlying physics and device mechanics to
*Author for correspondence: E-mail: kirankn24@gmail.com 419

Kiran and Anish
experimental secondary flows feature and The investigation was carried out for four
effect of boundary layer in a straight turbine different fence height named for convenience
cascade are given by Sieverding, (1985). as shown in Table 1.
Germain et. al., (2007) defines the secondary
flow as an additional flow feature due to the Details of Fence Height
presence of end walls, so it is important to
analyze the end wall. The detailed description SL. no Case no. Fence Height
of secondary flow in the boundary layer and
1 Case-0 (base case) 0 mm
its three-dimensional nature is presented
experimentally in Govardhan and Maharia, 2 Case-1 10 mm
(2012). 3 Case-2 20 mm
4 Case-3 30 mm
NUMERICAL PROCEDURE 5 Case-4 40 mm
The Durham cascade is a low speed, large mm = millimeter.
scale linear cascade for a high pressure rotor
ANSYS-CFX was used for computational
design. The blades are designed to have an
simulation in current study with transition
aerodynamic similarity same as real
SST k-ω model to model the turbulence. The
machines rather than geometrical similarity.
transition SST k-ω turbulence model was
The Durham cascade has already been
found to be most suitable for analysis of
subjected to numerous study on end wall
secondary flows [Kumar and Govardhan,
contouring and filleting the leading edge
2011; Dunn, 2009]. The transition SST model
[Mank et. al., 2014; Harvey et. al., 1999]. In
is based on standard SST k-ω equation with
this study, an attempt is made by
fully turbulence. The inlet boundary
incorporating the unique geometry of fence in
condition is velocity of 19.1 m/s along the
the Durham cascade.
flow direction, turbulence intensity of 5%
DESIGN STUDY and static temperature of 292.15 K. At the
outlet ambient conditions and the symmetric
Domain consists of single blade which is boundary conditions at mid-span was
placed exactly at one pitch distance and fence specified. All the walls are given as no slip
is positioned at fixed distance from the blade condition and adiabatic boundary condition.
camber line as shown on Figure 1. The current study was done using air as
working fluid on single blade passage with
translational periodic boundary condition at
one pitch length on either sides. High
resolution discretization scheme was chosen
for all calculations and convergence criteria
is set to 10-6 for all variables.
Figure 1. Typical Computational domain RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

with blade and fence
In the current study, computational
Fence is exactly half the pitch from the blade investigations of secondary flows in a linear
camber line and curvature of fence do not turbine cascade are presented. Detailed
follow the blade camber towards the leading analyses of losses with fence and without
edge of blade. Modified fence starts from fence are carried out. The primary objective
11% Cax move straight along axial direction is to understand the effect of fence on the
up to 42% Cax. From 42% Cax fence curvature secondary flow losses. The loss coefficients
flow same as blade camber curvature till the are evaluated from the mid-span of blade to
trailing edge. Thickness of the fence is hub wall. The pitch mass averaged total
2.5mm from leading edge to trailing edge. pressure loss coefficient along the span of
420
Reduction of Secondary Flow Losses in Linear Turbine Cascade by Boundary Layer Fence
blade at 128% axial chord (Cax) is calculated The variation of mass averaged total pressure
for all the cases. The pitch mass averaged loss coefficient (𝐶̿̿̿̿̿
𝑃0 ) through the measuring
total pressure loss coefficient ( 𝐶 ̅̅̅̅̅
𝑃0 ) is planes from 50% axial chord (Cax) to 150%
calculated from the Eq. (1), Cax is shown in Figure 3. The trailing edge of
∫ 𝑉𝑢 𝜉𝑑𝑇 blade is 100% Cax. The variation of ̿̿̿̿̿ 𝐶𝑃0
̅̅̅̅̅
𝐶 𝑃0 = (1) along the axial direction is qualitatively
∫ 𝑉𝑢 𝑑𝑇
similar for all the computations. It was also
Where, 𝜉(zeta) is
observed that ̿̿̿̿̿
𝐶𝑃0 increases almost linearly
𝑃01 − 𝑃0 after the trailing edge of blade for the base
𝜉= (2)
𝜌𝑉12⁄ case.
2
The numerical solution for the pitch mass EFFECT OF UNDERTURNING AND
averaged total pressure loss coefficient for OVER TURNING
four different fence height in comparison
with the base case are shown in Figure 2. The The pitch mass averaged exit flow angle is
coefficient of pressure losses is more near the calculated from Eq. (3),
end wall for fence cases in comparison with 𝑉̅𝑣
base case. It is observed that the value of loss 𝛼̅ = 𝑇𝑎𝑛−1 ( ) (3)
𝑉̅𝑢
coefficients rapidly decreases from the end -55
wall up to a span of 40 mm. There is a slight
Pitchwise mass averaged exit flow
-60
increase in the value of loss coefficient from
40 mm to 70 mm for all fence cases except -65
angle in deg.
for case-1 (10 mm fence height. -70
1.2 -75 Case-0

Case-1
Case-0 Case-2
1.0 -80
Case-1 Case-3
Pitchwise total presure loss
Case-2 Case-4
-85
0.8 Case-3 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Case-4
Span (S) in mm
coefficient
0.6
Figure 4. Pitchwise averaged exit flow
0.4 angle along the span
0.2
As the pressure leg of horseshoe vortex
0.0
moves towards the suction side of blade in
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Span (S) in mm the blade passage merges with counter
rotating vortex and forms a passage vortex.
Figure 2. Pitchwise mass averaged total This results in a change in the flow angle and
̅̅̅̅̅
pressure loss coefficient (𝐶 𝑃0 ) along the work output. This turning of the fluid is to
span of blade at 128% Cax. balance the static pressure gradient and
0.30
Case-0
centrifugal force. To maintain the radial
Mass Averaged Total Pressure
0.25
Case-1 equilibrium, the flow near the mid span is
Case-2
considered to be two-dimensional with
Loss coefficient
Case-3
Case-4
0.20 stream wise and tangential pressure gradient.
0.15
CONCLUSION
0.10
The conclusions are based on the present
0.05
investigations on the effect of modified fence
60 80 100
Percentage Axial Chord
120 140
leading edge and fence height on the
secondary flow losses are.
Figure 3. Mass averaged total pressure
̿̿̿̿̿ 1. Modified leading edge of fence is
loss coefficient (𝐶 𝑃0 ) along axial
successful in breaking down the
direction.
421
Kiran and Anish
horseshoe vortex in the blade passage. Computational Aerothermodynamics of

Internal Flows Lyon.
2. The magnitude of total pressure loss
coefficient and spanwise penetration of Govardhan M and Maharia P K 2012
passage vortex is reduced by 15.63% for Improvement of Turbine Performance
the optimum fence in comparison with by Streamwise Boundary Layer Fences
the base case. Journal of Applied Fluid Mechanics
3. By the influence of fence, the intensity of 5(3) 113-118.
passage vortex is diminished in the Harvey N W Rose M G Taylor M D Shahpar
downstream of blade. S Hartland J and Gregory-Smith D G
4. The flow overturning displaces the 1999 Non-Axisymmetric Turbine End
underturning peak towards the end wall, Wall Design: Part I—Three-
results in no turning of flow away from Dimensional Linear Design System.
the endwall. In ASME 1999 International Gas
Turbine and Aeroengine Congress and
5. The spanwise penetration of vortex core Exhibition (pp. V001T03A049-
is reduced which is witnessed in the V001T03A049).
CSKE value.
Kumar K N and Govardhan M 2011
6. Fence is effective in preventing the cross Secondary flow loss reduction in a
flow and weakening the vortices near the turbine cascade with a linearly varied
end wall is observed in 3D streamlines. height streamwise endwall
fence.International Journal of Rotating
REFERENCES Machinery 2011.
Acharya S and Mahmood G I 2006 Turbine Langston L S 2001 Secondary flows in axial
Blade Aerodynamics The Gas Turbine turbines—a review Annals of the New
Handbook 1. York Academy of Sciences 934(1) 11-26.
Brachmanski R E Niehuis R and Bosco A Mank S Duerrwaechter L Hilfer M Williams
2014 Investigation of a Separated R Hogg S and Ingram G 2014
Boundary Layer and its Influence on Secondary Flows and Fillet Radii in a
Secondary Flow of a Transonic Turbine Linear Turbine Cascade In ASME Turbo
Profile In ASME Turbo Expo 2014: Expo 2014: Turbine Technical
Turbine Technical Conference and Conference and Exposition (pp.
Exposition (pp. V02CT38A022- V02CT38A011-V02CT38A011).
V02CT38A022).
Rose M G 1994 Non-axisymmetric endwall
Denton J D 1993 Loss mechanisms in profiling in the HP NGV’s of an axial
turbomachines In ASME 1993 flow gas turbine. In ASME 1994
International Gas Turbine and International Gas Turbine and
Aeroengine Congress and Exposition Aeroengine Congress and Exposition
(pp. V002T14A001-V002T14A001). (pp. V001T01A090-V001T01A090).
Dunn D Snedden G C and Von Backström T Sieverding C H 1985 Recent progress in the
W 2009 Turbulence model comparisons understanding of basic aspects of
for a low pressure 1.5 stage test turbine. secondary flows in turbine blade
Germain T Nagel M and Baier R D 2007 passages Journal of Engineering for
Visualisation and Quantification of Gas Turbines and Power 107(2) 248-
Secondary Flows: Application to 257.
Turbine Bladings with 3D-Endwalls.
In Paper ISAIF8-0098, Proc. of the 8th
Int. Symposium on Experimental and
422
ICCMS2016
3D COUPLEDCFD-FEA DYNAMIC STALL ANALYSIS OF 5 MW NREL

WIND TURBINE BASELINE ROTOR
FATIMA N. and GOPAL K.V.N
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Madras, Chennai.
Abstract: Dynamic stall is a complex aerodynamic phenomenon that occurs from the
unsteady flow around horizontal axis wind turbines resulting in amplified
aerodynamic loads and severe blade stresses. Numerical methods are computationally
expensive but can model the flow physics during dynamic stall more accurately and
overcome the limitations of many existing semi-empirical and analytical models. In
the present study Large Eddy Simulation (LES) based CFD approach together with a
sliding mesh technique was implemented to accurately model the unsteady
aerodynamics around a large flexible blade of a 3-bladed rotor. The 5 MW NREL
wind turbine’s baseline rotor was used to develop the detailed geometric and
structural models. The influence of various factors like transient wind shear, unsteady
wake behaviour and blade flexibility on the complex flow physics during 3D dynamic
stall has been studied. Factors like wake turbulence and blade oscillations amplify the
unsteady effects leading to dynamic aero-elastic instabilities like flutter and cause the
blades to fracture. The influence of blade flexibility was studied by comparing the
results from uncoupled CFD simulations with those from coupled fluid-structure-
interaction (FSI) simulations. Simulations using 3D models are important for accurate
estimation of fatigue life and determining the structural dynamic response of the
turbine blades.
Keywords: Large eddy simulation; Sliding Mesh Technique; Wake turbulence;
Fluid Structural Interaction.
INTRODUCTION blades can result in phenomenon like

The quest to generate greater wind power at dynamic stall which has an adverse effect on
lower per unit cost has led manufacturers to the turbine performance and can seriously
build huge wind turbines with rotor diameters damage the rotor blades.
exceeding 100 m. The design and operation Dynamic stall has been highly studied by
of these huge blades bring many challenges researchers over the years but still
in the form of complex three dimensional insufficiently understood. Many 2-D semi-
unsteady flow fields around extremely empirical flow models [Früh et.al, 2014] have
flexible blades and the effect on aero- been proposed and used for engineering
elasticity of the structure. The unsteady flow analysis of dynamic stall. However,
fields arising from rapid variations in the analytical methods are not capable of
flow incidence angle around the rotating capturing the inherent instabilities and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:nisarfatimaaeroengr@gmail.com; 423

Fatima and Gopal
interference effects in 3-D flows. Extensive three dimensional computational domain as

numerical studies have been carried out using shown in figure 1 is a cylindrical area of
2-D computational fluid dynamics (CFD) diameter twice the height of the baseline
codes and very precisely validated using rotor extending about two diameters
experimental investigations (Khalid et.al, upstream, to allow the turbulence to develop
2013) to serve as benchmark for evaluation fully before encountering the wind turbine
of wind turbine aerodynamic computer codes. rotor. To accurately establish the near wake
study, the length of the domain extends to
Very few 3-D studies are reported in
about four times the diameter downstream.
literature [Mo et.al, 2013]. It is well known
The turbine rotor rotates about the positive x
from earlier studies [Sezer et.al, 2006] that
axis with the incoming flow directed along
Large Eddy Simulation (LES) based CFD
the positive x-axis. The wind shear effects are
models are computationally intensive but
included in the definition of the inlet
simulate the flow physics with much greater
conditions.
accuracy than RANS based models.
Therefore, while RANS based CFD
simulations might be sufficient for an
engineering analysis, precise modelling of the
complex flow physics during 3D dynamic
stall in wind turbine blades requires the use
of the computationally intensive LES
approach. The large wind turbine blades are
extremely flexible and undergo large
displacements. This continuously modifies
the rapidly varying flow incidence angle and
Figure 1. Computational domain extents
can significantly alter the aerodynamic forces
around the rotating blades. It is important to
Mesh Strategies and requirementsThe
understand the effect of flexibility on the
unstructured grid for the domain was
flow behaviour. Effects like transient wind
generated in ANSYS ICEM CFD and an
shear and wake behaviour can also have an
extensive grid independence study was
effect on the dynamic stall behaviour of the
performed using FLUENT solver.
blade and can be studied in the numerical
Approximately 12 million elements have
model.
been adopted for meeting the LES
computational accuracy requirements.
METHODOLOGY
Transition from shell triads on surface of the
Computational Methods: The numerical rotor blade to volume tetrahedrons in the
simulations were carried out on a geometric fluid domain is achieved gradually using 25
model of the NREL 5MW wind turbine layers of prism elements as dictated by figure
baseline rotor using ANSYS Fluent® 2. Prism elements are used in order to capture
software. The baseline rotor is about 126m in precisely the near wall effects and gradients
diameter. The WALE sub grid LES of pressure and velocity parameters around
turbulence model is used for simulations. The the blades.
424
3D CFD-FEA coupled dynamic stall analysis of 5 MW NREL wind turbine baseline rotor
Figure 2.Transition from shell mesh to Figure 3. Dynamic stall formation at x/D=0
volume mesh using transition elements (at t = 0.65s)
RESULTS The pressure and the velocity contours at two

The numerical simulations are carried out in different radial locations of blades are also
ANSYS FLUENT®. Initially, the steady plotted for the time interval of 0.065s as
computations were carried out for shown in the figures 4 and 5 below.
approximately 1000 iterations to make the
flow fully developed. These results were used
as initial conditions for unsteady
computations using sliding mesh technique
and LES WALE turbulence model.
Preliminary results are shown for the inlet
vertical velocity profile with mean velocity of
12m/s including wind shear effects. The
regions of primary interest are sections at
60% to 90% of the blade span as they are
more prone to stall because of the lift
coefficient. This is clearly depicted in figure
3, in which the complete development of
dynamic stall can be seen at sectional plane
x/D=0 in the domain. The set of simulations
covered the physics of the entire flow field Figure 2. Velocity profiles at r/R = 0.6 and
corresponding to the variations in vertical r/R = 0.7
profile with the mean velocity variations at
hub height to capture the time variations of
events occurring during three dimensional
dynamic stall phenomenon.
425
Fatima and Gopal
REFERENCES
Früh W G Angus C W Creech and A Eoghan
M 2014 Turbulence Characteristics in
Offshore Wind Farms from LES
Simulations of Lillgrund Wind Farm
Energy Procedia 59 182–189 ISSN
18766102.
Khalid S Liang Z Xue-wei Z and Ke Sun
2013 Three-Dimensional Numerical
Simulation of a Vertical Axis Tidal
Turbine Using the Two-Way Fluid
Structure Interaction Approach Journal
of Zhejiang University SCIENCE A
14(8) 574–582.
Mo Jang-Oh Amanullah C Maziar A and
Young-Ho Lee 2013 Large Eddy
Simulation of the Wind Turbine Wake
Figure 3.Pressure contours at r/R=0.6 and Characteristics in the Numerical Wind
r/R=0.7 Tunnel Model Journal of Wind
Engineering and Industrial
CONCLUSION Aerodynamics 112 11–24.
Sezer-U N and Lyle N L 2006 3-D Time-
The effect of dynamic stall formation on Accurate CFD Simulations of Wind
aerodynamic performance of the blades in Turbine Rotor Flow Fields AIAA Paper
terms of the variation of coefficient of lift with 394 0394.
time is of paramount importance for aero-
elastic analysis of wind turbine blades and is
also obtained through CFD-FEA numerical
simulations. Near wake flow is captured in
terms of the variations in flow parameters like
velocity magnitude, pressure distribution,
vorticity magnitude and turbulence intensities
at various downstream slices of the domain to
have a complete outlook of intensive near
wake development aft of rotor in case of
dynamic stall formation on the rotor. Hence,
intensive two way CFD-FEA numerical
investigation also serves to add literature in the
development of near wake models of wind
turbines useful for capturing turbine-turbine
interaction effects.
426
ICCMS2016
COUPLED FLUID-STRUCTURE ANALYSIS OF INLET DISTORTION

MEASURING RAKE FOR FIGHTER AIRCRAFT
VASHISTHA R. and GOGOI A.*
Aeronautical Development Agency, Bangalore, India
Abstract: The flow inside the intake of fighter aircraft is extremely complex. Due to
intake curvature and flight manoeuvres, flow at the exit of the intake becomes highly
distorted. This distorted flow adversely affects the operation of the aero-engine. Thus,
knowledge of flow distortion is essential for estimation of safe engine operating
envelope. Flow distortion at engine inlet can be measured by rake comprising of
multiple probes. However, in case of failure of rake structure, the rakeparts may get
ingested into the engine causing serious engine failure. In the present study, a fully-
coupled fluid-structure interaction study is carried out to determine the transient
loading behaviour of a rake designed for a fighter aircraft. The transient loads are used
to estimate the stress, strain and structure energy distribution. This data is used to
perform the fatigue analysis and the rake is found to be structurally acceptable.
Keywords: Pressure measuring rake; Coupled Fluid Structure analysis; Fatigue
analysis; Structural analysis; CFD analysis.
INTRODUCTION the rake. The transient loads are used to

estimate the stress, strain and structure
Gas turbine engine inlet pressure distortion
energy distribution. This data is used to
and inlet total pressure are important
perform the fatigue analysis.
parameters defining engine performance
[Frederick and Ratnayake, 2010]. Accurate
NUMERICAL MODEL
in-flight measurement of these parameters
enables better engine performance estimation A digital model of the rake is created and is
in terms of thrust and engine pressure ratio. A assembled in the intake duct of a generic
total pressure measurement rake is a proven aircraft. The rake is shown in figure 1. The
method of measuring inflight engine inlet rake comprise of eight arms on which sensors
total pressure and inflight pressure distortion are mounted for measuring pressure. The
at aerodynamic interface plane. There is risk rake arms are made up of symmetric and
involved in placement of pressure rake for subsonic NACA aerofoils. The duct is
inflight measurement of total pressure. In considered as the flow field and flow mesh is
case of failure in rake structure, the rake may generated in the duct. A corresponding
get ingested into the engine, resulting into structural mesh is generated on the rake.
serious engine breakdown. It is observed that ANSYS® Workbench™ CFX® and
the failure of the rake may not happen due to ANSYS® Mechanical were used for the 2
static loads. The rake is more prone to failure way coupling under ANSYS® multi-field
due to fatigue. In the present study, a Fluid- analysis mode.
Structure interaction study is carried out to
determine the transient loading behaviour of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: gogoi@jetmail.ada.gov.in 427

Vashistha and Gogoi
Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model is adopted

for turbulence closure.
Figure 1. Rake Geometry

A monitor point placed ahead of nose cone of
rake was used to obtain the data Figure 3. Cut section View of Mesh
corresponding to flow Mach number for the
transient analysis. The transient analysis was RESULTS
performed for a total duration of 0.1 sec. with A fully coupled Fluid structure interaction
an adaptive time step approach. The structure analysis is carried out. Figure 4 shows the
mesh was created using ANSYS® APDL contour plots for CFD analysis. Figure
meshing tools. The mesh consists of 3D brick 5shows the plots for structure analysis. The
elements. The boundary region of CFD mesh wake due to mixing of the right and left
contains 7 layers. The CFD mesh is generated intake duct can be seen in figure 3. Also, it is
using Altair® Hypermesh TM CFD Tetra observed that the rake does not create any
mesh generator. flow distortion. Presence of rake have
resulted into flow stabilization and
streamlining.
The structural analysis shows the maximum
directional deformation in z-axis as 0.046
mm. The maximum von Mises equivalent
stress observed is 24 MPa. The maximum
fatigue biaxiality indication observed is 0.995
Figure 2. CFD Mesh in the nose cone region of the rake. The
Figure 2 and 3 shows the CFD mesh and its fatigue analysis shows sufficient fatigue
cut section. The mesh contains tetrahedral safety factor in the rake structure. The
elements. The elements are clustered towards minimum fatigue safety factor of 6 is
the wall for boundary layer resolution. Inlet observed at the tip and hub of the prongs at
total pressure and temperature are taken as the leading and trailing edges. The maximum
101325 Pa and 288.15 K. Upwind advection strain energy observed is 769 µJ. A
scheme is used along with second order maximum total deformation of 0.046 mm is
backward Euler transient scheme. The observed at the nose cone of the rake.
428
Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis of Inlet Distortion Measuring Rake for Fighter Aircraft
Total Pressure Contour Plot at Total Pressure Contour Plot at

Station 1 Station 2
Total Pressure Contour Plot at Total Pressure Contour Plot at

Station 3 Station 4
Total Pressure Contour Plot at Velocity Contour Plot at Duct Cut

Station 5 Section
Figure 4. Results of coupled CFD simulation
429
Vashistha and Gogoi
Directional Deformation Z axis Equivalent Stress
Equivalent Alternating Stress Biaxiliaty indicatior
Safety factor strain energy
Total Deformation
Figure 5: Result of coupled structural simulation
430
Coupled Fluid-Structure Analysis of Inlet Distortion Measuring Rake for Fighter Aircraft
CONCLUSION
A fully-coupled fluid-structure analysis is
carried out for a rake of a fighter aircraft. The
complex flow in the intake ahead of the rake
is well captured. The analysis shows that the
present design of rake has enough design
margins in terms of fatigue mode of failure
and the maximum stress observed is within
the elastic limit of the material. The design is
safe to operate.
REFERENCES
Corda S and Vachon M J 2005 The F-15B
Propulsion Flight Test Fixture: A New
Flight Facility for Propulsion Research.
NASA/TM 2001-210395.
Flynn D C Ratnayake N A and Frederick M
2009 Design and Calibration of a
Flowfield Survey Rake for Inlet
FlightResearch AIAA-148
Frederick M A Ratnayake N A 2010 Flight
Test Results from the Rake Airflow
Gage Experiment on the F-15B
Airplane 28th AIAA Applied
Aerodynamics Conference 28 June -1
July 2010 Chicago Illinois.
Yuhas J A Ray R J Burley R R Steenken W
G Lechtenberg L and Thornton D 1995
Design and Development of an F/A-18
Inlet Distortion Rake: A Cost and Time
Saving Solution NASA Technical
Memorandum 4722
431
ICCMS2016
INVESTIGATION OF VIBRATION TRANSMISSION IN CANTILEVERED

STRUCTURES SUBMERGED IN FLUID CONSIDERING FLUID-
STRUCTURE INTERACTION
SUMATHI V*, JALALDEEN S, SELVARAJ P. and MURUGAN S
Indira Gandhi Centre for Atomic Research Kalpakkam, India
Abstract: Dynamic Interactions between an elastic structure and surrounding fluid

medium which are cantilevered and partially or fully immersed are investigated. It is
assumed that the cantilevered structures are fixed at one end and an ideal fluid is
surrounding the structures in a rigid rectangular container. The phenomenon of Fluid-
Structure Interaction (FSI) is of importance in investigating the vibration transmission
from one structure to the adjacent with and without consideration of an intermediate
structure between them. The cantilevered structure considered here includes both shell
and solid with the plate as an intermediate. Numerical simulation is done using Finite
Element Method in CASTEM. Vibration transmission between the structures with
resonant frequencies is also studied. The parametric study includes the shape of cross
section of the structure, distance between them, thickness of the intermediate plate,
variation of materials of the structure, with and without damping etc. This study aims
towards Fast Reactor Design and analysis.
Keywords: Cantilever; FSI; Vibration; CASTEM
INTRODUCTION Structure Interaction (FSI). Strong fluid

structure interaction phenomena results when
Solid and Shell structures partially or fully
the fluid force on a structure induces a
immersed in a fluid medium have wide
significant response which in turn alters the
applications in areas such as Aeronautical
fluid force.
Industries, Ship building Industries and most
importantly in the components of Nuclear The transmission of vibration between
power plants. It is therefore important to study structures considering Fluid-Structure
the dynamic behavior of the structures Interaction (FSI) is studied where the
immersed in a fluid, when they are subjected to displacement of the structure in the fluid
sudden loadings like pressure and seismic medium is investigated from one to the
loadings. As the structures are fully or partially adjacent through fluid and structure at sonic
immersed in the fluid medium, the fluid around velocities. Simulation cases coded in
a structure can significantly alter the structure’s CASTEM is run for with and without damping
vibrational characteristics and the structure in cases. The shapes of cross section of the
turn will affect the fluid medium. This study cantilevered structures are varied as square,
which includes the effect of fluid on structure rectangular and circular structures. The
and the resulting effect imposed by the materials of the structures chosen are Steel and
structure on the fluid is referred to as Fluid- Aluminium. The natural frequency, sonic
________________________________
*Author for correspondence: Email: vsumathi@igcar.gov.in 432

Sumathi et al.
velocities and the damping values are varied Simulation parameter details are as follows:
and fed in the code. Fluid: Water
The simulation done can be further simulated Tank Dimensions: (1000x1000x2000) mm
to investigate transmission of vibration of
reactor components in Fast Breeder Reactor Input force for Solid: 10000 N
(FBR) system for the components like Input force for Shell: 1000 N
Intermediate Heat Exchanger (IHX), Inner
Vessel, and Sub-assemblies during transient Input frequency=1Hz
load conditions.
Table 1. Dimensions for Simulation cases

Thickness of
Case Dimension of source structure Dimension of adjacent structure Intermediate
structure
1 Square rod (50x50x1250) mm Square rod (50x50x1500) mm -
2 Square shell (50x50x1250) mm Square shell (50x50x1500) mm -
3 Cylindrical rod Cylindrical rod 3 mm

(dia=50mm, height=1500mm) (dia=50mm, height=1000mm)
4 Cylindrical shell Cylindrical shell 3 mm

(dia=50mm, height=1500mm) (dia=50mm, height=1000mm)
SIMULATION MODEL
Figure 1 Model of cantilever structures Figure 2 Model of cantilever structures

without intermediate plate with intermediate plate
433
Investigation of Vibration Transmission in Cantilevered Structures Submerged in Fluid Considering Fluid-
Structure Interaction
Figure 3 Case 1: Solid structures inside Figure 4 Case 2: Shell structures inside
fluid fluid
Figure 5 Case 3: Solid structures inside Figure 6 Case 4: Shell structures inside
fluid fluid
factors i.e., the fluid properties, presence of

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION intermediate structures, type of materials etc.
From the above study, it is found that Fluid Here the considered cases for transmission of
Structure Interaction (FSI) is important in the vibration includes solid to solid and shell to
case of transfer of vibration from one shell structures with and without
structure to another structure. It also shows consideration of an intermediate structure
that the phenomenon depends on many between them.
Table 2. Results of Simulation cases

Transmissibility ratio Transmissibility ratio
Input force
Case Material without intermediate with intermediate
(N)
plate plate
1 Steel (solid) 10000 1/100 1/10000
2 Steel (shell) 1000 1/100 1/1000
1 Aluminium(solid) 10000 1/10 1/1000
2 Aluminium(shell) 1000 1/10 1/1000
434
Sumathi et al.
CONCLUSION transmissibility ratio shows that the ratio of

transmission of vibration from the source
structure to the adjacent structure is reduced by
the presence of intermediate plate and it also
depends upon the thickness of the intermediate
plate considered. Also the transmission in steel
is less compared to Aluminium and solid
structures have less transmissibility ratio
compared to the shell structures. Static fluid to
be considered for simulation also affects the
transmissibility ratio. Experimental validation
of the same is being done for the above cases.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors are greatly thankful to the support
and motivation by Dr. S.A.V Satya Murty,
Director, IGCAR.
Figure 7 The displacement on adjacent
structure vs time for case 1 (Steel) without REFERENCES
intermediate plate Fu Y and Price W G 1987 Interactions between
a partially or totally immersed vibrating
cantilever plate and the surrounding
fluid. Journal of Sound and Vibration
118 495–513
Kerboua A Y et al. 2008 Vibration analysis of
rectangular plates coupled with fluid,
Journal of Applied Mathematical
Modelling. 32 2570–2586.
Lindholm U S et.al. 1965 Elastic vibration
characteristics of cantilever plates in
water. Journal of Ship Research 9 11-22.
Muthuveerappan G et al. 1979 A note on
vibration of a cantilever plate immersed
Figure 8 the displacement on adjacent in water Journal of Sound and Vibration
structure vs time for case 1(Steel) with 63 385–391, 539–555
intermediate plate
Figure 7 and figure 8 shows the displacement

of the adjacent structure due to vibration
transmission by a sinusoidal input to the source
structure. Also from the Table 2, the
435
ICCMS2016
FLUID-FILM DEPENDENT ADDED MASS AND ADDED DAMPING FOR

PARALLEL PLATES
VERMA G.*1, ESWARAN M.2, SENGUPTA S.1, RAM REDDY G.2, MAMMEN S.1 and
BHATTACHARYA S.1
1
RRDPD, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India
2
RSD, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Parallel plate-type fuel assemblies are often used in nuclear research
reactors where power density is more. In these reactors, the fuel assemblies are held
very close to each other to achieve high neutron flux. The present paper discusses the
development of a methodology to establish parameters like added mass coefficient
(C m ) and added damping coefficient (C v ) for fluid film between two parallel plates.
Experiments are carried out to investigate the dynamic characteristics of cantilevered
parallel plates immersed in water. Coupled-fluid-plate numerical simulations are
performed and the results are validated through experiments. It is observed that added
damping and mass parameters are dependent on fluid film thickness
Keywords: Parallel plates; Fluid film thickness; Squeezing effect; Added mass;
Added damping.
INTRODUCTION present work investigates the effect of the

In nuclear research reactors, parallel plate- thin fluid film on the vibration behaviour of a
type fuel assemblies (Figure 1) are widely submerged flexible plate kept in close
used to achieve high neutron flux for isotope proximity to another plate. For this, double
production, material irradiation and basic plate systems are placed in such a way that
science studies. This is achieved by keeping a the plates are parallel to each other similar to
narrow gap (about 3~5 mm) between the fuel that of fuel assemblies and then the added
assemblies. The fluid film present in these mass coefficient (C m ) and the added damping
gaps alters the dynamic behaviour of the fuel coefficient (C v ) are estimated for the same.
assemblies which mainly depends on the Wilson (1991) developed an analytical
modal characteristics such as natural procedure to obtain the added mass and the
frequency ( ω n ), mode shape and damping added damping coefficients for hexagonal
ratio ( ζ ). The fluid film in these gaps affects prism of FBR fuel assemblies held in a
narrow gap and immersed in still water using
the dynamic behaviour by resisting the
small parameter expansion method. The
motion, while the vibration of plate has an
experimental results obtained by Yang and
opposite action on the fluid present in the gap
Moran (1979) and Fujita (1981) were used to
by moving boundary. The understanding of
validate his analytical relation. Yang and
this behaviour becomes important to assess
Zhang (1997) also determined the added
the interaction between the fuel assemblies to
mass and damping coefficients for a
ensure safety of the reactor core during
rectangular cross-section plate-fluid system
normal and accidental conditions. The
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:gverma@barc.gov.in 436

Verma et al.
where one of the two plates is rigidly fixed in coupled-fluid-structure interaction for the
still water and carried out experimental double hexagonal fuel assemblies for a fast
validation of their work. reactor thus providing the experimental
validation to the analytical model developed
by Wilson (1991). However, most of the
present day literatures on the vibration
behaviour of closely spaced parallel plates
Fuel plates
discuss about the variation of natural
frequencies and its corresponding mode
Side plate
shapes for variable liquid gaps as presented
Inert plate by Jeong and Kang (2013) or for variable
liquid depth ratios as discussed by Jeong and
Kim (2008). The aforesaid literature available
Fuel toe
does not discuss about the variation of
characteristic parameters like added mass and
added damping for the plates.
Figure1. Typical parallel plate-type In the present work, experiments are

fuel assemblies designed to analyse the vibration behaviour
of two flexible rectangular plate systems
Accelerometer
submerged in water. These plate systems are
h
placed parallel to each other and are fixed
Steel plate
from the bottom representing a clamped-free-
free-free (CFFF) condition. The experimental
Aluminum plate
set-up consisted of 2 mm thick aluminium
Water
plates fixed at the bottom to a heavy base
such that it acts like a cantilever. A plain
carbon steel (CS) plate is fixed near the free
end of the aluminium plate with the purpose
of attaching accelerometer sensors to the
Figure 2. Sketch of the plate plates. This whole set-up is placed inside a
arrangement plastic trough of sufficiently large diameter
and filled with water up to the height of the
aluminium plate, thus, totally submerging the
Accelerometer aluminium plates (Figures 2 and 3). The gap
Steel plate
Aluminum plate
between double plate systems is varied to
investigate the effect of fluid film thickness
Water
on C m and C v parameters. Coupled fluid-
plate simulations are also performed and the
results are compared with experiments.
Figure 3. Overview of the plate
arrangement
Daogang et. al. (2013) experimentally

investigated dynamic characteristics of
437
Fluid-Film Dependent Added Mass and Added Damping for Parallel Plates
Figure 4. Variation of Eigen- Figure 6.Variation of added

frequency with film thickness damping coefficient with film
thickness
Effect of fluid film thickness (h). The fluid
film present between the double plate
systems influences added mass and added
damping characteristics. In this section, the
results obtained by experiments and
numerical simulations are depicted and
discussed. The experiments are conducted for
5 mm, 10 mm and 15 mm film thickness and
numerical simulations for the film thickness 2
mm to 20 mm. Within the above specified Figure 7.Variation of added
range, it can be observed from Figure 4 that mass coefficient with film thickness
the natural frequency of the plates decreases
with decrease of fluid film thickness. Also, as Figure 6 shows the variation of added
shown in Figure 5 damping ratio tendencies damping coefficient with the film thickness.
increases with decrease in film thickness. The Added damping coefficient is inversely
straight dotted line plotted in the Figure 5 proportional to the cube of the fluid film
represents the damping ratio of a single plate thickness. Eq. 1 empirically relates the added
system immersed in water (both experiment damping to the film thickness for parallel
and simulation). rectangular plates.
C v = 21 (d / h) 3 (1 / Re) + 5.28 (1)
Where h is the film thickness, d is the width
of the rectangular plate and Re is the
Reynolds number of the oscillating flow (Re=
ω n d 2 v ). Here, ω n is the natural frequency of
the single plate system and υ is kinematic
viscosity of the oscillating water. This is
basically due to the increase in the viscous
effects between the plates. Figure 7 shows
Figure 5.Variation of damping the effect of film thickness on the added mass
ratio with film thickness
effects. The plots suggest that added mass is
inversely proportional to the water gap
thickness. Eq. 2 shows the empirical relation
438
Verma et al.
developed from the present study between Jeong K H Kang H S 2013 Free vibration of
added mass coefficient and fluid film multiple rectangular plates coupled with
thickness. As the film thickness decreases, a liquid International Journal of
the impedance caused due to the coupled Mechanical Sciences74 161-172.
water mass present between the plates Jeong K H Kim J W 2009 Hydro-elastic
participating along with the plate oscillation vibration analysis of two rectangular
increases. As However, lower than the plates partially coupled with a liquid
specified range of film thickness, double
Nuclear Engineering and Technology41
plate systems may behave like a single plate (3) 335-346.
system. Thus, projecting a different dynamic
behaviour of the plates. Wilson D 1991Added Mass and Damping
coefficients for a hexagonal cylinder
C m = 0.094 (d / g ) + 2.4 (2) Journal of Fluids and Structure5 503–
CONCLUSION 519.
In the present work, fluid-plate-coupled Yang C I Moran T J 1979 Finite – element
dynamic characteristics of the parallel plates solution of added mass and damping of
are investigated. Experimentally obtained oscillation rods in viscous fluids Journal
frequencies of the parallel plates for dry and of Applied Mechanics46 519-523.
water immersed conditions are found to be in Yang Y R and Zhang J Y1997Frequency
good agreement with the numerical results. It analysis of a parallel plate-type structure
is seen that, fluid film thickness sturdily in still water, Part I: A multi-span beam
affects the added mass and added damping Journal of Sound and Vibration203(5)
between the parallel plates. Added mass 795–804.
varies inversely proportional to the film
thickness while added damping is inversely
proportional to cube of the film thickness.
The analytical procedure developed by
Wilson (1991) for FBR fuel assemblies also
yields similar trends.
REFERENCES
Daogang L Aiguo L Chaohao S Junjie D
Yang H and Qingyu X 2013
Experimental Investigation on fluid-
structure-coupled dynamic
characteristics of the double fuel
assemblies in a fast reactor Nuclear
Engineering and Design 255 (2) 180–
184
Fujita K 1981 Vibration characteristics and
seismic response analysis of column
groups in liquid Bulletins of JSME24
1994-2004
439
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF HEAT TRANSFER IN SUPERSONIC FLOW

REATTACHMENT
VIDYARTHI N. K., SREEJITH K.* and DEEPU M.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology,
Thiruvananthapuram, India.
Abstract: Numerical computations of supersonic flow reattachment, downstream of a

rearward facing step is presented here. Solution of two-dimensional compressible
turbulent flow has been attempted using unstructured finite volume method with Roe-
Flux differencing scheme. Computational procedure has been validated using wall
pressure distributions reported from experiments. Heat flux is applied on vertical
rearward facing step as well as the region of reattachment on bottom wall. Extensive
computations have been performed to analyse the effect of heat transfer in
understanding the nature of reattachment and vortex structure in separation region.
Energy addition or removal from adjoining wall is found to affect the reattaching
supersonic free shear layer considerably and a favourable pressure gradient is
established due to cooling. This study establishes the role of heat transfer as a possible
method for controlling flow separation.
Keywords: Flow separation; Separation control; Free shear layer; Reattachment.
INTRODUCTION more complicated due to generation of shock

Understanding the characteristics of flow was waves.
ever fascinating subject for human race from In supersonic flows, the separation occurs
the very beginning of its scientific notion. because of excessive momentum loss in the
Flow characteristics changes abruptly when it boundary layer near wall by negating wall
experiences adverse pressure gradient due to shear stress to zero (τw= 0) by adverse
change in flow geometry, induced pressure pressure gradient. Starting from the
field or imparting velocity / mass flow. When separation point, the flow regime will be
the adverse pressure gradient (dp/dx > 0) is divided in to two; forward flow and reverse
strong enough, the flow will reverse its flow. There will be a line of separation
direction resulting in curved stream lines, dividing the two regions with a streamline
vorticities and even separation. Separation line of zero velocity. The separated boundary
can occur in both laminar and turbulent layer will continue downstream as disturbed
boundary layers. Laminar layers prone to flow with curls and bows. The turbulent
separation due to low flow velocity gradient kinetic energy is dissipated as heat in
in the near wall region as the adverse downstream and the pressure remains
pressure gradient can quickly and easily halt approximately the same throughout
the slow moving fluid. In case of high Mach downstream.
number flows, mostly the flow will be
Flow separation can occur not only in
turbulent in nature, the phenomenon is much
external flows such as that in a trailing edge
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sreejiji@gmail.com 440

Vidyarthi et al.
or corner, a backward step, a highly divergent corner expansion is not the commonly used
channel, a closed or open cavity but also in Prandtl-Mayer expansion, but rather is
internal flows with a sudden expansion as in accurately described by the method of
a diffuser. Flow separation will result in inviscid rotational characteristics which
reverse flow causing irregular random eddies, accounts for both the entropy gradient in the
very high energy losses and low pressure boundary layer and the pressure gradient
recovery. Undesirable flow separation is upstream of the step”.
observed in turbine blades, scramjet B. F. Armaly et. al. (1983) predicted
combustor, rocket nozzles etc. Hence numerically the flow field of backward-
understanding the flow separation facing step and validated with experiments.
phenomena and its controlling mechanisms is They conducted experiments of laminar,
very important. Current study deals with transitional and turbulent flow of air with
numerical computations of supersonic flow single backward-facing step using Laser-
reattachment downstream of a rearward Doppler measurements for velocity
facing step considering the effect of heat distribution and reattachment length. The
transfer. results revealed the recirculating flow regime
of backward-facing step and separation
LITERATURE REVIEW
region downstream. The numerical results
Many experimental and numerical reported are also in good agreement with
investigations on flow separation have been experiments for specified Reynolds number
undertaken in last century. Some of the flow.
relevant experimental and numerical studies
are reported briefly here. Houshang B. Ebrahimi (1997) provides
comparison of the Navier–Stokes-based CFD
R. Dean et. al. (1956) conducted experimental models results with experimental data for
and theoretical research on flow separation in many general cases including supersonic
pure laminar, transition and turbulent flow flow over a rearward-facing step. The CFD
regimes with step, bases, compression models are Three-dimensional Upwind-
corners, curved surfaces, and configurations differenced Finite volume Flow solver
producing leading-edge separation. The (TUFF), the General Aerodynamic
separation location and point of reattachment Simulation Program (GASP) version 3, and
are the controlling factors of pressure the Generalized Implicit Flow Solver (GIFS).
distribution in the separated flows. The study The results show that the computational
also showed that as the Mach number efficiency of GASP code is better than the
increases, the stability of a separated laminar GIFS and TUFF codes.
layer also will increase.
The present numerical analysis tries to
Howard E. Smith (1967) conducted complement, extend and correlate these basic
experimental investigations on flow field for studies.
rare-ward facing step in a supersonic flow
with pressure distribution and steady state GOVERNING EQUATIONS
heat transfer distribution. The base pressure
Governing equation for a two dimensional
and the maximum heat transfer at
compressible turbulent flow can be written as
reattachment may be predicted as a function
U F G
of the Reynolds number based on step height   S (1)
t x y
(ReH). The study brought out that “the rapid
441
Effect of Heat Transfer in Supersonic Flow Reattachment
Where
 u 
 2 
    u  P   xx 
u    uv   
   xy 
v 
U    , F   
  E  P u  Q 

x

  E
 u 
k    uk  k x 
   
     u    
 
x  Figure 1. Computational domain.
v 
  uv    0  VALIDATION AND GRID
 xy  F 
  v2  P     x  INDEPENDENCE TEST
 yy  Fy 
  E  P  v  Q    Experiments carried out by Smith (1967) for
G y  , and S  0 
  H  supersonic flow past a rearward facing step
v
  vk  k   k provides wall pressure measurements. This is
 y  H  
     regarded as one of the benchmark
  v    0 
experiments for CFD code validation
  y 
[Ebrahimi, 1997]. Air approaching at Mach
Here Fx , Fy are Viscous force terms and Hκ, 2.5 with total pressure (Po) 127553 Pa and
Hε are turbulence source terms represented in total temperature (To) =344.44K is flowing
standard κ-ε turbulence model. Viscous stress past a step of height of 11.25 mm.
is computed as
A preliminary computation has been
u u j 2 u
 ij   ( i    ij k ) performed by discretising the computational
x j xi 3 x k
(2) domain in to 1,35,000 control volumes by
maintaining 100×30 grids in step region. This
has been progressively refined to 2,56,000
NUMERICAL MODELING
control volumes and 3,18,000 control
In the present study, Roe FDS (Roe Flux volumes having 120×45 and 300×90 grids
Differencing Scheme, P L Roe) available in a respectively in step region. Grid convergence
Finite Volume Method (FVM) based has been attained with the third level of
commercial package (Ansys Fluent), has refinement (Fig. 2). Computed wall pressure
been made use for the computation of profile shows good agreement with
inviscid fluxes. experimental data, except at the point of
reattachment.
Computational domain used for the
simulation is given in Fig. 1. Entire
computational domain is initialised with free- RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
stream conditions. In order to study the effect Computations have been performed with
of heat transfer in free shear layer different heat flux values in the step region.
reattachment, prescribed heat flux boundary Reattachment point is observed to be shifted
conditions are provided on vertical rearward towards right when heat is given in to the
facing step surface (Height = H) and in the flow. Whereas a favourable pressure gradient
region of separated flow region on horizontal is observed to get generated with cooling
wall (Length = 4H). which brings reattachment closer to the wall.
442
Vidyarthi et al.
Pressure profiles corresponding to different pressure distribution, for supersonic free

levels of heating and cooling applied on wall shear layer reattachment behind a step.
is given in Fig. 3 Therefore, heat transfer can be used as an
effective method for controlling separation.
Figure 2. Validation and grid

independency.
Figure 4. Streamlines in reattachment

region for various heat flux
REFERENCES
Pijush K. Kundu and Ira M. Cohen 2008
Fluid Mechanics Fourth Edition Elsevier
Inc. Oxford UK
Dean R Chapma Donald Kuehn and Howard
K L 1956 Investigation of separated
Figure 3. Effect of heat flux in shear layer flows in supersonic and subsonic streams
reattachment. with Emphasis on the effect of transition
NACA Report 1356.
Streamline patterns in reattachment region Howard E Smith 1967 The flow field and
for various heat flux is given in Fig. 4. Center heat transfer downstream of a rearward
of the major vortex is shifting towards right facing step in supersonic flow Project
and it occupies more volume with the No. 7063, ARL 67-0056 The University
addition of heat. A minor vortex is also of Dayton Dayton Ohio.
formed for heat flux values above 80 W/m2. Armaly B F Durst F Pereira JCF and B
Whereas reattachment point shifts to left and Schönung 1983 Experimental and
vortices shrink with cooling. theoretical investigation of backward-
facing step flow Journal of Fluid
Mechanics 127 473- 496.
CONCLUSION
Houshang B Ebrahimi 1997 Validation
Numerical computations show that a database for propulsion computational
consistent effect of heat transfer can be fluid dynamics Journal of Spacecraft
observed, in flow pattern as well as in wall and Rockets 3 642-648.
443
ICCMS2016
EXPLICIT TIME MARCHING COUPLING SCHEMES FOR FLUID-

STRUCTURE INTERACTIONS
HOSKOTI L. and MAHESH M. S.*
Aerospace Engineering Dept., Defence Institute of Advanced Technology, Pune, India.
Abstract: Abstract: This paper presents the results of the investigation of various
explicit time marching partitioned coupling schemes applied to the computational
Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) problem. The analysis is applied to the 1-D piston
problem with coupling between fluid and solid domain. Set of already existing
explicit coupling schemes have been tested in the framework of compressible flow
FSI computations. Two types of explicit schemes, the serial and parallel staggered
scheme are considered. Among the serial staggered scheme, conventional serial
staggered (CSS), improved serial staggered (ISS), generalized serial staggered (GSS)
are presented. For parallel staggered scheme, results of conventional parallel
staggered (CPS), improved parallel staggered (IPS) are presented in this paper. FSI
coupling code developed in MATLAB is used for comparative study of different
coupling schemes in terms of various factors such as stability, order of accuracy and
computational costs.
Keywords: Fluid-structure interaction, partitioned algorithms, coupling scheme,
Piston problem.
INTRODUCTION challenging task. The significant

advancement in the computers and numerical
Fluid structure interaction (FSI) is
methods over the last two decade make it
multiphysics problems which brings together
feasible to simulate such complex problems.
all the concept of solid mechanics and fluid
mechanics simultaneously. The interaction of Present work is motivated by the increased
a flexible structure with a flowing fluid gives interest in developing efficient computational
rise to a rich variety of physical phenomena methods for coupling a fluid solver to a
with applications in many fields of dynamic structural model to predict
engineering, for example, response of aircraft behaviour of coupled FSI system. The
wings, the response of bridges and tall computational method can be efficient when
buildings to winds, the vibration of turbine domain is divided in to smaller subdomains
and compressor blades, and the oscillation of which are suitable for computer simulation
heat exchangers and the flow of blood and compute each subdomain parallelly by
through arteries. Due to their strong treating interaction effect as boundary
nonlinearity and multidisciplinary nature, condition at the common interface [Boer et
analytical solutions to such problems are al. 2007]. Subdomains are called partitions
difficult to obtain, whereas laboratory [Felipa et al. 2001] and the approach is called
experiments are limited in scope [Hou et al. partitioned or partitioned with staggering
2012]. Hence study of such problems is a approach. This approach is based on separate
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: maheshms@diat.ac.in 444

Hoskoti and Mahesh
computational treatment and solution of each due to their great simplicity and low
subdomain (i.e. fluid, structure) — hence the computational cost. However, the loosely-
name partitioned with staggering — with the coupled staggered procedure may suffer from
aid of velocity continuity (Dirichlet) and two major problems: (a) the numerical
momentum flux (Neumann) interface instability of the coupling scheme caused by
conditions by allowing reuse of existing spurious energy production along the
codes. Such approach deals with a interface due to the time lag (b) the temporal
Lagrangian finite element formulation for the accuracy of the resulting coupled analysis
structural domain, and an Arbitrary may be sacrificed. A special treatment is
Lagrangian Eulerian (ALE) finite volume generally required to counteract the interface-
formulation for the fluid domain. The other driven energy production in the loosely-
approach for solving FSI problem is coupled staggered scheme [Jaiman et al.
monolithic approach which treats the fluid 2007]. The present study is considering
and structure as a single system and solved different explicit coupling schemes and
with a single code while using implicit applied to the common FSI bench marking
solution procedure to solve interfacial problem, the piston problem.
conditions. This approach can potentially
achieve better accuracy, but it may require EXPLICIT COUPLING SCHEMES
substantially more resources and expertise to Number of explicit coupling schemes has
develop and maintain such a specialized code been developed and tested in the framework
[Hou et al.]. The fact that the structural of aerodynamical simulation, i.e.,
system is physically much stiffer than the compressible flow FSI computations. In the
fluid system — hence time step size following, the conventional serial staggered
requirement is different — makes (CSS), conventional parallel staggered (CPS),
numerically inefficient or even impossible to improved serial staggered (ISS), improved
solve both systems using a single numerical parallel staggered (IPS), and generalized
scheme. [Guruswamy, 2002]. serial staggered (GSS) schemes are
In partitioned approach, a number of presented.
procedures have been proposed to solve the
interfacial conditions (coupling) between the THE CONVENTIONAL SERIAL
fluid and structure and can be categorised as STAGGERED (CSS)
loosely coupled (explicit) [Cebral et al.] or The conventional serial staggered (CSS)
strongly coupled (implicit) algorithms procedure is one of the most widely used
[Bolm]. The strongly coupled schemes explicit schemes to compute solutions to
typically involve predictor corrector problems in FSI. Its computational steps are
iterations to ensure the convergence at each given in algorithm 1 and are represented
coupling time step. However, these coupling graphically in figure 1.
iterations increase the complexity of the
Algorithm 1: Conventional serial
implementation of FSI analyses as well as the
Staggered (CSS) scheme [Jaiman et al.]
computational cost at each time step. On the
other hand, explicit loosely-coupled methods, For n = 0 to nend
which integrate the fluid and the structure Step (1): Transfer fluid load (Fn) to
equations once and independently at every structure.
time step, are often the methods of choice
445
Explicit Time Marching Coupling Schemes for Fluid-Structure Interactions
Step(2): Solve structure equations Sn(Fn) = is tested. (1) a stationary analytical model (2)
Sn+1 an exact wave model for piston pressure
Step(3): Transmit Sn+1to fluid (Dirichlet calculation (3) a complete 1D compressible
BC) fluid flow model.
Step(4): solve fluid equations Fn(Sn+1) =
Fn+1
Repeat (1): transmit Fn+1 to structure
(Neumann BC)
Figure 2. Compressible gas enclosed in a

chamber with a moving piston.
The detailed formulation of problem is used
Figure 1. Conventional serial staggered as it is from [Blom]. Arbitrary Lagrangian
(CSS) procedure Eulerian approach is used for formulation of
Algorithm and graphical representation of fluid flow whereas classical Eulerian
computational steps of the remaining approach is used for structure. Newmark–
algorithms will be explained in the full paper. Wilson scheme is used to discretise the
structure part and Lax-Wendroff scheme is
BENCHMARKING PROBLEM used for fluid. Three different models are
To assess the stability, accuracy and presented for computing the pressure of fluid.
computational cost of the explicit staggered The capability of each of the following model
coupling schemes, a test problem involving is tested. (1) a stationary analytical model (2)
the coupling of a compressible fluid with a an exact wave model for piston pressure
rigid structure is presented. The problem calculation (3) a complete 1D compressible
presented by [Blom (1998) ] where perfect fluid flow model.
gas flow is contained in a chamber closed by In order to explain variation of piston
a moving piston. The other end of the pressure, a characteristic time for both fluid
chamber is fixed. The structural part of this and structure is introduced. The characteristic
problem - the spring mounted piston - closes time for fluid (Tfchar) is time required for a
the fluid domain, which produces the pressure wave to cross the chamber from one
fluid/structure interaction. The detailed side to the other and for structure,
formulation of problem is used as it is from characteristic time (Tschar) is natural period.
[Blom (1998)]. Arbitrary Lagrangian The characteristic time ratio (CTR) is the
Eulerian approach is used for formulation of ratio of characteristic time of structure to the
fluid flow whereas classical Eulerian characteristic time of fluid. When CTR value
approach is used for structure. Newmark– is close to one i.e., Tschar is approximately
Wilson scheme is used to discretise the equal to Tfchar then the fluid and structure
structure part and Lax-Wendroff scheme is see each other and coupling between fluid
used for fluid. Three different models are and structure is considered to be strong. For
presented for computing the pressure of fluid. strong coupling, shock appears in the
The capability of each of the following model
446
Hoskoti and Mahesh
chamber as seen in figure 3(a) the chamber fluid and structure do not see each other and
pressure increases suddenly. the problem is considered as quasi-steady.
The coupling in quasi steady problem is
weak. For lower frequency, a stationary
(a) ω = 160 Hz, CTR = 1.08 analytical model is in good agreement with a
complete 1D compressible fluid flow model
as seen in figure 3(c). Therefore, further
(b) ω = 51 Hz, CTR = 5.5
investigation uses the 1D compressible fluid
flow model to test the various coupling
(c) ω =16 Hz, CTR = 17 implicit coupling scheme. Piston motion is
plotted in figure 4 for time equal to two
natural time period of the piston using CSS.
(a) ω (a) ω = 160 Hz, CTR = 1.08 (a). ω = =16 Hz, CTR = 17
(b) ω = 51 Hz, CTR = 5.5 (b). ω (b). ω =160 Hz, CTR = 1.08
Figure 4. Plot of piston motion for two
natural time periods using CSS scheme.
It is noticed for weak coupling, the CSS
scheme is stable however scheme exhibits
inability to maintain losses when coupling is
strong. There is dissipation in energy as
shown in figure 4 (b) the reason for
(c) ω =16 Hz, CTR = 17
dissipation is because it violates the velocity
Figure 3. Variation of piston pressure kinematic interface conditions. Fluid
with time displacements of two successive time steps
It is clear from figure that a complete 1D u_f=(x^(n+1) 〖 - x〗^n)/∆t is not equal to
compressible fluid flow model is more structural displacement x_s=(x^(n+1) 〖 -
sensitive to the strong coupling. It can sense x〗^n)/∆t. The interface velocities of fluid and
the sudden change in the piston pressure. structure do not match and this can leads to
Further the model-II and model-III are instability. As a remedy, the improved serial
insensitive to the shock. These models cannot staggered (ISS) procedure is proposed. The
be used to compute the pressure when detailed analysis of ISS scheme including
coupling is strong. As the CTR increases, the
447
Explicit Time Marching Coupling Schemes for Fluid-Structure Interactions
GSS, CPS and ICPS will be explained in the Felippa C A Park K C & Farhat C 2001.
full paper. Partitioned analysis of coupled
mechanical systems Computer methods
CONCLUSION in applied mechanics and engineering
Different explicit fluid structure coupling 190(24) 3247-3270.
schemes are considered in this paper. Guruswamy G P 2002. A review of
Distinguishing factors are their stability, numerical fluids/structures interface
accuracy order, computational costs. While methods for computations using high-
some of the schemes are rather simple to be fidelity equations Computers &
implemented such as the CSS or CPS structures 80(1) 31-41.
procedures, others require more access to
Hou Gene Jin Wang and Anita Layton 2012
solver internals and assume specific time
Numerical methods for fluid-structure
integration methods, mesh adaption
interaction-a review Commun. Comput.
techniques, or equation solvers. However,
Phys 12(2) 337-377.
from a stability point of view, all schemes
suffer from the same problem. When a Jaiman R Geubelle P Loth E & Jiao X 2007
certain strength of interaction between fluid Stable and accurate loosely-coupled
and structure is reached and time step scheme for unsteady fluid–structure
restrictions are infeasible, they become interaction Proceeding of 45th AIAA
unstable. While these instabilities can be Aerospace Sciences Meeting and Exhibit
controlled rather well in compressible flow Reno Nevada 2007 334.
FSI, they become a real problem in
incompressible flow scenarios, where a
reduction of time step size results in a further
decrease of stability. A remedy can be found
in implicit coupling schemes.
REFERENCES
Blom F J 1998 A monolithical fluid-structure
interaction algorithm applied to the
piston problem Computer methods in
applied mechanics and engineering
167(3) 369-391.
Cebral J R and Lohner R 1997 Conservative
load projection and tracking for fluid-
structure problems AIAA journal 35(4)
687-692.
De Boer A Van Zuijlen A H & Bijl H 2007
Review of coupling methods for non-
matching meshes Computer methods in
applied mechanics and engineering
196(8) 1515-1525.
448
ICCMS2016
AEROELASTIC STABILITY OF DELTA WING CONFIGURATION

ARAVINTH A. D.* and MAHESH M. S.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Defence Institute of Advanced Technology, Pune, India.
Abstract: Mathematical formulation for aeroelastic analysis of low aspect ratio box
beam structured delta wing immersed in incompressible flow is analyzed in this paper.
An algorithm based on Hamilton’s variational principle and Galerkin approach has
been used for the determination of divergence instability of a delta wing structure at
high angle of attack. The structural model incorporates non classical effects such as
anisotropy. As compared to moderate swept wing, the nonlinear lift terms
corresponding to that of vortex lift comes into effect in a highly swept delta wing.
Polhamus leading edge suction analogy concept has been used for calculating the
nonlinear terms. The box beam structure and Polhamus concept are used together for
the formulation of the stability of the fluid structure interaction problem.
Keywords: Aeroelasticity; Delta wing; Box beam structure; Nonlinear lift;
Polhamus leading edge suction analogy.
INTRODUCTION tends to increase with the flying speed,

whereas the structural forces are independent
During the last two decades, a great deal of
of it, a speed will often exist at which the two
research activity has been devoted to the
sets of forces are exactly in balance, so that
development of new aerodynamic models for
they tend to maintain the given deflection.
analyzing delta wings. Even though great
This speed is known as divergence speed.
amount of research has been carried out on
delta wing aircrafts, it should be mentioned The objective of this paper is three fold: 1) to
that as far as the authors of this paper are determine the lift and moment terms for a
aware, a mathematical formulation for the delta wing taking into account the nonlinear
aeroelastic analysis of delta wing is not terms, 2) to formulate equation of motion for
available. a composite box beam structure for a delta
wing, 3) to find the divergence instability
The present work deals with aeroelastic
limit for a given delta wing configuration.
behavior of the laminated composite delta
wing for a box beam structure for
incompressible flows. The field of
AERODYNAMIC MODEL
aeroelasticity involves the mutual interaction An observation according to Polhamus
among the aerodynamic, inertia, and elastic method (1971) is that when a wing in the
forces. The wing divergence phenomenon is form of a narrow isosceles triangle (a slender
a static instability of the lifting surface where delta wing) is placed at incidence in an air
the inertial forces are neglected. If a wing is stream, the fluid separates from the surface
given a deflection of arbitrary magnitude, the along lines near the leading edges (figure 1).
aerodynamic forces often act in such a way as Vortex layers form in the fluid, springing
to increase the given deflection, whereas the from these lines and rolling up in opposite
structural forces always tends to decrease the senses on the two halves of the wing into
deflection. Since the aerodynamic forces cores of rotating fluid which lie above the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:dinesharavinth@rocketmail.com 449

Aravinth and Mahesh
wing and inboard of the leading edges. When The proposed model employs an assumed
the leading edge is sharp the line of pressure loading distribution given by
separation is fixed along it throughout a Cunningham (1972) based on classical
considerable range of incidence. Figure1 theoretical results. Lifting line, thin airfoil,
shows the vortex flow over a delta wing. and slender wing theory results are used to
Flow attachment lines have been observed develop a general functional form for the
inboard of the vortex sheets and indicate that pressure distribution. Assume that the
air is drawn over the vortex sheets and pressure loading distribution is of the form
accelerated downward. Many methods have Eq. (1).
been developed for estimating the effect of 𝑃𝑜
∆𝐶𝑃 = 2 √((1 − 𝜉)/𝜉)√(1 − 𝜂 2 )sin⁡⁡α⁡cos⁡⁡α
the separated vortex sheets with varying 𝜋𝑐
degrees of success. The present approach (1)
assumes that if flow reattachment occurs on where, P0 is a constant with dimensions of
the upper surface the total lift can be length, and c is the local wing chord
x−xLE
calculated as the sum of a potential-flow lift 𝜉= and⁡𝜂 = (y/(b/2)) are the
c
and a lift associated with the existence of the nondimensional chordwise and spanwise
separated leading-edge spiral vortices. First, coordinate and α⁡represents the angle of attack.
the potential-flow lift will be examined with xLE is the distance from the y axis to the
regard to the effect of high angles of attack leading edge. The wing geometry and
and modified leading-edge conditions. Then, coordinate system for the terms in Eq. (1) are
the vortex lift will be determined by a method shown in figure 2. By using that the sectional
in which the vortex flow is assumed to be lift coefficient (ccl) for the wing is calculated as
related to the potential flow about the leading given in Eq.(2)
edge.
⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡𝑐𝑐𝑙 = 𝑃0 ⁡sin⁡⁡α⁡cos⁡⁡2 α√1 − 𝜂 2 , (2)
By integrating over the whole span, the lift
coefficient CL,p for pure potential flow can be
determined. Further, the lift created by the
vortex in the leading edge (CVLE) is given by
𝐶𝐿𝑝 2 cos α
⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡𝐶𝑉𝐿𝐸 = (𝐶𝐿𝑝 sin α − cos ⁡α) ⁡,⁡ (3)
𝜋𝐴𝑅 sin Λ
Addition of the lift due to potential flow and

the vortex gives the total lift. Similarly the
moment coefficients are calculated. Figure 3
Figure 1. Vortex flow over a delta wing. represents how a vortex lift assist in forming
a nonlinear lift which increases the overall
A planform proposed by Purvis (1981) is
taken for the mathematical formulation which lift in addition to potential lift generated by
is shown in figure 2. xLE represents the Polhamus suction analogy.
distance from the y axis to the leading edge.
BASIC ASSUMPTIONS
Consider the case of a delta wing structure,
idealized as a box beam whose upper and
lower faces are constructed of laminated
composite materials. As depicted by Librescu
(1986), we shall also postulate the existence
of a reference axis (RA), passing through the
centroid of right span of the delta wing and
Figure 2. Wing geometry and coordinate joining the tip. It is located in the reference
system. plane of the box beam and at mid-distance
450
Aeroelastic Stability of Delta wing Configuration
between its front and rear edges. The material (1980) for the metallic wing whose wing
of each constituent lamina is assumed to be chord varies linearly along the span while the
orthotropic. The orthotropicity angle ϕ(j) (j bending and torsional stiffness vary as the
represents the lamina) of each lamina is fourth power of the chord has been used here.
measured in the counterclockwise direction The modifications to the equation of motion
starting from the rearward normal to the y is given by the following parameters Eq. (6),
axis. In addition to these assumptions, we c(𝜂) = βcr, D22(𝜂) = β4DR22,
shall postulate that both the chordwise D26(𝜂) = β4DR26, D66(𝜂) = β4DR66, (6)
deformation and wing distortions are where β=1-𝜂(1 − 𝜎), 𝜎 is the taper ratio. For
negligibly small. a delta wing 𝜎 =0. Here, the superscript R
represents the quantity affiliated to the wing
root section. Eq. (5a) and (5b) will be
multiplied by Z0dy and θdy, respectively, and
integrated over [0,l]. Z=Z0/(b/2) and
spanwise coordinate⁡𝜂 =y/(b/2) , followed by
the partial integration of the obtained
equations, whenever possible, results in the
equilibrium equations expressed in integral
form. The boundary conditions are given by
Figure 3. Variation of total lift over angle Z0= Z0’= θ= θ’=0, at y=0
of attack. D22 Z0’’- D26 θ’ = 0,
(D22 Z0’’- D26 θ’)’ = 0,
GOVERNING EQUATIONS D66 θ’- D26 Z0’’= 0. at y=b/2 (7)
the parameters assumed are substituted into
For the static case considered in this paper, the governing equation and simplified using
the aerodynamic terms L and T intervening in the boundary condition results in Eq. (8),
the equilibrium equations and representing 1 1
the lift and the aerodynamic torsional ∫0 β4DR22 (Zo’’)2d𝜂 - ∫0 β4DR26Zo’’ θ’d𝜂 -
moment (per unit length), respectively, are (b3/8) q cos2 Λ
1
expressed as Eq. (4) ∫0 βcr(P0⁡sin⁡⁡α⁡cos⁡⁡2 α√(1 − 𝜂 2 ) +
L(y) = qnSrccl, (4a) E1Ck H(𝜂) /cos Λ) Z d𝜂 = 0, (8a)
T(y) = qncSrcm, (4b)
where qn represents the dynamic pressure 1 1
∫0 β4DR66 (θ’)2d𝜂 - ∫0 β4DR26Zo’’ θ’d𝜂 -
component normal to the leading edge, Sr
represents the reference area (planform), ccl (b2/4) q cos2 Λ
1
and cm represents the sectional lift coefficient ∫0 βcr(P0(xLE+⁡βcr/4)⁡sin⁡⁡αcos⁡⁡2 α√1 − 𝜂 2 −
and sectional moment respectively. The 𝐶𝐿𝑝 2
((2E1xLE/C cos Λ) (𝐶𝐿𝑝 sin α − )
equation governing the static aeroelastic 𝜋𝐴𝑅
equilibrium of composite delta wing is (√(1 − 𝜂 2 )𝜂 + asin 𝜂) ⁡θ⁡d𝜂 = 0 , (8b)
expressed as in Eq. (5), where E1 is the proportionality constant and
(D22Zo’’) - (D26θ’)’’ = L(y), (5a) the span wise function H(𝜂),
- (D66 θ’)’ - (D26 Zo’’)’ = T(y), (5b) H(𝜂)=√(1 − 𝜂 2 )𝜂 + asin 𝜂, (9)
where Dij represents the bending and Ck=CT cos α. (10)
torsional rigidities of a composite wing, Zo The thrust coefficient CT,
represents the bending deflection positive 𝐶 2
upward along the straight reference axis CT= 𝐶𝐿𝑝 sin α − 𝐿𝑝 cos⁡α. (11)
𝜋𝐴𝑅
along the span and Zo’ (=dZ0/dy) the bending It is assumed that θ (η) and Z (𝜂) will be of
slope of the reference axis and θ represents the form,
the torsional deflection of the wing section θ (η) = ζθf(η),
about the reference axis. A solution to the ⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡Z (η) = ζZW(η),⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡⁡ (12)
equation of motion discussed by Weisshaar
451
Aravinth and Mahesh
where f⁡(η) and W (η) are the normalized speeds. Further investigation must be carried
torsional and bending deflection functions in the present model for validation with an
assumed to satisfy the boundary conditions, experimental result as well as for nonlinear
ζθ and ζZ are the generalized coordinates. delta planforms.
Inserting Eq. (12) in Eq. (8) and invoking the
standard requirement of nontriviality for the
solution of the obtained homogenous system
of equations results in the divergence
condition.

The governing equations are solved with
appropriate modal functions taken from Figure 4. Dynamic pressure ratio vs.
Librescu (1986) which satisfies the boundary
sweep angle
conditions are,
f(η)⁡= 3η-3η2+⁡η3,
w(η) = (6η2-4η3+⁡η4)/3. (13) REFERENCES
The numerical values assumed for this paper Cunningham A M1972 Unsteady Subsonic
are taken from Doggett (1992) and Librescu Collocation Method for Wings With and
(1986), Without Control Surfaces, Journal of
root chord cr = .75 m, angle of Attack = 150 Aircraft 9 413-419
and density of air = 1.225 kg/m3.
Doggett R V 1992 Low-Speed Flutter
The plies of wing structure, graphite-epoxy Characteristics of Some Simple Low-
material are arranged in the sequence (900/- Aspect-Ratio Delta-Wing Models
45 0/45 0/0)s. The graphite-epoxy material is Journal of Aircraft 29 196-212.
characterized by the constants E1=30xl06 psi,
Felipe Schaedler de Almeida 2013
E2 = 0.7xl06 psi, G12 = 0.375 x 106 psi, v12 =
Aeroelastic analysis of a delta wing
0.25, and t = 0.005 in. For a delta wing,
considering geometric nonlinear
aspect ratio is related with the sweep angle,
behavior Proceeding of International
thus by increasing the sweep angle aspect
Symposium on Solid Mechanics -
ratio decreases. The divergence dynamic
MecSol 2013 35-42.
pressure got by solving the equation is
divided by that of 00 laminates to get the Librescu L and Simovich J 1986 A General
dynamic pressure ratio which is plotted for Formulation for the Aeroelastic
different sweep angles. From figure (4) it is Divergence of Composite Swept
observed that the dynamic pressure decreases Forward Wing Structures. Proceedings
as the sweep angle increases. This is because of the 15th Congress of the International
of the nonlinear lift and moment terms, which Council of the Aeronautical Sciences
increases with the aspect ratio until the vortex 1129-1140 London 1986.
breakdown occurs at higher angle of attack. Polhamus E G 1971 Prediction of vortex-lift
characteristics by a leading edge suction
CONCLUSION analogy Journal of Aircraft 8 193-200.
The proposed mathematical model was able
Purvis J W 1981 Analytical Prediction of
to integrate the Polhamus leading edge Vortex Lift Journal of Aircraft 18 225-
suction analogy for aerodynamic model and 230.
box beam structure for the delta wing model.
Although the present investigation was Weisshaar T A 1980 Divergence of Forward
limited to subsonic speeds, with some Swept Composite Wings, Journal of
modifications in the overall model it can be Aircraft 17 442-448.
extended to transonic as well as supersonic
452
ICCMS2016
SEQUENTIAL EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN BASED UNCERTAINTY

QUANTIFICATION
BHATTACHARYYA B. and RAY S.*
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, India.
Abstract: Over the last two decades, response surface method (RSM) has emerged as
an efficient tool for uncertainty quantification. In this method, the sample points
required for formulating the RSM are selected empirically. This often results in under
sampling or oversampling of the problem domain. In this paper, a new approach of
sampling, referred to here as, Monte Carlo intersite projected (MCIP) based sequential
experimental design (SED) is proposed to be used in conjunction with RSMs. This
method maintains a trade-off between quality and efficiency of the computation.
Every new sample points are generated optimizing intersite and projected distances
between the previous and new points. In order to illustrate the performance of the
proposed SED, two problems has been solved. For both the problems, the uncertainty
quantification has been performed by coupling the proposed SED with two popular
RSMs, namely polynomial chaos expansion and Kriging. The obtained results have
been validated by comparing with full-scale Monte Carlo simulation (MCS) results. In
both the cases, the results obtained through the proposed approach are in excellent
agreement with the benchmark solution obtained using MCS.
Keywords: Sequential Experimental Design; Response Surface Method;
Uncertainty quantification.
INTRODUCTION analysis is performed at large number of

All structural systems have some sample points. The output uncertainties are
uncertainties, arising due to variability in then computed based on the results of the
loading condition, inherent material deterministic analyses. However, the primary
heterogeneities and/or measurement error concern of MCS is the computational cost,
(human error). Conventionally, the effect of making it unsuitable for large scale
uncertainties is nullified in the design by structures. To overcome the limitation
considering some partial safety factors. associated with MCS, various researchers
However, such an ad hoc procedure often Faravelli 1989; Bucher & Bourgund (1990);
yields conservative results, making the Goswami et al. (2013); Chakraborty &
structure/system uneconomical. Therefore, Chowdhury (2015) have used Response
quantification of uncertainty has become a Surface Method. In RSM, an explicit
fundamental issue in structural engineering. expression relating the inputs and output is
first formulated based on actual responses at
The most popular and widely utilized tool for some preselected sample points. This
uncertainty quantification is the Monte Carlo expression is termed as the surrogate, which
simulation (MCS). In MCS, deterministic is considered to be the backbone of RSM.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sonarfce@iitr.ac.in 453

Bhattacharyya and Ray
Once the surrogate is formulated, MCS is d

( ) ∑
2
performed on the generated surrogate to = idist P min pi , p j ∈P pik − p kj (1)
k =1
quantify the output uncertainty. Over the last
two decades or so, use of RSM has gained Definition 2: Projected distance (Dam et al.
vast popularity in design optimization, 2007)is defined as the distance between two
uncertainty quantification, model exploration consecutive sample points, when projected to one
etc. of the axis. Suppose, a d -dimensional space to
One issue associated with RSM is selection ( d − 1) -dimensional space along an axis. Then,
of design points. Conventional design point as per this criterion, no two point should be
methods(Fisher 1935) required large number projected at the same position. Minimum
of points, specifically for systems involving projected distance between two points can be
large number of random variables. Moreover, calculated as
the sample points are often not optimized. In
= pdist ( P ) min pi , p j ∈P min pik − p kj
order to alleviate this issue, sequential 1≤ k ≤ d
(2)
experimental design (SED) has been = min pi , p j ∈P pi − p j
−∞
proposed. In SED the sample points are
generated in a sequential manner until In this work, a trade-off between the two criteria
convergence, which generally reduces has been utilized to construct design of
undersampling and oversampling. It is experiment using SED. To be specific, an
expected that implementing SED will yield objective function by combining Eq. (1) and
good results with significantly reduced Eq. (2) has been formulated.
sample points. 1
( n + 1) d
−1
d
dist ( P, p ) min pi ∈P ∑ pik − p k
2
In the proposed approach SED has been=coupled
with two different RS method, namely 2 k =1 (3)
polynomial chaos expansion and Kriging. The n +1
+ min pi ∈P pi − p −∞
coupling of SED with RSM will enhance the 2
computational efficiency as well as quality of
prediction uncertainty. The design points are obtained sequentially
by optimizing Eq. (3). Monte Carlo
PROPOSED METHODOLOGY simulation (MCS) is performed in which
Consider d -dimensional design of experiment uniformly distributed random points are
P = { p1 , p2 ,..., pn } containing n number of generated and for each point the objective
function written in Eq. (3) is calculated, and
( )
sample points pi = pi1 , pi2 ,..., pid . The design
the best point is chosen as the next new point
of experiment will be generated consecutively in the design space. Boundary of the sample
one by one sample points without knowing the space is chosen to be in the interval [ −1,1] .
total number of sample points n .Design space
will be filled through this procedure until results This MCS based SED in called Monte Carlo
satisfy the convergence criteria. Two popular intersite projected (MCIP) method.
choice for convergence is intersite distance and
projected distance. NUMERICAL EXAMPLE
Definition 1: Intersite distance (Dam et al. Two types of numerical examples are
2007)is defined as the smallest distance presented in this paper to show the
between two points in the design space: performance of the proposed approach. In
primary stage two different multivariate
454
Sequential Experimental Design based Uncertainty Quantification
mathematical function is chosen and PDF of

approximated function is plotted using
different methods. Furthermore, in the later
stage, one FE problem of fixed frame has
been solved. This problem will be
communicated in the full length paper. The
prediction made using proposed approach
have been compared with the results obtained
through MCS. Error is being measured using
the expression for all the examples
( )
2
∫ F − Fˆ
Error =
x
dx / ∫ F 2 dx ×100 (4)
x
Where, F is the actual values of response at Figure 1. PDF of sum of square obtained
any point and F̂ is the approximate response by n = 6, 6,105 for PCE, Kriging and MCS
at that point using the proposed approach. respectively
EXAMPLE 1: SUM OF SQUARE EXAMPLE 2: FRANKE’S

f ( x)
= ∑ ix ; 2
i −5 ≤ xi ≤ 10 (5) BIVARIATE FUNCTION
i
f ( x, y ) = 0.75e
{ }
− ( 9 x − 2 ) + ( 9 y − 2 ) /4
2 2
A two dimensional case has been considered

here i.e., i = 2 in Eq. (5). The variables were +0.75e
{(9 x +1) /49−(9 y +1)/10}
2
considered as uniformly distributed in the

+0.5e
{(9 x −7 ) +(9 y −3) }/4 − 0.2e−{(9 x −4) +(9 y −7 ) }
2 2 2 2
design space. Sample points have been

generated using the proposed SED algorithm 0 ≤ x, y ≤ 1
and have been used to approximate the (6)
function by PCE and Kriging. PDF plots by The function is continuous and has
PCE, Kriging and MCS is shown in Figure 1. bimodality characteristic. The function was
Sample points considered for PCE and considered as uniformly distributed within
Kriging ( n = 6 ) is much lesser than MCS the domain 0 ≤ x, y ≤ 1 . The sample points
( n = 10 )
5
and a good agreement of result in are generated using SED and Sobol sequence,
and function was approximated using PCE
noticed for PCE and Kriging with MCS.
and Kriging. Figure 2 shows the PDF
Error with respect to the actual function
obtained using the proposed approach and
values calculated using Eq. (4) is found to be
MCS. Error calculated by Eq. (4) for PCE
1.25 ×10−12 % and 3.33 ×10−13% for PCE (2nd
(6th order polynomial) and Kriging using
order polynomial) and Kriging respectively.
SED based sampling are found to be
In order to obtain results of identical
6.47% ( n = 65 ) and 2.73% ( n = 45 ) . Error
accuracy, 32 number of sample points are
required for conventional Sobol sequence predicted by Sobol sequence sampling for
based PCE and Kriging. PCE ( n = 100 ) and Kriging ( n = 50 ) are
455
Bhattacharyya and Ray
found to be higher ( 7.43%,3.78% ) as Chakraborty S & Chowdhury R 2015

Assessment of polynomial correlated
compared to SED based sampling. function expansion for high-fidelity
structural reliability analysis Structural
Safety 59 (Accepted) 9–19.
Dam E R Van et al 2007 Maximin Latin
Hypercube Designs in Two Dimensions.
Operational Research 55(1)158–169.
Faravelli L 1989 Response-surface approach
for reliability-analysisJournal of
Engineering Mechanics-ASCE 115(12)
2763–2781.
Fisher R A 1935 The design of experiments
First Ed. Oliver and Boyd.
Goswami S Chakraborty S & Ghosh S 2013
Adaptive response surface method in
Figure 2. PDF of Franke’s bivariate structural response approximation under
uncertainty In International Conference
function obtained by n = 65, 45,105 for on Structural Engineering and
PCE, Kriging and MCS respectively Mechanics.
CONCLUSION
In this paper, a novel experimental design
scheme for uncertainty quantification has
been presented. The proposed approach,
referred here as, sequential experimental
design (SED), generates the sample points in
a sequential manner. As a consequence, the
chances of oversampling or undersampling
have been nullified. The proposed SED has
been coupled with two popular response
surface methods, namely polynomial chaos
expansion and Kriging. Two numerical
problems have been solved using the
proposed approach. It has been observed that
the proposed approach performs better than
the conventional PCE and Kriging, both in
accuracy and efficiency.
REFERENCES
Bucher C G & Bourgund U 1990 A fast and
efficient response-surface approach for
structural reliability problems.
Structural Safety 7(1) 57–66.
456
ICCMS2016
DAMAGE DETECTION IN COMPOSITE BEAMS USING

VIBRATION BASED METHOD
JOSHI S. P.* and DAWARI V. B.
Department of Civil Engineering, College of Engineering Pune, Pune, India.
Abstract: Damage can be defined as physical inability that impairs the value,
usefulness, or normal function of structure. Damage detection using non destructive
testing based on vibration based method has been carried out in this study. This study
focuses on the detection of damage by vibration analysis, whose main objective is to
exploit the dynamic response of a structure to detect, understand the damage. The
damage detection has been carried out for the fibre matrix composite beams, where
delamination is focus of study.
Keywords: composite beam; damage; delimitation; vibration method.
INTRODUCTION frequencies, mode shapes are functions of the

physical properties of the structure.
Composite material is a material which is
Therefore, changes in the physical properties
made from two or more combination of two
will cause detectable changes in the modal
or more materials. The focus this study is the
properties.
fibre-matrix composites. There is an intense
thirst for the new materials with improved METHODOLOGY
properties. Understanding the damage and
Analysis consists of following steps:-
failure of composite materials is critical for
a) Modelling of composite beam (both
reliable and cost-effective engineering
undamaged as well as damaged)
design. The aim of detecting damage in the
b) Performing free- vibration analysis of
material at initial stage without any
composite beam
destruction of the structure has become prime
c) Extraction of mode shapes from
importance in the field of structural
ANSYS 15
engineering. Non-destructive testing is an
d) Detection of damage using modal
emerging field as far as detection of damage
curvature method.
is concerned.
MODELLING OF COMPOSITE
Structural Health Monitoring (SHM) has
been defined in the literature as the BEAM
“acquisition, validation and analysis of For studying, Damage detection techniques in
technical data to facilitate life-cycle the composite beams were modelled using
management decisions”. Vibration based the finite element software ANSYS 15. A
methods are used to examine changes in Cantilever Beam having properties has been
measured vibration response to detect, locate, taken with [45/-45]2 stacking sequence as per
and characterize damage in structural and Table 1. The dimensions of the 4-ply beam
mechanical systems. The basic idea behind are 100 mm×15 mm× 3.0 mm.
this method is that modal parameters such as
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sud92jos@yahoo.co.in 457

Joshi and Dawari
Table 1. Details of Composite Material used. In general contact feature two contact
Properties properties are given namely tangential which
Material deals with friction between surfaces and
Values
Properties normal contact. For tangential and normal
E 11 135.3 GPa property penalty method is used with friction
E 22 9 GPa coefficient of 0. For meshing of the parts 8
E 33 9 GPa Node brick element (SOLID 185 with
ʋ 12 0.24 enhanced strain property is used. There are
ʋ 23 0.24 100 elements defined along length, 5 along
ʋ 31 0.46 with, and 1 for layer in depth. Fixed
G 12 5.2 GPa boundary conditions are given to one face of
G 23 5.2 GPa the beam as shown in the figure.
G 31 3.8 GPa The delamination has been carried out in full
width of the beam. The damages have been
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL modelled by creating contact layers, using
To make assembly of different layers, the contact elements and target elements. By
contact between the layers is defined. Contact creating contact layers the nodes of different
properties are defined from constraint tool at laminates which are in contact have been
each two surfaces coming in contact with merged. For the condition of the
each other. Contacts defined are surface to delamination the nodes at that interface have
surface contact for plane surfaces which are not been merged so that resulting interface
in contact. represents the delaminated region.
Table 2. Damage Cases

Damage Damage Damage % Range of
Case Location (% of Damage
span) Elements
C1 Fixed End 20 0-10
C2 (1/4)th 20 10-30
Span
Figure 1. Undamaged Beam C3 Mid Span 20 40-60
C4 (3/4)th 20 60-80
Span
C5 Free End 20 80-100
MODAL CURVATURE METHOD
DAMAGE INDEX
The damage index used here is the obtained

from the modal curvature method. The modal
Figure 2. Damaged Beam- 20% at Mid curvature is the second derivative of mode
Span shape, which is obtained using the central
For interaction between surfaces general difference approximation.
contact function of ANSYS 15 software is
458
Damage Detection in Composite Beams using Vibration Based Method
Ø(𝑥 + ℎ) − 2 ∗ Ø(𝑥) + Ø(𝑥 − ℎ) ∆Ø" = |Ø"𝑑 (x)-Ø"𝑢 (𝑥)| (2)

Ø"(𝑥) = (1)
ℎ2
Since number of mode shapes are taken into
This method depends on the absolute changes account the damage index (DI) is defined as
in the curvature mode shapes are localized in follows,
the region of damage and hence can be used to 𝑚
1
detect damage in a structure. The change in DI = � 𝛥Ø" (3)
𝑚
the curvature mode shapes increase with 𝑗=1
increasing severity of damage. This where m= no of natural modes

information can be used to obtain the amount Ø"𝑑 (x) = curvature of damaged beam at a
of damage in the structure. distace x of ith mode
The mode shape curvature criterion may be Ø"𝑢 (x) = curvature of undamaged beam at a
defined as the difference in absolute distace x of ith mode
curvatures (∆) of the healthy and damaged
structures, for each mode.
Table 3. Frequencies of Undamaged and Damaged Models
Damage Cases Undamaged C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
Mode 1 28.603 27.96 28.39 28.50 28.53 28.57
Mode 2 163.82 138.39 155.05 163.77 161.90 160.19
Mode 3 413.82 383.39 401.53 389.67 413.79 380.99
RESULTS Case 3:- Damaged at Mid Span

Case 1:- Damaged at Fixed End 0.0025
0.0006 0.002
0.0005
DI 0.0015
0.0004
0.001
DI 0.0003
0.0002 0.0005
0.0001 0
0 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Element No
Element No
Case 2:- Damaged at (1/4) Th Span Case 4:- Damaged at (3/4)th Span
0.0006 0.00014
0.0005 0.00012
0.0004 0.0001
DI 0.0003 0.00008
DI
0.0002 0.00006
0.0001 0.00004
0.00002
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0
Element No 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Element No
459
Joshi and Dawari
CONCLUSION M LAWU D and S S Law 2007

Delamination detection-oriented finite
Delamination causes irregularity of mode
element model for a fibre reinforced
shape curves. The extent of the irregularity of
polymer bonded concrete plate and its
the curve depends on the size and location of
application with vibration
delamination. The bigger the delamination,
measurements Journal of applied
the more irregular the mode shape curve.
mechanics 240-248
It has been found that all first four modes are
Ramtekkar G S 2009 Free vibration analysis
unaffected for very short delamination (less
of delaminated beams using mixed
than 5%). among the first four modes, mode
finite element model Journal of Sound
1 (lowest frequency) is insensitive to the
and Vibration 428-440.
presence of normal-sized delamination (10-
15%) while mode 4 is most sensitive. Ratcliffe Colin P 2000 A frequency and
curvature based experimental method
For the damage at the location except at
for locating damage in
boundary conditions the decrease in the value
of the DI (damage index) at mid of the structures Journal of vibration and
acoustics 324-329.
delamination region is observed since the
gapped smoothing method is not applied. It Ratcliffe Colin P et al. 1998 Vibration
can also be observed that after the application technique for locating delamination in a
of the gapped smoothing method the decrease composite beam AIAA journal 1074-
in the value of the damage index is found to 1077.
be absent and a peak is developed. Zou Y et al 2000 Vibration-based model-
REFERENCES dependent damage (delamination)
identification and health monitoring for
Abdo Ma-B 2002 A numerical study of
composite structures—a review Journal
structural damage detection using
of Sound and vibration 357-378
changes in the rotation of mode shapes
Journal of Sound and vibration 227-
239.
Kessler Seth S et al 2002 Damage detection
in composite materials using frequency
response methods Composites Part B:
Engineering 87-95
Krawczuk M 1996 Analysis of natural
frequencies of delaminated composite
beams based on finite element method
Structural Engineering and
Mechanics 4(3) 243-255.
Kumar S Keshava 2013 Partial delamination
modelling in composite beams using a
finite element method Finite Elements
in Analysis and Design 1-12
460
ICCMS2016
FATIGUE ANALYSIS OF CONCRETE MEMBERS UNDER VARIABLE

AMPLITUDE CYCLIC LOADING
JESHNA C. C., BHOWMIK S. and SONALISA RAY*
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, India.
Abstract: In this work, an analytical model has been proposed to estimate fatigue life
and crack growth rate in plain concrete under the action of fluctuating loading of
varying amplitude. The model would be developed by considering the effect of
fracture process zone in the formulation. Apart from conventional parameters, loading
history and frequency effects have been taken into account. The mathematical
formulation for the fatigue crack growth law is made on the basis of theoretical
arguments using the concepts of dimensional analysis and self-similarity. The model
predictions have been compared with the experimental results and are in good
agreement.
Keywords: Dimension analysis; Fatigue; frequency; Overload.
INTRODUCTION plain concrete by combining Paris law with

size effect law. Slowik et al. (1996) have
It is well known that, most of the concrete
proposed a model for low cycle fatigue under
structures are subjected to more or less severe
variable amplitude loading by performing
cyclic loadings such as traffic loads, wind
experiments on wedge splitting test
loads, vibrations due to operating machinery
specimens. Sain and Chandra Kishen (2007)
etc.Such loading causes a steady decrease in
have proposed a model for plain concrete to
the load carrying capacity and the stiffness of
incorporate the influence of loading
structures causing failure of structures at
frequency. Ray and Chandra Kishen (2010)
much lower stress than the ultimate strength
have proposed an analytical model for
of the material. Thus, the consideration of the
estimating fatigue crack propagation in plain
effects of fatigue loading is indispensable for
concrete by using the concepts of
the design of concrete structure in both
dimensional analysis. The authors have
economic and safety point of view.
suggested that the use of global energy
One of the first and most widely used fracture parameters is more suitable in concrete than
mechanics based fatigue crack propagation the local stress approach. Ray and Chandra
model commonly known as Paris law was (2012) modified the previous model to
proposed by Paris and Erdogen (1963). include the effects of overloads.
Aforementioned model were developed
Existing methods for the prediction of fatigue
mainly for metals. In order to make these
crack propagation are mostly empirical.
models applicable to concrete many
Since, these methods do not consider various
researchers have attempted to modify Paris
fundamental material parameters the resulting
law. Bazant and Xu (1991) have modified the
information may not be applicable to other
Paris law to incorporate the size effect in
design cases with different loading
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sonarfce@iitr.ac.in 461

Jeshna et al.
configurations or boundary conditions. written as,

Frequency of loading has a significant
influence on the fatigue life at high stress
levels. Thus, a new fatigue crack propagation Table 1.Various parameters with
model has been proposed in this work which
dimensions.
incorporates the existence of fracture process
zone, effect of overload and loading Parameters Dimension
frequency. Change in energy release(GI) FL-1

Maximum energy FL-1
ANALYTICAL FORMULATION release(G1max)
Goverlod - Gnormallod (G1) FL-1
In this section, a fatigue crack propagation
Frequency of loading () T-1
model has been proposed for plain concrete
Tensile strength (t) FL-2
using the concepts of dimensional analysis
Thermal diffusion coefficient L2T-1
and intermediate asymptotic. Fatigue crack ()
propagation phenomenon is generally Structural size (D) L
described in the stable regime of crack Crack length (a) L
growth curve thereby exhibiting intermediate
asymptotic behaviour. Assuming that GF,t and  have physically
independent dimensions and applying
Crack growth rate (da/dN) in a concrete
Buckingham P theorem to Eq.(1), crack
member subjected to variable amplitude
growth rate can be expressed in terms of non-
cyclic loading depends on various factors
dimensional parameters as given below,
such as material properties, loading
characteristics and geometric properties.The
loading parameters which influence the crack
Non-dimensional quantities are,
propagation behavior are the change energy
release rate range  GI  , energy release
corresponding the upper fatigue load (GImax)
and the change in energy release due to the
application of overload  GI  defined as The dimensionless parameter1, is a function
of energy release rate (GI) range and the
(Goverload  Gnormalload ) . In addition to these
fracture energy. It is well known that crack
parameters, crack growth is governed by growth rate strongly depends on the energy
material properties such as tensile strength, release rate range G1 and cannot be
fracture toughness (GF), thermal diffusion eliminated from the crack propagation model.
coefficient ( c ), loading frequency ( w ) and Hence, an assumption of incomplete self-
characteristic size of the structure (D). Use of similarity is made for this parameter.
GF is more useful than KIC for quasi-brittle
materials due to the heterogeneous nature and
presence of large size process zone. Assuming incomplete self-similarity in other
dimensionless parameters P2 ,P3 ,P5 above
Various crack growth governing variables
with their dimensions are listed in Table 1. Equation can be re-written as
Dependence of crack growth rate da/dN with
the governing parameters can be can be
462
Fatigue Analysis of Concrete Members under Variable Amplitude Cyclic Loading
Where coefficients g1 ,g 2 ,g 3 and g 4 and the amplitude nature. However, the parameter F
function can be obtained through an error will capture the acceleration effect which
minimization technique using available occurs due to sudden insertion of a higher
experimental results. amplitude cycle and will not remain constant.
To modify the value of F to include the
CALIBRATION OF THE PROPOSED effect of overload, calibration has been
MODEL carried out again using the same specimen
taking the whole loading region. The derived
The coefficients introduced in the proposed
model described in Eq. (4) are determined in expression for  is given as,
this section through calibration with the
experimental results of Shah (Shah, 2009). Where, FD is the value obtained when only
Shah has conducted tests on three
the constant amplitude loading region is
geometrically similar three point bend beam
considered. Values of a, b and c are 1, 80.362
specimens of different sizes under sinusoidal
and 0.001 respectively.Further, similar
loading of varying amplitude. The loading
expression for FD corresponding P5 are
data applied during the experimental program
is given in Figure 1. obtained for small, medium and large
specimens.
VALIDATION OF PROPOSED
MODEL
To verify the applicability of the proposed
model with other specimens, validation study
has been done. The experimental results of
constant amplitude cyclic load test conducted
Figure 1. Loading pattern used in the on three geometrically similar three point
experiment. bend beam specimens by Bazant and Xu
(1991) has been used.Crack growth rate have
In the proposed model it can be noted that the been plotted against stress intensity factor
dimensionless parameter F is a function of range KInormalized with the independent
s t D G F and DG1 G F . For constant fracture toughness KIf. Figures 2-4 show the
amplitude loading the value of DG1 will be comparison of rate of crack growth obtained
zero. Hence, considering F as a constant for through the model predictions with
constant amplitude loading case, the values experimental result.
of coefficients g1 ,g 2 ,g 3 and g 4 was obtained
through error minimization principle using
least square technique and are found to be
1.457, 0.774, 0.430, -0.016, and 7.308
respectively. To carry out the calibration
study, experimental results on medium sized
specimens were used. It is to be noted that,
the coefficients are determined considering
Figure 2.Validation of proposed model for
the experimental data points of constant
small specimens (Bazant and Xu, 1991)
463
Jeshna et al.
Materials Journal 88(4) 390–399.

Paris P and Erdogan F 1963 A critical
analysis of crack propagation laws
Journal of Basic Engineering
Transactions of ASME 85(4) 528–533.
Ray S and Chandra Kishen J M 2012 Fatigue
crack growth due to overloads in plain
concrete using scaling laws Sadhana 37.
Ray S and Chandra Kishen J M 2010 Fatigue
crack propagation model and size effect
Figure 3. Validation of proposed model in concrete using dimensional analysis
for medium specimens (Bazant and Xu, Mechanics of Materials 43(129) 75–86.
1991).
Sain T and Chandra Kishen J M 2007
Prediction of fatigue strength in plain
and reinforced concrete beams ACI
Structural Journal 104(5) 621–628.
Slowik V Plizzari G A and Saouma V E 1996
Fracture of concrete under variable
amplitude fatigue loading ACI Materials
Journal 93(3) 272–283.
Figure 4. Validation of proposed model

for large specimens (Bazant and Xu,
1991).
CONCLUSION
In this paper, an analytical model has been
proposed to predict fatigue life and analyze
the cracking behavior in concrete members
when subjected to variable amplitude cyclic
loading.
The model has been developed using the
principles of fracture mechanics in
conjunction with the concept of dimensional
analysis and self-similarity. The proposed
model considers the effect loading frequency.
REFERENCES
Bazant Z P and Xu 1991 Size effect in
fatigue fracture of concrete ACI
464
ICCMS2016
MIXED MODE STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR AND CRACK GROWTHS

MODELING OF DOUBLE EDGE CRACKS LAMINATED COMPOSITE
PLATE SUBJECTED TO TENSILE AND SHEAR LOADINGS USING
XFEM
LAL A1*, MULANI S. B.2, KAPANIA R. K.3. and SINGH B.N.4
1
SVNIT Surat, India.
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering and Mechanics, The university of Albama
3
Aerospace and Ocean Engineering, Virginia Tech
4
Department of Aerospace Engineering , IIT, Kharagpur. India.
Abstract: The normalized mixed mode stress intensity factor (MMSIF) and crack
growth analysis of multiple edge cracks orthotropic composite plate subjected to
biaxial tensile and shear loadings using extended finite element method (XFEM) is
evaluated. The interaction integral (M-integral) is used for the evaluation of MMSIF.
The global tracking crack growth algorithm is used to evaluate the crack propagation
path. Typical numerical results are presented to examine the different crack angle,
crack offset distance and uniaxial tensile, shear and combined loadings on the first
and second mode SIF of laminated composite plate.
INTRODUCTION discontinuities which avoid the

implementation of new nodes through the
During applications, the composite material
cohesive segments. This method allows
structures are subjected different types of
discontinuities to be represented
loadings as tension, shear and combination of
independently of the element boundaries and
both. The effect of these loadings on the
applied to number of applications in the field
crack growth and mixed mode SIF of double
of fracture mechanics for modelling and
edge crack composite structural plate are
simulation of structural problems involved
extremely important for reliability and safety
with different types of internal and external
of the structures. In conventional finite
cracks, holes, notches, and interfaces.
element method, the modeling of evolving
discontinuities is cumbersome and time FORMULATION
consuming due to the requirement of The discrete system of linear equations in the
updating the mesh continuously at each step XFEM in global form using linear fracture
of crack growth/increment, to match the mechanics can be written as [Asadpoure,
geometry and discontinuity or singularities. 2006]
This presents unique challenges along with
KU = F (1)
accuracy and convergence requirement.
Where K is the stiffness matrix, U is the
These difficulties can be overcome by
vector of degrees of freedom for nodes (for
XFEM. The main advantage of the XFEM is
both classical FEM and enriched ones by X-
its capability in modeling discontinuities
FEM) and F is the vector of external force.
independently, so the mesh is prepared
The global matrix and vectors are calculated
without considering the existence of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: achchhelal@med.svnit.ac.in 465

Lal et al.
by assembling matrices and vectors of each In the present crack growth analysis of
element. K and F for each element are double edge cracks laminated composite
defined as plate, Global tracking crack growth algorithm
 K ijuu K ijua K ijub  proposed is used that traces all discontinuity
  paths at once and does not need to be
K ije =  K ijau K ijaa K ijab  (2)
 K ij K ij K ij 
bu ba bb evaluated at each individual crack
  propagation step Dumstorff 2007 This
{ }
T algorithm shows satisfactory results in
Where Fi e = Fi u Fi a Fi bt 1 Fi bt 2 Fi bt 3 Fi bt 4 (3)
predicting the crack paths and can be easily
and U is the vector of nodal parameters and elegantly be incorporated into the X-
FEM algorithm by constructing function ψ
U = {u a bt1 bt 2 bt 3 bt 4 } (4)
T
whose ISO-lines run perpendicular to the
direction of principal stresses in all
=
where K ijrs ∫ (B ) DB sj d Ω
r T
i (r,s=u,a,b) (5)
Ωe integration points of the investigated
structure. However, this comes at the cost of
=fi u ∫L
Γt
i f t dΓ + ∫L i f bt d Ω (6) solving additional global system of equations
Ωe
with one degree of freedom per node.
= ∫L H f dΓ + ∫LH f d Ω (7)
bt
fi a i
t
i An ISO-line in the region Ω is then defined
Γt Ω e
as
= ∫L F f d Γ + ∫ Li Fβ f d Ω (β=1,2,3,4) (8)
btβ t bt
fi i β
Γt Ωe Y=
i {x ∈ Ω ψ ( x )= ψ iY } (12)
Mixed Mode Stress Intensity Factor
(MMSIF)
The normalized MMSIF of multiple edge
For evaluating the mixed mode stress
intensity factors K I and K II of the cracks composite plate subjected to uniaxial
homogenous orthotropic plates considered in tensile, shear and combined loadings are
the present study, the domain integral method evaluated using computer programme coded
as explained by R Asadpoure (2006) is used. in MATLAB [R2014a] environment through
The mixed mode SIFs associated with
X-FEM approach.
auxiliary and actual states can be evaluated
by calculating M and solving a system of In all examples, the following average
linear algebraic equations as
material parameters which are being the
M (1) =
2 N11 K I + N12 , and M (2) =+
N12 K I 2 N 22 K II (9)
function of independent engineering
where
constants (E ij ,υ ij , G ij , i, j = 1, 2.) are used for
s µ +µ  s  1  s11
N11 =
− 22 Im  1 2  , N12 =
− 22 Im   + Im ( µ1 µ2 ) all orthotropic and laminated composite
2 µ µ
 1 2  2  µ1 µ2  2
plates considered in this study as given by
…….. (10)
s Mohammadi (2008)
− 11 Im ( µ1 + µ 2 ) (11)
N 22 =
2 E11 ν 12 E′
E′
= ,ν ′
E11 E22 = ν 12 ν 21 ,=
δ4 = κ′
,= −ν ′
Crack growth analysis and propagation E22 ν 21 2G12
paths with MSIFs variation whereE11, E11, G12, a, α, θ and P(σ, τ and ρ)
are Young’s modulii, shear modulus, crack
length, crack angle, lamination angle and
466
Mixed Mode Stress Intensity Factor and Crack Growths Modeling of Double Edge Cracks Laminated
Composite Plate Subjected to Tensile and Shear Loadings using XFEM
stresses, respectively. The external stress P is simultaneously and starts oscillating which
assumed as uniaxial tensile (σ), shear (τ) and shows mixed mode fracture failure. From the
combined loading (ρ), respectively. Figure. 1 (e-f) it is observed that the
Here E' is the efficient Young’s modulus, ν' is normalized second mode SIF(KII) is greater
the effective Poisson’s ratio, δ4 is the than first mode (KI) which indicates that
stiffness ratio, and κ' is the shear parameter. though the crack tips show mixed mode
The following normalized mean MMSIF in failure, still (KII) shows dominant effects
the form of first mode SIF, KI and second than (KI)I in the fracture failure of the plate.
mode SIF, KII for tensile, shear and After certain distance, crack propagates as
combined (tensile and shear) loadings are faster rate in mixed mode SIF i.e., crack plate
represented as is going along unstable direction.
= I σ π a , K11
K I K= K II σ π a for TL
= I τ π a , K11
K I K= K II τ π a for SL
KI I (σ and τ ) π a , K11
K= K II (σ and τ ) π a
for CL
The material properties and geometry for
double edge cracks or orthotropic materials
are used in the present analysis as (unless
otherwise stated)
For double edge crack: E1=144.8 GPa, (a)
E2=10.12 GPa, G12=9.66 GPa, v12=0.27
with L=80 mm, W=10 mm and a= 4 mm in
both of the edges (unless otherwise stated). 4
Crack-1 Crack Tip
Enrichme nt Crack-2
The parameters h and W are the total length 2
and width of the plate, respectively as shown
0
in Figure. 1 (a). The crack tip and crack face
-2
enrichment functions are shown in Table 1 Crack Face
Enrichme nt
(b). Figure.1 (c) shows the stress contour of -4
0 2 4 6 8 10
crack tip and crack face enrichment
functions. It is observed that at crack tip, the (b)
stress shows highest value. Hence it is x 10
8
40
conclude that crack will propagate from tip 30 14
12
due to the highest stress. The mixed mode 20
10
crack propagation paths when combined 10
8
0 6
loadings (tensile and shear) are applied -10 4
simultaneously as shown in Figure. 1(d). In -20

2
0
the first step crack propagates in mode I and -30
-2
further it shows oscillations which indicates -40

0 2 4 6 8 10
that the crack direction becomes unstable.

(c)
This is due to the fact that, after the first step,
because of combined stresses applied the
crack tips may get slide and open
467
Lal et al.
CONCLUSION
6
The stochastic extended finite element
4 method (XFEM) is used to evaluate the
2
normalized mixed mode SIF of double edge
cracks orthotropic plate subjected to uni-axial
0
tensile, shear and combined loadings. The
-2 following conclusions can be noted from the
0 2 4 6 8 10 limited study. The normalized mixed mode
(d) SIF goes on increasing with increase the
crack length. The crack growth directions in
40
Crack1
Crack2
both of the cracks show different crack paths.
The crack near to loading is propagating
Normalized SIF KI
30
faster as compared to crack away from the
20
loading.
10
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
0
0 2 4 6 Financial support for the first author was
Number of crack growth steps
provided by Indo-US Research Fellowship
(e) Programme under the Indo-US Science and
Technology Forum (IUSSTF), under grant
40
Crack1 No. FELLOWSHIP/2012/ACHCHHE
Crack2
LAL/14-2012.
Normalized SIF KII
30
20 REFERENCES
10
Asadpoure A Mohammadi S Vafai A 2006
Crack analysis in orthotropic media
0
0 2 4 6
using the extended finite element
Number of crack growth steps
method Thin walled Struc 44(9)1031 –
(f) 1038.
Belytschko T Black T 1999 Elastic crack
Figure 1. Crack propagation path for off-
growth in finite elements with minimal
set double edge cracked [0/60°/60°/0]
remeshing Int J Num Meth Engrg 45(5)
laminated composite rectangular plate
601–620.
with left edge crack eccentric (e y /h=0.08)
subjected to tensile and shear stresses Dumstorff P Meschke G 2007 Crack
(a) geometry of the plate (b) enrichment propagation criteria in the framework of
using XFEM (c) stress contour (d) crack XFEM based structural analyses Int J
growth analysis (e) variation of Numer Anal Meth Geomech 31 239–
normalized K I with each step of crack 259.
growth, (f) variation of normalized K II with
each step of crack growth.
468
ICCMS2016
MECHANICS OF FRACTURE OF POROUS BULK METALLIC GLASSES

HAJARE R. and TANDAIYA P.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, Mumbai, India
Abstract: Bulk metallic glasses (BMGs) are relatively newly developed materials which
have some unique mechanical properties like high strength and reasonable fracture
initiation toughness but have negligible tensile ductility and zero crack propagation
toughness. Porous BMGs have been recently developed in an attempt to overcome some
of the limitations of monolithic BMGs. The pores may act as barriers to a propagating
crack and may improve propagation toughness of BMGs, which may widen their
application areas. It has been shown that porous BMGs can exhibit high compressive
ductility. However, the fracture behavior of porous BMGs has not been studied so far. In
this work, the fracture behavior of porous BMGs is investigated using the finite element
method. Simulations of crack propagation are carried out using a damage plasticity model
and element removal technique. Different pore sizes and pore densities are found to have
different effects on the load carrying capacity. It is found that some combination of pore
size and density may be favorable while some other combination may be unfavorable
with regards to improvement in load carrying capacity.
Keywords: Bulk amorphous alloys; Porous bulk metallic glasses; Finite element
analysis
INTRODUCTION voids and try to study the effect of voids in it to

improve its overall mechanical properties.
Bulk metallic glasses (BMGs) have a unique
Wada et al. (2006, 2007) studied mechanical
combination of superior properties that make
behavior of porous Pd-based specimens of
them attractive candidates for structural
different pore sizes and density. They
applications. They have high yield strength
measured 18.8% plastic strain to failure in
(~2-4 GPa), high yield strain (≈2%), high
uniaxial compression but 0% ductility in
elastic modulus (E) in the range of 47–102
tension. In contrast to Wada’s result Sarac
GPa, good corrosion resistance and moderate
(2013) tested a Zr-Ti-Cu-Be alloy having
fracture toughness (Schuh 2007). But, in spite
multiple through holes with a particular pattern
of having very high strength, most BMGs do
of orientation under tensile loading which
not exhibit global ductility. This leads to
showed 5.5% plastic strain.
inferior fracture response. Lack of strain
hardening and crack propagation barriers like Tandaiya et al. (2007, 2008) studied the mode I
grain boundaries causes BMGs to fail stationary crack tip fields in monolithic BMGs
catastrophically. Most BMGs show zero crack under plane strain small scale yielding
propagation toughness. To overcome this conditions. However, no attempt has been
drawback scientists have come up with a new made to study the crack propagation behavior
idea of porous BMGs which contains tiny of porous BMGs which is the objective of the
present work.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail 469

Hajare and Tandaiya
CONSTITUTIVE MODEL Figure 1. Schematic of S4PB specimen

used for simulation
In this study, the Mohr-Coulomb type
constitutive model proposed by Anand and Su Material properties used for study are E=97
(2005) within the finite deformation framework GPa, Poisson’s ratio=0.36, c o =890 MPa, b=120
is used. Also, a damage plasticity model is MPa, g 0 =0.4, strain rate sensitivity parameter,
used to simulate fracture by shear localization. m=0.02, γ c =0.1 and γ f =0.25. Appropriate mass
The equivalent plastic shear strain is denoted scaling is done to speed up the quasistatic
by γ and the damage variable by ‘d’ which calculations.
evolves as:
γ − γc RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
𝑑=
γf − γc MODE I CRACK PROPAGATION IN
where, γ C is the critical plastic shear strain at MONOLITHIC BULK METALLIC
damage initiation and γ f is the plastic shear GLASSES
strain at full damage or material failure. The Figure.2(a) shows an experimental micrograph
cohesion or shear yield strength, c, varies of monolithic Zr-based BMG (Vitreloy-1)
linearly with damage ‘d’ as having composition as
c= c damini (1-d ) Zr 41.2 Ti 13.8 Cu 12.5 Ni 10 Be 22.5, which shows
multiple shear bands form around the notch but
where, c damini is the value of cohesion at crack propagates only through a dominant
damage initiation. The damage variable ‘d’ shear band. In this case crack does not
varies linearly towards unity while propagate in the plane ahead of the notch, but
corresponding cohesion c drops linearly to deviates slightly from notch plane downward.
zero. When cohesion vanishes in a given Also, secondary cracks develop at the notch
element, the material is deemed to have failed
and the element is removed from the
calculations. The above model is incorporated
in the general purpose finite element code
ABAQUS/Explicit through a user material
subroutine VUMAT.
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL root.

(a) (b)
A symmetric four point bend specimen having
60 µm central notch and dimensions as Figure 2. (a) Optical micrograph of
specified in Figure.1 is used in this study. A fractured Vitreloy-1 S4PB specimen
plane strain iso-parametric element CPE4R is showing crack propagation trajectory is
employed. The mesh comprises of total number along the dominant shear band, (b)
of 77260 elements and 77967 nodes. Analysis Contour plot of von-Mises stress near the
is carried out by pushing the top two pins at notch tip showing the propagation of crack.
loading rate 5x10-4 mm.s-1. 2500
Experimental
simulation
2000
1500
Load(N))
1000
500
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25
Displacement(mm)
470
Mechanics of Fracture of Porous Bulk Metallic Glasses
Figure 3. Comparison of load vs. load point BMG sample. Main reason for this variation in
displacement curves for S4PB specimen load carrying capacity is as an affinity of pores
from experiment and FE simulation. to notch. Figure.5 shows contours of
logarithmic plastic strain in front of notch. It
Figure 2(b) shows a contour plot of von-Mises
can be observed that at the same load point
stress near the crack tip from FE simulation. It
displacement, specimen 3 shows plastic strain
shows a similar pattern of crack propagation
near the pore as well, which reduces the stress
(diversion from the notch plane) and secondary
concentration effect around the pore and
crack development around notch (see Figure.
redistributes the stresses developed ahead of
6(b)) as in experimental study. Load versus
the notch leading to increase in load carrying
load point displacement curves from
capacity of specimen 3.
experiment and FE simulation are presented in
Figure.3. It can be observed that the peak load Table 1. Load carrying capacity of different
is well captured in the simulations. samples
MODE I CRACK PROPAGATION IN Load

Specimen
POROUS BULK METALLIC GLASSES Description Capacity
No.
(N)
Till date, no study is available related to 1 Monolithic BMG 2140
mechanics of fracture of porous BMGs. But a
similar problem was studied by Aravas and 5% pore density
2 945
McMeeking (1985) and Tvergaard and and pore size 40 µm
Hutchinson (2002) for polycrystalline 2% pore density
materials. Similar methodology can be adopted 3 2550
and pore size 20 µm
for study of mechanics of fracture of porous
BMGs by finite element analysis. In this study,
pores are placed in front of notch in different
combination of sizes and orientation.
(a) (b)
Figure 5: (a) Specimen 3 shows plastic
strain develops near pore before crack
propagates, (b) Specimen 2 does not show
Figure 4. FE Mesh near notch and pores of
plastic strain near pore at crack initiation.
5% pore density and 40 μm pore size
Figure.4 shows the FE mesh around pore and
notch having 40 µm pore size and 5% pore
density (specimen-2). The mesh comprises of
total 91456 elements and 93959 nodes. Another
mesh is created with 20 µm pore size and 2%
pore density (specimen-3). Table 1 shows that
the load carrying capacity of specimen-2
decreases to 45% while it increases for (a) (b)
specimen-3 by 20% as compared to monolithic
471
Hajare and Tandaiya
Figure 6. (a) Near notch tip view showing blunting crack tip J. Mech. Phys. Solids
suppression of secondary crack in porous 33(1) 25-49.
BMG, (b) Near notch tip view showing Baran Sarac & Jan Schroers 2013 Designing
development of secondary cracks in tensile ductility in metallic glasses Nature
monolithic BMG Communications 4:2158 DOI:
It can be observed in Figure.6 that secondary 10.1038/ncomms3158
cracks develop ahead of monolithic BMG but Christopher A Schuh Todd C Hufnagel
not in case of porous BMG. Upadrasta Ramamurty 2007 Mechanical
Direction of propagation of crack in monolithic behavior of amorphous alloys Acta
BMG is slightly out of plane (seen in Figure. Materialia 55 4067–4109
2(b)) but in porous BMG, it is through pores Parag Tandaiya Narasimhan R Ramamurty U
which lie ahead of the notch and in the plane of 2007 Mode I crack tip fields in
notch as seen in Figure.7. amorphous materials with application
tometallic glasses Acta Materialia 55
6541–6552
Takeshi Wada Akihisa Inoue A Lindsay Greer
2007 Mechanical properties of porous
bulk glassy alloy prepared in high-
pressure hydrogen atmosphere Materials
Science and Engineering A 449–451 958–
Figure 7. Crack propagates through pores 961
and in notch plane for porous BMG
Takeshi Wada and Makoto Kinaka 2006 Effect
CONCLUSIONS of volume fraction and geometry of pores
on mechanical properties of porous bulk
In this work, the Anand and Su (2005) glassy Pd42.5Cu30Ni7.5P20 alloys
constitutive model with damage plasticity is Materials Research Society J. Mater. Res.
used for FE simulation of crack propagation in 21(4) 1041-1047
both monolithic as well as porous BMGs. The
5% pore density and 40 µm pore size specimen Tandaiya P Narasimhan R and Ramamurty
shows less load carrying capacity while 2% 2011 On numerical implementation of an
pore density and 20 µm pore size specimen isotropic elastic-viscoplastic constitutive
shows increase in load carrying capacity over model for bulk metallic glasses.
monolithic BMGs. It is because of effect Modelling and Simulation in Material
development of plastic strain near the pore and Science and Engineering 19 015002
secondary crack development after crack (19pp)
propagation. Tandaiya P Ramamurty U Ravichandran G and
Narasimhan R 2008, Effect of Poisson’s
REFERENCES ratio on crack tip fields and fracture
Anand L Su C 2005 A theory for amorphous behavior of metallic glasses Acta
viscoplastic materials undergoing finite Materialia 56 6077-6086
deformations, with application to metallic Viggo Tvergaard John W Hutchinson 2002
glasses Journal of the Mechanics and Two mechanisms of ductile fracture: void
Physics of Solids 53 1362–1396. by void growth versus multiple void
Aravas N and Mcmeeking R M 1985 Finite interaction International Journal of Solids
element analysis of void growth near a and Structures 39 3581–3597.
472
ICCMS2016
MESH FREE ANALYSIS OF CRACKED PANEL REPAIRED BY

BONDED COMPOSITE PATCH
PATHAK H.1, SINGH A.*2 and SINGH I.V.3
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Shiv Nadar University, Gautam Buddha Nagar, India.
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Patna, Patna, India.
3
Department of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering, IIT Roorkee, Roorkee, India.
Abstract: This paper presents a meshfree extended element free Galekrin method
(XEFGM) approach to analyze three-dimensional composite patch repair problem
under thermal and mechanical loads. In XEFGM approach, extrinsic enrichment
technique is employed to capture material and crack discontinuities in the physical
model. The location of geometric discontinuity is traced by vector level set method. A
domain based J-integral approach is used for the evaluation of stress intensity factors.
Effectiveness of applied patch is dependent on patch material, patch size, patch shape
and adhesive material. The implemented methodology used to investigate patch repair
effectiveness in terms of stress intensity factors (SIFs).
Keywords: Patch Repaired Crack Panel; XEFGM; SIFs; Thermo-elastic cracks.
INTRODUCTION FEM has been used with considerable

success to solve such problems. However, it
The technique of repairing cracked metallic is not well suited certain problems such as
aircraft structures using composite materials crack propagation, large deformation,
is known as “cracked patching” and was plasticity and thermo-mechanical simulations
developed by Alan Baker in 1980s (Baker of elasto-plastic fracture problems. Meshfree
1980). The composite reinforcement, also methods [Belytschko et al., 1994] are the
known as patch, can be attached to weakened natural choice for the analysis of such
structure either by mechanical fastener or problems. Many challenging engineering
adhesive bonding. Adhesively bonded problems can be solved much more easily
composite patches have several advantages with improved accuracy using these methods.
over mechanical fastened repairing method The principal attraction of the XEFGM is
such as increased strength and fatigue life their capacity to deal with moving
and effective crack retardation, etc. From the discontinuities such as phase changes and
literature survey conducted so far, adhesively crack propagation. To analyse these
bonded composite patch repair technique has problems, the XEFGM utilizes the
been used to restore or extend the service life asymptotic enrichment functions derived
of the cracked structural components. Most from the crack tip displacement fields.
of the work on patch repairing is performed Extrinsic partition of unity (PU) approach has
experimentally. Conventional methods such been applied locally to capture geometric
as finite element method (FEM) and discontinuity in the domain. Instead of entire
boundary element method (BEM) were used domain, only few nodes are selected near the
for analysis of such problems. So far, the crack for the enrichment as shown in figure1.
______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:akhil@iitp.ac.in 473

Pathak et al.
Split enriched nodes model the three-dimensional body with crack

and material discontinuity, primary variable
approximation can be written as (Fleming et
al., 1997),
u j  H (x)a j   (x)b j 
 
   
j  ns j  nr
n
 
u (x)   φ j (x)
h 4
 (1)
  B (x)c j

j 1 
  1
 
 j  nt 
Crack tip RESULTS

enriched nodes
The problem geometry along with boundary
condition is shown in Figure 2.Simulations
Figure 1: XEFGM Domain.
are performed under mechanical as well as
The XEFGM is selected for analysing the thermo elastic loading conditions. A typical
composite patch repair problem. The scope of XEFGM discretised patch repaired domain is
this work comprises implementation of presented in Figure 3.
XEFGM approach for composite patching
over a metallic sheet. A generalized in-house
MATLAB code has been developed to
understand effect of thermo-mechanical load
over composite patch repairing panel.
METHODOLOGY
The XEFGM utilizes moving least square

(MLS) approximation scheme (Belytschkoet Fig. 2: Edge crack plate with patch.
al, 1994b) to approximate an unknown
variable. In EFGM, both trial and test
functions are constructed using MLS
approximants. In XEFGM, the geometrical
discontinuity due to the presence of
crack/material interface is captured by
extrinsic enrichment of displacement Fig. 3: Patch domain with nodal points
approximation using partition of unity. In this Stess field contour  ZZ  obtained of a single
method, approximation is augmented by
side patch repaired panel fora crack size of
enrichment functions, which are added
a  15 mm is shown in Figure 4under
extrinsically in the existing standard EFGM
mechanical loading condition.The mode-I
approximation. To capture the effect of crack
stress intensity factor obtained by XEFGM is
(strong) discontinuities in the domain,
shown in Figure 5.
Heaviside and crack tip enrichment functions
are used whereas material (weak)
discontinuities are modelled by a signed
distance enrichment function. In order to
474
Meshfree Modelling and Analysis of Cracked Panel Repaired by Bonded Composite Patch
the same effect as developed by the

mechanical load, but quantitatively the
effects were found different.
REFERENCES
Baker AA and Jones R 1988 Bonded repair

of aircraft structures Kluwer Academic
Publishers New York.
Belytschko T Gu L and Lu YY 1994a
Fracture and Crack growth by Element
free Galerkin Methods Modelling and
Simulation in Materials Science and
Belytscko T Lu Y Y and Gu L
1994bElement-free Galerkin Methods,
Figure 4. Stress σzz (MPa) contour plots
International Journal of Numerical
of single sided patch repair plate (a) un-
patched side and (b) patch repaired side Methods in Engineering 37 229-256.
Fleming M Chu YAMoran B and Belytschko
24
KI (Without Patch under Mechanical Load) T 1997 Enriched element-free Galerkin
22
KI (Patch under Mechanical Load) methods for crack tip fields
20 KI (Without Patch under Thermal Shock)
KI (Patch under Thermal Shock)
18
Methods in Engineering 40(8) 1483-
SIFs (MPa-m1/2)
16
1504.
14
12
10
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Crack length (mm)
Figure 5: SIF KI (MPa-m1/2) variation with

crack length under mechanical and
thermal loads with and without patch
repaired panel
CONCLUSIONS
This work describes the numerical simulation

of the composite patching in structure panel
under thermo-elastic loading by extended
element-free Galerkin method. A generalized
in-house MATLAB codes have been
developed to perform numerical simulations
for 3-D patch repaired crack problems.
During simulations, it has been noticed that
thermal shock loading qualitatively develops
475
ICCMS2016
DETERMINATION OF SIZE INDEPENDENT FRACTURE ENERGY

FOR VARIOUS GRADES OF CONCRETE BEAMS- THREE
APPROACHES
HEMALATHA T.*, RAMACHANDRA MURTHY A. and ARAVINDAN M.
CSIR-SERC, Chennai, Tamilnadu, India.
Abstract: Size independent fracture energy (GF) which is a material property of

concrete is highly dependent on size of the fracture process zone (FPZ) and size of the
specimen. The general conception about FPZ is that it increases with increase in size
of specimen, however, the rate of increase is not proportional to its increase in size or
more appropriately this phenomena can be defined with the help of uncracked
ligament length. In this study, using uncracked ligament length (energy release rate
approach), size independent fracture energy is determined for various grades of
concrete (ranging from normal to ultra-high strength). The GF thus obtained are
compared with other two models namely boundary effect and RILEM work of
fracture method. It is found that the GF obtained through energy release rate is in good
agreement with that obtained from other two methods.
Keywords: Size independent fracture energy; Bilinear; Energy release rate; Fracture
process zone
INTRODUCTION fracture energies: size dependent (gf) and size

Concrete is a considered as a three phase independent (gf) as a result of size of FPZ.
material consisting of cement matrix, Size dependent fracture energy varies with
aggregate and interfacial transition zone the size of the specimen whereas size
(ITZ) [Shah (1995)]. Itz is accepted as the independent fracture energy is constant for all
weak link in conventional cement sizes and assumed as a material property.
composites, where initial micro cracks tend Size of FPZ increases with increase in size of
to nucleate and has the single greatest the specimens, however, increase in size of
influence on fracture properties of concrete FPZ is not proportional to the increase in size
[Landis and Bolander, 2009]. Size of the of the specimens which results in size
fracture process zone (FPZ) in a composite dependent fracture energy (Gf). The size
material depends on various mechanism such independent fracture energy of concrete is
as micro crack shielding, crack bridging, most important parameter in the fracture
interlocking of the particles etc. When a analysis of concrete and hence, determination
crack encounters an obstacle, in order to pass of GF is important. However, the
the obstacles the crack bows out which determination of GF is possible only using
makes the crack surface rougher. This leads very large specimens. Many methods have
to an increase in fracture energy dissipation been proposed by various researchers to
under static loading. Hence, fracture energy obtain size independent fracture energy in the
highly dependent on size of the FPZ and it is recent past [Duan et al., 2002, Karihaloo et
well documented that there are two types of al., 2003, Murthy et al., 2013, Muralidhara et
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: hemalatha@serc.res.in 476

Hemalatha et al.
al., 2011] without doing experiments on large  Gf 

specimens. In this study, size independent GF    (W  a) L arg e
 (W  a)  (W a )l arg e (4)
fracture energy is determined through energy
release rate method for various grades of Gf
concrete ranging from 57 to 122 MPa and the Based on this concept, W  a is determined
results are compared with that obtained from from the RILEM fracture energy for normal
RILEM and boundary effect method. strength concrete (NSC), high strength (HSC)
and ultrahigh strength (UHSC) concrete.
BACKGROUND STUDY 𝐺𝑓
𝐺𝑓 𝑑( )
𝑊−𝑎
In this study, size independent fracture From versus (W-a), slope is
𝑊−𝑎 𝑑(𝑊−𝑎)
energy is determined based on the calculated and extrapolated for large sized
relationship between fracture energy release beams. When it approaches particular (W-a)
rate and uncracked ligament length. This is value, Gf value becomes constant.
based on the concept that when ligament
length is sufficiently large, it can RESULTS
accommodate fully developed FPZ resulting 𝐺𝑓
Figure. 1 shows the typical plot of versus
in the development of constant fracture 𝑊−𝑎
𝐺𝑓
energy [Trivedi et al., 2015]. Thus, assuming 𝑑(𝑊−𝑎)
(W-a) of UHSC beams from which is
width of FPZ is constant, fracture energy is 𝑑(𝑊−𝑎)
proportional to the length of FPZ as is given calculated and extrapolated to large beams.
in equation (1) for a given strength.
G f l FPZ
(1)
Similarly, in a geometrically similar beams,
ligament length (W) is proportional to
uncracked ligament length (W-a). By
incorporating this in Equation (1), Equation
(2) is obtained as given below:
Gf l
 k FPZ
W a W (2) 𝐺𝑓
Figure 1. versus W-a for UHSC
where k is proportionality constant. 𝑊−𝑎
beams
Gf
The size independent fracture energy
Further, a plot made using W  a versus (W-
obtained using the above mentioned
a) shows that plot follows power law as given
procedure is presented in Table 1 along with
below:
the GF obtained from other two models such
Gf
 C (W  a)  as RILEM and boundary effect [Murthy,
W a (3) 2013]. It is noted that the GF obtained from
where C and β are constants. As (W-a) all the three methods are in good agreement
Gf revealing any of the methods can be used for
increases, W  a almost attains a constant the estimation of size independent fracture
value leading to size independent fracture energy.
energy.
477
Determination of Size Independent Fracture Energy for Various Grades of Concrete Beams- Three
Approaches
Table1. Size independent fracture energy for NSC, HSC and UHSC
Notch Rilem GF corrected Boundary Effect GF based on
Beam
to for P- δ tail Method (BEM) energy release
Mix Dimension
depth segment [Murthy et [Murthy et al. rate (From the
(mm)
ratio al. (2013)] (2013)] current study)
0.1 185 190 190
250x50x50 0.2
0.3
0.1
NSC 500x50x100 0.2
0.3
0.1
1000x50x200 0.2
0.3
0.1 6195 6393 6314
250x50x50 0.2
0.3
0.1
HSC 500x50x100 0.2
0.3
0.1
1000x5x200 0.2
0.3
0.1 13761 14185 13794
250x50x50 0.2
0.3
0.1
UHSC 500x50x100 0.2
0.3
0.1
1000x50x200 0.2
0.3
CONCLUSIONS material property for given grade of concrete

ranges from 57 to 122 MPa.
The size independent fracture energy of three
different grades of concrete (NSC, HSC and ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
UHSC) are evaluated and compared. It is
found that the values obtained from three Authors acknowledge with thanks the
methods are in good agreement. Hence, it is technical support provided by the
concluded that any one of the methods can be Computational structural mechanics group
used for estimating the size independent (CSMG), CSIR-SERC. This paper is being
fracture energy which is considered as a published with the kind permission of the
Director, CSIR-SERC, Chennai, India.
478
Hemalatha et al.
REFERENCES
Duan K Hu X and Wittmann, F 2002
Explanation of size effect in concrete
fracture 338 using non-uniform energy
distribution Materials and Structures 35
326-331.
Landis E N Bolander J E 2009 Explicit
representation of physical processes in
concrete fracture Journal of Physics D:
Applied Physics 42 1-17.
Karihaloo B Abdalla H and Imjai T 2003 A
simple method for determining the true
specific fracture energy of concrete
Mag. Concr. Res. 55 471-481.
Muralidhara S Prasad B Karihaloo B and
Singh R 2011 Size independent fracture
energy in plain concrete beams using tri-
linear model Construction and Building
Materials 25 3051-3058.
Murthy A R Karihaloo B and Iyer N R 2013
Determination of size-independent
specific fracture energy of concrete
mixes by two methods Cement and
Concrete Research 50 19-25.
Trivedi N Singh R K and Chattopadhyay J
2015 A comparative study on three
approaches to investigate the size
independent fracture energy of concrete
Engineering Fracture Mechanics 138
49-62.
Shah S Swartz S Ouyang C 1995 Fracture
Mechanics of Concrete: Applications of
Fracture Mechanics to Concrete, Rock
and Other Quasi-Brittle Materials John
Wiley & Sons Inc New York.
479
ICCMS2016
OBTAINING FRACTURE PROPERTIES OF FRC BY INVERSE

ANALYSIS USING THE PGSL OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM
STEPHEN S. J., RAPHAEL B. and GETTU R.*
Indian Institute of Technology, Madras India.
Abstract: The tensile fracture process in fibre reinforced concrete (FRC)can be

characterized by a cohesive stress versus crack opening curve (σ-w). The Probabilistic
Global Search Lausanne (PGSL) optimization algorithm is used in an inverse analysis
procedure developed to use experimental data from three-point bending tests on steel
fibre reinforced concrete to obtained σ-w curves. The algorithm is used to determine
the σ-w curve, with a predefined shape, that provides the best fits of the experimental
load versus crack mouth opening displacement (P-CMOD) curve.
Keywords: Optimization algorithm; Inverse analysis; Fibre reinforced concrete;
fracture; Stress-crack opening curve.
INTRODUCTION Kitsutaka, 1997;Kooiman, 2000;Østergaard,

2003; Lӧfgren et al., 2005; Sousa and Gettu,
Fibres are incorporated in concrete to
2006; Jepsen et al., 2016].The shape of the
improve the toughness and energy absorption
curve is defined in advance (bilinear,
capacity of concrete [Gopalaratnam and
trilinear, tetralinear) to best represent the
Gettu, 1995; Nayaret al., 2014]. This is due
fracture characteristics. The parameters of the
tothe crack bridging ability of the fibre in the
curve that provide the best fit of the test data
concrete, which facilitates applications in
are identified through error minimization
pavements, slab-on-grade, tunnel linings,
based on the least squares approach. In this
bridge decks, etc. The increase in toughness
paper, the experimental data of three-point
of fibre reinforced concrete can be
bending tests of steel fibre reinforced
characterized by its tensile fracture
concrete is used to illustrate the inverse
behaviour, normally represented by a stress-
analysis.
crack opening (σ-w) curve.
Hillerborg et al. (1976) proposed a non-linear
INVERSE ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
model for concrete, termed as the fictitious The inverse analysis approach begins with
crack model, which is based on the σ-w the choice of an appropriate shape or model
curve. A practical approach for obtaining the for the σ-w curve. Here, the inverse analysis
σ-w curve is by determining it indirectly from has been done with the bilinear, trilinear and
a bending test. In this paper, the Olesen tetralinear models (Figure 1). For the initial
(2001) model is implemented within an assumed σ-w curve, the P-CMOD curve, of a
optimization program using the Probabilistic three-point bend notched specimen of given
Global Search Lausanne (PGSL) algorithm to dimensions, is determined using the
determine the σ-w curve from the analytical formulation discussed later. The
experimentally obtained load-CMOD curve. optimization algorithm minimizes the error
This approach extends the work of various between the predicted response and the
researchers [e.g., Uchida et al., 1995; experimental data, in order to determine the
480
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:gettu@iitm.ac.in
Stephen et al.
best combination of values of unknown occurring during crack propagation is

model parameters. Here, the model restricted within these boundaries. The beam
parameters include the elastic modulus of the beyond the boundaries is considered as
concrete and the coefficients involved in the elastic. The concept of the non-linear hinge
multi-linear equations. The error in fitting is has previously been employed by various
computed as the sum of squares of researchers [Olesen, 2001; Lӧfgren et al.,
differences between the two curves. 2005; Sousa and Gettu, 2006; Buratti et al.,
Weighting functions are assigned to 2011] as it yields closed-formed analytical
emphasize the priority of certain region of the solutions for the entire load-crack opening
P-CMOD curve, say the peak load. When it is curve. The model is given by the equation:
not possible to get an exact match between
ε .E precrack state
the predicted curve and the experimental σ =  (1)
data, model parameters are adjusted such that  σ w ( w ) = g ( w ) . ft cracked state
regions having higher weights will have
where E – elastic modulus, ε – elastic strain,
lower error levels compared to other regions.
𝜎𝑤 (𝑤) – stress crack opening relationship
Eventually, the inverse analysis procedure
with 𝑤 – crack opening and 𝑓𝑡 – uniaxial
yields the constitutive σ-w curve of the FRC
tensile strength, and the function g(w) is
tested.
given by,
b −b
g ( w) = bi − ai w, wi −1 < w < wi = i +1 i
ai +1 − ai (2)
where b 1 = 1, w 0 = 0 and w i are the limits of

the linear branches of the stress-crack
opening relationships (Figure 1).As the crack
propagates, the stress distribution changes
from one phase to another. The stress
distributions in different phases of a
tetralinear model are shown in Figure 3.
Phase 0 corresponds to state of stress prior to
cracking. A relationship between crack
opening and stress in each phase can be
found by balancing the external forces,
Figure 1. Different analytical models. bending moment with sectional stresses.
ANALYTICAL FORMULATION
An analytical model based on the concept of
a non-linear hinge is suitable for modelling
the three-point bending test of a FRC
material. The hinge is modelled as layers of
spring elements, whose behaviour is Figure 2. Stress distribution over the
governed by the constitutive relations of depth of the beam for a tetralinear
model.
concrete in the uncracked and cracked states.
The springs are attached at each end to a
vertical rigid boundary, and the strain
481
Obtaining Fracture Properties of FRCby Inverse Analysis using the PGSL Optimization Algorithm
OPTIMIZATION SCHEME volume fraction of 0.4%.The typical load-

Inverse problems are usually solved by CMOD curve is shown in Figure 4,
minimizing the residuals using an exhibiting a strain-hardening type response.
optimization algorithm. Random search Inverse analysis has been performed using
algorithms, such as Probabilistic Global the bilinear, trilinear and tetralinear models,
Search Lausanne (PGSL), have been used to and the resultant P-CMOD curves are
solve system identification problems in the compared with the experimental data. It
areas of structural monitoring and optics could be seen that the P-CMOD curves
(Raphael and Smith, 2003). The optimization obtained using the trilinear and tetralinear
algorithm used in this research is a variation models yield significantly better fits than the
of PGSL in which random search is curves obtained using the bilinear model
combined with gradient descent. (Figure 3). The curve obtained using the
PGSL is a direct search algorithm that tetralinear model fits the tail part of the post-
employs random sampling in order to find the peak regime best. The drawback of complex
global minimum of a user defined objective models, such as trilinear and tetralinear, is
function. Solution points are generated by that the optimization algorithm converged to
randomly selecting values of optimization different solutions depending on the initial
variables within the specified bounds. A trial solution, which necessitated several trial
probability density function (PDF) is created runs to get unambiguous results. The final σ-
for each variable, which is used to generate w curves obtained using all three models are
the values. To start with a uniform PDF is presented in Figure 4.
used. As search progresses, the PDF is
updated such that there is higher probability
in areas where good solutions are found. In
the variation of PGSL used in this work, a
gradient descent is performed during the
search for faster convergence.
ILLUSTRATIVE APPLICATION
The test procedure followed in this work for
the flexural toughness characterization
conforms to the EN 14651:2005 (E) standard.
The test configuration of the three-point bend Figure 3.Load-CMOD curves obtained for
(3PB) notched prism using which the load SFRC beam using σ-w models.
versus crack mouth opening displacement (P-
CONCLUSIONS
CMOD) curve is obtained. The dimensions of
the beam are 150×150×700 mm, with a span The development of a procedure for the
of 500 mm; a notch of 25 mm depth is cut at inverse analysis of notched beam test data, to
the mid-span of the beam. The experiment is obtain bilinear, trilinear and tetralinear stress-
performed under closed-loop control, which crack opening curves of FRC, using the
is essential for obtaining stable response PGSL random search algorithm, is presented.
(Gettu et al., 1996).The inverse analysis An example is presented to validate the
approach has been applied here to the data approach for fibre reinforced concrete.
obtained from tests of fibre reinforced Inverse analyses showed good convergence
concrete with a characteristic compressive with all three models. The tetralinear model
strength of 35 MPa having a steel fibre yielded the best fit of the tail portion of the
post-peak regime. The proposed procedure 482
Stephen et al.
can give σ-w curves to be used as an input for Kitsutaka Y 1997 Fracture Parameters by
numerical analysis. Polylinear Tension-Softening Analysis
Journal of Engineering Mechanics123
444–450.
Kooiman A G 2000Modelling Steel Fibre
Reinforced Concrete for Structural
DesignPh.D. Thesis Technical
University of Delft.
Löfgren I Stang H and Olesen J F 2005
Fracture Properties of FRC Determined
through Inverse Analysis of Wedge
FIGURE 4. Σ-W CURVES OBTAINED
Splitting and Three-Point Bending
FROM INVERSE ANALYSIS.
Tests. Journal of Advanced Concrete
REFERENCES Technology3 423–434.
Buratti N Mazzotti C and Savoia M 2011 Nayar S K Gettu R and Krishnan S C 2014
Post-cracking behaviour of steel and Characterisation of the toughness of
macro-synthetic fibre-reinforced fibre reinforced concrete – Revisited in
concretes Construction and Building the Indian context The Indian Concrete
Materials252713–2722. Journal 88 8-23.
EN 14651 2005 Test method for metallic Olesen J F 2001 Fictitious crack propagation
fibred concrete - Measuring the flexural in fibre reinforced concrete beams
tensile strength (limit of proportionality Journal of Engineering Mechanics127
(LOP) residual) European specification 272–280.
for sprayed concrete-EFNARC
Østergaard L 2003Early-Age Fracture
Guidelines.
Mechanics and Cracking of Concrete
Gettu R Mobasher B Carmona S and Jansen Ph.D. Thesis Technical University of
D C 1996 Testing of Concrete under Denmark.
Closed-Loop Control Advanced Cement
Raphael B and Smith I F C 2003 A direct
Based Materials3 54–71.
stochastic algorithm for global search
Gopalaratnam V S and Gettu R 1995 On the Applied Mathematics and
Characterization of Flexural toughness Computation146 729–758.
in Fibre Reinforced Concretes Cement
Sousa J L A O and Gettu R 2006
and Concrete Composites17 239–254.
Determining the Tensile Stress-Crack
Hillerborg A Modẽer M and Petersson P-E Opening Curve of Concrete by Inverse
1976 Analysis of crack formation and Analysis Journal of Engineering
crack growth in concrete by means of Mechanics132 141–148.
fracture mechanics and finite elements
Uchida Y KuriharaN Rokugo K and
Cement and Concrete Research6 773–
Koyanagi W 1995 Determination of
782.
Tension Softening Diagrams of Various
Jepsen M S Damkilde L and Lövgren I 2016 Kinds of Concrete by means of
A fully general and adaptive inverse Numerical Analysis Fracture Mechanics
analysis method for cementitious of Concrete Structures F H Witmann
materials Materials and Structures 1– (Ed) 17–30 Germany AEDIFICATIO
14. Publishers. 483
ICCMS2016
A LINEARIZED TOUGHNESS MODEL FOR CONCRETE BY

CONSIDERING TOUGHENING MECHANISMS
SIMON K. M.* and KISHEN J. M. C.
Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India.
Abstract: A modified stress intensity factor (SIF) is determined based on linear

elastic fracture mechanics (LEFM) approach by considering the material behaviour at
different scales through a multiscale approach. This is achieved by considering a
bridging zone at the macro crack tip which resists the crack growth through aggregate
bridging mechanism followed by a micro crack. This modified SIF is further used to
determine the size dependent fracture energy of different types of concrete.
Keywords: SIF; Bridging zone; Micro crack; Multiscale; Fracture energy;
Sensitivity.
INTRODUCTION macroscopic scale, thereby capturing the

softening behavior of concrete accurately.
Fracture failure occurs when material
In this work, the modified SIF is derived
imperfections, in the form of internal flaws or
based on LEFM approach which includes the
microcracks grows to a macrocrack and
contributions from bridging stress offered by
finally separate the component into two or
aggregates at the mesoscale and
more parts under the influence of load. The
microcracking occurring at microscale which
failure due to fracture is generally
is derived by considering a free-free
characterized by the parameter known as
boundary condition along the microcrack
stress intensity factor (SIF), which describes
surface. The modified SIF is validated by
the state of stress near the crack tip. In quasi-
computing the fracture energy using available
brittle materials such as concrete, there exists
experimental data.
a fracture process zone (FPZ) which offers
resistance to the crack growth due to the
DETERMINATION OF MODIFIED
presence of various toughening mechanisms SIF
involving aggregate bridging, microcracking,
crack branching etc. Nirmalendra and Horri A modified SIF is derived based on LEFM
(1992) have reported that the major approach by considering the material
mechanisms responsible for the softening behavior in its lower scales for the case of a
behavior of quasi-brittle materials are notched plain concrete beam, subjected to
microcracking and aggregate bridging. The three-point load. For cementitious materials,
presence of FPZ in quasi-brittle materials there exist a bridging zone and a
restricts the use of linear elastic fracture microcracking zone at the macrocrack tip,
mechanics (LEFM) approach due to the which resists the crack growth. Upon loading,
absence of a sharp crack tip. Therefore, it is these microcracks will initiate and on
appropriate to have a model that can couple reaching a certain critical length they
the microscopic effects to those at coalesce with the existing macrocrack
resulting in an increase of crack length. The
#
Author for Correspondence: E-mail: chandrak@civil.iisc.ernet.in 484
Simon and Kishen
bridging zone described here is assumed to modulus of concrete, D is the depth of the
be a small region near the macrocrack tip beam. The geometric factors g 2 (c/D) and R R
which resists the crack growth due to the g 3 (c/D,x/c) are taken from standard reference
R R
bridging action of coarse aggregates. The (Shah et al., 1995).

modified SIF is determined by relating the
crack opening displacements at two different
CRACK OPENING DISPLACEMENT
scales namely (i) macroscale and (ii)
AT MICROSCALE
microscale.
The crack opening displacement at
microscale is determined based on the
CRACK OPENING DISPLACEMENT following assumptions: (1) A critical
AT MACROSCALE microcrack of length l exists in the mortar at
The material behavior in the macroscopic the tip of bridging zone as shown in Figure 1.
scale is characterized by considering the (2) The microcrack grows in a direction
combined effect of macrocrack and the perpendicular to the maximum principal
bridging zone present at the macrocrack tip. stress. (3) The microcrack tip is sharp and its
The bridging mechanism along the bridging surface is traction free. The stresses and
zone (b) present at the macrocrack (a) tip is displacement along the crack tip for this two
shown in Figure 1. dimensional crack problem is determined
through an inverse method by making use of
Airy stress function (Ф), which satisfies the
biharmonic equation (▽2▽2 Ф=0). Using
35T 35TP P35T 35TP P
these strains, the displacements in the polar

coordinate system are obtained. The crack
opening displacement corresponding to the
microcrack is determined by transforming the
displacement component perpendicular to the
loading direction (V) into rectangular
Figure 1. Representation of macroscopic coordinates and the corresponding COD gets
and microscopic mechanism. simplified to
Ar λ1 K1
micro (2)
By making use of the principle of linear δ micro =
superposition, the effective stress on the µ micro (1 + ν micro ) 2π
crack surface is σ = σ a - σ b , where σ a is the
R R R R R R
where λ 1 is eigenvalue corresponding to the
R R
stress due to external applied load and σ b is R R

microcrack angle (β*), K 1 micro is the stress
R RP P
the bridging stress that tends to close the intensity factor at the microcrack tip and A is
crack. The crack opening displacement (δ) at a function of microcrack angle and the
any point x takes the form eigenvalue.
4c (σ a − σ b )  c   c x  (1) EXPRESSION FOR MODIFIED SIF

δ macro = g 2   g3  , 
E  D  D c  The modified SIF which accounts for the
nonlinear behavior is determined by equating
where c is the total crack length (c=a+b+l), a the crack opening displacement at macroscale
is the incremental crack length, l is the and microscale at a section distance x as
critical length of microcrack, E is the elastic shown in Figure 1. From the continuity
485
A Linearized Toughness Model for Concrete by Considering Toughening Mechanisms
condition, the crack opening displacement at of experimental data reported by Bazant and
the junction x = c-(l/2) (ie, Xu (1991). Issa et al. (2000) concluded from
δ macro │ x =δ micro │ l/2 ) is used to derive the their study that the fracture properties of
modified SIF. In this study, the microcrack is concrete are significantly affected by
considered to be very sharp (ie, β*=180o) in specimen size (D) and the maximum
order to initiate the crack propagation. aggregate size (d a,max ).
Substituting Eq. 1 and 2 into Eq. 3 and
rearranging the equation
(σ a √(πc)g 2 (c/D)=K 1 ), the modified SIF
(K Imicro macro) reduces to
  l 
  σ b  c Emicro  c c − 2 
K1micro = K1 21 −  g3  ,  (3)
  σ a  l Emacro  D D 
macro
  
where E micro is the modulus of elasticity at

microscopic scale. The modified SIF which
accounts for the microscopic as well as the
Figure 2. Variation of bridging zone
macroscopic behavior is found to be length (b) (Bazant and Xu, 1991)
proportional to the mode I SIF (K I ). The
bridging stress, the critical microcrack length The unknown length 'b' for all the three
and the microscopic properties are geometrically similar specimens is
determined through a procedure as explained determined and the variation of bridging zone
in the previous work (Simon, 2015). length is plotted against the ratio of
maximum aggregate size to specimen depth
FRACTURE ENERGY as represented in Figure 2. For a particular
Fracture energy is an important parameter size of aggregate, it is found that the size of
used to characterize the fracture behavior of bridging zone increases with the increase in
concrete. For the case of plane problems the specimen size which is analogues to the
where in the crack propagates in a straight fact that the process zone size depends on the
line, the fracture energy (G F ) is related to the specimen size. Assuming a linear fit, the
fracture toughness (K IC ) as (Bazant and Xu, bridging zone length is given by
1991) G F =K IC 2/E. In this study, the fracture
 da 
energy is written in terms of the process zone b = −16 max  + 5.8 (4)
 D 
parameters, namely, the bridging zone length
(b) and the critical microcrack length (l). This
VALIDATION OF THE PROPOSED
is done by replacing the fracture toughness
MODEL
(K IC ) with the modified SIF (K 1macro micro)
computed using Eq. 3 at critical load and In order to validate the proposed model, the
crack length. fracture energy is computed using the
modified SIF and is compared with those
DETERMINATION OF THE obtained experimentally by Shah and
BRIDGING ZONE SIZE Chandra Kishen (2012) and Hemalatha et al.
The length of the bridging zone is determined (2015). All these experiments have been
through a calibration process by making use
486
Simon and Kishen
performed on three-point bend specimens of calibration process. For a particular aggregate

different sizes. size, the bridging zone length is found to be
It is evident from Table 1 that the bridging increasing with the size of the beam. Further,
zone length increases with the specimen size the fracture energy for different types of
for a particular mix of concrete. The length of concrete are determined and is found to
bridging zone of normal strength concrete match well with those predicted
specimens (Shah and Chandra Kishen, 2012) experimentally.
is found to be greater than those of self-
consolidating concrete (SCC) (Hemalatha et REFERENCES
al., 2015). The fracture energy is further Bazant Z P and Xu K 1991 Size effect in
estimated and is found to match considerably fatigue fracture of concrete ACI
well with the experimental results, thereby Materials Journal 88(4) 390-399
validating the same. Hemalatha T Ramaswamy A and Chandra
Kishen J M 2015 Simplified mixture
Table 1. Bridging zone length and design for production of self-
fracture energy consolidating concrete ACI Materials
Journal 112(2) 277-286
Bridging Fracture energy Issa M A Issa M A and Islam M S and

Specimen Chudnovsky A 2000 Size effects in
zone
designation Exp. Model concrete fracture-part II: Analysis of
length test results International Journal of
(b) (G F ) Fracture 102(1) 25-42
(mm) (N/mm) Nirmalendran S and Horii H 1992 Analytical
modeling of microcracking and bridging
S(normal 3.159 0.157 0.155 in the fracture of quasi-brittle materials
concrete) Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of
M(normal Solids 40(4) 863-886
4.455 0.167 0.163
concrete) Shah S G and Chandra Kishen J M 2012 Use
L(normal of acoustic emissions in flexural fatigue
5.102 0.192 0.195 crack growth studies on concrete
concrete)
Engineering Fracture Mechanics 87 36-
S(SCC) 3.159 0.085 0.083 47
M(SCC) 4.455 0.109 0.111 Shah S P Swartz S E and Ouyang C (1995)
L(SCC) 5.102 0.117 0.116 Fracture mechanics of concrete:
applications of fracture mechanics to
S-small, M-medium, L-large
concrete, rock and other quasi-brittle
materials John Wiley & Sons NewYork
CONCLUSIONS
Simon K M 2015 Studies on Fatigue &
In this work, a multiscale approach is adopted
Fracture Behavior of Cementitious
to derive a modified SIF by incorporating the Materials: Effects of Interfacial
microscale and macroscale properties. This is Transition Zone, Microcracking and
followed by the determination of an empirical Aggregate Bridging Ph. D. Thesis
relationship between the bridging zone length Department of Civil Engineering - IISc,
and the maximum aggregate size through a Bangalore, India (Submitted).
487
ICCMS2016
MESHFREE ANALYSIS OF BEAMS AND COLUMNS IN THE

PRESENCE OF INITIAL DAMAGE
GUPTA A.* and ARUN C.O.
Trivandrum, Kerala, India.
Abstract: This paper highlights the application of a numerical tool based on element
free Galerkin method (EFGM) to understand the effect of initial damage in buckling
and bending. An isotropic continuum damage model is used for modelling initial
voids. A parametric study based on number of nodes is carried out. Numerical
examples are solved and results are compared with theoretical results. A comparison,
with results obtained from finite element analysis, is also carried out. It is observed
that the presence of initial damage will act as an initial imperfection in columns and
so will reduce the critical load. EFGM is able to capture the reduction in critical
buckling load of columns and reduction in stiffness of beams.
Keywords: EFGM; Buckling; FEM; Damage
INTRODUCTION struts and explains the implementation of

Buckling of compression members, being a these formulations along with some
stability failure, always attract a special parametric studies. The thesis has some
consideration. Analytically, the problem errors as in the formulation of geometric
can be reduced to an eigen-value problem. stiffness matrix which has been rectified in
Euler buckling analysis gives minimum this paper. Arun et al., (2010) present the
loads, known critical buckling loads, at effect of initial damage on bi-lateral
which stability failures starts with materials using EFGM. It has been
corresponding modes. In practise, presence observed that, to the best of authors’
of initial imperfections or eccentric loading knowledge the literature lacks in studies on
reduces this critical load. Presence of initial effect of initial damage and its further
damages, which occur during manufacturing, growth on bending and buckling axial
handling etc. can also affect the structural members. The present work is an effort to
behaviour of beams and columns. The understand the same and also to appreciate
present paper proposes to model initial the capability of EFGM in such analysis.
imperfection as presence of initial damage. Damage variable LeMaitre, (1984);
EFGM being a meshfree method, which LeMaitre, (1992) is physically defined by
alleviate the tedious meshing process, will the surface density of micro-cracks and
be a suitable tool for buckling analysis. intersections of micro-voids lying on a
Liu, 2002 describes the EFGM in detail. A plane cutting RVE of cross section.
thesis by Jayalakshmi, (2009) deals with Damage variable D for a plane having
EFGM formulation for the elasto-static normal n can be written as below,
analysis of beams and buckling analysis of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:amangupta0141@gmail.com 488

Gupta and Arun
δ So A( x ) P T WP + PxT WPx , C ( x ) = P T W ,
where =
D ( n) = , 0 ≤ D(n ) ≤ 1 (1)
δS and C ( x ) = PxT W .Solving a ( x ) and
where δ So is the effective area of the
substituting in Eq. (2) will give,
intersections of all micro-cavities or micro- Λ Λ
cracks lies in area δ S . An isotropic damage u h ( x ) = ΦTu u+ ΦθT θ
which is independent of normal variable, a pT ( x ) A−1 ( x )C ( x )
where Φ u ( x ) =
δS
scalar, is defined as D = o .The concept of pT ( x ) A−1 ( x )C ( x )
Φθ ( x ) = (5)
δS Λ
σ ij u = {u1 , u2 .....un }
T
effective stress is given by σ ij = [Le

1− D Λ
θ = {θ1 , θ 2 .....θ n }
T
Maitre, 1984; Le Maitre, 1992].

where Φ u ( x ) and Φθ ( x ) denote the shape
THEORETICAL FORMUALTION
functions. One should note that they do not
OF EFGM satisfy the Kronecker delta property i.e.
For EFGM, formulation [Dolbow and Φ ui ( x j ) ≠ δ ij and Φθ i ( x j ) ≠ δ ij .
Belytschko, 1998] of shape function is first
BENDING OF BEAM
task in hand. For construction of shape
functions in EFGM, moving least square The governing equation for Euler Bernoulli
approximation is used. In the domain of beam including damage is
beam, the approximate displacement function
d2  d 2v 
u h ( x ) of u ( x ) is  o
E (1 − D ) I =q( x) (6)
m
dx 2  dx 2 
=u h ( x) ∑
= pi ( x )ai ( x )
i =1
p T ( x )a ( x ) (2) Weak form of Eq. (6) can be written as:
where pT ( x ) = { p1 ( x ), p2 ( x ), , pm ( x )} is a L L
vector of complete basis functions of order m

∫ E (1 − D) Iu
0
o ∫ qudx
v dx =
, xx , xx
0 (7)
and a ( x ) = {a1 ( x ), a2 ( x ), , am ( x )} is a =
o+ E (1 − D) Iv u |
, xxx x 0=
o , xx , x x 0 − E (1 − D) Iv u |
vector of unknown parameters that depend on where, u ( x) is the test function and v( x) is
x. The unknown coefficients will be the trial function. For applying EBC method
determined by minimizing the L2 norm, suggested by Sunitha et al., (2008) is
defined as employed. The discretized system equations
n are obtained as [Jayalakshmi, 2009],
∑ w( x − x )  p
2
J= i
T
( xi )a ( x ) − ui  + Λ Λ Λ
i =1 (3) Kd = f (8)
2
w( x − xi )  pxT ( xi )a ( x ) − θi  where
where w( x − xi ) denotes the weight function  k11 k12 ......k1n 
associated with node i , n is the number of Λ
k k 
−T  21 22 ......k 2 n  −1
K=Λ Λ is the stiffness
nodes in the neighbourhood of x such that ...................... 
the weight is non zero. The stationarity of  
 kn1 kn 2 ......knn 
J yields [Jayalakshmi, 2009; Dolbow and
Belytschko, 1998], matrix with
Λ Λ
)a ( x ) C ( x ) u + C ( x ) θ
A( x = (4)
489
Meshfree Analysis of Beams and Columns in the Presence of Initial Damage
=kij ∫B
T
Eo (1 − D ) IB j dx  ∂Φ ui ( x) ∂Φ uj ( x) ∂Φ ui ( x) ∂Φθ j ( x) 
∫ ∫
i
dx dx 
Ω ∂x ∂x ∂x ∂x
Ω
Ω 
 ∂ 2 Φ ui ( x )  =
k g ij 
   ∂Φθ i ( x) ∂Φ uj ( x) dx ∂Φθ i ( x) ∂Φθ j ( x) 
 ∫ ∂x ∫ ∂x
(9)
∂x 2  ∂x ∂x
dx

BiT =  2  Ω Ω 
 ∂ Φθ i ( x )  Eq. (14) can be written as | (k − pk g ) |= 0 to
 ∂x 2 
Λ
solve the Eigen value problem.
Force vector f is given as
NUMERICAL EXAMPLE
Λ
f = Λ−T f (10) The material chosen is mild steel with
L Eo = 210 GPa and cross section is taken as
with f i = ∫Φ
T
i q ( x )dx . circular with radius of 2 cm. The span of
0
the beam is taken to be 10 m. The basis is
Λ − taken to be cubic. The weight function
Displacement vector d = Λd with
chosen in EFGM is cubic spline. Three
Λ different damage variations along the span
d = {u h ( x1 ), θ h ( x1 ),..., u h ( xn ), θ h ( xn )}T
(11) are employed in this paper viz. uniformly
− Λ Λ Λ Λ
d = {u ( x1 ), θ ( x1 ),..., u ( xn ), θ ( xn )} T distributed, uniformly varying and sine
concentrated. Damage closure effect is
neglected.
where Λ is scaling matrix consisting of
shape function values associated with all BENDING OF SIMPLY SUPPORTED
nodes (Arun et al., 2010; Sunitha et al., BEAM
2008).
A uniform distributed load of 2 N/m is
BUCKLING OF COLUMN taken over the span of the beam. A
convergence study is carried out first and
The governing equation for buckling is: the optimum number of nodes to be used in
further analysis is fixed as 28.Figure 1
d2  d 2v  d 2v
 o
E (1 − D ) I  + p =
0 (12) shows the variation of deflection along the
dx 2  dx 2  dx 2
length of the beam. It can be observed that
Weak form of Eq. (12) is written as: inclusion of initial damage in the beam will
L reduce the stiffness and thus produce larger
∫ ( E (1 − D) Iu
0
o v − u, x pv, x )dx
, xx , xx deflection for the given load.
− Eo (1 − D) Iv, xxx u |x =0 (13)

− Eo (1 − D) Iv, xxx u |x = L =
0
Substitute the approximation of u ( x) given in
Eq. (5) in the weak form Eq. (13) to get the
following discretized system equation:
- -
k d − pk g d =
0 (14)
with
Figure 1. Displacement field for simply

supported beam
490
Gupta and Arun
BUCKLING OF SIMPLY SUPPORTED observed that EFGM can capture the

BEAM reduction in stiffness caused by the presence
of damage which leads to decrease in critical
Figure 2 shows the mode shape of a simply
supported beam with different damage buckling load, making it more susceptibleto
models and it is seen that inclusion of buckling failure.
damage does not change the mode shape
REFERENCES
much. Table 1 shows the variation of
buckling load with different damage Arun C O Rao B N Srinivasan S M2010
modelling. Continuum damage growth analysis
using element free Galerkin method
Sadhana 35(3) 279-301.
Dolbow J and BelytschkoT1998 An
Introduction to Programming the
Meshless Element Free Galerkin
Method Arch. Comput Mech 5 207-241.
Jayalakshmi S2009 Meshless Method for
Bending and Buckling Analysis of
Linear Member Thesis M.Tech IIT
Madras.
Lemaitre J A Course on Damage Mechanics
Springer-Verlag 1992.
Figure 2. First mode shape with different
damage for simply supported beam LeMaitre J 1984 How to use Damage
Mechanics, Nuclear Engineering and
Table 1. Comparison of FEM and EFGM Design 80 233-245.
first Buckling load with different damage
Liu G R2002 Mesh Free Method Moving
Damage FEM First EFGM first Beyond the Finite Element Method New
Buckling Buckling York CRC Press.
Load load Sunitha N V Dodagoudar G R and Rao B N
2008 Element free Galerkin method for
(N) (N)
beams on elastic foundation Journal of
No damage 2608.65 2670.37 Structural Engineering SERC 34 181-
D = 0.2 2086.92 2082.80 188.
D = 0.2 x / L 2342.89 2338.70

Πx 2161.13 2158.20
D = 0.2 sin
L
CONCLUSION
It is clear from the numerical result that
EFGM is a reliable tool to predict the
behaviour of beams under bending and
compressive load. Inclusion of damage in the
beam lowers the critical buckling load. It is
491
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF ELECTROCHEMICAL MODEL FOR

PITTING CORROSION
VAGBHARATHI A.S. * and GOPALAKRISHNAN S.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore India.
Abstract: Pitting corrosion is considered as one of the most destructive form of

localized corrosion due to its complex behaviour. In this work, a mathematical model
is presented for capturing the dynamic ionic concentration and electric-potential field
profiles along with the time-dependent evolution of the pit electrode boundary in the
dilute electrochemical system. Mass transport of ions is governed by Nernst-Planck
equation and Gauss law is used to govern the electric-potential field in the domain.
The ionic transport process is a much faster process when compared to evolution of
pit boundary, resulting in two different time scales. We present an extended finite
element model (XFEM) in combination with level set method (LSM) for solving the
above set of highly coupled non-linear and different time scale system of equations.
XFEM uses a discontinuous-derivative enrichment formulation, eliminating the
necessity of front-conforming mesh and re-meshing. The pit boundary (anodic
dissolution of the electrolytic system), governed by Faraday's law of electrolysis and a
function of current density, is tracked and updated using LSM. The advantages of
combined XFEM-LSM model are: no explicit representation for the boundary is
needed, computational efficiency and accuracy increases as the need for information
updation on the mesh for each time step is not required.
Keywords: Pitting corrosion; Ionic concentrations; Electric potential; Pit
boundary evolution; Stainless steel
INTRODUCTION the pit solution, cations present in the

environment migrate to the pit solution for
Pit nucleates after the breakdown of the form corrosion products (salt layer and oxide
passive layer. Pit propagation depends on layer). This self-stimulating repetitive
many parameters such as, alloy composition, chemical processes result in rapid dissolution
electrolytic solution, temperature, ionic of the metal/alloy. Diffusion of ions, ion
interactions, potential difference, chloride migration, rate of production/depletion of
concentration, salt formation, oxide layer ions in chemical reactions and ionic
formation, current densities. Pit propagation interactions combine to the electro-chemical
is considered as electro-chemical and auto- nature of the pit. Mass transport of the ions is
catalytic in nature. Often pit propagation governed by Nernst-Planck equation with the
leads to a fatigue crack initiation, which can assumption of local electro-neutrality
eventually result in failure of the system. condition. The potential in the pit solution is
governed by Gauss law (Sharland). Two
Oxidation of the metal/alloy results in
different time scales can be observed in this
accumulation of positive charge in the pit
system. Metal/alloy dissolution is a very slow
solution. To maintain the charge balance in
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: vagbharathi@aero.iisc.ernet.in 492

Vagbharathi and Gopalakrishnan
process when compared to ionic transport Let 𝑛 be the total number of chemical species
process in the electrolytic solution. The rate present in the electrolytic domain.The
of change of concentration fields is much domain consists of 𝑐𝑖 (for 𝑖 = 1, 2 … 𝑛 )
higher than rate of boundary propagation. concentration fields and electrical-potential
Due to this reason, steady state for ionic field𝜙 , therefore, the total number of field
transport is considered at any given time step. variables is 𝑛 + 1 . These variables are
From the literature, it is quite evident that the functions of space and time. The Nernst-
need for efficient computational method is Planck equation defines the mass transport of
required in order to circumvent the each ion as
difficulties in solving this complex system of 𝜕𝑐𝑖
= −∇. 𝑱𝑖 + 𝑞𝑖 − ∇. (𝑐𝑖 𝐯) in Ω𝐸 (1)
𝜕𝑡
equations. In this paper, a combined extended
finite method and level set method is where 𝑞𝑖 is the source/sink term due to
proposed. As the pit propagation is a moving chemical reactions in the domain, the third
boundary problem, conventional finite term is the flux density due to the velocity
method fails to capture the evolution of field 𝐯. The flux term 𝑱𝑖 is defined as
interface as ionic concentrations are 𝑱𝑖 =
𝑧𝑖 𝐹
discontinuous across the interface. XFEM −𝐷𝑖 ∇𝑐𝑖 − (𝐷𝑖 𝑐𝑖 ∇ϕ) − ∑𝑛𝑘=1,𝑘≠𝑖 𝐿𝑖𝑘 ∇𝜇𝑘 (2)
𝑅𝑇
uses a discontinuous-derivative enrichment The flux term is a combination of
formulation, by which the discontinuity in contributions from independent motion
ionic concentrations is handled and need for (diffusion and ion migration) of ion 𝑖 and
re-meshing at each step is avoided. In interaction with other ions. This model
addition to XFEM, LSM is an excellent tool describes the ionic transport in the most
used to track the interface, along with its general case, where ionic interactions are
geometry. It uses signed distance function to considered. For pitting corrosion, convective
define the interface and is evolved in time. velocity is neglected as the electrolyte is
This proposed model is validated for stainless considered as steady. Local electro-neutrality
steel 304. condition is required to be enforced as an
METHODOLOGY additional constraint on classic Nernst-Planck
equation,
In this section, a detailed formulation for
pitting corrosion in a dilute electrochemical ∑𝑛𝑗=𝑖 𝑧𝑗 𝑐𝑖 = 0 in Ω𝐸 (3)
system is described (Sarkar). Let the This constraint makes the ionic distributions
electrolytic and the solid alloy domain be linearly dependent; thereby incorporating the
represented asΩ𝐸 andΩ𝐴 , respectively, at any effect of cross coefficients 𝐿𝑖𝑘 , thru the
time𝑡. The electrode boundary Γ𝑒 is defined relation 𝑟𝑗 = ∇. (∑𝑛𝑘=1,𝑘≠𝑖 𝐿𝑖𝑘 ∇𝜇𝑘 ) defining 𝑟𝑗 as
as the boundary which is not in contact with a new variable.By formulating a constraint
the solid alloy. The anodic and cathodic minimization problem, a new variable 𝑟𝑗 can
boundaries are represented as Γ𝑎 and Γ𝑐 , be deduced as 𝑟𝑗 = 𝑧𝑗 𝜆 , where 𝜆 is Lagrange
respectively. Here, the anodic boundary multiplier used to enforce electro-neutrality
defines the boundary of the pit at any given condition as constraint. Therefore, the first
time. governing equation for mass transport of ion
𝑖 is given as
𝜕𝑐𝑖 𝑧𝑖 𝐹
= −∇. (𝐷𝑖 ∇𝑐𝑖 ) + ∇. (𝐷𝑖 𝑐𝑖 ∇ϕ) + 𝑞𝑖 −
𝜕𝑡 𝑅𝑇
𝑧𝑗 𝜆in Ω𝐸 (4)
The first term describes the ionic
concentration due to diffusion, the second
term describes electrical-potential field due to
ion migration, the third term represents
Figure 1. Domain representation
493
Numerical Analysis of Ectrochemical Model for Pitting Corrosion
source/sink contribution and the last term defined as a signed distance function, which
contributes to the interaction of each ion with allows for discontinuity at the interface.
other ions. The second governing equation Pitting corrosion is characterized by moving
describing the electrical-potential field in the boundary with time. The rate of anodic
electrochemical system is homogenous form dissolution is determined using Faraday’s law
of Gauss law, and is given by of electrolysis. The front velocity is
∇2 𝜙 = 0in Ω𝐸 (5)
calculated from the anodic current density,
and is evolved over time to track the position
Eqs. (3), (4) and (5) represents the set of
of the boundary. For this purpose, level set
equations, with appropriate boundary and
method is used (Vagbharathi). The interface
initial conditions, describing the pitting
is defined as a signed distance function,
corrosion in the domain. For the proposed
which defines the boundary by taking value
model, the following boundary conditions are
zero at the interface. The level set function is
specified: Dirichlet boundary with
approximated using standard finite element
concentration values specified, Neumann
approximation. Level set function is evolved
boundary with concentration flux specified,
in time, using TVD-Runge-Kutta scheme (3rd
electrode boundaryΓ𝑎 ∪ Γ𝑐 with flux of ions
order 3 step). Therefore, updation of FE mesh
specified, which are obtained from Butler-
is avoided as XFEM captures the new
Volmer relation. Similarly, boundary
interface position using discontinuous
conditions for electrical-potential are
enrichment functions.
specified in form of potential flux on
electrode boundary. From the proposed model, it is quite clear
that solution 𝑐𝑖 and 𝜙 is dependent on each
The weak form of the governing equations is
other, and depending on the reaction orders,
derived using Gauss divergence theorem. As
source/sink term can be nonlinear, resulting
electrode boundaries are a function of time,
in highly coupled nonlinear system of
the finite element mesh has to be re-meshed
ordinary differential and algebraic equations.
at each time. Here, extended finite element
Gauss-Seidal iterative approach is employed
method with level set method is proposed for
to determine the solution of this coupled
this moving boundary problem. XFEM uses
system. For nonlinear case, Newton-Raphson
discontinuous derivative enrichment
method is used in each Gauss-Seidal iteration
formulation for field variables in the domain.
to solve the two nonlinear systems of
The domain is discretized into finite elements
equations. To integrate in time, Crank-
(FE) containing 𝑚 nodes and the
Nicolson method is used.
concentration field is approximated as
𝑐𝑖 (𝒙, 𝑡) =
∑𝑠⊂𝑠𝑡𝑑 𝑁 𝑠 (𝒙)𝑐𝑖𝑠 (𝑡) + Stainless steel 304 is considered for
∑𝑒⊂𝑒𝑛𝑟 𝑁 𝑒 (𝒙, 𝑡)Ψ 𝑒 (𝒙, 𝑡)𝑎𝑖𝑒 (𝑡)(6) numerical analysis of the proposed model.
where, 𝑠𝑡𝑑 is the standard FE mesh with SS304 is composed of 71% iron, 19%
𝑁(𝒙) as standard FE shape functions, 𝑐 𝑠 as chromium and 10% nickel. All three metals
nodal DoF for ion 𝑖 , 𝑒𝑛𝑟 is the enriched (Fe, Cr and Ni) in the alloy undergo
FEmesh with Ψ𝑒 (𝒙, 𝑡) as enrichment oxidation reactions in the pit. The pit
functions. Here, 𝑎𝑒 are additional DoF’s at chemistry undergoes 3 anodic reactions, 4
enriched nodes corresponding to 𝑐 𝑠 at cathodic reactions and 14 hydrolysis
enriched node. The matrix form of nodal reactions. Total of 20 ionic species are
values can be expressed as: considered in this system, namely, Na+, Cl-,
𝑚 OH-, H+, Fe2+, FeCl-, FeCl+, FeCl 2 , FeCl 4 2+,
𝑐𝑖 (𝑡) = [𝑐𝑖1 𝑐𝑖2 … 𝑐𝑖𝑚 𝑎𝑖1 𝑎𝑖2 … 𝑎𝑖 𝑒 ]𝑇 =
Fe(OH)+, Fe(OH) 2 , Cr3+, CrCl2+, Cr(OH)2+,
[𝑐𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑑 𝑎𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑟 ]𝑇 (7)
Cr(OH) 2 2+, Cr(OH) 3 , Ni2+, NiCl+,Ni(OH)+,
In a similar way, the level set function𝜙(𝑡)is Ni(OH) 2 .
approximated. Enrichment function is
494
Vagbharathi and Gopalakrishnan
One dimensional analysis is presented in this anodic polarization occurring at positive

section. Consider the domain length of potentials. Fe2+ hydrolysis take place to
0.1 𝑚with unit cross-sectional area, along x- produce FeOH+ and H+, driving the pH of the
axis. The mouth of the pit is defined at 𝑥 = solution to increase at anodic potentials. Due
0 (cathodic end). For 1D case, the anodic to high levels of Fe2+, positive charge is
boundary is considered as bottom of the pit. accumulated in the pit and attracts Cl-, to
The computational domain is discretized into maintain local charge balance. The high
100 finite elements and two node linear concentration of Cl- is due to this electro-
element with one DoF per node is considered migration from the bulk solution.
for finite element formulation. This The pH of the solution is determined by
structured mesh consists of 𝑚 = 101 nodes. negative logarithm of H+ concentration. The
The interface is crossed by only one element concentration profiles of all the ions can be
with 𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑟 = 2 enriched nodes. Bulk obtained from the analysis. The potential
concentration values for Na+, Cl-, OH- and H 2 field is also obtained. The anodic dissolution
at the mouth of the pit are prescribed as rate and front velocity are obtained from
Dirichlet boundary conditions. Considering anodic current densities. Corrosion front
impermeable boundary, Neumann boundary evolution can be studied from this analysis.
flux is taken as zero. Initial concentration The dependency of all factors on each other
values for Cl-, OH-, H+, Fe2+, Cr3+, Ni2+,Na+, can be investigated. The salt film formation
H 2 are prescribed. The anodic current plays as important role in order to determine
densities are calculated for Fe2+, Cr3+ and the saturation concentration of the system.
Ni2+ ions. Electrochemical properties such as
open circuit potentials, standard current REFERENCES
densities and forward Tafel slopes are taken Sarkar S Aquino W 2011Electroneutrality
from (Wang). Similarly cathodic current and ionic interactions in the modelling
densities are calculated for the four cathodic of mass transport in dilute
reactions. The anodic dissolution rate is electrochemical systems Electrochim
obtained from total ionic current density, Acta 56(16) 8969-8978.
which is summation of individual anodic
current densities (depending on percentage Sharland Sn M Tasker Pn W 1988 A
composition of each metal in the alloy). mathematical model of crevice and
pitting corrosion – I The physical model
Corros Sci 28(6)603-620.
Vagbharathi A S, Gopalakrishnan S 2014An
extended finite element model coupled
with level set method for analysis of
growth of corrosion pits in metallic
structures Proc. R. Soc. A 4702014001.
Wang Wei Sun Hu-yuan Sun Li-juan Song
Zu-wei and Zang Bei-ni 2010
Numerical Simulation for Crevice
Corrosion of 304 Stainless Steel in
Sodium Chloride Solution Chem Res.
Figure 2. Concentration profiles vs Chinese Universities 26(5) 822-828.
potential at the bottom of the pit
Figure 2shows the concentration profiles for
few ions as a function of electric-potential at
the bottom of the pit. It is observed that
concentrations of Fe2+ are increasing with
495
ICCMS2016
EDGE CRACK SIMULATION USING T-SPLINE BASED XIGA

SINGH S. K.1, BHARDWAJ G.2, SINGH I. V.1*, and MISHRA B. K.1
1
Department of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering, IIT Roorkee, India,
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, NIT Jalandhar, India
Abstract: This paper presents the modeling of plane edge crack problems by XIGA
using analysis suitable T-spline. In T-spline based XIGA, both geometry and solution
are approximated using same T-spline based rational basis functions. The crack is
described by level set function. The crack face is modeled by heaviside function and
crack tip singularitries are captured using asymptotic crack tip enrichment functions.
The values of SIF are computed using interaction integral approach. The results
obtained using T-spline based XIGA are found in good agreement with B-spline
based XIGA and standard analytical solution.
Keywords: Edge Crack; T-spline; XIGA; Enrichment functions
INTRODUCTION based isogeometric analysis has been

The finite element method have been used applied in many areas like cohesive zone
extensively to solve variety of problems, modeling, structural mechanics, and
however it has got many issues in solving fracture mechanics. However for the
crack growth problems. The modeling of complicated geometrical design NURBS
crack growth requires conformal meshing produces superfluous control point due to
which needs to be updated as crack grows, the restriction of rectangular topology. The
and there is loss of accuracy as the data refinement of particular location using
mapped from old mesh to new mesh. It is NURBS is inherently global. To overcome
computationally costly and burdensome. the problem of global refinement and
To solve the problems of fracture tensor product topology, [Sederberg et al.,
mechanics, [Belytschko et al. 1999] 2003] presented T-spline as a
introduced extended finite element method generalization of NURBS which break the
(XFEM). XFEM allows the modeling of tensor product topology and has the ability
crack without conformal mesh through the to represent complicated geometries with
introduction of enrichment functions. minimal number of control points. T-
These days, the fracture problems are spline can be locally refined [Sederberg et
solved by the combination of isogeometric al., 2004] and form watertight model. In
analysis (IGA) and partition of unity to present study, analysis suitable T-spline
obtain accurate results with few additional based XIGA has been extended to model
degrees of freedom [Luycker et al., 2011]. the plane edge crack problems.
Isogeometric analysis was introduced by
METHODOLOGY
Hughes et al., (2005) where NURBS basis
functions are used to describe the The cubic order T-splines have been used
geometry as well as the solution. NURBS in both the parametric directions.
__________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ivsingh@gmail.com 496

Singh et al.
Rectangular domain with uniformly blending function for Heaviside function,

distributed eight control points in each BT is the blending function for the crack
direction has been created, and some of the
tip functions and ui , a j , bαk are the
control points are omitted from row and
column to create T-junction as shown in displacement vectors correspond to nen ,
Figure.1. Total 57 control points are taken ncf and nct respectively. To check the
to describe the geometry. T-spline basis
performance of the T-spline based XIGA,
function can be computed at each control
the results have been compared with the
point by forming the local knot vector. For
NURBS based XIGA and theoretical SIFs.
each control point, the local knot vector
The weight of each control point is taken
can be extracted by stepping through the
to be unity.
T-mesh until (p+1)/2 perpendicular edges
The analytical mode-I SIF for an edge
are intersected. Figure. 1 shows the
crack problem is given by,
extraction of local knot vector for 19
vertices. Once the local knot vector is K I = Cσ π a (3)
extracted for the entire vertex in the T- m
2
mesh, the basis function can be computed a a
C=
1.12 − 0.23   + 10.6  
by where,  
L L
Ri = N [ξi 0 , ξi1 , ξi 2 , ξi 3 , ξi 4 ](ξ ) a
3
a
4
(1) − 21.7   + 30.4  
× N [ηi 0 ,ηi1 ,ηi 2 ,ηi 3 ,ηi 4 ](η ) L L
where, N [ξi 0 , ξi1 , ξi 2 , ξi 3 , ξi 4 ](ξ ) is the cubic RESULTS
B-spline basis function associated with the A rectangular specimen of size 80 mm x
knot vector ξi = [ξi 0 , ξi1 , ξi 2 , ξi 3 , ξi 4 ] and 80 mm with an initial crack length (a = 20
mm) along with boundary conditions is
N [ηi 0 ,ηi1 ,ηi 2 ,ηi 3 ,ηi 4 ](η ) is associated with shown in the Figure. 2. The material
the knot vector ηi = [ηi 0 ,ηi1 ,ηi 2 ,ηi 3 ,ηi 4 ] . properties used for the simulation are
At a particular control point corresponding taken as E = 74GPa and ν = 0.3. Total
to point ξi in the parametric space, the 57 control points have been taken for the
simulation. The plate is subjected to a
displacement approximation for the crack
tensile load of σ = 60 N / mm . A stress
can be given by,
contour plot is shown in Figure. 3. Figure.
nen  ncf  4 shows the variation of SIF with crack
u h (ξ ) = ∑ ∑
Ri (ξ )ui +  R j (ξ ) [ H (ξ ) − H (ξi ) ] a j  BH
=i 1 =  j 1  (2) length. The results obtained using T-spline
 nct 
4 
 based XIGA are compared with available
∑ ∑
+  Rk (ξ )  βα (ξ ) − βα (ξi )  bαk  BT
analytical solution and B-spline based
=  k 1 =  α 1 
where Ri is the analysis suitable T-spline XIGA.
basis function which can be computed CONCLUSIONS

from Eq. 1, H (ξ ) is the Heaviside function
used for modeling the crack tip, βα is the
crack tip enrichment function, BH is the
497
Edge Crack Simulation using T-Spline Based Xiga
This paper presents T-spline based XIGA

for the edge crack simulation. This
simulation shows that T-spline based
XIGA with 57 control points shows good
agreement with the analytical solution and
B-spline based XIGA with 64 control
points.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Authors would like to thank Science and
Engineering Research Board (SERB),
Department of Science and Technology
(DST), New Delhi for providing financial
support to this work through grant no:
SR/S3/MMER/0105/2013.
σ
51 52 53 5 55 56 57 yy
350
44 45 46 47 48 49 50
300
37 38 3 40 41 42 43
250
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
200
25 26 27 28
150
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
100
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 50
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure1. T-mesh defining T-spline Figure 3. Stress contour plot ( σ yy ) for
geometry an edge cracked plate
REFERENCES
σ
Belytschko T Black T 1999 Elastic crack
growth in finite elements with
minimal remeshing International
a
Bhardwaj G Singh I V & Mishra B K 2013
L Numerical simulation of plane crack
problems using extended
isogeometric analysis Proceeding of
International Conference on Design
L
and Manufacturing (IConDM2013)
64 661-670.
Figure 2 Geometry of an edge crack plate
498
Singh et al.
De Luycker E Benson D J Belytschko T

Bazilevs Y & Hsu M C 2011 X-FEM
in isogeometric analysis for linear
fracture mechanics International
Engineering 87(6) 541-565.
Hughes T J R Cottrell J A Bazilevs Y

2005 Isogeometric analysis CAD
finite elements NURBS exact
geometry and mesh refinement,
Computer Methods in Applied
Mechanics and Engineering 194
4135-4195.
Sederberg T W Cardon D L Finnigan G T

North N S Zheng J & Lyche T 2004
T-spline simplification and local
refinement ACM Transaction on
Graphics 23(3) 276-283.
Sederberg T W Zheng J Bakenov A Nasri

A 2003 T-splines and T-NURCCs
ACM Transactions on Graphics 22(3)
477-484.
499
ICCMS2016
STOCHASTIC FRACTURE ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED COMPOSITE

PANEL WITH ELLIPTICAL CRACK SUBJECTED TO BIAXIAL LOAD
USING X-FEM
PALEKAR SHAIESH P.1,2* and ACHCHHE LAL3
1
S. V. National Institute of Technology, Surat, Gujarat India
2
SRES College of engineering, Kopargaon, Savitribai Phule Pune University, Pune, Maharashtra, India
3
S. V. National Institute of Technology, Surat, Gujarat India
Abstract: In the present investigation the stochastic fracture response of a symmetric

angle ply laminated composite panel with centrally located through the thickness
elliptical crack subjected to biaxially applied tensile stress using stochastic extended
finite element method (SXFEM) is evaluated. The system parameters such as material
properties, lamination angle, applied stress and crack parameters are modelled as
input random Gaussian variables. The second order perturbation technique (SOPT) is
used to obtain the mean and coefficient of variance (COV) of mixed mode stress
intensity factors (MSIFs) by assuming random change in input parameters by
performing Monte Carlo simulation (MCS) in the frame work of XFEM. The present
work signifies the accurate analysis of fracture behaviour by influence of different
random variables in angle ply laminates.
Keywords: Extended finite element method (XFEM); Coefficient of variance;
Second order perturbation technique; Stress intensity factors (SIFs)
INTRODUCTION restricts the types of solvable crack

geometries.
Recent years have seen an increasing interest
in the application of fibre reinforced To overcome difficulties of FEM for
composites structures in diverse engineering modelling discontinuities like cracks, Moes et
applications because of their several al. (1999) combined FEM with the partition
advantages. In such applications these of unity which is known as the extended
materials are subjected to the complex finite element method (XFEM).
service loading conditions which are rarely In the XFEM, the finite element
uniaxial, typically involving biaxial or even approximation is enriched with appropriate
triaxial states of stress. functions extracted from the fracture analysis
The fracture analysis of the curved cracks around a crack tip. This method allows
which may develop in the structures due to discontinuities to be represented
the holes, notches, or due to inclusions or independently of the element boundaries.
voids in the materials like fibre reinforced At the design stage of composites,
composites is usually carried out by direct uncertainties are present in the test data
(stress based) or indirect methods like virtual regarding material strength values, elastic
crack closure technique. These methods when constants, which significantly affect the
combined with classical FEM have certain performance and are unavoidable even with
difficulties, that the elements should be the best quality control measures. The
normal to crack front of the crack. This stochastic fracture analysis provides the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: palekarsnd@gmail.com 500

Palekar and Achchhe Lal
accurate prediction of fracture behaviour and −f

arctan (φ ) =
considerably improves the reliability of the g2 − f 2 (5)
structures and can gives guidelines for
In the X-FEM, to calculate the displacement
practical manufacturing of composite
for point x locating within the cracked
laminate.
domain following approximation is used
In the present paper an attempt is made to u h=
( x) u FEM + u XFEM enrichment (7)
throw some light on these problems by
carrying out stochastic analysis of symmetric For modelling a crack, crack surfaces and
angle-ply laminated composite panel with crack tips Eq. (6) can be rearranged as below
n
uh ( x) ∑ Lj ( x) u j +
central through the thickness elliptical crack =
j =1
subjected to biaxial stress using SOPT
Lh ( x ) ( H (ξ ( x ) ) − H (ξ ( xh ) ) ) ah +
cr
combined with XFEM and by performing ∑
h =1
MCS.
tp1
 
∑ L ( x )  ∑ ( F ( x ) − F ( x )) b
tp1 f
+
1 1 t1
K t t k k
FORMULATIONS =k 1 =t 1   (8)
tp2
 
LK ( x )  ∑ ( Ft 2 ( x ) − Ft 2 ( xk ) ) bkt2 
tp 2 f
In the present work the general formulation ∑
for fracture analysis of orthotropic material =k 1= t1 
by using XFEM as given by Mohammadi where cr is the set of nodes that have the
(2008) is used. In this method firstly the crack face (but not the crack tip) in their
meshing is produced by usual finite element support domain, tp1 and tp2 are the sets of
mesh. Then, to provide a higher level of nodes associated with crack tips 1 and 2 in
accuracy a few degrees of freedom are added their influence domain, respectively. u j are
to the classical finite element model in the nodal displacements (standard degrees of
selected nodes near to the crack by freedom), a h , are vectors of additional
considering the location of crack. degrees of freedom for the nodes located on
The equilibrium equations and boundary crack faces and the two crack tips
conditions for a cracked body can be written respectively.
as
∇σ + f q =0 in Ω (1)
with σ n = f on ᴦ t
t
(2)
u=u on ᴦ u
(3)
σn=0 on ᴦc
(4)
where Γ t , Γ u and Γ c are external traction

20
applied on the body, prescribed displacement 15 ELLIPTICAL CRACK
and traction free crack boundaries 10
respectively, σ is the stress tensor and f q and 5
0
f t are the body force and external traction -5
vectors, respectively. To take into account -10
-15
any curvature of the crack, a signed distance -20
-20 -10 0 10 20
function f (x 1 ) often called a level set is
defined. The angle of curvature ϕ is defined Figure 1. Plate with (a) elliptical crack (b)
by two ways; at a point if t.∇g curve ≤ 0, use the meshed model (c) crack tip enrichment
regular polar angle from –t and if t.∇g curve ≥ 0, and crack face enrichment.
ϕ is obtained by Stazi et al. (2003).
501
Stochastic Fracture Analysis of Laminated Composite Panel With Elliptical Crack Subjected to Biaxial
Load Using X-Fem
Table 1 Effect of random variables with COC (=0.1) on the normalized mean and
COV of MSIFs (K I and K II ).
RV’s SIF Mean COV
SOPT MCS SOPT MCS
E 11 KI 1.71942 1.71946 0.001797 0.001795
K II 0.09851 0.09852 0.007816 0.007817
ʋ 12 KI 1.71945 1.71947 0.000331 0.000330
K II 0.09852 0.09853 0.000152 0.000150
G 12 KI 1.71943 1.71943 0.003597 0.003596
K II 0.09851 0.09850 0.015734 0.015733
cw KI 1.72355 1.72357 0.052754 0.052752
K II 0.09911 0.09911 0.350955 0.350955
cd KI 1.71951 1.71953 0.007824 0.007822
K II 0.09881 0.09880 0.249257 0.249255
σ KI 1.71944 1.71944 0.003771 0.003770
K II 0.09851 0.09851 0.029843 0.029840
Φ KI 1.71943 1.71940 0.002739 0.002737
K II 0.09850 0.09848 0.011978 0.011974
Nodes that belong to tp 1 f or tp 2 f are enriched

with the crack-tip enrichment functions SIF STATISTICS RESPONSE FOR
Ft1 ( x ) , Ft 2 ( x ) respectively. H (ξ(x)) is the MULTIPLE RANDOM VARIABLES
Heaviside step function; the nodes which The response variable K which is the function
contain the crack within their support domain of first and second mode SIFs K I and K II can
and do not belong to tp 1 f or tp 2 f are enriched be represented by a relation as
with the Heaviside function H (ξ). In this
study; the value of +1 if the point is on the K = f ( K r ) where r = I , II (10)
positive side of the crack face and –1, where K r is the function of statistically
otherwise: independent and dependent random variables
+1 ξ ∈Ω + a i with mean µ ai and standard deviation σ ai
H (ξ ) = 
−1 ξ ∈ Ω
− (9)
and from Eq. 10 can be given as Hadlar and
The crack tip enrichment functions for Mahadevan (2000)
orthotropic body, which could include all if r =I then K I = K I (a 1 ,a 2 , ......., a n )
possible displacement states with respect to (11)
the polar coordinates (r, θ) defined for crack
geometry in the domain with global Cartesian and if r =II then K II = K II (a 1 ,a 2 ,...., a n )
coordinates (x, y) can be given as:
(12)
 θ1 θ2 
 r cos 2 g1 (θ ) , r cos 2 g 2 (θ ) , 
( Ft (r ,θ ) )t =1 = The mean values of K I or K II can be
4

 r sin θ1 g θ , r sin θ 2 g θ 
1( ) 2( ) 

obtained via expanding K I or K II using
2 2 
Taylor series up to second order about the
502
Palekar and Achchhe Lal
mean values µ a1, µ a2 ... µ an and can be elements selected for enrichment of the crack
obtained as is shown in Fig.1 (b-c).
Since the numerical results of the SOPT
∂K I analysis of elliptical crack are not available in
( ) ( )
n
=K K I µ a1 , µ a2 ,..., µ an + ∑ xi − µ ai
i =1 ∂ai the literature, therefore the present MSIFs are
compared with sampling based MCS
( )( x ) ∂∂aKa
2
1 n n
+ ∑∑ xi − µai
2=i 1 =j 1
j − µa j I
(13) solutions to verify the validity of the present
i j
SXFEM method. The numbers of samples
In the SOPT, the mean response {K} can be used for the MCS approach are taken as
written as 10,000 based on the satisfactory convergence
=E K I" ( ) (
K I µ a1 , µ a2 ,..., µ an + ) 1
2
var { K I } (14)
of the result.
The results obtained for mean and COV of
The corresponding second variance matrix of
SOPT as shown in Table 1 is in good
response var{K I ’’} can be obtained as
agreement with the results of MCS. It is
var { K I" } = var { K I } (15) observed that the plate is more sensitive to
Similarly, the mean and variance of K II can randomness in variables cw, cd, σ and Φ as
be evaluated. the values for COV of these RV’s are higher
as compared to the E 11 , ʋ 12 and G 12 .
The stochastic response of MSIFs is
CONCLUSION
evaluated by modelling different system Among the different random variables used
parameters as independent Gaussian random in the present study, the random variables
variables (RV’s). such as cw, cd, σ and Φ have the dominant
The basic random system variables {a i (i=1...
effect on the fracture behaviour of the plate.
7)} are defined and sequenced as;
a 1 = E 11, a 2 = ʋ 12 , a 3 = G 12 , a 4 = cw, Therefore it can be concluded that the proper
a 5 = cd, a 6 = σ, and a 7 = Φ. control of these random parameters for
where, a 1 to a 7 are Young’s modulli, reliability of composite plate with elliptical
Poisson’s ratio, shear modulus, crack width, crack is required.
crack depth, tensile stress, and lamination
angle, respectively. Keeping in mind the REFERENCES
limitation of perturbation technique, the
Hadlar A Mahadevan S 2000 Probability
coefficient of correlation (COC) in the
random input system properties is kept 10% reliability and statistical methods in
(COC= 0.1) variation from their mean values. engineering design John Wiley & Sons
Following, normalized SIFs, K I and K II are Inc. New York.
used in the present analysis.
K I = K I σ π . cw and K II = K II σ π . cw Moes N Dolbow J Belytschko T 1999 A
finite element method for crack growth
In this study a four layered symmetric without remeshing International
[0°/45°/45°/0°] laminated composite square Journal of Numerical Methods in
panel with length L (=40 mm), width W (=40 Engineering 46 131 150.
mm) and unit thickness having centrally
located semi elliptical crack with major axis Mohammadi S 2008 Extended finite element
(cw =1 mm) and minor axis (cd =0.5 mm) method for fracture analysis of
subjected to biaxially applied tensile stress σ structures Blackwell publishing ltd.
equal to unity as shown in Fig.1 (a) is Stazi F L Budyn E Chessa J Belytschko T
considered. The meshing, modelling and 2003 An extended finite element
503
Stochastic Fracture Analysis of Laminated Composite Panel With Elliptical Crack Subjected to Biaxial
Load Using X-Fem
method with higher-order elements for

curved cracks Journal of
Computational Mechanics 31 38–48.
504
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDIES ON THE INFLUENCE OF NOTCH DEPTH AND

LOCATION ON THE NATURAL FREQUENCY OF INDETERMINATE
BEAMS
STUTI M.1, VARUN K.1, KALYANA RAMA J S.1* and RAMACHANDRA MURTHY A.2
1
BITS Pilani-Hyderabad Campus, Shameerpet, Hyderabad, India
2
CSIR-Structural Engineering Research Centre, Taramani, Chennai, India
Abstract: Every physical structural system in real context when subjected to loads or
displacements behaves dynamically. Dynamic nature of the system is mainly due to
the additional inertial forces which is a product of mass times the acceleration.
Stiffness and mass of the structural system also plays a vital role in assessing the
dynamic nature of any system. Considering the effect of dynamic nature, it is essential
to address the frequency and corresponding mode shapes of a system. The present
study deals with the dynamic analysis of statically indeterminate beams with
distributed mass with and without the notch as a part of damage induced at 0.3L, 0.5L
and 0.7L locations of the beam. Three different notch depths were considered for the
identified locations. An analysis was carried out using a finite element tool ABAQUS
6.14, to see the behavior of beams in terms of its fundamental frequency with the
increase in notch to depth ratios for three different locations. From the analysis it was
observed that frequency decreases with the increase in notch depth for both the chosen
fixed-fixed and propped cantilever beams.
Keywords: Fundamental frequency; Notch depth; Frequency ratio.
INTRODUCTION without external excitation is called natural

frequency of the body. Frequency clearly
Presence of cracks implies an initiation of a
depends on the stiffness and mass of the
damage in a structural component due to
body. Presence of crack in the structure
applied load. Hence crack detection for
results in introduction of some flexibility to
structural members has always been an area
the structure. Thus stiffness decreases and
of concern for researchers. Processes often
hence change in natural frequency can be felt
used for fatigue crack detection are direct
easily. This phenomenon is hence exploited
methods like X-Rays, Ultrasounds, etc. these
for detection of cracks in structures. Crack
methods are however very expensive and are
depth and crack location can well be
not always feasible. They also require
determined with the help of changed natural
detailed monitoring. One way to avoid all
frequencies and mode shapes. The present
hassles is to make use of vibration based
paper studies the changes in frequencies and
methods which are not only economical but
mode shapes due to the presence of crack in a
are also fast and effective. Every repetitive
beam.
motion can be categorized as vibration. A
structure is said to be undergoing free Bakhtiari-Nejad et. al., (2013) studied
vibration if it is disturbed from static determinate beams with one and two cracks
equilibrium and then allowed to vibrate of different depth at different locations for
without any external dynamic loading. The frequencies and mode shapes using analytical
frequency with which the body vibrates estimation based on Rayleigh’s method. As
_____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: kalyan@hyderabad.bits-pilani.ac.in 505

Kalyana et al.
depth increases accuracy of estimation was and width 2000 mm was considered for
found to decrease. So, upper limit of crack modelling
depth had been found for both cases of beam
with one and two cracks for first three natural NUMERICAL MODELLING
frequencies and mode shapes. Mehrjoo et. al.,
The frequency extraction procedure performs
(2013) used Genetic Algorithm to locate the
eigenvalue extraction to calculate the natural
crack and its depth. Effect of crack was taken
frequencies and the corresponding mode
by modeling a rotational spring at each crack
shapes of a system. It is a linear perturbation
location and modifying the element stiffness
method.
matrix as a function of crack location and
depth. Barad et. al., (2013) investigated the The eigenvalue problem for the natural
effect of crack location and depth on natural frequencies of an undamped finite element
frequency analytically using rotational spring model is
in the models at the crack locations. Nguyen (−𝜔2 𝑀𝑀𝑁 + 𝐾 𝑀𝑁 )𝜙 𝑁 = 0
(2014) analyzed the mode shapes of cracked
beams using FEM and found sharp spatial Where MMN is the mass matrix (which is
bent in mode shapes of beams with crack. symmetric and positive definite); KMN is the
But beams with no cracks showed mode stiffness matrix (which includes initial
shapes in plane. Baviskar and Tungikar, stiffness effects if the base state included the
(2013) developed an algorithm to predict effects of nonlinear geometry); ϕN is the
crack characteristics from measurement of eigenvector (the mode of vibration); and M
natural frequency using Artificial Neural and N are degrees of freedom. When KMN is
Network. Jabboor, (2011) considered both positive definite, all eigenvalues are positive.
elastic and plastic properties while Rigid body modes and instabilities
considering both geometric and material non- cause KMN to be indefinite. Rigid body modes
linearity for dynamic analysis of the beam. produce zero eigenvalues. Instabilities
Permanent displacements under explosive produce negative eigenvalues and occur
loads, with specific velocities, were studied. when you include initial stress effects.
Yokoyama and Chen, (1998) analyzed Abaqus/Standard solves the eigen frequency
Bernoulli-Euler beam with single edge crack problem only for symmetric matrices. For the
under vibration using ANSYS. The crack Lanczos method of eigenvalue extraction we
was modeled as line spring i.e. in place of need to provide the maximum frequency of
crack a spring of zero length was considered. interest or the number of eigenvalues
Theoretical analysis was done using Nash’s required; Abaqus/Standard will determine
equation and results were compared with natural frequency and asked number of mode
experimental and analytical results to check shapes.
the accuracy of the model. For a simply
For the chosen dimensions of the beam, crack
supported beam it was found that as the crack
depth ratios (a/w) varying from 0.1 to 0.3
gets closer to the mid span, at a given depth
were considered at three locations (s/L) 0.3,
of crack, natural frequency falls.
0.5 and 0.7 of the beam. Natural frequencies
Discontinuity in mode shape was found at the
associated with first three modes were
mid span where the crack was located. For a
calculated for clamped-clamped and
cantilever it was seen that as the crack
clamped-roller edge conditions of the beam.
reached away from the support, effect of
Figure 1 shows the ABAQUS model of a
crack on the natural frequency partially
beam with varying notch depth and location.
vanished. With increase in depth of the crack,
natural frequency dropped down.
From the review of literature, a two
dimensional Euler beam of depth 200 mm
Figure 1. ABAQUS model of beam
506
Numerical Studies on the Influence of Notch Depth and Location on The Natural Frequency of
Indeterminate Beams
when the cracks are at the center of the

beam In the fixed beam the rate of increase
Table 1. Natural frequencies at different is nearly uniform on either side of center of
crack depths and locations at mode one the beam and in case of propped cantilever
of a fixed-fixed beam with and without the rate of increase towards the fixed end is
an edge crack much more than that towards the propped
end. It can also be observed that change in
crack depth ratios near clamped ends has
Without a/w = a/w = a/w = less impact on the fundamental frequency. It
s/L can be clearly seen that the frequency
Crack 0.1 0.2 0.3
decreases with an increase in crack depth.
0.3 7.7084 7.6856 7.6582 7.6077
0.5 7.7084 7.6451 7.5095 7.3
1
Fundamental Frequency Ratio

0.7 7.7084 7.6856 7.6602 7.6077
0.98
Table 2. Natural frequencies at different 0.96 s/L=0.3

crack depths and locations at mode one
0.94 s/L=0.5
of a fixed-roller beam with and without
an edge crack s/L=0.7
0.92
0.9
Without a/w = a/w = a/w =
s/L 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Crack 0.1 0.2 0.3
Crack Depth Ratio (a/w)
0.3 5.8507 5.8462 5.8417 5.8222
0.5 5.8507 5.8048 5.6894 5.4947 Figure 3. Variation of frequency ratio
w.r.t. crack depth at specified crack
0.7 5.8507 5.804 5.6989 5.4944 location for fixed-pinned beam
1 1
Fundamental Frequency Ratio
Fudamental Frequency Ratio
0.98 0.98
0.96 0.96
s/L=0.3 a/w=0.1
0.94 s/L=0.5 0.94 a/w=0.2
s/L=0.7 a/w=0.3
0.92 0.92
0.9 0.9
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Crack Depth Ratio (a/w)
Crack Location Ratio (s/L)
Figure 2. Variation of frequency ratio

w.r.t. crack depth at specified crack
w.r.t. crack location at specified crack
location for a propped cantilever beam
depth for a fixed-fixed b
From figures 2 to 4 it can be observed that
the fundamental frequencies attain minima
_____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: kalyan@hyderabad.bits-pilani.ac.in 507

Kalyana et al.
structures using a new cracked Euler–

1 Bernoulli beam element Applied Soft
Fudamental Frequency Ratio
0.98
Computing 13 867 – 880
Nguyen K V 2014 Mode shapes analysis of
0.96 a/w=0.1
a cracked beam and its application for
0.94 a/w=0.2 crack detection Journal of Sound and
a/w=0.3 Vibration 333 848 – 872
0.92
Yokoyama T Chen M C 1998 Vibration
0.9 analysis of edge-cracked beams using
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
a line-spring model Engineering
Crack Location Ratio (s/L) Fracture Mechanics 59 403 – 409

w.r.t. crack location at specified crack
depth for a propped cantilever beam
REFERENCES
ABAQUS Theory Manual Version 6.7
Bakhtiari-Nejad F Khorram A Rezaeian M
2014 Analytical estimation of natural
frequencies and mode shapes of a
beam having two cracks International
Journal of Mechanical Sciences 78
193–202
Barad K H Sharma D S Vyas V 2013 Crack
detection in cantilever beam by
frequency based method Procedia
Engineering 51 770 – 775
Baviskar P R Tungikar V B 2013 Multiple
Cracks Assessment using Natural
Frequency Measurement and
Prediction of Crack Properties by
Artificial Neural Network
International Journal of Advanced
Science and Technology 54 23 – 38
Chopra A K 2014 Dynamics of Structures
Pearson Education, Inc. South Asia
438 - 454
Jabboor W 2011 Dynamic Structural
Analysis of Beams Ph. D. Thesis-
School of the Built Environment,
Heriot-Watt University 1 - 233
Mehrjoo M Khaji N Ghafory-Ashtiany M
2013 Application of genetic algorithm
in crack detection of beam-like
508
ICCMS2016
INFLUENCE OF NOTCH TO DEPTH RATIO ON FRACTURE PROCESS

PARAMETERS OF PLAIN CONCRETE BEAM USING CONCRETE
DAMAGED PLASTICITY MODEL
GEORGE J.*1, KALYANA RAMA J. S.2, SIVA KUMAR M. V. N.3, VASAN A.4and
RAMACHANDRA MURTHY A.5
1,3
Department of Civil Engineering, National Institute of Technology(N. I. T) Warangal,
Telangana State, India.
2, 4
Department of Civil Engineering, Birla Institute of Technology & Science (B.I.T.S Pilani)
Hyderabad, India.
5
Structural Engineering Research Centre, CSIR-SERC, Chennai, Tamil Nadu, India.
Abstract: With the increase in the usage of concrete as a construction material, it is

essential for the designers to address the failures of various structural components due
to crack formation. Structural components like beams were vulnerable to failure due
to the formation of cracks. Fracture Mechanics concepts will be very much useful in
addressing such issues with the formation of cracks. In the present study, computer
based simulations were carried out on Notched beams so as to determine the fracture
energy from the load displacements graph. Finite Element Analysis package-
ABAQUS6.14 is used to carry out the analysis. Concrete damaged plasticity (CDP)
model has been used to account for the nonlinear behaviour of concrete. The CDP
model is a modified form of Drucker Prager criterion which takes into account the
tensile cracking and compression crushing. The effect of notch/depth ratio of beams
subjected to three point bending test has been studied to recognize their influence on
the fracture energy released for the formation of cracks. The effect of mesh refinement
has also been studied so as to accurately predict the results. It was observed that, with
the increase in the notch-depth ratio fracture energy decreased.
Keywords: Concrete Damaged Plasticity; Finite Element; fracture energy;
notch/depth ratio; mesh refinement.
INTRODUCTION design engineers over any other construction

The second most widely used material in the material. Many research and studies have been
world next to water is concrete. Concrete being performed to study and predict the behaviour
an inert construction material does not burn of concrete. A general assumption of concrete
nor involves itself in any kind of harmful being homogenous in nature is adopted so as
chemical reactions that would jeopardize the to simplify the design theories and ease the
health and safety of the building occupants. understanding of its behaviour. However the
Concrete is adaptable and also a durable response of a practical concrete structures
construction material that gains strength over when subjected to designed service loading are
time which makes it a preferred choice of anomalous due to presence of cracks in them.
*Author for Correspondence- E-mail:jobingeo154@gmail.com

509
George et al.
Cracks in concrete are inevitable which might A concrete beam of size

be due to one or combination of factors such as 700mmx150mmx150mm was considered with
shrinkage of concrete, thermal contraction or an initial notch width of 0.2mm. The notch
under dynamic or cyclic loading. Inclusions of depth has been varied from 0.1 to 0.5so as to
study of crack effect in concrete further study its influence on the fracture energy for
complicates our understanding of its the propagation of cracks. A three point
behaviour, thus none of the existing code bending test has been simulated
provisions on concrete are based on fracture computationally using Finite Element Analysis
mechanics. Sufficient understanding of package- ABAQUS 6.14. The grade of
fracture mechanics by concrete engineers concrete considered for the study was M25 as
would help them to predict and design the per IS 456:2000. The element for meshing was
response of concrete structures to loading so as selected as plane stress CPS4R Type- A four
to avoid catastrophic failure in future. noded bilinear plane stress quadrilateral.
Concrete Damaged plasticity model has been
LITERATURE REVIEW used to carry out the simulations. Concrete
Peter Grassl (2006) in his study has proposed a Tension and compression damage has been
new constitutive model to enhance the analysis defined in this model as CDP model takes into
of failure of concrete structures. This model account the tensile cracking and compression
incorporates both strain based damage and crushing. It is a modified form of Drucker-
stress based plasticity with an aim to achieve Prager criterion and combines the effect of
the important characteristic of concrete isotropic compressive and tensile plasticity of
structure when subjected to multi-axial concrete in association with isotropic damaged
loading. More realistic behaviour of concrete elasticity to account for the inelastic behaviour
can be observed as two separate isotropic of concrete. Simulations are carried out on
damage parameters for tension and notched beams so as to obtain the fracture
compression has been defined. The above process parameters such as fracture energy,
proposed model gives mesh independent load characteristic length etc. Mesh refinement
displacement curves for tensile and effect has been studied so as to recognize their
compression failures. influence on accuracy of the results.
S.V Chaudhari and M. A. Chakrabarti (2012) RESULTS& DISCUSSIONS

in his study has strained on the usage of
Following graphs have been obtained from
computer simulation ABAQUS so as to satisfy
ABAQUS for various Notch/Depth ratios.
the increasing urge to find exact solution for a
Figures fig.1 (a) to fig.5 (a) represent the load
concrete fracture problem. A fair comparison
vs CMOD curve for a beam subjected to Three
has been carried out between Smeared Crack
Point Bending for varying notch to depth
modelling and Concrete Damaged plasticity
ratios. It was observed that with the increase in
model- a model available in ABAQUS and the
displacement, load was decreasing after
results has been verified with the theoretical
attaining the peak value. This behaviour
values of stresses obtained by the equations
clearly depicts the softening behaviour
formulated by Hognestad. It has also been
shown in his study that the concrete damaged Fracture energy was calculated using the
plasticity model is mesh sensitive and thus expression given below:
smaller the mesh size closer would be the 𝑈0
results to the desired values. 𝐺𝑓 =
𝐵(𝑊 − 𝑎0 )
MODELLING
510
Influence of Notch to Depth Ratio on Fracture Process Parameters of Plain Concrete Beam Using Concrete
Damaged Plasticity Model.
Where, B = Width of the beam

U 0 = Area under the Load-CMOD curve W = Thickness of the beam
𝑎0 = notch depth
Load vs CMOD (notch/depth = 0.1) .
12
10
Load (kN)
8
6
4
2
0
0 0.5 1 1.5
CMOD (mm)
(a) (b)
Figure1 (a) Load vs CMOD graph for Beam Specimen with Notch/Depth = 0.1 (b) Model
of Beam Specimen in ABAQUS for notch/depth = 0.1
Load vs CMOD (notch/depth = 0.2)

8
6
Load (kN)
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
CMOD (mm)
(a) (b)
Figure 2 (a) Load vs CMOD graph for Beam Specimen with Notch/Depth = 0.2 (b) Model
of Beam Specimen in ABAQUS for notch/depth = 0.2
CONCLUSIONS subjected to loading or with initial flaws or

cracks.
Introduction of isotropic compressive and
tensile damage parameters helps us to achieve 1. From the modeling it was found that the
more realistic behavior of concrete structure Concrete Damaged Plasticity model was
511
George et al.
mesh sensitive i.e. lesser the mesh size

more accurate would be the results.
2. Fracture energy decreases with increasing
notch to depth ratio.
REFERENCES
Chaudhari S V and M A Chakrabarti 2012
Modelling of Concrete for nonlinear
analysis using Finite Element Code
ABAQUS International Journal of
Computer Applications 44(7)0975 – 8887
Grass P Xenos D Nystrom U Rempling R and
Gylltoft K 2013 CDPM2 A damage-
plasticity approach to modelling the
failure of concrete arXiv: 1307.6998v1
[cond-mat.mtrl-sci].
Grassl P and Jirasek M2006 Damage-plastic
model for concrete failure International
Journal of Solids and Structures 43
7166–7196.
Jankowiak T and Lodygowski T 2005
Identification of parameters of Concrete
Damage Plasticity Constitutive model
Publishing House of Poznan University of
Technology Poznan ISSN 1642-9303.
Wu J Y Li J and Faria R 2006 An energy
release rate-based plastic-damage model
for concrete International Journal of
Solids and Structures 43 583–612.
512
ICCMS2016
DAMAGE DEVELOPMENT DURING SINGLE FIBER FRAGMENTATION

PARAMBIL N.K. and GURURAJA S.
Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, Bangalore-560 012, India
Abstract: A numerical framework to study the associated damage mechanisms during single
fiber fragmentation in uni-directional fiber reinforced plastics (UD-FRPs) with 3-D repeating unit
cells (RUCs) has been developed. Three different damage mechanisms have been considered in
this work viz., matrix damage, fiber-matrix interface debonding and fiber failure. A non-linear
homogenization technique has been used to obtain the effective constitutive behavior of the 3-D
RUCs. In the present work, damage initiation and propagation of UD-FRPs has been developed
due to varying strength distribution along the fiber length.
Keywords: Micromechanics; Damage; Composites.
INTRODUCTION composites have been chosen for failure

analysis. The strength of the single fiber is
FRPs have become the structural material of
assigned to vary statistically using Weibull
choice in various industries due to their
distribution. In addition, matrix damage and
superior specific strength and stiffness
fiber-matrix debonding is allowed to occur
properties. However, for optimal design of
concurrently during loading. The effect of 3D-
composite structures it becomes important to
RUC size on homogenized stress strain curve
model failure in composites accurately. Failure
and the associated damage development has
modeling in composites remains a very
been studied extensively. The present analysis
challenging task due to the presence of
will pave way towards multi-scale damage
multiple damage modes at multiple length
development in FRPs.
scales (Talreja R, 2014). Several of the
damage modes such as matrix cracking, APPROACH
matrix-fiber debonding, fiber breaking etc.
occur in a progressive fashion. In recent times, A modelling framework of 3D-RUC with
extensive work has been conducted to develop periodic boundary conditions (PBCs)
a multi-scale damage development framework integrated within ABAQUS has been
using numerical homogenization techniques. developed using a python scripting interface
One of the key damage processes that have for rapid modeling of microstructures. In order
been looked at is that of a single fiber to study the damage mechanisms in the 3D-
fragmentation. Extensive fundamental work RUC, an algorithm has been developed to
has been conducted on damage accumulation generate randomly distributed strengths along
and fracture using weakest link theories based the length of the fiber embedded in a matrix.
on stochastic strength behaviour of brittle Radius of the fiber, fiber volume fraction and
fibers by Curtin (1999). number of partitions along the fiber are used
In the current work, single fiber fragmentation as input parameters to generate finite element
(FE) model. 3D-RUCs are meshed using 3D 8-
______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: suhasini@aero.iisc.ernet.in

513
Parambil and Gururaja
noded linear isoparametric elements (C3D8). CONCLUSIONS

Convergence studies have been conducted to
Single fiber fragmentation tests have been
figure out the optimal mesh size for the model.
simulated with an accurate damage model that
Fiber damage is simulated using a maximum allows for statistical strength variation along
stress criterion. A basic stiffness degradation the fiber length, fiber-matrix debonding and
approach has been used to simulate the matrix damage. The current framework yields
damaged element. A linear traction separation a damaged constitutive response similar to that
criterion has been used to simulate fiber- demonstrated in experiments. Further detailed
matrix debonding. A modified von mises investigations are being carried out to
criterion with isotropic damage model has understand the effect of fiber volume fraction,
been used for matrix damage. In addition, the RUC length, Weibull parameters on the failure
loading is applied along the direction of the response of the 3D-RUC.
fiber and the individual damage modes have
been identified and studied in detail. Further
REFERENCES
details of the modeling approach can be found
in previous work by Parambil et al. (2016), Curtin W A 1999 Stochastic damage evolution
Parambil and Gururaja (2015). and failure in fiber reinforced composites
Advanced Applied Mechanics 36 163-
253.
Llorca J Gonzlez C Molina-Aldaregua J M
Figure 1 depicts a typical homogenized stress Segurado J Seltzer R Sket F Rodrguez M
strain curve (σ 11 vs ε 11 wherein 1-direction is Sdaba S Muoz R and Canal L P 2011
along the fiber direction in the 3D-RUC). As Multi-scale modelling of composite
can be seen in the figure, due to the statistical materials: A roadmap towards virtual
variation in the strength of the fiber along its testing Advanced Materials 23(44) 5130–
length, multiple load drops occur with 5147.
increasing loading. Each load drop
Melro A R Camanho P P A Pires F M and
corresponds to either a single fiber break or Pinho S T 2013 Micromechanical
multiple fiber breaks. The 3D-RUC considered analysis of polymer composites
in this analysis corresponds to a fiber volume reinforced by unidirectional fibers: Part II
fraction V f = 10%. Fiber breakage (Figure Micromechanical analyses International
3(b)) is quickly associated with other damage Journal of Solids and Structures
modes such as interface softening (Figure 3 50(1)1906–1915.
(c)) and matrix damage (Figure 3(d)). It is
Parambil N K and Gururaja S 2015 Damage
interesting to note that the matrix damage does
development in 3D-RUC of polymer
not seem to progress independently. Instead, matrix with randomly distributed fibers
upon further load application in 1-direciton, AIAA 2015-097 56th
further fiber breaks are found to occur which AIAA/ASCE/AHS/ASC Structures,
then initiate matrix damage along neighboring Structural Dynamics and Materials
elements (Figures 3(e-f) corresponding to Conference.
point B on the homogenized stress strain
Parambil N K and Gururaja S 2016 Damage
curve).
onset and evolution in polymer
composites considering spatial variation
514
2
Damage Development During Single Fiber Fragmentation
of fibers Journal of Composite Materials V f Fiber volume fraction

(To appear) E ii Young’s modulus in ith direction
Parambil N K Pervaiz Fathima F M and G ij Shear modulus
Gururaja S 2016 Effect of strength ν ij Poisson’s ratio
variation along a single fiber on micro- σ T Longitudinal tensile strength of fiber
scale damage development in UD-FRPs σ Y Yield stress of matrix
AIAA 2016-0731 57th G I c Critical strain energy release rate (Mode I)
AIAA/ASCE/AHS/ASC Structures G IIc Critical strain energy release rate (Mode
Structural Dynamics and Materials II)
Conference. K n Penalty stiffness
t n Normal traction component for interface
Talreja R 2014 Assessment of the
fundamentals of failure theories for t s First shear component for interface
composite materials Composite Science σ o Weibull scale parameter
and Technology 5 105:190-201. m Weibull shape parameter
NOMENCLATURE
Homogenized stress-strain curve
180
160
140
120
B
Stress, σ 11 (MPa)
100
80 A
60
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6
Strain, ε 11 (%)
(a)
(b)
515
Parambil and Gururaja
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Figure 1: (a) Homogenized stress strain curves for the 3D-RUC with varying strength
along the fiber. (b) Failed elements in the fiber corresponding to point A (c) Damage
onset at the fiber-matrix interface at point A. (d) Matrix damage at point A (e) Failed
elements in the fiber corresponding to point B. (f) Damage onset at the fiber-matrix
interface at point B. (g) Matrix damage at point B.
516
4
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF FATIGUE CRACK PROPAGATION IN PLATE GIRDER

DAS R. and THAKKAR B.
School of Science and Engineering, Navrachana University, Vadodara
Abstract: Plate Girders are typically I-beams made up of separate structural steel
plates which are welded, bolted or riveted to form vertical deep web and horizontal
flanges. An edge crack was observed on the weldment of the plate girder and a study
has been carried out for ascertaining safe number of cycles for the plate girder under
anticipated cyclic loads. This study adopts a fracture mechanics based approach to
determine the crack propagation characteristics and development of crack due to
cyclic loads has been studied using Paris’ law. FRANC2D has been adopted here for
the computational simulation of crack growth and propagation. The fatigue life of a
crack in the weldment has been estimated. The approach gives significant information
regarding the fatigue life and crack propagation characteristics.
Keywords: Fatigue; Crack Growth; Finite Element Analysis; Fracture
Mechanics; Paris Law; Plate Girder; Weldment.
INTRODUCTION high possibility of micro or macro-cracks

A plate girder is constructed from plates of developing around the bolt holes, which
steel that are either bolted or welded together. would seriously hamper the performance of
The purpose of the plate girder is to build a the joints. Bolt or rivet holes also produce
beam that is larger than anything that can be stress concentration and are potential sites for
built by a steel mill or factory. This type of initiation of crack or damage. While welding
girder is usually used to make certain types of is a good choice, it offers a potential threat of
bridges and other industrial structures, and transfer of crack from one part of the
the girders themselves are very often in the component to the other. Further, the plate
shape of an I-beam. The size and shape of the girders used in industrial structures are often
girder allows builders to construct bridges subjected to cyclic loads, which may
that are much longer and heavier duty than introduce number of fatigue cracks at the
bridges constructed with other designs. The vicinity of the weldment after some number
plates are welded or bolted together in a of cycles. It becomes imperative then to
specific configuration for optimal strength determine the remaining life of the joints or
and reliability. The depth of the girder is no members based on fatigue crack propagation
less than 1/15 the span, and for a given load studies.
bearing capacity, a depth of around 1/12 the Fracture mechanics is a branch of solid
span minimizes the weight of the girder. mechanics that deals with the study of stress
Bolting and riveting are the common choice and strain fields around existing cracks in a
because of the simplicity involved in structure and tries to describe the behaviour
fabrication of the joints. However, bolting of the structure under effect of existing and
propagating cracks. A structure may be
and riveting operations require drilling of bolt
subjected to static or repetitive or cyclic
or rivet holes in the members. There is a very loads. A structural component may fail under
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:rasbihari@gmail.com 517

Das and Thakkar
the effect of repeated cyclic loads which may depicted in Figure 3. The von Mises
be of much smaller magnitude than the static equivalent stress values reported in the
failure loads. Such a failure of a component
is termed as a fatigue failure. Most industrial
structures are usually subjected to cyclic
loads and are prone to fatigue failure. It is
extremely common to observe fatigue cracks
emanating in the joints/members. The
probable locations from where the cracks
may emanate are called hot-spots. Since the
analysis is carried out using finite element
method, the crack propagation problem
becomes mesh sensitive. Fatigue is the
degradation of material and subsequent crack
propagation under the influence of repeated
cyclic loads on a structure. Commonly, the
fatigue life of a component can be described
by the well-known Paris’ law [Dahlberg and Figure 1. Schematic of Plate Girder.
Ekberg, 2006]. Paris law requires two
material constants for characterization of the
crack propagation behaviour; viz., m and C.
Experiments are required for determination
of m and C [Anderson, 2005].
ANALYSIS OF PLATE GIRDER

An industrial steel plate girder of length 15m
has been taken into consideration for analysis
here. The dimensions of the flanges are
350mm x 40mm, and the web is 1250m x
20mm. The welding of the plates was done
using submerged arc welding (SAW). The
weldment has a length of 30mm and a Figure 2. Finite Element Mesh of Plate
thickness of 25mm. A crack of 1 mm was Girder.
located in the weldment on the flange side. A
schematic of plate girder cross section is
shown in Figure 1.
FRANC2D is a two dimensional, finite
element based program for simulating crack
propagation in planar structures. The girder
cross section has been modelled in Franc 2D
using 8512 nodes and 2705 8-nodedlinear
strain quadrilateral elements. The finite
element mesh has been reproduced in Figure
2 and the Von Mises equivalent stresses
computed using FRANC2D have been
Figure 3. Von Mises Equivalent Stresses.
518
Analysis of Fatigue Crack Propagation in Plate Girder
plot are in MPa. Material properties of fatigue analysis approach has been studied.
standard industrial steel have been adopted FRANC2D has been used successfully for the
for the stress analysis .For fatigue analysis fracture analysis of cracks in weldment of the
using Paris’ law, the parameters are adopted plate girder. The approach adopted gives a
as m=3 and C =8.22192e-14 (MPa mm1/2) reasonably good description of the fatigue
(T. LASSEN 1990). The crack was allowed life of the plate girder. Fracture based
to propagate in FRANC2D simulation. The analysis should be adopted in the design
fatigue load cycles has been determined as an procedure for clearer description of crack
output of FRANC2D and has been propagation and estimation of life of the plate
reproduced in Figure 4. The crack girder.
propagation has been simulated till a crack
approaches length of approximately 20 mm.
Of course the plate girder should not be 35000
allowed to be in service till such a large crack
30000
length gets developed. A reasonable crack
25000
Number of Cycles
length at which the plate girder may be
changed/repaired would be approximately 20000
6mm, which corresponds to approximately 15000
30,000 load cycles. The decision whether this 10000
life span is sufficient depends on the number
5000
of load cycles imposed in a day and would
0
depend on the structure under consideration.
The life of the structure can be increased by -5000
introducing a smooth circular surface near the 0 5 10 15
tip of the crack to arrest the crack or by crack length (mm)
eliminating the crack from the material by
cutting some portion of the material. As Figure 4.Crack Length vs Number of
fracture mechanics requires a crack for cycles for cracked structure.
analysis of the structure a crack of 1mm has
been additionally given which may be found 40000
out during the cutting of the material, which 35000
is propagated up to a crack length of 15mm
30000
for fatigue analysis of the new structure. The
25000
number of cycles
new life cycle of the structure after

introduction of the smooth surface is found 20000
out to be two to three times higher than that 15000

of the un-cracked structure which is 10000
illustrated with figure 5. 5000
0
CONCLUSION
-5000
Fracture mechanics based fatigue analysis of 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5
a welded plate girder has been carried out and crack length (mm)
described here. The life of the plate girder as
estimated by the Fracture Mechanics based
519
Das and Thakkar
Figure 5.Crack Length vs Number of

cycles for un-cracked structure.
REFERENCES
Anderson T L 2005 Fracture Mechanics-
Fundamentals and Applications
3eTaylor and Francis.
Broek D 1984 Elementary Engineering
Fracture Mechanics Martinus Nijhoff
Publishers The Netherlands
Choudhary B K Roedig M and Mannan S L
2004 Fatigue Crack Growth Behavior Of
Base Metal, Weld Metal And Heat
Affected Zone Alloy 800 AT 823 K.
Trans. Indian Inst. Met.57 639-649
Dahlberg T, and Ekberg A 2006 Failure
Fracture Fatigue An introduction
Overseas Press (India) Pvt Ltd.
Lassen T 1990The Effect of the Welding
Process on the Fatigue Crack Growth,
Welding Research Supplement2 75s-82s.
McHenry H I and Reed R P 1977 Fracture
behavior of the heat affected zone in 5%
Ni steel weldment, Welding Research
Supplement 4 104s-112s.
Prashant Kumar 1999 Elements of Fracture
Mechanics Wheeler Publishing.
Subramanian N 2008 Design of Steel
Structures Oxford university press 929-
940.
Thakkar B K 2012 Analysis of Fatigue Crack
Propagation in Gusset Plates
International Journal of Structural and
Civil Engineering Research1 87-91.
Weiss B Z Steffens H D and Seifert D K
1972Fracture Toughness of the Heat-
Affected Zone in14CrMoV69 Steel and
18Ni Maraging Steel, Welding Research
Supplement 9 449s-456s.
520
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF CRACK PROPAGATION IN A WELDED LAP JOINTS

PATEL Y. and THAKKAR B.
School of Science and Engineering, Navrachana University, Vadodara, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: One of the major reasons for the joint failure in steel structures is initiation
and propagation of cracks in steel weldments. Cracks are often developed in lap joints
due to a combination of shear and flexure and are usually periodic in nature. Various
approaches have been adopted by researchers to describe the flexure crack
propagation in steel welded joints. The usual approach is to model a crack, taking in to
account the change in fracture toughness value K I c between steel plate and the welded
joint. The welded region is affected by the heat produced during welding process and
exhibits significant change in mechanical properties. Flexural stiffness and strength of
cracked members around the heat affected zones would also be significantly affected.
This paper tries to describe a study conducted on crack propagation in a welded region
between two steel plates. A fracture analysis codeFRANC2D has been adopted here to
generate a model of two welded steel plates having a crack in between. Behaviour of
the crack and stress distribution around it has been studied taking in to account the
location of crack, mode of crack, properties of welded region etc.
Keywords: Fracture Mechanics; Finite element analysis; crack propagation
behaviour; welded joint, welded steel plates; FRANC2D.
INTRODUCTION cohesive edge crack of 1mm length has been

To study the behaviour of a cracked welded introduced in the welded joint to observe the
member, it is necessary to obtain the crack deformation and stresses. Over the increase
depth and tip location. This is usually in total applied load, propagation of crack is
achieved by non-destructive evaluation studied, as well as the deformed shape is
techniques. While designing members by noted. Direction of crack, mode of failure,
Fracture Mechanics approach, a crack of crack tip location and lap length of the weld
small length is usually postulated. joint have been taken into consideration
while modelling as well as analysing.
In present study, two welded steel plates with
1mm crack in the welded region are PROCEDURE
considered. The lap joint is subjected to a Two steel plates with 10mm lap length weld
tensile load. An effort to describe the in between them have been modelled. The
behaviour of such a crack has been made. effect of stresses in the lap joint would be
Initially, the crack is under Mode II opening smoothened out within around 30mm.
.As the crack propagates, it slowly deviates Consequently, each plate has been modelled
to be under opening Mode I. to be having 60mm length. The material
A finite element model for simulating properties for each steel plate and the weld
propagation of crack in a welded lap joint has joint have been shown in Table1. Steel plate
been developed in FRANC2D. A non- 1 is considered to be 150 mm in width and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:yameenpatel.31@gmail.com 521

Patel and Thakkar
steel plate 2 is considered to be 1000 mm in (60 x 10 x 1000) mm. 1mm the weld has
width, making dimensions of both plates 1 been assumed in between both the plates. Lap
and 2 respectively as (60 x 10 x 150) mm and length of the joints taken as 10 mm.
Figure 1. Schematic of the lap joint

Table1. Material properties
Young’s modulus of Fracture toughness

elasticity (K1c) Poison’s
Material no. Type of material
ratio
(N/mm2) (MPa.m1/2)
1 Steel plate 1 200000 220 0.33
2 Steel plate 2 200000 220 0.33
3 Steel plate 3 200000 103 0.33
The left edge of the upper steel plate (plate 1) direction of the crack, stress contours, etc.
has been restrained to deform in x and y were observed.
directions. A point load of 10KN was applied
on the right edge of the lower steel plate RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
(plate 2) subjecting the specimen to direct A finite element mash showing steel plates,
tension. A non-cohesive, traction-free edge weld joint and 1 mm crack is shown in the
crack of 1mm length was generated on one figure 2. Tensile load on the plate was
edge of the welded region such that the crack incremented from 10kN to 60kN in steps of
becomes parallel to the longitudinal direction 10kN. Figure 3 shows crack propagation and
of both steel plates. The point load was deformed mesh after applying lodes of all 6
gradually increased up to 60 KN and the load steps.
corresponding increase in length of the crack,
Figure 2: Finite Element Mesh
522
Analysis of Crack Propagation in A Welded Lap Joints
Fig 3.1 Fig 3.2
Fig 3.3 Fig 3.4
Fig 3.5 Fig 3.6
Figure 3. Crack propagation for various load cases
CONCLUSION in the heat affected zone of weld causes rapid

propagation of crack due to the combination
A thorough study on propagation of edge of shear and flexural stresses.
crack in a welded lap joint has been carried
out using FRANC2D. It is observed that even REFERENCES
though the crack was initially in opening
Mode II, it subsequently propagated and was Aleksandar Bukvić Zijah Burzić Radica
predominantly exhibiting opening Mode I. Prokić-Cvetković Olivera Popović
The value of reduction in fracture toughness Meri Burzić RatkoJovičić 2012
523
Patel and Thakkar
Welding technology selection effect on

fracture-toughness Parameters of bi-
material welded joints Technical
Gazette 19(1) 167-174
Citarella R. Lepore M Maligno A and
Shlyannikov V 2015 FEM simulation
of a crack propagation in a round bar
under combined tension and torsion
fatigue loading Frattura ed Integrità
Strutturale 31.
Kiran Mudigoudar Shanmugam N Saddam
Hussain B Finite Element Analysis of
Dynamic Crack Propagation in Gray
Cast Iron, by International Journal of
Innovative Research in Science,
Engineering and Technology
Lassen T 1990 The Effect of the Welding
Process on the Fatigue Crack Growth
Welding Research Supplements
McHenry H I and Reed R P 1977 Fracture
Behavior of the Heat-Affected Zone in
5% Ni Steel Weldments Welding
Research Supplements
Priscilla L. Chin 2011 Stress Analysis, Crack
Propagation and Stress Intensity Factor
Computation of a Ti-6Al-4V Aerospace
Bracket using ANSYS and FRANC3D
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Hartford Connecticut
Sukumar N and Srolovitz D J 2004 Finite
Element-Based Model for Crack
Propagation in Polycrystalline
Materials Journal Computational and
Applied Mathematics
Weiss B Z Steffens H D and Seifert K 1972
Fracture Toughness of the Heat-
Affected Zone in 14CrMoV69 Steel
and 18Ni Maraging Steel Welding
Research Supplements
524
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF CRACK PROPAGATION IN GUSSET PLATES

CHAPANI M.* and THAKKAR B.
School of Science and Engineering, Navrachana University, Vadodara, India.
Abstract: Gusset plates are thick steel plates used to joint beam or girder to column
or to connect truss members. Connection is done with help of bolts, rivets or welding.
Cracks may be emanate in the plates while drilling a hole for connection or due to any
other phenomena. These crack propagate further while the loads are transferred to it
from the truss members. Hence, it becomes imperative for us to determine the
propagation of crack determine the limit up to which we can allow the crack to
propagate. A fracture mechanics based finite element analysis using FRANC2D has
been carried out in this work to describe the propagation of cracks.
Keywords: Crack propagation; Fracture Mechanics; Gusset plates; Finite
Element Analysis, FRANC2D.
INTRODUCTION which in future propagate with increasing

Truss members are assumed to be purely amount of stress. This strongly affects the
under compression or tension. Trusses are the joint behaviour and reduces its load bearing
structure of choice when large spans are capacity. Hence, we need to simulate the
required to be covered. As a results trusses remaining life of the member and amount of
are designed to carry large amount of loads in stress it can take after the introduction of
structures like bridges, industrial building, such crack in it. For the purpose, we have
and bracing for framed structures in tall adopted a fracture mechanics based approach
buildings. Truss members are connected with in the present study. Finite element
thick steel plates known as gusset plates. As simulations have been carried out in fracture
the truss members consist of direct tension analysis code FRANC2D.
and compression, the force transfer from one Fracture Mechanics is a branch of solid
member to another happens through gusset mechanics that deals with the crack and also
plates. Thus, it becomes vitalto ensure failure states the behaviour of the structure under the
safe design of gusset plates. Design of gusset existence of crack and propagating cracks. In
plates depend upon the number of members many cases the material fails without
connected to it and amount of force exerted reaching its ultimate stress because of the
by each member. Gusset plates may be presence of crack. The stress at the tip of
fastened to each member using mechanical cracks increase tremendously as compared to
fasteners such as bolts, rivets or permanent the other part of the structure.
bonds, such as welding. In bolted and riveted
connections, holes are required to be drilled Fracture mechanics however has a primary
in the members as well as gusset plate. This requirement of presence of existing crack in
process of drilling holes may induce some order to predict the propagation. Therefore,
micro or macro cracks in the gusset plates the position and size of existing cracks or
*Author for Correspondence: E mail: bhairavt@nuv.ac.in 525

Chapani and Thakkar
anticipated cracks must be determined before

using fracture mechanics to describe failure.
However, since the crack propagation is
carried out by finite element analysis, it
becomes a mesh sensitive problem and an
appropriate mesh must be arrived at before
reliable solutions may be achieved.
ANALYSIS OF GUSSET PLATE

A typical gusset plate of a K truss is
considered here. The gusset plate joins4
members, viz. two horizontal and two
inclined member. However, since the most
critical joint is the central joint, the central
joint is modelled and symmetry has been
exploited to reduce the mesh size. A Figure 2. Finite Element Mesh
schematic of half gusset plate is shown in The critical location of crack was ascertained
Figure 1. The half gusset plate would to be between to vertical holes in a horizontal
obviously have two members to connect. member component due to the large amount
Both members are connected with 9 bolt of tension. Initial cracks of 1 mm were
connection for each member. And the finite introduced in both holes in opposite
element mesh of gusset plate is shown in direction. Material property of steel was
Figure 2. adopted for stress analysis.
The gusset plate was considered to be fixed at
the bottom edge and along the line of
symmetry at the left edge of the half plate.
The force from the truss members was
considered to be transferred at each holes of
both members. A fracture mechanics based
finite element analysis was performed using
FRANC2D and the deformed shape of the
plate with presence of crack was studied. The
deformed shape and von Mises effective
stress around the bolt holes in gusset plate are
Figure1. Schematic diagram of gusset
shown in Figure 3and Figure 4 respectively.
plate
Figure 5 shows the opening and propagation
For determination of the crack location of cracks.
preliminary joint analysis is carried out. The
FEM mesh of 6-noded linear strain triangular CONCLUSION
element and the equivalent stress is shown in Failure in a guseet plate of a K-Truss was
figure 4 this stress and mashing is carried out described use of fracture mechanics based
in FRANC2D. It is the 2-d FEM based finite element analysis. Stresses around the
software used to perform crack propagation crack and the crack prapogation was studied
in plainer structures.
526
Analysis of Propagation in a Gusset Plates
using FRANC2D and the propagation of

crack in the gusset plate was understood.
Fracture based analysis offers a versatile tool
for describing propagation of fracture.
Figure 5. Propagated cracks
REFERENCES
Anderson T L 2005 Fracture Mechanics-
Fundamentals and Applications 3E
Taylor and Francis.
Figure 3. Displacement of gusset plate
Broek D 1984 Elementary Engineering
Fracture Mechanics Martinus Nijhoff
Publishers The Netherlands.
Choudhary B K Roedig M and Mannan S L
2004 Fatigue Crack Growth Behavior of
Base Metal, Weld Metal and Heat
Affected Zone of alloy 800 at 823 K
Transactions of the Indian Institute of
Metals 57(6) 639-649.
Fracture Mechanics Fundamentals and
application Third edition by T L
Anderson.
Myers M M 2011 Modeling and Analysis of
Steel Gusset Plates in Truss Bridges
Under Live Load Master of Science
Thesis Graduate School New Brunswick
The State University of New Jersey.
Figure 4. Effective Stress Prashant Kumar 1999 Elements of Fracture
Mechanics Wheeler Publishing.
527
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF CRACK PROPAGATION IN A PLATE GIRDER

PATEL R.H.* and THAKKAR B.
School of Science and Engineering, Navrachana University, Vadodara, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: Heavy loads are usually required to be transported using gantries or cranes
supported by deep girders which are fabricated by welding, bolting or riveting steel
plates together. There are often instances when cracks are observed on the girders due
to either overloads or fatigue. Cracks usually emanate from web-flange joints due to
heavy stress concentration there or in the high equivalent stress zones. Strength of the
girders reduce in presence of such cracks and the cracks tend to propagate when
subjected even to design loads. This paper presents a study carried out on propagation
of cracks which were observed on the upper flange of a plate girder and at the joint of
web and flange. This study adopts a Fracture Mechanics based approach to determine
the crack propagation characteristics. Simulations of crack propagation have been
carried out using a fracture analysis code FRANC2D.
Keywords: Crack growth; Fracture Mechanics; Plate Girder, FRANC2D
INTRODUCTION loads developing heavy bending moments in

Plate girders are typically I-beams that are flanges and high stress zones (hot spots) at
fabricated by welding, riveting or bolting the the flange web joints. These stresses tend to
steel plates together. A plate girder consist of introduce number of cracks in the structure.
a deep vertical plate called web and two Fracture mechanics is the field of mechanics
concerned with the study of propagation of
flanges each consisting of horizontal plates.
cracks in materials. It uses methods of
Plate girder bridges are suitable for short to analytical solid mechanics to calculate
medium spans and may support railroads, driving force on crack and those of
highways, or other traffic. Generally, the experimental solid mechanics to characterize
depth of the girder should not be less than the material’s resistance to fracture. A
1/15 the span, and for a given load bearing structure may be subjected to static or
capacity, a depth of around 1/12 the span repetitive or cyclic loads. Propagation of
minimizes the weight of the girder. For existing cracks under given loading has been
simulated here using FRANC2D. FRANC2D
Spans up to 30m to 35m, the plate girders are
is a two dimensional, finite element based
economic. Sufficient weld must be used to program for simulating crack propagation in
insure that the bottom flange, top flange and planar structures.
the web plate acts as one unit. Plates are
welded or bolted together in a specific PROCEDURE
configuration for optimal strength and A steel plate girder of length 15m has been
reliability. Bolting and riveting are the taken into consideration for analysis here.
common choice because of the simplicity The dimensions of the flanges are adopted as
involved in fabrication of the joints. Further, 350 mm x 40 mm, and the web is 1250 m x
the plate girders used in industrial structures 20 mm. A crack of 1 mm was introduced in
are often subjected to high and eccentric the finite element model on (1) the high
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: patelriya2@rocketmail.com 528

Patel and Thakkar
tension zones in the upper flange and (2) at The deformed structure after application of
the junction of web and flange. A schematic loads for the cracks introduced as per case (1)
of the cross-section of the plate girder and case (2) is shown in figure 3.
considered here for study is shown in Figure
1.
Figure 3 Case (1) Deformed shape of

Plate Girder with crack at the flange side
Figure 1. Schematic of Plate Girder.
The girder carries a uniformly distributed
load such as self-weight and other imposed
loads such as rolling loads. Apart from the
uniformly distributed load, the girder is also
subjected to concentrated load at the edge.
To simulate the above mentioned loads, a
uniformly distributed load was applied on the
top portion of the flange and a point load was
applied on the right end of the flange. The
finite element mesh of the upper portion of
the section is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 3 Case (2) Deformed shape of
Plate Girder with crack at the junction of
web and flange
The crack was allowed to propagate in
FRANC2D simulation. The crack
propagation has been simulated till the crack
develops to a length of approximately 5 mm.
As fracture mechanics requires a crack for
analysis of the structure a crack of 1mm has
been introduced, which is propagated up to a
crack length of 5mm for analysis of the
structure. The crack propagation for both the
cases is shown in figure 4. The effective
Figure 2 Mesh of plate girder stresses for both the cases are shown in figure
5.
529
Analysis of Crack Propagation in a Plate Girder
Figure 4 case (2) Crack propagation of

Figure 4 case:1 Crack propagation with
Plate Girder with crack at the junction of
crack on the flange side.
flange and web.
Figure 5 Case (1) Effective stress on Plate Figure 5 Case (2) Effective stress on Plate
Girder with crack on the flange side Girder with crack at the junction of flange
and web.
CONCLUSION
A comprehensive study on failure of a plate
girder under service loads and in presence of
detectable cracks has been carried out. The
crack propagation study has been carried out
using FRANC2D. The approach gives an
excellent information about whether the
presence of cracks would instigate further
crack developments or not and whether the
structure is safe under the anticipated service
loads. Further, the description of crack
propagation also indicates the expansion of
cracks under service loads.
530
ICCMS2016
FAILURE ASSESSMENT OF ALUMINIUM PLATE WITH CUT-OUT

USING CONTINUUM DAMAGE MECHANICS
NAWAB S.*, THAKKAR B.
Civil Engineering department, Navrachana University, Vadodara, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: Cut-outs in a plate induces stress concentration and also influences failure
initiation and damage propagation. Orientation of cut-outs in a given plate play an
important role for stress concentrations. The main objective of this paper is to study
failure initiation and damage propagation in a plate with a cut-out at various
orientations. For the purpose, a computer program based on Finite element method,
coupled with continuum damage mechanics has been adopted. Progressive failure
analysis of a plate with cut-out has been performed and presented here.
Keywords: Continuum Damage Mechanics, Plate, Cut-outs, Finite Element,
Aluminum, Progressive Failure Analysis
INTRODUCTION finite element analysis program based on

discrete layer approach has been employed to
Aluminum plate play a significant role in
study the stress distribution and subsequent
transportation structure. It is widely used in
progression of damage in an aluminium plate
automobiles, trucks, railways, cars, marine
having cut-outs. The Continuum Damage
vessels, bicycles, etc. Aircrafts and ships
model proposed by Chandrakanth has been
may have various critical circumstances and
adopted here.
emergencies due to different conditions. It is
important to understand the behaviour of CONTINUUM DAMAGE MODEL
such structures under various loading
condition. In this paper an aluminum plate Chandrakanth’s model shows a non-linear
with cut-out at various orientation has been variation with respect to plastic strain and it
studied. is suitable for materials like Al 2024-T3 alloy
and also shows a strong response to stress
Plates usually have cut-outs for various triaxiality. Due to these reasons
functional requirements. When such plates Chandrakanth’s model has been adopted and
are stressed, high concentrations are coupled with progressive failure analysis
developed at the corner the cut-outs, making framework.
such areas potential site for failure initiation
and propagation. Hence, such cut-outs may DISTRICT LAYERS APPROACH
be given a different orientations angles in
order to reduce the stress concentrations. The The layered shell element is built up as a
orientation angle for the openings must be stack of layers, so that material property of
appropriately determined. each layer can be varied. Even though the
material is homogeneous, it is assumed to be
An effort has been made to simulate cut outs made up of a stack of number of layers,
in a CDM coupled non-linear finite element perfectly bonded to each other at surfaces. In
analysis framework to study the effect of cut- case of non-linear damage coupled with
out orientation on development and elasto-plastic analysis, the spreading of
propagation of damage in plate. A plasticity and damage takes place from
Continuum Damage coupled Non-linear extreme fibers towards the neutral plane. In
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:12103040@nuv.ac.in 531

Nawab and Thakkar
order to model such progressive growth of Finite Element Mesh generated for the plate
plasticity and damage, the layered shell with cut-outs at 0o, 5o and 10o have been
element approach is found to be more presented below in figure 2, 3 and 4
convenient. The stress components of each respectively. The plate is 3000mm wide and
layer are computed at integration points 3000mm long with rectangular cut out of
(gauss points) on the mid-surface of the 1000mm wide and 1000mm long fixed at
element and these stresses are assumed to be adjacent edges have been loaded with
constant over the thickness of each layer. uniformly distributed load of 3 KN/m2.
This, results in a piecewise constant
approximation of stress, plasticity and
damage field as shown in figure.
Figure 2.FEM mesh of Aluminium plate

with Cut-out oriented at 0o
Figure 1. Discrete Layer approach
The layered plate element has been used, so
that material property of each layer can be
varied. In case of Non-linear Continuum
Damage Coupled Progressive Failure
Analysis, spreading of damage takes place
from extreme fibers towards the neutral
plane. In order to model such growth of
damage, the layered approach is found to be
more convenient.
For the purpose a computer program based Figure 3.FEM mesh of Aluminium plate
on Finite element method coupled with with Cut-out oriented at 5o
continuum damage mechanics has been
adopted. An isotropic ductile damage model
based on the internal variable theory of
thermodynamics has been adopted for
coupling the damage phenomena with
conventional Von Mises plasticity along with
Ahmad's degenerated iso parametric shell
element, which accounts for shear
deformation. A Continuum Damage coupled
Non-linear finite element analysis program
based on discrete layer approach has been
employed to study the stress distribution and
subsequent progression of damage in an Figure 4.FEM mesh of Aluminium plate
aluminum plate having cut-outs. with Cut-out oriented at 10o
532
Failure Assessment in Aluminium Plate using Continuum Damage Mechanics
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Von-Mises Stress 0f Aluminium plate for

10th layer and 15th load step for 0, 5 and 10
Analysis of aluminium plate with rectangular
degree orientation of cut-outs has been
cut-outs at various orientations has been
presented below in figures 8, 9 and 10
carried out using Finite element method
respectively.
coupled with continuum damage mechanics.
As per Discrete Layer Approach damage and
von-mises stresses on aluminium plate per
layer presented in following figures no. 5 to
10 below. Damage of 10th layer under load
step 15 shown in figures 5, 6 and 7 below.
Figure 8.VMS of aluminium plate with

Cut-Out Oriented at 0o of 10th layer and
15th load step
Figure 5. Damage of aluminium plate

with Cut-out Oriented at 0o of 10th layer
and 15th load step
Figure 9. VMS of Aluminium plate with

Cut-Out Oriented at 5o of 10th layer and
15th load step
Figure 6. Damage of Aluminium plate

with Cut-Out Oriented at 5o of 10th layer
and 15th load step
Figure 10. Damage of Aluminium plate

with Cut-Out Oriented at 10o of 10th layer
and 15th load step
CONCLUSION
Figure 7. Damage of Aluminium plate Analysis of aluminium plate with rectangular
with Cut-Out Oriented at 10o of 10th layer cut-out at various orientation has been carried
and 15th load step out using a computer program based on
533
Nawab and Thakkar
Finite element method coupled with Department of Civil Engineering, Indian

continuum damage mechanics. Damage and Institute of Science Bangalore India
Von-Mises Stresses has been studied have February-2005
been reported here. Based on the damage
propagation an appropriate orientation of cut-
out should be selected which minimizes
damage and von-mises stress. For the
presented case 10o orientation was found to
be appropriate.
REFERENCES
Chandrakanth S and Pandey P C 1995 An
isotropic damage model for ductile
material Engineering Fracture
Mechanics 50(4) 457-465.
Louhghalam A Igusa T Park C Choi S and
Kim K Analysis of stress concentrations
in plates with rectangular openings by a
combined conformal mapping – Finite
element approach International Journal
of Solids and Structures
Mahdi Mirzagoltabarroshan Studying
Decreased Methods of Stress
Concentration around Holes and
Openings of Plate and Shell Structures
Body International Research Journal of
Applied and Basic Sciences
Manual de Gen4u Version 2.1
www.lacan.upc.edu
Swapnil Fegade Patil R D Stress
Concentration: An Experimental and
Analysis Of Plate With Rectangular
Cutout IJREAT International Journal of
Research in Engineering & Advanced
Technology 2(4) Aug-Sept, 2014
Thakkar B Chandrakanth S and Pandey P C
Damage Coupled Elasto-Plastic Finite
Element Analysis of Plates and Shells,
Department of Civil Engineering Indian
Institute of Science Bangalore India
Thakkar B. K Progressive Failure Analysis of
Laminated Composites using
Continuum Damage Mechanics
534
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF FLEXURAL CRACKS ON BEHAVIOUR OF RCC BEAMS

UNDER TORSION
BARIYA M.*, THAKKAR B.
Civil Engineering department, Navrachana University, Vadodara, Gujarat, India
Abstract: When an RCC member is subjected to bending, the member develops

cracks in tension zones. The crack width and depth of such cracks can be determined.
Usually structural members are under the effect of combination of actions. Torsion
often acts on members along with bending. De-coupling the effects, it may be
appreciated that torsion acts on members having cracks in members at periodic
intervals. The cracked sections are less efficient in resisting torsion. The stress
concentration developed at the cracks tips compound the effects of torsion by
increasing the tendency of crack propagation. Various theories have been proposed in
literature for determination of crack angles and spacing. This paper compares the
spacing predicted by various theories with a finite element analysis performed in a
commercial finite element software ANSYS. Further, torsion has been applied on such
cracked sections in the finite element simulation and the behaviour of the member has
been studied. The variation in cross-section properties with respect to angle of twist
has been studied and reported.
Keywords: Cracked sections, Crack Spacing, Torsion, Finite Element Analysis,
RCC
INTRODUCTION under torsion. Comparatively, the crack

distribution is given by various theories in
Due to very low tensile strength a concrete
literature have been studied and compared.
member, a concrete member cracks as soon
For the purpose, a cantilever RCC beam has
as it is loaded in flexure. These flexural
been taken into consideration. The
cracks are periodic in nature. Various
approaches considered for calculation of
approaches here been prepared by researchers
crack spacing have been reported in table 1.
to describe the flexural crack formation in
Ratio of minimum spacing and maximum
RCC beam. The presence of future cracks
spacing to average spacing of crack given by
reduce the strength and stiffness of the
member. The problem is future aggravated 𝑆𝑟.𝑚𝑖𝑛
= 0.67 𝑡𝑜 0.7
when the members are subjected to combined 𝑆𝑟𝑚
actions of flexure with torsion. The torsional 𝑆𝑟.𝑚𝑖𝑛
stiffness and strength of such cracked = 1.33 𝑡𝑜 1.54
members would be significantly affected. 𝑆𝑟𝑚
To study the behaviour of a cracked member Formulas for Average Crack spacing (ACI
under torsion, we first need the crack depth Approach):
and distribution in the member. Different 𝑤 = 2.2𝛽𝜖𝑠 3�𝑑𝑐 𝐴
theories predict a different distribution or
spacing of cracks. The spacing of cracks is
vital to describe the behaviour of the member
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bhairavt@nuv.ac.in 535

Bariya and Thakkar
Table 1. Formulas for averege crack spacing
Formula for average crack spacing Proposed by

𝑆 ∅𝑠
AIJ3 𝑆𝑟𝑚 = 2 �𝐶 + � + 0.1
10 𝜌𝑒𝑓
1 ∅𝑠
Fehling and Koing4 𝑆𝑟𝑚 = �30 + �
1.7 4𝜌𝑒𝑓
∅𝑠
Farra and Jaccould5 𝑆𝑟𝑚 = 1.5𝐶 + 0.12
𝜌𝑒𝑓
2 ∅𝑠
CEB-FIP Model Code 19906 𝑆𝑟𝑚 =
3 3.6𝜌𝑒𝑓
A finite element model for simulation the

cracking behaviour have been developed in RESULT AND DISCUSSION
Ansys. After flexure cracks get developed in The twist obtained by finite element
the beam, torsion is applied to the beam in simulation is depicted in figure 2. Chart 1
Ansys to observe the deformation. To shows a comparison of the twist obtained
validate the finite element modelling the using crack spacing be various theories and
simulation have been compared with the finite element simulation. It can be observed
sample beam modelled using matrix method. that the twist obtained by carious theory fall
The moment of inertia of reduced section within a variation of approximately 18%. The
have been used to calculate the deformations finite element simulation appears to be
of the developed model. The twist obtained is agreement more in a with AIJ29 method. A
compared with the finite element stimulation. stiffness is observed in comparison with
A schedule of the cantilever beam is shown uncracked section.
in figure 1.
Deference of angle of twist v/s Section of Beam
8
6
Deference of angle of twist
AIJ29
Figure 1. Schamatic of beam considered. 5 Farra and Jaccod23
Fehling and Kӧnig22
4
CEB-FIP Model Code 19904
Section of Beam
Chart 2. Variation of angle of twist when

width of cross-section constant and depth
of cross-section varies.
Figure 2. Twist obtained by Finite Elment

Simulation.
536
Effect of Flexural Cracks on Behaviour of RCC Beams under Torsion
Deference of angle of twist v/s Section of Beam state of the art Budapest university of
4
Technology and Economics, Hungary.
3.5
3
Architectural Institute of Japan. Standard for
Deference of angle of twist
2.5
AIJ29 Structural Calculation of RC Structures.
Farra and Jaccod23
Fehling and Kӧnig22 AIJ Tokyo 1986.
2
CEB-FIP Model Code 19904
1.5
Comite´ Euro-Internationale du Be´ ton.
1
CEB-FIP Model Code 1978 – Design
Code. Comite´ Euro-International du
0.5
Be´ ton, Thomas Telford London 1978
0
(CEB Bulletin d’Information
Section of Beam No.124/125.).
Chart 2. Variation of angle of twist when Farra B and Jaccoud J P 1992 Bond behavior,
depth of cross-section constant and width tension stiffening and crack prediction
of cross-section varies.
of high strength concrete Proceedings
of International Symposium Bond in
Comparison of Twist Angle
Concrete Riga 1992.
6
Fehling E and König G Zur
Angle of Twist(Degree)
5
Rissbreitenbeschränkung im
4 Theoritical
3 Calculation
Stahlbetonbau Beton und
2 Stahlbetonbau 1988 6 161–167 7 199–
Ansys 204.
1
Simulation
0
IS: 456 2000 “Plain And Reinforced
Concrete - Code Of Practice (Fourth
Revision) Bureau Of Indian Standards,
New Delhi.
Mahmoud E Kamara and Basile G Rabbat
Chart 3. Comparison of angle of twist 2007 Torsion Design of Structural
between Theoritical calculation and Concrete Based on ACI 318-05
Ansys Simulation. Professional Development Series
September 2007
CONCLUSION
Nicholas J Carino and James R. Clifton
A comprehensive study of cracking patterns
and their effect on torsional rigidity have NISTIR 5634 1995 Prediction of
been studied. A comparison of various Cracking in Reinforced Concrete
prepared theories have been reported. AIJ29 Structure April 1995 Building and Fire
method was found to be closure with finite Research Laboratory National Institute
element simulation than other methods. A of Standards and Technology
significant researches of torsional rigidity Gaithersburg MD 20899
was observed due to flexural cracks.
Park R and Paulay T Reinforced Concrete
REFERENCES Structure John Wiley and Sons
A. Borosnyói and Balázs G L 2005 Models Rizkalla S H Shahawi M EL and Kwok C K
for flexural cracking in concrete: the Cracking Behaviour of Reinforced
537
Bariya and Thakkar
Concrete Members Department of Civil

Engineering University of Manitoba
Winnipeg Manitoba
Subramanian N 2005 Controlling the Crack
Width of Flexural RC Members The
Indian Concrete Journal November
2005.
Syed Yasir Alam Thibault Lenormand
Ahmed Loukili Regoin J P 2010
Measuring crack width and spacing in
reinforced concrete members B H Oh O
C Choi L Chung 7th International
conference on Fracture Mechanics of
Concrete and Concrete Structures
(FraMCoS-7) Jeju North Korea 377-
382.
538
ICCMS2016
NONLINEAR ANALYSIS OF FIBER WRAPPED REINFORCED

CONCRETE BEAMS WITH COHESIVE MODEL
CHAKRABORTY S.1, JHA D. K.1*, REDDY G. R.2 and SRINIVAS K.1
1
Civil Engineering Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai India.
2
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai India.
Abstract: External bonding of fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) plates has emerged as
a popular method for strengthening reinforced concrete (RC) structures. In this article,
finite element analysis of fiber wrapped RC beams are carried out and validated by
the experimental results available in literature. RC beams with different carbon fiber
reinforced polymer (CFRP) length are subjected to four points bending. A nonlinear
damage model is used for concrete with orthotropic response of CFRP and cohesive
element for the interface.
Keywords: CFRP; Cohesive model; Plastic Damage Model; Deboning.
INTRODUCTION where,
𝑅𝑒(𝑅𝜎−1) 1 𝐸𝑐 𝑓𝑐
FRP composites are built by combining a R= 2 − 𝑅𝜖 ; Re =
𝐸0
; E0 =
(𝑅𝜎−1) 𝜖0
plastic polymer resin together with
and, 𝜖 0 = 0.0025, R 𝜖 = 4, 𝑅𝜎 = 4 fc = 30 MPa
reinforcing fibers. FRP is one of the best
Steel reinforcement was modelled as elastic-
retrofitting materials for strengthening due to
perfectly plastic material with yield stress
a number of advantages, such as excellent
507MPa. For CFRP plate linear orthotropic
strength to self-weight ratio, large fatigue
constitutive model is selected with following
resistance capacity, better corrosion
material properties:
resistance, etc. RC beams with FRP
composites offer an attractive solution to E11=165 GPa, E22=E33=9.65 GPa,
enhance the behaviour of concrete in terms of G12=G13=5.2 GPa, G23=3.4GPa, ν12=ν13=0.3,
strength and ductility. Among various types ν23= 0.45.
of failure mode of FRP wrapped RC A cohesive zone model is used to represent
structures; the predominant mode of failure is large scale fracture process zone i.e., the
always the delamination of FRP sheets from CFRP-concrete interface. The initial stiffness
the parent RC structures. A damage plasticity in the elastic stage was found to be 508MPa.
model is used to model concrete in the A quadratic traction damage initiation
present study. This model has the ability to criterion is used for the initiation of softening
show two major failure modes i.e. tensile zone in cohesive model. Interface damage
cracking and compressive yielding. The evolution is expressed in terms of energy
stress strain behaviour proposed by Saenz release rate. The dependence of the fracture
was used to construct the uni-axial energy on mode mix is defined based on the
compressive stress-strain curve for concrete: Benzaggah - Kenane (BK) fracture criterions
𝐸𝑐ℇ𝑐 with critical fracture energy same along the
σc = ℇ𝑐 ℇ𝑐 2 ℇ𝑐 3
1+(𝑅+𝑅𝑒−2)( )−(2𝑅−1)( ) +𝑅( ) first and second shear directions.
ℇ0 ℇ0 ℇ0
_________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dkjha@barc.gov.in 539

Chakraborty et. al
The detail of the RC beam under

investigation is shown in Figure 1. There are
three different kinds of beams considered in
the study. First one is the control beam
without CFRP sheet. RF1 is the name of RC
beam with full length CFRP on the tensile
face for full span. Third one is named RF2
with 1040 mm CFRP length. RF1 and RF2 Figure 1. Detail of beam under
are shown in Figures 2-3 respectively. Only investigation
one forth model is used for simulation by
using symmetrical boundary conditions. The
FE model with appropriate boundary
conditions is shown in Figure 4. Eight
nodded linear brick elements (with reduced
integration) are used to model concrete
member. 2-D truss elements are used for
reinforcement bars with embedded constraint Figure 2. Detail of retrofitted beam (RF1)
with concrete. CFRP sheet is modelled as
continuum shell element and the interface is
modelled with zero thickness cohesive
elements. The deflections are applied
gradually in small increments. Automatic
stabilization and small time increment was
used to avoid divergent solutions. The
compression hardening and tension stiffening
Figure 3. Detail of retrofitted beam (RF2)
data for concrete are presented in Tables 1-2.
Table 1. Compression Hardening Data
Stress Total Inelastic Damage
(MPa) strain strain Factor
30 0.0025 0 0
14.90767 0.0065 0.004 0.5031
6.885362 0.0105 0.008 0.7705
2.403488 0.0185 0.016 0.9199
Figure 4. FE model of RC beam
1.64557 0.0225 0.02 0.9451
(Quarter)
Table 2. Tension Stiffening Data
Stress Total Inelastic Damage

(MPa) strain strain factor
1.81 0.0001 0 0
1.673 0.0031 0.0030 0.0756
1.0793 0.0161 0.0160 0.4037
0.4446 0.0300 0.0299 0.7544
Figure 5. Crack pattern in beam RF1
0.2514 0.0600 0.0599 0.8611
540
Nonlinear Analysis of Fiber Wrapped Reinforced Concrete Beams with Cohesive Model
NUMERICAL RESULTS CONCLUSION

The cohesive model chosen to simulate de- The present FE based investigations predicts
bonding of fiber from parent material clearly the results very closed to the experimental.
shows that de-bonding was initiated before However the differences at certain points
the failure of the RC beam. The crack pattern may be because of the following:
obtained from the FE analysis and  Actual compressive strength of the
experiment are in closed agreement. The concrete beams used for testing may be
distributed crack pattern in beam RF1 is higher than that taken in the FE
presented in Figure 5. The load deflection simulation on the basis of specification.
curves obtained for control beam and CFRP  Hardening of steel after yielding also
wrapped beams (RF1 & RF2) from causes some error in numerical
experimental data and FEM analysis are simulation.
presented in Figure 6.  Assumption of the determinative
200 properties of concrete-FRP interface
180
may affect the FE results to the
conservative values.
160
However, on the basis of present
140
investigation; it can be concluded that the
120
Load (KN)
current nonlinear cohesive bond model can

100
closely simulate CFRP wrapped RC beams.
80 Control Beam_Experiment
RF1_Experiment
The length of CFRP plate over the RC beams
60 plays an important role in strengthening of
RF2_Experiment
40 Control Beam_FEM retrofitted beams with CFRP.
20 RF1_FEM
0 RF2_FEM REFERENCES
0 5 10
Obaidat Y Heyden S Dahlbolm O Farsakh G
Deflection (mm) and Jawad Y 2011 Retrofitting of
reinforced concrete beams using
Figure 6. Load deflection curves
composite laminates Journal of
The ultimate load carrying capacity for the Composite and Building Materials 25
RF1 is 166 kN where as for RF2 it is 142 kN. 591-597.
This is because longer fiber provides more Obaidat Y and Heyden S 2010 The effect of
anchorage outside the maximum moment CFRP and CFRP concrete interface
region. As shown in the figure the stiffness of models when modelling retrofitted RC
all beams at small load is almost same. From beams with FEM Journal of Composite
load around 60 KN i.e., during cracking stage Structures 92 1391-1398.
the stiffness of the control beam reduce Wang J 2006 Cohesive zone model of IC
notably. The decrease in stiffness at this stage induced debonding of FRP-plated
is less for RF1 and RF2 because CFRP concrete beam J Solids & structures 43
prevents the crack to grow and widen. The 663-6648.
presented results reveal that strengthening Wu Z and Yin J 2003 Fracturing behaviours
process has significantly increased the of FRP-strengthened concrete structures
ultimate load carrying capacity of RC beams. Journal of Engineering Fracture
Mechanics 70 1339-1355.
541
NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF SPT DATA USING GTN MATERIAL

DAMAGE MODEL TO EVALUATE J-R CURVE
KUMAR P.*, DUTTA B. K., CHATTOPADHYAY J. and SHRIWASTAW R. S.
Homi Bhabha National Institute, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre Mumbai India.
Abstract: The small punch specimens are in use to determine mechanical properties of
the materials, such as yield strength, ultimate tensile strength, ductility etc. Use of such
specimens is popular whenever limited quantity of material is available for testing,
such as aged/irradiated material. In this paper, T91 nuclear material has been taken to
characterise the mechanical and fracture properties using small punch test and
numerical simulation method. The punch load v/s centre point deflection data are
collected up to fracture signified by rapid drop in load carrying capability of the
specimens. The experimental data of T91 material is then used to evaluate yield
strength and ultimate tensile strength making use of available correlations in the
literature. These material data are then used to calculate Ramberg-Osgood hardening
exponent leading to generation of complete true stress-strain data. The next task is to
determine Gurson parameters of the material using numerical sensitivity analysis to
simulate punch load v/s central deflection right up to fracture. These Gurson
parameters along with true stress-strain data are then used to numerically generate J-R
curves of the materials by analyzing ASTM standard CT specimens. Calculated J-R
curves are then compared with the experimental values quoted in the literature. The
methodology described in this paper has the potential to determine J-R curve of
irradiated material using small punch tests.
Keywords: SP Specimens; Finite Element Analysis; GTN; J-R curve
INTRODUCTION al. , 1992; Alegre et al., 2011; Garcia et al.,

2014]. Additionally, Gurson damage model
In those conditions where determination of
has also been extensively used to simulate
mechanical properties is necessary but due to
complete load displacement curve obtained
limited availability material such as aged
from SP test and Alegre et al., (2011) have
materials or in service components, standard
used material damage GTN model to study
test can not be conducted. The miniaturized
the variation in Nucleation porosity (f N ),
small punch test (MSPT) technique is one of
Critical porosity (f C ) & Failure porosity (f F ).
them in use to determine change in
One of the major challenges at present is to
mechanical properties of the materials, such
obtain the fracture toughness and J-R curve of
as yield stress, ultimate stress, ductility and
a material from this type of test. The main
fracture toughness [Mao et al. , 1987; Mao et
_______________________________________
*
Author for correspondence: E-mail: pradeep.dgfs@gmail.com
542
Kumar et al
objective this work is to extend existing MATERIALS

methodology of single fracture parameter
evaluation to complete J-R of material using T91nuclear materials are used in this study.
SPT. The experimental J-R plot for the The mechanical properties at room
validation purpose is taken from published temperature are shown in Table 1 (Contract
research work (Contract report 2005). report 2005).
MATERIALS USED AND

EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE
Table 1 Mechanical properties at room temperature
Material Properties E (MPa) ν σ Y (MPa) σ u (MPa)
T91 Steel 2.03E5 0.27 544 684
in-house finite element implicit code

EXPERIMENTAL SETUP AND MADAM (Material Damage Modeling).
PREPARATION OF SPECIMENS
A Schematic diagram of small punch bend
test setup is shown in fig. 1. The circular disk
with φ 3 mm and initial thickness (t 0 ) is
loaded centrally in lower die by the plunger
with a hemispherical ball of φ 1 mm. The
fixture has an upper die, a lower die and a
plunger. Both the dies are firmly tightened
with each other using LN screws as shown in
figure. The experiments have been performed
at a crosshead speed of 0.2 mm/min in BARC
at room temperature.
FE MODELING AND Figure 1 Schematic diagram of small

punch test (SPT) fixture
DETERMINATION OF GURSON
PARAMETERS USING SPT NUMERICAL ESTIMATION OF
Finite Element Modelling of SPT GURSON MATERIAL PARAMETERS
The axis-symmetric FE models of For the evaluation of Gurson material &

miniaturized small punch test (MSPT) of frictional parameters, two experimental tests
3mm diameter disk specimens as shown in for T91 material have been performed.
Fig.2 was developed and simulated using the Furthermore, the FE analysis of small punch
test was carried out to generate load-central
543
Numerical Simulation of SPT Data Using GTN Material Damage Model to Evaluate J-R Curve
deflection data points of 0.2336 mm initial experimental and numerical load-central

thickness for T91 material. However, the
Figure 2 FE Mesh and Boundary conditions of Small Punch Test Specimen
deflection curves were transformed into P/ t02 Determination of all these parameters are
vs biaxial strain (ε q ) curves as shown in Fig. done by comparing numerically calculated P/
3. On utilising this concept, coefficient of t02 vs biaxial strain (ε q ) curves curve with the
friction between ball & specimen and three experimentally measured values after the
Gurson material parameters viz. nucleation maximum load in which the rate of load
void volume fraction (f N ), void volume drop/slop with the central
fraction at coalescence (f C ) & void volume displacement/biaxial strain must be same for
fraction at failure (f F ) have been evaluated both because this region of curve is the
after 15 FEA simulations using different manifestation of fracture process in the
combination of above parameters. specimen.
8000 Test-A
Test-B
7000 Numerical (FEA)
6000 T91
5000
4000 f_0- 0.00001

P/t20
f_N- 0.01
3000 f_C- 0.08
f_F- 0.20
µ= 0.25
2000 t0(Numerical)= 0.2336 mm
1000
0
0.0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6
Biaxial strain εq
Figure 3 Experimental and numerical plot of normalised load v/s central deflection and
corresponding Gurson parameters for T91
544
Kumar et al
material model in comparison to

FE MODELLING OF CT SPECIMEN
experimental values for T91
AND MATERIAL J-R CURVE
The Gurson parameters evaluated in SP test CONCLUSIONS
are then used to generate J-R curves. For this
purpose, FEA model of ASTM standard CT The following conclusions are summarized as
specimen was developed. The FE model with below
1. The Gurson material parameters are
a zoomed view near to crack tip region is
verified with bilateral experimental
shown in Fig. 4. The 8-noded 2-D test results viz. SP test with load-
isoparametric plane strain finite elements are central deflection curve & CT test
used for the modelling. Only half of the CT with J-R curve.
specimen is modelled with appropriate 2. Numerically evaluated Gurson
symmetric boundary conditions as shown in parameters with q 2a =0.3 & q 2b =8
Fig. 4. 740 elements with 2343 nodes are produces acceptable J-R curve and J-
employed to model the specimen. The initiation values.
minimum size of the element in FE model
REFERENCES
surrounding the crack tip is 0.2 mm × 0.2mm.
The computed and experimental material J-R Alegre J M Cuesta I I and Bravo P M 2011
curve is shown in Fig. 5. Implementation of the GTN damage
model to simulate the small punch test
on pre-cracked specimens. Procedia
Contract report 2005 Flow and fracture
behavior of 9%Cr-Ferrritic/Martensitic
steels, SCK.CEN-R-4122.
Dutta B K Guin S Sahu M K Samal M K.
2008 A phenomenological form of the
Fig. 4 FE model with the zoomed view of q2 parameter in the Gurson model,
the crack tip region International Journal of Pressure
Vessels and Piping 85 199-210.
Experimental
1000 Original GTN
GTN & q =0.3 & q2b=8
Garcia T.E., Rodriguez C. and et al., 2014
2a
750
T91 Estimation of the mechanical properties
J-Integral (N/mm)
of metallic materials by means of the

500
f_0 = 0.00001
small punch test. Journal of Alloy and
f_n = 0.01
f_C = 0.08 Compounds 582 708-717.
f_F = 0.20
250 q1=1.5
Mao X and Takahashi H 1987 Development
0 of a further miniaturized specimen of 3
mm diameter for TEM disk (φ 3 mm)
0.0 0.4 0.8 1.2
Crack Growth (mm)

small punch tests. Journal of Nuclear
Fig. 5 Predicted J-R curves using Gurson
Materials 150 42-52.
545
Numerical Simulation of SPT Data Using GTN Material Damage Model to Evaluate J-R Curve
Mao X and Takahashi H Kodaira T

1992Supersmall punch test to estimate
fracture toughness J 1C and its application
to radiation embrittlement of 2.25Cr-
1Mo steel. Materials Science and
Engineering, A 150 231-236.
546
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF VARIOUS DAMAGE INDICES UNDER SEISMIC LOADING-

A REVIEW
PAREKAR S. D. and DATTA D.
Applied Mechanics Department, VNIT Nagpur India.
Abstract: During strong earthquake ground motion, there is a high degree of damage
and even collapse of reinforce concrete buildings. The design approach of earthquake
resistant design of structure based on codal provision (IS 1893:2002) is to control
damage to acceptable limit such as repairable damage during moderate earthquake and
collapse prevention during strong earthquake. In recent decades there is a focus on
evaluating damage level of structure under earthquake by the use of damage index.
Local damage index helps to numerically quantify the damage state of individual
structural member whereas global damage index evaluates the damage of the entire
structure.This paper discusses some available damage indices which are now being
extensively used for evaluating structural damage. A damage index may contain only
one damage parameter or multiple damage parameters. Multi-story RC frameswith
different plan dimensions were designed according to the provision of the current
Indian code (IS456:2000) and analyzed using nonlinear static (pushover)
analysis.Their response under some strong ground motions were obtained and by using
modified Park-Ang damage index the structural damage on designed RC frames are
quantified.Damage indices are the response parameter that might be merged in the
future design procedure which gives more efficient and economical solution of damage
state of structures.
Keywords: Damage index; Pushover analysis
INTRODUCTION quantities; horizontal storey displacements

Seismic damage index is response parameter and inter storey drifts in the structures are
used for quantification of degree of damage. used as global damage variables, while
In general, damage in structure is related to strains, curvatures and rotations are used for
inelastic deformations. Therefore, any the characterization of local damage.
damage variable should represent certain Another meaningful damage variable is the
deformation quantity. Such quantities are energy absorbed or the energy dissipated by
strains in materials, curvatures at cross the member or structure during inelastic
sections, rotations at member ends, deformation. Many different damage indices
horizontal storey displacements and inter had been introduced in past few years and
storey drifts in the structures. The last two each of them utilizes some parameters to
__________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: samyak854@students.vnit.ac.in 547

Parekar and Datta
estimate the structural damage. Each of Raufaiel and Meyer, in 1987, had been
these indices could give some useful proposed member damage indicator as
information on structural damage, modified flexural damage ratio (MFDR)
considering the underlying assumptions and defined as follows:
application limits introduced by their MFDR= max [MFDR+, MFDR-] In which,
developers. Depending upon the use of +
ϕx ϕ+
y
−
damage indices, they are classified as local M+ M+
MFDR+ =
x y
and global damage indices. +
ϕm ϕ+ ;
y
+ − +
Mm My
LOCAL DAMAGE INDICES −
ϕx ϕ−
y
+ − +
Mx My
Local damage indices quantify damage in MFDR− = −
ϕm ϕ−
y
(3)
individual member at critical section. It can + − +
Mm My
have cumulative nature if loads are cyclical This damage ratio represents the ratio
and depends on motion and number of between the secant stiffness at the onset of
loading-unloading cycles, but can also be of failure, M m /ϕ m , and the minimum secant
non-cumulative nature if no cyclic loading stiffness reached so far, M x /ϕ x . The term
exist. M y /ϕ y is the initial elastic stiffness.
a) Non-cumulative indices Superscripts + and - denote the loading
direction.
Newmark and Rosenblueth, proposed in
1971 the ductility factor as a means to assess b) Cumulative Indices
damage. The factor can be expressed as a Stephens and Yao (1987) developed a
function of curvature-ϕ, rotation-𝜽𝜽 or damage function which was applied for
displacement-d, using the following evaluation of structural damage. The
equation: damage sustained during n cycles of
ϕm θm dm response was expressed as:
µr (ϕ) = ; µr (θ) = ;µr (d) = (1)
ϕy θy dy
i=n
Δδpt 1−b∗rl
Where, suffix m and y denotes for maximum D = �( ) (4)
and yield value respectively. Δδpf
i=1 i
Banon et al, (1981) presented flexural
Where, b = deformation ratio coefficient; rl
damage ratio (FDR) based on stiffness and
= relative deformation ratio defined as the
computed according to following relation:
ratio of the negative change in plastic
Mu ϕm deformation in cycle i to the positive change
FDR = (2)
Mm ϕu in plastic deformation in cycle i, Δδpt ;
Δδpf = positive change in plastic deformation
Where,Mu is the ultimate bending moment
as resulting from a pushover analysis, Mm is in a one cycle test to failure conducted at
the maximum bending moment and ϕm and relative deformation ratio of cycle i which is
equal to the deflection at failure under
ϕu are corresponding curvatures.
simple monotonic loading.
548
Study Of Various Damage Indices Under Seismic Loading- A Review
c) Combined Cumulative Indices δm δu

Where, µm = ; µu = .
δy δy
The most widely used damage index is Park
and Ang (1984) which is defined as the Global Damage Indices
linear combination of the maximum Global damage indices take into account the
displacement and the dissipated energy. whole structure and its characteristics and
δM β provide information about global state as a
D= + � dE (5) function of distribution and severity of local
δu Q y δu
damage.
In which δM = maximum deformation under The following global damage parameter,
earthquake; δu = ultimate deformation under GDP, had introduced by Raufaiel and Meyer
monotonic loading (= µu δy ); Q y = calculated (1987), to define the overall degree of
yield strength (if maximum strength,Q u , is damage in a frame building,
smaller than Q y , Q y is replaced by Q u ); β=
non-negative parameter. µu = ultimate dR −dY
ductility factor; δy =yield deformation. GDP = (8)
dF −dY
Where, dR = the maximum roof
Colombo and Negro (2005), obtained
displacement; dY = the roof displacement at
damage index which is independent of
which the first member in the frame reaches
material used for the structure and defined
its yield moment capacity, assuming the
as ratio between initial strength and reduced
frame displaces in the first mode only; dF =
resistance capacity of structure. Strength
the roof displacement at which the frame is
degradation was determined by using
assumed to fail.
exponential and hyperbolic functions of
hysteretic energy. Park and Ang (1985) expressed the overall
1� damage of the building as average of local
𝜇𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝛽1
𝐷 = 1 − ��1 − � ∗ 0.5 �1 − indices weighted by local energy absorption,
𝜇𝑢
∫𝐸 ∫𝐸 ∑N
i=1 Di Ei
tanh(𝛽2 ∗ − 𝜋)� ∗ exp �−𝛽3 ∗ �� (6) Dstory = ∑N
;
𝐸𝑢 𝐸𝑢 i=1 Ei
Where, 𝜇𝑚𝑎𝑥 = maximum attained ductility; ∑N

story,i=1 Dstory,i Estory,i
𝜇𝑢 = available ductility; 𝐸𝑢∗ = maximum
Dglobal = ∑N
(9)
story,i=1 Estory,i
hysteretic energy.
Where, Di is the local damage index at
A damage model by modification of Park- location i, and Ei is the energy absorbed at
Ang damage model and eliminating its non- location i.
convergence problem at upper and lower
limits had been proposed by Jiang and Chen Illustrative Example:
in 2011 is given by, The building considered for the analysis is
µm ∫ dE seven story with different plan dimensions
D = (1 − β). + β. (7) reinforced concrete building (Figure.1).The
µu Fy δy (µu −1)
buildings are assumed to be situated in zone
549
Parekar and Datta
IV of IS1893:2002. Material properties are Density of brick wall and concrete 20KN/m2
assumed to be 25 MPa for concrete and 25 KN/m2 respectively.
compressive strength and 415 MPa for the
yield strength of longitudinal and shear
reinforcement. RESULTS
Multi-story RC frameswith different plan
dimensions were designed according to the
provision of the current Indian code
(IS456:2000)and IS1893:2002 and analyzed
using nonlinear static (pushover) analysis.
Their response under some strong ground
motions were obtained and by using
(a) modified Park-Ang damage index the
structural damage on designed RC frames
are quantified.
REFERENCES
Colombo A and Negro P 2005 A damage
index of generalised applicability
Engineering structures 27(8)1164-
1174.
(b)
Jiang H J Chen L Z and Chen Q 2011
Seismic damage assessment and
performance levels of reinforced
concrete members Procedia
Engineering (14) 939-945.
Park Y and Ang A H 1985 Mechanistic
(c) seismic damage model for reinforced
Figure 1. Plan dimensions of buildings concrete Journal of structural
(each bays in X and Y direction has 4m engineering.
width)
Roufaiel M S and Christian M
Other relevant data are as follows: 1987Analytical modeling of hysteretic
Live load considered on roof: 1.5 KN/m2 behavior of R/C frames Journal of
Live load considered on floors: 3 Structural Engineering 113-9.
KN/m2(25% for earthquake) Stephens J E and Yao J T 1987 Damage
2
Roof finish/ floor finish: 1 KN/m assessment using response
Brick wall on internal and external beams measurements Journal of Structural
are 150 mm thick and 230 mm thick Engineering 113 (4) 787-801.
respectively.
550
ICCMS2016
CHARACTERIZATION OF NEAR CRACK TIP STRESSES FOR

FRACTURE TESTING SPECIMENS FROM STRENGTH MISMATCH
WELD
KUMAR S.*, SINGH P. K. and PATEL R. J.
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Hall-7, Mumbai, India
Abstract: In-service inspection of many nuclear power plants has revealed that weld
joints are more critical in comparison to base metal. Therefore fracture assessment of
the strength mismatched weld is, required from safety considerations. In recent work,
the authors have proposed a three-parameter scheme to characterize the crack tip
opening stress, for small-scale yielding, for a crack lying anywhere in the strength
mismatched weld. The proposed scheme was validated with detailed finite element
analyses using the modified boundary layer formulation. In the present work, the
previously proposed scheme has been validated by detailed finite element analyses of
different types of fracture testing specimens (such as, middle tension, compact tension
and three point bend specimens) with crack in the weld and full scale pipe weld with
through wall crack. Wide range of weld strength mismatch ratio ranging from 0.6 to
1.6 and half of weld width 5mm to 20mm are considered in the study. Details of the
results have been discussed in this paper.
Keywords: Constraint; Crack tip stress; Weld strength mismatch; Finite
element.
INTRODUCTION addition to types of loading, geometry of

specimen, weld strength mismatch, weld
The fabrication of many engineering
width and crack location may also affect the
structures such as nuclear pressure vessel and
constraint level near crack tip in a mismatch
piping, boilers, and marine structures
weld specimen. Michiba et al., (1994) found
involves the adjournment of metal
that J-R curves of welded specimens are
components whereby welding becomes a
affected by weld strength mismatch ratio as
necessity. Cracks may develop in the
well as by the slenderness of the weld width.
weldment either during the fabrication
These studies indicate that weld strength
process and/or the service life of the
mismatch, weld width and weld location have
structure. Since these welds are vulnerable to
significant effect on crack tip stress, that
defect, hence accurate fracture assessment of
changing the constraint ahead of a crack in
these welds is an important aspect of integrity
specimen and hence fracture toughness. To
assessment. The existing structural integrity
transfer the fracture properties from
assessment methods [R6, 1998; Schwalbe et
laboratory specimen to components a
al., 1997] were developed mainly for
systematic investigation of crack tip stress is
homogeneous materials. Existing structural
required for welded (mismatch) specimens.
integrity assessment methods need to be
There have been several work in past, to
modified for the mismatch specimens. In
quantify the effect of weld strength mismatch

Kumar et al.
and weld width on crack tip constraint [Kim BACKGROUND

and Schwalbe 2014]. For weld centre cracks,
Crack tip stresses ahead of a crack in
Burstow et al. (1998) have investigated the
homogeneous material can be described in
strength mismatch effect on crack tip
terms of K–T or J–Q (O’Dowd and Shih,
constraint under small scale yielding and
1991, Williams, 1957). While K and J are
proposed a normalized load parameter to
stress intensity factor and J-integral that
scales the size of the plastic zone with the
accounts for the magnitude of applied load,
width of the weld material, and can be used
the second parameter Q or T represents the
to quantify the level of constraint for a given
crack tip constraint due to specimen
degree of mismatching. For interface cracks
geometry. Apart from specimen’s geometry
in strength mismatched bi-materials, several
and type of loading, weld strength mismatch
investigators [Zhang et al. 1996, 1997] have
ratio (M) and weld geometry also affect the
attempted to quantify the strength mismatch
crack tip stresses in mismatched specimens
effect on crack tip constraint. However, it
[Michiba et al., 1994]. Due to sharp strength
may be noted that, although such works
mismatch at the interface of base and weld
provided detailed information on the effect of
material an additional constraint gets
the strength mismatch on crack tip constraint,
developed at the tip of a crack lying in the
it is still difficult to obtain insight on the
weld region.
effect of other mismatch related variables,
Recently authors have proposed a three-
due to a large number of variables involved.
parameter scheme [Suranjitkumar et al. 2014]
In recent work, the authors have proposed a
to characterize the crack tip opening stress
novel three-parameter scheme [Suranjitkumar
for a crack lying at the center of a strength
et al. 2014, 2015] to characterize the crack tip
mismatched weld. In that, the first term
opening stress, for small-scale yielding, for a
estimate the crack tip opening stress, under
crack lying anywhere in the strength
small-scale yielding, in a homogeneous
mismatched weld. The proposed scheme was
material for the case of T=0. The second term
validated with detailed finite element
accounts for the specimen geometry via the
analyses using the modified boundary layer
Q-stress. The third term represents effect of
formulation. In the present work, the
weld strength mismatch and weld width.
previously proposed scheme has been
Three- parameter scheme is given as:
validated by detailed finite element analyses
of different types of fracture testing 𝜎𝑦𝑦 𝜎𝑦𝑦 𝑟
� � =� � + 𝑄 + (1 − 𝑀)(𝑎 𝐼𝑝2 + 𝑏)
specimens (such as, middle tension, compact 𝜎0 𝑀 𝜎0 𝑀=1,𝑇=0 𝐽�
𝜎𝑂
tension and three point bend specimens) with
crack in the weld and full scale pipe weld for, 2≤r/J/σ o ≤5 (1)
with through wall crack. Wide range of weld 4hσ
J
strength mismatch ratio ranging from 0.6 to 𝐼𝑝 = YS

2 (2)
2
1.6 and half of weld width 5mm to 20mm are T T
�σ +�4−(3−4ν2 )�σ � �
YS YS
considered in the study. For the case of
Compact Tension (CT) specimens having Here, σ o is the reference stress of the base
weld width of 10mm has been presented in material, a and b are the fitted constants that
this extended abstract. Remaining cases will depend on strain-hardening of the base
be covered in full paper. material, and r/J/σ o is the normalized distance
ahead of the crack tip. I p is plastic intraction
552
Characterization of Near Crack Tip Stresses for Fracture Testing Specimens from Strength Mismatch
Weld
factor. The parameter (I p ) scales the size of

the plastic zone with the width of the weld
material, accounting for the effect of T-stress,
and is essentially a measure of the degree of
influence of material mismatch on crack tip Base metal
Half weld
constraint for a given mismatch ratio. Further
width (h)
this scheme is extended for an off-center Weld metal
crack lying anywhere in the weld region by (a)
modifying the plastic interaction factor
(suranjitkumar et al., 2015).
NUMERICAL PROCEDURE
To evaluate the crack tip stress ahead of (b)
fracture testing specimens having weld center Figure1. (a) FE mesh for CT specimens
crack, detailed FE analysis have been carried having weld center crack (Weld width=10
out. Specimen has been modelled using 2D mm),(b) mesh details at blunted crack tip.
plane strain, 8nodedelement. The structure of Table 1. Details of material properties, E
the weld has been modeled as idealized bi- of base and weld are taken 2.05e5MPa
material having sandwich structure with
straight weld strip, without any heat affected
zone (HAZ).Details of FE model for CT
specimen having weld center crack has been
shown in figures1a and 1b. In all the
analyses, the weld material has been assumed
to be the same, and only the properties of the
base material have been varied to obtain
different mismatch ratio. Wide ranges of
mismatch ratio 0.6 to 1.6 were considered.
The weld and base materials have been Figure 2 shows the comparisons for a
modeled by Ramberg–Osgood material material having strain hardening index, n as 5
model. For the simplicity same young's and weld width 2h as10mm. Stress was
modulus of elasticity E and strain hardening evaluated for three different mismatch ratios
coefficient 'n' of base and weld materials (M = 1.6, 0.8 and 0.6) at different levels of
have been assumed.Details of material I p . The comparisons have been made for
properties used are given in Table. 1. different values of applied T-stresses, ranging
from 0.39σ o to 0.768σ o . The term Q in Eq.1
RESULTS accounts for the effect of constraint
developed due to specimen geometry. The
Crack tip opening stress estimated by using
relation between T stress and Q stress for
three parameter scheme (Eq.1.) are compared
different strain hardening indices is given by
with FE results of CT specimens.
O’Dowd et al. (1991, 1992). From figure 2 it
can be seen that Eq.1 nicely captured the
effect of material mismatch along with the
553
Kumar et al.
influence of specimen geometry and type of Kumar S Khan I A Bhasin V Singh R K 2014
loading. Characterization of crack tip stresses in
plane-strain fracture specimens having
weld center crack. International Journal
of Solids and Structures 51 1464–74.
Michiba K Hiramatsu H Hasegawa H
𝝈𝒚𝒚 /𝝈𝒐
Matsumara H Toyoda M 1994 An

experimental study on the behaviour of
stable crack growth in heterogeneity. In:
Toyoda M (Ed.) Second Workshop on
Constraint Effects on the Structural
Performance of Welded Joints, Osaka
r/J/σo
University.
Figure2: Comparisons of crack
tipopening stress obtained from the O Dowd N P Shih C F 1991 Family of crack
tip fields characterized by a traiaxiality
proposed scheme with FE analysis for
parameter. I: Structure of field. Journal
CT specimen having weld center crack of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids
(weld width 2h=10mm). 39 898–1015.
CONCLUSION R6 1998 Assessment of the integrity of
structural containing defects. British
• There is significant effect of strength
Energy R/H/R6-Revision 3.
mismatch ratio and weld width on
constraint level ahead of a crack lying Schwalbe K H Zerbst U Kim YJ Brocks W
Cornec A Heerens J et al 1997 EFAM
in the weld.
ETM 97. The ETM method for
• The proposed three parameter scheme assessing the significance of crack like
can completely characterize the radial defect in engineering structures. GKSS
variation of the crack tip opening stress Research Centre Germany,
ahead of crack lying in the centre of GKSS/98/E6.
weld. Williams M L 1957On the stress distribution
REFERENCES at the base of a stationary crack. Journal
of Applied Mechanics 24 109–114.
Burstow CHoward I C Ainsworth R A 1998 Zhang Z L Hauge M Thaulow C 1996 Two
The influence of constraint on crack tip parameter characterisation of the near
stress fields in strength mis-matched tip stress fields for bi-material elastic
welded joints. Journal of the Mechanics plastic interface crack. International
and Physics of Solids46 845. Journal of Fracture 79 65–83.
Kim Y J Schwalbe K H 2004 Numerical Zhang Z L Hauge M Thaulow C 1997
analyses of strengthmis-match effect on Assessment of material mis-match
local stresses for ideally plastic constraint in a bimaterial elastic–plastic
materials. Engineering Fracture interface crack. In: Schwalbe KH,
Mechanics71 1177–1199. Kocak M, editors. Mis-matching of
Kumar S Khan I A Singh P K Bhasin V interfaces and welds. Germany: GKSS
Singh R K 2015 Characterization of Research Centre Publications 149–60.
near tip stresses for a plane-strain off-
center crack in a strength mismatched
weld. International Journal of
Mechanical Sciences 99 48–57
554
ICCMS2016
EFFECTS OF INTERMEDIATE PRINCIPAL STRESS ON SHEAR

LOCALIZATIONDURINGTUNNEL EXCAVATION
SISODIA M. and DAS A.*
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur, Kanpur, India.
Abstract: Shallow underground tunnel excavation is one of the geotechnical

processes in which shear bands may form. Such deformation mechanism leads to
catastrophic failure of the soil located above the tunnel. In the present study, tunnel
excavation is simulated with finite element modelling using a robust constitutive
model, which can accommodate any shape of the yield surface for granular materials
and also accounts intermediate principal stress effects on soil failure. Our analysis
captures the formation and propagation of shear band around tunnel in accordance
with the experimental observations. It has been shown that classical approaches are
more conservative towards failure estimation during to shear band formation, than the
failure criteria which accounts intermediate principal stress effects.
Keywords: Shear band; Tunnel Excavation; Intermediate Principal Stress;
Finite element; Constitutive model.
INTRODUCTION 2010]. Only few of them analysed the

formation and propagation of shear band.
Shallow underground tunnel is one of the key
Akutagawa et al. (2008) and Shahin et al.
components of modern infrastructure
(2011) confirmed the formation of conjugate
development, particularly in the area of
shear bands at the tunnel shoulder and further
transportation. Such tunnel excavation
propagation up to the ground surface. Despite
disturbs the initial in-situ stresses of the soil,
predicting the surface settlement in
which leads to ground movements in the
accordance with the experiments, these
surrounding zones. This type of deformations
analysis, however, unable to capture the
do not stem from the applied loads, but from
evolution of shear band precisely.
restoring the internal equilibrium of the
ground. Excavation-induced settlements may The objective of the present work is to
cause serious damages to nearby structures. capture the formation and propagation of
Therefore, such deformation prediction shear band during tunnel excavation through
during tunnelling must be accurate, the 2D Numerical simulation. In addition, we are
prediction methods should account various aiming to explore effects of intermediate
parameters, such as tunnel construction principal stress on the analysis of shear band
method, tunnel-driving details, tunnel depth formation during shallow tunnel excavation.
and diameter, initial stress state, and stress- In the first part of this study we analyse shear
strain behaviour of the soil around the tunnel. band formation in biaxial samples. Second
part on the other hand, focuses on tunnel
Series of studies have been performed on
excavation simulation under 2D plane strain
shallow tunnel excavation in the recent past
condition and further analysis on the
using numerical modelling either in 2D or 3D
associated deformation patterns.
[Akutagawa et al., 2008; Almeida e Sousa et
al., 2011; Shahin et al., 2011; Walter et al.,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: arghya@iitk.ac.in 555

Sisodia and Das
CONSTITUTIVE MODEL Where 𝑝𝑠 is the hardening parameter, B p is a

the plastic compressibility constant under
A linear elastic non-associative elasto-plastic
hydrostatic compression and 𝜀̇𝑣𝑝 is the plastic
model, developed by Lagioia et al.(1996) is volumetric strain increment.
used for the present study. Various Flow rule:
ingredients of the model are given below: 𝜕𝑔 (8)
𝑝
Yield function (f) and plastic potential (g): 𝜀̇𝑖𝑗 = Λ ,
𝜕𝜎𝑖𝑗
𝑓 𝐾 /𝐶 −𝐾 /𝐶 (1)
� = 𝐴ℎ 1ℎ ℎ 𝐵ℎ 2ℎ ℎ 𝑝 − 𝑝𝑠 = 0 where, 𝜀̇𝑖𝑗𝑝 is the incremental plastic strain
𝑔
tensor,𝜎𝑖𝑗 is Cauchy stress tensor and𝛬is the non-
1 𝑞 (2)
𝐴ℎ = 1 + negative plastic multiplier.
𝐾1ℎ 𝑀ℎ 𝑝
1 𝑞 (3) NUMERICAL BIAXIAL TESTS
𝐵ℎ = 1 +
𝐾2ℎ 𝑀ℎ 𝑝 Shear band formation is studied in
(4) rectangular biaxial specimens (plane strain)
𝜇ℎ (1 − 𝛼ℎ ) of aspect ratio 3:1 (60 mm x 20 mm), and
𝐾1ℎ/2ℎ = �1
2(1 − 𝜇ℎ ) generated with 8 noded quadrilateral
elements. The vertical movement of the
4𝛼ℎ (1 − 𝜇ℎ ) sample base is restricted while the horizontal
± �1 − �
𝜇ℎ (1 − 𝛼ℎ )2 stability is assured by providing a fixity at
the lower left corner. Tests are performed in
𝐶ℎ = (1 − 𝜇ℎ )(𝐾1ℎ − 𝐾2ℎ ) (5) two stages, first stage consists of isotropic
confinement, and in the next stage
2𝑀𝑐ℎ 𝑐ℎ𝑀 (6)
𝑀ℎ = displacement control shearing is applied at
1 + 𝑐ℎ𝑀 − (1 − 𝑐ℎ𝑀 ) sin(3𝜗) the top boundary. Localization is triggered by
In Eqs. (1-6), 𝛼ℎ, 𝜇ℎ are the constants which introducing a local minor imperfection in an
control the shape of the surfaces in meridian element by reducing its initial p s value (1%).
sections of the stress space, while 𝑀𝑐ℎ and We have adopted a typical loose sand model
𝑀𝑒ℎ are the friction angle dependent parameters as provided by Mihalache &
parameters which control the geometry of the Buscarnera(2015), for all the numerical
surfaces in the region of compression and simulations.
extension loading, respectively. In particular, It is well known that, classical rate-
𝑀ℎ defines the shape of the deviatoric independent elasto-plastic models unable to
section, which is expressed as a function of capture post localization responses due to
the Lode angle, ϑ, (Gudehus, 1973). p and q absence of proper length scale. Hence, a
represents the mean stress and deviatoric regularization scheme is incorporated by
stress, respectively. In order to define any enhancing the model with Perzyna type rate-
particular yield surface (h=f) and plastic dependent viscoplasticity Eq. (9).
potential (h=g) two sets of all four
parameters need to be calibrated based on 𝑝 〈𝜙(𝑓)〉 𝜕𝑔 (9)
𝜀̇𝑖𝑗 =
experiments, thus defining the shape of the 𝜂 𝜕𝜎𝑖𝑗
yield surface from observed yielding points,
Where η is the fluidity parameter and “ϕ” can
and that of the plastic potential from the
be any positive function yield function f.
irreversible strain increments measured in the
Here for simplicity ϕ = f has been chosen.
post-yielding regime.
The regularized model is implemented in
Hardening rule:
Finite Element package ABAQUS through
𝑝𝑠 𝑝 (7) user defined subroutine (UMAT) which
𝑝̇𝑠 = 𝜀̇
𝐵𝑝 𝑣 includes a fully implicit stress integration
scheme.
556
Effcets of Intermediate Principal Stress on Shear Localizationduring Tunnel Excavation
Mc ≠ Me
Mc = Me
Mc = Me Mc ≠ Me
Figure 1. Deformation in biaxial sample

under 20 kPa confining pressure. Figure 2. Force-displacement response
of biaxial tests under 20 kPa confining
Biaxial tests are performed for 4 different pressure.
confining pressures 5,10,15 and 20 kPa. For
each confinement two simulations are SIMULATIONS OF SHALLOW
performed, one with considering the effect of TUNNEL EXCAVATION
intermediate principal stress (𝑀𝑐ℎ ≠ 𝑀𝑒ℎ )
and another one without considering In order to simulate tunnel excavation a
it(𝑀𝑐ℎ = 𝑀𝑒ℎ ). rectangular 2D (plane strain) domain of size
2.5 m x 2 m is generated and further
A typical force – displacement plot for discretized with 4 noded isoparametric finite
confining pressures 20kPa is given in Figure. elements. A circular opening of diameter 0.5
2 clearly shows that, the onset of localization m is created at a distance 0.5 m below the top
takes place at higher displacement when surface. Both the sides and the bottom
𝑀𝑐ℎ ≠ 𝑀𝑒ℎ . However, there is absolutely no surfaces of the domain are restricted from
difference in the final deformation patterns any movement, while gravitational load is
(Figure. 1) irrespective of intermediate applied over the entire domain. Excavation
principal stress consideration. Notice here, process is simulated by applying a radial
the displacements (Figure. 2) are less displacement boundary condition on the
compare to reality as a result of very loose circular opening in such a way, that the
sand parameters. It can be easily improved crown undergoes maximum displacement,
by choosing other realistic set of parameters. while the invert is fixed, as suggested by
Shahin et al.(2011).
(c) Present analysis
Figure 3. Comparison of shear band propagations (a-b) experimental and numerical

simulation by Shahin et al. (2011); (c) Present analysis.
Figure. 3 shows a qualitative comparison observations of Shahin et al. (2011) with the
between the experimental and numerical present study using deviatoric strain
557
Sisodia and Das
contours. It shows that, present study effects. Hence, considering intermediate

precisely captures the propagation of the principal effects might be economical.
multiple shear bands starting from the
REFERENCES
shoulder of the tunnel in a spiral fashion and
progressing towards the ground surface. Akutagawa S Lee J-H Kitani T 2008
Numerical modelling of nonlinear
deformation behaviour of shallow
tunnel by strain softening analysis. J.
Soc. Mater. Sci. Japan 57 (2) 191–198.
Almeida e Sousa J Negro A Matos Fernandes
M Cardoso A S 2011 Three-
U2 = 0.16 mm U2 = 0.16 mm Dimensional Nonlinear Analyses of a
Metro Tunnel in São Paulo Porous Clay
Brazil J. Geotech. Geoenvironmental
Eng.137(4)376–384.
Gudehus G 1973 Elastoplastische
Stoffgleichungen für trockenen Sand.
Ingenieur-Archiv 42(3) 151–169.
U2 = 0.25 mm U2 = 0.25 mm
Lagioia R Puzrin A M Potts D M 1996 A
Mc ≠ Me Mc = Me new versatile expression for yield and
plastic potential surfaces. Comput.
Figure 4. Progression of shear band with Geotech. 19(3) 171–191.
and without considering intermediate
Mihalache C Buscarnera G 2015 Is Wetting
principal stress.
Collapse an Unstable Compaction
Further in Figure. 4 the effect of intermediate Process ? J. Geotech. Geoenvironmental
principal stress is depicted at different stages Eng. 141 1–13.
of the tunnel crown movement (U2). Similar Shahin H M Nakai T Zhang F Kikumoto M
to biaxial test results, it has been observed & Nakahara E 2011 Behaviour of
that, at any instance, the evolution of shear ground and response of existing
band is faster if the effect of intermediate foundation due to tunneling. Soils
principal stress is not considered. Found.51(3) 395–409.
CONCLUSIONS Walter H Coccia C J Ko H-Y & McCartney J
S 2010 Centrifuge Modeling of Face
This study has shown how shear bands form Excavation in Tunnels with a
and propagate during the shallow tunnel Deformabel Lining GeoFlorida 2010
excavation. The use of a robust elasto-plastic Adv. Anal. Model. Des..
constitutive model in FE precisely predicts
the formation of multiple spiral shaped
localization bands around a circular tunnel.
The observations are found in accordance
with the experimental observation given in
the literature. Further analysis shows that the
presence of intermediate principal stress in
failure criteria, delays the shear band
formation. It suggests that the deformation
due to tunnelling might be overestimated by
the traditional methods which does not
account the intermediate principal stress
558
ICCMS2016
A NUMERICAL STUDY ON A ROCK SLOPE FAILURE WITH THE

RATE, STATE, TEMPERATURE AND PORE PRESSURE FRICTION
(RSTPF) MODEL
SINGH A. K.1 and SINGH T. N.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, VNIT Nagpur India.
2
Department of Earth Sciences, IIT Bombay, Mumbai India.
Abstract: We study numerically dynamic stability of a rock slope with the rate, state,
temperature and pore pressure friction (RSTPF) model on a rock slope. It is assumed
that failure of a rock slope occurs due to thermally activated creep of the micro
contacts at the sliding interface under the conditions of quasi static equilibrium. The
present study reveals that an increase in pore pressure destabilizes the rock slope.
However, failure of a rock slope depends on relative competitions between
temperature strengthening parameter and pore pressure related parameters.
Keywords: Rock slope stability; Rate and State friction; Temperature and pore
pressure.
INTRODUCTION velocity as well as state of the sliding

Study on stability of a rock slope is critical surfaces [Marone, 1998; Singh et al., 2013].
for many practical purposes for instance, The RSF model finds wide spread
warning of failure of a rock slope [Singh et applications in modelling and simulations
al., 2013; Helmstetter et al., 2004; Chau, of dynamics of earthquake faults
1995]. Static stability of a rock slope is [Marone,1998; Singh and Singh,2012].
generally carried out with the classical Despite success of the RSF model, this
Mohr-Coulomb friction model [Chau, friction model has not been used much in
1995; Helmstetter et al., 2004]. However the study of rock slope stability. Chau
dynamical stability is more important than (1995) studied the RSF model on rock
the static stability for the assessment of slope considering inertia. Singh et al.(2013)
failure of a rock mass on an inclined plane used the Chau’s model for rock slope
[Singh et al., 2013; Helmstetter, 2004]. stability for determining dynamic factor of
Based on the experiments, friction of rock safety of rock mass on an inclined plane.
surfaces at high normal stress (~MPa) They established that inertia causes
depends on sliding velocity, nature of the immediate failure of the rock slope.
sliding surfaces [Dieterich, 1979; Ruina, Helmstetter et al. (2004) have used the RSF
1983]. This model is known as the rate and model for studying time dependent failure
state friction (RSF) model [Singh and of rock mass slopes. However they have
Singh, 2012; Marone, 1998]. It should be not considered the role of temperature and
noted that the RSF model is basically pore pressure in their friction model. Singh
modified form of the Coulomb friction and Singh (2016) used the rate, state and
model which considers the role of slip temperature friction (RSTF) model to
predict the time of failure of a rock slope.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:aksinghb@gmail.com 559

φ
dφ ψ g [Λ1[c1e ψ g − c2 (Tˆs − Tˆ )] − Λ 2 ( pˆ s − 1)]
The RSTF model was basically proposed ∞
by Chester (1994) to include the effect of =

dT (σˆ ng − pˆ s ) 2
temperature on friction. Singh and Singh
[{ µˆ +φ + c (Tˆs−1 −1) −ψ g (σˆ ng − pˆ s )} β −1 ]
(2016) have established that temperature + β eφ − β e *
strengthening parameter delays the failure +cTˆs−2 [c1eφψ g − c2 (Tˆs − Tˆ ∞ )] (1)
of the rock slope and this is, in contrast,
dTˆs
with effect of velocity weakening friction = c1eφψ g − c2 (Tˆs − Tˆ ∞ )
parameter. Aiming to develop more dT
dpˆ s
realistic friction model for a rock slope, we =Λ1[c1eφψ g − c2 (Tˆs − Tˆ ∞ )] − Λ 2 ( pˆ s − 1)
shall consider the role of temperature as dT
well as pore pressure. As a result, we have Where the non dimensional terms are defined
further modified the RSTF model to as following µˆ = µ* a , T = tv* d c ,
include the effect of pore pressure which Tˆs = Ts T * , pˆ s = ps p ∞ , φ =ln ( v v* ) ,
we call as the rate, state, temperature and
c= (1 − β q ) Qa RT* β = b a , σˆ ng = σ ng p ∞ .
pore pressure friction (RSTPF) model. In
general, pore pressure reduces the effective It should be noted that the effect of
normal stress but compaction strengthens temperature parameter q diminishes for c = 0
the sliding interface [Segall and Rice, 1995 or β = 1 q . Moreover, ψ g is a component of
,2006;Schmitt et al.,2011; Lorenzo and gravitational force acting along the interface
Loddo,2014]. of the rock slope. The non-dimensional terms
Theoretical and experimental studies on Λ1 and Λ 2 are related with pore pressure.
earthquake faults have shown that thermal The terms c , c1 and c2 are, in contrast,
pressurization occurs owing to frictional shear
related with the temperature of the sliding
heating thus the earthquake fault becomes
interface [Singh and Singh,2016]. The
unstable [Segall and Rice, 2006;Lorenzo and
numerical value of friction and other physical
Loddo,2010]. Nonetheless this type of study
parameters are considered the same which
has not been applied in the case of rock slope
were considered by Segall and Rice [1995,
stability. We have studied numerically the
2006]. The system of differential equations in
dynamic interaction between temperature and
Eq.(1) is solved numerically to understand the
pore pressure at the sliding interface of a rigid
rock mass on an inclined plane with the interaction between temperature Tˆ and pore s
RSTPF model. The RSTF model has been pressure pˆ s on time of failure t f of the rock
modified further to take into account the role
interface under the condition Ts > T ∞ .
of pore pressure ps at the slip interface for
Figure 1. presents the results concerning
undrained conditions as following the failure of a rock slope with
(Λ1 ≠ 0, Λ 2 ≠ 0) and without (Λ1 =Λ 2 =0)
thermal pressurization for c = 0 or qcr = β−1
for β =1.2 . It is clear that the thermal
pressurization owing to interaction
between shear heat and pore pressure of
water at the slip interface hastens the
failure process by reducing the effective
normal stress.
560
A Numerical Study on a Rock Slope Failure with the Rate, State, Temperature and Pore Pressure
Friction (RSTPF) Model
REFERENCES
Chau K T 1995 Landslides modelled as

bifurcation of creeping slopes with
nonlinear friction law, International
Journal of Solids Structures 32 3451-
3464.
Chester F M 1994 Effects of temperature on
friction: constitutive equations and
experiments with quartz gauge Journal
of Geophysical Research 99 B4 7247-
7261.
Figure 1. Failure of a rock slope Dieterich J D 1979 Modelling of rock friction

Experimental results and constitutive
We have also studied the effect of q in equations Journal of Geophysical
presence of pore pressure. It seen in Research 84 2161-2168.
Figure1 that if q < qcr = β−1 that is, Helmstetter A Sornette D Grassol J-R,
q = 0.7 , the failure time of the rock Andersen J V Gluzman S and Pisarenko
V 2004 Slider-Block Friction Model for
slope further decreases. However, if Landslides: Application to Vaiont and
q > qcr =0.83 that is, q = 1.0 , the time La Clapière Landslides Journal of
to failure of the rock slope further Geophysical Research 109 B202409.
delayed. This particular observation is Lorenzo S D and Loddo M 2010 Effect of
attributed to strengthening of the sliding frictional heating and thermal advection
interface with increasing q = 0.7 . on pre-seismic sliding: a numerical
simulation using a rate state and
Similar observation is also seen in the
temperature-dependent friction law
case of velocity strengthening surface Journal of Geodynamics 49 1-13.
(β < 1) . It would be interesting to valid
Marone C 1998 Laboratory derived friction
the proposed RSTPF model with actual laws and their application to seismic
experimental data. Another application faulting Annual Reviews in Earth
of the model to correlate the theoretical Planetary Sciences 26 643-696.
slope movement with its satellite image. Ruina A L 1983 Slip instability and state
variable friction law Journal of
CONCLUSION Geophysical Research 88 10359-10370
The present numerical simulations study Schmitt S V Segall P and Matsuzawa T 2011
establishes that pore pressure at the shear heating‐induced thermal
sliding interface hasten the failure pressurization during earthquake
process even in the absence of shear nucleation Journal of Geophysical
shearing. However the presence of Research 116 B06308
doi:10.1029/2010JB008035.
temperature strengthening parameter
could hasten or delay the failure process
of the slip interface depending its
magnitudes.
561
Segall P and Rice J R 1995 Dilatancy,

compaction and slip instability of a
fluid-infiltrated fault Journal of
Geophysical Research 100 B11 22
155-171.
Segall P and Rice J R 2006 Does shear
heating of pore fluid contribute to
earthquake nucleation? Journal
Geophysical Research 111 B09316.
doi: 10.1029/2005JB004129.
Singh A K and Singh T N 2016 Stability of
the rate state and temperature friction
model and its applications Geophysical
Journal International 205 636-647.
Singh A K and Singh T N 2013 Frictional
strength and steady relaxation using the
rate and state dependent friction model
Pure and Applied Geophysics 170 247-
257.
Singh A K Kanthola A and Singh T N 2012
Prediction of slope stability with an
advanced friction model International
Journal of Rock Mechanics and Mining
Sciences 55 164-167.
562
ICCMS2016
REDISTRIBUTION PRINCIPAL APPROACH FOR EVALUATION OF

SEISMIC ACTIVE EARTH PRESSURE BEHIND RETAINING WALL
MASKAR A.D.1*, MADHEKAR S. N.2 and PHATAK D. R.1
1
Civil Engg Department, COE, Pune, India.
2
Applied Mechanics, COE, Pune, India.
Abstract: The available pseudo-static and pseudo-dynamic methods do not

incorporate the effect of wall movement on the earth pressure distribution. Dubrova
(1963) was the first, who considered such effect to evaluate active earth pressure
behind retaining walls. Till date, Dubrova’s method is used for cohesion less soil,
without considering the effect of seismicity. In this paper, Dubrova’s model based on
redistribution principle, considering the seismic effect has been developed. It is used
to compute the distribution of seismic active earth pressure on a rigid retaining wall,
supporting cohesionless backfill in more realistic manner, by considering the effect of
wall movement on the earth pressure. Effects of a wide range of parameters like soil
friction angle, wall friction angle, horizontal and vertical seismic accelerations; on
seismic active earth pressure have been studied. The current study implies the
variation of seismic active earth pressure coefficient (Kae) with seismic acceleration
coefficient in horizontal direction (kh) in the same manner as that of
Mononobe(1929)-Okabe method (1924) and Chaudhury - Nimbalkar (2006) study.
With increase in soil friction angle (ϕ), there is reduction in static as well as seismic
earth pressure. Also, by keeping constant ϕ value, as kh increases from 0 to 0.3, earth
pressure increases; whereas as wall friction angle (δ) increases, earth pressure
decreases.
Keywords: Dubrova’s model; Pseudo-static approach; Pseudo-dynamic
methods; Nonlinear distribution; Redistribution principle.
INTRODUCTION seismic earth pressure. Recent works of

The study of seismic active earth pressure is Chaudhury - Nimbalkar (2006), Choudhury
very essential for the safe design of retaining and (2006), Mylonakis (2007), Subba Rao
wall in seismic prone zones. The pioneering and Choudhury have considered the pseudo-
work on earthquake-induced lateral earth static approach to compute seismic active
pressure under active and passive conditions earth pressure behind a retaining wall.
behind retaining wall was reported by Okabe Choudhury and Katdare (2014); and
(1924) and Mononobe and Matsuo (1929). Choudhury and Nimbalkar (2006), studied a
Currently, this pseudo-static approach, pseudo dynamic approach for estimation of
following the Coulomb’s static earth pressure seismic earth pressure on rigid retaining wall.
analysis, known as Mononobe – Okabe However, both pseudo-static and pseudo-
method [Kramer, 1996] is used to evaluate dynamic approaches do not consider the
E-mail:amol.maskar5@gmail.com 563
Maskar et al.
effect of wall movement on the earth pressure From the force polygon shown in Figure2,
distribution. Dubrova presented an analytical the weight of trial wedge is given by,
method in the form of redistribution
𝑾’𝒅 = 𝑾𝒅 √𝟏 + 𝜶𝟐 + 𝟐𝜶𝒄𝒐𝒔(𝟗𝟎𝟎 ) (1)
principle, which is based on different wall
movements like rotation at top, rotation at From the geometry in Figure 2, the seismic
bottom and pure translation and calculated
active earth thrust (Pd) is given by,
static earth pressure. The distribution of static
earth pressure was found to be parabolic,
which matches with all available
experimental results. In the present study,
redistribution principle with incorporation of
seismicity effect is developed and seismic
active earth pressure distribution based on
newly developed redistribution principle is
worked out. In this paper, a complete
Figure 1. Resultant force acting on
analytical study is presented, which describes
Failure plane
the behaviour of seismic earth pressure
distribution using redistribution principle, for
different soil friction angle, wall friction
angle and; horizontal and vertical seismic
accelerations, for active conditions of earth
pressures.
MATHEMATICAL MODEL
Figure 1 shows that retaining wall rotates
about point O. At each point of wall there is a
corresponding failure plane. Fi is the resultant
Figure 2. Trial Wedge of Retaining Wall
of normal and frictional forces acting on
and Force Polygon
failure plane and is inclined at an angle of Ψi
to normal. OA is pushed into soil whereas W’𝑑 sin(θ−ψ+λ)
𝑃𝑑 = (2)
sin[90−(θ−ψ−δ)]
OB pulled outward, as shown in Figure 1.
Hence, there is limiting active and passive The pressure distribution along various
condition only at bottom and top of wall heights of wall z is obtained by
respectively. The force Fi is inclined at an differentiating Pd w.r.t z
angle – ϕ at top and + ϕ at bottom; while in-
between, values of ϕ are linearly distributed.
Dubrova assumed Coulomb’s theory (1776)
and replaced ϕ by Ψ(z), which considers (3)
variation of angle of internal friction from – ϕ Eq. (3) presents seismic active earth pressure
to + ϕ for z = 0 and z = H respectively. A distribution behind the retaining wall. Out of
single failure plane, on which various forces various wall movements, the wall movement
act, is shown in Figure2, where α is as rotation about bottom is considered, where
horizontal seismic coefficient and Pd is the Ψ is an inclination of the resultant with the
force inclined to horizontal at an angle δ. ϕz
normal, given by ψ=ϕ−
H
564
Redistribution Principal Approach for Evaluation of Seismic Active Earth Pressure behind Retaining Wall
∂ψ ϕ the present study, with that by Mononobe–

Differentiation gives, =−
∂z H
Okabe method and Choudhury and
Therefore from Eq. (3) active earth thrust Nimbalkar (2006), for the cases of kh= 0.2,
when wall rotates about bottom, as well as kv= 0.5kh , ϕ = 350 and δ = ϕ /2. The present
active earth thrust when wall rotates about study reveals non-linear seismic active earth
top is calculated. According to the pressure distribution behind retaining wall in
redistribution principle, sliding case (pure a more realistic manner, compared to the
translation) is the combination of both; pseudo-static and pseudo.
rotation about bottom case and rotation about
top case. Hence, the active earth thrust is RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
given as, The results are presented for normalized
seismic active earth pressure (Pae/γH) along
the normalized depth of the wall (z/H). -
4) dynamic `method. Eq. (4) shows nonlinear
The active earth thrust is used to determine seismic active earth pressure distribution.
seismic earth pressure distribution behind Moreover the data for the centrifuge
retaining wall based on redistribution experiment observations for model retaining
principle. wall under seismic condition measured by
Steedman and Zeng (1990) shows the non-
Variation of parameters considered is as linear variation of seismic active earth
follows: ϕ = 200, 250, 300,350 and 400; δ = 0, pressure along the depth of the wall. Thus,
0.25ϕ, 0.5ϕ, 0.75ϕ and ϕ; kh = 0, 0.1, 0.2 and the present findings are confirmed. Also the
0.3; kv = 0.5 kh i.e 0, 0.05, 0.1 and work by Choudhury and Katdare (2014),
0.15.Figure 3 presents normalized static earth based on pseudo-dynamic approach supports
pressure (Pa/γH) distribution along the the present findings.
normalized depth (z/H) of wall with different
values of ϕ, δ, kh and kv. It can be
0 0.2 0.4 0.6
interpreted from Figure3 (with kh = 0.0 and kv 0
= 0.0 ) that, as soil friction angle (ϕ) Normalized Pressure (Pa/γH)φ = 20, δ/φ
Normalized Depth (Z/H)
= 0.
increases from 200 to 250, 250 to 300, 300 to 0.2
350 and 350 to 400, there is reduction in static φ = 20, δ/φ
earth pressure values by 17%, 17%, 25% and = 0.25
0.4
8% respectively. This is because as soil φ = 20, δ/φ
friction angle (ϕ) increases then backfill 0.6
= 0.5
becomes denser, thus, reducing the earth φ = 20, δ/φ
pressure. As ϕ increases from 200 to 400, 0.8
= 0.75
nature of curve changes. Similarly the results φ = 20, δ/φ
are obtained with varying kh and kv. It is seen 1 =1
from Figure3, that with increase in kh from
0.1, 0.2, 0.3 and kv = 0.5kh, the active earth Figure 3. Normalized static active earth
pressure increases. pressure distribution with depth for
different values of ϕ and wall friction
COMPARISON OF RESULTS angle, δ with kh =0.0, kv = 0.0
Figure 4 shows the typical comparison of
normalized pressure distribution obtained by
565
Maskar et al.
Normalized Pressure Pae/γH Choudhury D and Singh S 2006 New

0 0.2 0.4
approach for estimation of static and
0 M-O seismic active earth pressure
METHOD
Normalized Depth (Z/H)
Geotechnical and Geological

0.2
Engineering 24(1) 117 - 127
0.4 CHOUDH Dewaikar D M and Halkude S A 1996
URY & Seismic passive/active thrust on
NIMBALK retaining wall-point of application Soils
0.6 AR (2006) and Foundations 42(1) 9 - 15
PRESENT
0.8 STUDY
Dubrova G A Interaction between Soils and
Structures [in Russian], Rechnoi
1 Transport
Greco V R 2010 Seismic active thrust on
Figure 4. Comparison of typical results of cantilever walls with short heel Soil
non-dimensional seismic active earth Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering
pressure distribution for kh=0.2, kv = 0.5 29(2) 249-252
kh, ϕ = 350, δ = ϕ /2 Kramer S L (1996) Geotechnical earthquake
engineering Prentice Hall Upper Saddle
CONCLUSION River NJ
Mononobe N and Matsuo H 1929 On the
Dubrova’s approach based on redistribution determination of earth pressures during
principle, considered the effect of wall earthquakes Proceeding of World
movement to determine active earth pressure Engineering Congress 177-185
distribution for non-seismic condition. In the Mylonakis G Kloukinas P and
present study, the formulation is developed Papantonopoulos C 2007 An alternative
for seismic condition. Further the seismic to the Mononobe–Okabe equations for
active earth pressure distribution along the seismic earth pressures Soil Dynamics
depth of the retaining wall is obtained. The and Earthquake Engineering 27(10)
study results into more realistic non-linear 957–969
seismic active earth pressure distribution Okabe S 1924 General theory on earth
behind the retaining wall as compared to the pressure and seismic stability of
pseudo-static and pseudo-dynamic approach. retaining wall and dam Journal of the
Also, value of Kae obtained by present study Japanese Society of Civil Engineering
matches with Greco (2010) study. It is also 10(6) 1277-1323
found that non-linearity of the active earth
pressure distribution increases with
seismicity.
REFERENCES
Choudhury D and Katdare A D 2014 New
method to compute seismic active earth
pressure on retaining wall considering
seismic waves Geotechnical and
Geological Engineering 32 391 - 402
Choudhury D and Nimbalkar S 2006 Pseudo-
dynamic approach of seismic active
earth pressure behind retaining wall
Geotechnical and Geological
Engineering 24(5) 1103 - 1113
566
ICCMS2016
THREE DIMENSIONAL COMPUTER SIMULATION OF LATERALLY

LOADED MONOPILE FOUNDATION FOR OFFSHORE WIND
TURBINE
DESHMUKH R. R.* and SHARMA V.K.
Civil Engineering Department, Matoshri College of Engineering and Research Centre, Nashik, India.
Abstract: Monopile foundation is used as foundation for offshore wind turbine. In the
current study, a non-linear 3D analysis of monopile foundation with an elastic plastic
soil model (Mohr-coulomb), an elastic pile material (steel) and interface elements are
used to model the pile–soil interaction using MIDAS GTS-NX finite element software
package. A define soil model represent medium dense sand and hollow steel pile
within sand subjected to large lateral loading. Analysis shows that vertical
displacement of monopile is more than lateral displacement along loading direction as
well as solid stresses also maximum in the vertical direction than horizontal or lateral.
Shear stresses is also found more compared to horizontal solid stresses in loading
direction.
Keywords: FEM; Monopile; Lateral loading; Displacement; Stresses.
INTRODUCTION 800-1100 €/KW and for offshore 1200-1850

€/KW out of that 5-10% and 15-25% cost
Worldwide, wind energy is accepted as one spend on construction & maintenance of
of the most developed, cost-effective and foundation respectively [Faaij A., 2011].
proven renewable energy technologies to
meet increasing electricity demands in a DEVELOPMENTS IN INDIA
sustainable manner. While onshore wind
energy technologies have reached to a stage In India preliminary assessments indicate
of mass deployment and have become prospects along the coastline of Kerala,
competitive with fossil fuel based electricity Karnataka and Goa. The wind resource data
generation with supportive policy regimes collected for the coastline of Rameshwaram
across the world, exploitation of offshore and Kanyakumari in Tamil Nadu and Gujarat
wind energy is yet to reach a comparable Coast shows reasonable potential. A
scale (National Offshore Wind Energy Policy preliminary assessment suggests potential to
2013). establish around 1 GW capacity wind farm
each along the coastline of Rameshwaram
GLOBAL STATUS and Kanyakumari in Tamil Nadu (National
Offshore Wind Energy Policy 2013).
About 5 GW offshore wind capacity has
already been installed around the world and TYPES OF FOUNDATION FOR
approximately an equal capacity is under
O.W.T.
construction. There are a large number of
offshore wind farms in Belgium, Denmark, Different types of foundations have been
Finland, Germany, Ireland, the Netherlands, proposed including monopile, gravity base,
Norway, Sweden, and the United Kingdom. jacket of the offshore turbines currently in
Total turnkey investment cost for onshore operation are supported on driven monopiles.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:rohandeshmukh520@gmail.com 567

Deshmukh and Sharma
The choice of monopiles results from their E s (Z) = E so + E sin c (Z - Z o ) (1)

simplicity of installation and the proven
success of driven piles in supporting offshore Where E so is Young’s modulus at the soil at
oil and gas infrastructures. depth Z o and E sin c is the increase of Young’s
modulus per unit of depth. For the full scale
Piles for offshore structures are typically 60– simulations, it was assumed that E so = 10
110m long and 1.8– 2.7m diameter. By MPa at the surface and a rate of increase E sin
contrast, monopiles for offshore wind c = 1 MPa/m. It was assumed that the pile
turbines are commonly 30–40m long and was installed in a normally consolidated sand
3.5–6m diameter. Degradation in the upper with K o = 0.42. It should be noted that
soil layers resulting from cyclic loading is interface elements were applied between the
less severe for offshore jacket piles which are soil and the pile in order to model the soil–
significantly restrained from pile head pile interaction. Along the pile the strength
rotation causing lower pile head deflections reduction factor of the interface (Rinter) is
[Subhamoy, 2013]. This pile head deflection set to 0.65 which is typical of sand steel
is more for offshore wind turbine due to interfaces.
higher lateral load, so there is necessity to
check the stability of monopile foundation,
for that numerical analysis monopile is carry
out.
METHODOLOGY
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
A three-dimensional (3D) finite element
model was established in order to analyse the
behaviour of monopile and finned pile. The
computations were carried out using the
finite element program system MIDAS GTS-
NX. The sand was assumed to be a linear
elastic perfectly plastic material. A non-
associated Mohr–Coulomb constitutive
model was assumed to govern the soil
behaviour for which the material parameters
are well established in geotechnical a) b)
engineering practice. An elasto-plastic Figure 1. a) Three dimensional view and
analysis under drained conditions was used b) Top view of Monopile
to model piles with the yield of the sand,
defined by the Mohr–Coulomb model, being The pile is shown in Fig. 1, were assumed to
the upper limit to the elastic behaviour of the be linear elastic mild steel material which has
sand. In the full scale analysis, the elastic soil typical properties of Young’s modulus, E p =
properties, corresponding to medium dense 200 GPa, Poisson’s ratio, ʋ p = 0.3, and unit
sand, were assumed to be: Poisson’s ratio ʋ s weight, γ p = 78 kN/m3. The yield of steel was
= 0.33, and dry unit weight γ s = 16.5 kN/m3. not considered in this study.
The Mohr–Coulomb model had an effective
friction angle ϕ’ = 35o, Dilatancy angle Ψ = NUMERICAL MODELLING
0o and effective cohesive strength c’= 0 kPa. The three-dimensional finite element
In order to account for the variation in soil program, MIDAS GTS-NX was chosen to
properties with depth, Young’s modulus was model the pile and the sand. The boundary is
assumed to increase linearly according to a cube with sides of 22.5 times the diameter
[Peng, 2010]: of the pile and a depth 2.5 times the pile
568
Three Dimensional Computer Simulation of Laterally Loaded Monopile Foundation for Offshore Wind
Turbine
length. The geometry of a three-dimensional shows a lateral displacement of monopile

model of a pile embedded in soil is shown in along X-axis.
Fig.2 b).
a) b)
Figure 2. Meshing of a) Monopile and b)
Sand block with monopile subjected to
lateral loading
The bottom boundary was fixed against
Figure 3. Displacement along loading
movements in all directions, whereas the
direction (For 50 MN load)
‘ground surface’ was free to move in all
directions. The vertical boundaries were
fixed against movements in the direction
normal to them.
Table 1. Properties of pile
Properties Monopile
Material Steel
Modulus of elasticity 200 GPa
Length 40m
Outer diameter 4m
Wall thickness 0.05m

Lateral load was applied in the range from
25MN to 100MN at the top portion of
monopile (in the direction of -ve x-axis) and
result was generated in the form of p-y curve,
where ‘y’ is the pile head displacement (% Figure 4. Stresses along loading
pile diameter). A non-linear analysis gives direction
the displacement and stresses on pile, Fig.3
569
Deshmukh and Sharma
(For 50 MN load) 1. Pile head displacement in the vertical

P- Y CURVE direction is more compared to pile head
displacement along loading direction
TOTAL DISPLACEMENT
TX (DISPLACEMENT ALONG LOADING) 2. Solid stresses in the vertical direction is
TY more compared to stresses along loading
TZ
120 direction.
100 3. Maximum shear stresses is more than solid
stresses along loading direction and less than
LOADS 'P' (MN)
80
solid stresses in vertical direction.
60
Therefore it is necessary to minimise the pile
40 head displacement in vertical as well as
horizontal direction and shear stresses.
20
0 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
0 20 40 60 80
PILE HEAD DISPLACEMENT 'Y' (% PILE
The authors wish to thank Mr. Akash Sharma
DIA.) (MIDAS R & D Centre, Navi Mumbai) for
his help with the numerical simulations.
Figure 5. Load against pile head REFERENCES

displacement curve Bowles J E 2001 Foundation Analysis and
Design McGraw Hill Publication 623.
P- SS CURVE Draft of National Offshore Wind Energy
SS-XX SS-YY Policy- 2013 by Government of India,
SS-ZZ S.MAX. SHEAR Ministry of New and Renewable
120
Energy.
100 Faaij A Junginger M 2011 Cost reduction

prospects for the offshore wind energy
LOADS 'P' (MN)
80 sector Research Article

60 (http://www.researchgate.net/publicatio
n/46642000).
40
20
Peng J R Rouainia M Clarke B G 2010 Finite
element analysis of laterally loaded fin
0 piles Computers and Structures 88
0 200 400 600 800
1239–1247.
SOLID STRESSES ('SS' MN/M3)
Subhamoy B Domenico L David M W 2013
Dynamic soil–structure interaction of
Figure 6. Load against solid stresses monopile supported wind turbines in
curve cohesive soil Dynamics and Earthquake
Engineering 49 165–180.
CONCLUSIONS
The behaviour of monopile was carried out
using a 3D finite element analysis (MIDAS
GTS-NX) to generate the pile head p–y
curves and load against solid stresses (p-ss)
curve. This p-y and p-ss curve shows that,
570
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF SOIL STRUCTURE INTERACTION ON VERTICAL

IRREGULARITY IN FRAMED RC STRUCTURE
DHADSE G.1* and MOHOD M.2
1
Department of Civil Engineering, G.H. Raisoni College of Engineering and Management, Amravati,
India.
2
Department of Civil Engineering, Prof. Ram Meghe Institute of Technology and Research, Amravati,
India.
Abstract: The problems in rapid industrialization and urbanization are defined as

acute space for utilization as well as air ventilation, light, architecture view etc.
Setback buildings were proved to be satisfied for the above aspects, but the problem is
the behavior of structure in earthquake and interaction with soil. Irregular buildings
are characterized by staggered abrupt reductions in floor area along the height of the
building, with consequent drops in mass, strength and stiffness. Height-wise changes
in stiffness and mass render the dynamic characteristics of these buildings different
from the ‘regular’ building. Due to unsymmetrical nature of structure the uneven
loads act on the structure hence the behavior of soil is also different thus it is
important to study the interaction behavior for vertical irregularity. An attempt has
been made in this paper to understand the behaviour of irregular structures resting on
elastic soil mass, the models having different vertical irregularity such as Rh= 6/5,
Rh=3/8 and Rh=8/3 are taken into consideration. At first all the models were
analysed in E-Tabs software for non-interaction analysis to obtain shear forces
required for interaction analysis, and then in ANSYS 11.0 for soil structure interaction
effect, considering soil as elastic. Thus paper further describes the behavior of such
vertically irregular RC framed structure models for soil structure interaction effect. As
the models are loaded with gravity loads as well as with lateral seismic loads,
parameters such as story drift and horizontal displacement are compared. A
systematic study with supportive literatures depicts the importance of considering the
effect of soil structure interaction. Hence, it is apparent to consider the effect of soil
mass on irregular structures.
Keywords: Soil structure interaction; Vertical irregularity; Finite element
analysis; Story drift; Horizontal displacement
INTRODUCTION displacements nor the ground displacements,

are independent of each other [Sharma et al.,
Most of the civil engineering structures
2014]. The process in which the response of
involve some type of structural element with
the soil influences the displacement of the
direct contact with ground. When the
structure and the displacement of the
external forces, such as earthquake, act on
structure influences the response of the soil is
these systems, neither the structural
explained by the phenomenon Static soil-
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: gdhadse@yahoo.com 571

Dhadse and Mohod
structure interaction [Kumar et al.]. Soil Figure.1. and Figure. 2. The concrete is
structure interaction parameters such as having modulus of elastic as 22360 x 106
stresses and displacements in both structure N/m2 also Poisson’s ratio as 0.15 and unit
and support systems (Foundation + Soil mass weight for RCC is 25kN/m3.
in contact) are depends up on relative
stiffness of superstructure, foundation system
and supporting soil mass. Thus if relative
stiffness of superstructure is taken into
consideration then the structure with regular
shape is best choice but if irregular shaped
structure is considered then structural
stiffness decrease [Hosamani and Fernandes, Figure 1.Plan of Superstructure
2015]. So it is essential to study the effect of The different vertical irregularities like
irregularity for SSI analysis. Also structural Ra=25% or Rh= 6/5, Ra=50% or Rh=3/8 and
stiffness has influence on both vertical and Ra=75% or Rh=8/3are shown in Figure. 3.
horizontal irregularity. Thus in this paper
vertical irregularity like Ra=25% or Rh= 6/5,
Ra=50% or Rh=3/8 and Ra=75% or Rh=8/3
are taken into consideration. At first all the
models are analyses in E-Tabs software for
non-interaction analysis and after this same
models are analyses for soil structure Figure 2.Elevation of Superstructure
interaction effect considering soil as elastic
in Ansys 11.0. Thus paper further describes
the behavior of such vertically irregular RC
framed structure models for soil structure
interaction effect. As the models are loaded
with gravity loads as well as with lateral
seismic loads so the parameters under
comparative study are story drift and (a) (b) (c) (d)
horizontal displacement. As outer frames are Figure 3. (a). Soil and structure for
likely to be fail so analysis of only outer Rh= 10/10 (regular building) (b). Soil and
frames are displayed. structure for Rh= 6/5 (c). Soil and
structure for Rh= 3/8 (d). Soil and
METHODOLOGY structure for Rh= 8/3
MODELING OF STRUCTURE MODELING OF SOIL

Superstructure is 4 bays x 4 bays x 10 story Soil is model as linear elastic having
and each story is having height of 3.0m. The modulus of elastic 100 x 106 N/m2, poissons
structure is having column of uniform ratio 0.3 and unit weight as 20 kN/m3. The
dimensions as 450 mm x 450mm and beam extent of soil is taken as 30 m x 30 m x 30 m.
of uniform dimensions as 300 mm x 300 mm.
Isolated footing is taken into consideration FINITE ELEMENT MODELING
having dimensions 1800 mm x 1800mm x The FEM modeling is done in Ansys 11.0
800mm. The plan and elevation are shown in and 2D analysis is carried out on each frame.
572
Effect of Soil Structure Interaction on Vertical Irregularity in Framed RC Structure
Plane 82 element is used for discreatization drifts by Ansys for story no 1 to 9 is more
of frame, footing and soil mass. Whereas as compare to ETABS but for last story
contact between footing and soil are models the results are matching. Thus there is no
by TARGE169 and CONTA172. need for comparing NIA for other cases
so directly comparison between Ansys
ANALYSIS NIA and IAE are discussed in next
The gravity loading and lateral seismic points.
loading (for zone III) are calculated and 2. After considering the effect of SSI the
shown Table1. And two analyses are carried story drift increases drastically. The
out a. Non Interaction Analysis (NIA) and b. variation of about 3 mm is found without
Interaction Analysis considering soil mass as irregularity.
Elastic (IAE). 3. When irregularity is considered for Rh
6/5,3/8 and 8/3 it has been observed that
Table 1. Loading data
Rh=6/5 is worst case.
UDL Lateral Loads
Story on Also from Figure 6 (graph) it has been
Ra Ra 25 Ra 50 Ra 75
No beams 0% % % % observed that,
kN/m kN kN kN kN 1. In ETABS and ANSYS the results for
11 17.025 51.8 34.21 40.36 42.34 horizontal displacement for NIA
10 28.75 51.77 34.16 40.33 42.3 (Rh=10/10) is within 30 mm. So all the
9 28.75 51.49 33.63 40.02 42
8 28.75 50.7 32.19 39.16 41.19
cases are safe as per IS 1893 criteria that
7 28.75 49.16 29.35 37.48 39.94 displacement should not be more than
6 28.75 46.61 25.08 34.71 37.86 0.004 x height of structure i.e. = 126 mm.
5 28.75 42.81 23.01 30.56 34.76 2. But after considering effect of SSI the
4 28.75 37.49 20.12 19.81 30.43
horizontal displacement increases and
3 28.75 30.41 16.27 17.39 19.74
2 28.75 21.31 11.32 12.22 17.27 hence effect is most important.
1 18.63 9.96 5.14 5.75 8.02 3. Also IAE model Rh=10/10 shows
maximum horizontal displacement of
RESULT AND DISCUSSION about 130 mm which is more than
permissible so structure may get fail.
After applying all above mentioned loads the 4. After considering irregularity, the results
analysis is carried out on all models using E- for Rh= 6/5 case is worst.
Tabs for NIA and Ansys 11.0 for both NIA
and IAE and results for displacements are
displayed. The following Figure 4 shows the
results for Ansys. So Comparison is done
(story drift and horizontal displacement) for
E-Tabs NIA with ANSYS NIA analysis and
ANSYS NIA with ANSYS IAE and results
are displayed in the form of graphs.Thus
from Figure 5 (graph) it has been observed
that: (a) NIA Ansys (b) IAE Ansys
Displacements Displacements (Rh
1. NIA comparison for Rh 10/10 for =10/10)
ETABS and ANSYS shows that the story
573
Dhadse and Mohod
(c) IAE Ansys (d) IAE Ansys (e) IAE Ansys

Displacements (Rh= 6/5) Displacements (Rh= 3/8) Displacements Rh= 8/3)
Figure 4
Figure 5. Story Drift Comparison Graph Figure 6. Horizontal Displacement

Comparison Graph
CONCLUSION REFERENCES
1. After considering the effect of SSI the
Pavan Kumar M Naidu G T and Ashok
parameter like story drift and horizontal
Kumar T Effect of soil- structure
displacement increases. interaction on high rise R.C. regular
2. ETABS and ANSYS (NIA) show almost frame structure with irregular bays
same variation so for more accuracy subjected to seismic load IJRET:
ANSYS is best option. International
3. As Structural rigidity for Rh= 6/5 is least Puneet Sharma Ankit and Ismit Pal Singh
so the structure shows worst results for 2014 Soil Structure Interaction Effect on
an Asymmetrical R.C. building with
both story drift and horizontal
shear walls IOSR Journal of
displacement. Mechanical and Civil Engineering
4. Also as irregularity changes there is (IOSR-JMCE) e-ISSN: 2278-1684
drastic change in response of building so ISSN: 2320-334X 11(3) 45-56
at geometric discontinuity locations the Sachin Hosamani Fernandes R J 2015 Soil
structure may get fail hence SSI analysis structure interaction of R.C. framed
is must. irregular building with shear walls
International Research Journal of
Engineering and Technology (IRJET)
2(4)
574
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL MODELING OF REINFORCED COPPER SLAG

EMBANKMENT USING PLAXIS 3D
ATHULYA G. K., CHOUBEY M. and MANDAL J. N.
Civil engineering department, IIT Bombay, Powai, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: The numerical modeling of the embankment was constructed using copper
slag –soil mix (20% soil and 80% copper slag)on the soft sub soil. The behavior of the
embankment was analyzed using computational geomechanics tool finite element method
based software ‘Plaxis 3D’. Study of the different height embankment was carried out
using with and without geotextile and geocell of various tensile strength. The suitability
was determined based on the safety and displacement criteria.The result of this study
shows that copper slag-soil mixembankment is stable up to 3m height with the addition of
geotextile. Copper slag-soil mix embankment of 4 m height is stable with the addition of
geotextile and geocell.
Keywords: Numerical modeling; Copper slag; Plaxis 3D
INTRODUCTION FINITE ELEMENT MODEL

In India about one mega tonne copper slag is The embankment of width 8 meters with 2:1
generated every year.. This cause serious side slope was modeled using the finite
environmental problem. The effective element based software Plaxis 3D. The
utilization of waste material can minimize foundation soil was taken as 14m deep
this problem. Due to the scarcity of good consists of two types of soft clay. The water
naturalavailable material the use of industrial table was assumed to be 3m below the ground
waste product as construction material get surface, overburden pressure applied for
popular. In this study copper slag (waste highway embankment is 30kN/m2. The
product of copper industry) is used as a embankment was constructed on soft clay in
highway embankment filled material two lifts. Two lifts have equal height. The
constructed on soft soil. construction time for each lift is 30 days and
Using the finite element method, modeling of followed by consolidation period of 30
the interaction between soil and structure days.The test was performed at different
material can be done effectively.In this study height of embankment varies from 3m-5m.
finite element method based Plaxis 3D is used Analysis the stability of embankment with
as an analysing tool for numerical modeling and without geotextile of varying tensile
of the embankment. Pervious works in this strength ranges from 50kN/m to 1500
area carried out by Mandal and Joshi(1996), kN/m.The influence of geocell of tensile
Bergado and Teerawattanasuk (2008), strength of 500kN/m on the stability of
Rujikiatkamjorn et al. (2012), Kasim et al. reinforced soil was also studied.
(2013), Khan and Abbas, (2014),Wulandari
and Tjandra (2015). MATERIALS
________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: athulyagk361@gmail.com 575

Athulya et. al.
The properties of foundation soil and property of the geotextile and geocell are
embankment fill material are given in the given in the Table 2.
Table 1. Embankment fill is modeled using
the Mohr coulomb soil. The foundation soil RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
is modeled as soft soil. Analysis of the geotextile reinforced
Table 1: Properties of foundation soil and embankment was performed by determining
embankment fill material the factor of safety with sequentially modified
reinforcement until the target factor of safety
Subsoil Clay 1 Clay 2 Copper Unit is achieved. Generally, a value of 1.5 for the
properties slag-soil
mix factor of safety with respect to strength is
Type of Undrain Undraine Drained - acceptable for the design of stable slope.For
behavior ed A dA unreinforced embankment of 3m, 4m, 5m
ϒ unsat 16.6 16.6 23.3 kN/m3 height has a factor of safety of 1.31,1.20,1.07
ϒ sat 17.31 17.31 25 kN/m3 respectively, and for reinforced embankment
Kx 0.04752 0.04752 7.128 m/day shown in Table.3 The deformed mesh of
Ky 0.04752 0.04752 7.128 m/day embankments with and without
Lamda (λ) .05 .05 - kN/m2 reinforcements are show in Figure1.
Kappa (κ) .01 .01 - -
Elastic - - 3000 kN/m2
modulus
(E)
Poison’s - - .27 -
ratio
C 24 16 11 kN/m2
(a)
ф 1 1 38 Degre
e
ψ 0 0 0 Degre
e
Material Soft Soft Soil Mohr - -
model Soil Coulum
b
(b)
Table 2 : Properties of Geotextile and
Geocell
Parameter Name Geotextile Geocell Unit
Material Model Elastic Elastic -
model
Elastic EA 50-1500 500 kN/m
stiffness
Two types of reinforcing material were used
in this study one is geotextile and the other (c)
one is geocell. Geotextile was placed between Figure 1: Deformed mesh of a)
in two layers, one was in between the embankment of 4m height without
embankment and other layer in the middle of geotextile b) embankment of 4m height
the embankment. Geocell was placed in the with geotextile c) embankment of 4m
soft soil near to the ground .The material height with geotextile and geocell
576
Numerical Modeling of Reinforced Copper Slag Embankment Using Plaxis 3D
Table 3 : Factor of safety and displacement values of different height embankment with
varying geotextile property
Tensile strength of 3m height 4m height 5m height

Geotextile F.S S (m) F.S S (m) F.S S (m)
0 1.310 0.01612 1.201 0.02260 1.007 .03096
50 1.521 0.01564 1.331 0.02244 1.143 .03068
100 1.55 0.01520 1.333 0.02210 1.16 .03055
150 1.562 0.01501 1.339 0.02198 1.165 .03036
200 1.572 0.01485 1.341 0.02164 1.175 .03023
250 1.579 0.01463 1.349 0.02132 1.18 .03006
300 1.583 0.01422 1.353 0.02089 1.185 .02994
400 1.589 0.01404 1.361 0.02050 1.195 .02969
500 1.592 0.01390 1.372 0.01980 1.2 .02928
600 1.594 0.01368 1.380 0.01926 1.204 .02903
800 1.597 0.01344 1.384 0.01892 1.211 .02844
1000 1.597 0.01306 1.383 0.01814 1.215 .02806
1500 1.594 0.01283 1.383 0.01645 1.22 .02688
Geocell (500kN/m)+
- - 1.632 0.01217 1.401 .02158
geogrid (500 kN/m)
F.S = factor of safety S= vertical displacement
Total displacement diagrams of embankments reinforcement of tensile strength 200kN/m

with and without reinforcement are shown in and higher can be selected because it has a
Figure 2. From the results it was inferred that factor of safety of above 1.5. The 4m height
a factor of safety tends to increases and embankment is not stable with high tensile
displacement decreases with increase in strength geotextile so geocell is added into
tensile strength of geotextile. The variation of the model so the factor of safety is increased
factor of safety,and vertical displacement upto 1.602. Embankment of 5m height has a
according to tensile strength of geotextile is lesser factor of safety with the addition of
shown in the Figures.3 and 4 respectively. geogrid, with geocell and geogrid factor of
For 3m height embankment it is found that safety increased upto 1.401.
(a) (b) (c)

Figure 2: Total displacement diagram of a)4 m height embankment without geotextileb)
4m height embankment with geotextile c) 4m height embankment with geotextile and
geocell
________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: athulyagk361@gmail.com 577

Athulya et. al.
1.8 ground Geotextiles and Geomembranes

1.6
26(1)39-55.
Factor safety
embankment IRC: 113-2013 Guidelines for the design and

1.4 of 3 m height
construction of geosynthetic reinforced
1.2 embankment embankments on soft sub soil
of 4 m height
1 emabnkment Kasim F Marto A Othman B A Bakar I and
of 5 m height Othman M F 2013 Simulation of safe
0.8
0 1000 2000 height embankment on soft ground using
Tensile strength (kN/m) Plaxis APCBEE Procedia 5 152-156.
Khan S A and Abbas S M 2014 Numerical
Figure 3: Variation of factor safety with modelling of highway embankment by
tensile strength of geotextile different ground improvement
techniques
0.035
Embankmen Mandal J N and Joshi A A 1996 Design of
0.03 t of 5 m
Displacement (m)
0.025 height geosynthetic reinforced embankments

0.02 Emabnkmen on soft soil Geotextiles and
0.015 t of 4 m
0.01
Geomembranes 14(2) 137-145.
height
0.005 Embankmen Rujikiatkamjorn C Indraratna B and Bergado
0 t of 3 m
0 1000 2000 height
D T 2012 3D Numerical Modeling of
Tensile strength of geotextile (kN/m) Hexagonal Wire Mesh Reinforced
Embankment on Soft Bangkok Clay
In GeoCongress of the Art and Practice
Figure 4 : Variation of displacement with in Geotechnical Engineering 2263-
tensile strength of geotexile 2272).
CONCLUSION Wulandari P S and Tjandra D 2015 Analysis
of Geotextile Reinforced Road
The addition of geotextile and geocell Embankment Using PLAXIS 2D
increases the factor of safety and decreases Procedia Engineering125 358-362.
the settlement. Factor of safety increases
with increases in tensile strength of
geotextile reinforcement
Embankment with copper slag-soil mix is
stable up to a 3m height reinforced with
geotextile of tensile strength 200kN/m and
above. Embankment of 4m height is stable
with geotextile 200 kN/m and geocell of
tensile strength 500 kN/m.
REFERENCE
Bergado D.T and Teerawattanasuk C 2008
2D and 3D numerical simulations of
reinforced embankments on soft
578
ICCMS2016
EVALUATION OF SOIL DEFORMATION MODULUS

WAGH J. D.*, JOSHI P. H. and BAMBOLE A. N.
Structural Engineering Department, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Soil E value is one of the most important soil property used in design of
raft foundations. Numerous correlations are available in literature to determine soil E
values from field tests. These correlations give a wide range of soil E values and it is
not clear which correlation one should use for design. This is one of the main reasons
different practitioners arrive at different value of raft settlements and ground bearing
capacities. This study compares the calculated soil E values from various large scale
footing load tests with Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N values from adjacent
boreholes in order to develop a reliable correlation between the two. Additional
footing load tests reported in literature have also been incorporated and considered
while developing the correlation. Stress dependency of soil E value is also considered.
The correlation established has also been compared with numerous existing
established published correlations.
Keywords: Soil Deformation Modulus, SPT N value, Footing Load Test.
INTRODUCTION dependency of soil E value is recognized and

incorporated in determination of correlation.
The most important soil property utilized
either directly or indirectly in calculating soil FOOTING LOAD TEST
settlement is the soil E value. Performing
detailed soil-structure interaction analysis for The authors have been conducting large scale
raft design is pointless when the very basic footing load tests. A total of 26 footing load
input E value is itself in doubt. Presently tests were carried out on sand and rock
numerous correlations are available to across India. The test setup consisted of
calculate soil E value from field tests or SPT reaction beam, reaction anchors, hydraulic
test. The different correlations give a wide jack to apply load, load cell and deflection
range of soil E values for a single N value. sensors.
Different practitioners utilize different
correlations thus arriving at widely varying
settlement values and thus K values. It is
need of the day to arrive at a consensus
across the world for one standardized
common correlation for soil E value. Due to
lack of clarity on which correlation to use,
the authors have been conducting footing
load tests and pile load tests at several sites to
back calculate soil E value. This study
compares the calculated values from the load
tests with SPT N values from adjacent
boreholes in order to develop a reliable Figure 1 Footing load test setup
correlation between the two. The stress
____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: geocon6@hotmail.com 579

Wagh et al.
ANALYSIS soil E value and SPT N value for sand is

established below
Results from each footing load tests were
analysed and soil E value was back E = 200 N (lower bound)
calculated from elastic settlement formula: E = 370 N (best fit)
1  2 The correlation between these two
S  q0 B' mI s I f parameters was established as E = 250N. It
Es
was observed that the E value conform most
Where, closely to the correlations mentioned by
Japanese Standards (E = 260N).
q 0 = Footing Pressure
B’ = B/2 (Where B is the width of pressure
distribution)
μ = Poisson’s ratio = 0.3
E = Modulus of Elasticity
I s = Influence Factor
I f = Depth Factor
m = 4 for center of footing.
Only the initial portion of pressure vs.
settlement curve up to the sudden change in
slope of the curve was utilized for calculation
of soil E value. The change in slope indicates
Figure 2. Es vs SPT N value with lower
advent of shear failure in the underlying soil.
bound fit
Criticism of the elastic method centers on its
assumption that the soil stress-strain CONCLUSION
relationship is linear. Indeed, soils behave in
Results of footing load tests completed at
a highly non-linear manner, especially at
project sites across India were analyzed as
strain levels in excess of 0.1%. It is an
part of this research to develop correlations
approximation or an overall averaging
between soil/rock E value and field test (SPT
approach to model a non-linear behavior
N value or rock core recovery). Additionally,
using a linear model. Young’s modulus
results of 5 load tests conducted and
obtained from the initial linear part of the
published by FHWA were also analyzed.
stress-strain curve results in a higher value
than one from the nonlinear section of the 1. In all analyzed footing load tests, load
curve. Therefore, an accurate estimation of vs. settlement graph is observed to be a
settlements needs to take the correct section straight line up to a certain point beyond
of the stress-strain relationship into which the rate of settlement increases
consideration. rapidly.
2. The rapid increase in rate of settlement is
RESULTS probably due to advent of shear failure.
The soil E values were then plotted with Even the advent or beginning of shear
corresponding SPT N values obtained failure interpreted from the rapid
founding level to arrive at a correlation increase in rate of settlement is much
between soil E value and SPT N value. Based high (3 to 5 times higher) than the
on the initial approximate straight line allowable bearing capacity predicted by
portion of footing load tests, a correlation of typical general shear failure equation.
This raises questions on the very validity
580
Evaluation of Soil Deformation Modulus
of the shear failure equations. Similar Leonards G A and Frost J F 1988 Settlement
questions regarding validity were raised of shallow foundations on granular
in the study of 5 footing load tests soils. Journal of Geotechnical
conducted by FHWA with worldwide Engineering 114(7) 791-809.
participation in interpretation.
3. The lower bound curve is almost same as
the correlation provide Japanese design
standards (E = 260N). The above
equation is valid only up to allowable
bearing capacity.
REFERENCES
Haider M. Abdul Hussein Effects of Flexural
Rigidity and Soil modulus on the linear
static analysis of raft foundations.
Daniel Thangaraj and Ilamparuthi K
Interaction Analysis of Soil-Raft-Frame
– A Parametric Study
Daniel Thangaraj and Ilamparuthi K
Interaction Analysis of MAT
Foundation and Space Frame for the
Non Linear behaviour of Soil
Meyerhoff G G 1947 Settlement analysis of
building frames.
Wardle L J and Frazier R A 975 Methods for
raft foundation design including soil
structure interaction Perth Australia
Balls S C James S and Notch 1984 Computer
analysis and design of mat foundations.
R K Bhandari and A R K Rao 1977 concept
of rigidity on foundation analysis,.
Brahma P Mukherjee S 2010 A realistic way
to obtain equivalent Young’s modulus
of layered soil Indian geotechnical
conference Bombay India 305–308.
Anagnostopoulos A et al. 2003 Empirical
correlations of soil parameters based on
Cone Penetration Tests (CPT) for Greek
soils Geotechnical & Geological
Burland J B and Burbidge M C 1985
Settlement of foundations on sand and
gravel Proc., Institution of Civil
Engineers Part I 78(6) 1325-1381
581
ICCMS2016
SOLUTION OF STOCHASTIC HEAT CONDUCTION PROBLEM USING

GALERKIN BASED POLYNOMIAL CORRELATED FUNCTION
EXPANSION
CHAKRABORTY S.* and CHOWDHURY R.
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, Roorkee, India
Abstract: This paper presents a new variant of stochastic Galerkin approach for the
solution of stochastic heat conduction problem. The proposed approach, referred to
here as Galerkin based polynomial correlated function expansion (G-PCFE), utilizes
polynomial correlated function expansion (PCFE) to represent the unknown stochastic
response and Galerkin projection to decompose the stochastic differential equation
into a set of coupled differential equations. The coupled set of partial differential
equations obtained is solved using finite difference method and homotopy algorithm
(HA). A new weight matrix, to be used alongside HA, has also been proposed. The
proposed weight matrix is formulated based on the hierarchical orthogonality of the
component functions, and describes an additional condition to be satisfied by HA. The
proposed approach has been utilized for solving the stochastic heat conduction
problem. The conductivity parameter is considered to be a random and modelled as a
random process. Karhunen-Loeve expansion is utilized to discretize the random
process into number of random variables. Results obtained have been benchmarked
against Monte Carlo simulation results. It is observed that the proposed approach
outperforms the conventional stochastic Galerkin approach both in terms of accuracy
and efficiency.
Keywords: heat conduction; PCFE; stochastic Galerkin; random process.
INTRODUCTION unknown response in a hierarchical order of

component functions with higher order
The heat conduction problem is of great
component function expressing a higher
importance due to their wide range of
order co-operative effect. The component
industrial application, such as brake disc,
function of the PCFE is expressed by
annular fins etc. Hence, many theoretical
utilizing the generalised polynomial chaos
studies have been carried out to investigate
expansion (G-PCE). The resulting expression
the effect of thermal stress. However, most of
obtained is substituted into the governing
the studies conducted ignore the presence of
stochastic partial differential equation and
uncertainties in the system. In this paper, a
Galerkin projection is employed to
novel approach for the solution of the
decompose the stochastic partial differential
stochastic heat conduction problem has been
equation into a set of coupled partial
presented. The proposed approach, referred
differential equations, which are further
to here as Galerkin based polynomial
decomposed into a set of underdetermined
correlated function expansion expresses the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:csouvik41@gmail.com 582

Chakraborty and Chowdhury
linear set of equations by using the finite having spatial randomness (i.e., random
difference method and solved using a process) and characterised by its mean and
homotopy algorithm (HA). HA is a novel covariance function
regression tool for determining the unknown
α = 10, Cα ( x1 , x2 ) = exp ( − x1 − x2 ) ,
coefficients of an underdetermined system (2)
(i.e. number of unknown coefficients is more x1 , x2 ∈ [ −1,1]
than the number of equations). HA
The goal is to determine the function
determines the unknown coefficients by
minimizing the least squared error and u ( t , x, ω ) satisfying Eq. (1)
considering an additional condition defined
PROPOSED APPROACH
in terms of an objective function. In this
work, the hierarchical orthogonality of the = Let, i ( i1 , i2 , , iN ) ∈  N0 be a multi-index
component functions is considered to be that with i = i1 + i2 +  + iN , and let N ≥ 0 be an
additional criteria.
integer. Now considering x = ( x1 , x2 , , xN )
The proposed approach has been utilized for
solving the stochastic head conduction to be the random inputs, we express the
problem. The conductivity parameter has response of interest g ( x ) as a series having
been considered to be uncertain and finite number of terms as (Chakraborty &
modelled as a random field. Karhunen-Loeve Chowdhury, 2014, 2015b)
expansion is utilized to discretize the random N
field into random variables. A convergence g ( x ) = ∑ gi ( xi ) (3)
i =0
study is performed to determine the optimal
number of random variables required. Once Definition 1: The univariate terms in
the optimal number of random variables is Equation (3) are termed as first order
determined, the proposed approach is utilized component functions. Similarly, the bivariate
to determine the mean and standard deviation terms, denoting cooperative effect of two
of the heat at different time instances. Results terms acting together, are termed as second
obtained have been validated against MCS order component function.
solution. It is found that the proposed
approach yields accurate and efficient results. Assume two subspaces R and B in Hilbert
space are spanned by basis 1 2

{r , r , , rl } and
PROBLEM SETUP
In this paper, the transient heat conduction {b1 , b2 , , bm } respectively. Now if (i)
⊥
problem in one spatial direction is B ⊃ R and (ii) B= R ⊕ R where, R ⊥ is the
considered:
orthogonal complement subspace of R in B ,
= ut ( t , x, ω ) (α ( x, ω ) u x ( t , x, w ) ) x + 1 we term B as extended basis and R as non-
x ∈ [ −1,1] , t ∈ [ 0, T ] , ω ∈ Ω extended basis [Chakraborty & Chowdhury,
(1) 2014; Li & Rabitz, 2012]. Now if ψ
u ( t , −1, ω
= ) u ( t ,1, ω=) 0 represents some basis of x , Equation (3) can
u ( 0, x, ω ) = 0 be rewritten as [Chakraborty & Chowdhury,
2015a]:
Here ( • )t and ( • ) x indicates derivative with
respect to t and x respectively. The
conductivity parameter α is assumed to be
583
Solution of Stochastic Heat Conduction Problem Using Galerkin Based PCFE
where P and Q are functions of A , B , C ,

N  N − k +1 k  ∞ ∞ 1 and 2 . Similarly, R is function of D .
 N
) 0 ∑ ∑
g ( x= g +  ∑i =∑ ∑ ∑ Finally, Eq. (8), for a particular time step is
=  1
k 1 =i 1 =ik k −1 r 1 =
m1 1 =
m2 1
(4) written as:
∞  
∑ α m(i mi i m)i ψ mi ψ mi  
12 k r 1 r
Pα n+1 = S (9)
 
1 2 r 1 r
mr =1
where
Where g 0 is constant and termed as zeroth =S Qα n + R (10)
order component function. Noting that most Remark 1: Since, extended basis is used to
real-life problems exhibit only lower order formulate PCFE, matrix P contains identical
cooperative effect, the higher order rows. This rows are redundants and should
component functions can be truncated. be removed.
Considering up to M th order component
Removing the identical rows, Eq. (9) reduces
function and s th order basis yields
to:
P ' α n+1 = S ' (11)
 N − k +1
) g0 + ∑  ∑  ∑ ∑  ∑ ∑ 
M N k s s
gˆ ( x= Where P ' and S ' are P and S after
=k 1
 =i1 1 =ik ik −1=r 1 =m1 1 =
m2 1
(5) removing the redundants. Eq. (11) represents
s   a set of underdetermined equations. In this
∑ α m(i11mi2  
ik )ir
m ψ i1
m ψ ir
m r 
 work Eq. (11) is solved by employing
 
2 r 1
mr =1
homotopy algorithm. For further details on
In this work, Equation (5) has been utilized homotopy algorithm, interested readers may
to represent the unknown response u ( t , x, ω ) . refer [Chakraborty & Chowdhury, 2015c; Li
M  N − k +1 k  s
& Rabitz, 2010; Li, Rey-de-Castro, & Rabitz,
 N s
) 0 ∑  ∑ ∑ ∑ ∑ ∑ 
uˆ ( t , x, ω= u +  2012].
=k 1
 =i1 1 =ik ik −1=r 1 =
m1 1 =
m2 1
 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

(ω ) 
s
∑α ( i1i2 ik )ir

m1m2 mr ( t , x )ψ (ω )ψ
i1
m1
ir
mr
The proposed approach has been utilized to
mr =1  
solve the problem described in Section 2.
(6) Fig. 1 shows the mean and standard deviation
of u ( t = 1) with x obtained using G-PCFE
Substituting Equation (6) into Equation (1)
and performing Galerkin projection with and MCS. It is observed that the results
respect to the basis function, one obtains: obtained using G-PCFE is in excellent
agreement with MCS results. Moreover, the
Aα t = Bα xx + Cα x + D (7) number of simulation required using G-PCFE
Utilizing Crank-Nicolson scheme for is significantly less as compared to MCS.
discretizing Eq. (7) in time and finite Table 1 reports the error obtained using
difference operators 1 and 2 , corresponding conventional stochastic Galerkin approach
to ( • ) x and ( • ) xx , Eq. (7) can be represented and G-PCFE based stochastic Galerkin
approach. It is observed that for both mean
as: and standard deviation, G-PCFE outperforms
n +1
Pα= Qα n + R (8) the conventional stochastic Galerkin
approach.
584
Chakraborty and Chowdhury
CONCLUSION expansion to represent the unknown

response. Galerkin projection is utilized to
In this paper, a novel stochastic Galerkin
decompose the stochastic partial differential
approach, referred to as Galerkin based
equation into a set of coupled partial
polynomial correlated function expansion
differential equation. A one dimensional
(G-PCFE), for solving the stochastic heat
stochastic heat conduction equation is solved
conduction problem has been presented. G-
using the proposed approach.
PCFE utilizes polynomial correlated function
Figure 1. Variation of u ( t = 1) with x

Table 1: ∞ error norm for G-PCFE and conventional stochastic Galerkin approach.
Results obtained using MCS is considered to be benchmark solution.
G-PCFE Stochastic Galerkin
Mean u 9.0328 ×10−6 2.1836 ×10−5
Standard deviation of u 1.4789 ×10−5 3.5645 ×10−5
Mathematical Modelling 39(23-24)
REFERENCES
7155–7180.
Chakraborty S & Chowdhury R 2014. Li G & Rabitz H 2010 D-MORPH
Polynomial Correlated Function regression: application to modeling with
Expansion for Nonlinear Stochastic unknown parameters more than
Dynamic Analysis Journal of observation data Journal of
Engineering Mechanics 141(3) 1–11. Mathematical Chemistry 48(4) 1010–
Chakraborty S & Chowdhury R 2015(a) A 1035.
semi-analytical framework for structural Li G & Rabitz H 2012 General formulation
reliability analysis Computer Methods of HDMR component functions with
in Applied Mechanics and Engineering, independent and correlated variables.
289(1) 475–497. Journal of Mathematical Chemistry
Chakraborty S & Chowdhury R 2015(b) 50(1) 99–130.
Assessment of polynomial correlated Li G Rey-de-Castro R & Rabitz H 2012 D-
function expansion for high-fidelity MORPH regression for modeling with
structural reliability analysis Structural fewer unknown parameters than
Safety 59(Accepted) 9–19. observation data Journal of
Chakraborty S & Chowdhury R 2015(c). Mathematical Chemistry 50(7) 1747–
Multivariate function approximations 1764.
using D-MORPH algorithm Applied
585
ICCMS2016
DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS:

A PARAMETRIC STUDY
JAYARAMAN S.*, TRIKHA M., SOMASHEKAR V. N., KAMESH D., VENKATESH K. and
RAVINDRA M.
Quality Assurance Group, ISRO Satellite Centre, Old Airport Road, Bengaluru, India
Abstract: A spacecraft consists of a number of electronic packages to meet the

functional requirements. An electronic package is generally an assembly of printed
circuit boards placed in a mechanical housing. A number of electronic components are
mounted on the printed circuit board (PCB). A spacecraft experiences various types of
loads during its launch such as vibration, acoustic and shock loads. Prediction of
response for printed circuit boards due to vibration loads is important for mechanical
design and reliability of electronic packages. The modeling and analysis of printed
circuit boards is required for accurate prediction of response due to vibration loads.
The response of PCB is highly dependent on the mounting configuration of PCB. In
addition, anti-vibration mounts or stiffeners are used to reduce the PCB response.
Vibration analysis of printed circuit boards is carried out using finite element method.
The objective of this paper is to study the effect of different parameters such as PCB
thickness and boundary conditions on the dynamic characteristics of a printed circuit
board. The effect of components mounted on the PCB is also considered in the
analysis. The analysis results are validated using vibration tests of PCB.
Keywords: Printed Circuit Board (PCB); Vibration Analysis; Spacecraft; Stiffeners
INTRODUCTION Failure (POF) approach. The first stage of

this approach is defined as the response
A spacecraft experiences various types of
prediction stage. In this stage, vibration
loads during its launch such as vibration,
response of the board is calculated through a
acoustic and shock loads. The electronic
finite element (FE) model of the PCB
packages are designed to withstand the
component system. The second stage relates
launch vibration environment. Electronics
this calculated response to some pre-
packages are subjected to vibration testing to
determined component failure criteria, to
establish adequate margins. Package
show whether the attached components can
component failures due to vibration loads
withstand this curvature or acceleration.
have been observed in the past. The four
basic failure modes of components mounted Simple one and two degree of freedom
on PCB due to random vibration systems are used to approximate the
environment are the results of the following electronic systems. Finite element models
conditions: high acceleration levels, high can be either simplified or detailed. Detailed
stress levels and large displacement finite element models are built by modeling
amplitudes [Steinberg 2000]. the PCB and the components. However, this
approach is rarely used as it is time
It is possible to predict the probability of
consuming and expensive. Instead, simplified
mechanical failure by a two stage Physics of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sjayaram@isac.gov.in 586

Jayaraman et al.
models of PCB are created where the MSC.NASTRAN as solver for bare PCB and
components geometry is neglected. The PCB with components. Finite Element model
component effects are included by increasing consists of 16272 quadrilateral shell elements
the Young's modulus and density of the PCB with appropriate thickness and 10 rigid
FE model, so it effectively behaves as if elements to simulate fixed boundary
components were present. Sensitivity condition. Details of the PCB are
analysis of PCB finite element models was summarized in Table 1. Fixed /clamped
carried out by Amy et al. (2009). They boundary conditions are applied at nine
determined the factors of safety by using locations (PCB mounting locations) by
different simplification methods of modeling arresting six degrees of freedom for the
the PCB. nodes on the boundary of holes in PCB as
shown in Figure 1.
Dynamic responses such as accelerations,
strains are to be closely monitored and Table 1. Material Properties
controlled to achieve test results which are Parameter Value
consistent and predict the structural behavior
in reality [Jing-en Luan 2007]. In order to PCB size 250×200×2.1 mm
design electronic packaging systems for Mass of Bare PCB 208.4 gm
safety and standards criterion, the accurate Mass of PCB with 380 gm
modeling of components influence on the components (=208.4+171.6)
multi-layered PCB becomes critical and Young’s modulus of
complex due to various reasons. Numerical Bare PCB 20 GPa
model using finite elements developed to
simulate the mechanical behavior of PCB Young’s modulus of
and physical tests were conducted to validate PCB with 34 GPa
the impact performance [Yuqi Wang 2006]. components
Poisson’s ratio 0.12
In this paper, vibration analysis of a typical
PCB used for space applications is carried Boundary Condition Fixed/clamped
out. The dynamic characteristics of a PCB
are determined using FEM and
experimentally. The dynamic characteristics
include natural frequencies, mode shapes and
frequency response functions (FRF). The
analysis is done for two cases: a bare PCB
(PCB without components) and PCB with
components. The analysis results are
validated by vibration tests on PCB.
Parametric study is carried out to determine
the effect of different parameters such as Figure 1: FE Model
PCB thickness and boundary conditions on
the dynamic characteristics of the PCB. Normal mode analyses were conducted on
FE model to extract first two fundamental
FE SIMULATION MODEL natural frequencies for bare PCB as well as
PCB with components. The calculated first
In this study, a six-layer PCB used for space three natural frequencies are 322.7 Hz, 360.1
applications is considered. The PCB is Hz, 377.1 Hz and 240.3 Hz, 268.2 Hz, 280.8
modelled as isotropic plate with equivalent Hz for bare PCB and component PCB
material properties such as Young’s modulus, respectively. Mode shapes corresponding to
Poisson’s ratio and mass density. FEA these frequencies are given in Figure 2 to
simulations of PCB dynamics are made using Figure 5.
HYPERMESH V11.0 as pre-processor and
587
Dynamic Characteristics of Printed Circuit Boards: A Parametric Study
Figure 2. Mode shape of bare PCB for

first frequency Figure 6. FRF plot
EXPERIMENTAL TEST SET UP

The bare PCB mounted on the vibration table
is shown in Figure 7 and the component PCB
is shown in Figure 8. Accelerometers are
mounted at various locations of the PCB to
measure the responses. The FRFs obtained
using an electro-dynamic shaker by
conducting a sine sweep test. The ratio of
Figure 3. Mode shape of bare PCB for
output to input acceleration gives the FRF at
second frequency
that location. The experimental frequency
response plot for bare PCB is shown in
Figure 9.
Figure 4. Mode shape of PCB with

components for first frequency
Figure 7. Bare PCB on Vibration Table
Figure 5. Mode shape of PCB with

components for second frequency
The same FE model was used to perform the
frequency response analysis by subjecting it
to sine vibration base excitation of 1g from 5
Hz to 2000 Hz. In this study, a structural
damping coefficient of 2% is incorporated in Figure 8. Component PCB on
the model. The FRFs at a specific location of Vibration table
the PCB are plotted in Figure 6. These values
are then compared with test data obtained RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
from vibration tests.
Simulation and test results for fundamental
frequencies of the bare PCB are compared in
Table 3 and for component PCB are
588
Jayaraman et al.
compared in Table 4. The simulation and test different parameters such as PCB thickness
results of bare PCB and that of PCB with and boundary conditions on the dynamic
components are matching well within the characteristics of a PCB. The work can be
acceptable limits. The FRFs for the third extended for random vibration and shock
natural frequency for two cases are compared analysis of the PCB.
in Table 5. Effect of thickness of PCB is
summarized in Table 6. REFERENCES
Amy R A 2009 Sensitivity analysis of
Table 3. Comparison of Fundamental
Frequencies for Bare PCB simplified Printed Circuit Board finite
element models. Microelectronics
Frequency Simulation Test % Reliability 49 791-799.
(Hz) Results Results Difference
1 322.7 311 -3.76 Jing-en Luan 2007 Dynamic responses and
2 360.1 351 -2.53 solder joint reliability under board level
3 377.1 379 0.5 drop test. Microelectronics Reliability
47 450-460.
Table 4. Comparison of Fundamental
Frequencies for component PCB Steinberg D S 2000 Vibration Analysis for
Electronic Equipment. 3rd ed. New
Frequency Simulation Test %
(Hz) Results Results Difference York: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
1 240.3 236.0 -1.79 Yuqi Wang and K H 2006 Modelling and
2 268.2 255.0 -4.92 simulation for a drop-impact analysis of
3 280.8 285.0 1.50 multi-layered printed circuit boards.
Microelectronics Reliability 46 558-
Table 5. Comparison of FRFs
for third natural frequency 573.
Simulation Test % APPENDIX: VIBRATION TEST

Case
Results Results Difference PLOT
Case1 18.3 19.3 -5.46
Case2 20.6 22.4 -8.74
Table 6. Variation of natural frequencies

(Hz) for different thicknesses of PCB
1.6mm 1.7mm 1.8mm 1.9mm
221.4 248.4 275.3 301.9
246.6 276.9 307.1 337.1
258.2 290.0 321.5 352.9
Figure 9. Frequency Response plot for
CONCLUSIONS bare PCB (case1)
An equivalent FE simulation model for a
standard PCB with components has been
established based on vibration test results
corresponding to fixed boundary conditions.
Simulation and test results for fundamental
frequencies of the PCB are matching well
within the acceptable limits. The parametric
studies carried out to understand the effect of
589
ICCMS2016
COMPARISON OF FLOW AND HEAT TRANSFER CHARACTERISTICS

IN TRIANGULAR AND SINUSOIDAL SHAPED WAVY CHANNELS
HARIKRISHNAN S. and TIWARI S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Madras, Chennai, India
Abstract: Present study deals with two-dimensional numerical investigations on flow

and heat transfer characteristics for confined flow in triangular and sinusoidal wavy
channels. Computations have been carried out for different Reynolds number (Re) in
the range 400 to 1000. The channel walls are assumed to be at constant temperature
and higher than the inlet fluid temperature. For both triangular and sinusoidal
geometries of wavy channel walls, the ratio of mean separation ( H avg ) and amplitude
of waviness ( a ) as well as of the ratio of module length ( L ) and amplitude ( a ) can
be varied. Detailed results pertaining to flow patterns and temperature contours for
various parameter combinations are presented and discussed.
Keywords: Two-dimensional numerical study; Triangular and sinusoidal wavy
channels; Streamline and temperature contours; Pressure drop.
INTRODUCTION sinusoidal shaped channel. They observed

that the flow repeats itself from one module
Extensive studies have been undertaken
to next while the heat transfer coefficient
during past two decades in the field of heat
attains its asymptotic value. Ramgadia et al.
transfer enhancement. Passive methods of
(2013) studied the effects of number of
heat transfer are preferred over active
streamwise periodic modules and Re on fluid
methods which require external power.
flow and heat transfer in wavy channel.
Enhancement is achieved by either breaking
Ramgadia et al. (2014) studied flow and heat
the boundary layer by periodic restarts or by
transfer characteristics of triangular and
generating transverse or longitudinal vortices
sinusoidal wavy channels at Re = 600. They
within the growing boundary layer. Changing
reported that the sinusoidal wall
wall geometry is one of the passive methods
configuration offers higher heat transfer
of heat transfer. Waviness in the wall
compared to triangular wall configuration.
geometry leads to generation of longitudinal
However, the pressure drop penalty of
and transverse vortices.
sinusoidal wall configuration is marginally
Goldstein et al. (1977) carried out higher as compared to that for the triangular
experimental investigations to study the flow wavy channel. The objective of present study
and heat transfer characteristics for laminar, is to compare the flow and heat transfer
transitional and low Reynolds number (Re) characteristics of confined flow through
turbulent flow through wavy walled triangular and sinusoidal wavy channels at
geometry. It was shown for the reported Re low Re.
that heat transfer gets enhanced in wavy
channels as compared that observed in plane PROBLEM STATEMENT
channels. Wang et al. (1995) studied two- Two geometric configurations have been
dimensional steady and unsteady fluid flow considered for the wavy channel, viz.
and heat transfer through a periodic
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: harikrishnansw@gmail.com; 590

Harikrishnan and Tiwari
triangular and sinusoidal, as shown in Figure. where ρ , µ , C p k are the density,

and
1. The sinusoidal profile is described by the dynamic viscosity, specific heat capacity and
function y = a sin 2 (π x / L) . The parameters thermal conductivity of the working fluid
influencing the behaviour of flow and heat respectively.
transfer through the channel are Re, the ratio
Boundary Conditions:
of module length ( L ) and amplitude ( a ), and
the ratio of average module width ( H avg ) to The boundary conditions imposed at inlet,
outlet, top and bottom wall are as follows.
amplitude. Here H avg is defined as the mean
Inlet: Uniform velocity, i.e.
value of maximum width (H max ) and =
u U ∞= , v 0,=w 0,= T T∞
minimum width (H min ) between channel
walls. Inlet velocity profile is uniform while Outlet: Pressure outlet ( p = p∞ )
the top and bottom walls are maintained at Top and bottom walls:
constant temperature that is higher than the No-slip and isothermal boundary conditions,
inlet fluid temperature. For each geometrical i.e. u= v= w= 0, T= Tw .
configuration, six modules of waviness have
been are considered (Figure. 1). NUMERICAL TECHNIQUE
Grid Independence Study
Non-uniform structured mesh has been
generated by using commercial software
ANSYS ICEM 14.0. Grid independence
(a) study is performed in order to assess the
accuracy of the results. Simulations are
carried out for triangular wavy channel with
H avg / a and L / a ratios equal to 2.5 and 2.5
respectively.
Table 1 gives the summary of grid
(b)
independence test for triangular wavy
Figure 1. Geometry of (a) triangular and
channel at Re 400. Nusselt number (Nu) and
(b) sinusoidal wavy channel.
friction factor of fourth module are
GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND calculated for each grid size. The value of
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Nusselt number (Nu) changes by 0.81%
Governing Equations while friction factor ( f ) changes by 0.44%
from Grid 2 to Grid 3 which is lower than
The governing equations for the two-
4.03% and 3.23% from Grid 1 to Grid 2.
dimensional, steady, laminar, incompressible
Hence all the computation have been
flow and heat transfer with constant thermo
performed by considering Grid 2.
physical properties and negligible dissipation
effect can be expressed in Cartesian Table 1. Grid independence performed
coordinate system in tensor form as follows: for triangular wavy channel at Re = 400.
Continuity equation: Grid Grid size Nusselt Friction

∇ ⋅V = 0 (1) Number (nodes) number Factor
Momentum equations: (Nu) (f)
   1 9000 5.21 0.1563
ρ (V ⋅∇)V = −∇P + µ∇ 2V (2)
Energy equation: 2 10500 5.01 0.1556

ρ C p (V ⋅∇)T = k ∇ 2T (3) 3 12000 4.97 0.1606
591
Comparison of flow and Heat Transfer Characteristics in Triangular and Sinusoidal shaped Wavy
Channels
NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY Although different parametric runs were

made, only representative results are
Present computations have been carried out presented in this work. Figure.3 shows the
using finite volume based commercial streamlines of fourth module for both
software ANSYS Fluent 14.0. SIMPLE triangular and sinusoidal shaped
(Semi Implicit Method for Pressure Linked configurations. A close examination of
Equations) algorithm is used for solving Figure.3 discloses that the center of the
governing equations. Second order upwind recirculation is shifted slightly to the right,
schemes is used for discretizing the close to the next module in both cases. The
convective terms. Convergence criterion for recirculation flow covers the whole concave
solution of mass, momentum and energy area in triangular as well as sinusoidal wavy
equations has been set at 10-6. geometry.
Bahaidarah et al. (2005) studied numerically Table 2. Comparison of Nu in modules
the two-dimensional steady fluid flow and with Bahaidarah et al. at Re = 400.
heat transfer through a sinusoidal shaped
Module Bahaidarah Present
channel. For validation of computations at Re
Number et al. (2005)
= 400, the geometric parameters chosen were
H min /H max = 0.3 and L/a = 8. Velocity profile 2 5.77 5.23
at the centre of 4th module from present 3 5.77 5.14
computations has been compared against 4 5.77 5.13
their results as shown in Figure. 2.
5 5.77 5.14
Figure 3. Streamlines for triangular and

sinusoidal configurations of wavy
Figure 2. Velocity profile comparison with
Bahaidarah et al. (2005) at Re = 400. channel for fourth module at Re = 400.
Table 2 presents a comparison of Nusselt Figure.4 shows the comparison of friction

number (Nu) values from present factor for the modules except first and last.
computations with the values reported by First and last modules are not considered
Bahaidarah et al. (2005). The surface- because of the entrance and exit effect.
averaged values for second, third, fourth and Figure.4 shows that sinusoidal wavy channel
fifth modules show a good agreement. modules shows lower friction factor
compared to triangular wavy channel
SAMPLE RESULTS modules.
Flow Field
592
Harikrishnan and Tiwari
sinusoidal shaped wavy channels as

compared to triangular shaped wavy channel.
CONCLUSIONS
Flow and heat transfer characteristics of
triangular and sinusoidal shaped wavy
channels have been studied for same
geometric parameters and Re. The sinusoidal
geometry of wavy channel is associated with
higher heat transfer and lower value of
friction factor as compared to triangular
geometry. The smoothness of wall geometry
Figure 4. Module wise comparison of affects the size and strength of the
friction factor for triangular and sinusoidal recirculation region and behaviour of heat
shaped wavy channels at Re = 400. transfer. Consequently, the effect of
recirculation with surface curvature needs to
Heat Transfer be examined thoroughly to understand the
Figure.5 shows a comparison of temperature physics of the flow in wavy channels.
contours for triangular and sinusoidal wavy
channels at Re = 400. REFERENCES
Bahaidarah H M S and Anand N K 2005
Numerical study of heat and momentum
transfer in channels with wavy walls
Numerical Heat Transfer Part A 47
417-439
Goldstein J L and Sparrow E M 1977 Heat
and mass transfer characteristics for
flow in corrugated wall channel ASME
Journal of Heat Transfer 99 187-195
Ramgadia A G and Saha A K 2013
Numerical study of fully developed
Figure 5. Temperature contour for flow and heat transfer in wavy passage
triangular and sinusoidal configurations International Journal of Thermal
of wavy channel for Re = 400. Sciences 67 152-166
Ramgadia A G and Saha A K 2014
Characteristics of fully developed flow
and heat transfer in channels with
varying wall geometry ASME Journal
of Heat Transfer 136 021703-1 -
021703-15
Wang G and Vanka S P 1995 Convective
heat transfer in wavy Passage
Numerical Heat Transfer Part A
Transfer 38 3219-3230
Figure 6. Comparison of Nu at Re = 400.

Figure 6 shows that Nu for intermediate
modules (all four) is higher in case of
593
ICCMS2016
THERMAL BEHAVIOUR ANALYSIS OF MIRROR V-THROUGH FLAT

PLATE SOLAR WATER COLLECTOR: AN EXPERIMENTAL AND
CFDBASED STUDY
JANGID A. K.1, SHARMA N. K.2, JAIN S. K.3, DADHICH M.4, SHARMA V.5, and AGARWAL D.6
1,2
Poornima College of Engineering, Jaipur, Rajasthan India.
3
4
Apex Institute of Engineering and Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan, India.
5
Grob Design Pvt. Ltd, Jaipur, Rajasthan , India.
6
FET Agra College, Agra, UP, India.
Abstract: This Research presents the results of an experimental and computation

Fluid Dynamic (CFD) study of thermal behaviour of a particular V-through solar flat
plate collector. In the closed loop solar water heater, consist of copper tubes for
indirect heating of water fluid, Piping system provided for recirculation the water into
copper tubing and SWE walls covered with 40 mm thermocol insulating material. The
total area of the V-through solar flat plate collector system is about 1 m2 and vertical
height, width and length of SWE are 100mm, 650mm, 1000mm respectively. In this
study, solar water heater body can be divided into four sections, each section
consisted of 2 tubes with 0.8 m long, 1.5 inch diameter and tubes are attached
together. The study about effect of tilt angle and dust particles on V-through solar flat
plate collector. The results indicated that increases tilt angle up to 45 degree thermal
efficiency also increases and when dust particles increases thermal efficiency
decreases.
Keywords: SWE; Thermal efficiency; V-through solar flat collector.
INTRODUCTION analysis is done on basis of setting angle,

The solar thermal energy is having the least medium flow and air inlet mode on solar air
environment impact level and easy to collector and results indicate that setting
available for human being without any angle has no influence on the thermal
requirement of transportation. The Solar efficiency, while medium flow has a positive
water collector is related to simplicity, relation with it [Hemant Kumar et al. 2015].
technological feasibility, economical and A mathematical model, the implementations
commercial viability in the world so that and the validations of numerical simulation
researches are being carried out to increase for three experimental prototypes of solar air
the thermal performance of solar water collector is purposed to enhance the
collector. A V through mirror flat plate solar efficiency and results the mathematical
water collector is purposed for the models and numerical implementations are
enhancement in thermal performance as able to estimate the air temperature inside of
compare to other solar water collector. An the collector [Ferenc et al. 2016]. The
efficiency of solar collector is limited due to
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:arunrajoria111@gmail.com 594

Jangid et al.
the surface losses due to absorption capacity 𝑝 = ℎ𝜌𝑔

of surface and the poor thermal properties of Where h is the height of tank from inlet port,
fluid flowing. It can be enhancing up to 10% ρ is the density of fluid in kg/m3, g is the
by using Al 2 O 3 –H 2 O nanofluid [Bingqing et gravitational accerlation in m/sec2.
al. 2015]. The multiphase flow of fluid
increases the heat transfer rate and efficiency
up to 40-80% of solar energy collector
[Villanueva et al. 2014]. The dust deposition
surface decreases the predicted thermal
efficiency, and the optical efficiency of the
SWC with severe dust deposition surface is
decreased up to 10%in contrast with the case
of clean cover surface [Marco Riccia et al.
2015].
SIMULATION MODEL OR
EXPERIMENTAL SETUP
An innovative model of v-through mirrors
and tubes type solar water collector is tested.
The V-shaped mirrors with higher reflective
coefficient are used to increase the heat Figure1: Simulation Model or
inside the setup. The copper tubes are Experimental Setup
indirectly heated by solar energy due to the The total solar thermal energy gain can be
reflection of solar radiation through mirrors. calculated by total heat gained by water due
The copper tubing and SWE walls covered to temperature difference at inlet and outlet;
with 40 mm thermocol insulating material. it can be evaluated as
Direct and diffused solar radiation heats up Q c = m . Cp( To – Ti )
the outside surface of the tubes and the solar Where m. is the mass flow rate kg/s, Cp is the
radiation are absorbed by copper material of specific heat in J/(kg K), T o isoutlet
tube. The total area of the V-through solar temperature and T i is inlet temperature in K
flat plate collector system is about 1 m2 and of fluid
vertical height, width and length are 100mm, The thermal efficiency of v- through solar
650mm, 1000mm respectively. The solar water collector is evaluated by the ratio of
water heater body is divided into four heat gained by water to the total solar
sections, each section consisted of 2 tubes radiation that is
with 0.8 m long, 1.5 inch diameter and tubes 𝑄𝑐
are attached together as shown in figure (1). 𝜂𝑐 =
𝑆. 𝐴𝐶
The study is performed at different angles in Where 𝜂𝑐 shows the total thermal efficiency,
v-shaped assembly of mirrors. A c total glass area of solar collector in m2, S
solar irradiance in W/m2.
DATA EVALUATION
The heat load calculation is taken from the
The inlet of water considered as pressure
temperature difference at water outlet and
inlet which is calculated from the height of
tank efficiency and tank capacity.
tank as shown in Figure 1.
595
Thermal Behaviour Analysis of Mirror V-Through Flat Plate Solar Water Collector: An Experimental
and CFD Based Study
𝐸𝑡 = 𝑇𝑐 . 𝐶𝑝 (𝑇𝑤𝑜 − 𝑇𝑡𝑤 ) 0 Exp, 25 Exp, 0 CFD, 25 CFD shows the

Where E t is the Heat in tank in Joule, T c is experimental and CFD observation at 0 and
tank capacity in litter, C p is the specific heat 25 degree tilt angle.
of water in J/kg.K and the T wo and T tw is the
outlet water temperature and actual water
temperature in take.
EXPERIMENTAL AND CFD

OBSERVATIONS
The commercial software Ansys Fluent is
used for the calculations of mass, momentum
and energy equations for the solar water Figure 3: Variation in temperature with
collector at atmospheric conditions. The time
whole domain of solar water collector The heat load in solar water collector is
simulation model is discredited into calculated for both of the cases of tilt angles
250000-300000 numbers of elements and at 0o and 25o. The maximum level of heat is
150000-175000 numbers of nodes with the generated at the tilt angle 25o about 2000KJ
size 2mm of each element with having 100 and for the tilt angle 0o would be about
relevance at high centre. In the present study, 1400KJ as shown in figure 3 .The variation
the inlet of water is described as the pressure in heat load takes place according to sun
inlet at the bottom port ( due to the thermo radiation level.
siphon effect) observed by the height of take
and the outlet of water is simply considered
as pressure outlet at atmospheric conditions
at 300K. The glass plates are considered as
semi-transparent with high reflectivity. The
heat load and efficiency is observed, the
comparative experimental and CFD analysis
is done for the different tilt angle of 0o and
25o.
Figure 4: Variation in heat load in SWC
with time
The efficiency of solar water collector is
calculated for the both of the tilt angle cases
and it varies in the range of 10-60%
according to sun radiation level on collector.
Figure 2: Vari ation in temperature with

time
The maximum level of temperature is found
at midday and varies accordingly sun
radiation level as shown in figure 2.The
Figure 3 shows the variation in direct,
Diffuse and global level of radiation. Where
596
Jangid et al.
direct absorption solar collector Case

Studies in Thermal Engineering 5 70–
78.
Jie Deng Xudong Yang Ming Yang Zhifeng
Wang 2015 Experimental study of a
single-pass flat plate solar air collector
with severe dust deposition on the
transparent glass cover Energy Procedia
70 32 – 40.
Figure 5: Variation in efficiency with time Marco Riccia Enrico Bocci Emanuele
Michelangeli Andrea Micangeli Mauro
The figure 5 shows the comparative analysis Villarini Vincenzo Naso 2015
experimental and CFD observation for both Experimental Tests of Solar Collectors
of the tilt angles. Prototypes Systems Energy Procedia 82
744 – 751.
CONCLUSION Matteo Dongellini StefaniaFalcioni Gian
The experimental and CFD observations are Luca Morini 2015 Dynamic simulation
taken for heat load and efficiency at different of solar thermal collectors for domestic
hot water production Energy Procedia
tilt angles for the solar water collector.
82 630 – 636.
- The heat load in SWC at tilt angle 25o is
Turhan Koyuncua Fuat Lüle 2015 Thermal
found 20-40% maximum in whole day
Performance of a Domestic Chromium
analysis as compare to 0o angle of tilt. Solar Water Collector with Phase
- The efficiency at 25o tilt angle is found in Change Material Procedia - Social and
the range of 30-60% at maximum level as Behavioural Sciences 195 2430 – 2442.
compare to 0o angle of tilt. Villanueva E Vega F Noh-Pat 2014
Validation of the simulation of solar air
REFERENCES collector prototypes Energy Procedia
Bingqing Luo Zhongting Hu Xiaoqiang 57 2295– 2304.
Hong Wei He 2015 Experimental study Wei Chang Yunfeng Wang Ming Li Xi Luo
of the water heating performance of a Yongbao Ruan Yongrui Hong Shaobo
novel tile shaped dual-function solar Zhang 2015The theoretical and
collector Energy Procedia 70 87–94. experimental research on thermal
Ferenc Gaspar Teodora Deac Lucian V performance of solar air collector with
Fechete Tutunaru Dan Moldovanu finned absorber Energy Procedia 70
2016Experimental study on the sun 13–22.
tracking ability of a spherical solar Weirong Zhang Kan Lin Ritsuko Yuasa
collector, Energy Procedia 85 220–227. Shinsuke Kato 2015 Experimental and
H U Helvaci Z A Khan 2015 Mathematical computational study for household
modeling and simulation of multiphase equipments system in a smart house
flow in a flat plate solar energy collector with solar collector Energy Procedia 78
Energy Conversion and Management 3428 – 3433.
106 139–150.
Hemant Kumar Gupta Ghanshyam Das
Agrawal Jyotirmay Mathur 2015
Investigations for effect of Al2O3–H2O
nano fluid flow rate on the efficiency of
597
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF LOCATION OF HEAT SOURCE AND RAYLEIGH

NUMBER ON NATURAL CONVECTION IN A SQUARE CAVITY USING
THERMAL LATTICE BOLTZMANN METHOD
PATIL M. Y., PATIL A. J. and SEWATKAR C. M.*
College of Engineering Pune, Shivajinagar, Pune, India
Abstract: Natural Convection in a square cavity with differential wall temperatures is

numerically studied under steady state condition using thermal lattice Boltzmann
method (TLBM).The top side of the cavity is insulated and the heat source is placed at
the bottom on one fourth of its length and the remaining is insulated. The left and
right side are kept at low temperature. Five different configurations for location of
heat source are studied. Lattice Boltzmann method uses a mesoscopic external force
term in the discretized LBM equation to consider the effect of buoyancy by using the
Boussinesq approximation. The macroscopic velocity and pressure field are simulated
using the density distribution function and temperature field is simulated using
temperature distribution function. The variation in Nusselt number is reported as a
function of location of heat source and Rayleigh number (103-105). The phenomenon
governing the heat transfer is explored.
Keywords: Thermal Lattice Boltzmann Method; Natural Convection; Square
Cavity; Rayleigh Number
INTRODUCTION the benchmark results for natural convection

in the square cavity for Prandlt number 0.71
Natural convection in a square cavity is a
and Rayleigh number 103 to 106. The results
classical problem in numerical heat transfer.
reported are believed to be accurate to better
It is encountered in various thermal
than one percent at highest Rayleigh number
engineering applications such as nuclear
and down to one tenth at the lowest value.
reactor insulations, ventilation of rooms,
solar energy collector and crystal growth in Different configurations of this problem are
liquids. Though this problem has been studied in literature. Mohammad et. al.
studied extensively in the literature changes (2009) analyzed natural convection in an
in the heat transfer pattern with change in the open ended cavity for Rayleigh number 104
location of heat source are rarely reported. to 106and aspect ratio 0.5 to 1. It is reported
that the rate of heat transfer decreases
Ostrach (1988) reported comprehensive
asymptotically as the aspect ratio increases.
review of natural convection in a square
Dou et al. (2015) studied the effect of length
cavity with differentially heated walls. He
of the heat source in the cavity for Rayleigh
discussed the importance of scaling analysis
105 to 106 in the regime of turbulent natural
and experiments to determine the flow details
convection and reported that the state of flow
and pointed out the implications of purely
of heat transfer characteristics in cavity is
numerical solutions. Davis (1983) reported
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:cms.mech@coep.ac.in 598

Sewatkar et al.
closely related with the dimensionless length • RC-Right corner

of the heat source. Khanafer et al.(2015)
analyzed the effect of thin porous fin on the
hot wall of the cavity for range of Rayleigh
number between 103 till 106. The variation in
heat transfer with angle of inclination of fin
and its length were studied and an optimal fin
location was obtained. Balakrishnan et al.
(2006) investigated steady laminar natural
convection in a square cavity with uniformly
and non-uniformly heated bottom wall using
penalty finite element method over a wide
Figure 1: Schematic of the
range of Rayleigh and Prandtl number and
Computational Domain
found out that non uniform heating of the
bottom wall produced greater heat transfer These configurations are shown in the
rates at the center of the bottom wall for all schematic with abbreviations. The Prandtl
values of Rayleigh number. They also number is fixed at 0.71 and the Rayleigh
reported lower overall heat transfer rates for number is varied from 103 to 105.
the non-uniform heating.
NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY
Though different configurations are studied
in the literature, the effect of change of Lattice Boltzmann Method based code is
location of the heat source has not been developed for simulation of the problem
explored. Thus, the objective of the present using the D2Q9 model. LBM is a mesoscopic
study is to analyze the effect of location of approach in which Boltzmann transport
heat source in a square cavity on the flow and equation is solved over the domain by
hear transfer regime under laminar natural discretizing it along all the lattice directions.
convection (Rayleigh 103 till 106). This equation is as follows:
∂f
PROBLEM DESCRIPTION + c.∇f = Ω (1)
∂t
The schematic of the problem considered is
The collision term on the RHS of Boltzmann
shown in the Fig. 1. All faces of the square
transport equation is approximated using the
cavity (aspect ratio=1) have no slip boundary
BGK (Bhatnagar Gross Krook) model and
condition. The left and right side are kept at
the complete discretized equation is
low temperature (θ=0).The top side of the
cavity is thermally insulated and the bottom ∂f i 1
+ ci .∇f i = ( f i eq − f i ) (2)
side is kept at high temperature (θ=1) for one ∂t τ
fourth of its side and the remaining three The mesoscopic dynamics is given by the
forth of the side is insulated. Five different discretized Boltzmann transport equation as
configurations are considered for location of f i ( x + ∆x, t + ∆t ) = f i ( x, t )[1 − ω m ]
high temperature source as (3)
+ ω m f k ( x, t )
eq
• LC-Left corner
• LM-Left middle g i ( x + ∆x, t + ∆t ) = g i ( x, t )[1 − ω s ]
(4)
• M- Middle + ω s g k ( x, t )
eq
• RM-Right middle
599
Effect of Location of Heat Source and Rayleigh Number on Natural Convection in a Square Cavity using
Thermal Lattice Boltzmann Method
The collision operators for momentum and different locations. It is noticed that the
energy distribution functions are calculated average Nusselt number is maximum at
by using the Chapman-Enskog expansion corner locations of heat source and as the
whereas the equilibrium distribution function heat source moves towards the middle it
is approximated as initially decreases and then increases.
 c .u 1 (ci .u) 2 1 u 2 
= wi ρ ( x, t ) 1 + i 2 + −
eq
fi  (5) 8
 cs 2 cs 4 2 c s 2 
Left corner
 c .u  7
Left middle
g i = wiθ ( x, t ) 1 + i 2 
eq Middle
(6)
Average Nusselt number

Right middle
 c s 
Right corner
6
The collision step is described by eq. 3,4 and
5
the streaming step is performed to transfer
the new densities to a new location. The 4
buoyancy force is approximated by
Boussinesq approximation and the force 3
along ith direction is given as 103 104 105

Fi = 3wi ρgβTciy (7)
Rayleigh number
Figure 2: Variation of average

The macroscopic variables are obtained as
Nusselt number.
8
ρ ( x, t ) = ∑ f i (8) In case of left middle and right middle
i =0 locations, the average Nusselt number is
8 minimum because only one dominant
ρ ( x, t ).u( x, t ) = ∑ f i ci (9) circulation zone contributes to heat transfer
i =0 and the other zone merely takes up space and
8
θ ( x, t ) = ∑ g i
do not contribute to heat transfer (Fig.
(10) 3a).The average Nusselt number is maximum
i =0
at the corner locations because of the
The Nusselt number is calculated as a non-
proximity to the cold sides. In case of middle
dimensional temperature gradient in a
location, though the heat source is located
direction normal to the surface as
farthest from the cold sides heat transfer is
∂θ
Nu x = − (11) enhanced by formation of two strong
∂n symmetric circulation currents (Fig.3b). The
The average Nusselt is calculated as the size of the circulation zones have been
mean of the local Nusselt numbers. The grid quantified in Table 1.
independence study was performed for a case
of left corner with Rayleigh of 105 and a grid 1
0.5
of 100×100 is found to be sufficiently 1 0
0.5
0.8 -1
accurate for simulation in laminar and a

0
0
-3
0.5 0 -1 -4
transition regime. 0.6
-5
-6
-3 -4
Y
-1
0
-5
-3
0.4 .5
EFFECT OF LOCATION OF HEAT -6
-1
-6 -6
-4
-5
-4
SOURCE 0.2 -3
-3
-1
-1
0
Figure 2 shows the variation of average 0

0
0
0.2 0.4
X
0.6 0.8 1
Nusselt number with Rayleigh number at

600
Sewatkar et al.
(a) Left Corner cavity is reported in the present work. Two

opposing factors namely, proximity to cold
1 0 side and circulation currents contribute to the
0
2
heat transfer. For maximum heat transfer the
-2
-4
4
0.8
-6 heat source should be located at the corners
-2
6
2
for the range of Rayleigh from 103 to 105.
-4
4
0
0.6
2
0
6
Y
-2
-6
-4
REFERENCES
4
0.4
-6
-2
0
Balakrishnan A R Basak Tanmay and Roy S

-4
4
0
0.2
0
2006 Effects of thermal boundary

2
-2
-2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6
0
0.8 1
conditions on natural convection flows
X
within a square cavity International
Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer
(b) Middle 4923.
Figure 3: Streamlines for(a) LC (b) M De Vahl Davis G 1983 Natural convection of
at Rayleigh number 104 air in a square cavity: a bench mark
numerical solution International
Table 1:Size of circulation zone Journal for Numerical Methods in
contributing to heat transfer Fluids 3(3) 249-264.
Configuration Area Khalil Khanafer Abdalla Al Amiri Joe Bul
2015 Laminar natural convection heat
L 0.8 transfer in a differentially heated cavity
with a thin porous fin attached to the
LC 0.67
hot wall International Journal of Heat
M 1 and Mass Transfer 87 59-70.
RM 0.7 Mohamad AA El-Ganaoui M and Bennacer

R 2009 Lattice Boltzmann simulation of
0.78 natural convection in an open ended
RC
cavity International Journal of Thermal
Sciences 48(10) 1870-1875.
EFFECT OF RAYLEIGH NUMBER Ostrach S S 1988 Natural Convection in
With increase in Rayleigh number, the Enclosures ASME J. Heat Transfer
average Nusselt number increases for all 110(4b) 1175-1190.
locations. As Rayleigh number increases the
buoyancy increases leading to formation of
strong circulation field. Thus the flow tends
to be turbulent with increase in Rayleigh
number. This causes an increase the heat
transfer. The evidence for the increased
turbulence shall be provided in the full length
paper.
CONCLUSION
The effect of location of heat source and
Rayleigh number on heat transfer in a square
601
ICCMS2016
COMPUTATIONAL ANALYSIS OF FLOW AND THERMAL

CHARACTERISTICS OF PIN-FIN HEAT SINK
MANOGNA J., DEEPAKKUMAR R. and JAYAVEL S.*
IIITD&M Kancheepuram, Chennai, India.
Abstract: As the growth of technology is very rapid, uses of electronic appliances

have been improved. The miniaturized high capacity electronic appliances generate
enormous amount of heat which has to be removed effectively. Thus thermal
management plays a key role in heat dissipation to increase life and reliability of the
electronic components. In this paper, thermal-fluid characteristics of pin-fin heat sink
are studied and the aim of the study is to improve its thermal performance by
incorporating geometry modifications and varying various geometric parameters.
Impinging air jet cooling system has been chosen as the fluid medium to enhance
transfer from the heat sink. The meshing of the model is done in ICEM and
computations are carried out using ANSYS FLUENT. Pin-fin geometries such as
width, height, and spacing are varied and their effect on thermal performance of the
heat sink are compared for Reynolds numbers in the range 5000 ≤ Re ≤ 25000.The
performance of the heat sink is analysed using the results obtained from the
computations. The results include temperature distribution, average surface
temperature, average Nusselt number. The optimum configuration with maximum
heat dissipation capability has been identified and reported.
Keywords: Air jet impingement; Pin fin heat sink; Conjugate heat transfer.
INTRODUCTION sink and studied the effect of geometry,

As the development of technology has materials and jet flow method and its speed.
improved very rapidly, the performance and Li et al. (2005) conducted experiments using
its importance have improved. The need for air impingent cooling and performance of
light and miniature products has led to high pin-fin taking into account the effects of fin
heat fluxes in electronic components. geometry and the Reynolds number on heat
Therefore electronic cooling has become a transfer rate. It was found that the
critical problem. There are methods available improvement of the thermal resistance
for cooling like thermoelectric cooling, decreases gradually with increased Reynolds
phase-change cooling and liquid cooling. But numbers.
the impinging jet cooling with heat sink is The optimized fin width of the heat sink
proved to provide an excellent heat transfer depends on Reynolds number and as
mechanism [Li et al. 2009]) in limited space Reynolds number increases the thermal
providing effective cooling of electronic performance increases. With increase of Fin
appliances. Many researchers have been height up to 45mm the thermal performance
examined the air-jet impingement on a heat was increased but beyond 45mm,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sjv@iiitdm.ac.in 602

Manogna et al.
performance of heat sink started reducing. The flow is assumed to be unsteady,

Ledezma et al. (1996) addressed the incompressible and turbulent with constant
optimization of the heat transfer from the pin fluid properties. The analysis is based on
fins under an impinging air flow. They conjugate heat transfer methodology, where
developed correlations for optimal fin-to-fin conduction within the material and
spacing and maximum heat conduction. convection between solid material and air
Yang et al. (2008) have studied the effect of flow are considered. The governing
fin shape by using non-uniform fin height for equations used to solve mathematical model
the Reynolds number 15000 and 25000. includes continuity equation, momentum
From their work, it is observed that the equation, energy equation, conduction
junction temperature gets decreased equation and k-epsilon equations. The
significantly due to non-uniform fin height. computational analysis is done by varying
the fin height for different Reynolds number
In this present work, impinging air jet
between 5000 and 25000.
cooling system is taken to enhance the heat
transfer rate from pin-fin heat sink.
Numerical results are analysed to study the
effect of fin geometry, Reynolds number and
fin height on heat transfer rate from pin-fin
heat sink.
PROBLEM STATEMENT
Computational domain of size210 mm × 112
mm × 210 mm (Li et al. 2005) is modelled as
shown in Fig. 1. The heat sink consists of
6×6 array of fins. The domain has been
meshed using ANSYS ICEM CFD as shown
in Fig. 2.
Figure 2. Discretized domain

(Structured mesh)
RESULTS AND SUMMARY

The results are analysed using surface
temperature distribution, path lines,
Coefficient of Enhancement (COE) and the
difference between junction temperature and
ambient temperature. Sample results are
shown in Figures3 and 4, which include
velocity distribution and temperature
distribution respectively, near the mid plane
of the domain. The effect of pin-fin height on
the thermal performance is investigated and
Figure 1. Computational domain
has been compared for various Reynolds
numbers. The optimum configuration with
603
Computational Analysis of Flow and Thermal Characteristics of Pin-Fin Heat Sink
maximum heat dissipation capability has

been identified and reported. The work can
be extended to study the performance of
elliptical pin fins and fins with perforations.
Figure 3. Velocity distribution
Figure 4. Temperature distribution
REFERENCES
Li H Y Chen K Y 2005 Thermal-
characteristics of pin-fin heat sinks
cooled by impinging jet Journal of
Enhanced Heat transfer 12(2) 189–201.
Ledezma G Morega A M Bejan A
1996Optimal spacing between pin fins
with impinging flow J. Heat Trans.118
570-577.
Li H Y Chen K Y Chiang M H 2009
Thermal-fluid characteristics of plate-fin
heat sinks cooled by impingement jet
Energy conservation and management
50 2738-2746.
Yang Y T Peng H S 2008Numerical study of
pin-fin heat sink with un-uniform fin
height design Int. J. Heat and Mass
Trans. 51 4788-4796.
604
ICCMS2016
VISUALIZATION OF THERMAL TRANSPORT INDISCRETELY

HEATED2-D COMPLEX SOLID GEOMETRIES
NARASIMHA SURI TINNALURI* and JAYA KRISHNA DEVANURI
Department of Mechanical Engg., National Institute of Technology Warangal, India
Abstract: In the present study different solid complex geometries with discretely
heated bottom wall have been considered to study temperature distribution for better
insight of thermal transport phenomena. An in-house numerical code has been
developed for the analysis of heat transport in these solid complex geometries.
Initially grid has been developed for different complex geometries. Later the
generated grid has been imported and the integral forms of the governing equations
have been discretized using collocated grid based finite-volume method. A collocated
grid based finite volume approach has been used due to i) flexibility in
accommodating irregular shapes of the domain ii) flexibility of grid distribution and
iii) yields accurate and conservative approximations. The governing equations are
solved using Gauss- Seidel iterative method. The present numerical scheme has been
rigorously validated for temperature distribution in complex domains with
commercial CFD code Ansys-fluent. Numerical results are presented in terms of
isotherms and thermal transport in 2D solid complex geometries with discretely
heated bottom wall is discussed.
Keywords: Collocated Grid; Complex Geometry; Finite Volume Method;
Isotherms;
INTRODUCTION represented in terms of generalized

In this study numerical algorithm has been curvilinear coordinates, which are obtained
developed for studying heat transfer by mapping the complex physical geometry
phenomena in complex geometries. into a simplified computational domain.
Applications such as heat exchangers, Harlow and Welch (1965) developed the
nuclear fuel assemblies, solar energy staggered grid system in which the scalar
systems, electronic components, biomedical quantities such as pressure are stored at the
engineering, etc. involve intricate geometries main grid points and the velocity components
where the analysis becomes very complex. A are stored at the faces or corners of the
thorough insight of heat transport in these control volume. Maliska and Raithby (1984)
complex geometries is very much needed for proposed to store all cartesian velocity
the optimum performance of the equipment. components at each face of control volumes.
Thompson et al. (1982) developed new Shyy et al. (1985) used staggered grids with a
computational methods for predicting fluid single cartesian velocity component stored at
flow and transport phenomena using non – each face of the control volume. The non –
orthogonal curvilinear grid using primitive staggered (collocated) grid has gained
variables. The governing equations are popularity mainly due to its simplicity in
* Author for correspondence: E-mail:tnsuri.suri@gmail.com 605

Tinnaluri and Devanuri

programming and gives more accurate results
Γ  1
1
= J De  Ve  { Aex (φE − φP ) + Aex (φne − φse )} + (2)

 e Aex  2
than the staggered arrangement as reported
by Peric et al. (1988). Krishna et al. (2008)  
studied lid driven flow in a skewed geometry Simplification of above equation (2),
= d e (φE − φP ) + d e (φne − φse )
1 2
which is filled with fluid-saturated porous J De (3)
medium using semi-staggered grid based Γ
=
Where d e Vee  Aex . Aex + Aey . Aey 
1 1 1 1 1
finite volume method. Roychowdhury et al.
(1999) solved incompressible N – S Γ
= d e Vee  Aex . Aex + Aey . Aey 
2 1 2 1 2
equations using, non – orthogonal collocated
grid based finite volume method. Suri and Similarly, J Dw , J Dn and J Ds can be obtained.
Krishna (2015) developed non-orthogonal The net diffusive flux contribution for all the
collocated grid based FVM code for the four sides can be shown to be of the form
analysis of thermal transport in complex
solid geometries. Based on the above
JD = { 1 1 1
(1 1 1
) }
− d eφE + d wφW + d nφN + d sφS − d e + d w + d n + d s φP + [bno ] (4
1 1
)
literature, it may be noted that for the better where
insight of heat transport in complex
geometries, several numerical methodologies
2
( 2
) ( 2
) (
2 2
) (
bno = d e + d w φne − d w + d n φnw − d e + d s φse − d w + d s φsw
2 2 2
)
were adopted and validated. In these studies the term b no arises due to non-orthogonality
grid was generated for a specific domain and of the grid and it vanishes whenever the grid
becomes orthogonal. The corner values are
later numerical analysis was performed. But
approximated using the four surrounding
in the present study a generalized code is nodal values. For instance, the north-east
developed to read mesh data for complex corner value is obtained as
domains and a collocated grid based Finite
1
Volume Method (FVM) has been employed φne= (φN + φE + φP + φNE ) (5)
4
for the analysis of thermal transport in
Similarly, ϕ nw , ϕ se and ϕ sw can be obtained.
complex domains.
METHOD OF SOLUTION
PROBLEM DEFINITION AND
The governing equations are discretized
using non- orthogonal domains by the finite-
Various computational solid domains and volume method. Arbitrary quadrilateral
their respective boundary conditions are meshes are chosen and numerical work has
shown in Fig. 1(a)–(e). The integral form of been carried out for complex domains.
governing equation employed for the heat Temperature values are defined at the same
transport in complex solid domains can be set of grid points which are located at the
given as centres of the cells known as a collocated
∂  ∂φ  ∂  ∂φ  grid arrangement. Collocated grid
∫ ∂x  ∂x 
∆V
 Γ  dx dy + ∫ ∂y  ∂y 
∆V
 Γ  dx dy = 0 (1) arrangement is chosen because the terms in
the governing equations are essentially
The expression for diffusive flux through the
east face can be obtained in terms of the identical between the different balance
projected areas and the neighbouring node equations and hence, the number of
values of ϕ can be evaluated as: coefficients that must be computed and
stored is minimized and programming is

 Γ e Aey  { Aey1 (φE − φP ) + Aey2 (φne − φse )}
1

simplified and exported in neutral file format.
 Ve   
 
606
Visualization of Thermal Transport inDiscretely Heated 2D Complex Solid Geometries
(a) (b) (c)
(d) (e)
Figure 1.Schematic diagram of the computational solid domains with the boundary
conditions
Figure 2.Comparison of isotherms for present study (left), Ansys

Fluent(middle)and mid plane temperature profile with commercial CFD code(right).
(a) (b) (c)
(d) (e)
Figure 3. Isotherms for different complex domains
607
Tinnaluri and Devanuri
A code has been developed to read the mesh methodology can be adopted for the analysis
from neutral file of gambit. This code acts as of thermo hydraulics in complex domains.
the link between the present in-house finite
volume numerical code and meshing REFERENCES
software. Terminated the solution the
convergence criterion is reached 10-6. Jaya Krishna D Basak T and Das S K 2008
Numerical study of lid-driven flow in
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION orthogonal and skewed porous cavity
Commun Numer Meth Engg 24 815–831
Grid generation is a crucial part of numerical
solution. Numerical code has been developed Harlow F H and Welch J E 1965 Numerical
to read the mesh from gambit and linked to Calculation of Time – Dependent
Viscous Incompressible Flow of fluid
the code developed for the visualization of with Free Surface Phys Fluids 82 182-
thermal transport. The constraint of the 2189
developed code is limited to quadrilateral
Maliska C R and Raithby G D1984 A
grid. Grid employed for considered complex method for computing three dimensional
domains in Fig.1 are (a) non uniform grid flows using non- orthogonal boundary –
(60×80), (b) non uniform grid (40×70), (c) fitted coordinates Int J Numer Methods
non uniform grid (50×60), (d) uniform grid Fluids 4 518-537
(80×80) and (e) uniform grid (80X80). The Peric M Kessler R and Schenerer G
validity of the present numerical 1988Comparison of finite volume
methodology is carried out by comparing numerical methods with staggered and
with commercial CFD code Ansys Fluent. collocated grids Computers and Fluids 16
The Comparison of isotherms for the 389-403
geometry is shown in Fig. 2, it is observed Shyy W Tong S S and Correa S M 1985
that the present numerical methodology Numerical recirculation flow calculation
agrees very well with commercial CFD code using a body – fitted coordination
systems Numer Heat Transfer 8 99-113
Ansys Fluent. The isotherms obtained by
solving energy transport equation for the Thompson J F Warsi Z U A and Mastin C W
complex geometries are shown in Fig. 3 1982 Boundary – fitted coordinate
systems for numerical solution of partial
differential equations – A review Journal
CONCLUSIONS
of Comput Physics 47 1-108
A numerical code has been developed to read Ghosh Roy chowdhury D Das S K and
the mesh from Gambit and linked to the Sundararajan T 1999An efficient solution
collocated grid based Finite volume solver method for incompressible N‐S equations
for visualization of thermal transport. The using non‐orthogonal collocated grid
governing equations are written in Cartesian International Journal for numerical
coordinate system and are discritised in the methods in engineering 45 741-763
physical domain. Results are presented in Narasimha Suri T and Jaya Krishna D 2015
terms of isotherms and mid plane A Collocated grid based finite volume
temperature profile for the considered approach for the visualization of heat
transport in 2D complex geometries
geometries. The results thus obtained are
Procedia Engineering 127 79-86
rigorously validated with commercial CFD
code Ansys Fluent Based on the study, it may
be noted that the present numerical
608
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF NATURAL CONVECTION WITH

RADIATIVE HEAT TRANSFER IN A CAVITY
PARMANANDA M.*, KHAN S. and DALAL A.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Guwahati, India.
Abstract: A low Mach number formulation has been presented for the numerical
simulation of natural convection including radiative heat transfer in a cavity for large
temperature differences. Density variations arising due to large temperature
differences are tackled separately using both Boussinesq approximation and low
Mach number formulation in combination with a pressure based approach. Further a
detailed study of the inaccuracies arising due to the incompressible treatment of quasi-
incompressible flows with radiative heat transfer effects is presented. (FVM) is used
for the discretization of governing flow, energy and radiative transfer equation (RTE).
From the series of numerical experiments it is shown that Boussinesq approximation
gives inaccurate results particularly at large temperature differences, thus depicting
the supremacy of low Mach number algorithm for simulating natural convection with
radiative heat transfer in enclosures at large temperature difference.
Keywords: Finite volume method; Eulerian –Eulerian two fluid model; Drag
force; Particle volume fraction.
INTRODUCTION includes the work of Yucel et al (1989) who

The effect of radiative heat transfer with used SIMPLER and DOM method for
natural convection cannot be neglected at large predicting velocity and temperature coupled
temperatures in many heat transfer with radiation heat transfer in 2-D enclosures.
applications, like, heat transfer and thermal Colomer et al. (2004) also used DOM with
analysis in nuclear reactors, fire and plume SIMPLE algorithm to simulate natural
assemblies, open fire and combustion etc. convection with radiation in a 3-D cavity. Lari
Numerical approach capable of solving flow et al. (2011) studied the radiation and natural
and heat transfer in conjunction with radiation convection in a cavity at normal room
effects becomes important for accurate temperatures with small temperature
prediction of such quasi-incompressible flows. difference using DOM for radiation and FVM
for flow. Tan and Howell (Tan and Howell,
One of the important aspects for numerical 1991) studied the effect of radiation on natural
simulation of such flows is the treatment of convection for a range of Rayleigh numbers
density variation. Use of Boussinesq and for different Planck numbers. In all the
approximation is the most popularly method studies mentioned above Boussinesq
for considering the density variations in such approximation is used for approximating the
simulations. Some of the prominent research density variations arising due to temperature
focusing on combined radiation with natural difference, this approximation is valid only in
convection using Boussinesq approximation regimes where temperature differences are
*Author for correspondence :E-mail: s.p.mukul@iitg.ernet.in 609

Parmananda et al.
small. Few researchers have considered 1. Initialize all variables and all the other
compressibility effects for solving non- parameters to their initial conditions.
Boussinesq convection with radiation. Kumar
and Eswaran (2010) studied natural convection 2. Solve RTE to obtain intensity
with radiation in a 3-D cavity by using a  ∂I ( s )  σ
variable density approach at significantly large 
 ∂ s
=

− β I + κ Ib + s
4π ∫ I ( s ) Φ ( s ,s ) dΩ
4π
i i i
temperature difference with varying wall

emissivity and scattering albedo. Darbandi and 3. Solve the continuity equation to obtain
Abrar (2014) used a compressible approach density.
for solving combined convection radiation
heat transfer and showed the errors
∂ρ ∂ ρ u j
+ =
0
( )
∂t ∂x j
encountered by taking a incompressible
approximation for such flows. Teleaga et al. 4. Solve the energy equation to obtain
(2006) has also presented low Mach number temperature.
model for thermal flows with radiation.
(
∂ ρ Cp T ) + ∂(ρ C p T uj ) =∂  ∂T
k
 dP
 +
We have used pressure based approach with
∂t ∂x j ∂x j  ∂x j  dt
low Mach-number formulation following the
work of Paolucci (1982) and extended it for + ka ( 4π I b − ∫ I dω )
4π
considering the radiation effects. The removal 5. Update the thermodynamic pressure
of acoustic waves gives rise to two pressure r
P = mo
fields which are thermodynamic and 1
hydrodynamic pressure. Hence the pressure ∫Ω T d Ω
based algorithm needs to solve density and
6. Find auxiliary velocity 𝑢𝑖∗ by solving the
thermodynamic pressure in addition to
Navier-Stokes equation without the pressure
velocity and temperature using conservation
term.
equation, whereas equation of state serves as a
(
∂ ρ u *i ) + ∂ ( ρu u ) =
*
∂
(τ ) + ( ρ − ρ ) g
relation between density, thermodynamic i j
+
∂t ∂x j ∂x j
ij o i
pressure and temperature.
SOLUTION ALGORITHM 7. Calculate flux 𝐹𝑓∗ using auxiliary velocity

The solution algorithm for solving natural 𝑢𝑖∗ and evaluate pressure using the variable
convection with radiative heat transfer using a coefficient Poisson equation.
1
low Mach number formulation is described ∆t ∑ (∇p* ) ⋅=S f ∑ F0 f * − ∑ Ff n +1
next. The descretization of the governing f ρ f f
equation is followed from the work of Dalal et

al. (2008) for collocated unstructured grids. 8. Calculate flux at each face using the
momentum interpolation formula.
n +1 1
Ff= F0 f * − ∆t ( ∇p * ) ⋅ S f
PROBLEM DEFINITION ρf
The problem consists of a heated square 9. Update velocity.
∂p
cylinder inside a cold square cavity of length ρ ui=
n +1
ρ ui + ∆t
L. The length of the heated square cylinder is ∂xi
0.2L. The cylinder is at uniformly 10. Repeat step 2-9 till convergence.
610
Numerical Simulation of Natural Convection with Radiative Heat Transfer in a Cavity
temperature 𝑇ℎ > 𝑇𝑐 greater than wall adiabatic and initial temperature of the
temperature. medium is 600 K and hot and cold vertical
walls are at 400 K and 800 K respectively. All
the walls are having emissivity ℰ𝑤 =1.0. The
Rayleigh number is 5 ×106 , Prandtl number
0.71 and Planck number 0.02. The results are
compared with the compressible solutions of
Darbandi and Abrar. (2014).
Figure 1. Schematics of heated square

cylinder inside a cavity for natural
convection with radiative heat transfer
problem.
All the walls are assumed to be grey and
Figure 2.Variation of local Nusselt
diffuse, with an emissivity of 1. The problem
number along the hot and cold walls.
is solved by keeping the enclosure
temperature constant at 300 K and the Table 1.Comparison of average Nusselt
cylinder temperature is varied so as the number at the hot wall.
temperature difference between walls and Author Nusselt number Nusselt number
cylinder becomes large. The problem is Conduction radiation
solved considering both Boussinesq and low
Darbandi 8.498 37.452
Mach number formulation. The medium
Present 8.389 37.134
inside the cavity is considered to be
participating medium which absorbs, emits Table 2.Comparison of average Nusselt
and scatters radiation. The problem is solved number at the cold wall.
for a Rayleigh number of 105 and Prandtl Author Nusselt number Nusselt number
number of 0.71 with varying optical Conduction radiation
thickness. Darbandi 14.354 31.617
Present 14.226 31.523
VALIDATION
The low Mach number formulation is
validated by solving a combined natural
convection radiation problem. The problem ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
consists of a 2-D enclosure filled with a This Study is funded by a grant from DAE-
participating medium of absorption BRNS, Government of India.
coefficient𝜅 = 0.2,Top and bottom walls are
611
Parmananda et al.
REFERENCES Square Enclosure Numerical Heat

Transfer Part A15 261-277.
Colomer G Costa G M Consul R and Oliva
A 2004 Three-Dimensional Numerical
Simulation of Convection and
Radiation in a Differentially Heated
Cavity Using the Discrete Ordinates
Method International Journal of Heat
Mass Transfer 47 257–269.
Dalal A Eswaran V and Biswas G 2008 A
finite volume method for Navier-Stokes
equations on unstructured meshes
Numerical Heat Transfer Part B 54(3)
238-259.
Darbandi M and Abrar B 2014 A
Compressible Approach to Solve
Combined Natural Convection-
Radiation Heat Transfer in Participating
Media Numerical Heat Transfer Part B
66 446-469.
Kumar P and Eswaran V 2010 A Numerical
Simulation of Combined Radiation and
Natural Convection in a Differential
Heated Cubic Cavity Journal of Heat
Transfer 132.
Lari K Baneshi M Gandjalikhan S A Nassab
Komiya A and Maruyama S2011
Combined Heat Transfer of Radiation
and Natural Convection in a Square
Cavity Containing Participating Gases
Transfer 54 5087–5099.
Paolucci S 1982 On Filtering of Sound from
the Navier-Stokes Equations Sandia
National Labs TR-82-8257.
Tan Z and Howell J R 1991 Combined
Radiation and Natural Convection in a
Two-Dimensional Participating Square
Medium International Journal of Heat
and Mass Transfer 34 785–793.
Teleaga I Seaid M Gasser I Klar A and
Struckmeier J 2006 Radiation models
for thermal flows at low Mach number
J. Comp Physics 215 506-525.
Yucel A Acharya S and Williams M 1989
Natural Convection and Radiation in a
612
ICCMS2016
LBM SIMULATION OF FREE CONVECTION IN AN ENCLOSURE

CONTAINING HEAT GENERATING LOW-PR FLUID
GERA B.*and SINGH R. K.1
*Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Trombay, Mumbai, India,
1
Abstract: Lattice Boltzmann simulations were conducted for the free convective flow
of a low-Prandtl number (Pr=0.0321) fluid with internal heat generation in a square
enclosure having isothermal side walls and adiabatic top and bottom walls. The
problem of free convection with volumetric heat source has represented itself in
connection with advanced engineering applications, such as water-cooled lithium–
lead breeder blankets for nuclear fusion reactors. A single relaxation time (SRT)
lattice Boltzmann method (LBM) was employed and a D2Q9 model was used to
simulate the flow field. The energy equation has been solved explicitly using Lax-
Wendroff method on the same lattice. Results have been obtained for laminar flows
for Rayleigh numbers ranging from 104 to 109. Steady state solution was obtained
under laminar flow condition. Flow and temperature fields in terms of stream function
and isotherms in the enclosure were predicted for all these cases. Nusselt number
values on side boundaries were obtained from the analysis.
Keywords: Heat generation; Low Prandtl number; LBM; free convection.
INTRODUCTION High value of heat generation makes this

Considerable attention is given to the study problem challenging to solve it numerically.
of natural convection in enclosures which are In the present work the problem of free
filled with volumetric heat generating fluids. convection with uniform volumetric heat
In some industrial application free generation has been investigated considering
convection from a heat generating working applications in nuclear industries e.g. post-
fluid is of prime concern. The application accident heat removal in nuclear reactors and
areas are in nuclear reactor design, post- geophysical problems associated with the
accident heat removal in nuclear reactors, underground storage of nuclear water. In
geophysics and underground storage of these applications, the Prandtl number is
nuclear waste and energy storage systems, usually small (liquid metals) and additional
among others [Baker et al., 1976]. A uniform effects, such as magneto-hydrodynamic
heat generation in an enclosure significantly interactions, may play a role [Arcidiacono et
alters the flow dynamics inside the enclosure. al., 2001]. Numerical simulations have been
At a high value of heat generation natural performed for the simplified geometry (2D
convection loops are formed inside the square enclosure) at
enclosure and rate of heat transfer increases. Pr=0.0321(representative of the Pb-17%Li
coolant) considering uniform volumetric heat
generation at various Rayleigh numbers
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bgera@barc.gov.in 613

Gera and Singh
using the lattice Boltzmann method (LBM) and all other properties were assumed to be
in present work. In the last few years constant. The Rayleigh numbers was defined
significant work has been done using the as Ra = ρ 2C p g β QH 5 / k 2 µ . Where Q
LBM for simulation of various engineering
represents the rate of internal heat generation
and fundamental research problems in fluid
per unit volume and g is gravitational
flow and heat transfer. LBM describes the
acceleration. Computations have been
fluid behaviour in a mesoscopic model
performed for various Rayleigh numbers
whereas conventional CFD tools model the
ranging from 103 to 109characterizing heat
macroscopic fluid properties. LBM lies in
generation. The fluid properties considered in
between the microscopic and the
the computation are fluid density ( ρ )
macroscopic levels by modelling the fluid
=9465.0 kg/m3, viscosity ( µ ) =0.0022375
behaviour with the evolution of averaged
distributions of particles. The complex kg/m-s, thermal conductivity ( k ) =12.70
microscopic fluid behaviour of an individual W/m-K, coefficient of thermal expansion( β )
molecule is not modeled, instead distribution =0.000161 and specific heat ( C p ) =182.8
functions are used which results in ease in J/kg-K. The side walls were maintained at
modelling and accurate prediction of the 550 K in all the calculations. It was assumed
macroscopic behaviour. This method is that the fluid is Newtonian and
second-order-accurate in both space and time incompressible, the flow is laminar, and the
[Chen and Doolen, 1998]. Since the effect of viscous dissipation is negligible.
distribution function originated from The gravity acts in the vertical direction and
microscopic theory, LBM has many of the fluid density variations are neglected except
intrinsic advantages of molecular dynamics in the buoyancy term, and radiation heat
and kinetic theories, its evolution rules are transfer is negligible.
linear and local thus making the method
Adiabatic Top Wall
simpler and faster. In the present study an
LBM simulation has been carried out for Q
laminar natural convection flow in a
differentially heated square enclosure with a H Isothermal g
Isothermal
heat generating fluid of low-Prandtl number Wall Wall
(Pr=0.0321) having adiabatic top and bottom

walls and isothermal side walls. The present Adiabatic Bottom Wall
work briefly describes the effect of Rayleigh
H
number on the temperature and flow Y
distribution for natural convection in a square X
enclosure.
Figure 1. Problem definition along with
The geometry of the enclosure considered for boundary conditions.
the analysis is depicted in figure 1. The
enclosure side length is H and the left and
NUMERICAL DETAILS
right walls are maintained at constant
For the present computation a D2Q9 lattice
temperature Ta . The top and bottom walls are
has been chosen, where 2 represents the
under no-slip, adiabatic boundary conditions. spatial dimension and 9 represents the
The variation in density of liquid metal was number of velocities in the truncated velocity
modeled with Bossinesque approximation
614
LBM Simulation of Free Convection in An Enclosure Containing Heat Generating Low-Pr Fluid
space. The D2Q9 lattice has the geometry of It is clear that the present simulation results
a regular Cartesian grid. Energy conservation are in good agreement with published
equation has been solved explicitly on the literature. Figure 3 show the isotherms for
same lattice. The fluid dynamics part (mass various values of Rayleigh numbers for the
and momentum evolution) is represented by configuration considered in the present work.
LBM while energy evolution is determined
by additional energy conservation equation.
Flow and energy evaluation are coupled
through body force term in LBM. This
approach provides much improved numerical
stability and has been used widely by many
researchers (Zhou et al., 2004).The scalar
transport equation has been solved explicitly
using Lax-Wendroff method on the same
lattice.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION (a). Ra =104
Further the present simulation was validated
against the results available from
Arcidiacono et al., (2001) for the free
convective flow of a low-Prandtl number
fluid with internal heat generation in a square
enclosure at Grashof number( Gr = Ra / Pr )
=107 and Prandtl number (Pr) =0.0321.
Figure 2 shows a comparison of streamlines
and isotherms of Arcidiacono et al., (2001)
with present work.
(b). Ra =105
(a). Streams lines (left) and isotherms

(right) Arcidiacono et al., 2001
(c). Ra =106
Figure 3. Isotherms for different Rayleigh
number.
(b). Streams lines (left) and isotherms The temperature of the fluid in the enclosure
(right) present work increases due to the increase of the internal
Figure 2. Comparison of streams lines heat generation. Higher value of heat
and isotherms with literature. generation causes a very high fluid
615
Gera and Singh
temperature compared to boundary

temperature, since left and right boundary are
maintained at constant temperature, heat is
transferred at higher rate out of the enclosure.
The internal heat generation increases the
rate of heat transfer significantly.
CONCLUSION
Heat transfer by natural convection in a
square enclosure with uniform internal heat
generation has been studied numerically
using LBM. The present method based on
LBM along with suitable boundary
conditions provides reliable results.
REFERENCES
Arcidiacono S Piazza I D and Ciofalo M
2001 Low-Prandtl number natural
convection in volumetrically heated
rectangular enclosures II Square cavity
AR=1Int J Heat and Mass Transf 44
537-550.
Baker J L Faw E F and Kulacki F A 1976
Post-accident heat removal—Part I: Heat
transfer within an internally heated, non-
boiling liquid layer Nuclear Science &
Chen S and Doolen G D 1998 Lattice
Boltzmann method for fluid flows Annu
Rev Fluid Mech 30 329–364.
Zhou Y Zhang R Staroselsky I and Chen H
2004 Numerical simulation of laminar
and turbulent buoyancy-driven flows
using a lattice Boltzmann based
algorithm International Journal of Heat
and Mass Transfer 47 4869–4879
616
ICCMS2016
NATURAL CONVECTION IN AN OPEN CAVITY WITH SURFACE

MOUNTED ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
MUTHUKRISHNAN S. and MADHUSUDHANA R. GAVARA*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Guwahati, India
Abstract: In the present study, laminar natural convection in a top open rectangular
vertical cavity mounted with three electronic components is studied. The left wall of
the cavity is a substrate which is surface mounted with three heated electronic
components. In this study, the heat transfer is examined for three wall removal cases:
(i) when bottom wall is removed, (ii) when right wall is removed and (iii) when both
the walls are removed. This study provides an estimate of how much heat transfer is
restricted by the bottom and right walls. The governing equations are solved using
Finite Volume Method (FVM) based solver. The convection is analysed using stream
function and temperature contours. Heat transfer is examined to find the effect of the
individual walls on temperatures in the cavity as wall as on the electronic
components. All he three wall removal cases shows better thermal performance than
the no wall removal case. The temperatures of the components are found to drop
highest when the bottom wall is removed.
Key words: Natural convection; Cooling of electronic; Open cavity; Thermal design
INTRODUCTION cavity is filled with air. The height of the

cavity H is taken as reference length for
Thermal design of the electronic components
non-dimensionalisation. The dimensions of
is one of the crucial aspects of electronic
equipment, for their proper functionality, the physical system are: W/H=0.3, Wst / H
lifetime and safety. When electronic =0.02, Wh / H =0.03, H h / H =0.1, S / H =
components are kept in an enclosure with the 0.2. The dimensionless spacing between the
top wall open to ambience, the cooling cavity bottom and bottom of the lower heater
becomes natural convection in open cavities. is kept 0.15. The spacing between the top
The heated component acts as discrete side of the upper heater and top side of the
heaters. In this work, natural convection cavity is 0.15. Air is considered as cooling
cooling of discrete heaters in a vertical cavity medium (Pr=0.71). The thermal
with open top is studied. conductivities of the substrate and heater is
taken as 10 times that of fluid thermal
PHYSICAL SYSTEM conductivity ( kst / k f =10, kh / kf =10). The
The physical system consists of a vertical study is conducted for Grashof number of
rectangular cavity with top side opened to Gr = 3 ×107
ambiance as shown in Figure. 1. The left side
of the cavity is made of a conductive MATHEMATICAL MODEL
substrate on which three identical rectangular
heaters are surface mounted. The three The flow is considered to be steady, laminar,
heaters generate uniform volumetric heat. incompressible with negligible viscous
The right and bottom walls along with the dissipation and radiation effects. The
backside of the substrate are insulated. The
_______________________________
*Author for correspondence:E-mail:gmadhu@iitg.ernrt.in 617

Muthukrishnan and Madhusudhana
physical and thermal properties are assumed

to be constant with respect to temperature,
( )
( p − p∞ ) / ρ (α f / H ) 2 , X = x / H ,
except the density of the fluid in buoyancy Y = y/H . θ = ( (T − T∞ )k f H ) / Q , In the

term. The buoyancy term is linearised energy equation for heaters, the term
according to Boussinesq approximation. Q / (Wh H h ) represents uniform volumetric
Radiation effects are assumed to be
heat generation in the heaters. The above
negligible. With the above assumptions, the
equations Pr is Prandtl number and
governing equations take the following
dimensionless form: Gr = g β f Q H 2 / kf ν f2 is Grashof number. In
the above, u and v are velocity components
along x and y coordinate directions,
respectively. p and T are pressure and
temperatures, p∞ and T∞ respectively, are
pressure and temperature of the ambience. U
, V , P and θ are dimensionless x -velocity,
y -velocity, pressure and temperature,
respectively. α f and k f are thermal
diffusivity and conductivity of fluid. Q is the
heat generation rate in each heater. H is the
height of the cavity which is taken as
reference length.
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Figure 1: Schematic of physical system
The boundary conditions are set in the
∂U ∂V
Continuity + =
0 FLUENT are as following. No slip and no
∂X ∂Y penetration condition is applied at all walls.
x -momentum At the top opening of the cavity, pressure-
∂U ∂U ∂P  ∂ 2U ∂ 2U  outlet condition is applied with back flow at
U +V =− + Pr  2 + 2  ambient temperature. All cavity walls,
∂X ∂Y ∂X  ∂X ∂Y 
including backside of the substrate, are
y-momentum specified with adiabatic condition. The top
∂V ∂V ∂P  ∂ 2V ∂ 2V  and bottom walls of the substrate are also
U +V =− + Pr  2 + 2 
∂X ∂Y ∂Y  ∂X ∂Y  specified with adiabatic condition. The
heaters are specified with uniform volumetric
+GrPr 2θ heat generation. At the interfaces of different
Energy in the fluid materials, namely, substrate-fluid, heater-
∂θ ∂θ ∂ 2θ ∂ 2θ fluid, substrate-heater interfaces are specified
U +V = +
∂X ∂Y ∂X 2 ∂Y 2 with thermally coupled condition.
Energy in the substrate
∂ 2θ ∂ 2θ NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY
+ = 0
∂X 2 ∂Y 2 The numerical simulations are performed
Energy in the heaters using ANSYS FLUENT 14.0 (ans). The
Semi-Implicit Method for Pressure Linked
kh  ∂ 2θ ∂ 2θ  Q H 2
 + + =
0 Equations (SIMPLE) algorithm is opted for
kf  ∂X 2 ∂Y 2  Wh H h pressure-velocity coupling, and the power-
The above equations are nondimensionalised law is opted for discretization of convection-
using the following definitions: U = diffusion terms. The details of the numerical
u / (α f / H ) , V = v / (α f / H ) , P= methodologies implemented in FLUENT can
618
Natural Convection in an Open Cavity with Surface Mounted Electronic Components
be found in the FLUENT manual version transfer is studied for wall removal cases: (i)
14.0. The details of SIMPLE algorithm can when bottom wall is removed, (ii) when right
be found in the book by Patankar wall is removed and (iii) when both right and
(Patankar 1981). left walls are removed. The boundary
condition for the removed wall is specified
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION with pressure inlet condition with ambient
pressure and temperature. This study
Natural convection is solved for heat transfer provides an estimate of how much heat
in an open cavity to find the convection transfer is restricted by the bottom and right
characteristics. The cavity is open at top (this walls.
is referred as the base case). Natural
convection is also solved for three wall When the cavity bottom wall is removed, it
removal cases. The base case heat transfer is becomes a vertical channel. In this case, the
compared with the three different cases ambient air is inducted through the bottom
formed when the bottom wall or/and right and makes the heat transfer different from
wall of the cavity is/are removed. The heat that of cavity with bottom wall.
Figure 2: Stream function and temperature contours for various wall removal cases.
(a)-(d): Stream function contours; (e)-(f): Temperature contours
When bottom wall is present, the coolant wall, the air inflow is mainly through the
entry is restricted from only top opening, and bottom, and the heated fluid naturally goes
the heated fluid has to again exit through the upwards and exits through top opening. The
same top opening as can be seen from strean streamlines and isotherms for cavity without
function plot shown in Figure. 2(a). The bottom wall are shown in Figures. 2(b) and
fluid has to pass in opposite directions in a 2(f), respectively. It can be seen from
restricted space. Hence, the fluid experiences streamline plot that even this is a resulting
higher resistive forces.In case of no bottom channel flow situation, flow reversal can be
619
Muthukrishnan and Madhusudhana
observed at the top opening. All the fluid temperature of the hottest point within that
comes from the bottom exits through small particular heater.
area at the top opening. The flow reversal In all the above cases it can be noticed that
spans much larger area, even though its the temperature difference between the
strength is low. However, in the base case the bottom and middle heater is higher than that
flow revarsal at the top openning is stronger. between the middle and top heaters. In all the
When the right wall is removed, the fluid on cases the top heater is the hottest heater,
the right side becomes accessible. Compared which is subjected to the highest thermal
to bottom wall removal, in the right wall risk.
removal situation the fluid can be drawn From the above table we can see that all the
from larger area; and and also from different wall removal cases perform better than the no
elevations of fresh ambient fluid. The wall removal case (base case). The
streamlines are horizontal at the right performance of the three wall removal cases
boundary before they turn to upwards are almost same. Temperatures of these cases
(Figure. 2(c). It provides almost no flow are lower than those of the base case.
reversal at the top opening. The isotherms of However, among the three wall removal
the right wall removal case is shown in cases the bottom wall removal performs best,
Figure. 2(f). The temperatures are lower than and the side wall removal performs the least.
those of the base case.When both bottom and The performance of the both walls removal
right walls are removed, the configuration case is in between the bottom wall removal
becomes heaters mounted on a vertical and right wall removal.
substrate. In this case fluid from all the
directions, except from backside of the CONCLUSIONS
substrate, is accessible as can be seen from
streamlines shown in Figure. 2(d). The Natural convection in a top cooled vertical
dimensionless temperature distribution can rectangular cavity mounted with three
be seen from Figure.2(h). In electronic electronic components is numerically
equipment the maximum temperature is one studied. The results are analysed using
of the most important design parameters. The stream function and temperature contours.
temperature maximum should be kept within The thermal performance of the base case is
safe operating temperatures. compared with the three wall removal cases.
It is found that all the wall removal cases
Table1: Comparison of Maximum perform better than no wall removal case.
dimensionless temperatures of heaters in Among the three wall removal cases, the
different wall removal cases bottom wall removal shows lowest
component temperatures, and the side wall
removal shows the least thermal
performance.
REFERENCES
Ansys fluent release 14 0 user manual.
Patankar S V 1981 Numerical Heat Transfer
and Fluid Flow McGraw-Hill, New
The thermal performance of all the above
York.
cases can be compared using the temperature
maximum as performance measure which is
shown in Table 1. Temperature varies
throughout the domain, including with in
individual heaters. In the table, maximum
temperature of a heater shows the
620
ICCMS2016
DESIGN, MANUFACTURING AND PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS OF

DIFFERENT THERMOPLASTIC GEARS IN THE GEARBOX FOR
MOPED
GUPTA A. R.*, ALONI S. N. and DATEY S. N.
Datta Meghe Institute of Engineering, Technology & Research Sawangi (Meghe) Wardha, India.
Abstract: The gearbox is one of the inherent components in any automotive system
and comprises approximately 30% cost of the total cost of the automobile. Plastic
gears also open new opportunities for more efficient transmissions in many products
along with reduced drive drive-cost, weight, noise and wear. Along with this the
gearbox is a heavy component of the automobile. To reduce drive cost, noise and
weight by replacing metallic gears by thermoplastic gears in the gearbox of identified
low power moped is the objective of this work. Initially the material is identified
among heavy engineering plastics for manufacturing of gear. The material selected is
tested in test laboratory and gears are manufactured using Hobbing process with the
same accuracy and specifications as that of metallic gears of the gearbox. The
modelling of the gearbox has been done and analysis has been carried out using
ANSYS software. The driven gear and driver pinion is replaced by cast nylon gears
and tested for different loading conditions. The experimentation is also carried out for
vibrations and noise generated by the gearbox at different RPM and compared with
existing gearbox. The results are compared with Metallic gears. It is found that Cast
Nylon gears generate less noise and vibrations and are economical than metallic gears
in the gearbox.
Keywords: Plastic gear; Material for plastic gear; Plastic gear design; Plastic
gear in moped; Necessity of plastic gear.
INTRODUCTION opportunities for smaller, more efficient

transmissions in many products. What are the
Plastic gears are continuing to displace metal
payoffs when using plastic gears in place of
gears in a widening arena of applications.
metal? Where do they make most sense?
Their unique characteristics are also being
How are they specified, and which resins are
enhanced with new developments, both in
best? These questions are timely as more
material sand processing. In this regard,
engineers turn to plastic gears in higher-
plastics contrast somewhat dramatically with
power, high-precision applications.
metals, in that the latter materials and
processes are essentially fully developed and COMPARISON OF PLASTIC GEAR
therefore, are in a relatively static state of WITH METAL GEAR
development.
Carbon fibre reinforced polymer has been
For mechanical engineers, plastic gears are a become an increasingly notable material used
powerful means of cutting drive-cost, weight, in structural engineering. In academic
noise and wear. Plastic gears also open new
_________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: amarjeetrzg@gmail.com 621

Gupta et al.
context, it has potential benefits in pleasure. Like most scooterettes, the Sunny is
construction; it has proved itself cost- targeted at teenagers who are eligible to get a
effective in a number of field applications. driving license for ungeared two wheelers at
Reinforced plastic is considered the best 16 years of age. The technical specification
selection from technical and economical of experimented moped i.e Bajaj sunny is
point. For mechanical engineering, plastic given in table 1.
gears are a powerful means of cutting drive
cost, weight, noise, and wear. It also opens
new opportunities for more efficient
transmission in many products.
Figure 2. Gear (Helical Type)

Figure 1. Different Types of Gears Used
Table 1. Technical Specification of Sunny
Moped
Engine Two Stroke/Petrol
Transmission Automatic
Engine Displacement 59.86 Cc
Tachometer No
Max. Power 2.8 Hp At 6000 RPM
Ground Clearance 100mm
Ignition Electronic
Dry Weight 63 Kg
Fuel Tank Capacity 3.5 Lit
Figure 3. Pinion (Helical Type)
Battery 12 V
Leading Link With
F/R Suspension MATERIAL SELECTION & ITS
Coil Spring
PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS
Max, Speed 50 Kph
Selection of material is a very important task
DIMENSIONS OF GEARS before the manufacturing of gears
considering all the factors regarding the
The Bajaj Sunny is India's first Scooterette. It material such as its strength, cost. load
has a 60cc engine, which takes it to a carrying capacity, availability and etc. After
maximum speed of 50kph. It has the capacity studying all the characteristics of the various
to carry a maximum load of 120kg, hence it available materials, we came to a conclusion,
is highly recommended for riding alone or that Delrin, cast nylon is best suitable
carrying a small pillion rider. With an material for the manufacturing of
automatic gearbox, it makes riding a thermoplastic gears.
622
Design, Manufacturing and Performance Analysis of Different Thermoplastic Gears in the Gearbox for
Moped
ANSYS REPORTS 3) Sound level meter

4) Digital tachometer
5) Vibration meter
6) Thermometer
NOISE AND VIBRATION TESTING
NOISE
Sr.No. C.I NYLON-66

1. At480 rpm,110db At480 rpm,102db
2. At590 rpm,112db At590 rpm,103db
Figure4. Total Deformation 3. At 710rpm,115db At710 rpm,100db

4. At 850rpm,157db At850 rpm,110db
VIBRATION
Sr.No. C.I NYLON- 66

1. At 480 rpm,1.3 At 480 rpm,1.1
2. At 590 rpm,1.5 At 590 rpm,1.3
3. At 710rpm,1.7 At 710 rpm,1.5
4. At 850rpm,1.8 At 850 rpm,1.6
Figure5. Maximum Shear Stress
TEMPERATURE
temp
Sr. Time Rp Temp.
.C.I
No. Duration m Nylon66(0C)
(0C)
1. 5min 50 34.5 36.8
2. 5min 90 41 43.4
3. 5min 10 43.3 46.6
4. 5min 50 46 48.1
Figure6. Von Mises Stresses
RESULT AND CONCLUSION
PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS
RESULT
The various devices used during the entire
The modest use of gears can only be accepted
experiment for measurement and analysis are
by replacing metal gears as per requirement.
as follows: 1) Dial vernier calliper
Experimentation was laid down for the
2) Digital vernier calliper evolution of material properties and their
623
Gupta et al.
resistance capabilities. The process hobbing process and analysed it, with the
comprised of installing, running and then help of ANSYS 11.0 software. After studying
comparison of reinforced thermoplastic gears all the parameters, it is concluded that
with metal gears. thermoplastic gear can be used instead of
metal gears where load capacity is less and
Nylon gears have shown that the noise
light weight is the priority.
generated by them are comparatively lower
than cast iron. According to the properties of
REFERENCES
nylon plastic gears have better quality of
damping as compared to the cast iron and Kapelevich and Mc Namara 2006 Plastic
also the vibrations produces are less as Gearing for Small Engine Applications
compared to the cast iron gear. SAE Technical Paper 2006-32-0038
2006 DOI: 10.4271/2006-32-0038.
The production of thermoplastics are cheaper
than metallic gears using injection moulding Chruma J 1983 The Evolution of Nylon
process and plastic gears have the advantage Plastics in U S Automotive Applications
of less machining cost also the physical and SAE Technical Paper 830284 1983 DOI:
chemical attack over the plastic gear is of no 10.4271/830284.
use as plastics are highly resistive to the Khurmi R S and Gupta J K 2011 Theory Of
chemicals and other physiological factors like Machine S Chand Publication Chapter
water, rusting etc. No.29 Helicle Gear 1066-1079
From the performance testing we have Crippa G Davoli Gorla C and Quaranta 1993
concluded that the noise, vibration and heat Nylon Gears for Engine Timing Drives:
developed by plastic gears are less as Design and Experimental Tests SAE
compared to the cast iron or metallic gear. Technical Paper 1993-25-0635 1993.
CONCLUSION Amarjeet R. Gupta 2013 Application of

Different Thermoplastic Gears in the
As the technological progress is happening
Gearbox of Moped International Journal
the products are now extensively made using
for Engineering Applications and
plastic material especially in robotics, Technology 58-62.
industry, electrical instrument and
automobile gear and in other mechanical Calabrese A Davoli P and Quaranta 1995
working condition. This application needs to Noise Reduction with Plastic Gears: A
be light weight and modular in nature plastic Case History for Diesel Engines SAE
components like gears. As per industry Technical Paper 95 4149.
statistics we have found that gears are made Shiwalkar B D 2012 Design of Machine
up of plastic material of High-density Element Theory and Problem
polyethylene (HDPE) which is prone to Publication-Dennet and Co. 19.1-19.20.
various kinds of defects when manufacturing
using image processing.
In this way, we have designed thermoplastic
gear in Pro-E (Creo-4.0) software by consider
various properties of gear and compare it
with metal gear. Also to study behaviour of
the thermoplastic gear, it is manufactured by
624
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF CONDENSATION HEAT TRANSFER IN HELICAL COIL

RASHED ALI, GULHANE N. P., KANSE A. and DATE P.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, VJTI, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Experimental study of heat transfer through the helical coil during
condensation of the steam in helical coil is carried out. The purpose of the study is to
investigate the effect of the coil curvature ratio, mass flow rate of steam and inlet
temperature of steam on the heat transfer coefficient. Experimental setup is fabricated
to carry out the experimentation on coil of diameters 225mm. The result shows that
there is increase in heat transfer coefficient with increase in inlet temperature of the
steam.
Keywords: helical coil, heat transfer coefficient, coil curvature ratio
INTRODUCTION MATERIALS
For well over a century, efforts have been A helical coil is made of MS material and is
made to produce more efficient heat placed in drum filled with water. The details
exchangers by employing various methods of specifications of the coil are given table 1.
heat transfer enhancement. The study of Steam flows through the coil and water
surrounds it. Experimental setup is shown in
enhanced heat transfer has gained serious
Figure 1. Experiment is carried out for the
momentum during recent years due to various mass flow rate of the steam.
increased demands by industry for heat
exchange equipment which would be less
expensive to build and operate than standard
heat exchange devices. Savings in materials
and energy use also provide strong
motivation for the development of improved
methods of enhancement. Many times it is
imperative that the heat exchangers designed
should be especially compact and lightweight
(for example automobiles and spacecraft
applications). Also, enhancement devices are
necessary for the high heat duty exchangers
found in power plants (i. e. air-cooled
condensers, nuclear fuel rods). These
applications, as well as numerous others,
have led to the development of various heat Figure 1 Experimental Set up
transfer enhancement techniques.
METHODS
Helical coils are used in process industries, Heat transfer coefficient is calculated by the
chemical industries, refrigeration and air following ways Heat gain by the cooling water
conditioning, in water purification plants etc.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:rashedali07@gmail.com 625

Rashed Ali et al.
from condensation of steam which is flowing coefficient as the mass flow rate of the steam
in the coil is calculated from overall heat increases.
balance equation as: It can be seen from Fig 2 that there is
increase in the heat transfer coefficient of
Q = m ' c p (Tout − Tin ) (1) condensation with the increase in the inlet
Where temperature of the steam to the coil.
m = mass flow rate of water in the water ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
tank.
The research is being carried out under the
T out = Temperature of hot water leaving tank financial grant from TEQIP-II of VJTI.
T in = Temperature of water entering the tank.
C p = specific heat of water. 10000
Heat Transfer Coeff W/m²K

9000
Inside heat transfer coefficient hi is
8000
calculated by using following relation as:
Q (2) 7000
hi =
Ai ∆T 6000
5000
Where ∆T = T s – T w
4000
T s = saturation temperature of steam
3000
T w = avg wall temperature of the coil 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114
A i = Inside surface area of the coil = π di L Steam Temp at Inlet °C
RESULTS & DISCUSSIONS

Fig 3 Effect of Inlet temperature of steam
The mass flow rate of cooling water (m w ) on heat transfer coefficient
was kept constant and the inlet temperature
of steam T s and mass flow rate of steam (m s ) REFERNCES
is changed in steps during the experimental
measurements. The condensation heat G S Vijaya Raghavan Devanahalli G
transfer is determined using eqn (1). Heat Prabhanjan Timothy J Rennie 2004
transfer is determined using eqn (2). Natural convection heat transfer from
helical coiled tubes International Journal
of Thermal Sciences 43 359-365
9000 Marko S Jaric Srbislav B Genic Branislav M

Heat Transfer Coeff
8000 Jac imovic Nikola J Budimir Mirko M

7000 Dobrnjac 2012 Research on the shell-side
W/m²K
6000 thermal performances of heat exchangers

5000 with helical tube coils International
4000 Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 55
3000 4295-4300.
9.40 10.40 11.40 12.40 13.40
Mass flow Rate kg/s
Mohamed E Ali 1998 Experimental
investigation of natural convection from
Figure 2 HTC Vs Mass flow rate of vertical helical coiled tubes Int. J Heat
steam Mass Transfer 37(4) 665 - 671.
Mohamed E Ali 1998 Laminar natural
It can be observed from the Fig 1 that there is convection from constant heat flux
increase in condensation heat transfer
626
Study of Condensation Heat Transfer in Helical Coil
helical coiled tubes Int. J Heat Mass

Transfer 41(14) 2175-2182.
Rogers Y R Mayhew 1964 Heat transfer and
pressure loss in helically coiled tubes
with turbulent flow International Journal
of Heat and Mass Transfer 7 1207-1216.
Xin R C and Ebadian M A Natural
convection heats transfer from helicoidal
pipes Journal of Thermophysics and Heat
Transfer 1996 12(2) 297-302.
627
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OFFLOW BOILING HEAT TRANSFER IN

SINGLE HORIZONTAL SMALL DIAMETER CHANNEL USING VOF
MULTIPHASE MODEL
JIGNESH R.* and KUMAR K.
Mechanical Engineering Department, SVMIT, Bharuch, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: The present paper talks about Numerical analysis of two phase flow boiling
heat transfer in small diameter circular cross section horizontal channel with water as
a working fluid. Numerical analysis of flow boiling in 2.1 mm diameter channel has
been done in commercial CFD software ANSYS FLUENT 15 for predicting heat
transfer coefficient. Volume of Fluid (VOF) approach has been used in the numerical
analysis of flow boiling heat transfer. Numerical analysis has been performed for
different ranges of heat flux (22-80 kW/m2) and mass flux (100-500 kg/m2s). The
graphs has been plotted for heat transfer coefficient and vapour quality.
Keywords: Flow boiling; Numerical modelling; Volume of Fluid method.
INTRODUCTION mass fluxes are both moderate. The

qualitative axial variations of the heat
Boiling is defined as the process of phase transfer coefficient are also shown in the
changing from liquid to vapour state. It is Figure 1.
divided into two parts: pool boiling and flow
boiling. Flow boiling is considerably more
complicated than pool boiling, owing to the
coupling between hydrodynamics and boiling
heat transfer processes. A sequence of two-
phase and boiling heat transfer regimes takes
place along the heated channels during flow
Figure 1. Flow and heat transfer regimes
boiling. in a uniformly heated horizontal tube with
The preferred configuration for boiling moderate heat flux
channels is vertical up flow. In this
Flow boiling is attractive over single-phase
configuration buoyancy helps the mixture
liquid cooling from two main
flow, and the slip velocity between the two
considerations:(i) High heat transfer
phases that is caused by their density
coefficient during flow boiling.(ii) Higher
difference actually improves the heat
heat removal capability for a given mass flow
transfer. However, flow boiling in horizontal
rate of the coolant.
is also of interest.
NEED FOR SMALL CHANNEL
Figure 1 displays schematically the boiling
and heat transfer regimes in a uniformly A channel serves to accomplish two
heated horizontal pipe when the heat and objectives: (i) Bring a fluid into intimate
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: jigneshrohit@outlook.com 628

Jignesh and Kumar
contact with the channel walls and (ii) Bring varies with the diameter D for a circular tube,
fresh fluid to the walls and remove fluid whereas the flow rate depends on the cross-
away from the walls as the transport process sectional area, which varies linearly with D2.
is accomplished. The rate of the transport
process depends on the surface area, which
Table 1. Boundary condition for numerical analysis

Mass flux(G) Heat flux (q) Reynolds Inlet
(kg/m2s) (kW/m2) Number(Re) Temperature (T i ) (0C)
100 22-80 253.31 30

300 22-80 759.95 30
500 22-80 1266.58 30

Material for flow boiling heat transfer in 2.1
mm circular cross section channel is Copper
which is chosen because of high thermal
conductivity. Though it is hard to predict the
characteristics of flowing particle, Volume of
Fluid(VOF) method is used which lies under
Euler-Euler approach of multiphase modelling
of numerical analysis.
NUMERICAL MODELLING
Figure 2. Discretisation of 2D
Different ranges of heat flux and mass flux circular channel
has selected as boundary condition for
numerical analysis as shown in Table 1.2D
and 3D geometry of circular cross section
channel has been developed in commercial
GAMBIT software as shown in Figure 2 and
Figure 3.
Figure 2 shows the discretisation of 2D
geometry of channel with interval size of
0.05 mm while Figure 3 shows the enlarged
view of discretisation of 3D geometry of
circular cross section channel with same Figure 3. Enlarged view of Discretisation
interval size. of 3D circular channel
629
Numerical Analysis of Flow Boiling Heat Transfer inSingle Horizontal Small Diameter Channel using
VOF Multiphase Model
REFERENCES
Dharaiya V V Kandlikar S G 2012
Numerical investigation ofheat transfer
in rectangular microchannels under
H2boundary condition
duringdeveloping and fully developed
laminar flow Journal of Heat Transfer
134 1-10.
Ghiaasiaan S Mostafa 2008Two-Phase Flow,
Boiling and Condensation In
Conventional and Miniature Systems
Cambridge University Press Cambridge
121-134.
Kandlikar S G Garimella SLi D Colin S
King M R 2006 Heat Transfer And
Fluid Flow In Minichannels and
Microchannels Elsevier Ltd. Great
Britain 175-220.
Lee WSon G Yoon H Y 2012 Direct
numerical simulation of flow boiling in
a finned microchannel International
Communications in Heat and Mass
Transfer 39 1460–1466.
Magnini M Pulvirenti B Thome J R 2013
Numerical investigation of
hydrodynamics and heat transfer of
elongated bubbles during flow boiling
in a microchannel International Journal
of Heat and Mass Transfer 59 451–471.
Mukherjee A Kandlikar S G 2005 Numerical
simulation of growth of a vapour bubble
during flow boiling of water in a
microchannel Microfluid Nanofluid
Journal 11 37–145.
Qunwu H Fukagata K and Nobuhide K 2007
Numerical simulation of gas-liquid two-
phase flow and heat transfer with dry-
out in a micro tube6th International
Conference on Multiphase Flow(ICMF
2007) Leipzig Germany 1-12.
Zhuan R Wang W 2012 Flow pattern of
boiling in micro-channel by numerical
simulation International Journal of
Heat and Mass Transfer 55 1741–1753.
630
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDY ON CONVECTIVE MASS TRANSFER

ENHANCEMENT BY BAROCLINIC TORQUE INDUCED VORTEX
ARAVIND G.P.*, MUHAMMED RAFI K.M., FAHD BIN ABDUL HASIS and DEEPU M.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology, Trivandrum
Abstract: Passive mixing mechanisms are widely used for heat and mass transfer
enhancement. Vortices generated in flow field lead to gradients that favour convective mass
transfer. Computations on enhancement of convective mass transfer of sublimating solid fuel
by baroclinic torque generated vortices in the wake of a swept ramp placed in high speed flow
is presented here. Advection Upstream Splitting Method (AUSM) based computational
scheme employed in the present study, to solve compressible turbulent flow field involving
species transport, could capture the complex flow features resulted by vortex boundary layer
and shock boundary layer interactions. Convective mass transfer is found to get improved in
regions near boundary layer by horseshoe vortex and further transported to other regions by
counter rotating vortex pair. Vortices resulted by flow expansion near aft wall of wedge and
recompression wave-boundary layer interactions also promotes convective mass transport.
Extensive computations have been carried out to reveal the role of vortices dominance at
higher Reynolds numbers in promotion of convective mass transfer in turbulent boundary
layer.
Keywords: Vortex Boundary layer Interaction; Convective Mass Transfer

Enhancement; Baroclinic Torque Induced Vortex; Swept ramp.
INTRODUCTION for the possible improvement in heat/mass

transfer effects. Henze et al (2011)
Passive mixing devices are widely used in
experimentally examined the role of
conjugate heat and mass transfer applications
longitudinal tetrahedral vortex generators and
such as chemical processing systems, hybrid
found out how the ratio between height of
rocket propulsions systems, refrigeration
VG and hydrodynamic boundary layer
systems and thermal protection systems.
thickness will affect heat transfer. Petersen et
Promotion of mixing lead to improvement of
al (2007) investigated the baroclinic vortex
performance and operational efficiencies of
production and found that local azimuthal
such systems; thereby energy and
temperature gradients introduce vorticity.
environmental issues associated with such
Storey et al (1999) noticed a 7% increase in
systems can be brought down considerably.
frost growth in channel flow with induced
Passive mixing devices are often simple to
stream wise vortices. Compressible turbulent
implement in practical applications, do not
flows in passive mixing devices involves
require any power or external interference.
complex flow features such as
Vortices generated by solid boundary
shock/expansion waves and their interaction
features such as winglets [Webb et. al., 1994,
with boundary layers associated with solid
Jacobi et. al. 1995] sharp edges [Gentry et.
surfaces. It generates sharp gradients in flow
al.1997 and 2002] surface protuberance
field. Misaligned gradients of the flow
features [Liou et. al., 2000, Storey et. al.,
variables such as pressure and density and
1999] have been widely investigated by
presence of viscous stress in density gradient
many researchers over the last few decades
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:anu.aravind007@gmail.com 631

Aravind et al.
generate baroclinic torque induced vortices turbulent compressible flow incorporating

[Waitz et. al., 1991]. Vorticity generated by fuel and oxidizer species as follows.
this effect will be perpendicular to density is
given by ∂U ∂F ∂G ∂H
+ + + =S (2)
Dω ω 1 ∂t ∂x ∂y ∂z
= ⋅∇u + 3 ∇ρ × ∇p (1)
Dt ρ ρ Where U is the vector of all conservation
Baroclinic torque induced vortex generated variables, F, and G are fluxes in x and y
in a high speed flow past a swept ramp and directions, and S is the vector of source
its role promotion of convective mass terms.
transfer is analysed in the present study. A
The turbulence is modelled using standard κ-
schematic of major features in this flowfield
is given in figure 1. Flow expands as it spills ω turbulence model [1974].
over the ramp and thereby produces low
pressure region in wall. This results in the NUMERICAL MODELLING
baroclinic torque induced vortex generation. In the present study, AUSM [1993] available
Large scale streamwise vortex develops in a Finite Volume Method (FVM) based
when flow spills over the ramp which
commercial package (Ansys Fluent), has
advects more fluid in the free stream to the
centre. Horseshoe vortices generated by flow been made use for the inviscid flux
separation behind the ramp and moves computations. Key aspect of the present
downstream in boundary layer region. problem is implemented in conjunction with
Counter-rotating vortex pairs have been boundary conditions given on fuel layer
observed in both vortex systems. These represented in bottom of the computational
vortex systems die out due to the viscous domain. Simulations have been performed on
effects in developing turbulent boundary 3D computational domain to compare the
layer. Species evolved by the vaporisation of
enhancement due to baroclinically induced
solid fuel gets transported to the mixing zone
initially by the horseshoe vortices and later vortex interaction. The Computational
carried by streamwise counter-rotating vortex domain consists of a flat hydrocarbon fuel
pair. In this process fuel gets mixed up well layer undergoing mass transport in simple
with high speed oxidiser stream as the vortex convective boundary layer as shown in figure
system provides low velocity region to 2. A simple flow manipulator (swept ramp)
promote molecular diffusion. is placed on the flat hydrocarbon fuel layer to
create vortices so as to bring in effect of the
vortex boundary layer interaction in flat fuel
layer. The computational domain were
initially discretized with 8×106 control
volumes and later refined to 1.6×107 level for
which convergence of species profile has
been attained. The entire computational
Figure 1. A schematic of flow features
domain was initialized with oxidizer fluid
GOVERNING EQUATIONS inflow conditions. Grid is refined near all no-
Present problem involving mass transport slip walls and near to the swept ramp, by
enhancement in Baroclinic induced vortex giving biasing in direction normal to no-slip
mass transfer enhancement can be modelled walls, maintaining a y+ of 1.2. For the
using conservative form of Navier-Stokes present density based solver using explicit
equations which govern a three dimensional time integration, convergence of the order of
632
Numerical Study on Convective Mass Transfer Enhancement by Baroclinic Torque Induced Vortex
10-5 for all residuals has attained after upstream of the oblique shock contact
125000 iterations with a CFL of 0.5. point. Reattachment compression wave is
also generated from the boundary layer
after the ramp. A high temperature
gradient region also formed upstream of
expansion wave reattachment. In short,
the present flow field of shock interaction
on a convective mass transfer boundary
layer involves many zones of sharp
Figure 2: Computational Domain gradients.
In mass transfer studies, the dimensionless
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION number used is Sherwood number (Sh)
In the present study, a swept ramp is used for which is the ratio of the total rate of mass
the The computational procedure was transfer to the rate of diffusive mass transport
validated using experimentally measured alone. Here in the present study a relative
centreline wall pressures for a similar ramp
Sherwood number is used for the
placed in supersonic flow [Donohue, 1996].
Streamline plot of the computed results for quantification of the mass transfer. Relative
the 3D domain is given in figure 3. All Sherwood number is the ratio of Sherwood
salient flow features, described before (figure number at the vortex effected area to the
1), has been captured. Sherwood number at vortex unaffected area.
It is analogous to the heat transfer
correlations with Nusselt number in terms of
Reynolds number and Prandtl number.
Figure 3: Streamlined view of computation

Velocity magnitudes associated with regions
of vortex boundary layer interaction as well Figure 4: Mass fraction profiles at two
as counter rotating vortex pair are observed planes (z=5mm&10mm) above the plate
to be relatively smaller compared to other
regions. This enables the formation of The formation of counter rotating vortex pair
gradients favouring enhancement of mass and horseshoe vortices will increase the
transfer. turbulence and that will increase the residue
time available for the interaction of oxidizer
EFFECT OF VORTICES ON MASS with the fuel.
TRANSFER
A strong oblique shock is developed at
the leading edge of swept ramp.
Boundary layer developed at the fuel
surface separates in the region of oblique
shock interaction and a separation shock
originates from the boundary layer
633
Aravind et al.
Figure 5: Variation of ShR along span isobars and results in the production of
wise direction at various axial locations baroclinic torque induced vortices which
will further enhance the convective mass
Baroclinically induced vortices are produced
the temperature gradients. An enhancement transfer.
in mass transfer and an increase in Sh R is
observed at some distance in the span wise
REFERENCES
direction because of the vortices generated Gentry M C and Jacobi A M 1997 Heat
by the sweep given in the ramp and also due transfer enhancement by delta-wing
to the horse shoe vortices. vortex generators on a flat plate: vortex
EFFECT OF REYNOLDS NUMBER interactions with the boundary layer.
The effect of Reynolds numbers on mass Experimental Thermal and Fluid
transfer enhancement in presence of Science 14 231-242.
baroclinic torque induced vortex has been Gentry M C and Jacobi A M 2002 Heat
estimated for Re= 5.0 x 107, 5.5 x 107, transfer enhancement by delta-wing-
and 6.0 x 107 levels. As the velocity generated tip vortices in flat-plate and
increases, there will be a strong drift in developing channel flows Journal of
the vortices that will result in heat transfer 124 1158-1168.
enhancement of mass transfer. Henze M. and Von Wolfersdorf J 2011.
Influence of approach flow conditions
on heat transfer behind vortex
generators. International Journal of
Heat and Mass Transfer 54 279-287.
Jacobi A M and Shah R K 1995 Heat transfer
surface enhancement through the use of
longitudinal vortices: a review of recent
progress Experimental Thermal and
Figure 6: Mass fraction along centreline
Fluid Science 11 295-309.
at different Reynolds Number
Launder B E and Spalding D B 1974 The
CONCLUSIONS numerical computation of turbulent
flows Computer methods in applied
Computationally investigated the impact mechanics and engineering 3 269-289.
of vortex generators in the convective
mass transfer enhancement. Shock Liou T M Chen C C and Tsai T W 2000 Heat
induced mixing enhancement is already transfer and fluid flow in a square duct
with 12 different shaped vortex
in use in scramjet engines. Two
generators Journal of Heat Transfer 122
longitudinal counter rotating vortex pair 327-335.
are generated along the sliding surface of
the ramp and lateral vortices are formed Liou M S and Steffen C J 1993 A new flux
due to the sweep given in the ramp. Small splitting scheme Journal of
Computational physics 107(1) 23-39.
horseshoe vortices are formed finally
because of the flow attachment to the Petersen M R Stewart G R and Julien K 2007
wedge wall. Large Pressure gradients will Baroclinic vorticity production in
be associated with the generated protoplanetary disks. II Vortex growth
compression wave which will be imposed and longevity The Astrophysical
Journal 658 1252.
on the density gradients at the oxidizer
fuel interface. This will produce Promvonge P Chompookham T
misalignment in the isopycnals and Kwankaomeng S. and Thianpong C
634
Numerical Study on Convective Mass Transfer Enhancement by Baroclinic Torque Induced Vortex
2010 Enhanced heat transfer in a

triangular ribbed channel with
longitudinal vortex generators. Energy
Conversion and Management 51 1242-
1249.
Storey B D and Jacobi A M 1999 The effect
of streamwise vortices on the frost
growth rate in developing laminar
channel flows International Journal of
Heat and Mass Transfer 42 3787-3802.
Waitz I Marble F and Zukoski E 1991
Investigation of a contoured wall
injector for hypervelocity mixing
augmentation AIAA Journal 31 3140.
Webb R L and Kim N H 1994 Principle of
enhanced heat transfer Taylor Francis
New York NY USA.
635
ICCMS2016
THERMOHYDRAULIC STUDY OF V-CORRUGATED HEAT

EXCHANGER
DUTTA P.*, DAS A. and DUTTA P.P.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Tezpur University, Tezpur, India
Abstract: Corrugated plate heat exchangers have large surface area to volume ratio
and increased turbulence due to surface corrugations and thus help to improve the
energy saving capabilities in various industries. A two dimensional heat transfer study
was investigated in a triangular wavy duct with different channel heights of 12 mm,
14 mm and 16 mm for a single corrugation angle. The commercial code FLUENT was
used to study the flow features. The wall temperature was kept constant for the study.
The results showed that V- shaped corrugated channels have a major impact on heat
transfer enhancement. A low Reynolds number k-Ɛ turbulence model was employed
to account for the turbulence in the flow. Therefore, these types of heat exchangers
with V-shaped corrugation are preferred for various equipment for energy savings.
The numerical results showed that the variation of average plate temperature, Nusselt
number with Reynolds numbers were within the range of ± 7 from available data.
Average Nusselt number increased in corrugated plate from a value of 6 to 14 while
that of parallel plate channel varied from 4.5 to 5.0. As the channel height decreases,
the average Nusselt number increases. Also the goodness factor (j/f) increased with
decreasing channel height so the best performance was observed for the corrugation
with channel height of 12 mm. For wide variety of engineering applications like
heating, air conditioning unit and waste heat from the exhaust of an engine,
corrugated channel is a favourable alternative.
Keywords: Corrugations; Turbulence; Thermal boundary layer; k-Ɛ
Turbulence model.
INTRODUCTION heat exchanger belongs to the category of an

indirect heat exchanger. Plate heat
Heat exchangers are basically of two types exchangers comprise of a stack of parallel
that is direct contact heat exchanger and plates that are corrugated both to increase
indirect contact heat exchanger. In direct turbulence and to give mechanical rigidity.
contact type of heat exchanger the two media These stacks of corrugated metal plates are
between which heats is exchanged are in the heat transfer surfaces [Kuppan, 2000].
direct contact. Cooling tower and scrubbers Corrugated plate heat exchangers have
are examples of direct contact heat become an essential part for many industrial
exchangers. Contrary to this in indirect applications. Plate heat exchangers have a
contact heat exchanger the two media very good heat transfer characteristics. This
between which heat is exchanged are way they can be made more compact than
separated by wall [Kumar, 1990]. A plate
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:poojadutta132@gmail.com 636

Dutta et al.
usual shell and tube heat exchangers with assumptions, the governing equations can be
very large surface area to volume ratio. written as [Smith and Pongjet, 2008]
The assessment of performance showed that Mass:
wavy channels give rates of heat transfer when
∂
operated at transitional Reynolds number. ( ρ ui ) = 0 (1)
Islamoglu and Parmaksizoglu, (2003) ∂xi
investigated the correlation for fully developed where ui is the axial velocity,
Nusselt number and friction coefficient for air
Momentum:
flowing inside corrugated channels of plate heat
exchangers. The experiments were performed for ∂
two different values of channel height 5mm and
∂x j
( ρ ui u j ) =
10mm for a single corrugation angle of Reynolds
number in the range of 1200 to 4000.They found ∂ρ ∂   ∂ui ∂u j 2 ∂ui 
that as the channel height is increased, the − +  µ  + − δ ij  
∂xi ∂x j   ∂x j ∂xi 3 ∂x j  
pressure gradient decreases but the friction factor
∂
increases. Moreover performance considering
flow area goodness factor slightly decreased
+
∂x j
(
− ρ ui′u ′j )
(2)
.They also performed a numerical study using
Energy:
finite element methods for the corrugated heat
exchanger channel and the results were compared ∂
ui ( ρ E + p )  =
with the experiment results Islamoglu and ∂xi 
Parmaksizoglu, (2004). Faizal and Ahmed,
∂  c p µt  ∂T 
+ ui (τ ij ) 
(2012) performed experimental studies on a
 k + 
corrugated plate heat exchanger for a small ∂x j  Prt  ∂x j eff

(3)
temperature difference. They investigated the
Here E is the total energy,
channel height between the plates to determine
the configuration that gives the optimum heat E=c p T+p/ρ+u2/2,Pr t is the turbulent
Prandlt number and (τ ij ) is the deviatoric
transfer for water. Three different spacing such as
6mm, 9mm and 12mm were used. eff
stress tensor,
 ∂u j
 2 ∂ui ∂ui
(τ )=
ij eff
∂ x
µeff 
  − µij
3
+
∂∂x j
x
δ ij
(4)
 i  j
In the present numerical study, k-ε turbulent

model which was proposed by (Launder and
Spalding, 1974) was employed. The model
consists of two equations for turbulent kinetic
energy (k) and dissipation rate of the
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the turbulent kinetic energy (ε).
corrugated channel.
The equations for turbulent kinetic energy (k)
MATERIALS AND METHODS and dissipation rate of the turbulent kinetic
energy (ε) are given by
The governing equations to be considered are
continuity, momentum and energy. The Turbulent kinetic energy (k) equation
assumptions that were made are two
dimensional flows, steady state, turbulent and
no slip at the wall. Based on the above
637
Thermohydraulic Study of V-Corrugated Heat Exchanger
∂ dissipation kinetic equation. The SIMPLE

( ρ kui ) =
∂xi algorithm was used with the flow
assumption.
∂  µt  ∂k 
 µ +   + Gk − ρε
∂x j  σ k  ∂x j  (5) RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Turbulent kinetic energy dissipation (ε) The average Nusselt number as a function of
equation Reynolds number for different channel
heights is plotted in Fig 2. It was observed
∂ ∂  µt  ∂ε 
( ρε ui ) =  µ +  + that with the decrease in channel height
∂xi ∂x j  σε  ∂x j  Nusselt number increases.
C1ε ( ε / k ) Gk − C2ε ρ ( ε 2 / k ) (6)
Here G k represents the generation of
turbulent kinetic energy due to mean velocity
gradients, σ k and σ ε are effective Prandlt
numbers for turbulent kinetic energy and rate
for dissipation, respectively; C1ε and C2ε are
constants and µt is the eddy viscosity and is
given as:
µt = ( ρ Cµ k 2 ) / ε (7)
Fig. 2: Average Nusselt Number versus
The empirical constants for turbulence model Reynolds number for corrugated plate of
are arrived by comprehensive data fitting for a different channel heights.
wide range of turbulent flow (Launder and
Spalding,1974) and (Versteeg and CONCLUSION
Malalasekera,1995) by Numerical study was performed to
Cµ =0.09, C1ε =1.47, C2ε =1.92, investigate the heat transfer and flow
characteristics in a 2D-corrugated channel for
σ k =1.0, σ ε =1.3. (8) turbulent flow with Reynolds number 400-
2000. The results of the average Nusselt
Numerical procedure number, goodness factor (j/f) in different
Two dimensional continuity, momentum and channel heights were presented.The heat
energy equation were solved numerically. transfer characteristics for corrugated
The standard k-ε turbulent was selected. The channels are different than flat plate as flow
upwind and central difference methods are interruption occurs along with recirculation
used for convections and diffusion and reattachment. The convective heat
respectively. The FLUENT was used as the transfer is enhanced heavily as thermal
solver and post –processor. The boundary layer is interrupted because of the
discretization was done using the PRESTO corrugation.
method for pressure and second order
upwind method for momentum, energy,
turbulent kinetic equation and turbulent
638
Dutta et al.
Table 1. Specifications for the corrugated channel under study.
Channel Wavy Corrugation Number of Wavy

height(mm) Angle(θ) length(mm) waves height(mm)
12 60 180 32 3
14 60 180 32 3
16 60 180 32 3
difference applications Experimental
It was observed that numerical results of Thermal and Fluid Science 36 242-248.
variation of average plate temperature, Islamoglu Y & Parmaksizoglu C 2003 The
Nusselt number with Reynolds numbers were effect of channel height on the enhanced
within ± 7 from experimental data. Average heat transfer characteristics in a
Nusselt number increased much higher in corrugated heat exchanger channel
corrugated plate (6 to 14) relative to that of Applied Thermal Engineering 23(8)
parallel plate channel (4.5 – 5.0) depending 979-987
upon the spacing of the corrugated channel.
Kumar D S 1990 Heat and Mass Transfer SK
Goodness factor (j/f) increases with
Kataria & Sons Delhi.
decreasing channel height and the channel
with height of 12 mm showed the best Kuppan T 2000 Heat exchanger design
results. For wide variety of engineering handbookMarcel Dekker Inc. New
applications like heating and air conditioning York.
unit, corrugated channel is a favourable
alternative. Moreover, waste heat from the
exhaust of an engine may preferably trapped
by using such corrugated surface heat
exchanger.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
“Development of an innovative model of
Combined Heat and Power from Purely
Producer Gas Based Engine Alternator
System for Partial Conventional Energy
Substitution of Tea Processing Industries in
North-East India” Funded Science and
engineering Research Board, Govt. of India:
2012-2016.
REFERENCES
Faizal M & Ahmed M R 2012 Experimental
studies on a corrugated plate heat
exchanger for small temperature
639
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF NATURAL CONVECTION AROUND A

PAIR OF HEATED CYLINDERS INSIDE A COLD SQUARE
ENCLOSURE
CHAUHAN S.P.* and THAKUR H.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, School of Engineering, Gautam Buddha University, India.

Abstract: The current study investigates the natural convection induced by a
temperature difference between a cold outer square enclosure and two hot inner
cylinders. The shape of inner cylinders cross section is selected as square, rhombic
square and equilateral triangle one by one to study their comparative performance by
keeping surface area of cylinders same. The effects of the Rayleigh number and the
position of cylinder are studied with help of corresponding flow field and temperature
distribution. Variations of local Nusselt number along the walls of the enclosure and
along the surface of the internal bodies are also drawn to understand the mechanism
of heat interaction between the hot internal bodies and the enclosure.
Keywords: Natural Convection; Square Enclosure; Enclosure with Internal
Cylinders.
INTRODUCTION double cylinders inside the

square/rectangular enclosure.
Natural convection heat transfer within an
enclosure takes place in many engineering RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
and industrial applications such as heat
exchangers, nuclear safety systems, solar The objective of the current study is to
collectors, electronic equipment cooling etc. investigate the influence of the operating
A large number of research has been carried parameters such as Grashof number, shape of
out to investigate the phenomena of cylinders and the location of
buoyancy induced convection within cylinder/cylinders on flow field and
different shaped geometry, with different temperature field development due to natural
enclosed fluids and with different boundary convection around a pair of square, a
conditions. Enclosure with internal object or rhombic square and triangular cylinders
objects within it represents more realistic inside the square enclosure. The enclosed
cases of many practical applications. The fluid is air and the Prandtl number is
presence of internal body or bodies has assumed to be fixed at 0.71. The Grashof
significant effects on the pattern of fluid flow number is varied in the range 104 to 106. The
and heat transfer within the enclosure. distance between the cylinders in all cases is
Geometry of the enclosure, shape, size and set within a range of 0.3 L to 0.7 L.
number of internal objects, properties of Results in the current analysis is validated
enclosed fluid, and types of thermal with help of results of Moukalled and
boundary conditions are few parameters Acharya (1996) under similar circumstances
result in different variant of problems in this and found to be in good agreement. Grid
category. Many researches have been found independence test has also been performed
in literature to have performed experiments and based on this best suitable coarser
by placing single and many others with
_____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: chauhansatendra251992@gmail.com 640

Chauhan and Thakur
arrangement of grid is used to obtain the HEAT TRANSFER

results. The side of the square cylinder has
Figure 2 shows variation of local Nusselt
also be fixed keeping the surface area same
number along the walls of enclosure and
as of the circular cylinder used for validation.
internal cylinders for Ra = 106. Stream flow
FLOW PATTERN AND and temperature distribution lines play a vital
role to describe the heat transfer.
TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION
Dependencies of heat transfer on shape of
Figure 1 shows a typical distribution of inner cylinders and centre to centre distance
stream function and isotherms around the between cylinders (δ) are also shown in
pair of cylinders in square enclosure. For Ra comparative manner. Upper left corner of the
= 106, two eddies are developed when δ = enclosure, top left vertex of inner square
0.3, grows to four in number for δ = 0.5 but cylinder of case 1 and vertex on the top for
again negotiates with two cells only for δ = case 2 & case 3 considered as the starting
0.7 as the passage between inner cylinders point and a clockwise movement along the
and the vertical walls of the enclosure is surface is taken for all the diagrams showing
narrowed down considerably for case 1 and variation of local Nusselt number A
case 2 but for case 3, four eddies are comparison of averaged Nusselt number for
developed when δ = 0.3 and centre and size the enclosure, left cylinder and right inner
of eddies close to left and right wall of cylinder is shown in Figure 3. Average value
enclosure shifted up when δ = 0.5 and δ = 0.7 of Nusselt number of enclosure for rhombus
respectively. The effect of Shape change of is maximum when δ = 0.3 & 0.5 but when δ
cylinders is visible in terms of flow = 0.7, square attain maximum value and
separation and boundary layer development. equilateral triangle attain minimum value of
Extent of asymmetry in case 2 and case 3 are average Nusselt number. For left and right
more than case 1. Isotherms are distributed cylinder, average Nusselt number attain
according to stream flow lines around maximum value with respect to triangle
enclosure and cylinders and easily when δ = 0.3 & 0.5 and when δ = 0.7 attain
understandable buoyancy driven mechanism. maximum value with respect to square and
For case 1, two zone where denser isotherms minimum with respect to square cylinder but
and one low isotherm lines zone occurs when when δ = 0.7, attain minimum value.
δ = 0.3 & 0.5 but when δ = 0.7 one zone of
denser isotherm lines at middle of top
CONCLUSION
enclosure wall. Denser isotherm lines Numerical simulation of natural convection
directly mean high temperature gradient at around cylinders is performed. Based on the
particular location. For case 2, when δ = 0.3 results and discussion following conclusions
& 0.7 one zone of denser isotherm lines at can be drawn for all three cases of enclosure
middle of top enclosure wall and when δ = with a pair of cylinders conclusions are (i)
0.5 two zone where denser isotherm lines at Heat transfer for case 2 is maximum when δ
corners and one low isotherm lines zone = 0.3 & 0.5 but when δ = 0.7, case 1 attain
occurs at middle of top wall of enclosure. maximum value and case 3 attain minimum
Whereas For case 3, when δ = 0.3, 0.5 & 0.7 value of heat transfer and (ii) for left and
two zone where denser isotherm lines at right cylinder, heat transfer for case 3 is
corners and one low isotherm lines zone maximum when δ = 0.3 & 0.5 and minimum
occurs at middle of top wall of enclosure. with respect to case 1 but when δ = 0.7, case
This variation in isotherm lines when we 1 attain maximum and case 2 attain minimum
shift to case 1 to case 3 just because of value.
impact of shape of cylinder on flow of hot
stream.
641
Numerical Analysis of Natural Convection Around a Pair of Heated Cylinders Inside a Cold Square Enclosure
(a) δ = 0.30 (b) δ = 0.50 (c) δ = 0.70

6
Ra = 10
Figure 1. Effects of cylinder to cylinder distance on flow field and temperature
distribution for Ra = 106
En Lft sqr cyl Rgt sqr cyl
18 120 120
16
δ = 0.3
δ = 0.3
100 δ = 0.5 100 δ = 0.3
δ = 0.5
14
δ = 0.5 δ = 0.7
80
δ = 0.7
12 80
δ = 0.7
Nulft sqr cyl
Nurgt sqr cyl
10
Nuen
60
60
8
6 40
40
4
20
20
2
0
0 0 1 2 3 4 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
S S
S
En Lft tiltedsqr Rgt tilted sqr
35 120 120
30
100 δ = 0.3 100 δ = 0.3
δ = 0.3 δ = 0.5 δ = 0.5
δ = 0.5
25
80
δ = 0.7 80
δ = 0.7
Nurgt tilted sqr
Nulft tilted sqr
20 δ = 0.7
Nuen
60 60
15
40 40
10
20 20
5
0 0 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
S S S
En Lft trg cyl Rht trg cyl
16 100 100
δ = 0.3(xc=0.15)
14 δ = 0.3(xc=0.15) δ = 0.3(xc=0.15)
δ = 0.5(xc=0.25)
δ = 0.5(xc=0.25) 80 δ = 0.5(xc=0.25) 80
δ = 0.7(xc=0.35)
12 δ = 0.7(xc=0.35)
δ = 0.7(xc=0.35)
10
Nurgt trg cyl
Nulft trg cyl
60 60
Nuen
6 40 40
4
20 20
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
S S S
(a) Enclosure (b) Left cylinder (c) Right cylinder

Figure 2. Variation of local Nusselt number along the walls of enclosure and internal
cylinder for Ra = 106
642
Chauhan and Thakur
6 6
En(Ra10 ) Left Cyl(Ra 106) Right Cyl(Ra 10 )
5.8 16.0 16.0
5.6
Square Square
Square Rhombus
15.5 15.5 Rhombus
5.4 Rhombus Triangle Triangle
Triangle
5.2
Avg Nu right cyl

Avg Nu left cyl
15.0 15.0
Avg Nuen
5.0
14.5
14.5
4.8
4.6 14.0
14.0
4.4
13.5
4.2 13.5
4.0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
13.0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 13.0
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
δ δ
δ
(a) Enclosure (b) Left cylinder (c) Right cylinder

Figure 3. Variation of averaged Nusselt number with different δ for enclosure and
internal cylinders for Ra = 106
REFERENCES and diagonal locations Int. J. Heat Mass

Transfer 53 5905–5919
Butler C Newport D and Geron M 2013
Natural Convection Experiments on a Moukalled F and Acharya S 1996 Natural
Heated Horizontal Cylinder in a convection between concentric
Differentially Heated Square Cavity, horizontal circular and square cylinders
Experi. Thermal and Fluid Sci. 44 199– J Thermophys Heat Transfer 10 524-
208 531
Chae M and Chung B 2011 Effect of pitch- Park Y G Ha M Y Choi C and Park J 2013
to-diameter ratio on the natural Natural convection in a square enclosure
convection heat transfer of two with two inner circular cylinders
vertically aligned horizontal cylinders positioned at different vertical locations
Chem. Eng. Sci. 66 5321–5329 Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 77 501–518
Karimi F Xu H T Wang Z Yang Mo and Park Y G Yoon H S Ha M Y 2013 Study on
Zhang Y 2014 Numerical simulation of natural convection in a cold square
unsteady natural convection from heated enclosure with a pair of hot horizontal
horizontal circular cylinders in a square cylinders positioned at different vertical
enclosure Numer. Heat Transfer Part A locations Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 65
65 715–731 696–712
Kim B S Lee D S Ha M Y and Yoon H S Shu C and Zhu Y D 2002 Efficient
2008 A numerical study of natural computation of natural convection in a
convection in a square enclosure with a concentric annulus between an outer
circular cylinder at different vertical square cylinder and an inner circular
locations Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 51 cylinder Int. J. Numer. Methods Fluids
1888–1906 38 429–445
Kumar De and Dalal A 2006 A numerical Shu C Xue H and Zhu Y D 1996 Numerical
study of natural convection around a study of natural convection in an
square, horizontal, heated cylinder eccentric annulus between a square
placed in an enclosure Int. J. Heat Mass outer cylinder and a circular inner
Transfer 49 4608–4623 cylinder using DQ method Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer 44 3321–3333
Lee J M Ha M Y and Yoon H S 2010 Natural
convection in a square enclosure with a
circular cylinder at different horizontal
643
ICCMS2016
PARAMETRIC INVESTIGATION OF PERFORMANCE OF PORTAL

FRAME AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURE
SHARMA S.2, BHATT P.2, SINGH T.1, MATSAGAR V.2 and REDDY G.R.1
1
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India,
2
Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi, India,
Abstract:Design codes in India (IS 456-2000, IS 1642-1989) like most of the codes
around the world specify minimum cover to reinforcement to obtain a specific fire
resistance rating (FRR). FRR is usually determined by standard fire test. The problem
associated with limited information provided by the experiments for determining the
complex behavior of concrete under fire, is well substituted by the use of numerical
techniques. In this paper a 3D Finite Element (FE) model for portal frame is
developed for studying its thermo-mechanical response using different parameters,
which are grade of concrete (M30, M40 and M60), grade of steel rebar (Fe250, Fe450
and Fe500), types of aggregate (carbonate and siliceous) and different fire exposure
conditions of one, two and three sides of beams (only sides; only bottom; sides and
bottom) exposed to fire. With the progress of fire, the variation of stress from top
surface to bottom of beam is no longer linear. The stresses changes randomly along
the depth. The effect of grade of steel is significant when only sides are exposed to
fire. It happens due to the low rise of temperature the middle bottom steel.
Keywords: Fire Resistance Rating; Finite Element.
INTRODUCTION cover to reinforcement of the members. The

Concrete prior to start of 20th century was limitation of this approach is that response of
considered sufficient fire resisting material in the structure and the damages it undergoes
itself. Compared to present, the constructions after a fire accident are not adequately
during that period were architecturally analyzed. This paper attempts to analyze the
simpler and had lot of open spaces. Thus dependence of fire response of portal frame
both the probability of occurrence of fire and with parameters like grade of concrete, grade
the loss of life and property was very low. of steel, aggregate type and fire exposure
conditions. Although in actual fire scenario,
British Standard (BS 476-1932) in 1932 was exposure conditions cannot be controlled but
one of the initial steps to take into account taking it as parameter will help in deciding
design consideration for fire. In most of the the judicious use of fire proofing material.
later developed codes fire resistant rating Understanding of dependence of
(FRR) of member was defined in terms of the performance on grade of concrete, grade of
duration to which the member can withstand steel and aggregate types is needed for
fire without failing. BS 8110-1997, IS 456- selection of optimum construction material.
2000, IS 1642-1989 aims to achieve the
required fire FRR by providing a certain
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shaileshs@barc.gov.in 644

Sharma et al.
CONCRETE AT ELEVATED as per the guidelines of IS 456-2000

TEMPERATURE considering the end reactions transferred by
the static load of beam. The length of beam
Properties of concrete changes rapidly at
and column is both 5100 mm with rigid joint
elevated temperature [Arioz, 2007; Fletcher
and hinged support. The effect of
et al., 2007].When ordinary concrete is
confinement is not considered in present
heated to 300°C strength reduces by 10-20%
model. The geometric details of portal frame
and up to 600°C it reduces by 60-70%
and section of the beam and column is as
[Husem, 2006].The strength of concrete
shown Figures 1 and 2. During heat transfer
becomes nearly zero as the temperature
analysis, the beam was subjected to the ISO
reaches 1000 °C. Modulus of elasticity for
834 standard fire for 100 minutes with
concretes is reduced with the increase in
different sides of the beam exposed to fire
temperature. The elastic modulus at 200 °C,
and one side (inner side) of columns exposed
400 °C and 600 °C are respectively about
to fire. The pressure load applied including
80%, 40% and 6% of the original unheated
the self-weight of beam was 0.07
value [Chang et al., 2006].In the present
N/mm2 .
study the properties are taken from Euro code
4000 mm
2 (2005). The properties essential to carry out
the analysis includes specific heat, thermal
conductivity, density, thermal expansion,
Poisson’s ratio, elastic modulus, stress strain
curve in compression and tension. 4300 mm
MODELING 5100 mm
5100 mm
The thermo-mechanical analysis of

Reinforced Concrete (RC)frame subjected to 12 mm rebar
elevated temperature is performed using
finite element based software ABAQUS®. In
non-linear analysis the stress-strain curved is Hinged
traced in various increments by following an support
iterative process. The elastic and plastic
deformations are decided by the yield Figure1: Geometrical Details of Frame.
criteria. Various parameters are to be defined
that control the behavior of members when 200
subjected to loading. Cracking is said to be
initiated when the stress in any direction lies 2-10φ
outside the yield surface. In present study the
25 mm
concrete damaged plasticity (CDP) model cover all
available in ABAQUS® is used.
400
1-14φ
GEOMETRIC DETAILS OF PORTAL
FRAME 2-12φ
Dimensions of beam analysed by tested by
Wu et al. (1993) is extended to be used as a Figure 2: Cross Section of beam
part of portal frame. Columns were designed
645
Parametric Investigation of Portal Frame at Elevated Temperature
0 (a) 0 (b) 0 (c)

(a) Carbonate Aggregate, M40, Fe250
Deflection (mm)
-20 (b) Carbonate Aggregate, M40, Fe450

-20 -20
(c) Carbonate Aggregate, M40, Fe500
-40
(d) Siliceous Aggregate, M40, Fe250
-40 -40
-60 (e) Siliceous Aggregate, M40, Fe450
-80 -60 -60 (f) Siliceous Aggregate, M40, Fe500

0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100
0 (d) 0 (e) 0 (f)

Deflection (mm)
-20
-20 -20 Fire Exposure
Bottom
-40
Sides
-40 -40 Bottom and sides
-60
-80 -60 -60

0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100
Time (minutes) Time (minutes) Time (minutes)
Figure 3: Comparison of Mid Span Deflection for Different Fire Exposures for M40 concrete
646
Sharma et al.
ANALYSIS OF PORTAL FRAME With the progress of fire, the variation of

stress from top surface to bottom of beam is
The parameters in the study includes types of no longer linear. The stresses changes
aggregate (carbonate and siliceous),grade of randomly along the depth.No perfect neutral
concrete (M30, M40 and M60), grade of steel axis is visible in the section because of the
rebar (Fe250, Fe450 and Fe500) and fire complex interaction between concrete and
exposure conditions of one, two and three steel.
sides of beams (only sides; only bottom;
sides and bottom) exposed to fire. In all 54 The deflection profile generally shows a high
analysis were carried out. The outputs nonlinearity with the increase in time for
obtained from above analysis include nodal bottom and sides exposed to fire. It happens
temperature at mid span, stress at different due to the deteriorating properties at elevated
depth in the mid span and mid span temperature.
deflection. The deflection profile of individual member
The distribution of temperature in the section shows large deformations at the elevated
plays a very important role in deciding the temperature.
mechanical response of the structure. Thus The effect of grade of steel is not very
accuracy in capturing the thermal response is significant when only bottom or bottom and
desirable for better prediction of mechanical sides are exposed to fire. It happens because
behaviour. The thermal behaviour is however at elevated temperatures the loss in strength
independent of the grade of concrete and of steel is very high so the effect of grade of
depends on type of aggregate. steel is reduced considerably resulting in
The study of stress variation gives an idea of moderate change in deflection.
the internal forces acting at different location. The effect of grade of steel is significant
Analysis of stress distribution inside the when only sides are exposed to fire. It
section is essential to understand the happens due to the low rise of temperature
interaction between concrete and steel and to the middle bottom steel. A significant
estimate there is dual strength of member at amount of strength is still left in the steel
elevated temperature. which helps in deflection control. The
The failure criterion in most of the case is difference in final deflection at 100 minutes
defined by limiting the deflection to a certain for M30 concrete, Fe 250 steel and carbonate
value. Thus a complete analysis of deflection aggregate when compared M30 concrete, Fe
is very essential to analyse the response of 450 steel and carbonate aggregate when only
frame. The deflection is characterised by a sides are exposed to fire is 66.87%.
high nonlinearity in the final stages owing to
The higher the grade of concrete more is the
the deteriorating strength and increasing
variation in deflection for different grade of
strains. Deflection profile for different
steel for different sides exposed to fire.
combinations of M40 concrete are shown in
Figure 3.
CONCLUSIONS
The temperature rise in siliceous aggregate is
more than carbonate aggregate owing to the
high thermal conductivity.
647
ICCMS2016
THERMAL DESIGN AND ANALYSES OF LITHIUM-ION BATTERY

FOR ROVER OF AN INTERPLANETARY MISSIONS: MODELING AND
SIMULATION
JAYARAMAN S*, CHANNI A., BINDAGI S.V., SRINIVASAN M.S., SATYANARAYANA,
RAVINDRAN R., BARVE S.G. and SHARMA A.K
ISRO Satellite Centre, Old Airport Road, Bengaluru, India
Abstract: Rover of an interplanetary mission carries a Lithium ion battery inside

Warm Electronics Box (WEB) and a sleeve is designed to hold the battery cells in
place. It is required to analyze the battery from thermal point of view to check the
adequacy of the sleeve design. Two options of sleeve designs are evaluated for
thermal adequacy. To establish design margins, three cases namely hot case, cold case
and heater power during charging of the battery are needed to be analyzed. The
present work describes the thermal design and analysis of the battery.
Keywords: Battery; Simulation; Rover
INTRODUCTION performed transient thermal analysis to

predict the thermal behaviour of the Ni-Cd
The primary source of electric power for a battery on board remote sensing satellite
space mission is from the solar arrays, in using I-DEAS TMG software. Passive
which the solar cells convert solar energy thermal control system has been able to
into electric power by photovoltaic maintain the battery temperature and gradient
conversion. During a solar eclipse, when the among the cells within the acceptable limits.
power from the solar arrays is not available,
The present study is for a 3Ah Lithium ion
power storage devices such as rechargeable
battery of a Rover for interplanetary mission.
batteries provide the power. These batteries
The battery sleeve which is a supporting
are discharged during eclipses and are
structure also provides the conduction path
charged slowly during sunlight periodically
for the battery cells. Two sleeve designs are
(Gilmore D S, 2002). ISRO’s planetary
proposed from structural and mechanical
exploration missions require rechargeable
point of view. It is required to analyze these
batteries that can be operated at extreme
options from thermal point of view. The
temperatures. Lithium ion batteries are
present work also describes the thermal
widely used in modern space technology.
analysis of the battery for various cases
Significant improvements in the lifetime and
establishing heater power requirements.
performance of batteries can be achieved if
they are maintained within the specified LITHIUM ION BATTERY
temperature limits. Ratnakumar et al. (2003)
proved that the use of Lithium ion batteries The battery for Rover will be mounted inside
enhance the mission life of the Rover as a warm electronic box (WEB). It is Lithium-
compared to Li-SOCl 2 batteries. Further, it Ion battery weighing approximately 1 kg.
was demonstrated that the lithium ion cells The sleeve is made of Al 6061-T5 and is
show excellent performance characteristics at anodized. The cell is a basic building block
low temperatures. Megahed A et al. (2007) of the battery. Each cell weigh 40gm. Cells
are bonded to the sleeve using RTV adhesive.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sjayaram@isac.gov.in 648

Jayaraman et al.
The 5S3P Li-Ion battery is as shown in the modelled with orthotropic material properties
Figure 1 with one of the sleeve options. The such as Thermal Conductivity and IR
overall size of the battery is 131×95×75 mm. emittance. Computer simulations of the
The side walls are 1.5 mm thick, while lugs battery thermal behaviour are made using I-
are 2.5 mm thick. The details of Li-Ion DEAS (2011) as pre-processor and TMG as
battery are as summarized in Table 1. solver. Simulation model consists of solid,
quadrilateral and triangle shell elements with
appropriate thickness and contact
conductance couplings to simulate the
conduction heat transfer. Material property
details of the battery elements are
summarized in Table 3. Computational
model is as shown in Figure 2.
Table 3. Material Properties
Mass Specific Conducti

Comp- Emiss
Density heat -vity
onent -ivity
(kg/m3) (J/kg-K) (W/m-K)
Figure. 1. Geometric model of the battery
K r =3
Cells 2418.3 1000 0.6
K a =45
Table 1. Details of Li-Ion Battery Sleeve 2770 961.2 167.9 0.8
MLI 370 1582.2 0.08* 0.78
Component Details
*h coefficient in W/m2-K
Cell type 1Ah Li-ion cell
Battery configuration 5S3P
Battery capacity 3Ah (nominal)
Battery voltage range 15-21 V
Battery dimension 131×95×75 mm
Mass 1.0 kg
Mechanical interface M4 × 4
Electrical interface One 15 pin ITT
connector D type
Sleeve material Al 6061-T651
TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications on the temperature of the Figure 2: Computational Model
battery are as shown in the following Table 2.
THERMAL DESIGN
Table 2. Temperature Specifications
Battery in this particular mission used for
Non-operating
Design limits limited power requirement during roll down
(Storage) limits
MinTemp MaxTemp MinTemp MaxTemp from the lander and short shadow periods.
-400C 500C -300C 400C The thermal inertia of the battery takes care
of rise in temperature during these
COMPUTATIONAL MODEL operations. To maintain the battery
temperature during rest of the mission where
In this study, a Lithium-Ion battery used for limits are narrow, battery needs to be
Rover is considered. The battery cell is conductively as well as radiatively. GFRP
649
Thermal Design and Analysis of Lithium-Ion Battery for Deep Space Missions: Modelling and Simulation
washers are used for conductive isolation and from -300C to the required value with
MLI is used for radiative isolation. Battery is two different heater power options.
placed inside warm electronics box which is Heaters are located on the two side plates
having low emittance face inside. Cells are of the sleeve.
attached to the sleeve with RTV adhesive. At
Case-1:
certain phases of mission, battery can go as
low as -300C and it may be in discharged It is cold case and both the enclosure and
condition. Battery needs to be heated to 00C deck are imposed at -30°C. In this case, 5 W
before charging is initiated. This is heater is equally distributed on two sides of
accomplished by design of suitable heaters. the sleeve. Time required for the sleeve lug
point to reach a temperature of -100C, 00C
THERMAL ANALYSES and 100C are presented in Table 4. Also the
temperature gradient in the sleeve and cells at
Purpose is to check the adequacy of given
those times are presented. Figure 3 shows the
sleeve design from thermal point of view.
temperature distribution on the sleeve and
Since battery makes a sub system of a rover,
cells at the end of 147 minutes.
the relevant boundary conditions are taken
from rover thermal analysis. Following three
cases are considered:
i. Hotcase: Rover under Sunlit condition
ii. Coldcase: Rover under non sunlit
condition for a long duration
iii. Battery charging case
First two cases validate the adequacy of
thermal control and Third case is used design
suitable heater when battery is under cold
conditions.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Figure 3: Temperature Distribution

Presently results discussed correspond to
sleeve design shown in Figure 1. Figure 4 shows the transient temperature
1. Hotcase: Represents Rover in Sunlit response of lug of the sleeve with 5 W heater
condition and all packages ON. Analysis power.
is carried out by imposing the
appropriate boundary condition imported
from system level rover analysis. Result
show that battery attains close to its
upper design limit of 40 o C.
2. Coldcase: Represents Rover in non-
sunlit condition and all packages OFF.
Like hot case, here also battery
temperature is dictated by the ambient
and it attains a value closer to its lower
design limit of -30
3. Charging case: Heater power is required
if battery temperature is to be raised
from -300C to about 00C. Transient Figure 4: Transient Temperature of
analyses were carried out to find out the the lug
time required to raise the temperature
650
Jayaraman et al.
Table 4: Transient analysis results for 5 W heater

Temp at the end of 3840 Temp at the end of 6180 Temp at the end of 8820
Component sec (64 minutes) (°C) sec (103 minutes) (°C) sec (147 minutes) (°C)
Min Max Min Max Min Max
Cells -10.3 -8.8 0.1 1.7 10.3 11.9
Sleeve -10.3 -6.8 -0.2 3.6 9.7 13.8
Lug_sleeve -10 0 10
Case-II: Ratnakumar B V 2003 Lithium batteries for

It is also a cold case like case I with aerospace applications: 2003 Mars
enclosure and deck imposed at -30°C. In this Exploration Rover Journal of Power
case, 10 W heater is equally distributed on Sources 906-910.
two sides of the sleeve. Time required for the
UGS Corp. 2006 I-DEAS 12 User’s Guide.
sleeve temperature to reach -100C, 00C and
100C are presented. Also the temperature
gradient in the sleeve and cells at those times
are presented. The comparative study with
other sleeve option shall be presented in full
length paper.
CONCLUSIONS
Lithium-Ion Battery used for a Rover of an
interplanetary mission is analyzed from
thermal point of view for a given sleeve
design. The battery temperatures are
maintained within the design temperature
limits during both hot and cold environments.
The heater power for charging case can be
either 5 W or 10 W depending on the mission
constraint of time required to reach 0oC. It
takes 103 minutes with 5 W and 47 minutes
with 10 W.
REFERENCES
Gilmore D G 2002 Spacecraft thermal
control hand book V1: Fundamental
technologies 2nd ed. Aerospace Press
California.
Megahed A 2007 Thermal Design and
Analsis for a Battery Module for a
Remote Sensing Satellite Journal of
Spacecrafts and Rockets 44(4) 920-926.
651
ICCMS2016 ICCMS2016
A STUDY ON RIVER BED DEGRADATION DUE TO MINING OF

COARSER TOP SEDIMENT LAYER
BANDITA BARMAN and ARUP KUMAR SARMA
Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Assam, India.
Abstract: Sediment mining from river bed or flood plain causes change in river
morphology. In the present study, river bed degradation due to sediment mining is
estimated using an earlier developed mathematical model for non-equilibrium
sediment transport. The developed model was operated with flux vector splitting finite
difference technique for estimation purpose and the sediment mass conservation
equation of river bed particles coupled with both continuity and momentum equations
of sediment laden water were used to perform the numerical experiments. This study
has incorporated two horizontally stratified bed layers as an extension over the earlier
study considering only single bed layer. The performance of this model is checked by
the same numerical scheme for predicting the degradation profile of exposed river bed
after the removal of upper coarser sand layer.
Keywords: Sediment mining; River bed degradation; Non equilibrium sediment
transport; Flux vector splitting finite difference technique.
INTRODUCTION the single layered river bed materials of

Aggregate extraction from rivers is gaining uniform sized sediment particles. However,
attention from the engineers and scientists of the present study considers two horizontally
different disciplines because of its adverse layered river bed materials with coarser layer
impacts on hydrodynamics, hydrology, on the top and finer at bottom. River bed
morphology, environment, and ecology of the degradation profile due to the removal of top
river [Collins and Dunne, 1989; Rinaldi et al., coarser sand during mining operation is
2005]. Degradation of river bed due to estimated using this model.
sediment mining and migration of mining pit
was studied by various researchers using
different approaches [Lee et al., 1993; Gill, Shallow water conservation equations of
1994; Cao and Pender, 2004; Rinaldi et al., sediment laden flow for fluvial system
2005]. Modelling of river bed morphology comprising of sediment exchange between
under the influence of sediment mining is water flow and the river bed sediment are
important for assessing the various impacts of coupled with continuity equation of river bed
mining. materials [Cao and Pender, 2004; Cao et al.,
2004]. Matrix form of continuity and
The main aim of this paper is to study the momentum equations for sediment laden
impact of sediment mining on river bed flow can be written as,
degradation under existing mathematical
formulation of mobile bed shallow water 𝜕𝑈 𝜕𝐹
+ =𝑆 (1)
hydrodynamic [Cao and Pender, 2004]. The 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥
where,
earlier numerical study was conducted over
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bandita.barman@iitg.ernet.in 652

Barman and Sarma
ℎ sediment concentration is specified to be 0.01

𝑈 = [ℎ𝑢], (1a) at the upstream end, water surface elevation
ℎ𝑐
at the downstream is fixed at -2.0 m, initial
ℎ𝑢 flow depth ranging linearly from 4 m at the
1
𝐹 = [ℎ𝑢 + 2 𝑔ℎ2 ]
2
(1b) upstream and 8 m at the downstream end. 𝑔 =
ℎ𝑢𝑐 9.8 m/s2, 𝑑=0.0015m, 𝑚=2, 𝜃𝑐 = 0.045, 𝑛 =
0.03, 𝑝 = 0.4, 𝑠 = 1.65, 𝛼 = 2, 𝑥𝑐 = 20000 m,
𝑆=
𝜎 = 500 m, and ∆𝑥 = 250 m. ∆𝑡 is set
(𝐸 − 𝐷)/(1 − 𝑝)
𝜕𝑧 (𝜌𝑠 −𝜌𝑤 )𝑔ℎ2 𝜕𝑐 (𝜌0 −𝜌)(𝐸−𝐷)𝑢 according to specified Courant number 𝐶𝑛 ,
[−𝑔ℎ ( + 𝑆𝑥 ) − − ]
𝜕𝑥 2𝜌 𝜕𝑥 𝜌(1−𝑝) which is defined by:
𝐸−𝐷
𝐶𝑛 = ((𝑢 + 𝑎)∆𝑡⁄∆𝑥 ) <1.
(1c)
Bed materials are considered to be composed
Sediment mass conservation equation can be of uniform sediment particles for experiment
written as, 1. Mining intensity of 5x10-4 m/s is assumed
and introduced at 20000 m from upstream
𝜕𝑧
(1 − 𝑝) = −𝐹𝑛 − (1 − 𝑝)𝐹𝑚 (2) end. However, different mining intensities
𝜕𝑡
can be tested in the numerical experiments. In
Empirical formulations are applied to the first experiment an attempt has been
determine the friction slope, sediment made to reproduce the results obtained in the
exchange flux across the bottom boundary of earlier study [Cao and Pender, 2004]. Second
the flow. Manning’s empirical relation is experiment is performed by considering two
used to determine friction slope, which horizontally stratified layers of uniform bed
involves Manning’s roughness coefficient. material where top most and bottom layers
Sediment exchange flux is represented by the are assumed to be composed of average
difference between upward sediment particle size of diameter 0.0015 m and 0.0005
entrainment flux and downward sediment m respectively. The upper layer is assumed as
deposition flux. Empirical relationships are extending up to 1 m depth from the bed
adopted from various published literature surface.
[Cao, 1999; Cao et al., 2004]. A time- A comparison is made between the
independent Gauss function is used as degradation profiles of river bed obtained in
sediment mining flux [Cao and Pender, the second numerical experiment with the
2004]. first one and these profiles at 32 days are
(𝑥−𝑥𝑐 )2
𝐹𝑚 = 𝐹𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑒𝑥𝑝 [− ] (3) shown in Fig. 1. Behaviour of sediment
2𝜎 2
mining has been found different in both the
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS experiments. Degradation of river bed has
Two numerical experiments have been been observed at upstream of the mining
conducted by using flux vector splitting finite region in both the cases, but it is more severe
difference scheme. The following initial and in case of second experiment due to the
boundary conditions, and parameters are used underlying finer layer. Cao and Pender model
in these experiments [Cao and Pender, 2004]. (2004) has been observed to perform well for
Channel length, 𝐿 =100000 m, initial bed the problem formulated in the present study.
slope 0.0001, flow unit-width discharge is This model has produced bounded solutions,
fixed at 3.36 m2/s and initial volumetric but the accuracy of the solutions cannot be
653
A Study on River Bed Degradation Due to Mining of Coarser Top Sediment Layer
ensured at this stage due to the lack of of Hydraulic Engineering 117 1145-
experimental or real field data. 1164
Cao Z 1999 Equilibrium near bed
concentration of suspended sediment
Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 125
1270-1278
Cao Z Day R and Egashira S 2002 Couple
and decouple numerical modelling of
flow and morphological evaluation of
alluvial rivers Journal of Hydraulic
Engineering 128 306-321
Cao Z and Pender G 2004 Numerical
modelling of alluvial rivers subjected to
interactive sediment mining and feeding
Advances in Water Resources 27 533-
546
Figure 1. Comparison of river bed profiles
for both numerical experiments at 32 Cao Z Pender G Wallis S and Carling P 2004
days. Computational dam-break hydraulics
over erodible sediment bed Journal of
CONCLUSIONS Hydraulic Engineering 130 689-703
This study shows that sediment mining Cheng N S 1997 A simplified settling
induces degradation of river bed and velocity formula for sediment particle
propagation of degradation depends on Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 123
sediment characteristics of bed materials. 149-152
There are the possibilities of impacts of many Chen D Acharya K and Stone M 2010
other factors on mining caused degradation Sensitivity analysis of non equilibrium
which can be considered in future studies. adaptation parameters for modelling
mining-pit migration Journal of
REFERENCES Hydraulic Engineering 136 806-811
Anderson J D 1995 Computational Fluid Collins B D and Dunne T 1989 Gravel

Dynamics McGraw Hill India 497-502 transport gravel harvesting and channel
bed degradation in rivers draining the
Baghlani A Talebbeydokhti N and Abedini, Southern Olympic Mountains
M J 2008 A shock-capturing model Washington U.S.A. Environmental
based on flux-vector splitting method in Geology New York Springer-Verlag 13
boundary-fitted curvilinear coordinates 213-224
Applied Mathematical Modelling 32
249-266 Gill M A 1994 Hydrodynamics of mining
pits in erodible bed under steady flow
Barman B 2015 Morphological modelling of Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 120
alluvial river with aggregate mining M. 1337-1348
Tech Thesis Indian Institute of
Technology Guwahati Assam Kassem A A and Chaudhry M H 1996
Comparison of coupled and semi
Bhallamudi S M and Chaudhry M H 1991 coupled numerical models for alluvial
Numerical modelling of aggradation and channels Journal of Hydraulic
degradation of alluvial channels Journal Engineering 124 794-802
654
Barman and Sarma
Lee H-Y Fu D-T and Song M-H 1993 n Manning’s roughness

Migration of rectangular mining pit coefficient
composed of uniform sediment Journal
p porosity of bed material
of Hydraulic Engineering 119 64-80
Q discharge
MasPla J Montaner J and Sola J 1999 Ground
water resources and quality variations S source matrix of conserved
caused by gravel mining in coastal variables of mobile bed
stream Journal of Hydraulic shallow water hydrodynamic
Engineering 216 197-213 equation
Rinaldi M Wyzga B and Surian N 2005 Sf friction slope
Sediment mining in alluvial channels: t time
physical effects and management
perspective River Research Application u flow velocity in x-direction
21 805-828 x cartesian coordinate
Vade P M Boix C F and Ollero A 2010 xc location of maximum
Incision due to gravel mining: sediment mining
modelling a case study from the Gallego
River Spain Geomorphology 117 261- z bed elevation
271 Δx grid spacing in 𝑥-direction
NOTATIONS Δt time step

α coefficient linking depth
a celerity of water
average and near-bed
c volumetric average sediment sediment concentration
concentration
θ Shield parameter
d average diameter of the
θc critical Shield parameter
sediment particles
ν kinematic viscosity
D downward sediment
deposition flux ρo density of saturated sediment-
water mixture
E upward sediment entrainment
flux ρ density of water sediment
mixture flow
Fm volume of saturated sediment
mined directly from the ρs density of sediment
river bed per unit time per unit ρw density of water
bed area
σ parameter indicating the
Fmax magnitude of sediment mining
function
Fn net sediment exchange flux
defined by the volume of pure
sediment exchange per unit
time and unit bed area
g acceleration due to gravity
h depth of flow
m empirical exponent
655
ICCMS2016
TWO PHASE INTERFACE MODEL FOR TRANSPORT PHENOMENA

DURING SUBLIMATION OF CRYSTALS AND VAPOR PHASE
REACTION
SAWANT R.1*, INAMDAR S. R.1, KARIMI I. A.2 and KULKARNI B. D.3
1
Chemical Engineering Department, Vishwakarma Institute of Technology Pune, India
2
Department of Chemical & Biomolecular Engineering, National University of Singapore,
Singapore
3
Chemical Engineering & Process Development Division, National Chemical Laboratory,
Pune, India.
Abstract: We present a transport phenomena model (TPM) for a two phase system,
where solid crystals sublimate while submerged in liquid product. The liquid product
forms at liquid-vapor interface and the height of liquid layer above the crystals is
almost constant in that transport properties remain invariant. The derived model is
subject to bifurcation analysis and steady state behavior of the system is analyzed.
Keywords: Interfacial kinetics; Liquid-solid interface; Sublimation of crystals in
liquid phase; Bifurcation analysis.
INTRODUCTION interface., and later using integral theorem in

transport phenomena theory scale up the
In this paper, we consider a two phase system
reactor performance for a cylindrical
that is separated by an interface and a phase
geometry.
change occurs. The solid crystals are
considered as submerged below liquid Further, in conventional transport phenomena
product and reaction between vapors from problems, the analytics of performance of
sublimation come in contact with a gaseous spatially distributed reaction system will
reactant above and instantaneously react to depend on various factors, which are usually
form liquid product. brought into analytical results and
computational work in form of dimensionless
In such vapor phase reaction systems, when
numbers such as Reynolds number for
crystals are submerged in the liquid reaction
momentum transport. Using these as a range
product, and solubility of crystals and
of operability the shell behavior within
melting due to heat absorbed by crystals
geometrical boundaries is analyzed.
forms a melt that exhibits a non-Newtonian
flow behavior, a number of changes will be Thus, the challenges that lie before us are
required to derive a transport process model scale-up, search for multiple solutions,
(TPM) for such complex interfacial kinetics. stability of wave motion, and analysis of
performance characteristics in terms of
The basic difference while extending the
dimensionless numbers. Such an analysis of a
rational approximations to the problem of
chemical reaction system when reaction
interfacial kinetics lies in scope of
occurs at an interface is indeed a challenge
application. The theory when extended to
and will contribute well to seek new design
crystals sublimating and reacting with a
principles for reactor geometry and internal
gaseous reactants across a liquid product
arrangements for interfacial kinetics, where
layer is that of scale up based on continuum
phase changes are involved while reactants
of shell units across cross sectional area for
transform to products.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bd.kulkarni@ncl.res.in ` 656

Sawant et al.
Now, we will give a minimum description species that are two reactants and one liquid
of the reaction model using transport product are, 𝜕𝑡 𝜌𝑘 𝜑𝑘 + ∇ ∙ (𝜌𝑘 𝜑𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙
phenomena theory and later see how 𝒋𝑘 ;
𝑘 𝑘 𝑘
bifurcations can be computed and stability 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈𝜑𝑘 〉 ) + ∇ ∙ (𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈𝜑𝑘 〉 〈𝒗𝑘 〉 ) =
behavior of steady state branches can be −∇ ∙ (〈𝒋𝑘 〉 ∙ 〈𝒋𝑡𝑘 〉) + 𝐽𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 𝐽𝑘 = 0 ; 〈𝒋𝑡𝑘 〉 =
analyzed using established bifurcation theory −〈𝜌𝑘 𝜑�𝑘 𝒗�𝑘 〉 . Writing a notation, 𝜒𝑘Γ =
based on reductive perturbation theory. 1
− ∫𝐴 𝜌𝑘 𝜁𝑘 (𝒗𝑘 − 𝒘𝑘 ) ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 ; where,
𝑉0 𝑘
TRANSPORT PHENOMENA 𝜒𝜖{𝑴, 𝑄, 𝐽} ; 𝜁𝑘 𝜖{𝑣𝑘 , ℎ𝑘 , 𝜑𝑘 } . And, Γ𝑘 =
MODEL 1
− ∫𝐴 𝜌𝑘 (𝒗𝑘 − 𝒘𝑘 ) ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 . Also, 𝜒𝑘 =
𝑉0 𝑘
Since the net volume that is considered 𝜒𝑘Γ + 𝜒𝑘ϖ ; and correspondingly, ϖϵ{𝜏, 𝑞, 𝑗} .
constant as transport properties and reaction Further, the corresponding interfacial
conversion remains invariant as a steady quantities are denoted as, 𝜒𝑘ϖ =
state, we do volume averaging for transport 1
− ∫ 𝜉 ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 ; and respective term
phenomena occurring at interface. Thus, 𝑉0 𝐴𝑘 𝑘
we express the volume average as expressions are, 𝜉𝑘 𝜖{−(𝜏𝑘 − 𝑝𝑘 𝑰), 𝒒𝑘 , 𝒋𝑘 } for
the three transport processes.
1
〈𝜙𝑘 〉𝑘 =� 𝜍 𝜙 𝑑𝑉
𝑉𝑘 𝑉0 𝑘 𝑘 Extending the arguments to a two phase,
liquid and solid phases, we can write
where𝜙𝑘 is a state variable for 𝑘 𝑡ℎ phase in relations, 𝜀𝑠 + 𝜀𝑙 = 1; also, we find that in
TPM and 𝜍𝑘 is a phase fraction as a functional orthogonal coordinates, we have, 𝐴𝑠 = 𝐴𝑙 =
form. When, 𝜍𝑘 = 1 , we have, volume 𝐴𝑖 ; as at interface cross section is the same.
fraction, 𝜀𝑘 ≜ (𝑉𝑘 ⁄𝑉0 ); ∑𝑘 𝜀𝑘 = 1. We also Further, we note that, 𝒘𝑠 = 𝒘𝑙 = 𝒘. It is
obtain from volume averaging assumption a seen that, in presence of dissipative effects,
relation 1
𝑴𝜏𝑘 = ∫𝐴 (𝜏𝑘 − 𝑝𝑘 𝑰) ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴 =
𝜕𝜙𝑘 𝜕〈𝜙𝑘 〉 1 𝑉0 𝑘
〈 〉= − ∫𝐴 𝜙𝑘 𝒘𝑘 ∙ 𝒏𝑘 𝑑𝐴
𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑡 𝑉0 𝑘 + 𝑝̅𝑘𝑖 ∇𝜀𝑘 + 𝑴𝑑𝑘 . Thus, average
where𝑤𝑘 velocity for mass transport, and 𝒏𝑘 interfacial stress and dissipative effects given
is outward vector normal to interface of by 𝑴𝑑𝑘 give us the total interfacial stress.
phase k. At the end of analysis, we obtain a Also, the net difference between interfacial
1
result, ∫ 𝒏 𝑑𝐴
𝑉0 𝐴𝑘 𝑘
= −∇𝜀𝑘 . stresses of two phases, i.e. liquid and solid is
expresses as, 𝑝̅𝑠𝑖 − 𝑝̅𝑙𝑖 = 𝜎𝛿̅ ; where 𝜎 is
Thus, the microscopic (exact mass), surface tension and 𝛿̅ is the mean curvature
macroscopic mass, interfacial mass balances of two phase interface. For crystals as solid
and dispersive flux equations come out as, phase submerged in liquid the interfacial
𝜕𝑡 𝜙𝑘 + (∇ ∙ 𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ) = 0 ; 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ momentum flux source as due to surface
𝑘
(𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉 ) = Γ𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 Γ𝑘 = 0. tension effects is given as, 𝑴𝑖 =
1
Similarly, the momentum balance equations ∫ 𝜎𝛿𝒏𝑠 𝑑𝐴 = −𝜎𝛿̅∇𝜀𝑠 .
𝑉0 𝐴𝑘
are given as, 𝜕𝑡 𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 + ∇ ∙ (𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ) =
−∇𝑝𝑘 + ∇ ∙ 𝜏𝑘 + 𝒃𝑘 ; 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ Then summing up we obtain a relation for
(𝜀𝑘 𝜙𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉𝑘 〈𝑣𝑘 〉𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙ (𝜀𝑘 〈𝑝𝑘 〉𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ interfaces between two phases and presence
𝑗
(〈𝜏𝑘 〉 ∙ 〈𝜏𝑘𝑡 〉) + 𝑴𝑘 + 𝜀𝑘 〈𝒃𝑘 〉𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 𝑴𝑘 + of dissipative effects as, ∑𝑖 ∑𝑗 𝑴𝑖 = 0 ;
𝑴𝑖 = 0 ; 〈𝜏𝑘𝑡 〉 = −〈𝜌𝑘 𝒗 �𝑘 〉 . Also, the
�𝑘 𝒗 where indexes i, j denote, 𝑖𝜖{𝑠, 𝑙}, which are
energy transport equations are, 𝜕𝑡 𝜌𝑘 ℎ𝑘 + ∇ ∙ two phases, and 𝑗𝜖{Γ, 𝑑} that respectively
(𝜌𝑘 𝑣𝑘 ℎ𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙ 𝒒𝑘 ; 𝜕𝑡 (𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈ℎ𝑘 〉𝑘 ) + ∇ ∙ denote interfacial and dissipative effects.
(𝜀𝑘 𝜌𝑘 〈ℎ𝑘 〉𝑘 〈𝒗𝑘 〉𝑘 ) = −∇ ∙ (〈𝒒𝑘 〉 ∙ 〈𝒒𝜏𝑘 〉) + There are two more average quantities that
𝑄𝑘 ; ∑𝑘 𝑄𝑘 = 0; 〈𝒒𝜏𝑘 〉 = −〈𝜌𝑘 ℎ�𝑘 𝒗 �𝑘 〉. we need to define to complete the set of
relations, and are, 〈𝑝𝑙 〉𝑙 = 𝑝̅𝑙𝑖 , and here i
The mass transport equations of chemical refers to interface condition. Also for solid
657
Two Phase Interface Model for Transport Phenomena during Sublimation of Crystals and Vapour Phase
Reaction
phase, assuming no contact between two BIFURCATIONPATTERNS

crystals, a similar relation that holds is,
〈𝑝𝑠 〉𝑠 = 𝑝̅𝑠𝑖 . Next, applying mean value APPLYING RPM
theorem to integral expressions, we obtain, Now, we are ready to apply the multi-
Γ𝑠 = −Γ𝑙 = Γ = 𝑆𝑣 𝜌𝑠 𝒘 � 𝑛𝑠 , and that, 𝑆𝑣 ≜ equation bifurcation theory of Karimi and
(𝐴𝑖 ⁄𝑉0 ) . Now, we can write another Inamdar (2002) to the interfacial phenomena
modified expression for interfacial transport model. In another work by Inamdar (2014),
processes as, 𝛺𝑘Γ = 𝜁𝑘𝑖 Γ𝑘 ; and the scalar equations in Euclidean space
}
Ω𝜖{𝑴, 𝑄, 𝐽}𝜁𝑘𝑖 𝜖{𝑣𝑘𝑖 , ℎ𝑘𝑖 , 𝜑𝑘𝑖 . Furthermore obtained from Schrodinger equations by
at interface, the mass balance will lead to a separating real and imaginary parts, and
relation as, Floquet theorem was applied to seek
(𝜌𝑠 −𝜌𝑙 ) 𝑉𝑠 2 Γ𝑠 branching of bifurcating periodic solutions
(𝒗 �𝑙𝑖 ) =
�𝑠𝑖 − 𝒗 � � � � ∇𝜀𝑠 .
𝜌𝑠 𝜌𝑙 𝐴𝑖 𝜀𝑠 2 across a singularity, where the averaged
monodromy matrix had a singularity as a
FURTHER APPROXIMATIONS simple zero eigenvalue.
When the crystals melt due to heat even Again the multi-equation theory was
partially i.e. most of crystals on heated successfully applied and approximate
surface, the dissipative effects set in, and the stability and branch solutions verified the
earlier term becomes in the situation above resulting motion after numerical integration
1
as, 𝑴𝑑𝑠 = − 𝜌𝑙 𝐴𝑑 𝐶𝑑 |〈𝒗𝑠 〉𝑠 − of solutions. We may extend the reductive
2𝑉0
〈𝒗𝑙 〉𝑙 |(〈𝒗𝑠 〉𝑠 − 〈𝒗𝑙 〉𝑙 ). perturbation theory to the resulting system of
partial differential equations and seek the
For Stoke's law held applicable for two phase bifurcations for a variety of branching
mixture, the Reynold's number expression is solutions that exist across singular point.
�〈𝒗𝑠 〉𝑠 −〈𝒗𝑙 〉𝑙 �𝜌𝑙 𝑑𝑑
reported as, 𝑅𝑒 = ; where To begin the analysis, we revisit the
𝜇𝑚
effective drag diameter is given as, 𝑑𝑑 = analytical work done by Inamdar and Karimi
(3𝑉𝑠 ⁄2𝐴𝑠 ); 𝜇𝑚 = 𝜇𝑙 (1 − 𝜀𝑠 )−𝑐 , and 𝑐 ⋍ 2.5. (2000) on plane wave solutions for a variety
Also, the dissipative tensor comes out as, of instability points assuming wave number
−1 can pick up a fractional value. The resulting
𝑴𝑑𝑙 = −𝜀𝑙2 𝜇𝑙 𝜅 (2) (〈𝒗𝑠 〉𝑠 − 〈𝒗𝑙 〉𝑙 ) ∙ . Note
Ginzburg-Landau equations can now be
that 𝜅 (2) is symmetric permeability tensor. perturbed further using O'Malley's scheme
Similarly, interfacial stresses are given as, for perturbation that has inherent singularity
𝑞 𝑞 𝑞
𝑸𝑙 = 𝑆𝑣 �𝑘𝑙 ⁄𝑙𝑙 �(𝑇�𝑙𝑖 − 〈𝑇𝑙 〉𝑙 ) , 𝑸𝑠 = of (1⁄0) type.
𝑞
𝑆𝑣 �𝑘𝑠 ⁄𝑙𝑠 �(𝑇�𝑠𝑖 − 〈𝑇𝑠 〉𝑠 ) ;
𝑗 𝑗 𝑠
Thus, these perturbed equations using the
𝑱𝑠 = 𝑆𝑣 𝜌𝑠 �𝐷𝑠 ⁄𝑙𝑠 �(𝜑�𝑠𝑖 − 〈𝜑𝑠 〉 ). scheme presented in previous work Inamdar
Note that Q denotes total interfacial heat (2000) can be used to seek branching of
transfer, w is velocity of interface, J is total homogeneous solutions.
interfacial flux of chemical species, and j is Thus, we have given a new result how a tow
individual species flux, b is weight of phase interfacial kinetics expressed in form
crystals per unit surface area. of inherently nonlinear partial differential
Once we have the basic model for the equations will give rise to branching of wave
sublimation of solid crystals that occurs in a solutions for the two point boundary value
submerged state, then we can put together problem.
simplified scale differential equations with Further we will extend the results to see how
interface boundary conditions stated for singularities that can appear at boundary
momentum, heat and mass transport points will give rise to a new types of
processes. branching solutions in free parameter space.
658
Sawant et al.
CONCLUSIONS Inamdar S R and Karimi I A 2002 Branching

and stability of stationary solutions in
In sum, we have considered a transport multi-equation systems Chemical
phenomena model for a melted state of Engineering Science 57(8) 1251-1267.
crystal in previous literature and were able to
express the vector and tensors as spanned Inamdar S R and Karimi I A 2002 Plane
into orthogonal coordinate system. The waves in systems having an intrinsic
resulting scalar equations after vanishing time lag, International Journal on
terms were identified, we were able to obtain Bifurcation and Chaos International
a description of phenomenology in two Journal of Bifurcation and Chaos
spatial dimensions to derive a boundary
12(01) 193-204.
value problem.
Extending the various analytical results in Inamdar S R and Karimi I AJune 2001
previous works by Karimi and Inamdar, it Application of reductive perturbation
was possible to derive the GL equations for method to branching of stationary
various types of instabilities that can set up in solutions Chemical Engineering Science
diffusive reaction systems. 56(12) 3915-3922.
The perturbation theory based on further Magnus J & Neudecker H 1988 Matrix
perturbation expansion using O'Malley's
differential calculus with applications in
perturbation scheme, we were able to apply
the reductive perturbation theory and statistics and economics New York:
applying solvability conditions, obtain Wiley.
perturbed equations that are branching Ni J. and Beckermann C June 1991Volume-
equations. Averaged Two-Phase Model for
Selecting a first order harmonic solution as a Transport Phenomena during
neutral solution, we have sought bifurcating Solidification, Metallurgical
periodic solutions across a singularity which Transactions B 22B 349-361.
is a simple zero eigenvalue and this leads to a
system of algebraic equations to seek motion Wolfram Mathematica 2015 version 10.0.3.
of two point boundary value problem.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors thank Council of Scientific and

Industrial Research for giving partial support
of CSIR Extramural research grant to do the
research work.
REFERENCES
Bird R B Stewart W E Lightfoot E N 1960.
Transport Phenomena Wiley New York
Appendix A.
Inamdar S R 2014 Branching behavior of
field dynamics of resonators of left-
handed materials Applied Physics A
(Springer) 117(2) 621-627.
659
ICCMS2016
FLOOD PLAIN SIMULATION OF AN URBAN RIVER CATCHMENT: A

CASE STUDY
ZOPE P.E.; ELDHO T.I. and JOTHIPRAKASH V.
Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Powai, Bombay, India
Abstract: Flooding is one of the most severe natural hazards occurring frequently in
coastal cities around the world. Being a natural hazard, it cannot be fully avoided but
to minimise the losses of property and human beings, preventive measures can be
taken. Flood plain simulation modelling for different storm flow conditions is one of
the preventive measure technique from which the flood mitigation, evacuation, flood
warning and flood preparedness management planning system can be prepared in
advance. Flood plain simulation modelling gives the results in terms of the flood
extent as well as flood depth along the alignment of the river catchment. In this study,
flood simulation mapping has been carried out for Koparkhairane catchment of Navi
Mumbai, India. Hydrologic modelling is carried out by integrating hydrologic
engineering centres, hydrologic modelling system (HEC-HMS) model with HEC-
GeoHMS model. Hydraulic modelling has been performed by using River analysis
system software (HEC-RAS). Flood plain maps for 10 year and 100 year return
period’s storm conditions have been generated by integrating HEC-GeoRAS model
with GIS. The generated flood plain maps can be used for preparation of flood
mitigation, flood preparedness, evacuation management system and drainage design
in advance.
Keywords: Hydrologic modelling; Hydraulic modelling; Flood plain simulation.
INTRODUCTION discharging their flows to sea through creeks

are summarised as major drainage system
Urban flooding is the main issue to be
[FFC, 2006; Haestad and Durans, 2003]. The
considered seriously while implementing
minor drainage system can be designed for
future developments of the city
the rainfall intensity of 10 year return period
[Guhathakurta et al., 2011; Kulkarni et al.,
and major drainage system can be designed
2013]. Flooding is one of the natural hazard
up to rainfall intensity of 100 year return
occurring worldwide frequently which
period [FFC, 2006; Haestad and Durans,
accounts approximately 70% of total
2003].
economic losses due to natural disaster
(Singh and Sharma, 2009). In coastal urban To assess the flood plain mapping,
areas, when high intensity of rainfall integration of hydrologic and hydraulic
coincides with high tides, existing drainage models with GIS and remote sensing plays
system losses its storm water draining vital role [Suriya and Mudgal, 2012].
capacity and severe flooding occurs [Zope et Anderson (2000) generated flood plain maps
al., 2015]. Road side drains discharging their with integration of HEC-HMS and HEC-
flow in nallahs have been categorized under RAS model with HEC-GeoRAS and Arc
minor drainage system whereas major rivers View GIS [Gul et al., 2010]. Generation of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: eldho@civil.iitb.ac.in 660

Zope et al.
flood hazard maps and implementation of (www.hec.usace.army.mil/software/hec-

flood mitigation system in advance can hms/) has been used to generate flood
reduce the flood prone losses and lives hydrographs at each junction and outlet of
during the floods [Zope et. al., 2015]. the catchment area. HEC-HMS model
consists of basin model, meteorological
The objectives of the present study are to
model, and control specification. Basin
generate the flood plain maps for different
model components are generated using the
flow conditions. The generated maps will be
HEC-GeoHMS software which is the
useful to the water resources planners and
extension of Arc GIS. The sub part of the
storm water designers for designing of the
basin such as streams, sub basins, reach,
effective storm water drainage system.
source, junctions, sinks has been generated in
STUDY AREA this software. The main inputs to the basin
model are curve number, basin properties
The study area consist of Koparkhairane such as length of the stream, area of the
catchment which is located between North basin, time of concentration, lag time,
Latitudes of 190 4’ 0” and 190 8’ 0”, and East Manning’s roughness coefficient, slope of
Longitudes of 730 0’ 0’’ and 730 3’ 0’’ the basin and infiltration. Curve number map,
(Figure 1). It is one of the small catchment of Manning's roughness coefficient map and
Navi Mumbai area. The discharge of the infiltration maps are prepared for the study
main channel is in to the Thane creek which area and composite value for each sub basin
is influenced by the tidal effect. The Digital has been used as input to basin model. Total
Elevation Model (DEM) generated for the 20 sub basins are delineated for the
study area shows minimum ground elevation catchment area (Figure1). For loss
of the catchment as 5 m and highest one as estimation, Soil Conservation Service-Curve
390 m with respect to mean sea level. Number (SCS-CN) method has been used,
SCS-Unit hydrograph method has been used
for transformation and kinematic wave
method has been used for channel routing.
Flood hydrographs are generated for the
storm flow depth of 10 year and 100 year
return periods. These generated maps at each
junction and outlet will be used as input to
the HEC-RAS model.
In the present study, for the channel flow, the
water surface profiles are generated using St.
Venant equations which can be expressed as
follows (USACE, 2010):
The equation of continuity:
∂Q ∂A
+ −q=0 (1)
∂x ∂t
and the momentum equation:
Figure 1 Flood Plain Simulation Map- 10 ∂Q ∂  Q 2  ∂h
year return period
∂t ∂x  A 
( )
+   = gA S − S fc − gA c
∂x
(2)
MODELLING APPROACH Where Q is discharge in the channel

HEC-HMS model developed by U.S Army (m3/sec), A is area of flow in the channel
Corps of Engineers (m2), S is bed slope of channel and S fc is
661
Flood Plain Simulation of an Urban River Catchment: A Case Study
friction slope of channel, g is the acceleration by exporting the water surface extent and
due to gravity, h c is depth of the flow in profile file in HEC-GeoRAS as post
channel and x, t are spatial and temporal co- processing process. For extraction of
ordinates. Moment correctional factor is attributes of spatial geometric data,
considered equal to 1. triangulated irregular network (TIN) is used.
Flood plain maps for the rainfall depth of 10
It is assumed that S fc is approximated from
year and 100 year return periods are shown
Manning’s equation for steady flow by:
in Figure 1 and Figure 2 respectively. The
1 ( 2/3) (1/ 2) flood extent area for 10 year return period is
Q= R S fc A (3)
nc 2.64 Sq. km whereas for 100 year return
period, it is 2.94 Sq. km. Flood plain maps
where R is hydraulic radius and nc is also denote the flood depths. From the flood
Manning’s roughness coefficient for Channel plain extent and flood depth, water resource
flow which may be increased to account for engineers can get idea for design of the
other energy losses such as expansions and effective drainage system.
bend losses. In HEC-RAS, the one
dimensional unsteady flow equations are CONCLUSIONS
solved by four-point implicit finite difference Pre estimation of flood plain maps for
scheme. Geometry file has been prepared different flow conditions is necessary to
with HEC-GeoRAS software in Arc GIS. minimize the economic as well as human
Flood hydrographs generated from HEC- losses. In this study, HEC-RAS with
HMS are used as input in HEC-RAS and integration of HEC-GeoRAS is used for
water surface extent and profiles are flood plain modelling. Integration of
generated for storm flow depth of 10 year hydrologic and hydraulic models with GIS
and 100 year return periods. and remote sensing can be used as an
effective tool for generation of flood plain
and flood hazard mapping. The generated
flood plain maps in this study can be used by
the local municipal organization and planners
for flood mitigation, preparedness planning.
REFERENCES
Anderson D J 2000 GIS based hydrologic
and hydraulic modeling for flood plain
delineation at highway river crossing
MSc Thesis The University of Texas
Austin.
FFC (Fact Finding Committee) 2006
Maharashtra State Govt. Committee
Report 31-130 (unpublished).
Guhathakurta P Sreejith O P Menon P A
2011 Impact of climate change on
extreme rainfall events and flood risk in
Figure 2 Flood Plain Simulation Map-
India J. Earth Syst. Sci. 120 359–373.
100 year return period
Gul G O Harmancroglu N Gul A 2010 A
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION combined hydrologic and hydraulic
Flood plain maps for the rainfall depth of 10 modeling approach for testing
year and 100 year return period are generated efficiency of structural flood control
662
Zope et al.
measures Nat Hazards 54 245-260.

doi:10.1007/s11069-009-9464-2
Haestad Methods Durans S R 2003 Storm
water Conveyance Modelling and
Design Haestad Press Waterbury, CT
USA.
Kulkarni A T Mohanti J Eldho T I Rao E P
Mohan B K 2013 A web GIS based
integrated flood assessment modeling
tool for coastal urban watersheds.
Computers & Geoscience 64 7-14
Singh A K Sharma A K 2009 GIS and a
remote sensing based approach for
urban flood-plain mapping for the Tapi
catchment India. Proc. of Symposium.
331, IASH Publ. 2009.
Suriya S Mudgal B V 2012. Impact of
urbanization on flooding: The
Thirusoolam sub watershed – A case
study Journal of Hydrol. 412 210-219.
USACE 2010 HEC-RAS River analysis
system Hydraulic reference manual
Version 4.1 USACE Davis CA USA.
Zope P E Eldho T I Jothiprakash V 2015
Impacts of urbanization on flooding of
Coastal Urban Catchment: A Case study
of Mumbai City, India Journal of Nat.
Hazards 75 887-908.
663
ICCMS2016
BALLISTIC STUDIES OF BORON CARBIDE TILES AGAINST 7.62 MM

AP PROJECTILE
SAVIO S. G.*, SRIVATHSA B. and MADHU V.
Defence Metallurgical Research Laboratory, DRDO, Kanchanbagh, Hyderabad, India.
Abstract: Simulation studies on Depth of Penetration (DOP) test with steel confined
boron carbide tile backed by aluminum alloy 6063 against 7.62 mm AP projectile
were carried out. Johnson-Cook (JC) material model was used for steel projectile,
confinement and backing aluminium alloy. Johnson-Holmquist material model (JH2)
was considered for boron carbide tile. Suitable model parameters for all the materials
were chosen from published literatures. An optimized mesh size and erosion strains
were used. Both experiment and simulation were carried out for reference DOP on
150 mm dia and 100 mm thickness backing material. For residual DOP on the backing
material 5mm and 6mm thicknesses of boron carbide tiles and backing thickness of 50
mm were considered. This paper essentially discusses the results and validation of the
simulations with experimental results of DOP.
Keywords: Boron carbide; DOP test; modeling and simulation; 7.62 mm AP.
INTRODUCTION However, partial success in ranking

In present day scenario ceramic materials are material’s ‘potential’ has been made by
extensively used for armour applications. testing techniques, for a particular class of
Design of armour is a very complex and threats and a common defeat mechanism,
expensive process especially in ceramic with carefully controlled geometrical
armour research because it involves ballistic configuration (2002).Among the various
testing and evaluation of these materials. Due ballistic test methods, the depth of
to advancements in numerical modelling in penetration (DOP) test is widely used for
terms of high performance computing ballistic evaluation (1983). In this method the
facilities and numerical codes, ballistic reference and residual penetration is obtained
performance of materials under extreme on a metallic backing material for the
loading conditions have become handy. In ceramic material tested. In the present study,
terminal ballistic studies, for stresses below modeling DOP test of boron carbide tile
hydrodynamic flow characteristics, the backed by Al 6063 alloy against 7.62 mm AP
material behaviour is described by projectile was performed and results are
constitutive relations for strength and failure validated with the experimental values.
whereas equation of state (EOS) is used for
EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS
stress values above hydrodynamic limit
(2004). The schematic DOP test target configuration
is shown in figure 1. The detailed
Due to various failure mechanisms in
experimental setup of DOP test can be found
ceramics during impact it is not so easy to
elsewhere (1999). The ceramic tile to be
rank them for their ballistic performance.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: geasin@dmrl.drdo.in 664

Savio et al.
ballistic tested is tightly inserted into the slot The dimensions of hot pressed boron carbide
present in a steel plate, by using a brass shim tiles used for conducting ballistic
in the gap between the tile and the steel plate. experiments were of 40 mm diameter and a
The tile fitted steel plate is placed over the thickness of 5 and 6 mm. Six experiments
6063-T6 aluminum alloy backing, with were performed for each tile thickness. The
enough thickness to make the backing semi- diameter of steel confinement used in
infinite. confining boron carbide tile was 150 mm.
The experimental results of DOP tests are
given in Table 1.
Table 1.Experimental results of
Reference and Residual DOP.
Sr. Tile Tile Projectile DOP
No. thickness density Velocity (mm)
(mm) (g/cm3) (m/s)
1 5.5 2.46 811 20
2 5.3 2.46 816 24.5
3 5.4 2.45 802 10
4 5.2 2.46 815 26
5 5.1 2.47 809 19.5
6 5.1 2.47 817 11.5
7 6.3 2.46 814 19
8 6.3 2.46 810 10
9 6.2 2.47 809 4.5
10 6.5 2.45 810 6.5
11 6.2 2.45 801 23.5
12 6.4 2.46 806 15
13 Nil Nil 820 54
Figure 1.Schematic representation of the
DOP test (a) Residual DOP (b)
NUMERICAL MODEL
Reference DOP in the backing material.
Dynamic problems are generally described
All the experiments were performed with the
using a wave equation. For impact related
7.62 mm AP projectile. The projectile core
problems, travelling wave form as a solution
has a diameter of 6.1 mm and total length
of the wave equation is considered. In this
(cylindrical shaft + ogive) of 28.4 mm with a
study of DOP test, Johnson and Cook (JC)
mass of 5.3 g. The cylindrical shaft was of
model (1985, 1994) is used for backing,
length 22 mm and radius of 3.05 mm. Also
confinement and Projectile materials.
the ogive length and ogive radius were of 7
Similarly, for boron carbide we used Johnson
mm and 9.56 mm respectively. In this
and Holmquist modified JH2 model (2011)
experiment the ammunition was fired with a
along with failure and damage evolution
muzzle velocity of 820 ± 15 m/s. For all
functions. The JC model strength and failure
DOP experiments, the diameter of backing
parameters considered are shown in Tables 2
Al 6063 alloy was maintained as 150 mm.
and 3 respectively. JH2 model parameters for
The backing thickness of this plate was kept
boron carbide are shown in Table 4.
at 100 mm for reference DOP and at 50 mm.
665
Ballistic Studies of Boron Carbide Tiles against 7.62 mm AP Projectile
Table 2.Strength Model parameters comparison with reference DOP simulation.

for backing and projectile The residual DOP obtained from simulation
study was found to be 17.7 mm for 5.2 mm
Material A B N C M
(MPa) (MPa) thick tiles and 5.8 mm for 6 mm tiles. The
Al 6063- 176.45 63.99 0.07 0.0036 0.0 average experimental residual DOP obtained
T6 (2011) for 5 mm thick tile had a scatter between 10
Hard Steel 1900 1100 0.3 0.005 1.0 to 26 mm (average 18.6 ±2.7) and for 6 mm
(2013) thick tile the scatter was between 4.5 to 23.5
mm (average 13.1 ± 3 mm). This kind of
Table 3.Failure model parameters for
variation is generally expected in ceramic
backing
material mainly due to inherent brittleness
Material D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 and associated tensile failure.
Al 6063- 0.0741 0.0892 - 2.441 - 4.76 0.0
T6
Table 4.JH2 Model parameters from

boron carbide(1999)
Property Value
Shear Modulus, (GPa) 197
Bulk Modulus, K1 233 Figure 2.Change in projectile velocity
pressure constant, K2, (GPa) -593 during penetration for hard steel
pressure constant, K3, (GPa) 2800 projectile in simulation of residual DOP
HEL, (GPa) 19
Intact Strength Constant, A 0.927
Intact strength exponent, N 0.67
Strain rate constant, C 0.005
Fractured Strength Constant, B 0.7
Fractured strength exponent, M 0.85
Max. Fracture strength ratio 0.2
Hydro Tensile Limit, T, (GPa) - 0.26
Damage Constant,D1 0.001
Damage Constant,D2 0.5
Bulking Constant, β 1.0
Figure 3.Simulation of fracture observed
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION on steel confined boron carbide ceramic
against 7.62 mm AP.
A quarter symmetry models of projectile and
target were used for numerical simulations Simulation studies on reference DOP showed
using ANSYS AUTODYN 14.0. Projectile that the plastic strain of 3.1 on Al 6063
normal impact velocity was assumed to be produces a DOP of 58.1 mm. In case of
820 m/s. residual DOP on 6mm tile thickness, a
marginal reduction of plastic strain to 2.7
The variation in projectile velocity with produces a significant reduction of DOP of
penetration time is shown in figure 2. It was 5.8 mm on Al6063. Further, it is important to
found that the deceleration of projectile is note that the generation of strong stress wave
faster in case of residual DOP simulation in results in projectile and ceramic
666
Savio et al.
fragmentation. A simulated crack pattern of REFERENCES

fractured boron carbide tile during impact is
Bryn James 2002 Depth of Penetration
shown in figure 3. A typical cleavage Testing Ceramic Armour Materials by
fracture pattern observed on fracture surface Design Ceramic Transactions 134 165-
of boron carbide tile is shown in figure 4. 172.
Charles E Anderson Jr 2007 A review of
computational ceramic armor modelling
Advances in ceramic armour II Ceramic
Engineering and Science Proceedings
27(7) 1-18.
Gordon R Johnson and Tim J Holmquist
1994 An improved computational
constitutive model for brittle materials
AIP Conference Proceedings309 981-
984.
Gordon R Johnson and William H Cook
Figure 4.Typical cleavage fracture 1983 A constitutive model and data for
pattern observed on fractured surface of metals subjected to large strains high
strain rates and high temperatures 7th
boron carbide tile.
International Symposium on Ballistics
The Hauge The Netherlands 541-547.
CONCLUSION Johnson GR and Cook WH 1985 Fracture
Simulations carried out using JC model for characteristics of three metals subjected
both Al 6063 and for 7.62 mm AP hard steel to various strains strain rates
projectiles and JH2 model for boron carbide temperatures and pressures Eng. Fract.
Mech. 21 31-48.
for shows that the model parameters were
Johnson GR and Holmquist TJ 1999
able predict the reference and residual DOP Response of boron carbide subjected to
reasonably close to experimental results. large strains high strain rates and high
However, the scatter in experimental DOP is pressures Journal of Applied
due to inherent brittleness of these materials. Physics85(12) 8060-8073.
Also it may be required that the model Jonas A Zukas 2004 Introduction to
parameters need to be modified for better Hydrocodes Studies in Applied
predictive capabilities. Effort in this direction Mechanics 49 Elsevier.
Michael J Normandia and William A Gooch
are under progress. However, the model
2002 An overview of ballistic testing
parameters used in this study are reasonably methods of ceramic materials Ceramic
good as this value is closer to the residual Armour Materials by Design Ceramic
DOP obtained experimentally. Transactions 134 113-138.
NamıkKılıc and BulentEkici 2013 Ballistic
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT resistance of high hardness armor steels
against 7.62 mm armor piercing
The authors thank the Director, DMRL, for
ammunition Materials and Design44
his constant encouragement and support and 35-48.
also DRDO for funding to carry out this Zhu H et al. 2011 Characterization and
work. We acknowledge the support of all Simulation of Mechanical Behavior of
members of ADDD of DMRL. 6063 Aluminum Alloy Thin-walled
Tubes Advanced materials
Research197-1981500-1508.
667
ICCMS2016
INCLUSION MODELLING IN CONCRETE WITH THE EXTENDED

FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
THIRUMALAISELVI A.*, ANANDAVALLI N. and RAJASANKAR J.
Academy of Scientific and Innovative Research, CSIR-Structural Engineering Research Centre, CSIR
Campus, CSIR Road, Taramani (P.O), Chennai, India.
Abstract: Accurate modeling of inclusions (aggregate) is critical in mesoscale

simulation of concrete. Extended finite element method (XFEM) is an efficient tool to
model discontinuities within a regular mesh, so that the element edges do not
necessarily coincide with the discontinuity unlike in the case of conventional finite
element method (FEM).In this paper, an attempt is made to adopt level set function to
model aggregates in cement mortar matrix. As a case study, two dimensional
mesoscale simulation of mechanical response of concrete is carried out by following
unit cell based approach consisting of a spherical aggregate surrounded by mortar
matrix. Linear static analysis of the mesoscale model of concrete subjected to tensile
loads is carried out by using XFEM. The same problem is analysed by using
conventional finite element method to demonstrate the accuracy and potential of the
XFEM. Numerical results show that the XFEM is efficient for mesoscale simulation
of concrete, which involves explicit modeling of inclusion and its interaction with the
matrix.
Keywords: Extended finite element method; Level set function; Inclusions;
mesoscale; Unit cell approach
INTRODUCTION interfacial transition zone (ITZ) and cement

Concrete is referred as macroscopically mortar [Schlangen and van Mier, 1992].
homogenous material with nonlinear In general, mesoscale model is analysed by
behaviour, which is predominantly caused by taking representative volume element (RVE)
the development of cracks within the and applying necessary boundary conditions.
constituents of material. Behaviour of This approach is known as ‘unit cell
concrete is derived at the macrolevel using approach’ and is being employed in
various constitutive models [Hafner et al. predicting the effective properties and
2006]. These models do not reflect the nonlinear behaviour of composite materials
influence of individual constituents upon the [Kouznetsova et al. 2001; Gitman et al. 2008;
behaviour explicitly. In order to include such Ghouse et al. 2011]. Unit cell considered in
details into the computational scheme, this study consists of one aggregate
concrete needs to be considered as a multi- surrounded by mortar matrix for numerical
scale material, where the individual simulation.
constituents are explicitly modelled. At Two types of computational approaches,
mesolevel, concrete is modeled as a three namely, Lattice modeling and Continuum
phase material consisting of aggregate, modeling are available. Lattice models have
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: selvi@serc.res.in 668

Thirumalaiselvi et al.
been used extensively [Schlangen and van approximation takes the following form
Mier, 1992], but are found to have a major (Moes et al 1999)
drawback in that the results obtained show a
u(x) = ∑ NI (x)uI + ∑ NJ (x)ᴪJ (x)aJ (1)
strong dependence on the lattice geometry I∈Kall J∈Kenr
considered. On the other hand, continuum
where Kall is these to fall nodes, Kenr is
based models have proven to provide
these to enriched nodes, NIx) is the nodal
reasonable trade-off between the
shape function, ᴪJ(x) is the enrichment
computational efficiency and accuracy of the
function, I represents conventional nodes, J
response obtained [Niknezhadet al. 2015].
denotes enriched nodes, uI is the
This approach is being used in the present
conventional nodal degree off reedom
study. Though the finite element method
(DOF), aJ is the additional nodal DOF, and
(FEM) based continuum modelling has been
hence, for the two-dimensional case, for
widely used in research, difficulties in the
example, each enriched node has four DOFs
meshing are still encountered when complex
in total (i.e. two conventional DOFs and two
problems involving discontinuities (e.g.
additional DOFs).
inclusions and cracks) are considered. To
overcome this, in the past decade, researches
have been carried out by adopting extended
finite element method (XFEM) for modelling
discontinuities (Unger and Könke2006). The
key advantage of this method is that it can
model discontinuities without conforming the
mesh with the discontinuities (Daux et al.
1999). However, the advantage of this Figure 1.llustration of the XFEM and
method has not been exploited well for FEM mesh with inclusions and voids lie
mesoscale modeling of concrete which inside the domain
involves explicit modeling of inclusions. As
a step towards this, in the present work, the MESOSCALE MODEL BASED ON
idea of XFEM based two dimensional UNIT CELL APPROACH
continuum modelling to consider aggregate
RVE of concrete of dimension 100 mm
as a rigid inclusion in cement mortar matrix
consisting of a single aggregate surrounded
using unit cell approach is proposed.
by cement mortar matrix is considered for the
BRIEFING ON THE XFEM present study [Ghouse et al 2011]. The
diameter of aggregate is chosen as 20 mm.
The extended finite element method is an RVE with one circular aggregate under
efficient numerical tool to solve problems uniaxial tension is examined through the
involving geometric discontinuity. The XFEM implemented in MATLAB. In this
essence of XFEM is that the mesh is first case, aggregate (inclusion) is relatively hard
generated regardless of the internal boundary and so can be considered as rigid. For rigid
(e.g. see Figure 1). The discontinuity inside inclusion problem, enrichment function ᴪJ(x)
the domain is then modeled by incorporating is chosen to be
enrichment functions associated with the
discontinuity in the finite element ᴪJ (x) = ∑|φJ |NJ (x) − |∑ φJ NJ (X)| (2)
approximation. In XFEM, the displacement J J
669
Inclusion Modelling in Concrete with the Extended Finite Element Method
whereφJare the nodal level set values for the noded quadrilateral plane stress elements are
material interface level set function. The used to mesh two different phases of unit
interface bounds an open region Ω. The level cell. FE mesh used consists of 3050 linear
set function φ(x(t),t) is a continuous function, quadrilateral elements with 3151 nodes.
where x(t) is a point in the domain Ω Corresponding mesh for XFEM has 2501
[Sukumar et al. 1997]. The level set function elements with 2602 nodes. The maximum
has the following properties displacement obtained from both XFEM and
φ(x(t), t) < 0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑥 ∈ Ω FEM is almost same (i.e. about 350 µm). The
φ(x(t), t) > 0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑥 ∉ Ω (3) maximum principal stress predicted from
φ(x(t), t) = 0 for x ∈ interface region
XFEM and FE simulation at the interface is
1.288 MPa and 1.279 MPa, respectively. The
The material properties of matrix and contour plot of the normal stresses obtained
inclusion are given in Table 1. In the 2D using the two approaches is presented in Fig.
XFEM analysis under uniaxial tension, plane 3. Very good agreement between the
stress condition is assumed. Boundary solutions obtained by the two methods is
condition adopted is shown in Figure 2(a). observed.
Discretized unit cell in XFEM highlighting Exact solution for elastic analysis of circular
enriched nodes is shown in Figure 2(b). inclusion in a plate under uniaxial tensile
Gauss quadrature rule is used to carry out load has been derived [Shioya 1967]. The
numerical integration. For the inclusion maximum principal stress on the interface
problem under study, interface elements are using this method is given by the expression
partitioned into several triangular elements, 1
σmax = T {
over which integration is carried out. (1 + υ) + (1 − υ̅)Г
2
+ } (4)
(3 − υ) + (1 + υ̅)Г
E
Г=
̅
E
where T is the applied tensile stress, υ and
υ̅ are Poisson’s ratio of matrix and inclusion
respectively, E andE ̅ are Young’s modulus of
matrix and inclusion respectively. When plate
is subjected to a tensile stress of 1 MPa, and
Figure 2. (a) Unit cell showing substituting elastic properties given in Table 1
boundary conditions; (b) Discretized and in equation 4, maximum principal stress is
XFEM mesh computed to be 1.291 MPa.The difference in
maximum principal stress predicted by XFEM
VALIDATION OF XFEM SOLUTION is around 0.6% when compared to analytical
In order to assess the accuracy of the XFEM solution. The difference is very small which
for modeling inclusions, XFEM solution is shows the efficiency of adopting XFEM in
compared with the finite element (FE) modeling inclusions in mesoscale modeling of
solution. Uniaxial tensile stress of 1MPa is concrete. However, further study is needed to
applied on RVE and linear static analysis is explore the applicability of XFEM in
carried out using ABAQUS software. Four- mesoscale modeling with several inclusions.
670
Thirumalaiselvi et al.
Table 1. Material parameters of different phases (Ghouse et al., 2011)
Material parameters Inclusion Mortar matrix

Young’s modulus (N/mm2) 86700 28700
Poisson’s ratio 0.3 0.27
Ghouse M D Lakshmana Rao C and Rao B N
2011 Numerical modelling of failure of
cement concrete using a unit cell approach
Sadhana 36(1) 35-51.
Gitman I M Askes H and Sluys L J 2008
Coupled-volume multi-scale modelling of
quasi-brittle material European Journal of
Mechanics and Solids27 302–327.
Hafner S Eckardt S Luther T and Konke C 2006
Figure 3.Contour plot of the normal Mesoscale modelling of concrete: Geometry
stress σ_yy: (a) XFEM; (b) FEM and numeric Computers and Structures 84
450–61.
CONCLUSION Kouznetsova V Brekelmans W A M and Baaijen
An attempt has been made to model F P T 2001 An approach to micro-macro
inclusions in mesoscale model of concrete modeling of heterogeneous materials
Computational Mechanics 27 37–48.
without meshing the interface by coupling
Moes N Dolbow J and Belytschko T 1999 A
level set method to XFEM. Level set finite element method for crack growth
function proposed by Sukumar et al. (1997) without remeshing International Journal of
is used to represent inclusions. FE simulation Numerical Methods in Engineering 46 31–
was performed on unit cell based mesoscale 150.
model to test the accuracy of the present Niknezhad D Raghavan B Bernard F and Bernard
approach. This study demonstrated that by S K Proceedings of 33rd Meetings of
AUGC, ISABTP / UPPA 27-29 Anglet May
incorporating XFEM, accurate result for the 2015.
modeling of inclusions without meshing the Schlangen E and van Mier J 1992 Simple lattice
interface separately can be obtained. Results model for numerical simulation of fracture
confirm the potential of XFEM to of concrete materials and structures
incorporate the inclusions (aggregates) in Materials and Structures 25 534-542.
mesoscale modeling of concrete. The idea in Shioya S 1967 On a semi-infinite thin plate with
a circular inclusion under uniform tension
this paper can be extended to nonlinear Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers 42
analysis of mesoscale model of concrete. 623–636.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Sukumar N Chopp D L Moes N and Belytschko
T 1997 Modeling holes and inclusion by
This paper is being presented with the kind levelsets in the extended finite-element
permission of the Director, CSIR - Structural method Comput. Methods Appl. Mech.
Engineering Research Centre, Chennai. Eng.190 6183–6200.
Unger J F and Könke C Simulation of concrete
REFERENCES using the extended finite element method
Proceedings Int. Conf. on Computational
Daux C Moes N Dolbow J Sukumar N and Modelling of Concrete Structures (EURO-C
Belytschko T 1999 A finite element method 2006) 239-247Balkema.
for crack growth without remeshing
International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering 46 131–150.
671
ICCMS2016
MATHEMATICAL MODEL FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE

PROBLEMS
RAMANA P.V.* and KUNAL B.
Department of Civil Engineering, MNIT Jaipur, India.
Abstract: This paper presents the behaviour of reinforced concrete structures

subjected to static loads, coarse aggregate fine sand is component of concrete, the rate
of macropores in concrete determine the rate porosity and void ratio in concrete
structure, the influence of the permeability coefficient determine the rate of water
passes in concrete. The mathematical model to predict the rate of permeability on
water passes were mathematically developed, the model is to monitor the rate of water
transport in concrete structure. A viscous regularization is introduced in order to avoid
the mesh dependency effects that usually appear when strain softening occurs. The
permeability established a relationship under the influence of macropores on the
constituent that made of concrete, application of concrete placement determine the
rate of permeability deposition in concrete structure, permeability establishment are
under the influence of macropores between the mixture through the cement paste,
considering the variables in the system, mathematical model were established to
monitor the rate of water passing through concrete and also determine the rate of
permeability coefficient on concrete structures.
Keywords: Reinforced Concrete Structures; Permeability; Mathematical model.
INTRODUCTION of steel bars using conventional technology

that applies corrosion inhibitors only on the
The concrete is a type of porous material and
surface of concrete. The main purpose of the
can be physically and chemically damaged
mathematical model is to minimize the time
due to its exposure to various environments
to construct the RC or any structures.
from the placing of concrete to its to the
service life. In particular, some external METHODOLOGY
hazardous elements, such as sulphate,
chloride ion, and carbon dioxide, permeate in To produce high quality long lasting concrete
concrete over a long-term period as a structures, cements of high and consistent
solution or a gaseous state and cause physical quality maintenance is most important factor.
damage due to chemical reactions. These The cement industry spends countless hours
reactions affect the corrosion of steel bars assuring the quality of its products, mainly
applied in concrete and that decreases the based on laboratory tests. The most physical
durability life and strength of such steel bars. testing of cements is performed according to
Thus, it is very important to insert corrosion SERC, CSIR, NASA or ASTM standards
inhibitors into steel bars in the case of a testing are generally governed. Technologies
deterioration element that exceeds the critical that could reduce the number of physical
amount of corrosion in the location of steel tests needed for cement production (and
bars. However, it is very difficult to optimization) would clearly be a welcome
guarantee corrosion resistance at the location addition. One such potential technology is
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: pvramana.ce@mnit.ac.in 672

Ramana et al.
the use of virtual testing. In virtual testing, paving have been studied. There is still a gap
starting materials are characterized and their of optimizing the surface materials for
performance predicted via the use of permeable pavements pervious concrete. At
computer models. This should result in ambient temperature conditions, a dosage of
savings in both resources (materials, 5 fl oz/cwt provides between 60 and 90
equipment, calibration etc.) and time, as 28 minutes of extra working time. Hydration
days of concrete performance can be controlling admixtures can eliminate
simulated in just a few hours of computer inconsistencies and performance variability
time. An additional benefit of virtual testing that may be brought on by the need to re-
is the capability to perform a large number of temper mixtures at the job sites. Along with
“what-if” type computations to explore new the HCA, VMA or viscosity modifying
material systems and optimize existing ones, admixtures may be beneficial to the
e.g., what is the optimum sulphate content performance of pervious concrete. The use of
and form for a particular cement or how will VMAs results in better flow, quicker
the performance of a cement change if its discharge time from a truck, and easier
Blaine fineness is increased by 10 m2/kg. placement and compaction. Furthermore,
Long-lasting structure is very important if it VMAs prevent drain down, and may increase
both compressive and flexural strength of
is to survive the harsh environment that it is
pervious concrete. It should be noted that not
often exposed to. In some rural places, where
all VMAs are made with pervious concrete in
there is no maintenance culture, it is all the
mind, and therefore, care should be taken
more imperative. The places like hot marine
when choosing the right VMA for pervious
coastal waters constitute an aggressive
installation. Mixtures with latex modifiers
environment that has been found to be
might allow utilization of pervious concrete
deleterious to concrete, leading to premature
in high speed pavement applications.
deterioration that affects the strength and
durability characteristics of concrete
MATHEMATICAL BACKGROUND
structures. One of the major forms of
chemical attack on concrete is the chloride This model consider the cylinder sample
ingress. This ingress leads to corrosion of depicted which produced total volume of V =
reinforcement, reduction in strength, AL where A is the cross section area of the
unserviceable structures, and structures that specimen and L is known to be the length,
are aesthetically poor. The corrosion verification of this sample is through two
products put surrounding concrete in tension pressurized reservoirs, this produced the
thereby causing tension cracking and spalling upstream at φu and the downstream one at φd
of the cover of concrete. The attendant . These initial values can be expressed as
adverse structural influences are: loss of upstream and downstream pressures are φ1
bond between the reinforcement and and φ0 respectively. In this condition
concrete, loss of steel area, and loss of application of partial differential expression
stiffness. The total effects of these are serious which should govern pressure variation as a
durability problems because of reductions in function of length and period φ(x, t) within
the strength, serviceability and aesthetics of the sample which is expressed as but in this
concrete structures. The permeable RC study concrete materials where considered,
structures have been utilized as a potential lack mix design application that has lead
tool of Water Sensitive Urban Design to poor compressive strength in concrete, this
manage natural water. However, the previous has also developed to so many structural
studies conducted mainly concentrated on damage, the focus of this study are to
water quality and pollution control through determine the rate of permeability and there
permeable RC structures and, only the relation with the concrete constituent.
properties of base course materials in
permeable pavement system and segmental
673
Mathematical Model for Reinforced Concrete Problems
GOVERNING EQUATION 𝑏 𝑏𝑡²

- 2a∏² sin²∏xt + 2a sin³∏xt + ------------
𝑐² 𝑐²
The model is to monitor the behaviour of
water that is passing through a concrete Now using boundary conditions
structure. ϕ(x=0,t) = sin∏x ; ϕ’(0,t)= - sin∏x
(𝜕∅
𝜕²∅ 𝜕∅
+ b (𝜕∅
𝜕²∅ 𝜕∅
𝑎
𝜕𝑥²
+ b 𝜕𝑥
)² = 𝑐
𝜕𝑡
𝑎 𝜕𝑥
)² = 𝑐 𝜕𝑡
𝜕𝑥²
Eq(1)
c Lt ϕ = aLx ϕ + b N ϕ
Consider IC’s as ϕ(x,0) = sin∏x and BC’s
ϕ(x=0,t) = sin∏x ; ϕ’(0,t)= - sin∏x aLx ϕ = c Lt ϕ - b N ϕ
𝜕² 𝜕 𝑐 𝑏
Lx = ; Lt = ; No =(ϕo)² Lx ϕ= Lt ϕ – N ϕ
𝜕𝑥² 𝜕𝑡 𝑎 𝑎
𝑐 𝑏
No = (sin∏x)2 ϕ = ao + a1x+ (Lx)-1 Lt ϕ - N ϕ
𝑎 𝑎
c Lt ϕ = aLx ϕ + b N ϕ ϕ0 = ao + a1x
𝑎 𝑏
ϕ = ao + (Lt)-1 Lx ϕ + N ϕ At x=0
𝑐 𝑐
ϕ0 = sin∏t = ao
ϕo= ao = sin∏x
𝑎 𝑏
ϕ0’ = -sin∏t = a1
ϕ1 = (Lt)-1 Lx sin∏x + No
𝑐 𝑐 ϕ0 = sin∏t (1-x)
𝑡𝑎 𝑏
ϕ1 = ∫0
𝑐
Lₓ ϕo + 𝑐
sin²∏x
ϕ1 = ∬ 𝑐
1 𝜕
ϕ0 – b N0
𝑎 𝜕𝑡
𝑎 𝑏 1−𝑐𝑜𝑠2∏𝑥
ϕ1 = - ∏2sin∏x.t + t N0 = sin²∏t (1-x²)
𝑐 𝑐 2
N1 = ϕ1.2 ϕ0 𝑐 𝑐𝑜𝑠∏𝑡 3 (−∏+𝑥) 𝑏𝑥²𝑠𝑖𝑛²∏t(x2 −4x+6)

ϕ1 = +
6𝑎 12𝑎
2𝑎∏² 𝑏𝑡
N1 = - sin²∏x + 2 (sin³∏x) 𝑐 𝑐𝑜𝑠∏𝑡 3 (−∏+𝑥)
𝑐 𝑐 Φ= sin∏t (1-x) + +
6𝑎
𝑎 𝑏 𝑏𝑥²𝑠𝑖𝑛²∏t(x2 −4x+6)
Φ2 = (Lt)-1 Lx sin∏x + N1 +...
𝑐 𝑐 12𝑎
𝑎 𝑡𝑎 𝑡² 𝑏 The mathematical expression of the

Φ2 = ∫ ∏⁴sin∏x. + (2∏²
𝑐 0 𝑐 2 2𝑐
parameter in the system where put into
(- sin²∏x+∏cos²∏x)) dt +
𝑏
∫0
𝑡 2𝑎∏²
sin²∏x + mathematical equation, the variables φ
𝑐 𝑐
2𝑏𝑡 denote (x, t) which is the function of x
sin³∏x dt
𝑐 distance and Time T, but for simplicity the
Φ2 =
𝑎 𝑎∏⁴𝑡²
sin∏x +
𝑏𝑡²
(2∏²(-sin²∏x+∏cos²∏x))
equation where linearized so it will be easy
𝑐 2𝑐 2
to solve the problem. The concept of water
-
𝑏
2a∏² sin²∏xt +
𝑏𝑡²
2a sin³∏xt forms the binding agent with cement paste
𝑐² 𝑐²
fine sand coarse aggregate are mixed
𝑎 𝑏 1−𝑐𝑜𝑠2∏𝑥 𝑎 together to make up concrete structure, most
Φ= sin∏x - ∏2sin∏x + t +
𝑐 𝑐 2 𝑐 time it reinforced either with mild steel or
𝑎∏⁴𝑡² 𝑏𝑡²
sin∏x + (2∏²(-sin²∏x+∏cos²∏x)) high tension steel depending on the imposed
2𝑐 2
load, the concrete is placed on a form work,
674
Ramana et al.
it is also vibrated for compaction, this Ramana P V and Raghu Prasad B K 2012
compaction will only reduce the rate of void Novel techniquefor fracture of laminated
and decrease the rate permeability in the uni-direction comp. Journal of Springer
concrete structure, but it will not avoid 37 33-57.
permeability, the rate of permeability
determine the rate of void ratio and porosity
deposited in concrete structural component.
Considering the equation by applying novel
technique; the variables in the system were
represented, by the application of
mathematical tools, a constant C1 and C2
where establish as the equation were derived
where φ represent pressure, a, b, c, this
condition expresses the entire variables.
CONCLUSION
The model established consider all the
variables in the system that influence the
transport of water in concrete structure,
initially, concrete attained strength by curing
the structure component, but when it has
attained the required strength, the fluid
passing through the macropores established
is through the influence of permeability, this
will decrease the structural compressive
strength, water transport on the structure are
caused by the variables on the model
developed. Applying the mathematical
expression will definitely monitor the rate of
water migrating on concrete structure, the
variable that allows the water transport has
been expressed. The permeability influence
that relate with the macropores between the
constituent of the concrete is the mixture of
fine. Sand, cement, water and coarse
aggregate, including the mixture and
compressibility of concrete placement
through compaction are expressed base on
various rates. The model can be simulated to
develop the theoretical values that can be
compared with the experimental values for
validation of permeability coefficient in
concrete structure.
REFERENCES
Ramana P V 2014 An Emerging technique
for Hyperbolic engg problems SEC 2014
Delhi.
675
ICCMS2016
MATERIAL MODELLING AND SIMULATIONS OF HIGHLY

FLEXIBLE STRUCTURES
PAWAR V.S.*, GURUPRASAD P. J. and PANT S. R.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: The main objective of this work is the development of a material model
that can predict complex phenomenon such as wrinkling in flexible membrane
structures. In particular, the material under consideration in this study is Nitrile
Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Material properties necessary for the model development
were determined from uniaxial tests on NBR at different loading rates based on IS
3400(2012) standards. The NBR samples however showed inconsistent deformation
response at loading rates of 50 mm/min. Hence, the tests were repeated as per ASTM
D-412standard. Dynamic Mechanical Analysis(DMA) in the frequency range 10 - 985
Hz were also performed on these samples to obtain values of key parameters, viz.,
dynamic strain, storage modulus, instantaneous modulus, complex modulus, and loss
tangent. The results obtained offer interesting insight and answer many questions
related to the phenomena of wrinkling. A material model, which incorporates
deformation response features observed in the experiments, is developed following
the framework of variational asymptotic method (VAM). Within this framework,
wrinkling can be incorporated using principal strain criteria of tension field theory or
in the development of the kinematics through the deformation gradient tensor.
Material model development is validated and numerically implemented in UMAT for
structural scale applications.
Keywords: Wrinkling; VAM; PVC; NBR; DMA; UMAT
INTRODUCTION such structures in space, to prolong their life,

while maintaining the strict service
Inflatable materials are finding lot of
requirements. Care needs to be taken that
applications in diversified fields such as
such structures should not be lost in space,
Aerospace, Biomedical Engineering,
due to their heavy cost. Major design
Architecture, and Civil Engineering. NASA
challenges for such structures are: (a) correct
has developed super-pressure balloon
prediction of the loads that structure may be
technology for collection of weather data and
subjected to when deployed in space, and
planet exploration missions; the key
identification; and (b) prediction of the
requirement for this application is a highly
material behaviour well. Such materials are
light weight structure. Typical materials used
not only for space inflatables; they also find
for this application include LLDPE, LDP,
application in our day to day life, for e.g.,
and PVC coated fabrics. A lot of testing and
doctors and nurses use hand gloves of nitrile
simulation is required before deployment of
rubber. Such material comes under the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:vaibhavpawar3@iitb.ac.in 676

Pawar et al.
category of highly flexible structures; the key loading conditions [Berdichevsky, 1979;
difference between these elastomers and Burela and Harursampath 2012]. The present
others like PVC is that the former undergo work focuses on the experimental results and
strains of around 200 to 300 % with large discusses the broad framework of VAM for
deformations, while the latter undergo large model development.
deformations with much smaller strains.
A common problem that both these materials
face is that of wrinkling, which is the The present study is aimed at testing and
inability of an envelope or patch or elastomer simulation of NBR elastomer (popularly
to resist compressive loads; resulting in known as nitrile rubber), which has shown
buckling. Modelling of wrinkling is a wrinkling in biomedical applications.
formidable challenge, and prediction of its Though some test about NBR are available in
onset and the response of the material is quite literature, e.g., [Saleesung et al., 2010], more
difficult. Wrinkling can be handled in tension tests were carried out in this study to
field theory approach, as well as in generate data for simulations from wrinkling
bifurcation theory approach (as a post point of view. Further, if material
buckling behaviour) [Cao and Hutchinson, modelling(with and without wrinkling) is to
2012]. Two approaches are commonly used be attempted; and various simulation
while dealing with such materials; one being strategies investigated, some specific
hyper elastic material behaviour and other parameters of NBR elastomers are needed,
being viscoelastic behaviour, though viz., time dependent behaviour, static stress
combinations cannot be ruled out. Materials and strain behaviour, dynamic strains,
such as PVC and LDPE (Low Density Poly instantaneous, long term and short term
Ethylene) fit under the class of viscoelastic modulus, performance at various elongation
materials, while materials such as elastomers rates, and the effect of biaxial loading.
fall under hyper elastic materials. Many In this study, a test-setup was developed that
material models and strategies are available can apply uniaxial and biaxial traction on the
to deal with both these materials. Some of test specimens. Fresh compound of NBR was
these are Prony series, Viogt model, procured and cured at 1600 C for about 20
convolution integrals for viscoelastic minutes. Initially, it was decided to test the
materials [Deng and Pellegrino 2012], and performance of NBR at different elongation
Neo-Hookean, Ogden, Mooney Rivlin, rates ranging from 50 to 500 mm/min, as per
Marflow, polynomial energy density IS 3400(2012) standards for rubber. Test
functions for hyperelastic materials [Martins specimen were gripped in the jaws, with
et al., 2006]. There have been many inter-jaw distance varying from 40 to 50 mm.
contributors in this field, e.g., Deng and The samples were prepared in a manner to
Pellegrino (2012), Gerngross and Pellegrino permit averaging of results. Since the load
(2007), Akita and Natori (2008), Nayyar et deformation curves could be obtained using
al.(2014), to name a few. A viable alternative the set-up, experiments were performed to
to the above methodologies is a model based determine the elongation at break and to
on variational asymptotic method (VAM), carry out accurate strain based investigation.
which can naturally capture the overall However, inconsistent results were obtained
material response and consequently the when the sample were subjected to
development of wrinkling under appropriate
677
Material Modelling and Simulations of Highly Flexible Structures
elongation rates of 50 mm/min elongation be seen that the sample tested at elongation
rates. rate of 50 mm/min was showing a different
trend compared to others.
Further tests were performed on a Dynamic
Mechanical analyser (DMA) with a Figure. 2 shows breaking stress as a function
frequency ranging from 10 to 985 Hz with a of different elongation rates. As can be seen
span of 25 Hz. The breaking stress was in the Figure, some in consistencies were
determine as per ASTM D-412 standards for observed in breaking stress with respect to
static tests, and ASTM-D 5992 standards for strain rates, with the peak value observed at
dynamic tests. The tests also generated an elongation rates of 300 mm/min. Results
values for instantaneous, long term, short are found to be consistent with those
term, compliance, dynamic strains, Young’s obtained with ASTM D-412. The test results
Modulus, Tangent modulus, and Loss shown in Figure. 1 and Figure. 2 correspond
Modulus. Tests were also performed for to IS 3400 (2012) standards.
stress relaxation, to get force retention when
initial compression is set to be equal to
14.7% of the specimen axial length of 12
mm. Observations were taken for seven
different temperatures ranging from 30 to
900C. The tests were conducted over a period
of eight days, and the temperature readings
were noted down after every hour. All data
has been generated with a view to help in
carrying out better material modelling, and
develop more robust and sophisticated
models to predict material behaviour of Figure 2. Breaking Stress v/s Elongation
elastomers with and without wrinkling. Rates
Another study was carried out which looked
at the variations in % elongation when the
material samples were subjected to different
elongation rates, as shown in Figure. 3.
Figure.1 Performance of NBR at different

Elongation Rates
RESULTSOF TESTING Figure 3. % Elongation at Break of NBR

Figure.1 shows averaged stress-strain curve It can be observed that performance of
for NBR elastomers when tested at different material drops, and the % elongation
elongation rates at room temperature. It can
678
Pawar et al.
decreases steadily as the elongation rates are Ghatkopar for providing all the facilities
increased. required for testing.
In general, the experimental results have Akita T and Natori M C 2008 Sensitivity
shown the significant role of geometrical Analysis Method for Membrane
nonlinearity in the overall deformation Wrinkling Based on the Tension-Field
response of the materials. Except for one Theory AIAA Journal 46(6) 1516–1527
sample (which showed inconsistent doi:10.2514/1.33187.
behaviour at elongation rate of 50 mm/min), Berdichevsky V 1979 Variational-
the results obtained using both the standards Asymptotic Method of constructing a
(viz., IS3400 (2012) and ASTM D-412) Theory of Shells AIAA Journal 43(4)
showed good agreement with each other. 664–687 doi:10.1016/0021-
Since testing as per the two different 8928(79)90157-6.
standards involved different dimensions with
different gage length, width and thickness, Burela R G and Harursampath D 2012 VAM
the results are applicable to general class of applied to dimensional reduction of
loading which such type of material may face non-linear hyperelastic plates
in actual practice. A sudden jump in material International Journal of Engineering
behaviour was observed in terms of stress Science 59 0–102.
generated at 300 % elongation rate and doi:10.1016/j.ijengsci.2012.03.019.
physical reasoning to rationalize this Cao Y and Hutchinson J W 2012 From
characteristic is yet to be completely wrinkles to creases in elastomers: the
developed. Currently, a material model based instability and imperfection-sensitivity
on the VAM is being developed for the of wrinkling Proceedings of the Royal
analysis of flexible structures made of Society A: Mathematical Physical and
materials under study in this work. VAM as a Engineering Sciences 468(2137) 94–
mathematical tool has been successfully used 115 doi:10.1098/rspa.2011.0384.
in the development of material and Deng X and Pellegrino S 2012 Wrinkling of
geometrically nonlinear beam, strip and plate Orthotropic Viscoelastic Membranes
models and as a viable alternative to classical AIAA Journal 50(3) 668–681
micromechanics approach for the prediction doi:10.2514/1.J051255.
of material properties of heterogeneous
Gerngross T and Pellegrino S 2007
materials. For the sake of brevity, the model
Modelling of Anisotropic Viscoelastic
details and the description of the framework
Behaviour in Super-Pressure Balloons
is not provided here. In this work VAM will
1–15.
be used for material model development for
capturing deformation response like Martins P a L S Jorge R M N and Ferreira a J
wrinkling. M 2006 A comparative study of several
material models for prediction of
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS hyperelastic properties: Application to
The authors are extremely thankful to silicone-rubber and soft tissues Strain42
IRMRA, Thane, and Attuned Polymers Ltd 135–147doi:doi:10.1111/j.1475-
1305.2006.00257.x
679
Material Modelling and Simulations of Highly Flexible Structures
Nayyar V Ravi Chandar K and Huang R

2014 Stretch-induced wrinkling of
polyethylene thin sheets: experiments
and modeling International Journal of
Solids and Structures Elsevier Ltd
doi:10.1016/j.ijsolstr.2014.01.028.
Saleesung T Saeoui P and Sirisinha C 2010
Mechanical and thermal properties of
thermoplastic elastomer based on low
density polyethylene and ultra-fine
fully-vulcanized acrylonitrile butadiene
rubber powder (UFNBRP) Polymer
Testing 29(8) 977–983.
680
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS AND OPTIMIZATION OF MULTI-PLATE WET CLUTCH

WITH DIFFERENT FRICTION MATERIALS
SHAHA U.* and TEMBHARE G.U.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute,, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Clutch is very important component in automotive power transmission

system. It includes friction plate and pressure plate which are responsible for
transmission of power from engine to gearbox. During power transmission friction
surfaces are worn out which affects the life as well as behaviour of clutch. In this
paper comparative study of friction surface has done with different materials in order
to reduce deformation and increasing the service life of the clutch. This study includes
multi-plate wet clutch of EN15 as core disc and pressure plate material and Cork
composite, Kevlar, SF-MC2, and HCC as friction materials. 3D modelling of clutch
plate will be done using CATIA V5. Analysis and optimization of stresses and
deformation of different materials to be done in ANSYS 16.0using uniform wear
theory.
Keywords: Multi-plate wet clutch; Cork composite; Kevlar; SF-MC2; HCC.
INTRODUCTION high coefficient of friction both plates engage

with each other. Due to this frequent
Clutch is very important component in
engagement and disengagement of pressure
automotive power transmission system. It
and friction plates, friction surfaces are worn
helps in transmission of engine torque and
out with time, which reduces the life and
power to gearbox through frictional contact
performance of clutch. Friction surfaces of
interfaces of clutch plates.
clutch plates are made of different friction
In multi-plate wet clutch pressure plates and materials according to the working condition
friction plates are arranged alternatively in a and its application. Friction materials need to
compact casing. They are engaged during meet requirements in a wide variety of
running condition. During shifting of gear properties. Desired properties of a friction
driver press the clutch pedal due to which material include strength, heat resistance and
clutch plates get disengaged and on release of long life. Friction materials for transmissions
the pedal clutch plates retain original should display no bond failure under
position. During disengaged condition one of standard usage conditions, and have retention
the set of clutch plates is in moving of torque curve levelness and torque
condition. When clutch pedal is released, the capacity. In addition, as friction modifiers in
stationary plates are engaged with these the transmission fluid enhance smooth
moving plates. Due to this relative velocity, operation of the clutch, the friction material
both stationary and rotating plates try to should hold or retain an appropriate amount
synchronize their speed. During of fluid at the engaging surface.
synchronization, pressure plates and friction
plates are rubbed on each other and due to
_______________________
Author to correspondence E-mail: ubaidhaina@gmail.com 681

Shaha and Tembhare
In this paper comparative study of friction includes multi-plate wet clutch of EN15 as
surface has done with different materials in core discs material and Cork composite,
order to reduce deformation and increasing Kevlar, SF-MC2, and HCC as friction
the service life of the clutch. This study materials.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Table 1. Material Properties (EN-GJS-400-15)
Property Value Property Value
Hardness 150 BHN Ultimate Tensile Strength 572 MPa
Elasticity 7107 GPa Tensile Yield Strength 503 MPa
Poisson's Ratio 0.33 Density 2.81 g/cc
Shear Modulus 26.9 GPa Shear strength 331 MPa
CTE, linear 250°C 25.2 µm/m°C Thermal Conductivity 130 W/m-K
Table 2. Material Properties (Friction Materials)

Properties Cork composites Kevlar SF-MC2 HCC
Density (kg/m3) 1200 1440 1350 1950
Young’s Modulus (MPa) 12.3 51.3 51.3 54.6
Compression Modulus (MPa) 25 300 280 120
Shear Modulus (MPa) 15 19 19 21
Poisson’s Ratio 0.25 0.35 0.27 0.3
Thermal Conductivity (W/mK) 0.057 0.25 0.25 0.26
Specific Heat (J/kgK) 350 1674 1540 1674
Coeff. of Friction 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.45
Pressure plate and core disc of friction plate

share the same material and are made of EN-
GJS-400-15 or EN-15.
3D MODELLING OF CLUTCH
3D modelling of clutch plates is done using
CATIA V5. Though multi-plate clutch
having 10plates (5 friction plates+5 pressure
plates) but in this paper a simplified clutch
model is used for analysis. Clutch assembly
then export to ANSYS 16.0 for further
analysis. All dimensions are kept constant
throughout the process in order to get better
results. Figure 1 shows the friction plate and Figure 1. Friction Plate
figure 2 represents pressure plate
682
Analysis and Optimization of Multi-Plate Wet Clutchwith Different Friction Material
The wear model to find the rate of wearfis

given by
𝑑ℎ
=𝑓 (4)
𝑑𝑡
FE MODELLING
The next step in modelling process is to
create a 3D finite element model for static
structural analysis using ANSYS 16.0.
Assembly created in CATIA V5 is imported
in ANSYS keeping all the dimensional data
and coordinate system untouched.
Figure 2. Pressure Plate In FE model friction surface and core disc
are considered as flexible or deformable
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING bodies while the pressure plate is considered
Since this paper includes calculation of as rigid body. The interface between core
deformation of the friction surface, hence disc and friction surface is bonded contact
uniform wear theory is applied for the and the interface between friction surface and
analysis. According to uniform wear theory pressure plate is modelled as frictional
following equation is used to find the applied asymmetric contact. Both contacts are
torque, defined by augmented Lagrangian contact
𝑇𝑜𝑟𝑞𝑢𝑒 𝜏 = 𝑛𝜇𝑅𝑊 (1) algorithm in both tangential and normal
Where, directions.
𝑛 = 𝑛1 + 𝑛2 − 1 (2) Meshing of assembly is done by proximity
n= no. of pairs contact surfaces and curvature setting keeping asymmetric
n 1 = no. of friction plates Newton-Raphson analysis process.
n 2 = no. of pressure plates
𝑅1 +𝑅2
𝑅= (3)
2
R=Mean radius of friction surface
R 1 = External radii of friction Surface
R 2 =Internal radii of friction Surface
W= Axial force
µ= Coefficient of friction
WEAR MODELLING
Figure 3. Meshing of Friction Plate
The wear at friction-pressure plate interface
is modelled on macro level and not on detail RESULT
molecular level. This phenomenon is based
Solution of FE model of clutch plate using
on local level wear law used to find relation
Cork as friction material calculates different
between the depth of wear hat particular
results viz. total deformation, max axial
point and distance s that the point slides
stress, Max. Shear stress, directional
against the interacting surfaces.
deformation, von Mises stress, etc. But for
683
Shaha and Tembhare
this paper we choose only Total deformation clutch Tribology International 505 154-
and Max. Shear stress. 164.
Total deformation= 0.06 mm Archard J F 1953 Contact and rubbing of flat
Max. Shear stress = 3035 MPa surfaces Journal of Applied Physics 24
981-988.
Ingram M Spikes H Noles J Watts R 2010
Contact properties of a wet clutch
friction material An International
Journal on the Science and Technology
of Friction Lubrication and Wear 43
815-821.
Kumar M Kodaganti V 2013Wet clutch
Figure 4. Meshing of Pressure plate modelling techniques Master’s Thesis In
The Automotive Engineering, Chalmers
University of Technology Goteborg
Sweden 21-31.
Podra P Andersson S 1999 Simulating
sliding wear with finite element method
Tribology International 32 71-81.
Soderberg A Andersson S 2009 Simulation
of wear and contact pressure distribution
at the pad-to-rotor interface in a disc
brake using general purpose finite
element analysis software An
Figure 5. Maximum Shear Stress International Journal on the Science and
Technology of Friction Lubrication and
CONCLUSION Wear 267 2243-2251.
This paper discuss how FE model is used for
analysis of deformation and shear stress on
different friction materials. During
engagement of clutch plates maximum shear
stress as well as von Moises stress is
developed at edges of friction surface. We
can compare the results of different friction
materials and choose best possible friction
material in order to increase the life and
performance of the clutch assembly.
REFERENCES
Abdullah O I Prof Schlattmann S 2012 The
effect of disc radius on heat flux and
temperature distribution on friction
684
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL EVALUATIONOF FLEXURAL STRENGTHOF NBG-18

GRAPHITE
BANSAL M 1*, SINGH I. V.1, MISHRA B. K.1 and SHARMA K.2
1
2
Reactor Structures Section, Reactor Safety Division, BARC, Mumbai, India
Abstract: In this paper, an FEM based numerical approach has been implemented on
a three-point bend test specimen to evaluate the flexural strength of NBG-18 nuclear
graphite. The flexural strength has been evaluated from the known values of tensile
and compressive strength of the graphite. NBG-18 has a significantly higher
compressive strength compared to its tensile strength. Hence, Drucker-Prager
plasticity model has been implemented in the present work. The model has been
developed based on a bi-axial fit of Mohr-Coulomb yield surface. Since the measured
values of tensile and compressive strengths of NBG-18 have a lot of scatter, thus a
pair of compressive and tensile strength is assigned to the plasticity model. The
flexural strength is obtained for a large number of such pairs of tensile and
compressive strengths selected randomly as per their frequency of occurence in the
experimental data. The results obtained from the simulation are compared with the
experimaental data, and it is observed that the simulation overpredicts the flexural
strength.
Keywords: Flexural strength; Plane stress; Drucker-Prager plasticity model;
NBG-18.
INTRODUCTION that structural integrity of nuclear graphite is

Due to rising energy demands and stricter established. Nuclear graphite shows a large
pollution norms, alternative energy sources scatter in its strength. Hence it is important to
are being explored. Nuclear energy as against develop an analytical/numerical stochastic
the fossil fuel based resources is a viable framework to estimate its strength. In this
alternative for the future. The development of paper numerical simulation has been
generation IV nuclear plant aims to extract implemented to evaluate the flexural strength
90% of the energy available in the fuel. Such of NGB-18 in terms of its tensile and
reactor would increase the percentage of compressive strengths. The experimental data
uranium and plutonium atoms participating [Hindley et al., 2012] for tensile and
in fission. These reactors require material compressive strengths is used to predict the
with high thermal/irradiation resistivity along flexural strength. The predicted flexural
with uncompromised structural strength. strength is compared with the experimentally
Nuclear graphite is the best available measured values given in the same work.
material for the purpose. Therefore, it is Due to large difference in the tensile and
crucial to have rigorous strength analysis so compressive strengths, Drucker –Prager
plasticity model has been implemented. A
_____________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:manikbansal.iitr@gmail.com 685

Bansal et al.
pair of tensile and compressive strength from the statistical distribution of the same
given as input to model is assigned randomly given in Hindley et al., 2012.
in accordance with the frequency of its The schematic representation of a three-point
occurrence in the experimental data. Mean bend specimen along with boundary
and standard deviation of flexural strength condition is shown in Figure 1. The geometry
obtained by simulation are compared with ofthe specimen is as per ASTM D7972. The
the same obtained experimentally. elastic properties for the NBG-18 (Philippe et
al., 2012)are taken as E=11.5 GPa and ν =
METHODOLOGY 0.2.
For the evaluation of the flexural strength of The finite 10 mm
the nuclear graphite grade NBG-18, FEM
10 mm
based numerical formulation has been
implemented. The stress-strain behaviour of
50 mm
the material is considered as elastic-perfectly
plastic. Due to large difference in the Figure 1.Schematic representation of 3-
strength values of tension and compression, point bend specimen.
the simple Von-Mises based plasticity
models cannot be used for the prediction of element analysis has been performed many
the flexural strength. Therefore plane stress times to evaluate the flexural strength using
based Drucker-Prager plasticity model with the different pairs of tensile and compressive
associative/non-associative flow rule has strengths. The results obtained are
been implemented (Neto et al., 2008). statistically fitted in both normal and Weibull
The frequency of occurrence of a pair of distributions.
tensile and compressive strength is obtained
Table 1. Statistical parameters obtained by fitting flexural strength data based on
simulation and experimental results
Statistical parameters Simulation data Experimental data

(Hindleyet al., 2012)
Scale parameter (λ) 43.4 32
Shape parameters (κ) 11 9.2
Mean (µ) 41 30.3
Standard Deviation (σ) 5 3.74
obtained through simulation varies from 25-
RESULTS 50 MPa whereas the experimental results lie
Large number (292) of tensile and within 18-38 MPa. The normal and Weibull
compressive strength pair generated distribution parameters of the simulated
randomly from the experimental data given results are given in Table 1. For the effective
in Hindley et al., (2012) are used as input to representation of the simulation data,
the FEM analysis. The simulations are histograms are plotted along with probability
performed to obtain 292 random values of density function curve for normal and
flexural strength. The flexural strength Weibull distributions in Figure 2 & Figure 3
686
Numerical Evaluation of Flexural Strength of NBG-18 Graphite
respectively. A comparison of the

numerically simulated results with the
experimental data shows that the numerical
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
model overestimate the flexural strength.
We would like to thank Board of Research in
Normal Distribution
140 Nuclear Sciencs (BRNS), Department of
Numerical Data
Normal fit
Atomic Energy (DAE), Mumbai for
120
providing financial support to this work
Fre
100 through grant no: 36(2)/14/01/2014-
qu 80 BRNS/1078.
enc 60
y
REFERENCES
40
Hindley M P Mitchell M N Blaine D C and
20 Groenwold A A 2012 Observations in
0 the statistical analysis of NBG-18
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 nuclear graphite strength tests Journal
Flexural Strength (MPa) of Nuclear Materials 420 110-115.
Figure 2: Normal Distribution plot Neto E A de Souza Perić D and Owen D R J
2008 Computational methods for
Weibull Distribution
140 plasticity Theory and Application John
120
Numerical Data Wiley & Sons Ltd United Kingdom.
Weibull fit
100 Philippe B Berlioux G Mesnildot B Hiltmann
Fre F and Melin M 2012 NBG-17 an
qu 80
improved graphite grade for HTRs and
enc 60
VHTRs Nuclear Engineering and Design
y
40 251 146-149.
20
0
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Flexural Strength (MPa)
Figure 3: Weibull Distribution plot
CONCLUSIONS
This paper presents a FEM based approach
for the prediction of flexural strength of
NBG-18 nuclear graphite. Drucker-Prager
model has been implemented such that the
yield surface fits the Mohr-Coloumb surface
biaxially in tension and compression. The
predicted flexural strength range from 25-50
MPa while the experimental data ranges from
18-38 MPa. Thus, it can be concluded that
the numerical simulation over predicts the
flexural strength.
687
ICCMS2016
FE BASED INVESTIGATION OF HEAT EFFECTED ZONE AND

TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION IN COPPER AND AISI 304
STAINLESS STEEL WELDMENT
SINGH G.1*, SAXENA R. K.1 and PANDEY S.2
1
ME Department, Sant Longowal Institute of Engineering & Technology, Longowal, Sangrur (PB) ,
India..
2
ME Department, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, Hauz Khas New Delhi, India
Abstract: Dissimilar material welding of AISI-304 stainless steel and copper are used
to utilize corrosion resistance of stainless steel and heat conductivity of copper to
enhance the performance characteristics of the heat exchanger. Due to the large
differences in material properties, there is uneven partitioning of the heat at the joint
interface in such dissimilar welding. Welding arc is traversed at a suitable offsetting
from the joint interface to compensate for the heat loss at the joint interface between
two plates. Experimentation for the understanding and analysis of the process
involving dissimilar welding becomes a cost intensive process. In the present work,
finite element method is employed for the simulation of dissimilar welding of AISI
304 stainless steel and Copper using MSC Marc 2014®. The method is employed to
obtain the temperature distribution and heat affected zone (HAZ) at different off-
setting distances.
Keywords: FEM, Temperature Distribution, Copper, AISI 304 and GTAW.
INTRODUCTION heat rapidly away from the weld leading to

difficulties in reaching the melting
Welding is a process of joining two temperature of copper. A number of
components under localised heating. The researchers have studied the copper and AISI
localised heating causes coalescence and 304 stainless steel weldment using different
forms a permanent joint. The two welding techniques viz. Shielded Metal Arc
components may consist of similar or Welding (SMAW) [Velu and Bhat 2013],
dissimilar materials. Welding of dissimilar Friction stir welding [Tsuchiya and
metals is required in order to satisfy Kawamura 1996, Sahin et al. 1998, Fu and
differential requirements for process and Du 2006, Sahin et al. 2012], Laser beam
performance. The limited solubility between welding [Weigl and Schmidt 2010], Electron
the different metals, different thermal- Beam welding [Tomashchuk et al. 2010,
expansion coefficients, melting temperature Zhang et al. 2015], Explosion welding
and thermal conductivities makes the [Durgutlu et al. 2005], Gas tungsten arc
welding difficult. The different thermal welding (GTAW) [SHIRI et al. 2012], Finite
conductivities of the materials gives rise to element method [Attarha and Far 2011,
uneven temperature partitioning and Zhang et al. 2015]. The processes have been
distribution around the weld interface. applied to investigate upon the metallurgical
Copper conducts heat up to 10 times faster study, microstructure characterization and
than steels, which in turn tends to dissipate mechanical testing. Most of the study is
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: gurdeepsinghbanga@gmail.com 688

Singh et al.
performed through experimental methods. In elements mesh used have a total 151200
the present work, a finite element model is hexahedral elements and 175160 nodes
developed to simulate the welding of (Figure. 2). The process parameters for
dissimilar couple consisting of Copper and simulation are
AISI 304 stainless steel. The welding is
assumed as a thermal analysis model
involving the high intensity of localized heat
source viz. Goldak’s double ellipsoidal heat
source model (2005) which is moving at a
predefined speed along a specified path. A
commercial FE software MSC Marc(R) is
employed to develop the transient non-linear
model. The model is employed to predict
temperatures distribution and heat affected Figure. 1. Isometric solid model of AISI
zone during butt welding. The study is 304 and Copper (mm)
performed to find the effect of off-setting of
the welding arc from the weld interface Table 3. Parameter of GTAW process
during gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW).
No. of Experiments
Due to the off-setting of the welding arc, the
study becomes difficult due to the 1 2 3 4 5
introduction of thermal contact resistance at Off-setting
0.5 1.0 1.25 1.50 1.75
the joint interface. (mm)
Electrode
Diameter 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING (mm)
Polarity DCE DCE DCE DCE DCE
A 3D finite element model is employed for N N N N N
welding simulation. The typical chemical Voltage (V) 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
composition and thermo-physical properties Current (A) 80 80 80 80 80
of the materials are given in Tables 1 and 2.
Welding
1.85 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.85
Speed (mm/s)
Table 1. Chemical Composition Arc
Materi
M
efficiency 50 50 50 50 50
al C Si P S Cr Ni Cu Fe (%)
Name n
Shielding gas
0. 0. 18 8 8 8 8 8
AISI 0. 2. 1. 8- __ Ba arc (L/min)
304
04 00 -
08 0 0 10 _ l.
5 3 20 The double ellipsoidal model is given by:
Coppe --- --- --- --- 99 ---
r
--- -- ---
-- -- --- - .9 - For the front side heat source:
Table 2. Physical Properties 6 3 f f ηQ  −3 x 2   −3 y 2   −3 z 2 
f ( x, y , z ) = v exp  2  exp  2  exp  2 
abc f π π  a   b   c 
Thermal
Thermal Specific  f 
Material Density Expansion
Conductivity Heat (1)
Name (Kg/m3) coefficient
W/(m.K) J/(Kg.K)
(K)
AISI For the rear side heat source:
8000 1.8e-005 16 500
304
6 3 f rη Q  −3 x 2   −3 y 2   −3 z 2 
f ( x, y , z ) = v exp  2  exp  2  exp  2 
Copper 8900 2.4e-005 387 390 abcrπ π  a   b   cr 
(2)
The geometric dimensions of problem
domain are given in Figure 1. The solid where x, y and z are the local coordinates of
model of the plates are generated using Solid the double ellipsoid model aligned with the
works(R), then the model is imported in weld line. The fractions f f and f r are the
Patran(R) 2010 through IGS format. The finite parameters for defining the fraction of the
689
FE Based Investigation of HAZ and Temperature Distribution in Cu and AISI 304 SS Weldment
heat deposited in the front and the rear of the Roughness (m), P is contact pressure (Pa),
welding arc, respectively. In the present H c is surface micro-hardness (Pa).
work, f f is selected as 1.4 and the f r is
selected as 0.6. The power of the welding
heat source (Q) is calculated by using
following empirical:
ηVI
Q= (3)
v
The parameters a is the weld width, b is the
weld penetration depth, c f and cr are the
forward length and rear length in the weld (a) (1)
path.
(b) (2)
Figure. 2. Finite element mesh of

SS304 and copper.
These parameters are determined through
(c) (3)
experimental study of the weld pool and are
adjusted to create desired melted geometry
according to the prescribed welding
conditions. The governing differential
equation for heat conduction is given by
∂  ∂T  ∂  ∂T  ∂  ∂T  ∂T (4)
 kx  +  ky  +  kz +q =ρc
∂x  ∂x  ∂y  ∂y  ∂z  ∂z  ∂t
where K x ,K y and K z are the thermal (d) (4)

conductivities, ρ is the density of the
materials, c is the specific heat capacity, T is
the current temperature, q is the heat flux
vector and t is the time. The thermal contact
conductance, h c (W/m2-K), of the interface
between AISI 304 stainless steel and copper
weldment is given by the following
relationship: (e) (5)
0.95 Figure.3. Heat affected zone (a-e) and
 P 
(5) temperature distribution (1-5) of AISI
−0257
hc = 4200ks R a  
 Hc  304 stainless steel and copper v/s
distances from the weld line with
where k s is harmonic mean thermal
different off-setting.
conductivity, Ra combined average
690
Singh et al.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION plates through experimental

measurements and finite element
The heat affected zone (HAZ) and
simulation J of Mater Pro Tech. 211
temperature distribution between AISI 304
688–694.
stainless steel and copper are show in figure
Fu L and Du S G 2006 Effects of external
3. It is observed that HAZ is larger in Cu
electric field on microstructure and
weld pads than in AISI 304. The similar
property of friction welded joint
phenomena is observed with the off-setting
between copper and stainless steel J of
distances. This is due to the fact that the
Materials Sci 41 4137-4142.
thermal conductivity of Cu is higher giving
Goldak J A Akhlaghi M 2005 Computational
higher dissipation rate in Cu than in 304
Welding Mechanics Springer.
steel. Further, due to this phenomenon the
Tsuchiya K and Kawamura H 1996
peak value of temperature is higher in AISI
Mechanical properties of Cu-Cr-Zr
304 steel than in Cu.
alloy and SS316 joints fabricated by
Due to physical contact between two plates friction method J of Nuclear Material
before welding, the contact interface is 233-237 913-917.
modeled as a thermal contact making the Sahin M Cıl E and Misirli C 2012
problem non-linear. The value of thermal Characterization of Properties in
contact resistance depends upon the physical, Friction Welded Stainless Steel and
process and, environmental conditions. For Copper Materials J of Materials Engg.
simplicity, its value is assumed constant. Due and Performance 22 840-847.
to the presence of thermal contact, a finite Weigl M. and Schmidt M 2010 Influence of
step is observed in the temperature values at the feed rate and the lateral beam
the joint interface. The finite jump in displacement on the joining quality of
temperature seems reasonable by the laser-welded copper-stainless steel
observed values of peak temperature around connections, Physics Procedia 5 53–59.
the joint interface. Shiri S G Nazarzadeh M Sharifitabar M. and
Afarani M S 2012 Gas tungsten arc
CONCLUSION
welding of CP-copper to 304 stainless
The FE model is effectively employed for the steel using different filler materials
analysis of HAZ and temperature distribution Transaction of Nonferrous Metal
during welding of AISI-304 stainless steel Society China 22 2937−2942.
and copper. The effect of off-setting of Tomashchuk I Sallamand P Jouvard J M and
welding arc in GTAW is employed. The Grevey D 2010 The simulation of
model is able to demonstrate the effect of morphology of dissimilar copper–steel
thermal contact at the joint interface during electron beam welds using level set
GTAW welding of the dissimilar materials. method Computational Materials
REFERENCES Science 48 827–836.
Velu M and Bhat S 2013 Metallurgical and
Durgutlu A Gulenc B and Findik F 2005 mechanical examinations of steel–
Examination of copper/stainless steel copper joints arc welded using bronze
joints formed by explosive welding and nickel-base super alloy filler
Materials and Design 26 497–507. materials Materials and Design 47 793–
Sahin A Z Yibas B.S Ahmed M. and Nickel J 809.
1998 Analysis of the friction welding Zhang B G Zhao J Li X P and Chen G Q
process in relation to the welding of 2015 Effect of filler wire on residual
copper and steel bars J of Mater Pro stress in electron beam welded QCr0.8
Tech. 82 127–136. copper alloy to 304 stainless steel joints
Attarha M J Far I 2011 Study on welding Applied Thermal Engineering 80 261-
temperature distribution in thin welded 268.
691
ICCMS2016
MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF EPOXY MATRIX UNDER TENSION,

COMPRESSION AND SHEAR USING DIC: EXPERIMENTS AND
NUMERICAL MODELING
GUPTA M.* and MAHAJAN P.
Department of Applied Mechanics, IIT Delhi, New Delhi, India.
Abstract: Polymermatrix composites (PMC’s) finds an extensive use in modern day

industrial applications. When loaded the polymer used undergoes complex state of
stresses. So to accurately predict the mechanical response multiscale modelling is
preferred, which requires more accurate prediction of both matrix and particulate
phase in composites. Thus current work deals with the characterization of EPIKOTE
RIM135 epoxy resin system in tension, shear and compression using Digital Image
Correlation (DIC) for measuring strains. An updated numerical model is implemented
to predict the experimental behaviour using yield function.
Keywords: Digital image Co-relation; Polymer matrix characterization;
Plasticity
INTRODUCTION Epoxy resin is used a lot to prepare PMC’s. It

is well known that in a transverse tension test
Polymeric materials have become an strain to failure in a uni-directional composite
important part of modern automotive industry approaches only fraction of the strain-to-
due to increasing use of composites in body failure as compared to that of neat epoxy.
parts. In particular, polymer and polymer While the tensile fracture strain of the matrix
matrix composites (PMC), due to their varies over a wide range (1.5–70%), the
lightweight and excellent mechanical corresponding composite transverse fracture
characteristics are widely used for civil and strain to failure is limited (0.2–0.9%) (Asp et
mechanical applications. Simultaneously the al. 1995).In literature the dominant
understanding of their mechanical behaviour explanations for the above behaviour were (i)
has significantly advanced, but due to their strain magnification, (ii)stress magnification
different deformation modes, the mechanical (Nicholls 1986). Strain magnification occurs
response of PMC’s is complex when because of relatively stiff fibers with 50-60%
compared to metals. In metals conducting volume fraction (generally). Thus the actual
different types of mechanical loadings do not strain in the matrix between the fibers is
show significant problems due to higher than the nominal strain measured for
homogeneity and isotropy of metals, whereas the composite. Stress magnification occurs
in PMC’s the testing is challenging due to the from the fibers which cause localized stress
inhomogeneity and anisotropy. The concentrations in the matrix. Thus, in a
inhomogeneity in composites is usually due mechanically loaded composite the matrix is
to a filler material (fiber) in a matrix, under a tri-axial stress state. Thus in this
distributed periodically or random. The situation the behaviour of polymeric matrix is
embedded fibers are stiffer compared to the different when compared to bulk response
matrix [Fiedler et al. 2001]. without fibers. The difference in the fiber and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:g.mohit15@gmail.com 692

Gupta and Mahajan
matrix Poisson’s ratio creates a tri-axial stress As shown on figure 1(a) a tensile specimen
state. mold is shown. Three different specimens are
The other dominant factor which makes shown in figure 1(b). Silicone mold casting
characterization of polymers more complex method was preferred over CNC cutting of
as compared to metals is that of the effect of specimens out from a slab due to the cost
hydrostatic component of stress. On the effectiveness and eliminating the surface
contrary most metals, the deformation and cracks that forms due to tool tip cutting over
the failure stress of polymers are greatly the specimen.
affected by the hydrostatic pressure. It is
often observed that, while the neat resin
shows rather brittle fracture behaviour at a
very low tensile strain, it yields and shows
considerable plastic deformation in uniaxial
compression or in pure shear (Kinloch 1986).
SAMPLE PREPARATION AND

MECHANICAL
CHARACTERIZATION
The epoxy resin system used for preparing
samples was RIM135. It was used as it has
low viscosity and suitable for composite
preparation by vacuum infusion process.
Dimensions for tensile, compression and
shear (double v-notch type) are according to
ASTM standards D638-10 (type-1), D695-10
and D5379-05.Silicone molds were made for
casting specimens of desired shape. First a
mold is created out of metal and then silicone Figure 1 (a & b). Silicone mold (in red) for
rubber molds were prepared. 6 specimens can making tensile specimens and 3 different
be casted at a time thus increasing the epoxy specimens for characterization (on
uniformity in preparation of specimens. right)
Figure 2. Shear test setup (using Iosipescu fixture) with DIC for strain measurement
693
Mechanical Behaviour of Epoxy Resin under Tension, Compression and Shear using DIC: Experiments
and Numerical Modeling
Now resin is casted in these molds and cured For describing the pressure–dependent
at room temperature for 24 hours and then behaviour a quadratic yield surface was
post cured at 80° C in an oven. After chosen by Ernst et al. (2010). is described
complete curing the specimens were polished below.
on polishing papers of different grades with f (σs , σ t ) =σ 2 vm − a 0 − a1p (1)
flowing water on the polishing wheel. where
Stress-strain curve of epoxy matrix RIM135
1 3
under tension and shear are available in work p = σii & σ vm = sijsij
done by Ernst et al. (2010). Ernst et al. 3 2 (2)
reported that it behaves near to brittle in σ 2 − 3σ 2s
tension and ductile in shear. The ductile a0 =3σ 2s & a1 = 3 t (3)
σt
nature in shear doesn’t show any hardening.
Compression tests and its modelling are not The hardening curves are as below:
pl pl
included in his work. Compression tests with σ t =σ t (ε ) & σs =σs (ε ) (4)
cylindrical specimens as shown in figure 1 A non-associative flow rule is used to
were performed on ZICK UTM 100 kN determine the direction of flow. The plastic
capacity at 1mm/min displacement controlled potential used in current work is used
rate. Its stress-strain behaviour is shown in different as compared to that used by Ernst et
figure 3. In compression it yields at a higher al. The square root is removed to match up
stress (83 MPa) compared to that in tension the order with that of yield function ‘f’.
(60 MPa), and also behaves ductile with
g = σ 2 vm + αp 2 (5)
hardening. Failure strain of 0.4 is nearly
similar to that in shear as reported in Where
literature. 9  1 − 2v p 
α = *  (6)
2  1 + v p 
Table 1. Summary of the implementation
algorithm for the polymer constitutive
model.
Elastic stress increment with uniaxial

1.
stress condition. ( σ = Cε )
Initialize a 0 and a 1 with updated yield
2.
strengths using equation 4
3. Check yield criteria using equation 1
∂f ∂g
4. If yielded calculate &
∂σ ∂σ
Figure 3. Stress-strain curve for
∂f
compression tests on epoxy resin ( ).C dε
cylindrical samples 5. Calculate dλ = ∂σ
∂f ∂f
MATERIAL MODEL FOR ELASTIC- ( ).C( )
∂σ ∂σ
PLASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF EPOXY ∂g
RESIN 6. Calculate ∇ε pl = dλ
∂σ
Epoxy generally shows pressure dependency Calculate updated yield strengths from
in its material behaviour which is different 7. hardening curves using equivalent
under tension, compression and shear. It plastic strains ().
behaves ductile under shear and compression 8. Update the stress
but nearly brittle in tension. v p lies between 0 & 0.5. In current work v p is
chosen equal to the poisons ratio (0.35).
694
Gupta and Mahajan
Equivalent plastic strain is chosen in such a CONCLUSIONS

way so that if value of v p is substituted in Eq.
7 than it generates the output of regular The experiments performed on RIM135
equivalent plastic strain definition. epoxy system shows nearly brittle behaviour
in tension and ductile behaviour in shear and
 1  p p
=εep  2 
ε :ε (7) compression. Compression also shows a
1 + 2v 
 p  hardening region after 20% strain. Digital
Procedure described in table 1 was image correlation (a non- contact strain
implemented in MATLAB and the updated measurement method) is used to capture full
computational model results were verified field strains over the specimens using.
with the experimental data of Ernst. The numerical model used in the present
work is a slightly updated model used by
Ernst et al. But still this model doesn’t have
provision of including the compressive yield
strength in the yield function. So there is a
need of better model.
REFERENCES
Asp L E Berglund L A Gudmundson P 1995

Effects of a composite-like stress state
on the fracture of epoxies Composites
science and technology 53(1) 27-37.
Figure 4. Stress-strain curve for epoxy Ernst G Vogler M Hühne C Rolfes R 2010
matrix under tension, computational Multiscale progressive failure analysis
model compared with experimental of textile composite Composites Science
results and Technology 70(1) 61-72.
Fiedler B Hojo M Ochiai S Schulte K Ando
M 2001 Failure behavior of an epoxy
matrix under different kinds of static
loading Composites Science and
Technology Sep 30 61(11) 1615-24.
Kinloch A J2013 Fracture behaviour of
polymers Springer Science & Business
Media.
Nicholls D J 1986 Effect of stress biaxiality
on the transverse tensile strain-to-failure
of composites ASTM STP893109-14.
Figure 5. Stress-strain curve for epoxy
matrix under shear, computational model Raghava R Caddell R M Yeh G S 1973 The
compared with experimental results. macroscopic yield behaviour of
polymers. Journal of Materials Science
The current yield function (Eq.1) doesn’t 8(2) 225-32.
include the yield strength in compression ( σc
[Raghava et al. 1973], is only a function of
( σc & σ t ). Thus a new yield criteria has to be
implemented to take all three yield strengths
into account for more accurate predictions
under multi-axial loadings.
695
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF AGGLOMERATE BREAKAGE IN A SHEAR FLOW USING

NUMERICAL SIMULATIONS
AKITI N.1,2,3*, HAPGOOD K.2 and KHAKHAR D.3
1
IITB-Monash Research Academy, IIT Bombay, Mumbai
2
Department of Chemical Engineering, Monash University, Melbourne
3
Department of Chemical Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai
Abstract: Wet granulation consists of three granulation rate processes: wetting and
nucleation, consolidation and growth, and breakage and attrition. Of these, breakage
and attrition are the least understood. Breakage and attrition play an important role in
high-shear wet granulation. To understand the breakage phenomena, Discrete Element
Method (DEM) simulations were performed in a 3-dimensional shear flow. An
agglomerate was generated at the center of the simulation box, in order to study its
breakage behaviour. The effect of formulation properties such as, cohesive medium,
agglomerate shape, agglomerate size, on the breakage behaviour of the agglomerate
was studied using DEM simulations in a shear flow. Simulation results showed that
the formulation properties have significant influence on the breakage behaviour of the
agglomerate.
Keywords: Breakage; Discrete Element Method; Granulation; Shear flow.
INTRODUCTION growth retardation, granule homogeneity

Granulation is the process of aggregating and granule strength. A study of the effect
particles by creating bonds between them. of formulation parameters on the breakage
In a wet granulation process, a liquid process helps to improve the properties of
binder is distributed over the bed in a granular products [Reynolds et al., 2005].
tumbling drum, a fluidised bed, or a high In the present study, to understand the
shear mixer and the like, to initiate granule breakage behaviour of the agglomerate,
formation. DEM simulations [Cundall and Strack,
Granulation is useful in detergent, 1979] were performed in a 3-dimensional
pharmaceutics, agricultural product, shear flow. An agglomerate was generated
mineral processing, food, and speciality at the center of the simulation box from the
chemical industries. The three main rate steady state position file of the shear flow.
processes in wet granulation are wetting Then, the effect of medium cohesiveness,
and nucleation, consolidation and growth, shape of the agglomerate and size of the
and breakage and attrition [Iveson et al., agglomerate, on its breakage behaviour was
2001]. Breakage and attrition are the least studied using simulations. To study the
understood among all the three rate effect of medium cohesiveness, simulations
processes. It is important to understand the were performed with a non-cohesive
breakage rate process in wet granulation, medium and a cohesive medium, to study
because it plays the vital role in granule the effect of agglomerate shape,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: narendra.a@iitb.ac.in; 696

Akiti et al.
simulations were performed with a The shear flow simulation was allowed to
spherical cluster (agglomerate) and a run till the system reaches steady state.
rectangular cluster and to study the effect Then, an agglomerate of 2 mm was
of size of the agglomerate, simulations generated at the center of the simulation
were performed with two different size (2 box by assigning the cohesive energy
mm and 1 mm) agglomerates. Simulation densities to the particles. The JKR model
results have showed the significant was used for the contacts with cohesion
influence of formulation properties on the [Johnson et al., 1979]. Four different
breakage behaviour of the agglomerate. cohesive energy densities of equal number
were assigned to the particles in the
SIMULATION METHODOLOGY agglomerate. Subsequently, the simulation
Simulations were performed in a three- was run in order to study the breakage
dimensional shear flow using open source behaviour of the agglomerate. Figure 2
LIGGGHTS software [Kloss et al., 2012]. shows the image of the agglomerate at
The simulation box was chosen to be 50d × time, t=0 sec. The medium particles
26d × 25d (except wall particles) long, (surrounding the agglomerate) have been
wide and high, respectively, in x, y and z rendered invisible in figure 2 in order to
directions. Periodic boundary conditions observe only agglomerate. In the
were used in the x and y directions. The simulation, different particles are
simulation box was filled with particles of differentiated by assigning the different
a size range of 190-210 μm. The diameter type number (different types are shown by
of wall particles (400 μm) was taken as different colours in the figure 2). Cohesive
double of the diameter of free flowing energy densities used (in the cluster) in the
particles in order to increase the roughness. present simulation are 2.725×105 J/m3,
Gravity was not considered in the system. 2.825×105 J/m3, 2.925×105 J/m3 and
The bottom was kept stationary and the top 3.025×105 J/m3. All the simulations were
wall was moved with a fixed velocity of repeated for five times with a different
1.414 m/s in the simulations. Figure 1 initial position file and a different initial
shows the snapshot of the simulation at cluster each time.
time, t=15 sec. The colour indicates the
velocity of the particles as shown in the
scale.
Figure 2. Snapshot of the simulation

showing agglomerate at the center.

Figure 1. Snapshot of the simulation The agglomerate is considered to be
at time, t=15 sec. broken, if the mass of the cluster is reduced
to less than half of the initial mass. The
697
Study of Agglomerate Breakage in a Shear Flow using Numerical Simulations
breakage behaviour of the agglomerate is prepared in the simulations by assigning a

studied by measuring the following: change cohesive energy density of 50000 J/m3 to
in mass of the biggest cluster with shear the free flowing particles (medium
time, deformation of the cluster with shear particles) of the system. Simulation results
time, shear time required for the breakage showed that, cohesive medium takes more
of the cluster and granule size distribution time than the non-cohesive medium for the
at the breakage of the cluster. breakage of the cluster. Average time for
the breakage of the primary cluster in the
To study the effect of shape of the
cohesive medium is 7.45 sec, whereas, in
agglomerate on its breakage, simulations
the non-cohesive medium is 4.68 sec. The
were performed using a spherical cluster
change in aspect ratio of the cluster is
and a rectangular cluster (of equal mass).
measured with respect to the shear time to
Figure 3 shows the change in mass of the
study the agglomerate deformation in both
biggest cluster with respect to the shear
cohesive and non-cohesive mediums. It is
time for both spherical and rectangular
observed that, cluster elongation takes less
cluster. Figure 3 infers that, rectangular
time in non-cohesive medium as compared
cluster takes less time for breakage than the
to the cohesive medium. Granule size
spherical cluster. Average time for the
distribution is also measured for both the
breakage of the rectangular cluster is 2.03
cases at the first breakage. Similar size
sec, whereas, for the spherical cluster is
distribution is observed in both the cases at
4.68 sec. At the breakage of the cluster,
the first breakage of the cluster.
granule size distribution is measured for
both the cases (spherical and rectangular To study the effect of size of the
cluster). Granule size distribution showed agglomerate on its breakage, simulations
that, although erosion is similar in both the were performed using two different sizes (2
cases, more number of medium size mm and 1 mm diameter) of the cluster.
clusters are formed with the rectangular Simulation results showed that, smaller
cluster as compared to the spherical cluster. agglomerate takes less time for breakage
than the bigger agglomerate. Average time
for the breakage of the smaller cluster is
1.08 sec, whereas, for the bigger cluster is
4.68 sec. From the results of change is
aspect ratio with shear time, it is observed
that, cluster elongation is more in the case
of smaller cluster as compared to the bigger
cluster.
CONCLUSIONS
Effect of formulation properties on the
Figure 3. Effect of agglomerate agglomerate breakage is studied using
shape on its breakage. DEM simulations in a shear flow.
To study the effect of cohesive medium on Simulation results shows that, cohesive
agglomerate breakage, simulations were medium takes more time for breakage than
performed using both cohesive medium and the non-cohesive medium, non-spherical
non-cohesive medium. Cohesive medium is cluster takes less time for breakage as
698
Akiti et al.
compared to the spherical cluster and

smaller agglomerate takes less time for
breakage than the bigger agglomerate.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to express their
gratitude to the Prime Minister's
Fellowship Scheme for Doctoral Research,
India, and Procter & Gamble (China) for
their financial support.
REFERENCES
Cundall P A and Strack O D L 1979 A
discrete numerical model for granular
assemblies Geotechnique 29(1) 47-65
Iveson S M, Litster J D, Hapgood K and
Ennis B J 2001 Nucleation growth and
breakage phenomena in agitated wet
granulation processes: A review Powder
Technology 117(12) 3 – 39
Johnson K L, Kendall K, Roberts A D (1971)
Surface energy and the contact of elastic
solids Proceedings of the Royal Society
of London Series A 324 301-313
Kloss C Goniva C Hager A Amberger S and
Pirker S 2012 Models, algorithms and
validation for open source DEM and
CFD-DEM Progress in Computational
Fluid Dynamics 12 140-152
Reynolds G K Fu J S Cheong Y S Hounslow
M J and Salman A D 2005 Breakage in
granulation: A review Chemical
Engineering Science 60 3969-3992
699
ICCMS2016
PREDICTION OF COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE WITH

NATURAL AGGREGATES AND RECYCLED AGGREGATES USING
M5’ MODEL TREE ALGORITHM
JAIN S. and BARAI S.V.*
IIT Kharagpur, Kharagpur, India.
Abstract: Concrete mix proportions are proposed by empirical equations and do not
account for slight modifications. The mix design becomes primitive in case of
introduction of new parameters as research progresses such as accounting for new
kinds of admixtures, super-plasticizers or binders. Structures nearing service life have
to be demolished and new establishments constructed in place of them which creates a
great impact on the environment in terms of the waste produced and the natural
resources needed. In such times, concrete recycling is a new avenue and its use in the
industry is not well established. The existing codes of practice do not account for
recycling aggregate and consider only natural aggregates. Hence the need for design
mix of recycled aggregate arises. Considering the strength prediction problem here as
a classification domain of input space, it is modelled using M5’ model tree algorithm.
The study conducted shows the performance promised by such a model to be accurate
within statistical error.
Keywords: Concrete compressive strength; M5’ model trees; Prediction model
INTRODUCTION economic and time constraints especially

when the number of controlling independent
Concrete is a mix of cement, water and
variables is large. With observation it is seen
aggregates by proportion. Booming
that usually most experimental variables can
construction industry requires investment of
be split into dependent and independent
large amount of natural resources.
variables hence forming a control set. An
Revamping of structures beyond service limit
empirical relationship can be established
produces high amount of concrete debris
between the independent variables and
which, if harnessed through recycling. can
dependent variables through observation and
contribute to sustainable development.
analysis of test data. This gives rise to
Concrete batching is a standard process
prediction and estimation modelling for
followed according to the construction codes
parameters using test data which can be used
and advent into recycling concrete debris in
to model various testable physical properties
the form of aggregates calls for analysis of
in terms of measurable physical parameters.
performance parameters such as slump, flow,
Concrete is prepared as per mix design
compressive strength. In practice it is usually
determined using standard codes of practice.
not possible to test each and every sample
The prediction models can easily determine
proposed by theoretical analysis due to
the target strength of the concrete depending
________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: skbarai@civil.iitkgp.ernet.in

700
Jain and Barai
on the input parameters provided to the programming searches the program space to
model. find a function fitting the data given as
Recycled aggregate concrete does not have shown in a study done to model prediction of
proper equations for mix design like natural velocity field [Gholami et al., 2015].
aggregate concrete. The works done aim at Decision trees search the data space working
identifying differences between the equations as a classifier on the input variables to split
to be used predicting strength for the two the space into regions and fit them with
varieties of concrete and hereby establish linear models as demonstrated by the study
working equations to ease the mix design conducted on predicting heart disease.
process. In general concrete is prepared as [Dangare et. al. 2012].
per mix design from codes of practice. Such Motivation to choose M5’ model tree
models aim at producing better estimation algorithm. Traditional methods of regression
models for preparing concrete by controlling analysis are not able to capture the effect of
the materials used which shall be the model variation in various types and qualities of
input parameters. The modelling aims at materials such as addition of fly ash,
producing linear reproducible equations admixtures or aggregate replacement since
which can be easily used to estimate the they employ error minimization. Non-
compressive strength of concrete on the basis traditional methods employ various other soft
of the selected input parameters. computing tools such as ANN which tend to
give a complex non-mathematical, symbolic
LITERATURE SURVEY relation between input and target variables.
Concrete compressive strength can be Use of gene expression programming
modelled by various methods which have employs search through program space and
been actively used in various applications. since concrete is a non-linear model,
Conventional methods such as linear identifying such relations becomes a hefty
regression models have been used in task. Also these methods become
modelling fatigue model fatigue strength of computationally demanding and hence time-
plain, ordinary and lightweight concrete consuming. Decision trees result in fewer
subjected to compressive stress [Tepfers and factors of significance than traditional
Kutti, 1979] and logistic regression models regression and neural networks, hence with a
have been used in mapping of landslide simpler structure produce accurate results as
hazard at Selangor, Malaysia [Lee and for predicting electrical energy consumption.
Pradhan, 2007]. These methods aim at [Tso and Yau, 2007).
producing linear predictors by way of error MODEL DEVELOPMENT
reduction in continuous domain or binary
The prediction model is being modelled
variables respectively. Unconventional
taking different varieties of concrete
methods work by the principle of mapping
considering natural aggregates, recycled
data into non-linear relationships by way of
aggregates, fly ash, silica fumes and different
artificial neural networks like in a research
proportions of admixtures and water cement.
conducted on predicting landslide for a
Natural Aggregate Concrete: A total of 103
susceptibility study. [Bui et al., 2015] where
data points have been taken from UCI data
the target variable is represented in terms of a
repository [Yeh, 1998] natural aggregate
weighted sum of inputs expressed by a non
concrete. For this problem, the following
linear mapping. Genetic expression
input parameters have been considered for
701
Prediction of Compressive Strength of Concrete with Natural Aggregates and Recycled Aggregates using
M5’ Model Tree Algorithm
the concrete: Slag; Cement; Water; Fly ash; For ease of understanding the models have
Coarse aggregate; Fine aggregate; Super been denoted as follows:
plasticizer. The target output is the mean
compressive strength of the concrete in 28 • NA-D1: Model taking Cement, Slag and
days measured in MPa. Fly Ash as separate entities.
Recycled Aggregate Concrete: A total of 99 • NA-D2: Model taking Cement, Slag and
data points have been collected and used for Fly Ash as sum given by Binder
• RA-D1: Model taking Cement, Silica
modelling for concrete with aggregates under
fume, Fly Ash, Chemical Admixtures,
replacement of natural aggregate by recycled Mineral Admixture as separate entities.
aggregate through referring to various • RA-D2: Model taking Cement, Silica
reference papers [Dilbas et al., 2014], [Rahal, fume, Fly Ash, Chemical Admixtures,
2007], [Cassucio et al., 2008], [Ravindrarajah Mineral Admixtures as sum given by
and Tam, 1985], [Kou et al., 2007], [Duan et Binder
al., 2013], [Butler et al., 2013] and [Kou, RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
2006] on recycled aggregate concrete. For
The simulations for models have been carried
this problem, the following input parameters
out using R software and studies have been
have been considered for the concrete: Silica
performed for mean error and correlation
fume; Sand; Cement; Water; Fly ash; Coarse
between predicted values of compressive
aggregate; Fine aggregate; Recycled
strength and actual values. The values have
aggregate; Chemical admixture; Mineral
been tabulated in Table 1.
admixture; Super-plasticizer. The target
output is the mean compressive strength of
the concrete in 28 days measured in MPa.
Table 1: Tabulation of error, standard deviation and correlation for models
NA-D1 NA-D2 RA-D1 RA-D2
No Of Regions 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100
CS MEAN 4.83 4.58 8.83 8.71 14.24 11.29 12.20 11.67
CS SD 4.36 3.62 6.69 6.35 21.27 19.22 13.89 15.71
CS R 0.95 0.96 0.85 0.85 0.836 0.912 0.882 0.891
CLOSING REMARKS prediction and mix design become fairly easy

with the help of model tree algorithm.
M5’ model tree algorithms are well suited for
nonlinear prediction problems and perform REFERENCES
within reasonable domain of error within the
Behnood A Olek J and Glinicki M A 2015
given data set of concrete mix proportioning
Predicting modulus elasticity of
for natural and recycled aggregate concrete.
recycled aggregate concrete using M5′
Concrete properties can be modelled in terms
of its constituent materials and hence
702
Jain and Barai
model tree algorithm Construction and Open channel bend using a gene
Building Materials 94 137-147. expression programming model Flow
Bui D T Tuan T A Klempe H Pradhan B and Measurement and Instrumentation 46
Revhaug I 2015 Spatial prediction 189-192.
models for shallow landslide hazards a Kou S C 2006 Reusing recycled aggregates
comparative assessment of the efficacy in structure concrete Ph.D. Thesis - The
of support vector machines artificial Hong Kong Polytechnic University 75-
neural networks kernel logistic 188
regression and logistic model tree Kou S C Poon C S and Chan D 2007
Landslides 12 1-18. Influence of fly ash as cement
Butler L West J S and Tighe S L 2013 Effect replacement on the properties of
of recycled concrete coarse aggregate recycled aggregate concrete Journal of
from multiple sources on the hardened Materials in Civil Engineering 19 709-
properties of concrete with equivalent 717.
compressive strength Construction and Lee S and Pradhan B 2007 Landslide hazard
Building Materials 47 1292-1301. mapping at Selangor Malaysia using
Casuccio M Torrijos M C Giaccio G and frequency ratio and logistic regression
Zerbino R 2008 Failure mechanism of models Landslides 4 33-41.
recycled aggregate concrete Rahal K 2007 Mechanical properties of
Construction and Building Materials 22 concrete with recycled coarse
1500-1506. aggregate Building and environment 42
Concrete Slump Test data donated by Yeh I 407-415.
C from UCI repository Ravindrarajah R S and Tam C T 1985
https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets/C Properties of concrete made with
oncrete+Slump+Test. crushed concrete as coarse aggregate
Dilbas H Şimşek M and Çakır Ö 2014 An Magazine of Concrete Research 37 29-
investigation on mechanical and 38.
physical properties of recycled Tepfers R and Kutti T 1979 Fatigue strength
aggregate concrete (RAC) with and of plain, ordinary and lightweight
without silica fume Construction and concrete ACI Journal Proceedings 76
Building Materials 61 50-59. 635-652.
Duan Z H Kou S C and Poon C S 2013 Using Tso G K and Yau K K 2007 predicting
artificial neural networks for predicting electricity energy consumption A
the elastic modulus of recycled comparison of regression analysis,
aggregate concrete Construction and decision tree and neural networks
Building Materials 44 524-532. Energy 32 1761-1768.
Frank E Wang Y Inglis S Holmes G & Yeh I-Cheng 1998 Modeling of strength of
Witten I H 1998 Using model trees for high performance concrete using
classification Machine Learning 32(1) artificial neural networks, Cement and
63-76. Concrete Research 28 1797-1808.
Gholami A Bonakdari H Zaji A H Akhtari A
A and Khodashenas S R 2015
Predicting the velocity field in a 90°
703
ICCMS2016
EVALUATION OF EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE (EPS) GEOFOAM

CREEP USING PLAXIS 3D
BEJU Y. Z.* and MANDAL J. N.
Civil Engineering Department, Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, Powai, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: With different geotechnical applications of EPS geofoam including

underlying compacted soil and higher structural loads, creep deformation under
compression pressure have been occurring. In the present study an attempt has been
made to understand the behavior of compression creep of EPS geofoam through
Plaxis 3D software. The numerical modeling result carried out on three different
densities of EPS geofoam 12, 15 and 20 kg/m3 under the applied pressure of 65% of
the compressive strength. For each density cube sample 100 mm size was considered.
The numerical results reveals that with the increase in density of EPS geofoam, creep
deformation value decreases but on low density EPS geofoam the effects of creep
deformations were more noticeable. The finite element analysis result validating with
the experimental data. The average variation between experimental and finite element
analysis results of EPS geofoam creep strain was 28%.
Keywords: EPS Geofoam; Density; Creep; Stress; Strain; Finite element model
INTRODUCTION influence geofoam creep on the performance

of a compressible inclusion applied to behind
Expanded polystyrene (EPS) geofoam has been
rigid retaining walls. The EPS geofoam was
used in a wide variety of geotechnical
applications. Because of its extremely low
modeled as a linear-elastic material. The
density, EPS geofoam makes an ideal backfill effect of geofoam was evaluated by modeling
material when the self-weight of the construction an instrumented case history incorporating
material is a major design consideration and for limiting an elastic modulus of the geofoam;
rapid construction of embankment over that resulting from rapid loading tests and
compressible soils [Mandal and Nimbalkar, creep tests. The result showed that the lateral
1999; Farnsworth et al., 2008; Wong and stresses are highest under rapid loading
Leo, 2006]. EPS geofoam has been used in conditions, and then decrease as the geofoam
reduction of lateral loads on retaining walls creeps. Ram Rathan Lal et al. (2014)
and bridge abutments [Zarnani and Bathurst, performed finite element simulation to know
2008; Ram Rathan Lal et al, 2014; Bathurst the effect of density and thickness of EPS
et al., 2007; Hatami and Witthoeft, 2008]. geofoam compressible inclusion on lateral
The mechanical behavior of EPS geofoam deformation of facing panel, backfill settlements
affected by density, confining stress and and lateral pressure on model walls using
temperature [Atmatzidis et al., 2001; Chun et Plaxis 2D software. The EPS geofoam was
al., 2004; Wong and Leo, 2006; Birhan and modeled as a linear elastic perfectly plastic
Negussey, 2014]. Creep deformation of EPS material with Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria.
geofoam decreases with density increase The result indicated that the facing panel
Sun, (1997). Murphy (1997) conducted a horizontal deformation, backfill settlements
finite element model to evaluate the and lateral pressure on the model walls was
significantly influenced by the density and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:yzbeju@iitb.ac.in 704

Beju and Mandal
thickness of EPS geofoam. Padade and geofoam for this analysis is calculated by
Mandal (2012) carried out FEA using Plaxis using the Eq. (1) given EDO (1992).
2D software to visualize horizontal 𝜐 = 0.0056𝜌 + 0.0024 (1)
displacements and deviator stress-strain patterns
of EPS geofoam. The material EPS geofoam Where ρ is density of EPS geofoam (kg/m3).
was modeled as a Mohr-Coulomb model.
They concluded that finite element analysis Table 1. Material properties of EPS
results reasonably agreed with experimental geofoam used in FEA
study. In order to study the creep behaviors
ρ c ϕ E ti σf
of EPS geofoam, many researchers have υ
3
(kg/m ) (kPa) (°) (kPa) (kPa)
performed tests on different sizes and shapes
of EPS of geofoam samples. However, no 12 28.75 1.25 1611 88 0.1
creep studies have been carried out on 15 32.25 1.38 2769 169 0.1
numerical modeling of EPS geofoam. The
present study objectives to investigate EPS 20 37.5 2.25 5086 219 0.12
geofoam creep using Plaxis 3D software with
different densities. The effect of low density
of EPS geofoam on creep behavior is
reported. Further, the results related to
vertical displacement pattern and creep
strain, were validating with experimental test
data.
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSES

Finite element analysis of EPS geofoam
under 1-d (one dimensional consolidation)
loading condition was carried out in Plaxis Figure 1. Schematic representation of
3D finite element software. For all analyses the FEA model of EPS geofoam
20 kPa surface load (65% of the compressive
strength at 5% strain level) was applied on RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
the surface of 100 mm cube size and 12, 15, The comparison of creep strain values
and 20 kg/m3 densities of EPS geofoam between experimental and FEA at different
models at 220 days. All the displacement of time interval is listed in Table 2. Comparing
the nodes on the horizontal boundary and the the simulated FEA creep with experimental
bottom surface were arrested, whereas creep test results, for all densities of EPS
allowed to undergo vertical displacement. geofoam there is an average of
The schematic representation of the FEA approximately 28% less than the creep
model is depicted in Figure 1. The EPS resulting from the experimental test results
geofoam is modeled by a Mohr-Coulomb over the 220 days. The simulated creep
non-porous material. The compressive model reduced the laboratory results by 28%.
strength, density, flexural strength and triaxial The possible reason includes the FEA model
tests of EPS geofoam were performed in material properties like Poisson’s ratios.
accordance with ASTM D1621-10, ASTM Thus, by adjusting the above parameters, the
D1622-14, ASTM C203–12 and ASTM D2850- FEA may increase the creep strains. In
15 respectively. The material properties of EPS
general, the FEA nearly agreed with the
geofoam used in FEA are given in Table 1. experimental test results. The analysis results
The value of Poisson’s ratio (υ) of EPS showed that the creep strain of EPS geofoam
705
Evaluation of Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Geofoam Creep Using PLAXIS 3D
increase with an increase in the duration. It is kg/m3 densities of EPS geofoam. The
also observed this variation is the same for comparison graph shows that the creep strain
all the densities of EPS geofoam. The total behavior determined by FEA was smaller
vertical displacement visualization of EPS than that by experimental data.
geofoam with different densities is shown in
Figure 2.
Figure 3. FEA of total strain Vs log time

Figure 2. Vertical displacement of 100 mm cubic size and 12, 15, 20
visualization for 100 mm cube size and kg/m3 densities EPS geofoam
different densities of EPS geofoam a, 12
b, 15 and c, 20 kg/m3
Figure 3 represents finite element results that
occurred in 220 days for 100 mm cube EPS
geofoam model of 12, 15 and 20 kg/m3
densities under the pressure of 65% of the
compressive strength at 5% strain of EPS12.
The FEA data were used to fit the results of
laboratory creep test data. The comparison is Figure 4. Comparison of experimental
shown in Figure 4, in which T means test and FEA of creep of 100 mm cube size
data and P means FEA data. The number and 12, 15, 20 kg/m3 densities EPS
following the letter represents 12, 15 and 20 geofoam samples
Table 2. Comparison of creep strain values obtained from experiments and FEA
Time EPS12 EPS15 EPS20
(days) Axial strain (%) Axial strain (%) Axial strain (%)
Exp. FEA Var. Exp. FEA Var. Exp. FEA Var.
1 3 2 33 1 0.9 10 0.2 0.2 29
55 9 7 22 5 3 31 1 0.6 37
110 15 11 27 10 7 29 4 2.6 34
220 27 20 26 22 16 29 10 6.7 33
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION EPS geofoam. The finite element results of

creeps have been shown by laboratory creep
The numerical analysis of creep models was
tests results. However, the result indicates
carried out on EPS geofoam models prepared
that there is a large discrepancy between the
with different densities at 65% of the strength
FEA result and the test data. Comparing the
at 5% strain level to examine the effect of
experimental and FEA creep cases, the
densities on compression creep behavior of
706
Beju and Mandal
average variation between experimental and compressible inclusion by centrifuge

FEA results of EPS geofoam creep strain was modeling Proce. of IGC-1999 Dec 1999
28%. The possible reason includes the FEA Calcutta 63-67.
model material properties like Poisson’s Murphy G 1997 The influence of geofoam
ratios. The FEA results showed that the creep creep on the performance of a
strain of EPS geofoam increase with an compressible inclusion. Geotexti.
increase in the duration. It is also observed Geomembr. 15 (1-3) 121–131.
this variation is the same for all the densities Padade A H and Mandal J N 2012 Behavior
of EPS geofoam. of Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)
Geofoam under triaxial loading
REFERENCES conditions, EJGE 17 2543-2553.
Atmatzidis D K Missirlis E G and Chrysikos Ram Rathan Lal B Padade A H and Mandal J
D A 2001 An investigation of EPS N 2014 Numerical simulation of EPS
geofoam behavior in compression, geofoam as compressible inclusions in
Proc. EPS Geofoam 2001 fly ash backfill retaining walls, Ground
rd
3 International Conference (CD-Rom) Improvement and Geosynthetics GSP
Salt Lake City Utha USA. 238 ASCE 2014 526-535.
Birhan A G and Negussey D 2014 Effect of Sun M C 1997 Engineering behavior of
confinement on creep behavior of EPS geofoam (expanded polystyrene) and
geofoam ASTM GTJ 37(6) 1-8. lateral pressure reduction in
Bathurst R J Zarnani S and Gaskin A 2007 substructures, Master's Thesis Syracuse
Shaking table testing of Geofoam University New York USA.
seismic buffers, Soil Dynamics and Wong H and Leo C J 2006 A simple
Earthquake Engineering, 27(4) 324-332. elastoplastic hardening constitutive
Chun B S Lim H S Sagong M and Kim K model for EPS Geofoam Geotext.
2004 Development of a hyperbolic Geomembr. 24 299-310.
constitutive model for expanded Zarnani S and Bathurst R J 2008 Numerical
polystyrene (EPS) geofoam under modeling of EPS seismic buffer shaking
triaxial compression tests Geotext. table tests. Geotext. Geomebr. 26(5)
Geomembr. 22(4) 223-237. 371-383.
EDO 1992 Expanded Polystyrene NOTATION
Construction Method Riko Tosho
Publishers Tokyo Japan. FEA finite element analysis
Farnsworth C B Bartlett S F Negussey D and EPS12 EPS geofoam 12 kg/m3 density
Stuedlein A W 2008 Rapid construction EPS15 EPS geofoam 15 kg/m3 density
and settlement behavior of embankment
systems on soft foundation soils, ASCE EPS20 EPS geofoam 20 kg/m3 density
J. Geotech. Geoenviron. Eng. 134(3) E ti initial tangent modulus
289–301.
σf flexural strength
Hatami K and Witthoeft A F 2008 A
c cohesion
numerical study on the use of Geofoam
to increase the external stability of ϕ internal friction angle
reinforced soil walls Geosynthetics 2D two dimensional
International 15(6) 452-470.
3D three dimensional
Mandal J N and Nimbalkar S S 1999
Reduction of lateral earth pressure by
707
ICCMS2016
SIMULATION OF SOIL SUBJECTED TO UNDERGROUND BLAST

USING FLAC3D
KUMAR R.1*, CHOUDHURY D.2 and BHARGAVA K.3
1
Civil Engineering Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India.
2
Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Powai, Mumbai, India.
3
Nuclear Cycle Board, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: In recent past, effects of blast load on structures/foundations have gained

considerable attention due to increase in threat from various man-made activities.
Blast phenomenon can lead to excessive settlement or distortion of foundation
systems which in turn may collapse the building. The finite difference method is a
powerful numerical method to solve geo-mechanical problems which can be used to
analyze soil foundation interaction. In the present paper, finite difference software
Fast Lagrangian Analysis of Continua in 3 Dimensions (FLAC3D) is used to model
ground shock wave propagation in soil. In order to study the response of foundations
to blast loads through numerical modeling, many factors such as fixity conditions,
constitutive models, mesh size, time step need to be calibrated. Blast load is applied
and Particle velocity time-history is obtained. Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) is
estimated at various points away from blast. The FLAC3D result has been compared
with field data to arrive at suitable constitutive model, mesh size, time step etc.
Calibration of FLAC3D model is achieved. The results will be very useful for
evaluation of response of foundation subjected to blast.
Keywords: Blast induced vibration; Blast loading; Peak particle velocity;
Numerical modelling; FLAC3D
INTRODUCTION is calibrated with respect to available

experimental data.
Finite difference method based software Fast
Lagrangian Analysis of continua (FLAC3D) is CALIBRATION OF SOIL MODEL
used to analyze the SSI problem in soil.
USING FLAC3D
Validation of material model and soil model
parameters was established using Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) model by
experimental vibration parameters in soil. In present author (Kumar, 2015) is written as
practice, several shallow foundations for Eq. (1) which is established based on 120
domestic and industrial buildings and published data.
structures are constructed in soil strata. These E
shallow foundations subjected to blast v = ( )0.229 D − (1.6985−0.175×S ) (1)
γ
loading can cause severe damage. The
scarcity of study on behaviour of shallow (with r2 = 0.907)
foundations subjected to underground blast
shows a need for such study. Hence, in this where, ν = PPV, m/s;
study, FLAC3D is used to model blast wave E= Young’s modulus of soil, MPa
propagation in soil medium. The soil medium γ = unit weight of soil, kN/m3;
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ranjancv42@gmail.com 708

Kumar et al.
S= degree of saturation (in fraction, 1m and 3m for two sites is modeled. Free
maximum = 1.0); field peak pressure is calculated and is
D = Scaled distance, m/kg1/3 applied on the spherical crater boundary.
FLAC3D model is given in Fig. 1. Brick zone
Eq. (1) will be used to estimate free field size is taken as 25 m × 20 m × 11 m and 25
pressure at explosion crater boundary. Free m × 20 m × 13 m. Element size in all the
field peak pressure can be calculated using directions are kept as 0.5m. Soil is modeled
present PPV model for soil sites. Seven and as Mohr-Coulomb model. Soil input
two field data for saturated clay and saturated parameters to FLAC3D namely Young’s
alluvium sand site of Leong et al. (2007) and modulus, Poisson’s ratio, shear modulus,
Charlie et al. (1992) have been selected bulk modulus, cohesion and angle of friction
respectively. The details of the field data are are estimated.
shown in Table 1.
It is proposed to model the soil subjected to
blast in FLAC3D and measure PPV at various
points and compare with the field data. After
blast, PPV is calculated from presently
developed model. Summary of field blast
parameters is given in Table 1.
ASSIGNING PROPERTIES AND

MATERIAL MODELS IN FLAC3D
Figure 1. FLAC model for saturated clay
Both the sites are modeled in FLAC3D. One
big spherical crater of diameter 1 m at depth
Table 1. Summary of field blast parameters
Measurement
Blast Charge Measurement
Author Type of soil points away
depth, m weight, kg depth, m
from blast, m
Leong et
Saturated clay 1 4.352 1 1.5
al. (2007)
Leong et Partially saturated 1.6, 2, 3, 4.3
2, 2.5 4.352 2, 2.5
al. (2007) sand and 4.8
Charlie et Saturated
3 0.0045 0.1 6.1, 12.2
al. (1992) alluvium sand
APPLYING BOUNDARY as 0.01 at 50 Hz frequency. Time

CONDITIONS independent peak pressure is applied on the
crater boundary.
The model size has to be limited by artificial
boundaries. Quiet or viscous boundary is MODELLING OF BLAST LOAD
applied at bottom and three side faces. Front AND CRATER DIMENSIONS
and top face are kept free. Dynamic Curves which describe the ground motion
frequency independent Rayleigh stiffness (acceleration versus time, velocity versus
damping is applied. Damping ration is taken time, and displacement versus time curves)
709
Simulation of Soil Subjected to Underground Blast using FLAC3D
are not readily calculated. However, these Comparison of PPVs for saturated clay with
relationships are not required since the IS 6922 (1973) and Drake and Little (1983)
design of protective structures/foundations to model is done. It is observed that Drake and
resist shock loads is based on the peak values Little (1983) gives highest value of PPV and
of the induced motion rather than the actual FLAC gives lowest PPV value. IS 6922
motion-time relationships (UFC 3-340-02, (1973) gives lower PPV value than the field
2008). PPV value. The possible reason could be
Blast is not explicitly simulated in analysis. only one site constant for soil in empirical
Blast free field pressure is applied at the relationship for PPV in IS 6922 (1973). The
crater boundary. Pressure is applied normal possible reason for Drake and Little (1983)
to the crater boundary which is uniformly providing highest value is sensitivity of
attenuation constant. Comparison of PPVs
distributed along the crater boundary. The
for partially saturated sand with FLAC, IS
geometry of the crater and the dynamic load 6922 (1973) and Drake and Little (1983)
condition are symmetrical around a results is done. In this case, PPV obtained
horizontal axis through the centre of the from FLAC gives highest value for lower
crater. The crater diameter is taken as 1 m. scaled distance and lowest value for higher
The sites of Leong et al. (2007) and Charlie scaled distance. The possible reason could be
et al. (1992) have been modeled. due to partly saturated soil. Comparison of
PPV for coarse sand is done. It is clear that
ANALYSIS OF RESULTS field value gives highest PPV and IS 6922
(1973) gives lowest value. It is also observed
FLAC3D results for both the soil sites are that IS 6922 (1973) provides lower PPV
presented here. Comparison of PPV values value than field value in case of soil unlike in
obtained from field and FLAC3D results is soil where, it provides conservative value.
presented in Table 2. The results have been Hence, IS 6922 (1973) provides closer value
compared with the results obtained by using of PPV in case of soil.
TM 5-855-1 (1986).
History of particle velocity versus time at PARAMETRIC STUDY FOR
saturated clay, partially saturated sand and CALIBRATION OF FLAC3D
coarse sand sites at various distances away SIMULATION
from the blast is plotted. For saturated clay, Mesh size is varied beyond elements at
the particle velocity versus time history plot distances way from blast point. It is observed
is obtained at distances 1m, 1.5m and 3.3m that as y-dimension of element increases, the
away from the blast point using Mohr- PPV value decreases. Young’s modulus,
Coulomb model. For partially saturated sand, Poisson’s ratio, run time and time step are
the particle velocity versus time history plot also varied. It is observed that the effects of
is obtained at distances 1.6m, 2m, 3m, 4.3m, variations of these parameters on PPV are not
4.8m and 6.5m away from the blast point significant. Effects of various parameters on
using Mohr’s Coulomb model. Comparison PPV in FLAC3D are studied.
of PPV values obtained from field and
FLAC3D is presented. It is observed that PPV CONSTITUTIVE MODEL OF SOIL
from obtained from TM5-855-1 is more than
Mohr-Coulomb model has been used to
the field value for saturated clay and partially
model soil. To know the sensitivity of model,
saturated sand. However, for coarse sand,
three other models namely Drucker Prager,
PPV obtained from TM5-855-1 is less than
Double yield and Shear hardening models
the field value. PPV obtained from FLAC is
were used to model Sites. From the plots of
less than the field value in most of the cases.
the particle velocity versus time history for
shear hardening model, Drucker Prager
710
Kumar et al.
model and Double yield model, PPV was User’s Manual Itasca Consulting Group
estimated and presented. It is observed that Minneapolis Minnesota USA
Mohr Coulomb model gives PPV which is IS 6922 1973 Criteria for Safety and Design
very close to field value. Hence, Mohr- of Structures subject to Underground
Coulomb model will be adopted in further blast BIS New Delhi
soil structure interaction under blast loading.
Kumar R 2015 Responses of shallow
MESH SIZE foundations in soils and rocks subjected
to blast loadings PhD thesis IIT
The varied mesh size is presented. The
Bombay
results of PPV for these mesh sizes for Mohr-
Coulomb model is presented. It is observed Leong E C Anand S H Cheong, K. and Lim,
that if element size increases, PPV decreases. C. H. 2007 Re-examination of peak
Hence, optimum size of mesh should be stress and scaled distance due to ground
selected. Mesh size plays important role in shock International Journal of Impact
modelling blast wave propagation. Drucker- Engineering 34 1487–1499
Prager model and Mohr-Coulomb model TM 5-855-1 1986 Fundamentals of
have been fixed and mesh size of model has Protective Design for Conventional
been varied. It is observed that mesh size of Weapons United States Department of
1×1×1m gives best correlation with field the Army Technical Manual U.S.
value. Hence, mesh size of 1×1×1m will be Department of the Army Vicksburg MS
adopted in further Soil structure modelling
under blast loading. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) 3-340-02
2008 Structures to resist the effects of
CONCLUSION accidental explosions Department of
Defense United States of America
Modelling of shock wave propagation has
been done with FLAC3D to calibrate the W A Charlie Jacobs F J and Doehring, D O
model for further carrying out soil-structure 1992 Blast induced liquefaction of an
interaction modelling. Peak pressure is alluvial sand deposit Geotech. Testing J.
applied at the crater using the PPV model ASTM 15(1) 14-23
developed by the authors. Mohr-Coulomb
model has been found to give best
correlations with the field data. The effects of
mesh size, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio
and time step on FLAC simulation were also
presented. The mesh size of 1mx1mx1m
gives best correlations with the field value.
Validity and suitability of FLAC3D were
established by comparisons with existing
empirical formulae for PPV.
REFERENCES
Drake L J and Little C D J 1983 Ground
shock from Penetrating Conventional
Weapons U.S. Army Engineer
Waterways Experiment Station
Vicksburg Mississippi, 1-6
FLAC3D 2009 Fast Langragian Analysis of
Continua in 3 Dimensions, Version 4.00
711
ICCMS2016
MICROSTRUCTURE-GUIDED CONSTITUTIVE MODELLING FOR

DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF SUSTAINABLE NEXT
GENERATION INFRASTRUCTURE MATERIALS
SUMANTA DAS1, XIANGHUI XIAO2, NIKHILESH CHAWLA3, NARAYANAN NEITHALATH1*
1
School of Sustainable Engineering and the Built Environment, Arizona State University, AZ, USA.
2
Advanced Photon Source, Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, IL, US.
3
Materials Science and Engineering, Arizona State University, Tempe, AZ, USA.
INTRODUCTION MICROSTRUCTURE-GUIDED
CONSTITUTIVE MODELLING
Modification of traditional Portland cement-
based concrete through incorporation of The current approach involves generation of
supplementary cementitious materials and 3D virtual microstructure based on
development of non-conventional cement- microstructural features obtained from 3D
free binding materials for improved high resolution synchrotron image of the
sustainability are being increasingly popular material. Generation of RVE is accomplished
in recent years. Traditionally trial and error- here using the Lubachhevsky-Stillinger
based experimental testing is being used for algorithm [Lubachevsky and Stillinger 1990].
property-evaluation as well as design of such This algorithm employs non-overlapping
new materials without looking into the real particles on a cubical RVE. First, the desired
phenomena occurring at the Nano/micro level number of particles is randomly distributed
of the composites that dictate macro-scale inside the periodic bounding box with
behavior. But, significant improvement in random initial velocities of the particles. The
computational power for mathematical radius of each particle is initialized as zero.
modelling and numerical simulation in recent The radius of ith particle (ri) in the next event
years raises the possibilities of is a function of the growth rate (gi), which is
microstructure-based design and tailored to attain the desired particle size
development of such new micro- distribution, as shown in Eq. 1.
heterogeneous materials through numerical
dri
simulation. The effective elastic properties of  gi (1)
heterogeneous materials have traditionally dt
n1
been predicted using effective media theories, n
The growth rate between time t and t is
self-consistent schemes, and various computed using a finite difference scheme as
analytical homogenization methods. follows:
However, in many cases, these
methodologies only give estimates or bounds ( ri n 1  ri n )
gi  (2)
for the macroscopic properties. Furthermore, t
these techniques have been proved to be The particle radii are then updated using the
insufficient when the stiffness contrast growth rate and time increment. The position
between the phases is large or when large of particle “i” is also updated considering a
inclusion volume fractions are incorporated constant velocity between time nodes.
[Idiart et al. 2009]. This paper presents a Checks for particle contacts and post-contact
micro-mechanical numerical model for velocities are made in each time step, and all
determination of macroscopic material particle positions are updated using a forward
properties of novel cementitious materials Euler scheme. These steps are repeated and in
towards microstructure-based design of such the process of iterations the particles change
materials. position in the bounding box, collide and
grow in order to obtain the desired volume
___________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: Narayanan.Neithalath@asu.edu 712

Das et al.
fraction. Finally, the obtained microstructural and the analysis is implemented through
information is scripted in python language to ABAQUSTM solver. Thus this approach
be imported to ABAQUSTM for finite element simulates a strain- (or displacement)
implementation. controlled test scenario. To efficiently handle
post-processing of the simulated element
After generation of the microstructure, the
stresses/strains, a homogenization module is
representative volume element (RVE) is
developed to obtain effective volume-
meshed with a Python script and periodic
averaged RVE stress/strains or effective
boundary conditions are implemented on the
homogenized Young’s modulus of the
RVE as nodal displacement constraints
material. The numerical simulation approach
through a Python language program. A
is summarized in Figure 1.
uniaxial strain is then applied on the RVE
Figure 1. Micro-mechanical numerical model for determination of macroscopic

material properties
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS reconstruction of synchrotron XRT images.

Figure 2(b) shows the pore (red) and solid
The current numerical constitutive modelling
(grey) phases segmented using transition
framework has been applied to alkali
point-based thresholding coupled with the
activated fly ash geopolymers in order to
application of appropriate discrete
verify the efficacy of the method to
thresholding in the microstructure to obtain
determine the macro-scale Young’s modulus
the most realistic representation of known
through synergistic use of high fidelity
microstructural features. The segmentation
experiments such as nanoindentation,
procedure is described in detail in our recent
synchrotron XRT coupled with numerical
work [Das et al. 2015]. Here, the unreacted
homogenization technique. Figure 2(a) shows
fly ash particles are not separable from
a representative cubic volume of interest of
partially reacted ones due to lack of sufficient
the fly ash geopolymer obtained from
absorption contrast between these phases.
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E mail: Narayanan.Neithalath@asu.edu 713

Microstructure-Guided Constitutive Modelling for Design and Development of Sustainable Next
Generation Infrastructure Materials
Thus synchrotron XRT is used to quantify the geopolymers) using the Mori-Tanaka
pore structure alone in this study. method. Furthermore, fly ash particles with
cavities and the unreacted fly ash particles
The intrinsic elastic property of component
are homogenized together. Thus, pores,
phases in the fly ash geopolymer is classified
unreacted fly ash (including those with
and quantified using statistical
cavities) and the matrix (partially activated
nanoindentation. Figure 2(c) shows the peaks
fly ash homogenized with the N-A-S-H gel)
obtained through statistical deconvolution of
are used as the different microstructural
the histogram. Four characteristic peaks are
phases in numerical simulation. The size
observed in the histogram. The peaks were
distribution of unreacted fly ash (starting
assigned to different solid phases based on
material) as obtained from laser diffraction is
microstructural observation.
used in numerical simulation since unreacted
For simplification, partially activated fly ash fly ash particles could not be segmented
is homogenized with the N-A-S-H gel (which separately from partially activated fly ash in
is the major reaction product in fly ash-based XRT.
Figure 2. (a) Original XRT image, (b) 3D image after pore segmentation (two-phase;
pore and solid), and (c) deconvoluted component peaks for the four distinctly
identifiable microstructural phases in the solid component of the fly ash geopolymer
obtained from nanoindentation. The area under each deconvoluted peak is the fraction
of that respective solid phase in all solids in the paste.
Two-stage numerical homogenization is obtained after the application of different

performed to obtain homogenized Young’s strains is shown in Figure 3(c). In Stage-II,
modulus of the geopolymer. In Stage-I, the the homogenized value from Stage-I is used
unreacted fly ash particles are homogenized as the elastic modulus of the matrix, and the
with the matrix. Figure 3(a) shows the 3D pores are incorporated into the microstructure
microstructure containing fly ash (green) and (Figure 4(a)). Figure 4(b) shows the
the matrix (blue) phases. The RVE is meshed dominant principal stress distribution in the
with tetrahedral C3D10 elements (in unit cell when an externally applied strain of
ABAQUSTM) and periodic boundary 0.1% is applied. The constitutive relationship
conditions are implemented as explained for the fly ash geopolymer is shown in Figure
earlier. Figure 3(b) shows the dominant 4(c). The numerically homogenized value of
principal stress distribution in the RVE 15.6 GPa correlates well with the
corresponding to an externally applied strain experimentally obtained (three point bending
of 0.12%. The constitutive relationship thus test) Young’s modulus of 14.73 ± 0.7 GPa.
714
Das et al.
Figure 3: Step-I: (a) FE model showing the unreacted fly ash and matrix; (b) stress
distribution (MPa) under an imposed strain of 0.12%, and (c) the constitutive
relationship in the linear elastic regime.
Figure 4: Stage-II: (a) FE model showing the matrix (from Stage-I) and the pores ; (b)
stress distribution (MPa) under a strain of 0.1%, and (c) the constitutive relationship in
the linear elastic regime
CONCLUSIONS of X-Ray Synchrotron Tomography,

Nanoindentation, and
Good agreement between the predicted and
Homogenization Models Cement and
experimental Young’s modulus for
Concrete Research 78 252–62.
geopolymers presented here provides
confidence on the ability of the current Idiart M I Willot F Pellegrini Y P and
methodology to be applied for many classes Castañeda P P 2009 Infinite-Contrast
of highly heterogeneous novel sustainable Periodic Composites with Strongly
infrastructure materials. This study thus links Nonlinear Behavior: Effective-
the microstructure with the macro-scale Medium Theory versus Full-Field
effective mechanical behavior of highly Simulations International Journal of
heterogeneous materials enabling efficient Solids and Structures 46 3365–82
design strategies to tailor the microstructure Lubachevsky B D and Stillinger F H 1990
for requisite mechanical performance of Geometric Properties of Random Disk
highly heterogeneous infrastructure materials. Packings Journal of Statistical
Physics 60 561–83.
REFERENCES
Das S Yang P Singh S S Mertens J C E Xiao
X Chawla N and Neithalath N 2015
Effective Properties of a Fly Ash
Geopolymer: Synergistic Application
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E mail: Narayanan.Neithalath@asu.edu 715

ICCMS2016
BUCKLING OF NANOBEAMS USING DIFFERENT NONLOCAL

CONTINUUM THEORIES
BABU B.* and BADRI P. P.
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, India.
Abstract: To capture the size effects predominant at the nano scale, different nonlocal
theories of elasticity have been proposed in the literature. In the present paper, the
buckling behaviour of nano beams is investigated using different nonlocal elasticity
theories. The governing equations for different nonlocal theories such as Eringen’s
stress gradient theory, second order strain gradient theory (with both negative and
positive nonlocal coefficients), modified couple stress theory (MCST), modified strain
gradient theory (MSGT) and Mechanically-based theory are derived considering
Euler-Bernoulli beam finite element. A detailed parametric study is carried out to
investigate the efficacy of different nonlocal theories for the prediction of critical
buckling load of SS, CC, CS and CF nano beams. It is observed that critical buckling
load decreases with the inclusion of nonlocal effect through Eringen’s model and
second order strain gradient model with positive sign, but depicts increasing trend for
other nonlocal models. The nonlocal effects are found to be significantly
overestimated through MCST and MSGT with the same value of nonlocal parameters.
Keywords: size effect; nonlocal theory; couple stress; stress and strain gradients.
INTRODUCTION considered as a function of the strain fields at

all the points in the entire domain which is
Some of the recent experiments on various governed by a distance decaying attenuation
materials have shown significant effect of function [Eringen, 1972]. The atomic length
size on the mechanical properties when the scales are directly introduced into the
dimensions of the specimen become very constitutive equations as material parameters
small [Lam et al., 2003]. The classical and can be written as [Eringen, 1983]:
continuum theories (CT) lack the capability
of capturing small scale effects since they do (1 − l ∇ )σ
2 2
ij =Cijkl ε kl (1)
not include any internal length scale
parameter. Hence, the need for a modified where l is the nonlocal parameter and ∇ 2 is
continuum model arose to account for the the Laplacian operator and σ ij is the
scale effects such that the formulation nonlocal stress tensor.
remains relatively simpler and To smoothen the discontinuities and
computationally tractable. Several singularities in the strain field, the strain
modifications in the classical elasticity gradient elasticity model with negative
formulation have been proposed to address nonlocal coefficient (NSGT) was given as
the small scale effects and are discussed in [Aifantis, 1992]:
the next section.
NONLOCAL THEORIES
= (
σ ij Cijkl ε kl − l 2ε kl ,mm ) (2)
Eringen’s stress gradient theory (SGT) Using the homogenization approach for the
assumes that the stress at a point is displacement field of the discrete media, the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bishweshwar.babu@gmail.com 716

Babu and Badri
strain gradient elasticity model based x and ξ are considered. The components of
constitutive relation with positive nonlocal the position vectors x and ξ are given by
coefficient (PSGT) can be written as (Chang x = [x z ]Tand ξ =[ ξ ζ ]T , respectively.
and Gao, 1995):
The nonlocal potential energy of the beam
= (
σ ij Cijkl ε kl + l 2ε kl ,mm ) (3) forms the basis for the additional stiffness
due to the distance decaying mutual body
Considering an additional equilibrium forces and is given by (Di Paola et al., 2011):
equation for moment of couple to constrain
the free floating nature of the couple stress U snl ( η ) = (1 / 4) ∫∫ g[r T η]2 dV (ξ ) dV ( x) (10)
tensor, the strain energy expression for
MCST is given by (Yang et al., 2002): where η( x, ξ, t ) = u(ξ, t ) − u( x, t ) is the
= Us
1
2V∫ ( σ ij ε ij + mijs χ ijs )dV (4)
relative displacement between points x and
ξ , r ( x, ξ ) is the unit vector associated with
where mijs is symmetric part of the couple the direction x − ξ and g ( x, ξ ) is a distance
decaying attenuation function.
stress tensor and χ ijs is the symmetric
curvature tensor. The additional constitutive In the available literature, the effectiveness of
relation is given by: different nonlocal models to capture scale
effects has not been studied and is the main
mijs = 2l 2 µχ ijs (5) aim of this work. The variational statements
for linear elastic isotropic Euler-Bernouli
The strain energy using MSGT (Lam et al., beam incorporating the above models are
2003), constructed as a function of the derived and finite element formulation is
symmetric strain, dilatation gradient, developed considering 3-noded element with
deviatoric stretch gradient and symmetric quintic variation of the transverse
rotation gradient tensors, can be written as: displacement along x. The buckling
=
Us
1
2 V∫
(σ ijε ij + piγ i + τ ijk(1)ηijk(1) + mijs χijs )dV (6) characteristics of nanobeams are investigated
employing the developed FE models.. The
where pi and , τ ijk(1) are higher order stresses, essential boundary conditions of all the
nonlocal theories discussed are same as those
γ i is dilatation gradient and ηijk(1) is deviatoric of the classical theory.
stretch gradient. The additional constitutive
relation can be given by: RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
pi = 2l02 µγ i (7) The dimensions of the nanobeam is taken as
length (L) = 17.11 nm, width (B) = 2.282 nm
τ ijk(1) = 2l12 µηijk(1) (8) and height (h) = 0.34 nm [Allegri et al.,
2013]. Young’s modulus (E) and Poisson’s
ratio (υ) are taken as 1.1 TPa and 0.3,
mijs = 2l22 µχ ijs (9) respectively [Ansari et al., 2012]. The
variation of non-dimensional critical
where l0 , l1 and l2 are the nonlocal
buckling load [ N= cr N cr × ( L2 / EI )] with
parameters associated with dilatation
different values of the nonlocal parameters is
gradients, deviatoric stretch gradients and
found out for all the nonlocal theories
rotation gradients, respectively. The MCST is
considered above. The results for four
a special case of the MSGT when the effects
different boundary conditions are given in
of dilatation gradient and deviatoric stretch
Tables 1-4.
gradient are neglected.
In the mechanically based theory (MBT), two
arbitrary points in a beam having coordinates
717
Buckling of Nanobeams using Different Nonlocal Theories
Table 1. Non-dimensional critical buckling load ( N cr ) for simply supported (SS) beam.
l CT SGT NSGT PSGT MCST MSGT MBT

0.1 9.8663 9.8729 9.8663 13.8101 23.7945 9.9189
0.2 9.8563 9.8829 9.8563 25.6315 65.5681 10.1023
0.3 9.8398 9.8996 9.8397 45.3340 135.1906 10.4154
0.4 9.8696 9.8167 9.9231 9.8166 72.9174 232.6622 10.8546
0.5 9.7871 9.9535 9.7871 108.3818 357.9827 11.4169
0.6 9.7513 9.9908 9.7512 151.7271 511.1523 12.0986
0.7 9.7092 10.0354 9.7092 202.9534 692.1708 12.8951
0.8 9.6612 10.0873 9.6611 262.0607 901.0382 13.8007
Table 2. Non-dimensional critical buckling load ( N cr ) for clamped-clamped (CC) beam.

0.1 39.4253 39.5317 39.4252 55.2404 95.1843 39.6679
0.2 39.2667 39.6925 39.2666 102.5262 262.2889 40.3393
0.3 39.0051 39.9635 39.0049 181.3359 540.7947 41.4178
0.4 39.4784 38.6447 40.3492 38.6444 291.6695 930.7032 42.8353
0.5 38.1909 40.8561 38.1906 433.5270 1432.0150 44.5323
0.6 37.6506 41.4932 37.6502 606.9084 2044.7255 46.4565
0.7 37.0315 42.2723 37.0310 811.8137 2768.8482 48.5636
0.8 36.3419 43.2085 36.3413 1048.2429 3604.3778 50.8170
Table 3. Non-dimensional critical buckling load ( N cr ) for clamped-hinged (CS) beam.

0.1 20.1768 20.2047 20.1768 28.2520 48.6777 20.2897
0.2 20.1352 20.2466 20.1352 52.4357 134.1353 20.6494
0.3 20.0662 20.3169 20.0661 92.7419 276.5627 21.2466
0.4 20.1907 19.9704 20.4161 19.9703 149.1706 475.9641 22.0601
0.5 19.8485 20.5451 19.8483 221.7218 732.3358 23.0698
0.6 19.7016 20.7051 19.7013 310.3955 1045.6744 24.2558
0.7 19.5307 20.8973 19.5304 415.1917 1415.9839 25.5978
0.8 19.3372 21.1236 19.3368 536.1104 1843.2688 27.0763
Table 4. Non-dimensional critical buckling load ( N cr ) for cantilever (CF) beam.

0.1 2.4672 2.4676 2.4672 3.4525 5.9483 2.4795
0.2 2.4666 2.4682 2.4666 6.4079 16.3909 2.5235
0.3 2.4655 2.4693 2.4655 11.3335 33.7952 2.5966
0.4 2.4674 2.4641 2.4707 2.4641 18.2293 58.1612 2.6964
0.5 2.4622 2.4726 2.4622 27.0954 89.4888 2.8203
0.6 2.4599 2.4749 2.4599 37.9318 127.7785 2.9658
0.7 2.4573 2.4776 2.4572 50.7384 173.0292 3.1301
0.8 2.4542 2.4808 2.4542 65.5152 225.2421 3.3105
718
Babu and Badri
In MSGT, all three nonlocal parameters are Eringen A C 1972 Linear theory of nonlocal
kept same. The results from Tables 1-4 elasticity and dispersion of plane waves
depict that the non-dimensional critical International Journal of Engineering
buckling load decreases with the increase in Science 10 425-435
the nonlocal parameters for the stress Eringen A C 1983 On differential equations
gradient and the strain gradient model with of nonlocal elasticity and solutions of
positive sign. Its value increased with the screw dislocation and surface waves
increase in the nonlocal parameter for rest of Journal of Applied Physics 54 4703-
the nonlocal models. 4710
CONCLUSION Lam D C C Yang F Chong A C M Wang J
and Tong P 2003 Experiments and
It can be concluded from the results theory in strain gradient elasticity
presented that the range of nonlocal Journal of the Mechanics and Physics
parameters used for SGT, NSGT, PSGT and of Solids 51 1477-1508
MBT are not appropriate to be used for
MCST and MSGT which show extremely Yang F Chong A C M Lam D C C and Tong
large differences from the classical theory. P 2002 Couple stress based strain
Further studies through atomistic simulation gradient theory for elasticity
are required to arrive at the values of International Journal of Solids and
nonlocal parameters for each model. Structures 39 2731-2743
Appendix: Additional Formulae
REFERENCES
Aifantis E C 1992 On the role of gradients in Symmetric curvature tensor:
the localization of deformation and
fracture International Journal of
χ ijs
= (θ i, j + θ j ,i ) 2 (11)
Engineering Science 30 1279-1299 Rotation vector:
Allegri G Scarpa F Chowdhury R and
Adhikari S 2013 Wave propagation in
1
( curl ( u ) )i
θi =
2
(12)
periodically supported nanoribbons: a Dilatation gradient:
nonlocal elasticity approach Journal of
Vibration and Acoustics 135 041017 γ i = ε mm ,i (13)
Ansari R Gholami R and Rouhi H 2012 Deviatoric stretch gradient:
Vibration analysis of single-walled
ηijk(1)= ( ε ij ,k + ε jk ,i + ε ki , j )
1
carbon nanotubes using different
3
gradient elasticity theories Composites:
− δ ij ( ε mm ,k + 2ε mk ,m ) + δ jk ( ε mm ,i
1 (14)
Part B 43 2985-2989
15
+ 2ε mi ,m ) + δ ki ( ε mm , j + 2ε mj ,m ) 
Chang C S and Gao J 1995 Second-gradient
constitutive theory for granular material
with random packing structure Distance decaying attenuation function:
International Journal of Solids and x −ξ
E −
Structures 32 2279-2293 g ( x, ξ ) = e l (15)
2lA2
Di Paola M Failla G Sofi A and Zingales M
2011 A mechanically-based approach to
non-local beam theories International
Journal of Mechanical Sciences 53 676-
687
719
ICCMS2016
SIZE DEPENDENCE IN MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF

POLYSTYRENE MICROPILLARS UNDER COMPRESSION
GURUPRASAD. T *, BHATTACHARYA S. and BASU S.
Mechanical Engineering Department, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur, India
Abstract: Understanding the mechanical behaviour of polymers at different length

scales is an important thing, as nowadays the polymers are increasingly being used in
many micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) based devices for electronics and
biological applications. In this work, amorphous polymer, Polystyrene (PS) micro-
pillars are deformed in compression under in-situ SEM using a custom made
microcompression device. The stress strain plots are obtained by fitting the load
displacement behaviour with a constitutive model for amorphous polymers. Results
suggest that the yield stress of PS intrinsically depend on the diameter.
Keywords: Microcompression; In-situ SEM; Micropillars; Polystyrene.
intense debate, it is generally believed that a

INTRODUCTION
"dislocation starvation mechanism" operates
Polymers are increasingly being used as where dislocations exit the surface of the
functional/structural materials in MEMS crystal at a rate faster than they can be
devices. Electronics and opto-electronics are nucleated within its bulk. Similar studies of
changing towards polymers; including size effect on metallic glass micropillars
displays, photo voltaic devices, memory, and made by FIB millinghave been reported by
many more. many authorsLee CJ (2007), Lai YH (2008).
With increasing applications of materials at Metallic glasses are amorphous materials and
small scale, we come across situations where dislocation based explanations on size effect
strength of the material depends on the size does not apply.
of the sample. One of the important Polymers are important class of amorphous
demonstrations on size effect is given by materials and studies on mechanical behavior
Greer et al. (2005) on Au nanopillars made at micron scale is not adequately explored.
by focused ion beam (FIB) milling. They Recently, size effect on FIB machined epoxy
reported strength of material is many times micropillars in compression has been
higher than the bulk material for nanopillars reported by Wang et al. (2008). They
of diameters ranging from 400 – 7450 nm. reported increase in yield and fracture
Similarly, size effects in micron sized pillars strength with decrease in micropillar
loaded in compression, fabricated out of diameter.
metal single crystals using FIB milling has
In this work, we fabricated PS micropillars
been reported by several authors. The size
using micro-fabrication technique. The
effect manifests in a significant amplification
micropillars are fabricated by methods that
of the flow stress with decrease in diameter.
do not involve FIB milling and are therefore,
Though the origin of this effect is a subject of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tgprasad@iitk.ac.in 720

Guruprasad et al.*
free of ion damage. We fabricated PS compression. At least, three specimens are

micropillars of diameters ranging from 38 μm tested for each of the diameters.
to 190 μm, with aspect ratio of 2:1. The
fabricated micro-pillars are then deformed in-
situ in a FESEM under compression using
custom made micro-compression machine.
The stress strain plots for all the diameters
are obtained by fitting the experimental load
displacement behaviour with a constitutive
model for amorphous polymers. The
constitutive model is implemented in a
commercial FE software ABAQUS.
FABRICATION AND TESTING

PS thin films are prepared first by dissolving
PS beads in toluene and then dip coating
glass slides into the dissolved solution. PS
thin films are allowed to dry in vacuum
desiccator and we obtained a film thickness
of 250 – 300 µm. PDMS mold is prepared by
casting PDMS solution on SU-8 micropillars.
PS micropillars are prepared by hot Figure 1. (a) schematic illustrating the
embossing procedure. Micropillars of various steps followed for the fabrication
diameters ranging from 38 μm to 190μm of the PS micropillars. (b) FESEM
have been fabricated and fabrication flow images of array of PS micropillars of
chart is shown in Figure 1(a). The FESEM varying diameters.
images of fabricated PS micropillars are
FE SIMULATIONS
shown in Figure 1(b).
Three dimensional FE simulations have been
The microcompression testing of PS
performed using the commercial FE software
micropillars are performed in a FESEM
ABAQUS v6.11. PS micropillarsof diameters
using a custom designed microcompression
are ranging from 38 μm to 190 μm are
machine. The microcompression device is a
modeled. The material model for PS given is
vacuum compatible and can be tested inside a
implemented inABAQUS using UMAT
FESEM. A microcompression device with a
feature. The rate dependent elastic-
displacement sensitivity of 50 nm,
viscoplastic constitutive model given by Wu
displacement rate of 50 nm/s to 13 mm/s and
and Van der Giessen is used. It is based the
load range of 130 μN to 2.5 N has been used
formulation of Boyce et al.
to deform the specimens. A truncated steel
nanoindentor with a flat top of diameter 150 The finite element mesh of micropillar is
μm and 500 μm are used for the shown in Figure 2. In the formulation of
compression. The fabricated micropillars of boundary conditions, the bottom surface of
diameters ranging from 38 μm to 190μm are film is constrained in Y direction.
then deformed in-situ in an FESEM under Micropillars are deformed in compression by
applying a velocity in Y direction using a
721
Size Dependence in Mechanical Behaviour of Polystyrene Micropillars under Compression
rigid flat indenting surface. For all the barrels at the final stages of the deformation.
diameters of tested PS micropillars, their The bottom face of the sample is on a thin
respective geometry is modeled and is film instead hard surface and cannot expand
simulated as that of experimental conditions. freely as compare compression test of bulk
samples. Also, friction between the sample
the indenter is not controlled. The stress
strain plots are obtained by fitting the load
displacement behavior with a constitutive
model for amorphous polymers. The fits are
obtained by varying the important parameters
of the constitutive model. Figure 5 shows fits
for a micropillar of diameter 45 μm. Yield
exhibited by pillars are governed by the
athermal yield stress (S 0 ) in the model. This
quantity (Figure 5), as well as the stress at
which yielding occurs, increases with
decrease in diameter.
Figure 2. Micropillar meshed model.

We fabricated PS micropillars of diameters Figure 3. Load displacement behaviour
ranging from 38 μm to 190 μm and deformed of PS micropillars of diameters 38 μm
under compression using custom made and 45 μm.
microcompression device inside an FESEM.
The load displacement plots for the diameters
are recorded. Figure3 shows the load
displacement behaviors of micropillars of
diameters 38 μm and 45 μm. They show a
classical features of compression test on PS,
namely linear elastic deformation, yield drop
followed by rehardening response. Figure4
shows the FESEM images of micropillar of Figure 4. FESEM images of
diameter 66 μm before and after 66μmdiameter before and after
compression. Here the pillar undergoes compression.
uniform deformation for most part of it and
722
Guruprasad et al.*
Lai Y H Lee C J Cheng Y T Chou H S Chen

HM Du XH et al 2008 Bulk and
microscale compressive behavior of a
Zr-based metallic glass Scripta
Materialia 58 890-893.
Lee C J Huang J C Nieh T G 2007 Sample
size effect and microcompression of
Mg 65 Cu 25 Gd 10 metallic glass Applied
Physics Letters 91 161913.
Wang S Yang Y Zhou L M and Mai Y W
2012 Size effect in micro compression
of epoxy micropillars Journal of
Materials Science 47 6047–6055.
Figure 5. Comparison of experimental
and simulation load displacement Wu P D and Vander G E 1993 On the
behavioursfor 45μmmicropillar diameter. improved the network model for rubber
elasticity and their applications to
orientation hardening in the glassy
polymers Journal of Mechanics and
Physics of Solids 41 427-456
Figure 6. Athermal yield stress versus

micropillar diameters for38 µm to 95 µm.
REFERENCES
Boyce M C Parks D M Argon A S 1988
Large inelastic deformation of glassy
polymers. Part I: Rate dependent
constitutive model Mechanics of
Materials 7 15 -33.
Greer J R Oliver W C and Nix W D 2005
Size dependence of mechanical
properties of gold at the micron scale in
the absence of strain gradients Acta
Materialia 53 1821 – 1830.
723
ICCMS2016
LENGTH SCALE EFFECT ON THE DEFORMATIONBEHAVIOUR OF

BIO-INSPIRED NANOCOMPOSITES USING MOLECULAR DYNAMICS
MATHIAZHAGAN S.* and ANUP S.
Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology, Thiruvananthapuram, Kerala, India.
Abstract: Length scale dependent deformation mechanisms have been a huge source
of interest with the advancement in the fields of nanoscience and nanotechnology.
Studies in nano crystalline materials have shown that the deformation mechanism
changes with the reduction of grain size beyond a critical size. In the present study,
we investigate the effect of length scale on the nanocomposites, primarily on bio-
inspired nanocomposites. In order to obtain the deformation behavior of nanoscale
material with atomistic details, molecular dynamics (MD) is used. The present study
shows that the model nanocomposite materials exhibit the transition in the
deformation behaviour similar to that of observed in nanocrystalline materials with
reducing length scale. However, in the nanocomposite materials, the dislocation
activities are limited only to the soft matrix. This study would be useful in providing
design guidelines in the production of advanced materials.
Keywords: Mechanical properties; Nanocomposites; Molecular dynamics.
INTRODUCTION studies have helped to understand the basic

Size dependent mechanical properties and mechanisms behind these superior
plasticity have been a huge source of interest mechanical properties and the plasticity of
to materials science research community with these nanoscale materials. In this article, we
the advancement in the fields of nanoscience address the effect of the length scale of bio-
and nanotechnology. The production and inspired nanocomposite models on
characterization of nanoscale materials, such deformation mechanisms and the overall
as nanowires, nanopillars, nanolaminates, mechanical properties. The nanocomposite
nanofilms, nanocrystalline and nano models, which are inspired from
composite materials, have also increased nanostructure of the biological materials such
tremendously. These materials are attractive as nacre and bone, are considered in our
due to their high stiffness, strength and article. These biological materials have
toughness. The length scale of the intrinsic shown superior mechanical properties. The
and extrinsic features of these materials have arrangement of nanosized inclusions have
played major roles in achieving the superior been attributed to their superior mechanical
mechanical behaviours. Molecular dynamics properties. In order to transfer the mechanical
(MD) simulations have been proven to be principles learned in these biological
beneficial in understanding the deformation materials, studies related to the bio-inspired
behaviour associated with these nanoscale nanocomposite materials are necessary. The
featured materials, nanocrystalline metals regularly staggered (RSM) arrangement of
and alloys[Buehler, 2008; Schiøtz, 2004]. These hard platelets reinforced in soft matrix was
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: smathi.research@gmail.com 724

Mathiazhagan and Anup
shown to possess superior combination of used to provide different mechanical

optimal mechanical properties [Ji and Gao, behaviour for the constituents. The simplest
2010; Zhang et al., 2010]. Though various model is chosen to study the generic
studies have been done in the biological and behaviour. The reduced units are expressed
bio-inspired nanocomposite models, the based on the LJ parameters of the platelets.
effect of the length-scale on these bio-
inspired nanocomposites are very few. These
studies are necessary not only to the design
the nanocomposite materials but also to the
design of nanoscale building blocks of
hierarchical composite materials. The
computational approach is explained in the
next section. The results and conclusion are
given in further sections.
COMPUTATIONAL METHOD
In order to obtain the generic understanding
of the effect of size on the overall mechanical
behaviour of the nanocomposite, the concept
Figure 1.Details of the simulated
of model material is used. To create the model. (a) unit cell of 2D hexagonal
model material, the interatomic force is lattice (b) 2D hexagonal lattice structure,
modelled using Lennard-Jones (LJ) potential. (c) regularly staggered model (Red
The LJ potential is given by Eq.(1), where σ colour refers to platelet and blue colour
&𝜖are referred to as the LJ parameters which refers to matrix)
are respectively zero-energy interatomic The two dimensional crystal lattice and
distance and bond strength of the interatomic nanocomposite model used to study the
potential. length scale effect of bio-inspired
𝜎 12 𝜎 6 nanocomposite model is shown in the Figure.
𝜑(𝑟) = 4𝜖 �� −� � � (1)
𝑟 𝑟 (1). The subplot (a) shows the unit cell of the
Further, we follow the traditional convention lattice structure used and subplot (b) shows
of using reduced units in order to obtain the the hexagonal crystal lattice. The
generic mechanical behaviour of the nanocomposite model made of this
nanocomposites. The mineral platelets are hexagonal lattice is shown in the subplot (c).
hard, brittle and strong. In contrast, the Once the initial atomic positions and inter-
protein matrix is soft, ductile, and weak. atomic potentials are defined for the
There is a need to implement different nanocomposite model, the initial atomic
mechanical behaviour for different velocities and boundary conditions are
constituents. Therefore, the values of 𝜖 for necessary for running a molecular dynamics
platelet, matrix and their interaction are (MD) simulation. The initial velocity
chosen as 1, 0.1 and 0.1 respectively. This distribution of atoms is determined from the
leads to the strength and modulus value of temperature of the model. In our simulations
platelet 10 times that of matrix. The value of in order to focus on the effect of structural
σ is kept unity for all the constituents to effect, the temperature value of 0.0001 (in
maintain uniform lattice structure. These reduced units) is used, leading to very small
values of σ and 𝜖 are representative values
725
Effect of Length Scale on the Mechanical Behaviour of Bio-inspired Nanocomposites
atomic velocities. The boundary conditions increase in the stress levels are observed due
are determined from the type of numerical to the arrest of (i)the movement of
experiments to be performed. We do dislocation, (ii)the growth of cracks, and
computational uni-axial tensile tests by (iii)the emission of dislocation itself. Further,
applying constant strain-rate in the vertical a significant reduction in the stress levels are
direction. Therefore, nanocomposite is observed due to (i)the nucleation of
modelled with free and expandable boundary dislocations, (ii) nucleation of cracks, and
in the Y-direction and periodic boundary (iii) growth of cracks. Moreover, the bigger
condition in the X-direction. Further models show the nucleation of a central
modelling settings are used similar to that of nanocrack in the gap between the platelets.
used in the literature [Mathiazhagan and This nanocrack grows with the strain.
Anup, 2016]. Further, the open source MD
solver, LAMMPS, is used to model and solve
the equations of motion of the atoms with a
time-step (∆t) of 0.001. Solving the
Newton’s equations of motion, the position
and velocity of every atom are obtained until
the model undergoes complete failure. The
stress and strain at each time-step of the
simulation is calculated. The following
section, we discuss how the deformation and
failure mechanisms occur with different
length scale of the model.
Figure 3.Typical deformation

process observed in the nanocomposite
at smaller length scale.
Thereafter, the decohesion of the platelet tips
are observed. On the contrast, in the smaller
model the decohesion of the platelet tips
occurred without the nucleation of a
Figure 2.Typical deformation nanocrack at the gaps. The generation of
process observed in the nanocomposite nano cracks contributes to a significant
a thigher length scale. reduction in the stress levels in the bigger
model. Therefore, compared to the bigger
Figure.(2) and Figure. (3) show the evolution
model, the smaller model shows tremendous
of deformation processes for the higher and
increase in the stress levels. Moreover a
smaller length scales respectively. The
sudden drop in stress follows after the drastic
evolution of deformation process provides
increase in the stress value for smaller
valuable information. The significant
models. This behaviour explicitly shows that
726
Mathiazhagan and Anup
the models are more brittle at smaller length behaviour of bio-inspired

scales. nanocomposites using molecular
dynamics J. Mech Behav Biomed Mater
Generally, the dislocation activities are more
59 21-40.
in the bigger model than the smaller ones.
However, these dislocation activities do not Schiøtz J 2004 Atomic-scale modeling of
seem to play a more significant role in plastic plastic deformation of nanocrystalline
deformation or flow behaviour compared to copper Scr Mater 51 837–841.
the platelet pull out. Further, both the smaller Zhang Z Q Liu B Huang Y Hwang K C and
and bigger model show that the pull out Gao H2010 Mechanical properties of
mechanism is the dominant mechanism unidirectional nanocomposites with non-
causing plasticity in the model. uniformly or randomly staggered platelet
distribution J Mech Phys Solids 58
CONCLUSION
1646–1660.
In this article, we studied the length scale
effect on the deformation behaviour and
associated plasticity of the nanocomposite
models, which are inspired from the
biological materials. We varied the total
number of atoms proportionately in all the
characteristic dimensions of the
nanostructure of the models. MD simulation
is used to perform uniaxial tensile tests. The
visual analysis of the deformation
mechanisms associated with each model is
studied. The dislocation activities are
observed only in the soft matrix region.
Moreover, we find that when the length scale
is reduced below a critical size, the
dislocation mediated plasticity is reduced as
a result of space restriction. This further
leads to the higher stresses with the loss of
plastic flow. The understanding gained from
this study could be used in the design of
advanced nanocomposite materials.
REFERENCES
Buehler M J 2008 Atomistic modeling of
materials failure Springer New York.
Ji B and Gao H 2010 Mechanical principles
of biological nanocomposites Annu. Rev.
Mater. Res.40 77–100.
Mathiazhagan S and Anup S 2016 Influence
of platelet aspect ratio on the mechanical
727
ICCMS2016
DISPERSION PROPERTIES OF LINEAR MICROELASTIC

PERIDYNAMIC BAR
MUTNURI V.S.* and GOPALAKRISHNAN S.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India.
Abstract: Peridynamic analysis is being carried out for linear micro-elastic material
for an infinite bar. Dispersion curves are compared between non-local continuum
theories. Results show that for the propagating modes, peridynamic material to be a
low-pass filter with an escape frequency, in accordance to the Eringen stress gradient
theory. Perdynamics gave an excellent agreement with long-range interactions of 1D
spring mass lattice within the first Brillouin zone.
Keywords: Peridynamics; Dispersion; Escape frequency; Lattice dynamics; Non-
locality.
INTRODUCTION In this paper we show the analysis of the

peridynamic bar with a linear micro-elastic
In the study of structures for their properties material. Properties of the dispersion curves
dispersion of the medium plays a are compared with gradient theories in a
fundamental role. Classical theory failed to linear elastic material. It shows an excellent
predict the properties of a material with agreement with the atomic dispersion law
microstructure. This was explained based that of the long range interactions.
on its inadequacy in capturing the influence
of the microstructure on macroscopic MATERIALS AND METHODS
properties through dispersion laws. Atomic
dispersion studies revealed the Equations of motion and the dispersion laws
microstructure dispersion laws. It showed are given in this section. Analysis on a
waves with frequency band structure and linear elastic homogenous infinite bar is
periodicity in wavenumber [Brillouin 2003]. considered. The non-local models compared
are the stress gradient theory Eringen
Non-local theories of elasticity were
(1972), strain gradient theory and the
proposed to incorporate the influence of peridynamics. Following Abeyaratne and
discrete microstructure to the continuum. Weckner (2005), equation of motion for the
Recently, Silling (2000) has proposed 1D linear peridynamic analysis of an
peridynamics as an integral non-local infinite bar is given as,
continuum theory with long range L
2
interactions between the material particles.
ρü = ∫ C̅(ξ) [u(x − ξ, t) − u(x, t)] dξ (1)
The role of dispersion as a measure to
L
quantify predictability of a continuum −
2
model was studied by Jirásek (2004); Here, a constant 𝐶̅ (𝜉) is assumed within the
Zimmermann (2005). They have compared horizon of length L. Satisfying the
the models in their ability to capture the conditions on the micro-modulus function,
atomic dispersion law. They have it is defined as,
considered dispersion law that of the nearest 24E L L
neighbour interactions in a periodic lattice. C̅(ξ) = { L3 − 2 ≤ ξ ≤ 2 (2)
0 elsewhere
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: vsmutnuri@aero.iisc.ernet.in

728
Mutnuri and Gopalakrishnan
A 1D periodic lattice of identical particles that of the peridynamics and then the
of mass m placed at a distance 𝑑to each bracketing method is applied, if necessary.
otheris considered. A mass at a location n Numerical values used for the calculations
interacts with N number of its neighbours in
are, 𝜌 = 7850 kg/m3, E = 200 * 109 Pa and L
a symmetrical way. Interaction is assumed
= 1 m.
as a linear spring with constant
𝐾𝑛−𝑟,𝑛 between particles at n-r and n for –N RESULTS
≤ r ≤ N. Then, the equation of motion is
given as Dispersion pair for a considered frequency
2 N
d ξn – wavenumber range is shown in the figure
m = ∑ K n−r,n [ξn−r − 2ξn + ξn+r ] (3)
dt 2 1. Characteristics that can be seen are as
r=0
where, 𝜉𝑛 is the displacement of the particle follows. For an angular frequency there are
at location x =nd from a origin. Here n and infinite values of wavenumber. In the figure
N are natural numbers. only four complex modes are shown. There
is maximum value of 𝜔 after which no real
Fourier transform of the equations of pair exists.There is a frequency band within
motion of models is done by assuming its which multiplicity in real wavenumber
solution of the form of a plane waves given increases. Multiplicity is infinite at a single
as, frequency, whose value is given as√(( 𝐶̅ 𝐿)/
u(x, t) = e−i(kx−ωt) (4) 𝜌). This is defined as escape frequency.
The relation between the wave
parameters𝜔(𝑘) is known as the dispersion Group speeds of complex pairs, excluding a
relation. band of frequencies around this maximum,
Dispersion relations are obtained as follows. are unbounded. Within this band complex
Substitution of Eq. (4) into Eq. (1) gives pair damp with propagation, that is, these
L are in-homogenous waves. Group speed for
2
ρω = ∫ C̅(ξ) [1 − cos kξ] dξ
2 all the real pairs is bounded. Hence, the
L
−
2 only propagating waves along the bar are
Applying Eq. (2) and carrying out due to the real pairs. Group speeds of these
integrating gives pairs are shown in the figure 2.Further, from
kL
ρω2 sin ( 2 ) plots the following characteristics can be
1− = (5) seen. For lower values of pairs, slope of the
C̅L kL
2 curve is straight line, that is, classical
Consider displacement u as 𝜉𝑛 for a discrete behaviour for long wavelengths is captured.
particle located at x =nd. Then substitution As frequency increases multiplicity in real
of Eq. (4) modified with above wavenumber increases, thus, resulting in
considerations into Eq. (3) gives, multiple positive and negative real group
N
2 speeds. Group speed is approaching escape
2
ω = ∗ ∑ K n−r,n [1 − cos(krd)]
m
(6) frequency as a ‘sink’. This behaviour was
r=0 also found recently by Mikata (2012).
Equations of motion and dispersion laws for
classical and gradient theories are
summarized in Gopalakrishnan (2013).
Dispersion pair (𝜔, 𝑘) are calculated by root
bracketing method at a given value of
angular frequency for transcendental
dispersion equation Eq. (5). The pair for
gradient models is calculated by first
choosing the value for scale factor as that
which captures the characteristics closely to
729
Dispersion Properties of Linear Microelastic Peridynamic Bar
Figure 1. Real and complex valued Figure 2. Group speeds for the dispersion
dispersion pairs of peridynamic bar.𝑘𝐿is pairs for peridynamic bar.
non – dimensional wavenumber. This was studied by Jirásek (2004;
Dispersion from different models is Zimmermann (2005) with the nearest
compared as shown the figure 3.All models neighbour interactions. The dispersion real
have captured classical theory for lower pair of peridynamics is given as input to the
values of pair. Difference in the models is dispersion law of long-range interactions of
with respect to higher values of the pair. the lattice to obtain the constant coefficients
Strain gradient theory of order 2 has two of the equation Eq. 6. Coefficients contain
branches. Group speed shows that upper spring constant between n and n-r particles
branch gives unbounded values for lower and mass of particle. They quantify the
values of pair, hence not a physically strength of interaction between neighbours.
reasonable mode. Stress gradient theory and Method of least squares is used for this
strain gradient theory of order 2 have a purpose. The obtained curve fit from
maximum frequency after which there are considered range of peridynamic real pair is
no propagating waves. Strain gradient shown in the figure 4.For number of
theory of order 4 has no multiplicity as well neighbours of 21 atoms it gave an excellent
as maximum frequency. match to the peridynamic pair with error
around 0.02 percent. Coefficients are almost
DISCUSSION constant and small after 15 neighbour
interactions for the considered range of
As the results show each model has wavenumber.
respective characteristics with some
similarities and differences to each other for
a range of values of the pair. To know
applicability of a model it is contrasted with
the atomic dispersion laws.
730
Mutnuri and Gopalakrishnan
International Publishing Switzerland

143-145.
Jirásek M 2004 Nonlocal theories in
continuum mechanics Acta
Polytechnica 44 16-34.
Mikata Y 2012 Analytical solutions of
peristaltic and peridynamic problems
for a 1D infinite rod International
Journal of Solids and Structures 49
2887-2897.
Silling A S Reformulation of elasticity
theory for discontinuities and long-
range forces Journal of the Mechanics
and Physics of Solids 48 175-209.
Weckner O and Abeyaratne R 2005 The
Figure 3. Real dispersion pairs for effect of long-range forces on the
considered models dynamics of a bar Journal of the
Mechanics and Physics of Solids 53
705-728.
Zimmermann M 2005 A continuum theory
with long-range forces for solids Ph.
D. Thesis Graduate School—
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
70-81.
NOTATION
x position of a material particle

𝜌 mass density of particle
u displacement of particle
E Youngs’ modulus
𝜉 distance from x
Figure 4. Dispersion comparison of 𝑘 wavenumber
periodic lattice and peridynamics.
𝜔 angular frequency
REFERENCES
Brillouin L 2003 Wave Propagation in

Periodic Structures Dover Phoenix
Editions New York 1-43.
Eringen C A 1972 Linear theory of nonlocal
elasticity and dispersion of plane
waves International Journal of
Engineering and Science 10 425-435.
Gopalakrishnan S 2013 Wave Propagation
in Nanostructures Springer
731
ICCMS2016
EVALUATING THIN FILM MECHANICAL PROPERTIES APPLYING

NANOINDENTATION: COMPUTATIONAL, EXPERIMENTAL AND
ANALYTICAL STUDY
MALLIKARJUNACHARI. G.* and GHOSH P. P.
Indian Institute of Technology, Madras, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Ultra - thin polymer coatings (150 – 200 nm) on various su strates (hard,
soft, and elastomeric) are gaining significant attention in these days because of a wide
variety of applications. However, extracting nano-mechanical properties of thin films
are extremely difficult because of substrate effect, pile-up and viscoelastic behavior of
polymers. In this work, 150 nm PMMA film was deposited on various substrate
namely glass (hard), epoxy (soft) and silicone (elastomer) by applying the spin
coating. Depth sensing quasi-static nanoindentation experiments were conducted to
obtain mechanical properties. Substrate effect and pile-up were considered in
evaluating Young’s modulus and hardness. Two-dimensional finite element
simulations of the Berkovich indenter was used to examine the elastic-plastic
properties of different thin-film substrate combinations. Nanomechanical properties
obtained from experiments and finite element simulation were compared with the
analytical models. Limitations of each technique were discussed and compared.
Keywords: Thin Film; Nanoindentation; Hardness; Pile-up; Viscoelasticity
INTRODUCTION mechanical properties using techniques

Evaluating thin film mechanical properties mentioned above is not straight forward due
are gaining significant attention because of to various parameters such as pile-up
[Bolshakov and Pharr, 1998] during
a broad range of applications of the thin
nanoindentation nanoscratching, substrate
film in various engineering fields. Touch
effect [Barletta and Gisario 2011] and
screen panels [Boland, 2010], solar panels
surface effects [Zang and Xu, 2002].
[Chung et al., 2011] coatings on concrete
[Chen et al., 2014], thin film, wrinkled Finite element technique is one of the
formation on the elastomeric substrate alternative tools to measure the mechanical
[Chung et al., 2011] etc., are some of the properties of the thin film. Modeling of
advanced applications. indentation into super hard coatings [He and
Veprek, 2003], the effect of substrate [Xu
Fragmentation test [Leterrier et al., 2010]
and Rowcliffe, 2004], hard coating on a soft
nanoindentation [Fang and Chang, 2004]
substrate and soft coating on the hard
and nanoscratching [Pergande et al., 2001]
substrate [Pelegri and Huang, 2008], are
are few experimental techniques to measure
few studies applying Finite element
the thin film mechanical properties at the
technique. However, finding yield point,
nanoscale. Young’s modulus, hardness,
roughness effect, adhesion effects,
fracture toughness which are basic
viscoelastic properties, creep, frictionless
parameters extracted from experimental
contact are few limitations in the finite
techniques. However, estimation of
element techniques. It is necessary to
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:gmc1811@gmail.com 732

Mallikarjunachari and Ghosh
combine experimental and numerical experimentally and finite element

techniques along with theoretical studies for method at various depths 80 nm, 200 nm
an accurate estimate of thin film properite and 300 nm
[Yu et al., 2003].
Table 1. Mechanical properties of
In this work, an attempt is made to extract various materials used in finite element
thin film mechanical properties of thin films simulations
accurately with the help of computational,
Young's
experimental and theoretical studies. Hardness
Material Modulus
(H) GPa
(E) GPa
EXPERIMENTS
Bulk
THIN FILM PREPARATION 3.9 0.188
PMMA
Bulk
The Poly methyl methacrylate (PMMA) 4.35 0.197
epoxy
thin film of 150 nm thickness was deposited
on epoxy, glass and elastomeric substrates Bulk
74.66 5.20
by spin coating technique. The film Glass
thickness was measured using J A Woollam Bulk
0.002 0.000279
Spectroscopic ellipsometer at temperature Elastomer
18 ˚C and RH 40%. Polymethyl
Methacrylate (PMMA) (Molecular Weight
= 990000), Diglycidyl Ether of Bisphenol A The same load function 20 seconds for
(Epoxy) DGEBA supplied from Sigma- loading, 10 seconds for holding and 10
Aldrich, glass slide and silicone elastomer seconds for unloading was applied in
supplied from Mold-Star were used for all experiments as well as finite element
experiments. simulations. One of the high-resolution
3D piezo image showing pile-up after
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS performing nanoindentation experiment
The axisymmetric thin film thickness of 150 is shown in Figure 1 (a). Finite element
nm is modelled on 1000 nm substrate simulations showing pile-up
material. Both film and substrate material (displacement field in Y direction)
are considered as an isotropic elastic-plastic obtained for depth 100 nm is shown in
material. The elastic-plastic properties of Figure 1(b).
film and substrate are given in Table 1. No
friction is considered between film and tip CONCLUSION
(rigid Berkovich of radius 150 nm and half It was observed in the case of finite element
angle 70.3º) and perfect bonding between
simulation the pile-up is overestimated.
thin film and substrate are considered. The
simulation was carried out by using Abaqus This pile-up difference is primarily due to
CAE 6.10-1. the viscoelastic behavior of polymers which
is not considered in finite element
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS simulations.
ANALYSIS OF PILE-UP ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Polymeric materials normally show pile- Authors would like to thank AFM Lab,
up behavior because of lack of work Metallurgical and Materials Engineering,
hardening capacity. In this work, the IIT Madras for providing nanoindentation
pile-up was compared and analyzed
733
Evaluating Thin Film Mechanical Properties Applying Nanoindentation: Computational, Experimental
and Analytical Study
facility for conducting all the experiments sincerely.
Figure 1 PMMA thin film on Glass substrate (a) Piezo image showing pile-up observed
after nanoindentation experiment (b) Finite element simulation showing pile-up at
penetration depth of penetration 80 nm
Table 2. Comparison of experimental and FEM values

Thin film-substrate Finite
Depth (nm) Experimental value
combination element value
PMMA-Epoxy 80 1.47 11
200 3.07 14.6
300 3.92 15.5
PMMA-Glass 80 8.1 15
200 51.3 62.7
300 101.78 110.5
PMMA- 80 0.1 0.12
Elastomer 200 0.2 0.3
300 0.45 0.6
Mech. 225 431–452.

REFERENCES
doi:10.1007/s00707-013-0979-y.
Boland J J 2010 Flexible Electronics: Leterrier Y Mottet A Bouquet N Gilliéron D
Within touch of artificial skin Nat. Dumont P Pinyol A et al 2010
Mater 9 790–792. Mechanical integrity of thin inorganic
doi:10.1038/nmat2861. coatings on polymer substrates under
F Limited Organic Conductive Polymer quasi-static thermal and fatigue
2008 26 1–5. loadings Thin Solid Films 519 1729–
1737. doi:10.1016/j.tsf.2010.06.003.
Chung J Y Nolte A J Stafford C M 2011
Surface wrinkling: A versatile platform Fang T H Chang W J 2004 Nanoindentation
for measuring thin-film properties Adv. characteristics on polycarbonate
Mater. 23 349–368. polymer film Microelectronics J. 35
doi:10.1002/adma.201001759. 595–599.
doi:10.1016/j.mejo.2004.02.004.
Chen Z Zhou K Lu X Lam Y C 2014 A
review on the mechanical methods for Pergande S R Polycarpou A A Conry T F
evaluating coating adhesion Acta 2001 Use of Nano-Indentation and
734
Mallikarjunachari and Ghosh
Nano-Scratch Techniques to
Investigate Near Surface Material
Properties Associated With Scuffing of
Engineering Surfaces General Motors
Corporation 61801 1–157.
Bolshakov A Pharr G M 1998 Influences of
pileup on the measurement of
mechanical properties by load and
depth sensing indentation techniques J.
Mater. Res. 13 1049–1058.
doi:10.1557/JMR.1998.0146.
Barletta M Gisario A 2011 The role of the
substrate in micro-scale scratching of
epoxy–polyester films, Appl. Surf. Sci.
257 4449–4463 doi:10.1016 /j.apsusc.
2010.12.090.
Zhang T- Xu WH 2002 Surface Effects on
Nanoindentation J. Mater. Res. 17
1715–1720. doi:10.1557/JMR.
2002.0254.
He J L Veprek S 2003 Finite element
modeling of indentation into superhard
coatings Surf. Coatings Technol. 163-
164 374–379. doi:10.1016/S0257-
8972(02)00628-X.
Xu Z-H Rowcliffe D 2004 Finite element
analysis of substrate effects on
indentation behaviour of thin films
Thin Solid Films 447-448 399–405.
doi:10.1016/S0040-6090(03)01071-X.
Pelegri A A Huang X 2008 Nanoindentation
on soft film/hard substrate and hard
film/soft substrate material systems
with finite element analysis Compos.
Sci. Technol. 68 147–155.
doi:10.1016/j.compscitech.2007.05.033
.
Yu N Polycarpou A Conry T F 2003
Experimental Analytical and Finite
Element Studies of the
Nanoindentation Technique to
Investigate Material Properties of
Surface Layers Less Than 100
Nanometers Thick 61801.
735
ICCMS2016
KINEMATIC AND DYNAMIC ANALYSES OF 3-LINK

COOPERATIVE MANIPULATORS HANDLING HAZARDOUS
CHEMICALS
RANJAN R.* and DWIVEDY S. K.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Guwahati, India
Abstract: Manual handling of hazardous chemicals poses significant risks to lives

and health of handlers. Such types of works can efficiently be carried out by two
cooperative manipulators. In this paper kinematic and dynamic analysis of PUMA
560 type two 3-link cooperative manipulators up to their wrists have been carried out
that handle hazardous chemicals in laboratory or pharmaceutical industries for testing
purposes. The inverse Kinematics required for performing the job has been solved by
using geometric method and the dynamic analysis has been carried out by using the
Lagrange-Euler formulation for dynamic equation of motion.
Keywords: Kinematic and dynamic analysis; 3-Link cooperative manipulators;
Lagrange-Euler dynamic equation of motion.
INTRODUCTION et. al. (1987) for PUMA 560 robot and shown
in figure 2 and corresponding Link
Many chemicals that we deal with in coordinate parameters upto four axes have
laboratories or in pharmaceutical industries been given in table 1.
are found to be of dangerous nature that may
potentially harm handlers of such chemicals.
For handling such chemicals cooperative
manipulators can be employed as shown in
figure 1 to minimize the risk to the handlers
of the chemicals. In this paper kinematic and
dynamic analyses of manipulators that handle
such chemicals cooperatively and may be
Figure 2. Link coordinate system for the
operated remotely have been done. PUMA 560 type manipulator up to gripper
Table 1. Arm link coordinate parameters
of 6-axis robot
Link coordinate parameters
Joint θ i di ai αi
i ( rad) ( m) ( m) ( rad)
1 θ1 0 0
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of
cooperative PUMA type manipulators
handling hazardous chemicals 2 θ2 0.149.09 0.431.8 0
3 θ3 0 -
The link coordinate system for the 0.02032
manipulator has been supposed to be as in Fu
Rajesh Ranjan*: E-mail: rajesh.2013@iitg.ernet.in 736

Rajesh Ranjan*
4 θ4 0.433.07 0 configurations of the manipulators have

similarities with PUMA 560 manipulator.
Inertial properties of different links and Many research papers can be found on
actuators of both the manipulators which are PUMA type manipulators but very few
of similar kinds have been supposed to be as researchers have studied the application of
in Zomaya (1993) and are given in table 2 PUMA type robots in cooperative tasks. To
and table 3. name a few who worked on PUMA
manipulators, Santos and Ferreira (2006)
Table 2. Link mass and first moment presented an attractor based dynamics that
3-link manipulator autonomously generated temporary discrete
Link Mass x y Z movement based on generated timed
(Kg) (m) (m) (m) trajectory for a PUMA arm which was used
1 m1=12.95 0 0.309 0.039 to catch a moving ball before it falls over a
2 m2=22.36 - 0.005 0.2038 table. Armstrong et. al. (1986) disassembled
0.329 a PUMA 560 arm and measured the inertial
3 m3=5 0.02 0.014 0.0037 properties of links that led to improved
accuracy in calculated forces of motion and
Table 3. Actuator and link Inertia
simplified the dynamic model. Piltan et. al.
3-link manipulator [2012] developed simulation models using
Lin- I a I xx I yy I zz MATLAB/SIMULINK for the realization of
k (Kg.m2) (Kg.m2) (Kg.m2) (Kg.m2) position control of PUMA 560 arm through
sliding mode control as a part of a software
1 0.7766 2.351 0.1968 2.3457 laboratory to support and enhance
2 2.3616 1.3313 4.313 3.4116 graduate/undergraduate robotics and control
3 0.5827 0.07582 0.07766 0.01038 courses. Benzater and Chouraqui (2014)
applied Non-dominated Sorting Genetic
Here, for an example, an elliptical path for Algorithm II (NSGA-II) technique in the
the manipulator carrying a jar full of tuning of computed torque controller gain of
chemical and a path comprised of vertical a PUMA560 arm manipulator.
and horizontal straight lines for the
manipulator carrying collecting jar have been RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
planned as shown in figure 3. Torque on each It is found that at the start and end of each
joint which drive manipulators to execute the section of the trajectories abrupt changes in
task accurately and deftly is calculated by
joint torques as can be seen in figures 5 and 7
finding angular velocities, angular
accelerations. The proper trajectory- occur because of jumps in angular velocities
algorithm is needed to feed into the controller and accelerations that may damage the
unit and also to do the accurate dynamic manipulators. So, to smoothly start and stop
analysis for the exact estimation of torque the manipulator at each section of the
and load that manipulators will be subjected trajectories, quintic polynomial trajectory
to in order to carry out the process smoothly planning has to be applied that gives smooth
without any spill or overflow of chemicals.
Lagrange-Euler method for dynamic analysis velocities and accelerations varying with time
of these manipulators has been applied. which in turn requires comparatively very
less and smoothly varying torques at the two
Although manipulators under present study
are not PUMA 560 manipulators but many of ends of each trajectory section as can be seen
their inertial properties and arm from figures 6 and 8.
737
Kinematic and dynamic analyses of 3-link cooperative manipulators handling hazardous chemicals
Figure 3. Two Puma-560 type manipulators cooperatively handling hazardous

chemicals (There is 4 mm of gap between the two containers at the time of pouring)
Figure 4. Joint angles of the Figure 7. Joint torque of a Puma-

manipulator carrying a collecting jar 560 type manipulator carrying a
collecting jar before torque smoothening
Figure 5. Joint torque of the

manipulator carrying a pouring bottle
before torque smoothening
Figure 8. Joint torque of a Puma-560

type manipulator carrying a collecting jar
after torque smoothening
REFERENCES
Figure 6. Joint torque of the Armstrong Brian Khatib Oussama, Burdick

Joel 1986 The Explicit Dynamic Model
manipulator carrying a pouring bottle of
and Inertial Parameters of the PUMA 566
chemical after torque smoothening Arm. Proceedings IEEE Int. Conference
on Robotics and Automation San
Francisco CA 510-518.
738
Rajesh Ranjan*
BENZATER Habiba and CHOURAQUI Control Methods Using

Samira 2014 Puma 560 Trajectory MATLAB/SIMULINK and Their
Control using NSGAII Technique with Integration into Graduate/Undergraduate
Real Valued Operators. International Nonlinear Control, Robotics and
Journal of Soft Computing, Mathematics MATLAB Courses. International
and Control (IJSCMC) 3(3). Journal of Robotic and Automation,
(IJRA) 6(3).
Craig John J. 2005 Introduction to Robotics: Saha S K 2012 Introduction to Robotics Tata
Mechanics and Control, Pearson McGraw Hill Education Private Limited
Education International, Third Edition. sixth reprint.
Fu K.S Gonzalis R. C. Lee C.S.G 1987 Santos Cristina and Ferreira Manuel 2006
Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and Ball Catching by a Puma Arm: A
Intelligence Mc. Graw Hill Book Nonlinear Dynamical Systems Approach.
Company. Paper presented at the Proceedings of the
http://www.andrew.cmu.edu/user/lingzhil/K
2006 IEEE/RSJ
DC/hw6/hw6.htm
Schilling Robert J 2009 Fundamental of
Jazi Hadian Keshmiri S. Sheikholeslam M.
Robotics: Analysis and Control Eastern
Shahreza F. M. G. and Keshmiri M 2012
Economy Publication, Ed. 2009.
Dynamic analysis and control synthesis
Spong M W Hutchinson S Vidyasagar M
of undesired slippage of end-effectors in
2006 Robot Modeling and Control Wiley
a cooperative grasping. Advanced
Robotics, 26(15) 1693-1726 India Edition Ed.
Zomaya Albert Y 1993 Modelling and
International Conference on Intelligent
Simulation of Robot Manipulators:A
Robots and Systems, Beijing, China.
Parallel Processing Approach World
Piltan F Emamzadeh S Hivand Z Shahriyari
FMirzaei M 2012 PUMA-560 Robot Scientific series in Robotics and
Manipulator Position Sliding Mode Automated systems 8.
739
ICCMS2016
PENDULUM IMPACT TEST ON THERMALLY DAMAGED

REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMES
SINGH TARVINDER*, SHARMA SHAILESH, PARMAR R. M. and REDDY G.R.
Abstract:In order to design safe and economic structures, it is important to know the
behavior of concrete under extreme loading conditions like dynamic behavior of fire
damaged structures.The objective of this paper is to present an experimental study on
fire and post fire dynamic response of Reinforced Concrete (RC) frame.It will be
helpful to understand seismic behavior of fire damaged structures during earthquake
after-shocks.Due to its very high complexity, there are not many experiments which
shows the effect of fire on dynamic behavior of structures. This study will help in
benchmarking of both computer and analytical models of post fire dynamic response
of structure.
Keywords: Fire; RC Frame; Impact; Residual Strength; Experiment.
INTRODUCTION A single story single bay frame RC frame

In the literature, various researches shows was casted at Automotive Research
that at high temperature mechanical Association of India (ARAI), Pune. To
properties of concrete (Stress-Strain simulate dynamic behaviour of fire damaged
relationship, Compressive strength and RC frames, it was subjected to one hour of
Modulus of elasticity) deteriorate with standard ISO 834 fire and sequentially after
increase in temperature [Chang et al., 2006; cooling it was subjected to pendulum
Euro code 2, 2005]. High temperature impacts.
induced degradation in material properties SPECIMEN DETAILS
have a pronounced effect on the behaviour of Figure 1 shows the schematic diagram of
RC structure. High rate loading and high
tested frame. The test frame had the story
temperatures can occur in combination, for height of 1500 mm from footing and
example, cases of earthquake after-shocks to consisted of four columns (150mm X 150
the structure exposed to fire due to mm) at centre to centre distance of 1600 mm
earthquake. Number of fire tests on structural in each direction supporting four beams
elements subjected to static and quasi static (100mm X 150mm) with 70mm thick RC
loading have been conducted by various slab.
researchers [Dwaikat and Kodur, 2009;
Kamath et al., 2015; Shah et al., 2015]. Due The reinforcement detailing beams is shown
to its very high complexity, there are not in the Error! Reference source not found..
many experiments which shows the effect of Clear cover on main reinforcement of
fire on dynamic behavior of structures. The column, beam and slab were 20mm, 20 mm
main objective of this study is to understand and 17.5 mm respectively. Footing blocks of
experimentally the performance of RC frame dimensions 450mm X 450mm X 200mm
subjected to fire and post fire dynamic loads. with strap beams were provided in the frame.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tarvindr@barc.gov.in 740

Tarvinder et al.
thermocouples at each S1, S2 & S3 numbered

as TC66 to TC68,TC69 to TC71 & TC 72 to
TC74 respectively a shown in Figure
4.Recorded temperature readings are shown
in Figure 5.
Figure. 1. Frame before fire test
S1
Figure 2. Beam and column details
FIRE TEST
The frame were instrumented with 80 nos of
thermocouples to measure temperature across
the cross-section of beams, columns and slab. Figure 4. Location of thermocouples in
For measuring furnace temperature 5 slab
thermocouples were used, one at centre of It can be observed that the core region of
each bay and one at centre of frame. In member reaches its peak temperature during
addition to this, three thermocouple were the cooling phase. Although the temperature
used near columns to measure the spatial of the air starts decreasing but the gradients
variation of furnace temperature with height. in the column and slab are still inward, this
The thermocouple location in mid height leads to increase in core temperatures.
1000
section of column is shown in Figure 2 and TC 66
800
the recorded temperature readings are shown TC 67
Temperature ( C)
TC 68

in Figure 3. 600
1000 400
TC 56
800 TC 55
200
Temperature ( C)
TC 54

600 TC 51 0
TC 52 0 60 120 180 240 300
400 TC 49 Time (min)
TC 48
200 Figure 5. Thermocouple reading at S2
0
0 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480
Time (min)
PENDULUM IMPACT TEST
Figure 3. Thermocouple reading at mid The pendulum impact test setup is shown in
height section of column Figure 6. The dynamic response of frame was
Thermocouples were placed at three recorded with 11 nos. of accelerometers. The
locationsS1, S2, and S3 along the diagonal acceleration recorded at impacted side of
connecting columns. There were three frame below 350 mm from top of the slab is
shown in Figure 7. Displacements of frame at
741
Pendulum Impact Test on Thermally Damaged Reinforced Concrete Frame
level of slab during impact were obtain with OBSERVATION

high speed photography (HSP). as shown in It was observed that the core region of
Figure 8. member reaches its peak temperature during
It was instrumented with 40 nos. of strain the cooling phase. In column core
gauges. Location of strain gauges along with temperature recorded had a plateau near 100
tag number are shown in Figure9. The °C which can be attributed to moisture. The
response of strain gauges (2, 5, 14, and 17) maximum temperature reached in
on mid height and at front side of columns thermocouples near column rebar is in the
are shown in Figure10. range of 500 °C to 600 °C, the maximum
temperature reached in the core region is
around 400 °C. The peak temperature in core
of column is reached at around 150 minutes
when the furnace is in cooling phase. There
are number of surface cracks were observed
frames and visual defection in beams and
slabs after fire test. Cracks in beam-column
joint and footing-column joint area were also
noted. Color of the surface had changed to
light grey with pinkish tint. The tint is
basically a characteristic of the chemical
composition of the aggregate used.
Figure6. Frame before impact test.
15
10
Accelaration (g)
-5 Figure 9. Location of strain gauges.

-10
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 600 SG 2
Time (sec)
500 SG 5
Strain (microns)
Figure 7. Acceleration near top of frame 400 SG 14

300 SG 17
200
Horizontal Displacement (mm)
0 100
-25 0
-50 Loc 4 -100
Loc 5 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
-75 Time (sec)
Loc 6
-100 Loc 7 Figure 10. Strain gauge reading of frame
-125 Loc 8
-150
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 Maximum acceleration of pendulum is 20g.
Time (sec)
The corresponding peak acceleration near top
Figure 8. Horizontal displacement at slab. of frame is around 13g. The maximum strain
742
Tarvinder et al.
readings in column are mostly in the range of structural engineering 135(11) 1408-
500 microns to 600 microns during the 1417.
impact. Horizontal displacement of frame at
the level of slab is 125 mm with residual EN 1992-1-2 2004 Design of Concrete
deflection of 75 mm. Cracks are visible in Structures Part 1-2: General Rules-
inner surface of beam-column joints and Structural Fire Design Brussels.
footing column joints due to pendulum
Kamath Praveen Umesh Sharma Virendra
impact. Crushing of concrete also noted at the
location of contact of pendulum and frame. Kumar Pradeep Bhargava Asif Usmani
Bhupinder Singh Yogendra Singh Jose
Torero Martin Gillie and Pankaj Pankaj
CONCLUSION
2015 Full-scale fire test on an earthquake-
To study behavior of structural member damaged reinforced concrete frame Fire
under extreme load, frame was subjected to Safety Journal 73 (21-19).
elevated temperature and post fire impact
test. Observation of temperature profile of Shah A H Umesh K Sharma Pradeep
structure during heating and cooling along Bhargava G R Reddy Tarvinder Singh
with post fire dynamic response of structure and Hitesh Lakhani 2015 A full scale fire
were presented and discussed. test on a pre damaged RC framed
The migration of moisture plays an important structure Advances in Structural
role in the thermal distribution of the RC Engineering 2259-2274 Springer India
specimen and leads to an elongated plateau at 2015
100 °C. High water content may lead to delay
in maximum core temperature of the
specimen thus influence the fire resistance of
the member
The experiment result shows high
degradation in stiffness and strength of
structural members when subjected to
elevated temperature. Due to the thermal
damage, response of the structure member to
high rate loading is highly influenced.
A database is generated for modelling
analytical and computer models and to
further enhance the understanding of post fire
dynamic response of structure.
REFERENCES
Chang Y F Chen Y H Sheu MS and Yao GC
2006 Residual Stress-Strain Relationship
for Concrete after Exposure to High
Temperatures Cement and Concrete
Research 36(10) 1999-2005.
Dwaikat M B and Kodur V K R 2009
Response of restrained concrete beams
under design fire exposure Journal of
743
ICCMS2016
RESPONSE OF FIRE DAMAGED RC SLAB UNDER IMPACT

SHARMA S., TARVINDER SINGH, PARMAR R. M. and REDDY G. R.
Abstract:Safety of structures under impact load has always been an area of utmost
importance in nuclear industry. In the advent of fire, properties of concrete degrade
due to high temperature experienced by Reinforced Concrete (RC) member which
ultimately leads to reduction in member capacity. The response of these deteriorated
members in the event of internal missiles and equipment drop needs to be properly
understood. To address the above issue experimental results of fire damaged RC slab
under impact load is presented in this paper.
A 2 m × 1.7 m RC slab of 150 mm thickness was used in the present study.
Reinforcement of 8ϕ @ 150 mm c/c distance in longitudinal and transverse direction
was provided on both faces with a clear cover of 25 mm. Instrumentation for the test
included thermocouple, strain gauge and load cells. One side of slab was exposed to 1
hour ISO 834 standard fire, and then cooled naturally. There were surface cracks and
the colour of the surface changed to light grey with pinkish tint at the end of cooling
phase. Spalling was not reported in the specimen. The maximum temperature in the
rebar was noted around 530 ºC. Impact was induced on exposed face by dropping
punch of 588 kg from a height of 3 m. The specimen failed in punching mode, the
projectile punched through the slab breaking the top rebar layer and rested on the
bottom rebar layer.
Keywords: Fire; RC Slab; Impact
INTRODUCTION adequate time to occupants and emergency

Reinforced Concrete (RC) is a widely used service personal for evacuation. The situation
material for construction of building and becomes worse when the structure is
structures. Recent natural and man-made subjected to a combination of these events
events have exposed the vulnerability of such as fire followed impact. The response of
reinforced concrete (RC) structures to these deteriorated members in the event of
extreme loading cases such as earthquakes, internal missiles and equipment drop needs to
fire and impact. The effect of such load is be properly understood.
detrimental to integrity and stability of the Various researchers have performed
structure. Key consideration in design of experimental studies on RC slabs subjected to
structures is that building should survive high rate loading [Zinnedin et al., 2007;
without collapse with some structural damage Sugano et al., 1991; NEA/CSNI/IRIS-2010].
in case of extreme event such as fire, A number of studies have been carried out by
earthquake and blast and should provide various researchers for fire loads [Lim &
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shaileshs@barc.gov.in 744

Sharma et al.
wade, 2002; Bailey &Toh, 2007]. Due to its fire in vertical position. Instrumentation
very high complexity, there are few during fire tests included thermocouples. Five
experiments which shows the effect of fire on different locations namely A, B, C, D, and E
impact resistance of slabs.The main objective were chosen for thermocouples and were
of this study is to understand experimentally placed along the depth as shown in Figure. 2.
the performance of RC slab subjected to fire At all locations five thermocouples were
and post fire impact loads. This study will placed at 10mm, 55mm, 100mm, 145mm and
help in benchmarking of both computer and 190mm from the exposed surface. Thus in all
analytical models of post fire impact 25 thermocouples were used to record the
behaviour of slabs. temperature variation across the dimensions
of slab to study the thermal response of the
The tests were performed at the test facilities
slab at elevated temperature. Thermocouple 1
at The Automotive Research Association of
to 5 were used at location A, 6 to 10 at
India (ARAI), Pune. The experimental results
location B, 11 to 15 at location C, 16 to 20 at
for various tests are presented in this paper.
location D and 21 to 25 at location E.
SPECIMEN DETAILS Thermocouple reading are shown in Figure.
The plan dimensions of the slab is 1700mm 3.
X 2000mm having thickness 150 mm. The
1700 mm
schematic arrangement of test set up is shown
in Figure. 1. Reinforcement provided for
150mm thick slab is 8ϕ @ 150mm both ways 400 mm
A B
with clear cover of 25mm. To prevent local
500 mm
crushing near support during drop test
2000 mm
channel section was placed along the

periphery of the slab i.e., ISMC150 is used. Locations of
thermocouples
M20 grade of concrete and Fe-415 grade of C
reinforced was used in casting of test
specimens.
D E
Figure2. Location of Thermocouples

800
LOC 06
600 LOC 07
Temperature (οC)
LOC 08
LOC 09
400
LOC 10
200
Figure 1. Schematic Diagram of Test 0

Setup 0 60 120 180 240 300
Time (min)
FIRE TEST Figure 3. Thermocouple readings of slab
The slab was mounted in the frame that fits The peak temperature at location C, D & E
the furnace opening. The slab was exposed to are almost same and higher than those
745
Response of Fire Damaged RC Slab under Fire Load.
observed at location A & B. This is attributed to ambient temperature. It was tested for
to the vertical gradient inside the furnace impact on exposed face by dropping punch of
during the test. Temperature near bottom was 588 kg from a height of 3 m as shown in
higher as compared to those near top since Figure 5.Both top and bottom face of slab
the burners were located near the bottom of was instrumented with strain gauges in same
the furnace. It can be observed that the core locations. The impacting side of slab was
reaches its peak temperature during the referred as top and the other was referred as
cooling phase. At 55 mm from the exposed bottom.
surface the temperature rose quickly to 100
°C and thereafter a plateau is observed. This
may be attributed to moisture in the slab.
Since evaporation is endothermic process
there is a dip observed in temperature just
after the plateau region.
There were many surface cracks in slabs after
fire test and the color of the surface changed
to light grey with pinkish tint as shown in
Figure 4. The tint is basically a characteristic
of the chemical composition of the aggregate
used.There was very minor spalling near the Figure 5. Still image during impact
bottom of the slab, which can also be
attributed to casting defect. The spalling was Strain reading for location 3 which is at 300
not sufficient enough to directly expose mm distance on both sides from center of
reinforcement to fire. slab, is shown in Figure. 6 and Figure.
7.Letter ‘V’ was used to indicate strain gauge
parallel to longer side and letter ‘H’ was used
for strain gauges parallel to shorter side of the
slab. Slab after impact is shown in Figure. 8.
1000
TOP_3V [UE]
0 TOP_3H [UE]
Microstrain
-1000
-2000
-3000
14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5
Time [s]
Figure 6. Strain at location 3 (Top)

Figure 4.Exposed fire surface after fire
test.
IMPACT TEST
After exposing the slab to elevated
temperature, it was allowed to cool naturally
746
Sharma et al.
3000 further enhance the understanding of post fire

BOT_3V [UE]
BOT_3H [UE] impact response of slab.
2000
Microstrain
REFERENCES
1000
Bailey C G and Toh W S 2007 Behaviour of
0 Concrete Floor Slabs at ambient and
elevated temperatures Fire Safety Journal
-1000
14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 42 425–436.
Time [s]
Lim L and and Wade C 2002 Experimental
Figure 7. Strain at location 3 (Bottom) Fire Tests of Two-Way Concrete Slabs
Fire Engineering Research Report.
NEA/CSNI/IRIS 2010 Improving Robustness
Assessment Methodologies for Structures
Impacted by Missiles IRIS 2010 Final
Report published by OECD.
Sugano T Subota H Y Kasai N Koshika S
Ohnuma WA von Riesemann D C Bickel
and M B Parks 1993 Local damage to
reinforced concrete structures caused by
impact of aircraft engine missiles Part
Test program method and results Nucl
Figure 8. Bottom view of slab after impact Eng Des 140 387–405.
CONCLUSION Zineddin M and Krauthammer T 2007
There were many surface cracks in slab after Dynamic response and behavior of
fire test. The color of the surface changed to reinforced concrete slabs under impact
light grey with pinkish tint at the end of loading International Journal of Impact
cooling phase. The experiment result shows Engineering 34 1517–1534.
high degradation in stiffness and strength of
structural members when subjected to
elevated temperature. Due to the thermal
damage, response of the structural member
subjected to high rate loading is highly
influenced. High strain readings were
observed during impact test because of
numerous micro cracks and degradation in
material property due to elevated
temperature. The specimen failed in punching
mode, the projectile punched through the slab
breaking the top rebar layer and rested on the
bottom rebar layer.
A database is generated for modelling
analytical and computer models and to
747
ICCMS2016
STROKE AND TOLERANCE STACK UP ANALYSIS OF AN

AUTOMOTIVE SIDE DOOR LATCH
VINODKUMAR R.*, ELANGO M.1 and UDUPA N.2
1
School of Mechanical and Building Science, VIT University, Chennai, Tamil Nadu, India.
2
IFB Automotive Private Ltd. Bangalore, Karnataka, India.
Abstract: This paper gives a clear review of the performance of an Automotive Side
Door Latch, as it plays a vital role in the vehicle design. The study mainly
concentrates on different strokes and its variation with respect to the tolerance
allocated for different child parts. A complete Automotive Side Door Latch along
with Child Lock feature was built according to standards. Different strokes namely
Free Travel, Operating Travel and Full travel of the Latch was calculated and cross
verified the same. Tolerance allocation for different child parts was done as per
standard manufacturing requirement and the model is rebuilt along with tolerance.
The variation in stroke value caused due to tolerance in child parts is calculated
considering different parameters like maximum tolerance limit and minimum
tolerance limit of child parts and it’s positioning during assembly. Complete variation
i.e. tolerance stack up with all possible combinations was done. A variation of <±1
mm was found when the Latch is released from outside of the Automotive whereas
<±1.5mm when release from inside of the Automotive. By this analysis we can say
the Automotive Side Latch meets up the requirements.
Keywords: Automotive Latch; Stroke; Tolerance Allocation; Tolerance Stack up.
INTRODUCTION  Hood Latch

 Side Door Latch
In the present modern and fast growing era,
 Tail Gate Latch
automotive industry also grown parallel to
the changes in a rapid manner. As the An Automotive side door latch is a
industry is grown well, different parameters Mechanical component which is used to
has to be considered and modified with a align the door in a closed position relative to
view to improve consumer satisfaction, framework of the automotive. Latch is
safety of the occupants, cost effectiveness basically used to Lock/Unlock and
and many other factors. Safety of both Latch/Unlatch operations. Side Door Latch is
passengers and automotive plays a vital role mainly intended to avoid ejection of
and is one of the biggest task which has to be occupants from the side door of the
taken care. As we think of safety in Automotive. Present model is an advanced
automotive we come across different sections model of Latch is built which includes Child
like Braking system, Doors, Air bags etc. Lock Feature along with it. Child Lock is one
Automotive Latch (Locking System) is one of the important feature, once it is activated
of the important component of vehicle which automotive side door cannot be released from
plays a vital role in safety of the occupants inner side of the Vehicle. This feature is
and the valuables in the vehicle. We have included considering the safety of children
different types of Automotive Latch namely: sitting in the rear seat of the vehicle.
______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: vinodkumar2302@yahoo.com 748

VinodKumar et al.
STROKE ANALYSIS Tolerance Allocation is done for different

child parts which affects the stroke values as
Stroke analysis of an Automotive Side Door
per the requirement for mating different child
Latch involves different position of Latch
parts during assembly of a Latch. Major
i.e., while releasing an Automotive Side
components for which Tolerance allocated
Door Latch we can observe different strokes
are Housing, Catch, Catch Rivet, Pawl, Pawl
namely
Rivet, Pawl Rivet 1, ALH Lever, Operating
 Free Travel Lever, Operating Lever Rivet, Frame Box,
 Operating Travel Inside Release Connecting Lever, Inside
 Full Travel Release Lever and Inside Release Lever
Rivet.
Free Travel refers to the movement of the
ALH Lever until it touches the Pawl Rivet1.
Operating travel refers to further movement
of the ALH Lever until the Latch gets
released. Finally, Full travel it is the
maximum movement that ALH Lever can
move after the Latch is released.
Figure 1, 2 represents the stroke values with
respect to Inside Release Lever and Outside
Release Lever respectively of an Automotive
Side Door Latch. From Figure 1 and 2 we
can observe the exact stroke values for Inside
Release and Outside Release of the Latch.
Figure 2. Different stroke values with

respect to Outside Release
Figure 1. Different stroke values wrt

Inside Release
Figure 3. Tolerance Stack up Analysis
TOLERANCE STACK UP ANALYSIS
Tolerance Stack up is carried out under
Tolerance stack up analysis is a technique
different conditions i.e., Maximum tolerance
used to calculate the total tolerance created in
limit and Minimum tolerance Limit and
an assembled model due to tolerance
positioning the different child parts i.e.,
provided for different child
Extreme right positing and Extreme Left
parts/components. This can seen as shown in
Positioning of the child parts. As per
Figure 3.
749
Stroke and Tolerance Stack Up Analysis of an Automotive Side Door Latch
different conditions different combination of As per 4 different conditions stated above 4

charts were built and with respect to child different Latches were built and suitable
parts were selected and new model (Latch) constraints are applied for the same. Stroke
were built. Different combination which analysis is carried out on the new models to
were selected for Tolerance are: and stroke values were found as shown in
Table 1. As we can observe different
o Minimum Tolerance Condition
variation created for different combination,
 Extreme Left Position
by considering all the different conditions we
 Extreme Right Position
can see that the variation created with respect
o Maximum Tolerance Condition
Inside Release is ±1.5 mm and for Outside
 Extreme Left Position Release ±1 mm.
 Extreme Right Position
Table 1 Tolerance stack up Analysis and its respective stroke value
Minimum Tolerance Condition Maximum Tolerance Condition

Base
Different Strokes
Condition Extreme Right Extreme Left Extreme Right Extreme Left
Position Position Position Position
FREE TRAVEL 4.8 3.8 4.1 5.8 6.3
INSIDE OPERATING
10.8 9.7 9.8 11.3 12
RELEASE TRAVEL
FULL TRAVEL 13.9 13.8 13.7 14.7 14.5
FREE TRAVEL 3.7 3 3.3 4.3 4.7
OUTSIDE OPERATING
8.3 7.5 7.7 8.6 9.3
RELEASE TRAVEL
FULL TRAVEL 10.9 10.8 10.8 11.5 11.5
An Automotive Side Door Latch was built Evaluating LATCH System Ease of Use and
and base stroke calculation was done as Key Features in New
shown in the paper. Tolerance Allocation Jay Bang et al 2008 Optimization of a Hood
was done successfully and Tolerance Stack
Latch System Bachelor of Science
up analysis was carried for different
Thesis - Worcester Polytechnic Institute
conditions and found a variation of ±1.5mm
United States.
for Inside Release and ±1mm for Outside
Release. This variation is optimal for the Suguna Thanagasundram et al 2010 Real-
continuous working of Automotive Side time Simulation of a Vehicle Door
Door Latch. Locking Mechanism on a Hardware-in-
the-Loop Platform Research Gate
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 231582194.
I would like to thank IFB Automotive Pvt. Vehicles AAA Foundation for Traffic Safety.
Ltd., Bangalore for providing me an
opportunity to carry out the project in its
Organisation. I also would like to thank Mr.
Sandeep Musti, Assistant Manager and all
the team members for their support and
Guidance.
750
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF NONLINEARITIES IN THE SUSPENSION OF HEAVY

GOODS VEHICLES ON VEHICLE ROAD INTERACTION
JOSHI S., VICHARE C., PABLE M. J. and SESHU P.*
Mech. Engg. Dept., IIT Bombay, India.
Abstract: India has the second largest road network in the world (~3.3 million km)
and about 65% of goods transport takes place by road. However, it is observed that
the condition of roads deteriorates over time leading to huge losses estimated to be
around INR 10000 crore per year due to poor quality of roads (Vijayaraghavan,
2007). The Govt. of India invested nearly INR 70000 crore for the construction of
National Highways like the Golden Quadrilateral# and East-West; North-South
corridors##. One of the major causes of road damage is the force exerted by multi-
axle, Heavy Goods Vehicles (HGVs) on the road. Hence, research is being done in the
field of suspension design attempting to reduce road damage along with other design
criteria. The vehicle suspension can be designed to have variable stiffness and
damping to achieve better trade-off between performance measures than possible with
a linear passive suspension. The present study involves analysis of nonlinearity in the
suspension for a quarter HGV model. The nonlinear system is compared with linear
suspension model for goods-safety and road damage criteria. The aim of the study is
to address the issue of nonlinearity in suspension system in influencing the dynamic
forces exerted by the vehicle on the road.
Keywords: Nonlinear Suspension; Road Damage; ISO 8608; Heavy Goods Vehicle
INTRODUCTION Officials (AASHO, 1962), states that the road

damage is proportional to fourth power of
Research is being done in designing
tyre forces exerted on the road. Pable (2011)
suspension systems with an aim of reducing
used aggregate fourth power law based on
road damage along with other criteria such as
dynamic tyre-road force, and minimized it for
ride comfort, road holding, vehicle handling,
lesser fatigue induced road damage.
etc.
Suspension deflection is also an important
As an input to the system, the most widely criterion to be considered in the design. It is
accepted method to model roughness of roads observed that all these design criteria have
is ISO 8608 road profile, also known as varied requirements of suspension
Robsons’ Profile (ISO 8608:1995) and is characteristics for different performance
used in this study. Since HGV are considered measures.
here, RMS acceleration would be considered Metwalli (1986) showed that nonlinear
as a measure of goods safety. The RMS tyre suspension has better optimum characteristics
load is a measure to evaluate the road holding than linear. Yi Wan and Schimmels (2003)
characteristic (Metwalli, 1986); whereas the optimized the mechanism of seat suspension
aggregate fourth power law given by for seat acceleration and displacement with
American Association of State Highway cubic nonlinear spring. Similarly, the
# Retrieved from http://www.roadtraffic-technology.com/projects/golden-quadrilateral-highway-network/

## Retrieved from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/National_Highways_Development_Project
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: seshu@iitb.ac.in 751
Joshi et al.
suspension mechanism for HGV may be

ms ys + cs ( y s − yu ) +
developed to provide cubic nonlinear ride (2)
rate. Silveira (2014) considered the effect of k1s ( ys − yu ) + k3 s ( ys − yu )3 =
0
asymmetrical damping on the vibration
isolation of the system with road profiles yu + cs ( yu − y s ) + k1s ( yu − ys )
mu 
which cause shock loading. This (3)
+ k3 s ( yu − ys )3 + kt ( yu − yr ) =
0
configuration helped in reducing the
oscillation of sprung system and improving = Ft  kt ( yu − yr )  (4)
the comfort. However, it is observed that in
the past research, the concept of road damage For validation of the model, sinusoidal input
has not received adequate attention while is given to the system and the MATLAB
designing nonlinear suspension systems. In code for the model is verified by comparison
the present work, this asymmetric nature of with analytical solution (Figure 2). Analytical
damping with cubic nonlinear characteristics results were obtained as per the formulation
of spring will be used to study vehicle road for standard form of forced Duffing oscillator
interaction. (Rao, 2003).
Figure 2. Validation of Nonlinear System

for Forced Vibration (steady state)
Figure 1. Quarter Vehicle Model
As per ISO 8608, the road roughness can be
MODELLING AND SIMULATION represented in terms of Power Spectral
Density (PSD) as given in Eq. (5). Since the
For simplicity, a single tyre station has been
system is nonlinear, time domain road profile
considered for the analysis. The model
needs to be generated. The artificial profile
(Figure 1) to be studied is a nonlinear system
(h(x)) comes out to be of the form given in
with a cubic nonlinearity (Eq. 1)
Eq. (6) where x is the distance along the road
=
F k1s x + k3 s x 3 (1) (Agostinacchio et al., 2014). Such time
domain simulations are computationally
The system has been modelled and simulated expensive and yet, have to be carried out for
in MATLAB-Simulink considering road as a sufficient length such that system response
rigid body and the only input to the system is averages have stabilized. Based on an
road roughness. The equations of motion and exhaustive set of simulations at 20m/s vehicle
force transmitted to the road (measure of road speed for various lengths of the road, the
damage) are given by Eq. (2-4). For length of input road (ISO 8608 Grade C
generating results with a linear suspension for (G d (n 0 ) =256e-6 m3)) is finalized to be 200m
comparison purposes, nonlinear terms in the for further studies (Figure 3).
equations of motion have been ignored. −2
n
Gd ( n ) = Gd ( n0 ) .   (5)
 n0 
752
Effect of Nonlinearities in the Suspension of Heavy Goods Vehicles on Vehicle Road Interaction
N
h ( x)
= ∑
i =1
2.∆n.Gd ( ni )
(6)
× cos ( 2π ni x + Φ i )
where
Gd ( n0 ) = a constant depending upon road class
n0 = standard wavenumber (cycles/m) = constant ,
n = wavenumber (cycles/m)
(a)Dynamic vehicle-road force

(Metric of Road Damage)
Figure 3. Generated ISO 8608 Road

Profile
Sun (2007) optimized a heavy vehicle linear
suspension for reducing the road damage. (b)RMS sprung mass acceleration
The parameters m s = 4450 kg and m u = 550 kg (Metric of Goods Safety)
and optimal values of linear stiffness and
damping coefficient K 1s =622180 N/m and C s Figure 4. Comparison between linear
= 26582 Ns/m are fixed as per their model. and nonlinear suspension with C s =26582
This corresponds to a static deflection of Ns/m
0.07m which ensures that the natural
frequency of the system lies within the
desirable range of 1-2.5Hz (Els et al. (2007)). After extensive simulations, it is observed
Value of K t =1700 kN/m is used. that
RMS acceleration response, magnitude of • At lower linear stiffness values, the RMS
suspension travel and road damage response sprung mass acceleration and the dynamic
(i.e. RMS value of dynamic force transmitted forces transmitted have lower values. This
to the road) are studied for linear and low linear stiffness, in combination with
nonlinear systems by varying the stiffness the cubic stiffness parameter keeps the
and damping parameter values using suspension deflection within limit.
extensive simulations. The plots (Figure 4) • For system having pure cubic (ie K 1s = 0)
show some of the important results obtained stiffness characteristics, the reduction in
for nonlinear system compared to linear RMS sprung mass acceleration is nearly
system. The value of damping coefficient, C s 34%, whereas reduction in RMS dynamic
= 26582 Ns/m. K 1s and K 3s are varied such forces is around 9% as compared to the
that the static deflection is not more than optimal linear suspension. This gives us an
0.07m. idea that use of cubic nonlinearity would
give better performance in terms of road
753
Joshi et al.
damage and goods safety over purely ISO 8608:1995 (n.d.) Road surface –
linear suspension. reporting measured data, Draft Proposal
• Different magnitudes of static deflection ISO/DP 8608 Mechanical Vibration
constraints give different values of optimal International Organization for
suspension parameters.
Standardization 1995
• Beyond a threshold value, increased
damping does not have any noticeable Metwalli S M 1986 Optimum Nonlinear
effect on the sprung mass acceleration and Suspension Systems Journal of
road damage. This value is in the range of Mechanisms Transmissions and
0.5*104 to1.5*104 Ns/m for the selected Automation in Design 108(85) 197–202.
sprung mass and unsprung mass
parameters, which nearly corresponds to Pable M 2011 Optimization of Passive
the critical damping value considering Suspension Systems PhD Thesis IIT
simplified one-degree-of-freedom model Bombay.
for sprung mass.
• The peak suspension travel has been found Rao S S 2003 Mechanical Vibration Fourth
to be < 0.1m for all the combinations of Edition Pearson Education Inc.
parameters (K 1s , K 3s and C s ). Silveira M Pontes B R and Balthazar J M
2014 Use of nonlinear asymmetrical
SUMMARY AND FUTURE WORK
shock absorber to improve comfort on
In this work, quarter HGV suspension model passenger vehicles Journal of Sound and
involving cubic nonlinear stiffness has been
Vibration 333(7) 2114–2129.
studied. Responses in terms of RMS
acceleration and dynamic forces Sun L Cai X and Yang J 2007 Genetic
characterizing the goods-safety and road algorithm-based optimum vehicle
damage respectively, have been analysed. suspension design using minimum
Similar response analysis is required to be
dynamic pavement load as a design
carried out for nonlinear models with
asymmetric damping model of damper. This criterion Journal of Sound and Vibration
parametric study would give insight into 301(1-2) 18–27.
optimization of the suspension system Vijayaraghavan TAS Impact of transportation
parameters. infrastructure on logistics in India
REFERENCES Logistics Spectrum US 35(1) 12-16.
Agostinacchio M Ciampa D and Olita S 2014 Yi Wan A and Schimmels J M 2003.

The vibrations induced by surface Improving Vibration Isolating Seat
irregularities in road pavements – a Suspension Designs Based on Position-
Matlab® approach European Transport Dependent Nonlinear Stiffness and
Research Review 6(3) 267–275. Damping Characteristics Journal of
Dynamic Systems Measurement &
Anon 1962 The AASHO road rest, Report 7 Control 125(3) 330–338.
Summary Report Highway Research
Board Special Report 61G 1962
Els P S Theron N J Uys P E and Thoresson
M J 2007 The ride comfort vs. handling
compromise for off-road vehicles
Journal of Terramechanics 44(4) 303–
317.
754
ICCMS2016
INVERSE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF AXIAL PISTON PUMP USING

AUGMENTED NEWTON-EULER FORMULATION
MILIND T. R.1* and MITRA M.2
1
Senior Engineer, Eaton India Engineering Center, Pune, India.
2
Associate Professor, Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay,
India.
Abstract: In the present work, the analytical modeling of the inverse dynamics of an
axial piston pump mechanism is carried out to predict the bearing and constraint force
reactions. The governing dynamic equations of motion (EOMs) are developed using
the augmented Newton-Euler formulation. The governing equations are solved to
obtain closed form expressions for the constraint reactions. A numerical rigid MBD
model of the pump mechanism is also developed. The results from the analytical
modeling are compared with the numerical results. The parametric studies are carried
out using the analytical model to understand the influence of design parameters on the
frequency domain magnitudes of the constraint reactions.
Keywords: Multibody dynamics; Inverse dynamics; Closed form solution;
INTRODUCTION governing dynamic equations for a 3-PRS

Multibody dynamics (MBD) describes the parallel mechanism.
use of matrix and numerical methods for An axial piston pump is a source of fluid
modeling and analysis of the kinematics and power in hydraulic systems. The axial piston
dynamics of large scale systems involving pump consists of pistons reciprocating in a
interconnected bodies [Shabana, 2010]. cylinder barrel for the purpose of displacing
Inverse dynamics is an important class of fluid. Rocatello et al (2007) presented the
analysis in the dynamics of mechanical forward dynamic analysis of the axial piston
systems where the motion trajectories of all pump in a multibody framework for
the system degrees of freedom are specified predicting the steady state characteristics of
and the objective is to determine the forces the pump and compared the numerical results
that produce this motion [Shabana, 2010]. with experiments. Thus, the inverse dynamic
Previous studies in inverse dynamics have analysis of an axial piston pump has not been
been primarily carried out on parallel carried out previously.
manipulators. Lee et al (2003) presented the
In the present work, the analytical modeling
formulation of the governing dynamic
of the inverse dynamics of an axial piston
equation using the Newton-Euler approach
pump mechanism is presented. The
for aninverse dynamic analysis of a Stewart’s
governing equations are derived using the
platform for tracking control. Tsai and Yuan
Newton-Euler formulation. These governing
(2010) presented the approach for inverse
dynamic equations together with the
dynamic analysis, after the formulation of
kinematic equations are solved to obtain the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:TRMilind@eaton.com; 755

Milind and Mitra
constraint reaction forces. The results of the

analytical modeling are compared with
numerical modeling. The parametric studies
are carried out to understand the influence of
design and operating parameters on the
constraint reaction forces.
(a)
ANALYTICAL MODELING
In the case of unconstrained motion, the
equations of motion of the system take a
simple form defined by Newton-Euler
equations. In the case of constrained rigid
body dynamics, the equations consist of the
differential equations obtained by the direct
application of Newton-Euler equations and (b)
the algebraic constraint equations. Thus, the
governing equations in constrained rigid
body dynamic problems are expressed as,
[ M ]{q} = {Fe }+ {Qc } (1a)
[C (q, t )] = 0 (1b)
In the present analytical approach, the
dynamic modeling is carried out by
developing the differential equations of (c)
motion (EOMs) using the augmented
Newton-Euler formulation where the Figure 1. Free body diagram of piston.
constraint reaction forces are explicitly
Equations (3) gives the piston EOMs
considered. The equations are developed for
along the different axes.
the individual components in the form,
 M i  {qi } − {Qc i } =
{Fei } m p

  xp  
i
  yi   − R i
− R iptnsheX  − Fpressure
 
i


(2)  mp  p   ptnsheY − R ptnbrlY 
i
 0 
  zip   − R iptnsheZ − R iptnbrlZ   
M i   mp 0
Where   is the mass-inertia tensor, 

  i  + 
θ
 p   0
=
  0


{q } is the vector of generalized coordinates,

 Ip ϕ  p   M ptnbrlY + R ptnsheZ l ptn  
i i i 1
0 
i   i   i   
  ψ
 p   M ptnbrlZ − R iptnsheY l 1ptn   0 
{Q } is the constraint force vector and {F }

c
i
e
i
(3)
is the external force vector. Fig 1 (a), (b) and By solving the dynamic equations together
(c) show the free body diagram of the piston. with the kinematic equations, the closed form
expressions (4) and (5) for the different
constraint reactions and moments are
obtained given by,
(4)
756
Inverse Dynamic Analysis of Axial Piston Pump using Augmented Newton-Euler Formulation
of the different design parameters on the

normalized frequency domain magnitudes of
bearing constraint reactions.
(5)
In the actual application, the design engineer

is interested in the bearing and control piston
constraint forces. These can be derived from
the constraint force and moment expressions
presented above. The different bearing and
control piston constraint forces analyzed are
R
the vertical end-cover bearing force ( ebZ ), Figure 2. Verification of analytical and
numerical results.
vertical housing bearing force ( RhbZ ),
horizontal high pressures wash plate bearing
R
force ( hpX ), horizontal low pressure swash
R
plate bearing force ( lpX ), vertical high
R
pressure swash plate bearing force ( hpZ ),
vertical low pressures wash plate bearing
R R
force ( lpZ ) and control piston force ( c ).
The time domain reactions obtained from
the analytical expressions are converted into
the frequency domain using the discrete
fourier transform (DFT) algorithm. Figure 3. Time domain results of end
cover bearing force.
Figure 2 shows the comparison of
normalized forces obtained from analytical
and numerical model for the case of a single
pumping piston.
Figure 3 shows the normalized time domain
variation of the bearing constraint forces in
the nine piston transverse actuated pump
obtained from the analytical model.
The parametric studies are conducted
using the analytical model. The studies are Figure 4. Variation of bearing reactions
conducted to determine the influence of the with swashplate angle.
design parameters on the bearing constraint
reactions. The Figures 4-6 show the influence
757
Milind and Mitra
REFERENCES
Lee S Song J Choi W Hong D 2003 Position
control of a Stewart platform using
inverse dynamics control with
approximate dynamics Mechatronics 13
605-619
Roccatello A Mancò S Nervegna N 2007

Modelling A Variable Displacement
Axial Piston Pump In A Multibody
Simulation Journal of Dynamic Systems,
Measurement and Control 129 456-468
Figure 5. Variation of bearing reactions
with pitch circle diameter of bores. Shabana A A 2010 Computational Dynamics
Third edition John Wiley & Sons Ltd
Tsai M Yuan W 2010 Inverse dynamics

analysis for a 3-PRS parallel mechanism
based on a special decomposition of the
reaction forces Mechanism and Machine
Theory 451491-1508
Figure 6. Variation of bearing reactions

with swashplate arm dimension.
CONCLUSION
In the present work, the inverse dynamic
modeling of the axial piston pump using the
analytical approach is presented. The
governing dynamic equations are developed
using augmented Newton-Euler formulation.
The dynamic equations together with the
kinematic equations are solved to obtain the
constraint reactions. A comparison of
analytical and numerical results showed a
close agreement. The parametric studies were
conducted using the analytical model and
showed that the sensitivity of the constraint
reactions to design and operating conditions.
758
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL RIGID AND FLEXIBLE MULTIBODY DYNAMIC

MODELING OF AN AXIAL PISTON PUMP: VALIDATION,
COMPARISON AND PARAMETRIC STUDIES
MILIND T.R.1* and MITRA M.2
Senior Engineer, Eaton India Engineering Center, Pune
Associate Professor, Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay.
Abstract: Multibody dynamic (MBD) modeling is an important area of

computational dynamics. Numerical modeling of complex rotating machines in a
MBD framework provides the prediction of the dynamic performance which the basis
of an improved design. In the present work the modelling of the dynamics and
vibration behaviour of an axial piston pump is carried out using a numerical MBD
approach based on forward dynamic analysis. Rigid and rigid-flexible MBD models
of an axial piston pump are developed. The constraint reactions and end-cover
acceleration levels are predicted using the MBD models. The numerical results are
validated with experiments. A comparison is carried out between the rigid and rigid-
flexible MBD models. Numerical studies are carried out to identify dominant
parameters influencing the vibration behaviour of the pump which could help in the
development of possible passive control strategies.
Keywords: Numerical Multibody dynamics; Axial Piston Pump; Flexible body
dynamics.
INTRODUCTION discrete number of pistons that reciprocate in

Multibody dynamic modeling is an important a sinusoidal fashion for the purposes of
area in computational dynamics which is displacing the fluid (Manring, 2001). Flow
useful in modeling complex systems ripple, cavitation, leakage, lubrication,
consisting of many components structural integrity, control, vibration and
interconnected by joints and forces. noise are some of the important
In most engineering applications, a closed- considerations in the design of axial piston
form solution is difficult to obtain and thus pumps. Zeigers and Akers (1985) studied the
forward dynamic analysis based on the dynamic torque on the swashplate of the axial
numerical integration of the equations of piston pump for the development of
motion is adopted (Shabana, 2010). In linearized equations of motion required in the
general, multibody systems can be classified control of axial piston pumps. Manring
as rigid multibody systems or flexible (2002) studied the static control and
multibody systems (Schiehlen and Seifried, containment forces for a cradle mounted,
2006). axial-actuated swashplate in order to provide
An axial piston pump is a source of fluid the design engineer with information that is
power in hydraulic systems comprised of a necessary for sizing the pump components.
759
Author for Correspondence: E-mail:TRMilind@eaton.com;
Milind and Mitra
Manring and Dong (2004) examined the

control and containment forces in an axial
piston pump with a secondary swashplate
angle. Bahr et al (2004) developed
the dynamic model of an axial piston pump
with conical cylinder-barrel for
predicting the swashplate response times.
Casoli et al (2013) presented the
mathematical modeling of the axial piston Figure 1. Rigid MBD Methodology
pump in AMESim® as a part of the study Fig 2 shows the methodology adopted for
on modeling of an excavator hydraulic the rigid-flexible MBD model developed. In
system. Ericson (2014) developed a dynamic the rigid-flexible MBD model, the
model of axial piston pump to housing assembly is modeled as a flexible
investigate the oscillations of the swashplate body and the internal components are
and its effect on efficiency and flow modeled as rigid bodies.
pulsation. Thus, dynamic modeling of axial
piston pump have been primarily carried out
to study the displacement control aspects.
In the present work, the
numerical implementation of the
multibody dynamic framework for the
axial piston pump is studied. Numerical
rigid and rigid-flexible models of the
pump are developed. Experiments are Figure 2. Rigid-Flex MBD Methodology
performed to obtain acceleration levels.
The constraint reactions and end-cover MATHEMATICAL BACKGROUND
acceleration levels are predicted from
In constrained rigid body dynamics the
the numerical MBD models. The numerical
equations consist of the differential equations
end-cover accelerations are compared with
obtained by direct application of Newton-
experiments. The constraint reactions in the
Euler equations and algebraic constraint
rigid and rigid-flexible MBD models are
equations given by,
compared. Parametric studies are carried
[M ]q  Fe  Qc 
out using the rigid-flexible MBD model
to study factors influencing the (1a)
vibration behavior and develop possible [C (q, t )]  0 (1b)
passive vibration control strategies. The governing dynamic equations in rigid
multibody dynamic modeling are most
MODELING METHODOLOGY conventionally developed using augmented
Newton-Euler formulation with Lagrange
The rigid and rigid-flexible model of the multipliers (Shabana, 2010). The general
axial piston pump are developed. Fig 1 shows form the equations is given by,
the methodology adopted for the rigid MBD  M r Cqr
T
  qr   Fer 
model development.      
C qr 0   r  Qdr  (2)
760
Numerical Rigid and Flexible Multibody Dynamic Modeling of an Axial Piston Pump: Validation,
Comparison and Parametric Studies
C described. The piston, shoe, swashplate,

Where M r is the mass-inertia tensor, qr is
driveshaft and cylinder-barrel constitute the
the constraint Jacobian matrix, qr is the major internal components of the pump.
acceleration vector,  r is the vector of
Figure 3 shows the schematic representation
of the numerical multibody dynamic model.
F
Lagrange multipliers, er is the vector of Control Piston
Q
external forces, and dr is the quadratic
Shoe
velocity vector. The initial conditions provide

the initial values of the position qr (0) and Swashplate
Cylinder Barrel
velocities q r (0) .
In flexible multibody dynamic modeling the Piston
equations of motion are developed using the

Drive Shaft
relative nodal coordinate formulation
(RNCF) with a floating frame of reference
(Shabana, 1997). Thus, the equations of Figure 3. Rigid MBD Model
motion for the flexible body in the
The pressure acting on the piston is obtained
generalized coordinates is given by,
T
from an AMESim© simulation.
 M f 
M        1
q f  M f q f  q f
T
  
 q f As mentioned above, a rigid-flexible MBD
 q f 
f
2 (3)
model of an axially actuated piston pump is
           F 
 K f q f  D f q f  C qf
T
f f also developed. The rigid MBD model
q  x  described above is extended to the flexible

y z    i
T
Where f
is MBD model by incorporating component
the generalized coordinates of the flexible flexibility. Figure 4 shows the flexible MBD
body,
M  is the mass matrix of the flexible
f
model of the axial piston pump and the global
coordinate systems used.
body,
K f
is the stiffness matrix of the
flexible body,
Df  
is the damping matrix,
 
Cqf
is the constraint Jacobian matrix of the
flexible body,
 f  is the Lagrange
multipliers associated with the flexible body,
F 
and f is the vector of generalized external
forces acting on the flexible body. Equations
(2) and (3) together constitute the governing
equations of a combined rigid and flexible
multibody system.
NUMERICAL MODELING
Figure 4. Rigid-Flexible MBD Model
In the following paragraphs, the numerical
modeling details of the rigid MBD model of Table 1 lists the different constraints
an axially actuated pump with nine pistons is defined in the MBD model.
761
Milind and Mitra
Table 1. Constraints in MBD model Figure 6 shows the comparison of the

No. Part ‘i’ Part ‘j’ Constraint Type normalized frequency domain magnitudes in
Location
1 Piston Shoe Spherical rigid
Ball and
end of flexible MBD simulations.
piston
2 Piston Cylinderbarrel Cylindrical Center of cylinder
barrel bore
3 Shoe Swashplate Planar Center of the shoe
4 Cylinderbarrel Driveshaft Fixed Driveshaft spline
5 Driveshaft Housing Revolute End cover bearing,
Housing bearing
6 Control Piston Swashplate Spherical Cam surface of
swashplate
7 Swashplate Housing Cylindrical Center of HP
Swash bearing, LP
Swash bearing
8 Control Piston Housing Cylindrical Center of mass of
control piston
9 Housing Ground Fixed Center of the
housing flange
The different bearing and control piston
constraint forces analyzed are the vertical end- Figure 7 shows the variation of the
cover bearing force (
RebZ ), vertical housing normalized end-cover acceleration levels
RhbZ ), horizontal high pressure with housing stiffness.
bearing force (
RhpX
swashplate bearing force ( ), horizontal low
RlpX
pressure swashplate bearing force ( ), vertical
R
high pressure swashplate bearing force ( hpZ ),
vertical low pressure swashplate bearing force (
RlpZ Rc
) and control piston force ( ).

Figure 5 shows the correlation of the
normalized overall acceleration levels at the Figure 7. Rigid-Flexible MBD Model
end-cover location at the 9th, 18th, 27th and
36th orders. CONCLUSIONS
The numerical implementation of the
multibody framework for modelling the
dynamics of an axial piston pump is
presented. The acceleration level results
predicted from numerical models agreed
reasonably well with the experimental data.
The comparison of rigid and rigid-flexible
model results show the influence of the
housing flexibility on the shaft bearing
reactions. The housing stiffness is one of the
parameters influencing the vibration
behaviour of the pump.
762
Numerical Rigid and Flexible Multibody Dynamic Modeling of an Axial Piston Pump: Validation,
Comparison and Parametric Studies
REFERENCES Shabana, A. A., Computational Dynamics,

Bahr M K, Svoboda J, Bhat R B, “Modeling Third edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd,
of Swash Plate Axial Piston Pumps With 2010.
Conical Cylinder Blocks”, Journal of Zeiger G, Akers A, “Dynamic Analysis of an
Mechanical Design, Vol.126, pp 196-200, Axial Piston Pump Swashplate Control”,
2004 Proceedings of the Institution of
Casoli P, Ricco L, Cesare D, “Modeling and Mechanical Engineers, Vol. 200, pp 49-
verification of an excavator system – 58, 1985
Axial piston pump, kinematics and load
sensing flow sharing valve block”,
Proceedings of 13th Scandinavian
International Conference on Fluid Power,
pp 53-63, 2013
Deeken, M., 2002, “Simulation of the
reversing effects of axial piston pumps
using conventional CAE tools”,
Ölhydraulik und Pneumatik, 46, pp. 1-11.
Ericson, L., 2014, “Swash Plate Oscillations
due to Piston Forces in Variable In-line
Pumps”, Proceedings of 9th International
Fluid Power Conference, Aachen,
Germany
Manring N D, “Designing a control and
containment device for cradle mounted,
axial actuated swash plates”, Journal of
Mechanical Design, Vol. 124, pp 456-
464, 2002
Manring N D, Dong , “The impact of using a
secondary swash plate angle within an
axial piston pump”, Journal of Dynamic
Systems, Measurement and Control, Vol.
126, pp 65-74, 2004
Negrut D, Dyer A., ADAMS Theory Manual,
2004
Roccatello, A., Mancò, S., Nervegna, N.,
2007, “Modelling A Variable
Displacement Axial Piston Pump In A
Multibody Simulation”, Journal of
Dynamic Systems, Measurement and
Control, 129, pp. 456-468.
763
ICCMS2016
BOUNDARY ELEMENT MODELING OF THE ACOUSTIC RADIATION

OF AN AXIAL PISTON PUMP: NUMERICAL IMPLEMENTATION
MILIND T. R. *1 and MITRA M. 2
1
Eaton India Engineering Centre, Pune
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay
Abstract: Boundary element method is one of the commonly adopted techniques for
modeling the acoustic radiation. There are several steps in the numerical
implementation of the BE method which influence the results. In the present work,
numerical implementation of BE framework for predicting the acoustic radiation from
an axial piston pump is carried out. The studies are conducted to understand the
influence of the different numerical BE implementation factors on the results.
Keywords: Acoustic Radiation; Boundary Element Method; Axial Piston Pump;
INTRODUCTION The integral equation is the starting point for

the boundary element method. Brebbia and
The theoretical and mathematical foundation
Dominguez (1998) have described the
of BEM can be traced back to the 18th
different steps in the formulation and solution
century with the contributions of
of boundary element problems considering
mathematicians like Laplace, Green,
the Laplace’s equation.
Fredholm, Fourier, Kellog and Betti. Cheng
In the present work, numerical
and Cheng (2005), Yu et al (2010), Hsiao
implementation of BE framework for
(2006), and Liu et al (2011) have documented
predicting the acoustic radiation from an
various theoretical bases and its early
axial piston pump is carried out. The studies
development.
are conducted to understand the influence of
There are over 40 BEM variants and
the different numerical BE implementation
formulations which have been developed
[]Yu et al, 2010]. The ‘direct’ and ‘indirect’ factors on the results. The different factors
formulations are the two most fundamental studied in the numerical implementation of
formulations applied in BEM. Some of the BE modeling of the pump are sound pressure
other important formulations are Collocation level computation, method of sound power
BEM, Symmetric Collocation BEM, Indirect level computation, boundary element mesh
Galerkin-Bubnov BEM, Wavelet Galerkin size, orientation of mesh normal, field point
BEM, Symmetric Galerkin BEM, Dual mesh density, field point mesh radius, nature
Reciprocity BEM, Multiple Reciprocity of transfer of normal surface velocities,
BEM, and Fourier BEM [Yu et al, 2010; mapping radius in transfer algorithm of
Duddeck, 2002]. In order to overcome normal surface velocities, and method of
uniqueness and existence issues in exterior formulation (Direct/Indirect).
problems Schenck (1967), Burton and Miller
(1971), and Kussmaul (1969) developed
improved formulations. Indirect boundary element method is one of
the most commonly adopted approaches in
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:TRMilind@eaton.com 764

Milind and Mitra
computational acoustics. The Figure 1 shows Figure2 shows the boundary element model mesh
the schematic representation of indirect of pump.
boundary element modeling.
Figure 2. Verification of analytical and

numerical results.
Figure 1. Indirect BE Modeling.
The Figure 3 shows the field point mesh at a
The governing equation in indirect boundary r
element method is given by, radius f from the center of pump and with
 
∂G (r , r0 ) nf
 p (
 + 
( r ) − p − 
( r )) 

field point nodes.
∂
0 0
 n
p(r ) = ∫   dΓ(r )
+  − 
 
  ∂p (r0 ) ∂p (r0 )   0
Γ
 − G ( r , r ) −  
∂n 
0 
  ∂n
(1)
The discretized variational functional J is given
by,
1 1
J = {σˆ i }T [ B]{σˆ i } + {µˆ i }T [ D]{µˆ i }
2 2
~ ~
− {σˆ i } [C ]{µˆ i } − {σˆ i }T { f σ } − {µˆ i }T { f µ }
T
(2)
The matrix form of the equations with the
unknown densities is given by, Figure 3. BE model and Field point mesh.
~
B C  σˆ i   fσ 
C T   = ~ 
D  µˆ i   f µ 
(3) RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Figure 4 shows the comparison of the field
The pressure at the field points are computed as,
[ ] {µˆ }
 point mesh versus model mesh method of
p(r ) = [Aσ ]{σˆ i } + Aµ i (4) computation of the sound power.
NUMERICAL MODELING
Numerical modeling of the pump acoustic
radiation is carried out in the commercial
software LMS Virtual lab.acoustics®. The
765
Boundary Element Modeling of the Acoustic Radiation of An Axial Piston Pump: Numerical
Implementation
Figure 4. Comparison of sound watt level Figure 6. Variation of sound watt level
(SWL) computation method. (SWL) with BE element size.
Figure 5 shows the comparison of the

sound watt level (SWL) and sound pressure
level (SPL) obtained from the field point
mesh.
Figure 7. Variation of SWL with

orientation of mesh normal nˆ + ∈ Ω E and
nˆ + ∈ Ω I .
Figure 5. Variation of sound levels with
CONCLUSION
frequency
In the present work, the different numerical
Figure 6 shows the comparison of the sound factors are studied which influence the BE
watt level (SWL)with element size on BE results. Based on the study the optimal
model mesh. parameters for the modeling of acoustic
Figure 7 shows the sound watt level (SWL) radiation of an axial piston pump is
results obtained with element normal pointed established.
nˆ + ∈ Ω
E
towards the exterior domain and
REFERENCES
element normal pointed towards the internal
nˆ + ∈ Ω I Brebbia C A Dominguez J1998 Boundary
domain . Elements – An introductory course
Second Edition WIT Press.
Cheng A H D Cheng D T 2005 Heritage and
early history of the boundary element
766
Milind and Mitra
method Engineering Analysis with Element Method Applied Mechanics

Boundary Elements 29 268-302. Reviews 64 031001-1-38.
Duddeck F M E 2013Fourier BEM: Roccatello A Mancò S Nervegna N 2007
Generalization of Boundary Element Modelling A Variable Displacement
Methods by Fourier Transform Axial Piston Pump In A Multibody
Springer. Simulation Journal of Dynamic Systems
Measurement and Control 129 456-468.
Hsiao G C 2006 Boundary element methods
– An overview Applied Numerical Shabana A A 2010 Computational Dynamics
Mathematics 56 1356-1369. Third edition John Wiley & Sons Ltd.
Lee S Song J Choi W Hong D 2003 Position Tsai M Yuan W2010 Inverse dynamics
control of a Stewart platform using analysis for a 3-PRS parallel mechanism
inverse dynamics control with based on a special decomposition of the
approximate dynamics Mechatronics 13 reaction forces Mechanism and Machine
605-619. Theory 45 1491-1508.
Liu Y J Mukherjee S Nishimura N Schanz M Yu K H Kadarman A H Djojodihardjo H
Ye W Sutradhar A Pan E Dumont N A 2010 Development and implementation
Frangi A Saez A 2011 Recent Advances of some BEM variants – A critical
and Emerging Applications of Boundary review Engineering Analysis with
Boundary Elements 34 884-899.
767
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL MODELING OF THE STRUCTURAL ACOUSTIC

RADIATION AND SOUND PRESSURE FIELDS OF AN AXIAL PISTON
PUMP
MILIND T. R. *1 and MITRA M.2
1
Eaton India Engineering Center, Pune, India.
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay
Abstract: Numerical modeling of acoustic radiation from complex irregularly shaped

objects is an important area in computational acoustics. The noise generated by axial
piston pump is an important area of concern in the design of hydraulic systems. In the
present work, detailed modeling of the acoustic radiation from an axial piston pump is
carried out using the combined FE/BE methods. The numerical results are compared
with experiments and found to agree well. The sound power level (SWL), sound
pressure level (SPL), phase and panel contributions from the validated model are
studied at the different pumping orders.
Keywords: Acoustic Radiation; Model Validation; Axial Piston Pump;
INTRODUCTION numerical modeling of sound radiated by
The numerical modeling of the acoustic domestic and industrial machinery such as
radiation is an important area in power transformer, ship hull, gearbox,
computational acoustics. Modeling of engine, refrigerators e.g. Junhong and Jun
acoustic radiation is structural acoustic (2006).
problem involving modeling of the structural The axial piston pump is a source of fluid
vibration and acoustic radiation. In practical power in hydraulic systems. The noise
applications, due to factors such as generated by the hydraulic system can often
geometric, material, dynamic and/or be traced back to the axial piston pump which
kinematic complexity or the wavelength generates sound pressure levels up to 100 dB
being comparable to the source dimensions, it [Manring et al, 2007]. In axial piston pumps,
is not possible to obtain analytical solutions Palmen (2004) studied the vibration response
and numerical modeling is conducted. of the housing using FE and experimental
The modelling of the dynamic behavior of methods. This study was aimed at the
complex structures is an important area of reduction of noise generated by an axial
interest in applied mechanics. Studies have piston pump through structural modification
been carried out to investigate the dynamic of the housing surface. Yamazaki and Kojima
characteristics of components and assemblies (2003) proposed the simulation technique
such engine blades, rotating machinery, which predicted the sound power radiated
agricultural machinery, flexible manipulators, from an axial piston pump under operating
cranes, and civil structures, e.g. Wu conditions using FEM and BEM.
(2006).Studies are carried out on the Experimental measurements of the radiated
sound power were also conducted.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:TRMilind@eaton.com
768
Milind and Mitra
In the present work, detailed modeling of the

acoustic radiation from an axial piston pumps
is carried out using combined FE/BE
methods. The sound pressure levels predicted
from the numerical modeling are validated
with experiments.
The numerical modeling of the pump is
carried out using the finite element method.
The governing equation for vibration
modeling of the pump is given by,
(1) Figure 1. Finite element model of the

The vibration response is obtained by the axial piston pump.
mode superposition method,
[Φ ]  M  [Φ ]{q} + [Φ ] C  [Φ ]{q } + [Φ ]  K  [Φ ]{q } = [Φ ] {F }
T T T T
(2)
Further, the generalized coordinate can be
expressed as {q } = {c}e iωt where {c} is the modal
coefficients, ω is the angular frequency of the
forcing function. Thus, the solution of equation
(1) provides the required displacements at the
frequencies of the forcing function.
The numerical modeling of the acoustic
radiation is carried using the boundary
element method. The governing equation in
the indirect boundary element method is
given by,
 
∂G (r , r0 )
(
 + 
p ( r ) − p − 
( r ) ) 
 Figure 2. Boundary element model
∂n
0 0
   dΓ(r )
p(r ) = ∫ +  − 
    ∂p (r0 ) ∂p (r0 )  0
Γ ( )
 − G r , r0  −   RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
  ∂n ∂n 
Figure 3 shows thecomparison of the
(3)
simulation results with the experimental
NUMERICAL MODELING results.
The numerical modeling of the vibration Figure 4 shows the normalized sound
behavior is carried out in ANSYS® and pressure fields in the horizontal plane.
acoustic radiation is carried out in LMS Figure 5 shows the normalized sound
Virtual lab.acoustics®. The Figure1shows the pressure fields in the vertical plane.
finite element model of the axial pistonpump
assembly and Figure 2 shows the boundary
element model mesh of the axial piston
pump.
769
Numerical Modelling of the Structural Acoustic Radiation and Sound Pressure Fields of An Axial Piston
Pump
Figure 6 shows comparison of normalized

sound power levels (SWL) and sound
pressure levels(SPL) of the axial piston
pump.
Figure 3.Comparison of sound pressure

level (SPL) computation
Figure 6. Variation of sound levels of the

pump
Figure 7 shows the variation of the phase of

normalized sound power with the order
frequencies.
Figure 4. Variation of sound pressure

fields in the horizontal plane
Figure 7. Variation of sound power level
(SWL) phase
Figure 8 shows the variation of the radiation

efficiency with the order frequencies.
Figure 5. Variation of sound pressure

fields in the vertical plane
Figure 8. Variation of radiation efficiency
770
Milind and Mitra
Figure 9 shows the results of normalized REFERENCES

panel sound power levels conducted as a part Junhong Z Jun H 2006CAE process to
of panel acoustic contribution analysis. simulate and optimize engine noise and
vibration Mechanical Systems and
Signal Processing 20 1400-1409.
Manring N D Mehta V S Raab F J Graf K J
2007 Shaft torque of a tandem axial
piston pump ASME Journal of Dynamic
Systems Measurement and Control 129
367-371.
Palmen A 2004 Noise reduction of an axial
piston pump by means of structural
modification Olhy drualik and
Pneumatic 48 1–11.
Figure 9. Comparison of sound power
levels (SWL) from different panels Wu J 2006 Finite element analysis and
defined on axial piston pump vibration testing of a three-dimensional
crane structure 39 740-749.
CONCLUSION
Yamazaki T Kojima E 2003 Prediction of
In the present work, the analysis of the
sound power radiated from an oil
structural acoustic of an axial piston pump is
hydraulic pump using FEM and BEM
carried out. The results of the numerical
Acoustical Science and Technology 24
modeling agreed well with the experiments.
103-105.
Further, the study of the different acoustic
parameters enable the development of
strategies for noise control.
771
ICCMS2016
DISPLACEMENT & ARREST OF OCCUPANT ON AUTOMOTIVE SEAT

SYSTEM IN FRONTAL DYNAMIC CRASH CONDITION: ANTI-SUB
FEATURE ON SEAT CUSHION
DHARMADHIKARI V. D.* and CHOUGULE V. N.
MES College of Engineering, Pune, Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: Occupant Safety for both an adult and child is equally important in vehicle
dynamics. Lot of research and experimental studies are done worldwide to define
safety regulations for an automobile in order to provide adult and child safety. Based
on different studies conducted worldwide researchers felt a need of making Seat Belts
mandatory for automotive seating. Hence Government of United States developed
vehicle safety regulations and imposed them on vehicle manufacturers. FMVSS 209,
use of Seat belts was made mandatory for automotive seating in order to hold the
occupant safely on seat in any dynamic crash condition. These regulations are then
called as legal regulations and imposed on the vehicle manufacturers so that vehicle
manufacturers should produce safe cars. It became mandatory for vehicle
manufacturer to comply with these legal regulations in order to sale the vehicle in
United States or in European market. In this work efforts are put to design a feature in
automotive seating in order to prevent the occupant from sliding under the seat belt.
Here in this paper some facts on Vehicle dynamics (Vehicle Front Impact), Occupant
response to these dynamic situations and based on this dynamic situation need of anti-
sub feature in automotive car seat for the safety of adult occupant is studied and
demonstrated.
Keywords: Vehicle Safety; Vehicle dynamics; FEA.
INTRODUCTION come up with different safety devices to

With the variety of Automobiles (cars) and protect occupant from injuries. Here in this
road driving conditions creating complicated paper we would be analysing one of the
injuries to the occupant driving or seating in automotive crash conditions which is front
the car. Occupant behaviour in the car is impact of the car and the safety features
totally depends upon the type of crash the provided to prevent the occupant from
vehicle in. There are main four types of injuries.
vehicle crash condition mainly causing major This first stage report focuses principally on
injury conditions to the vehicle occupant, front seat occupants involved in frontal
which are named as Front Impact, Rear crashes. Recommendations are made about a
Impact Side Impact and Roll over.Different range of potential countermeasures for these
government authorities and researchers did occupants, along with further research and
huge study on occupant behaviour in these development work required. Future reports
types of vehicle dynamic conditions and are planned to provide recommendations for
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:v.d.dharmadhikari@gmail.com; 772

Dharmadhikari and Chougule
other crash configurations and seating pulls the seat belt. This pull is nothing but the
positions when additional data from a larger impact pull, seat belt retractor locks the belt,
number of crashes has been collected. hence occupant forward motion is restricted
as seat belt is now locked because of impact
To prevent occupant from injuries in front
load. In this condition occupant shoulder is
impact government made use of seat belts
loaded as occupant tries to move forward and
compulsory. Hence this study is conducted
belt is locked. Maximum allowable force on
considering the vehicle has seat belts to
the occupant shoulders ranges from 4 KN to
ensure the occupant stays on the seat in front
7 KN. Belt retractors are designed with load
impact dynamic crash condition. Front crash
limiters. That means the moment occupant
of the vehicle can happen in different speeds.
shoulders reached certain loads (4-7 KN)
Here in the study the crash speed of 56 kmph.
retractor release the load balances it so that
In vehicle front impact occupant moves
occupant shoulders will not see excessive
forward direction. We know that in any
loads and face any injury. Once the occupant
impact attachments see major load always. In
forward motion is restricted occupant moves
vehicle front impact Four seat mountings
starts moving downwards. Hence seat
(Seat is mounted on vehicle floor with the
cushion will see the loads vertically
help of four bolts) and 3 seat belt mountings
downward from occupant downward
(Seat belt installed in automotive car is called
movement. The max loads coming on
as three point belt system, one point is at
cushion area is around 10Kn. Cushion is
retractor, second point is seat belt buckle and
allowed to deform @ 50 to 70mm based on
third point is another end of the seat belt
the design requirements that means if cushion
mounted in vehicle floor.) So overall four
doesn’t deform loads will go on occupant and
seat anchorage and 3 seat belt anchorages are
if cushion deforms excessively then there are
getting loaded severely in vehicle front
chances that occupant may slip under the
impact. Seat belt mounted in with the two
belt.
ends. One end of the belt is attached to the
retractor and other end of the belt is mounted In this condition of excessive deformation so
on the vehicle floor. Retractor winds the belt cushion structure feature of cushion structure
which it is not in use. Retractor works on which prevents occupant slipping under the
inertia locking principle i.e. when the belt is belt is termed as “Anti-submarining” feature.
pulled with the jerky motion, inertia lock Study conducted here proves that anti-sub
basically locks the seat belt and doesn’t allow feature of seat cushion helps occupant to pass
coming out of retractor. There is a tongue on the loads as well as to prevent occupant to
which is inserted in the seat belt. Tongue has slide pass under the seat belt.
a male lock and seat belt buckle forms female
lock. When seat belt tongue is pulled and METHODOLOGY AND
locked in the seat belt buckle it actually GEOMETRIC MODELLING
forms third anchor point. When seat belt is OCCUPANT DYNAMICS IN BEFORE
locked it forms two loops. One is over the AND AFTER FRONT IMPACT
shoulder of the occupant and another over the
In Frontal impact as occupant forward
laps of the occupant.
movement is restricted by seat belt, occupant
In front impact as occupant moves forward starts moving downward and loading cushion
because of inertia, shoulders of occupant
773
Displacement and Arrest of Occupant on Automotive Seat System in Frontal Dynamic Crash Condition:
Anti-Sub Feature on Seat Cushion
member, as shown in Figure 1. If occupant Cross section of bracket is considered as

loads causes excessive deformation is shown in Figure 3. Moment of inertia for
cushion then occupant may slide under the stamping bracket is approximated as
belt hence, we design cushion anti-submarine Moment of Inertia:
feature. The feature could be,
I = t (H3 / 12) + 2 (At3 / 12 + (H/2)2 * tA) +
• Stamped bracket.
(BH3 / 12) + (Ct3 / 12) + (H/2)2 * tC
• Round tube Stress.
where, t=1.2 mm, H=35 mm, A=35 mm,
B=45 mm and C= 25mm
I = 42290.28 mm4
The bending stresses can be calculated as:
𝜎 = (𝐻𝑀/𝐼)/2= 465 MPa
Need to select the material with tensile
strength higher than 465 MPa.
Finite Element Analysis (FEA) results are as
Figure 1.Sub marine Effect shown in Figure 4.
Study is done using stamping bracket.

Consider max load which can go on anti-sub
feature of cushion as 10,000 N, as shown in
Figure 2.
Moment = PL/4= 10000*450/4= 1125KNm
Figure 4.FEA Results
Force because of Occupant downward

Figure 2 Force Analysis - Stamping movement
Bracket.
Force from CAE = 7,500 N
Force considered for Hand calculation =
10,000 N
CONCLUSION
The Engineering analysis and CAE given
better direction for design. Without
antisubmarine bracket cushion cannot hold
occupant in place and there are chances of
Figure 3.Bracket Cross Section
occupant slipping under the belt.
774
Dharmadhikari and Chougule
Figure 5 Dynamic Load on Cushion.

Hand calculations given better direction for
design.
REFERENCES
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and
Regulations U.S. Department of
Transportation, National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
http://www.unece.org/trans/main/
https://www.araiindia.com/Draft_AIS_Standa
rds.asp
http://www.globalncap.org/
http://www.ancap.com.au/
http://www.euroncap.com/
http://www.iihs.org/iihs/topics
http://www.c-ncap.org.cn/c-
ncap_en/index.htm
775
ICCMS2016
MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF CYCLIC OXIDATION OF

THERMAL BARRIER COATINGS USING FEM
SRIVATHSA B. *, MEENA KUMARI V., S. GOKUL LAKSHMI and DAS D.K.
Defence Metallurgical Research Laboratory, Kanchanbagh, Hyderabad, India.
Abstract: A thermal barrier coating (TBC) system has been analyzed for residual
stress build up during thermal cycling using finite element method (FEM). A mass
balance based coupled field multi physics model has been developed to simulate
dynamic growth of thermally grown oxide (TGO) and the consequent stress build up
in TBC system. The model prediction agrees well with experimentally measured
TGO growth during thermal cycling. The predictions of the model in terms of stress
build up also agree with reported experimental and simulated results.
Keywords: Thermal barrier coatings; Thermally grown oxide; residual stress;
Modelling and simulation.
INTRODUCTION the growth strains in the TGO. Earlier

numerical models have demonstrated the
Thermal barrier coatings (TBCs) used on
effect of residual stress on the durability of
advanced gas turbine engine components
TBC by considering incremental growth of
increase engine efficiency and its
TGO thickness statically. The present
performance by prolonging the life of the
analysis sets out to eliminate this restriction
components. A typical TBC system is shown
of the previous models and aimed at the
in Figure 1 [Evans et al. 2001]. There are
development of a mathematical model by
three constituents in this system, namely the
considering dynamic growth of TGO during
superalloy substrate, the bond coat (BC) and
thermal cycling with temperature dependent
the ceramic layer (or the top coat). The bond
material properties. The residual stress build-
coat provides oxidation resistance which is
up in a TBC system during thermal cycling
derived from its ability to form a thin
has been simulated using finite element
protective oxide layer (consisting primarily
method based COMSOL multi physics
of Al2O3) at BC/ceramic layer interface.
software (2014).
Once formed, this oxide layer, also known as
thermally grown oxide (TGO), retards the
Ceramic
diffusion of oxidizing species such as oxygen
Layer
and Al. As a result, the oxidation resistance
of the bond coated alloy is enhanced (2003). TGO
Layer
Durability assessments have drawn the
y
attention to the importance of residual stress
build up in the TBCs during thermal cycling. X
z
Residual stress building is due to the
combined influence of thermal expansion Figure 1. A typical TBC system showing
misfit between TBC constituents, as well as all the constituents.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mailsrivathsab@dmrl.drdo.in 776

Srivathsa et al.
EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS 7YSZ ceramic layers are 50 and 100 mm,

respectively. The thermo-mechanical
The substrate material considered in this
properties of constituent materials has been
study was Ni-based superalloy CM247 which
obtained from reported literature [Evans et
has a composition (in wt %) Ni-6Co- 8Cr-
al., 2001; Mao et al., 2011; Srivathsa et al.,
6W-5.2Al-9Ta-1.2Ti-2Mo. This alloy was
2011; Piotr Bednarz, 2007].
available in the form of 12 mm diameter and
80 mm long rods. Disc shaped coupons MODELLING OF GROWTH OF TGO
having a thickness of 3 mm were sliced from LAYER
these rods by using electro-discharge Evans et al. (2001) have considered parabolic
machining (EDM). A high activity Pt- growth as per Eq. (1) given below:
aluminide (Pt-Al) bond coat was applied on
the above coupons. To form the bond coat, a h 2  2K pt (1)
5 m thick Pt layer was first electrodeposited where h and t represent thickness and time
on the coupons, following which the plated respectively; kp is the temperature dependent
coupons were given a diffusion heat parabolic rate constant. In the present
treatment at 1100C for 4 hrs in vacuum. investigation, instead of introducing the TGO
Subsequently, the coupons were subjected to thickness growth according to Eqn. (1) its
a high activity pack aluminization process at growth was modelled based on mass balance
850C for 5 hrs in an inert (Ar) atmosphere. approach. This balance was done between
A post aluminizing vacuum heat treatment mass of alumina formed at bond coat/ceramic
was given to the aluminized coupons at coat interface and the aluminum required to
1100C for 5 h for completing bond coat be consumed from the aluminum rich bond
formation. These samples were then coat. The growth rate of TGO by this method
deposited with a layer of 7 % Yttria would vary with temperature. Thermal
stabilized zirconia (7YSZ) ceramic coating stresses in the present model are allowed to
using a 250 kW EB-PVD facility. These TBC relax during the lateral moment of the
coated samples were then thermal cycled by system. This has been done to accommodate
exposing them to 30 min heating at 1100 oC the effective TGO thickness growth using
followed by 30 min cooling at RT in normal moving mesh concept. A coupled diffusion-
air. constitutive framework along with thermo-
structural physics was used to calculate stress
MODELING SCHEME build-up during thermal cycling. Appropriate
boundary conditions were used. A thermal
In this study, a two-dimensional (2D) model cycle of 30 min heating at 1100 oC and 30
with plain strain condition was developed min cooling at room temperature has been
using COMSOL software (2014). It is used. A total of 1000 cycles have been
assumed that the TBC system consists of no considered.
defects in the form of heterogeneities such as
voids. Interfaces between different layers of SIMULATION DETAILS
the TBC are assumed to be planar and
assumed to be stress free to start with. A transient thermal, structural and reaction
based constitutive coupled physics
SPECIMEN CONFIGURATION AND framework has been employed for carrying-
MATERIAL PROPERTIES out simulations. Bilinear isotropic hardening
The model considered has a substrate having elasto-plastic behaviour has been assumed for
a diameter of 12 mm and thickness of 3 mm. substrate and bond coat materials. For -
The thicknesses of the Pt-Al BC and the Al2O3 and 7 YSZ ceramic coating linear
777
Modelling and Simulation of Cyclic Oxidation of Thermal Barrier Coatings using FEM
elastic model has been considered.

Generalized alpha time stepping method is
used with backward time integration.

Residual stresses computed from the present
simulations are mainly due to growth of
oxide layer, differential thermal contraction
between the constituents of the systems and
also due to rapid expansion and contraction
during the thermal cycling. Specimen has Figure 3. Mass of alumina deposited
been subjected to 1000 thermal cycles and during thermal cycling.
stress distributions are calculated for the
Heating Cooling
entire TBC system.
VALIDATION OF MODEL
The validity of model was verified by
comparing the simulated thermal profile with
the experimentally measured profile. Figure 2
shows that the calculated temperature from
the model matches reasonably well with the
experimental values. The experimental
profile shows that the rate of rise in Figure 4. Stress (x) distributions at
temperature during heating and rate of mid-point of TBC/TGO interface.
temperature drop during cooling are slightly
steeper as compared to the model prediction. INFLUENCE OF TGO GROWTH ON
Predicted TGO (alumina) mass growth STRESS BUILD-UP
during thermal cycling has been compared Figure 4 presents the variation of stress at the
with experimental results as shown in Figure middle of TBC/TGO interface (x) during
3. The deviation between the two curves can first thermal cycle. It can be seen that the
be attributed to the fact that TGO growth is dynamic growth of TGO leads to nearly three
no longer on plane surface as assumed in the times high stresses as compared to without
model. However, the model prediction is TGO. It can be observed that the stress
reasonably accurate at longer oxidation relaxation during cooling also occurs at a
durations. much slow rate in the presence of TGO. It
can be expected that TGO growth introduces
H C a complex stress state which leads to the
ooling
eating observed slow stress relaxation. The variation
of normal stress (y) in the first cycle in
presence of TGO as compared to when TGO
is absent is shown Figure 5. During the
cooling cycle the variation is similar to that
observed for x (Figure 4.). Such difference
in the magnitude of stresses between the
Figure 2. Temperature distribution at cases when TGO is present and it is absent
TBC/TGO interface. can also be seen in terms of rate rise in stress
778
Srivathsa et al.
during 1000 thermal cycles, as plotted in support. This work is carried-out under the
Figure 6. project DMR- 294.
REFERENCES
Chen Xiao Zhang Yue and Gong Sheng 2005
Finite element analysis of stresses and
interface crack in TBC system Trans.
Non-Ferrous Met. Soc. China 15(2)
457-460.
Figure 5. Stress (y) distributions at mid- Clarke D R and Levi C G 2003 Materials
point of TBC/TGO interface. design for the next generation thermal
barrier coatings Annu. Rev. Mater.Res33
383-417.
COMSOL Multiphysics 2014 Comsol A B
Stockholm Sweden.
Evans A G Mumm D R Hutchinson J Meier
G H and Zettit F S 2001 Mechanism
controlling the durability of thermal
Figure 6. Stress y) gradients during
barrier coatings Progress in Materials
thermal cycling.
Sci. 46 505-553.
CONCLUSIONS Hsueh C H and Fuller E R 2000 Analytical
A mass balance based two-dimensional modeling of oxide thickness effects on
model has been developed to simulate residual stresses in thermal barrier
dynamic growth TGO in a TBC system using coatings Scripta Materialia 42 781–787.
COMSOL multi-physics code. Residual Hutchinson J W He M Y and Evans A G
stress build-up in a TBCs during 1000 2000 The influence of imperfections on
thermal cycles has been calculated. the nucleation and propagation of
Temperature distribution and mass of buckling driven delamination Jl. of
alumina deposited during thermal cycling mechanics and physics of solids 48 709-
calculated using the numerical model 734.
reasonably matches with experimental
Mao W G Jiang J P Zhou Y C and Lu C2011
values. Overall, the predictions of the model
Effects of substrate curvature and radius
agree with the experimental as well as
deposition temperature and coating
simulated reported results. It has been
thickness on the residual stress field of
demonstrated conclusively that the TGO
cylindrical thermal barrier coatings
growth play an important part in determining
Surface &Coatings Technology 8-9
the TBC’s durability.
205-211.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Miller R A 1997 Thermal barrier coatings for
aircraft engines: history and directions
We express our earnest thanks to Dr. Samir V
J. Therm. Spray Technology635-42.
Kamat, Outstanding Scientist and Director
DMRL for his constant encouragement and Piotr Bednarz 2007 Finite Element
guidance. We also thank DRDO for financial Simulation of stress evolution in
779
Modelling and Simulation of Cyclic Oxidation of Thermal Barrier Coatings using FEM
Thermal Barrier Coating systems Ph.D

thesis for schungszentrum Jülich.
S M Meier D K Gupta1994The Evolution of
Thermal Barrier Coatings in Gas
Turbine Engine Applications
TransASME116250-256.
Srivathsa B Zafir Alam Md Kamat S V and
Das D K 2011 Modelling of Residual
stresses developed in thermal barrier
coatigs during thermal cycling, Int. Jl.
App. Mechanics and Engg16 3 869-883.
Wright P K Evans A G 1999 Mechanisms
governing the performance of
TBCsCurrent opinions in Solid State
and Mater Sci 4255–65.
780
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL STUDY OF EFFECTS OF PARTICLE DIAMETER AND

PARTICLE VOLUME FRACTIONS ON DISPERSED GAS-PARTICLE
FLOWS THROUGH VERTICAL CHANNELS
KOTOKY S.*, DALAL A. and NATARAJAN G.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Guwahati, India.
Abstract: A numerical study of the flow physics of laminar gas-particle flows

through vertical channels is carried out using finite volume method (FVM). In this
context, a numerical solver has been developed to take into account the flow
characteristics of gas-particle flows using Eulerian-Eulerian two-fluid model. The
interaction between the phases is taken care by introducing drag force terms in their
governing equations. The developed solver is used to simulate gas-particle flows
through vertical channels for different values of inlet particle phase volume fractions
and particle diameters. It has been found that particle phase volume fraction and
particle diameters have significant effects on steady state gas and particle velocity
profiles in vertical channels.
Keywords: Finite volume method; Eulerian –Eulerian two fluid model; Drag
force; Particle volume fraction.
INTRODUCTION Both experimental and numerical studies in

Dispersed gas-particle flow is a special type the field of dispersed gas-particle flows have
of two phase flows in which both the phases been going on since decades. The numerical
are thoroughly mixed in each-other and not study of dispersion of laminar flow through
separated by a distinct interface. The particle straight tubes has been carried out
phase may be solid or liquid. The flow extensively in literature [Booras and Krantz,
physics of this type of flow is governed 1976; Luo et al., 2003].The interaction
mainly by the interaction between the gas among the particles by collision has been
phase and particle phase which is termed as taken into account. It was found that in case
phase coupling. Dispersed gas-particle flow of ducts with arbitrary inclinations, it is
has attracted the attention of the researchers necessary to take into account the forces
due to its existence in a wide variety of transmitted between the particles at points of
applications ranging from the flow of dust-air sustained, rolling and sliding contacts as a
mixture in the atmosphere to industrial result of compaction due to gravity. The
applications like chemical reactors, fluidized numerical simulation of dilute gas-particle
beds, pneumatic conveying, IC engines etc. flow with dispersed phase consisting of solid
As a result, the research in this type of flow is particles of finite size has been extensively
gaining pace along with other types of two carried out by Barton (1996). The laminar
phase flows over the years. particle laden flows were analysed for a
classical backward-facing step geometry
using orthogonal grids. The particle phase
* Author for Correspondence: E-mail: s.kotoky@iitg.ernet.in 781

Kotoky et. al.
was treated with Lagrangian approach in found out by the concept of volume fraction
which each particle is tracked individually which is defined as the ratio of volume
inside the computational domain. The occupied by that phase to the total volume
behaviour of the flow for various inlet values under consideration. This is mathematically
defined as:
of Reynolds number, particle Stokes number
∆VP
and void fraction was mainly studied in these α = lim (1)
∆V → 0 ∆V
works. Another significant work in Where α denotes the volume fraction of a
simulations of dilute laminar gas-particle particular phase, ΔV P is the volume occupied
flows was carried out by Passalacqua and by that phase in the neighbourhood of the
Fox (2011). In this work, a third-order point of interest and ΔV is the total volume
quadrature based moment method coupled occupied by the two phases together in the
neighbourhood of that point.
with a fluid solver has been applied to
Two-fluid model is one of the three modeling
simulate dilute gas-particle flow in a vertical approaches of two-phase flows in which both
channel with particle phase volume fractions the phases are considered separately. In this
between 0.0001 and 0.01. The effect of model, the two phases have own independent
particle phase volume fraction on the flow velocity fields and other properties flowing
has been studied extensively. Similar work under the influence of the same pressure
was carried out by Passalacqua et al. (2010) field. The interaction between the phases is
taken care by introducing extra source terms
in which numerical simulations of laminar
known as exchange coefficients in the
gas-particle flows were carried out for governing equations of both the phases. In
particle Stokes numbers 0.061 and 0.61 in a the present work, a two-way coupling is
2D vertical channel. The effect of particle considered between the phases which mean
Stokes numberin the overall flow through the that both the phases have influence on the
channel has been explained in this work. flow dynamics of each-other. This is
achieved by introducing a drag force term in
The objective of the present work is to the momentum equations of both the phases.
numerically study the effects of change of The effect of particle-particle interactions has
inlet particle phase volume fractions on not been considered in this work.
steady state gas phase velocity profiles in
vertical channels. Also for a constant set of NUMERICAL METHODS
inlet particle and gas phase volume fractions, The numerical solver used to solve the above
the changes in velocity profiles will be mentioned problem is developed using finite
studied for particles with different diameters. volume method (FVM) where the entire
solution domain is sub-divided into a number
EULERIAN-EULERIAN APPROACH of cells (finite volumes). The co-ordinates of
TWO-FLUID MODEL the vertices of these cells are read directly
from a CGNS (CFD General Notation
In Eulerian-Eulerian approach, the two System) grid file. Collocated grid
phases are considered as inter-penetrating arrangement has been used where all the
continua and instead of tracking each dependent variables are defined at the
individual particle in the flow field, the centroid of each individual cell. The FVM
particle phase is collectively solved using uses integral form of governing equations
fluid like equations. As a result, it becomes which can be written for each individual cell
relatively easy to implement, solve and adopting the following procedure.
interpret the particle phase along with the
fluid phase equations. The relative amount of 1) During integration over the cell volume
each phase present in the flow domain is the values of the variables are assumed to be
782
Numerical Study of Effect of Particle Diameter and Particle Volume Fractions on Dispersed Gas-Particle
Flows through Vertical Channels
constant and equal to its value at the cell velocity profiles for changes in particle
centre. diameter are shown in Figure. 2.
2) Similarly during the surface integral over
the cell face, the value of the variable is
assumed constant throughout the surface and
is equal to the face center value.
3)The values at the face centres are evaluated
using volume interpolation.
The discretization procedure used to
discretize the governing equations follows
the work of Dalal et al. (Dalalet al.2008).
PROBLEM DEFINITION
The laminar particle laden flows will be
analysed for the problem of laminar gas-
particle flow through a vertical channel. The
schematic of the problem is given in Figure. Figure 2. Variation of particle velocity
1.
with particle diameter at constant volume
fractions.
It is seen that the maximum steady state
particle velocity decreases with increase in
particle diameter. It is due to the fact that the
motion of the particles with larger diameters
is more influenced by their inertia and gravity
force.
Again the variation of gas velocity with
particle volume fraction for constant particle
diameter of 100 μm is shown in Figure. 3.
Figure 1. Schematic of vertical channel.

In this problem, the inlet velocity of both the
phases is considered to be equal to 1 m/s. The
gas phase is considered to be air with density
equal to 1.2 kg/m3 and particle phase density
is considered to be 1680 kg/m3. The study in
this case is mainly focused on the effect of
variation of particle diameter on the steady
state gas velocity profiles for a particular set
of inlet volume fractions. In this regard, the
diameter of particles is varied from 100μm to Figure 3. Variation of gas velocity with
300μm for inlet volume fractions of 0.99 and particle phase volume fraction at a
0.01 for the gas and the particle phase constant particle diameter.
respectively. The changes in the particle
783
Kotoky et. al.
It can be seen that as particle phase volume Dalal A Eswaran V and Biswas G 2008 A
fraction is increased from 0.005 to 0.01, the finite volume method for Navier-Stokes
maximum steady state velocity attained by equations on unstructured meshes
the gas phase decreases. This can be Numerical Heat Transfer Part B 54(3)
238-259.
attributed to the fact that with increase in
particle phase volume fraction, the amount of Luo R Kant T and Yang X 2003 Laminar
drag acting on the gas phase increases which light particle and liquid two phase flows
in a vertical pipe International Journal
in turn reduces the steady state maximum
of Multiphase Flows 29 603-620.
velocity of the gas phase.
Passalacqua A and Fox R O 2011 Advanced
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS continuum modelling of gas-particle
This Study is funded by a grant from DAE- flows beyond hydrodynamic limit
BRNS, Government of India. Applied Mathematical Modelling 35
1616-1627.
REFERENCES
Passalacqua A Fox R O Garg R and
Barton I E 1996 Computation of dilute Subramaniam S 2010 A fully coupled
particulate laminar flow over a quadrature based moment method for
backward facing step International dilute to moderately dilute fluid-particle
Journal for Numerical Methods in flows Chemical Engineering Science65
Fluids 22 211-221. 2267-2283.
Booras G and Krantz W 1976 Dispersion in NOTATION
the laminar flow of power-law fluids
through straight tubes Industrial and FVM Finite Volume Method
Engineering Chemistry Fundamentals αg Gas phase volume fraction
15(4) 249-253.
αs Particle phase volume fraction
784
ICCMS2016
CFD MODELLING OF GAS BUBBLE FORMATION IN A STAGNANT &

CO-FLOWING LIQUID MEDIUM
PRASAD V. K., SINGH S. P. and CHATTERJEE D.*
CSIR-Central Mechanical Engineering Research Institute.
Abstract: Dynamics of gas bubble formation through an orifice submerged in a

Newtonian liquid under the condition of constant gas flow rate is studied numerically.
Both the stagnant and co-flowing conditions of the surrounding liquid are considered.
The full chain from bubble formation to its detachment is simulated by using both
Volume of Fluid (VOF) method and Coupled Level Set and Volume of Fluid
(CLSVOF) method. The study includes :- (a) Time sequence profile of bubble
formation to clearly represent various stages such as bubble growth, neck formation,
and bubble breakup at given Weber number (We), Reynolds number (Re), Bond
number (Bo) and Liquid to gas mean velocity ratio (V r ); (b) Bubble growth history for
different V r and at constant Re, We and Bo; (c) Comparison between results obtained
by VOF and CLSVOF at given V r , We, Re, and Bo; and (d) Bubble volume and
bubble formation time, and finally bubble coalescence phenomenon and technique to
prevent this. It is observed that the CLSVOF method is more efficient in predicting
the interface property as compared to the VOF method.
Keywords: Bubble dynamics; VOF; CLSVOF; CFD; Stagnant/co-flowing liquid
medium
INTRODUCTION preferable over a single larger size bubble of

Bubble generation has become a major thrust same volume because surface to volume ratio
area for many industrial processes related for smaller bubbles increases remarkably.
with water treatment, water oxygenation, Some fundamental medical applications of
metallurgy, generalized floatation, chemical micron size bubbles range from their use as
and nuclear industries [Badam et. al., 2007]. an ultrasound contrast agents, thrombus
A common way of generating gas bubbles is destructor, tumour destructor to targeted drug
to flow a gas continuously through a delivery to kill cancerous tissues/cells
nozzle/orifice in an immiscible liquid such [Majumdar, 2010]. A commonly used
that it emanates into either a stagnant or co- mechanism to produce micron-sized bubbles
flowing liquid medium and breaks up into is to place a gas injection needle into a co-
bubbles. Micron size bubble generation is flowing liquid. For the co-flow arrangement,
still a dynamic research area in material the dispersed phase (gas) is injected through
science (to synthesize mesoporous materials), a nozzle in the same direction as that of
food industries (for texture tailoring) and in liquid flow. This configuration provides
biomedical applications. In order to increase several advantages over a stagnant liquid
the heat and mass transfer rate at the interface ambience such as (i) control over bubble size
several micron size bubbles are always by proper tuning of co-flow property; (ii)
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rsdchat@yahoo.co.in 785

Prasad et al.
avoidance of bubbles merger; and (iii)

enhanced bubble formation frequency. The
simulation of dynamics of gas-liquid involves
the solutions of continuity and momentum
equations for the two fluids with specified
boundary conditions. It is to be mentioned
that most of the earlier numerical simulations
in such co-flowing systems are based on
negligible buoyancy effects under the
condition of very high Weber and Reynolds
numbers except reference Chakraborty et. al.
(2011). We attempt here to analyze
numerically the bubble formation Figure 1. Computational domain and
phenomenon at a submerged orifice in imposed boundary conditions on (r, z)
stagnant and co-flowing liquids using both plane showing two-phase cell.
the VOF [Ranade, 2002;Zaleski, 2005] and A cylindrical coordinate system (r, θ, z) is
CLSVOF [Sussmanand Puckett, 2000] defined whose origin lies at the centre of the
methods to elucidate the underlying physics orifice. The dynamics are taken to be axi-
of bubble dynamics governed by the interplay symmetric so the problem is reduced to a 2D
of inertial, pressure, surface tension and problem independent of the azimuthal angle
buoyancy forces. θ. The distance from the centre of the orifice
to the cylindrical tube wall is taken as R t = 10
In the present problem a co-flowing system × R o so that the wall effect on bubble growth
of two immiscible fluids is considered as maybe neglected. The height of the
shown in Figure.1. The gas (dispersed phase) cylindrical tube is taken as H t = 30 × R o , so
of density ρ g and viscosity µ g is injected that the bubble dynamics are not influenced
through the orifice with a radius R o into a co- by the outflow boundary condition.In this
paper, the submerged orifice is assumed to
flowing/stagnant ambient liquid (continuous
have zero thickness for simplicity.
phase) of density ρ l and viscosity µ l in a co-
axial cylindrical tube of radius R t . The METHOD& MATERIALS
gravitational force aligns with the axis of the The commercial CFD solver Ansys Fluent
orifice as well as of the tube. The surface (Ansys Fluent, 2011) is used for the
tension σ of the gas-liquid interface is numerical computation of the problem. The
spatially uniform and constant with time. The VOF and CLSVOF multiphase models of
disperse phase (gas) is injected into the Ansys are deployed. The QUICK (Quadratic
system continuously at a constant flow rate Upstream Interpolation Convective Kinetics)
Q g . For the co-flowing condition of the scheme is used for the discretization of the
surrounding liquid, continuous phase is convective terms in the momentum equation.
allowed toflow upward in the concentric The Geometric reconstruction scheme is used
cylindrical tube with average liquid for the interface reconstruction and the
velocity(v c,avg ). PRESTO scheme is used for the pressure
discretization. Fractional step scheme is used
for the pressure-velocity coupling. An
implicit first order time discretization scheme
is used and a sufficiently small time step size,
786
CFD Modelling of Gas Bubble Formation in a Stagnant & Co-Flowing Liquid Medium
10-5 sec is considered. Implicit method for act as an attaching force or as a detaching
time integration with NITA (Non-Iterative force depending on the relative magnitude of
Time Advancement) transient formulation is the velocities of the co-flowing liquid and the
used and some User Defined bubble. If the bubble velocity is higher than
Functions(UDFs) are used to apply the the liquid mean velocity then the liquid
boundary conditions at different inlet points. inertia force will act as an opposing force
These functions are written by the help of (attaching force) and vice-versa. Figure.2
Fluent defined macros and then complied demonstrates the qualitative features of the
using Fluent compiler and finally hooked bubble evolution with time for given
with Fluent solver to impose desired parameters. The first snap depicts the
boundary conditions. A uniform grid velocity profile imposed at different inlets for
structure is used to discretize the entire gas and liquid phases. After having a closer
computational domain. The smallest division look at the time sequence profiles, one could
along both radial and axial directions are easily divide the bubble formation process
taken as 0.1525 mm. A comprehensive grid into two stages, viz. expansion stage and
sensitivity study is also conducted using collapse stage. In the expansion stage, the
three different grid sizes 100×150, 135×200 total upward (detaching) forces are in balance
and 200×300. with the total downward (attaching) forces
and the period of this stage is called the
The properties of the fluids(liquid & gas)
expansion time. The bubble expands in the
used are given in the following table :
radial direction but the tip of the bubble
Table 1. Properties of the reference propagates downstream due to the
fluids: air-water system at 20°C. momentum of directly incoming gas stream.
Any imbalance between attaching and
Property Value
detaching forces will cause the
ρl 998.12 kg/m3 commencement of collapse stage where in a
ρg 1.188 kg/m3 visible neck forms (at t = 40 ms) which will
ultimately lead to the detachment. The
µl 1.0016 ×10−3 Pa-sec velocity vector field near the bubble interface
µg 1.824 ×10−5 Pa-sec demonstrates that during this entire period,
σ lg 72.8 ×10−3 N / m the surrounding liquid plays a significant role
in the bubble breakup process. The lower part
RESULTS of the surface of the detached bubble
becomes concave towards the liquid. The
The formation, expansion, necking and
reason for this concavity is the retraction of
detachment of a gas bubble is governed by
the surface immediately after bubble breakup
the interaction of several forces such as the
from the orifice.
buoyancy, pressure, gas momentum, surface
tension, liquid inertia and drag/fluid viscosity DISCUSSION
forces. In case of stagnant liquid ambience
An axi-symmetric numerical simulation is
the first three forces come under the category
performed to analyze the dynamics of gas
of detaching forces whereas the last three
bubble formation from a submerged orifice in
forces come under attaching forces.
an immiscible Newtonian liquid under the
However, in case of co-flowing liquid
condition of constant gas flow rate using a
ambience the liquid inertia force may either
finite volume based commercial CFD solver
787
Prasad et al.
Ansys Fluent. The study demonstrates the results obtained by VOF and CLSVOF
differences between the dynamic effects of methods. However, the interface captured by
stagnant and co-flowing surrounding on CLSVOF is superior than that captured by
bubble evolution and detachment. Both VOF VOF method alone; (iv) during the bubble
and CLSVOF methods are used to capture breakup process, the surrounding flowing
the evolving interface. The computational liquid plays an important role because it
solution describing the incipience, growth, compresses the gas stream and forms neck
necking and eventually detachment from the which ultimately leads to the detachment; (v)
submerged orifice is presented. the co-flowing liquid ambience is preferred
Velocity Vector t = 0ms t = 10ms over the stagnant liquid ambience in order to
at inlet BC prevent the bubble coalescence phenomenon.
REFERENCES
Ansys Fluent, ver. 14.02011 Theory Guide
Ansys Inc. USA.
Badam V K Buwa V F Durst 2007
Experimental Investigations of
Regimes of Bubble Formation on
t = 20 ms t = 30 ms t = 40 ms
Submerged Orifices under Constant
Flow Condition The Canadian
Journal of Chemical Engineering
85 257-267.
Chakraborty I Biswas G P S Ghoshdastidar
2011 Bubble generation in quiescent
and co-flowing liquids International
t = 60 ms t = 80 ms t = 100 ms Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer544673-4688.
Majumdar S SChowdhury 2010 Novel
therapeutic application of
microbubbles for targeted drug
delivery. International Journal
of Pharma and Bio Sciences11-9.
Ranade V V 2002 Computational flow
modeling for chemical reactor
Figure. 2. Time sequence profile of
engineering 5 Academic Press St.
bubble growth, neck formation, and
Louis MO USA.
bubble breakup for We = 4.35, Re =
SussmanM E G Puckett 2000 A coupled
690.48, Bo = 0.31 and V r = 0.88.
level-set and volume-of-fluid
Some of the important observations are as method for computing 3D and axis
follows: (i) it is observed that there are two symmetric incompressible two-phase
stages in the entire bubble formation process, flows. Journal of Computational
namely the expansion stage and the collapse Physics162 301-337.
stage; (ii) higher value of co-flowing liquid Zaleski S 2005 Interface tracking-VOF in:
Lecture Given at Course:
velocity leads to a faster bubble collapse
Industrial Two-phase Flow CFD Von
dynamics and thus creates smaller bubble Karman Institute for Fluid Dynamics
size with enhanced bubble formation Belgium.
frequency and reduced formation time; (iii)
not much difference is witnessed between the
788
ICCMS2016
THE ROLE OF CONSISTENCY IN THE SIMULATION OF HIGH

DENSITY RATIO FLOWS
PATEL J. K.* and NATARAJAN G.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India
Abstract: In numerical development of the fluid flow algorithms for high density
ratios, researches are focused on the consistent formulations. To enforce the
consistency, numerous sophisticated and the computationally expensive approaches
are proposed in the literature. In this work, through the numerical experiments, we
demonstrate that the inconsistent formulation can also produce accurate results in
specific cases associated with high density ratios. Furthermore, we present a criterion
that indicates whether the consistency is must or an inconsistent is sufficed to generate
the stable solutions.
Keywords: Inconsistent; High density ratio; Stability criterion; Volume-of-fluid.
INTRODUCTION momentum transport in conjunction with

The accuracy and the robustness of the continuity equation using level set approach.
algorithm is the prime objective of any fluid While most of the previous works are
flow solver. Preserving the stability in case of focused on the consistency of the algorithm
the interfacial flows is not trivial, as the high in the high density ratio flows, influence of
fluid properties jump can be encountered the other parameters like viscosity ratio,
across the interface. Over the years, several Reynolds number, convection velocity are
methods Hirt and Nichols (1991); Sussman et not analyzed appropriately. It is likely that
al., (1994) have been proposed for the the inconsistent formulation can also produce
numerical simulation of the fluid flows with accurate results as the consistent formulation,
interface. However, many researchers with specific group of these parameters even
reported issues in these methods when for high density ratios. In this work, based on
subjected to the high density ratios. Bell and the numerical experiments, we design a
Marcus (1992) found that the non- criterion that predicts whether the consistent
conservative formulation of the governing formulation is required or the inconsistent
equations is source of instability in such formulation can also produce the accurate
flows. Seminal work of Rudman (1999) results.
presented a consistent mass and momentum
NUMERICAL METHODOLOGY
formulation by constructing the density flux
from the mass flux in staggered framework. The fluid flow is govern by the two-
Subsequently, the concept is implemented in dimensional, laminar, incompressible Navier-
collocated framework [Bussmann et al., Stokes equation,
2002] and level set method [Raessi and ∇ ⋅u = 0 � (1)
Pitsch, 2012]. Recently, Ghods and Hermann
(2013) proposed consistent rescaled
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail :_j.patel@iitg.ernet.in 789

Patel and Natarajan
∂( ρu) 1 ρ to the cell centroids using IDeC

+ ∇ ⋅( ρuu) = −∇p + ∇ ⋅ µ∇ u + + Fst
∂t Re Fr �(2) reconstruction. The overall algorithm is
second order accurate in time and space.
where ρ is the density, µ is the viscosity and p
is the pressure. The non-dimensional number RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Re = ρminU∞L∞ / µmin
and Fr = U∞2 / gL∞
is based on the
For the consistent mass and momentum
lighter fluid properties. In this work we use
formulation identical scheme is used in
single fluid formulation where mixture density
and viscosity are calculated from the volume advection Eq.(3)and convective part of the
momentum equation Eq.(2) at the discrete
fraction φ ,
level. In present formulation, to incorporate
the inconsistency upwind scheme is used
ρmax µ
ρ =φ + (1 − φ ) ; µ =φ + (1 − φ ) max instead of high resolution scheme in the
ρmin µmin
convective part. In the following sections we
Finally, the surface tension force is implemented present the test cases by implementing the
in Continuum surface force inconsistent formulation.
model, Fst= κ /
∇φ We �,where κ is the curvature
RAYLEIGH-TAYLOR INSTABILITY
which is calculated using Ubbink, (1998) model
and We = ρmin L∞U∞2 / σ is the Weber number. Surface Evidently, for low density ratios an
tension, pressure and gravity forces are inconsistent formulation can also produce
implemented in balanced force algorithm acceptable results in the literature. In this test
(Francois et al., 2006). In this work we use the case we simulate the Rayleigh-Taylor
volume-of-fluid approach to capture the interface instability with low density ratio 7 and unit
dynamics,
viscosity ratio. The computational domain is
Dφ ∂φ rectangular tank, divided into 22256
= φ 0
+ u ⋅∇=
Dt ∂t � (3) triangular elements which is symmetric about
vertical centreline. No-slip condition is
The above equation is solved implicitly using specified on the top and bottom walls
GMRES solver with saamg precondition. whereas lateral walls are slip walls. The
High resolution scheme Patel and Natarajan, interface is initially perturbed with the
function, y= 2 + 0.01 cos0.5π x . The
(2015) is used for calculating the face value
of the volume fraction. The variables are
Reynolds number and the Froude number for
stored in hybrid staggered framework
the simulation are 1000 and 0.1 respectively
Natarajan and Sotiropoulos (2009) and the
with the constant time step 0.001.
momentum equation is solved normal to the
face. The normal momentum equation is The interface positions at different non-
computed implicitly using inexact Newton dimensional time are shown in the Fig. 1
Krylov solver (PetSclibraries) in fractional using inconsistent formulation. The
step algorithm. In this algorithm pressure instability begins as the heavy fluid
correction equation is obtained by using the penetrates inside the lighter and the interface
incompressibility constraint which is solved is distorted due to shear. Owing to the grid
implicitly using LiS libraries. After solving symmetry, interface should also remain
the pressure correction equation velocities symmetric about centreline. However, at time
and pressure are updated to the next time t=1.0, irregularity of the interface can be seen
level. Thereafter velocities are reconstructed clearly. This demonstrates that for low
790
Role of Consistency in High Density Ratio Flows
density ratio also inconsistent formulation Froude number hence the higher convection
can generate inaccurate results. Lower velocity triggered this asymmetric pattern.
Figure 1. Time plots of Rayleigh–Taylor instability for density ratio 7 with Re = 1000 and
F r = 0.1 on unstructured grid
AIR BUBBLE RISING IN WATER simulation is carried out for high density ratio
1000 and viscosity ratio 100 with constant
For the next test case we consider rising of a
time step 0.001 and Weber number 0.125.
bubble in stagnant fluid. Following the
numerical simulation of Hysing et al. (2008) Figure 2 depicts the time evolution of the
a bubble of diameter D=1 is placed at (1 × 1) mass centre of the bubble and the rising
in velocity. Present results in the inconsistent
formulation are compared with the results of
A rectangular tank of cross-section (2 × 4) Hysing et al. (2008), with good agreement.
which is subdivided into 80426 triangular Despite the high density ratio, in this test case
elements. Slip condition is given on the side inconsistent formulation produce the accurate
walls and no-slip on the top and bottom results. The lower value of the Reynolds
walls. The Reynolds number and Froude number may be the reason for this
numbers are 3.5 and 1 respectively. The improvement.
(a) (b)
Figure 2. Time evolution of (a) bubble mass center (b) rising velocity for density ratio
791
Patel and Natarajan
1000 viscosity ratio 100, Re = 3.5, We = 0.125 and Fr = 1 on unstructured grid.

Hirt C W and Nichols B D 1991 Volume of
CONCLUSION
fluid (VOF) method for the dynamics of
An inconsistent formulation is investigated free boundaries J. Comput. Phys. 39
for high and low density ratio flow conditions 201-225.
with different fluid and flow properties.
Hysing S Turek S Kuzmin D Parolini N
Through the numerical experiments it is
Burman E Ganesan S and Tobiska L
observed that the density ratio is not only the
2008 Quantitative benchmark
parameter for numerical instability of the
computations of two-dimensional
inconsistent formulations. The influence of
bubble dynamics Int. J. Numer Methods
Reynolds number, viscosity ratio and
Fluids 60 1259-1288.
convection velocity are crucial. The
conditions under which an inconsistent Natarajan G and Sotiropoulos F 2009
formulation would be as accurate as a Adaptive finite volume incompressible
consistent formulation shall be discussed as a Navier–Stokes solver for 3D flows with
part of full length paper. complex immersed boundaries
Proceedings of the 62nd APS-DFD
REFERENCES meeting, Minneapolis.
Bell J B and Marcus D L 1992 A second Patel J K and Natarajan G 2015A generic
order projection method for variable framework for design of interface
density flows J. Comput. Phys. 101 334- capturing schemes for multi-fluid flows
48. Comput. Fluids 106 108-118.
Bussmann M Kothe D B and Sicilian J M Raessi M and Pitsch H 2012 Consistent mass
2002 Modelling of high density ratio and momentum transport for simulating
incompressible interfacial flows ASME incompressible interfacial flows with
Conference Proceedings 707-713. large density ratios using the level set
Francois M M Cummins S J Dendy E D method Comput. Fluids 63 70-81.
Kothe D B Sicilian J M and Williams M Rudman M 1997 Volume tracking method
W 2006 A balanced-force algorithm for for interfacial flow calculation Int. J.
continuous and sharp interfacial surface Numer. Meth. Fluids 24 671-691.
tension models within a volume
Sussman M, Smereka P and Osher S 1994 A
tracking framework J. Comput. Phys.
level set approach for computing
213 141-173.
solutions to incompressible two-phase
Ghods S and Herrmann M 2013 A consistent flow J. Comput. Phys 114 146-159.
rescaled momentum transport method
Ubbink O 1997 Numerical Prediction of Two
for simulating large density ratio
Fluid Systems with Sharp Interfaces
incompressible multiphase flows using
Ph.D. thesis Imperial College London
level set methods Phys. Scr.
London, UK
792
ICCMS2016
THREE-DIMENSIONAL DEFORMATION OF A DROPLET ON A

SQUARE DUCT WALL CONSIDERING WETTING EFFECTS
BHARDWAJ S.* and DALAL A.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Guwahati,
Assam, India
Abstract: In the present study, an investigation is performed to observe the

deformation dynamics and spreading behaviour of a three-dimensional immiscible
droplet adhere to the wetted wall of a square duct. To perform this task, lattice
Boltzmann Shan and Chen model is employed. The analysis has been done to see the
effect of the Reynolds number, capillary number, and droplet to carrier fluid viscosity
ratio on deformation. The three wetting conditions (e.g., hydrophobic, hydrophilic and
mixed wettability) of the wall have been considered for the investigation. It is to be
expected that at low Reynolds number and capillary number, the droplet deformation
is not much on hydrophilic wall condition but deformation may be more in
hydrophobic condition. It is also to be expected that as Reynolds number and capillary
number increase which in-turn increases the deformation of the droplet. The results
will be shown in the form of droplet contours and non-dimensional wetted length and
wetted area.
Keywords: Three-dimensional shear flow, Droplet deformation, Lattice
Boltzmann method, Square duct.
INTRODUCTION capillarity-viscosity–wettability interaction.

The displacement of immiscible fluids is an The impact of critical physicochemical
important phenomenon in the field of determinants, including capillary number and
multiphase fluid flow due to its wide range of viscosity ratio will be explored. The main
engineering and nature applications such as task will be to analyse the droplet
microfluidic and nano-fluidic oil recovery. deformation and spreading behaviour on a
The effect of wettability, capillarity and wettable duct wall.
viscosity on the dynamics of immiscible From past two decades the lattice Boltzmann
displacement of droplet has attracted many method (LBM) has emerged as an effective
researchers in the past few years. The proper methodology to study the fluid flow
understanding of droplet dynamics and the behaviour of a multiphase or two phase
effect of wall wettability and viscosity are flows. The main strength of LBM is its
very complex in the areas like enhanced oil versatility, excellent numerical stability and
recovery and clean energy conversion. In the easy implementation for simulating fluid
present work, meso-scopic analysis of droplet flows. There are a number of multiphase LB
dynamics in a square duct based on the two- models [Gunstensen et al., 1991; Shan and
phase lattice Boltzmann model (LBM) will Chen, 1993; Shan and Doolen, 1995; Swift et
be presented in order to reveal the role of al., 1995; He et al., 1999] present in which
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: Saurabh.2014@iitg.ernet.in 793

Bhardwaj and Dalal
the interaction potential based approach Shan al., 2009). Shan and Chen (Shan and Chen,
and Chen (1993) is widely utilized due to its 1993) proposed an LB model with inclusion
ability to implement boundary conditions of interaction potential for multiphase and
easily for the fluid phases with different multicomponent fluid flows. The present
densities, viscosities and wettabilities. Zhang study uses the S-C model since it takes into
(2011) has reported a detailed review on the account interactions at the microscopic level
utilization of LBM in microfluidics. between the fluid molecules which is the sole
cause of the mixing or the separation of the
phases. The separation of fluid phases or
FORMULATION
components in the S-C model is automatic
LBM is a powerful simulation technique and is preferred because of its convenience in
which has attracted interest from researchers handling fluid/solid interaction.
in computational physics for studying fluid
Interaction force among the particles is
flow and transport process. LBM serves as a
mediator between micro-scale and macro- incorporated in S-C model using an altered
scale by considering behavior of a collection velocity in the equilibrium distribution
of particles as unit. The properties of the function. The new momentum taking the
collection of particles are represented by the interaction force into consideration is
distribution functions. LBM considers a expressed by the parameter ρk ueq which is
spatially discretized form of the continuous given as.
Boltzmann equation. The computer algorithm ρ k=
u eq
k ρ k u ′ + τ k Fk
is simple and consists of collision and
streaming steps as follows: where u′ is an extra component on the top
due to addition of interparticle interaction for
(i) Collision step: each component. Total force acting on the kth
component taking into account the
f k ( x, t ) − fi k ( eq ) ( x, t )
fi k ( x + ciδ t , t + δ t ) − fi k ( x, t ) =
− i interparticle interaction is given by F k which
τk
includes fluid/fluid interaction F 1k ,
where fi ( x, t ) is the number density
k
fluid/solid interaction F 2k , and external force
distribution function for the kth component in F 3k [Martys and Chen 1996] and is expressed
the ith velocity direction at position x and by
time t, and δt is the time increment. The
relaxation time of the kth component in lattice Fk = F1k + F2 k + F3k
unit is given as τ k whereas f i
k ( eq )
( x, t ) is The interaction force F 1k between the
the corresponding equilibrium distribution particles of kth component at location x and
function. k th component at location x′ is assumed to
be proportional to the product of their
(ii) Streaming step: effective mass ψ(ρ k ).
−ψ k ( x ) ∑∑ Gkk ( x, x ′ )ψ k ( x ′ )( x ′ − x )
s
fi k ( x + ciδ t , t + δ=
t) fi k ( x, t + δ t ) F1k (x) =
x ′ k =1
where i represents the direction of
momentum. Details of the LB methodology The interactive force between the fluid and
are well described in the literature by several wall is given as (Shan and Doolen, 1996)
investigators (Kang et al., 2005; Mukherjee et
794
Three-Dimensional Deformation of a Droplet on a Square Duct Wall Considering Wetting Effect
−nk ( x ) ∑ g kw nw ( x ′ )( x ′ − x )
F2 k ( x ) = PROBLEM SPECIFICATION
′
x The present study deals with the simulation
where of deformation and spreading behaviour of a
n w = number density of the wall, which is a three-dimensional spherical immiscible
constant at the wall and zero elsewhere. droplet adhere to the duct wall. A square duct
g kw = interactive strength between the of aspect ratio 10:1 has been taken and a
component k and the wall. droplet is placed on one of the wetted wall of
F 2k is the force that is perpendicular to the the duct as shown in Fig. 1. The droplet is
wall. Hence, it does not affect the no slip placed in the presence of shear flow. The
boundary condition. It may be noted that the density ratio droplet fluid to the carrier fluid
inclusion of fluid/solid interaction does not is considered to be 1 in the present study. The
have any influence on macroscopic equations study has been performed for different
since F2k only exists at the interface of solid combinations of Reynolds number, Capillary
and fluid. g kw is negative for wetting fluid numbers and viscosity ratios.
and positive for non-wetting fluid.
Gravitational force is given by, REFERENCES
F3k ρ=
= kg mk nk g Gunstensen A K Rothman D H Zaleski S and
where g is gravitational factor. The total Zanetti G 1991 Lattice Boltzmann
density and momentum density of model of immiscible fluids Phys. Rev. A
multicomponent flow are given by 43 4320–4327.
ρ = ∑ mk ∑ fi k He X Y Chen S Y and Zhang R Y 1999 A
k i lattice Boltzmann scheme for
ρ u = ∑ mk ρ k u k incompressible multiphase flow and its
application in simulation of Rayleigh-
Taylor instability J. Comp. Phys. 152
642–663.
Kang Q Zhang D and Chen S 2005
Displacement of a three dimensional
immiscible droplet in a channel J. Fluid
Mech. 545 41–66.
Martys N S and Chen H 1996 Simulation of
multicomponent fluids in complex
three-dimensional geometries by the
lattice Boltzmann method Phys. Rev. E
53 743–750.
Mukherjee P P Wang C Y and Kang Q 2009
Meso-scopic modeling of two-phase
behavior and flooding phenomena in
polymer electrolyte fuel cells
Electrochim. Acta 54 6861–6875.
Figure 1. Computational domain and Shan X and Chen H 1993 Lattice Boltzmann
sectional view of the domain. model for simulating flows with
795
Bhardwaj and Dalal
multiple phases and components Phys. Swift M Osborn W and Yeomans J 1995
Rev. E 47 1815–1819. Lattice Boltzmann simulation of
nonideal fluids Phys. Rev. Lett. 75 830–
Shan X and Doolen G 1995 Multicomponent
833.
lattice-Boltzmann model with
interparticle interaction J. Stat. Phys. 81 Zhang J 2011 Lattice Boltzmann method for
379–393. microfluidics: models and applications
Microfluid Nanofluid 10 1–28.
796
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF DROPLET SOLIDIFICATION DURING FCI

IN SEVERE ACCIDENT OF NUCLEAR REACTORS
GHOSH B.* and MUKHOPADHYAY D.
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, India
Abstract: During Fuel-Coolant Interaction (FCI) process in severe accident of a

nuclear reactor, molten corium jets interact with coolant and get fragmented into
droplets. The resulting metal droplets are cooled by the considerably large
temperature difference with the surrounding coolant and rapidly undergo partial or
complete solidification. In order to understand corium droplet solidification process,
in this work, we study the solidification of alloy droplets. The thermal history exhibits
different regimes of solidification and associates temperature variation. The larger
droplets cool down slower, on account of their higher mass.
Keywords: Severe accident, Fuel-coolant interaction, Alloy solidification
INTRODUCTION Miravete, et al. 1989]. Consequently, the

During Fuel-Coolant Interaction (FCI) models and method for rapid droplet
process in severe accident of a nuclear solidification have been adopted from
reactor, fused reactor fuel rods, clads and literature available in these two areas of
core internals mixes to form a molten mass applications.
terms as corium. Molten corium jets interact The corium droplet is an alloy of fuel and
with coolant and get fragmented into clad materials. In order to understand corium
droplets. The resulting metal droplets are droplet solidification process, in this work,
cooled by the considerably large temperature we study the solidification of alloy droplets.
difference with the surrounding coolant and This work describes a numerical model
rapidly undergo partial or complete which combines both cooling and break-up in
solidification. The cooling process is further a single computation aimed at simulating the
complicated by secondary droplet break-up. dynamics of a droplet. It describes a heat
The droplets finally arrive at the bottom of transfer model which incorporates the
the reactor vessel and form a porous debris complete thermal behaviour of metal droplet
bed. The corium contains some fission cooling including undercooling, recalescence,
products which continue to generate heat peritectic and segregated solidification.
through radioactive decay process. The long Segregated solidification is solved with
term effective cooling of the debris bed forms Scheil’s equation. The heat transfer model is
a severe accident management strategy. fully integrated with the droplet break-up
The rapid droplet solidification has been model described in, in this way, both the
traditionally encountered in the processes of break-up and thermal behaviour within
development of new materials in powder droplets are calculated simultaneously. The
metallurgy [Quist and Lewis, 1986] and combination of break-up and heat transfer
spray atomisation and deposition [Gutierrez-
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bghosh@barc.gov.in 797

Ghosh and Mukhopadhyay
2000
models is important to evaluate the debris
bed characteristics.
Droplet Temperature (K)

1500
MODEL
In conformity with the phase diagram, the
cooling process for a droplet in a coolant 1000
goes through a series of transformations and

solidification (see Figure 1). A complete
transformation from liquid droplet to solid 500
γ-TiAl Alloy Droplet
particle includes: cooling in (i) liquid state
and undercooling, (ii) nucleation and 1E-5 1E-4 1E-3 0.01
Time (sec.)
recalescene, (iii) initial segregated
solidification, (iv) peritectic transformation, Figure 2. Thermal History of the Droplet
(v) further segregated solidification and Figure 2 and 3 show some sample results of
cooling in solid state. In the literature, two thermal and solidification fraction history of
segregated solidifications have been
a α-TiAl droplet. The droplet diameter is
identified for alloy droplets, namely initial
and further segregated solidifications. The 8×10-5 m; initially at a temperature of 1885K.
initial segregated solidification takes place Ambient gas temperature and velocity is
after recalescence while the further taken to be 298 K and 4 m/s respectively. The
segregated solidification occurs after thermal history exhibits different regimes of
peritectic transformation. Both segregated solidification and associates temperature
solidifications work in the same principle and variation.
the droplet temperature decreases.
The solidification gets completed within
about 10-2 seconds.
1.0
γ-TiAl Alloy Droplet

0.8
Solid Fraction
0.6
0.4
Figure 1. Schematic of Droplet Cooling 0.2
RESULTS AND CONCLUSION

0.0
1E-6 1E-5 1E-4 1E-3 0.01
The system of governing equations consists Time (sec.)
of the differential equations for evolution of Figure 3. Solidification History of the
temperature and solidification fraction of the Droplet
droplet coupled with the phase specific
thermo-mechanical properties and heat The thermal history of particles is strongly
transfer characteristics to the coolant. The dependent on initial droplet size. Large
system of equation have been solved droplets will not go through undercooling
numerically using modified Runge-Kutta while small droplets have identifiable stages
method. of different transformations. Moreover, the
798
Analysis of Droplet Solidification during FCI in Severe Accident of Nuclear Reactors
larger droplets cool down slower, on account

of their higher mass.
REFERENCES
Gutierrez-Miravete E et al. 1989 A
Mathematical Model of the Spray
Deposition Process Metall. Trans 20A
71-85.
Quist W E and Lewis R E 1986 The Need for
Rapidly Solidified Powder Metallurgy
Aluminum Alloys for Aerospace
Applications Rapidly Solidified Powder
Aluminum Alloys (eds. Mahy H P et al.)
ASTM.
799
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF MICROMIXER WITH FLOW

DISTURBING RIBS
SRIKARTHIKEYAN K.K.1, KRISHNAH S.1, ARUNKUMAR S.2 and VENKATESAN M.*1
1
School of Mechanical Engineering SASTRA University, Thanjavur, India.
2
Dept of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology, Madras, India.
Abstract: Rapid mixing in micro reactors is important in chemical synthesis and

chemical process intensification. Micro reactors provide a high surface to volume
ratio when compared to conventional reactors. However, the inherent disadvantage in
micro reactors is its low mixing efficiency pertaining to the highly laminar regime.
Thus, two reactive fluids are predominantly separated from each other when they flow
along the length of the channels. At present, obstacles in the form of rectangular ribs
are introduced and its effect on mixing is exploited. Various parametric modifications
are done on the rectangular ribs that would provide enhanced mixing as a result of the
formation of recirculation zones or increase in local velocity of a fluid. The effect of
the formation of multiple recirculation on the mixing efficiency is demonstrated.
Keywords: Microfluidics; Micro reactors; Ribbed channel.
INTRODUCTION broadly classified as active and passive

micromixers [Nguyen et. al., 2005]. Active
Process Intensification is a very important
micromixers use external electric, magnetic
aspect in chemical reactors. Intensification of
or acoustic field to induce disturbance in the
a chemical process requires a proliferated
flow medium. However, in passive
space/time output. Thus the high surface to
micromixers surface modifications are
volume ratio in micro reactors provide a great
introduced in the micro reactors that induces
scope for engineers to exploit them for
disturbance in the flow. A state of the art
chemical synthesis. Micro reaction
review on passive micromixers was presented
engineering has a large number of
in [Lee et. al., 2016].
applications in chemical and biological fields.
The governing physics of the micro reaction In the present work, an attempt has been
technology has been dealt in detail in the made to optimize the design of rectangular
book [Nguyen et. al., 2002]. ribs to enhance micromixing. Rectangular
and stepped rectangular ribs are tested
The key challenge of the design of
numerically to study the parametric influence
microreaction systems is the low diffusion
in mixing. The analysis is a development of
rate of the chemical species since the flow is
the work presented on the flow dynamics in a
highly laminar. Thus the flow of the two
ribbed microchannel in [Stogiannis et. al.,
fluids is predominantly separated as they
2014].
flow through the channel [Chiara et. al.
2015]. Considerable amount of work has It was seen from the numerical model that
been done in the past to develop a design for rectangular ribs introduce adverse pressure
rapid mixing micro reactors. They are gradient causing local recirculation. The
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:_mvenkat@mech.sastra.edu 800

Srikarthikeyan et al.
modelling of the micromixer takes in effect solved with the species transport equation
dimensions and spacing between ribs to shown in Eqn.3 in the flow field. Two fluids
optimize the distribution of these are modelled with different concentration of
recirculation zones to enhance the mixing dilute species based on the inlet mass fraction
efficiency. of dilute species in both the fluids. The
concentration of the fluid at a particular
NUMERICAL MODEL location is modelled using transport of dilute
In the present work, a microchannel species equation shown in Eqn. The
comprising of two Y shaped inlets and Continuity equation is given as:
single outlet is modelled. The 2D numerical 
    v   0
model used for numerical experiments is t (1)
shown in Figure. 1.
The Navier-Stokes equation is given as:
  v 
t
 
     vv   p  .   v  v T     g  F
(2)
Species transport equation is given as
Figure 1. Geometry of the micromixer

(3)
The two fluids mix in a Y-Section as shown
in Figure, 1. The size of the rectangular Here D is the diffusivity of the medium and
microchannel is 225 µm. A triangular mesh C is the concentration. The value of D can be
comprising of approximately 18352 elements inferred from Eqn. 4
is used. Mesh near the mixing zone is made
denser to accurately model the mixing. A grid
independence study is done to numerically
(4)
model an accurate system. Inlet velocities of
the microchannel are 0.6 m/s. In the present Here kb is Boltzmann constant. T0 is the
work, the micro reactors are divided into ambient temperature(25ºC) and dhis the
three parts for the design of ribs. It is shown hydrodynamic diameter of the particle (200
in Figure. 1. In Figure 1 zone ‘A’ represents nm). The concentration at one inlet is
the zone in which the two fluids mix as it considered 1x 106mol/m3and other as 0. The
enters the mixer section from the Y shaped value of inlet concentration is calculated
inlets. Zone B represents the region in which based on the mass fraction of dilute species.
the ribs are formulated. Zone ‘C’ represents Concentration 0 in the second inlet indicates
the region in which the objective is to get the that the mass fraction of the dilute species in
maximum mixing. The entire numerical the second inlet is zero. Concentration value
model was created and tested using the for other inlet is obtained for 0.02 % of dilute
commercial FEM solver COMSOL species. Mixing index is used to calculate the
MULTIPHYSICS ©. local efficiency of mixing at the post mixing
zone. Mixing index of 0 indicates complete
Mass and momentum conservation equations
mixing.
shown in Eqn.1 and Eqn. 2 are coupled and
801
Numerical Analysis of Micromixer with Flow Disturbing Ribs
|𝐶−Cavg|
∑𝐸𝑙𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛 section increases, thereby leading to an
Cavg
𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
𝑀= (6) enhanced mixing. Moreover, at the
𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑓𝐸𝑙𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
downstream of the rectangular ribs, adverse
Here Cavg is the concentration of the fluidic pressure gradient develops leading to
medium at a local space when the fluids are boundary layer separation. This induces local
completely mixed. In the present case it is vortices which further enhance the mixing.
arithmetic mean of both the inlet The streamline plot for channel with and
configurations without ribs shown in Figure. 3 ascertains
this.
Flow in Smooth microchannel
Initially, a smooth microchannel without ribs
is modelled to visualize the separated flow
and extent of diffusion. Figure. 2 shows the
concentration plot for a micro mixer without
ribs. Completely separated blue and red
regions indicate the flow is separated. The
separated flow regime obtained in the Figure 3. Effect of rectangular rib
channel coincides with the experimental
The average mixing index in zone ‘C’ for a
results of Shou-Shing et al. (2013) which
smooth channel is found to be 0.7 whereas
validates the present numerical model.
for a channel with single rib is found to be
0.4. It is to be noted that in the present work a
lower value of mixing index pertains to the
case with more efficient mixing. Thus we can
see that the flow constriction as a result of rib
and the formation of vortices play a role in
the enhanced mixing in the flow channel with
Figure 2. Concentration plot for
ribs. A considerable amount of numerical
Conventional T shaped micromixer
experiments is made in the present work to
FLOW IN A RIBBED CHANNEL study the effect of flow constriction and
recirculation length in the enhancement of
The amount of mixing is found to increase mixing.
with increasing length. As the length of the
channel increases, the dilute species diffuse EFFECT OF RECIRCULATION
which leads to effective mixing. It is also LENGTH
seen from the numerical analysis and earlier
published results that with an increase in The length of the recirculation can be varied
velocity, the effect of convective transport is by changing the spacing between the
more and the mixing gets enhanced. Thus, in consecutive ribs. It is seen from the analysis
the present work, an attempt has been made that with the increase in the number of ribs,
to use rectangular ribs in the microchannel there is an increase in the number of
which will reduce the area of cross section. recirculation. It should be noted that in the
Since the mass conservation is employed the present work, the ribbed zone is constrained
local velocity at the reduced area of cross to zone (B). Thus increasing the number of
802
Srikarthikeyan et al.
ribs implies decreasing the spacing between through the constricted space. The increased
the ribs when the rib width is kept constant. convective velocity increases the mixing
The increase in the number of local between the fluids. In order to further
recirculation is found to enhance the mixing increase the velocity of the fluid, rectangular
more effectively. The effect of mixing with ribs are introduced on both sides of the
increase in the number of ribs is shown in microchannel. It is seen that with the
Figure.4 introduction of ribs on both the walls of
rectangular channel, there is an increase in
the formation of recirculation in addition to
flow constriction. This is found to enhance
the mixing efficiency considerably. This is
Figure 4.Effect of increase in number of shown in Figure. 6.When introducing ribs in
ribs. (Mixing index is 0.32) both the walls, staggered arrangement of ribs
It was also seen from the numerical analysis is found to be more efficient because of the
that the effect of length of recirculation zones recurrent formation of recirculation zones.
on enhancement of mixing is considerably
less when compared to the effect of decrease
in distance between vortices. Thus the mixing
effectiveness is found to be high when the
ribs are close to each other with a
considerable distance provided for the
formation of vortices. Too close the ribs, the
recirculation lengths becomes too less,
leading to a flow pattern similar to the one
observed without the formation of vortices. Figure 6. Ribs along both the walls
In order to still increase the formation of (Mixing index (a) 0.08 and (b)0.15
close recirculation zones, a stepped It can be seen from Figure. 6 and based on
rectangular rib is used that enhances the the analysis that even in the case of ribs along
mixing efficiency when compared to the one both the walls the mixing increase with
with regular rectangular ribs. This is shown increases with increase in number of ribs as
in Figure. 5 reasoned earlier. In the present work the best
mixing index of 0.04 (which indicates 96 %
mixing) was obtained for stepped rectangular
Figure 5 Mixing in a stepped cone ribs formulated on both sides of the channel.
(mixing index 0.25) This can be reasoned based on the combined
effect of flow constriction and formation of
EFFECT OF FLOW close recirculation zones.
CONSTRICTION
CONCLUSION
Analysis has been done by varying the height
In the present work, a micro reactor with
of the ribs. The mixing efficiency is found to
rectangular ribs are numerically analysed for
increase with increase in the height of ribs.
effective mixing. Formation of recirculation
This can be reasoned based on the increase in
zones and flow constriction were found to
velocity of the fluid as the flow passes
play the leading role in the enhancement of
803
Numerical Analysis of Micromixer with Flow Disturbing Ribs
mixing index. It is concluded that the

maximum mixing is obtained if the
recirculation zones are found to be at close
proximity. Recirculation length played a
meagre role in mixing enhancement. Stepped
rectangular ribs kept on both sides of the wall
is found to provide the maximum mixing
(about 96 %) adhering to the combined
effects of flow constriction and formation of
local vortices at close proximities.
REFERENCES
Andreussi Tommaso Chiara Galletti Roberto
Mauri Simone Camarri and Maria
Vittoria Salvetti 2015 Flow regimes in
T-shaped micro-mixers Computers &
Chemical Engineering 76 150-159.
Stogiannis I A Passos A D Mouza A A Paras
S V Pěnkavová V Tihon J 2014 Flow
investigation in a microchannel with a
flow disturbing rib Chemical
Engineering Science 119 65-76.
Lee Chia-Yen Wen-Teng Wang Chan-
Chiung Liu and Lung-Ming Fu 2016
Passive mixers in microfluidic systems:
Areview Chemical Engineering Journal
288 146-160.
Nguyen N T Wereley S T 2002
Fundamentals and applications of
microfluidics Artech House.
N T Nguyen Z Wu 2005 Micromixers—a
reviewJMiMi 15R1.
Shou-Shing Hsieh Jyun-Wei Lin Jyun-Hong
Chen 2013 Mixing efficiency of Y-type
micromixers with different angles
International Journal of Heat and Fluid
Flow 44 130-139.
804
ICCMS2016
A MULTI-PHASE CLOSED PIPELINES SIMULATION APPROACH FOR

TRANSPORTATION OF HEAVY OIL WITH OPENFOAM IN HPC
ALOMOY BANERJEE1 and BARMAN S.2
1
IEM Satlake, Y-12 Sector-V Saltlake Electronics Complex Kolkata India.
2
NIT Sikkim, Barfung Block, Ravangla, Sikkim India.
Abstract: Transportation of heavy crude oil through closed pipelines is a challenging issue
both in offshore and in land oil transportation, because of their high viscosity and high carbon
to hydrogen atomic ratios along with the presence of Sulphur content and brine. The present
paper deals with the pressure modelling and flow steadiness analysis of two phase Canadian
Athabasca crude oil & water flow (added in order to reduce the viscous drag) in OpenFOAM
(Open Source Field Operation & Manipulation) software. The simulation modelling is done
using RAS approach and k-  turbulence model, which is followed by post processing
through paraview in HPC of kanchenjungha cluster, NIT Sikkim, India.
Keywords: Openfoam; ANSYS fluent 6.2; HPC.
INTRODUCTION research about how to encounter the challenges

of transportation.
The global oil demand has increased by 30% in
the last 2 decades and most of this oil demand is LITERATURE SURVEY
met by the middle and light weight crude oil
Anand B. Desmala et. al. (2014) described the
from Arabian Countries. However, the reserve various pressure distribution features for oil
of this middle and light weight crude oil is on water two phase stratified, stratified wavy, slug
the decline, which makes the untapped researve and annular flow using ANSYS FLUENT 6.2
of extra heavy crude oil, the only source of Nerea Herreras et. al. compared analytical and
energy to turn to. The global reserve of extra simulation results for two phase 2 Dimensional
heavy crude oil is surveyed to be 6 trillion pipe flow in open and closed channels in
barrels at the present situation. Canada and OpenFOAM with post processing using
Venezuela are the only countries to be MATLAB. Abdurahman Nour et. al. (2012)
exploiting the reserves of extra heavy crude oil. studied the effect of oil water mixing speed and
In Canada 700,000 barrels of synthetic crude oil temperature on kinematic viscosity of oil water
are synthesized daily from extra heavy crude oil. mixture. Rasha Mohammed Abd et. al.
But, there are significant challenges that need to concluded from experiment non Newtonian
be encountered on transport of extra heavy shear thinning of oil water emulsion and a
crude oil, like asphaltene deposition, sulphur or reduction in oil viscosity by 14% on being
brine that ceases the mobility of the crude oil. emulsified with water. Liyana Nadirah et. al.
Besides the presence of Salt in heavy crude oil experimentally investigated the rheology of oil
causes corrosion problems in the pipelines. water emulsion in a Brookfield Rotational
However the energy efficiency of this extra Digital Rheometer in order to demonstrate the
heavy crude oil makes it a serious issue of non-linear relationship between shear stress and
___________________________________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:alomoybanerjee@gmail.com

805
Banerjee and Barman
____________________________________________________________________________________
shear strain through power law model W. Sundt k k u u j ui

et. al. explained the basic mathematical uj  vt ( i  ) 
t x j x j xi x j
operations of Navier Stokes equation in terms of …………….(4)
solution schemes familiar to OpenFOAM. The  v k
[(v  t ) ]  
paper further ventures into finite element x j  k x j
analysis of the pipeline and its corresponding D  u  v 
representation in OpenFOAM. Jignesh P.  C 1 (ui 'u ' j ) i  [(v  t ) ]
Dt k x j x j   x j
Thaker modelled two phase (water & gas) pipe
flow simulations through horizontal pipelines in 2
C 2
OpenFOAM, with post processing in preview. k
………………….(5)
OBJECTIVE The k- ε turbulence model applies the solution
The paper aims at modelling the pressure equations to the cell centre first and then the
distribution throughout the length of flow, along results are interpolated through various Gauss
with the sharp variation of pressure at the interpolation schemes like upwind, linear, van
interface of the two fluids. The paper further Leer etc. The wall co ordinates are divided into
ventures into modelling steady state flow the viscous sublayer, buffer layer and
modelling and investigates the time required to logarithmic layer, based on the nature of profile
achieve steady flow. in the flowfield.
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING RESULTS
The continuity and Navier Stokes equations in The pressure observation was taken keeping the
multiphase flow are modified by the inclusion oil flow velocity constant and gradually varying
of multiphase flow density given as ρH and the the water flow velocity.
multiphase flow velocity denoted by uH.
 
(U H S )  S H  0 …….(1)
z t
m 1  (m S /  H ) 
2
 P
   g H sin   0
t S z z S
(2)
In order to account for the parameter fluctuation
due to turbulence, Reynold’s Averaged Navier
Stokes equation(RANS) is solved in Reynold’s
Stress tensor form:
Du p ui ' u j '
 i  Fi   ui   ( ) (3) Fig 1- Pressure Modelling
Dt xi x j
Interpretation: In the plot above, the water
The turbulence properties of the multiphase velocity is gradually increased from 10% to
flow are modelled through k- ε Turbulence 90% of the oil flow velocity. In all the cases
Model, where turbulent kinetic energy is however, a roughly horizontal plot is obtained
denoted by k and ε denotes the dissipation of the parallel to X axis , after which, there is a sharp
turbulent kinetic energy. The transport equations
rise in pressure, that marks the interface of the
for k and ε are denoted through Bousinessq
approximation as
two fluids. The Canadian athabasca oil has an
API gravity of 6, which signifies a higher
806
A Multi-Phase Closed Pipelines Simulation Approach for Transportation of Heavy Oil with OpenFOAM in HPC
___________________________________________________________________________________________
density than water. At the interface of the two Fig 3-Flow Velocity Distribution_80%_4
fluids, owing to the difference in density, the seconds
pressure varies drastically. The interface zone
Interpretation: After 4 seconds of flow, it has
affects the pressure typically at a zone of 10-15 been observed that the dark red zone at the top
cm along the length. In the initial part of the boundary has enhanced in size, i.e. the zone of
flow, water dominated the flow more because of high shear stress has increased, reducing the
its low viscosity and high flow ability thus flow ability of multiphase flow mixture. This
giving a roughly constant pressure plot. marked the time period where maximum
However the oil water interface dominated in pumping power was necessary for
the last part of the flow. The following flow transportation, due to high shear stress between
velocity distribution was obtained with water
layers.
velocity being 80% of the oil flow velocity.
Here the water velocity is (8 8 8) and the oil
flow velocity is (10 10 10)
Fig 4-Flow Velocity Distribution_80%_8

seconds
Fig 2-Flow Velocity Distribution_80%_2 Interpretation: After 8 seconds of flow, finally

seconds the multiphase flow stabilized. The zone of high
Interpretation: After 2 seconds of flow, the velocity recuced in thickness, hence enhancing
following velocity distribution was obtained its flow ability from the 4 seconds situation.
through the length of the pipe. The deep red From 8 seconds onwards, the velocity
border on the top depicts the very high velocity distribution was observed to be constant,
zone near the top boundary. The high velocity through the length of flow, irrespective of the
results in viscous stresses to be generated near timeframe through which the flow was
the boundary wall. monitored.
CONCLUSION
 The pressure exerted by the flow on the pipe
walls sharply increases at a distance of 10-
15 cm from the source, thus signifying that
there should be additional protective
measures in that zone to account for the
pressure rise.
 At the initial part of the flow, the flow
velocity is not stabilized, thus the pumping
power required to pump the flow mixture is
fluctuating in magnitude.
807
Banerjee and Barman
____________________________________________________________________________________
 The purpose of modelling the flow field is to OpenFOAM Masters Thesis NTNU
trace the velocity distribution all along the Mechanical Engineering under R
length, such that the viscous shear stress can Kristoffersen.
be modified accordingly. Hole G Fluid Viscosity effects on Centrifugal
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Pumps.
In order to create this paper, I have worked on Jignesh P Thaker & Jyotirmay Banerjee 2013
the Kanchenjungha Cluster HPC, to generate CFD Simulation Of Two-Phase Flow
data through post porcessing in paraview at NIT Phenomena In Horizontal Pipelines Using
Sikkim. I am actually indebted to the Openfoam Proceedings of the Fortieth
mechanical department of NIT Sikkim, for co- National Conference on Fluid Mechanics
operating with me throughout my research and Fluid Power December 12-14 2013
tenure. NITHamirpu Himachal Pradesh India
FMFP2013 34.
REFERENCE
Lecture material – Environmental Hydraulic
Abdul R M Nour A H Sulaiman A Z Simulation Page 66-69.
Experimental Investigation on Dynamic
Viscosity and Rheology of Water-Crude Marie E Sundt W under the supervision of Bjørn
Oil Two Phases Flow Behavior at Different H Hjertager Jørgen Osenbroch Numerical
Water Volume Fractions at American And Analytical Study of Steady State and
Journal of Engineering Research (AJER) Transient Heat Transfer In Liquid Filled
e-ISSN: 2320-0847 p-ISSN: 2320-0936 Deadlegs Masters thesis.
03(03)113-120. Nadirah L Abdurahman M S Nadira H and
Andersson P Tutorial on multiphase Interfoam. Rizauddin D Rheological Study of
Petroleum Fluid and Oil-in-Water
Behrens T Open Foam’s basic solvers for linear Emulsion in International Journal of
systems of equations Solvers Engineering Sciences & Research
preconditioner smoothers. Technology.
CFD online discussion forum Available: Nour A Nour A H & Abdul H A 2012 Bari
http://www.cfd-online.com/Forum/. Pipeline transportation of viscous crudes as
Desamala A B Dasamahapatra A K Mandal T K concentrated oil-in-water emulsions in
2014 Oil-Water Two-Phase Flow Journal Of Petroleum Science And
Characteristics in Horizontal Pipeline – A Engineering.
Comprehensive CFD Study in OpenFOAM user guide Available:
International Journal of Chemical http://cfd.direct/openfoam/user-guide/.
Molecular Nuclear Materials and
Metallurgical Engineering World Pathankar S V Numerical Heat Transfer & Fluid
Academy of Science Engineering and Flow.
Technology 8(4). Sengupta T K Fundamentals of Computational
Hemida H OpenFOAM tutorial: Free surface Fluid Dynamics.
tutorial using interFoam and rasInterFoam . Voigt Comparison of Turbulence Models for
Herreras N Omagogeascoa J I Labeaga Two- numerical calculation of Airflow in an
Phase pipe flow simulations with annex 20 room.
808
A Multi-Phase Closed Pipelines Simulation Approach for Transportation of Heavy Oil with OpenFOAM in HPC
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Zuo W Introduction to Computational Fluid

Dynamics.
809
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS OF PIN FIN WITH

ELLIPSOIDAL BEADS
MADHUMITHA R., ARUNKUMAR S., BALACHANDAR C. and VENKATESAN M.*
School of Mechanical Engineering SASTRA University, Thanjavur, India.
Abstract: Fins are protrusions on heated surfaces provided to augment the heat
transfer rate. Considerable amount of work has been done in the past to design various
geometries. In the present study a pin fin with ellipsoidal beads surrounded by a
cylinder is analyzed under natural convection conditions using commercial CFD code
ANSYS FLUENT©. The heat sink is supplied with a constant heat duty of 60 W. The
size of the beads is varied and the heat transfer and fluid flow characteristics are
studied. It is concluded, based on the analysis that cylindrical fins with beads are
more effective than solid, hollow and annular cylindrical pin fins, which stresses the
importance of the study of these fins to utilize them in an effective way.
Keywords: Pin fins; Ellipsoidal beads; Numerical analysis; Heat transfer
INTRODUCTION to optimize them [London and Shah, 1968;

Zhao and Avedisian, 1997; Turkyilmazoglu
The natural convection heat transfer has
2015]. Advancements in the field integrated
many important applications in refrigeration,
electronic system demanded fins with less
air conditioning and other cooling equipment.
weight and pressure drop when compared to
They provide a noiseless mode of operation
rectangular plate fins. This paved the way for
in comparison with forced convection
the effective utilization of pin fins. Several
supported by fans or blowers. Fins are
analyses have been reported on the heat
protrusions made on a surface to lower the
transfer and pressure drop characteristics of
temperature of the heated surface which
pin fins [Jubran et al., 1993; Bahadur and
makes system more efficient. Fins of various
Bar-Cohen, 2007; Agrawal et al., 2014].
shapes have been tested that includes
Authors earlier made a deliberate attempt
rectangular, cylindrical and trapezoidal
[Balachandar et al., 2015] to prove the
geometries and other special profiles. The
efficiency of hollow fins over solid
effect of thermal resistance on the air side of
cylindrical pin fins. The present work is the
the fin in a natural convection environment
extension of the same in which cylindrical
necessitates variation in fin geometries.
volume (annular pin fin) and ellipsoidal
Several experimental and numerical literature beads are introduced in the hollow region.
can be found that exploits various fin shapes The heat transfer and fluid flow studies are
to augment the heat transfer rates. Initial made to characterize the modified pin fins.
studies on heat transfer augmentation using
flat plate pins were done by Starner and NUMERICAL MODEL
Mcmanus (1963). This study was further In the present work, cylindrical pin fins are
extended for plate fin arrays by Harahap and placed perpendicular in a vertical base plate
McManus (1967). Several experimental and of dimensions 250×180×5 mm. The above
numerical analysis of plate fins followed setup is kept over a concrete block of
these initial results and attempts were made dimensions 340×450×100 mm. The whole
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:mvenkat@mech.sastra.edu 810

Venkatesan et al.
assembly is kept in a closed cubicle of ellipsoidal beads. The novelty of the present
dimensions 3× 3 × 3 m with top side open at work is in the analysis of pin fins with
ambient temperature. The material properties ellipsoidal beads.
and other conditions are specified in RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
[Balachandar et al., 2015].
A non-uniform meshing is applied to the In the present work beads are created inside
model where, mesh is extremely fine in the hollow region of the pin fin mentioned in
modelling the bead with the maximum size of [Balachandar et al., 2015]. The dimensions of
0.01 mm, whereas a tetrahedral mesh of the beads were less than that of the inner
maximum size 0.5 mm is applied to the rest radius of the pin fin. The beads were kept one
of the fin assembly. Other geometrical parts over the other with the bead in contact with
are discretised with a maximum element size the base plate being a half ellipsoid. This is
of 5 mm. A grid independence is performed done so as the increase the contact between
to ascertain the accuracy of discretisation. the heated surface and the beads. The
The following equations are solved using the introduction of beads is found to augment the
commercial CFD code ANSYS FLUENT©. natural convection heat transfer as a result of
increase in conduction when compared to
hollow cylindrical pin fin. It can be illustrated
by Figure 2 that the convection heat
conduction at the planar section along the
center of the bead is high. As a result the
temperature at the center of the plot with R=0
cm is the highest. But as one moves from the
center of the pin fin of the walls, the
conduction heat transfer decreases till the
wall. At walls, the conduction is the
maximum.
Figure 1. Side view of the present
geometry and heat sink
The Continuity equation:
∂u 𝜕v ∂w
+ + =0 (1)
∂x 𝜕𝑦 ∂z
The Momentum equation
∂u ∂u 𝜕u ∂2 u ∂2 u ∂2 u
u. + v. + w. = ν. ( 2 + 2 + )+
∂x ∂y ∂z ∂x ∂y ∂z2
g. β. ∆T (2)
The Energy equation
∂T ∂T 𝜕T ∂2 T
ρ. Cp. ( u. + v. + 𝑧. ) = k. ( +
∂x ∂x 𝜕𝑧 ∂x2
∂2 T ∂2 T
+ ) (3) Figure 2.Heat Transfer in Fins with beads
∂𝑦 2 ∂z2
The validation of the present numerical The maximum base plate temperature (which
model is described in [Balachandar et al., is a measure of overall heat transfer) of fins
2015]. Various pin fin geometries analyzed in with ellipsoidal beads is compared with the
the present work are solid pin fins, hollow annular, hollow and solid cylindrical pin fins
pin fins, annular pins and pin fins with are provided in table 1. In order to ensure a
811
Numerical Heat transfer analysis of Pin fin with Ellipsoidal beads
proper comparison, the radius of the pin fin is (higher air) to enter into the fin. The increase
kept constant at 10 mm for all the cases. in convective velocity causes an increased
heat transfer when there is a hollow space
It can be seen that fins with ellipsoidal beads
inside. However, when the introduction of
is found to be more efficient when compared
inner cylinder in an annular pin fin or
to other fins. Though conduction heat transfer
ellipsoidal beads with the present designs
was explained earlier to for the increased heat
provides a considerable amount of space for
transfer rate in fins with beads when
the convective fluid to travel. Moreover an
compared to hollow fins, the explanation is
increased heat dissipation occurs due to the
insufficient in comparison with annular and
conductive nature of inner cylinder in an
solid pin fins. It has been explained by
annular pin fin and beads in the present case.
Balachandar et al., (2015) that hollow pin
However, since the beads provide a higher
fins when optimized provides a better heat
surface area to volume ration when compared
transfer when compared to solid fins because
to the inner cylinder in an annular pin fin,
of the increase in convection heat transfer.
there is an increase in convective heat
The hollow space creates room for a
transfer.
considerable amount of convective fluid
Table 1. Comparison
Elliptical beads Annular fins with
Fin Type (with axes lengths inner cylinder radius Hollow pin fin Solid pin fin
5mm) 5 mm
Maximum Base Plate 170.8 181.2 190.3 192.4
Tempeature (ºC)
Heat transfer
coefficients (W/mK)
8.42 7.43 5.24 5.1
length is less when compared to y axis

It can be seen from the explanation that
length. This is also shown in Fig. 3. This is
multiple factors play a role in deciding the
due to the fact that the gravity acts in the
heat transfer in a pin fin. Thus, there is a
negative y direction. So the surface along the
requirement to arrive at an optimal bead
x axis lies normal to the y direction of
dimension to provide the maximum heat
buoyancy. Thus, the optimal value of the x
transfer augmentation. So in the present
axis dimension is less than that of the y axis
work, an initial attempt is made to study the
dimension. Analysis was carried out by
effect of axial lengths of the bead. Since
varying the number of beads. While varying
gravity acts in the Y direction in the present
the number of beads, it was ascertained that
case, the Y axis length of the bead is varied.
the total size of the beads along the z
The effect of variation in y axis length of the
direction equals the height of the cylindrical
base plate temperature is shown in Fig, 3 It
pin fin. It is found from the analysis that there
can be seen that with the increase in size
exists an optimal value of the number of
along the y direction, there is an increased
beads. As the number of beads increased, the
heat transfer owing to a larger surface area
contact area between the subsequent beads
exposed to both conduction and convection.
normal to the z direction decreases. This
However, after a limiting value, the heat
causes a decrease in conduction heat transfer.
transfer rate is found to decrease It can be
The effect of the number of beads on base
reasoned out that though there is an enhanced
plate temperature is shown in Fig. 4.
heat transfer due to conduction, yet the flow
It can be seen from the qualitative discussion,
path is blocked leading to decrease in
that the introduction of beads plays a
velocity of the convective fluid. This cause a
supportive role in the heat transfer
decreased convection rate. Further, it is
augmentation of pin fin. The design and
noticed from the numerical simulation that
analysis of the ellipsoidal bead dimensions
optimal value of dimension of the x axis
812
Venkatesan et al.
are also critical for the maximum heat REFERENCES

transfer augmentation. The optimal
ellipsoidal pin fins can be designed based on Starner K E & McManus H N 1963 An
the heat transfer analysis, which could experimental investigation of free-
provide an enhanced heat transfer when convection heat transfer from
compared with the existing pin fins. rectangular-fin arrays Journal of Heat
Transfer 85(3) 273-277.
CONCLUSION Harahap F & McManus H N 1967 Natural
In the present work, numerical analysis is convection heat transfer from horizontal
done to study the heat transfer characteristics rectangular fin arrays Journal of heat
of hollow cylindrical pins with ellipsoidal transfer 89(1) 32-38.
beads. It is seen from the qualitative analysis London A L & Shah R K 1968 Offset
of the numerical results that the cylindrical rectangular plate-fin surfaces—heat
pin fins with spherical beads provide an transfer and flow friction characteristics
augmented heat transfer when compared to Journal of Engineering for Gas Turbines
other cylindrical pin fins. The high surface to and Power 90(3) 218-228.
volume ratio of the beads causes an enhanced
convective heat transfer supported by Zhao Z & Avedisian C T 1997 Enhancing
considerable surface conduction. It is also forced air convection heat transfer from
seen from the parametric analysis that the an array of parallel plate fins using a heat
dimensions of the beads play a crucial role in pipe International journal of heat and
designing of fins to achieve maximum heat mass transfer 40(13) 3135-3147.
transfer. Turkyilmazoglu M 2015 Stretching/shrinking
190 longitudinal fins of rectangular profile
and heat transfer Energy Conversion and
185 Y axis length Management 91 199-203.
Temperature (ºC)
(X=5mm)
X axis length
180 (Y=5mm) Jubran B A Hamdan M A & Abdualh R M
1993 Enhanced heat transfer, missing
175
pin, and optimization for cylindrical pin
170 fin arrays Journal of heat transfer 115(3)
576-583.
165
0 5 10 Bahadur Raj and Avram Bar-Cohen 2007
Length (mm) Orthotropic thermal conductivity effect
Fig. 3 Effect of Y and X axis length of on cylindrical pin fin heat transfer
beads International journal of heat and mass
transfer 50(5) 1155-1162.
190
Agrawal S Simon T W North M Bissell D &
185 Cui T 2015 Heat transfer augmentation
Temperature (ºC)
of a channel flow by active agitation and

180
surface mounted cylindrical pin fins
175 International Journal of Heat and Mass
Transfer 87 557-567.
170
Balachandar C Arunkumar S & Venkatesan
165 M 2015 Computational heat transfer
0 2 4 6 8 analysis and combined ANN–GA
Number of Beads optimization of hollow cylindrical pin fin
Fig. 4 Effect of Number of Beads on a vertical base plate Sadhana 40(6)
1845-1863.
813
ICCMS2016
TOPOLOGY OPTIMIZATION OF PRE-MIXING ZONE IN A T SHAPED

MICROMIXER FOR ENHANCED MIXING
MADHUMITHA R.1, ARUNKUMAR S.2, RAVICHANDRAN V.3 and VENKATESAN M. 1*
1
School of Mechanical Engineering SASTRA University, Thanjavur, India
2
Indian Institute of Technology, Madras, India.
Abstract: Rapid mixing in micro channels is a pioneering area of interest among

researcher in chemical, biological and medical analysis fields. Two reactive fluids
essentially flow parallel to each other in microchannels as a result of very low
Reynolds number. Chaotic advection is in general introduced in the flow channel to
enhance optimal mixing. Majority of the existing works provide a method to induce
chaos in post mixer section region. But, such a micromixer requires a considerable
length for mixing. Moreover it induces considerable pressure loss in the mixed fluid.
The present work illustrates a finite element based topology optimization algorithm
for the design of pre mixer section for maximum mixing. A T-mixer section is used in
the present case and the two inlet surfaces of the T section (Pre mixing zone) are
modified using the algorithm. Surface modifications of micromixer are done using
porosity of the channel as the control variable and mixing index as the objective
function. The mixer section with surface modification is found to provide rapid
mixing between the two fluids
Keywords: T section; Rapid micromixing; Topology optimisation.
INTRODUCTION task of inducing the disturbance to achieve

rapid mixing between the fluids. Micromixers
Micro reaction engineering has wide
are broadly classified as Active and Passive
applications in the field of chemical and
micromixers. Active micromixers generate
biological reactions. High surface to volume
disturbance by application of external forces
ratio in microchannel favours high heat and
in the form of pressure, temperature,
mass transfer rates, making microfluidics an
electrical and magnetic forces.
important area of research. Micro Total
Analysis Systems (µ-TAS) is a portable Although easily controllable, yet there are
device that hold sensors, controllers and the few problems associated with the design of
mixing system in a single unit for chemical such micromixers. Passive micromixers are
synthesis. robust and easy to integrate as a single unit.
Passive mixers achieve rapid micro mixing
One of the challenge of micro reaction
by enhancing diffusion or chaotic advection.
systems is that the flow is highly laminar.
Some of successive designs of passive
Thus the flow of two fluids during reactions
micromixers include serial laminations,
is predominantly parallel. This brings in the
parallel laminations and zig zag
need to develop a device that induces
arrangements.
disturbances to the flow of fluids and causes
mixing. Modified Micro reactors perform the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:_mvenkat@mech.sastra.edu 814

Madhumithaet al.
But in all these designs, effective mixing fluids mix in a T-Section as shown in Figure,
happens occurs after the mixer section. Thus 1. The diameter of the channels investigated
the two fluids should flow together over a is 1000 microns with a total flow length of 22
mixing length. These causes a space mm. A mesh comprising of approximately
constraint and fabrication defects. More 15000 triangular elements is used. A
importantly, the pressure drop of the mixed preliminary grid convergence study was
fluid increases. made to ascertain the number of grids. The
numerical model for a given pressure inlet is
In the present work, an attempt has been
validated with analytical results for average
made to alleviate this problem. Two inlets
flow velocity. The objective of the present
sides forming the mixer section are modified
work is to obtain maximum mixing at the
in contrast to the conventional methods in
zone after T junction (post mixing zone). The
which the outlet side is modified.
control field zone in which the porosity is
One could easily observe that a lot of formal distributed on the two T-section inlets (pre
designs of obstacles were tried in the past. mixing zone). The entire numerical model
However, many such efforts required was created and tested using the commercial
considerable trial and errors and the operating FEM solver COMSOL MULTIPHYSICS ©.
range for each type of chaotic micromixer is
limited. Thus, a considerable amount of time
is spent on designing the shape of obstacle or
surface modification. This necessitates
computational design of micromixers.
Topology optimization is a paradigm using
which the material distribution along a given
space is optimized for a given objective
Figure. 1 Microchannel Layout
function subjected to specified constraints.
An earlier attempt to apply topological In the present work, a modification is done in
optimization to Navier-Strokes equation was the N-S momentum equation to formulate the
presented in. Simple T-Junctions are widely problem of topology optimization. A force
used for micromixing. However modifying term is added to the N-S equations that
the inlets is presumed to allow rapid mixing models scaled porosity. In the present work
of fluids. In the present work an attempt has scaled porosity is used to remove finite
been made to use topology optimization to elements from the microchannel. A scaled
arrive at an optimal surface modification of porosity (γ) is varying from 0 to 1 for the
inlets of T –junctions. The control variable geometry. Null value of γ indicates a solid
used in the present work to optimise the filled channel. If the value of γ is unity, it is
surface modifications is Scaled porosity assumed that the channel is open and
(discussed in detail later). The present streamlines can pass through that point. The
method is also aimed at bringing in a new numerical solver optimizes the microchannel
strategy that would ease the task of designers by assigning different values of γ to mesh
to arrive at optimal micromixer layout for elements to arrive at desired mixing level.
rapid mixing especially the layout that Eq. 1 shows the continuity equation. The
modifies the pre-mixing zone. momentum equation used is shown in
equation 2.
NUMERICAL MODEL
(2)
In the present work, a micromixer comprising
of horizontal microchannels having two inlets Here α (γ) is the forcing term where
and single outlet is modelled. The 2D (3)
numerical model used for numerical
experiments is shown in Figure. 1. The two
815
Topology Optimization of Pre-Mixing Zone in a T Shaped Micromixer for Enhanced Mixing
α max is a function of Darcy number modifications are absent. Figure. 2 shows the
(Da) as shown in equation 4. contour for mixing in the absence of any
surface modifications of the pre-mixing zone.
(4) It can be seen that nearly two separated fluid
Here q is the scaling coefficient and η is the zones for high and low concentration fluids
dynamic viscosity of the fluid. Mixing of two are seen from the contour. In order to
fluids is modelled by coupling the N-S quantify the result, the plot of mixing index
momentum conservation with Nernst-Planck with distance is shown in Figure. 3. As
advection-diffusion equation. The advection discussed earlier mixing index of 0 indicates
diffusion equation is shown in equation 5. absolute mixing. It can be seen that there is a
small decrease in mixing index as one moves
along the channel. This can be reasoned as
(5) the increase in diffusion between the two
Here D is the diffusivity of the medium and fluids with increase in distance.
C is the concentration.
Pressure inlet (100 Pa) boundary conditions
are applied to the two inlets and outflow (at
atmospheric pressure) is applied at the outlet.
The concentration at one inlet is considered
1000 and other as 0. Thus a concentration of
500 at the fluidic domain indicates complete
mixing. Mixing index is used to calculate the
extent of mixing at the post mixing zone. Figure 2. Concentration plot for
Mixing index of 0 indicates complete mixing. Conventional T shaped micromixer
|𝐶−500|
∑𝐸𝑙𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛 1.2
500
𝑀= 𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
(6) 1
𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑓𝐸𝑙𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑆𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 3
Mixing Index
The objective function for topology 0.8

optimization problem was to minimize the 0.6
absolute value of c-500 in the pre mixing 0.4
zone. The control field variable is γ which is 0.2
scaled porosity value. The constraints are 0
obtained based on inference from the 0 5 10 15
governing physics. The value of γ is Length from the point of mixing (mm)
constrained from 0 to 1 and the value of

concentration is constrained from 0 to 1000 Figure 3. Mixing index along channel
(the maximum and minimum value). The length
optimization and flow physics are solved The optimization solution is run till
together to obtain the optimal surface convergence and the surface modification for
modification for the maximum mixing. The the flow channel is obtained. The objective is
convergence criterion for optimization is to get the maximum in the section after T
taken to be 10-6. Sparse nonlinear optimizer junction (post mixing zone). The premixing
is used with Cholesky Quadratic zone is modified to achieve this. The surface
programming solver is used to solve the modification is shown in Figure. 4. The blue
optimization problem. coloured region indicates a non-porous
structure through which streamlines cannot
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION pass through.
Analysis is done to study the extent of
diffusion in the micromixer when the surface
816
Madhumithaet al.
CONCLUSION
In the present work, an algorithm for
computational design of rapid chaotic
micromixers are demonstrated and tested to
modify the shape of the premixing zone of T
shaped micromixer. Scaled porosity is used
as a control field parameter with an objective
Figure 4. Scaled porosity distribution to get maximum mixing at the post mixing
(surface modification) zone. The surface modified using the
Variation in mixing index for surface topology optimization algorithm is presented.
modified T shaped micromixer and that The resulting topology of T-shaped
without is compared and shown in Figure. 5. micromixer is found to be efficient as a result
It can be seen that the surface modified of surface modifications inducing a strong
micromixer attains 0 micromixing vortices downstream to the surface
immediately after the mixer section for the modification.
same inlet and outlet pressure difference.
Thus the pre zone surface modified REFERENCE
micromixer is more effective than
Jog C S Haber R B 1996 Stability of finite
conventional T shaped junction.
element models for distributed-parameter
1 optimization and topology design
0.8 CMAME130203-26.
Mixing Index
Convetional T shaped
0.6 micromixer Reyes D R Iossifidis D P-AAuroux A
0.4 Manz2002 Micro total analysis systems
Modified T shaped
micromixer Introduction theory and technology Anal
0.2
Chem742623-36.
0
0 5 10 15 Gan H Y Lam Y C Nguyen N T Tam K C
Length along the Flow channel(s) Yangn C 2007 Efficient mixing of
Figure. 5 Mixing index comparison.
viscoelastic fluids in a microchannel at
low Reynolds number Micro fluid Nano
In order to further focus on the effect of fluid 3 101-108.
surface modification on the flow, the
streamlines along the flow channel are Olesen L H Okkels F Bruus H 2006 A high
plotted in Figure, 6. level programming language
implementation of topology optimization
applied to steady state Navier–Stokes
flow International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering 65 975-1001.
Nguyen N-T Wu Z 2001 Micromixers—a
review JMiMi 15 R1.
Figure. 6 Streamlines plot

Strong recirculation stream can be seen
downstream to the surface modifications
which induces rapid mixing of the fluids.
817
ICCMS2016
COMPARATIVE STUDY OF COAL COMBUSTION IN AIR AND O2/CO2

ENVIRONMENT
RAJNEESH VACHASPATI1*, OM PRAKASH SINGH1 and RAY T. K.2
1
School of Engineering IIT-Mandi, India.
2
PMI, NTPC, Noida, India.
Abstract: The key factor for the world wide technological and infrastructural
development is availability of energy. The per capita electricity consumption pattern
is yard stick to measure the growth rate of any country. Coal has vital role to play in
meeting the global demand for energy as it is the most abundant, available and
affordable fuel. There are certain negative impacts of coal combustion as greenhouse
gas emission including carbon dioxide (CO2), particulate matter (PM), release of
pollutants as SOx and NOx, carbon monoxide (CO) which is a worldwide concern for
global warming and climate change. The oxy-coal combustion is the newer and
promising technique to address the concerns related with the greenhouse gas emission
due to coal combustion. CFD is a powerful tool to predict the valuable information
regarding the combustion of coal, flame temperature, NOx & SOx formation etc. under
variable operating condition. The objective of this work is to do the comparative CFD
based study of the performance of pulverized coal combustion in air and in the
mixture of O2/CO2 using commercial CFD code Star CCM+. The eddy break up model
and Discrete Ordinate model is used for turbulence - chemistry interaction and
radiation modelling. The gas phase have been modelled by Eulerian description, solid
phase i.e coal flow is modelled by Lagrangian description and empirical sub models
are used for char oxidation and coal devolatilization .Comparison of gas temperature
profile, NOx emission and CO emission have been made between coal combustion in
air and coal combustion in various O2/CO2 mixture. It has been found that gas
temperature and thermal NOx decreases in case of O2/CO2 combustion in comparison
with the air combustion at same coal flow rate.
Keywords: Oxy-coal Combustion; NOx Emissions; Computational Fluid
Dynamics
INTRODUCTION as SOx and NOx, carbon monoxide(CO)

which is a worldwide concern for global
More than 65% of electricity produced in
warming and climate change [Perrone, 2015;
India is from coal based thermal power
Toporov].
plants. Because of cheaper and abundantly
availability of coal makes it a major source For reduction of CO2 the technique is to re
for power generation in India as well as circulate the flue gas. Combustion of coal is
globally. There are certain negative impacts done in presence of oxygen and re circulated
of coal combustion as greenhouse gas flue gas. The oxy fuel combustion consists of
emission including carbon dioxide (CO2), burning the fuel in a mixture of near pure
particulate matter (PM), release of pollutants oxygen and recycled flue gas (RFG) as
818
Vachaspati et al.
oxidant which is mainly CO2.CO2 has higher REVIEW OF EXPERIMENTAL

specific heat in comparison with nitrogen in SETUP
conventional air fired combustion, oxy -coal
combustion found to lead the noticeable A laboratory-scale triple stream burner of
changes in flame temperature, chemical 16.3kW has been selected for this 2D
species concentration, and radiation heat simulation study. Pulverized coal is carried in
transfer in combustor [Perrone, 2015; Croise combustor by carrier stream which consists
Eric et. al. 2000; Rowan and Celik, 2015]. of gas mixture i.e. oxidizer (O2 / CO2
Due to absence of nitrogen oxy fuel mixture or Air). The secondary stream is
combustion leads for significant reduction in mixture of air and CH4.Methane is used to
NOx emission from pulverized coal assist the coal combustion. The tertiary
combustion. stream is air. The flow conditions and
composition of streams are given in Table 1
Advantage of oxy-fuel combustion in and Table 2 .
reduction of NOx emission is reported by
various researchers. Liu et. al. (2005) MATHEMETICAL MODEL AND
carried pulverized coal combustion in air and METHODOLOGY
mixture of O2/CO2 in a 20kW down-fired
Numerical 2D simulation of pulverized coal
combustor. They reported that by replacing
combustion under air fired and O2/CO2
the N2 in the combustion air with CO2 results
atmosphere has been carried out by a
in a significant decrease in combustion gas
commercial CFD software Star CCM+. The
temperature and NOx emission. The coal
CFD code used to model and simulate coal
combustion in a mixture of 30% O2 and 70%
combustion, temperature of gas, CO2
CO2produces similar result as with the coal
emissions and NOx emissions. The
combustion in air. Muto Masaya et. al.
Lagrangian and Eulerian approach is used for
(2015) carried CFD based simulation using
simulation of gas solid two phase flow.
Large-eddy simulation of pulverized coal
stream with O2/CO2 mixture as oxidizer in MODELLING GAS PHASE
place of air and investigated the effect of O2
concentration on NOx formation. They The multi component gas phase turbulent
reported that regardless of equivalence ratio flow is described by Eulerian partial
with increase in O2 concentration O2 differential conservation equations for mass,
consumption becomes marked due to rise in momentum, turbulence kinetic energy,
gas temperature which with higher dissipation rate, enthalpy and species mass
concentration of O2 enhances the oxidation fraction
𝜕 𝜕 𝜕 𝜕∅
reaction. The NO decreases in case of (𝜌∅) + (𝜌𝑈𝑖 ∅) = (Γ ) + 𝑆∅ + 𝑆𝑝∅ (1)
𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥
𝑖 𝜕𝑥𝑖 𝜕𝑥 𝑖
equivalence ratio larger than one (rich
mixture) due to lack of O2.and for MODELLING PARTICLE PHASE OF
equivalence ratio less than one (lean mixture) COAL FLOW
NO does not decreases due to prevailing In Star CCM+, the coal flow phase is
oxidizing atmosphere. In the present work a modelled by Lagrangian Discrete Element
pulverized coal laboratory -scale triple stream Method (DEM). The group of non interacting
burner of Balusamy Saravanan et. al. (2015); spherical particles are termed as parcels.
Muto Masaya et. al. (2015) has been used for Equations for exchange of momentum, heat
2D combustion analysis of pulverized coal in and mass transfer between particles and gas
O2/CO2 atmosphere and in terms of gas phase are solved.
temperature profile, NOx profile and CO
emission profile with varying O2 TURBULENT DISPERSION
concentration in mixture of O2/CO2 and
comparison with combustion in air. The turbulent dispersion is modelled through
RANS which uses a random walk technique.
819
Comparative Study of Coal Combustion in Air and O2/Co2 Environment
The standard k- model is used for turbulence combustion of methane and volatile gases
modelling and solid phase combustion which is
associated with coal devolatilization and
COAL COMBUSTION MODELS
further oxidation of residual char. The coal
Coal combustion simulation includes the gas used for simulation is El Cerrejon coal, and
phase combustion which mainly includes it's properties are given in Table 3.
Table 1 Flow Conditions
Parameter Carrier Secondary stream Tertiary stream

3
Volume flow rate (m / hr) 6 4 14.4
Mass flow rate (g / s) 1.9 - 2.6 1.25 4.74
Temperature 300 400 293
Bulk equivalence ratio ( 1.2 - 2.3 1
Table 2. Test Matrix
Volume flow rate Composition Bulk

Coal flow rate
Case
(g /s ) (m3 / hr ) (vol. % ) Equivalence
O2 / CO2 /N2 / CH4 O2 / CO2 /N2 / CH4 ratio()
A3 0.46 1.6 /0.0 / 3.8 / 0.5 30 / 0 / 70 2.63
O1 0.46 1.6 /3.5 / 0.3/ 0.5 30 / 64 / 6 2.63
O2 0.46 2.2 /3.0 / 0.3 / 0.5 40 / 54 / 6 1.91
O3 0.46 2.5 /2.7 / 0.3 / 0.5 45 / 49 / 6 1.68
Table 3. Coal Properties
Proximate analysis Ultimate analysis
VM FC Moisture Ash C H O N S
wt% 34.8 50.8 5.8 8.6 69.2 4.4 9.98 1.42 0.58
COAL COMBUSTION REACTIONS 𝐶𝐻4 + 1.5𝑂2 → 𝐶𝑂 + 𝐻2 𝑂 (6)

GAS PHASE The eddy break-up (EBU) model proposed
by Spalding (1971) is used for combustion
In gas phase combustion, the coal volatile are
calculations and to simulate turbulence -
modeled as
chemistry interaction.
𝐶0.403 𝐻1.157 𝑂0.164 𝑁0.027 𝑆0.0048 based on the
mass and energy conservations and RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
proximate and ultimate analysis data of coal
and the gas phase reactions are: EFFECT OF COMBUSTION MEDIA ON
𝐶0.403 𝐻1.157 𝑂0.164 𝑁0.027 𝑆0.0048 + 𝑂2 → 𝐻2 + GAS TEMPERATURE
𝐶 + 𝐶𝑂 + 𝑁2 + 𝑆𝑂2 (2)
Figures 1 and 2 shows the centreline gas
𝐻2 + 0.5𝑂2 → 𝐻2 𝑂 (3)
temperature measurements of coal
2𝐶 + 𝑂2 → 2𝐶𝑂 (4)
𝐶𝑂 + 0.5𝑂2 → 𝐶𝑂2 (5) combustion in air and oxy fuel combustion
with varying O2%. The results indicate that
820
Vachaspati et al.
flame temperature increases with increase in Higher oxygen concentration in O2/CO2 gas
oxygen concentration in the O2/CO2 gas mixture increases the NOx emission rate. An
mixture. From Fig. 2 for the case A3 (air increase in O2 percentage in mixture leads to
combustion) and O1 (oxy coal combustion)
increase in gas temperature which promotes
having same bulk equivalence ratio (the
the NOx formation further. From fig. 4 for the
flame temperature in case of air combustion
is more in comparison with the oxy coal case A3 (air combustion) and O1 (oxy coal
combustion. This is due to the higher specific combustion) with same bulk equivalence
heat of CO2 in comparison with nitrogen for ratio (the NOx emission is slightly more in
air combustion. case of A3 in comparison with Case O1. The
results shows that the majority of NOX is
2300 formed due to temperature in form of thermal
2100
NOx.
1900
1700 500
1500
T [K]
1300 400
1100 Case O1
900 Case O2
300
700
NO [ppm]
Case O3
500
200
300 Case O1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Case O2
100
Height [mm] Case O3
Fig. 1. Centreline gas temperature for 0

oxy - coal combustion. 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
2300 Height [mm]

2100
Fig.3. NO concentration for oxy - coal
1900
combustion.
1700
1500 500
T [K]
1300
1100 Case A3 400
900 Case O1
NO [ ppm]
700 Case O2 300

500 Case O3
200 Case A3
300
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Case O1
100
Height [mm] Case O2
Case O3
Fig. 2. Comparison of centreline gas 0
temperature distribution of air and oxy - 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
coal combustion. Height [mm]
EFFECT OF COMBUSTION MEDIA ON Fig. 4. Comparison of NO concentration

NOX EMISSION for oxy -coal and air combustion.
NOx emission represented here are in ppm. CONCLUSION

Figures 3 and 4 shows that there is reduction
in NOx emission in an O2/CO2 medium The flame temperature increases for higher
relative to that observed in air combustion. oxygen concentration in the O2/CO2 gas
mixture. For an equivalent oxygen
concentration, the flame temperature is lower
821
Comparative Study of Coal Combustion in Air and O2/Co2 Environment
for combustion in O2/CO2 gas mixture. The Conference of the ATI Engineering
flame temperature behaviour is critical for Association.
understanding pollutant emission as it is
Rowan Steven L and Celik Ismail B 2015A
temperature sensitive. With increase in Reduced Order Model for the Design
oxygen concentration in O2/CO2 gas mixture of Oxy-Coal Combustion Systems
the NOx emission increases due to thermal
Journal of Combustion Hindawi
NOX.
Publishing Corporation.
REFERENCES Toporov Dobrin D Combustion of Pulverised
coal in a Mixture of Oxygen and
Al-Abbas Hussein et. al. 2011 CFD
Recycled Flue Gas Elsevier 225
modelling of air-fired and oxy-fuel
Wyman Street Waltham MA 02451
combustion of lignite in a 100 KW
USA
furnace Fuel 90 1778 - 1795.
Balusamy Saravanan et. al. 2013 Flow field
measurements of pulverized coal
combustion using optical diagnostic
techniques Exp fluids 54:1534
Balusamy Saravanan et. al. 2015 Laser
diagnostics of pulverized coal
combustion in O2/N2and O2/CO2
conditions: velocity and scalar field
Exp fluids 56:108
Croise Eric et. al. 2000 Coal combustion in
O2/CO2 mixtures compared with air
The Canadian Journal of Chemical
Engineering 78.
Hu Yukun and Yan Jinyue 2013 Numerical
simulation of radiation intensity of oxy-
coal combustion with flue gas
recirculation International Journal of
Greenhouse Gas Control 17 473 - 480
Liu Hao et. al. 2005 Comparisons of
pulverized coal combustion in air and
in mixtures of O2/CO2 Fuel 84 833 -
840
Muto Masaya et. al. 2015 Large-eddy
simulation of pulverized coal jet flame
–Effect of oxygen concentration on
NOx formation Fuel 142 152-163
Okazaki K and Ando T NOx 1997 Reduction
mechanism in coal combustion with
recycled CO2 Energy 22 207 - 215
Perrone Diego 2015 A study of an oxy-coal
combustion with wet recycle using
CFD modelling Proceeding of 70th
822
ICCMS2016
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE EXPOSED TO BURNING

RAMANA P. V., BISHT K., PATHAK D. * and GUPTA R.
Department of Civil Engineering, MNIT Jaipur, India.
Abstract: In this study, some mechanical properties of high strength concrete under
the effect of fire flame exposure is presented. The concrete specimens were subjected
to fire flame temperatures ranging from (20-850°C) at different ages of 30, 60 and 90
days. Three temperature levels of 400°C, 600°C and 850°C were chosen of exposure
duration of 2.0 hours. After burning, the concrete specimens were quenched in a water
tank to provide the maximum shock due to sudden cooling. The test results showed
that the density, compressive strength, tensile and flexural strength decreases when
the fire flame temperatures were increased. mathematical models were proposed to
predict the compressive strength, splitting tensile strength and flexural strength of
concrete after exposure to fire flame.
Keywords: Concrete; Mathematical modelling; Mechanical Properties.
INTRODUCTION duration of burning. It was decided to limit

In the structural design of buildings, in the maximum exposure to fire to about
addition to the normal gravity and lateral 400°C, 600°C and 850°C with duration of
loads, it is in many cases necessary to design exposure to fire flame of 2.0 hours which
the structure to safely resist exposure to fire. cover the range of situation in the majority of
However it is usually necessary to guard elevated temperature test.
against structural collapse for a given period
MATERIAL AND MIXTURE
of time Shetty (1988). Several investigations
PROPERTIES
have shown that the deterioration in the
compressive strength of concrete under high In this investigation, the cement used
temperature exposure. There are indeed rare Ordinary Portland Cement (O.P.C). The
researches about temperature gradient and physical properties and chemical
exposure time of the concrete indirect contact compositions are presented. Crushed basalt
with the fire flames. In this study there is an (specific gravity of 2.65) having the
attempt to investigate the effect of maximum aggregate size of 10mm and river
temperature gradient and exposure of high sand (specific gravity of 2.62 ) were used as a
strength concrete to fire flames on coarse and fine aggregate content was 30% ,
compressive strength, tensile strength and by weight .
flexural strength of high strength concrete.
Three mixes were investigated mix 1
EXPERIMENTAL WORK consisted 535Kg/m³of cement. In mix 2, 20%
fly ash and 80% cement (O.P.C) (fly ash was
The experimental work was carried out to
replaced from cement). Mix 3 contained 90%
decide upon the temperature range and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: 2015rce9046@mnit.ac.in 823

Ramana et al.
70
(O.P.C) and 10% silica fume (silica fume was
65 Mix No.
replaced from cement). For all three mixes 60
Compressive Strength (MPa)

Mix 1
the water to cement ratio was kept at 0.30, by 55
Mix 2
weight. A constant dosage of super 50
Mix 3
45
plasticizers (1.0 % by weight of cement) was
40
used in all concrete mixture to obtain 35
workable concrete mixtures. 30
25
The specimens used for compressive strength 20
(100×100×100) mm cube and for tensile 15
strength (100 mm diameter by 300 mm long) 10

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
cylinder. The specimens used for flexural Temperature C
o
strength (100×100×500) mm prisms.

Figure 1. The effect of fire exposure
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION on the compressive strength of high
strength concrete at age 30 days and 2.0
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON hours period of exposure
DENSITY 70
Mix No.
65
Density shows the effect of the exposure to Compressive Strength (MPa)
60 Mix 1
55 Mix 2
fire flame on the density of high strength 50 Mix 3
concrete, while figures ( 1 to 3 ) shows the 45

40
relations between the fire flame temperature 35

30
and density of high strength concrete. It can 25
20
be seen from figures that the density behaved 15
as the following: 10
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
o
Temperature C
1. At (400,600 and 850°C) fire flame

temperature exposure and for all age and Figure 2. The effect of fire exposure
for mix 1, the reduction in density was on the compressive strength of high
ranged between (1.8- 2.8 %), (3.6-5.5%) strength concrete at age 60 days and 2.0
and (6.8-9.2%) respectively if compared hours period of exposure
with initial density before exposure to 70
fire flame. 65
Mix No.
2. At (400, 600 and 850°C ) fire flame 60 Mix 1

Mix 2
temperature exposure and for all ages 55
50 Mix 3
and for mix 2, the reduction in density
45
less than reduction in mix 1 was ranged 40
between (1.4-2.0 %),(2.8-4.2 %) and 35
(5.6-8.6 %) respectively . 30
3. In mix 3, the reduction in density less 25

20
than reduction in mix (1 and 2) was (1.0-
15
1.5%), (2.0-3.1%) and (4.2-6.8%) at 10
(400, 600 and 850°C) respectively for 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
o
700 800 900 1000
Temperature C
the same fire flame temperature. These
results confirmed that of Sri Figure 3. The effect of fire exposure
Ravindrarajah (1993) and Karim (2005). on the compressive strength of high
strength concrete at age 90 days and 2.0
hours period of exposure
824
Mechanical Properties of Concrete Exposed to Burning
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON concrete, considerable compressive strength

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH loss when exposed to fire flame temperature
The compressive strength results are is noticed. These result agreed with that
summarized in Table (1), while the Figure (4, obtained by other investigations, [Habeeb
5 and 6) shows the relation between the 2000 and Umran 2002]. It is observed that
compressive strength and fire flame the color of the concrete specimens changed
temperature for different ages. The to pink and increased in intensity. This may
compressive strength of the high strength be due to hydration condition of iron oxide
concrete dropped significantly as the component and other material constituents of
maximum temperature was increased. The the fine and coarse aggregates, [Habeeb
residual strength varied from (71-89%) of the 2000]. The surface cracks increased in
corresponding initial strength when the number length and depth due to temperature
concrete was exposed to the fire flame was rise.
400°C followed by sudden cooling in water. 70
65 Mix No.
As the temperature was increased to 600 °C, 60

Mix 1
55
the residual strength was ranged from (46- 50
Mix 2
Mix 3
81%) of the initial strength. At 850°C fire 45
40
flame temperature exposure the residual 35
30
strength ranged from (29-45%). 25
20
The results showed that the binder material 15
type has noticeable influence on the residual 10

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
strength. The concrete mixture containing z Temperature C

o
silica fume performed poorly compared to Figure 4. The effect of fire exposure on
the compressive strength of high strength
other binder materials. Although the silica
concrete at age 30 days and 2.0 hours
fume addition increased the initial strength of period of exposure
Table (1): Test values of compressive strength of high strength concrete for all mixes
before and after exposure to fire flame
MATHEMATICAL MODEL FOR The first step in the development of the

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF statistical analysis was the selection of the
CONCRETE variables include in model prediction.
825
Ramana et al.
1. The first model: 1. The density, compressive, of high

strength concrete decrease with
𝑓𝑐𝑢𝑎 = exp⁡(a × fcub − 𝑏 × 𝐴𝑔𝑒 − c × T − d
increasing fire flame temperature for all
× ρ + e) mixes and for all ages.
2. It was found that the loss in density of
Where: mix 3 less than that in density of mixes 1
and 2.
fcua = Compressive strength of the specimens
3. Concrete with silica fume suffered the
after exposure to fire flame temperature
most under increased exposure to fire
(MPa).
flame temperature below 850 °C.
fcub = Compressive strength of the specimens 4. High-strength concrete has shown 74%
before exposure to fire flame temperature drop in its strengths once exposed to
(MPa). 850°C irrespective of the type of binder
Age = The age of the specimens at the time of materials used.
exposure (days). 5. The reduction in tensile strength for
high-strength concrete mixes was (78-84
T = Temperature of fire flame (ºC).
%) when they were burned to 850°C.
 = Density of concrete before and after 6. Based on experimental results, an
exposure to fire flame (kg/m3). equation to estimate the compressive
a, b, c, d, e = Regression coefficients of strength of concrete after burning was
independent variables. suggested as follows:
2. The second model: 𝑓𝑐𝑢𝑎 = 1.21525 × fcub − 0.005178⁡ × 𝐴𝑔𝑒
− 0.039796 × T − 0.00470
𝑓𝑐𝑢𝑎 = a × fcub − 𝑏 × 𝐴𝑔𝑒 − c × T − d × ρ
× ρ + 3.423845
3. The third model:
𝑓𝑐𝑢𝑎 = a × fcub − 𝑏 × 𝐴𝑔𝑒 − c × T − d × ρ + 𝑒
Table 2. Regression coefficients for
mechanical properties of concrete after
burning.
Coefficient Model 1 Model 2 Model 3
A 0.032513 1.20969 1.21525 Figure 5. The difference between

observed compressive strength and
B -0.000364 -0.004753 -0.005179
calculated compressive strength
C -0.000957 -0.039192 -0.039796 compressive strength after burning in
D -0.000242 -0.003225 -0.004703 model (3).
E 2.88643 ------ 3.423845
REFERENCES
Variance
Explained 0.8547 0.9281 0.9283 Habeeb G M 2000 Residual mechanical
(R2) properties of high strength concreted
Standard 5.9184 4.1971 4.1595
subjected to elevated temperature Iraq
Error
November 2000 164.
Husem M 2006 The Effect of High
CONCLUSIONS
Temperature on Compressive and
Based on the results of this experimental the Flexural Strengths of Ordinary and
following conclusion can be made: High-Performance Concrete Fire
Safety Journal 41 155-163.
826
ICCMS2016
THE WASTE MATERIALS AS PARTIAL REPLACEMENT OF FINE

AGGREGATE IN CONCRETE-OUTLET
RAMANA P. V., MANISH M.* and KUNAL B.
Department of Civil Engineering, MNIT India.
Abstract: Concrete is the most widely used construction material. As concrete is

weak in tension and also have very less energy absorption, thus to improve the
properties of the concrete industrial by-products are taken into use as a replacement of
fine aggregates or cement. The use of waste materials such as shredded and crumbed
rubber, marble powder and glass is taken into account in the present work which
ultimately reduces the cost of construction. In the present work, performance of
concrete mixture with fine aggregate replacement 5% and 10% of rubber, 1%
replacement of rubber without NaOH coating and 1% replacement of rubber with
NaOH coating were investigated. If the proportion of rubber in the concrete is less
then strength of concrete is nearly equal to the control mix, but as the proportion of
rubber increases strength of concrete decreases, concrete up to certain proportion of
rubber can be utilized in structural applications. The present work also deals with
incorporation of glass waste which is retained on 600μ IS sieve at an increment of 5%
up to 40%. As maximum strength is achieved at replacement of 20%, now the work
deals with finding the optimum percentage in the range of 15% to 25% with an
increment of 1.25% at which the strength is maximum. The waste materials shredded
rubber, crumbed rubber, marble powder and glass which are using in concrete as fine
aggregate will conduct many experimental tests.
Keywords: Concrete; Shredded and Crumbed Rubber; Glass; Chemical
Composition.
INTRODUCTION and use of waste materials to a great extent.

Research & Development activities have been
The waste materials that are commonly
taken up even in India for proving its feasibility,
known are blast furnace slag, fly ash, solid
economic viability and cost effectiveness for the
waste, plastic waste and rubber waste use of waste materials in all the construction
(commercial waste). As the problem of activities. Discarded vehicle tires constitute an
disposing these waste materials became a big important part of waste material, which had
environmental problem, the proper utilization of
historically been disposed of into landfills.
these materials again in construction activities
The production of waste by the tyre industry
will be a great relief to the society. Some of the
has been a growing problem, indicating the
important elements in this respect are the
reduction of the consumption of energy and need for its reuse in the construction field.
natural raw materials, systematic consumption The concrete obtained by replacing
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:2015rce9046@mnit.ac.in

827
Ramana et al.
conventional (fine/coarse) aggregates with EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION

waste tyre rubbers in different volume or Materials used:
proportions is known as rubberized concrete.
Rubber can be added to asphalt, which Cement: Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC)
increases its durability and improve conforming to IS: 1489-1991. The specific
pavement quality and safety conditions by gravity of cement is 3.15.
absorbing the rubber elastic properties. Rubber: Shredded rubber and crumb rubber.
Rubber can also be used for concrete Fine Aggregate: Locally available river sand
pavements for light traffic. Over the years, was used conforming to Zone II of IS:383-
research is going on for the use of recycled 1970 was used as fine aggregate. The specific
tire rubber in PCC mixture as a possible gravity of fine aggregate is 2.66.
alternative aggregate (partially replacing Coarse Aggregate: 20 mm crushed materials
some part of aggregate).Rubber aggregates obtained from local quarry.
from discarded tire rubber in sizes 20-10 mm, Water: Potable tap water with Ph value of
10-4.75mm and 4.75 mm down can be 7.0±1.
partially replaced natural aggregates in Super plasticizer: FosrocConplast SP500
cement concrete construction also. complies with IS 9103:1999 and BS: 5075
Part3
Mix Proportions:
Table1. Mix proportions for crumb rubber per m³
Fine agg. Cement Sand Coarse Crumb Water w/c

replac. (%) (kg) (kg) agg. (kg) Rubber (kg) (l) (%)
0% 437 678 1049 0 197 0.45
5% 437 644 1049 34 197 0.45
10% 437 610 1049 68 197 0.45
1% 437 671 1049 7 197 0.45
1% + NaOH 437 671 1049 7 197 0.45
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS aggregate particles during mixing are

minimized.
Properties of fresh concrete Table2. Slump values for crumb tyre
The slump test of the fresh concrete is shown replacement
in table below. The highest slump was
obtained with concrete made 5% Sr. No Mix Slump (mm)
replacement. Finely ground crumb scrap 1 Mix 1 27
rubber has a relatively smooth surface and 2 Mix 2 41
round in shape, thereby enhanced the 3 Mix 3 49
workability of fresh concrete. This aggregate 4 Mix 4 36
requires less amount of paste to coat its
5 Mix 5 31
surface and thereby leave more paste for
lubrication so that interactions between
828
Waste Materials as Partial Replacement of Fine Aggregate in Concrete-Outlet
Properties of hardened concrete but with the addition of NaOH in crumb

The observations & results of the rubber strength increase progressively.
Compressive strength & Flexural test are
been tabulated here. CONCLUSION
Table3. Crumb rubber tyre replacement
1. The test results show that the use of rubber
results
aggregate in concrete mixes produces a
Compressive strength Flexural significant reduction in concrete compressive
Mix (N/mm²)
Strength strength, which increases with increasing
(N/mm²) at
3days 7days 28 days 28 days
rubber aggregate content.
Mix 1 15.85 22.45 32.66 31.65 2. If the amount of rubber in the concrete is
limited (1%), a normal strength concrete can
Mix 2 8.2 11.55 15.57 15.95
still be produced. Use of NaOH to coat the
Mix 3 4.9 6.75 7.82 9.15
shredded rubber contributes to a slight higher
compressive strength which can be thought
Mix 4 15.95 21.65 30.98 30.6 about for potential use in structural
applications.
Mix 5 15.8 22.1 31 31.05
3. Properties of crumb rubber as compared to
the conventional coarse aggregate are not
very encouraging. However an attempt to use
35 3days them in concrete as percentage replacement
30 7days can be done
25 28 days 4. As contrast to the specifications given by
20 IS 10262:2009, all the mixes were easy to
15 work with. It was found that rubberized
concrete mixes did not pose any difficulties
10
in term of finishing, casting, or placement,
5 and that a good quality finish can be achieved
0 although additional effort is required to
Mix 1 Mix2 Mix3 Mix4 Mix5
smooth the finish surface.
5. Increasing the rubber aggregate content
Figure.1: Compressive strength results
reduces the workability of the mix
40 6. Flexural strength of concrete with
28 days percentage replacement tends to increase
30
with decrease in the percentage replacement
20 of crumb rubber. However a greater
advantage is observed when crumb rubber is
10 treated with NaOH. This can be an
0
encouraging study which can lead to use of
Mix 1 Mix 2 Mix 3 Mix 4 Mix 5
crumb rubber for higher structural
applications.
Figure.2. Flexural strength results REFERENCES

From Figure1 it was noted that with
Eldin N N and A B Senouci 1993
increasing the percentage of crumb rubber Observations on rubberized concrete
in concrete the strength goes on decreasing
829
Ramana et al.
behaviour Cement and concrete Kamil Kaloush Doug Carlson George Way
Aggregtaes1574-84. and Mark Belshe 2004 Crumb Rubber-
concrete
El-GammalA K Abdel-Gawad Y El-Sherbini
http://www.precast.org/publications/sol
AShalaby 2010 Compressive Strength
utions/2004_fall/crumb_rubber.
of Concrete utilizing Waste tire
rubberJournal of Emerging trends in Mavroulidou M Figueiredo J 2010 Discarded
Engineering and Applied Sciences196- tyre rubber as concrete aggregate: A
99. possible outlet for used tyres Global
Nest Journal 1-5.
Eshmaiel Ganjian Morteza Khorami Ali
Akbar Maghsoudi 2009 Scrap-tyre Nimesh Sharma 2010 Tyre Recycling: The
rubber replacement for aggregate and new business on block
filler in concreteConstruction and http://dare.co.in/opportunities/manufact
Building materials231828-1836. uring/tyre recycling: the new business
on block.
Gintautas Skripkiunas Audrius Grinys
Benjaminas Cernius 2007 Deformation Segre N Joekes I 2000 Use of tyre rubber
Properties of concrete with rubber waste particles as addition to cement paste
additives Materials Science 13(3) 219- Cement concrete research 30(9)1421-
222. 1425.
Senthil Kumaran G Nurdin Mushule and Skripkianas G Grinys A 2005 Using tyre
M.Lakshmipathy2008 A review on rubber Waste for modification of
construction technologies that enables concrete propertiesArchitecture
environmental protection Rubberized Proceedings of conference Kaunas
ConcreteAmerican journal of Technology 132-137.
Engineering and Applied science 1(1)
40-44.
Hernandez-Olivares Barluenga Bollati
Witoszek B 2002 Static and Dynamic
behavior of recycled tyre rubber-filled
concrete Cement and Concrete
Research 32(10) 1587-1596.
J L AkasakiA C Marques M L Marques A P
M Trigo Bibliographical review of the
used tyre in concrete Universidad
Estadual Paulista (Unesp) Brasil
www.ppgec.feis.unesp.br.
Kersevicius V 2002 Rubber waste-Raw
materials for building: Technical and
economical aspect of
utilizationEnvironmental Research,
Engineering and Management 3(31)72-
77.
Kamil E Kaloush P E ge B Way P E Han Zhu
Geor 2005 Properties of crumb rubber
concrete Journal of the transportation
research board028-14.
830
ICCMS2016
MOLECULAR MECHANISMS IN SELF-FOLDING BEHAVIOUR OF

HYDROGEL NANOCOMPOSITE
MATHESAN S., RATH A. and GHOSH P.*
Nanomechanics and Nanomaterials laboratory, Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of
Technology Madras, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Hydrogels with unique response to the external environment can be used as
an environmental responsive sensor. Chitosan is a hydrogel which has the capability
to swell on absorbing large amount of water. The hydrophilic groups present in the
chitosan as well as in solvent medium are mainly responsible for the folding of
chitosan film during the swelling process. Initial studies on folding phenomenon have
confirmed chitosan could be a potential material for environmental responsive sensor.
This folding behavior is dependent on the mechanical properties of chitosan and it is
modified in the presence of nanoparticles. Also, the folding behavior is a function of
diffusion of solvent molecules and their interaction with chitosan. Molecular
Dynamics (MD) simulation is applied to understand the interaction mechanisms
between chitosan, nanoparticle and solvent medium. The folding behavior of chitosan
and its response time could be tailored based on the interaction mechanisms obtained
from MD.
Keywords: Self-folding; Chitosan; MD.
INTRODUCTION reported that mechanical properties of CS is

Stimuli responsive hydrogels are widely used enhanced in the presence of Hydroxyapatite
as sensors, which can retain large amount of (HAP) nanoparticles [Rath A et.al 2015]. The
water. The physical properties of stimuli presence of calcium and phosphate ions in
responsive materials are altered in the HAP plays a major role in diffusion of water
presence of pH, temperature or electric field molecules within the CS/HAP
[Johnson B D, et.al 2004]. These changes are nanocomposite. The self folding behaviour of
helpful in incorporating hydrogels into CS/HAP nanocomposite is influenced by the
different applications. Self-folding is interactions between HAP and solvent
observed in hydrogels when they are placed medium. In the present work, we have
in a solvent medium. Self-folding employed MD simulations to understand the
phenomenon is achieved due to differential behaviour of water at the CS/HAP interface.
swelling, interactions within the functional
OBJECTIVE
groups present in the system, porosity and
mechanical properties of the hydrogel The aim of this research work is to
[Fernandes R et.al 2012]. understand the possible interaction
Chitosan (CS) is a polysaccharide which is mechanisms which could alter the self
biocompatible and biodegradable. It is folding behavior of CS/HAP matrix in water
_____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: pijush@iitm.ac.in; 831

Ghosh et al
as shown in figure 1. Also we would like to In the presence of water molecules, the
understand the phenomenon of adsorption of interaction between CS and HAP is hindered.
water and desorption of chitosan from HAP. Water molecules are attracted towards
Understanding the fundamental principles is hydrophilic surfaces of HAP. The water
necessary for successful design and molecules diffuse through CS chains to reach
implementation of hydrogels as sensors the HAP surface. The amine group and
hydroxyl group present in CS are responsible
for the diffusion of water molecules.
Figure 1. Schematic to represent the

folding behavior and the interactions
between CS/HAP and Water
SIMULATION METHODOLOGY
Figure 2. Molecular model to represent
All simulations were performed using the interface between Chitosan, HAP and
LAMMPS [Plimpton S 1995]. Two chitosan Water.
chains, each of length 50 monomer units
were selected. Hydroxyapatite (HAP) crystal The oxygen in water molecule is attracted
has a hexagonal unit cell with space group towards the Ca2+ ion via electrostatic
P63/m and it was used to generate HAP interactions and it was confirmed using radial
nanoparticle. The chitosan chains were distribution function (RDF) as shown in
allowed to interact with HAP nanoparticle at figure 3. The PO 4 3- ion attracts water
300K. Then, CS/HAP system was solvated molecules via hydrogen bond formation as
using modified TIP3P water molecules as shown in figure 4.
shown in figure 2. The entire system was
equilibrated at 300K using NVT ensemble.
To understand the interactions, the system
was subjected to 1 ns (NVT) MD simulation.

It is observed that chitosan adhere to HAP
surfaces mainly through electrostatic
interactions. These interactions could reduce
the dihedral conformation freedom available
for chitosan. The above mentioned
mechanisms are responsible for enhanced Figure 3. Radial distribution function
mechanical properties in CS/HAP (RDF) between Ca2+ ion of HAP and
nanocomposites [Mathesan S et.al 2016]. oxygen of water molecules.
832
Molecular Mechanism in Self Folding Behaviour of Hydrogel Nanocomposites
REFERENCES
Fernandes R Gracias D H 2012 Self-folding
polymeric containers for encapsulation
and delivery of drugs Adv. Drug Deliv.
Rev. 64 1579–1589.
Johnson B D Beebe D J Crone W C 2004
Effects of swelling on the mechanical
properties of a pH-sensitive hydrogel for
use in microfluidic devices Mater. Sci.
Eng. C 24 575–581.
Mathesan S Rath A Ghosh P 2015 Molecular
Figure 4. (a) Electrostatic interaction mechanisms in deformation of cross-
between Ca2+ and oxygen of water (b) linked hydrogel nanocomposite Mater.
Hydrogen bond formation between PO 4 3-
Sci. Eng. C 59 157-167
ion and water molecules. Green-Calcium;
Red-Oxygen; White-Hydrogen; Yellow- Plimpton S 1995 Fast Algorithms for Short-
Phosphorous Range Molecular Dynamics J Comp
It is observed that water molecules tend to Phys 117 1-19.
have downward orientation facing the Rath A Mathesan S Ghosh P 2015
hydrogen towards oxygen of PO 4 3- and Nanomechanical characterization and
upward direction facing the oxygen towards molecular mechanism study of
Ca2+ ions of HAP (figure 4 a &b) [Zhao W nanoparticle reinforced and cross-linked
et.al (2014)]. The favourable orientation of chitosan biopolymer J. Mech. Behav.
water will leave the HAP surface surrounded Biomed. Mater 55 42-52.
with highly structured water, deteriorating the
interaction between CS and HAP surface. Zhao W Xu Z Yang Y, Sahai N 2014
This in turn affects the mechanical properties Surface Energetics of the Hydroxyapatie
of CS/HAP nanocomposites. Variation in the Nanocrystal − Water Interface: A
mechanical properties of the hydrogel alters Molecular Dynamics Study Langmuir
the folding behaviour of the hydrogel. 30 13283-13292
CONCLUSION
We have performed MD simulation to
understand the behaviour of CS/HAP
nanocomposite placed in a solvent medium.
In the absence of water molecules, CS
interacts with HAP. The interaction between
CS and HAP is affected in the presence of
highly structured water molecules around
HAP. Also, the CS chains tend to move away
from HAP surface. Thus interfacial water
plays a major role in determining the folding
behaviour of CS/HAP nanocomposites.
833
ICCMS2016
AN EFFICIENT LOCKING FREE MULTISCALE FINITE ELEMENTS

FOR FREE VIBATION ANALYSIS OF CARBON NANOTUBES
SINGH S.* and PATEL B. P.
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, Hauz Khas, India
Abstract:The four/eight noded multiscale membrane locking free improved discrete

Kirchhoff quadrilateral (IDKQ) shell elements are developed and employed to study
the free vibration characteristics of carbon nanotubes. The constitutive relation at
continuum level is derived through the Tersoff–Brenner atomic interaction potential
per unit area of a unit cell using Cauchy–Born rule. The membrane locking present in
the original interpolation of transverse displacement in circumferential strain is
eliminated by using the smoothed shape functions derived through least square strain
smoothing technique. The performance of the four/eight noded inconsistent/consistent
IDKQ elements is investigated and it is found that the four noded elements with
smoothed interpolation of transverse displacement in circumferential strain yield
accurate results and are computationally efficient. The present results are compared
with molecular mechanics simulations depicting the close agreement.
Keywords: Carbon nanotube; Cauchy–Born rule; Finite elements; Membrane
locking; Molecular mechanics; Free vibrations.
INTRODUCTION closed form analytical solution [Ghavanloo

The exceptional properties of carbon and Fazelzadeh, 2012]. The three
nanotubes (CNTs) accelerated their dimensional closed form solutions are found
engineering applications in to be almost close to those from beam models
sensing/actuation, load bearing members, for length to diameter ratio >20 Brischetto,
oscillators, manufacturing and medicine etc. (2014). Strozzi et al. (2014) employed
The mathematical modelling and analysis of Sanders–Koiter thin shell theory and
CNTs is explored as an efficient tool to Rayleigh–Ritz method for the free vibration
understand their structural behaviour. analysis of SWCNTs. The free vibration
behaviour of SWCNTs was studied
The one dimensional beam models and employing higher order Cauchy–Born rule,
analytical solution techniques were employed Tersoff–Brenner potential and moving
to study the free vibration behaviour of CNTs Kriging meshless method [Yan et al., 2013].
[Yoon et al., 2003; Zhang et al., 2005; Hu et
al., 2012] using elastic modulus of 1 TPa and The main aim of the present paper is to
~0.34 nm effective wall thickness. develop locking free four/eight finite element
formulation based on improved discrete
The effect of chirality and axial force on the Kirchhoff theory (IDKT) [Jeyachandrabose et
free vibration behaviour of SWCNTs was al., 1987] for the CNTs in the multiscale
examined using Flugge shell theory and framework. To avoid the membrane locking,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:mechmehal@gmail.com 834

Singh and Patel
the circumferential strain is interpolated respectively.The equation of motion of the

consistently using smoothed interpolation system is obtained usingHamilton’s principle:
functions obtained through least square t2
smoothing technique [Hilton and Campbell, ∫ (δ T − δΦ + δW )dt =0 (5)
1974]. The free vibration frequencies of first t1
few modes obtained from multiscale thin where δ T , δΦ and δW is first variation of
shell model are compared with molecular kinetic energy, strain energy and virtual
mechanics simulations depicting good work of transverse load Q respectively.
agreement. Finite element based discretized form of
equation of motion can be expressed as:
CONSTITUIVE LAW
 d Γ − δ dT BT  S d Γ
− ∫ δ dTe ρ UT Ud
The constitutive law is derived from
Γe
e e ∫ e M  e
Γe
interatomic interactions through Tersoff– (6)
Brenner potential using Cauchy–Born rule. + ∫ δ d e H Qd Γ e =
T T
0
Γe
The tangent constitutive matrix D relating where, d e is vector of elemental degrees of
incremental stress (ΔS) and moment (ΔM)
freedom,B is the strain/curvature–
resultant tensors with incremental Green–
displacement matrix, U is the interpolation
Lagrange strain (ΔE) and curvature(ΔK)
matrix of displacement field, H is the
 A B
tensors is expressed as: D =  T transverse displacement interpolation vector
D 
(1)
B andΓ e is area of a finite element. For free
where the matrices A, B and D are vibration analysis, considering the harmonic
expressed as: motion and no transverse load, the
−1 eigenvalue problem is expressed as:
∂ 2W  ∂ 2W   ∂ 2W   ∂ 2W 
= −     (2)
∫ ( −ω ρ U Ud + BT DBd e )d Γ e =
A 2 T
∂E∂E  ∂E∂η   ∂η∂η   ∂η∂E  e 0 (7)
Γ e
−1
∂ W  ∂ W  ∂ W   ∂ W 
2 2 2 2 Based on the convergence study, the spatial
=B −     (3) integration in Eq. (7) is carried out using 3×3
∂K∂E  ∂E∂η   ∂η∂η   ∂η∂K 
Gauss quadrature numerical integration.
−1
∂ 2W  ∂ 2W   ∂ 2W   ∂ 2W 
=D −     (4) FINITE ELEMENT DESCRIPRION
∂K∂K  ∂K∂η   ∂η∂η   ∂η∂K 
For the four and eight noded elements, the
The detailed expressions for the elements of in–plane displacements u and vin
constitutive matrix D can be found in strain/curvature–displacement relationsare
literature [Arroyo and Belytschko, 2002; interpolated through Lagrangian and
Singh and Patel, 2015].
serendipity interpolation functions,
GOVERING EQUATIONS respectively. The inter–element continuity of
w, ∂w/∂x and ∂w/∂y is enforced through
The deformation of a SWCNT as continuum
improved discrete Kirchhoff constraints
shell model having radius R and length L of
[Jeyachandrabose et al., 1987] on a
surface area Γ 0 subjected to transversely
quadrilateral element wherein the rotations
distributed load Q is represented by in–plane
∂w/∂x and ∂w/∂y are interpolated as:
displacements u, v and transverse
displacement w along x, y and z directions,
835
An Efficient Locking Multiscale Finite Elements for Free Vibration Analysis of Single Walled Carbon
Nanotubes
∂w 12  ∂w 12  membrane consistent (4NIDMC) element are

= ∑ Gi d wi , = ∑ H i d wi (16)
∂x i =1 ∂y i =1 obtained with 8×8 mesh whereas 64×64 mesh
~ of membrane inconsistent (4NIDMIC)
where d wi is ith element of the vector:
element is required for the converged results.
  ∂w   ∂w   In particular, the percentage difference of
d w =  w1 ,   ,   , w2 , ... (17)
  ∂x 1  ∂y 1  free vibration frequencies for (1,0)b mode
computed using 8×8 and 64×64 meshes of
where G and
i H are the interpolation
i
4NIDMIC and 4NIDMC elements is found
function for w in curvature–displacement to be about 36% and 0.5%, respectively.
relations [Jeyachandrabose et al. 1987]. Thus, the consistent interpolation of
circumferential strain significantly improves
the convergence rate of the four noded IDKQ
The convergence study for the free vibration shell elements. The quadratic interpolation of
frequencies of first five modes of 2.031 nm in–plane displacements (u, v) for eight noded
long simply supported (8, 0) CNT is given in IDKQ inconsistent/consistent elements
Table 1. It can be observed from Table 1that depicts the convergence rate similar to
the converged results using four noded 4NIDMC element.
Table 1: The free vibration frequencies of 2.0310 nm long simply supported zigzag (8,
0) CNT.
Active Mode (p, q)

Element Mesh b b
DOF (1,1) (1,2) (1,0)t (2,2)b (2,1)b
8× 8 296 2.2862 3.7875 2.6568 4.3993 4.9061
16× 16 1232 1.8457 2.8826 2.6440 3.4712 3.5777
4NIDMIC
32× 32 5024 1.7118 2.2845 2.6409 3.1016 3.3849
64× 64 20288 1.6766 2.1068 2.6401 2.9689 3.3630
8× 8 296 1.6553 2.1996 2.6568 3.0064 3.4022
16× 16 1232 1.6625 2.0840 2.6440 2.9432 3.3677
4NIDMC
32× 32 5024 1.6641 2.0540 2.6409 2.9282 3.3587
64× 64 20288 1.6645 2.0464 2.6401 2.9244 3.3564
8× 8 536 1.6717 2.1680 2.6398 2.9831 3.3590
16× 16 2224 1.6650 2.0500 2.6398 2.9168 3.3555
8NIDMIC
32× 32 9056 1.6646 2.0435 2.6398 2.9200 3.3556
64× 64 36554 1.6646 2.0437 2.6398 2.9223 3.3556
8× 8 536 1.6645 2.0433 2.6398 2.8959 3.3582
16× 16 2224 1.6646 2.0405 2.6398 2.9103 3.3554
8NIDMC
32× 32 9056 1.6646 2.0428 2.6398 2.9196 3.3556
64× 64 36554 1.6646 2.0436 2.6398 2.9223 3.3556
Yan et al. (2013)c 1.6075 1.8678 2.5660 2.7621 3.2449
MM simulation 1.7050 2.0684 2.7400 2.9574 3.5198
a b
Number of elements in longitudinal (x) and circumferential (y) directions, Bending
mode, tTorsional mode, cResults based on higher order Cauchy–Born rule.
836
Singh and Patel
CONCLUSIONS element functions using a least squares

method. International Journal for
The multiscale locking free IDKQ finite
Numerical Methods in Engineering 8 461–
elements are developed/tested for the free
480.
vibration analysis of CNTs.Form the detailed
study, the following conclusions are drawn: Hu Y G Liew KM and Wang Q 2012
Modeling of vibrations of carbon
• The four noded membrane consistent nanotubes Procedia Engineering 31 343–
computationally efficient as compared to 347.
other elements.
Jeyachandrabose C Kirkhope J and Meekisho
• The efficiency of the eight noded
L 1987 An improved discrete Kirchhoff
membrane consistent and inconsistent
quadrilateral thinplate bending
elements is qualitatively similar.
element. International Journal for
• The consistent interpolation of transverse Numerical Methods in Engineering 24
displacement in circumferential strain or 635–654.
quadratic interpolation in–plane
displacements significantly improve the Singh S and Patel B P 2015 Nonlinear elastic
properties of graphene sheets under finite
convergence rate.
deformation Composite Structures 119
REFERENCES 412–421.
Arroyo M and Belytschko T 2002 An Strozzi M Manevitch L IPellicano F Smirnov

atomistic-based finite deformation VV and Shepelev D S 2014 Low–
membrane for single layer crystalline frequency linear vibrations of single-
films Journal of the Mechanics and walled carbon nanotubes Analytical and
Physics of Solids 50 1941–1977. numerical models Journal of Sound and
Vibration 3332936–2957.
Brischetto S 2014 A continuum elastic three-
dimensional model for natural frequencies Yan J W Liew K M and He L H 2013 Free
of single-walled carbon nanotubes vibration analysis of single-walled carbon
Composites Part B: Engineering 61222– nanotubes using a higherorder gradient
228. theory Journal of Sound and
Vibration 332 3740–3755.
Ghavanloo E and Fazelzadeh S A 2012
Vibration characteristics of single-walled Yoon J Ru CQ and Mioduchowski A 2003
carbon nanotubes based on an anisotropic Vibration of an embedded multiwall
elastic shell model including chirality carbon nanotube Composites Science and
effect Applied Mathematical Modelling 36 Technology 63 1533–1542.
4988–5000. Zhang Y Liu GR and Han X 2005 Transverse
Hinton E and Campbell J S 1974 Local and vibrations of double walled carbon
global smoothing of discontinuous finite nanotubes under compressive axial load
Physics Letters A 340 258–266
837
ICCMS2016
DISPLACEMENT ANALYSIS OF A COMPLIANT MICRO-GRIPPER

USING PRBM AND FEA METHOD
DARAWADE P. B., SHENDGE M. P., DESHMUKH A. S., JAIN S. S., JOSHI R. S.*, MITRA A.C.
Mechanical Engg. Dept, M.E.S College of Engineering, Pune, India
Abstract: Day-by-day, the things in every field are getting reduced in size. There is
need to reduce their sizes, so that space can be utilized completely. Due to the
advances in technologies, particularly increased performance and cost reduction are
expected from mechanisms/machines in the service. Compliant mechanisms offer a
great promise in providing new and better solutions to many mechanical design
problems. This leaves us only choice of developing new mechanisms like compliant
mechanism. Compliant mechanism consists of a whole single structure without any
joint. The grippers of simple shapes can be easily designed & manufactured. Design &
analysis of the hinges are very important. The paper consists of the two design
methods most widely used for designing the compliant gripper including the FEA and
Pseudo Rigid Body Method. In this paper, comparison between two methods is done
& more optimized or more precise method can be decided. We get the more precise
results using PRBM method.
Keywords: Compliant mechanism; PRBM; Micro-gripper, MEMS
INTRODUCTION the relative flexibility of their elements rather

than rigid body joints [Li et al., 2013]. It
A mechanism is a defined as a mechanical
gains some or all of its mobility from the
device which is used to transfer or transform
flexibility of its components. As a result,
motion, force or energy [Larry, 2001].
compliant mechanisms could also be
Generally, traditional rigid body mechanisms
engineered from only a few parts, it means
are used to transform linear motion into
that the requirement for assembly procedures
rotary motion or force into torque and they
will be cut to a minimum. Compliant
consist of rigid links connected at movable
mechanisms are joint-less mechanisms which
joints. A rigid mechanism doesn't have
can transform or transmit motion or force
quality, therefore it doesn't perform any
through elastic deformation instead of
work, it merely transfers energy preserved
through hinges and sliders as in their rigid-
between the input and output. A compliant
linked counterpart [Limaye 2012]. Because
mechanism is outlined as a mechanism that
of their monolithic construction and superior
exploits flexibility from one or a lot of its
wear and loss properties, flexure joints are
members to realize controlled transmission of
accustomed cut back the size of mechanism
forces and motions [Ouyang et al., 2008].
and increase the accuracy of positioning. The
Compliant mechanisms are single – piece
compliance of flexure joints, however, the
versatile structures that transfer associate
static and dynamic characteristics of the
input force or displacement to a different
mechanism will be affected [Kang and Wen
purpose through elastic deformation. They
2006].
include fewer elements than rigid – link
mechanisms. In different words, some or all Compliant mechanisms are elastic continua,
of their motions are derived primarily from single-body which are designed to deform as
____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: prasadd0707@gmail.com 838

Darawade et al.
desired upon application of forces, like compliant mechanism. The compliant gripper
various joints, rigid-body mechanisms, they need simple design method and shape due to
transmit and transform force and motion manufacturing constraints. For handling
[Mankame and Ananthasuresh, 2004]. micro level objects in micro-electro-
Compliance was also used in earliest human mechanical systems (MEMS) needs precision
designs. Consider for instance bows and and accuracy this objective can be achieved
arrows. Bows are designed to store the strain by simple shape of micro-gripper, which are
energy provided by the archer. Strain energy easy to actuate and easy to experiment by
is then transferred to the arrow during the using simple MEMS components.
escape. The arrow is nothing but the
compliant to curve and oscillate during flight
to correct its trajectory [Juan Andrès Gallego
Sànchez, 2013].
Using PRBM approach, a micro-gripper was
proposed by Lin and Shih [Lin Chih Feng
Shih Chien Jong, 2011] and counter-link
lengths were optimized. Krishnan and
Saggere [Krishnan Sandeep and Saggere Figure 1. Circular hinge used in
Laxman, 2012] elaborated micro class PRBM
gripper for manipulation of complex shaped- In this paper, micro-gripper is proposed
small sized objects for any position and which is based on the PRBM for handling
proposed rotational flexures concept with micro-level objects. The circular type of
obtained a maximum geometrical advantage hinges have advantages over the other in
of 11.56. Flexural hinges design depends on stiffness and stress consideration so they are
capacity of rotation, precision of rotation, used in proposed work.
stress levels, energy consumption and energy
storage which is very significant. M. R. MATERIALS & METHODS
Arvind, A. Senthil and Bhat (2010) The dimensional constraint of a micro
developed a micro-gripper by considering the gripper is considered as (Fig.2.) 90 x 70 mm.
2D- Flexure hinge parameters of circular and There are various types of hinges like
elliptical hinges. The concluded the effects of circular, rectangular and elliptical shaped.
parameters and position of hinge on the
stiffness and output displacement of gripper.
Nah & Zhong (2006) designed and fabricated
a micro-gripper tested using Piezoelectric
actuator for wire and gear of various
displacement modes, with 170 microns stoke
and amplification factor 3 mm. Zubir &
Shirimzadeh (2009) developed a high
precision parallel jaw motion micro-gripper
by cantilever beam approach and using
PRBM approach and attended maximum jaw
displacement of 100 micron and
amplification factor of 2.85 and compared
results using FEM, they have also done
optimization of rigid links.
Fig.1. shows the parameters of a circular Figure 2. Gripper with input Force F
hinge. The PRBM technique is simple to O-fixed ends, F-input force, AB-input link
understand and apply on any lumped
839
Displacement Analysis of a Compliant Micro-Gripper Using PRBM and FEA Method
1 2 9𝜋𝑟 2.5 and analysis of compliant mechanisms.

𝑋 = 𝐹𝐿 (1) Hinge design plays a vital role in designing a
8 2𝐸𝑏𝑡 0.5
mechanism using PRBM which completely
Eq. 1 gives the deflection in output arms of a affects the output performance of the
gripper [Deshmukh et al., 2014]. For analysis compliant mechanism. The proposed gripper
purpose dimension taken as r=2.5mm, design can handle parts which are having
b=2mm, t=1mm and L=20 mm. The gripper dimensions less than 1 mm. and which
is analysed in FEA with material as steel provides sufficient gripping force to handle
because of spring properties it possess which the micro level objects. The manufacturing of
are most suitable for micro-gripper, strength gripper will be done soon and after
characteristics of steel Elastic modulus (E)= manufacturing on designed experimental
205 GPa, Poisson’s ratio= 0.3, Mass density= setup it will be tested for gripping force and
7,850 kg/m3. displacement. Thus the application of the
proposed work can be in the micro assembly
RESULTS tasks, bio medical field etc.
Table 1. Results of PRBM and FEA 0.25
displacement
Force PRBM FEA Error (%) Deformation (mm) 0.2
(N) (mm) (mm)

0.15
5 0.013963 0.01335 4.56366851 FEA
10 0.027926 0.02670 4.55975359 0.1
15 0.041890 0.04006 4.56105853 PRBM
0.05
20 0.055853 0.05341 4.55975359
25 0.069817 0.06677 4.56053655 0
30 0.083780 0.08012 4.55975359 0 20 40 60 80 100
Force (N)
35 0.097744 0.09348 4.56031284
Fig 3. Comparison of displacement in
40 0.111707 0.10684 4.55583896
PRBM an FEA
45 0.125670 0.12019 4.56018856
50 0.139634 0.13354 4.56366851
REFERENCES
55 0.153597 0.14690 4.55939770
60 0.167561 0.16025 4.56236350
Deshmukh Bhagyesh Pardeshi Sujit Mistry
65 0.181524 0.17361 4.55885018
Roohshad Kandharkar Sachin Wagh
70 0.195488 0.18696 4.56143137
Santosh 2014 Development of a Four
75 0.209451 0.20032 4.55844868
bar Compliant Mechanism using Pseudo
80 0.223414 0.21367 4.56073229
Rigid Body Model (PRBM) Procedia
Fig 3 shows Force Vs. displacement by Materials Science 6 1034 – 1039.
PRBM and FEA results. It clearly shows Howell Larry L 2001 Compliant Mechanisms
displacements are in close agreement with A Wiley-Interscience Publication John
each other. Wiley & Sons.
DISCUSSION Juan Andrès Gallego Sànchez 2013 Statically
Balanced Compliant Mechanisms Theory
The gripper developed using PRBM for
and Synthesis ISBN 978-94-6186-215-0.
displacement model and validated using
FEA. The shape of the gripper comprises of Kang Byoung Hun John T Wen 2006 Design
simple geometrical shapes which are of Compliant MEMS Grippers for
integrated to form final geometry necessary Micro-Assembly Tasks Intelligent
to obtain the desired deformation which is Robots and Systems IEEE/RSJ
put in to use for gripping purpose. The International Conference 1-4244-0259-
PRBM technique is very simple for design X 760-765.
840
Darawade et al.
Krishnan Sandeep Saggere Laxman 2012 Mohd Nashrul Mohd Zubir, Bijan
Design and development of a novel Shirinzadeh 2009 Development of a high
micro-clasp gripper for precision flexure-based microgripper
micromanipulation of complex-shaped Precision Engineering 33 362-370.
objects Sensors and Actuators A Nah S K Zhong Z W 2006 A microgripper
Physical 176 110-123. using piezoelectric actuation for micro-
Li Y Huang X Xie Y M Zhou S W 2013 object manipulation Sensors and
Evolutionary topology optimization of Actuators A: Physical 133 218-224.
hinge-free compliant mechanism Ouyang P R Tjiptoprodjo R. C Zhang W J
International Journal Of Mechanical Yang G S 2008 Micro-motion devices
Sciences 86 69-75. technology: The state of arts review The
Limaye Padmanabh Ramu G Pamulapati International Journal of Advanced
Sindhuja Ananthasuresh G K 2012 A Manufacturing Technology 38 463-478.
compliant mechanism kit with flexible Raghavendra Aravind M R Kumar A Senthil,
beams and connectors along with Bhat Nikhil Jagdish 2010 Design and
analysis and optimal synthesis analysis of flexure-hinge parameters in
procedures Mechanism and Machine Micro-gripper The International Journal
Theory 49 21-39.
of Advanced Manufacturing Technology
Lin Chih Feng Shih Chien Jong 2011 49 1185-1193.
Multiobjective design optimization of
flexure hinges for enhancing the NOTATIONS
performance of micro‐compliant X Displacement (mm)
mechanisms Journal of the Chinese
Institute of Engineers 28 999-1003. L Length of input link (mm)
r Radius of semicircular hinge (mm)
Mankame Nilesh D Ananthasuresh G K 2004
Topology optimization for synthesis of b Thickness of structure (mm)
contact-aided compliant mechanisms t Web thickness (mm)
using regularized contact modeling
Computers and Structures 45(1) 24.
841
ICCMS2016
ADAPTIVE MULTISCALE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD FOR

SIMULATION OF HETEROGENEOUS MATERIAL
PATIL R.*, MISHRA B. K. and SINGH I. V.
Abstract: In present work, the XFEM is coupled with multiscale finite lement
(MsFEM) to analyse mechanical behaiviour of heterogeneous materials. The materials
are heterogeneous at micro level and homogeneous at macro level. The effect of
heterogeneities such as voids, interfaces and cracks present at micro level in material
need to be considered.To model such defects at small scale, the XFEM is deployted in
conjunction with level set to avoid conformal meshing or remeshing. The MsFEM is
used to capture overall behaviour of material. In MsFEM, small scale heterogeneity of
macro elements in FEM are captured by numerically evaluated the base functions.
The efficiency of the method is governed by the boundary conditions used for
determination of the base functions. The capability of developed MsXFEM is
validated for periodic heterogeneityat small scale. The results show that MsXFEM
can efficiently provide macro response of microscopically heterogeneous structure.
Keywords: FEM; MsFEM; XFEM; MsXFEM.
INTRODUCTION of the macroscopic effective properties of

Most of engineering and naturally occurring heterogeneous materials has become an
materials have multiple scales. These essential problem in many engineering
materials are heterogeneous at a particular applications.
length scale. These heterogeneities have Recently, a new multiscale method, which is
major impact on their macroscopic called the multiscale finite element method
mechanical behaviors e.g. composite (MsFEM), was developed by Zhang et al.,
materials have reinforcing phases (particles (2010) for solving solid mechanical problems
and fibers) may be distributed in the matrix of multiple scale features. The method can be
randomly. The reinforcing phase significantly conveniently implemented to capture the
enhances the overall mechanical performance macroscopic response of material having
of materials as well as gives rise to multiscale heterogeneities such as voids, interfaces and
fluctuations in the mechanical properties. The micro cracks. The problems are analyzed
direct numerical method will encounter without scale separation and periodicity
difficulties when used to solve these assumptions. The micro scale discontinuities
multiscale problems due to the tremendous are modelled using Extended Finite Element
requirement of computer memory and CPU Method (XFEM) Beltyschko et al., (2001) to
time. On the other hand, in engineering avoid the conformal meshing at the
practice, it will be sufficient to obtain the boundaries of such discontinuities. As the
macroscopic solutions of the multiscale simulation of several discontinuities/defects
material structures. Therefore, determination
____________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: patildme@gmail.com 842

Patil et al.
using FEM becomes quite cumbersome. In where N is the matrix of multiscale base
this method, the modeling of a crack growth functions, u is the displacement vector of
and arbitrary discontinuities is performed by nodes on the small scale meshes within the
enriching the standard FE approximation unit cell, and u E is the displacement vector
function. The level set function Stolarska et of nodes on the coarse scale level.
al., (2001) is used to identify the location of Γt 4 3
the defects in the small scale mesh. The e4 e
actual small scale stress and strain within the
e1 e
coarsescale elements can be obtained Ω
simultaneously along with the macroscopic 1 2
Sub-
displacement field by means of downscaling
ΩK
computation.
y
METHODOLOGY
Ω
The main difference between the standard x Γ
FEM and MsFEM is the construction of the Figure 1. Schematic description of the MsFEM
base functions. The base functions used in the
u = {u1 v1 u2 v2 .. .. un vn }
standard FEM are constructed according to T
the coordinate values of the nodal points of (3)

{ }
T
the elements. N = R1T R2T .. RnT
The equilibrium equations (Zhang et al., (4)
u E = {u1 v1 u2 v2 u3 v3 u4 v4 }
T
2010)of two–dimensional domain shown in
(5)
Figure1 is given by
 N1 xx (i ) N1 xy (i ) . . . . . N 4 xy (i ) 
∇. σ + b = 0 in Ω (1a) Ri =  
σ .nˆ = t on Γt (1b)  N1 yx (i ) N1 yy (i ) . . . . . N 4 yy (i ) 
(i = 1, 2,........., n )
u = u on Γu (1c)
(6)
where, σ is the Cauchy stress tensor, u is the n is the total number of nodes on the small
displacement field, b is the vector of body scale mesh within the unit cell. It should be
force per unit volume, and n̂ is the unit noted that, for materials with periodic
outward normal. The displacements are microstructures, the multiscale base functions
prescribed on Γu , tractions are prescribed on need to be constructed only once on the unit
Γt . Strain displacement relations are given cell and are used for all the coarse elements.
The equivalent stiffness matrix of the coarse
as: ε = ε(u) = ∇ s u .The constitutive relation
element can be expressed as the following
for the elastic material is given by Hooke's form
law σ = D ε where, D is the Hooke’s tensor. p
=
The multiscale base functions of the element K E ∑= Ke K e GeT K eGe (7)
e =1
are constructed by solving the equilibrium
Eq. (1) in the sub–region Ω K with special
boundary conditions (Zhang et al., 2010).
The small scale displacement fields within a
particular coarse element can be given as
u = N uE (2)
843
Adaptive Multiscale Finite Element Method for Simulation of Heterogeneous Material
= ∫ Be De Betd Ωe , microstructures, the base functions of coarse

T
where K e is the stiffness
Ωe element (unit cell) constructed once and then
matrix of small scale element. G e is a adopted for all elements. Thus, the MsFEM is
transition matrix Ge = [ Re1 Re 4 ] . very convenient for the analysis of periodic
T
Re 2 Re 3
composite materials.
The XFEM approximation presented in the
general form with usual meaning as (Singh et y
al.,2012):
n   x
u (x) = ∑ N i (x) ui + φ (x) a i  (8)
h
 H P
i =1   
 i∈nr 
L
RESULTS
Figure 2.The cantilever beam and its
Consider a heterogeneous cantilever beam boundary conditions
having L = 120 unit and H = 24unit as shown
in Figure 2which is composed of20 × 4
periodic unit cells. The microscopic FE
model of a unit cell is shown in Figure 3.
Unit cell contains a hard inclusion of
diameter 1.5unit, void of diameter 1 unit and
a microcrack of length 2 unit with inclination 6
of 30 degrees with horizontal. The Young’s
moduli of matrix and hard inclusion are E =
200×103and 200×104respectively and
Poisson’s ratio is μ = 0.3. The displacement
boundary condition on beam as shown in
Figure 2 and a parabolically distributed load
6
(P) of 1000 magnitude is applied on the right
side. The beam is analyzed using developed Figure 3.Microscopic FE model (sub-
MsXFEM MATLAB code and commercially grids) of the unit cell
available FE software Abaqus in which entire
domain is meshed with fine mesh having
approximately 16000 elements. The
numerical basis functions are obtained by
using both Linear (MsXFEM-L) and periodic
(MsXFEM-P) boundary condition. The y-
direction displacements along the neutral axis
of the structure obtained by the both methods
are shown in Figure 4.It is observed that the
results obtained by the MsXFEM-P and FEM
are in good agreement. Figure 5 shows the
Figure 4. The y-direction displacements
distributions of microscopic longitudinal
of the nodes along the neutral axis of
stress (σ xx ) in beam obtained by MsXFEM.
the beam
Note that, for the materials with periodic
844
Patil et al.
REFERENCES
Beltyschko T Moes N Usui S and Parimi C
2001 Arbitrary discontinuities in finite
elements International Journal for
Figure 5.Microscopic σxx stress of overall Numerical Methods in Engineering 50
structure 993-1013.
Singh I V Mishra B K Bhattacharya S and
CONCLUSION Patil R U 2012 The Numerical
Simulation of Fatigue Crack Growth
The XFEM is coupled with MsFEM to Using Extended Finite Element Method
analyse mechanical behaiviour of International Journal of Fatigue 36
heterogeneous material. The MATLAB code 109-119.
is developed and the multiscale base Stolarska M Chopp DMoes N and
functions are constructed numerically to Belytschko T 2001 Modelling crack
capture the small scale features induced due growth by level sets in the extended
to heterogeneities using linear and periodic finite element method International
boundary conditions. The small scale features Journal for Numerical Methods in
are modelled easily and efficiently using
XFEM. The numerical example shows that Zhang H WWu J K and Fu Z D 2010
the materials with periodic microstructures Extended multiscale finite element
method for elasto-plastic analysis of 2D
can be analyzed very accurately and
periodic lattice truss materials
efficiently as base functions are evaluated for Computational Mechanics 45 623–635.
one macro element by MsXFEM. It is also
Zhang H WWu J KLU J and Fu Z D 2010
found that the periodic boundary condition Extended multiscale finite element
results are well consistent with FEM results. method for mechanical analysis of
Hence, this method has a great potential to heterogeneous materials Acta
analyze periodic composite materials. Mechanica Sinica 26 899–920.
845
ICCMS2016
INELASTIC SEISMIC RESPONSE OF ASYMMETRIC BUILDINGS

RAUT R.* and MADHEKAR S.1
*1
Structural Engineering, College of Engineering Pune, India.
2
Applied Mechanics, College of Engineering Pune, India.
Abstract: The eccentricity between center of mass and center of stiffness produces
torsion in asymmetric buildings during earthquakes. In this paper, the inelastic seismic
behaviour of asymmetric-plan buildings is studied by using the histories of base shear
and torque (BST) surfaces. BST surface represents all combinations of shear and
torque when applied statically, lead to collapse of the structure. The two single storey
buildings are considered, one with symmetric in plan and another with strength
asymmetry in plan. The BST surfaces are drawn for these buildings. This BST
surfaces give maximum capacity of building with respect to base shear and torque
combinations. BST surface gives general information for understanding the behaviour
of asymmetrical buildings even before their dynamic analysis. Comparing the BST
surfaces of Symmetric and Asymmetric building having same capacity, it has been
found that some elements of asymmetric building enter into inelastic state prior to
those in symmetric building
Keywords: Asymmetrical building; torsion; base shear and torque surfaces;
inelastic analysis; dynamic analysis.
INTRODUCTION structural configurations. These histories are

A lack of asymmetry produces torsional represented in the force space spanned by the
effects which are difficult to identify and can base shear Vx andVy in x and y directions
be very adverse. Buildings with an respectively, and base torque T. At each
asymmetric distribution of stiffness and instant of the response the base shear and
strength in plan undergo coupled lateral and torque define one point in this space. These
torsional motions during earthquake. Because combinations of base shear and torque are
of torsion, the seismic demand of asymmetric bound in this space by a surface denoted
buildings increases than those of symmetric hereafter as the BST (base shear and torque)
buildings. Even though asymmetric structures ultimate surface. The BST surface is defined
are provided with ductility capacity similar to by the set of base shear and torque
that of symmetric structures, they may combinations corresponding to the different.
collapse in moderate earthquakes. Hence it is Collapse mechanisms that can be developed
important to study the behaviour of in the structures.Chopra (1995) have done
asymmetric buildings in inelastic range. The pioneeringworkon BST Surface. Dj. Z.
most fundamental concept used in this Ladjinovic and R. J. Folic (2008) explained
investigation is to study the effects of plan nonlinear seismic analysis of asymmetric
asymmetry by considering the base shear and
torque response histories of different
______________________
*Author for correspondence: E-mail:_rushikeshr2@gmail.com 846

Raut and Madhekar
building using BST surface and factors that X4 = - Vy0 ̂)

Y4 = - Vy0xp + Tɹ( 1- 𝑉𝑥
determine the shape of BST surface.
X5 = - X1 , X6 = - X2 , X7 = - X3 ,
BASE SHEAR AND TORQUE (BST) X8 = - X4 , Y5 = - Y1 , Y6 = - Y2 ,

ULTIMATE SURFACE
Y7 = - Y3 , Y8 = - Y4.
BST surface defines all combinations of base
shear and torque that, when applied statically where,
lead to collapse of the system. BST surface is ̂ = Vx / Vx0 is the normalized storey
1. 𝑉𝑥
divided into two regions. shear in x-direction;
Interior - combinations of the base shear and 𝑀
Vx0 = ∑𝑖=1 𝑓𝑥 (𝑖) is the lateral capacity
torque representing elastic behaviour of the
structure. of the storey in x-direction;
Exterior – containing statically inadmissible 𝑓𝑥 (𝑖) is the capacity of the ith resisting
base shear and torque combination. plane in x- direction and M is the number
of resisting planes in the x- direction.
The BST surface is the boundary between 𝑁
these two regions as shown in Figure 1. All 2. Vy0= ∑𝑖=1 𝑓𝑦 (𝑖) is the lateral capacity
the inelastic action of system takes place on of the storey in the y-direction;
the boundary of this surface. 𝑓𝑦 (𝑖) Is the capacity of the ith resisting
plane in the y-direction and N is the
number of resisting planes in y direction
3. Vyc = Is the capacity of the resisting
planes in y-direction passing through the
center of mass of the system.
𝑁
4. T0 = ∑𝑖=1|𝑓𝑦 (𝑖) 𝑥 (𝑖) | +
𝑀
∑𝑖=1|𝑓𝑥 (𝑖) 𝑦 (𝑖) | is the torsional capacity
of the system.
𝑀
5. Tɹ =∑𝑖=1 𝑓𝑥 (𝑖) 𝑦 (𝑖) is the torque provided
by the resisting planes in the orthogonal
direction.
𝑁
6. xp= ∑𝑖=1 𝑓𝑦 (𝑖) 𝑥 (𝑖) / Vy0 is the strength
eccentricity, also referred as first moment
Figure 1. BST surface showing interior of strength.
𝑀
and exterior regions 7. Vyu = ∑𝑖=1,𝑖≠2 𝑓𝑥 (𝑖) 𝑦 (𝑖) / |𝑥 (𝑖) | is the
strength imbalance in the system
DEVELOPMENT OF BST SURFACE
METHODOLOGY
Juan c. De la llera and Anil K. Chopra (1995)
have presented equations to draw BST BST surface for symmetric single storey
surface. The coordinates of BST surface are building
given by eq. (1) BST surface for symmetric single storey
building is drawn by using Eq. (1).The
̂)
X1 = Vy0 ,Y1 = Vy0xp + Tɹ ( 1- 𝑉𝑥 Building has plan dimensions of 18m x 9m as
̂
X2 = Vyu + Vyc Y2 = T0 - Tɹ𝑉𝑥 shown in Figure 2. Resisting planes 1, 2,3,4,5
are taken of dimensions 7m x 0.25m by
̂
X3=Vyu -VycY3=T0-Tɹ𝑉𝑥 (1) considering future expansion of building.
847
Inelastic seismic response of asymmetrical buildings
Considering minimum reinforcement of Figure 5. The strength eccentricity ep= (f x

0.25% in resisting planes, and concrete 9)( 1 / 2 -2 ) / ( 3f ) = -4.5 m
M30.shear stress of 0.37 N/mm2 is calculated
from IS 456:2000, using percentage
reinforcement and grade of concrete. Shear
strength of resisting planes is calculated as f
= 0.37 x 7 x 0.25 = 647.5kN
Figure 4. Single storey building with

strength asymmetry in plan
Figure 2. Single storey Symmetric

building in plan
Figure 5. BST surface for single storey

building with strength asymmetry in plan
CONCLUSION
Figure 3. BST surface for single storey In strength asymmetric building, from BST
building with Symmetry in plan surface strongest resisting plane remains
essentially elastic, while other planes yield
BST surface for single storey building with significantly. BST surface helps to
strength asymmetry in plan understand the behaviour of asymmetric
The asymmetry is produced by changing the building eliminating the need of dynamic
shear strength of resisting plane 1 from f to 2f analysis.By simply calculating the shear
and for resisting planes 2 and 3 from f to f/2 strength of building columns, behaviour of
.Due to asymmetry, there is change in any building can be understood by BST
orientation of BST surface as shown in surface. Thus, plotting BST surface proves to
be a simple tool, to get reasonably accurate
848
Raut and Madhekar
estimation of base shear and torque capacity

of plan symmetric and plan asymmetric
buildings.
REFERENCES
Dj Z Ladjinovic and R J Folic 2008
Nonlinear seismic analysis of
asymmetric in plan buildings The 14th
world conference on earthquake
engineering October 12-17 Beijing
china.
IS 456 -2007 Plain and Reinforced concrete
code of practice BIS.
Juan C De la llera and Anil K Chopra 1995 A
simplified model for analysis and design
of Asymmetric-plan buildings
Earthquake engineering and structural
dynamics 24 573-594.
Juan C. De La llera and Anil K Chopra 1995
Understanding the inelastic seismic
behaviour of Asymmetric-plan buildings
Earthquake engineering and structural
dynamics 245 49-572.
849
ICCMS2016
SEISMIC VULNERABILITY ASSESSMENT OF RC FRAMES USING

FRAGILITY CURVES
BHENDE S. and PEDNEKAR S.
Department of Structural Engineering, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Earthquakes are the most devastating natural phenomenon in terms of life
and property of any region. The damage occurred due to recent earthquakes has
demonstrated the need of seismic vulnerability assessment of RC buildings. This paper
focuses on vulnerability assessment of RC buildings by using fragility curves.
Fragility curves provide the uncertain probability of structural response when
subjected to earthquake loads as a function of ground motion intensity. A conventional
method such as High Dimensional Model Representation Method (HDMR) or
Cornell’s method involves development of large number of computational models for
the generation of fragility curves. Therefore, in this paper, the guidelines given by
HAZUS technical manual have been used for the generation of fragility curves. A
twenty story regular and irregular building RC frame is considered for the fragility
analysis. Nonlinear analysis of the building models is done by using pushover analysis
using ETABS v9.7.4. The results from pushover analysis have been used to plot
fragility curves. Spectral displacement is used as a ground motion parameter to plot
the fragility curve. The damage state probabilities corresponding to a predefined
damage state as per HAZUS (Slight, Moderate, Extensive, Complete) has been used to
check the performance of the building models. Seismic performance of the regular and
irregular building is studied to check the vulnerability of building models in terms of
damage state probabilities.
Keywords: Fragility curves; Vulnerability; HAZUS; Pushover analysis; Ground
motion parameter
INTRODUCTION developed in recent decades in the context of

projects such as HAZUS in the United
The vulnerability is generally represented in
Nations. Many times earthquake can cause
terms of either Damage Probability Matrices
severe damage to the structures therefore
(DPM) or fragility curves. The seismic
seismic vulnerability estimation of building is
vulnerability of structures is commonly
essential step in preventing damage to the
reaching or exceeding a predefined damage
building. Fragility curves are useful tools,
state given the measure of earthquake
since they use estimation of the probability of
shaking. Its evaluation is essential for
structural damage caused by earthquakes as a
effective planning, risk management and
function of ground motion indices. Fragility
mitigation of damage and losses prior and
curves are the uncertain possibility of
after an earthquake. Vulnerability can be
exceedance of response of a structure for a
estimated by conducting seismic scenarios
given ground motion intensity. A fragility
using methodologies that have been
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bhende_sneha@rediffmail.com 850

Bhende and Pednekar
function expresses the probability that an given median estimates of spectral response,
adverse event will occur as a function of the for example spectral displacement. These
value of some seismic excitation. curves take into account the variability and
uncertainty associated with capacity curve
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT properties, damage states and ground
shaking. For a given damage state, P [S | Sd ],
In this paper the methodology adopted for the P [M| Sd], P [E | Sd], P [C | Sd] a fragility
development of fragility curves is briefly curve is well described by the following
describes as follows. Pushover analysis is lognormal probability density function
carried out on building models in ETABS 1 𝑆𝑑
v9.7.4. As per the HAZUS manual the results P[ ds | Sd ] = Φ[ ln( )] (2)
𝛽𝑑𝑠 𝑆𝑑,𝑑𝑠
from nonlinear static analysis are used to plot
fragility curve. Where is Sd,ds the threshold spectral
displacement,βds is the standard deviation of
PUSHOVER ANALYSIS the natural logarithm of this spectral
displacement, Φ is the standard normal
Displacement based pushover analysis is cumulative distribution function and Sd is the
performed in ETABS v9.7.4 as per the spectral displacement of the structure. Table
guidelines given in FEMA 440 and ATC40. (1) shows how the thresholds obtain from
As per the FEMA 440 target displacement is capacity spectrum.
necessary to perform displacement based P [S | Sd] = probability of being in or
pushover analysis. This target displacement is exceeding a slight damage state, S.
given by equation (1) P [M | Sd] = probability of being in or
Δ t = C 0 C 1 C 2 C 3 S a T e 2g / 4π2 (1) exceeding a moderate damage state, M.
P [E | Sd] = probability of being in or
Where, C 0 , C 1 , C 2 , C 3 are modification exceeding an extensive damage state, E.
factors taken from FEMA 440. Capacity P [C | Sd] = probability of being in or
curve in the form of Base shear vs Roof exceeding a complete damage state, C.
displacement is obtained from pushover
analysis. This capacity curve is converted Table 1. Damage state thresholds
into ADRS (Acceleration Displacement defines with the agreement of capacity
Response Spectra) format. Performance point spectrum (1)
is obtained as intersection of capacity spectra Damage States Spectral Displacements
and elastic demand spectra. (Sd,ds)
Slight 0.7Dy
HAZUS METHODOLOGY
Moderate Dy
There has been numerous works in the Extensive Dy + 0.25(Du – Dy)
literature for the evaluation of the fragility Complete Du
curves of the structures. However, For the
development of fragility curves, guidelines Where, Sd is spectral displacement and suffix
given by HAZUS technical manual have been 1, 2, 3, 4 show slight damage, moderate
used. HAZUS methodology was developed damage, extensive damage, and complete
for FEMA by National Institute of Building collapse respectively.
Science (NIBS) to reduce seismic hazard in Ay = yield spectral acceleration
United States. HAZUS technical manual Au = ultimate spectral acceleration.
provides the procedure for deriving the Dy = yield spectral displacement
fragility curves for different types of Du = ultimate spectral displacement
structures. Building fragility curves are So now in the formula of cumulative normal
lognormal functions that describe the distributive probability, value of Sd was
probability of reaching, or exceeding, found from pushover analysis result and the
structural and non-structural damage states, value of𝛽𝛽 is taken from HAZAUS Technical
manual (table 5.11- 5.11d).
851
Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of RC Frames using Fragility Curves
BUILDING GEOMETRY vertically downward, as per specifications in

IS 1893: 2002 (Part I) the structural data is
In this paper two building models are same for both frames. A three dimensional
considered for the development of fragility model of each structure has been created to
curves. Fragility curves are generated for four undertake the non linear analysis.
damage states as per HAZUS. Results of the
regular and irregular building model are RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
compared. No infill walls were considered in
the modeling of all the buildings. Pushover Curve for G+19
0.06
Spectral Acceleration (g)

0.05
0.04
Pushover
0.03
Curve
0.02
0.01
0
0 0.5
Spectral Displacement (m)
Figure 2. Pushover Curve for Building

Model 1
1 Fragility Curves for G+19
Figure 1: Regular and Irregular G+19
storey building modeled in ETABS 3D 0.8
Probability of Damage
view
0.6 Slight
Table 2. Description of Building Models Moderate
Description Value 0.4 Extensive
Complete
Number of Stories 20 0.2
Height of Storey 3.5 m
Grade of steel Fe 415 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Grade of Concrete M25 -0.2 Spectral Displacement (m)
Imposed Load 3 kN/m2
Slab thickness 150 mm Figure 3. Fragility Curve for Building
Model 1
Seismic Zone V
Damping 5% The fragility curve obtained considering four
damage states is shown in figure (3) and (5).
Three dimensional model of G+19 RC frames Plot of Capacity spectrum curve obtained
are considered. The model specification and is shown in figure (2) and (4). The graph
the loading data is given in Table (2). obtained of pushover curve is
Spectral displacement is used as ground converted into ADRS (Acceleration
motion parameter. The probability of damage Displacement Response Spectra) format. The
for a particular damage state is worked out. value of spectral displacement corresponding
Then comparison of values corresponding to to ultimate capacity of target displacement is
probability of damage with the regular and used to plot fragility curve. The probability of
irregular frame is done. Regular building and damage or the probability of exceedance for
model with geometric irregularities to the four damage states i.e. Slight, Moderate,
identify the effects of mass irregularity on the Extensive and Collapse can be read from the
shape of building geometry is changed by fragility curve. The table 3 shows the
reducing the no. of bays in X-direction probability of exceedance of particular
852
Bhende and Pednekar
damage state for the spectral displacement infill walls. From the results generated, it is
value of 0.365 m. concluded that this methodology gives an
Pushover Curve for G+19 idea to predict the damage level of the
Spectral Acceleration (g)
0.08 building corresponding to particular value of

Irregular
spectral displacement. The damage state of
0.06
the building is also identified from the above
0.04 analysis. Irregular building is more
Pushover
Curve
vulnerable as compared to regular building
0.02
corresponding to the particular value of
0 spectral displacement. Nonlinear static
-0.2 0 0.2 0.4 procedure can be effectively use to plot
-0.02 fragility curves. Seismic performance of RC
building frame is evaluated by using HAZUS
Figure 4.Pushover Curve for Building procedure in terms of damage state
Model 2 probabilities.
1
Fragility Curves for G+19
REFERENCES
Irregular
0.8 HAZUS technical manual MH MR1
Slight Earthquake loss estimation
Probability of Damage
0.6
methodology Department of homeland
0.4 Moderat security Washington DC USA 2003.
e
0.2 extensiv ATC40 seismic evaluation and retrofit of
e concrete buildings-volume I Report no.
0 SSC 96-01 Redwood City, Applied
0 0.2 0.4 Technology Council 1996.
-0.2
FEMA 440 Pre-standard and commentary for
Figure 5. Fragility Curve for Building seismic rehabilitation of buildings,
Model 2 Federal Emergency Management
Agency Washington DC USA 2000.
Table 3. Comparison of Probability of
Damage State Sevket and Ali et al. 2010 Fragility based
damage assessment in existing precast
Regular Irregular industrial buildings: A case study for
Damage
Building Building turkey. Structural Engineering and
State
(G+19) (G+19) Mechanics 34(1) 39-60.
Slight 0.8 0.84 Jun ji and Amr et al. 2007 An analytical
framework for seismic fragility analysis
Moderate 0.63 0.67 of RC highrise buildings Engineering
Extensive 0.33 0.37 structures 29 3197-3209.
Complete 0.26 0.29 Cornell C A et al. 2002 The probabilistic
basis for the 2000 SAC/FEMA steel
moment frame guidelines. ASCE
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS Journal of Structural Engineering
In this study, HAZUS procedure for the 128(4) 526-533.
generation of fragility curves is discussed and
the fragility curves are generated for high-rise
RC building structures without considering
853
ICCMS2016
IMPACT TEST ON REINFORCED CONCRETE SLABS

PARMAR R. M., TARVINDER SINGH and REDDY G. R.
Abstract: To study the behaviour of reinforced concrete structures subjected to high

rate loading like impact test have been carried out. The paper presents test results of
the impact test carried out at Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI),
Pune. Total of four slabs have been subjected to impact load due to drop of weight at
the centre of slab which simply supported at the edges. The slab is instrumented with
various kinds of sensors like surface mounted strain gauges, embedded strain gauges
installed on reinforcement, displacement gauges. In addition, high speed photography
is also used for displacement measurements and velocity measurements.
Keywords: Reinforced concrete slab, Impact, High rate of loading
INTRODUCTION dependent on the width assumed for the

failure zone.
The behaviour of the reinforced concrete
The differing rates of increase in tensile,
structures subjected to impact is highly non-
flexural, and compressive strengths with
linear. In nuclear industry, reinforced
increasing loading rates, and the crack
concrete structures are designed against
propagation effects that cause failure, can
impacts of different kinds of either externally
result in the mode of failure of a concrete
or internally generated missiles. The
member changing from flexure to shear with
containment not only designed to provide a
an increase in the loading rate.
leak tight barrier, but also required to have
sufficient margin for impact, blast and To study these impact test is performed on
seismic loads. Potential missiles loads are reinforced concrete slabs. The slab is
generated due to aircraft crash, internal instrumented with various sensors like
accident generated missiles etc. The impact surface mounted strain gauges, embedded
load may also arise due to accidental drop of strain gauges installed on reinforcement,
the objects on the floor. displacement gauges etc. In addition, high
speed photography is also used for
Upon impact of any object/missile on RC
displacement measurements of slab and
structures local damages like penetration,
velocity measurement of missile.
spalling, scabbing and complete perforation
etc. occurs. It is observed that the strength of EXPERIMENTAL SETUP
concrete increases with the increase in strain
rate/rate of loading Two slabs of 150mm thickness and two
The strength of concrete in tension, flexure, slabs of 200mm have been tested for
and compression increases with an increase impact load.
in the loading rate. The strain corresponding
to the maximum strength also increases with The size of the slab is 1700mm X
an increase in the loading rate. The increase 2000mm. The slab is reinforced on both
in strain is due to the development of top and bottom sides. 150mm thick slab is
multiple cracks in the failure zone, and the reinforced with 8mm dia. @ 150mm c/c
value of the maximum strain is strongly
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rparmar@barc.gov.in 854

Parmar et al.
both ways and 200mm thick slab with

reinforcement of 10mm dia. @ 200mm
c/c both ways with clear cover of 25 mm.
To prevent local failure at the edges of
slab rolled steel channel is provided along
the periphery of the slab. The slab is
simply supported at the edges during the
impact.
The experimental setup used for the
impact test on slab is as shown in Figure.
1.
Front view Back view

Figure 3: View of slab after impact
The results of some of the strain

gauges(SGs) and accelerometer are as
shown in Figure. 4, Figure. 5 and Figure.
6.
Figure 1: Test set up for impact test CT_SG_1V
20
The punch used for impacting the slab was 0
-20
designed with adjustable number of plates to -40
CT_SG_1V (µε)
increase or decrease the weight as per -60
-80
requirement Figure. 2. The minimum weight -100
of punch was approx. 250 kg, consisting of -120
-140
punch and single plate welded to it. The -160
weight of plates that could be added was in 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Time (sec)
multiples of 154 kg or 369 kg.
Figure 4: Response of surface SG -1H
CT_SG_1H
50
-50
CT_SG_1H (µε)
-100
-150
-200
-250
-300
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Figure 2: Details of missile Time (sec)
Figure 5: Response of surface SG -1V
855
Impact Test on Reinforced Concrete Slabs
300
CT_SG_2V impacted. The damaged area on the
200
back surface i.e. scabbing (ejection of
material from the back surface) is large
100
as compared to the front surface

CT_SG_2V (µε)
0
damage.
-100
-200 2. In slabs subject to single impact, the

-300
punching failure was observed. The
-400
punch fully penetrated the slab. The
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Time (sec) area of damage on the front surface is
Figure 6: Response of surface SG -2V almost equal to the cross-sectional area
CT_SG_2H
of the punch and the damage on the
back surface was significantly large
300
than the front damage area. The top
200
layer and bottom layer rebar
CT_SG_2H (µε)
100
yielding/failure was also observed in
0
the test.
-100
3. In slab subjected to multiple impacts,

-200
in the first drop the radial (visible)
-300
cracks were developed on the bottom
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
Time (sec) surface of the slab. A large strain
Figure 7: Response of surface SG -2H values have been observed in the test
Acc_Z (strain > 2000µε). Subsequently upon
500
400
second drop, partial penetration of the
300 punch into the slab as well as spalling
200
on the bottom surface were observed.
100
Subsequently upon third drop punching
Acc_Z (g)
-100 failure of the slab have been observed.

-200
The area of damage on the front
-300
-400
surface is almost equal to the cross-
-500 sectional area of the punch and the
0.160 0.162 0.164 0.166 0.168 0.170 0.172
Time (sec) damage on the back surface was
Figure 8: Response of accelerometer
significantly large than the front
installed on missile damage area. Due to scabbing of slab
on the bottom surface of the slab, some
EXPERIMENTAL OBSERVATIONS of the strain gauges came out with the
Experimental observations are as follows concrete chunk during second drop of
the punch and hence data for those
1. The failure was observed to be strain gauge were not available for the
localized and the damage area is almost third drop test. Also some of the strain
equal to the area of punch on front gauges recorded high strain values and
surface of the slab where punch is
856
Parmar et al.
failed upon the first drop impact and

those gauges did not recorded any data
upon subsequent drops.
CONCLUSIONS
The concrete is highly nonlinear material
and still requires lot of research to
understand it fully. The strength like
compressive strength, tensile strength,
shear strength etc. increases with increase
in loading rate/strain rate. The rate of
increase of strength differs in tension and
compression. The experiments performed
will be helpful in understanding the
behaviour of reinforced concrete
structures subjected to impact load.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors thank engineers of ARAI, Pune
for their help in performing the tests and
acquiring data during the test.
REFERENCES
American Concrete Institute ACI 446.4R-04
Report on Dynamic Fracture of
Concrete 2004
VTT - Technical Research Centre of Finland,
Experimental Tests for Bending and
Punching Behaviour of Reinforced
Concrete Walls under Impact Loading
August 2010.
857
ICCMS2016
GEOMETRIC NONLINEAR ANALYSIS OF CABLE DOMES

SUDARSHAN KRISHNAN
Illinois School of Architecture, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA
Abstract: The inherent geometric nonlinearities and the presence of prestress do not
lend cable domes to classical methods of analysis and design. They are greatly
dependent on iterative methods and the use of digital computing for analysis. In this
paper, the nonlinear large displacement analysis procedure for analyzing cable domes
is formulated using the direct stiffness method and programmed in MATLAB. A two-
dimensional model equivalent to that of a three-dimensional model is used for efficient
analysis. The structural behaviour of a series of cable domes are investigated. For
domes that are adequately prestressed, the study revealed that buckling of struts or
displacements exceeding the acceptable ranges for serviceability are potential limit
states.
Keywords: Cable domes, Prestress, Large-displacement, Nonlinear, Analysis,
buckling.
INTRODUCTION (USA), the Tropicana Field in St. Petersburg

(USA), and the Taoyuan Arena in Taoyuan
Cable domes are an assembly of prestressed
City (Taiwan), all were large-span fabric-
cables in equilibrium with vertical struts.
covered radial cable domes designed by the
Members are stressed purely in axial tension
visionary structural engineer David Geiger.
or compression (Figure 1) and as a result, the
materials are used efficiently. The structure Design of cable and membrane structures has
attains stiffness primarily by means of relied on several nonlinear finite element
prestress, i.e. at the expense of material analysis techniques. The various nonlinear
strength of members rather than increased theories and solution methods developed in
member sizes [Kuznetsov, 1991]. the late 1960s and early 1970s for the
analysis of cable structures proved pivotal in
COMPRESSION the design of cable-strut structures. Although
RING TENSION RING
several nonlinear theories were developed for
RIDGE CABLES solving cable problems, no analytical method
was available for solving the resulting
nonlinear equations of equilibrium and
compatibility. Consequently, iterative
methods were developed to solve the
DIAGONAL governing equations. For an iterative
CABLE
procedure to be viable, the method must
HOOP ensure convergence, and for it to be efficient,
CABLES
POST convergence should be rapid to minimize
computational time and costs. First-order
Figure 1. Structural components of a
methods like the secant-stiffness method
radial cable dome
show moderate convergence rates. For this
The Fencing and Gymnastic Arenas in Seoul reason, second-order iterative methods with
(South Korea), the Redbird Arena in Normal their high convergence rates are more
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: skrishnn@illinois.edu 858

Sudarshan Krishnan
popular. The Newton-Raphson procedure or 4. Cables have constant cross-sectional

modified Newton methods are the most areas.
popular of these second-order methods using 5. Roof membrane has negligible bending
tangent stiffness. Essentially, these stiffness.
techniques strive to achieve rapid 6. Snow loads are applied as point loads at
convergence, resulting in minimal the top nodes of the struts.
computational time (Tezcan & Özdemir 7. Rigid perimeter beam.
2000). Baron and Venkatesan (1971) 8. Cable slackening is taken into account by
presented a secant stiffness matrix scheme, a ascribing a very small value of axial
modification of it, and a combined technique stiffness EA = 1 x 10-10 to those cables.
using tangent and secant stiffness matrices. With the aforementioned assumptions
They concluded that the use of tangent established, a stiffness-based finite element
stiffness matrix instead of secant stiffness analysis procedure can be formulated.
leads to rapid convergence. For improving Consider a planar truss member connecting
the convergence in highly nonlinear cable-net nodes 1 and 2 in the XY-plane, where
problems, Siev (1963) and Thornton and
Birnstiel (1967) suggested incrementally ( X 1 , Y1 ) and ( X 2 , Y2 ) are the nodal
applying loads. To enhance convergence, coordinates in the initial configuration. Under
Haug and Powell (1971) limited the norm of load, the member deforms and the nodes
response increments between iterations. move to new locations with coordinates
Argyris and Scharpf (1972) performed large
displacement analysis of complex prestressed
( x1 , y1 ) and ( x2 , y2 ) as illustrated in Figure
structures subject to the usual external 2.
loading. In fact, their method was used to Undeformed
design the 1972 Olympic Stadium in Munich; 𝑋 1 , 𝑌1 𝑋 2 , 𝑌2
L
the model contained over 10,000 degrees of 𝟏 𝟐
freedom. Many of the recent developments in
the field of cable structures have been 𝑥 1 , 𝑦1 𝑙
possible because of the accessibility of high 𝑥2 , 𝑦2
performance computers. Deformed
Figure 2. Undeformed and deformed

NONLINEAR ANALYSIS geometry
FORMULATION
Let u 1 and u 2 be the displacements of node-1
Form-finding procedure is fundamental to along the x and y axis, and u 3 and u 4 be the
cable dome design. The form-finding displacements of node-2 along the x and y
problem is to determine the prestressed axis respectively. Then, the net displacement
configuration of a cable dome structure under along the global x-axis is:
self-weight and prestressing forces. After the
u = ( X 2 + u3 ) − ( X 1 + u1 ) (1)
prestressed configuration is determined, the
structure is analysed for various load And the net displacement along the global y-
combinations prescribed by ASCE 7-10. axis is:
Certain assumptions are made taking into v = (Y2 + u4 ) − (Y1 + u2 ) (2)
account material properties, support
conditions and the nature of forces that can The deformed length of the member is found
be resisted by the members. They are: as:
1. Large displacement and small strain. =l u 2 + v2
2. Cables are tension-only members. (3)
3. Cables are straight-line members.
859
Geometric Nonlinear Analysis of Cable Domes
𝑄2 In three-dimensional problems, k will be a

𝑄1 6 x 6 matrix and Q will be a 6 x 1 vector. The
𝑙 𝑄4
structure stiffness matrix K is then assembled
using the member stiffness matrices and
𝑄3 destination vectors. K is the sum of elastic
Figure 3. Member force components in and geometric stiffness and because the
global axes geometric stiffness is dependent on the
change in geometry of the structure under
The internal member force Q (Figure 3) can load, K is a function of U.
be written in terms of the strains as
Let the sum of internal forces Q and external
Q = Aσ = AE(ε - ε p ) (4) loads F at each node i of the dome be
where A is the member cross-sectional area, represented as R, the residual force vector.
E is the member modulus of elasticity and ε p Therefore,
is the prestrain assigned to the diagonal
members. ∑Q + F =
R(U ) (9)
And the member axial strain ε is defined as: where Q, F and R are the global internal
force, external force and residual vectors,
l− L l respectively. Note that Q and R are functions
ε= = −1 (5)
L L of U.
The response of the cable dome structure is
The member force can therefore be expressed obtained from solving the set of nonlinear
in terms of the strains as: equilibrium equations:
AE
Q= (l − L) − AEε p (6) K ΔU=R (10)
L
Stiffness is defined as the change in the ith Since R is a function of the unknown
force due to a unit change in the jth displacements, there is no direct solution for
displacement. As such, the stiffness terms of Equation 10. Iterative numerical schemes
the member stiffness matrix are derived by such as the Modified Newton-Raphson
taking partial derivatives of the end forces Method, Newton-Raphson Method or
with respect to each of the end displacements, Incremental Loading Method have to be used
as: (Krishna 1978). The Newton-Raphson
∂Qi Method exhibits the much desired terminal
kij = ( j=1 to 4 ) (7) quadratic convergence, making it an
∂u j
attractive iterative method and is adopted as
Therefore, the solution method for Eq. 10. The
computations in this method are based on the
 ∂Q1 ∂Q1 ∂Q1 ∂Q1  instantaneous stiffness of the structure
 ∂u ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4  derived anew at each iterative cycle. The
 1 
 ∂Q2 ∂Q2 ∂Q2 ∂Q2  method demands significant computational
 ∂u ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4 
effort because the stiffness matrix has to be
k= 
1
(8) computed at every iteration. The structure is
 ∂Q3 ∂Q3 ∂Q3 ∂Q3  therefore loaded incrementally and the
 
 ∂u1 ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4  equations are solved iteratively in a piecewise
 ∂Q4 ∂Q4 ∂Q4 ∂Q4  linear manner until the values of ΔU or R
  converges to be within an acceptable
 ∂u1 ∂u2 ∂u3 ∂u4 
tolerance.
860
Sudarshan Krishnan
COMPARISON OF SAP2000 AND REFERENCES

MATLAB RESULTS Argyris J & Scharpf D 1972 Large Deflection
A numerical example for a sample cable Analysis of Prestressed Networks,
dome is solved using the MATLAB Journal of Structural Division 98
programme developed specifically for cable 633-54.
dome analysis. Two load cases, namely: 1) ASCE/SEI 2010 Minimum Design Loads for
Dead Load + Prestress, and 2) Dead Load + Buildings and Other Structures,
Prestress + Live Load were analyzed. The ASCE/SEI 7-10 Ed. ASCE Reston VA
results were compared and verified using the 650 pages.
commercial program SAP 2000. The results
showed good agreement with the difference Baron F & Venkatesan M 1971 Nonlinear
in member forces and joint displacements Analysis of Cable and Truss
being almost negligible for the latter case. Structures Journal of the Structural
Division.
CONCLUSIONS Haug E & Powell G 1971 Discussion of
A geometric nonlinear analysis model was Inelastic Analysis of Suspension Roof
developed using the stiffness method. The Structures by Donald Greenberg
effects of large displacements were Journal of Structural Division, ASCE,
considered in the formulation. Nonlinear 97 1360-63.
effects of cable slackening and member Krishna P 1978 Cable-Suspended Roofs
yielding were also included. The Newton- McGraw-Hill.
Raphson iteration was used to iteratively
solve the system of nonlinear equilibrium Kuznetsov E N 1991 Underconstrained
equations. A MATLAB code was written Structural Systems Sringer-Verlag
based on the procedure formulated in this New York 219 and 152-157.
paper. The accuracy of the analytical
Siev A 1963 A General Analysis of
procedure was verified for a sample dome
Prestressed Nets International
and the MATLAB results showed good
Association for Bridge and Structural
agreement with those from SAP2000. The
Engineering Publications 23 283-92.
nonlinear model offers the possibility of
including additional parameters depending on Thornton C & Birnstiel C 1967 Three
the engineer’s requirements. Parametric Dimensional Suspension Structures
analysis may be done with relative ease using Journal of Structural Division 93(2).
the code and as such serves as a powerful 247-270.
design tool for a structural engineer. Further,
the study revealed that buckling of struts and
serviceability are the dominant limit states.
861
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF SCALED CONTAINMENT MODEL

PARTHESH PAREKH P. 1, PARMAR R. M. 2*, SINGH R. K. 3 and REDDY G. R. 2
1
Nirma University, Ahmedabad, Gujarat, India.
2
Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India.
3
IIT Roorkee, Roorkee, India.
Abstract: Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC), Trombay has organized an
International Round Robin Analysis program to carry out the ultimate load capacity
assessment of BARC Containment (BARCOM) test model. The test model located in
BARC facilities Tarapur; is a 1:4 scale representation of 540 MWe Pressurized Heavy
Water Reactor (PHWR) pre-stressed concrete inner containment structure of Tarapur
Atomic Power Station (TAPS) unit 3&4. The containment model is heavily
instrumented with various kinds of sensors vibratory wire strain gauges of embedded
and spot-welded type, surface mounted electrical resistance strain gauges, dial gauges,
earth pressure cells, tilt meters and high resolution digital camera systems for
structural response, crack monitoring and fracture parameter measurement to evaluate
the local and global behaviour of the containment test model. The model has been
tested pneumatically during for proof test (PT) (pressurising the containment up to
design pressure). The paper presents the numerical simulation of the containment
model subjected to design pressure and comparison with the experimental results.
Keywords: Nuclear Containment; Pressurised Heavy Water Reactor; Proof test
integrated leakage rate test; Numerical modelling.
INTRODUCTION This test model simulates all the major

openings namely Main Air Lock (MAL),
Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC), Emergency Air Lock (EAL), Fuelling
Trombay has organized an International Machine Air Lock (FMAL) and Steam
Round Robin Analysis program to carry out Generator Openings (SG) in the dome. This
the ultimate load capacity assessment of model in addition also includes buttresses to
BARC Containment (BARCOM) test model. accommodate the pre-stressing tendons
The test model located in BARC facilities closely to the actual containment structure of
Tarapur; is a 1:4 scale representation of 540 TAPS3&4 nuclear power station.
MWe Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor
(PHWR) pre-stressed concrete inner BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
containment structure of Tarapur Atomic At the bottom of the containment, between
Power Station (TAPS) unit 3&4. the stiffened base of the cylindrical wall and
The model has been tested pneumatically the foundation, the displacements and
during the low pressure tests (LPTs)followed rotations are assumed to be fully constrained.
by proof test (PT) and integrated leakage rate This assumption is based on the layout of the
test (ILRT), over pressure test (OPT) up to reinforcement extending from the foundation
the functional failure and finally will be into the cylindrical wall.
tested for ultimate load capacity test (ULCT).
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rparmar@barc.gov.in 862

Parekh et al.
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL of the containment model. The analysis have

been carried out in steps. In the first load step
Detailed finite element model is prepared for analysis for dead load and the pre-stressing
the numerical simulation. Five major forces of the containment is carried out and
openings namely MAL (1.5m x 1.8m), EAL subsequently internal pressure of 0.1413
(618mm dia.), FMAL(782mm x 782mm) and N/mm².
two numbers of Steam Generator (SG)
openings(1274mm dia.) are modelled. Cross
sectional view of containment model is as
shown in Fig. 1. Local thickening around
openings, stressing gallery in the raft,
stressing ribs in the containment wall etc. are
also modelled. Photograph of the
containment model is as shown in Fig. 2.
Finite element model is as shown in the Fig.
3. The concrete is modelled using three
dimensional brick elements. The
reinforcement and tendons are modelled
using 3D truss element. Tendons and
reinforcements are embedded in the concrete
using embedded element option. Material
properties of the concrete and tendons are as
shown in Table 1 and 2 respectively.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Table 1. Material properties of
concrete
Parameter Value
Characteristic
45 N/mm2
Compressive Strength
Modulus of Elasticity 33540 N/mm2
Split tensile Strength 2.78 N/mm2
Table 2. Material properties tendon
Parameter Value
0.2% Proof Stress 1683 N/mm2
1% Extension Stress 1649 N/mm2
Ultimate tensile Strength 1848 N/mm2
Modulus of Elasticity 189600 N/mm2
Figure 1. Cross sectional view of
Cross sectional area 142.8 mm2
containment model
LOADING
Analysis has been carried out for the design
pressure (p d ) of 1.44kg/cm2(0.1413 N/mm²).
The pressure is applied on the inner surface
863
Numerical Analysis of Scaled Containment Model
R M Parmar Singh T Thangamani I Trivedi N

Singh R K 2011a Over-PressureTest on
BARCOM Pre-Stressed Concrete
Containment Paper-486 Division V
SMiRT-21 New Delhi.
R.M. Parmar Tarvinder Singh I Thangamani
Neha Trivedi 2014 Ram Kumar Singh,
Over-pressure test on BARCOM pre-
stressed concrete containmentNuclear
Engineering and Design269 177–183.
Figure 2: Phograph of scaled Singh R K Gupta A Kushwaha H S Mahajan
containment model S C Kakodkar 1993 A Ultimate Load
Capacity Assessment of Indian PHWRS
- Some Pre Test Results U02/5 SMiRT
12 Stuttgart Germany.
Figure 3. Three dimensional FE model

of containment
CONCLUSION
The numerical results of the analysis have

been compared with the experimental results
at critical locations identified as specified
sensor locations (SSLs). The results shows
good agreement with the experimental
results.
REFERENCES
Basha S M Singh R KPatnaik R Ramanujam

S Kushwaha H S Venkat Raj V 2003
Predictions of Ultimate Load Capacity
for Pre-Stressed Concrete Containment
Vessel Model with BARC Finite
Element Code ULCA Annals of Nuclear
Energy 30/4437-471.
864
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF CIRCULAR WEB PERFORATION IN RECTANGULAR

LEAN DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL (LDSS) TUBULAR BEAMS – A
FINITE ELEMENT STUDY
SONU J. K* and SINGH K. D.
Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India
Abstract: Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) rectangular hollow beams with
centrally located single circular perforation in one web were analysed using finite
element analyses, to study the shear capacity and deformation shapes. The dimensions
of the beam were w f = 200 mm, h w = 600, t w = 2 mm, t f = 10 mm, a = 600 mm, where
h w , t w , t f , w f and a are the web height, web thickness, flange thickness, flange width
and shear span respectively. Three perforation sizes (d o ) viz., d o /h w = 0.1, 0.3 and 0.5
were used to study the effect their size on the shear performance. Based on the study,
a near linear decrease in shear capacity was seen with increasing perforation size, with
~21% drop in shear capacity for 400% increase in perforation size (from 60 mm
diameter), for the beam parameters considered. However, the mid-span deformation
corresponding to the formation of compression flange increased with increasing
perforation size.
Keywords: LDSS; Shear behaviour; Rectangular hollow beam; Perforation;
Abaqus.
INTRODUCTION as low as ~1.5% lower nickel, it is now

possible to bring down the cost of stainless
Of late, in increasing usage of stainless steel steel construction. In addition, LDSS has
structural members can be seen, especially shown to possess good strength, adequate
for exposed architectural constructions. The weldability and fracture toughness, improved
preference of stainless steel members by thermal properties etc. in relation to the both
architects and engineers attributable not only Austentic and Ferritic stainless steels by
to the aesthetic aspects (e.g. smooth and Theofanous and Gardner, (2010), Hassanein,
glossy finish), but also to other properties (2009), Patton and Singh, (2012).
such as better/improved: corrosion resistance,
Hence, in the recent years, interests have
strength/weight ratio, ductility, fire resistance
been shown by both engineers as well as
etc, in comparison to carbon steel. In spite of
researchers on LDSS. Studies on both open
these attractive properties, its use in the
sections (e.g. I-section) and closed LDSS
construction industry is limited, mainly
sections (e.g. rectangular-section) have been
because of its relatively higher initial material
reported by Theofanous et al., (2009),
cost, due to high nickel content (~8%).
Gardner et. al., (2008), Saliba and Gardner
However, with the availability of a new class
(2013), Gardner and Nethercot (2004) etc. In
of stainless steel called Lean Duplex
relation to the open sections, hollow or closed
Stainless Steel (LDSS EN 1.4162) containing
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:k.sonu@iitg.ernet.in 865

Sonu and Singh
sections offer better torsional rigidity in and 0.5) located at the centre of the left shear
addition to their aesthetics; hence they are span was considered (see Figure 1) for the
increasingly used as structural members e.g. study. The beam was simply supported with
columns and beams. These steel beams may load applied at the midspan. The beam was
need to be perforated for several services modelling using four noded shell element
associated with air conditioning, ventilations, (S4R) available in Abaqus (2009), with an
water, process pipes, electrical and aspect ratio of ~1 (see Figure 2). The cross-
instrumentation cables etc. Such perforations sections at both the mid-span and support
help in the reduction of floor height without were kinematically coupled in order to avoid
affecting the available head-room (e.g. local buckling at these locations (see
Lagaros et al., 2008, Hagen, et al., 2009). Theofanous and Gardner, 2010). Local
Perforated beams can be widely seen in oil imperfections were applied as per Dawson
refinery, offshore, highway bridges and Walker (1972). Two-stage material
structures, etc. Such perforations can have model proposed by Gardner and Ashraf
adverse influence on the structural behaviour (2006) for LDSS was used as material input
of beams. In the literature, Ridley-Ellis to Abaqus (2009), with Young’s modulus
(2000) was probably the first and only one to (E), yield stress (σ 0.2 or f y ), and Poisson’s
report on the shear load capacity of ratio as 209797 MPa, 755 MPa and 0.3
rectangular ‘hollow’ section (RHS) made of respectively. The FE modelling approach was
carbon steel. In this work, the effect of validated using experimental result reported
circular web perforation in the shear by Theofanous and Gardner (2009).
characteristic of rectangular hollow beams,
made of a relatively promising duplex steel
(a) (b)
(i.e. LDSS), using the general purpose FE tw load
software called Abaqus (2009). tf
hw do
FINITE ELEMENT MODELING
The shell finite element (FE) modelling

wf
approach adopted here is similar to those
Figure 1: (a) Geometry and (b) boundary
adopted for modelling thin wall structures
e.g. hollow beams, hollow columns etc (see conditions.
e.g. Theofanous et al., 2009, Patton and
Singh, 2012, Saliba and Gardner, 2013).
Geometry as well as the boundary conditions
of the rectangular hollow beam considered
for the study is shown in Figure 1. The
dimensions of the beam were taken as w f =
200 mm, h w = 600, t w = 2 mm, t f = 10 mm, a
= 600 mm, such that h w /t w = 300, w f /h w =
Figure 2: Typical FE mesh of perforated
0.33, t f /t w = 5, a/h w = 1.0, where h w , t w , t f , w f beam.
and a are the web height, web thickness,
flange thickness, flange width and shear span
respectively. Single perforation of diameter,
d o (= 60, 180 and 300 mm; d o /h w = 0.1, 0.3
866
Effect of Circular Web Perforation in Rectangular Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) Tubular Beams –
AFinite Element Study
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION (b) S1 S2
Results from the non-linear FE analyses of

the perforated beam is presented in the form
of normalised shear capacity (V/V y, where
V y = 2 × hw × t w × f y / 3 , the shear yield
capacity of the webs) vs mid-span M1 M2
deformation in Figure 3 along with the von-
Mises contour plots. The plot of unperforated
(d o /h w = 0.0) beam is also potted for
comparison.It can be seen from Figure 4a that
the value of V u /V y (V u = ultimate shear load)
decrease with increasing perforation size. L1 L2
Variation of V u /V y with d o /h w is shown in
Figure 4. An increase of 400% in perforation
size from 60 mm, decreases the value of
V u /V y ~21%, and the decrease is found to be
near linear. In the unperforated beam, a
diagonal tension band can be seen indicating Figure 3: a) Variation of V/V y vs δ, and b)
of the shear buckling deformation of the von-Mises stress contour plots.
webs. The continuity and distribution of the 0.8
diagonal tension band is visibly disturbed due
to the presence of the perforations, with 0.6
Vu/Vy
apparently decreasing highly stressed area at 0.4

V u (see M1 and L1 in Figure 3). The mid-
span deformation corresponding to the 0.2
yielding of the compression flange (near the 0

support) is also found to increase with 0.00 0.20 0.40
increasing perforation size. At the post-V u , do/hw
once the yielding starts at the compression Figure 4:Variation of V u /V y vs d o /h w .
flange (on the perforation side), relaxation of CONCLUSIONS
the stress can be seen on the webs on the
right side (i.e. non perforated side). Finite element analysesof hollow rectangular
do/hw =
do/hw 0.0
= 0.0 do/hw == 0.1
do/hw LDSS beams with centrally located single
(a) do/hw = 0.2
0.8 do/hw = 0.3 do/hw == 0.3
do/hw 0.5 circular perforationswere carried out to assess
M1 S1 the shear capacity and deformation modes.
0.6 M2 S2
Based on the study, a near linear decrease in
L1
V/Vy
0.4
L2 shear capacity was seen with increasing
0.2 perforation size, with ~21% drop in shear
0 capacity for 400% increase in perforation size
0 20 40 (from 60 mm diameter), for the beam
δ (mm) parameters considered. However, the mid-
span deformation corresponding to the
867
Sonu and Singh
formation of compression flange increased hollow columns of square L- T- and +-

with increasing perforation size. shaped cross sections under pure axial
compression Thin-Walled Structures 53
REFERENCES 1-8.
Abaqus. Abaqus/Standard user's manual Ridley-Ellis D J 2000 Rectangular Hollow
volumes I-III and ABAQUS CAE manual sections with circular web openings-
Version 6.9-EF1DassaultSystemes Fundemental behavior in torsion
Corp. Providence USA 2009. bending and shear Ph.D. Thesis
Dawson R G & Walker A C 1972 Post- University of Nottingham.
buckling of geometrically imperfect Saliba N and Gardner L 2013 Experimental
plates Journal of the Structural Division study of the shear response of lean
ASCE 98 75-94. duplex stainless steel plate girders
Gardner L & Nethercot D A 2004 Engineering Structures 46 375-391.
Experiments on stainless steel hollow Theofanous M and Gardner L 2010
sections—Part 2: Member behaviour of Experimental and numerical studies of
columns and beams Journal of lean duplex stainless steel beams
Constructional Steel research 60(9) Journal of constructional steel research
1319-1332. 66(6) 816-825.
Gardner L and Ashraf M 2006 Structural Theofanous M Chan T M & Gardner L 2009
design for non-linear metallic materials Flexural behaviour of stainless steel oval
Engineering Structures 28(6) 926–934. hollow sections Thin-Walled structures
Gardner L Chan T M & Wadee M A 2008 47(6-7) 776-787.
Shear response of elliptical hollow
sections Proceedings of the Institution
of Civil Engineers—Structures and
Buildings 161 (6) 301–309.
Hagen N C, Larsen P K & Aalberg A 2009
Shear capacity of steel plate girders with
large web openings, part 1: modelling
and simulations. Journal of
Constructional Steel 65(2) 142-150.
Hassanein M F 2009 Finite element
investigation of shear failure of lean
duplex stainless steel plate girdersThin-
Walled structures 49 964-973.
Lagaros N D Psarras L D Papadrakakis M
and Panagiotou G 2008 Optimum design
of steel structures with web openings
Engineering Structures 30 (9) 2528–
2537.
Patton M L and Singh K D 2012 Numerical
modeling of lean duplex stainless steel
868
ICCMS2016
STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE OF ELLIPTICAL HOLLOW STEEL

TUBULAR BRACES UNDER ULTRA LOW CYCLE FATIGUE LOADING
NARENDRA P. V. R. * and SINGH K. D.
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Guwahati, India
Abstract: Numerical modelling of elliptical hollow section (EHS) braces of constant

steel cross-sectional area, A and thickness, t with aspect ratios (major to minor axis
diameter ratios, a/b) ranging between 1 and 2under ultra low cycle fatigue loading
(ULCF) by employing a non-linear combined (isotropic/kinematic) hardening
material (NLCHM) model in Abaqus (2009) is presented in this paper. Parametric
studies are conducted on the hysteresis behavior prior to the crack initiation of EHS
brace models under the cyclic axial displacement loading history adopted from the
recommendations of ECCS (1986) to assess their compressive resistance and cyclic
energy dissipation. The paper concludes with a commentary on a/b ratios and global
slenderness limits of EHS steel tubular braces. The optimum non-dimensional global
slenderness ratio, 𝜆 for adopting EHS braces with a/b ratio of 2.0 under ULCF loading
for economical design is found to be 0.8.
Keywords: EHS; Braces; ULCF; Aspect ratio; NLCHM; Abaqus; ECCS .
INTRODUCTION 2008). Post-earthquake reconnaissance and

Many steel tubular members have evolved in follow up research have indicated that the
the construction sector with various types of damage in structural members like beams,
cross sectional shapes. The familiar range of columns and braces is most likely a result of
tubular sections, namely circular, square, insufficient ductility and improper energy
rectangular, oval hollow sections has been absorption capacity to sustain the large
recently extended to include EHSs. More inelastic displacement cyclic loadings
than a century after their initial use by Brunel [Elchalakani et. al., 2003; Nip et al., 2010]. In
(Binding, 1997) in the Royal Albert bridge, the early days, models were proposed to
UK, EHSs evolved as the newest members of predict the area under the hysteresis loops,
the structural steel tubular member family which represents the amount of energy
and are now available as hot-rolled (HR) and dissipation by bracing members. Besides
cold-formed (CF) structural members with evaluating the cyclic energy dissipation, post-
a/b ratio of 2.0 (Packer, 2008; Chan and buckling compressive resistance, lateral
Gardner, 2008).Since its inception during the deflection at plastic hinge near mid-length at
latter part of the twentieth century, EHS offers various displacement ductility levels are also
an interesting choice for engineers and studied. Till date, all such experiments e.g.
architects to meet their design visions from Shaback and Brown, (2003); Sheehan and
an architectural perspective with its aesthetic Chan, (2014) were carried out only on
appeal, complemented by the sound structural rectangular hollow section (RHS) and
efficiency (Packer, 2008; Chan and Gardner, circular hollow section (CHS) bracing
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: v.perumalla@iitg.ernet.in 869

Narendra and Singh
members. Yet, to the best of authors' thickness is employed throughout this study
knowledge, no such reported study on EHS for meshing the models. The extent of the
braces under cyclic loading has been carried refined mesh in the longitudinal direction is
out. Therefore, the primary objective of this set to ~4a at the mid-length region as shown
study is to evaluate the hysteretic behaviour in Figure. 2 for a typical brace model. A
of EHS steel braces under ULCF loading similar pattern is adopted for meshing from
using FE modelling procedure. both the ends of the brace models along the
extent of ~6a. Therefore, ensuring
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING sufficiently large refined area in the zones
The shell FE modelling approach adopted where the plastic hinge and local buckling is
here is similar to those adopted for modelling most likely to occur. The adopted element
RHS and CHS braces (see e.g. Nip et al., ratio in the regions of refined mesh is 1:1 and
2010) using the general purpose FE software, in the elastic regions of the model is 2:1 as
Abaqus (2009).The mechanical and NLCHM shown in Figure. 2.The number of elements
model parameters are extracted from the used in the analyses for various models
experimental program of Gardner et al. ranges from ~ 36,000 – 81,000.
(2010) for HR-CS of grade S355J2H, which
is adopted as reference material in the current
study. The axial tensile yield displacement,
δ y of each specimen is taken as the product of
L and the measured tensile yield strain, ε y
(=f y,meas . /E) of the cross-section where f y,meas 112 mm (~ 4a)
Normal Refined
. and E are measured yield stress and modulus
mesh mesh
of elasticity of the brace material
respectively. The cross-section (c/s) Figure 2. FE mesh pattern at mid-length
dimensions of the EHS brace models is of 63.2×31.6×3×1250 mm EHS brace.
shown in Figure. 1.
All the six degrees of freedom of all the
a/b = 1.00 a/b = 1.33 nodes at both ends of the members were
restrained, except for the axial displacement
at the loading end which is allowed for
translational movement along the global axis
2a = 48.7 mm 2a = 55.4 mm as shown in Figure. 3. Both global and local
2b = 48.7 mm 2b = 41.6 mm initial geometric imperfections were
incorporated into the FE models. Global
a/b = 1.67 a/b = 2.00 imperfection amplitude of L/1500 as
suggested in Nip et al. (2010) and local
imperfection amplitude of t/100as
2a = 60.0 mm 2a = 63.2 mm recommended in the literature (Chan and
2b = 36.0 mm 2b = 31.6 mm Gardner, 2008) are adopted. The cyclic
Figure 1. EHS model sectional loading as per the protocol outlined in ECCS
dimensions. (1986) is chosen with a strain rate of 3×10-4s-
1
Four-noded general purpose shell element at the loading end as shown in Figure.
(S4R) with five integration points through the 3through a reference point to which all the
circumferential nodes of the model in the
870
Structural Performance of Elliptical Hollow Steel Tubular Braces under Ultra Low Cycle Fatigue
Loading
loading plane are tied to by kinematic RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

coupling. It is observed from Figures. 4a & 4b that,
-δ +δ EHS braces with higher a/b ratios offer lesser
Cyclic
post-buckling compressive resistances, F c
L
Load and lesser energy dissipation capacities. In all
T the models, the compression resistance
reduced after subsequent loading cycles due
Figure 3. Applied boundary conditions.
to the accumulated elongation and residual
PARAMETRIC STUDY lateral deformation at the plastic hinge near
mid-length. The F c values at various μ δ
A total of twenty 3mm thick EHS tubular
levels (denoted as F c,μδ ) of all the FE models
braces with five sets of brace lengths (L)
in the current study are normalized with
ranging between 900mm to 2500mm, a/b
respect to their axial tensile yield force, F y
ratios ranging between 1 and 2 are modeled
(=A.f y ) and are plotted against 𝜆 in Figure. 4.
with a constant A, ~ 417 mm2 which is equal
It is also observed from Figures. 4a & 4b that
to that of a 40×40×3-CS-HR brace used in
the a/b ratio has a significant effect on F c,μδ
the experimental investigation of Nip et al.
values at higher μ δ levels (≥2) on lesser
(2010).It may be noted that, all cross-sections
are deemed as Class 1 sections according to global slender sections with 𝜆< 0.8. The first
EC3 Part 1-3 (EN 1993-1-1, 2005). loading cycle at μ δ level of 4 (i.e., 8th loading
cycle) is found to be the cycle with the
largest amount of energy dissipation, 𝑊4𝛿𝑦
1.2
a/b = 1.00 (Tremblay, 2002; Nip, 2008).
(Fc, µδ=2)/Fy
a/b = 1.67
0.8 12
a/b = 2.00 a/b=1.00
0.4 a/b=1.67
W4δy/(Fy .
9
a/b=2.00
0.0
6
δy)
0.2 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6

3
0.8
0.2 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6
a/b =
0.6 1.00
µδ=4)/Fy
25
0.4 a/b = 1.00
(Fc,
20 a/b = 1.67
cum./(Fy.δy)
0.2
a/b = 2.00
15
0.0
W8.
0.2 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6 10

𝜆
5
Figure 4. Compressive resistance of EHS 0.2 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.6
cyclic specimens during the first loading 𝜆
cycles at ductility levels of 2 and 4.
Figure 5. Energy dissipation of specimens
during the 8th loading cycle and up to the
8th loading cycle.
871
Narendra and Singh
A decreasing trend of 𝑊4𝛿𝑦 with increasing 𝜆 Edition. European Committee for

Standardization Brussels Belgium.
values is observed (Figure. 5a). The
cumulative energy dissipation, W 8.cum. of the Elchalakani M Zhao X L and Grazebieta R
braces which is the area under the hysteretic 2003 Tests of cold-formed circular
tubular braces under cyclic axial loading
loops up to the 8th loading cycle of the EHS
Journal of Structural Engineering 129(4)
FE models is normalized and plotted against 507-514.
𝜆 in Figure. 5b. Although, CHS (i.e., EHS
EN 1993-1-1 2005 Eurocode 3 Design of
with a/b = 1.0) showed the highest W 8.cum. steel structures-Part 1.1 General rules
values, the effect of a/b ratio is observed to and rules for buildings.
be very less significant on the W 8.cum. values
Gardner L Nip K H Davies C M and
of higher slender sections with 𝜆 ≥ 0.8. Elghazouli A Y 2010 Extremely low
cycle fatigue tests on structural carbon
CONCLUSION steel and stainless steel. Journal of
The following conclusions have been derived Constructional Steel Research 66(1) 96–
based on the parametric study made on the 110.
results obtained from FE modelling. Nip K H 2008 Cyclic behavior of carbon
steel and stainless steel tubular members
1) Higher slender sections offer lesser Ph.D Thesis Imperial College London
compressive resistance and energy London UK.
dissipation values at all ductility levels.
Nip K H Gardner L and Elghazouli A Y 2010
2) The a/b ratio has less significance on Cyclic testing and numerical modelling
F c,μδ and W values at higher μ δ levels of carbon steel and stainless steel tubular
(≥2) on sections with 𝜆≥ 0.8. bracing members Engineering Structures
3) The optimum 𝜆 for adopting steel EHS 32 424-441.
braces with a/b ratio of 2.0 under ULCF Packer J A 2008 Going elliptical. Modern
loading for economical design is found to steel construction AISC March Issue 65-
be 0.8. 67.
Shaback B and Brown T 2003 Behaviour of
REFERENCES square hollow structural steel braces with
Abaqus 2009 HibbitKarlsson and Sorensen end connections under reversed cyclic
Inc. Version 6.9-EF1 Pawtucket USA. axial loading. Canadian Journal of Civil
Binding J 1997 Brunel's Royal Albert Bridge
Twelve heads Press Cornwall UK. Sheehan T and Chan T M 2014 Cyclic
response of hollow and concrete-filled
Chan T M and Gardner L 2008 Compressive circular hollow section braces
resistance of hot-rolled elliptical hollow Proceedings of the Institution of Civil
sections Journal of Engineering Engineers - Structures and Buildings
Structures 30(2) 522–532. SB3 167 140-152.
ECCS 1986 Recommended testing procedure Tremblay R 2002 Inelastic seismic response
for assessing the behaviour of structural of steel bracing members Journal of
steel elements under cyclic loads First Constructional Steel Research 58 665–
701.
872
ICCMS2016
A COMPARATIVE STUDY ON EFFECT FIBRE VOLUME FRACTION

ON EX-SITU BMG COMPOSITES THROUGH UNIT CELL
SIMULATIONS
GOURIPRIYA S.1*, SINHA S.A.2 and TANDAIYA P.1
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, Mumbai, India.
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Vellore Institute of Technology, Vellore, India.
Abstract: Bulk Metallic Glasses (BMGs) are multi-component amorphous alloys

with strengths 10 times that of conventional steels (~2—4 GPa), which makes them
attractive candidates for structural applications. However, BMGs exhibit almost no
ductility in uniaxial loading, high fracture initiation toughness (~15—80 MPa-m0.5)
but zero crack propagation toughness. To overcome these limitations, BMG
composites (BMGC) have been developed. Ex-situ BMGCs are a class of composites
where the matrix material is reinforced with particle or fibres [Schuh et. al., 2007].
They exhibit better compressive and tensile plastic strain to failure [Conner et. al.,
1998]. The present work is to capture the mechanical behaviour of ex-situ BMGCs
through unit cell simulations. A qualitative behaviour of fiber reinforced ex-situ
BMGCs is obtained from the current analysis.
Keywords: finite element analysis; bulk metallic glass composites; ductility;
shear band
INTRODUCTION reinforcements used, BMGCs can be
classified under three categories: ex situ, in
Plasticity in crystalline materials are
situ and porous. The present work is
governed by the motion of dislocations. But
motivated by the property enhancements
BMGs that are amorphous in nature deform
exhibited by ex-situ BMGCs over monolithic
by the cooperative movement of a cluster of
BMGs. The goal of this work is to investigate
about 50-100 atoms. This is known as shear
the mechanics and mechanisms of
transformation zone (STZ), which occurs due
deformation and failure in ex-situ BMGCs by
to free volume creation and annihilation. The
means of computer simulations. The
plastic deformation mechanisms of BMGs
behaviour of a fibre reinforced BMGC under
are still an on-going topic of research.
tensile and compressive load is investigated
Although BMGs possess high yield strength,
through unit cell simulations. The objective
they are poor in their fracture response. In
of the present work is to conduct a parametric
order to overcome this drawback, several
study on the effect of fibre volume fraction
researchers have created different kinds of
on the tensile and compressive behaviour of
BMG matrix composites (BMGCs). BMGCs
ex-situ BMGCs.
are an emerging area of research in material
science and various methods have been
adopted to include the reinforcement phases
in the amorphous matrix. Based on the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: gouripriya.s@gmail.com 873

Gouripriya et al.
METHODOLOGY (sα) defined with respect to the principal

directions of stress. Multiplicative
A cubic unit cell containing a cylindrical
decomposition of the deformation gradient
fibre reinforcement of volume fractions 10%,
into elastic and plastic parts is assumed.
20%, 40% and 60% are considered to study
the effect of volume fraction on uniaxial
The flow rule corresponding to the plastic
tension and compression of ex-situ BMGC.
part is
The 3D unit cell (Figure.1) is modelled such 6 . ( )
that its boundaries remain orthogonal and l p   (s ( )  m( ) )   (m( )  m( ) )  (1)

free of shear traction. In order to exploit the
where, β is the dilatancy function, s(α) is the
symmetry, only 1/8th of the unit cell is
slip direction, m(α) is the unit slip plane
modelled with ABAQUS C3D8RH finite
normal and v(α) is the plastic shearing rate for
elements. Aspect ratio of the cell is
the αth slip system.
2H0/2L0=1 in the X-Y plane and 2T0/2L0=1
The shearing rate is defined as
in the X-Z plane.
1/ m
. ( )   ( ) 
.
 0  ( ) 
0 (2)
 c   
where, v0 is a reference plastic shear strain
rate. τ(α) and σ(α) are shear and compressive
normal tractions at the respective slip system
and c is cohesion, defined as the yield
strength in pure shear. µ is an internal friction
parameter and when τ = c + µσ, v(α) = v0 for
m > 0; m being the strain rate sensitivity
parameter. The dilatancy function β and
cohesion c, are assumed to be exponential
functions of plastic volumetric strain η as
g 0  1cv  
  
Figure 1. Unit cell model ˆ

   ( )  e  1 (3)
e 1  
The constitutive model for BMGs proposed 
b  1cv  
  
by Anand and Su, (2005) and implemented in
c  cˆ( )  ccv  e  1 (4)
a user Material Subroutine VUMAT in e 1  
ABAQUS/Explicit by Tandaiya et. al. (2011) 
is used in the present work. The constitutive As the volumetric strain increases from 0 to a
model of Anand and Su, (2005) involving a saturation value ηcv, β varies smoothly from
damage model governed by plastic shear g0 to 0 and c from c0 to ccv, where initial
strain γ is summarized in Eq. (1)-(7). cohesion c0 = ccv + b. In order to model the
failure of the material, an equivalent plastic
BMG being an amorphous material does not shear strain rate γ~ p in an element is defined
have any preferential direction for slip. as
According to Anand-Su model, deformation ~ p def
of BMGs consist of simultaneous shearing   |D0p | (5)
and dilatation on six potential slip systems
874
A Comparative Study On Effect Fibre Volume Fraction On Ex-Situ BMG Composites Through Unit Cell
Simulations
where Dp0 is the symmetric deviatoric part of determines the element deletion from the
plastic part of velocity gradient. Thus, analysis.
equivalent plastic shear strain γp is defined as The material properties and parameters used
def t ~
p for the Anand- Su model are listed in Table 1.
 (t )    (  )d 
p
(6) The reinforcing fibre within the matrix is
0
considered to be Steel and the properties are
A damage variable d is defined as inferred from MATweb. Steel density is
 p   cp considered to be 7.87e-9 tonnes/mm3, the
d (7)
 fp   cp elastic modulus is 200 GPa and the Poisson’s
such that d = 0 for γp less than a critical value ratio is considered to be 0.29. Von-mises
of plastic shear strain γpc and d = 1 as γp plasticity is used for steel wire with initial
evolves to failure value γpf. The value of the yield strength of 585 MPa.
damage parameter at the integration points
Table1. Material properties for the matrix material (Vitreloy 1)
Property Value Ref

(i) Young's modulus E 97000 MPa Conner et. al.(1998)
(ii) Density 6e-9 tonnes/mm3 Conner et. al.(1998)
(iii) Poisson's Ratio ν 0.36 Anand and Su (2005)
(iv) µ 0.06 Present Study
(v) ν0 0.001 Anand and Su(2005)
(vi) m 0.02 Anand and Su(2005)
(vii) b 120 MPa Anand and Su(2005)
(viii) c0 820 MPa Anand and Su(2005)
(ix) g0 (tension) 0.4 Anand and Su(2005)
(x) g0 (compression) 0.04 Anand and Su(2005)
(xi) γc 0.05 Anand and Su(2005)
(xii) γp 0.15 Anand and Su(2005)
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION shown in Figure 2. Figure 3(a) shows the

stress-strain curve of steel fibre reinforced
The accuracy of the properties of steel wire
Vitreloy 1 subjected to uniaxial tension. It is
reinforced Vitreloy 1 considered in the
observed that a primary kink appears at a
present analysis is validated by comparing
value close to 500 MPa indicating that the
the Young’s modulus obtained from
matrix is stressed completely at this point.
simulation with the rule of mixtures lines and
Further loading leads to sharing of stress
available literature [Conner et.al. 1998] as
between the fibre and the matrix. It is seen
875
Gouripriya et al.
that with the increasing value of volume failure point accurately, a qualitative study
fraction of the fibre, the yield strength shows that with increasing fibre volume
decreases. The present damage model used in fraction, plasticity of the composite
the analysis is solely for the purpose of improves.
qualitative comparison of effect of different (a) (b)
volume fraction of reinforcement. They do
not provide the exact failure point of the
material. It can be inferred that with
increasing fibre volume fraction, the failure
point of the composite increases.
Figure 3. Effect of volume fraction of

stress-strain behaviour under uniaxial (a)
tension (b) compression
REFERENCES
Anand L Su C 2005 A theory for amorphous
viscoplastic materials undergoing finite
deformations with application to
Figure 2. Comparison of Steel reinforced metallic glasses Journal of the
BMG properties with Rule of Mixtures Mechanics and Physics of Solids 53(6)
A similar observation is made in the case of 1362 – 1396.
uniaxial compression test of steel fibre Conner R Dandliker R Johnson W 1998
reinforced Vitreloy 1and is shown in Figure Mechanical properties of tungsten and
3(b). It is also observed that the yield point of steel fiber reinforced
the material for a particular volume fraction Zr41.25Ti13.75Cu12.5Ni10Be22.5
under compression is higher than yield point metallic glass matrix composites Acta
under tension. This is consistent with the Materialia 46(17) 6089 – 6102.
behaviour of BMGs, [Anand and Su, 2005].
Schuh C A Hufnagel T C Ramamurty U 2007
CONCLUSION Mechanical behavior of amorphous
alloys Acta Materialia 55(12) 4067 –
A parametric study on effect of volume
4109.
fraction on uniaxial tension and compression
behaviour of fibre reinforced ex-situ BMGCs Tandaiya P Narasimhan R Ramamurty U
is conducted through unit cell simulations. It 2013 On the mechanism and the length
is observed that with increase in volume scales involved in the ductile fracture of
fraction yield strength decreases in both a bulk metallic glass Acta Materialia
tension and compression. Yield strength in 61(5) 1558 – 1570.
compression for a particular composite is
higher than that in tension. Though the
present damage model does not capture the
876
ICCMS2016
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE

JOSHI A. D., GUJAR P. S. and PENDHARI S. S.
Department of Structural Engineering, V.J.T.I. Mumbai, Maharashtra India.
Abstract: The objective of the present work is to compare the applicability of

concrete smeared cracking and concrete damaged plasticity model for plain cement
concrete element and to check the mesh sensitivity effect using finite element
methodology. Finite element analysis of plain cement concrete is carried out in
ABAQUS 6.12. Modeling and analysis of simple plain cement concrete block for
different concrete grades and various mesh sizes is done by using concrete smeared
cracking model and concrete damaged plasticity model. Results for both the models
are compared to check the adequacy and accuracy of both the models along with mesh
sensitivity.
Keywords: Finite Element Analysis; Concrete Smeared Cracking (CSC)Model;
Concrete Damage Plasticity (CDP) Model
INTRODUCTION leads to the nonlinear behaviour at low stress

levels and causes volume expansion. All this
Finite element analysis is a numerical
possess difficulties for numerical analysis.
technique which is widely used for solving
The initiation and propagation of cracks in
many engineering problems having complex
concrete is the dominant mechanism of
geometries, boundary conditions and loads.
concrete material response.
From last few decades, the fast improvement
in computer hardware technology has Chaudhary and Chakrabarti (2012) presented
boosted this method. There are number of a modelling of concrete for nonlinear analysis
popular finite element analysis software using finite element code ABAQUS. In this
available such as ANSYS, ABAQUS, paper a 3D concrete cube model is prepared
NASTRAN etc. which can be useful for using concrete smeared cracking model and
linear and nonlinear analysis of structural concrete damaged plasticity approach.
components. Finally, the validation of the model to the
desired behavior under monotonic loading is
The nonlinear and complex behavior of
discussed. Ngo and Scordelis (1967) analysed
concrete leads to challenge in modelling and
reinforced concrete beams using finite
simulation of concrete structures. Concrete
element. The basic concept of using the finite
when subjected to compression exhibits
element method of analysis is in constructing
nonlinearity right from the start. It much
an analytical model for the study of the
quicker undergoes degradation under tension.
behavior of reinforced concrete members.
Concrete exhibits a large number of micro-
The main objective was to demonstrate the
cracks, especially, at the interface between
feasibility and potentialities of finite element
coarse aggregates and mortar, even before
method as well as the difficulties of using the
subjected to any load. The presence of these
same methodology for developing a general
micro-cracks has a great effect on the
analytical method for the study of reinforced
mechanical behaviour of concrete, since the
propagation of micro-cracks during loading

Joshi et. al.
concrete members in the full range of Figure 2. Meshed concrete cube with
loading.
Gupta and Akbar (1983) presented a finite
element method for analysis of reinforced
concrete structures. Four noded isoparametric
element which is suitable for modelling of
cracks in reinforced concrete structures was
formulated. Finally, it was concluded that the
proposed formulation gives superior results
as compared to both the standard
isoparametric element and the conventional
selectively integrated element. Barzegar and
Schnobrich (1986) presented nonlinear finite
element analysis of reinforced concrete under
short term monotonic loading. A
computational procedure for analyzing C3D8 elements
membrane and flexural reinforced concrete
elements is developed. The main focus was
NON-LINEARANALYSIS OF PLAIN
on the post-cracking behavior of CONCRETE ELEMENTS
anisotropically reinforced elements. The Finite element analysis has been carried out
smeared non-orthogonal cracking model was for the concrete grades M10, M15, M20,
modified and extended to simulate the M25, M30, M35, M40 and M50. A cube of
behavior of cracked concrete considering dimensions 150 x 150 x 150 mmis modelled.
tension stiffening. At the end, experimental Two steel plates of same cross sectional area
specimens are analyzed to demonstrate the with negligible thickness of 5 mmare
relative importance of different nonlinear modelled to avoid the stress concentration
effects and the capabilities of the adopted and for proper distribution of load. The cube
numerical procedures. and steel plates are assembled assuming tie
In the present work emphasis is given to constraint for perfect bonding. The elastic
compare the applicability of concrete property, Young’s modulus 200 GPa and
smeared cracking model and concrete Poisson’s ratio 0.3 are assigned to steel
damaged plasticity model for plain cement plates. The values of inelastic strain and yield
concrete elements and also to study the effect stress of concrete material are obtained from
of mesh sensitivity on mechanical behavior Hognestad’s (1951) equation for both CDP
of plain cement concrete elements. and CSC models and the tension stiffening
parameters are obtained from Kwak’s (1990)
formula for both the models. Fixed boundary
condition is assigned at bottom surface of
steel plate and load is applied at top face of
steel plate shown in Figure1. Three
dimensional full integration cubic element
available in ABAQUS (C3D8) is used for
meshing (Figure 2). The results are obtained
for stress distribution across the surface of
the cube. Various mesh sizes considered for
present study are 7.5mm, 10mm, 12.5mm,
15mm, 25 mm and 50 mm.
Figure 1. Modelled concrete cube with

loading and boundary conditions
878
Finite Element Analysis of Plain Cement Concrete
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 25
Results obtained from finite element analysis 20

of plain concrete cube for Concrete Damaged
Theoretical
Plasticity (CDP) and Concrete Smeared 15
Stress
Cracking (CSC) model for various mesh sizes
10 CSC FE
are compared. Figure 3 and Figure4 shows
Analysis
the variation of stress v/s strain for concrete
grade M25 using CSC and CDP model for 5 CDP FE
Analysis
different mesh sizes. It is observed that mesh
0
sizes 12.5 mm, 15 mm, 25 mm and 50 mm did 0 0.002
not show proper matching to the input curve Strain
whereas 10 mm mesh size shows good
agreement with the analytical curve. Figure 5. Variation of stress v/s strain for
Therefore, 10 mm mesh size is used for M25 concrete grade- CSC and CDP
further study. models with mesh size 10
25 20
18
20 16
Mesh 7.5 14
15 Mesh 10 12
Stress
Stress
Theoretical
Mesh 12.5 10
10 8
Mesh 15 CSC FE
6
5 Mesh 25 Analysis
4 CDP FE
Mesh 50
2 Analysis
0 Theoretical 0
0 0.002
0 0.002
Strain Strain
Figure 3. Variation of stress v/s strain for Figure 6.Variation of stress v/s strain for
various mesh sizes- CSC model, M25 M20 concrete grade- CSC and CDP
grade of concrete models with mesh size 10
30
30
25
25
Mesh 7.5 20
20 Theoretical
Stress
Mesh 10
Stress
15
15 Mesh 12.5 CSC FE
10
10 Mesh 15 Analysis
Mesh 25 5 CDP FE
5 Analysis
Mesh 50 0
0 Theoretical 0 0.002 0.004
0 0.002 Strain
Strain
Figure 4. Variation of stress v/s strain for Figure 7.Variation of stress v/s strain for
various mesh sizes- CDP model, M25 M30 concrete grade- CSC and CDP
grade of concrete models with mesh size 10
879
Joshi et. al.
Figure 5 shows the variation of stress v/s REFERENCES

strain for concrete grade M25 for CSC and
CDP analysis with theoretical stress v/s strain Barzegar F and Schnobrich W C 1986
curve for 10 mm mesh size. It is found that Nonlinear finite element analysis of
CDP model has more accurate and realistic reinforced concrete under short term
failure curve than CSC model. monotonic loading Civil Engineering
studies SRS No. 530 University of
This is because of inclusion of elasticity Illinois at Urbana Illinois.
parameters in the CDP model which define
the curve more realistically than that of CSC Chaudhary S V and Chakrabarti M A 2012
model in ABAQUS. Figure 6 and Figure 7 Modelling of concrete for nonlinear
shows the variation of stress v/s strain for analysis using finite element code
concrete grade M20 and M30 for 10 mm ABAQUS International Journal of
mesh size respectively. Computer Applications 44(7) 14-18.
Gupta A K and Akbar H 1983 A finite
CONCLUDING REMARK element for the analysis of reinforced
concrete structures International journal
Finite element analysis of plain cement
concrete is performed with the help of for numerical methods in engineering19
1705-1712.
ABAQUS considering concrete smeared
cracking model and concrete damaged Hognestad E 1951 A study of combined
plasticity model for various grades of bending and axial load in reinforced
concrete and mesh sizes. CDP model shows concrete members University of Illinois
more accurate stress-strain behavior than Engineering Experiment Station Bulletin
CSC model. It was found that the ideal point 399 Bulletin No. 1.
for measurement of stresses and strains is the Kwak H and Filippou F C 1990 Finite
midpoint of the cube on the face adjacent to element analysis of reinforced concrete
the loading axis. The plasticity parameters of structures under monotonic loads
CDP were constant throughout the iterations
Structural engineering mechanics and
and did not affect the analysis. Another materials Report No. UCB/SEMM-
important parameter is mesh sensitivity. The 90/14.
ideal mesh size which shows good agreement
with theoretical analysis is found to be 10mm. Ngo D and Scordelis A C 1967 Finite
element analysis of reinforced concrete
beams Journal of ACI 64(3) 152-163.
880
ICCMS2016
ESTIMATION OF LOCAL STRESSES AND STRAINS FOR NOTCHED

GEOMETRIES USING NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS
KHATAWATE V. H.*, DHARAP M. A.1 and MOORTHY R. I. K.2
*.1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, V.J.T.I. Matunga, Mumbai, India
2
PIIT, New-Panvel, Navi Mumbai, India
Abstract:The paper reports, evaluation of stresses at notch root for three different
notched specimens using finite element analysis(FEA).Linear FEA is performed on
the three notch configurations to evaluate theoretical stress concentration factor (𝐾𝑡 )
and validated using Roark’s formulae available in the literature. Nonlinear finite
element analysis(NLFEA) is performed to evaluate local plastic stresses at the notch
root for all the three specimens and compared using Neuber’s rule and Equivalent
strain energy density(ESED), i.e., Molski and Glinka’s energy density approach. The
obtained results are thoroughly compared and discussed. The stress values at notches
by Neuber’s rule gives upper bound values while Energy density approach by Molski
and Glinka gives lower bound values. NLFEA values for notch stresses lie in between
these two values for all the three specimens.
Keywords: Notch; Neuber’s rule; Equivalent strain energy density (ESED);
Finite element analysis (FEA); Stress concentration factor.
INTRODUCTION commonly used methods are Neuber’s rule and

ESED method proposed by Molski and Glinka.
The engineering components subjected to
repeated loading fails due to fatigue. Fatigue In this paper evaluation of theoretical stress
life prediction methods in use today are based concentration factor (𝐾𝑡 ) at notch root for three
on the local stress and strain. Therefore, the different notched geometries using linear FEA
accurate evaluation of inelastic stresses and is presented. The results obtained using linear
strains induced at the geometric irregularities is FEA is validated using Roark’s formulae. The
significant from the life prediction point of validated model is used to perform NLFEA.
view. Early researches focused primarily on The paper also focuses on prediction of local
determining theoretical stress concentration stresses on three notched specimens by NSSC
factor ( 𝐾𝑡 ) using either elasticity theory or (Notch stress-strain conversion) rules viz,
photoelastic analysis [Pilkey, 2008]. So far, Neuber’s rule and ESED method, and their
approximate methods [Neuber,1961; Molski prediction is assessed by comparing results
and Glinka,1981; Glinka,1985a;Glinka,1985b; with NLFEA.
Topper et al.,1969] for assessing local stresses
and strains have been developed. Some NSSC RULES
researchers have used linear FEA to assess
NEUBER’S RULE
local stress and strain by modifying material
properties such as elastic modulus and Theoretical or Linear elastic stress
Poisson’s ratio [Seshadri, 1991; Babu and Iyer, concentration factor ( 𝐾𝑡 ) (Pilkey,2008) is
1998]. Among these most popular and defined as the ratio of maximum stress at notch
root (σ𝑚𝑎𝑥 ) to nominal stress (σ n )
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:vkhatawate@mes.ac.in 881

Khatawate et al.
Graphical interpretation of 𝑊𝜎 and 𝑊𝑠 is

σ𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐾𝑡 = (1) shown in Figure.2. The above relation is used
𝜎𝑛
to find notch stress and strain in plastic region.
Beyond yield point, 𝐾𝑡 becomes invalid and
two more concentration factors namely stress
concentration factor ( 𝐾𝜎 ) and strain
concentration factor (𝐾𝜀 ), are needed.
Neuber’s rule (Neuber,1961) correlates all the
three concentration factors by equation,
𝐾𝑡2 = 𝐾𝜎 . 𝐾𝜀 (2)
In terms of maximum stresses and strainsEq.
(2) becomes
𝜎𝑛2
𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝜀𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐾𝑡2 (3)
𝐸
Eq. (3) when solved with stress strain curve 𝑊𝑠 : 𝑊𝜎 :

equation gives the actual local stress-strain
state of the notch as shown in Figure.1 Figure2. Strain energy density due to
nominal and notch stress (Molski and
Glinka,1981).
MATERIAL PROPERTY
Johnson Cook elastic plastic material model
(Johnson et al.,1983) is used for nonlinear
analysis. For laboratory experiment at room
temperature the model is given by equation,
𝜎 = �𝑎 + 𝑏𝜀𝑝𝑛 � (5)
Johnson Cook material model parameters for
Aluminum 6063T7
Figure1. Determination of local stress and a= 90.26 MPa, b=223.13 MPa and n = 0.374
strain using Neuber’s rule. Failure Stress for the material,σ m = 175 MPa.
EQUIVALENT STRAIN ENERGY COMPUTATIONAL PROCEDURE

DENSITY (ESED) METHOD AND MODELING
One more frequently used method to find PROBLEM DEFINITION
notch stress and strain is energy density
approach given by Molski and Glinka (1981). Empirical formulae of 𝐾𝑡 for the geometries
Strain energy density is strain energy per unit selected are given by Roark (Young,2002) and are
ε
volume and is given as W= ∫0 σ (ε) . 𝑑ε and presented in Table 1. All the three specimens are
graphically it is area under stress-strain curve . . subjected to uniaxial tension. The material is
homogeneous and isotropic. For this analysis the
The relation between Theoretical stress cartesian coordinates (x,y,z) are used.
concentration factor 𝐾𝑡 and Strain energies
(𝑊𝜎 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑊𝑠 ) is given by
𝑊𝜎 = 𝐾𝑡2 𝑊𝑠 (4)
882
Estimation of Local Stresses and Strains for Notched Geometries using Non-linear Analysis
Table1. Geometries selected for the

analysis and stress concentration factor by 3.0
Roark’s formulae(Young,2002). 2.5
a) Specimen-1:Flat plate with centre 2.0
circular Hole
Kt
1.5
Roark
FEA (Auto Mesh)
1.0
FEA (Biased Mesh)
D= 40mm, r =5mm,
t =5mm 0.5
0.0
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000
2 3
2r 2r 2r Number of Elements
𝐾𝑡 = 3.00 − 3.13 � � + 3.66 � � − 1.53 � �
D D D Figure3. Mesh convergence of stress
𝐾𝑡 =2.42
concentration factor for specimen-1.
b) Specimen-2:Flat plate with
Semicircular edge notches RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
D=40mm, LINEAR ANALYSIS

r=h=5mm, t=5mm
A linear FEA of three specimens is performed.
The finite element models of three specimens
2h 2h 2 2h 3
𝐾𝑡 = 3.065 − 3.370 � � + 0.647 � � + 0.658 � � are validated by comparing 𝐾𝑡 obtained by
D D D
𝐾𝑡 =2.27 FEA with 𝐾𝑡 by Roark’s formulae.
c) Specimen-3:Semicircular groove in NONLINEAR ANALYSIS

cylindrical bar.
140
D=40mm, r=h=5mm 120
100
σ max ( MPa )
2 3
2h 2h 2h 80
Neuber
𝐾𝑡 = 3.04 − 5.42 � � + 6.27 � � − 2.89 � � ESED
D D D 60 NLFEA
𝐾𝑡 =2.03 40
20
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL 0

0 20 40 60 80 100
σ n ( MPa )
Due to the symmetry, only one-quarter of the
model is analyzed. Appropriate boundary Figure 4.Comparison of local stresses by
condition constraints are placed at all planes of different methods for specimen-1.
symmetry. For better accuracy and due to
presence of curved geometry, the size of the Nonlinear analysis is carried out by using three
elements (4 node Quad elements for specimen- methods viz., Neuber’s rule, ESED method
1 and 2, 8 node brick elements for specimen-3) and NLFEA. Local stresses for all the three
decreases gradually with decreasing distance specimens arecalculated for different values of
from the notch root. For all the analysis mesh nominal stress (σ n ).
convergence tests have been carried out to
As a case study, Figure.4 show variation of
ensure that the results obtained through
maximum stress at notch tip with nominal
analysis are the converged values as shown in
stress for the specimen-1.The NLFEA is also
Figure.3. The FEA is carried out using
performed for specimen-2 and 3.
HYPERWORKS finite element program.
883
Khatawate et al.
CONCLUSIONS Molski K and Glinka G 1981 A Method of

Elastic-Plastic Stress and Strain
This paper presents a brief summary of some Calculation at a Notch Root Materials
of the criteria commonly used to compute the Science and Engineering 50 93–100.
elastic-plastic stresses for three notched
geometries.For all the three specimens NLFEA Neuber H 1961 Theory of Stress
results lie between results of Neuber’s and Concentration for Shear-Strained
ESED method. Neuber’s rule gives upper Prismatic Bodies with Arbitrary Nonlinear
bound values i.e., the results are conservative, Stress-Strain Law ASME Journal of
whereas ESED method gives lower bound Applied Mechanics 28 544-550.
values. It is found that Neuber’s rule gives Pilkey D Walter 2008 Peterson’s stress
better prediction for flat specimens-1 and 2, concentration factors John Wiley & Sons
whereas ESED method gives better prediction Inc. Hoboken New Jersey84.
for cylindrical specimen-3, when compared to
NLFEA. Seshadri R 1991 The Generalized Local Stress
Strain GLOSS Analysis-Theory and
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Applications ASME Journal of Pressure
Vessel Technology 113 219– 227.
Authors would like to thank Mr. Atul Godase
and Mr.Sumit Karnik of ANSYCAD solutions Topper T H Wetzel R M and Jo Dean Morrow
Vashi for supporting this work. 1969Neuber’s rule applied to Fatigue of
notched specimens Journal of
REFERENCES Materials(JMLSA) 4 200-209.
Young W C & R G Budynas 2002 Roark's
Babu S and Iyer P K 1998 Inelastic Analysis of Formulas for Stress and Strain McGraw
Components using a Modulus Adjustment Hill Co. NewYork781.
Scheme Journal of Pressure Vessel
Technology 120 1-5. NOTATION
Glinka G 1985 Calculation of Inelastic Notch-
tip Strain-Stress Histories under Cyclic 𝐾𝑡 Theoretical or Geometrical Stress
Loading Engineering Fracture Mechanics Concentration Factor
22 839-854. σ𝑚𝑎𝑥 Notch/Local/Plastic stress
𝜀𝑚𝑎𝑥 Notch/Local/Plastic Strain
Glinka G 1985Energy density approach to σ True Stress
calculation of Inelastic strain-stress near
εp Plastic Strain
notches and cracks Engineering Fracture
a Yield stress
Mechanics 22 485-508.
b Hardening parameter
Johnson Gordon R and Cook William H 1983 A n Hardening exponent
constitutive mode and data for metals 𝑊𝑠 Strain Energy density per unit
subjected to Large strains, high strain rates volumedue to nominal stress and
and high temperatures Seventh 𝑊𝜎 Strain Energy densityper unit
international symposium on Ballistics The volumedue to notch stress
Hague Netherlands.
884
ICCMS2016
FRICTIONAL HYSTERESIS IN AN ELASTIC BODY WITH

MICROCRACKS
BISWAS S.*1, JANA P.2and CHATTERJEE A.1
1
Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur, India
2
Mechanical Engineering, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, India
Abstract: We study an elastic plate with randomly distributed frictional microcracks,

loaded cyclically under plane stress conditions. Finite element solutions in ABAQUS
show narrow hysteresis loops pinched at the origin. Such pinched loops partially
resemble an ad hoc model due to Reid (1956). We also propose a new scalar
hysteresis model that gives a good qualitative match with the numerical solutions. The
new model may lead to better interpretations and modeling in, e.g., vibration response
of structures with such internal frictional damping.
Keywords: Hysteresis; Internal dissipation; Frictional microcracks.
INTRODUCTION 2014). The key qualitative difference

between the Bouc-Wen model and ours is
Many engineering materials dissipate energy
through hysteresis in their stress-strain
response. Under simple cyclic deformation,
the area enclosed by the hysteresis loop
equals the energy dissipated. Hysteretic
material damping in many materials is long
known to be frequency-independent at
somewhat low frequencies (see e.g., Lord
Kelvin, 1865; Rowett, 1914; Kimball and
Lovell, 1927). Mathematically, the material
dissipation on a per cycle and unit volume
basis has been approximated by
𝐷 = 𝐽𝜎 𝑛 ,
where𝜎 is an equivalent stress amplitude, and
𝐽 and 𝑛 ≥ 2 are material constants. Rowett
Figure 1. (a) Stress-strain hysteresis
(1914) found 𝑛 ≈ 3 for torsion of steel tubes,
loop adopted from Rowett (1914). (b)
while Kimball and Lovell (1927) found
Bouc-Wen modelunder a single
𝑛 ≈ 2 for eighteen different materials.
frequency input. (c) The model of
For motivation, Figure 1(a) shows a
Biswas and Chatterjee(2014) under
hysteresis loop measured by Rowett. For
single-frequency input. (d) Bouc-Wen
comparison, Figure 1(b) shows a typical
model under a two-frequency input.
response of the Bouc-Wen model (1967,
Minor loops are not captured. (e) Minor
1976) under single-frequency input. Figure
loops are captured by the model of
1(c) shows a hysteresis loop from our own
Biswas and Chatterjee. (f) Sketch of a
model elsewhere (Biswas and Chatterjee,
hysteresis loop pinched at the origin.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:s.biswas90@gmail.com 885

Biswas et al.
that latter captures minor loops upon partial 𝜎𝑥 = −20 MPa, 𝜎𝑦 = 100 MPa; and for
R R
unloading and loading: Figures 1(d) and (e). case (ii), 𝜎𝑥 = 150 MPa, 𝜎𝑦 = −200 MPa.
R R
With the above motivation, here we first

study hysteresis in a square elastic plate
with several frictional microcracks of
random sizes, locations and orientations. We
perform finite element simulations of the
plate under several time varying biaxial
loadings. Our numerical results show
hysteresis quite different from those in
Figures 1(a)-(e), more like the loop in Figure
1(f). The new loops resemble the pinched
and angular loops proposed empirically by
Reid (1956) and Muravskii (2004), but have Figure 2. (a) A square elastic plate with
additional features we will describe below. frictional microcracks. (b) Finite element
We close the paper with a new single degree mesh generated in ABAQUS.
of freedom rate-independent evolution
equation that captures such pinched SCALAR DISPLACEMENT AND
hysteresis loops. HYSTERESIS LOOP
ANELASTIC PLATE WITH The above analyses of the FE model give the
MICROCRACKS amounts of dissipation under two cyclic
stresses. To generate corresponding
We consider a square elastic plate of size 10 hysteresis loops, we identify a suitable scalar
mm × 10 mm as shown in Fig 2(a). The plate displacement 𝜉 via work done by external
has 32 frictional cracks. The crack lengths, forces as follows.
positions, orientations, friction coefficients From the finite element simulation results,
are assigned randomly. The cracks are non- we take the 𝑥 displacements for the vertical
propagating, and not close to the edges of the edges and the 𝑦 displacements for the
plate. The plate is subjected to a bi-axial horizontal edges. The net displacements in
external load without shear components. the 𝑥 and 𝑦 directions are
Because the crack orientations are random, 𝑢𝑥 = 𝑢right − 𝑢left ,
the crack faces do experience shear tractions.
Displacement boundary conditions at corners 𝑢𝑦 = 𝑢top − 𝑢bottom ,
A and B eliminate rigid body modes.
where 𝑢right , 𝑢left are 𝑥 displacements of the
FINITE ELEMENT SIMULATIONS right and left edges respectively; and 𝑢top
and ubottom are 𝑦 displacements of the top
A finite element model of the plate is made and bottom edges respectively. The work
in ABAQUS as shown in Fig 2(b). We use done by the external tractions in a small
154710 elements of CPS4R type, a 4 node incremental displacement is
bilinear element. The Young's modulus and
Poisson's ratio of the plate are taken as 210 𝑑𝑊 = 𝜎𝑥 𝑓(𝑡)𝑑𝑢𝑥 + 𝜎𝑦 𝑓(𝑡)𝑑𝑢𝑦 = 𝑓(𝑡)𝑑𝜉
GPa and 0.3 respectively. say, whereby
We carried out pseudo-static analyses of the
𝜉 = 𝜎𝑥 𝑢𝑥 + 𝜎𝑦 𝑢𝑦
model in ABAQUS for two load cases (i)
𝑓(𝑡) = sin 2𝜋𝑡, (ii) 𝑓(𝑡) = sin 2𝜋𝑡 + is seen to be the appropriate generalized
0.4 sin 8𝜋𝑡. Here, 𝑓(𝑡) is a time-varying scalar displacement of the system. To study
multiplier of 𝜎𝑥 and 𝜎𝑦 . For load case (i), hysteretic responses, we plot 𝑓(𝑡) against
886
Frictional Hysteresis in an Elastic Body with Microcracks
𝜉(𝑡). The results show hysteresis. However,

the actual hysteresis loops are too thin to see
details without some artificial magnification.
Accordingly, we subtract a bilinear term
from 𝑓 and define a new
𝑓 ̅ = 𝑓 − 𝑎𝜉 − 𝑏|𝜉|, (1)
where 𝑎 and 𝑏 are obtained using least
squares. Figure3 shows hysteresis loops Figure 4. (a) Hysteresis loop from the
corresponding to the two load cases. Minor Reid model, (b) Muravskii's desired loop.
loops are seen in Fig 3(b).
Figure 3.Hysteresis loops correspond to Figure 5. Hysteresis loops from Eq. (2),
(a) load case (i), (b) load case (ii). with 𝐾 = 5, 𝜃𝑚 = 2.5, 𝛽 = 1.5, and
𝜖 = 10−4 (a) 𝑥(𝑡) = sin(2𝜋𝑡), (b) 𝑥(𝑡) =
SCALAR HYSTERESIS MODEL sin(2𝜋𝑡) + 0.4 sin(8𝜋𝑡).
The hysteresis loops obtained in Figure 3 Note that Eq. (2) captures key qualitative
have some qualitative similarity with the aspects of Figure 3. Figure 3 is not
loops given by Reid (1956) and Muravskii symmetric due to the small number of
(2004): see Figure 4. cracks: if the number of cracks is made
Here, we propose an empirical, scalar, larger, we anticipate that the loops in Figure
rate-independent hysteresis model that offers 3 will become symmetric.
an improvement upon Reid and Muravskii's For more detailed assessment, a direct
proposals. Let comparison of Eq. (2) with the results of
𝐾
𝜃̇ = |𝑥|+𝜖 {𝜃𝑚 + 𝛽sgn(𝑥𝑥̇ ) − 𝜃}|𝑥̇ |, (2) Figure 3 is presented. To avoid problems due
where 𝑥 is the input displacement, 𝜃 is an to lack of symmetry, comparison is made
internal variable, and the hysteretic output with the loops of Figure 3 restricted to the
𝑓 = 𝜃𝑥. The model has four parameters that first quadrant. Additionally, each case of
obey the following restrictions: 𝐾, 𝛽, 𝜃𝑚 > 0, Figure 3 has a different transformation in the
and 0 < 𝜖 ≪ 1 . Here 𝜖 is a small form of different𝑎and𝑏in Eq. (1). Therefore,
regularization parameter to cross over the the parameters 𝐾 , 𝛽 and 𝜃𝑚 are separately
singularity at 𝑥 = 0 . Figure 5 shows two fitted for each case using only first quadrant
hysteresis loops obtained from Eq. (2). data and Eq. (2).
It is seen in Figure 6 that the simple
empirical model of Eq. (2) fits fairly well the
results from finite element simulations.
887
Biswas et al.
model can be used for theoretical studies of

damping in frictional systems under multi-
frequency deformations.
An extended version of this paper is due to
appear in Biswas et al. (2016).
REFERENCES
Biswas S and Chatterjee A 2014A reduced
order model from high dimensional
Figure 6. Hysteresis loops of Figure 3, frictional hysteresis, Proceedings of the
fitted individually using Eq. (2). Only first Royal Society A470:20130817.
quadrant portions are considered. The
red solid lines with dots denote FE Biswas S Jana P and Chatterjee A
results; the blue solid lines without dots 2016Hysteretic damping in an elastic
are the fitted curves. body with frictional microcracks
International Journal of Mechanical
Finally, it may be easily shown that in the Sciences In press.
single-frequency case, for amplitudes much
larger than 𝜖 , Eq. (2) predicts a per cycle Bouc R 1967Forced vibrations of mechanical
dissipation systems with hysteresis Proceedings of
2𝛽𝐾 2 the Fourth Conference on Nonlinear
𝐷= 𝑥 ,
𝐾+2 𝑚𝑎𝑥 Oscillation Prague 315.
where 𝑥𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the input displacement
amplitude. Kimball A L and Lovell D E1927Internal
friction in solids Physical Review 30
CONCLUSIONS 948-959.
Typical hysteresis loops observed in material Lord Kelvin (Thomson W) 1865 On the
damping, as in Rowett's experiment, in the elasticity and viscoelasticity of metals
hysteresis loops in the Bouc-Wen model, and Proceedings of the Royal Society of
even in our recently presented model London A14 289-297.
(Biswas and Chatterjee, 2014), all have Muravskii G B 2004 On frequency
nonzero thickness at zero deformation. independent damping Journal of Sound
In contrast, the loops proposed by Reid and and Vibration 274 653-668.
Muravskii are pinched at the origin. From a ReidT J 1956Free vibration and hysteretic
vibration damping viewpoint the latter loops damping Journal of the Royal
apparently had no physical basis. Here, Aeronautical Society 60 283.
through finite element simulations of a plate
with many small random frictional cracks, Rowett F E 1914 Elastic hysteresis in steel
we have shown a possible physical basis for Proceedings of the Royal Society of
such hysteresis loops. London A 89(614) 528-543.
Finally, we have proposed a scalar evolution Wen Y K 1976Method for random vibration
equation that captures some essential features of hysteretic systems Journal of
of such hysteresis loops. This new simple Engineering Mechanics Division ASCE
102(614) 249-263.
888
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF A NONLINEAR FLEXURALWAVE-BREATHING

CRACKINTERACTION IN A SLENDER BEAM USING WAVELET
SPECTRAL FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
JOGLEKAR D. M. and MITRA M.*
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, India.
Abstract: An analytical-numerical method is presented for investigating the nonlinear

interactions of flexural wave with a breathing crack in a finite length slender
waveguide. Wavelet spectral finite elements based on Daubechies wavelet scaling
functions are employed for approximating the variation of a transverse displacement
over the length of the waveguide. An equivalent rotational spring model is used to
represent the effect of crack. The breathing behavior is achieved by switching the
stiffness matrix of the beam segment hosting the breathing crack between that of a
healthy beam and a cracked beam. An iterative method is devised to arrive at the
displacement solution. The existence of higher order harmonics is observed in the
response spectrum of the beam.
Keywords: Wavelet spectral finite element method; Breathing crack; Flexural
wave; Higher order harmonics.
INTRODUCTION paper for investigating the interaction of

flexural waves with a breathing crack
Detection of structural damages at an early
present in a finite length slender
stage is crucial for ensuring integrity,
waveguide.
safety, and reliability of structural
The remainder of the manuscript is
components. The modern day structural
organized into three sections. The
health monitoring practices prevalently
equivalent crack model along with the
employ the wave based techniques,
formulation of the WSFEs representing the
exploiting the nonlinear characteristics
cracked beam structure is explained in the
emanating from wave-crack interaction
former half of the following section. The
[Broda et al., 2014]. Among the various
latter half of the Section 2 describes the
forms of nonlinearities originating from the
method of the solution of the resulting set
existence of the crack, the one referred to as
of bilinear equations. The third section
a breathing of crack faces results into
describes the results obtained, followed by
generation of nonlinear harmonics in the
the conclusion of the article in the last
response spectrum [Joglekar and Mitra,
section.
2015].
The scarcity of the analytical-numerical FORMULATION AND METHOD OF
techniques addressing the nonlinear
SOLUTION
interactions of guided waves with breathing
crack has motivated the present research. In The schematic of a slender cantilever beam
this connection, an analytical-numerical of length L, thickness h and width b is shown
method employing Wavelet Spectral Finite in the Figure. 1. A breathing crack of depth a
Elements (WSFEs) is presented in this is present in the beam at a length Lc from the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: mira@aero.iitb.ac.in 889

Joglekar and Mitra
free end. The excitation force ft in form a tone the beam material. 1Γ and 2Γ are the
burst signal is applied at a free end of the connection coefficient matrices. Variable j
beam. The response of the structure is sensed takes the values from 0 to n-1, n representing
at a location, Ls units away from the free end. the number of translates of the scaling of
functions.
Mapping the wavelet transform coefficients
wˆ j on to the eigen-spaces of the connection
coefficient matrices, Eq. 3 is decoupled as the
following:
d 4 w j   A   A 2
   i j     j  wj (4)
 EI   EI  
4
dx
Figure 1.Schematic of a cracked
cantilever beam. where w is the displacement transform
coefficient mapped on to the eigen-space of
When the crack is in a closed condition, the the connection coefficient matrix, and  j is
beam is assumed to behave as an intact beam.
In contrast, when the crack is in an open the eigenvalue of the same. Solutions of Eq.
state, the localized reduction in stiffness at 4are used in formulating the dynamic
the crack-location is modeled by a torsional stiffness matrix of WSFEs.
spring acting between the two sections The beam structure shown in Figure. 1 is
adjacent to the crack surfaces. The stiffness divided into three WSFEs. Of which, first
Krof this rotational spring is obtained in terms and third elements are the healthy beam
of crack parameters as [Sundermeyer and WSFEs; whereas, the second element is the
Weaver, 1994] cracked beam WSFE. In deriving the
dynamic stiffness matrix of the healthy beam
Ebh 2
Kr  (1) WSFE, the solutions of Eq. 4 are used as the
 h
72 f a interpolation functions. Thereafter, the
where E represents the modulus of elasticity essential and the natural boundary conditions
 
are evaluated in the transform domain
and f a h is a crack function. employing the aforesaid interpolation
functions. These two conditions take the
In the present method of analysis, the following form:
temporal dependence of the transverse
displacement variable w is approximated by a u e  R1h a, f e  R2 h a (5)
series of compactly supported Daubechies Terms u e and f e are the nodal dof and force
wavelet scaling functions ϕ of order N as the
vectors, respectively. The superscript e is
following:
used to represent the element level
w   wˆ k    k  k Z (2) formulation, and h indicates the healthy
k
(defect-free) configuration. a is the vector of
Using this approximation and the orthogonal
properties of the scaling functions, the arbitrary coefficients. It is now possible to
governing equation of motion for an intact eliminate the vector of arbitrary constants and
free beam, following the Euler-Bernoulli relate the nodal dofs to nodal forces through
hypothesis, reduces to the element dynamic stiffness matrix Ke.
The second element in the assembly is a
d 4 wˆ j A  1  A 2 crack beam WSFE. To account for a local
  wˆ j    wˆ j  0 (3)
 EI   EI 
4
dx reduction in stiffness, this element contains a
In this Eq. 3, I and Aare the area moment of massless rotational spring, connecting two
inertia and area of the cross section of the healthy beam segments. The approximation
beam. The term ρ represents the density of functions for transform coefficients of the
890
Analysis of a Nonlinear Flexural Wave-Breathing Crack Interaction in a Slender Beam using Wavelet
Spectral Finite Element Method
transverse displacements in these two healthy 5. Resulting vector is then transformed

beam segments have the same form as that of to the time domain and then multiplied by the
the solution of Eq. 4. Similar to the case of decision. This step gives the contact force
finite-length healthy element, the next step vector in time domain, which is then mapped
involves evaluation of natural and essential to transform domain.
boundary conditions at two ends of the crack 6. The residue in satisfying the Eq. 6 is
element. However, since the element carries a then obtained and the trail solution is
rotational spring in it, the continuity modified to minimize this error.
conditions at this location are also evaluated The results obtained by employing the
along with the other two sets of conditions. proposed method of solution are discussed in
The elimination of the vector of arbitrary the following section.
constants form these three sets leads to the
dynamic stiffness matrix for the cracked RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
beam configuration. In order to demonstrate the use of the
The element level matrices for three elements aforementioned method of solution, an
are then assembled together to obtain the illustrative example of a 10 m long slender
global stiffness matrix corresponding to a cracked cantilever beam, as shown in Figure.
single translate. Considering all such 1 is considered. The beam is assumed to be
translates simultaneously, the set of nonlinear made up of Aluminium with Young’s
algebraic equations for the cracked beam is modulus and mass density equal to 70 GPa
written as and 2800 Kg/m3,respectively. The beam has
K c u  fa  fc (6) a square cross-section with its width and
thickness both equal to 0.025m. A breathing
where K c is the assembled dynamic stiffness crack with depth equal to 30% the beam
matrix for the beam with an open crack, and thickness is considered to be present ata
u is the vector of nodal dofs. f a represents location of 1 m from the left boundary (Lc = 1
the nodal force vector resulting from the m). The excitation in the form of a tone-burst
externally applied forces, whereas f c signal of central frequency 25 kHz is applied
to the left-most boundary as shown in Figure.
represents the bilinear force in the transform
1. The velocity response is obtained at a
domain arising from the intermittent contact
location 2 m distant from the point of load-
between the two crack surfaces.
application (Ls = 2 m).
The iterative procedure devised to solve Eq. 6
To determine the velocity response of the
involves the following steps:
aforementioned beam structure, the
1. A linear solution of Eq. 6, obtained by
compactly supported Daubechies wavelet
setting the term f c equal to zero is used as a scaling functions of the order 22 are selected.
trial solution. The time window and the number of
2. The difference between the respective translates are set equal to 1.5 ms and 512,
dofs of two successive nodes in time domain respectively. The velocity response at the
is then determined. sensor location in both time and frequency
3. A state of the crack (open or closed) domains is shown in Figures. 2 and 3
is then determined by multiplying the respectively.
resulting vector by the Heaviside function. The velocity response in time domain (Figure
This step yields a decision vector. 2) is marked with two prominent wave-
4. The trial solution in transform domain packets. The first packets corresponds to the
is now multiplied by the difference between part of the signal transmitted from the crack
the global stiffness matrix of the cracked and the latter corresponds to the part of signal
configuration and that corresponding to the that is reflected from the crack first and then
intact configuration. from the free end of the cantilever. The
891
Joglekar and Mitra
second lobe in time domain is the signature with a breathing crack in an Euler-Bernoulli
of the existence of the crack, which is beam is presented. Wavelet spectral finite
predicted by models built on either open or elements are developed for the healthy and
breathing crack assumptions. However, the cracked beam. The intermittent contact
nonlinear harmonics in the frequency between the crack surfaces is accounted for
spectrum (Figure 3) are seen only in case of a by introducing an additional bending moment
breathing crack model. acting at the nodes of the damage spectral
element. The resulting system of nonlinear
simultaneous equations is solved using an
iterative approach.
For a representative case of a cracked
cantilever beam, the velocity response shows
presence of an additional lobe in time domain
and higher harmonics of interrogating
frequency in frequency domain. This
observation demonstrates the suitability of
the proposed method in capturing the
nonlinear effects arising from the wave-crack
Figure 2.Time domain velocity response interaction.
at the sensor location.
Although the proposed method of analysis
considers only the flexural mode
approximated by the Euler-Bernoulli
hypothesis, the method is generic, and can be
further refined to accommodate the effect of
longitudinal mode coupled with the flexural
mode.
REFERENCES
Broda D Staszewski W J Martowicz A Uhl T
Figure 3. Frequency domain velocity and Silberschmidt V V 2014 Modelling
response at the sensor location. of nonlinear crack-wave interactions for
damage detection based on ultrasound-
The frequency domain representation of the A review Journal of Sound and
velocity response is shown in Figure. 2b, Vibration 333(4)1097-1118.
wherein, the frequency peaks are normalized
with the fundamental peak at 25 kHz. The Joglekar D M and Mitra M2015 Nonlinear
existence of higher order harmonics (at 50, analysis of flexural wave propagation
75, and 100 kHz), is observed in the results through 1D waveguides with a
obtained using all the proposed method. breathing crack Journal of Sound and
Results of the healthy waveguide are Vibration 344242–257.
superimposed on the respective plots, which Sundermeyer J Nand Weaver RL1995 On
high light the effect of a breathing crack. crack identification and characterization
in a beam by nonlinear vibration
CONCLUSION analysis Journal of Sound and Vibration
An analytical-numerical method, analyzing 183(5)857–871.
the nonlinear interaction of flexural waves
892
ICCMS2016
BUCKLING BEHAVIOUR OF INELASTIC CASTELLATED BEAM

BASKAR K.*, AARTHY E. and CYRIL THOMAS A.
Department of Civil Engineering, NIT Tiruchirappalli India.
Abstract: The present study aims at developing a 3D Finite element model of

castellated beam using ABAQUS, to determine the effect of beam slenderness and
position of loading from the shear centre on C b in the inelastic range due to
concentrated load. It was found that the C b given in AISC and literatures are not
accurate for concentrated load at shear centre and at bottom flange in the inelastic
range, which will lead to an unsafe design. Therefore, a reduction factor is proposed
to the value of C b for the castellated beams that buckle in the inelastic range.
Keywords: Inelastic lateral-torsional buckling; finite element method; castellated beam;
equivalent moment gradient factor.
INTRODUCTION The critical buckling moment of a simply

supported I-beam in the case of pure bending
Lack of bracings will lead to failure of the is given by equation (1)
beam by lateral-torsional buckling, which is a π
type of instability in which, when a beam is M ocr = EI yGJ (1 + W 2 )
L
loaded in the plane of symmetry it deforms in
that plane until it reaches a critical loading at where
which the beam buckles and then twists thus π ECw (1)
leading to the reduction in the load carrying W=
L GJ
capacity of the beam. When the load applied
on a beam produce a gradient in the bending The nominal moment for the beam subjected
moment diagram, its lateral-torsional to loads other than uniform moment is given
buckling moment is higher than that of the by equation (2)
beams subjected to pure bending. Equations
to determine the buckling moment were M n = Cb M ocr (2)
derived for simply supported beam subjected
to uniform end moments. The effect of For different position of loading the value of
moment gradient is accounted in this C b is given by the following equation
equations by the use of equivalent moment
gradient factor C b . This factor depends on the C b =AB2y/d
type of loading, position of loading from (3)
shear centre and support conditions of the
beam within the unbraced length. Where, d =depth of cross-section
y =distance from the centroid to the
The equations given in AISC (360-05) and
location where load applied
literatures to determine the value of C b were
derived through elastic analysis and the same Previous works done by Nethercot and
are being used for the beams that buckle in Kerdal(1982) and by Kohnehpooshi and
the inelastic range. Showkati(2009) on castellated beams
concluded that the equations given in codes
to determine the moment carrying capacity of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: kbaskar@nitt.edu 893

Baskar et al.
rolled I beams can be used for castellated Concentrated load was applied in top and
beams with cross section properties bottom flange and at the shear centre of the
calculated at a section passing through the castellated beam. Due to the presence of
center of the hole and the equations given in castellations, loading at the shear center is
code for rolled I-beams gives a conservative given by applying half of the load in top
value for castellated beams. Nonlinear flange and next half in the bottom flange.
lateral-torsional buckling of simply supported Bearing stiffeners were provided in all the
castellated beams with a wide variety of beams at the support and at the position of
modified slenderness was studied by Amin point load to prevent local yielding. Figure 1
Mohebhak(2004) and it was concluded that shows the finite element model with point
the value of C b is not constant in the whole load acting at shear center.
range of castellated beams slenderness and
the values given in the code are higher than
that determined by the finite element model
in the inelastic range which leads to unsafe
design. The effect of different postion of
loading with varying slenderness due to
concentrated load in the inelastic range for
rolled I-beams was studied by Amin
Mohebhak (2011). However, no effort has
been done to extend the study, to determine
the effect of position of loading and support
conditions on the value of C b for castellated
beams that buckle inelastically. Figure 1. Finite element model
OBJECTIVE
A non-linear analysis was performed with the
help of static Riks method in ABAQUS by
The purpose of this study is to investigate the considering both geometric and material non-
effect of beam slenderness and position of linearity. S4R element was used for
loading on the moment gradient factor of modelling. A convergence criterion based on
castellated beams that buckle inelastically. maximum norm of incremental displacement
was adopted by using static-general analysis
MODELLING AND ANALYSIS in ABAQUS and a mesh size of 26.6mm x
26.6mm was adopted.
PARAMETERS CONSIDERED
MATERIAL NON-LINEARITY
AISC provides equations to determine the
limiting length for plastic(L p ) and elastic Material non-linearity was introduced by
behaviour(L r ). For the present study simply using the trilinear elastic–plastic strain-
supported castellated beam with varying hardening stress–strain curve which was
slenderness was subjected to concentrated assumed by Amin Mobebakh (2004) in his
load and pure bending to determine the value study, with Young’s modulus of 210 GPa,
of C b . Span for the present study was taken in strain hardening modulus of 6000 Mpa and
the inelastic and elastic range based on the Poisson’s ratio of 0.3.
calculated values of L p and L r as 1.05 and
2.57m respectively. GEOMETRIC NON-LINEARITY
FINETE ELEMENT MODELLING Geometric non-linearity was introduced by

providing an imperfection value of d w /100.
894
Buckling behaviour of inelastic castellated beam
Imperfection was introduced from the global

buckling mode shape which was obtained
from Eigen value buckling analysis.
Table 1. Reduced C b for concentrated load at shear center

L(mm) W R fs Cb C br
1190 2.81 0.62 0.84 0.83
1530 2.18 0.74 1.00 1.02
1870 1.79 0.85 1.15 1.14
2210 1.51 0.90 1.22 1.23
2550 1.31 0.98 1.32 1.29
2890 1.16 0.99 1.35 1.34
3230 1.03 1.04 1.40 1.38
3570 0.94 1.04 1.41 1.41
VALIDATION R fsc = -0.229W + 1.25 (4)

Where R fsc is the reduction factor for
The modelling and method of analysis was
concentrated load at top flange.
validated with the analytical studies done by
Amin Mohebakh on Lateral buckling
resistance of inelastic I-beams under off-
shear center loading and a variation of 8%
was observed.
Concentrated load was applied at shear

center, top flange and bottom flange of the
castellated beam. It can be observed from
figure 2 that, for concentrated load at shear
center the value of C b given in AISC is
always greater than those obtained by using
FEM by around 30% in the inelastic range Figure 2. Variation of C b
and the value of C b obtained from FEM
approaches to value given in AISC as the Table 1 shows the value of C b obtained for
length of the beam approaches the elastic concentrated load acting at shear center from
range. The reduction in the load carrying FEM and the value of C br which is the
capacity was due to the occurrence of local reduced value obtained after the application
failure due to the presence of hole prior to the of reduction factor. It can be observed that
occurrence of global buckling. the variation in the value of C b after the
A reduction factor was proposed for the value application of reduction is reduced to the
of C b in the inelastic range. Figure 3 shows maximum of 2%. Similar results were
the linear polynomial regression equation obtained for concentrated loading at bottom
(R2=0.990) for the reduction factor interms of flange. When the load was applied in the top
dimensionless parameter W, for concentrated flange it was observed that in the entire range
load acting at shear center. of beam slenderness the value of C b obtained
from literature.
The reduction factor for concentrated load at
shear center is given by equation (4) For The reduction factors for concentrated load at
W<2.81 and L>L p bottom flange is given by equation (5)
895
Baskar et al.
R fbc =0.138W2-0.791W+1.586 Where R fbc is the reduction factor for

(5) concentrated load at bottom flange.
This is due to the destabilizing effect of load applications for structural engineers.
applied in top flange. So no reduction factor New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons 2008.
is required for loading in top flange. Kerdal D and Nethercot DA 1984. Failure
modes for castellated beams. JCSR 4(4)
295–315
Kohnehpooshi O and Showkati H. 2009
Numerical modeling and structural
behavior of elastic cafstellated section.
European Journal of Scientific Research
31(2) 306–18
Mohebkhah A 2011. Lateral buckling
resistance of inelastic I-beams under off-
shear center loading. Thin-Walled
Structures 49 431–436
Figure 3. Reduction factor Mohebkhah A. 2004 The moment-gradient
factor in lateral–torsional buckling on
CONCLUSION inelastic castellated beams. JCSR 60
1481–94
From the current study it was concluded that
the value of C b is not constant in the entire Nethercot DA and Kerdal D 1982. Lateral–
range of the beam’s slenderness but AISC torsional buckling of castellated beams
gives a constant value and it is higher than Struct Eng Lond 60B(3) 53–61
that obtained from the FEA in the inelastic
range for loading at bottom flange and shear NOTATIONS
center. It is also found that the equations
given in literature for determining the value E Young’s modulus of elasticity
of C b can be applied for castellated beam
E st Strain hardening modulus
with a reduction factor. This study can be
further extended for different support f y Yield stress
conditions inorder to obtain more generalized G Rigidity modulus
result.
I y Second moment of area about y-axis
REFERENCES J Torsional rigidity
American Institute of Steel Construction L Unbraced length
(AISC). ANSI/AISC 360-05 M ocr Elastic buckling moment
specification for structural buildings
13th ed. Chicago (USA) 2005. M n Nominal moment
Chung K F Liu T C H Ko A C H 2000.

Investigation on Vierendeel mechanism
in steel beams with circular web
openings. JCSR 57 467–90
Galambos TV and Surovek AE. Structural
stability of steel: concepts and
896
ICCMS2016
NON- LINEAR BEHAVIOUR OF LATERALLY RESTRAINED BEAMS

WITH SINUSOIDAL CORRUGATED WEB
BASKAR K. * and SADANANDA H. I.
Abstract: Advancement in Auto-fabrication process have increased the usage of

corrugated sections more in construction of large span bridges, industries, hangers etc.
There is a shift to sinusoidal corrugated section from trapezoidal corrugated section
which had dominated in previous decades because of fabrication difficulties.
Researches have shown that sinusoidal section provides increased capacity with less
weight compared to conventional I beams. In this paper attempt has been made by
using FEM software ABAQUS to understand the non-linear behaviour with variation
in web geometry when the beam is laterally restrained. Emphasis is given on load
carrying capacity of the section, deflection, non-linear behaviour for various
considered parameters and compared to the conventional I beam to have the better
understanding. I beams performs better in case of laterally restrained sections.
Keywords: Auto-fabrication; sinusoidal section; load carrying capacity;
deflection; non-linear behaviour
(1994, 1996) worked on buckling analysis,

INTRODUCTION shear strength and lateral torsional buckling
Corrugated web beams are the fabricated of trapezoidal profiles and gave empirical
members which have wide steel flanges and equations based on their studies. Elgaaly at
corrugated web. The corrugated profile al. (1997) studied on shear and bending
provides enhanced shear capacity, eliminate strength of trapezoidal profile to conclude
the use of stiffeners there by economising the that web did not contribute much to the
design. Previous researches have shown that bending strength of the profile. Jegwong Yia
considerable weight reduction is achieved et al. (2008) proposed interactive shear
compared to normal I beam. There are three buckling formula based on FEM analysis on
types of corrugated profiles namely trapezoidal profile. Kiymaz et al. (2010)
trapezoidal, sinusoidal, triangular or zigzag. studied behaviour and design of sinusoidal
In the previous decades trapezoidal profiles corrugated web steel beams with and without
dominated the other profiles as it was easy to web openings to say its effect on the height
fabricate. But after advancement in auto- of the girder and percentage reduction in
fabrication processes the use of sinusoidal strength. Tohamy et al. (2013) conducted
profiles are picking pace where the research studies to show that trapezoidal corrugated
work needs attend use of sinusoidal profiles web with 30 degree corrugation has a higher
are picking pace where the research work load-carrying capacity compared with other
needs attention. corrugation angle. Sudeok Shon et al. (2015)
developed the weight optimum design for
Many studies have been done on corrugated sinusoidal corrugated web. Primenta et al.
profile during the past. Luo and Edlund (2015) have done the investigation on

Baskar and Sadananda
sinusoidal corrugated beams subjected to The various (M/V) values are 0.70, 0.85, 1.1,
LTB through experimental and FEM 1.42, 1.76. Note that higher (M/V) here
modelling and have given reliability based represents lesser length since only moment
design recommendations. Design procedure carrying capacity depends on length and it is
present in ANSI for flat webs can be used. higher for lesser length.
Behaviour with laterally restrained sections LOADING AND BOUNDARY
by considering variation in sinusoidal web
geometry would add more insights to the CONDITIONS
understanding. Henceforth the present study
concentrated on this area. Point load and UDL were considered for
loading. Simply supported with top flange
PARAMETERS CONSIDERED restrained is taken as the boundary condition
to study the in-plane behaviour of the
SECTION PROPERTIES sinusoidal corrugated web sections.
The values of a ranging from 50 to 200mm
with the increment of 50mm is chosen. w
values were chosen from 200 to 500mm with
an increment of 100mm is chosen for the
present study. (Refer Figure 1). Since the
corrugated web is built by wide flanges
properties of ISWB 600 is chosen for the
current studies for the plastic section. Further
the thickness of the flange and web is varied Figure 2. Boundary conditions (wired
such that it falls under all the sectional model)
category according to IS:800. All the parts
VALIDATION OF THE MODEL
were modelled as shell elements of S4R type
and analysis was carried out for the same. Primenta et al. (2015) clearly mentioned that
design of lateral torsional buckling is similar
to that of normal conventional I beams in
case of sinusoidal web sections which are
used commonly in the industries. Hence end
moments are applied on sinusoidal web
sections with a=50mm, w=200mm and
Figure 1. Geometry of corrugation
buckling analysis is done for the section. It is
then compared with the critical moment
LONGITUDINAL LENGTH ADOPTED carrying capacity of the laterally unrestrained
Longitudinal length plays major role in section as per theory.20mm mesh size was
behaviour of the girder. With the lesser adopted after mesh convergence studies.
length Shear dominates, while Moment
carrying capacity dominates as the length RESULT AND DISCUSSIONS
increases. Since behaviour is governed by 1. For the point load conditions ultimate
moment-shear interaction length was chosen load obtained shows that for the same
according to (M/V) ratio in the range 0.5 to 2. value of the w instead of going for the
The following formulas were used to arrive at higher a value lower value of 50
(M/V) values. performs better.
(1) 2. Variations have less effect on the
ultimate load carrying capacity for
higher (M/V) values.
(2)
3. As the (M/V) values decrease w values
also has significant effect on the ultimate
898
Non-Linear Behaviour of Laterally Restrained Beams with Sinusoidal Corrugated Web.
load where in for higher w values load carrying capacity is higher.

Table 1. Load carrying capacity of corrugated web for point load
Ultimate load when point load is applied (in kN)
Plastic section
(M/V) capacity
w (mm) a (mm) 1.76 1.42 1.1 0.85 0.7
200 50 1289.80 897.68 623.79 465.70 370.56
100 1246.79 872.04 584.78 436.08 346.92
150 1259.85 859.38 571.87 427.08 340.71
200 1272.46 850.28 567.49 424.67 339.27
300 50 1282.03 908.25 637.38 480.50 378.44
100 1221.99 888.71 595.21 444.32 353.33
150 1211.95 865.48 581.88 432.47 344.11
200 1219.65 846.42 563.92 422.04 336.70
400 50 1274.23 925.66 651.59 486.07 387.24
100 1217.87 903.91 603.87 451.97 360.06
150 1221.34 877.65 581.76 434.74 344.86
200 1219.6 852.55 568.56 423.97 337.29
500 50 1273.62 940.09 664.06 494.87 387.24
100 1247.85 921.46 621.45 462.39 368.13
150 1229.31 894.90 592.03 440.23 350.54
200 1234.90 868.91 574.50 427.03 339.87
For UDL sections the following observations • For a particular type of section
are made. (plastic, compact, semi-compact or
• After reaching plasticity global slender) load carrying capacity is
buckling of web takes place near almost same when corrugation depth
supports for lesser length of the girder is more (a>100) indicating that higher
for plastic sections and buckling of value of really does not account for
flanges takes at the mid of the section increased capacity.
for increased lengths indicating • Better plastic rotation capacity is
influence (M/V) interaction. observed lesser values of w and for
Conventional I beams have higher a 100 indicating that post yielding
capacity (Figure 3.) strength can be utilized effectively for
those sections.
• Ultimate load carrying capacity I
section is much higher than that of the
corrugated sections (refer Figureures
3,4 and 5)
• In case of girders with corrugated
webs with lower w the plastic rotation
capacity is more as compared to
higher w. But ultimate load is higher
for the girders with higher w values
i.e. when the material concentration
more in the middle. So it is better to
use I sections (refer Figure 3 and
Figure 3. Behaviour for w=200, Figure 4)
(M/V)=1.42 plastic section
899
Baskar and Sadananda
Figure 4. Behaviour for w=500, (M/V) = Figure 5. Behaviour for w=500, (M/V) =
1.42 plastic section 1.1 compact section
CONCLUSION Pimenta R J Queiroz G and Diniz S.M.C

2015. Reliability-based design
Even though plastic rotation capacity is low
recommendations for sinusoidal-web
for laterally restrained conventional beams;
beams subjected to lateral-torsional
the post yielding capacity is sufficiently high.
buckling Engineering Structure 84 195-
Hence instead of going for corrugated beams
206.
one can go for conventional beam there by
economising the design. Sedky Abdullah Tohamy Osama Mohamed
Abu El Ela Amr Bakr Saddek and Ahmed
REFERENCES Ibrahim Mohamed 2013. Efficiency of
Plate Girder with Corrugated Web Versus
Elgaaly M Sheshadri A and Hamilton RW
Plate Girder with Flat Web. Minia Journal
1997 Bending strength of steel beams with
of Engineering and Technology 32 (1) 62-
corrugated webs. Journal of structural
77.
engineering ASCE Philadelphia 23 (6)
772-782. Sudeok Shon Mina Yoo Joowon Kang and
Seungjae Lee 2015. Minimum Weight
Jongwon Yia Heungbae Gilb Kwangsoo
Design of Sinusoidal Corrugated Web
Youmc and HakeunLeed 2008 Interactive
Beam using Differential Evolution
shear buckling behaviour of trapezoidally
Algorithm International Journal of Steel
corrugated steel webs Engineering
Structures 15(1) 213-225.
Kiymaz G Coskun E Cosgun C and Seckin E NOTATIONS
2010. Transverse load carrying capacity of a Depth of corrugation
sinusoidally corrugated steel web beams
with web openings Steel and Composite w One horizontal sine wave length
Structures 10 (1) 69-85.
Design bending stress corresponding to
Luo R and Edlund B 1994 Buckling analysis lateral buckling
of trapezoidally corrugated panels using
Plastic section modulus
spline finite strip method Thin-Walled
Structures 18(3) 209-224. fy Yield strength of steel
Luo, R. and B. Edlund 1996. Shear Capacity Partial safety factor for steel
of Plate Girders with trapezoidally
Corrugated Webs Thin-Walled Structures
26 (1) 19-44.
900
ICCMS2016
NON-LINEAR BEHAVIOUR OF GIRDERS WITH HORIZONTAL WEB

SPLICE
BASKAR K. * and SAWANT R.
Department of Civil Engineering, NIT Triruchirappalli, India.
Abstract: This paper investigates the effect of a horizontal web splice on the plate
girder with transverse stiffeners. Linear buckling and static non-linear analysis has
been carried out for the girders under pure flexural loading considering the material
and geometrical non-linearities as per Code provisions to study post-buckling
behaviour of girder. General purpose finite element package ABAQUS has been used
for analysis. Splice was designed considering various failure criteria. Correlation
between moment carrying capacity and web slenderness, panel aspect ratio, stiffness
of transverse stiffener and stiffness of splice was investigated. Reserve strength in
slender webs was investigated by carrying out non-linear analysis.
Keywords: Plate Girders, horizontal splice, transverse stiffener, web bend -
buckling.
INTRODUCTION PREVIOUS STUDIES
Plate girder is a very well established field in Many theoretical and experimental
steel construction. In case of structures with investigations have been carried out for
high loads the depth of the girder becomes girders with horizontal stiffeners. In recent
very large and there is a need of splicing the years, numerical studies have been carried
girder due to limitation in transportation out for vast range of parameters in which
facilities or for convenience in execution of researchers have considered transverse and
work. The size of the horizontal splice in longitudinal stiffeners together. Rockey
web is large as compared to the normal [1965] studied the behaviour of longitudinal
longitudinal stiffeners used in girders and stiffener for webs and found out optimum
the effect of location and size of the splice is location of stiffener at 0.21 d from
to be studied. Web-bend buckling occurs in compression flange using energy methods.
case of slender webs under pure flexural Rockey and Cook [1967] carried out
loading. This makes the web plate to buckle theoretical investigation on girders with 2 to
before it reaches the yield point leading to 5 stiffeners in web and found out optimum
loss in load carrying capacity. Under cyclic location for 2 stiffeners is at 0.136d &
loading this buckling causes fatigue failure 0.284d for fixed condition at longitudinal
at web-flange junction. In order to avoid the boundaries and 0.123d & 0.275d for simply
bucking of web longitudinal stiffener is supported condition at longitudinal
provided in the compression zone of the boundaries. Cooper [1967] carried out
girder. It is necessary to investigate the experimental tests on girders with
parameters related to splicing. longitudinal stiffeners and found out
optimum location of the stiffeners at 0.2 d
from compression flange. He also proposed
requirement of moment of inertia for the
stiffener. This stiffener helps girder to
_____________________________

Baskar and Sawant
achieve ultimate moment and keeps stress Various parameters and their effect on the
distribution linear in the web. Azhari and behaviour of the girder was studied. The
Bradford (1993) used semi-analytical finite governing parameters for the behaviour of
stripe method considering the local buckling girder are panel aspect ratio, slenderness of
of the stiffener and optimized the location of web and location of splice. Various values of
the stiffener to maximise the web buckling the parameters considered for current study
stress. The research work on girders with are listed below.
horizontal splice is limited.
Panel Aspect Ratio= (a/d) = 0.5,1.0,1.5
METHOD OF ANALYSIS Distance of Splice from Top Flange=0.3d,
0.4d, 0.5d.
In case of pure bending load there are no Web slenderness ratio= d/t w = 80, 100, 125,
shear forces in the girder. In order to design 166.6, 250, 333.33.
the web, splice some secondary shear is Thickness of transverse stiffener=t st = 2
required. When the direct shear on a girder mm, 4 mm, 6 mm, 8 mm.
is less than 0.6 times the design shear it does
not reduce the moment carrying capacity of RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
the girder. So for all the girders the bolted
splice was designed for the shear which is LINEAR BUCKLING ANALYSIS:
0.6 times the design shear for the web. End
moments were applied to the girder. All the The stiffness of splice being function of the
parts of the girder were modelled as shell loading on the girder is not considered as a
elements using S4R elements. The bolting in parameter. The location of the splice, panel
the splice was modelled using the fasteners aspect ratio and stiffness of the transverse
for shell elements in ABAQUS. Mesh stiffener are considered as the parameters.
convergence study was carried out and The moment carrying capacities of the
element size of 30mm was found sufficient girders are calculated using simple beam
to give accurate results as compared with theory. Elastic moment is calculated when
theoretical values. The Young’s Modulus for the top and bottom flange reach at yield
the steel was taken as 200 GPa and stress. Plastic moment is calculated for fully
Poisson’s Ratio as 0.3. The yield stress for plastic section. The stiffness of transverse
the steel was given as 250 MPa. Bi-linear stiffener required to get maximum buckling
stress strain curve which was linearly elastic moment has been related to the rigidity of
and perfectly plastic was used for material plate in compression. I st is M.I. of stiffener
modelling of steel. The depth of the girder is and D c is Rigidity of plate. The girders with
1000 mm and the width of flanges in 300 lower slenderness ratio give the values of
mm. Thickness of both the flanges is 18 mm. buckling moments which are higher than the
elastic moment carrying capacities of the
girder. These values of buckling moments
have no significance. The requirement of
moment of inertia of the transverse stiffener
is reduced when the splice goes closer to the
compression flange. The minimum I st /D c
ratio for panel aspect ratio 0.5 is around
1000 for splice at 0.3d and 2000 for 0.5d.
NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS
Figure.1 Finite Element Model Non-linear analysis was carried out to

investigate the reserve strength of the girders
PARAMETRIC STUDY beyond the buckling moment for slender
902
Non-linear Behaviour of Girders with Horizontal Web Splice
webs. It was also carried out to study the show marginally better behaviour in
contribution of splice in the moment achieving full plastic section and shows low
carrying capacity. Geometrical imperfection reduction in load. In case of higher panel
was provided as per the provisions of aspect ratio the performance of girders
EUROCODE 3 [2006]. For slender webs without splice is very poor in terms of
without splice there was of loss of strength rotation capacity. But for girders with splice
due to buckling. Girders with slender webs closer to the compression flange it shows
without splice were not able to achieve the good rotation capacity and the reduction in
elastic moment capacity. For lower panel load in post-buckling range is also less as
aspect ratio the girders with slender webs compared to girders without splice
Table. No.1 Ultimate Moment from Non-linear Analysis
Panel Aspect Ultimate Moment(kN.m)

Slenderness
Ratio
Ratio Control Splice 0.5d Splice 0.4d Splice 0.3d
333.33 1580.11 1579.40 1592.9 1610.46
250.00 1630.24 1626.51 1651.01 1679.96
0.5 166.67 1736.12 1730.38 1767.59 1806.64
125.00 1849.80 1837.58 1884.5 1931.22
100.00 1971.62 1951.99 2009.27 2053.37
80.00 2129.06 2104.60 2161.5 2222.71
333.33 1479.20 1497.60 1522.04 1550.53
250.00 1555.84 1555.70 1584.4 1611.65
1.0 166.67 1657.60 1673.80 1711.6 1749.3
125.00 1766.18 1792.80 1839.94 1880.03
100.00 1885.85 1916.80 1970.2 2009.29
80.00 2038.89 2077.88 2129.44 2165.76
333.33 1460.12 1469.40 1497.7 1493.14
250.00 1514.50 1515.39 1558.8 1545.3
1.5 166.67 1649.90 1628.05 1690.6 1691.2
125.00 1776.90 1738.67 1832.65 1868.05
100.00 1906.90 1870.50 1961.8 2001.7
80.00 2074.90 2023.20 2123.9 2149.77
Figure.3 Panel Aspect Ratio=1.0, Web

Figure.2 Panel Aspect Ratio=0.5, Web
Slenderness Ratio=250
Slenderness Ratio=250
903
Baskar and Sawant
In case of lower panel aspect ratio, the splice achieve full plastic section for girders
contributes in the girder section and gives with panel aspect ratio 0.5 only.
moment capacity more than the full plastic 5. The splice contributes for increase in
capacity of the girder. This contribution moment carrying capacity of girder
reduces as the panel aspect ratio increases acting similar to flange.
due to buckling of web. 6. The rotation capacity of girder
increases as the splice goes closer to
CONCLUSIONS the compression flange form 0.5d to
0.3d.
Based on the results of finite element
analysis, the following conclusions are REFERENCES
derived.
1. Slender webs with higher d/t ratio Azhari M. and Bradford M A 1993 Local
show loss of strength due to web buckling of I-section beam with
slenderness both in buckling and non- longitudinal web stiffeners Thin-Walled
linear analysis. Structures 15 1-13.
2. Splice at all the location provides Cooper P B 1967 Strength of longitudinally
additional stiffness and increases the stiffened plate girders ASCE J. Str. Div.
load carrying capacity. 93(ST2) 419-452.
3. The minimum I st /D c ratio required for
slender webs to achieve maximum Eurocode 3 2006 EN 1993-1-5: Design of
possible moment for panel aspect ratio Steel Structures – General Rules Plated
0.5 and 1 is 1000 when splice is at Structural Elements.
0.3d and 2000 when splice is at 0.5d. Rockey K C and Cook I T 1965a Optimum
4. For slender webs the splice at 0.3d reinforcement by two longitudinal
helps to achieve full plastic moment stiffeners of a plate subjected to pure
for girders with panel aspect ratio 0.5 bending Int. J. Solids Structures 1 79-
and 1 and at 0.4d and 0.5d it helps to 92.
904
ICCMS2016
NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS OF CASTELLATED BEAMS

BASKAR K. *, SHOBANA R., and CYRIL THOMAS A.
Abstract: The in-plane behaviour of castellated beams has been studied extensively
all these years with varying hole properties, length and loading conditions. In this
paper, a numerical study has been done to determine the behaviour of castellated
beams for different section classification (i.e plastic, compact, semi compact and
slender as per IS: 800:2007) and length which is based on the moment to shear ratio.
Moment to shear ratio defines the effect of shear compared to moment that are
produced by the beam to resist the external load. In the present study the beams were
laterally restrained to prevent lateral torsional buckling. This study considers both
material and geometric non linearity. The hole shape used was hexagonal. Eigen value
buckling analysis was carried out from which the initial geometric imperfection was
obtained and was imposed to the model to initiate the buckling. From the numerical
study it was concluded that there is no constant optimum value for weld length and
hole depth, it is varying upon the section properties and also moment to shear ratio.
The variation in the load carrying capacity for different section properties, moment to
shear ratio, hole depth to web depth ratio, weld length to hole depth ratio havebeen
presented.
Keywords: Castellated beams; Moment to shear ratio; Non-linear analysis
INTRODUCTION stiffness. Castellated beams, because of their

high strength-to-weight ratios and their lower
In recent multi-storey buildings, the provision
maintenance and painting costs, can
for electric wires and pipe lines is of major
sometimes advantageously replace built-up
concern. This provision leads to the greater
girders. The disadvantage is that due to the
depth of beam and roof slab. By using
presence of the holes in the web, the
castellated beams we can increase the depth
structural behaviour of castellated beams will
of beam without increase the weight.
be different from that of the plain webbed
Castellated beams are manufactured by
beams. Because of different possible modes
cutting the web of arolled I beam in zig-zag
of failure or even new modes also, they are
pattern and welding them back such that the
highly indeterminate structures, which are not
depth will increase up to 1.5 times the
susceptible to simple methods of analysis.
original depth. By forming a standard rolled
The re-entrant corners at the openings give
I-section into a castellated beam, a section is
rise to stress concentrations and limit the
obtained with an elastic section modulus and
usefulness of castellated beams in situations
moment of inertia higher than that of the
where dynamic effects are severe.
rolled section, at no increase in mass. A case
for castellation can only be made when a high FAILURE MODES FOR
level of stiffness is required (i.e. a large
CASTELLATED BEAMS
inertia).The principal advantage of
castellation is the increase in vertical bending
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:kbaskar@nitt.edu ; 905

Baskar et al.
The mode of failure depends principally upon hexagonal and octagonal opening which was
the beamslenderness, the geometry of the cut calculated from the eurocode is more than
(hole depth, angle of cut andspacing of the that of FEA result. Peyman et al., (2015)
holes or weld length) and the type of loading. proposed the empirical equation to predict the
Six potentialfailure modes which are load carrying capacity of the castellated
associated with castellated beams are: beams.
• Formation of Flexure Mechanism
• Lateral-Torsional Buckling MATERIALS AND METHOD USED
• Formation of Vierendeel Mechanism The Finite Element Analysis of castellated
• Rupture of the Welded Joint in a Web beams are done with using the ABAQUS
Post 6.11 package. S4R element was used to
• Shear Bucking of a Web Post
analyse the beams.
• Compression Buckling of a Web Post
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PREVIOUS STUDIES
The behaviour of steelis assumed to be
Boyer (1964) investigated the economy of the
homogeneous and isotropic. The material
castellated beams and reported that the
considered in the analysis is mild steel. The
savings effected depend on span, loading,
average value of yield stress (σ y ) of the steel
depth and the choice of castellated beam is
is 233.3MPa, the Young’s Modulus (Es) is
bad when the loads are too small, spans are
210 GPa and Poison’s ratio (ν) is 0.3. The
too small and the depth limitations are too
castellated beams in the current study are
restrictive. Kerdal and Nethercott (1984)
simply supported and are laterally restrained
studied the various failure modes of
to avoid lateral buckling. This helps the
castellated beams, reported that when the
girder to achieve full strength without out of
critical span is subjected to an approximately
plane buckling. Simply supported boundary
uniform moment, collapse is likely to occur
condition can be given to a girder in many
either by lateral-torsional instability in the
ways. Pinned condition was applied to one
case of unrestrained beams or by the
end and other end as roller. To provide lateral
formation of a flexural mechanism for
deflection both the edges of top flange were
laterally restrained beams and when the shear
given zero displacement in lateral direction.
is dominant the failure may be lateral
Concentrated central point load was applied
torsional buckling of web post or rupture of
in the beam for both buckling and non-linear
welded joint or by the vierendeel mechanism.
analysis.
Richard et al. (1998) investigated the web
post buckling of the castellated beams and MESH AND VALIDATION
buckling load for various geometry and
moment to shear ratio was calculated. Chung Mesh convergence study was done carefully
et al., (2001) studied the vierendeel and mesh size of 20 mm was chosen as the
mechanism in steel beams with circular web optimum size. FEmodelsof the castellated
opening, reported that the current design beams were validated with experimental
method is conservative. Chung et al., (2003) results which have been carried out by
have done the finite element investigation on Richard et al., (1998) and Zaarour et al.,
steel beams with web openings of various (1996)
size and shapes and reported that the global
shear forces in perforated sections may cause PARAMETERS CONSIDERED
both shear failure and Vierendeel mechanism Section properties : plastic, compact,
in perforated sections simultaneously. Soltani semicompact, slender
et al., (2012) reported that the load carrying M/V ratio : 0.5, 1, 1.5
capacity of the castellated beams with d h /d w : 0.55, 0.65, 0.75
906
Non-linear analysis of castellated beams
e/d h : 0.2, 0.3,0.4 above parameters were

considered and total number of 108 models
were analysed. The following are some of the
results and their discussions.

Initially buckling analysis was done to
incorporate the geometric imperfection. The
imperfection of dw/200 was given in the non-
linear analysis. Local buckling was observed
as first buckling mode in case of smaller
length beams and global buckling was
observed as first buckling mode in case of
larger length beams. Incase of smaller length
beams (i.e M/V=0.5) the failure mode was a Figure 2. Variation of load with e/d h for
vierendeel mechanism where the collapse of plastic section with M/v=1
hole shape was observed. In case of larger
length beams (i.e M/V=1.5) the failure mode
was a flexure mechanism where the bending
of beam was observed. Incase of medium
length beams (i.e M/V=1.0) the failure mode
observed was either the vierendeel
mechanism or the flexure mechanism.
From the below graphs we can see that the
maximum load carrying capacity was
obtained at different parameters. Main aim of
this study is to provide the information about
the optimum hole depth and weld length for
various cross section classification and length
of the beam. Behaviour and variation in load
carrying capacity of the castellated beams for Figure 3. Variation of load with e/d h for
various parameters were presented which will plastic section with M/v=1.5
be useful while going for the practical
installation.
Figure 1. Variation of load with e/d h for Figure 4. Load vs deflection for plastic
plastic section with M/v=0.5 section with d =0.55d
h w
907
Baskar et al.
Chung KF Liu TCH and Ko ACH 2001

Investigation on Vierendeel Mechanism
in Steel Beams with Circular Web
Openings Journal of Constructional
Steel Research 57 467–490
Chung KF Liu CH and Ko ACH 2003 Steel
Beams with Large Web Openings of
Various Shapes and Sizes: An Empirical
Design Method Using a Generalised
Moment-Shear Interaction Curve,
Journal of Constructional Steel
Figure 5.Load vs deflection for plastic Research 5 1177–1200
section with d =0.65d Kerdal D and Nethercott DA 1984 Failure
h w
Modes for Castellated Beams Journal of
Construction Steel Research 4 295-315
Soltani MR Bouchaïr A and Mimoune M
2012 Nonlinear FE Analysis of the
Ultimate Behaviour of Steel Castellated
Beams Journal of Constructional Steel
Research 70 101–114
Peyman Pourbehi and Akbar Pirmoz 2015
Shear Response of Castellated Steel
Beams International Journal of Steel
Structures 15(2) 389-399
Figure 6. Load vs deflection for plastic Richard Redwood and Sevak Demirdjian
section with d =0.75d 1998 Castellated Beam Web Buckling in
h w
Shear ASCE Jl. of Struc. Engg.
CONCLUSIONS Walid Zaarour and Richard Redwood 1996
Web Buckling in Thin Webbed
There is no constant optimum value for weld Castellated Beams Journal of Structural
length and hole depth. It is varying upon the Engineering ASCE
section properties and also M/V ratio.
Maximum load carrying capacity has been IS 800:2007 General Construction in Steel
attained at dh=0.55dw since the depth of the Code of Practice Bureau of Indian
hole is small when compared to other two. Standard New Delhi
There is no much variation between
maximum load carrying capacities at NOTATIONS
dh=0.65dw and dh=0.75dw in case of plastic e Weld length
and compact sections. There is considerable
increment in maximum load carrying dw depth of web
capacity at dh=0.55dw and dh=0.65dw in dh depth of hole
case of semi compact and slender sections.
M/V moment to shear ratio
REFERENCES
Boyer J P 1964 Castellated beam- New

Developments AISC National
Engineering Conference Omaha Nebr
908
ICCMS2016
NONLINEAR COMPUTATIONAL ANALYSIS OF MULTI STRAND

HELICAL WIRE ROPE ISOLATORS
PATEL N.1 and KUMARASWAMY A.2*
1
Scientist, VRDE (DRDO), Ahmednagar, Maharashtra, India.
2
Professor & Head, Mechanical Engineering, DIAT (DU), DRDO, Pune, India.
Abstract: A new computational simulation approach to investigate performance

characteristics of multi-strand helical shape wire rope isolator (WRI) consisting of
double helix of independent wire rope core (IWRC) is presented first time in this
paper. Further, the study includes nonlinear analysis of WRI considering complex
contact conditions among individual wires of 7×7 configuration for various loading
conditions such as compression, tension and shear/roll. It is observed from the study
that, the hysteresis curve is asymmetric indicating that stiffness of the WRI is non-
linear in nature and different for tension and compression mode. This approach
facilitates designers to understand various performance characteristics of WRIs as a
function of different geometric and material design parameters without repetitive
experiments.
Keywords: Wire rope isolator; Numerical contact simulation; Non-linear explicit
FE analysis; Independent wire rope core (IWRC)
INTRODUCTION • Limited experimental data is available

on selective wire rope isolators.
Wire rope isolators (WRIs) consists of
[Balaji P. S. et. al. 2014]
stranded metallic wires held between two
retainer bars in the form of helical shape as • Analytical and numerical simulation data
shown in Figure.1 that are used for effective is available only for straight strand
vibration and shock isolation to attenuate subjected to axial loading conditions.
vibrations from any equipment to [Cengiz Erdonmez & Erdem Imrak C
surrounding environment and vice versa in 2010]
various defence, marine, transportation and • The data on double helix multi strands
industrial applications. Some of the important considering complex contact behavior
applications are highlighted in Figure. 2 & with various loading conditions is seldom
Figure. 3. WRIs efficiently absorb applied available.
impact energy providing sufficient damping. In view of the above, the present research
In view of various important applications of work has been taken up to fillup the gap
WRIs, a comprehensive literature review has albeit partially and the work has been
been carried out to understand the state of the oriented towards achieving the following
art of performance evaluation of WRIs. It is objectives:
observed that, • Finite Element (FE) modeling of WRI
consisting of double helix of independent
**Author for Correspondence: E-mail: akswamy@diat.ac.in 909

Patel and Kumaraswamy
wire rope core (IWRC) along with overall MODELLING AND SIMULATION
helical shape.
• Performance evaluation by nonlinear The geometry of 7×7 WRI having 4 turns of
explicit analysis of WRI considering single inner strand of (1+6) configuration and
complex contact conditions among outer six strands of (1+6) configuration tied
individual wires of 7×7 configuration for with top and bottom metallic retainer bars as
various loading conditions such as shown in Figure. 1 is created using solid
compression, tension, shear/roll etc. modeling software with the geometric
parameters as mentioned at Table 1.
The FE model consisting 700152 number of
3D solid elements is created using
Abaqus/CAE software as shown in Figure. 4.
Appropriate material properties of SS304
were defined and penalty friction approach
was considered with coefficient of friction
(µ) of 0.115 for the explicit the analysis.
Figure 1. Helical Wire Rope Isolator
Figure 4. FE Model of 7×7 WRI
WRIs
Figure 2. Missile transportation carrier
WRI
Figure 5. Boundary conditions

Performance of the WRI is evaluated for
compression/tension and shear (Roll) modes
with appropriate boundary conditions as
shown in Figure.5. Dynamic displacement
Figure 3. Mobile Camera platform input as plotted in Figure. 6 is applied at top
910
Nonlinear Computational Analysis of Multi Strand Helical Wire Rope Isolators
retainer bar in vertical and horizontal considering geometry, material and contact
direction. The analysis is completed with nonlinearities
Table 1. Geometric parameters of 4 coil helical WRI (7×7)

Parameters Dimension (mm)
Wire Rope Diameter (D) 32
Inner Core Central Wire Radius, R 1 2.12
Inner Core single helix wire Radius, R 2 2.01
Outer Core single helix wire Radius, R 3 1.73
Outer Core Double helix wire Radius, R 4 1.62
Inner Core single helix pitch length, P 1 70.7
Outer Core single helix pitch length, P 2 201.2
Outer Core Double helix pitch length, P 3 70.7
Overall Height, H 235
Overall Width, W 271
Overall lenght, L 314
60
number of contact nodes and amplitude of
40
total friction, while in tension mode contrary
Displacement (mm)
20
is true.
0
60
-20 Compression
40
-40
20
-60
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0
Force (kN)
Time (s)
Figure 6. Displacement Input -20
-40
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION -60
Tension
-80
Performance evaluation of WRI in terms of -100

-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60
load Vs deflection were obtained and plotted Displacement (mm)
in Figure.7 & Figure.8 for compression & Figure 7. Force Vs Deflection Behavior
tension mode in vertical direction and shear (Compression/Tension)
mode in horizontal direction respectively. It 15
is observed from Figure.7 that the stiffness Shear (Positive)

10
characteristic is nonlinear in nature and
different for tension and compression modes. 5
Force (kN)
0
The hysteresis curve of the
compression/tension behavior is asymmetric -5
representing different reaction force of 77 kN -10
for tension and 37.5 kN for compression Shear(Negative)

-15
mode. This phenomenon is due to the fact -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60
Displacement (mm)
that, when the WRI is under compression the
Figure 8. Force Vs Deflection Behavior
relative distance between the wire strands
(shear mode)
will be increasing with reduction in total
911
Patel and Kumaraswamy
In tension mode stiffness of the WRI comes tension mode are observed that increases
from the wires itself. On the other hand, for stiffness value due to increased dry
shear mode the curve is symmetric indicating friction between wire strands. On the
similar stiffness characteristics in both other hand, contact area in compression
directions for given dynamic displacement mode decreases as a function of
input. The maximum reaction force of 10.8 displacement.
kN is observed for shear mode, which is
The nonlinear computational analysis
significantly low compared to tension and
presented in this article open new field for
compression. Displacement behavior of the
designers involved in characterization of
WRI is plotted as shown in Figure. 9 for
WRIs as a function of various design
compressive mode.
parameters such as geometry, configuration,
The results plotted indicates that, nonlinear effect of number of turns, helix angle,
stiffness characteristic of WRI is in good material properties etc. that will minimize
correlation with the experimental results conduct of large number of experiments,
available in the literature. Other important time, effort and cost.
results e.g. contact pressure, damping, load
distribution in each strand, stress distribution, ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
relative deflection between contact points, The authors are grateful to Vice Chancellor
strain energy, etc. can be computed by the DIAT, Pune and Director, VRDE (DRDO),
same analysis. Ahmednagar to present this paper in the
international congress and subsequent
publication in the journal.
REFERENCES
Balaji P S Leblouba Moussa Rahman M
Eand Vuia Tshun Loo 2014
Experimental investigation on the
hysteresis behavior of the wire rope
isolators Journal of Mechanical Science
and Technology 29(4) 1527-1536
Figure 9. Displacement (mm) plot
(compression mode) Cengiz Erdonmez and Erdem Imrak C 2010
Advances In 3d Wire Rope Modeling
CONCLUSIONS And Numerical Analysis The
International Journal of Transport &
1. Significant nonlinear stiffness Logistics ISSN 1451-107X
characteristics are observed for the WRI Demetriades G F Constantinou M C and
in compression/tension mode. Reinhorn A M 1992 Study of wire rope
2. Asymmetric hysteresis behavior i.e. systems for seismic protection of
maximum stiffness in tension mode is equipment in buildings Engineering
twice that of compression mode for the Structures 15 5
given displacement and boundary Gordana K Nenad Vidanovic Vukman Bakic
conditions. In shear mode, symmetric Bosko Rasuo 2014 on finite element
stiffness behavior is observed in both analysis of sling wire rope subjected to
axial loading Journal of Ocean
directions.
Engineering (Elsevier) 88
3. Increased contact area representing
higher number of contact nodes in
912
Nonlinear Computational Analysis of Multi Strand Helical Wire Rope Isolators
Phillips J W and Costello G A 1985 Analysis Tinker M L and Cutchins M A 1992

of wire ropes with internal-wire-rope Damping phenomena in a wire rope
cores Transactions of the ASME 52 510- vibration isolation system Journal of
516. Sound and Vibration 157 7-18.
913
ICCMS2016
ENERGY HARVESTING FROM ORIENTED PIEZOELECTRIC BEAM

GARG A.* and DWIVEDY S. K.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Guwahati, India.
Abstract: In the present work cantilever beam based energy harvesters embedded
with piezoelectric patch are proposed. The proposed harvester is harmonically base
excited oriented cantilever beam with a tip mass at its free end. Piezoelectric patch is
attached near to the fixed end of the beam. Euler-Bernoulli beam theory is applied
since the beam is slender. Nonlinear governing equations of motion are obtained using
Hamilton’s principle. Then the temporal governing equation of motion is obtained by
using single mode approximation in the generalized Galerkin’s method. Steady state
response for amplitude and voltage is obtained using method of multiple scales.
Responses under primary and secondary resonance cases are obtained. It is found that
the proposed models can be used as energy harvester for a wide range of frequency as
many resonance conditions are found due to nonlinear nature of the system.
Keywords: Oriented cantilever beam; Method of multiple scales; Piezoelectric
patches; Energy harvester; Secondary resonance.
INTRODUCTION The proposed model is consists of an oriented

Last decade has been witnessed the cantilever beam with a tip mass and a
emergence of new field of research where the piezoelectric patch. The beam is subjected to
transduction of waste ambient vibrational harmonic base excitation as shown in Fig. 1.
energy to electrical energy using
piezoelectric materials embedded with smart MATHEMATICAL MODELING
elastic structures has been done. Since most Total Kinetic T and Potential energy U of
of the work is based on linear vibration, the system can be written as [Yaman and Sen
resonance governs the criteria in transduction (2004)]
mechanism. Later on researchers started to
exploit the behaviour of nonlinear vibration
to enhance the performance of harvesters.
Harvesters based on nonlinear vibration
[Masana and Daqaq (2011), Harne and Wang
(2015)] have potential to extract energy due
to multiple resonance conditions and
enhanced band width.
The present work aims in exploiting the
phenomenon of nonlinear vibration in order
to make the energy harvester capable of
harnessing energy over a wide frequency Figure 1. Base excited oriented
band.
cantilever beam configuration with a tip
mass and piezoelectric patch.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: anshul.sv@gmail.com 914

Garg and Dwivedy
L
The other coefficients are provided in
 A v  s, t   y gv   u  s, t   ds
1 2 2
T
2 0
  Appendix.
 m v  L, t   y gv   u  L, t    I t 2
1 2 2 1
SOLUTION OF TEMPORAL
2   2
EQUATION
(1)
Method of multiple scales Nayfeh and Mook
L
EI   k  s, t   ds   mg sin   u
1 2 (2004) is used to find the uniform first order
U (2)
2 0 approximate solution of Eq. (3) and (4).
Expanding the solution of system q(t ) and
 , A, E , I ,  , k , u, v, I t ,  , ygv , ygu , m, and 
here V (t ) in the following series form
denotes mass density, area, Young’s q(t )  q0 T0 , T1    q1 T0 , T1   O( 2 ) (5)
Modulus, area moment of inertia, Lagrange
multiplier, curvature, transverse displacement, V (t )  V0 T0 , T1   V1 T0 , T1   O   2  (6)
longitudinal displacement, mass moment of
inertia of tip mass m, angle of rotation, CASE (1): PRIMARY RESONANCE
displacement in the axial and transverse
direction of the beam, tip mass and angle of To express the nearness of the excitation
orientation respectively. frequency  to the frequency of the harvester
0 ,
By using Hamilton’s principle with single
mode approximation in the generalized   0  
Galerkin’s method the governing equation of here  denotes detuning parameter. After
motion after scaling becomes following the procedure of perturbation
q   H 2 q  H 5 q   H 3 q 3   H 1q 2 q   H 4 q q 2 method we obtain frequency-response
equation which is quadratic in 
 H 6 gq   H 7V   H 8 q 2V (3)
  F1 cos( )   F2 q cos( )  3H 3 a 3 H10 a 3 Z1  H 7 a 3  
     H 8 a3   
80 4 0  2 8  
1
V  q  H13V  H14 q 2 q  0 (4)   2  (7)
a  F 2  a aZ 2  a2   
 4 2   2  2  H 7  H 8 4  
1 0

Following parameters is used to  0  0   
nondimensionalize the governing equation of
motion. CASE (2): SECONDARY RESONANCE
Response analysis when frequency of periodic
R5  R6 g sin( ) Rr  
1  , V  8 V ,  , t  , excitation  coincides with twice of systems
R1 Cp 1 1 natural frequency  0
The other coefficients are as follows
  20  2
 R2 r R Rr 2
 Again after following the procedure of
 H1  , H 2  4 , H 3  3 2 , H 4  rH1 , 
 R R  R 11 
1 1 1
perturbation method we obtain following
 R R sin( ) R8 2 
 H5  5 2 , H6  6 , H7  ,  frequency-response equation
 R11 R112
C p R112 
   3H 3 a 3 H10 a 3 Z1  H 7 a 3
2
 H  R9 R8 r , H   R r , H  R8 r ,   
     H 8 a3   
 8
C p R112
9 1 8 10
 80 4 0  2 8  

CpR
 1 (8)
  2 
 H10 H12  a  F 2 2  aH aZ 2  a2   
 H12  R9 r 1 , H13  H , H14  H , H11  H 9 ,
3
  16 2
2
a  
2
  7
H  H 
20  4   
8
 9 9
  0  2
 F1  y0 2 2 cos( ) R7 / (12 rR1 ), F2  H 6 y0 2 2 
 
  here   2 T1  
915
Energy harvesting from oriented piezoelectric beam
Table 1. Geometric and material properties

Substrate Piezo-patch
Length, m Ls 0.1575 Lp Ls / 3
Young’s modulus,GPa Es 190 Ep 62
Width, m bs 0.02 bp 0.02
Height, m hs 0.002 hp 300μ
Density, Kgm -3
s 8100 p 7800
Others
Cp 51.4  109 F g 9.81ms -2
Mt 0.05Kg c 4  105 NmV -1
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS CONCLUSION

Amplitude and voltage curves with frequency Oriented beam configuration provides the
are plotted in Fig 2. Frequency curve is compressive axial load due to tip mass and
bending slightly on right side. The backbone oriented beam configuration that helps to
curve has hardening type characteristic. Wide enhance the performance of harvester for low
frequency bandwidth is available here which frequency excitation. Also the harvester can
is helpful for energy harvesting purpose. harness energy subjected to external
Amplitude vs Frequency excitation of any direction.
0.015
REFERENCES
Amplitude (m)
0.01
Friswell M I Ali S F Bilgen O Adhiari S Lees
0.005
A W and Litak G 2012 Non-linear
piezoelectric vibration energy harvester
0
from a vertical cantilever beam with tip
50 55 60 65 70
Frequency (Hz) mass Journal of Intelligent Material
Systems and Structures 23 1505-1521
a
Harne R L and Wang K W 2015 Axial
Voltage vs Frequency
0.5 suspension compliance and compression
0.4
for enhancing performance of a
nonlinear vibration energy harvesting
Voltage (V)
0.3
beam system ASME J. Vib. Acoust
0.2 138(1) 011004-011004-10
0.1
Masana R and Daqaq M F 2011
0 Electromechanical modeling and
50 55 60 65 70
Frequency (Hz) nonlinear analysis of axially loaded
(b) energy harvesters Journal of Vibration
and Acoustics 133(1) 011007-011007
Figure 2. (a) Amplitude-frequency
and (b) voltage-frequency curves with Nayfeh A H and Mook D T 2004 Nonlinear
variation of amplitude of base excitation Oscillations Willey-VCH Weinheim
916
Garg and Dwivedy
Yaman M and Sen S 2004 The analysis of

the orientation effect of non-linear
flexible systems on performance of the
pendulum absorber International
Journal of Non-Linear Mechanics 39(5)
741-752.
APPENDIX: COEFFICIENTS
R1   Ak1 , R2   Ak4  mk5  I t k9 ,

R3  EIk3 , R4  ck1 , R5  EIk2 ,
R6   Ak6  mk7 , R7   Ak4 ,
R8   c k10 , R9 1.5 c k11
L L L

k1   2 ds, k2    ds, k3          ds,
 
0 0 0
L
 Ls  L
 L 2 
k4      2 dsds  ds, k5      ds  ds,
0  s0  0  s 
L L L
k6    ( L  s)  ds, k7     ds, k8   ds,
0 0 0
L L L
k9    2 ds, k10   ds, k11    2 ds
0 0 0
Galerkin expansion used to discretize the

governing equation of motion

v( s, t )   r  n ( s )qn (t )
n 1
917
ICCMS2016
AN IMPROVED APPROXIMATION STRATEGY FOR MULTI

OBJECTIVE EVOLUTIONARY OPTIMIZATION
CHATTERJEE T.* and CHOWDHURY R.
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, Roorkee India.
Abstract: A novel approximation technique has been developed in order to resolve

the computational burden inherently associated with evolutionary algorithms. The
proposed framework is not only computationally efficient but also accurate enough in
dealing with typical scenarios, such as, problems having non-convex and disconnected
Pareto optimal fronts. The approximation model has been developed by coupling
ANOVA decomposition and Gaussian process (GP) modelling. They are coupled in
such a way that ANOVA handles the global behaviour of the model using a set of
component functions and GP interpolates local variations as a function of sample
points, resulting in a two-level approximation. This tool has been referred to as
adaptive bi-level error-sensitivity based ANOVA decomposition (ABE-ANOVA).
Further, ABE-ANOVA has been integrated with the elitist non-dominated sorting
genetic algorithm (NSGA-II) to solve multi objective optimization problems with
significantly less computational power. ABE-ANOVA assisted NSGA-II has been
employed to solve two multi objective problems having typical Pareto fronts and the
performance has been assessed by comparing the results with that of simple ANOVA
assisted NSGA-II and actual NSGA-II. Excellent results in terms of accuracy and
computational effort makes the proposed method potential for large scale applications.
Keywords: ANOVA decomposition; Gaussian process; NSGA-II; Pareto front.
INTRODUCTION However, such models have to be accurate

Evolutionary Algorithms (EAs) have enough to be utilized in sensitive applications
received a lot of attention regarding their such as, multi objective evolutionary
potential to solve complex optimization optimization. Moreover, approximation of
problems. However, the computational some portions of Pareto front may be
intensiveness of EAs has been observed to be difficult to capture (Deb & Nain, 2007).
their main limitation, making their use in Additional problems may also arise in
expensive problems as prohibitive (Jin, capturing the Pareto fronts which are non-
2005). One prominent solution towards convex and disconnected.
mitigating the above mentioned drawback The objective of the paper is to address the
and accelerating the evolutionary issues of multi objective evolutionary
optimization life cycle may be replacement optimization as discussed in the previous
of computationally expensive codes with paragraph. Accordingly, a novel
cheap approximation models (Lim, 2008; approximation technique, referred to as
Regis, 2014). adaptive bi-level error-sensitivity based
* Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tanmoydce88@gmail.com 918

Chatterjee and Chowdhury
ANOVA decomposition (ABE-ANOVA) has methodology renders the bi-level

been developed and integrated with elitist approximation, GP on the local scale and
non-dominated sorting genetic algorithm ANOVA on the global scale. Specifically, for
(NSGA-II) (Deb, Agarwal, & Meyarivan, those inaccurately predicted portions of the
2002). Few example problems have been GP model, successive ANOVA
solved in order to evaluate the performance decomposition models are trained by
of the proposed approach. discretization of the domain and creating
small neighbourhood regions around these
METHODOLOGY inaccurately predicted points.
The framework of ABE-ANOVA assisted Now, the above model has been integrated
NSGA-II has been explained in this section. with NSGA-II so as to gain computational
Since the framework is an improvement of advantage. The model has been fused at the
ANOVA decomposition model, generalized time of evaluation of objective and constraint
ANOVA decomposition (Rabitz & Aliş, functions. The populations are predicted after
1999)has been introduced in Eq. (1) checking onto which ANOVA
P decomposition model they fit into. If they
η0 + ∑ηi ( xi ) +
η (x) = does not lie within the bounds of any of the
i =1
ηi , j ( xi , x j ) +  + η1,,P ( x ) (1)
constructed ANOVA models, then it is
∑
1≤i ≤ j ≤ P
predicted by the GP model. This automatic
∑
model selection feature on the basis of error
= ηu ( xu )
u ⊆{1P} sensitiveness renders the framework as
In order to enhance the local approximation adaptive in nature.
capabilities of an ANOVA decomposition
model, it has been coupled with Gaussian NUMERICAL EXAMPLES
process (GP) modelling. Both of them have ABE-ANOVA assisted NSGA-II has been
been combined efficiently so as to render applied to test problems featuring typical
higher level of approximation accuracy. The Pareto fronts in order to illustrate its superior
detailed procedure of ABE-ANOVA has performance. The numerical investigation is
been discussed henceforth. carried out by selecting two problems, one
having a disconnected Pareto front and
The variance of GP prediction can be
another having a non-convex Pareto front,
obtained as (Sudret, 2012)
namely KUR and FON, respectively (Deb,
 1 − f ( x )T r ( x )T  2001). The number of sample points utilized
  for ABE-ANOVA are less than that of
σ Y2ˆ = σ y2   
 0 F  f ( x )  
T −1 (2)
ANOVA as shown in tables 1 and 2. The
   
  F R  r ( x )  
excellent performance of ABE-ANOVA is
Since, Eq. (2) is a local error measure, it can clearly illustrated in figs. 3 and 4 for the
be utilized for searching regions with low same problems where ANOVA
prediction accuracy. A pre-defined error decomposition fails to capture the Pareto
tolerance limit is set so as to segregate the front adequately as shown in figs. 1 and 2.
predicted function values according to the
error magnitude. The predicted function
values for which the error has exceeded the
tolerance limit is to be approximated by
ANOVA decomposition. This feature of the
919
An Improved Approximation Strategy for Multi Objective Evolutionary Optimization
Table 1. Number of sample points per

function for ANOVA
Problem ANOVA
KUR 127
FON 127
Table 2. Number of sample points per function utilized for ABE-ANOVA

Problem GP ANOVA Total
KUR 16 61 77
FON 16 61 77
Figure 1. Obtained Pareto front for KUR Figure 2. Obtained Pareto front for FON
utilizing ANOVA utilizing ANOVA
Figure 3. Obtained Pareto front for KUR Figure 4. Obtained Pareto front for FON
utilizing ABE-ANOVA utilizing ABE-ANOVA
CONCLUSION has been observed to yield much more
accurate results with lesser computational
A novel approximation technique has been power than that of ANOVA. The significant
developed to solve multi objective improvement in the accuracy of the
evolutionary optimization. ABE-ANOVA developed framework resides in the fact that
920
Chatterjee and Chowdhury
the approximation on the local scale has been Jin Y 2005 A comprehensive survey of
efficiently handled by the GP model fitness approximation in evolutionary
employed. Hence, it incorporates the computation Soft Computing 9(1) 3–12.
advantages of both ANOVA and GP model.
Lim D 2008 Evolutionary Optimization For
Excellent results have been achieved both in
Computationally Expensive Problem
terms of accuracy and computational effort. Nanyang Technogical University.
The superior performance of ABE-ANOVA
makes it potential for real time applications. Rabitz H and Aliş Ö F 1999 General
foundations of high dimensional model
REFERENCES representations Journal of
Mathematical Chemistry 25(2-3) 197–
Deb K 2001 Multi-objective optimization
233.
using evolutionary algorithms.
Chichester UK: Wiley.
Regis R G 2014 Particle swarm with radial
basis function surrogates for expensive
Deb K Agarwal A and Meyarivan T 2002 A
black-box optimization Journal of
Fast and Elitist Multiobjective Genetic
Computational Science 5(1) 12–23.
Algorithm: NSGA-II IEEE
Transactions on Evolutionary
Sudret B 2012 Meta-models for structural
Computation 6(2) 182–197.
reliability and uncertainty quantification
In Proceedings of 5th Asian-Pacific
Deb K and Nain P K S 2007 An Evolutionary
Symposium on Stuctural Reliabilty and
Multi-objective Adaptive Meta-
its Applications (APSSR 2012)
modeling Procedure Using Artificial
Singapore 53–76 Methodology
Neural Networks In Studies in
Applications.
Computational Intelligence 322 297–
322 Springer Verlag Berlin Heidelberg.
921
ICCMS2016
DESIGN AND OPTIMIZATION OF BRAKE SLACK ADJUSTER FOR

LIGHT COMMERCIAL VEHICLE BRAKING SYSTEM
KARWANDE S.V.*
Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Slack adjuster is one of the important components of braking system for
vehicles equipped with pneumatic S-cam drum brake. The slack adjuster converts the
linear force applied by the brake chamber into torque on s-cam shaft and maintains
the constant gap between the brake drum and the lining by adjusting the excessive
clearance generated due to lining wear. Today’s design for automatic slack adjuster
used in all categories of commercial vehicles is same. The focus of the paper is to
provide the solution for the underutilization of the adjuster body and optimization
through the force analysis of the slack adjuster for different braking forces from HCV
and LCV.
Keywords: Slack Adjuster; Brake Chamber; S-Cam shaft; Drum Brake Lining
INTRODUCTION assembly with the brake shoe lining on the

vehicle.
Brakes are essential to stop the vehicle within
the smallest possible distance and this is done
by converting the kinetic energy of the
vehicle into heat energy which is dissipated
into atmosphere. The braking system of any
vehicle has the task of reducing speed and
bringing the vehicle to standstill condition
and in some cases keeping it standstill. The
vehicle brake slack adjuster is one of the
integral part of the foundation braking system
for commercial vehicle with air brake system.
FOUNDATION BRAKE Figure 1. Foundation Brake Assembly

The brake assembly at each wheel is The air brake chamber pushrod is connected
generally called the foundation brake. The to a lever arm called a slack adjuster. The
assembly consists of the brake parts around slack adjuster is attached to a camshaft with
the wheel that are operated by the air brake an S-shaped head called an S-cam. Air
system, including the brake chamber. The pressure applied to the chamber causes the
most popular type of foundation brake is the pushrod to move forward, causing the slack
s-cam drum brake. Figure. 1 shows the image adjuster to rotate the s-cam. This causes the
of named foundation brake assembly and brake linings to press against the brake drum,
Figure. 2 shows the actual S-cam brake
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sunilkarwande77@gmail.com 922

Karwande
causing friction, which causes the wheel to Wormshaft, Worm wheel, Coil Spring,
decelerate and hence stopping the vehicle. Regulator wheel, Control Disc, one-way
clutch, Adjusting screw and clutch wheel etc.
Out of these, the Wormshaft and the Worm
wheel are the only components along with
the Housing, which are subjected to the
heavy forces from the brake chamber. For the
other components some means are provided
such that on exertion of heavy forces they
will be detached from the main working
components.
The housing or adjuster body (see Figure. 4)
is subjected to higher magnitude forces from
the brake chamber directly (at 1) and the
reaction force that will be transmitted from
the Worm wheel to Wormshaft (axial force –
at 2).
Figure 2. S-cam Drum Brake Assembly
In the brake chambers, for HCV type 30

brake chamber is generally used and for LCV
type 12 brake chamber is used. Here the
number signifies the effective area of the
brake chamber (in inches square) over which
the pneumatic pressure will be applied.
Figure 4. Housing of Adjuster

Some axial force will also be exerted on
housing rare side wall by worm wheel, whose
magnitude will be very less compared to
tangential force on the same. The ANSYS
analysis of the body for the above mentioned
Figure 3. Components of Adjuster forces is done for both cases of HCV and
LCV. The results are compared and
The above Figure. 3 shows some of the accordingly material change and design
general components of the brake slack changes are proposed.
adjuster which includes, Housing,
923
Design and Optimization of the Brake Slack Adjuster for Light Commercial Vehicle Braking System
ANALYTICAL FORCE From the gear calculations:

CALCULATIONS The axial force on the Wormshaft will be =
Forces on slack adjuster body are exerted by (Fa)s = 73147.6 N&,
the brake chamber. For type 30 brake
chamber, effective chamber area is 30 in2 and The axial force on the worm wheel will be =
pneumatic pressure of 8.1 bar the forces that (Fa)w= 7520.65 N
will be- Various forces (for pressure of 8.1 bar and
Area= 30 in2 = 30*(25.4) 2= 19354.8 mm2 centre distance of 140 mm) on the adjuster
Pressure= 8.1 bar= 0.81 N/ mm body are be tabulated as shown in table 1:
Force = Pressure*Area = 15677.388 N
Table 1. Forces on the Housing Body
Brake Chamber Area (mm2) Force (N) (Fa)s (N) (Fa)w (N)
Type 30 19354.8 15677.39 73147.6 7520.65

Type 12 7741.92 6270.96 29259.04 3008.26
MARKET ANALYSIS REFERENCES

The current market analysis shows that the ICRA Research Service 2015 Indian
market requirement for LCV segment will be Commercial Vehicle Industry- Quarterly
rising slowly to peak, which suggest us that if Updates March 2015.
the results of this paper are implemented for Maitra G 1994 Handbook of Gear Design
separate manufacturing of the slack adjuster McGraw-Hill Book Co. New York 4.21 –
for HCV and LCV, it will result in weight 4.28.
reduction and cost optimization of the
Ray S 2012 Economic Performance of Indian
component.
Automobile Industry AnEconometric
ANALYSIS Appraisal Business Intelligence Journal
151 – 162.
Modelling of the body is done in Creo 2.0,
with the basic standard dimensions. The slack Sarangi P Bano S and Pant M 2014 Future
adjuster body is validated for its deflection Trend in Indian Automobile Industry: A
and stresses by finite element techniques Statistical Approach Journal of
using the ANSYS software. Management Sciences and Technology
2(1) February 2014.
RESULTS Velmurugan1 V Sethuraman V Sudhakar N
The displacement and stress plot are Maheshkumar G A R 2015 Design and
generated and compared, for different Fabrication of Slack Adjuster for Heavy
materials and best suited material is selected. Vehicles Braking System International
Journal of Emerging Technology and
CONCLUSION Advanced Engineering 5 (3) 554 – 559.
Based on these results the material changes
and geometry changes are proposed and its
feasibility is justified by ANSYS analysis.
924
ICCMS2016
STABILITY PRESERVING RUNGE KUTTA METHOD USING GENETIC

ALGORITHM
NEELAN A. G. and NAIR M. T.*
Indian Institute of Space science and Technology, Valiamala, Trivandrum.
Abstract: Explicit methods have constraint on time step or space step for differential
equations. The step size become very small for stiff-differential equation (SDE). Most
of the time we prefer implicit methods for stiff differential equation. This increases
the computation cost. Convergence rates may be increased by using a higher order
implicit schemes – however, they are relatively tougher to code. Explicit method with
extended stability property can reduce the computational cost. In this work we are
presenting three stage and four stage Runge-Kutta methods (RK) with enhanced
stability property. RK methods are optimized using Genetic Algorithm (GA) for better
stability. Since the stability function is multi-modal in nature we are using GA and
the result is refined using newly proposed method called multi-section method
(MSM). Enhanced stability preserving Runge-Kutta methods shows better stability
property than most of the existing methods of same kind, known to the authors.
Keywords: Explicit methods; Stability; Stiff-differential equation; Genetic
algorithm.
INTRODUCTION they increase the computational cost

Runge-Kutta methods are popular methods significantly for bigger problems of moderate
for time integration because of its good SDE. Tai et al. (1995) pointed out some
stability property. Sengupta et al. (2003) advantage of explicit methods over implicit
mentioned that they are ideal for hyperbolic methods, like explicit methods can be used
differential equations for time integration. on vector machines so parallelization is
Rabiei and Ismail (2011) reduced the number relatively easier than implicit one, adaptive
of function evaluation in RK methods. grid refinement in complex geometry for
Udwadia and Farahani (2008) worked on better spatial accuracy is easier etc. So
accelerating the convergence. Williamson developing explicit methods with extended
(1980) and Kennedy et al. (2000) developed stability property will help to solve such kind
RK method with reduced storage space and of problem.
Ketcheson (2008) improved the stability We propose RK methods with extended
property of RK methods. stability property. Optimization of stability is
Explicit RK methods do not have good carried out using genetic algorithm
stability region to handle stiff differential (GA). Since convergence of GA algorithm is
equation. Hence, commonly implicit methods poor near solution, the output of GA is
are preferred. Though implicit RK methods refined using one newly proposed multi-
and semi-implicit RK methods are available, section method (MSM). This MSM is
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: manojtnair.iist@gmail.com 925

Neelan and Nair
modified bisection method and can be It’s a first order method. a1 and a2 are free
parallelized easily. MSM can be used in variables. In Eq. (3), these are determined
single variable or multi-variable single modal using GA for better stability property.
optimization problems. Extending this to The ESPRK3-2 term scheme is
multi-modal optimization problem is also (4a)
k1 = hF (u n )
discussed.
RK METHODS FORMULATION k 2 = hF (u n + 0.0419893639k 1 ) (4b)
For an initial value problem (IVP) k 3 = hF (u n + 0.1547479338k 2 ) (4c)

u ' = F (u ) u ( 0) = u 0 (1)
u n+1 = k 4 (4d)
m stage RK method considered here is of
the form ESPRK4 - 1 method
k1 = hF (u n ) (2a) It’s a third order method with a3 as an
optimizing (free) variable in Eq. (3). The
k i +1 = hF (u n +α i k i ) 2≤i≤m (2b)
scheme is
(5a)
u n +1 = k m (2c) k1 = hF (u n )
Where h is the time step used, α i is

k 2 = hF (u n + 0.12518545k 1 ) (5b)
weight to be determined using Taylors series
and stability criteria of the RK methods. k 3 = hF (u n + 0.5k 2 ) (5c)
STABILITY OF RK METHOD 1
k 4 = hF (u n + k 3 ) (5d)
Stability equation of fourth order RK method 3
is
R(hλ ) = 1 + hλ + a1 * (hλ ) 2 + a 2 * (hλ ) 3 (3) u n+1 = k 4 (5e)
+ a3 * (hλ ) 4
ESPRK4 - 3 method
where a1 = 1 / 2; a2 = 1 / 6; a3 = 1 / 24; It’s a first order method with a3 , a2 and a1 as
the optimizing variables in Eq. (3). The
For RK3 a1 = 1 / 2; a2 = 1 / 6; a3 = 0; scheme is
METHODS USED k1 = hF (u n ) (7a)
Here we are presenting four enhanced k 2 = hF (u n + 0.0365869421k 1 ) (7b)

stability preserving RK methods, one with
three stages and others with four stages each. k 3 = hF (u n + 0.09836131668k 2 ) (7c)
Enhanced Stability Preserving RK Methods
Here we are optimizing Eq. (3) for better k 4 = hF (u n + 0.23838576823k 3 ) (7d)
stability property.
ESPRK3-2 method u n+1 = k 4 (7e)
926
Stability Preserving Runge Kutta Method using Genetic Algorithm
RESULT O’Malley (1991) and Shampine et al. (2003).

Stability Plots Solution of the Eq. 8 is shown in the figure
Stability plots are plotted by substituting (2).
λh = x + jy in Eq. (3), where j is √−1.
Stability graph of different methods framed
are shown in figure (1). Figure (1) shows
comparison of stability graph of SSP104 and
SSP64 of Ketcheson (2008). One can observe
that Enhance stability RK method has better
stability region than most of the existing
explicit methods of same order. Though
methods illustrated here are first order or
second order, this procedure can be extended
to higher other methods. Above schemes are
tested on the following problem.
Problem:
Cleve Moler (2015) used one simple model
Figure 2. (a) Numerical Solution using n
to quantify SDE. The simple model is: When
= 3000 (b) Numerical Solution using n =
we light a match, the ball of flame 4000 (c) Numerical Solution using n =
grows rapidly until it reaches a critical size. 5000 (d) Numerical Solution using n =
6000
y ' = y 2 (1 − y ) y (0) = 10 −4 (8)
2 CONCLUSIONS
0≤t ≤
y ( 0)
• It has been observed that stability area
of ESPRK3-2, ESPRK4-1, ESPRK4-
2 and ESPRK4-3 method is more than
5, 1.5, 3 and 8 times respectively
than the stability area of RK4 method
• Though ESPRK4 -3 is more than 8
times better than RK4 method, it’s not
a good method because small
perturbation in weights greatly affect
the stability area. So we should
consider the effect of weights while
framing method.
• ESPRK4 -1 method outperform other
Figure 1.Stability plots of different methods proposed here for the
methods.
problem 1
The scalar variable y (t ) represents the radius
2 3
• Higher order methods may show low
of the ball. y and y terms come from the convergence rate for SDE.
surface area and the volume. The critical Convergence rate of sum of absolute
parameter is the initial radius, y (0) which is difference error is 1.6095382094913.
small. This is a simple combustion model by This is almost same for all the
927
Neelan and Nair
methods considered. Approximate implementations SIAM Journal on

rate of convergence of maximum Scientific Computing 30(4) 2113–2136.
error is 1.213207461012115 Rabiei F and Ismail F 2011 New improved
independent of methods considered. Runge-Kutta method with reducing
• Methods presented here are only good for number of function evaluations In
stiff and moderate stiff differential International Conference on Software
Technology and Engineering 3rd
equations. Some of the methods presented
(ICSTE 2011) ASME press.
here may be out-performed by traditional
methods for non-stiff differential Sengupta T K Ganeriwal G and De S 2003
Analysis of central and upwind compact
equation.
schemes Journal of Computational
Physics 192(2) 677–694.
REFERENCES
Tai C H Sheu J H and Van Leer B 1995
Cleve Moler M 2015 Stiff differential Optimal multistage schemes for euler
equations url: equations with residual smoothing.
http://in.mathworks.com/company/newsl AIAA journal 33(6) 1008–1016.
etters/articles/stiff-differential-
equations.html Udwadia F E and Farahani A 2008
Accelerated Runge-Kutta methods
Kennedy C A Carpenter M H and Lewis R M Discrete Dynamics in Nature and
2000 Low-storage explicit Runge–Kutta Society 2008.
schemes for the compressible Navier–
Stokes equations Applied numerical Williamson J 1980 Low-storage Runge Kutta
mathematics 35(3) 177–219. schemes. Journal of Computational
Physics 35(1) 48–56.
Ketcheson D I 2008 Highly efficient strong
stability-preserving Runge-Kutta
methods with low-storage
928
ICCMS2016
A REFINED TIME SERIES MODEL FOR STRUCTURAL HEALTH

MONITORING
LAKSHMI K. 1 and A. RAMA MOHAN RAO2
1
Academy of Scientific and Innovative Research, Chennai, TN, India.
2
CSIR-Structural Engineering Research Centre, Chennai, TN, India.
Abstract: Time series analysis is gaining popularity among the damage detection
methods for structural health monitoring. The damage features are generally con-
structed using the coefficients or prediction errors of popular time series models
like AR and AR-ARX. Even though the damage features are effective to indicate
the presence of damage, they are not found to be sensitive, especially when the in-
cipient damages are small like minor cracks. Also, identifying the exact spatial
damage location is difficult. In view of this, in this paper, we present an approach to
enhance the sensitivity of the damage features of scalar AR-ARX model to identify
the presence of damage and enabling it to locate the damage, without employing a
vector model. Numerical simulation studies are carried out by considering an ex-
ample of a simply supported beam girder minor cracks. The results of the proposed
technique is found to improve the sensitivity of the damage features devised from
the prediction errors of AR-ARX model for damage detection and damage localiza-
tion on the structures.
Keywords: Time series analysis; Autoregressive models; Singular Spectrum
Analysis; damage diagnostics; Structural Health Monitoring.
INTRODUCTION though modal analysis is a basic and effi-

cient tool for structural health monitoring,
Generally, the damage of the structure may
system identification computation work is
be detected from the variation of structural
heavy due to the computation work of stabil-
features which may be affected by the
ity analysis and is inappropriate for online
changing environmental conditions such as
monitoring. Further, handling environmental
temperature, humidity, loading conditions,
variability is rather difficult with modal
and boundary conditions. It is also believed
based approaches. In view of this, several
that the operational and environmental loads
non-modal-based or signal-based analysis
do exist in the monitoring data which cannot
approaches to monitor structural condition
be separated from the damage features.
and detect damage are being proposed.
Therefore, robust technologies which are
Techniques based on time-frequency analy-
capable of issuing the early warning and at
sis (Bayissa et al, 2008), multi variant analy-
the same time handling the variability in-
sis (Abdi and Williams, 2010) and time se-
volved in measurements, are still evolving.
ries algorithms(Sohn and Farrar, 2001; Sohn
A common structural monitoring approach
et al. 2003) are gaining popularity.
is modal analysis, which uses system identi-
fication technique to identify the structural The basic idea behind the time series based
modal frequency, modal damping ratio and damage detection is that if there has been a
mode shape from vibration data. Even change in the process underlying the gener-
_______________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: lakshmik@serc.res.in

929
Lakshmia and Rao
ation of the data, then the model, fit to the handling the environmental variability and
undamaged sensor data no longer predicts measurement noise.
the subsequent data and hence the residuals
are large and/or correlated. This change is NUMERICAL STUDIES
assumed to be caused by damage to the sys- In order to demonstrate the effectiveness of
tem. However, the damage features of pop- the proposed SSA augmented AR-ARX
ularly used time series models like AR and model, we consider a simply supported
AR-ARX, constructed using the prediction elastic beam as a numerical example. The
errors, are not found to be sensitive, espe- beam generates transverse elasto-plastic
cially when the incipient damage is small cracks upon loading and the time history
like minor cracks. Also, identifying the ex- responses are obtained using a cracked
act spatial damage location, with those sca- beam finite element analysis(krawczuk et
lar models are found to be difficult. On the al., ,2000). These cracks are considered as
other hand, using vector time series models incipience of damage in the beam and their
for damage localization increases the com- spatial locations are identified using the
putational cost and complexity in data han- proposed SSA based time series technique.
dling. In view of this, we present an ap- The simply supported beam girder of 6m,
proach to enhance the sensitivity of these initially without cracks in a healthy state, is
damage indices of the scalar AR-ARX as shown in Figure 1, along with its proper-
model, enabling it to locate the damage, ties. The beam is excited using random dy-
without employing a vector model. namic loading which is stochastic in nature.
Singular Spectrum Analysis (SSA) (Orope- The acceleration time history response is
za, 2010) is a novel nonparametric tech- computed using finite element analysis
nique used in the analysis of time series and with Newmark’s time marching scheme.
is based on the principles of multivariate The sampling rate is considered as 3000
statistics. SSA decomposes the vibration samples per second. Initially, 10s long ac-
signals collected from the structure in am- celeration time history data are generated
bient conditions and these decomposed sig- with random loads, environmental condi-
nals are used to reconstruct the time series. tions and measurement noise in the form of
The reconstructed time series are then pre- signal to noise ratio(SNR). This healthy
dicted using AR-ARX model to determine data is segmented into subsets of 1000 time
a damage index, based on the ratio of mo- points each. Similarly, the acceleration data
ments of the prediction errors. In this paper, for the current state of the structure, with
we follow the feature extraction technique the simulated damage at element number 6,
proposed by Sohn and Farrar, 2001, to de- by introducing cracks of 20mm length, are
tect damage. The performance of SSA is generated and segmented into subsets.
found to improve the efficiency of the Now the SSA is performed to the accelera-
damage localization process by using the tion data from the healthy and current data
AR-ARX models. Numerical studies are subsets by following the four steps of em-
carried out by solving a simply supported bedding, singular value decomposition,
beam example, simulated with single and grouping and averaging and finally recon-
multiple cracks, reflecting minor damage, struction. By choosing window size as 25,
to demonstrate the effectiveness of the pro- the number of interesting components are
posed damage diagnostic algorithm to de- determined for reconstruction using the
tect the time instant and spatial location of energy criteria as follows.
damage. Both environmental variability
s
and measurement noise are considered. It
has been observed that the proposed SSA  s
i 1
based time series algorithm can satisfactori- E d
(1)
ly localize damage/crack in the structure by  d
i 1
930
A Refined Time Series Model for Structural Health Monitoring
__________________________________________________________________________________________
where ‘s’ is the number of the singular dicate that the SSA certainly increases the
values of the desired signals, considered sensitivity of the AR-ARX models and we
for regrouping and ‘d’ is the number of can precisely identify the time instant of
singular values of all the signals, obtained damage as well as spatial location of dam-
using SSA. age using AR-ARX models without resort-
ing to vector AR models. The results of the
The singular spectrum plots, for baseline
studies have shown that the technique is
(healthy) data and the current data for node
capable of handling environmental as well
6, with a window length of 25 are shown
as operational variability and less sensitive
in Figure 1. By considering the energy cri-
to measurement noise.
teria cut-off as 0.99, the number of com-
ponents for reconstruction is chosen as 15.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Few of those individual SSA components
thus obtained from healthy and damage This paper is being published with the
data of 6th node with window length 25 are permission of the Director, CSIR-
plotted against each other in Figure 2. It Structural Engineering Research Centre
can be clearly seen from the figure, that (SERC), Chennai.
there is no loss of damage information if
all the 15 components are considered for REFERENCES
reconstruction. The reconstructed signal is Abdi H and Williams L 2010.Component
then subjected to times series analysis to analysis Wiley Interdisciplinary Re-
evaluate the damage index discussed in view Computational Statistics 2
sohn and Farrar, 2001. The damage indices 433–459. DOI: 10.1002/wics.101.
obtained from all the sensors using AR-
Bayissa WL Haritosa N and Thelandersson
ARX are shown in Figure 3(a) and using
S 2008 Vibration based structural
SSA-AR-ARX is shown in figure 3(b).
damage identification using wavelet
From Figure 3, it is seen that the SSA-AR-
transform Mechanical Systems and
ARX technique is able to exactly identify
Signal Processing 22 1194–1215.
the minor damage in the 6th element,
whereas, the AR-ARX technique without Krawczuk M Zak A and Ostachowicz W
SSA fails to locate the minor damage. 2000 Elastic beam finite element with
a transverse elasto-plastic crack Fi-
CONCLUSION nite Elements in Analysis and Design
34 61-73.
In this paper, we propose a damage detec-
tion technique for online structural moni- Oropeza V E 2001 The Singular Spectrum
toring of civil engineering structures by Analysis method and its application
enhancing the sensitivity of the damage to seismic data denoising and recon-
features of autoregressive time series mod- struction University of Alberta 2010.
els. In this paper, the acceleration time his- Sohn H and Farrar C R Damage diagnosis
tory signals are preprocessed using singu- using time series analysis of vibration
lar spectrum analysis and the regrouped signals. Smart Materials and Struc-
data obtained from SSA is used to con- tures 10 446 DOI: 10.1088/0964-
struct AR-ARX model and subsequently 1726/10/3/304.
the damage indices using the baseline and Sohn H Allen D W Worden K et al. 2003
current data obtained from the structure. Statistical Damage Classification Us-
Numerical simulation studies are carried ing Sequential Probability Ratio Tests
out using a simply supported beam with Structural Health Monitoring 2(1)
single and multiple cracks as an example. 57-74.
Studies presented in this paper clearly in-
931
Lakshmia and Rao
35
damage with noise
30 Healthy with noise
25
Singular Values
20
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Singular Value Number
Figure 1 Singular spectrum plot of data from 6th node with window length L= 25.
Data points
15 15 15
st nd rd
1 Component of Damage data 2 Component of Damage data 3 Component of Damage data
10 st 10 10 rd
3 Component of Healthy data
1 Component of Healthy data nd
Acceleration, m/s2
Acceleration, m/s2
Acceleration, m/s2
5 5 5
0 0 0
-5 -5 -5
-10 -10 -10
-15 -15 -15

0 500 1000 1500 0 500 1000 1500 0 500 1000 1500
Data points Data points Data points
(a) (b) (c)
15 15
th th 15
9 Component of Damage data 12 Component of Damage data
10 10 th
th th 10
15 Component of Damage data
9 Component of Healthy data 12 Component of Healthy data th
Acceleration, m/s2
Acceleration, m/s2
5 5
Acceleration, m/s2
0 0 0
-5 -5 -5
-10 -10 -10
-15 -15 -15

0 500 1000 1500
0 500 1000 1500 0 500 1000 1500
Data points Data points Data points
(d) (e) (f)

Figure 2. Components of healthy and current data from 6th node with L=25 of order:
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 9 (e) 12 (f) 15
1.2
5
1.0
4
0.8
Damage Index
Damage Index
3
0.6
0.4 2
0.2 1
0.0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Sensor Number Sensor Number
(a) (b)
Figure 3. Damage indices obtained from (a) AR-ARX model (b) SSA-AR-ARX model.
932
ICCMS2016
A NOVEL TECHNIQUE FOR SOLVING THREE DIMENSIONAL

PROBLEMS
RAMANA P. V.
Department of Civil Engineering, MNIT, Jaipur, India
Abstract: In the paper, the well known is new technique applied to solve the
hyperbolic Initial and Boundary Value Problem (IBVP) equations. The present
method is quite different than the numerical method. The results are compared with
the existing exact or analytical method. The present novel technique simple and
improve the accuracy and convergence of the solution. Thus, the present method is
named as novel technique. The novel technique for three dimensional thick plate
results are found to converge very quickly and are more accurate compared to
numerical methods. The present method is quite efficient and is practically well suited
for use in these problems. Several examples are given to check the reliability of the
present method. An novel technique is a non-numerical method which can be adapted
for three dimensional thick plate solving hyperbolic equations. In the current paper,
the principle of the decomposition method is described, and its advantages are shown
in the form of hyperbolic equations. Using novel technique solved many engineering
hyperbolic engineering problems and compared with numerical techniques and
comcluded that the novel technique and numerical techniques solutions matches very
closer and errors are much less. Many numerical example of a shock with a dense
hammering is presented. The detailed timings are given to illustrate the performance
of the method in three dimensions evaluation.
Keywords: Novel technique; Numerical solution; Three Dimensional Problems;
Hyperbolic.
INTRODUCTION solving nonlinear equations. Some times

numerical methods are used in special cases,
The present method consists of calculating
where exact methods cannot be used to solve
the solutions of nonlinear functional
equations of higher order nonlinear problems.
equations using infinite Taylor’s series in
But numerical methods often suffer problem
which each term can be easily determined.
due to convergence. Numerical techniques,
present method is used to obtain the n th -order which are commonly used, encounter
approximation to the one direction partial difficulties in terms of size step truncation
solution that satisfies the boundary conditions and round off errors causing a loss of
in the same direction. The decomposition accuracy.
solution is also an approximation, but one
which does not change the originality of the The present method transforms the nonlinear
problem. Therefore it is often physically equation into a recursive relation. The present
more realistic. The solution obtained by method has proved to be very effective in
decomposition is generally an infinite series. saving the computational effort. An
Commonly exact methods are used for application in seismic analysis can reduce the

Ramana
computational time by an order of magnitude. nonlinear operator and R denotes the

The novel tool derived by Adomian has been remainder terms, other than linear and
applied to a wide class of ordinary and partial nonlinear derivative operators.
differential equations. However as mentioned Here an important contribution to be
earlier the present method has also several highlighted is that in present method L is
limitations in terms of accuracy and speed. chosen as the highest order derivative,
Therefore in the current paper the present while in present method it is any higher
method has been to address the lacunae ordered derivative chosen according to
mentioned earlier. The present method is initial conditions.
named as innovative method or in short 2.Selecting any one of the spatial or time (x,
present method. In the following articles the y, z or t, preferably time variable for initial
same has been described in detail. present value problem) variables and considering
method has been applied to solve many the higher order derivative w.r.t. that
functional equations. present method has a variable, higher oder linear derivative
useful features in that it provides the solution operator L is retained on the L.H.S, while
in a rapid convergent power series with remaining (other) terms viz. N and R are
elegantly computable series of terms. The transfered to R.H.S. Now the given
present method has proved to be very equation becomes Lu = g − Ru − Nu .
effective and results in considerable savings Inverting the higher order linear operator
in computation time as well as accuracy. on both the sides, the equation becomes
L−1 Lu = L−1 g − L−1 Ru − L−1 Nu .
METHODOLOGY
3.On successive integrations
Consider a dynamical system u = a0 + t a1 + t a2 + +t an + L g − L−1 Ru − L−1 Nu
2 n −1
LN (u , ù , ) = g ( x, y, z , t ) , where LN is a
, where a0 , a1 , an are n integral constants.
differential operator. LN (LN(u) = Lu + Ru +
Nu) has to be that of the highest derivative, if 4.Identifying the initial conditions and the
the problem is a one dimensional (governed terms involving the independent variable
by ODE) with only space or time as the alone as initial approximation
independent variable. If it is two dimensional ui = a0 + t a1 + t a2 + +t an + L−1 g .
2 n
like plate problems (x,y, or t) or one 5.Having obtained u i as stated above, the
dimensional time variant (x,t or y,t) or three
various u i , i = 0 to n are obtained as
dimensional like thick plate (x,y, z and t),
when come across partial differential follows. Decomposing the unknown
equation, present method is more advantage. function into a series whose components
For problems like the above with time also as are to be determined, the decomposed
an independent variable, it is only in present terms are u00 = a0 , and u0 = t a1 + L−1 g
method one comes across with only one where xi ’s are known independent
derivative operator, which is highest order
either w.r.t. x or w.r.t. y or w.r.t. z or w.r.t. variables. The integral constants a0 , an
time. Here LN(u) = Lu + Ru + Nu = g(t) are determined from the given boundary
includes both linear and non-linear terms. conditions.
The linear term is written as Lu + Ru where L 6.Finding the successive terms of the series
is chosen as the higher ordered derivative, solution by successive iteration using
and R contains the remainder terms. The Adomian polynomials, in the next
present method consists of, recursive steps, we obtain
1. The given equation u1 = a 2 xi − L−1 Ru 0 − L−1 Nu 0 = a 2 xi − L−1 Ru 0 − L−1 A0 , u 2 = a3 xi − L−1 Ru1 − L−1 Nu1 =
2 2 3
L(u , ù , )u + R (u , ù , )u + N (u , ù , )u = g (t ) is n +1
a3 xi − L−1 Ru1 − L−1 A1 ,  u n = a n+1 xi − L−1 Ru n−1 − L−1 Nu n−1 =
3
split into linear(L), remainder(R), and n +1

a n+1 xi − L−1 Ru n−1 − L−1 An−1 ,
nonlinear(N) parts where L is any higher
order linear derivative operator, N is the the nonlinear terms Nu0 , Nu n are further
934
A Novel Technique for Solving 3d Problems
decomposed with the help of Adomian differential equation (3) with specified initial
polynomials as, Nu0 = A0 , Nu1 = A1 , and conditions,
Nu n = An . ∂ 2u − xt ∂ u
2
− yt ∂ u
2
− zt ∂ u
2
= exp + exp + exp (4)
n ∂t 2 ∂x 2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2
d
In an Initial Value Problem(IVP), L is (a the initial conditions posed are u(x,y,z,0) =
dt n
x^2 + y^2 + z^2, u t (x,y,z,0) =0.
differential operator) and L−1 may be
regarded as multiple definite integrations PRESENT METHOD
with limits 0 to t. For IVPs, they need to be
found from initial conditions and may be The above equation (4) can be written as
du Lt u = exp− xt Lx u + exp− yt Ly u + exp− zt Lz u ,
identified as u |t = 0 and | x = 0 respectively. In
dt where the linear operators are
the present method for i th time interval, L−t 1 ∂ 2
∂ 2
∂ 2
∂ 2
Lx = 2 , Ly = 2 Lz = 2 and Lt = 2 .
is the two-fold definite integral from 0 to δT , ∂x ∂y ∂z ∂t
with δT ∈ [ti −1 , ti ] . The same procedure for Pre multiplying both sides of the equation (4)
singularity, fractional derivative and fracture by L−t 1 ,
problems have been adopted. The subset of L−t 1 Lt u = L−t 1 (exp− xt Lx u + exp− yt Ly u + exp− zt Lz u ) ,
time interval [0,T] be divided into n
subintervals and so ordered that u = a + bt + L−t 1 (exp− xt Lx u + exp− yt Ly u + exp− zt Lz u )
0 = t0 < t1 < t 2 <  < t n = T and δT = ti − ti −1 . u0 = ui = u ( x,0) + t ut ( x,0).
th
Therefore, using present method over i Using initial conditions, one can find the
interval, the solution similar to numerical unknown constants a &b .
approximation procedure. To convey the idea ∴ a = u ( x, y, z ,0) = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 , b = ut ( x, y, z ,0) = 0
and for the sake of completeness of the
present method, now one can rewrite the u 0 ( x, y , z , t ) = f ( x, y , z ) + t g ( x , y , z ) = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 .
nonlinear equation in the following form of ∂ 2u ∂ 2u ∂ 2u
A0 = exp − xt 20 + exp − yt 20 + exp − zt 20 ,
u = N (u ), (1) ∂x ∂y ∂z
2
t t t
It is convenient to find the solution of u1 = ∫ ∫ A0 dtdt = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + .
equation (1) in the series form such as, 0 0 2!
∞ In the next iteration,
u = ∑ui . (2) ∂ 2u ∂ 2u ∂ 2u
i =0 A1 = exp− xt 21 + exp− yt 21 + exp− zt 21 ,
∂x ∂y ∂z
3D HYPERBOLIC APPLICATIONS t t 1 1 1
u2 = ∫ ∫ A1 dtdt = 2 exp− xt + 2 exp− yt + 2 exp− zt ,
The present method solution of variable
0 0 x y z
coefficient fourth-order hyperbolic partial 
∂ 2u n −1 − yt ∂ u n −1
2
− zt ∂ u n −1
2
differential equation in two and three An −1 = exp− xt + exp + exp ,
dimensional space variables are shown ∂x 2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2
t t
below. Considering the following general un = ∫ ∫ An dtdt.
form of three dimensional wave equation, 0 0
with initial conditions: ∴ present method solution is,

∂ 2 u ( x, y , z , t ) ∂ 2u ∂ 2u
= A( x, y, z , t ) 2 + B( x, y, z , t ) 2 + DISCUSSION OF RESULTS
∂t 2 ∂x ∂y
The z-axis is chosen to vary from 0 to 50 and
∂ 2u
C ( x, y, z , t ) 2 + D( x, y, z , t ), (3) (3)the time interval is chosen to vary from 0 to
∂z 10. The present method and exact
the initial conditions posed are u(x,y,z,0) = displacement results are shown in figure (1).
f(x,y,z), ut (x,y,z,0) = g(x,y,z). Considering It shows that in z-axis it is grow
the above three dimensional partial exponentially and in time interval variation is
935
Ramana
cubic and parabolic at a point x = y = 2. Equation). The first example with a forcing
Figure (1) shows that displacement for term, has a known exact solution. A number
various z values at various time interval. of problems which are generally encountered
in engineering are solved using present
method. Most of the problems have exact
solution. Therefore the results from present
method are compared with those from the
exact solution. In all the problems it may be
observed that present method results closely
agree with the exact solution.
[Displacement u (Present & Exact).] REFERENCES

Abbasbandy S 2003 Improving Newton-
Raphson method for nonlinear equations
by innovative method Applied
Mathematics and Computation145(2)
887-893.
Adomian G 1991 A review of the
Figure 1: Displacement for Z & timel decomposition method and some recent
results for nonlinear equations
1 1 1 1 Computers and Mathes with Applic’s 21
u ( x, y, z, t ) ≅ x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + t 2 + 2 exp− xt + 2 exp− yt + 2 exp− zt +
2 x y z 101-127.
1 x2 2 − xt − yt 2 − xt − zt
+ exp + exp + Adomian G 1994 Solving frontier problems
4 exp( xt ) 2 (− x − y) 2 (− x − z ) 2
of physics: The decomposition method
1 z 2 1 x2 3 − 2 xt − yt
+ + exp + (2nd edition) Kluwer Dordrecht
4 exp ( zt ) 2
9 exp ( xt ) 3
(−2 x − y) 2
3 3 6 Cherruault Y and Adomian G 1993

− 2 xt − zt ( − xt − 2 yt )
exp + exp + Decomposition methods: a new proof of
(−2 x − z ) 2
(− x − 2 y ) 2
(− x − y − z ) 2
y 2 convergence Mathematical Computation
( − xt − yt − zt ) 3 ( − xt − 2 zt ) 1
exp + exp + + and Modeling 18 103-106.
(− x − 2 z ) 2
9 exp( yt ) 3
3 ( −2 yt − zt ) 3 ( − yt − 2 zt ) 1 z2 Gabet L 1994 The Theoretical Foundation of
exp + exp + . the Adomian Method Computers and
(−2 y − z ) 2 (− y − 2 z ) 2 9 exp( zt ) 3
Mathematics with Applications 27 41-
EXACT SOLUTION 52.
The exact solution is
1 1 1 1 1 x2
Jishe F 2009 A New Two-step Method for
x 2 + y 2 + z 2 + t 2 + 2 exp− xt + 2 exp− yt + 2 exp− zt + + Solving Nonlinear Equations
2 x y z 4 exp( xt ) 2
International Journal of Nonlinear
2 − xt − yt 2 − xt − zt 1 z2 1 x2
exp + exp + + Science 8(1) 40-44.
(− x − y ) 2 (− x − z ) 2 4 exp( zt ) 2 9 exp( xt ) 3
(5) Ramana P V An Emerging technique for
and results are shown in figure (1). Hyperbolic engg problems SEC 2014
Delhi.
CONCLUSION Ramana P V and Raghu Prasad B K 2012
Present technique for three dimensional wave Modified Adomian decomposition
static and dynamic solutions offers an explicit method for fracture of laminated uni-
time-marching algorithm that works directional composites Journal of
accurately over such a bigger time step than Springer 37 33-57.
the numerical methods like FEM and Runge
Kutta Method(Stochastic Differential
936
ICCMS2016
COMPUTATIONAL MECHANISM ON LARGE DEFORMABLE BODIES

USING NOVEL TECHNIQUE
RAMANA P. V.
Department of Civil Engineering, MNIT, Jaipur, India.
Abstract: In the paper, the well known Novel technique is modified to solve the
parabolic equations. The present method is quite different than the numerical method.
The results are compared with the existing exact or analytical method. The already
known existing Novel techniqueis modified to improve the accuracy and convergence.
All physical interaction occurs between the mass elements only, and thus there is no
need for explicit handling of rigid-deformable or rigid-rigid body interaction. This
also means that bodies can be partially rigid and partially deformable. It is also
possible to change whether part of a body should be rigid or not dynamically. In this
paper presents many demonstration example, and also possible applications in
conceptual design engineering, geometric modeling, as well as computer
simulation.The Novel techniqueresults are found to diverge but using Novel technique
converge very quickly and are more accurate compared to numerical methods. The
Novel technique is quite efficient and is practically well suited for use in these
problems. Several examples are given to check the reliability of the present method.
The Novel technique is a non-numerical method which can be adapted for solving
parabolic equations. In the current paper, the principle of the decomposition method is
described, and its advantages are shown in the form of parabolic equations.
Keywords: Novel technique; Parabolic problems; Initial value problems;
Analytical solution; Computer simulation; Geometric modeling.
INTRODUCTION METHODOLOGY
A novel technique applied for solving Recently, Morawetz (1991) solved a first
continuous support bridge problems. In order nonlinear wave equation(NLWE)
problem differently and applied for wav
recent years the development of the high-
speed digital computer and increased interest equations only. The solution obtained by this
in continous and linear phenomena have led method is derived in the form of a power
to an intensive study of the numerical series with easily computable components.
The decomposition method requires that the
solution of ordinary and partial differential
equations. The innovative decomposition nonlinear operator F be separated into three
method is a non-numerical method for terms as follows: F = L+R+N where N is a
solving linear and nonlinear differential nonlinear operator and L + R together form
the linear term. Here L is chosen to be easily
equations, both ordinary and partial. The
general direction of the paper is towards invertible and R is the remainder of the linear
obtaining solution for ordinary and partial term. To convey the idea and for the sake of
differential equations (PDEs). completeness of the innovative
decomposition method, a three dimensional

Ramana
time variant (x, y, z, t) equation is considered With the preceding assumptions on u and N,
as shown below, the Adomian series equations are solutions of
⇒ 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + basic equation. Next it is required to find
𝑅(𝑢) = 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) (1)Adomian polynomials of above equation,
Where 𝐿𝑥 , 𝐿𝑦 , 𝐿𝑧 , 𝐿𝑡 are 𝑛𝑡ℎ order derivative which are needed to derive a series of
operators. Solution for u is obtained after solutions of equation by Adomian iterative
operation w.r.t. x, procedure. Here it may be noted that 𝑢𝑛 is
absent in the series because 𝑁𝑛 depends up
⇒ 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) − (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + on Adomian polynomial 𝐴𝑛−1 , i.e.
𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (2)𝑢0 , 𝑢1 , 𝑢2 , … , 𝑢𝑛−1 .
1 1 1 1
u1 = a2 xi  L Ru 0  L Nu 0 = a2 xi  L Ru0  L A0 , u2
2 2
Now pre-multiplication by 𝐿−1
𝑥 on both sides
for equation (2)
= a3 xi  L1 Ru1  L1 Nu1 = a3 xi  L1 Ru1  L1 A1 ,
3 3
⇒ 𝐿−1
𝑥 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = 𝐿−1
𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡)
− 𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + n 1
 u = a x  L1 Ru n 1  L1 Nu n 1 =
𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (3) n n 1 i
n 1
an 1 xi  L1 Ru n 1  L1 An 1 ,
This equation 𝐿−1 𝑥 𝐿𝑥 is multiplication of
integration and differentiation of 𝑛𝑡ℎ order Adomian polynomials, in the next recursive
differential equation. Therefore it yields n steps, we obtain the nonlinear terms
constants, 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 ,, and 𝑎𝑛 . Nu 0 , Nu n are further decomposed with the
help of Adomian polynomials as,
⇒ 𝑢 = ′n′ constants + 𝐿−1𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) −
−1
𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (4)Nu0 = A0 , Nu1 = A1 , Nu n = An .
Therefore the 𝑛𝑡ℎ order equation is now one can rewrite the nonlinear equation in
the following form of
u = N (u ), (1)
⇒ 𝑢 = 𝑎1 + 𝑥𝑎2 + ⋯ + 𝑥 𝑛−1 𝑎𝑛 +
𝐿−1 −1 It is convenient to find the solution of
𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) − 𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 +
𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) equation
(5) (1) in the series form such as,

Where 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 and 𝑎𝑛 are n constants of u = ui . (2)

i =0
integration. For IVPs and BVPs, the
constraints need to be found from initial and
LARGE DEFORMABLE BODY
boundary conditions respectively. The
𝑑𝑢 APPLICATIONS
boundary conditions are u |𝑥=0 , |𝑥=0 ,
𝑑𝑥
𝑑𝑢 The large-deflection problem of an elastica
u|𝑥=𝐿 , and |𝑥=𝐿 and initial conditions are cantilever beam of length L subjected to a
𝑑𝑥
𝑑𝑢
u|𝑡=0 , |𝑡=0 . Here, the nonlinear part N(u) is transverse concentrated load P, at its free end
𝑑𝑡
assumed to be a contracting (nonlinear) exact is shown in figure (1) and the governing
operator and decomposed as an infinite sum second order nonlinear differential equation
d 2 P
of functions, is,  cos( )  0 (19)
ds 2 EI
𝑁𝑛 (𝑢) = ∑𝑛𝑖=0 𝐴𝑖 (𝑢0 , 𝑢1 , 𝑢2 , … , 𝑢𝑛−1 ) (6)
with boundary conditions  (0) =   (L) = 0,
Where 𝐴𝑖 are the Adomian polynomials valid where  , P are slope, lateral load
only for the specific N(𝑢) . Adomian respectively and s denotes the independent
polynomials 𝐴𝑖 depend on 𝑢𝑖 for i = 0, n-1 spatial coordinate along the deformed
and form a rapidly convergent series. Now, longitudinal axis i.e. deformed centroidal
let the solution u of the above equation axis.
obtained as a series of functions 𝑢𝑖 , i = 0 to n,
The above equation (19) can be written as
i.e, 𝑢 = 𝑢0 + 𝑢1 + 𝑢2 + 𝑢3 + ⋯ + 𝑢𝑛 . (7)
P
Ls  cos( ) = 0 , where the linear
EI
938
Computational Mechanism on Large Deformable Bodies Using Novel Technique
d2  is the slope at any point (X, Y). Total

operator is Ls = 2 . Pre multiplying both length of the undeformed beam L is assumed
ds
to remain same after deformation, but it is
sides of the equation (19) by Ls 1
large deflection.
P
. Ls1 Ls =  Ls1 ( cos( )) Large deflection problem of a nonuniform
EI
cantilever beam subjected to a tip
P
 =  (0)  s(0)  Ls1 ( cos( )) concentrated rotational load has been
EI examined(Figure (2)). Consideration of large
P deflection of beams is seen to result in a
 0 =  (0)  s(0),...  i = 1i Ls1 ( cos( i 1 ))
EI gradual decrease in the rate of increase of
n
P deflection y with respect to the load. This
 =  i =  (0)  s(0)  Ls1 ( cos( i 1 )) effect, termed usually as hardening is found
i =0 EI
to increase with increasing deflection, but the
actual extent of hardening depends on the
load distribution of the beam. Effect of the
PL2
non-dimensional load parameter on
EI
stability is studied. In figure (2), it is clear
PL2
that after critical tip load = 14, it is
EI
Figure 1. Schematic diagram for Elastica totally unstable at L = 14 = 3.7417. At
Beam that value, the cantilever becomes unstable.
EXACT SOLUTION CONCLUSION

The exactsolution as shown in literature. Novel technique for stability problems offers
an explicit time-marching algorithm that
works accurately over such a bigger time step
than the numerical methods like FEM and
Runge Kutta Method(Stochastic Differential
Equation). The first example with a forcing
term, has a known exact solution. A number
Figure 2. Deflect shapes for Elastica with of problems which are generally encountered
PL2 in engineering are solved using NOVEL
EI TECHNIQUE. Most of the problems have
exact or experimental solution. Therefore the
DISCUSSION OF RESULTS
results from NOVEL TECHNIQUE are
Figure (2) shows the deformed configuration compared with those from the exact or
of the cantilever beam due to the end tip experimental solution. In all the problems it
loading computed using non-linear shooting
may be observed that NOVEL TECHNIQUE
and Novel technique. The direction of force
results well agree with the exact solution.
shown in figure (2) is assumed to be positive.
Each point (X, Y ) on the beam is Different types of problems have been solved
X Y in order to confirm the robustness of the
normalized, as , as , where L is the method over a wide variety of differential
L L
length of the un-stretched beam and EI is the equations for stability problems. In the
flexural rigidity of the beam, assumed to be present paper, the problem considered have
constant through out the length of the beam. important engineering applications.
939
Ramana
Table 1. Large Deflection positions for Celia and Andrade and McKee S 1977 High
Elastica Cantilever Beam accuracy A.D.I. method s for fourth order
parabolic equations with variable
PL2 Defl.  y
Slope(  ) Defl.  x coefficients Journal of Computational
EI and Applied Mathematics 3(1) 11-14.
1 0.46135 0.95304 0.30394 Cherruault Y and Adomian G 1993
2 0.78175 0.84791 0.49696 Decomposition methods: a new proof of
3 0.98600 0.75335 0.60740 convergence Mathematical Computation
and Modeling 18 103-106.
4 1.12119 0.67826 0.67442
5 1.21527 0.61918 0.71841 Gabet L 1994 The Theoretical Foundation of
the Adomian Method Computers and
6 1.28355 0.57193 0.74928
Mathematics with Applications 27(12)
7 1.33478 0.53337 0.77213 41-52.
8 1.37427 0.50125 0.78980
Jishe F 2009 A New Two-step Method for
9 1.40542 0.47396 0.80397 Solving Nonlinear Equations
10 1.43048 0.45034 0.81568 International Journal of Nonlinear
11 1.45100 0.42952 0.82560 Science 8(1) 40-44.
12 1.46810 0.41084 0.83421 Morawetz 1991 The decay of solution of the
13 1.48255 0.39381 0.84181 exterior initial boundary value problem
for the wave equations.Pure Applied
14 -0.26246 0.75183 0.58046
mathematics 14 561–568.
15 -3.11967 0.08885 -0.43606
P V Ramana 2014 Modified Decomposition
PL2 Method for nonlinear Van Der Pol
For  14, it is unstable and results are
EI problems International Journal of
tabulated in table (1). nonlinear Mechanics Elsevier 12-36.
P V Ramana An Emerging technique for
REFERENCES Hyperbolic engg problems SEC 2014
Adomian G 1984 Convergent series solutions Delhi.
of nonlinear equations Computer and P V Ramana and B K Raghu Prasad 2012.
Application in Mathematic 11(2) 225- Novel techniquefor fracture of laminated
230. uni-directional composites Journal of
Biazar J 2008 He’s Homotopy Perturbation Springer 37 33-57.
Method for Solving Helmholtz Equation, Pai P F and Palazotto A N 1996 Large
International Journal of Contemporary deformation analysis of flexible beams
Mathematics Sciences 3(15) 739 - 744. International Journal of Solids Structures
Biazar J and Babolian E and Nouri A and 33(9) 1335-1353.
Islam R 2003 An alternate algorithm for Raymond H P and Surjani S and David A D
computing Modified Adomian 1999 Deflections and buckling of a bent
Decomposition Method in special cases elastica in contact with a flat surface
Applied Mathematical Computer International Journal of Solids and
Implementation 138 523-529. Structures 36 1209-1229.
Biazar J and Shafiof S M 2007 A Simple Yu T X and Johnson W 1982 The Plastica:
Algorithm for Calculating Adomian The large deflection of elastic-plastic
Polynomials International Journal of deflection of a strut International Journal
Contemporary Mathematical Sciences of Non-Linear Mechanics 17(3) 195-209.
2(20) 975 - 982.
940
ICCMS2016
AN INNOVATIVE METHOD FOR SOLVING STRUCTURAL

ENGINEERING PROBLEMS
RAMANA P .V.*, KUNAL B., GUPTA R., AGRAWAL N. and SINGH A.K.
Abstract: In the present paper presents a technique for solving ordinary and partial
differential equations (ODE & PDE) linear and nonlinear by an innovative method. The
innovative method consists of decomposing a given differential equation in to linear,
nonlinear and remainder terms. The method has been applied quite extensively by
mathematicians for various cases. However, engineering applications are not that many.
In the present paper solved many Eulers and Timoshenko beams, Kirchoffs lawas for
plate problems have been solved. While applying the method to a static beam and static
problem are observed that the solution with innovative one very close to numerical and
analytical solutions. An innovative method has been applied for linear equation beam
problems to improve the simplicity, accuracy and convergence of above mentioned
problems. The beam problems can easily solve with help of innovative method, which is
decomposion technique and semi-analytical method. The decomposition innovative
method results are found to converge very quickly and are more close to exact solution.
By introducing appropriate stiffness equations with numerical values representative of
material properties, boundary conditions, and loading, the innovative technique can be
developed to model specific structural systems. These equations are mutually dependent
and may be solved using the iteration techniques that are part of the innovative technique.
A common structural problem that is difficult to solve without a special computer
program is the analysis of a slab and plate arbitrarily supported on elastic beams and
columns. The use of the innovative technique to solve this problem is demonstrated.
Equations for plate and slab bending and for beams with finite flexural and torsional
stiffness’s are derived using finite element and difference methods. These equations are
then recast into a form more convenient for an iterative solution. The use of these
equations is demonstrated with numerical examples.
Keywords: Innovative technique, convergence criteria, Eulers beam, Timoshenko
beam, Kirchoffs plate, Finite Difference, Finite Element Method.
___________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: pvramana.ce@mnit.ac.in 941

ICCMS2016
A REVIEW ON APPLICATIONS OF MESHLESS METHODS TO

FLOW AND TRANSPORT PROCESSES IN POROUS MEDIA
BODDULA S.* and ELDHO T.I.
Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, India
Abstract: The complex phenomena of flow and transport through porous media are
often simulated using mathematical models governed by set of equations which are
solved using either analytical or numerical methods.While attempting most of the
industrial or real field problems, porous media flow modeling is dominated by the
finite difference (FDM) and finite element (FEM)methods. This is due to the
robustness of current commercial codes available and their convenient usage through
Graphical user interfaces (GUI) for input and output for the system analysis under
given conditions. As hydro-geologists and researchers try to analyze even larger
systems under more complex conditions, the difficulties associated withgrid based
numerical methods like FDM and FEM become of greater significance.Few
shortcomings like, high costs in meshing and re-meshing, difficulty in adaptive
analysis and deformation can be dealt using latest developed Meshless methods.
These techniques are widely researched from past two decades and are yet to be
commercialized. The present paper attempts to review recent developments and
applications of meshless methods like EFG, PCM, RBF and with additional focus on
MLPG to various cases of porous media modeling applications like flow, solute
transport, contamination remediation, inverse modeling, management problems. In
meshless methods, some issues like computational cost, application of essential
boundary conditions, shape parameter analysisetc are to be dealt accordingly based
onthe problem to be solved. However, good accuracies, low cost to prepare input data,
ability to tackle system locally or globally lead to the successful application of these
Meshless methods.
Keywords: Porous media flow; transport process; Meshless methods.
INTRODUCTION used very effectively. But in view of the

increasing population and uncontrolled
To meet the ever growing demands of fresh
pollution worldwide, there is an urgent need
water, groundwater sources are more reliable,
to manage and protect these resources
as it has several inherent advantages over the
efficiently to ensure its sustainable
surface water resources like its availability
utilization. For the appropriate management
does not depend directly on the annual
of groundwater, flow and transport through
rainfall, is free from enormous losses and is
porous media and its modeling plays a major
relatively pure compared to surface water. As
role.
groundwater is a scarce resource, it should be
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:boddulaswathi@gmail.com 942

Boddula and Eldho
Complex engineering problems are recent applications these methods, without

investigated with the help of numerical giving full mathematical description to
simulation instead of expensive and time porous media modeling problems.Also in
consuming experimental model studies. As particular, an example for Meshless Local
porous media flow process being insidious Petrov-Galerkin (MLPG) method is given.
and complex in nature, its study is done
primarily using numerical models.The MESHLESS METHODS
simulation models based on grid based APPLICATIONS
methods like FDM and FEM have some The application of different Meshless
shortcomings like relying on meshes/grids or methods handling different groundwater
elements that are connected together by modeling problems with methodology
nodes in a properly predefined manner, large features are given in Table 1.
deformation problems where excessive mesh
distortion takes place in the presence of well MESHLESS LOCAL
locations, special treatments in case of PETROVGALERKIN METHOD
essential boundary conditions, complex flow
In this paper, a local weak form method,
and solute transport conditions.
Meshless Local Petrov-Galerkin (MLPG)
The idea of getting rid of mesh, paved way method with Moving Least Squares (MLS)
for the development of Meshless methods [Atluri, 2005] is used for solving the
[Liu and Gu, 2005]. It is another approach to saturated porous media (groundwater flow)
establish stable numerical solutions for equation. The computer model is developed
integral or partial differential equations by in MATLAB and is verified with the
forming system algebraic equations for the available solutions.
whole problem domain without the use of a
The governing equation describing the flow
predefined mesh for the domain
in a two dimensional confined aquifer is
discretization. Here only a set of nodes
given as (Bear, 1979):
scattered within the problem domain as well
𝜕 𝜕ℎ 𝜕 𝜕ℎ 𝜕ℎ
as on the boundaries are used. Meshless �𝑇𝑥 �+ �𝑇𝑦 �=𝑆 +
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑡
methods have found good applications and 𝑄𝑤 𝛿(𝑥 − 𝑥𝑖 )�𝑦 − 𝑦𝑗 � − 𝑞 (1)
shown very good potential to become Here, h = Piezometric head [L], T =
powerful numerical tools.
Transimissivity [L2T-1], S=Storage
Many meshless methods have been achieved coefficient, x, y = Horizontal space variables
remarkable progress over the past years in the
[L], Q = Source or sink function [LT-1], t
w
areas of engineering such as solid mechanics,
structural analysis, heat transfer and fluid = Time [T].The proposed dependent variable
flow analysis etc. Some of these methods are is taken as (Atluri, 2005):
element free Galerkin (EFG), radial point ℎ(𝒓) = ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝜙𝑖 (𝒓)ℎ�𝚤
interpolation, collocation, meshless local (2)whereℎ�𝚤 is the so called fictitious value of
Petrov- Galerkin (MLPG), smooth particle ℎ at node 𝑖 , and 𝜙𝑖 (𝒓) is a trial/shape
hydrodynamic (SPH), hp- cloud, boundary function, similar to those in FEM. Using fully
node (BNM), local boundary integral implicit scheme for time derivative in the
equation (LBIE) method etc [Liu and Gu, model development, the final system of
2005]. The present paper attempts to review
943
A Review on Recent Contribution of Meshless Methods to Groundwater Modeling
equations in the matrix form to solve is of the like no mesh generation and ease of adaptive
form Swathi and Eldho (2014). analysis which plays a significant role.
� 𝒕+𝟏 � = 𝒇
𝐊�𝒉 (3) REFERENCES
To demonstrate the model application, a Alhuri Y Ouazar D and Taik A 2011
hypothetical confined aquifer (saturated Comparison between local and global
porous media) example is considered. The Meshfree methods for groundwater
aquifer is 1000 m x 1000 m with two wells modeling International Journal of
(one pumping and one injection)with Computer Science Issues 8 (2) 337-342.
impervious boundaries. The transmissivity Atluri S N 2005 Meshless method (MLPG)
and storage coefficient of the aquifer are for domain and BIE discretizations
taken75 m2/day and 0.001, respectively. The Forsyth: Tech Science Press.
aquifer is initially at a steady state condition
Bear J 1979 Hydraulics of Groundwater.
with piezometric head equal to 100 m
McGraw Hill Publishing New York.
throughout the aquifer. A pumping well,
extracting and injection of8000 m3/day is Ciftci E Avci C B Borekci O S Sahin A U
located in the aquifer. The Western and 2012 Assessment of advective–
Eastern boundaries are constant head dispersive contaminant transport in
boundaries with values of 100 m and 100 m, heterogeneous aquifers using a meshless
respectively. Northern and Southern method Environmental Earth Sciences
boundaries are no flow boundaries. The head 67(8)2399–2409.
variation in the aqufier at the end of 100 Kumar P RandDodagoudarGR2008Two-
dayswith 1 day time step and compared with dimensional Modeling of Contaminant
FDM and FEM solutions.From the results, Transport through Saturated Porous
present MLPG technique gave quiet Media using the Radial Point
promising results and can be used very well Interpolation Method (RPIM).
for solving the various problems that are Hydrogeology Journal 16 (8)1497-1505.
related to groundwater modeling. Kumar P R and Dodagoudar G R
2010Modelling of contaminant transport
CONCLUSION through landfill liners using EFGM,
In this paper, an effort has been made to International Journal for Numerical and
present different meshless methods and their Analytical Methods in Geomechanics 34
applications in the field of porous median 661–688.
modeling and also highlight the application Li J Chen Y and Pepper D 2003Radial Basis
of meshless local Petrov-Galerkin (MLPG) Function Method for 1-D and 2-D
method for a typical groundwater flow Groundwater Computational Mechanics
problem. Meshless methods have the 32 10-15.
potential to out-perform finite element Li Z and Mao Xian-zhong 2011 Global
methods in the future, if few shortcomings multiquadric collocation method for
are addressed. Many more researchers from groundwater contaminant source
wider computational mechanics community identification Environmental Modelling
are attempting to solve different engineering and Software 26(12) 1611–1621.
problems as these methods bringadvantages
944
Boddula and Eldho
Liu G R and Gu Y T 2005 An introduction to Groundwater Flow Response to Tidal

meshfree methods and their Fluctuation in a Coastal Leaky Confined
programming Dordrecht Berlin Aquifer Journal of Coastal Research 64
Heidelberg New York Springer. 1175-1178.
Meenal M and Eldho T I 2011 Simulation of Swathi B and Eldho T I 2014 Groundwater
groundwater flow in unconfined aquifer Flow simulation in unconfined aquifers
using Meshfree polynomial point using Meshless Local Petrov-Galerkin
collocation method Engineering (MLPG) method Engineering Analysis
Analysis with Boundary Elements 35 of Boundary Elements 48 43-52.
700-707. Swathi B and Eldho T I 2015 Ameshless
Meenal M and Eldho T I 2012 Groundwater method coupled with PSO for parameter
Remediation Optimization Using a Point estimation in groundwater flow system
Collocation Method & Particle Swarm Proceedings of International
Optimization Environmental Modelling Conference on Approximation Methods
and Software 32 37-48. and Numerical Modelling in
Saeedpanah I Jabbari E and Shayanfar M A Environment and Natural Resources
2011 A New Approach for Analyses of MAMERN-2015 France 137-148.
Table 1. Applications of Meshless methods in Groundwater modeling.

Authors, Year Methodology Application
Li, Chen and Pepper Collocation-(MultiQuadric Contaminant Transport
(2003) Radial Basis
Funtion)MQRBF
Kumar and Dodagoudar Radial Point Interpolation Contaminant Transport
(2008, 2010) Method (RPIM)-RBF,
Element Free Galerkin-
MLS
Alhuri, Ouazar and Taik Collocation- Contaminant Transport
(2011) MQRBF,CSRBF
Li and Mao (2011) Radial Basis Collocation Contaminant Source
Method (RBCM) Identification
Saeedpanah, Jabbari and Local Radial Point Flow in coastal aquifer
Shayanfar (2011) Interpolation Meshless
Method (LRPIM) - MQRBF
Meenal and Eldho Collocation-MQRBF Flow, Contaminant
(2011,2012) Transport and
Remediation
Ciftci, Avci , Borekci and Collocation-MQ,IMQ, Contaminant Transport
Sahin (2012) TPS,S,GARBF
Swathi and Eldho Meshless local Petrov- Flow, Inverse modelling
(2014,2015) Galerkin (MLPG)-
GARBF,MLS
945
ICCMS2016
THE EQUALITY OF PARTIAL SOLUTIONS FOR Nth ORDER

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS USING NOVEL TECHNIQUE
RAMANA P. V. and GUPTA S.*
Abstract: In this paper, the Solutions of linear and nonlinear partial differential
equations are found using an extended Maclaurin series form of the decomposition
method and developing the nonlinear polynomials. Using novel technique solve
either two dimensional problems or three dimensional problems, the procedure is
unique, similarly solve either static problems or dynamic problems, the procedure is
unique. Consider the solution of partial differential equations for initial/boundary
conditions using the decomposition method. The partial solutions obtained from the
separate equations for the highest-ordered linear operator terms are shown to be
identical when the boundary conditions are general and asymptotically equal when the
boundary conditions in one independent variable are independent of other variables.
This work considers the partial solutions of partial differential equations for
initial/boundary conditions using the Novel technique. The study formally shows that
the partial solutions are always identical for all styles of boundary conditions or initial
conditions. It’s also prove that the partial solution in the space (i.e. x, y, z) or t-
direction requires less computational work if compared with other partial solutions
developed in any space variable direction. In addition, several mathematical models
that govern the heat distribution and the wave propagation phenomena’s have been
tested, and the results obtained have shown that the t-solution minimizes the size of
calculations if compared with the traditional techniques.
Keywords: Equality of Partial Solutions; Novel technique; Numerical solution;
Two & Three Dimensional Problems; Simulation.
INTRODUCTION both sides, identifying the initial or boundary

conditions and the terms involving the
The technique uses a decomposition of the
independent variable alone as initial
nonlinear operator as a series of Adomian
approximation, decomposing the unknown
functions. Each term of this series is a
function into a series whose components are
generalized polynomial called the Adomian
to be determined, decomposing the linear and
polynomial. Some techniques which assume
nonlinear function in terms of special
essentially that the linear and nonlinear
polynomials, and finding the successive
system is almost linear after equivalent
terms of the series solution. The present
linearization will not be able to retain the
innovative method provides the solution in a
originality of the problem. Present technique
rapidly convergent series with easily
consists of splitting the given equation into
computable components. The main
linear, remainder and nonlinear parts,
advantage of the method is that it can be used
inverting the highest order differential
directly to solve, all types of differential
operator contained in the linear operator on

Ramana et.al.
equations with homogeneous and 𝑑𝑢

boundary conditions are u |𝑥=0 , | ,
𝑑𝑥 𝑥=0
inhomogeneous boundary conditions. 𝑑𝑢
Another advantage of the method is that it u |𝑥=𝐿 , and | and initial conditions
𝑑𝑥 𝑥=𝐿
reduces the computational work in a tangible 𝑑𝑢
are u|𝑡=0 , |𝑡=0 . Here,
the nonlinear part
𝑑𝑡
manner, while maintaining higher accuracy
N(u) is assumed to be a contracting
of the numerical solution. The conventional
(nonlinear) exact operator and
have systematic procedure and follows some
decomposed as an infinite sum of
assumed rules, but using the innovative
functions,
method, one can solve the proble stright way.
𝑢 = 𝑢0 + 𝑢1 + 𝑢2 + 𝑢3 + ⋯ + 𝑢𝑛 .
now one can rewrite the nonlinear equation
METHODOLOGY
in the following form of
The decomposition method requires that the u = N (u ), (1)
nonlinear operator F be separated into three It is convenient to find the solution of
terms as follows: F = L+R+N where N is a equation (1) in the series form such as,
nonlinear operator and L + R together form 
the linear term. Here L is chosen to be easily u = ui . (2)
i =0
invertible and R is the remainder of the linear
term. To convey the idea and for the sake of
completeness of the innovative 2D PLATE APPLICATION
decomposition method, a three dimensional TWO DIMENSIONAL BI-HARMONIC
time variant (x, y, z, t) equation is considered EQUATION WITH MIXED BOUNDARY
as shown below, CONDITION'S
⇒ 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) +
The first example is a bi-harmonic equation
𝑅(𝑢) = 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) (1)with a forcing term i.e. a function of (x,y).
where 𝐿𝑥 , 𝐿𝑦 , 𝐿𝑧 , 𝐿𝑡 are 𝑛𝑡ℎ order The governing bi-harmonic equation is,
derivative operators. Solution for u is 𝜕4 𝑢 𝜕4 𝑢 𝜕4 𝑢 𝑝
4 +2 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 + 𝜕𝑦 4
= (3)
obtained after operation w.r.t. x, 𝜕𝑥 𝐷
⇒ 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) − (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + where u is the transverse displacement of a
𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (2)plate subjected to uniformly distributed load
Now pre-multiplication by 𝐿−1 p only problem 1 statement is given by
𝑥 on both
sides for equation (2) Rectangular plate simply supported on all its
⇒ 𝐿−1 −1 four sides is loaded with uniformly
𝑥 𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = 𝐿𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) −
𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (3)distributed Load p shown by shaded area. It
is known, E = 2.1×105 MPa, μ= 0.3; t= 0.1m,
This equation 𝐿−1
𝑥 𝐿𝑥 is
p = 2kN/m2, a= 4m, b = 6m. Determine the
multiplication of integration and
values of deflection at the center of plate.
differentiation of 𝑛𝑡ℎ order differential
equation. Therefore it yields n constants,
𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 ,, and 𝑎𝑛 .
⇒ 𝑢 = ′n′ constants + 𝐿−1 𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) −
−1
𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (4)
Therefore the 𝑛𝑡ℎ order equation is
⇒ 𝑢 = 𝑎1 + 𝑥 𝑎2 + ⋯ + 𝑥 𝑛−1 𝑎𝑛 +
𝐿−1 −1
𝑥 𝑔(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧, 𝑡) − 𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑧 𝑢 +
Figure-1: simply supported plate with udl
𝐿𝑡 𝑢 + 𝑁(𝑢) + 𝑅(𝑢)) (5)
Where 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 and 𝑎𝑛 are n constants of Consider a rectangular plate {0≤x≤a, 0≤y≤b }
integration. For IVPs and BVPs, the which is freely mounted along the edges.
constraints need to be found from initial This is the case of a simply supported plate.
and boundary conditions respectively. The The boundary conditions are
947
The Equality of Partial Solutions for Nth Order Differential Equations using Novel Technique
𝜕2𝑈 with those of conventional method, FDM and

u=0 , = 0 for x=0 and x=a,
𝜕𝑋 2 exact. It may be observed that the results of
𝜕2𝑈
u=0 , = 0 for y=0 and y=b, emerging decomposition method coincide
𝜕𝑦 2
In the emerging decomposition method perfectly with those of exact, which FDM
procedure, above equation (3) can be written results do not match with the exact. The error
as however is quite small.
𝑝
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 2𝐿𝑥𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 = ( ) where 𝐿𝑥 =
𝐷
𝜕4 𝜕4 𝜕4
, 𝐿𝑦 = , 𝐿𝑥𝑦 = ,
𝜕𝑥 4 𝜕𝑦 4 𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
𝑃
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = ( ) − 2𝐿𝑥𝑦 𝑢 − 𝐿𝑦 𝑢,
𝐷
Using the Dirichlet and Neumann boundary
conditions, Pre multiplying both sides of the
equation (8) by 𝐿−1
𝑥 . +
𝑝
𝐿−1 −1
𝑋 𝐿𝑋 𝑢 = 𝐿𝑋 {( ) − 2𝐿𝑥𝑦 𝑢 − 𝐷
𝐿𝑦 𝑢} , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝐿−1
𝑥 = ∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ 𝑓(𝑥)𝜕𝑥
𝑚𝑥 3 𝑐𝑥 2 𝑝𝑥 4
𝑢= + + 𝑑𝑥 + 𝑒 + −
6 2 24𝐷
−1
𝐿𝑥 (2𝐿𝑥𝑦 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢)
𝑚𝑥 3 𝑐𝑥 2 𝑝𝑥 4
𝑢0 = + + 𝑑𝑥 + 𝑒 + ,
6 2 24𝐷
𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑢0 𝑖𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
Using Dirichlet and Neumann boundary conditionsFigure
one can
2. determine the
Analytical & unknown
Novel solutions
constants
pa pa3
m=− , c=0, d= , e = 0,
2D 24D
now 𝑢0 can be written as
𝑝𝑎𝑥 3 𝑝𝑎3 𝑥 𝑃𝑥 4 𝑎
𝑢0 = − + + at x= value of
12𝐷 24𝐷 24𝐷 2
5𝑝𝑎4
𝑢0 = ,
384𝐷
𝑢1 = −𝐿−1𝑥 (2𝐿𝑥𝑦 𝑢0 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢0 ) , remender
term will have a value of zero.
After putting the values of p , a and D from
above problem deflection at centre will be
Emerging Solution:
𝑝𝑎𝑥 3 𝑝𝑎3 𝑥 𝑃𝑥 4
u = 3.466×10−4 mm, 𝑢 = − + +
12𝐷 24𝐷 24𝐷
Exact (Analytical) Solution
16𝑝
u = 3.185×10−4 mm, u = ∑∞ ∞
𝑚=1 ∑𝑛=1 ,
𝐷𝜋6 (𝛼+𝛽)2
𝑚 𝑛
where α = ( )2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽 = ( )2
𝑎 𝑏
Finite difference method solution
u = 1.667× 10−4 mm, by taking nodes as
shown in figure 1. Figure 3: Fdm & Pdetool (matlab)
Discussion of Results solution
The above problem has an important
engineering application. It is a problem TWO DIMENSIONAL LAPLACE
where in plate uniformly distributed load is EQUATION WITH MIXED BOUNDARY
acting all over the plate. The x-axis is chosen CONDITION'S
to vary from x = 0 to x = 𝑥𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 4 and y = 0 This example is a Laplace equation with a
to y = ymax = 6. Results of the present forcing term i.e. zero. The governing Laplace
approach or Present technique are compared
948
Ramana et.al.
equation is,
𝜕2 𝑢
+
𝜕2 𝑢
= 0 (0<x<1 𝑢 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 2 + 6𝑦𝑥 2 −
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 𝑥4
and 0<y<1) …..(4) 𝑦𝑥 4 + − 𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢)
2
The boundary conditions are,
𝑢0 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 4𝑥 2 +
u (x=0 , y) = - 𝑦 3 ,
𝑥4
u (x=1 , y) = - 𝑦 3 + 3𝑦 2 , 6𝑦𝑥 2 − 𝑦𝑥 4 + ,
2
In the emerging decomposition method 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑢0 𝑖𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
procedure, above equation(9) can be written
as, Using Dirichlet and Neumann boundary conditions
𝜕2 𝜕2
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 = 0 , where 𝐿𝑥 = , 𝐿𝑦 = , one can determine the unknown constants a =
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
5
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = −𝐿𝑦 𝑢 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 , b = − 5𝑦
2
−1 −1
(𝐿𝑥 𝑢) = −𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢) , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝐿𝑥 = 5
∫ ∫ 𝑓(𝑥) 𝜕𝑥 𝑢0 = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 + ( − 5𝑦 )𝑥 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 +
2
𝑢 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 − 𝐿−1 𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢) & 𝑢0 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑥 , 𝑥4
3𝑦 𝑥 − 4𝑥 + 6𝑦𝑥 − 𝑦𝑥 4 +
2 2 2 2
, now 𝑢1 =
𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑢0 𝑖𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑣𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 2
−1
−𝐿𝑥can
Using Dirichlet and Neumann boundary conditions one (𝐿𝑦determine
𝑢0 ) , the unknown
constants 1
a = - 𝑦 3 , b = 3𝑦 2 𝑢1 = −6𝑦𝑥 2 + 3𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑥 2 − 𝑥 4 , now
2
𝑢0 = − 𝑦 3 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 − 𝐿−1
𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢) , now
𝑢 = 𝑢0 + 𝑢1
𝑢1 = −𝐿−1 𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢0 ),
5
𝑢1 = − ∫ ∫(𝐿𝑦 𝑢0 ) 𝑢 = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 + 𝑥 − 5𝑥𝑦 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 +
2
𝑢1 = −𝑥 3 + 3𝑥 2 𝑦 , now 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2 ,
𝑢 = 𝑢0 + 𝑢1
𝑢 = −(𝑥 3 + 𝑦 3 ) + 3𝑥𝑦(𝑥 + 𝑦) Exact (Analytical) Solution:
Exact (Analytical) Solution:
𝑢 = −(𝑥 3 + 𝑦 3 ) + 3𝑥𝑦(𝑥 + 𝑦) 𝑢 = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 − 2𝑦 3 𝑥 2 + 3𝑦 2 𝑥 2 − 𝑥 2
TWO DIMENSIONAL POISSON'S CONCLUSION

EQUATION WITH MIXED BOUNDARY The novel solution is compared with
CONDITION'S MATLAB solution. In all the problems it
may be observed that novel method results
The governing poisson’s equation is, perfectly agree with the exact solutions.
𝜕2 𝑢 𝜕2 𝑢 Different types of problems have been solved
+ = −2(2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1) +
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 in order to confirm the robustness of the
2 )(2𝑦
6(1 − 𝑥 − 1) (0<x<1 and 0<y<1) ……(5) method over a wide variety of second order
The boundary conditions are, axial bar and truss and also fourth ODE
beam linear problems seen effectively.
u (x=0, y) = 2𝑦 3 − 3𝑦 2 + 1 & u (x=1 , y) = 0
In the emerging decomposition method REFERENCES
procedure, above equation (5) can be written Al-Said E A and Noor MA. 2002 Quartic
as, spline method for solving fourth order
obstacle BVPs applic for Math Comp.
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 + 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 = −4𝑦 3 + 6𝑦 2 − 12𝑦𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 2 + 43 107-116.
𝜕2 𝜕2
12𝑦 − 8 , where 𝐿𝑥 = , 𝐿𝑦 = , Al-Said E A and Noor M A 1998 Numerical
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2
solutions of a system of fourth order
𝐿𝑥 𝑢 = −4𝑦 3 + 6𝑦 2 − 12𝑦𝑥 2 + 6𝑥 2 + 12𝑦 −
boundary value problems International
8 − 𝐿𝑦 𝑢 Journal of Computational Mathematics
𝐿−1 −1 3 2 2
𝑥 (𝐿𝑥 𝑢) = 𝐿𝑥 (−4𝑦 + 6𝑦 − 12𝑦𝑥 +
71 347-355
2 −1
6𝑥 + 12𝑦 − 8) − 𝐿𝑥 (𝐿𝑦 𝑢)
949
The Equality of Partial Solutions for Nth Order Differential Equations using Novel Technique
Aluru N 2000 A point collocation method Noor M A and Tirmizi S I 1986 Numerical
based on reproducing kernel methods for unilateral problems Journal
approximations International Journal of Computational Appl & Maths 16
for Numerical Methods in Engineering 387-395.
47 1083–1121. Noor M A and Tirmizi S I 1991 Numerical
Reddy J N 1995 An Introduction to the Finite methods for a class of contact problems,
Element Method. McGraw Hill International Journal of Engg Sc 29
Noor and Jian-Lin Li 2009 Adomian's 513-521.
decomposition method and homotopy Ramana P V Raghu Prasad B K 2012 Novel
perturbation method in solving techniquefor fracture of laminated uni-
nonlinear equations Journal of direction comp. Journal of Springer 37
Computational and Applied 33-57.
Mathematics 228(1) 168-173.
P V Ramana 2014 An Emerging technique
Noor M A and Al-Said E A 2000 Numerical for Hyperbolic engg problems SEC
solutions of fourth order variational Delhi.
inequalities International Journal of
Repaci A 1990 Nonlinear dynamical
Computational Mathematics 75 107-
systems: on accuracy of Adomian's
116.
decomposit method Applied Math Lit 3
35-39.
950
ICCMS2016
MODELLING AND ANALYSIS OF METAL DRILLING PROCESS

USING EXPERIMENTAL STUDY AND FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
PONNUSAMY PANDITHEVAN* and VINAYAGA MURUGA PANDY
Department of Mechanical Engineering,Indian Institute of Information Technology Design and
Manufacturing Kancheepuram, Chennai, Tamilnadu, India.
Abstract: Finite element analysis of machining processes is evolving from past

several years. Machining involves complex dynamics of tool and workpiece; hence
improvements in the finite element models are done to match with the actual. This
paper presents a three dimensional finite element modelling and analysis of metal
drilling process using Ansys explicit dynamics. A finite element model for drilling
mild steel and brass workpiece materials using a high speed steel twist drillbit is
developed. The cutting force variation along three directions during drilling process is
obtained. In this paper Mie-Gruneisen form of equation of state that uses the shock
Hugoniot as a reference curve is used in the finite element analysis. The finite element
analysis done using this technique is found in good agreement with the experimental
work. Drilling process for various work piece and tool materials under different
cutting conditions can be modeled using this technique.
Keywords: Drilling; Force; Explicit dynamics; Finite element method.
INTRODUCTION detailed review of Finite element methods

Drilling is a highly dynamic material removal used in all machining processes.
process. Much of research is carried out on
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF
modelling and analysis of drilling process to
WORKPIECE AND DRILL BIT
predict the thrust force, torque and
temperature. Numerous numerical, analytical The work piece and drill bit is modeled using
and empirical models are proposed for the Autodesk Inventor© software. Brass
drilling process. Currently available metal workpiece (91 mm x 50 mm x 12 mm) and
drilling models are mainly based on the Mild steel workpiece (95 mm x 50 mm x 6
model proposed by Merchant, (1944). mm) are used in the finite element analysis.
Oxford, (1955) identified a small region Parametric modelling of actual drill bit is
called the indentation zone in the middle part done. The specifications of drill bit used in
of the drill where the material is not cut but finite element analysis and experimental
extruded. Strenkowski et al., (2004) had work is as follows: Major diameter is 3 mm,
modeled the chisel cutting region as overall length is 62 mm, flute length is 35
orthogonal cutting region and cutting lips as mm, helix angle is 30°, point angle is 118°
oblique cutting and developed a Eulerian and a web thickness of 1.1 mm. For
finite element method. Guo and Dornfeld, computational purposes the deformations in
(2000) introduced an internal state variable drill bit is neglected and assumed as a rigid
model for finite element modelling of chip solid.
formation. Mackerle, (1981) presented a
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ppthevan@iiitdm.ac.in 951

Pandithevan and Pandy
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL Table 1. Material properties of tool and

In this paper a 3D modelling of drilling workpiece materials
process is developed using commercial finite Mild
Material Brass
element software Ansys. The model aims to steel
simulate the drilling process, to calculate the Density (Kg/m3) 8450 7896
various stresses in the work piece and tool Shear Modulus (GPa) 40 81.8
materials; to predict induced cutting forces,
Shock EOS Linear Parameters
distribution in the work piece throughout the
drilling process Shock equation of state is Gruneisen Coefficient 2.04 2.17
being used in this finite element analysis. Parameter C1(m/s) 3726 4569
Shock equation of state used to determine the Parameter S1 1.434 1.49
pressure in a shock-compressed solid. The Parameter Quadratic
0 0
Figure 1 shows the boundary condition S2 (s/m)
applied during finite element simulations of
drilling.
Figure 2. Equivalent stress obtained in

drilling
EXPERIMENTAL WORK
Figure 1. Boundary conditions Drilling operation is carried out using CNC
vertical milling machine on brass and mild
In this work, brass and mild steel work pieces steel metal specimens with 3mm HSS drill
are drilled using high speed steel drill bit. bit under same operating conditions. The
The feed rate 0.1 mm/rev is given as linear feed rate used is 0.1 mm/revolution with a
velocity and cutting speed 1000 rpm is spindle speed of 1000 rpm. The forces are
applied as angular velocity. The chips
measured using Kistler force dynamometer.
removal as a result of drilling operation is
specified using displacement in direction
along the drill bit. The material properties RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
used in analysis is listed in Table 1. The The forces from experiments are compared
equivalent stress during simulation of drilling with finite element method results. Here F X
process is shown in Figure 2. The drilling and F Y are found negligible in both cases due
simulation is done for two workpiece and to the workpiece is fixed and the drill bit is
contact reaction forces were obtained.
given only translational and rotational motion
in single axis only.
952
A Three Dimensional Finite Element Modelling and Analysis of metal drilling
CASE STUDY 1 This influence is found in same manner

across various drilling conditions.
In this case study, drilling is carried out on
brass workpiece and drilling force
components are plotted against time as
shown in Figure 3. Here the thrust force
fluctuates initially and remains almost
constant for the entire time due to the ease of
machining of brass. The other force
components are found negligible. The thrust
force obtained during machining with the
same feed rate and speed is almost close with
that done by Moneim, 1981. However, the
drill bit size is different from this study. Figure 4. Forces -Time plot
Table 2. Components of cutting force

involved for brass and mild steel
materials
Material Property Mild

Units Brass
\ Workpiece steel
Density Kg/m3 8500 7850
Figure 3. Forces -Time plot Elastic modulus Gpa 125 210
Shear modulus Gpa 40 79.3
CASE STUDY 2 Max F X (Exp) N 7.07 4.39
Max F X (FEM) N 0 0
Here drilling is carried out on mild steel
Max F Y (Exp) N 7.96 6.631
workpiece and drilling force components are
Max F Y (FEM) N 0 0
plotted against time as shown in Figure 4.
Max F Z (Exp) N 133 175
The axial thrust force is gradually increasing
Max F Z (FEM) N 153.78 146.8
and remains changing in a cyclic fashion due
to material erosion and removal. The thrust
CONCLUSION
force obtained under same feed rate and
drillbit diameter is almost close to that A three dimensional finite element modelling
obtained by Pal et al., 1965. However, the of drilling was done using Ansys explicit
speed is different from this study and pilot dynamics. Experiments were done under
hole is used by Pal et al., 1965. The shear same drilling conditions to find out the
modulus of mildsteel is higher than brass so variation of cutting forces with respect to
more cutting energy is required hence the material properties. The results obtained from
thrust forces obtained is higher than brass. above have been summarized as follows:
SUMMARY 1. The cutting force obtained by

The summary of results in metal drilling experiments is much close to the
process is shown in Table 2. The cutting simulation results, which shows the
force components are influenced by the simulation model is accurate and
density and modulus values of materials. reliable.
953
Pandithevan and Pandy
2. Cutting forces are influenced by the ductile materials International Journal

shear modulus of materials. Slight of Machine Tool Design and Research
changes in shear modulus values affect 4(4) 205-221
the results drastically in comparison with Strenkowski J S Hsieh C C and Shih A J
other material properties. 2004 An analytical finite element
3. The influence of shock EOS linear technique for predicting thrust force and
constants in cutting force is the most torque in drilling International Journal
significant, in addition to modulus and of Machine Tools and Manufacture
density values. 44(12) 1413-1421.
The shock equation of state is used to
describe the state of internal energy of an
object during impact, collision and other high
speed processing. The effect of this
parameter in machining is not discussed in
literature. The finite element model
developed using Ansys explicit dynamics can
be further extended to new drilling
conditions, new workpiece and drill bit
materials, and also errors between the
experimental and finite element method
results are to be minimized.
REFERENCES
Guo Y B and Dornfeld D A 2000 Finite
element modeling of burr formation
process in drilling 304 stainless steel
Journal of manufacturing science and
engineering 122(4) 612-619
Mackerle J 1999 Finite-element analysis and
simulation of machining: a bibliography
(1976–1996) Journal of Materials
Processing Technology 86(1) 17-44
Merchant M E 1944 Basic mechanics of the
metal cutting process Journal of Applied
Mechanics 11(A) 168-175
Moneim M E A 1981 Effect of drilling speed
on the required torque and thrust force
for non-ferrous materials Wear 66(1)
65-75
Oxford Jr. C J 1955 On the drilling of metals
1: basic mechanics of the process
Transactions of ASME 77(2) 103-111
Pal A K Bhattacharyy A and Sen G C 1965
Investigation of the torque in drilling
954
ICCMS2016
FATIGUE ANALYSIS OF ABS MOULD

ADDANKI SAMBASIVA RAO1, DHARAP M. A. and VENKATESH J. V. L.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai, India.
2
Mechanical Engineering Department, SGGSIE&T, Nanded, Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: Casting process simulation is now widely accepted as an important tool in

product design, process development, improving yield and in solving processing
problems throughout the manufacturing industry. Casting process issues related to hot
tearing and cracking of the mould, thermal fatigue of mould, and prediction of the
final part dimensions can however be a challenge. Powerful, multi-physics simulation
tools are now available to address such issues. New dies can be designed on the
computer, thereby eliminating expensive trial-and-error retooling procedures and
achieving drastic cost savings in new process development alongside the
improvement of current production.
Keywords: Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS); Fused Deposition Modeling
(FDM); Finite Element Analysis (FEA); ANSYS; Transient Thermal
Analysis; Transient Structural Analysis; Fatigue Analysis.
INTRODUCTION pressures. In order to accurately simulate the

stress behaviour, one should consider the
Rapid tooling like ABS moulds fabricated
full coupling between the thermal &
from FDM process are preferably used to
mechanical stress analysis of all the
save the time and cost in case of the
relevant materials [Samonds et al. 2002].
production of low quantity (in hundreds)
parts. Component life time is strongly Furthermore, moulds may experience some
influenced by in-homogeneities caused by the local plastic deformation therefore; one
material’s microstructure and the needs to consider both the elastic and
manufacturing process. In-homogeneities plastic behaviour of the mould [Eufinger
often act as a fatigue crack starter. Failure 2011]. Any local plastic deformation in the
may be divided into stages for crack
mould would severely limit its life time
initiation, short and long crack growth until
lifetime [Kwon et al. 2004]. Efforts have and should therefore be avoided. Even
been made to analyse the fatigue life of ABS when mould operates within the elastic
mould. region, its life time is influenced by the cyclic
Other than the defects related to filling and stresses which occur during processing
solidification, there are a number of stress [Yuhua Song et al. 2001].
related issues which can affect the final A realistic assessment of these issues requires
integrity of the mould components and result a fully transient thermal and transient
in mould failures. Factors which influence
structural simulation. The finite element
the stress behaviour and fatigue life of the
mould include geometry, thermal history, method has been found to be superior for this
thermo-mechanical properties of the mould type of simulation [Zienkiewicz and Taylor
and mould components, thermal/mechanical 1991]. FDM fabricated mould of ABS
contact algorithm, and external forces and
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: asrao@vjti.org.in 955

Rao et al.
material has been treated with chemical Therefore it is necessary to predict the fatigue
treatment to improve its surface [Sung-Hoon life of mould. Transient temperature and
et al. 2004]. Some of the consideration pressure conditions involved in the moulding
involved in the implementation of such a process use two types of analyses i.e. thermal
program include; 1) Use of an appropriate analysis & mechanical stress analysis
material model. 2) Unstructured mesh. 3) u s i n g A N S Y S software. Further fatigue
Thermal-mechanical contact. 4) analysis is carried to get the final life of ABS
Implementation for mould filling and mould.
solidification. 5) Fatigue life prediction.
(A) BOUNDARY CONDITIONS FOR
METHODOLOGY WAX PATTERNS THROUGH FDM ABS
MOULDS
In this process, the wax patterns are produced
using the case study of “Fork” of direct I. Pouring (initial) conditions (At open
tooling. The initial conditions are room condition): Pouring time: 1 minute
atmospheric conditions since the wax pouring = 60 Sec, Pressure, 1atm = 0.10132 Mpa
(14.6959 psi), Initial temperature: 27ºC,
is performed under gravity into the mould
Final temperature = 70ºC.
cavity. The temperature of the mould is II. Under pressure conditions (Inside a
therefore, considered at 27°C as the pressure pressure vessel under air pressure):
is atmospheric (1atm) and the pouring Settling time: 90 min = 5400 Sec,
temperature is 70°C. Wax pouring is carried Pressure = 0.44815Mpa (65psi), Initial
out under gravity flow for about 1 minute at temp: 70ºC, Final temp: 40ºC
these conditions. At this stage temperature of III. Curing (final) conditions: (At open room
wax inside the mould temperature is 70°C condition): Settling time: 120 min =
7200 Sec, Pressure = 0.10132 Mpa
and pressure is atmospheric. After filling the
(1atm), Initial temp: 40ºC, Final temp:
mould cavity fully with wax material the 27ºC.
mould assembly is kept inside a pressure
vessel for uniform solidification of wax (B) MATERIAL PROPERTIES OF ABS
inside the mould cavity, which has a MOULDS
regulated air pressure of 65psi for 90 min. as In order to simulate ABS mould, mechanical
per the industry standard. This will ensure properties of ABS mould have been adopted
proper solidification of wax material without in ANSYS. In ABS mould all the parameters
any blow holes caused due to air trap while and functions are temperature dependent
pouring the wax material into the cavity. (Sung-Hoon et al. 2004).
During this period of solidification of the
wax the temperature falls to 40°C. After the
solidification, the assembly of mould is taken
out and placed again in the room conditions
for 120 min. at atmospheric (1atm) pressure.
After 120 min. the wax pattern can be taken
out easily from the mould. This process is
repeated for production of each pattern. Due
to repetition of this process the mould cavity
is subjected to different conditions of filling,
solidification phases. As the fatigue stresses Figure 1. CAD model of ‘Fork’ mould
are generated in the mould, it may fail.
956
Fatigue Analysis of ABS Mould
(C) FEA ANALYSIS CASE STUDY: D) TRANSIENT THERMAL ANALYSIS

FORK The thermal temperature conditions are
A case study under taken for this study is applied on inside cavity of the mould, and the
Fork as shown in Figure 1. This CAD model mould is subjected to transient thermal
is made in CATIA software and imported analysis. Figure 3 shows temperature loading
into ANSYS. Material properties are applied is applied to mould and Figure 4 shows
to the mould and fixed boundary condition is temperature distribution of mould after the
applied on bottom of the mould. Then a thermal analysis.
meshing is done with 10 node tetrahedron
elements. Figure 2 shows meshed model of
mould.
Figure 4 Temperature distribution results
(E) TRANSIENT STRUCTURAL

ANALYSIS
Pressure is applied on external surface of
Figure 2. Meshed model of ‘Fork’ mould mould. Temperature results are imported
from the transient thermal analysis and the
Table 1. Properties of ABS material
mould is subjected to transient structural
Value analysis. Figure 5 shows the stress results
Material Property
obtained after transient structural analysis.
Density 1.04 g/cc
Tensile yield strength 16.58
Flexural strength 36.83
Melt flow 18-23 g/10 min
Figure 5. Stress results
(F) FATIGUE ANALYSIS
The “Fork” FEA model is further subjected

to ‘Fatigue Analysis’ for its life. Figure 6
shows results of fatigue life of “Fork” mould.
The life of the mould is the minimum value
Figure 3. One half of Fork mould with
of the fatigue results to be considered i.e. the
applied temperature
predicted life of the “Fork” mould is 46.543
cycle say 46 cycles.
957
Rao et al.
H J Kwon P Y B Jar Z Xia 2004 Residual

toughness of poly acrylonitrile-
butadiene styrene (ABS) after fatigue
loading-effect of uniaxial fatigue
loading Journal of Materials Science 39
4821 – 4828.
Mark Samonds J Z Zhu Adi Sholurwalla
2002 Integration of Thermal Stresses
Simulation with Process Development in
Figure 6. Fatigue life result the Modern Foundry Nadca.
CONCLUSION Sung-Hoon Ahn Caroline S Lee Woobyok

Jeong 2004 Development of Translucent
From above analysis, it is concluded that
FDM Parts by Post-Processing Rapid
chemically treated FDM fabricated mould of
Prototyping Journal 10/ 4 218 – 22.
ABS material has the fatigue life of 46 cycles
that means 46 wax patterns can be produced Trantina, G G Design with Plastics Materials
from the mould before it is damaged. The Selection and Design 20 ASM
experimental results also conducted on Handbook ASM International 1997
chemically treated FDM fabricated ABS pages 639 - 647.
mould, which has yielded 43 wax patterns. Yuhua Song Yongnian Yan Renji Zhang
Hence it is observed that both experimental Qingping Lu Da Xu 2001 Three
results and ANSYS simulated results are in Dimensional Non-Linear Coupled
good agreement. Thermo-Mechanical FEM Analysis of
the Dimensional Accuracy for Casting
REFERENCES Dies in Rapid Tooling Finite Elements
Eufinger J 2011 Characterisation of Crack in Analysis and Design 38 79-91.
Tip Stress Fields Forni di Sopra (UD)
Zienkiewicz O C Taylor R L1991 The Finite
Italy March 7/9 34-4.
Element Method 2 McGraw-Hill.
958
ICCMS2016
FINITE ELEMENT SIMULATION OF PWT INDUCED GUIDED WAVE

MODES IN ISOTROPIC CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
JAYESH P.* and BIJUDAS C. R.
Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology, Thiruvananthapuram, India
Abstract: Full-fledged structural health monitoring (SHM) of aerospace and civil

structures will be a major breakthrough in the structural design area. SHM using
guided wave modes is one of the promisingareas of investigation in aerospace
structural design. Operational costs can be considerably reduced by introducing
condition based structural maintenance in these structures instead of routine
preventive maintenance. The guided wave modes induced by light weight
piezoelectric wafer transducers (PWT) can be used for SHM of structures. Even
though a large number of research papers are generated on SHM using guided wave
modes in plate like structures, a very few are focusing on the cylindrical shell type
structures. This article discusses the finite element modelling and analyses of PWT
induced wave propagation in cylindrical shell surface. 2D and 3D finite element
analyses are carried out and the guided wave modes for different excitation
frequencies are extracted. Group velocity dispersion plot of the structure is also
evaluated numerically. The time reversal behaviour of the guided wave modes in
cylindrical shells is successfully demonstrated. Later experiments are conducted on
actual cylindrical shell hardware with PWTs attached to the outer surface and results
are compared with finite element predictions. The conducted experiments shown that
the time reversible behaviour of the guided wave modes predicted by the finite
element modelling procedure are exactly matching with the experimental results.
Similarly the group velocity dispersion plots for different conditions are also matching
well. This shows the robustness of the modern finite element packages to exactly
predict the behaviour of elastic wave propagation systems. The boundary reflection of
guided wave modes are suppressed by providing a pottery clay layer over the edges of
the experimental model. This situation is attempted for simulation using spring-
damper elements. A scheme is worked out which can detect the in-use damage and
predict its propagation, which can be used for condition based structural maintenance
of civil and aerospace structures. A comparison between the numerical modelling and
experimental studies are done and damage indices based on time reversed
reconstruction are given.
Keywords: Structural health monitoring; Cylindrical shells; Piezoelectric wafer
transducers and FE modelling.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: jayeshpkalappila@gmail.com 959

Jayesh and Bijudas
INTRODUCTION the length of the structure. The fine mesh is

provided to capture the dispersion
SHM of cylindrical shell structures is of large
characteristics of different wave components
practical importance due to extensive use of
with sufficient accuracy. A full transient
cylindrical shell structures in aerospace and
analysis with incremental time step of 0.25
civil applications. Since the introduction of
micro seconds is carried out. The manpower
light weight PWTs for SHM applications,
requirement for modeling and computational
mass penalty associated with the
infrastructure needed in a 2D FE analysis is
implementation of SHM systems for
much less compared to a 3D analysis for
aerospace applications are considerably
wave propagation studies where fine mesh
reduced. V Giurgiutiu et al (2004) introduced
and a large number of load sub steps are
the idea of embedded ultrasonic structural
necessary. But a full 3D FE analysis can
radar (EUSR) for damage detection in
simulate all the possible wave propagating
cylindrical shells. A Muc et al. (2011) gives a
modes in a single analysis and is also better
comparison between experimental and
for easy visualization. Multiple FE analyses
numerical studies on the propagation of
carried out with different values of central
elastic guided waves in cylindrical shells.
frequency ranging from 50 kHz to 300 kHz.
Gresil et al. (2012) gives detailed guidelines
The distributions of lateral displacement at
on finite element wave propagation problems.
different time instants of wave propagation
Park et al. (2007) attempted the full
for axisymmetric analyses are shown in
reconstruction of the time reversed signal in
Figure 2.
plates.
FINITE ELEMENT MODELING OF
WAVE PROPAGATION IN PLATES
AND CYLINDRICAL SHELLS
0.6 m diameter, 1.5 mm thick, 1.2 m long
cylindrical shell structure is modelled in
Ansys14.5 FEM software. The distance between
the PWTs modelled is kept as 0.3 m and the
bottom and top nodes of PWTs are modelled as
voltage coupled. The load input to the PWT is
given as a voltage signal. Since piezoelectric Figure 2.Lateral displacements at
element is used for modelling PWT, this voltage different time instants.
signal will be converted in to a varying
mechanical wave at the bottom of the PWT The axial displacements noticed at 2 nodes on
elements. The input signal is shown in Figure 1. outside and inner side of the cylinder are given in
Figure 3. It can be seen that the first mode
propagated is having same axial displacement
at both outside and inside surfaces, is a
signature of a symmetric mode. The second
propagated wave is having equal but opposite
displacement pattern showing it is an anti-
symmetric mode. They are termed as
Figure 1.Input voltage signal. L(0,2)mode and L(0,1) mode respectively
Four hexahedral elements across the and associated group velocities are estimated.
thickness are used for meshing throughout
960
Finite element simulation of PWT induced guided wave modes in isotropic cylindrical shells
output voltage with and without boundary clay

are shown in Figure 5.
The different possible wave propagation
paths and the simulated defects in the
tomography experiment are simulated using
2D FE analyses.
Figure 3.Axial displacement at the

receiver PWT location for axisymmetric
FE analysis; Red-outer side, Blue-inner
side.
Similarly FE analyses repeated for different
frequencies and for each case the group Figure 5.omparison of output voltage
velocity of primary longitudinal modes are signals with out and with pottery clay
estimated. FE analyses repeated with a plane covered the open end boundaries at 100
strain model. The wave propagation in kHz.
circumferential direction can be visualized 3D FE modelling and analyses attempted for all
from this model. The resultant displacements the above cases. Since the computation
noticed at different time instants are given in requirement for full 3D analyses is huge, it is
Figure4. attempted to do the analysis using a cyclic
symmetry approach by modelling a sector of the
cylindrical shell. But the symmetry considered
here is a mere assumption, and there is really no
symmetry of displacement or loading exists in a
cyclically symmetric fashion for this problem.
The output voltage noticed for FE analyses with
symmetric boundary conditions are shown in
Figure 6.
Figure 4.Resultant displacement variation

at different instants- 2D plane strain
analysis. Figure 6.Output voltage for 3D FE
The boundary reflections from the edges are a analysis.
major source of noise and it is experimentally The time reversal reconstruction in the paths
eliminated by placing pottery clay on these which passing through the defects is very poor
boundaries. To simulate this, spring damper and the correlation factor obtained is as less as 15
elements are attached to the edges and varying % compared to more than 99 % at other defect
the spring constant and damping constant, it is free locations. Figure 7 gives a comparison
able to suppress the boundary reflections. The between the original input signal and numerically
simulated time reversed output signal for a
961
Jayesh and Bijudas
typical propagation path which contains the CONCLUSIONS

defect.
 All the experimental wave mode
packets are matching with the 2D
finite element predictions.
 3D Finite element analysis on
cylindrical shell type structures is
attempted to simulate the wave
propagation paths and boundary
reflections.
 Full time reversal reconstruction by
Figure 7.Comparison between the time re compression is attempted in
numerically simulated TR output signal cylindrical shell type structures and
and original input signal over a successfully carried out numerically
propagation path which contains the and experimentally.
simulated defect.  Dispersion plot for the cylindrical
shell structure considered is plotted
EXPERIMENTAL VALIDATION using experimental evaluation and
compared with numerical predictions.
Wave propagation experiments are conducted on
Group velocities of different modes
an open sided AA8081 cylindrical shell having
are matching with predictions for all
dimensions same as that in the FE model. Agilent the frequencies considered.
33522A arbitrary wave form generator is used for
 Experimentally observed correlation
exciting the signal. The oscilloscope used is
factors for wave propagation paths
Agilent DSO X2004A with four channels. PWTs
used are 7 mm PWT 5A. The experimental setup
with simulated defects matching with
is shown in Figure 8. numerical predictions.
REFERENCES
Giurgiutiu V and L Yu 2004 Embedded
ultrasonic structural radar with
piezoelectric wafer active sensors for
damage detection in cylindrical shell
structures, AIAA.
Gresil M., Giurgiutiu V, Shen Y and Poddar
Figure 8.Experimental setup. B 2012 Guidelines for using the finite
element method for modelling guided
Group velocity dispersion curve plotted (as a Lamb wave propagation in SHM
function of frequency) and is shown in Figure 9. processes, 6th European Workshop on
It is clear from the dispersion plot that the group Structural Health Monitoring.
velocities estimated from experimental, and Muc Aand Stawiarski A2011 Modeling
numerical methods are closely matchin damage in cylindrical shells using
elastic wave based techniques, 18th
international conference on
composite materials.
Park H.W., Sohn H., Law K.H. and Farrar
C.R. 2007 Time reversal active
sensing for health monitoring of a
composite plate,Journal of sound and
vibration.
.
Figure 9.Group velocity dispersion plot.
962
ICCMS2016
A COMPUTER NUMERICAL SIMULATION STUDY BETWEEN

SYSTEM LEVEL AND COMPONENT LEVEL MODEL OF A SYSTEM
UNDER DESIGN
HARIRAM SHANMUGANATHAN*
Applications Engineer, Siemens Industry Software India, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Co-simulation between two different mathematical models is an interesting

topic in complex engineering system simulation. The co-simulation between system
level model and component level model is a perfect example. These mathematical
models are distinct in features such as the type of differential equations used to
represent its physics, the boundary conditions etc. In this study we use model-based
design methodology to develop a simulation model that can drive product
development and optimization environment of a physical system. We also incorporate
a 3-D computational fluid dynamics (CFD) model as one of its subsystem into the
system level model architecture. This is done by creating a co-simulation interface
between these two different modelling environments and exchange boundary
conditions via a specific interface which is also discussed. We then show the
interaction between different physical domains through system simulation together
with the detailed fluid flow and thermal analysis of the component through CFD.
Finally, the dynamic behaviour of the complete system and its temporal and spatial
scales is shown to be captured in more detail.
Keywords: Co-simulation; system simulation; CFD
INTRODUCTION component level modelling deals with fuel

flow from tank to combustion, external drag
Model based design and simulation is an
prediction, cooling loops, valve fluid motion,
important cycle in the design, development
stress distribution etc. System level models
and prediction of a mechatronic system. On
usually have algebraic and or differential
the other hand, a component level analysis
equations to solve for a complex physical
such as CFD will help in predicting the
system while computational fluid dynamic
detailed flow and thermal characteristics of
models have to solve for partial differential
these systems. When they are coupled by
equations. The way the initial and boundary
means of simulation techniques for e.g. co-
conditions are applied to these models are
simulation, we definitely combine the
different as well.
advantages from both the environments. For
instance, consider the modelling of a Several of ways of co-simulation between
complete airplane or car. System level two different model development software
modelling can take care of sizing of the environments are reported in Andersson,
vehicle, interaction between different (2013). One of the ways of coupling these
subsystems such as power plant, cabin, simulation models is reported in Viel, (2011)
cooling and electrical systems, environment as either static coupling for steady state
and tyre-road contact etc., whereas simulation or dynamic coupling for transient
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: hariram.s@siemens.com 963

simulation. The former is generally done by functionalities in OpenFOAM and then

parametric studies of the CFD model and creating an executable for the target
these results are used in system level models environment.
as look up tables obtained from these batch
results. The latter is a dynamic coupling
through dynamic exchange of variables
across a co-simulation interface. This kind of
coupling is considered as a quasi-static
coupling according to Andersson, (2013) and
this coupling method the basis of our current Figure1. Heat sink configuration
co-simulation study.
SYSTEM LEVEL MODEL
METHODOLOGY
This model based design approach involves
In this paper a simulation model is developed multi domain modelling and simulation using
to study a simple heat sink of a CPU cooling Amesim environment. We have two major
system as shown in Figure 1.A typical side subsystems (model units) that constitute the
inlet, side exit (SISE) heat sink configuration complete system, mechanical subsystem and
such as the one discussed in Cohen and heat sink subsystem. Mechanical subsystem
Iyengar, (2012) is considered in this study. consists of power supply unit, DC motor and
Our primary focus of this numerical model is pneumatic (air) fan. Further power supply
to account the phenomenon of forced air unit consists of DC electric supply with a
convection of the heat sink system and constant voltage source. For the DC motor,
temperature variation of the heat sink fins as motor torque as a function of speed curve is
a function of time. This is achieved by provided. Flow rate as a function of pressure
modelling major subsystems like mechanical drop curve is provided to the fan submodel
and electrical parameters that affect the and supplied with inlet and outlet boundary
system characteristics through model based conditions for air pressure and temperature.
design i.e. system level modelling. In this Heat sink subsystem consists of series of
system level model, the parameters of the thermal masses that represent the heat sink
subsystems such as motor, fan are modelled fin assembly. Each thermal mass model
with constant parameters or look up tables represents a heat sink fin and its function is
for the state variable calculations. In the CFD to sum all the heat exchanges at the boundary
model, the flow through the channel of the and calculates the final temperature based on
heat sink is considered for computation. The its specific heat capacity.
purpose of this model is to study two major
aspects: heat sink pressure drop also called COMPUTATIONAL FLUID
system resistance and heat sink thermal DYNAMICS MODEL
resistance. For the thermal resistance
Since the flow through each channel of the
calculations, the focus will be only on forced
heat sink will similar, only one channel is
convection and other phenomena such as
considered for computation and analysis. The
natural convection, radiation is neglected in
dimensions of this channel are given in terms
this study.
of width, height and length equal to 2mm,
Here, Amesim is used as the system level 25mm and 100 mm respectively. The channel
modelling software and for the CFD is then discretized into uniform hexahedral
modelling, OpenFOAM an open source C++ elements along x,y and z directions and the
package for solving continuum mechanics number of cells is 0.12 million in total.The
problems is used. The co-simulation is done bonundaries of this computational domain
by creating a user co-simulation interface are inlet, outlet, top and wal.This
block in Amesim and coupling the two solver computational domain which is a single
964
A Computer Numerical Simulation Study between System Level and Component Level Model of a System
Under Design
channel geometry between a pair of fins of and diffusive terms. Heat transfer
the heat sink assembly is shown in Figure2. correlations for forced air convection as
The boundary conditions for the pressure, defined in Teertstra et al., 2000 are also
velocity and temperature assigned to each incorporated into the solver code.
boundary face is given in Table 1. Here u, v
and w denote the components of velocity
along X, Y and Z coordinate axes
respectively. OpenFOAM solver employed is
icoFoam which is used to compute transient
incompressible laminar flow. This solver
code is further modified to additionally solve
Figure2.Computationalgeometry
for energy equation considering convective
Table 1. Boundary conditions for the CFD model
Boundary Pressure Velocity Temperature

u = v = 0; w
Inlet Zero gradient Atmospheric inlet
= varying
Outlet Atmospheric outlet zero gradient Zero gradient
u=v= w=
Wall Zero gradient Varying
0
Top Zero gradient v= 0 Zero gradient
The complete simulation model architecture

CO-SIMULATION INTERFACE
consisting of system level and the co-
In this co-simulation procedure, OpenFOAM simulation interface to interact with the CFD
acts as the master solver and Amesim acts as model as seen in Amesim sketch window is
the slave. The two solvers exchange shown in the below Figure 3.
boundary conditions and the two solutions
march in time like in a usual co-simulation
procedure as given by Viel, (2011). There is
always a lag of one simulation time step as a
result of this coupling. But this loss can be
made minimal by using smaller simulation
time steps. In the present model, fin
temperature and the forced air convection
velocity obtained from the system level
model is given as input to the CFD model.
While the CFD model calculates the heat
transfer rate and the pressure drop which is
given as inputs to the system level model.
The dynamic data exchange at specific time
intervals is achieved by a dedicated co-
simulation interface defined in the system
level model. Figure3.System level model
965
RESULTS mathematical models. In Amesim, this can be

done by simply choosing different submodel
This co-simulation model is run for 200 choices or by representing the submodel
seconds and time step used is 1 millisecond. characteristics with a C program in consistent
Figure4 shows the heat transfer rate with the software. In a similar manner,
calculated from CFD studies and Figure 5 OpenFOAM also offers to customize parts of
shows the heat sink fin and base temperatures the code to include necessary equations and
calculated from system level model. This empirical relations such as shown for heat
qualitative study correctly captures the transfer calculations.
evolving temperature of the heat sink which
eventually reaches outside air temperature in ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
the absence of heat sources.
The author wishes to thank Andre Jerome
and Arne Jansson, SISW France in Roanne
and MBSE Engineering Services team, SISW
India in Chennai for bringing and supporting
this into a productive work.
REFERENCES
Andersson C2013 A Software Framework for
Figure 4. Heat transfer from CFD model Implementation and Evaluation of Co-
Simulation Algorithms Licentiate
Theses in Mathematical Sciences
Faculty of Engineering- Lund
University.
Bar Cohen A and Iyengar M 2002 Design
and optimization of air-cooled heat sinks
for sustainable development
Components and Packaging
Technologies IEEE Transactions 25(4)
584-591.
Figure 5. Heat sink temperatures from Teertstra P Yovanovich N M and Culham J R
System model 2000 Analytical Forced Convection
Modelling of Plate Fin Heat Sinks
CONCLUSION Journal of Electronics Manufacturing
A qualitative study of the co-simulation 10(4) 253-261.
between system level and CFD models is Viel A 2011 Strong Coupling of Modelica
reported here. These studies have shown the System-Level Models with Detailed
advantages of coupling the different CFD Models for Transient Simulation of
simulation model environments for system Hydraulic Components in their
design and optimization environment. The Surrounding Environment Proceedings
subsystems modelled in this system level of the 8th International Modelica
model are quite simple. However, the Conference Technical University
complexity of these subsystems can be Dresden Germany March 2011.
increased by considering different
966
ICCMS2016
OPTIMIZATION OF ENGINE TIMING CHAIN SYSTEM OF

PASSENGER CAR
SHINDE A. P.
Veermata Jijabai Technological institute, Mumbai, India
Abstract: The factors affecting on engine timing chain system majorly affects the
working life of the engine. The main aim of this project is to reduce failure and
optimize the design of engine timing chain system. The factors like Chain speed,
chain pitch, camshaft and crankshaft revolutions and number of teeth on sprockets
includes in the design of the timing system. The optimization of the selected
parameters is carried out using statistical simulation, and increase life of the engine.
The minimum amount of vibration was achieved which led to smoothness of the
drive.
Keywords: Timing chain; Failures; Simulation; Factors; Optimize
INTRODUCTION other chain. The amount of noise generated

An important aspect of the machine is the by silent chain drive depends on many factors
design of the silent chain drive. Silent chain including sprocket size, speed, load,
designed to eliminate the evil effects causing lubrication, and drive support. A link belt
by stretching and to produce noiseless silent chain includes removable links joined
running. by interlocking tabs.
When the chain stretches and the pitch of the

chain increases, the lines ride on the teeth of
the sprocket wheel at a slightly increased
radius. This automatically make the small
change in the pitch, there is no reactive
sliding between the teeth of the invested
tooth chain and the sprocket wheel teeth.
When properly lubricated this chain given
disables service and runs very smoothly and
quickly.
Figure1.Inverted tooth chain
Silent chain or inverted tooth chain is a type
of chain with teeth formed on its links to According to Winder velocity profile with the
engage with the teeth on the sprockets as per varying loads, inverted tooth chain is an
figure 1. Silent chain drives are not truly optimum solution shown in figure 2.
silent. The links in silent chain drive, The timing is made by three chains driven by
however, engage with the sprocket teeth with the crankshaft toothed gear module:
little impact or sliding and as result a silent • Green chain is driving the camshafts.
chain produces less vibration and noise than The existing down gearing drives the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: abhijeet9396@gmail.com 967

Abhijeet Shinde
camshaft at half the rotation speed of the higher performance than the chains being
crankshafts. used up now. They also transfer the same
• Orange chain is driving the balance amount of torque with thinner chain.
shafts. The existing down gearing drives For optimum guiding and tension of then
the balance shafts at twice the rotation of chains several polyamide plastic guides and
the crankshaft. three tensioners have been used:
• Blue chain is driving the oil pump as per • A hydraulic tensioner is driving the
figure 3. camshafts. To remove it we need to lock
the tensioner piston by using special tool.
• A mechanical tensioner is driving the
balance shafts. The tensioner is screwed
onto the block and lubricated with oil. A
mechanical tensioner is driving the oil
pump. Special tool T40011 has to be
used for locking it.
• A timing rotor for the camshaft position
sensor is provided at each back end of
the intake and exhaust camshafts. The
Figure 2.Winder Velocity Profile
chain tensioner uses spring and oil
pressure to maintain proper tension at all
times.
The chain tensioner reduces noise generated
by the timing chain. The chain tensioner is
ratchet type with non-return mechanism. To
achieve excellent Serviceability, the chain
tensioner is constructed such that it can be
removed and installed from outside of the
timing chain cover.
FACTORS AFFECTING ON DESIGN

OF TIMING CHAIN SYSTEM
The major factors include in optimization of
timing chain system are change in Chain
speed, pitch, camshaft and crankshaft
revolutions and number of teeth on sprockets.
With the help of special tool ‘Sofa statistics’
how factors are affecting on design of timing
chain are shown below.
Figure 3.Engine timing chain system
CALCULATION
The chains used are of new design, metallic
Chain Length (L)
and maintenance free. These chains are more
noiseless, have greater flexibility and much
𝐿 =j∗p
968
Optimizing the Design of Engine Timing Chain System of Passenger Car
Linear regression details: Always look at the

Where, (j) is scalar plot when interpreting the linear
regression line. The results of graphical
𝑇1 +𝑇2 2∗𝑥 (𝑇2 −𝑇1 ) 2 𝑝 representation between chain length and
𝑗= + + �� ∗ � + 𝐶𝑐
2 𝑝 2∗𝜋 𝑥 number of teeth are shown below in table1.
Where,
𝑇1 = Number of teeth on driving sprocket
𝑇2 = Number of teeth on driven sprocket
𝑥 = centre distance between driver and driven
sprocket
𝑝 = pitch of the chain
𝐶𝑐 = centre distance between driven sprockets
Using formula of chain length graphical
representation of relation between Chain
length (L) and Number of teeth (𝑇1 ) is shown Figure 4. Graphical Representation
in figure 4. Between Chain Length and Number of
Teeth
Table1. Graph results

Graph outputs Results
(1) Two-tailed p value 0.001
(2) Pearson’s R statistic 1.0
(3) Degrees of freedom 12
(4) Slope 5.885
(5) Intercept 1225.406
Results help to choose optimum number of

RESULTS
teeth on driving sprocket. Similarly to find
Graph shows with the increasing number of out suitable values of number of teeth on
teeth the chain length also increases. As the camshaft sprocket and length of chain by
value of Pearson’s R statistic is one, hence varying the chain pitch, chain speed, driving
there is perfect positive correlation between and driven sprocket revolutions and number
chain length and number of teeth. Hence with of teeth.
the help of graph we can select chain length
which is suitable to transmit power efficiently CONCLUSION
and withstand under high revolutions. Optimization of engine timing chain system
If p is small, i.e. less than 0.01, or 0.001, we with selected design parameters which help
can assume the result is statistically to select most suitable design and further
significant hence there is a relationship reduces the failures of engine.
between chain length and number of teeth on
sprocket. REFERENCES
969
Abhijeet Shinde
Gopinath R 2014 Design of silent chain drive

Journal of scientific Research 20(5)
667-670
Mulik R V Prof. Joshi M M Dr. Gajjal S Y
Ramdasi S S and marathe N V 2014
Dynamic analysis of timing chain
system of a high speed three cylinder
diesel engine International journal of
Engineering and Science 4 21-25.
Self Study Programme 401 1.8 l TFSI 16v
118kW engine Architecture and Operation
970
ICCMS2016
NOVEL ALGORITHMS FOR SIMULATION OF FREE AND MOVING

BOUNDARY PROBLEMS
RANGARAJAN R.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IISc Bangalore, India.
Abstract: We present novel algorithms for the numerical simulation of free and
moving boundary problems using finite element methods. We address the key
challenge of how to accommodate evolving boundaries without resorting to expensive
remeshing operations. To this end, we first describe an algorithm that recovers
triangulations conforming to moving boundaries by merely perturbing vertices in a
given background mesh while retaining the same connectivity. The algorithm relies
on a novel parameterization of the boundary over select faces of the background mesh
and is guaranteed to be robust with nominal restrictions on the meshsize and angles of
the background mesh, and smoothness of the boundary. Noting that there are no
conformity requirements on the background mesh, an evolving domain can be
triangulated by immersing it in the same background mesh, at least until the boundary
develops new features. Second, we discuss a new optimization-based directional
vertex relaxation algorithm to iteratively improve the qualities of meshes by
perturbing its vertices along prescribed directions. A distinguishing feature of the
algorithm is that the quality of the mesh is guaranteed to improve with each vertex
perturbation. We demonstrate the performance of the proposed algorithms with
numerous applications, including luid structure interactions, phase transformations,
finite deformation nonlinear elasticity and quasi-static crack propagation.
Keywords: universal meshes; directional vertex relaxation; r-adaptivity.
INTRODUCTION velocity of the interface is governed by the

Free and moving boundary problems are heat flux transmitted across the interface
ubiquitous in engineering applications. They (Stefan condition). As the interface evolves
encompass problems of fluid-structure towards an equilibrium configuration, the
interactions, phase transformations, crack geometry of the solid and the liquid phases
propagation and even shape optimization. To change. Hence the diffusion equations have
illustrate the challenges involved in their to be solved over domains that change at
numerical simulation, consider the Stefan every instant. At the interface, which is a
problem as a model for melting from a solid moving codimension-1 manifold, we have to
to a liquid phase. The temperatures of each impose the melting temperature as a
phase is governed by the diffusion equation. constraints well as the Stefan condition to
At the interface between the two phases, the govern its evolution.
temperature equals the melting point. The It is evident that in addition to approximating
the temperature for a given position of the
_________________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rram@mecheng.iisc.ernet.in 971

Rangarajan R.
interface, we also need to approximate the interfaces/boundaries. Both choices entail

interface itself in the Stefan problem. This detailed analyses to prove convergence.
feature of having to approximate the
In contrast to the above approaches, we
geometry is emblematic of moving boundary consider instead the question of how to
problems, and a recurring challenge in “deform” a nonconforming background mesh
numerical simulations. to fit a given geometry. In essense, this
There is a large body of literature on methods transforms the problem of meshing a domain
devoted to the question of how to discretize to a question of defining mappings
evolving domains. A common approach (diffeomorphisms) frombackground to
consists in frequently remeshing the domain, boundary-fitting meshes. There is
accompanied by a suitable reinitialization of considerable choice in designing algorithms
state variables. Although straightforward to to construct such mappings; we outline ours
implement, the computational cost of in the following sections and an example is
remeshing renders this approach infeasible illustrated in Figure 1 for the case of a crack.
forlarge scale applications. Immersed However, the key challenge lies in discerning
boundary methods on the otherhand bypass when such algorithms are robust, i.e., in
the remeshing problem altogether and instead guaranteeing that the defined maps are indeed
reformulate the problem over a bijections. It is common knowledge that
nonconforming background mesh. The key heuristic perturbation algorithms can result in
questions in such methods concern the degenerate/inverted elements and can yield
approximations of the geometry over the tangled meshes. In contrast, with practically
background mesh and the imposed feasible sufficient conditions, we can
constraints over the resulting guarantee the robustness of the simple
algorithms described here.
Figure 1. Deforming a background mesh to conform to an immersed crack. The

algorithm discussed in Section 2 & 3 enable perturbing the same background mesh to
recover meshes conforming to a crack at each instant of its propagation.
UNIVERSAL MESHES
We explain an algorithm for mapping a
background mesh to a boundary-fitting one
with the aid of the example in Figure 2,
where a circular domain is immersed in a
nonconforming mesh of triangles. We
emphasize that the algorithm applies
verbatim to meshing three dimensional Figure 2.Conforming mesh recovery (2D)
domains immersed in nonconforming meshes
of tetrahedra.
972
Algorithms for Free and Moving Boundary Problems
i. Identify triangles with at least one vertex vicinity of the boundary are all acute angled.
inside the domain. These are the triangles Or even simpler, by adopting background
shaded in red. meshes with all acute-angled elements. We
ii. Map the bounding edges of the identified term a background mesh as a universal mesh
collection of elements (in black) onto the for the family of domains it can be used to
boundary of the domain, using the closest triangulate. The result proved in [2013] also
point projection. provides reasonable estimates for the
iii. Relax some of the vertices lying inside the refinement required in the background mesh
domain away from the boundary. depending on the curvatures and feature sizes
Deliberate choices lie behind the simplicity of the boundary. Such estimates are crucial in
of the algorithm. First is the choice of edges automating the algorithm– background
(faces in 3D) mapped onto the boundary. meshes can be refined as and where needed,
Second is the choice of the closest point by inspecting the details of the immersed
projection to map the chosen edges onto the boundary.
boundary. Observe that with these choices, it
is easy to construct pairs of background DIRECTIONAL VERTEX
meshes and domain boundaries for which the RELAXATION
above algorithm yields tangled meshes.
Indeed, the algorithm is not even well defined While the algorithm described in Section 2
when the closest point projection to the yields an admissible boundary-fitting mesh, it
boundary becomes multi-valued. is essential to improve the qualities of
perturbed elements for use in finite element
To guarantee the robustness of the algorithm, computations. Hence we seek an algorithm
it is imperative to concurrently restrict the that holds vertices along the boundary fixed
families of domains and background meshes. and perturbs some of the remaining ones to
In [2013], we rigorously demonstrated improve the qualities of elements in the
sufficient conditions for the closest point mesh. Here again, there is a plethora of
projection to parameterize the boundary over methods in the literature but few with any
the collection of identified edges: (a) the meaningful guarantees.
domain should be C2-regular, (b) the
background mesh should be sufficiently We propose an optimization-based algorithm
refined in the vicinity of the boundary, and that guarantees improvement in the quality of
(c) elements of the background mesh with the mesh with each vertex perturbation. First
precisely one vertex inside the domain should we identify the set of vertices to be relaxed
be strictly acute-angled. and prescribe a relaxation direction d(vi) for
each such vertex vi. In our case, we choose
Conditions (a) and (b) ensure that the closest vertices in a small neighborhood of the
point projection is well defined over the boundary and the relaxation direction to be
edges/faces chosen in the algorithm. along the local normal. Let {Ki}i denote the
Condition (c) is the crucial link between the set of elements incident at vi. Denote the
boundary and the background mesh. It plays quality of Ki when vi is perturbed to vi +
a key role in ensuring that the closest point d(vi) by Qi(.
projection is in fact a homeomorphism from i. Loop over the set of vertices being
the edges/faces chosen on the background relaxed
mesh to the boundary. It is worth ii. At each vertexvi, compute
emphasizing that condition (c) is easily
satisfied in pratice by ensuring for instance,
that elements of the background mesh in the iii. Perturb vi to vi + optd(vi)
973
Rangarajan R.
iv. Repeat until element qualities APPLICATIONS

converge.
Figure 3. Mesh improvement using 15

iterations of directional vertex relaxation
Figure 5. Comparison between quasi-

statically propagating crack paths
simulated using a fixed background mesh
and experimental observations.
REFERENCES
Rangarajan R Chiaramonte M Hunsweck M
Figure 4. Simulation of flow induced by a Shen Y Lew A 2015 Simulating
rotating propeller. curvilinear crack propagation in two
dimensions with universal meshes Int J.
The equations for Stokes flow are solved
Num. Meth. Engng. 102 632-670.
using meshes computed for the changing
fluid geometry while using a fixed Rangarajan R Lew A 2013 Analysis of a
background mesh. Such simulations are method to parameterize planar curves
challenging with Arbitrary Lagrangian- immersed in triangulationsSIAM J. on
Eulerian (ALE) methods due to the large Num. Anal. 511 392-1420.
mesh deformations required, but are easily Rangarajan R Lew A 2014 Universal Meshes
performed with universal meshes. A method for triangulating planar curves
The key computation in the algorithm is the immersed in nonconforming meshes Int. J.
resolution of the nonsmooth scalar max-min Num. Meth. Engng 98 236-264.
problem, for which we have identified robust
and efficient methods with no heuristics. At
the outset, it is not clear whether the
algorithm converges, and when it does, in
what sense the limiting mesh is optimal. We
have some useful results to address these
questions and will announce them in the near
future.
974
ICCMS2016
GA BASED THICKNESS OPTIMIZATION OF FLAT SLAB

RAJE S. S.* and DOIPHODE G. S.
Civil Engineering Department S.V.I.T., Vasad, Gujarat, India
Abstract: Flab slab optimization using genetic algorithm based on survival fitest is
worked out using various trial error based thickness criterion. An initiation of main
depth has been taken from two way shear based on IS 456-2002 using necessary
guidelines. Matlab has been extremely explored for prepraing GUI based
programming which enables us giving input deta at front end. Material property and
perticular corner column is selected for further design and optimization procedure.
The mathematical curve of shape profile for the flat slab is initiated mathematically
which gives corrolary idea of an angle section with prisamtic shape throughout. By
modifying proper mathematical order of curvature based criterion each thickness are
optimized with number of cycles. Safety and servicibililty of regular design criterion
also fully checked for each optimized depth. The prime criterion to optimize the
mimumum cost and weight design of optimied depth. The overall economy has been
observed during calculation, which provides numerous advatages in overall way.
Systematic combination of mathematical based thickness optimization with necessary
Matalab based GUI programming technique has beeen fully utilized in the present
work.
Keywords: Genetic Algorithm; Flats slab; Minimum Cost; Matlab.
INTRODUCTION detailing [Michalewicz and Schoenauer,

Optimum design of concrete structure is main 1996; Castilho and Lima,2007; Khedr,2007].
scenario of research for researchers and Cost optimization of reinforced cement
professional engineers. Optimization of RC concrete member can be termed as Discrete
structure differs from steel structure in way optimization as size of concrete member is
that minimum weight design is not as not continuous it is discrete eg. Number of
minimum cost design. The cost of reinforced bar can be 10 or 11 not 10.5 but limitation of
concrete structural system is dependent on these methods is that they are applicable to
number of factors, including the cost of simple structure as they need many complex
concrete, steel and workmanship including design variables so application to complex
formwork. Optimum design means most structure is tedious [Belegundu and
economical design satisfying codal Chandrupatla, 1999; Rao, 1996; Ozgan and
provisions of strength and serviceability. Ozturk, 2007].
Cost optimization of reinforced concrete Conventional and optimum designs with
structures depends on cross sectional fixed spans equal to l x = l y = 7.5 m,
dimensions of member and reinforcement respectively [Sahaba et al., 2005].
___________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: samruddha11@gmail.com 975

Raje and Doiphode
Most efficient design of simply supported A typical flat slab middle panel is considered
slab is obtained by using Genetic algorithm at and designed by Using Direct Design Method
l/d ratio =29-30, gives us the optimum cost as per IS 456:2000 and results are noted.
for our considerations.M20 and fy 500 to be Then optimization of drop panel and column
head is carried out using Genetic Algorithm
used for the optimum results. [Hatindera Singh1,
inbuilt function in MATLAB 2013R.
Hardeep Singh Rai2, Jagbir Singh3].
Optimization is carried out varying various
Maximum cost savings of 33.91% over the
parameters like finding most appropriate
conventional design is achieved in case of flat
slab with drop panel at M20 and fe415 [Kiran S. 1)Column spacing in X and Y direction.
Patil, N. G. Gore, P. J. Salunke]. 2) Column spacing in any of one direction.
GENETICALGORITHMAS 3) Column dimensions.

OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUE. 4) Slab depth.
John Holland (1975) defines that genetic ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
algorithm is an extremely similar
mathematical algorithm that transmutes a set Author heartily thanks following persons for
of distinct mathematical things (usually helping in research.
fixed-length character strings spotted after 1. Dr. D.P.Soni –(H.O.D. Civil Engineering
chromosome strings), each through a related Department S.V.I.T. Vasad).
fitness value, into a new population (i.e. the 2. Dr.R.B.Patel-(H.O.D. I.C. Department
next generation) by operations patterned after 3. S.V.I.T Vasad.
the Darwinian principle of reproduction and 4. Complete Civil Engineering Staff
survival of the fittest and after naturally S.V.I.T,
happening genetic operations. 5. Vasad.
6. My Family Members.
Genetic algorithm vary from old-style 7. My friend Vrunda Shah, Harshil Jani.
optimization algorithms in numerous means. 8. My All Class Mates and Friends
A few are listed here (Goldberg, 1989).
REFERENCES
Gupta R C and Sethia M R 1993 Computer
aided design of flat slab-column-
footing structure The Bridge and
Structural Engineering 23(1) 39-54.
Ronaldo B. Gomes and Paul E. Regan 1999
Punching Resistance of RC Flat Slabs
with Shear Reinforcement Journal of
Structural Engineering 125(6) 684-692.
Mehanny S S F Sobhy B M and Bakhoum M
Figure 1. Typical Flat slab Panel M 2008 Strength versus drift limitation
effects on code compliant seismic-
Various constraints considered are shear resistant flat slab buildings The Indian
stress constraints, Moments constraints. Concrete Journal 36(6) 1-2
RESEARCH OVER VIEW Kim H S and Lee D G 2005 Efficient
analysis of flat slab structures subjected
Designing flat slab by DDM as per IS to lateral loads Engineering Structures
456:2000 in Matlab2013R. 27 251–263.
976
GA Based Thickness Optimization of Flat Slab
Sahab M G Ashour A F and Toropov V V

2005 Cost optimisation of reinforced
concrete flat slab buildings Engineering
Subramanian N 2005 Evaluation and
enhancing the punching shear
resistance of flat slabs using HSC The
Indian Concrete Journal 79(5) 31-37.
977
ICCMS2016
OPTIMIZATION OF SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS BY

MINIMIZING THE ENTROPY GENERATION USING BAT
ALGORITHM
THARAKESHWAR T.K. *1, SEETHARAMU K.N.2, DURGA PRASAD B.3 and KUMAR B.4
1,4
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Siddaganga Institute of Technology, Tumkur Karnataka,
India.
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, PES University, Bangalore India.
3
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University, Anantapur–
Andhra Pradesh. India.
Abstract: In the present paper, the key objective optimization on shell and tube heat
exchanger is based on minimization of modified entropy generation. The optimization
is carried out by using bat algorithm. Bats are the only mammals with wings and their
behaviour is based on the echolocation, which is helpful for them to detect prey, avoid
obstacles, and locate their roosting crevices in the dark. The various design
parameters are tube length, tube diameter, pitch size, baffle spacing’s, number of
tubes. The results are reported and compared with previous literature. It is found that
irreversibility loss is decreased as the effectiveness increases due to which the total
cost decreases. Bat algorithm takes much less time to converge as the number of
iterations required is small.
Keywords: Bat algorithm; heat exchanger; entropy generation.
INTRODUCTION wall thickness. Smaller diameter tubes yield

A heat exchanger is a device that is used to higher heat transfer coefficients and so
transfer thermal energy between two or result in a compact heat exchanger [Caputo
more fluids, between a solid surface and a et al. 2008; Hadidi and Nazari 2013;
fluid or between solid particulates and a Masoud Asadi et al. 2014].
fluid at different temperatures. Expansion
MATHEMATICAL MODEL
joint is an important component in the case
of fixed tube-sheet exchanger for certain The heat exchanger surface area is given by
design conditions. The selection criteria for Q
S= (1)
a proper combination of these components U∆TLM F
depends upon the operation pressures,

where Q is the heat load, U is the overall
temperatures, thermal stress, corrosion heat transfer coefficient, ∆𝑇𝐿𝑀 is the
characteristics of fluids, fouling, clean logarithmic mean temperature difference, F
ability and cost. Because of the desired heat is the correction factor.
transfer in the heat exchanger take place The heat transfer rate is given by,
across the tube surface, the selection of tube
Q= ms cps (Tis - Tos ) = mt cpt (Tot - Tit ) (2)
geometrical variables is important from
thermal performance point of view. Tube 1
U= 1 d 1 (3)
size is specified by outside diameter and +Rfs + 0 ( Rft +h )
hs di t
______________________

Tharakeshwaret al.
Tube side Table 1. The operating and physical

𝑑
parameters of the STHE
𝑘𝑡 0.0677(𝑅𝑒𝑡 𝑃𝑟𝑡 𝐿𝑖 )1.33
ℎ𝑡 = [3.657 + 𝑑 ] (4)
𝑑𝑖 1+0.1𝑃𝑟𝑡 (𝑅𝑒𝑡 𝐿𝑖 )0.3 Case study
Parameter Shell side Tube side
( 𝑅𝑒𝑡 < 2300) (methanol) (sea water)
mass
Shell side 27.80 68.9
(𝑘𝑔⁄𝑠)
𝑘
1
𝜇𝑡 0.14
𝑇𝑖 (℃) 95 25
ℎ𝑠 = 0.36 𝑠 𝑅𝑒𝑠0.55 𝑃𝑟𝑠3 ( ) (5) 𝑇𝑜 (℃) 40 40
𝐷𝑒 𝜇𝑤
𝜌(𝑘𝑔⁄𝑚3 ) 750 995
Pressure drop and Objective function 𝐶𝑝 (𝑘𝐽⁄𝑘𝑔𝐾 ) 2.84 4.2
1 𝑚𝑡 𝑚𝑠 𝜇(𝑃𝑎𝑠) 0.00034 0.0008
P= ( ∆𝑃𝑡 + ∆𝑃𝑠 ) (6) k (W/m K) 0.19 0.59
𝑛 𝜌𝑡 𝜌𝑠
Rf (m2 k/W) 0.00033 0.0008
𝐶0 = 𝑃. 𝐶𝑒 . 𝐻 (7)
𝑦 𝑛0 𝐶
𝐶𝑜𝐷 = ∑𝑘=1 (1+𝑖)𝑘
(8) 0.4052
Modified entropy (Smod_ent)
𝐶𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 𝐶𝑖 + 𝐶𝑜𝑑 (9) 0.405
𝑆𝑔𝑒𝑛 Tos 0.4048

𝑆𝑚𝑜𝑑_𝑒𝑛𝑡 = (10)
𝑄 0.4046
Fmin = - (Smod_ent) (11) 0.4044
where(Smod_ent) is modified entropy 0.4042

generation number which is the objective 0.404
function for the case study. 𝐶𝑡𝑜𝑡 is total 20 40 60 80
costwhich includes capital investment(𝐶𝑖 ) , Effectiveness (%)
energy cost(𝐶𝑒 ), annual operating cost (𝐶𝑜 )
and total discounted operating cost (𝐶𝑜𝐷 ). Figure.1. Variation of modified entropy
generation number with effectiveness
0.4052
For a heat exchanger for seawater the heat
Modified Entropy (Smod_ent)
load is 0.415MW. This heat exchanger has 0.405

two tube side passages with triangle pitch
pattern and one shell side passage. 0.4048
From Figure.1, is seen that as the modified 0.4046

entropy generation number decreases the
effectiveness of STHE increases. The 0.4044
reduction of modified entropy ensures that
0.4042
there is increase in NTU which implies that
increasing in area. Hence cost of the heat 0.404
exchanger increases. This shows that the 40000 80000 120000
irreversibility loss is decreased. Total Cost (€)
Figure.2. Variation of modified entropy

generation number with total cost.
979
Optimization of Sell and Tube Heat Exchangers by Minimizing the Entropy Generation using Bat
Algorithm
Table 2.Parameters of the optimal shell and tube exchangers for a case study
BA
Original GA BBO CSA
Present
design [Caputo et al., 2008] [Hadidi et al., 2013] [Masoud et al., 2014]
work
Ds (m) 0.894 0.830 0.801 0.826 0.875
L (m) 4.830 3.379 2.040 2.332 1.52
B (m) 0.356 0.500 0.500 0.414 0.4681
do (m) 0.020 0.016 0.010 0.0151 0.017
Nt 918 1567 3587 1754 1325
ht (W/m2 K) 3812 3762 4314 6104 3516
𝛥Pt (Pa) 6251 4298 6156 4186 2986
hs (W/m2 K) 1573 1740 2197 2083 1667
𝛥Ps (Pa) 35789 13267 13799 22534 5981
U (W/m2 K) 615 660 755 848.2 637
S (m2) 278.6 262.8 229.95 209.1 272
Ci (€) 51,507 49,259 44,536 40,343 50604
Co (€/yr) 2111 947 984 1174 449
CoD (€) 12973 5818 6046 7281 2764
Ctot (€) 64480 55077 50582 47625 53369
ε (%) -- -- -- -- 54.69
Smod_ent -- -- -- -- 0.4042
modified entropy indicates that pumping

power becomes smaller and smaller due to
decrease in the mass flow rate of cold water.
The number iterations for convergence are
found to be less than10 iterations as shown
in Figure.3 and its computational time is
also less compared to other algorithms. The
results of BA are tabulated in Table 2 are
quite closely matching with other methods
in the literature. Hence, this algorithm can
be effectively applied for optimization
applications.
REFERENCES
Figure.3. Convergence of BA for the A C Caputo P M Pelagagge P Salini2008
case study Heat exchanger design based on
economic optimization Applied Thermal
The variation of total cost with the modified Engineering 28 1151-1159.
entropy generation number is complicated
Amin Hadidi Ali Nazari 2013 Design and
as shown in Figure.2, but the overall trend
economic optimization of shell-and-tube
is that the cost decreases with reduction in
heat exchangers using biogeography-
modified entropy. Further, the reduction of
980
Tharakeshwaret al.
based (BBO) algorithm Applied

Thermal Engineering 51 1263-1272.
D Q Kern Process Heat Transfer McGraw-
Hill New York 1950.
Masoud Asadi Yidan Song Bengt Sunden C
GongnanXie2014 Economic
optimization design of shell-and-tube
heat exchangers by a cuckoo-search-
algorithm Applied Thermal Engineering
73 1032-1040.
981
ICCMS2016
COMPUTATIONAL PERFORMANCE OF ISOGEOMETRIC ANALYSIS

IN EXTERIOR ACOUSTICS USING PERFECTLY MATCHED LAYER
DINACHANDRA M.* and RAJU SETHURAMAN
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Madras, India.
Abstract: Sound wave phenomena have found many applications in engineering.

Finite Element Method (FEM) is often used to simulate and study the phenomenon.
But the C0 basis in conventional FEM leads to dispersion error requiring more degrees
of freedom per wavelength to get a satisfactory accuracy. On the other hand,
Isogeometric Analysis (IGA) based on Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS)
has higher level of smoothness and lesser dispersion error. In this paper, a study on
the computational performance of IGA for exterior acoustics using Perfectly Matched
Layer (PML) domain truncation is presented. Two cases are considered viz. an
oscillating cylinder and scattering of plane wave by a rigid cylinder. It is observed that
IGA performs better than the conventional C0 FEM in both cases.
Keywords: Wave scattering; Helmholtz; NURBS; Isogeometric Analysis; PML.
INTRODUCTION found that they suffer from poor conditioning

of the system matrix. Laghrouche and Bettess
Sound wave propagation is used in many
(2000) extended PUFEM in exterior
engineering applications e.g. medical
acoustics for several applications and
technology, non-destructive testing etc. Due
reported better performance. Hughes et al
to the complex geometry, a numerical
(2005) proposed IGA which uses the same
solution is often sought. Conventional C0
geometric basis i.e. NURBS in modelling for
FEM is normally used for the analysis. The
analysis as well. The use of NURBS basis
domain is truncated for the simulation
removes the tedious part of meshing,
purpose as an infinite domain is impossible.
increases easeness in refining and polynomial
Several domain truncation methods are
degree elevation while maintaining the exact
available in literature. One of them is PML,
geometry. In doing so, a higher level of
in which the domain is enveloped by a layer
smoothness is achieved. Cottrell et al (2007)
which dampens the wave passing through it.
reported that IGA suffers lesser dispersion
Bermudez et al (Bermudez et. al. 2007) has
error than the C0 FEM. Simpson et al (2012)
proposed a PML and reported it to be
proposed Isogeometric based Boundary
efficient compared to the classical PMLs. It
Element Method in elastostatics and reported
has been reported in literature that FEM
better convergence to conventional Boundary
suffers from dispersion error requiring more
Element Method. Peake et al (2013) proposed
degrees of freedom to get a solution with
extended Isogeometric Boundary Element
satisfactory accuracy. Melenk and Babuška
Method and showed that better convergence
Melenk and Babuška, (1996) proposed
can be achieved by enriching the basis.
Partition of Unity Finite Element Method
Haijun et al (2015) extended IGA for interior
(PUFEM) with plane wave enrichments and
acoustics and observed higher accuracy per
observed better accuracies. But it is also
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dina63bms@gmail.com 982

Dinachandra and Sethuraman
degree of freedom than the classical FEM. In  1  2 

 and ˆ  2  2 i.e.
this paper, IGA is extended for exterior yˆ  y y xˆ yˆ
acoustics using PML domain truncation
1   1   1   1  
based on Bermudez (2007) and its     in PML
performance is compared to C0 FEM. In  x x   x x   y y   y y 
section 2, the weak formulation of Helmholtz domain.
equation using PML is shown. In section 3,
two numerical cases viz. an oscillating
cylinder and scattering of plane wave by a
rigid cylinder are considered. Finally,
accuracy and convergence of IGA over FEM
is reported.
METHODOLOGY
The governing equation in exterior acoustics
considering time harmonic is the Helmholtz
Figure 1. Domain truncation using PML
equation where a potential  is normally
considered as the scalar variable from which Problem: Find   C 2 (  D  A ) such
other variables of interest like pressure and that
velocity can be derived.
ˆ   k 2  0 in Ω
  C 2 ( D )    g
Problem: Find such that D
  k  0 in D
2
(1)   n   g
N
   g (2) ˆ  n 
  n     (5)
D
O  O
  n   g (3)    
 
N
O O

lim
r  n
 ik  O  
1
r
(4)  0
A
i
where  x  1   x  L ; y 
Equation (4) represents the Sommer field k a  x 
condition at ∞ which is required for
i
modelling only outgoing waves. As an 1  y  W and unity elsewhere.
infinite domain is not possible for k b  y 
computation purpose, a finite domain with an
 Finite Dimensional Weak Form:
artificial boundary O is considered as shown
Find  h such that  h  S h where S  S 
h
in figure 1. This is commonly known as mesh
truncation.   H        and  V where
1
D g
h h
The artificial boundary is enveloped by

V  V    H      0 , the integral
h 1
D
another domain (PML domain) with
 below holds
boundary A which dampens any wave
 ˆ  ˆ  d   k    d     gd 
h h 2 h h h
passing through it. This is achieved by N
h h
 1 
mapping the operator from  ,  y  h  h  x  h  h
xˆ  x x   
 x x x  y y y
d 
h
983
Computational Performance of Isogeometric Analysis in Exterior Acoustics Using PML
k 2   x y h h d     h gd  (6) in IGA is considered. The solutions obtained

 h N are compared to the analytical solutions
The trial and test function are approximated available. The directivity patterns of the real
as  h   i 1 Ripi and  h   i 1 Rip i where
dof dof part of the solution obtained from FEM
(=2296 dofs) and IGA(=2160 dofs) are also
Ri is the NURBS basis given as shown in figure 2a and 3a for both the cases.
wi N i p   A relative error norm is also used to measure
Ri p    (7)
 i 1 wi Ni p   the error over the domain, defined as
n
 h L 
 
Here, p is the degree of the piecewise Error  2 D
 L2   D 
parametric polynomial over  , i is the
w (10)
corresponding weights of the basis due to RADIATION FROM AN OSCILLATING
geometry and p   is the B-Spline basis
Ni  CYLINDER
defined over a non-decreasing set An unit cylinder cylinder oscillating in its
  0 , 1 , 2 ,..., i ,... , n p , n p 1 
given as
first mode is considered. The domain is
truncated at L  5 units along x-axis and
1 ,if  i , i+1 
Ni0   =  W  5 units along y-axis. The convergence
0 ,otherwise graph is shown in figure 2b.
  i
N ip     N ip 1   
i  n  i
i  n 1  
N ip 1   (8)
i  n 1  i 1
After simplifications, equation 6 is written as

Kij  k 2 M ij  j  Fi  (9)
where
 y Rip R jp  x Rip R jp
Kij   
 x x x  y x x
d
(a) Directivity along  N
h
M ij    x y Rip R jp d 
h
Fi  R gd 
p
i
N
NUMERICAL RESULTS
Two cases are considered to show the
performance. In all the cases, wave number,
𝑘 = 2 𝜋 is considered and quadratic (b) Convergence plot
polynomial is used. The mesh in both the Figure 2. Solution of an oscillating
cases is made by equal division along radial cylinder in first mode
direction and different divisions but even
SCATTERING OF PLANE WAVE BY A
distributions along θ-directions to achieve RIGID CYLINDER
same number of degrees of freedom in IGA
and FEM. A PML layer of thickness 1.5 units A plane wave travelling along x-axis is
with 10 elements in FEM and 10 knot spans incident on a rigid cylinder of unit radius.
The domain is truncated at L = 5 units along
984
Dinachandra and Sethuraman
x-axis and W=5 units along y-axis. The provides a better alternative to FEM for
convergence graph is shown in figure 3b. exterior acoustics problems.
It is observed that IGA solution is much REFERENCES
closer to the analytical solutions than FEM
solutions from figure 2a and 3a for a fixed Bermudez A Hervella-Nieto L Prieto A and
degrees of freedom with same polynomial Rodriguez R 2007 An optimal perfectly
degree. And moreover based on the matched layer with unbounded
convergence plot shown, it is observed that absorbing function for time-harmonic
higher regularity IGA convergence is better acoustic scattering problems Journal of
than conventional FEM. Computational Physics 223 469-488
Cottrell J A Reali A Bazilevs Y and Hughes
T J R 2006 Isogeometric analysis of
structural vibrations Comput. Methods
Appl. Mech. Engrg. 195 5257-5296
Haijun Wu Wenjing Ye and Weikang Jiang
2015 Isogeometric finite element
analysis of interior acoustic problems
Applied Acoustics 100 63-73
Hughes T J R Cottrell J A and Bazilevs Y
2005 Isogeometric analysis: CAD finite
(a) Directivity along  N elements NURBS exact geometry and
mesh refinement Comput. Methods
Laghrouche O and Bettess P 2000 Short
wave modelling using special finite
elements J. Comp. Acous. 8 189-210
Melenk J M and Babuška I 1996 The
partition of unity finite element method:
Basic theory and applications Comput.
Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg. 139 289-
314
(b) Convergence plot
Figure 3. Solution of scattering of a Peake M J Trevelyan J and Coates G 2015
plane wave by a rigid cylinder Extended isogeometric boundary
element method (XIBEM) for three-
CONCLUSION dimensional medium-wave acoustic
scattering problems Comput. Methods
The performance of IGA for exterior
acoustics is compared with conventional C 0
FEM. It is observed that the IGA gives better Simpson R N Bordas S P A Trevelyan J and
accuracy compared to FEM for the same Rabczuk T 2012 A two-dimensional
number of degrees of freedom in the isogeometric boundary element method
considered cases. The C p  k continuity of the for elastostatic analysis Comput.
NURBS basis where p and k are the degree Methods Appl. Mech. Engrg. 209-212
and knot multiplicity, makes it more efficient 87-100
and its effect can be seen more clearly in
highly oscillatory problems as considered in
this paper. It can be concluded that IGA
985
ICCMS2016
A STUDY ON THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE BASIS FUNCTIONS IN

DIFFERENTIAL QUADRATURE METHOD FOR ELASTO-STATIC
PROBLEMS
DURGA RAO S.S. * and SETHURAMAN R.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, IIT Madras, Chennai.
Abstract: Differential Quadrature Method (DQM) is used to solve the governing

differential equations of Elasto-static problems. Unlike in Finite Element Method
(FEM) where the isoparametric approach is commonly employed, in the present
study the geometry is defined by the basis functions viz. Lagrangian, Weighted
Lagrangian and Non Uniform Rational B-splines (NURBS) and the field variables
are represented by Localized Lagrangian and NURBS basis functions. Case studies
are considered to illustrate the convergence behaviour.
Keywords: DQM; NURBS; Localized Lagrangian; Weighted Lagrangian.
INTRODUCTION order of the Lagrangian polynomial in L-

DQM. Later, IGA collocation was developed
DQM was introduced (Bellman and Casti, (Auricchio et. al., 2012) in which NURBS
1971) in order to solve the partial differential (Piegl and Tiller, 1997) are used to represent
equations encountered in the field of the geometry and the field variables. The use
engineering. In DQM, the derivative is of NURBS basis enables to represent the
approximated by the weighted sum of complex geometries accurately. The theory
function values in the domain, as in integral and implementation of NURBS basis in
quadrature methods. These weights are DQM is cumbersome. In order to represent
determined by fitting a suitable trial functions the conic shapes accurately with Lagrangian
to the function values at chosen points in the polynomials, weights are given to the each
domain and successively differentiating the coordinate representing the geometry. These
trial functions at those points. The choice of weights are determined using the
the trial functions plays a key role in the transformation rule (Schillinger et. al., 2016).
convergence of the solution. Traditionally
DQM employs Lagrangian shape functions to In the present study, in order to know the
represent the geometry and approximate the effect of basis functions on the convergence
field variables. The use of Lagrangian basis behavior, the geometry is represented using
in DQM is limited due to the inaccurate three basis functions viz. Lagrangian,
representation of conic shapes and the global Weighted Lagrangian, NURBS and the
nature of Lagrangian basis, which makes the solution is approximated using two basis
polynomial order equal to the number of grid functions viz. Localized Lagrangian and
points. In order to overcome these limitations NURBS basis functions.
Localized Differential Quadrature Method
(L-DQM) was introduced to approximate the METHODOLOGY
solution [Zong and Lam, 2002] where the
function derivative depends on neighbouring DIFFERENTIAL QUADRATURE
influencing points. The number of METHOD (DQM)
neighbouring influencing points decides the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: satyadurgarao4@gmail.com 986

Durga Rao and Sethuraman
In DQM (Shu, 2000) the trial function is ( w)
expressed using function values chosen at Weighted Lagrangian basis, Li ( x) :

grid points in the domain as If w1 , w2 ,...., wN are the weights (Schillinger
N
f ( x) = ∑ ϕi ( x) f ( xi ) et. al., 2016) corresponding to the grid points
i =1 (1) x1 , x2 ,...., xN then the basis function of
where, φ i ’s are the basis functions. weighted Lagrangian basis at i th grid point is
given by
The weighting coefficients for the derivatives
are obtained by differentiating the basis wi Li ( x)
functions at discrete grid points. L(i w) ( x) = N (6)
df N dϕ ( x ) N ∑ wi Li ( x)
= ∑ f ( x j ) ∑ aij f ( x j )
i =1
= j i (2)
=dx x= x j 1 =dx j 1
i where, Li ( x) is the Lagrangian basis
where, a ij ’s are the first order weighting function.
coefficients. The weighting coefficients for
(l )
higher orders are obtained by successively Localized Lagrangian basis, Li ( x) :
differentiating the basis functions.
In localized Lagrangian basis, unlike
The application of DQM to two dimensional
problems is straight forward by selecting a Lagrangian basis, the basis functions of
rectangular grid points and approximating the degree ‘p’’ depends on only the neighbouring
function using function values at discrete grid ’p’ points on both sides. The formula for
points in two dimensional domain. localized Lagrangian basis at ith grid point is
N N
f ( x, y ) = ∑∑ ϕi ( x)ψ j ( y ) f ( xi , y j ) i + ( p /2)
x − xk
=i 1 =j 1 (3) L(i l ) ( x) = ∏
i −( p /2),k ≠i xi − xk
(7)
∂ N k=
f ( xi , y j ) = ∑ aijα f ( xi , y j )
∂α i =1 (4) Ri , p (t )
NURBS basis, :
NURBS are built from B-splines. A B-spline
where φi’s and ψi’s are the basis functions
basis of degree ’p’ is obtained from a knot
along x and y directions. α can be either x or
y. In order to solve the differential equations vector. The basis functions of degree ’p’ are
in irregular domain, the actual geometry is defined by cox-de Boor recursion formula as
mapped into a rectangular domain by the
1 if ti ≤ t < ti +1
suitable basis functions, the derivatives are N i ,0 (t ) =  (8)
calculated in parametric domain and then  0 otherwise
converted in to real domain.
 t − ti t −t
BASIS FUNCTIONS =N i , p (t )  N i , p−1 (t ) + i+ p+1 N (t )
 ti + p − ti ti + p+1 − ti +1 i+1, p+1
Lagrangian basis, Li ( x) : (9)
If x1 , x2 ,...., xN are the grid points in the

If w i ’s are the weights associated with
domain, the Lagrangian basis at the grid point coordinates, then the NURBS basis functions
xi is given by of degree ‘p’ at ith grid point are computed as
N
x − xk
Li ( x) = ∏
k 1,k ≠i xi − xk
=
(5)
987
A Study on the Behaviour of the Basis Functions in Differential Quadrature Method for Elasto-Static
Problems
wi N i , p (t ) ∂ 2u ∂ 2v ∂ 2u
Ri , p (t ) = (10) C1 + C + C =
0
∂x 2 ∂x∂y ∂y 2
n
∑w N
2 3
i i, p (t )
i =1 ∂ 2v ∂ 2u ∂ 2v
C3 + C + C =0
∂x 2 2
∂x∂y 3
∂y 2
BASIS FUNCTIONS USED FOR
E (1 −ν )
REPRESENTING GEOMETRY C1 = , (11)
(1 +ν )(1 − 2ν )
In DQM Lagrangian polynomials are used to E E
represent the geometry, but Lagrangian C2 = C3 = ,
2(1 +ν )(1 − 2ν ) 2(1 +ν )
polynomials can’t represent the conic shapes
exactly. On the other hand NURBS basis can u and v are the displacements along x and
represent the conic shapes exactly. Since the y directions, E and ν are the Young’s
theory and application of the NURBS basis is modulus and Poisson’s ratio which are taken
cumbersome, one can represent the conic as 21000 N/m2 and 0 respectively. P P
shapes exactly by Lagrangian polynomials by

attaching a weight to the actual coordinates, Boundary conditions:
these weights are derived from the weights of on AB, T x = 0, v = 0;
R R
the coordinates in NURBS basis by using a

transformation rule (Schillinger et. al., 2016). on BC, T x = 0, T y =0;
R R R R
on CD, u = 0, T y = 0;
BASIS FUNCTIONS USED FOR
R R
REPRESENTING SOLUTION on DA, T x = P cos(θ), T y = P sin(θ).

R R R R
To approximate the solution, the Localized where, T x and T y are the traction forces along
R R R R
Lagrangian and NURBS bases are used. The the x and y directions, P is the pressure
shape functions of the Localized Lagrangian
basis can be written explicitly and the applied on DA, θ is the angle made by the
derivatives are evaluated directly, whereas line joining centre and points along DA with
using NURBS basis functions, the derivative x -axis. The internal pressure (P) is 10 N/m2. P P
cannot be obtained explicitly. For Localized The inner radius (r 1 ) and outer radius (r 2 ) are R R R R
Lagrangian basis, the higher order derivatives taken as 10 mm and 40 mm respectively.

can be written as product of lower order
derivatives, which makes the finding higher
order coefficients in a recursive manner,
while in the case of NURBS, there is no
recursive relationship for obtaining higher
order derivatives.
CASE STUDY
An internally pressurized thick cylinder of

infinite length is chosen for the case study.
Due to the symmetry in the problem, only
one quarter of the section is solved and the
boundary conditions are applied as in
Figure.1. The governing differential
equations for plane strain case in the absence Figure.1 Quarter model showing Problem
of body forces, in terms of displacements are, geometry and boundary conditions.
988
Durga Rao and Sethuraman
convergence behaviour in DQM. Out of the

two basis functions chosen for representing
solution, NURBS basis gives fast
convergence in comparison to Localized
Lagrangian basis.
REFERENCES
Auricchio F Veiga L B Hughes T J R Reali A

and Sangalli G 2012 Isogeometric
Figure.2 Convergence Plot - The first tag collocation for elastostatics and explicit
is the geometry basis and the second tag dynamics Computer Methods in Applied
represents the solution basis. Mechanics and Engineering 2-14 249-
In order to quantify the error, relative error 252
norm, ratio of the L 2 norm of the error and L 2
R R R R
Bellman R and Casti J 1971 Differential
norm of the exact solution [Auricchio et. al., quadrature and long-term integration
2012] is taken as the error measure. The Journal of Mathematical Analysis and
convergence of the solution with six different Applications 34 235-238
cases is shown in Figure.2. From the results, Piegl L and Tiller W 1997 The NURBS Book
it is inferred that by fixing the basis functions
Springer Verlag Second Edition
for representing the solution and by varying
the basis functions for representing the Schillinger D Praneeth K R and Nguyen L H
geometry the convergence of the solution 2016 Lagrange extraction and projection
remains almost same. On the other hand by for spline basis functions: a direct link
fixing the basis functions for representing the between isogeometric and standard
geometry and varying the basis functions for nodal finite element formulations
representing the solution, the convergence of International Journal for Numerical
the solution is not same. For a relative error
Methods in Engineering
norm of -2.5 (log 10 scale) the number of grid
R R
points required along each direction for doi:10.1002/nme.5216.

NURBS basis is 20 while it is 40 for Shu C 2000 Differential quadrature and its
Localized Lagrangian basis. application in engineering Springer
Verlag
CONCLUSIONS Zong Z and Lam T Y 2002 A LDQ method
and its application to the 2D wave
The basis functions chosen for geometry does equation Computational Mechanics 29
not show much effect on the convergence of
382–391
solution, on the other hand the basis functions
chosen for solution plays a key role in the
989
ICCMS2016
MULTI-BLOCK STRUCTURED GRID GENERATION USING

ALGEBRAIC TECHNIQUES FOR COMPLEX ROCKET MODELS
KUMARAVEL G.* and UNNIKRISHNAN C.
Vikram Sarabhai Space Centre, India
Abstract: In the present work, algebraic methods are used to generate multi-block
structured grid over various rocket models viz. core alone rocket, rocket with two and
four fins, rocket with two, four and six Strapons. The grid data is written in
multiblock plot3d format so that the grid can be used by any standard commercial
CFD codes. Flow field visualization for one example case is also presented. It is
demonstrated that structured grid over any complex rocket models can be created
using algebraic techniques and plot3d output format.
Keywords: Rocket model; Fin; Strapon; Structured grid; Multi-block; Algebraic
techniques and Plot3d format.
INTRODUCTION The objective of the present work is to

In actual Computational Fluid Dynamics develop a stand-alone grid generation code
(CFD), about 50% of the time is spent in Grid for multi-body rocket models. In the present
generation and domain setting [Versteeg, work, structured wall aligned grid is
2007]. In fluid flow over a solid body, the developed over rocket models with fins/
presence of body is communicated to the strapons using algebraic techniques
flow only by means of pressure distribution [Unnikrishnan, 1996] and the output is
over the body in wall normal direction and written in multiblock plot3d format so that
shear distribution in tangential direction to any standard CFD package can import the
wall. Therefore, the cells are to be aligned to grid directly. Few example problems are
these directions near the wall for accurate discussed in the present article: - a typical
solution. Though there are user-friendly sounding rocket model with fins and a typical
codes using automatic grid generation launch vehicle model with Strapons.
techniques based on unstructured and Description of algebraic method is given in
Cartesian mesh types, only structured grid next section. Few example problems are
has the advantage of orthogonal/ near- discussed in third section, followed by
orthogonal properties and wall-aligned to conclusions.
capture the physics accurately. Besides, the
DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD
structured grid has the advantage of faster
convergence, compared to other grid types. The rocket configuration consists of various
For multi-body and complex models, grid is segments such as spherical cap, cone,
generated in multiple blocks such that all the cylinder, flare, boat-tail and etc. The wall
cells in each block can be represented by a boundary of the rocket model consists of
single two or three-dimensional array. such segments and every segment can be
represented by algebraic equations. The outer
domain is also described by an algebraic
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: gnanakumaravel@gmail.com 990

Kumaravel and Unnikrishnan
equation- circular, parabolic or rectangular. radial direction. Inner zone consists of 4

In algebraic method of grid generation, the blocks between the fins, as shown in Figure
area (two-dimensional) or volume (three- 2(b). The outer zone forms a ring over the
dimensional) enclosed by the boundaries are inner zone. The outflow boundary of zone 1
filled with set of parallel lines such that one meets the inflow boundary of 5 blocks of
set of lines is running in wall-normal or near second zone along with fin leading surfaces
wall-normal direction and other set is running (wall boundaries). Therefore, the outflow
parallel to the wall, near the wall and parallel boundary of first zone has to be split
to the far-field boundary at the far end. These accordingly and boundary conditions have to
lines are created using algebraic equations. be set manually. But, in most of the
The grid lines are clustered near the wall, commercial codes, this problem is avoided by
compression and expansion corners and splitting the first and third zones also in radial
geometry changes to capture the gradients of direction for a face-to-face match with zone
flow properties accurately. The clustering is 2. Therefore, there will be 4 additional blocks
done using geometric progression. It can be in each of the zones 1 and 3, corresponding to
seen that the structured grid generation is the 4 fins in zone 2. Altogether, there will be
carried out on a case-to-case basis of the wall 23 blocks.
boundary and outer boundary and therefore it A numerical simulation has been carried out
cannot be made automatic like in at M = 4, α = 13.50 using a commercial
unstructured or Cartesian grid types. Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) code
CFD++ with cubical k-ε turbulence model
DISCUSSIONS
[Kumaravel, 2012]. The convergence history
For a core-alone rocket, single block grid is of fluxes of mass, momentum, etc. are shown
sufficient. Inclusion of base region requires in Figure 3(a). It is seen that the residuals
additional block as shown in Figure 1. As converged to an order of 4 in 500 iterations.
seen in the above Figure, inclusion of base Grid independent study and validation studies
requires large domain in the base and huge using measured data are carried out in the
number of grids. Therefore, in most of the previous work mentioned above. The
computations focused on fore-body contours of Mach number and pressure over
aerodynamics, base is not included. the fins are shown in Figure 3(b) and 3(c)
With the inclusion of fins over the rocket, the respectively.
domain has to be divided into several blocks. Figure 4 shows a 5-block grid over a launch
A seven-block grid over a rocket with 4-fins vehicle model with 2 Strapons. The Strapons
and without base is shown in Figure 2. For are extended up to the base. The entire
grid generation over the above rocket, the domain is divided into multiple zones in axial
computational domain is divided into three and radial direction, as explained earlier. In
zones in axial direction: First zone contains the main paper, grid over launch vehicle
axi-symmetric domain from nose and up to model with 4, 6 and 8 Strapons will be
the leading edge of fin, second zone contains illustrated.
only fins and third zone contains axi-
Unlike automobile industries, rocket and
symmetric domain from trailing edge of fins
space industries work on very few
and up to the base. They are shown in
configurations and carry out repeated
different colours in Figure 2(a). The second
launches. Therefore, even though
zone is again divided into two sub-zones in
991
Multi-block structured grid generation using algebraic techniques for complex rocket models
development of structured grid over a Unnikrishnan C and Balu R 1996 An

configuration requires more time as algebraic grid generation technique for
compared to other automated grids, these multi body launch vehicle
grids once developed can be modified configurations Proceedings of fifth
international conference on numerical
quickly to adopt variation.
grid generation in computational fluid
dynamics 901-910, Mississippi State
CONCLUSIONS University 1996
In the present work, the algebraic method of Kumaravel G 2012 Investigation of
grid generation is discussed. Few example acceleration effects on rocket
problems of grid generation on rocket models aerodynamics Ph.D. Thesis Department
with fins/strapons are demonstrated. Even of Aerospace Engineering IIT Kanpur
though initial time spent on generating the Versteeg H K and Malalasekera W 2007 An
structured grid is more, the advantages of introduction to Computational fluid
structured grid over-compensate the dynamics, finite volume method,
advantages of automatic unstructured or Second Edition Printice Hall
Cartesian grid generation techniques.
REFERENCES
Figure 1. Rocket-1: Two-block grid over a core alone Rocket model (sounding
rocket) with base
(a) Front view showing 3 blocks (b) Enlarged sectional view across the
fins showing 4 blocks
Figure 2. Rocket-2: Seven-block grid over the Rocket model with 4 fins
992
Kumaravel and Unnikrishnan
(a) Convergence of Fluxes
(b) Mach contours and (c) Pressure contours over the fins
Figure 3. Numerical simulation of flow over the Rocket model at M = 4, α = 13.50
(a) Front view (b) Side view (showing one quarter)

Figure 4. Five-block grid over a Rocket model (launch vehicle) with 2 Strapons
993
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF FRICTION BETWEEN PUNCH & DIE ON SPRINGBACK IN

600 V BEND
SAYYAD V. M., PHALLE V. M., VISHWADEEP C. H., PATIL S. S.
Mechanical Engg. Dept. VJTI, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Bending is one of the important forming processes in stamping industry. It
is often accompanied by spring back effect. In this paper the effect on spring back is
studied considering the effect of friction between punch, die and specimen. The actual
idea came from a case study while testing the die & punch whether less, adequate or
excess lubrication is to be provided. To conduct physical testing it is tough to control
& put exact amount of friction between die & punch. For this reason only FEA is
carried out. Bilinear isotropic hardening material model is used so as to capture
accurate spring back effect & material behaviour while forming and to include strain
hardening effect. A study of springback shows more friction delays the springback
action as compared with no friction case.
Keywords: Springback; FEA; Bilinear isotropic hardening; Friction; V Bend.
INTRODUCTION considered including nonlinear work

hardening [Jaber Abu Qudeiri et.al, 2013].
Spring back is very serious problem in
the different parameters on spring-back in U-
components which are generally formed from
die bending of different materials with
sheet metal. In assembly of sheet metal
different sheet thickness and tip radius were
component they will need to be fitted with
studied by numerical simulations and
manual adjustment which is time consuming
compared with experimental results [Jaydeep
& tedious work. Spring back depends on
R. Shah et al, 2010]. The computer code
many factors such as thickness of component,
MARC was used to simulate the V-die
bending radius, material used etc. if material
bending process under plane-strain condition.
undergoes more stress than yield strength
It provides a model, which predicts the
then permanent deformation takes place but
precise final shape of products after
most of the time in bending stress induced in
unloading, in relation to the tensile properties
specimen is less than yield strength which
of the material, especially instantaneous
leads to spring back. To reduce spring back it
strain hardening parameters ().
is essential that material should be in plastic
range. Strain hardening plays an important GEOMETRY AND MATERIAL
role in spring back which is mostly neglected
in day to day practices to avoid complications Following is geometrical details of the part
involved in computation & to reduce which is considered under study. Sixty
computation time. degree angle bend is considered. The
thickness, length and width of the specimen
Have used elasto-plastic incremental finite kept constant as 3.2mm, 123mm and 40mm.
element computer code based on an updated outside radius of bend is also kept constant as
Lagrangian formulation to simulate the V-die 10mm. Material is HRPO Fe 410 Steel (hot
bending process of sheet metal under the rolled pickled and oiled).
plane-strain condition. Isotropic and normal
anisotropic material behaviour was
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: vasim.sayyad23@gmail.com 994

Sayyad V. M.*
The strain hardening curve obtained in Ansys

is shown below for HRPO Fe 410 material.
The curve is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 1. Geometry
BILINEAR ISOTROPIC HARDENING

AND FEA
Plasticity theory provides a mathematical
relationship that characterizes the Figure 3. Bilinear Isotropic Hardening
elastoplastic response of materials. Rate-
independent plasticity is characterized by the ANALYSIS DETAILS
irreversible straining that occurs in a material Very fine time steps are used to get more
once a certain level of stress is reached. The detailed process result. The coefficient of
plastic strains are assumed to develop friction is added between all the contacts. The
instantaneously, that is, independent of time. geometry (With BC’s) & mesh view are as
The material response in hyper elastic models follows
can be either isotropic or anisotropic, and it is
assumed to be isothermal. Because of this
assumption, the strain energy potentials are
expressed in terms of strain invariants.
Unless indicated otherwise, the hyper elastic
materials are also assumed to be nearly or
purely incompressible. Material thermal
expansion is also assumed to be isotropic.
Strain hardened component will show almost Figure 4. CAD Model and BC’s
negligible springback. This plasticity material
model is often used in large strain analyses.
The slope of the first segment in the curve is
equivalent to the Young's modulus of the
material while the slope of the second
segment is the tangent modulus. Typical
curve is shown in Figure. 1
Figure 5. CAD Model and BC’s
Boundary conditions (BC’s)

a) Fixed Support-
The die is fixed for all DOF’s i.e. three
rotations and three translations.
b) Displacement-
Figure 2. Bilinear Isotropic Hardening. The punch has 60mm downward
displacement in Y direction. Rests of the
995
Effect of Centre Distance Variation on Performance of Spur Gear
DOF’s are restricted to avoid rotation

and displacement of punch.
c) Displacement 2-
The specimen is restricted in Z direction
so as to avoid specimen come outside
from die. X and Y directions are kept
free.
SPRING BACK MEASUREMENT

Figure 6. At End of Stroke.
Four images are taken for frictionless contact
600 bend. Following method is adopted as it
is simple. When the spring back is happening
at that time the specimen is observed to be
resting on the two ends of die as shown in
figures below. In figure 1 the die punch &
specimen are all in contact and it is final step
of forward stroke. After reversing of the
punch the upper side of specimen is in
contact with punch. In figure 2 specimen
loses its contact with die at bend but still Figure 7. Punch Started Reverse Stroke.
rested on two bending ends of die. This
indicates that spring back is in progress. In
figure 3 punch loses contact with specimen
still specimen is in contact with die at ends. It
shows spring back is in progress. In figure 4
all three parts are without contact. It indicates
the completion of spring back effect. The
displacement between these stages gives the
amount of spring back occurred. Simple
CAD drawing is drawn so as to measure
change in angle due to vertical travel of the Figure 8. Punch and Specimen No
bend. From following drawing the change in Contact, But Contact with Die
angle is measured. It is observed that always
punch loses contact first with the specimen.
By using Query result function the
displacement is obtained. Difference is
(49.885-47.6) = 2.285mm this is vertical
travel of bend which is shown in Figure6 as
Y Axis. This shows that the frictionless
contact gives almost 5.100 springback angle.
For friction coefficients µ s = 0.125 and µ k = Figure 9. Specimen Completely Free.
0.1 (49.809-47.6) = 2.209mm. The spring
back angle obtained is reduced from 5.100 to RESULT AND DISCUSSION
4.930. Equivalent Stress verses time graph is
For friction coefficients µ s =0.225 and µ k =0.2 plotted. From graph it is clear that not even
(49.774-47.854) = 1.92mm. The spring back single case has crossed the yield limit of
angle obtained is reduced from 4.930 to material hence spring back will occur. In
4.290. frictionless case the material experience more
996
Sayyad V. M.*
stress during bending but it has almost zero Also the adequate lubrication has to be
residual stress which leads to more spring provided for avoiding surface scratches on
back. For friction µs = 0.125 the residual specimen. For these the contact friction needs
stress increased drastically which reduces to be considered while simulating spring back
spring back effect. For friction µs = 0.225 analysis. The different solvers use different
the residual stress increased slightly which methods for formulation of contact to
reduces spring back effect by small amount. simulate nonlinearity. It is highly
Same thing can be seen from Figure.10, 11 recommended to use appropriate coefficients
and 12. of friction to get correct prediction of spring
back in sheet metal components.
Figure 10. Friction Less Bending.
Figure 13. Stress V/S Time.
Figure 11. For Adequate Lubrication.
Figure 14. Strain V/S Time.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors express their deep gratitude to
Figure 12. For Insufficient Lubrication Mech. Engg. Dept. VJTI Mumbai-19 for the
The same thing is observed from strain V/S technical support and valuable guidance for
time graph. The increase in strain reduced the this research project.
springback action, which confirms the
analysis is correct. Also it is confirmed that REFERENCES
strain hardening reduces the springback Jaber Abu Qudeiri et.al. 2013 Effect of
effect. So it is recommended to use bilinear Material and Geometrical Parameters on
isotropic hardening material model. the Springback of Metallic Sheets Life
Science Journal 10(2)
CONCLUSION
Jaydeep Shah et al. 2010 Investigating
Great importance is to be given for Springback effect in U-Die Bending
simulating the springback analysis Process by varying different Parameters,
considering material model, and the Institute of Technology, Nirma
coefficient of friction between die and punch. University Ahmedabad
997
ICCMS2016
A COMPUTER SIMULATION MODEL FOR SMARTLY ACTUATED

DORSAL FIN WITH COMPLIANT MECHANISM AND SHAPE
MEMORY ALLOY
GOVINDARAJAN G.* and SHARMA R.
Department of Ocean Engineering, IIT Madras, Chennai (TN) India.
Abstract: This paper presents a computer simulation model for smartly actuated
dorsal fin with ‘Compliant Mechanism (CM)’ and ‘Shape Memory Alloy (SMA)’.
Our idea is to design dorsal fin with a SMA based actuator that is compact with
sufficient contracting force and stroke and the fin is conceived as a Euler beam.
Herein, we report our preliminary results of a cantilever beam with SMA and select
the Nickel-Titanium (Ni-Tinol) SMA for simulating the swimming motion of a fish.
Our presented results show that the proposed computer simulation model for smartly
actuated dorsal fin with CM and SMA i efficient in computing the essential
parameters from the fish assumed as a beam.
Keywords: Cantilever beam; Shape memory alloy; Compliant Mechanism;
Dorsal fin; Computer simulation.
INTRODUCTION way process: Way 1 - original to deformation

In recent times, the focus of engineering is and Way 2 - deformation to original. In the
slowly shifting towards developing new, Way 1, the SMA is deformed to a new shape
novel and innovative designs that are and in the Way 2 it recovers its original shape
imitations of the models, systems, and upon application of some form of energy, e.g.
elements of nature for the purpose of heating. In the applications related to higher
achieving high system efficiency, e.g. bio- temperatures, a shape is retained and it needs
mimetic inspired robotic fish for high to be re-deformed to start another cycle. A
propulsive efficiency and remarkable recent research work on the application of
manoeuvring characteristics. Our primary SMA for the design of an oscillatory
idea is to integrate a SMA into the Euler propulsion system can be found in Shinjo and
beam. The shape memory effect is a property Swain (2004) and our motivation is similar to
of specific materials to recover some of the them with the difference being that we focus
previous shapes or sizes when they are on SMA integrated with CM and apply the
subjected to a form of energy, e.g. idea to fish rather than exploring SMA in a
deformations at the low temperature (in their restricted setting of only oscillatory
martensitic phase) and upon exposure to propulsion system. Our aim is to investigate
higher temperature deformations disappear propulsion in modes of oscillation, un-
and it returns to its original shape prior to the adulation, and in combination of them.
deformation. This happens because certain The remaining of paper is organized: Section
materials can transform to and from 2 presents the computer simulation model,
martensite phase. The SMA follows a two- Section 3 reports the numerical example and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ggovindarajaniit@gmail.com 998

Govindarajan and Sharma
discussion, and finally Section 4 concludes contract or bend. The actuation unit generates
the paper with some identification about the forces and displacements within the
future scope of research. nano/micro/mili/centi ranges depending upon
the application. Furthermore, the actuators
COMPUTER SIMULATION MODEL can be arranged in series or parallel where
The method of actuation influences one actuation element can have
performance of beam and we focus on the multiplication of action quantities. In a
actuation process itself. Basically, the differentiated behaviour of elementary
actuation process converts an input energy actuation units and strategies of their
(i.e. electrical, thermal, magnetic, chemical excitation that are similar to those specific to
and optical, etc.) into output mechanical natural muscles. In SMA, below the
energy (i.e. motion, rotation, and vibration, transformation temperature (T < M f ), the
etc.) through actuator. The conversion dimension of SMA elements is x and after
depends upon the geometric characteristics of application of energy (e.g. heating) to ensure
the mechanisms and also on the material phase transformation temperature (T >A f ),
properties. The basic design process for SMA the dimension contracts to y. As the elements
is shown in Fig. 1. cool, they change automatically their shape to
the dimension and shape corresponding to
lower temperature. In the phase of
contraction, the active elements tend to bend
towards inside of the actuation unit. In
general, the SMA wires are initially in
martensitic state only and later they get
elongated through the processes of either
plastic or elastic or in a combination of them
deformations. If the SMA is heated well over
Figure 1. Basic design process for SMA the temperature of phase transformation, then
adapted from Follador et al. (2012).
the wires enter in austenitic state. In an
The primary mechanism of actuator is to austenitic state the volume of crystalline
ensure that there is enough force to network is much smaller and this causes them
initiate/oppose the extension/contraction to contract, i.e. approximately 5% of the
force. The force can be constant, an length even in condition of significant
increasing one or an antagonising one. In our opposition forces. We consider the dorsal fin
application, the anticipated advantages of as a beam as shown in Fig. 2.
SMA are: Small size, light weight, high
power to weight ratio, smooth and silent
operation, long life, and precise
controllability, etc. However, our SMA Figure 2. Conceptual description of
application has limitations also, e.g. slow dorsal fin as a beam with SMA.
response on heating/cooling, limited energy
efficiency and undesired non-linear Following Elahinia (2016) and Lagoudas
properties. An elementary linear and co-axial (2010), we note Equations (1-2) that are
actuator works on linear and axial applicable to the first half of beam (i.e. in the
contraction/extension and the system can austenitic phase) and the second half of beam
999
A Computer Simulation Model for Smartly Actuated Dorsal Fin with Compliant Mechanism and Shape
Memory Alloy
(i.e. in the martensitic phase) and with N/m2, b = 0.6 cm, and L1 / L2 =1.5 cm. The
reference to Fig. 2, they are: numerically computed results are listed in
d2 y Table 1.
Ea I = M = F ( x1 − L1 ) + M1 , (1)
dx 2 Table 1. Computed results of the
deflection of dorsal fin for Parts 1 and 2
dy x2
Ea I ==
V F ( 1 − L1 x1 ) + M1 x1 , (2) as a beam with SMA.
dx 2
Part Y1 (Simpson’s Y1 (Simpson’s
1   x1 L x2  M x 2 
3
=
Y1 F  − 1 + 1 1 , (3) 1 1/3 rule) 3/8 rule)
Ea I   6 2  2 
 
1.5 - 0.00625398 m - 0.00668145 m
for x1 = 0 < x < L1 . And for the second part: Part Y2 (Simpson’s Y2 (Simpson’s
d2 y
2 1/3 rule) 3/8 rule)
Em I = M= F ( x2 − L2 ) , (4)
dx 2 1.5 - 0.0049444 m - 0.0048953 m
dy x2
Em I = V= F ( 2 − L2 x2 ) , (5) We can observe from Table 1 that both rules
dx 2
of Simpson’s integration are resulting in
1   x2  closely matching results and they converge
3
Lx2
=Y2 F  − 1 2  , (6)
Ea I   6 2 
 closely. The results of Table 1 are

illuminating in a sense that they show that the
for M1 = − F * L2 , x2 = 0 < x < L2 . In Equations deflection in Part 2 – as expected - is lesser as
(1-6): E is the Young’s Modulus (N/m2), F compared to Part 1 because E2 / Em of 6.02E5
is the force (N), b is the width of dorsal fin N/m2 is higher than E1 / Ea of 4.5E5 N/m2, but
(m), L / L1 / L2 are the length parameter of the difference is not significant. This can
dorsal fin (m), Y / Y1 / Y2 is the deflection happen because of many reasons, e.g.
parameter of dorsal fin (m), M / M1 / M 2 = is moment is created by the force at free end
the moment parameter of beam (N-m), and I and the equivalent shear force through-out
is the area moment of inertia (m4). To ensure the beam; and they can create a situation
the compatibility between two parts, we where even when there is a difference in E
match deflection and slope at the interface. of the Parts 1 and 2, the loads affect the
Therefore, the total deflection through second deflections to a larger extent. Though our
half of the beam is proportional to the results are interesting they are only
deflection and the slope of the Part 1 and this preliminary in nature and we would like to
can result into: investigate the results reported in Table in-
detail with more variational data to arrive at
dy
Y2t = Y1 + Y2 + X2 . (7) suitable conclusions.
dx
Equations (3, 6, and 7) for the deflections are NUMERICAL EXAMPLE AND
solved numerically using Simpson’s rules of DISCUSSION
numerical integration. The deflection is As mentioned previously, the moment is
computed at the free end of beam. The results created by force at the free end of beam and
for SMA cantilever beam subjected to the the equivalent shear force remains constant
temperature gradient are computed for: F = through-out the beam. The variation in
1 N, E1 / Ea = 4.5E5 N/m2, E2 / Em = 6.02E5 temperature gradient as shown in Fig. 3
1000
Govindarajan and Sharma
allows different deflections by varying the been implanted in Euler beam and our
austenitic to martensitic transitions inside the process of design aims for application
length of the beam and hence the overall towards fish like propulsion system. In our
deflections are affected. application, the fish was conceived as an
Euler beam and in this paper we focused on
preliminary results that are reported with a
cantilever beam. Our presented results
showed that the proposed computer
simulation model for smartly actuated dorsal
fin with beam and shape memory alloy is
efficient in computing the essential
parameters from the fish assumed as a beam.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This research was supported by the internal
research grants of IIT Madras through
Figure 3. Computed results of
research scheme: OE12D004.
deformation of dorsal fin as a beam with
SMA under temperature gradient. TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS
*
In our work, we have assumed only the Trademark and copyright with Mathworks,
elastic behaviour. In reality the beam is Inc., USA and **Trademark and copyright
expected to deform plastically at least in the with Ansys, Inc., USA.
martensitic phase once the linear stress limit
is reached. The plastic deformation can create REFERENCES
a hinge type of behaviour at the transition Elahinia M Shape Memory Alloy Actuators:
point and this behaviour is expected to make Design, Fabrication and Experimental
the beam a suitable choice for an actuator Evaluation Wiley USA
system. The total deflection is controlled by Follador M M Cianchetti A Arienti and
the location of temperature gradient and force Laschi C 2012 A general method for the
applied. After the plastic deformations occur design and fabrication of shape memory
SMA beam will be subjected to the alloy active spring actuators Smart
temperatures above austenitic transition point Materials and Structures 21(11) 115029.
and the beam will recover its strain, i.e. up to Lagoudas D C (2010) Shape Memory Alloys:
approximately 4-5% and return to its original Modeling and Engineering Applications
position. This cycle can be repeated as many Springer
number of times as desired and our research Shinjo N and Swain G W 2004 Use of a
that will be reported later in some other shape memory alloy for the design of an
avenue will be built upon this idea. oscillatory propulsion system IEEE
Journal of Oceanic Engineering 29 750–
CONCLUSIONS 755
Our aim was to develop a simulation model
that is integrated with the design of a SMA
actuator that is compact with sufficient
contracting force and stroke. The SMA has
1001
ICCMS2016
COMPARATIVE STUDY OF METALLIC AND COMPOSITE BELLY FOR

BELLY LANDING OF A LIGHT TRANSPORT AIRCRAFT THROUGH FE
BASED SIMULATION
BANAKAR P.1 and AKSHATHA H T.2
1
Dept. of Civil Engineering, Manipal institute of technology, Manipal, Karnataka, India.
2
Centre for Civil Aircraft Design and Development, CSIR-National Aerospace Laboratories, Bengaluru,
Karnataka, India.
Abstract: Survivability of occupant during emergency condition is one of the

important factors to be accounted during aircraft structural design. Belly landing
(without the aid of landing gear) is one such case where the safety of the occupant
entirely depends on the energy absorption characteristic of the structure. Here an
effort is made to ascertain such a damage scenario and its implication through a FE
based crash simulation. The general purpose Finite Element solver ABAQUS has
been used as the analysis platform. The belly landing forms a case of non-linear
dynamic low velocity impact analysis considering the contact between the deformable
belly and a rigid ground surface. A comprehensive study was made by modelling the
belly skin as metal (AL 2024-T3) and composite (CFRP) separately and comparing
the deformation patterns, energy absorption and dissipation, acceleration loads etc.
during such impact. As an extended study composite skin with different ply
orientation were simulated and analysed. Based on the result comparison during
impact event, it was concluded that the composite belly design could be adopted over
metal with an advantage of structural weight reduction of 8% and continued safety of
occupant. This work has resulted in development of a methodology to simulate belly
landing of the present aircraft that can be used for analysis of various impact scenario.
Keywords: Crash Simulation, Belly Landing, Composite Belly, Impact analysis
INTRODUCTION their study, valid assumptions especially

The belly under consideration is a portion of during finite element (FE) modelling, like
a 14 seater light transport aircraft (LTA). The consideration of access panels, segment of
belly is a separate component attached to the model to be considered etc. have been
fuselage section which forms a sort of adopted.
shielding to the passenger cabin as shown in
METHODS AND MATERIALS
the figure 1.
The basic motivation for carrying out the
Variety of research Adams and Lankarani
present problem is the certification
(2003); Meng et al., (2009); Zhenyu has been
requirement by aviation regulatory body.
carried out on simulation of fuselage impact
Federal Aviation Regulations FAR 23.562
including experimental validation. Based on
gives the guidelines about the factors to be
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dacivilian@gmail.com 1002

Banakar and Akshatha
considered for the vertical drop deformable impactor (belly) and a rigid
test/simulation. As per the guidelines, the surface (ground/runway surface).
aircraft descend velocity of 9.41 ft/sec (2.87 100
m/sec) with a tail down angle of 60 was
80
chosen for belly impact simulation. This can
Accelerartion
be categorized as a low velocity transient 60
g, m/s2
analysis problem.The analysis was performed 40
in dynamic explicit environment using fuselage alone
20
general purpose FE solver ABAQUS. Belly+fuselage
0
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20
Time, sec
Figure 2: Acceleration vs time plots for

fuselge-alone and fuselge-belly assembly
Figure 1: LTA with a typical cross RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

sectional view. The analysis was carried out in steps. Intially
the fuselage and belly were analysed in
isolated condition. As the fuselge-alone
A small bay consisting of 3 bulkheads of model was found to yield exceptionally
fuselge and belly including 2 side by side higher acceleration level compared to the
seats were modeled using 2-D elements. The assembly as shown in the figure 2, it was
weight of seat and passenger as per FAR
concluded that the present fuselage would not
guideline was around ~90kg was applied as cater to the crashworthiness requirements,
mass on seat rails. Intial runs were made to hence was decided to continue with the
establish the analysis worthy, numerically assembly of fuselge and belly. One more
stable model with optimum mesh density,
important finding from the initial feasibility
time step and mass representation. study was the consideration of part of the
Modeling the material failure criterion is the model in place of whole model for analysis
most important step in impact studies as the resulting in the reduction of compuation time
impact loads are material strain rate and cost.
dependent. Models with different failure
criteria were carried out and finally Johnson
cook failure criterion was chosen for impact
with metal structure and Hashins damage
criterion was chosen for composite belly
impact analysis. The material modelling was
contained to damage initiation level.
The impact study is based on the contact
mechanics approach where the contact t=0.025sec t=0.05sec
stresses develop between the colliding bodies Figure 3: Deformation contours for
and dynamic response of the system is metal/composite skin
involved in assessing the impact. Here
general contact was given between the
1003
Comparative Study of Metallic and Composite Belly for Belly Landing of a Light Transport Aircraft
Through FE Based Simulation
Based on these considerations an assembly of The study was extended to comparison of

belly and fuselage at the potential impact composite belly with the different ply
region was modelled and analysed. The orientations. The different sequence of ply
kinetic and internal energy plots reveal that analysed were [45, -45, 0, 45, 0, -45, 45] and
the energy principle is satisfied for the [90, 45, 0, 45, 0, 45, 90] respectively. It was
present simulation. The main energy found that the ply orientation has an impact
absorption is through the local on the peak acceleration loads.
buckling/crippling of belly frames with a part
of belly skin reaching the plastic state after CONCLUSION
the` impact. The deformation patterns are An effort was made to simulate the belly
shown in figure 3 which clearly demonstrate landing of an LTA categorised under low
the presence of plastic hinge which helps in velocity impact problem using commercial
bending of belly and thus maintaining the FE software considering FAR 23 guidelines.
integrity of the fuselge thereby protecting the Several iterative study were made to address
occupants. Accelation loads were also found modelling issues. With the development of
to be within limits. numerically stable model, an impact study
Further study was conducted by replacing the carried involving the simulation and analysis
aluminum skin of the belly with the CFRP of the belly with metal and composite skin. It
skin of same thickness. Here the thickness of also included the parametric study involving
each ply was 0.15mm. Similar trend in various ply orientations of composite skin.
overall energy absorption was observed with Based on the results, it was concluded that
the lower plastic disscipation energy as the composite belly skin would obviously be
compared to metal. The comparison of a best candidate for the design considering
acceleration loads (figure 4) monitored near the weight reduction benefit of 8% compared
the seat support structure were of same order to metal skin without much altering overall
for both metal and composites suggesting that performance of the aircraft during vertical
the composite skin can be safely adopted for impact scenario. Also the ply orientation
the present configuration. Further the plays a significant role in acceleration loads
acceleration loads were found to be well obtained in this contact analysis. Hence once
within limit, that observed during seat should take care of these aspects while
qualification tests, thus confirming the belly design. In both cases the acceleration loads at
effectiveness for assessing crashworthiness of seat support structure were found to be within
the aircraft. seat qualification load limits for specific time
4 instance assuring the occupant safety.
Accelerartion g, m/s2
Through this exercise a workable platform

3
(model) was developed to study the impact
2 characteristic of the present aircraft.
metal
However, more iterative analysis like
1 composite
extended fuselage analysis is planned in next
0 phase of this work to validate the results
0.00 0.10 0.20 obtained.
Time, sec
Figure 4: Acceleration plot for metal and

composite belly skin models
1004
Banakar and Akshatha
REFERENCES Internet sources

Adams A and Lankarani H M 2003 A Meng F X Yang J L and Zhou Q 2009
modern aerospace modelling approach Improvement of crashworthiness
for evaluation of aircraft fuselage behaviour for simplified structural
crashworthiness International Journal of models of aircraft fuselage International
Crashworthiness 8(4) 401-413. Journal of Crashworthiness 14(1) 83-
97.
Dassault systems ABAQUS analysis user’s
manual 6.12 I-V. Zhenyu Feng Haolei Mou Jian Ren and
Tianchun Zou 2013 Crashworthiness
Federal aviation administration Federal Simulation Research of Fuselage
Aviation Regulations Part 23: Section with Composite Skin 3rd
Airworthiness Standards: Normal, International Symposium on Aircraft
Utility, Acrobatic and Commuter Airworthiness ISAA.
Category Airplanes
1005
ICCMS2016
HEAT TRANSFER ENHANCEMENT OF HEAT EXCHANGER USING

POROUS MEDIUM: A CFD BASED STUDY
SHARMA V.1*, MITTAL S.1, SHARMA N. K. 1, JAIN S. K2, SHARMA V. 3 and DADHICH M. 3
1
Global Institute of Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan.
2
Apex Institute of Engineering and Technology, Jaipur, Rajasthan
3
Grob Design Pvt. Ltd, Jaipur, Rajasthan.
Abstract: In recent years, the high cost of energy and material has led to a dramatic
endeavour for designing more efficient and economical heat exchange apparatuses. A
great deal of research has been developed to study the different heat transfer
enhancement techniques. The problem of dissipating high heat fluxes has received
much attention due to its importance in applications such as heat exchangers. The
porous materials are often characterised by its porosity which are used in heat
exchangers to increase their performance and the heat transfer rate due to its wide
contact area and tortuous shape. The metal chips and concrete are taken as porous
material for study. The experimental studies on the enhancement of heat transfer using
a porous medium are presented. The system incorporates a cylindrical cavity (shell)
with inlet and outlet ports that are thermally insulated and five tubes containing hot
water and cold water flows in shell. Performance tests under different mass flow rate
are carried out to study the effect of porosity on heat transfer enhancement. Both
Experiment and CFD are carried out to study the effect of heat transfer enhancement
and also the results are comparing with the simple heat exchanger.
Keywords: Porous Medium; CFD; porosity; heat exchanger; mass flow rate.
INTRODUCTION Socket was found to optimize the

configurations of porous insertin a tube for
Heat Exchanger is process equipment
heat transfer enhancement [Zhang-Jing
designed for the effective transfer of heat.
Zheng 2015]. The field synergy principle and
There are many ways to enhance heat transfer
the entrain theory were proposed for the flow
such as using fins, baffles, twisted tapes, coil
and the heat transfer in a clear channel and
tubes, high conductive particles, etc.[B.K.P.
the optimization equation was deduced based
Ary 2012, S. Eiamsa-ard 2013, D.G.
on the variation method [Y.L. He 2014].
Prabhanjan 2002, S.S. Sonawane 2013].The
Similarly, the constructed theory was also
porous materials are often characterised by its
proposed for the optimization of flow and
porosity which are used in heat exchangers to
heat transfer in a porous media [Bejan 2004].
increase their performance and the heat
An analytical solution was presented for the
transfer rate due to its wide contact area and
flow in annulus configuration partially filled
tortuous shape Insertion of porous medium in
with porous medium [S. Chikh 1995]. The
internal flows is also an efficient method for
flow inside the porous domain was
increasing the heat transfer enhancement.
numerically investigated using Darcy-
Study of new optimization method coupling
Brinkman-Forchheimer for the forced
genetic algorithm (GA) and computational
convection in the developing range of parallel
fluid dynamics (CFD) based on Windows
plate ducts [M.K. Alkam 2001]. Adoption of
*Author for Correspondence E-mail: vineetsharma817@gmail.com 1006

Sharma et al.
new axis symmetric lattice Boltzmann model are to be filled in heat exchanger to create
is used to solve a unified governing equation porous zone. The water is allowed to flow
which is applicable to both fluid and the through hot tubes at inlet temperature of
porous regions [F.M. Rong 2010]. 323K. The thermal properties of aluminium
chips and concrete are showed in Table 1.
SIMULATION MODEL
Thesimulation is performed on three Table 1. Thermal properties of Aluminium
configurations. The first is simple heat Chips and Concrete
exchanger, second contains aluminium chips
Properties Aluminum Concrete
as a porous media and third contains concrete
Chips
as a porous medium in a simple counter flow
Density (kg/m3) 2719 2300
heat exchanger. The model consists of a
cylindrical cavity with inlet and outlet Specific heat (J Kg/k) 871 750
thermally insulated ports which are
considered as shell with five tubes using Thermal conductivity 202.4 1.28
scale ratio. Mild steel cylindrical cavity of (W/m k)
length 2feet and diameter 6inches. There are
5 steel tubes of length 2feet and 4inches and
ENERGY EQUATIONS
diameter ½ inches. The simulation model
also consists of baffles for greater heat Heat loss by the hot water is equal to the heat
exchange. gained by the cold water, which is given by
following equation (1)
Q = m. Cp ( Th1 – Th2 ) (1)

.
Where m is the mass flow rate, C p is the
specific heat of water, T h1 isthe inlet
temperature of hot water and T h2 is the outlet
temperature of hot water.
The bulk temperature of water for the
calculation of heat transfer coefficient is
Figure 1. Simulation Model of Heat
Exchanger T +T
𝑇𝑏𝑢𝑙𝑘 = h1 h2 (2)
2
R
The heat transfer coefficient is determined by

using
𝑄
ℎ= (3)
A(Twall – Tbulk )
Where T wall is temperature of hot tube, T bulk

is bulk temperature and A is total convective
heat transfer area.
Figure 2 Design Layout of Heat The viscous resistance factor is determined

Exchanger by using
1 150(1−𝜀)2
𝐶1 = = (4)
𝐾 𝑑𝑝 2 𝜀 3
POROUS MEDIUM PROPERTIES
The comparative study is performed for the Where d p is the pore size and 𝜀 is the
two types of porous mediums one is porosity.
aluminium chips and other is concretes that
1007
Heat Transfer Enhancement using Porous Medium: A CFD Based Study
The inertial resistance factor is determined by the range of 90-150 and 3000-6000
using respectively, which shows the turbulent mode
of flow of fluid.
3.5(1−𝜀)
𝐶2 = (5)
𝑑𝑝 𝜀 3
The Reynolds number and Nusselt number is
calculated by using
ρVm Dh
𝑅𝑒 = (6)
µ
h.Dh
𝑁𝑢 = (7)
k
Where D h is hydraulic diameter,V m is mean Figure 3. Variation in Nusselt numbers
velocity of water, ρ is density of water, µ is with Reynolds numbers
dynamic viscosity and k is thermal The Nusselt number is highest for concrete
conductivity of water. medium and minimum for the simple heat
exchanger at the same value of Reynolds
CFD MODELLING AND number.
OBSERVATIONS
In the present study the simulations are
performed on commercial software ANSYS
FLUENT and three dimensional calculations
of steady state mass, momentum and energy
equations to solve the total heat transfer
confident for counter flow porous medium
heat exchanger. A shell and tube type of heat
exchanger is considered as simulation model
with five numbers of tubes. The whole Figure 4. Variation in outlet temperature
domain of simulation model of Counter flow of fluid with. Reynolds number
heat exchanger is discredited into 3000000 to
500000 numbers of elements and 100000- Figure 4 shows that Reynolds number
175000 numbers of nodes with fine relevance depends on the mass flow rate as mass flow
centre. The fluid (water) is allowed to flow rate increase, increases the Reynolds number.
through tubes and shell for simple heat As mass flow rate of water increase, increase
exchanger and heat exchanger with porous the temperature difference. Maximum
mediums. The inlet of fluid is considered as temperature difference occurs at concrete as a
mass flow inlet at atmospheric constant porous medium in shell.
temperature and pressure conditions. The
mass flow rate varies from 0.034 to 0.056
kg/sec per tube at the temperature 323K and
mass flow rate for shell is to be constant as
0.25 kg/sec in a normal direction to the
boundary for all mass flow rates in tubes. The
outlet is described as the pressure outlet. The
porosity of aluminium chips and concrete
medium is 0.7. The fluid is allowed to flow Figure 5. Variation in heat transfer
through heat exchanger for 30 minutes. coefficient with. Reynolds number
Figure 3 shows that increment in Nusselt Figure 5 shows that variation in heat Transfer
numbers with respect to Reynolds number or Rate at different Reynolds number. Heat
increasing mass flow rate. The Nusselt transfer coefficient is proportional to
numbers and Reynolds numbers are found in temperature difference. As reynolds number
1008
Sharma et al.
increase, increase the temperature difference length Appl. Therm. Eng. 54(1) 289–
and also increase the heat transfer coefficient. 309.
Maximum heat transfer coefficient (h) is He Y L Tao W Q 2014 Numerical studies on
occurs concrete as a porous medium in shell. the inherent interrelationship between
field synergy principle and entransy
CONCLUSION
dissipation extreme principle for
The result yields the following conclusion: enhancing convective heat transfer Int.
1. Increase the mass flow rate, increase J. Heat Mass Transfer 74 196–205.
the temperature, minimum temperature Prabhanjan D G Raghavan G S V Rennie T J
is desired and minimum temperature 2002 Comparison of heat transfer rate
occurs in the case of concrete as a between a straight tube heat exchanger
porous medium. and a helically coiled heat exchanger,
2. Increase the mass flow rate, increase Int. Commun. Heat Mass Transfer 29(2)
the Reynolds number. Increase the 185–191.
Reynolds number the heat transfer
Rong F M Guo Z L Chai Z H Shi B C 2010
coefficient and maximum heat transfer
A lattice Boltzmann model for
coefficient is desired. In case of
axisymmetric thermal flows through
concrete as a porous medium, obtains
porous media, Int. J. Heat Mass
maximum heat transfer coefficient.
Transfer 53 5519–5527.
REFERENCES Sonawane S S Khedkar R S Wasewar K L
2013 Study on concentric tube heat
Alkam M K Al-Nimr M A Hamdan M O
exchanger heat transfer performance
2001 Enhancing heat transfer in
using Al2O3–water based nanofluids
parallelplate channels by using porous
Int. Commun. Heat Mass Transfer 49
insertsInt. J. Heat Mass Transfer 44(5)
60–68.
931–938.
Zhang-Jing Zheng Ming-Jia Li Ya-Ling He
Ary B K P Lee M S Ahn S W Lee D H 2012
2015 Optimization of porous insert
The effect of the inclined perforated
configurations for heat transfer
baffle on heat transfer and flow patterns
enhancement in tubes based on genetic
in the channel Int. Commun. Heat Mass
algorithm and CFD International
Transfer 39(10) 1578–1583.
Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 87
Bejan 2004 Designed porous media: maximal 376–379.
heat transfer density at decreasing
length scalesInt. J. Heat Mass Transfer
47(14) 3073–3083.
Chikh S Boumedien A Bouhadef K Lauriat G
1995 Analytical solution of non-
Darcian forced convection in an annular
duct partially filled with a porous
medium Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 38
1543–1551.
Eiamsa-ard S Somkleang P Nuntadusit C
Thianpong C 2013 Heat transfer
enhancement in tube by inserting
uniform/non-uniform twisted-tapes with
alternate axes: effect of rotated-axis
1009
ICCMS2016
SIMULATION OF ADVECTIVE-DISPERSIVE TRANSPORT IN A

POROUS MEDIUM USING THE OPERATOR SPLITTING TECHNIQUE
TINESH PATHANIA
Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Assam, India.
Abstract: In the present study, the operator splitting technique (OST) is used to split
the advective-dispersive transport equation (ADE) of contaminant transport in a
porous space and the resulting equations are then solved using the finite difference
method. The entitled technique is featured with treating the advective and dispersive
part of the transport equation separately. The advective part is solved by MacCormack
scheme and the solution so obtained is used while solving dispersive part implicitly at
the respective time step and spatial grid to get the final concentration. For the one
dimensional equation, the numerical solution obtained by implementing this scheme is
compared with an available analytical solution and solution by Crank Nicolson
method and for the two dimensional transport equation, only with the solution
obtained by the Alternate Direction Implicit (ADI) scheme. The OST technique
approximately gives the same solution as the other schemes with different initial and
boundary conditions. The study shows that OST method can be employed to predict
the contaminant distribution in homogeneous soils under both steady and transient
conditions. This method has been found to be capable of providing the solution for the
tested transport problems. However, for the general applicability of this technique for
the various transport situations, the stability criteria need to be developed.
Keywords: Advective-dispersive transport; Operator splitting technique; Finite
difference method; MacCormack scheme.
INTRODUCTION The contaminant transport modelling in a

porous medium can be done either by
The Mathematical models play an important
implementing numerical schemes or
role in the proper planning, management and
analytical approaches to the ADE. In order to
monitoring of a groundwater system. A
mimic the natural phenomena, the analytical
mathematical model represented by a set of
methods give the exact solution. Due to their
differential equation based on some
limitation of handling the complex boundary
conservative laws of nature is generally used
conditions, numerical schemes do well to
for simulating the real field situation [Wang
give the approximate numerical solutions for
and Anderson, 1982]. ADE is widely used in
such environments. Obtaining the solution of
the study of movement of contaminant
the ADE in its various forms has been a
transport in streams and rivers and in porous
challenging task from past many decades and
formations [Fischer et al., 1979; Deng et al.,
different researchers have adopted different
2004].
techniques towards achieving this end [Batu,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tineshpathania07118@gmail.com 1010

Tinesh Pathania
1990; Cleary, 1973; Dehghan, 2004; 𝜕𝐶 𝜕𝐶 𝜕𝐶 𝜕2𝐶 𝜕2𝐶

+𝑢 +𝑣 = 𝐷𝑥 2 + 𝐷𝑦 2
Guerrero et al., 2009; Huang et al., 1997; 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
Hundsdorfer, 2003; Leij, 1990; Linstorm and −𝜆𝐶 + µ(𝑥, 𝑦) (1)
Boersma, 1989; Ogata, 1961; Genuchten,
Using the operator splitting technique, Eq.
1981]. Kaluarachchi and Morshed (1995)
(1) can be written into two separate equations
performed the critical assessment of the
as under
operator splitting technique for solving the
advection-dispersion reaction equation 𝜕𝐶 𝜕𝐶 𝜕𝐶
+𝑢 +𝑣 = 𝑟� −𝜆𝐶 + µ(𝑥, 𝑦)� , (2)
(ADRE).Deng et al. (2004) developed a 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
numerical scheme along with its stability 0≤ 𝑟 ≤1
criteria for the one-dimensional fractional and
advection-dispersion (FRADE) derived by 𝜕𝐶 𝜕2𝐶 𝜕2𝐶
− 𝐷𝑥 2 − 𝐷𝑦 2 = (1 − 𝑟)(−𝜆𝐶
revising the Fick’s first law. Their objective 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
was to develop a physical based fractional + µ(𝑥, 𝑦)) (3)
order advection-dispersion equation and an where Eq. (2) is for the simulation of the
efficient numerical scheme for the equation advective and Eq. (3) is for the simulation of
so that the non–Fickian dispersion processes the dispersive part of the full ADE given by
in various fields including natural rivers can Eq. (1). The numerical solution of Eqs. (2)
be estimated with precision. Verma et al. and (3) from one step to the next can be done
(2006) made an attempt to solve the ADE in two steps and in each step the solution
using OST and checked the performance of obtained from the advective part vide
this coupled solution (MacCormack scheme application of the MacCormack scheme
for the advective part and an implicit for the isused in solving the dispersive portion of the
dispersive part) for different combination of differential equation in an implicit way.
Courant and Peclet numbers. Thus, for a typical interior node (𝑖, 𝑗), the
In the present study, the numerical procedure predictor and corrector steps of the
(OST) of Verma et al.’s (2006) is extended to MacCormack scheme for an irregular mesh
obtain solutions to the generalized form of can be written between times 𝑡 and 𝑡 + 𝛥𝑡/
the one-and two-dimensional ADE for 2as
homogeneous and anisotropic porous 𝜕𝐶 𝑛 𝛥𝑡
formations. The ADE with source/sink and (𝐶̅ )𝑛+1/2
𝑖,𝑗 = 𝑛
𝐶𝑖,𝑗 + � � , (4)
𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 2
decay terms has been also solved by the OST
where
method for both Dirichlet and Neumann 𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 𝑛
𝜕𝐶 𝑛 𝐶𝑖+1,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑖,𝑗 𝐶𝑖,𝑗+1 − 𝐶𝑖,𝑗
conditions at the boundaries. The validity of � � = −𝑢 −𝑣
𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 𝛼2 𝛥𝑥 𝛽2 𝛥𝑦
the proposed numerical scheme for the ADE
𝑛
is checked by comparing its outputs for + 𝑟 �−𝜆𝐶𝑖,𝑗
different transport situations with solutions + µ(𝑥, 𝑦)�, (5)
from the other well established numerical
approaches. 0 < 𝛼2 ≤ 1 , 0 < 𝛽2 ≤ 1,
�� 𝑛+1/2
𝜕𝐶 (𝐶̅ )𝑛+1/2
𝑖,𝑗
𝑛+1/2
− (𝐶̅ )𝑖−1,𝑗
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION � � = −𝑢
𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 𝛼1 𝛥𝑥
The two-dimensional ADE for a
(𝐶̅ )𝑛+1/2
𝑖,𝑗
𝑛+1/2
− (𝐶̅ )𝑖,𝑗−1
homogeneous and anisotropic porous space −𝑣
can be written as (Bear, 1972) 𝛽1 𝛥𝑦
1011
Simulation of Advective-Dispersive Transport in a Porous Medium using the Operator Splitting
Technique
𝑛+1/2
+𝑟 �−𝜆(𝐶̅ )𝑖,𝑗 + µ(𝑥, 𝑦)� , (6) Case1. The one-dimensional ADE for an
incompressible and homogeneous soil,
0 < 𝛼1 ≤ 1, 0 < 𝛽1 ≤ 1 without the source/sink and decay terms, as
and 𝜕𝐶 𝜕𝐶 𝜕2𝐶
+𝑢 = 𝐷𝑥 2 (9)
𝑛+1/2
𝐶𝑎 𝑛
= 𝐶𝑖,𝑗 + 𝜕𝑡 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥
𝑖,𝑗
subjected to
1 𝜕𝐶 𝑛 �� 𝑛+1/2 𝛥𝑡
𝜕𝐶
�� + � � � . (7) 𝐶(𝑥, 0) = 1; 0 ≤𝑥≤1
2 𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 𝜕𝑡 𝑖,𝑗 2
𝐶(0, 𝑡) = 1; 𝑡>0
Now, Eq. (7) can be utilized to write down
𝐶(1, 𝑡) = 0; 𝑡>0
the finite difference equation for the
dispersive part Case 2. The two-dimensional ADE [Eq. (1)]
𝑛 +1/2 𝑛+1/2 subjected to following set of space dependent
𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑎𝑖,𝑗 initial condition and time dependent
𝛥𝑡/2 boundary conditions
𝑛+1/2 𝑛+1/2 𝑛+1/2 𝑛+1/2
2𝐷𝑥 𝐶𝑑 𝑖−1,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 𝐶𝑑 𝑖+1,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 𝐶(𝑥, 𝑦, 0) = 2𝑥 − 𝑥𝑦; 0 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1; 0≤𝑦
− 2� + �
𝛥𝑥 𝛼1 (𝛼1 + 𝛼2 ) 𝛼2 (𝛼1 + 𝛼2 ) ≤1
𝑛+1/2 𝐶(0, 0 ≤ 𝑦 < 1, 𝑡) = 0.8 − 0.2𝑒 0.1𝑡 ; 𝑡>0
+𝜆(1 − 𝑟)𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 =
𝐶(0 < 𝑥 < 1, 0, 𝑡) = 0.8 − 0.2𝑒 0.1𝑡 ; 𝑡>0
2𝐷𝑦 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗−1 − 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗 − 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗+1 𝐶𝑑𝑛 𝑖,𝑗
� + � 𝐶(1, 0 ≤ 𝑦 < 1, 𝑡) = 0.002√𝑡; 𝑡>0
𝛥𝑦 2 𝛽1 (𝛽1 + 𝛽2 ) 𝛽2 (𝛽1 + 𝛽2 )
+ (1 − 𝑟)µ(𝑥, 𝑦). (8) 𝐶(0 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1, 1, 𝑡) = 0.002√𝑡; 𝑡>0
Now, to move from𝑛 + 1/2to𝑛 + 1 , exactly 1
the same procedure can be repeated with 0.9
𝑛 +1/2
𝐶𝑑 𝑖,𝑗 will be used as known concentration 0.8 t = 0.1
∆x = 0.1 ∆t = 0.01 t = 0.2

to obtain the 𝐶𝑎𝑛+1
0.7
𝑖,𝑗 by MacCormack scheme. Pe = 0.1 α = 0.1
Concentration
0.6 t = 0.3
Analytical (Guerrero et al.)
NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS 0.5
Analytical (Guerrero et al.)
0.4 Analytical (Guerrero et al.)
Initially, a few numerical experiments have Crank Nicolson Method
0.3 Crank Nicolson Method
been performed to predict the contaminant Crank Nicolson Method
0.2
migration for one-dimensional transport Operator Splitting Technique
0.1 Operator Splitting Technique
situation and then these are carried out to Operator Splitting Technique
0
include situations involving two-dimensional 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Distance
transport. The validity of these OST
procedures are also checked for the studied
situations by comparing results obtained Figure 1. A concentration profileas
from them with the corresponding values obtained from theproposed OST solution
obtained from running well established when the parameters of the transport
numerical schemes to the same considered problem are taken as 𝑢 = 1 and 𝐷𝑥 = 1.
situations. The two transport situations and
their results are shown as following
1012
Tinesh Pathania
0.7 REFERENCES
t = 18000 s
y = 0.5 m
0.6 Anderson J D 1995 Computational fluid
y = 0.6 m
Concentration, C (kg/m )
dynamics McGraw-Hill India 216-262

3
0.5
y = 0.7 m
0.4 Bear J 1972 Dynamics of fluids in Porous
0.3
media Elsevier New York 579-634
Alternating Direction Implicit Scheme
Alternating Direction Implicit Scheme
0.2 Alternating Direction Implicit Scheme
Chapra S C and Canale R P 2006 Numerical
Operator Splitting Technique methods for engineers McGraw-Hill
0.1 Operator Splitting Technique
Operator Splitting Technique New Delhi 710-715
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Distance, x (m) Deng Z-Q Singh V P and Bengtsson L 2004
Figure 2. A concentration profileas Numerical solution of fractional
obtained from theproposed OST solution advection-dispersion equation Journal
when the parameters of the transport of Hydraulic Engineering 130(5) 422-
problem are taken as𝑢 = (0.01/3600) m/ 431
s, 𝑣 = (0.01/3600) m/s, 𝐷𝑥 = Guerrero J S P Pimentel L C G Skaggs T H
(0.01/3600) m2 /sand𝐷𝑦 = (0.01/ Genuchten M Th V 2009 Analytical
3600) m2 /s. solution of the advection-diffusion
transport equation using a change-of-
CONCLUSION variable and integral transform
In this study the suitability of OST has been technique International Journal of Heat
checked to predict one- and two-dimensional and Mass Transfer 52 3297-3304
transport of contaminants in porous media Hoffman J D 2001 Numerical methods for
under different initial and boundary engineers and scientists McGraw-Hill
conditions. In the analysis presented here, the New York 501-683
efficacy of the OST procedure to solve the
ADE for the transport situations with Huang K Simunek J and Genuchten M Th V
complex initial and boundary conditions has 1997 A third-order numerical
been explored. The OST procedure has been schemewith upwind weighting for
found to work reasonably well for the tested solving the solute transport equation
transport situations and hence may be applied International Journal for Numerical
to solve problems of similar nature. This has Methods in Engineering 40 1623-1637
been validated by running parallel numerical Kaluaracbchi JJ and Morshed J 1995 Critical
programs for the other numerical approaches. assessment of the operator-splitting
The OST outputs for the one-dimensional technique in solving the advection-
ADE without any additional terms are dispersion reaction equation: 1. First-
sensitive to the Peclet number and stability of order reaction Advances in Water
the outputs is affected with the increase of it, Resources 18(2) 89-100
particularly if the Courant number is low.
Li Y S and Chen C P 1989 An efficient split-
However, the convergence and stability of
operator scheme for 2-D advection-
the procedure has not been included in this
diffusion simulations using finite
study, factors which must be looked into
elements and characteristics Applied
before the method can be made use of with
Mathematical Modelling 13 248- 253
confidence.
1013
Simulation of Advective-Dispersive Transport in a Porous Medium using the Operator Splitting
Technique
Pathania T 2015Simulation of advective-

dispersive transport in a porous medium
using the operator splitting techniqueM.
Tech.ThesisIndian Institute of
Technology Guwahati Assam India
Verma P Hari Prasad K S and Ojha C S P
2006 MacCormack scheme based
numerical solution of advection –
dispersion equation The Indian Society
for Hydraulics Journal of Hydraulic
Engineering 12(1) 27-38
NOTATION
C contaminant concentration
𝐶𝑎 advective concentration
𝐶𝑑 final concentration
𝐷𝑥 dispersion coefficient in
xdirection
𝐷𝑦 dispersion coefficient
inydirection
𝑛 time step
Pe Peclet number
𝑢 longitudinal seepage velocity
in x direction
𝑣 transverse seepage velocity in
y direction
𝛥𝑥 grid spacing in xdirection
𝛥𝑦 grid spacing in y direction
α Courant number
𝛼1 fraction of 𝛥𝑥 on the left of
node 𝑖
𝛼2 fraction of 𝛥𝑥 on the right of
node 𝑖
𝛽1 fraction of 𝛥𝑦 on the left of
node 𝑗
𝛽2 fraction of 𝛥𝑦 on the right of
node 𝑗
𝜆 first order decay rate
µ source/sink term
1014
ICCMS2016
CHARACTERIZATION OF FLOW AND THERMAL BEHAVIOUR OF

PRODUCT GAS CONSTITUENTS IN THE THROAT-LESS
DOWNDRAFT GASIFIER
KANE A. A.1*, MAURYA R. S.1, TIWARI I.2, and LOBO S.2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Sardar Patel College of Engineering, Mumbai, India.
2
Applied Research, Clean Technology, TATA Power, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Application of gasifier to meet rural energy requirement efficiently is a

need of time. Present wok investigates a gasification process as a case study using a
throat less gasifier. A commercial software is used to evaluate effect of air flow
distribution on combustion pattern and distribution of different species. The result
is useful for gasifier designers which can be used to appropriately locate the air
supply points to get the best result.
Keywords-Gasification; Throat-less gasifier; Combustion pattern; Numerical
INTRODUCTION investigated different gasification models

available for modelling downdraft gasifier
Biomass is a proven source of energy in
such as thermodynamic equilibrium,
rural area since a long time. The use of
kinetic, CFD, ANN and ASPEN Plus
biomass as a fuel is a carbon neutral
models. Patel et. al., (2013) investigated
process since the carbon dioxide captured
different aspects of gasification process for
during photosynthesis is released during its
down-draft gasifier using Fluent. The
combustion. Keeping in mind the
formation of flow pattern, temperature,
availability of biomass in rural areas
turbulence and product gas composition
gasification technology can be seen as a
were investigated. The results were found
promising option. Gasification is acomplex
out to be nearer to the experimental results.
process of converting solid biomass into
Janajreh and Shrah, (2013) studied a small
mixture of combustible gases like carbon
scale, air blown, downdraft gasification
monoxide, hydrogen, methane and non-
system operated using wood chipsto
combustibles like carbon dioxide and
investigate its conversion efficiency, inside
nitrogen. This gas can be further utilized
temperature field using a CFD model.
for power generation. In such a condition
These results were compared using actual
designing an efficient gasification system
experimental analysis.Raj and Srividhya
is imperative and thus comprehensive
(2013) varied process parameters like
modeling using CFD can play a key role in
porosity and oxidizer velocity to check
the whole designing process.
their effect on gasifier performance using
The current status of gasification CFD simulation. Simanungkalit (2013)
technology was reviewed by Kumar et. al., conducted computational studies for
(2009) and they studied the effect of air throated down draft gasifier to check the
flow, biomass flow and gasification conversion efficiency using waste, empty
temperature on the properties of gaseous fruit bunches of palm in the form of fibre
product. Sheth and Patra, (2015)
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: aniruddha.kane74@gmail.com

1015
Kane et al
as fuel. Gupta et. al., (2012) studied the ∇. �𝜈(𝜌𝐸 + 𝑝)� = ∇. �𝜆eff𝛻𝑇 − ∑ℎj 𝑗j +
effect of various operating parameters such (𝜏⃗eff. 𝜈)� + 𝑆h… (3)
as air velocity, fuel rate and moisture
𝜕
content on the performance of updraft (𝜌𝑌s) + ∇. (𝜌𝜈⃗𝑌s) = −∇J�s + 𝑅s… (4)
𝜕𝑡
gasifier using ANSYS Fluent. Muilenburg, 𝑍j−𝑍j, ox
2011) carried out an investigation on the 𝑓= … (5)
𝑍j, fuel−𝑍j, ox
combustion and gasification zones of the
A solid model of the computational
gasifier to estimate the optimum values of
domain is shown in Fig.2 with appropriate
porosity and air velocity for two different
boundary condition. The domain is
fuels.
meshed with unstructured mesh with
Present work is a case investigation which 303032 cells to capture all key parameters.
intends to improve the design of a The reaction chemistry inside the gasifier
throatless downdraft gasifier by estimating is modelled using non-premixed
few key parameters of performance i.e. combustion model. The equilibrium model
temperature distribution, equivalence ratio is used and it assumes that the chemistry is
and gas composition of the gasifier. It rapid enough for chemical equilibrium to
consists of basically two sections- hopper always exist at the molecular level. The
and reactor. Air is sucked in the gasifier non-premix combustion model considers
through four air inlets while wood is mixture fraction model to solve
loaded from the top of gasifier. Gas turbulence-chemistry interaction by using
produced is sucked from bottom outlet of probability density function method.
reactor. Wood briquettes are used as a fuel Pressure based steady state solver is used
in this gasification system. In an while SIMPLE scheme is adopted for
experimental investigation the proximate consideration of pressure-velocity
and ultimate analysis of the wood sample coupling. Second order upwind scheme is
gives the elemental proportion which is applied for spatial discretization. Steady
shown in the Table 1. The wood is loaded state converged solution is obtained which
at the rate of 25 kg/hr and air supplied is presented in the following section.
during gasification is 7.3475 x10-03 kg/sec.
Gasifier schematic with dimension is RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
shown in Fig.1. The objective of current
The supply air enters through four nozzles
study is to characterize thermal and flow
0.55 m/sec, Figure 3 shows the distribution
behaviour of product gas and to predict the
of flow in the computational at central
product gas composition. ANSYS Fluent
cutting plane. The gasification process
14.5 is used as a tool of investigation.
leads to the evolution of a thermal profile
as shown in Fig.4 which clearly represents
COMPUTATIONAL APPROACH
the combustion phenomena taking place
The mechanism which governs different inside gasifier. Core of combustion has
gasification processes taking place is due maximum temperature of about 1833.38 K
to conservation of mass, momentum, The convection effect of flow on
energy and species with appropriate source temperature distribution can be observed
terms. These equations are given below. clearly.
∇. (𝜌𝜈⃗) = 𝑆m … (1) The distribution of carbon monoxide mole
fraction or volume fraction on a central
∇. (𝜌𝜈⃗𝜈⃗) = −∇𝑝 + ∇. (𝜏̅) + 𝜌𝑔⃗ + 𝐹⃗ ... (2)
1016
Characterization of Flow and Thermal Behaviour of Product Gas Constituents in the Throat-less
Downdraft Gasifier
plane is shown in Fig.5. Deficiency of CO Janajreh I Shrah M Al 2013 Numerical and

in the central narrow part where complete experimental investigation of
combustion is expected is obvious from downdraft gasification of wood chips
the figure. Major part of the core except in Journal of Energy Conversion and
narrow strip shows huge presence of CO. Management 65 783-792
This is expected due to high probability of Kumar A Jones D D and Hanna M A 2009
incomplete combustion in these regions. It Thermochemical biomass
is due to presence of lesser amount air for gasification: A review of the current
combustion which leads to reduction status of technology Journal of
Energies 2 556-581
zone.Average CO mole or volume fraction
at the outlet is coming to be 23.15 % Muilenburg M A 2011 Computational
which is very close to the experimental modeling of the combustion and
value. gasification zones in a downdraft
gasifier M S Thesis Graduate College
In Fig.6 core of combustion zone shows of The University of Iowa 21-36
low H 2 mole fraction. Red zone is the
Patel K D Shah N K Patel R N 2013 CFD
indication of thermal decomposition of analysis of spatial distribution of
volatiles.Average H 2 mole fraction or various parameters in downdraft
volume fraction at outlet is 21.265 % gasifier Proceedings of Chemical,
which is close to experimental value. Civil Mechanical Engineering Tracks
Average volume fraction of CH 4 at outlet of 3rd Nirma University International
is coming to be 0.483% while average Conference on Engineering
volume fraction of CO 2 at the outlet is (NUiCONE 2012)764-769 Nirma
obtained as 9.744%. All these results are University Ahmedabad India.
coming to be in the range of experimental Sheth P N Patra T K 2015 Biomass
values. gasification models for downdraft
gasifier: A state-of-art review Journal
It can be concluded that distribution of of Renewable and Sustainable Energy
different gaseous constituents is regulated Reviews 50 583-593
by distribution of air in the combustion
Simanungkalit S P 2013 Numerical
zone. So a regulated air supply is
simulation of gasification process for
desirable. Air inlet location is a significant palm empty fruit bunch waste
parameter for the designers. Thus the Journal of Electrification and
future scope of this study is the Renewable Energy12 11-20
improvement of air inlet design for
Srividhya P K Raj C M 2013 CFD
optimizing gas composition.
simulation of 20 KW downdraft
gasifier Journal of Current
REFERENCES Engineering and Technology 3 209-
Basu P 2010 Biomass Gasification and 214
Pyrolysis Elsevier Inc.1 172-175
NOTATIONS
Gupta B Beohar H Sethi V K Pandey M
Parmar H 2012 Effect of air velocity, E Energy (J)
fuel rate and moisture content on the F Force applied (N)
performance of updraft biomass J Diffusion of species
gasifier using Fluent tool Journal of S Source term
Modern Engineering Research 2 T Temperature (K)
3622-3627 Y Elemental mass fraction
1017
Kane et al
Z Mass fraction of element τ Shear stresses

f Mixture fraction Subscripts
g Acceleration due to gravity (m/s2) eff Effective
h Enthalpy (J) m Mass
p Pressure (N/m2) j Species/Element
𝜈⃗ Velocity (m/s) s Species
ρ Density (kg/m3)
λ Conductivity
v Kinematic viscosity
Figure 1. Schematic Figure 2. 3D model with Figure 3. Velocity contour

drawing boundary conditions
Figure 4. Temperature Figure 5. CO mole fraction Figure 6. H 2 mole fraction

contour contour contour
Table 1. Proximate and Ultimate analysis

Sr. No. Proximate analysis Ultimate analysis
Name of species % Name of species %
1 Moisture 7.49 Carbon 38.22
2 Ash 5.77 Hydrogen 5.65
3 Volatile matter 69.11 Nitrogen 6.75
4 Fixed carbon 17.63 Oxygen 49.34
5 - - Sulphur 0.04
1018
ICCMS2016
FLOW OF GRAINS THROUGH AN ORIFICE IN A RECTANGULAR

SILO
BHATEJA A.* and KHAKHAR D. V.
Department of Chemical Engineering, IIT Bombay, Powai, Mumbai India
Abstract: We perform two-dimensional discrete element simulations to explore

gravity flow of cohesionless grains through an orifice in a rectangular silo. The grains
are inelastic and frictional. The influence of material and physical properties of grains
on their flow through orifice is explored. In addition, the flow rate is fitted to
Beverloo correlation, modified for a rectangular silo as -- m f = C r b g1/2 (W-kd) (D –
kd)3/2 -- where C and k are fitting parameters. The effect of grain properties on these
parameters is also investigated.
Keywords: Discrete Element simulation; silo flow; Beverloo correlation
INTRODUCTION where g is the acceleration due to gravity and

Flow of granular materials through an orifice C is a proportionality constant. Beverloo and
is ubiquitous in several, especially, co-workers (1961) amended the above
pharmaceutical and agricultural, industries. equation and proposed the following form of
Hourglass, a device to estimate a passage of the mass flow rate
time, is a classical example of flow of grains
m f = C ρ b g1/2 (D – kd)5/2, (2)
through an orifice. The fact that the time
measured is proportional to the amount of where C and k are fitting parameters, and d is
exited grains is based on Janssen's law the mean particle diameter. For a rectangular
[Nedderman, 1992], which predicts pressure silo, Eqn. (2) may be modified to
saturation below a certain depth from the top [Nedderman et al. 1982]
surface in a granular assembly. In other m f = C ρ b g1/2 (W-kd) (D – kd)3/2, (3)
words, the mass flow rate of grains is
independent of their fill height. Certainly, the where W is the silo width. Notice that Eqns.
fill height needs to be greater than its critical (2) and (3) are still dimensionally correct.
value [Nedderman et al., 1982] to hold the The parameter C is typically considered to be
Janssen's law. a function of material properties, whereas k is
believed to depend on the shape of the grains.
An expression capable of correctly estimating Hereafter, these parameters will be referred
the mass flow rate of grains through an to as Beverloo parameters. It is worth noting
orifice in a silo has several important that Eqn. (2) does not expicitly include
consequences. Based on simple dimensional material properties, such as, friction and
arguments, the mass flow rate may be restitution coefficients, which, certainly,
expressed in terms of the orifice size D and affect the flow of grains. Several
bulk density ρ b of the granular assembly in computational investigations report the
the following way influence of these parameters on the mass
m f = C ρ b g1/2 D5/2, (1) flow rate [Ristow, 1997; Anand et al., 2008;
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: bhateja@iitb.ac.in 1019

Bhateja and Khakhar
Vidyapati and Subramaniam, 2013] It is lower bound on the silo width W to ensure its
obeserved that the flow rate decreases as negligible effect on the outflow of grains, i.e.,
friction increases between the grains. W > 2.5D (Nedderman et al., 1982,
However, the effect of inter-particle Vidyapati and Subramaniam, 2013). In
restitution coefficient is consistently found to addition, the mass flow rate is independent of
be in signifcant by these studies. the fill height H provided its value at the
Furthermore, for a wide enough silo, friction center line is greater than the orifice size D,
between silo walls and grains plays negligible i.e., H>D (Nedderman et al., 1982). In order
role as the grains exiting the system are to achieve steady state for a longer period,
affected by the local conditions adjacent to the exited grains are placed back into the
the orifice. system, in proximity to the top surface with
zero initial velocity.
To our knowledge, in spite of knowing the
effect of physical and material properties of
grains on the mass flow rate, the dependence
of the Beverloo parameters on these
properties is not yet explored. It is difficult to
make such a comprehensive investigation
through experiments. However, it can easily
be accomplished by utilizing discrete element
(DE) simulations[Cundall and Strack, 1979]
where trajectory of each grain is computed by
numerically integrating its equations of
motion. The advantage of DE simulations is
that the information about every grain in the Figure 1. Initial state of grains in a two
system can be extracted at any desired time dimensional silo before opening the
step of the simulation. Our aim in this study orifice.
is to examine the effect of particle size,
We model grains as cohesionless disks of
density, friction and restitution coefficients
mean diameter d with a polydispersity of ±10
on the Beverloo parameters via DE
%, to prevent crystallization in the system.
simulations. Furthermore, the effect of grain
The disks are inelastic and frictional. In all
properties on the microstrutural information,
simulations, the values of restitution and
e.g., density and velocity profiles near the
friction coefficients for interaction between
orifice will also be explored. In addition, a
walls and grains are kept constant at e w = 0.9
relationship between the Beverloo parameters
and µ w = 0.4, respectively. The inter-grain
and grains' microstructure adjacent to the
restitution and friction coefficients are,
orifice will also be studied.
respectively, considered to be fixed at e p =
COMPUTATIONAL SCHEME 0.9 and µ p = 0.4, unless mentioned explicitly.
We consider a two dimensional rectangular RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

silo as shown in Fig. 1. The silo width W and
We now present the results obtained from
fill height H of the grains are kept fixed at
discrete element simulations. The effect of
40d and 50d, respectively, where d is the
inter-grain restitution and friction coefficients
mean diameter of the grains. We vary D in
on the mass flow rate and on the Beverloo
the range from 6d to 14d, conforming to the
1020
Flow of Grains Through an Orifice in A Rectangular Silo
parameters will be discussed. Figure 2 We now fit Eqn. (3) to the data displayed in
displays variation in the mass flow rate m f Fig. 2 and obtain Beverloo parameters C and
with coefficient of restitution e p for different k. The value of C is found to be nearly the
values of orifice size D. Expectedly, at a same for all restitution coefficients and equal
given e p , the amount of grains exiting the to 0.026. Figure 3 shows variation in the
system grows by increasing the orifice size. Beverloo parameter k with restitution
In addition, the mass flow rate rises with coefficient e p . We note a minimal variation
increasing the restitution coefficient from 0.4 (~ 6%) in k when e p varies in the range from
to 0.95, for all orifice sizes. It is important to 0.4 to 0.8, which is evident from a nearly
note that there is almost no change in m f constant flow rate as shown in Fig. 2.
when e p is varied from 0.4 to 0.8, which is in However, notably, the value of k decreases
agreement with two-dimensional by nearly 40 % when e p is further increased
computational study of Ristow (1997) that to 0.95 from 0.8. This reduction in k
reports variation in the flow rate by 1.2 % for corroborates well with a noticeable lift in the
mass flow rate at all orifice sizes (see Fig. 2).
e p varying between 0.3 and 0.7.

Figure 2. Variation in the mass flow rate Figure 3. Variation in the Beverloo
with coefficient of restitution, e p . parameter k with restitution coefficient e p .
Mass flow rate m f is scaled with m(d/g)-1/2, Figure 4 shows variation in the mass flow
where m is the mass of a grain. However, as rate with friction coefficient µ p for different
displayed in Fig.2 , the increase in the flow values of D. At a fixed µ p , the flow rate rises
rate becomes significant when e p is escalated with increasing the orifice size. Moreover,
beyond 0.8. The variation in the flow rate is the flow rate decreases when friction is
approximately equal to 32 % and 12 % for increased from 0 to 0.5, for all orifice sizes.
the smallest (D=6d) and largest (D=14d) In agreement with three-dimensional
orifice sizes, respectively, when e p is simulations of Vidyapati and Subramaniam
increased from 0.8 to 0.95. This result is in (2013), the mass flow rate falls nearly by 32
contrast to three-dimensional investigations % when friction coefficient is varied in the
of Anand et al. (2008) and Vidyapati and range from 0.1 to 0.5, at D=6d. It is
Subramaniam (2013), which report no important to mention here that change in the
influence of restitution coefficient on the mass flow rate lowers with increasing D, in
flow rate. the aforesaid range of friction coefficient.
Specifically, at the highest orifice size, i.e.,
1021
Bhateja and Khakhar
D=14d, nearly 16 % drop is obtained in the ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

mass flow rate, which is 50 % of its variation
We thank Prof. Neeraj Kumbhakarna, IIT
at D=6d. On this basis, therefore, we can say
Bombay for providing access to his
that the effect of friction increases with
computational cluster for running the
narrowing the orifice.
simulations.
We again fit Eqn. (3) to the data show in Fig.
4 to explore the effect of friction on the REFERENCES
Beverloo parameters. Surprisingly, the value Anand A Curtis J S Wassgren C R Hancock
of C again comes out to be 0.026, B C and Ketterhagen W R 2008
independent of the friction coefficient µ p . Predicting discharge dynamics from a
However, as displayed in Fig. 5, k increases rectangular hopper using the discrete
when µ p is increased from 0 to 0.5. It is element method (DEM). Chem. Eng.
important to note that k inflates by nearly 33 Sci. 63(24) 5821-5830.
% when µ p is increased from 0.1 to 0.5. Beverloo W A Leniger H A and Van de
Velde J 1961 The flow of granular
solids through orifices. Chem. Eng. Sci,
15(3) 260-269.
Cundall, P A and Strack O D 1979 A discrete
numerical model for granular
assemblies. Geotechnique 29(1) 47-65.
Nedderman R M Tüzün U Savage S B and
Houlsby G T 1982 The flow of granular
materials—I: Discharge rates from
hoppers. Chem. Eng. Sci. 37(11) 1597-
1609.
Nedderman, R. M. (1992). Statics and
Figure 4. Variation in the mass flow rate
kinematics of granular materials.
with friction coefficient µ p .
Cambridge University Press.
Mass flow rate m f is scaled with m(d/g)-1/2, Ristow G H 1997 Outflow rate and wall
where m is the mass of a grain. stress for two-dimensional hoppers.
Physica A 235(3) 319-326.
Vidyapati V and Subramaniam S 2013
Granular flow in silo discharge: discrete
element method simulations and model
assessment. Ind. Eng. Chem. Res, 52(36)
13171-13182.
Figure 5. Variation in the Beverloo

parameter k with friction coefficient µ p .
1022
ICCMS2016
DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF ENERGY EFFICIENT COLD

STORAGE INTERIOR USING COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
MARADKAR ROHIT R.* and MAURYA R. S.
Sardar Patel College of Engineering, Mumbai, India
Abstract: The study is a part of numerical investigation which is being done to

develop an improved cold storage for better stacking of potatoes in sacks. The work
focuses on transient cooling characteristics of potatoes in a sack using porous media
model through numerical tools. Study is based on an investigation of a 3 dimensional
heat generating model of a sack. The result of investigation with validation is
explained and presented through different property plots using a commercial
computational software based on finite volume technique.
Keywords: Cold storage; CFD; Porous media; Transient; Heat transfer; Stacking
arrangement.
INTRODUCTION plug air flow between them was considered.

Chourasia et al. (1999) modeled packed bag
Potato is an important seasonal vegetable
of potato and investigated the effect of
commodity in the world. Particularly in India,
operating and geometric parameters on cool
its huge production and a consistent demand
process. A research used lattice Boltzmann
throughout the year, demand an energy
scheme to optimize the vent hole design of
efficient cold storage where stacking
the seed potato container in order to avoid
arrangement of sacks filled with potatoes,
condensation during transportation.
play an important role to meet the objective.
Hoang and Verboven (2000) used CFD to
A continuous effort by researcher can be
develop mathematical model which describes
observed in the literatures addressing
steady, isothermal three dimensional forced
different dimensions of cold storage such as -
airflow in cold storage. The numerical results
making it energy efficient. Bryan et al. (2005)
were compared with experimental data.
described the details of fruits and vegetable
Nahor and Hoang et al. (2005) developed
processing plant from the point of view
transient model to predict velocity,
energy consumption and operating cost and
temperature and moisture distribution in a
highlighted the potential measures for energy
space. The model was capable of predicting
and cost savings. Goswami and Chourasia
both the air and product temperature with
(2009) emphasized on problems generally
reasonable accuracy. The phenomena of
encountered in running a cold storage and
natural convection were analyzed by
their probable solutions. Modeling of heat
Chourasia and Goswami (2007) considering
and mass transfer in a potato cold store
partially permeable boundary condition for
assuming the potato arbitrarily being layered
agricultural product stored in cold storage.
was done by Marchant et al. (1994) where
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: maradkarrohit31@gmail.com 1023

Rohit and Maurya
Objective of the present work is to investigate information a sack is modeled as a 3-

the transient and steady cooling dimentional space with porous features
characteristics of a sack of potato with capable to generate volumetric heat as shown
internal heat generating capacity. The work in Fig. 1. The bottom surface of sack is
aims to predict developing flow and thermal modeled as impermeable to heat and mass
pattern in and outside the sack. The study transfer and other boundary conditions are of
expected to help system designer to design outflow type.
more energy efficient cold storage. Since the
work involves a high order of complexity for GOVERNING EQUATIONS
its experimental investigation it is proposed to Following set of governing equations are
do numerically using an appropriate employed to examine heat and mass transfer
commercial software. through porous media:
𝑑𝜌𝑓
MODELING FOR COMPUTATION + ∇ . (𝜌𝑓 𝑣⃗) = 0 (1)
𝑑𝑡
The computation of the proposed work is �⃗�
𝑑�𝜌𝑓 𝑣
+ ∇. �𝜌𝑓 𝑣⃗𝑣⃗� = −∇ 𝑝 + ∇. (𝜏̿)
complex due its packing pattern of the 𝑑𝑥
product in sacks, evolution and dissipation of + 𝜌𝑓 𝑔⃗ + 𝐹⃗ (2)
biological heat during storage. It involves
moisture exchange, internal-external heat The external body force appear in above
transfer by diffusion and convection manner. equation represents additional resistive force
So mass, momentum, energy and species due to porous zone (S r ). It is given by Darcy
transport is expected to be dominant in coefficient as below.
computation of variables desired. µ 1
S r = − � 𝑣𝑖 + 𝐶2 𝜌𝑓 𝑣𝑓 𝑣𝑖 �
𝛼 2
𝐷𝑝2 𝜙3
α=
180(1−𝜙)2
Where Permeability α is given by Carman-

Kozeny equation (2013), and internal
resistance factor C 2 is defined by Ergun’s
equation (2013),
1.75 (1−𝜙)
C2 = 𝐷𝑝 𝜙3
Figure 1. Numerical model in 𝜕
computational domain 𝜕𝑡
�𝛷𝜌𝑓 𝐸𝑓 + (1 − 𝛷)𝜌𝑝 𝐸𝑝 �
During storage a sack of potatoes is subjected + ∇. �𝑣⃗�𝜌𝑓 𝐸𝑓 + 𝑝��
to different kind of racking arrangement
which may be permeable or impermeable to = ∇. �𝑘𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒 ∇𝑇 − �∑𝑖 ℎ𝑖 �𝐽⃗𝚤 �� + 𝑆𝑓 (3)
airflow. This peculiar arrangement of stack 𝜕�𝜌𝑓 𝑌𝑖 �
+ ∇. �𝜌𝑓 𝑣⃗𝑌𝑖 � = −∇. 𝐽⃗𝑖 + 𝑆𝑖 (4)
causes non uniform natural airflow pattern 𝜕𝑡
inside the sack even in a mechanically
NUMERICAL MODEL
ventilated space. To capture all expected
1024
Design and Development Energy Efficient Cold Storage Interior Using Computational Techniques
The FVM computation is carried out using average temperature in the bag is found to be
ANSYS Fluent 14.5 which uses 274.63 K for the surrounding temperature of
incompressible fluid. Governing equations 274 K. Fig. 3 shows the variation of average
are solved using PISO algorithm. Flow is product temperature inside the sack.
assumed to be laminar flowing in porous
medium. Solution progress under operating
conditions: P= 1.01325 bar, T= 274 K and
product temperature 298K. Volumetric heat
generation is 20 Watt/m3. Material properties
used in the analysis are given in the table 1.
Table 1. Material Properties
Material Type Solid (Potato) Figure 2. Velocity vector in YZ plane at

steady state
Density 1100 Kgm-3
Specific Heat 3600 Jkg-1K-1
Thermal Conductivity 0.5 Wm-1K-1
It is reported that single sack of potatoes

conforms the rectangular shape (2007). PISO
scheme is used for pressure-Velocity
coupling which gives stable solutions with
larger time step. First order upwind scheme is
used to discretize momentum, energy and Figure 3. Temperature distribution in YZ
species equations. plane at steady state
RESULTS
The investigation consists of steady and
transient state study where flow and
temperature distribution is predicted.
STEADY STATE BEHAVIOR

Fig.2 shows the distribution of velocity on
YZ plane inside the sack. Due to the
buoyancy effect induced by volumetric heat Figure 4. Temperature distribution in YZ
generation, air enters from sides’ surfaces and plane after 7 hrs. of cooling
flow upward direction. The specific air
pattern is get effected by impermeable bottom TRANSIENT BEHAVIOR
surface. Lower air movement is obtained at
the center of the lower half. Steady state
1025
Rohit and Maurya
The case simulated for a period of 7 hrs. of Chourasia M K Goswami T K 2009 Efficient
storage to study the transient cooling of sack design, operation, maintenance and
filled with potato. It is validated with management of a cold storage Journal
experimental work of Goswami and of Biological Sciences 1 70-93
Chourasia (2007) which is shown in Fig.5. Chourasia M K Goswami T K Chowdhury K
The simulated result shows the evolution of 1999 Temperature profile during cold
temperature and flow in the sack. Maximum storage of bagged potatoes: effects of
temperature is found to be at the center of geometric and operating parameters
upper half of the sack as shown in fig. 4. Trans ASAE 42 1345–51.
Cooling of the sack started from the side
surfaces and is symmetric about vertical axis. Hackett B Chow S Ganji A R 2005 Efficiency
Rate of cooling is faster in lower half than the Opportunities in Fresh Fruit and
upper half. Vegetable Processing/Cold Storage
Facilities ACEEE Summer Study on
300
Avg. Product Temperature
Energy Efficiency in Industry Energy

295
Hoang M L Verboven P Baerdemaeker J
290
Nicolai B M 2000 Analysis of the
285 airflow in a cold store by means of
280
computational fluid dynamics
International Journal of Refrigeration
275
23 127-140
0 2 4 6 8
Time, h Marchant A N Lidstone PH Davies T W 1994
Avg. Product Temperature,(K) Numerical
Artificial intelligence techniques for
Avg. Product Temperature,(K) Experimental
the control of refrigerated potato
Figure 5. Variation of average product stores. Part 2: Heat and mass
temperature during cooling of sack simulation. Journal of Agricultural
Engineering 58 27–36
REFERENCES
Nahor H B Hoang M L Verboven P Baelmans
ANSYS Fluent 15 User’s Guide 2013 M Nicolai B M 2005 CFD model of
Canonsburg PA 15317 ANSYS Inc. the airflow, heat and mass transfer in
243-245 cool stores International Journal of
Chourasia M K Goswami T K 2007 Three Refrigeration 28 368-380
dimensional modeling on airflow, heat Narasimhan A 2013 Essentials of Heat and
and mass transfer in partially Fluid flow in Porous Media Ane
impermeable enclosure containing Books Pvt. Ltd. 110002
agricultural produce during natural
NOTATIONS
convective cooling Energy
Conversion and Management 48 𝜌𝑓 Density of air-vapor mixture (kgm-3)
2136-2149 𝜙 Porosity in the sack (dimensionless)
𝐷𝑝 Effective diameter (m)
1026
Design and Development Energy Efficient Cold Storage Interior Using Computational Techniques
𝑆𝑓 Enthalpy source term (Wm-3)

𝑆𝑖 Source term for species generation (kgm3s1)
𝐽⃗𝑖 Diffusion flux of species (kgm2s-1)
𝑌𝑖 Mass fraction (dimensionless)
1027
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF FIELD PARAMETERS ON SALTWATER INGRESSION IN

COASTAL AQUIFERS
UKARANDE S. K.1 and SONAWANE S. B.2
1
K. J. Somaiya Institute of Engineering & I.T., Sion, Mumbai India.
2
Datta Meghe College of Engineering, Airoli, Navi Mumbai India.
Abstract: The effects of field parameters like hydraulic gradient, dispersivity and ratio
of aquifer depth and longitudinal dispersivity to the freshwater and saltwater interface
were simulated by using coupled two non-linear partial differential equations of flow
and solute transport equation. A two dimensional numerical groundwater flow model
for simplified hypothetical freshwater lens is developed to explain the effect of various
field parameters. The results show that field parameters significantly influence on
saltwater ingression in coastal aquifers.
Keywords: Saltwater ingression; Field parameters; Numerical modelling
INTRODUCTION DEVELOPMENT OF A NUMERICAL

Dimensionless field parameters are used to MODEL
simplify the governing equations. The The Governing Equations used for numerical
simulated steady state solutions are compared model development are,
with Henry (1964), Pinder and Cooper The equations describing steady flow and
(1970), and Lee and Cheng (1974) to assess solute transport in an isotropic porous
the correctness of the developed algorithm. medium can be written as:
Analytical study about the alteration of salt
1) Flow Equation:
water interface in response to land
𝜕
reclamation with assumption that a sharp (𝑝𝑞𝑖 ) = 0 … . (1)
interface exists between the fresh water and 𝜕𝑥𝑖
the saline water by Haipeng Guo and jui where q i is given by Darcy’s equation as
Jimmy Jiao, (2007) below:
−𝐾𝑖𝑗 𝜕𝑝
The finite element formulation developed 𝑞𝑖 = [ + ρ. g. 𝑒𝑗 ] … . (2)
involved field parameters like inverse of µ 𝜕𝑥𝑗
upstream hydraulic gradient (A), dispersivity 2) Solute Transport Equation:
(α T ), aquifer depth and longitudinal 𝜕 𝜕𝐶𝑖 𝜕𝐶
dispersivity ratio (d L ), porosity (θ) and �𝐷𝑖𝑗 � − 𝑉𝑖 = 0 … (3)
𝜕𝑥𝑖 𝜕𝑥𝑗 𝜕𝑥𝑖
hydraulic conductivity (K yy ) whose
The constitutive equation relating fluid
magnitude determines manner of interface of
density to concentration is:
saltwater ingression.
ρ = ρf (1 + εC) … (4)
1028
Ukarande and Sonawane
where, Vi are the components of the seepage dimensional form in two-dimensional co-
velocity (LT-1), k ij is the intrinsic ordinate (x-y) system are defined as:
permeability of the porous medium (L2), µ is 𝑉𝑥2 𝑉𝑦2
the dynamic viscosity of the fluid (ML-1T-1), 𝐷𝑥𝑥 = + 𝛼𝑇
|𝑉| |𝑉|
ρ is the fluid density (ML-3), p is the fluid
pressure (ML-1T-2), e j are the components of 𝑉𝑦2 𝑉𝑥2
𝐷𝑦𝑦 = + 𝛼𝑇
the gravitational unit vector (LT-2), D ij is the |𝑉| |𝑉|
dispersion coefficient (L2 T-1) and C is the 𝑉𝑥 𝑉𝑦
concentration of the pollutant (ML-3). 𝐷𝑥𝑦 = 𝐷𝑦𝑥 = (1 − 𝛼 𝑇 ) … (7)
|𝑉|
Introducing the non-dimensional variables The average linear velocity (i.e. V x and V y ) in
𝑥 ′ 𝑦 ℎ 𝐶 non-dimensional form for 2-D x-y coordinate
𝑥′ = ; 𝑦 = ; ℎ′ = ; 𝐶 = ∗ ;
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝐶 system from equation (2) can be written as;
𝐾𝑦𝑦 𝐾𝑥𝑥 𝑉𝑥 𝐴 𝜕ℎ
𝐾′𝑦𝑦 = ; 𝐾′𝑥𝑥 = ; 𝑉′𝑥 = ; 𝑉𝑥 = − � � … . (8)
𝐾𝑥𝑥 𝐾𝑥𝑥 𝑉 𝜃 𝜕𝑥
𝐴 𝜕ℎ
𝑉𝑦 𝛼𝑇 𝛼𝐿 𝑉𝑦 = − 𝐾𝑦𝑦 � + 𝜀� … (9)
𝜃 𝜕𝑦
𝑉′𝑦 = ; 𝛼′ 𝑇 = ; 𝛼′𝐿 =
𝑉 𝛼𝐿 𝛼𝐿 𝐾𝑖𝑗 1
𝑑 𝑊ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑉 = ,
𝐴 𝐴
= 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑑𝐿 =
𝛼𝐿 is piezometric gradient and θ is porosity of
in equation (1) and (3) and dropping the aquifer. Thus the equations (5), (6), (8) and
primes on all the terms in further analysis we (9) are Governing Equations in dimensionless
get, form.
𝜕2ℎ 𝜕2 ℎ 𝜕𝑐 SOLUTION DOMAIN
+ 𝐾𝑦𝑦 = −𝐾𝑦𝑦 𝜀 … (5)
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 𝜕𝑦 The rectangular two-dimensional vertical
2 2 2 cross-section of length L and depth d of
𝜕 𝐶 𝜕 𝐶 𝜕 𝐶
𝐷𝑥𝑥 + 𝐷𝑦𝑦 + 𝐷𝑥𝑦 confined coastal aquifer is shown in fig.-1.
𝜕𝑥 2 𝜕𝑦 2 𝜕𝑥𝜕𝑦
2
𝜕 𝐶 𝜕𝑐 𝜕𝑐
+ 𝐷𝑦𝑥 − �𝑉𝑥 + 𝑉𝑦 �𝑑 = 0
𝜕𝑦𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝐿
(6)
where d is the depth of confined coastal
aquifer, C* is saltwater concentration, α L and
αT are longitudinal and transverse
dispersivities of medium respectively, V is the
average linear velocity, K xx and K yy are non- Figure 1. Boundary conditions and
dimensional hydraulic conductivities along x Definition sketch
and y direction respectively, and, D ij is the
dispersion tensor, whose terms in non- The L/d for the domain is 2:1. This paper
discuss the approach of synthetic confined
heterogeneous isotropic aquifer with two thin
1029
Effect of Field Parameters on Saltwater Ingression in Coastal Aquifers
unyielding layers at depth of 0.4 and 0.8 unit Parameter A is reciprocal of upstream
depth from top of aquifer as shown in figure hydraulic gradient. A boost in the value of A
1. means drop off in upstream freshwater head
seeing as other parameters kept constant.
FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION
Other parameters used are α T = 1, K x1 = 1.0,
Presently the entire flow region is divided in K x2 = 0.2, Kx1 = 0.5, K y1 = 1.0, K y2 = 0.2 and
1024 elements and 561 nodes. K y3 = 0.5, d L = 2.4, θ 1 = 0.26, θ 2 = 0.43 and θ 3
Applying Galerkin’s approach in addition to = 0.26 are kept unvarying to learn effect of
Green’s Theorem, equations (5) (6), (8) and variation of ‘A’ parameter.
(9) can be written in matrix form as follows: The slope of hydraulic gradient can vary from
[𝐾1 ] {ℎ} = 𝜀 𝐾𝑦𝑦 [𝑅] {𝐶} + {𝐵ℎ1 } … (10) 0.01% to 0.5% for most realistic field
conditions (Pandit and Anand, 1980). The
[𝐾2 ] {𝐶} = {𝐵𝑐 } … (11) effect is significant for ‘A’ equal to 200 to
Head and concentration vary linearly in the 1200. For variation of ‘A’ from 200 to 10000
triangular elements. These elements are the length of ingression of saltwater increases
associated with shape functions defined for at bottom from 1.4 units and at top 0.8 units.
each node of the element, which are functions
of spatial coordinates and define the head and
solute concentration in an element in terms of
the nodal head and concentration. The
resulting matrices are square, diagonally
dominant and asymmetric in nature.
[𝑀] {𝑉𝑥 } = {𝐹} … (12)
[𝑀] �𝑉𝑦 � = {𝐸} … (13)
where [K 1 ], [K 2 ] and [M] are conductance
Figure 2- Effect of ‘A’ parameter
matrices and [R]{C}, {Bh 1 }, {B c }, {F}, {E}
are column vectors containing boundary EFFECT OF PARAMETER ‘Α T ’ ON
conditions. SALTWATER INGRESSION
For more authenticity the model is validated The values of other parameters kept constant
with Ukarade S. K. and Rastogi (2003) for to observe effect of ‘α T ’ on saltwater
homogeneous and isotropic conditions. ingression. Other parameters used are A =
294, K x1 = 1.0, K x2 = 0.2, Kx1 = 0.5, K y1 =
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 1.0, K y2 = 0.2 and K y3 = 0.5, d L = 2.4, θ 1 =
0.26, θ 2 = 0.43 and θ 3 = 0.26 are kept
Based on above numerical model of Synthetic
unvarying to learn effect of variation of ‘α T ’
Heterogeneous Isotropic Aquifers yields the
parameter.
effects of assorted parameters on freshwater
and saltwater interface are discussed below. It is observed that variation of ‘α T ’ upto 0.5
the saltwater ingression increases at bottom
EFFECT OF PARAMETER ‘A’ ON
by 0.81 and reduces at top by 0.52. By
SALTWATER INGRESSION
1030
Ukarande and Sonawane
deviation in value of ‘α T ’ upto 1.0 the upstream of interface increases cause boost in
ingression at bottom increases and at top interface movement towards freshwater
reduces. boundary.
Non-dimensional parameter ‘α T ’ i.e. ratio of
transverse and longitudinal dispersivity does
not effects saltwater ingression appreciably.
Non-dimensional parameter ‘d L ’ i.e. ratio of
aquifer thickness and longitudinal dispersivity
for value 10 decease the saltwater intrusion at
bottom and increases at top of aquifer.
Figure -3- Effect of parameter ‘α T ’ REFERENCES
EFFECT OF PARAMETER ‘D L ’ ON Das A and Datta B1999 Development of
SALTWATER INGRESSION multi objective management models for
coastal aquifers Jr. of water resources
The values of other parameters kept constant
planning and management 125(2) 76-88
to observe effect of ‘d L ’ on saltwater
ingression. Other parameters used are A = Haipeng Guo and Jui Jimmy Jiao. 2007.
294, K x1 = 1.0, K x2 = 0.2, K x3 = 0.5, K y1 = Impact of Coastal Land Reclamation on
Ground Water Level and the Sea Water
1.0, K y2 = 0.2 and K y3 = 0.5, α T = 0.1, θ 1 =
Interface Ground Water 45(3) 362-367
0.26, θ 2 = 0.43 and θ 3 = 0.26 are kept
unvarying to learn effect of variation of ‘d L ’ Henry H R 1964. Effect of dispersion on salt
encroachment in coastal aquifers U.S.
parameter.
Geol. Surv., Water-Supply Pap. 1613C
70-84.
Lee C H and Cheng 1974. On seawater
encroachment in coastal aquifer Water
Resour. Res. 10(5) 1039-1043.
Pandit A and Anand S C 1984 Ground water
flow and mass transport by finite
elements - A parametric study Proc. 5th
Int. Conf. on Finite Elements in Water
Figure 4 Effect of parameter ‘d L ’ Resources, (J.B. Liable, C.A. Brebbia,
W. Gray, G. Pinder eds) Burlington,
It is observed from plot that the shape of 0.5 Vermount, USA, 363-381.
isochlor more or less remains match but its
shifting towards freshwater. Dispersion Pinder G F and Cooper H H Jr 1970 A
numerical technique for calculating the
coefficient also increases so increase in
transient position of the saltwater front
saltwater ingression. Water Resour. Res 6(3) 875-882.
CONCLUSION Ukarande S K and Rastogi A K 2000
Seawater Intrusion Control Through
Non-dimensional parameter ‘A’ i.e. inverse of
Recharge and Recharge-Discharge Well
hydraulic gradient of freshwater which is at System presented and published in the
1031
Effect of Field Parameters on Saltwater Ingression in Coastal Aquifers
proceedings of National Conference on

Recent Advances in Hydraulics and
Water Resources Engineering, HYDRO-
held at National Institute of Technology,
Kuruksetra, Haryana 6-8th Oct. 2000
433-445
1032
ICCMS2016
DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF AN ASYMPTOTICALLY CORRECT

PIEZOELECTRIC SENSOR WITH A TIP MASS
BANERJEE S.* and ROY S.
Department of Applied Mechanics, IIT Delhi, India.
Abstract: The present work is devoted in studying the response of an asymptotically

correct piezoelectric cantilever sensor with a tip mass. Piezoelectric material are
excellent sensor material with electromechanical coupling properties that enable them
to convert input mechanical energy into some useful electric potential. Variational
asymptotic method is used to mathematically develop and study the response of a
piezoelectric sensor with a tip mass under a periodic force. The source of periodic
force can occur in environment with different frequencies. In order to exploit the
maximum of the mechanical energies into electrical energies a sensor model should
operate close to the frequency of the mechanical source. So a well-developed theory is
needed which can mathematically model the multi physics behaviour of a
piezoelectric sensor and can also estimate the eigen frequencies with varying
piezoelectric parameters, dimension of the model and mass at the free end. In past
literatures variational asymptotic method has proved to be a very useful and effective
mathematical technique to study the electrodynamics of any structure defined by an
energy functional and having some inherent one or more small parameters. This
present work is all about applying the method to model a piezoelectric cantilever
sensor with a tip mass. The general theory discussed in the present work reduces the
3D beam problem to a 1D beam analysis with a very accurate 2D cross sectional
constants. The method discussed herein is thus another new tool for building accurate
electromechanical models for dimensionally reducible structures.
Keywords: Piezoelectrics; Sensor; Variational asymptotic method, Dynamic
response.
INTRODUCTION structural members, energy harvesters, AFM

application etc. Efficient mathematical
Piezoelectric materials has emerged as one of
technique is highly required which can
the most widely used sensor material. Some
capture accurately the electromechanical
of the reasons for its popularity are its easy
coupling effect. In the present work we apply
availability, efficient conversion capability
variational asymptotic method to model and
between electrical and mechanical energy
analyse the response of a piezoelectric
and relatively linear electromechanical
cantilever sensor with a tip mass. Variational
behaviour. Piezoelectric sensors has its major
asymptotic method was first introduced by
applications in the different fields such as in
Berdichevsky in the year 1979. Piezoelectric
aerospace applications, damage detection in
sensor has been analysed as a slender beam
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shreyabanerjee002@gmail.com 1033

Banerjee and Roy
model by considering the small parameters difficulty in solving the electric enthalpy.
inherent in the structure. The method splits Variational asymptotic method (VAM)
the 3D beam problem into a 1D linear beam provides a very effective technique to solve
analysis and 2D cross sectional analysis. the unknown warping inherent in electric
Variational asymptotic method has been enthalpy through an asymptotic analysis of
previously used by Yu (2002) to model the variational statement.
dimensionally reduced composite structures. The 3D strain for an Euler-Bernoulli beam
It has also been applied to model classical can be expressed in terms of 1D strain vector
smart beam structures by Roy et al.(2007). and 3D warping field as,
The present study introduces VAM to
capture the sensory effect and finding out the
ˆ Γòò
Γ = Γ h w+ (3)
response of the piezoelectric sensor when it ˆ = [wˆ 1wˆ 2 wˆ 3φ]
where, w
T
is the warping,
is under a time varying load. The study firstly
predicts the first three eigen modes. It also ò  [ 111 23 ]T is the 1D strain vector and
captures the nodal displacement under both Γ h , Γ ò are the operator matrices as defined
damped and undamped conditions and its in Roy et al.(2007).
corresponding voltage response in time
domain under an excitation frequency which The dimensional reduction from the original
is close to its first eigen frequency. 3D formulation to a 1D formulation is done
by taking advantage of the small parameters
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION in the formulation. To construct a 1D
formulation an asymptotically correct
The mathematical formulation for the
approximation to the 3D formulation can be
piezoelectric sensor starts with the very well-
achieved as shown in Eq. (2) where the 1D
known Hamilton’s principle.
terms are discretised from the general 3D
t2
terms. For a structure to be modelled as beam
 [ ( K  U )   W ]dt  0 (1) it should be slender which means the ratio

t1
between characteristic size of cross section
and characteristic wavelength of axial
where t1 and t2 are arbitrary fixed times, K is
deformation is very less than unity. Since we
the kinetic energy, U is the are dealing with a materially linear model so
electromechanical enthalpy and W is the the characteristic magnitude of strain is also
virtual work of applied loads and electric very less than one.
charges. Eq. (1) depicts the 3D formulation. h
 1 ,
We can write Eq. (1) in terms of 1D l
displacements and rotations and 3D ò ~ O(ò) ~ O()  1 (4)
mechanical warping functions which ò is the characteristic magnitude of ò .
comprises of warping in three directions and According to the order assessments and
electric potential. Thus Eq. (1) can be considering zeroth order approximation for a
rewritten as, classical model we can write,
t2 t2 L
 [δ(Κ1D + Κ -U)+δW1D +δW ]dt = 0 (2)  [δK1D - (  U 0dx1 ) - δW1D ]dt = 0

* *
(5)
t1 t1 0
Neglecting () terms which are 3D functions, We neglect the higher order terms in kinetic
energy as well as in the work done and keep
when we try to solve Eq. (2) we find
1034
Dynamic Response of an Asymptotically Correct Piezoelectric Sensor with A Tip Mass
the terms which are functions of only x1 . for the mid node in damped as well as
undamped condition.
Unknown 3D warping functions i.e wi and 
only appears in U 0 and it can be solved by
variational statement.
U 0  0 (6)
The minimization of zeroth order of strain
energy subjected to some global constraints
gives the Euler-Lagrange equation. Solving
the Euler-Lagrange equation we get the
solution of warping in terms of 1D strains.
Figure 2. First three normalized eigen
Substituting the warping in the strain energy
modes
expression and differentiating it with respect
to the strain vector we get the 1D constitutive For damped response we have considered a
model for a classical sensor model. proportional damping. The present study
 F    S ò (7) includes only bending mode but the theory is
very well capable of capturing axial,twist and
Here F is the force vector, S is the
bending modes in other two planes.Fig. (4)
generalized cross sectional stiffness matrix.
shows the voltage response for the mid node
MODEL VERIFICATION in time domain.
Here we analyse a cantilever sensor made up

of PZT5H with a tip mass and cantilever
boundary condition. The sensor is of
0.049m  0.0038m  0.0006m dim-ension
which is same as given in Ly et al.(2012)
paper. A periodic force is applied at the free
end. The excitation frequency is close to the
first natural frequency of the system.
Figure 3. Displacement response with

and without damping
Figure 1. Schematic of piezoelectric

cantilever sensor
The eigen frequencies for the first mode is
73Hz which is close to the eigen frequency
of the model discussed in Ly et al. (2012)
paper. Fig. (2) shows the first three modes.
Under a periodic force we get the Figure 4. Voltage response in time
displacement response as shown in Fig. (3) domain.
1035
Banerjee and Roy
CONCLUSION APPENDIX
The present work applies variational The electric enthalpy expression for a
asymptotic method to model and analyse a piezoelectric material can be expressed as,
piezoelectric cantilever sensor with a tip 1
mass. Though the emergence of the theory is U  (T : C E :   2 E.e :   E T .  .E )dv
2v
many years back but applying the theory to where,
mathematically model a piezoelectric sensor
with a tip mass is a main novelty of the C E -elastic tensor at a constant electric field
present work. The theory is capable of  - strain tensor
analysing multilayer as well as embedded
sensor model. The present study has e - piezoelectric tensor
considered a rectangular cross section but the E - electric field vector
theory is well capable of handling any
arbitrary cross sectional analysis. This is a   - dielectric tensor at constant strain field
preliminary work and it can be very well v - space occupied by the structure.
extended to model an energy harvester.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to thank the
Department of Applied Mechanics, IIT Delhi
for their encouragement and help.
REFERENCES
Berdichevsky V L 1979 Variational
asymptotic method of constructing a
theory of shells PMM43 664-687.
Ly R Rguiti M Astorg S D Hajjaji A
Courtois C Lerichea A 2011Modeling
and characterization of piezoelectric
cantilever bending sensor for energy
harvesting Sensors and Actuators A 168
95–100.
Roy S Yu W and Han D 2007 An
asymptotically correct classical model
for smart beams International Journal
of Solids and Structures 44 8424–8439.
Yu W 2002 Variational asymptotic modeling
of composite dimensionally reducible
structures Ph.D. thesis Georgia Institute
of Technology.
1036
ICCMS2016
NOTCH-TYPE DAMAGE DETECTION IN PLATE STRUCTURES USING

A REFINED TIME-REVERSED LAMB WAVE METHOD
KAPURIA S. 1 and AGRAHARI J. K. 2*
1
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi India.
2
CSIR- Structural Engineering Research Centre, Taramani, Chennai-India.
Abstract: This paper deals with the damage detection in thin plates with notch type
damage using a baseline-free refined time reversed Lamb wave method. The
effectiveness of the method has been examined for an integrated actuator–plate–
sensor system through numerical and experimental investigation. The analysis reveals
that combination of symmetric mode (S 0 ) and antisymmetric mode (A 0 ) provides
better reconstructability of an input signal, compared to the usually recommended
single-mode tuning. Damage indices (DIs) obtained from the conventional main wave
packet of the reconstructed signal are less sensitive to an increase in depth of the
notch, which is consistent with some recently reported experimental results by other
groups. A recently proposed method of computing DIs with extended signal length is
shown experimentally to have high sensitivity to the damage and lead to a low
threshold for the undamaged case when used at the best reconstruction frequency.
Keywords: Time Reversal Process, Lamb Wave, Sweet Spot Frequency, Damage
INTRODUCTION (1992) in acoustics, is being currently studied

as a promising candidate for the baseline free
One of the important concerns in civil,
damage detection technique. An input signal
mechanical, aerospace, space and ship
can be reconstructed at the source transducer
structures is to prevent catastrophic failure
if the output signal at the sensor is reversed in
during their service life. Failures in thin
time and emitted back to the original source
metallic structures are often caused by sharp
transducer. But, the linear reciprocity breaks
cracks developed due to fatigue. It is very
in the presence of damage, due to the
challenging to detect the damage by
nonlinear interactions of the transmitted wave
measuring the changes from the baseline
with the damage. Because the Lamb wave
data, as the scattering may be due to the
amplitude is generally dependent on the
variation in the structural dynamic
frequency (amplitude dispersion), the
characteristics caused by changing
reconstruction of the time-reversed signal in
operational and environmental conditions.
the undamaged structure is not perfect. This
Compensations for such changes are difficult
has direct impact on its effectiveness for
to achieve in a general scenario. Due to these
damage detection. Gangadharan et.al (2009)
such difficulties in conventional baseline
have shown that the damages in the metallic
methods, significant research interest has
structure cannot be identified from the time
been shown in developing effective baseline
reversibility of Lamb waves, as these defects
free structural health monitoring (SHM)
do not introduce any nonlinearity that breaks
system. The concept of time reversal process
the TRP of Lamb wave. Xu and Giurgiutiu
(TRP) of Lamb waves proposed by Fink
(2007) have studied single mode tuning
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: agrahari2006@gmail.com 1037

Kapuria and Agrahari
effects on Lamb wave time reversal for 28 oC) for at least 48 hours. One transducer
damage detection. Recently, Agrahari and was actuated with a five-peak Hann window
Kapuria (2015) presented a refined method modulated tone burst signal of 20 V with its
for computing the damage indices by center frequency varying from 160 to 340
introducing the concept of the 'best kHz, and the voltage output of the other
reconstruction frequency' and extended wave transducer was measured. The sampling
packet, which showed much-enhanced frequency was taken as 48 mega samples per
sensitivity to damages. In this work, we second (MS/s), and an average of six runs
establish numerically and experimentally the was taken for each test to improve the signal-
efficacy of the new method in detecting to-noise ratio of the sensor output. In this
notch-type damage in aluminium plates. paper, the reflections from structural
boundaries are not considered by choosing
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF TRP appropriate time window in the wave signals.
FOR DAMAGE DETECTION Damage is introduced in the form of notch of
2 mm width in between the wave path as
shown in Figure 2.
Notch
Figure 1. Experimental setup: 1. Scan

Sentry High Voltage system 2. In-sight Figure 2. Surface damage (a notch) in
2.1 software 3. Connection box 4. between sensor and actuator
Connection cable 5. PZT transducers 6.
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
Plate
The finite element (FE) analysis is performed
The experimental setup (Figure 1) consists of
to simulate the Lamb wave actuation,
Scan Sentry High Voltage (SSHV) hardware
propagation and sensing in the actuator-plate-
system, made by Acellent Technologies
sensor system, as shown in Figure 3.
USA, for Lamb wave actuation and sensing
and signal processing and visualization
software. The experiment was conducted on
an aluminium plate of dimensions 1500 mm
× 1250 mm × 3.0 mm, with wafer type PZT
SP-5H transducers of 10 mm square size,
Figure 3. Plate–transducer configuration
made by Sparkler Ceramics, India was used
with notch type damage
for actuation and sensing. The patch
transducers were bonded to the plate surface
using the commercially available Araldite
epoxy adhesive. The thickness of the
adhesive layer is 60 μm. The center to center
distance between the actuator (PZT-A) and
sensor (PZT-B) is taken as 300 mm. The Figure 4. Mesh configuration, shown for a
adhesive was cured at room temperature (22- portion of the FE model.
1038
Notch-Type Damage Detection in Plate Structures using A Refined Time-Reversed Lamb Wave
The analysis is performed using the distortion energy (DE) (Sohn et al., 2007) is
commercial FE software, ABAQUS. The used to identify the damage.
accurate prediction of Lamb wave
propagation requires a high spatial resolution (1)
as well as a good temporal resolution with at I(t)
least 20-time steps in one wave cycle, which and V(t) are the normalized original and
leads to a large computational effort if 3D FE reconstructed signals, respectively, and t i and
model is adopted. t f define the signal length used for the
In order to maintain a good spatial resolution comparison. For a perfectly reconstructed
and a reasonable computation time, a signal V(t), DI DE = 0 and a high value means
simplified 2D plane strain model is considerable dissimilarity, implying the
considered here to perform the damage presence of damage.
diagnosis without any loss of generality. Sweet Spot Frequency and Frequency of Best
Accordingly, the plate and adhesive layers Reconstruction for Undamaged Plate.
are modelled using the 2D eight-node plane The frequency corresponding to the
strain quadrilateral element (CPE8R) with maximum value of S 0 /A 0 amplitude ratio is
reduced integration, and the piezoelectric the sweet spot frequency (f ss ), at which only
actuator and sensor are modelled with the 2D the S 0 mode is excited in the plate. Its value
eight-node plane strain piezoelectric has been obtained as 270 kHz experimentally
quadrilateral element (CPE8E) featuring at and 260 kHZ from the 2D FE analysis. TRP
least 20 elements over the shortest wave has been performed at a similar range of
length (λ min ) as shown in Figure 4. The center frequency in order to get the frequency
material properties of PZT transducers, host of best reconstruction (f rc ), at which DI DE is
plate and adhesive are taken from Agrahari minimum, i.e. the similarity with the input
and Kapuria (2015). The maximum element signal is maximum. The best reconstruction
length is 0.5 mm, and the time step is taken frequency has been obtained as 200 kHz from
as 100 ns for excitation frequencies of up to experiment and 180 kHz from 2D FE
300 kHz and 50 ns for higher frequencies, analysis, which is much different from the
satisfying the resolution requirements sweet spot frequency when only S 0 mode is
mentioned earlier. The interfaces between the present.
piezoelectric elements and the adhesive
layers are electrically grounded. For DAMAGE DETECTION USING TRP
actuation, a uniform voltage as per the The damage was introduced in between the
specified modulated tone burst signal is two transducers in the form of a notch of
applied to the top surface of the actuator width 2 mm and depth varying from 0.5 mm
(PZT A). For sensing at PZT B, the to 2.25 mm. It is seen that the damage affects
equipotential condition of the electrode the forward response of the Lamb wave
surface of the sensor is imposed by coupling propagation as well as the TRP of Lamb
the electric potential degree of freedom wave.
(DOFs) of this surface.
There is an extra wave packet between S 0
Damage Index. and A 0 mode waves , generated due to the
A damage index based on the RMSD or the reflections from the damage which is
L 2 error norm, which measures the relative distorting the reconstructed signal as shown
in Figure 5. It is found that the amplitude of
1039
Kapuria and Agrahari
the extra band increases with the depth of

notch, which in turn will affect the TRP. The
TRP has been performed for various depths
of the notch to examine the sensitivity of the
damage index at best reconstruction
frequency as well as sweet spot frequency.
(a) 2D FE
(a) 2D FE
(b) Experiment
Figure 6. Variations of DI ratio based on
extended and main wave packets with
(b) Experiment notch depth
Figure 5. Reconstructed signal at PZT
at f rc for notch of width 2 mm and depth CONCLUSIONS
2.25 mm The numerical and experimental study
For the understanding of the sensitivity of the reveals that the best reconstruction of the
DI to the depth of notch, the ratios of the diagnostic signals after the TRP is generally
refined DIs to their respective threshold achieved at a frequency when both S 0 and A 0
values corresponding to the undamaged plate modes are excited. The damage index
are plotted in Figure 6 at both f ss and f rc , and computed based on the conventional main
compared with the variations in the wave packet is not very sensitive to the
conventional DIs. It is observed that while presence of notch damage, confirming its
the conventional DI comparing the main ineffectiveness for damage detection as has
mode at f ss remains very close to 1 been reported earlier. The refined DI based
(undamaged) in presence of the notch and on the extended wave packet, however, has
does not increase much with the increase in excellent sensitivity to damage depth when
its depth in both simulation and experiments, excited at the best reconstruction frequency.
the refined DI based on the extended wave This is because of the extended wave packet
packet at f rc is very sensitive to the notch captures the extra bands around the main
depth. wave packet, generated from interactions
with the damage.
1040
Notch-Type Damage Detection in Plate Structures using A Refined Time-Reversed Lamb Wave
REFERENCES
Agrahari J K and Kapuria S 2015 A refined
Lamb wave time reversal method with
enhanced sensitivity for damage
detection in isotropic plates Journal of
Intelligent Material Systems and
Structures 1-23.
Fink M 1992 Time-reversal of ultrasonic
fields-Part I: Basic principles IEEE
Transactions Ultrasonic, Ferroelectrics
and Frequency Control 39(5) 555–566.
Gangadharan R Murthy CRL Gopalakrishnan
S and Bhat M R 2009 Time reversal
technique for health monitoring of
metallic structure using Lamb waves
Journal of Ultrasonics 49 696–705.
Sohn H Park HW Law K H and Farrar C R
2007 Damage detection in composite
plates by using an enhanced time
reversal method Journal of Aerospace
Xu B and Giurgiutiu V 2007 Single mode
tuning effects on Lamb wave time
reversal with piezoelectric wafer active
sensors for structural health monitoring
Journal of Nondestructive Evaluation 26
123–134.
1041
ICCMS2016
FE MODELING OF SANDWICH BEAM WITH TWO-PLANE EDGE

DEBONDING OF PIEZOELECTRIC SHEAR ACTUATOR
VENKATA RAO K.1*, RAJA S. 2 and MUNIKENCHE GOWDA T.3
1
Mech. Engg. Dept., B. M. S. Evening College of Engg., Bangalore, India.
2
Structural Technologies Division, CSIR-National Aerospace Laboratories, Bangalore, India.
3
S. J. C. institute of Technology, Chickballapur, Karnataka, India.
Abstract: A novel finite element method based layerwise MODELING scheme is

proposed for a sandwich beam with two-plane edge debonded shear actuator
involving debonding from the top and bottom faces, which has not been addressed so
far. This paper investigates the effect of edge debonding of shear actuator on the
actuation authority of sandwich beam under extension actuation mechanism (EAM),
shear actuation mechanism (SAM) and hybrid actuation mechanism (HAM). Finite
element method based classical sandwich theory (CST) is adopted to capture the
damage mechanics involving edge debonding of shear actuator. Kinematics of
deformation of the sandwich beam is developed by employing Euler-Bernoulli’s beam
theory for the top and bottom faces and Timoshenko’s beam theory for the core. The
debonded sandwich beam is modelled by MODELING different debonded and
healthy regions individually and subsequently assembling them by imposing
displacement constraints. The numerical results establish the fact that the edge
debonding of shear actuator has notable influence on the actuation authority.
Keywords: Edge debonding; piezoelectric sandwich beam; coupled sandwich
beam element; piezoelectric shear actuator.
INTRODUCTION Bernoulli’s beam theory for the faces and

Timoshenko’s beam theory for the core.
Piezoelectric sandwich beam with embedded
Debonding of actuators is a common
shear actuator and surface bonded extension
problem, which needs to be addressed, while
actuators is proved to be most versatile class
designing the sandwich structures for the
of smart structures. A sandwich beam offers
applications such as active vibration control,
consistent performance as regards to the
shape control etc. Debonding of actuator
actuation authority and vibration control
leads to altered natural frequencies,
performance over a wide range of stiffness
introduction of local modes of vibration,
ratio (structure stiffness / actuator stiffness)
degraded actuation authority and active
and natural frequencies respectively. Finite
vibration control performance. Delamination
element method has extensively been
of composite structures has attracted the
employed to address the modeling issues.
attention of several researchers. Wang et al.
Two noded sandwich beam elements
(1982) investigated the free vibration
[Benjeddou et al., 1999 and Raja, 2003] have
behaviour of an isotropic beam with through-
been developed by employing Euler-
thickness delamination. Different
______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:kvrao771@yahoo.com 1042

Rao et al.
delaminated regions in the beam were theory and Timoshenko’s beam theory. Rao
assumed to undergo deformation freely et al., (2012) presented finite element
without any interaction between them. MODELING of sandwich beam with edge
Therefore the prediction regarding free debonded piezoelectric extension actuator
vibration behaviour off mid-plane from the face and edge debonded face from
delamination was not admissible physically. the shear actuator in the core. Experimental
Mujumdar and Suryanarayana, (1988) validation proved the authenticity of the
presented a model for delaminated beam, developed model. Numerical investigations
wherein the delaminated regions were were carried out to assess the effect of extent
constrained to undergo the same transverse of edge debonding under different types of
deformation, while they were allowed to actuations (EAM, SAM and SAM).
undergo axial deformation freely. Della and The sandwich beam with segmented
Shu, (2005) presented an analytical model extension and shear actuators (Figure 1) is
based on classical beam theory for a beam modelled by employing Euler-Bernoulli’s
with double delaminations. The beam with beam theory for the top and bottom faces and
two delaminated planes was modelled with Timoshenko’s beam theory for the core. The
five interconnected beams. Further, it was core consists of shear actuator of prescribed
considered that the thinnest delaminated length and the rest is filled with foam. The
layer was constrained by the other layers to shear actuator is considered to debond from
deform in a constrained mode. the inner surfaces of top and bottom faces as
shown in Figure 1 by red coloured boundary.
The debonded and healthy regions formed as
a result of debonding of shear actuator are
modelled individually and the same are
assembled by imposing constraints for
Figure 1. Piezoelectric sandwich beam
displacement continuity conditions.
Few researchers addressed the problem of
debonding of actuator from the host FINITE ELEMENT MODELING OF
structure. A delaminated piezoelectric SANDWICH BEAM WITH
composite laminate was modelled [Seeley PIEZOELECTRIC ACTUATORS
and Chattopadhyay 1999] with higher order Basic configuration of the sandwich
shear deformation and finite element penalty considered for the development of kinematics
method. The developed model was found to of deformation is shown in Figure 2. The
correlate well with the results from the displacements are u0 along the axis of the
conducted experiments. It was shown that the
sandwich, rotation of core due to shear
length of the debonded actuator was a critical
deformation ψ y , bending slope in the top and
factor and it introduced local and global
deformations, which in turn will have a bottom faces w0,x and deflection w0 .The
significant effect on the mode shapes and displacements and strains in the core, top
frequencies. A beam with debonding of face and bottom face are given in the
actuators/sensors was modelled [Sun and following.
Tong, 2002] for investigating the
longitudinal and transverse vibrations of the
beam by considering both classical beam
1043
Finite Element MODELING of Sandwich Beam with Two-Plane Edge Debonding of Piezoelectric Shear
Actuator
embedded shear actuators is developed by

employing Euler-Bernoulli’s beam theory for
the faces and Timoshenko’s beam theory for
the core. The nodal degrees of freedom
include, four mechanical degrees of freedom
Figure 2. Displacements in the sandwich ~e , w ~ e ) and three electrical
( u~ e , ψ
0 y
~ e and w
0 0 ,x
Core (c) The displacements and strains in the
core based on Timoshenko’s beam theory ~ ( a )e , φ
degrees of freedom ( φ ~ (b ) e and φ
~ ( c )e ).
1 1 1
with FSDT are
u x( c ) ( x, z,t ) = u0 ( x, t ) + z ψ y ( x, t ) , BEAM WITH EDGE DEBONDED
SHEAR ACTUATOR
w ( x, z,t ) = w0 ( x,t ) , (1)
(c )
Debonding of shear actuator from the top
ε x = u o ,x + z ψ y,x ,
face and bottom face creates several
(c ) ∂wo debonded and healthy regions. These regions
γ xz = +ψ y . (2)
∂x include (Figure 3) healthy portion of the
Top face (a): The expression for axial beam without actuators (region 1), debonded
displacement along the x-axis is derived portion of bottom face (region 2), below the
based on the continuity of displacements plane of debonding (POD*), debonded
between the core and top face. The portion of top face (region 3) above the plane
longitudinal displacement ( u0( a ) ) along x- of debonding (POD*), debonded portion of
axis, longitudinal displacement at any point shear actuator (region 4) and healthy portion
of the beam with healthy regions of actuators
through the depth ( u x( a ) ) and deflection (w) in
(region 5). All these regions have their axes
the top face are offset with respect to those of the adjacent
u0( a ) ( x, z,t ) = u0 ( x,t ) + z 3 ψ y ( x,t ) regions. This requires that the debonded
ha beam be modeled as five interconnected
− w0 ,x ( x ,t ), beams. These five regions are modeled
2
u x( a ) ( x, z,t ) = u0 ( x,t ) + z 3 ψ y ( x, t )
individually and are connected together by
enforcing displacement continuity
 h 
−  z − c  w0 ,x ( x , t ) , conditions. The displacement continuity
 2 conditions are as given in the following. The
w ( x, z, t ) = w0 ( x, t ) , (3) interface between region1andregion2is
represented asS1(1,2), region1-region3 as
The longitudinal strain at the x-axis ( ε m( a ) ),
S2(1, 3), region2-region5 as S3(2, 5),
longitudinal strain at any point through the region3-region5 as S4(3, 5) and region4-
thickness ( ε x( a ) ) and bending curvature ( ε (fa ) ) region5 as S5(4, 5).
in the top face are given by
h
ε m( a ) = u 0 ,x + z 3 ψ y,x − a w0 ,xx ,
2
 h 
ε x( a ) = u0 ,x + z 3ψ y,x −  z − c  w0 ,xx , Figure3.Regions in the debonded beam
 2
(a )
ε f = − wo,xx . (4) RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
A two noded piezoelectric sandwich beam
element with surface-bonded extension and
1044
Rao et al.
A sandwich beam with segmented extension

and shear actuators (Figure 1) is considered
for the numerical evaluations. The
dimensional details are, length of the beam,
L = 100 mm , distance of the centre of the
piezopatches from the left hand side end of
Figure 4. Deflection distributions (EAM)
the beam X p = 25mm , thickness of the top
face ha = 2mm , thickness of the bottom face
hb = 2mm , thickness of the core hc = 1mm
and length of the piezopatches L p = 30 mm .
The beam is subjected to EAM and SAM by Figure 5. Deflection distributions (SAM)
applying the electrical potentials ± 100V and
− 200V respectively on the extension and REFERENCES
shear actuators. Simultaneous application of Benjeddou A Trindade M A and Ohayon R
both EAM and SAM results in hybrid 1999 New shear actuated smart
actuation mechanism (HAM).Edge structure beam finite element AIAA
debonding of shear actuator is indicated as a Journal 37(3) 378-383.
percentage of its length. Further, the edge Della C and Shu D W 2005 Vibration of
debonding of shear actuator is introduced at beams with double delaminations
its left side end of shear actuator. The Journal of Sound and Vibration 282
sandwich beam with clamped-free boundary 919-935.
conditions is considered for the numerical Mujumdar P M and Suryanarayana S
evaluations. The properties of the materials 1988Flexural vibrations of beams with
given in (Benjeddou et al., 1997) are delaminations Journal of Sound and
employed. Bending deflection distributions Vibration 125(3) 441-461.
of the beam under EAM, SAM and HAM are Raja S 2003 Distributed Active vibration
evaluated for healthy and debonded beams control of laminated composite
with 16.6%, 33.3% and 50% edge debonding sandwich beams, plates and shells Ph.D
of shear actuator. Thesis -Department of Aerospace
Engineering Indian Institute of
These deflection distributions are plotted in Technology Kharagpur India.
Figure 4 for EAM, Figure5 for SAM. In all Rao K V Raja S and Gowda T M K
these cases, increase in the extent of edge 2014Finite Element Modeling and
debonding resulted in decrease in actuation Bending Analysis of Piezoelectric
authority. The percentages of reduction in Sandwich Beam with Debonded
deflections of the beam with 50% edge Actuators Smart Structures and
debonded shear actuator are 23%, 16.4% and Systems13 55-80.
22.6% with respect to those of healthy beam Seeley C E and Chattopadhyay A 1999
respectively for EAM, SAM and HAM. Modeling of adaptive composites
including debonding International
Journal of Solids and Structures
36(12)1823-1843.
Sun D and Tong L 2002 Control stability
analysis of smart beams with debonded
1045
Finite Element MODELING of Sandwich Beam with Two-Plane Edge Debonding of Piezoelectric Shear
Actuator
piezoelelctric actuator layer AIAA

Journal 40(9) 1852-1859.
1046
ICCMS2016
CRITICAL BUCKLING ANALYSIS OF SPHERICAL SHELL

DESAI D. J.1*, CHAUHAN N. H.1 and DOIPHODE G. S.2
1
M. S. Patel, Department of Civil Engineering, CSPIT, Charusat, Anand, Gujarat, India.
2
Department of Applied Mechanics, MS University, Vadodara, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: Critical Buckling Analysis under transverse loading is considered here for
thin spherical shells with clamped boundary conditions, due to its shape sensitivity
based uncertainty aspects. Even though, it have been majorly utilized in practical field
of structural engineering for large spanning structures under cantilevered action or in
multi-spanning aspects. The load resistance mechanism plays important role during
loading is the main criterion in the present work. In this work thin shell with steel
material is utilized where critical buckling load within elastic limit is worked out and
it is compared with literature based Classical Buckling Load. Various H/D ratios are
considered here for understanding the cumulative buckling behaviour associated with
deformation aspect. The economical stiffeners also considered with shell thickness for
dual behaviour along Meridional directions to raise transverse load carrying capacity.
Optimum numbers of stiffeners are worked out with various cross sectional properties
of rolled steel sections along meridian and parallel circle directions. The numbers of
stiffeners are decided as per buckling behaviour of each shell. Commercial code SAP
2000 is also used to calculate the internal in-plane stresses for various loading with
stiffened and unstiffened criterion. Various plots are drawn for Buckling load,
stresses, crown deflections for various H/D ratios.
Keywords: Spherical shell; Buckling; Stiffeners; In-plane stresses
INTRODUCTION structure as Arch (Figure1), which having

same cross-section with minor reinforcement
In the recent years, due to advancement in
provision. Under transverse loading the key
structural engineering on the part of material
observation found that beam structures
research associated with mathematics recent
deflect with sagging bending moment at
structural scientist had found hidden strength
centre while arch tends to flatten up but by
of different materials. It is utmost
providing hinge support at ends, it restores
requirement of structural society to have
the flattering aspect. In the sense it provides
column less construction, which provides a
axial reaction at supports, produces hogging
large space under curved roof that gives
moment at any section. Algebraically at any
miscellaneous advantages. In this connection
section in beam or an arch the net moment
it is necessary to study spherical shells under
tremendously reduces which proves that with
transverse loading.
same loading same spanning an Arch needs
Shell structures are the structures which with lesser depth compared to Beam.
stand transverse loading may be due to self-
By keeping in mind above aspect Structural
weight or loading externally applied on it.
scientist start exploring the axial strength of
Considering a simple comparison of 1-D
various structural material even it is weaker
plane structure as Beam and 1-D Curved
in other i.e., Bending, Shear and Torsion etc.,
*Author for Correspondence Email: dimple.desai124@gmail.com 1047

Desai et al.
Due to this reason Shell structural element (ISLB150) and Tube-section (ISB 167.6 x
proved to be much Stiffer, Stronger and most 115 x 8.0). Figure 2 & 3 represents the
economical compared to other Voluminous geometry of unstiffened and stiffened
Structural elements. But analysis of shell spherical shell in SAP 2000 respectively.
structures presents a challenge because their
formulation may become clumsy and their
behaviour can be unpredictable with respect
to the geometry or support conditions.
Figure 2..Geometry of Unstiffened

Spherical Shell (L=20m, H=2m and
t=0.08m)
Figure 1. Beam and 1-Hinged

Parabolic Arch
DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS
Using SAP 2000, the buckling load of thin
spherical shell is calculated when the shells
are subjected to externally applied load. For
the buckling of unstiffened and stiffened
spherical shell the various H/D ratio are
considered. Table 1 shows the different cases
of unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell Figure 3.Geometry of Stiffened
with their different rise and span value. Spherical Shell with C-section Stiffener
Table 1 Cases for span and rise of (L=20m, H=2m and t=0.08)
unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell
Cases Span (m) Rise (m)
A 20 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 Table 2 shows Buckling load factor for mode
1 to 6. The 1st mode value is considered for
B 30 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 buckling load as it gives critical value for
C 40 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell.
D 45 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 Figure 4 and 5 shows the 1st buckling mode
E 50 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5,4,4.5, 5 of unstiffened and stiffened spherical shell.
Figures 6 to 10 shows the Comparison of
For stiffened spherical shell, three hot-rolled unstiffened spherical shell and stiffened
section is used as stiffener profile which is spherical shell having C-section, I-section
based on the Indian Standard (SP-6). The and Tube-section stiffener profile with
sections are C-section (ISLC300), I-section different H/D ratio.
1048
Critical Buckling Analysis of Spherical Shell
4000
Buckling Load (kN)

3000
2000
1000
0
1/15 1/12 1/10 1/8.5 1/7.5 1/6.67 1/6
H/D Ratio
Figure 7.H/D v/s Buckling load, L=30m

and t=0.08m
Figure 4. 1st Buckling mode of 1500
Buckling Load (kN)

Unstiffened Spherical shell (L=20m, 1200
H=2m and t=0.08m)
900
600
300
0
1/20 1/16 1/13.31/11.4 1/10 1/8.8 1/8
H/D Ratio
Figure 8.H/D v/s Buckling load, L=40m and

t=0.08m
1000
Buckling Load (kN)
800
600
400
200
Figure 5.1st Buckling mode of Stiffened 0

1/22.5 1/18 1/15 1/12.81/11.2 1/10 1/9
Spherical Shell with C-section Stiffener H/D Ratio
(L=20m, H=2m and t=0.08m) Figure 9.H/D v/s Buckling load, L=45m and
t=0.08m
UNSTIFFENED SPHERICAL SHELL
I-SECTION STIFFENER
18000 TUBE-SECTION STIFFENER
C-SECTION STIFFENER 600
16000
Buckling Load (kN)
500
Buckling Load (kN)
14000
12000 400
10000
300
8000
6000 200
4000
100
2000
0 0
1/10 1/8 1/6.6 1/5.7 1/5 1/4.4 1/4 1/25 1/20 1/16.61/14.21/12.51/11.1 1/10
H/D Ratio H/D Ratio
Figure 6. H/D v/s Buckling load, L=20m Figure 10.H/D v/s Buckling load, L=50m
and t=0.08m and t=0.08m
1049
Desai et al.
CONCLUSION Magnucki K and Jasion P 2015 Theoretical

investigation of the strength and stability
1. The geometrical variation in shell of special pseudospherical shells under
structures highlights that the lower external pressure Journal of thin-walled
values gives us a quite larger value of Structures
buckling load due to its stiffer and Timoshenko S P and Gere J M 1961 Theory
stronger behaviour. It is observed also of Elastic Stability McGraw-Hill Book
due to stiffer behaviour material get Co. New York110-124
confined gives more value tensed to
material failure. The larger value of Timoshenko S P (1989) Theory of Plates and
H/D ratio gives us more instability Shells McGraw-Hill Book Co. New
aspect due to side-line the material York 110-124
from line of action of forces.
2. The load carrying capacity of larger
H/D ratios needs here various types of
stiffeners, which convert the complete
geometrical shell form from instable to
stable one. It also consecutively raises
the loading capacity.
3. The Elastic Critical buckling load is
approximately raised by 45-50% by
providing stiffeners in shell surface
along the meridians and parallel circles.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The research work described in this
manuscript is part of Dissertation work of the
first author and carried out in the Department
of Civil Engineering, Charusat, Changa,
Anand, Gujarat.
REFERENCES
Jadhav H S and Patil A S 2013 Parametric

Study of Double Layer Steel Dome with
Reference to Span to Height Ratio
International Journal of Science and
Research (IJSR), 2
Khakina P N Mohammed A I Zhu E Zhou H
and Moula B H 2011 Effect of the
Rise/Span Ratio of Spherical Cap Shell
on the Buckling Load International
Scholarly and Scientific Research &
Innovation 5
Khakina P N 2013 Buckling Load of Thin
Spherical Shells Based on the Theorem
of Work and Energy International
Journal of Engineering and Technology
5.
1050
ICCMS2016
IMPACT OF IRREGULARITY ON THE PROPAGATION BEHAVIOR OF

SURFACE WAVE IN A LAYERED PIEZOELECTRIC STRUCTURE
SINGH A. K., KUMAR S.* and MAHTO S.
Department of Applied Mathematics, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, India.
Abstract: A mathematical model has been developed to investigate the propagation

behavior of Love-type wave in a piezoelectric layer with parabolic irregularity,
perfectly bonded to an isotropic elastic half-space. An analytical treatment has been
employed to establish the closed form expression of the dispersion relation for both
the cases of electrically open condition and electrically short condition. The crux of
the study lies in the fact that there is a sound impact of wave number, size of
irregularity and piezoelectric constant of the irregular piezoelectric layer on the phase
velocity of Love-type wave. The emphatic influence of these affecting parameters on
the phase velocity of Love-type wave has been traced out by means of numerical
computation and graphical demonstration. It is worth mentioning that the size of
irregularity diminishes the phase velocity of Love-type wave substantially. Classical
Love wave equation has been recovered for both the electrical conditions as the
limiting case when both the media are elastic and the interface between them is
regular.
Keywords: Love wave; piezoelectricity; irregularity; phase velocity; wave
number.
INTRODUCTION Love waves in a piezoelectric stratum

Surface waves are greatly influenced by the overlying an isotropic substrate considering a
presence of irregular boundary in the material parabolic form of irregularity at the interface.
medium. In any realistic model, it is
STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM
supposed that the boundary of the layer of the
material medium is not perfectly plane rather Let us consider an irregular piezoelectric
irregular in nature. Also, the shape of layer of finite thickness ( H ) lying over an
irregular boundary may be arbitrary. These isotropic elastic half-space. We choose a
non-planar boundaries in the material Cartesian co-ordinate system in such a way
medium must be taken into consideration for that y-axis is in the direction of Love-type
a more accurate modeling procedures and a wave propagating along the interface
between the layer and the lower semi-infinite
better interpretation of the results. Motivated
medium and x − axis is in positive direction
by these pragmatic notions, the present study pointing vertically downwards. Let us assume
has been taken into consideration. the irregularity in the form of a parabola with
Recent researches [Singh et al., 2014; Singh the span 2s and depth (size) H ′ below the
et al., 2015] placed emphasis on the problems interface x = 0 with origin O placed at the
involving irregular boundaries in distinct middle point as depicted in Figure 1. The
media. Up to now, no attempt has been made source of the disturbance is placed on
positive x − axis at a distance d ( > H ′ ) from
by any author to study the propagation of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ksantan.ism@gmail.com 1051

Singh et al.
the origin. Let us assume that the The only non-vanishing equation of motion
piezoelectric material is polarized in for the upper irregular piezoelectric layer is
z − direction. given as (Liu et al., 2001)
∂ 2 w1 ∂ 2 w1 1 ∂ 2 w1 
+ 2 − 2 2 = 0, 
∂x 2
∂y c1 ∂t 
 (3)
∂ φ1 ∂ φ1 1 e15 ∂ w1
2 2 2
+ − = 0.
∂x 2 ∂y 2 c12 ε11 ∂t 2 
c44  e2 
where=
c1 ,=
c44  c44 + 15  and c1 is the
ρ1  ε11 
shear wave velocity in the irregular piezoelectric
layer.
Figure 1. Geometry of the problem with
parabolic irregularity GOVERNING EQUATION OF
The equation of the interface containing MOTION FOR THE LOWER
parabolic irregularity is defined as ISOTROPIC ELASTIC HALF-SPACE
0 for | y |> s The only existing equation of motion for
 isotropic half-space is (Liu et al., 2001)
= h ( y )   y2 
x ε= (1)
∂ 2 w2 ∂ 2 w2 1 ∂ 2 w2
 H ′ 1 − s 2  for | y |≤ s, + − = 0, (4)
   ∂x 2 ∂y 2 c22 ∂t 2
where ε is a small positive number such µ2

Where c2 = is the shear wave velocity in
=
that ε H ′ 2s << 1 and is called perturbation ρ2
parameter. the isotropic half-space.
For Love-type wave propagating in the
positive direction of y-axis and causing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
displacement in the z − direction only, we The electrical boundary conditions at the free
shall assume surface i.e. at x = − H is
u=1 v=1 0, u2= v2= 0, w=1 w1 ( x, y, t ) , Dx(1) (− H , y ) =
0 (Open condition) (5)
(2)
= 2 ( x, y , t ) , and φ1 φ1 ( x, y , t ) .
w2 w=
φ1 (− H , y ) =
0 (Short condition) (6)
where ( u1 , v1 , w1 ) are the mechanical
The mechanical traction-free condition at
displacement components for the upper x = − H is
irregular piezoelectric layer
and ( u2 , v2 , w2 ) are the displacement τ zx(1) (− H , y ) =
0. (7)
components for the lower isotropic elastic The continuous conditions at the irregular
half-space in x, y and z directions
interface i.e. at x = ε h ( y ) are
respectively.
w1 = w2 (8)
GOVERNING EQUATION OF φ1 = 0 (9)
MOTION FOR THE UPPER τ zx(1) = τ zx(2) (10)
IRREGULAR PIEZOELECTRIC
LAYER Thus, Eqs. (3)-(10) together give complete
mathematical model for the problem.
1052
Impact of Irregularity on The Propagation Behaviour of Surface Wave in A Layered Piezoelectric
Structure
SOLUTION OF THE PROBLEM For the isotropic half- space [Gubbins, 1990]
Following the perturbation technique µ2 = 15.05 ×1010 N/m 2 , ρ 2 =
12.666×103 kg/m3 .
[Eringen and Samuels, 1959; Chattopadhyay Unless otherwise stated, H ′ H = 0.1.
and Singh, 2012], the dispersion equation for
Love-type wave propagating in a 1.6
1: e15=17 C/m2
piezoelectric layer with a parabolic 1.5

2: e15=21 C/m2
3: e15=25 C/m2
irregularity overlying an isotropic half-space
for electrically open case is obtained as 1.4 1
2
3
 4 H ′ { χ1ξ1 + χ 2ξ 2 + χ3ξ3 } 
1
c/c
(αβ ′ − α ′β ) 1 −
1.3
=0, (11)
 3π ( βγ ′ )  1.2
and for electrically short case is given by
{ }
1.1
 4 H ′ χ ′ξ ′ + χ ′ξ ′ + χ ′ξ ′ 
( )
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
α1′β 2′ − α 2′β1′ 1 − =

1 1 2 2 3 3 kH
3π ( X )  0, (12)
Figure 3. Variation of ( c / c1 ) against
 
where expressions in Eqs. (11) and (12) are ( kH ) for different values of ( e15 ) in case
provided in Appendix A and Appendix B. of electrically open condition.
When H ′ = 0 and e15 = 0, then Eqs. (11)
and (12) reduce to 1: H'/H=0.0
1.45 2: H'/H=0.15
3: H'/H=0.30
  c 2    c2   c2  1.4
tan   2 − 1kH  = µ2 1 − 2  c44  2 − 1 , 1.35

1
2
  c1    c2   c1 
3
1
c/c
1.3
which is the classical Love wave equation. 1.25
1.2
1.15
1.6
1: H'/H=0.0 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8
2: H'/H=0.15 kH
1.5
3: H'/H=0.30
1.4
1
Figure 4. Variation of ( c / c1 ) against
2
( kH ) for different values of ( H ′ / H ) in

3
1
c/c
1.3
1.2
case of electrically short condition.
1.1
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 1: e15=17 C/m2

kH 1.13
2: e15=21 C/m2
Figure 2. Variation of ( c / c1 ) against 1.12 3: e15=25 C/m2
( kH ) for different values of ( H ′ / H ) in

1.11 1
2
3
1
1.1
c/c
case of electrically open condition. 1.09
1.08
NUMERICAL CALCULATIONS 1.07
AND DISCUSSION 1.06

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
kH
For numerical computation, following data
have been considered: Figure 5. Variation of ( c / c1 ) against
For piezoelectric layer (Liu et al.,
2001)
( kH ) for different values of ( e15 ) in case
of electrically short condition.
=
e15 17.0 C/m 2=, ε11 277.0 ×10−10 C2 /Nm 2 ,
2.30 ×1010 N/m 2 , ρ1 =
c44 = 7.50 × 103 kg/m3 .
1053
Singh et al.
Numerical computation and graphical Eringen A C and Samuels C J 1959 Impact

demonstration of dispersion curve delineating and moving loads on a slightly curved
the variation of dimensionless phase elastic half-space Journal of Applied
velocity ( c / c1 ) against dimensionless wave Mechanics 26 491–498.
number ( kH ) for different values of size of Gubbins D 1990 Seismology and Plate
Tectonics Cambridge University Press
irregularity ( H ′ / H ) and piezoelectric Cambridge.
constant ( e15 ) has been exhibited in Figures 2 Liu H Wang Z K and Wang T J 2001 Effect
to 5. In each of these figures, it is revealed of initial stress on the propagation
that phase velocity of Love-type wave behavior of Love waves in a layered
decreases with an increase in wave number. piezoelectric structure International
Figures 2 and 4 study the influence of size of Journal of Solids and Structures 38 37-
irregularity on the dispersion curves 51.
corresponding to the case of electrically open
Singh A K Kumar S and Chattopadhyay A
and short conditions respectively. Both these
2014 Effect of irregularity and
figures signify that phase velocity of Love-
heterogeneity on the stresses produced
type wave steps down with an increment in
due to a normal moving load on a rough
the size of irregularity. The similar impact of
monoclinic half-space Meccanica 49
piezoelectric constant on the phase velocity
2861-2878.
of Love-type wave has been observed in
Figures 3 and 5 for both the cases. Singh A K Kumar S and Chattopadhyay A
2015 Love-type wave propagation in a
CONCLUSIONS piezoelectric structure with irregularity
1. Phase velocity of Love-type wave Science 89 35-60.
starts from a particular value, which
falls off with rise in wave number and APPENDIX A: EXPRESSIONS FOR
finally tends to its minimum value for
a specific wave number.
OPEN CASE
2. As the size of irregularity increases, (1 + e2kH ) , β ′ =
α = ( e15 ε11 ) , β = ke15 (1 − e 2 kH ) ,
phase velocity of Love-type wave
decreases for both the cases of ( )
α ′ =c44 P1 tan P1 H − µ2 P2 , P1 =kp1 , P2 =kp2 ,
electrically open condition and p1 = ( c 2 c12 ) − 1, p2 = (1 − c 2 c22 ).
electrically short condition.
3. It can be remarkably quoted that an APPENDIX B: EXPRESSIONS FOR
increase in the value of piezoelectric
constant of the irregular piezoelectric SHORT CASE
− µ2 P2 + ( ke152 ε11 )(1 − e− kH sec PH 1 ) ,

layer disfavors the phase velocity of
=α1′ c44 P1 tan PH 1

Love-type wave in both electrically
open and electrically short conditions. β1′ = ke15 ( 2 − ekH sec PH − e− kH sec PH 1 ) ,

 1
REFERENCES = α 2′ c44e− kH P1 cos ecPH 1 − c44 P1 cot PH1 − µ2 P2 + ( ke152 ε11 )  ,

Chattopadhyay A and Singh A K 2012
1 (e
β 2′ c44 ( ε11 e15 ) P1 cos ecPH − ekH ) + 2ke15  .
− kH
Propagation of magnetoelastic= shear
waves in an irregular self-reinforced
layer Journal of Engineering
Mathematics 75 139-155.
1054
ICCMS2016
DETECTION OF DAMAGE IN SURFACE-MOUNTED PZT

TRANSDUCERS USING VOLTAGE AMPLITUDE SPECTRUM
ASHWIN U.1,2*, SATHYANARAYANA C. N.2 and RAJA S.2
1
Dept. of Mechanical Engg., VTU, Belgaum , India.
2
Structural Technologies Division, CSIR-NAL, Bangalore, India.
Abstract: In the present paper, a monitoring scheme based on VAS is proposed to

monitor health of the surface-mounted piezoelectric transducers. VAS is unique for an
actuator-sensor pair and is a function of transducers’ bonded area. In case of breakage
or debond, the bonded area of transducer decreases, thereby shifting VAS to a higher
frequency range. Numerical and experimental studies are presented to highlight
sensitivity and efficacy of the proposed scheme. Further in presence of damage in the
structure (flat panel), VAS conform no shift in the frequency, thereby isolating the
detection of transducer degradations from structural damage.
Keywords: Structural Health Monitoring; Piezoelectric Transducer Damage;
Spectral Finite Element; Voltage Amplitude Spectrum
INTRODUCTION transducers, even when structural damages

In literatures various attempts on detecting are present in the structure. Numerical and
health of the transducers using various experimental results are presented to validate
parameters such as capacitance [Park, 2006], the proposed scheme.
admittance [Park, 2006; Overly, 2009], and
VOLTAGE AMPLITUDE SPECTRUM
impedance [Seungee, 2009] have been made.
Further using the resonance of the transducer In Eq. 1, VAS as discussed by Raghavan and
[Lanzara, 2009; Wang 2008] in both Cesnik (2005) is written for an actuator-
perfectly and debond or breakage conditions sensor pair (Figure 1) in an antisymmetric
have also been made. Other techniques such Lamb wave field is written, where τ 0 is the
as examining for linear reciprocity of wave traction force of uniform magnitude acting
propagation between pair of transducers; along the edges of the piezoelectric emitter;
segmenting sensors into parts to check E s , h s , d 31 and ν s are the Youngs modulus,
debond through their voltage output have also thickness, piezoelectric strain constant and
been made. Poisson’s ratio of the sensor; µ is the shear
modulus of the plate on which the
In the present paper a transducer health
transducers are mounted; s 1 , s 2 , a 1 and a 2 are
monitoring scheme based on Voltage
the length and breadth of the sensor and
Amplitude Spectrum (VAS) [Giurgiutiu
2005; Raghavan 2005; Scalea 2007] has been actuator, respectively; ξ is the wavenumber;
proposed for monitoring debond and (x c ,y c ) is the location of the sensor with
breakage conditions of transducers. The respect to actuator; c L , c T are the
scheme has also been verified for longitudinal, transverse wave velocities; f is
highlighting the health of condition of the frequency of the propagating wave;
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ashwin@nal.res.in 1055

Ashwin et al *
4π 2 f 2
α2
= cL2
−ξ2 and β2
= 4π 2 f 2
cT2
−ξ2 ; value is utilized to detect damage in the
transducers.
A ( ξ ) ξβ ξ + β
N= 2 2
(
sin ( α2h ) cos) ( )βh
2 ,
( )
ξ 2 − β sin ( α2h ) cos
DA ( ξ ) = 2 2
( ) + 4ξ αβ cos ( ) sin ( ) and
βh
2
2 αh
2
βh
2
h is the thickness of the plate.
∑ξ πµτ −8 0 Es hs d31 N A (ξ )
VAS ( f ) = ei 2π ft
s1s2 (1−ν s ) (ξ )2 D′ (ξ )
A
π
2
sin (ξ a1 cos γ ) sin (ξ a2 sin γ ) sin (ξ s1 cos γ ) sin (ξ s2 sin γ )
×
∫
0
sin 2 2γ
(1)
−iξ ( xc cos γ + yc sin γ )

×e dγ
Figure 2. Shift of VAS to higher

frequency value on degradation of
transducer
INFLUENCE OF TRANSDUCER
Figure 1. Actuator – sensor pair surface DIMENSIONS ON VAS
mounted onto a plate
A plate structure of configuration shown in
From Eq. 1, it may be noted that the VAS figure 3 is considered for the study, where the
depends on the bonded area of the thickness of the plate and transducers are
transducers (actuator a 1 ×a 2 and sensor s 1 ×s 2 ) 1.5mm and 0.5mm, respectively. The
and reducing the in-plane dimensions of the actuators E 1 and E 2 are surface-mounted onto
transducers shifts the peak amplitude of the the top and bottom surface of the plate and
VAS to a higher frequency value. In case of the sensors R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 are mounted
occurrence of breakage or debond, the only on the top surface of the plate. The
bonded area of the transducer will also actuators are actuated in A0 mode using 3.5
decrease. cycles amplitude modulated signal. Figure 4
shows the influence of actuator dimensions
Therefore in the event of breakage or debond
on the VAS, where the sensors R 2 and R 3
of the transducers, the following observations
shows a shift the VAS to higher frequency
as shown in Figure 2 are made.
value.
1. The peak amplitude of the VAS in case
of unhealthy actuator-sensor pair occurs
at a higher frequency value (f + ∆f).
2. A reduction in amplitude (∆A) is
observed in the VAS of the unhealthy
actuator sensor pair at a frequency
where peak VAS of healthy actuator
sensor pair occurs.
The former observation, i.e. the breakage or
debond shifts the VAS to a higher frequency
1056
Detection of Damage in Surface-Mounted PZT Transducers using Voltage Amplitude Spectrum
Figure 3. Plate with actuators surface- mounted on both top and bottom surface
Figure 4. Influence of transducer dimensions on VAS
Figure 5. Influence of structural damage on VAS (E 1,2 -R 1 )
INFLUENCE OF STRUCTURAL between E1,2 and R1, alternatively. The

DAMAGE ON VAS result obtained in terms of VAS is shown in
This case has been studied by considering the figure 5, which shows no shifts in VAS to
plate shown in figure 3, where damages in higher frequency value. Thus, the study
the form of cutouts of size 5×6.6 mm2 and presented verifies that the transducer fault
10×6.6 mm2 have been introduced mid-way detection scheme is well isolated from the
1057
Ashwin et al *
presence of structural damages in the Vibration and Acoustics-Transactions of

structure. the ASME 128 469-476.
CONCLUSION Park S Park G Yun C B and Farrar C R 2009

Sensor Self-diagnosis Using a Modified
A transducer health monitoring scheme based Impedence Model for Active Sensing-
on Voltage Amplitude Spectrum (VAS) has based Structural Health Monitoring
been presented. The proposed scheme was Structural Health Monitoring 8(1) 071-
verified for detected of breakage for various 82.
breakage conditions in the actuator. Further, Raghavan A and Cesnik C E S 2005 Finite-
the scheme has also been shown to be dimensional piezoelectric transducer
unaltered when structural damages were modeling for guided wave based
introduced in the structure. The proposed structural health monitoring Smart
scheme has been verified numerically and Materials & Structures 14 1448-1461.
experimentally. Wang D W and Yin C C Resonance-based
bonding detection for piezoelectric fiber
REFERENCES composites Proc. SPIE 7375 ICEM
2008: International Conference on
Di Scalea F L Matt H and Bartoli I 2007 The Experimental Mechanics 73755X;
response of rectangular piezoelectric doi:10.1117/12.839360.
sensors to Rayleigh and Lamb ultrasonic
waves Journal of the Acoustical Society
of America 1211 75-187 2007.
Giurgiutiu V 2005 Tuned lamb wave
excitation and detection with
piezoelectric wafer active sensors for
structural health monitoring Journal of
Lanzara G Yoon Y Kim Y and Chang F K
2009 Influence of Interface Degradation
on the Performance of Piezoelectric
Actuators Journal of Intelligent Material
Systems and Structures 20 1699-1710.
Overly T G Park G Farinholt K M and Farrar
C R 2009 Piezoelectric Active-Sensor
Diagnostics and Validation Using
Instantaneous Baseline Data IEEE
Sensors Journal 9 1414-1421.
Park G Farrar C R di Scalea F L and Coccia
S 2006 Performance assessment and
validation of piezoelectric active-sensors
in structural health monitoring Smart
Materials & Structures 15 1673-1683.
Park G Farrar C R Rutherford A C and
Robertson A N 2006 Piezoelectric active
sensor self-diagnostics using electrical
admittance measurements Journal of
1058
ICCMS2016
MAGNETICALLY COUPLED BROAD BAND PIEZOELECTRIC

ENERGY HARVESTING
MALAJI P. V.* and ALI S. F.
Department of Applied Mechanics, IIT Madras, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Vibration energy harvesting with multiple beams in a single device is one
of the way to harvest enough power at wider frequencies for sensors. The presence of
magnetic force between beams may change the performance of the overall system.
This paper studies a simple case of two beams in coupled magnetically is analyzed for
piezoelectric broadband energy harvesting under low frequency excitation. The effect
of magnets and their directions on bandwidth and magnitude of power are analyzed.
The numerical analysis shows that the magnetic coupling increase band width.
Keywords: multiple beams; magnetically coupled; energy harvesting.
INTRODUCTION produce energy at resonance frequency, as

they are very sensitive to excitation
On hand information of all the things around
frequency. Power harvested can be reduced
the smart cities will be an absolute necessity.
by high extent with a slight uncertainty or
This needs millions of sensors to be deployed
mismatch between the host vibrating
in smart cities measuring health of structures,
frequency and the natural frequency of the
weather data, traffic data and many more.
harvester. [Ali et al. 2010]. This challenge
Most of the sensors have to work in remote
encouraged many researchers to look out
places and continuously, where supply of
alternate solution to increase the operating
continuous power will be a difficult affair.
frequency range of harvesters by using
with the development in the technology low
multiple harvesters with different
power remote sensors looks to be feasible.
dimensions.
Challenge lies in powering these sensors
through and then disposal of these millions of A multi frequency harvester with an array of
batteries, which is a huge environmental piezoelectric beam harvesters of different
concern. Reliable, battery-less, self powered lengths to harvest power at various
sensor nodes are attractive in such cases due frequencies was developed [Shahruz 2006].
to its maintenance-free, environment friendly Malaji (2015) investigated Multiple
nature. Energy harvesting technology that harvesters with mistuning and coupling for
taps energy from the ambient sources to broad band harvesting. A Duffing oscillator
power such miniature sensors and make them bistable configuration whose large-amplitude
self-sustaining. Therefore, energy harvesting periodic oscillations can be used as an
has the potential to pave a way to low effective way to harvest vibration energy was
powered self sustaining replacing battery demonstrated by Erturk and Inman (2011).
powered sensors for various wireless Stanton et al. (2010) investigated single
operations. external magnet bistable harvester. Tang and
Yang (2012) analyzed nonlinear harvester
Models for many kinds of linear harvesters to
with magnetic oscillator, they considered two
generate electrical energy have been
beams one of which is oscillator and other is
developed [Glynne et al. 2003 and Williams
harvester. They found an increase of power
et al. 1995]. Linear harvesters can only
and bandwidth. The inverted cantilever type
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:pradeepmalaji@gmail.com 1059

Malaji and Ali
harvester with tip mass to exploit buckling

was investigated by Friswell et al. (2012).
Combination above two methods for broad
band energy harvesting have also been
developed. Zhou et al. (2015) investigated the
doubly nonlinear magnetically coupled
harvesters, with appropriate distance between
harvesters broadband performance was
obtained.
In this present work, a magnetically coupled
two piezoelectric beam harvester system is Figure 1. Schematic diagram
modelled analytically and is numerically
analyzed for harmonic excitation. The effect
of magnets and their directions on bandwidth
and magnitude is analyzed. With certain
magnet direction the bandwidth of harvesters
can be enhanced.
MATHEMATICAL MODEL
Figure 1 shows the schematic diagram of
magnetically coupled harvester. There is an
interactive repulsive force between two
coupled harvesters induced by endmost
magnets. Under base excitation, the
electromechanical equation of motion of the Figure 2. Magnet positions
system is given by;
m1x1 + c1 x1 + k1 x1 − θ v1 + F21 − F31 − F41 =
−m1xg Magnets are considered to be as point
m2 x2 + c2 x2 + k2 x2 − θ v2 − F21 − F32 − F42 =
−m2 xg dipoles, the vector from centre of magnet
dipoles are given as;
 Λ Λ
v
C p v1 + 1 + θ 
x1 =
0 r 21 = (d1 + x1 − x2 ) e x + [ L(1 − cos(δ1 )) − L(1 − cos(δ 2 ))] e z
R  Λ Λ
v2 r 31 ( x1 ) e x + [ −d 2 − L(1 − cos(δ1 ))] e z

=
C p v2 + + θ 
x2 =
0 (1)  Λ Λ
R r 41= (d1 + x1 ) e x + [ −d 2 − L(1 − cos(δ1 ))] e z
Where x g is the base displacement. m 1 ,  Λ Λ
m 2 ,c 1 ,c 2 ,k 1 ,k 2 ,x 1 and x 2 are equivalent mass, r 32 = (−d1 − x1 ) e x + [ −d 2 − L(1 − cos(δ1 ))] e z
damping , stiffness and tip displacement  Λ Λ
respectively. F 21 ,F 31 ,F 41 ,F 42 and F 32 are r 42 = (− x1 ) e x + [ −d 2 − L(1 − cos(δ1 ))] e z (3)
magnetic forces in the system. Cp, R, Ɵ are The vector sum of all macroscopic magnetic
the equivalent capacitance, load resistance moments within the ferromagnetic material
and equivalent electromechanical coupling is;
coefficient of harvester. Br
M= (4)
Figure 2 illustrate the detailed relative µ0
positions of the magnets. The approximate The magnetic moment vectors can be written
value of angle of inclination is given as; as;
x Λ Λ
δ = arcsin   =
(2) µ1 M 1V1 cos(δ1 ) e x − M 1V1 sin(δ1 ) e z
L  
1060
Magnetically Coupled Broad Band Piezoelectric Energy Harvesting
Λ Λ with 0.7g base excitation is carried out. The

µ2 =
− M 2V2 cos(δ 2 ) e x − M 2V2 sin(δ 2 ) e z
distance between magnets d 1 =25mm and
Λ
µ3 = M 3V3 e x d 2 =16mm was considered for magnetically
Λ
coupled harvesters. The moving and fixed
µ4 = − M 4V4 e x (5) cylindrical magnets of size 8mm x 4mm and
Where V magnet volume. 10mm x 5mm respectively are considered.
The potential energy of the magnet is; The other parameter values are listed in Table
µ 0 µi µ j 1. Length of each beam is 100mm.
U = (6)
2π r
3
Figure 3 shows the power curves for linear
The magnetic force is given by harvesters where a peak power at resonance
dU can be observed with lesser bandwidth.
F = (7)
dr Magnetically coupled harvesters shows wider
bandwidth with reduced power output and
NUMERICAL RESULTS shift in peak power frequency as shown in
Numerical analysis for the system with Figure 4 and 5 with different orientations of
forward and reverse sweep frequency sweep fixed magnets.
2 1
10 10
Forward X: 14
X: 19.4
X: 15.2 Backward Y: 8.365
1 Y: 6.813
10 Y: 35.46
0
Power mW(P1)
Power mW(P1)
10
0
10
-1
-1 10
10
Forward
-2
Backward
10 -2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Frequency Hz Frequency Hz
2
10 2
10
Forward X: 14
X: 13.6
1
Y: 60.98 Backward Y: 85.12
10 1
10
Power mW(P2)
Power mW(P2)
0 0
10 10
-1 -1
10 10
Forward
Backward
-2 -2
10 10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Frequncy Hz Frequncy Hz
Figure 3. Linear PEH Figure 4. Magnetically coupled PEH

(Fixed magnets in opposite direction with
respective moving magnets)
Table 1. Parameter values
m(gm) K(N/m) c(Ns/m) Ɵ(N/V3) Cp(F) R(Ω) B r (T)

Harvester 1 8.167 64.9 0.017 -1.7e-4 11.30e-9 1e6 1.1
Harvester 2 9.177 64.9 0.015 -1.7e-4 11.30e-9 1e6 1.1
1061
Malaji and Ali
2
10 coupling Journal of Sound and
X: 14.7
Vibration 330 2339–2353.
1 Y: 41.52
10
Friswell M I Ali S F Bilgen O Adhikari S
Power mW(P1)
0
Lees A W and Litak G 2012 Non-linear
10
piezoelectric vibration energy
-1
harvesting from a vertical cantilever
10
Forward beam with tip mass Journal of
Backward
-2
10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 Structures 23 1505–1521.
Frequency Hz
2 Glynne-Jones P Tudor M J Beeby S P and
10
White N M 2004 An electromagnetic,
X: 14.8
1
10
Y: 44.34 vibration-powered generator for
intelligent sensor systems Sensors and
Power mW(P2)
0
10
Actuators-A: Physical 110 344–349.
Malaji P and Ali S 2015 Analysis of energy
-1
10 Forward harvesting from multiple pendulums
Backward with and without mechanical coupling
-2
10
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 The European Physical Journal Special
Frequncy Hz Topics 224 2823–2838.
Figure 5. Magnetically coupled PEH Shahruz S 2006 Design of mechanical band-
(Both fixed magnets in same direction pass filters for energy scavenging
North downward) Journal of Sound and Vibration 292
A detailed analysis of harvester for high 987–998.
power and band width will be presented in Stanton S C McGehee C C and Mann B P
final manuscript. 2010 Nonlinear dynamics for broadband
energy harvesting: Investigation of a
CONCLUSION bistable piezoelectric inertial generator
Physica D: Nonlinear Phenomena 239
A analytical model for magnetically coupled
640–653.
piezoelectric harvesters is developed to study
the behavior of the system. Numerical Tang L and Yang Y 2012 A nonlinear
piezoelectric energy harvester with
simulations are carried out to compare linear
magnetic oscillator Applied Physics
and magnetically coupled harvesters. Letters 101 1–4.
Magnetically coupled harvesters generate
Williams C and Yates R 1995 Analysis Of A
power over wider bandwidth than linear
Micro-electric Generator For
harvesters with certain magnet directions. Microsystems Proceedings of the
International Solid-State Sensors and
REFERENCES Actuators Conference -
Ali S F Friswell M I and Adhikari S 2010 TRANSDUCERS ’95 1 8–11
Piezoelectric energy harvesting with Zhou S Cao J Wang W Liu S and Lin J 2015
parametric uncertainty Smart Materials Modeling and experimental verification
and Structures 19 1–9. of doubly nonlinear magnet-coupled
Erturk and Inman D 2011 Broadband piezoelectric energy harvesting from
piezoelectric power generation on high- ambient vibration Smart Materials and
energy orbits of the bistable Duffing Structures 24 1-13.
oscillator with electromechanical
1062
ICCMS2016
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF A PIEZOELECTRIC PLATE BASED

ON FIRST ORDER SHEAR DEFORMATION THEORY
PENDHARI S.S.*, JADHAV S. S. and PATIL V.
Structural Engineering Department, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: A 4-node quadrilateral finite element is developed for a single layered

piezoelectric plate subjected to the sinusoidal mechanical and electric loading for
simply supported boundary conditions. Finite element formulation is based on first
order shear deformation theory. The layer wise linear theory is applied to electric
potential and linear through thickness variation of electric potential is taken.
Numerical results from the present investigation have been compared with available
results to ascertain the accuracy and effectiveness of the proposed model.
Keywords: Piezoelectric layer; Layer wise liner theory; Finite element formulation;
Potential.
INTRODUCTION Mindlin type model also called First Order

During the last two decades, numerous Shear Deformation Theory (FOST) is an
researchers have taken interest in finite improvement over CLPT. Song Cen et al.
element modeling of piezoelectric structures (2002) had also developed formulation based
which become a major area of research. For on FOST.
the analysis of piezoelectric structural In the present paper, variation of the
elements, many finite element models have electrical potential through thickness
been developed.There has been number of direction is assumed to be linear which is
studies reported on smart or adaptive based on the layer wise linear theory
structures which involves laminates attached proposed that’s why the electrical DOF will
with piezoelectric layers or patches. Strength depend on the number of layers of the
of materials approach was started to use for laminates in the thickness direction.
the static and dynamic analysis of smart
THEORETICAL FORMULATION
structures in early years. Benjeddou (2000)
took survey on piezoelectric finite element The displacement field for First order shear
modelling through more than hundred papers. deformation theory is assumed in following
After that Kapuria et.al (2009) reviewed form:
around two hundred papers on modelling of u ( x , y , z )  u 0 ( x , y )  z x ( x , y )
piezoelectric composite laminates based on v ( x , y , z )  v 0 ( x , y )  z y (x, y)
various theories. w (x, y, z)  w0(x, y)
In Classical Plate Theory (CLPT), the where u0 , v0 , w0 are the in-plane and
transverse shear deformation has not been transverse displacements of point ( x, y ) on
considered in the analysis and that leads to mid-plane respectively and x ,y are the
ineffectuality of the theory for thick plate and rotations of normal to mid-plane about y and
composite laminate 0analysis. A Reissner- x axes respectively.

Pendhari et al.
Strain components obtained from transformation rule of stress or strain is

displacement field equation (1) written as
 u    
x   0   z  x   yz  Q44
L
0   yz 
L L
 x   x      
 v0    y   xz   0 Q55   xz 
y    z 
 y   y 
FINITE ELEMENT DISCRETIZATION
z  0
Consider the plate quadrilateral element
 u v     
 xy   0  0   z x  y  having 5 mechanical DOF to each node and 2
 y x   y x 
electric DOF to surface of plate. Now Nodal
 w  displacement vector for 4-noded element is
 yz    y  0 
 y 
d u1 v1 w1 x1 y1 u2 v2 w2 x2 y2 u3 v3 w3 x3 y3 u4 v4 w4 x4 y4 1 2
T
 w 
 xz    x  0 
 x  It is assumed that the variation of electric
potential throughout the layer is linear. The
Linear constitutive equations of piezoelectric electric potential ф for kth layer is given by
materials, including the converse and direct
piezoelectric effects, can be written as     N   
k
 e
  C   eE
 Z i  Z Z  Z i 1 
where,  N    ; Zi  Z  Z i 1
D  e   E h 
T
 h
where, Nф is shape function for electric potential and
   x  y  z  xy  yz  xz 
T
фe is the matrix of electric potentials at
surfaces (top and bottom)
   x  y  z  xy  yz  xz 
T
The element stiffness matrices can be derived

are the stress and strain vectors respectively from the principle of minimum potential
and, E   Ex Ey
T
Ez  , D   Dx Dy Dz 
T
energy
are the electric field vector and electric  Kuu   Mechanical stiffness matrix =   B   D  B  dv
T
displacement vector.
 K u   Piezoelectric coupling matrix =   B   e  B dv
T
Piezo-electric stress co-efficient matrix, e and

 Ku    K u   Piezoelectric coupling matrix =   B   e   B dv
T T T
Dielectric coefficient matrix, μ

 K   Dielectric permittivity matrix = -   B      B dv
T
 11
T
0 0 0 0 e15 0 0 0 
e   0 0 0 0 0 e24     0 22 0 
e31 e32 e33 0 0 0   0 0 33   K uu K u   d   P 
   
L L  K u Ku  e   q 
 x   Q11 Q12 x 
L
0 
    
 y   Q12 Q22 0   y 
In this expression, Kuu, KuФ, KuФ, KuФ are the
   0   stiffness and P, q are the external force.
 xy   0 Q33   xy  Stiffness and force are known quantitates.
Displacement d, Фe are unknown quantities.
The stress-strain relationship for a typical
After applying boundary conditions,
lamina L with reference to laminate co-
displacements are find out.
ordinate system by using usual
1064
Finite Element analysis of a Piezoelectric Plate based on First order Shear Deformation Theory
0.5 0.5
0.4 U_FEM 0.4 U_Heylinger
0.3 U_Semi‐analytical 0.3 U_FEM
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
Z/h
0 0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
‐0.05 ‐0.025 0 0.025 0.0 ‐0.5 ‐0.3 ‐0.1 0.1 0.3 0.5
U(a/2,b/2) U(a/2,b/2)
0.5 0.5
W_FEM 0.4 Txx_FEM
0.4
0.3 W_Semi‐analytical 0.3 Txx_Heylinger
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
0
Z/h
0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 ‐25 ‐20 ‐15 ‐10 ‐5 0 5 10 15 20 25
W(a/2,b/2) Txx(a/2,b/2)
0.5 0.5
Txx_FEM
0.4 0.4 W_FEM
Txx_Semi‐analytical
0.3 0.3 W_Heylinger
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
Z/h
0 0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
‐0.3 ‐0.2 ‐0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0. 0 1E‐09 2E‐09 3E‐09 4E‐09
Txx(a/2,b/2) W(a/2,b/2)
0.5 0.5
Txy_FEM
0.4 0.4 Txy_FEM
Txy_Semi‐analytical
0.3 0.3 Txy_Heylinger
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
Z/h
Z/h
0 0
‐0.1 ‐0.1
‐0.2 ‐0.2
‐0.3 ‐0.3
‐0.4 ‐0.4
‐0.5 ‐0.5
‐0.15 ‐0.1 ‐0.05 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 ‐10 ‐8 ‐6 ‐4 ‐2 0 2 4 6 8 10
Txy(0,0) Txy(0,0)
Figure 1: Through Thichness Variation of Figure 2: Through Thickness Variation of

Normalized u, w, Txx, Txy for Square Plate Normalized u, w, Txx, Txyfor Square Plate
for Aspect Ratio 4 of Isotropic Composite for Aspect Ratio 10 of Simply Supported
Plate PVDF Plate
1065
Pendhari et al.
NUMERICAL INVESTIGATION Cen S. Soh Ai-Kah Long Y.Q. Yao Z.H.

The computer codes are developed in 2002 A new 4-node quadrilateral FE
MATLAB R2013A by incorporating the model with variable electrical degrees
foregoing FE formulations for the static of freedom for the analysis of
analysis. piezoelectric laminated composite plates
Composite Structures 58 583–599
Example 1: A homogeneous isotropic with
simple support end conditions on all four Heyliger P R Ramirez G Pei K C 1994
edges and subjected to transversely Discrete-Layer Piezoelectric Plate and
distributed load on their top surfaces have Shell Models for Active Tip-Clearance
been considered. Normalized E=1GPa with Control NASA Contractor Report.
Poisson's ratios is 0.3 is taken from Pagano Pagano N J 1969 Exact solutions for
(1970) research paper. The normalized composite laminates in cylindrical
stresses (σx, σy, τxy) and mid-plane bending Journal of Composite Materials
transverse displacement (w) obtained by the 3 398-411
proposed FE models have been compared for
aspect ratio 4 without electric loading.
Example 2: Simply supported single layer
square PVDF plate with aspect ratio 10 is
considered. Properties of material are taken
from paper. The plate is subjected to double
sinusoidal mechanical load with p0 = 1, at the
top surface, with no electric potential applied.
Results obtained are compared with the exact
solutions given by Heylinger et.al. (1994).
Through-thickness variation in displacements
and stresses are shown in Figure 2.
CONCLUSION
Proposed finite element model has been
developed for analysis of single layered
PVDF plate under sinusoidal loading as well
as electrical loading for simply supported
boundary condition. Results are in good
agreement with the available results for all
aspect ratios.
REFERENCES
Benjeddou A. D. Jean-F. 2000 A two-
dimensional closed-form solution for
the free-vibrations analysis of
piezoelectric sandwich plates
International Journal of Solids and
1066
ICCMS2016
BEHAVIOUR OF POLYPROPYLENE FIBRE REINFORCED

CONCRETE PAVEMENT UNDER STATIC WHEEL LOAD
MOHOD MILIND 1* and KADAM K. N.2
1
Department of Civil Engineering, PRMIT&R, Badnera, India.
2
Applied Mechanics Department, GCOE, Amravati, India.
Abstract: Concrete pavements are commonly used because of their durability, their
ability to overcome sub-grade weakness, and difficult climatic conditions. The
serviceability and longevity of rigid pavement constructions depend on the rate of
pavement deterioration which is a function of factors such as material properties,
climatic effects and vehicular load characteristics. The load applied by traffic on
highway rigid pavements is of repetitive nature. This repetitive action of loads
produces fatigue damage in the pavement structure, deteriorating pavement stiffness
and supporting capabilities. Concrete in the slab is under the action of repetitive
stressing and straining, which leads to originating fatigue damage in it in the form of
internal micro-cracking, which eventually results in large localized cracks in the slab.
Cracks can occur at any location within the pavement where tensile stresses exceed
the concrete flexural strength. Tensile stresses are induced in a rigid pavement due to
bending action of concrete base under vehicular as well as climatic forces. In order to
overcome the problems associated with concrete pavements an attempt has been made
to study the behavior of polypropylene reinforced concrete in pavement structure with
the help of Finite element analysis software package ANSYS (Version 11). A 3D
Finite element model adopted by Imran Khan and Harwalkar (2014) is used to
investigate the applicability of Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete in concrete
pavements. Stresses and deflection observed in the model are compared with classical
approach of Westergaard’s and Imran Khan and Harwalkar (2014). Obtained results
are found to be in reasonable agreement with available literature.
Keywords: Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete; Finite element analysis;
Wheel load stress; rigid pavements; etc.
INTRODUCTION receives the vehicle loads transferring them

down to the lower layers. The loads,
The pavement structure is made up of several
distributed within the tire prints, cause high
layers that successively transfer the loads
bearing stresses, as well as bending stresses
from the top to the bottom of the pavement.
in the slabs. The bending action of the slabs
In this transfer, the magnitude of the stresses
transfer stresses into the lower base, subbase
is gradually reduced so that they are not
and subgrade layers. The level of stresses
harmful to any of the layers. Generally, the
occurring at each layer depends on the
strength of these layers decreases with
relative stiffness of the individual layers. The
decrease in depth in the pavement. The
nature of the traffic load is transient,
concrete slab at the top of the pavement
producing fast stress increments at a given
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: milindmohod88@gmail.com 1067

Mohod and Kadam
point. Thus, the stresses taking place at a validate and predict the performance of
certain point can be approximated by those Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete in
produced by an impact load. In addition, rigid pavement. Duncan et al (1968) was
traffic loads are applied constantly on the among the first to apply finite element
pavement resulting in a repetitive action. As a method to the pavement analysis. For this
whole, the concrete slabs receive repetitive purpose, the structural analysis package
bending stresses. Repetitive traffic loads ‘ANSYS’ (Version 11) has been used. The
deteriorate the interior of the structure of each concrete slab has been modeled as SOLID 45
layer, as well as the interfaces between the brick element, having 8 nodes with three
layers. The concrete slabs suffer flexural degrees of freedom per node, translations in
fatigue damage, which produces internal the nodal x, y and z directions. The subgrade
microcracking and localized reduction of the is modeled as Winkler foundation that
strength and stiffness of the concrete. An consists of a bed of closely spaced,
attempt has been made to study the independent, linear springs. Spring elements
applicability of Polypropylene fibre namely COMBIN 14 are used to represent the
reinforced concrete in rigid pavement with Winkler foundation which has three degrees
the help of results published for high grade of of freedom in the nodal x, y and z directions.
concrete (M30 and M40) by incorporating Data adopted for modelling purpose is as
Polypropylene fibre in mix and Finite under,
element analysis. Polypropylene fibre
a) Dimension of concrete slab: 4.5m x 3.7m
reinforced concrete consist of thousands of
x 0.16m.
small fibers which are dispersed and
b) Properties of concrete: Modulus of
distributed randomly in the concrete during
Elasticity, E = 3 x 1010 N/ m2, Poission’s
mixing, and thus improve concrete properties
ratio = 0.15, Co-efficient of thermal
in all directions. Fibers help to improve the
post peak ductility performance, pre-crack expansion, α = 10 x 10 -6 / 0C , Density , γ
tensile strength, fatigue strength, impact = 24000 N/ m3.
strength and eliminate temperature and c) Results of Polypropylene fibre reinforced
shrinkage cracks. concrete for M30 and M40 grade have
been adopted from Mohod (2015),
optimum percentage incorporation of
Polypropylene fibre in concrete mix is
0.5%. Modulus of Elasticity for M30 and
M40 grade of concrete are E1 = 3.074 x
1010 N/ m2 (M30) and E2= 2.977 x 1010 N/
m2 (M40).
Figure 1. Meshed 3D Rigid Pavement

Ansys Model
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING

In the present research, a 3-Dimensional
finite element model developed for concrete
pavement system by Imran Khan and Fig.2 Stress Contours in Rigid Pavement
Harwalkar (2014) has been adopted to
1068
Behaviour of Polypropylene Fibre Reinforced Concrete Pavement under Static Wheel Load
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION From the results it can be seen that present
ANSYS results are slightly on the higher side
The concrete pavement slab model have been
when compared with the values of ANSYS
analysed for different wheel loads (Single
results from Imran Khan and Harwalkar,
axle load-60 kN and Tandem axel load-120
2014 and Westergaard’s. Maximum flexural
kN) by using ANSYS. Maximum flexural
stress and deflection computed by using
stresses and deflection observed for edge
Polypropylene fibre reinforced concrete in
Wheel loads are presented in graphical form.
pavement structure are in agreement with
Comparison of flexural stress and deflection
maximum wheel stress data reported by
with results presented by Reference Imran
reference Imran Khan and Harwalkar (2014).
Khan and Harwalkar (2014) are shown in
Fig.3 and Fig 5 for different wheel loads
(Single axle load-60 kN and Tandem axel
load-120 kN).
DISCUSSION
A single element of slab has been used for
analysis by using Finite element analysis. For
validation purpose flexural stresses and
deflections developed in present ANSYS
model are compared in tabular and graphical
form. Wheel load stresses calculated using
Westregaard’s equation and Imran Khan and Figure 4. Displacement Contours in Rigid
Harwalkar (2014). The comparison is Pavement
provided in Table 1, Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Figure 3. Comparison of Flexural stresses for different wheel load
1069
Mohod and Kadam
Table 1 Maximum stress in pavement for wheel load (Single axle load-60 kN)
Maximum Stress (N/mm2)

Subgrade Axle
Present Study Imran
Sr.No. Modulus load
Westergaard Khan et
K(N/mm3) (kN) Data M30 M40
al.
1 0.06 60 2.81 2.83 2.80 2.67 2.22
2 0.08 60 2.58 2.60 2.58 2.58 2.18
*As reported in Reference [Imran Khan and Harwalkar, 2014].
0.7
[2]-60kN Present-60kN
0.6
[2]-120kN Present-120kN
0.5 M30-60kN M30-120kN
0.4 M40-60kN M40-120kN
Deflection
0.3
(mm)
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35
K (N/mm2)
[2] - Imran Khan and Harwalkar, 2014
Fig.5 Comparison of pavement deflection for different wheel loads.
CONCLUSION 4. The finite element model is a powerful

tool for analyzing stresses and strains in
Based on the results obtained for present plain-jointed concrete pavements.
ANSYS model under wheel load following
conclusions are drawn: REFERENCES
1. The Finite element model developed in Larralde J and Chen Wai-Fah 1987
ANSYS provides reasonable agreement Estimation of Mechanical Deterioration
with the available results for stresses and of Highway Rigid Pavements ASCE-
deflection in concrete pavement. This JTE 113(2) 193-208
shows that FEM techniques are more
versatile in determining wheel load Mohd. Imran Khan and Harwalkar A B
stresses. Mechanistic Analysis of Rigid
Pavements for Wheel Load Stresses
2. Stresses obtained by using Westergaard’s using ANSYS IJRCE.2014 4(1) 79-90
equation under estimate edge wheel load
stresses. Present ANSYS results are Mohod M V 2015 Performance of
slightly on higher side when compared Polypropylene Fibre Reinforced
with available results in literature. Concrete IOSR-JMCE 12(1) 28-36
3. Significant increase in flexural and tensile Ling H I and Huabei L 2003 Finite Element
strength of concrete pavement was Studies of Asphalt Concrete Pavement
reported for an optimum dosage of Reinforced with Geogrid ASCE-JEM
polypropylene fibre in concrete mix. 129(7) 801-811
1070
ICCMS2016
ACCURATE MODELLING OF SHEAR MONOMORPH SENSORS

RAVEENDRANATH P.* and SULBHEWAR L.N.
Thiruvananthapuram-Kerala, India.
Structures Group, ISRO Satellite Centre, Bangalore-Karnataka, India.
Abstract: In this work, an accurate higher-order shear deformation theory (HSDT)

based finite element modelling of shear monomorph sensors, with improved
representation of electric potential is presented. An appropriate through-thickness
electric potential distribution has been derived which satisfies the electrostatic
equilibrium equation, unlike conventional formulations which use assumed linear
through-thickness distribution. The derived field accounts for the induced potential
and hence takes care of the associated changes in the structural stiffness. It is shown
that, in order to get the same level of accuracy as of present formulation which uses a
single layer of consistent electric potential, the conventional formulations with linear
potential require a mathematical subdivision of piezoelectric layer along the thickness
direction. The comparative analysis of present and conventional formulations against
refined ANSYS 2D simulation proves the superiority of the present formulation over
the conventional formulation.
Keywords: piezoelectric; shear monomorph; finite element; induced potential.
INTRODUCTION layered modelling of through-thickness

potential to capture this nonlinearity.
Piezoelectric smart structures employed in
the active vibration and shape control, work In the present work, an appropriate through-
on the mechanism of sensing the external thickness distribution of electric potential
mechanical field and responding to it by consistent with HSDT is derived using
actuation. Accurate representation of electrostatic governing equation. Along with
mechanical field and electric potential in the the conventional linear terms, the derived
numerical modelling of piezoelectric expression has a higher order nonlinear term
structures plays a vital role in their structural which properly accommodates the induced
control process. Recently, Sulbhewar and potential effect. As the higher order coupled
Raveendranath (2014) showed that the term in derived potential is purely
through-thickness distribution of electric represented by strain variables, no additional
potential in the shear monomorph sensor is nodal degree of freedom is required to
nonlinear due to induced potential effects. represent nonlinearity in the distribution. The
Conventional HSDT-based formulations improved accuracy of the present formulation
assume a linear through-thickness over the conventional formulation is proved
distribution; hence give inaccurate finite by comparison of the results against
element results. As shown by Sulbhewar and benchmark solutions from are fined ANSYS
Raveendranath (2014), the conventional 2D simulation.
formulation requires the mathematical sub-
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: raveendranath@iist.ac.in 1071

Raveendranath and Sulbhewar
THEORETICAL FORMULATION in which  , ,  ,  , D and E denote normal

The present formulation is based on modified stress ( N / m2 ), shear stress ( N / m2 ), normal
form of Reddy’s HSDT, for which the strain, shear strain, electric displacement (
displacement fields are given as (Chee et al., C / m2 ) and electric field( V / m ),
1999): respectively.
u ( x, z )  u0 ( x)  z   0 ( x)  w0' ( x)  
4 (1)
z3  0 ( x)
3h2
w( x, z )  w0 ( x) (2)
where ( ) ' denotes d dx . The u0 , w0 and  0

denote the axial displacement, total
transverse displacement and shear rotation at
the centroidal axis of the beam, respectively. Figure 1. A piezoelectric shear
monomorph.
The dimensions L, h and b are the length,
total thickness and the width of the structure, The constants Qii (i  1,5), eand
15
denote
1 the
respectively. reduced elastic, piezoelectric and dielectric
material constants for beam geometry,
Substituting Eqs. (1) and (2) in the usual
respectively.
strain-displacement relations, the following
expressions for axial and shear strains are DERIVATION OF ELECTRIC
obtained:
POTENTIAL CONSISTENT WITH
 x ( x, z ) 
u ( x, z )
x

 u0' ( x)  z  0' ( x)  w0'' ( x) HSDT
For free volumetric charge density
4
 z 3 2  0' ( x) (3) assumption, electrostatic equilibrium
3h equation is given as:
Dz ( x, z )  z  0 (7)
u ( x, z ) w( x, z )
 xz ( x, z )  
z x
(4) From Eqs. (4)-(7), we get:
 4 
 1  z 2 2   0 ( x) 2 ( x, z) z 2  2(e15 1 ) z  0 ( x) (8)
 h 
The electric field in the transverse direction is where   4 h 2 . On solving Eq. (8), we
defined as [Sulbhewar and Raveendranath, get:
2014]:  ( x, z )   ( x )  ( z h )  ( x ) 
Ez ( x, z )   ( x, z ) z (5) (e15 1 )   z 3 3  z h 2 12   0 ( x)
(9)
 
where  is electric potential.
where the conventional linear terms,  ( x) and
The coupled constitutive relations for shear
 ( x) are the average and difference of the
mode piezoelectric material are given as
[Sulbhewar and Raveendranath, 2014]: surface potentials, respectively.
The higher order coupled term defines the
 x  Q11 0 0   x  induced part of the potential and is a function
    
 xz   0 Q55 e15   xz  (6) of geometric, piezoelectric and dielectric
 D  0  
 z   e15 1   Ez  properties.
Using Eq. (5), the electric field is derived as:
1072
Accurate Modelling of Shear Monomorph Sensors
E z ( x, z )    ( x ) / h  in which f V , f S , f C are volume, surface and

(10)
(e15 1 )   z 2  h2 12   0 ( x) point forces, respectively. q0 and S are the
 
surface charges and area on which charge is
VARIATIONAL FORMULATION applied.
The Hamilton’s principle is used to formulate
FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION
the smart beam, which is given as [Chee et
al., 1999]: A two-noded beam element formulation is
t2 t2
developed here in which u0 ,  0 and  are
  ( H  W ) dt   ( H   W ) dt  0 (11) modeled using Lagrange linear shape
t1 t1 functions, while w0 is modeled using Hermite
Variation on electromechanical energy of the cubic shape functions.
shear monomorph is given as [Sulbhewar and
2 2
Raveendranath, 2014]: u0   N j ( x)u0j ;  0   N j ( x) 0j ;
j 1 j 1
2
(14a)
t2
  H dt  i   N j ( x)i . j
t1 j 1
  
t2
   u0 Q11 I 0u0  I1w0   I1   I 3   0 
 
' ' '' ' 2
t1 x
w0j   H wj w0j  H wj ' w0' j . (14b)
j 1

 w0'' Q11  I1u0'  I 2 w0''   I 2   I 4   0'  
Substituting Eq. (14) in Eqs. (12) and (13)
  I1   I 3  u0'   I 2   I 4  w0''   and using them in Eq. (11), the following
 0 Q11 
' 
 2 
 I  2 I   2 I  '
4 6 0  

discretized form of the model in terms of
matrix equations is obtained:
 55 0 
 Q I  2 I   2 I  
2 4 0  

 Kuu   Ku   U   f 
 2
 
 0  e15 1 (5 / 9) I 0  2  I 2   I 4   0  
2 

  Ku 
  
 K    q 
(15)
   
  (e15 I 0 h)(1   h 2 / 12)   
   
 
 (e I h)(1   h 2 / 12)   Where Kuu , Ku , K are the global mechanical,
  
15 0  0 
 dx dt (12) piezoelectric and dielectric stiffness sub-
 
 (1 I 0 / h )
2
 matrices, respectively; U ,  are the global
 
where   4 3h 2 and I i  b( zti 1  zbi 1 ) / (i  1)
mechanical and electrical nodal degrees of
freedom vectors, respectively; f and q are
As seen from the Eq. (12), the induced global mechanical and electrical nodal force
coupled term changes the structural stiffness vectors, respectively.
of the shear monomorph.
The variation on work of external forces is NUMERICAL EXAMPLES AND
given as: DISCUSSIONS
t2 
The cantilever shear monomorph (h=18 mm
 dV 
t2
  W dt      ufuV   wf wV and L=100 mm) of PZT 5H material [Kapuria
t1 t1 V and Hagedorn, 2007] with a tip load of 1000
S

  ufu   wf w dS 
S S
 (13)
N is studied here. The results for transverse
deflection, potential developed along the
 length of monomorph, through-thickness
 
  ufuC   wf wC    q0 dS  dt


potential and shear stress are shown in
S  figures 2 (a), (b), (c) and (d), respectively. As
seen from the results, though the
1073
Raveendranath and Sulbhewar
conventional model gives accurate prediction

of transverse deflection, it fails to predict
accurately, the potential developed and
through-thickness distributions of potential
and shear stress. The proposed model which
incorporate the induced potential effects
through consistent potential, predict accurate
results.
Figure 2(c). Through-thickness

potential distribution.
Figure 2(a). Transverse displacement.
Figure 2(d). Through-thickness shear

stress distribution.
REFERENCES
Chee C Y K Tong L and Steven G P 1999 A
mixed model for composite beams with
piezoelectric actuators and sensors
Smart Materials and Structures 8 417-
432.
Figure 2(b). Potential developed.
Kapuria S and Hagedorn P 2007 Unified
CONCLUSIONS efficient layerwise theory for smart
An appropriate through-thickness potential beams with segmented extension/shear
distribution for shear monomorph sensors, mode piezoelectric actuators and
consistent with HSDT, has been derived and sensors Journal of Mechanics of
successfully employed in the finite element Materials and Structures 2 1267-1298.
formulation. Present formulation takes care Sulbhewar L N and Raveendranath P 2014
of nonlinear nature of through-thickness Importance of accommodating induced
potential, with the help of coupled term, potential effects in the modelling of
without adding any extra nodal degree of shear monomorph sensors Proceeding of
freedom in the formulation. Conventional 5th International Congress on
HSDT formulations based on linear through- Computational Mechanics and
thickness potential need number of sublayers Simulation (ICCMS2014) CSIR-IIT
in the mathematical modelling to achieve Madras India December 2014.
same level of accuracy as of present
formulation.
1074
ICCMS2016
AN EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF A NOVEL ENERGY SCAVENGER

CUM VIBRATION ABSORBER
VISWANATH ALLAMRAJU K.* and SRIKANTH K.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Warangal, India.
Abstract: Electricity is the greatest crisis in the world on one side and another side is
environmental pollution is caused by E-waste especially due to smart devices such as
mobile phones, laptops, compact devices, computer spare parts, unrecyclicable batteries
etc. By considering these problems authors are taken up a research on energy harvesting
by using ambient vibrations. In this field so far people had done a lot of research only
by using clamped-free beam with tip mass for dynamic flexibility. In this paper the
authors are demonstrating the novel energy harvester cram by using clamp-free beam
with impact mass harvester as a tip mass. Here impact mass harvester is fulfilled the
both purposes one is for generating electricity and the another one is for dynamic
flexibility by absorbing vibrations. The mass of 9 grams lead material is considered as
a hitting mass on Lead Zirconate Titanate(PZT) patch and developed a voltage of 45.25
V is on average and 98 V is the maximum as an output at the resonance frequency of
82.231Hz for charging the impulse power applications.
Keywords: Novel energy scavenger; Vibration absorber; Clamped free beam.
INTRODUCTION effect. Representative piezoelectric materials

can be categorized into piezoceramics and
Vibration energy harvesting is defined as the
piezopolymers. Piezoceramics have large
harvesting or scavenging electrical energy
electro-mechanical coupling constants and
from vibrations which are available naturally
provide high energy conversion rate, but they
or by using some means. Whereas
are too brittle to use general shape energy
Piezoelectricity is a form of coupling between
transducer. On the other hand, piezopolymers
the mechanical and the electrical behaviours
have smaller electromechanical coupling
of ceramics and crystals belonging to certain
constants compared to the piezoceramics, but
classes. These materials exhibit the
they are very flexible. Based on direct
piezoelectric effect, which is historically
piezoelectricity, many research works have
divided into two phenomena as the direct and
been conducted for piezoelectric energy
the converse piezoelectric effects. When a
harvesting from mechanical vibration.
piezoelectric material is mechanically
Piezoelectricity is found in useful applications
strained, electric polarization that is
such as the production and detection of sound,
proportional to the applied strain is produced.
generation of high voltages, electronic
This is called the direct piezoelectric effect
frequency generation, microbalances, and
and it was discovered by the Curie brothers in
ultrafine focusing of optical assemblies.
1880.When the same material is subjected to
Although the magnitudes of piezoelectric
an electric polarization, it becomes strained
voltages, movements, or forces are small, and
and the amount of strain is proportional to the
often require amplification, piezoelectric
polarizing field. This is called the converse
materials have been adapted to an impressive
piezoelectric effect or inverse piezoelectric
range of applications. The piezoelectric effect
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: akvn87@gmail.com 1075

Viswanath and Shrikanth
is used in sensing applications, such as in piezoelectric energy harvesters. Secondly, the

force or displacement sensors. The inverse energy harvesters should be able to sustain
piezoelectric effect is used in actuation under impact loads, random vibrations and
applications, such as in motors and devices shocks. Thus, development of flexible and
that precisely control positioning, and in resilient piezoelectric materials is necessary.
generating sonic and ultrasonic signals. In the Thirdly, development of efficient electronic
20th century metal oxide-based piezoelectric circuitry for energy harvesters is necessary.
ceramics and other man-made materials Since the obtained electrical energy from
enabled designers to employ the piezoelectric vibration is small, rectification and energy
effect and the inverse piezoelectric effect in storing circuits should be able to activate in
many new applications. These materials such a low power condition. Vibrations are
generally are physically strong and available everywhere therefore vibration-
chemically inert, and they are relatively based energy harvesters should come to the
inexpensive to manufacture. The composition, real life of the world population. Many
shape, and dimensions of a piezoelectric researchers have done on the clamped free
ceramic element can be tailored to meet the beam by taking tip mass and attached the
requirements of a specific purpose. Ceramics rectangular PZT 5H patch on the beam but
manufactured from formulations of lead nobody designed the EHD and considered it
zirconate/lead titanate exhibit greater as dual purpose for dynamic flexibility and
sensitivity and higher operating temperatures, generating maximum voltage and also absorbs
relative to ceramics of other compositions, the vibrations.
and PZT materials currently are the most
widely used piezoelectric ceramics. Piezo- RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
electrics are the most popular materials. They
There are six experiments are conducted by
undergo surface elongation (strain) when an
using clamped free beam with EHD at
electric field is applied across them (actuator
different frequencies such as <20 Hz,
characteristics); produce voltage when surface
3.543kHz, 82.231 Hz, 73.58 Hz, 91.43 Hz and
strain is applied (Sensor characteristics), and
79.43 Hz. All DSO readings are shown from
thus can be used both as actuators and sensors.
Figure.4 to Figure.9. At the resonance
Under applied field, these materials however
frequency the travelling distance of hitting
generate very low strain but cover a wide
mass will be maximum thus it causes to create
range of actuation frequency; this makes them
maximum dynamic strain(DS) in the PZT
to be used in vibration control. The most
patches. When the DS is maximum, the output
widely used piezoceramics (such as lead
power from the device is maximum that
zirconate titanate) are in the form of thin
increases the efficiency of energy harvesting.
sheets which can be readily embedded,
All the readings are taken at the division per
surface bonded or attached to composite
signal is 2 V and the time is 2.5 s but at the
structures. There are three issues that limit the
frequency of 3.54 kHz, the voltage per
broad technological impact of the vibration-
division of DSO signal is 50 mV at the time of
based piezoelectric energy harvesters. Firstly,
2.5 s. GW Instek DSO is used for reading the
development of high coupling coefficient
Voltage Vs Time signal in digital form at
piezoelectric materials is essential to improve
different frequencies, the memory length for
the performance of piezoelectric energy
each signal is 500, Trigger level is zero,
harvesters. Proportional to the coupling
source is CH1, vertical units is V, vertical
coefficient, the energy conversion efficiency
scale is 2 V, vertical position is 2.24,
will be improved therefore increasing the
horizontal unit is s and horizontal scale is
coupling coefficient for the PZT material is
2.25. Even though EHD is tested at different
quintessential. Thus, the advent of new
frequencies but the discussion is focussed at
piezoelectric materials with high coupling
the resonance frequency of 82.231Hz and its
coefficient will bring a new era of
digital signal form as shown in Figure.10.
1076
An experimental study of a novel energy scavenger cum vibration absorber
Figure.10 illustrates the operation and

behaviour of hitting mass and the PZT
patches. The total signal is studied by taking
into 392 points on the horizontal scale, at the
three points, the generated voltage is
maximum related to other points. One is
between 18 to 35 is around more than 50 V,
between 120 to 137 is around more than 90 V
and closer to point 392, voltage is 80. At
remaining points, the voltage is 45 V has been
maintained constantly. On total average the Figure 7. DSO reading at 73.58 Hz
output is 45.25 V for the frequency of 82.23
Hz.
Figure 8. DSO reading at 91.43 Hz

Figure 4. DSO reading at 3.54 kHz
Figure 9. DSO reading at 79.4366 Hz

Figure 5. DSO reading at less than 20 Hz
Figure 10. DSO reading at 82.231 Hz in

Figure 6. DSO reading at 82.231 Hz digital form
1077
Viswanath and Shrikanth
REFERENCES
Ming Li Yumei Wen Ping Li Jin Yang
Xianzhi Dai 2011 A rotation energy
harvester employing cantilever beam
and magneto rictive laminate transducer
Sensors and Actuators A 166 102–110.
Anuruddh Kumar Anshul Sharma Rajeev
Kumar Rahul Vaish Chauhan VS 2014
Finite element analysis of vibration
energy harvesting using lead-free
piezoelectric materials: A comparative
study Journal of Asian Ceramic
Societies 2 138–143.
Bhuyan MS Masuri Othman Sawal Mahid
Mahammad Ali 2013 Investigation and
design of MEMS based energy
harvesters with aspect of autonomous
automobile sensors Asian journal of
scientific research 6(1) 1-15.
Vijay Kumar Sharma Srikanth K Viswanath
K 2014 Influence of cross-sectional area
of a dynamic magnifier for vibration
energy harvesting Proceedings of 4th
IRF International Conference
Hyderabad India ISBN: 978-93-84209-
00-1 69-72
Vishwanath K Allamraju Srikanth K 2014
Review and scope of scavenging micro
energy using piezoelectric materials
Advanced Materials Manufacturing &
Characterization 4(2) 96-100.
Mossi K Green C Ounaies Z Hughes E 2005
Harvesting energy using a thin unimorph
prestressed bender: geometrical effects
Journal of Intelligent Material Systems
and Structures 16 249–261.
Srikanth Korla Tansel I N 2011 Design and
testing of an efficient and compact
piezoelectric energy harvester
Microelectronics Journal 42 265–270.
1078
ICCMS2016
AN ENERGY-BASED APPROACH FOR EXTRACTING THE DYNAMIC

INSTABILITY PARAMETERS OF DIELECTRIC ELASTOMER
ACTUATORS WITH UNEQUAL BIAXIAL PRESTRESS
BAJPAYEE S.1, JOGLEKAR D.M.2 and JOGLEKAR M. M. 1*
1
Department of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering, IIT Roorkee Roorkee India.
2
Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT Bombay Mumbai, India.
Abstract: This paper presents an energy-based approach for extracting the dynamic
instability parameters of dielectric elastomer actuators (DEAs) subjected to unequal
biaxial prestress. The standard sandwich model of DEA made up of neo-Hookean
material is considered for enunciating the underlying steps of theapproach. When such
actuator-model is driven by applying a Heaviside step voltage, the temporal response
exhibits a saddle-node bifurcation at the critical value of the applied step-voltage. This
threshold is referred to as the DC dynamic instability, and is one of the crucial
criterion in the design of DEAs. The proposed approach relies on establishing the
energy balance at the point of maximum stretch in an oscillation cycle followed by the
application of an instability condition to extract the critical values of the electric field
and the lateral stretches on the onset of the DC dynamic instability. Additionally, the
governing differential equation of motion is devised using the Euler-Lagrange
equation and integrated to validate the predictions of the dynamic instability
parameters. The comparison shows a close agreement, and highlights the utility of the
proposed approach in circumventing the need for performing time-integrations to
extract the dynamic instability parameters. The influence of unequal biaxial prestress
is examined by performing a parametric study. Results of the present investigation can
find their potential use in the design of DEAs subjected to transient loading.
Keywords: Dielectric elastomer actuators; biaxial prestress; dynamic instability
parameters; energy approach; equation of motion.
INTRODUCTION the thickness direction (X 3 ) and expands in

Dielectric elastomer actuators (DEAs) the two lateral directions (X 1 and X 2 ). The
represent a class of electroactive polymers interplay between the electrostatic force of
capable of undergoing large deformations attraction and the mechanical restoring forces
when actuated electrically [Pelrine et al. lead to an operational instability which
2000]. An idealized model of DEA imposes restrictions on the working range of
comprises a soft polymeric material the actuator. These instability parameters are
(typically of hyperelastic or viscoelastic dependent on the mechanical and electrical
nature) sandwiched between two compliant properties of the material, boundary
electrodes as shown in figure 1. When driven conditions, and the extent of prestress.
by a step-voltage, the actuator contracts in
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:joglekarmm@yahoo.com 1079

Bajpayee et al.
Several researchers have described 1

stretches are related as λ3 = . The
previously the methods to extract the static λ1λ2
instability parameters of DEAs subjected to a Helmholtz free energy function G of the
lateral prestress. However, relatively a few actuator, taking into account the
number of researchers have addressed the contributions from the biaxial prestress (S 1
development of dynamic instability and S 2 ) and the electric loading, is written as
parameters. In this connection, Xu et al.
µ 2 
(2014) suggested an approach based on
 2
( λ1 + λ22 + λ1−2 λ2−2 − 3) − 
integrating the equation of motion, and G = 8 H ' L '2   (1)
 S λ S λ E ελ1 λ2 
2 2 2
 1 1 − 2 2 −
inferred that the dynamic instability can be
2 
realized at voltages significantly less than
those corresponding to the static instability. Where μ represents the shear modulus of the
Subsequently, an energy-based approach was
elastomer. Also, E and ε represent the
suggested by Joglekar (2014; 2015) which
nominal electric field (V/2H) and the
circumvented the need for performing
permittivity of the elastomer, respectively.
iterating time integrations to extract the
dynamic instability parameters. However, When driven by a step voltage, the temporal
only the case of equal-biaxial prestress was response of the actuator (i.e., stretches as a
considered in those analyses, which function of time) is periodic up to a certain
facilitated the formulation of the governing voltage and turns aperiodic for voltages
equations in terms of a single independent exceeding this critical value. In the
stretch parameter. This paper extends this following, an energy-based approach is
approach by accommodating the case of outlined to extract this threshold voltage and
unequal biaxial prestress. the critical values of principal stretches on
the onset of the DC dynamic instability.
ENERGY-BASED METHOD OF
SOLUTION
In this method, it is assumed that the system
is conservative, and the energy dissipation
has negligible effect on the system dynamics.
When the actuator system is driven by a step
voltage, a fixed amount of electrostatic
energy proportional to the square of the
Figure 1. Schematic of a step-voltage
magnitude of the applied step voltage is
driven DEA.
imparted to the system. To obtain its
PROBLEM DEFINITION estimate, the free-energy function stated in
Eq. (1) is first expressed in terms of the
Figure 1 shows the sandwich model of a
dimensionless parameters as
step-voltage driven DEA subjected to an
1 2 
unequal biaxial prestress. The stretches in
 ( λ1 + λ22 + λ1−2 λ2−2 − 3) − 
three principal directions are denoted by λ 1 , G = 8 H ' L '2 
2
 (2)
 Ω λ − Ω λ − e λ1 λ2 
2 2 2
λ 2 , and λ 3 , respectively. Due to  1 1 
2 2
2
incompressibility of the elastomer, these
1080
An Energy-Based Approach for Extracting the Dynamic Instability Parameters of Dielectric Elastomer
Actuators with Unequal Biaxial Prestress
where, Ω 1 = (S 1 /μ), Ω 2 = (S 2 /μ), and stagnation curve relates the applied electric
e = E ε / µ represent the dimensionless field to the corresponding stretches at the
point of maximum overshoot, and is obtained
stresses and electric field, respectively. In
as
order to derive the expression for the kinetic
energy, the following equation is used: D = (λ
1
2
+ λ22 + λ1−2 λ2−2 − 3)
1
∫∫∫
(5)
= T ρ ( x12 + x22 + x32 )dv , (3) −2Ω1 (λ1 − 1) − 2Ω 2 (λ2 − 1)
2 v
−e 2 ( λ12 λ22 − 1) =
0.
Where ρ represents the density of the de
Two conditions of instability, i.e., =0
elastomer. By using the incompressibility d λ1
conditions and the definition of the stretch
de
ratios, Eq. (3) can be simplified as and = 0 are applied to Eq. (5). The
d λ2
4
= T ρ L '4 H '(λ12 + λ22 ) resulting two equations together with Eq. (5)
3
 2. (4) are then solved for the critical values of λ1 ,
4 3  λ1 λ2 
+ ρL' H '  2 +
2
2  λ2 and e. These values represent the DC
3  λ1 λ2 λ1λ2 
dynamic instability parameters of the
The Hamiltonian of the actuator system can dielectric elastomer actuator subjected to the
now be written as H= G + T . Assuming that unequal biaxial pre-stress. The dynamic
the system starts from the rest, at t = 0, the instability fields predicted by this approach
stretches are equal to unity, and their time are listed in Table 1 for various values of the
derivatives are equal to zero. Therefore, the prestress ratio.
system Hamiltonian at t = 0 [denoted by H
(0)] can be obtained by setting λ 1 = λ 2 =1.0, TIME INTEGRATION BASED
and λ1 = λ2 = 0 in Eq. (2). Because the METHOD OF SOLUTION
system is conservative, the system In this method, the Lagrangian is first
Hamiltonian remains unchanged, and hence, devised as L= T − G and subsequently the
D =− H H (0) = 0 represents an energy Euler-Lagrange equation for two variables,
constraint on the system. Physically, the i.e., λ 1 , and λ 2 is applied to obtain the
equation D = 0 represents the energy-balance following two equations:
between the strain energy, kinetic energy and −λ2 2λ12
λ1 (c + λ1−4 λ2−2 ) = +
the work potential. At the point of maximum (λ1λ1 )3 (λ15λ22 )
overshoot in an oscillation cycle, because the 2λ 2 2λ λ (6)
velocity is zero, the strain energy stored in + 3 2 4 + 41 32
(λ1 λ2 ) (λ1 λ2 )
the actuator is equal to the electric work
−3c[λ1 − λ1−3λ2−2 − Ω1 − e 2 λ1λ22 ]
potential. This condition can be obtained by
setting λ1 = λ2 = 0 together with λ 1 = λ1 and
 −λ1 2λ12
λ2 (c + λ2 λ1 ) =
−4 −2
+
λ 2 = λ2 in the expression of D = 0 which (λ1λ1 )3 (λ14 λ23 )
(7)
leads to the equation of the stagnation curve 2λ 2 2λ λ
+ 2 2 5 + 31 42
represented by D = 0 . Here, λ1 and λ2 denote (λ1 λ2 ) (λ1 λ2 )
the lateral stretches at the maximum −3c[λ2 − λ1−2 λ2−3 − Ω 2 − e 2 λ2 λ12 ]
overshoot position. The equation of the
1081
Bajpayee et al.
Table 1. Comparison of dimensionless electric fields corresponding to static and

DC dynamic instability.
Prestress DC Dynamic instability DC Dynamic instability Static instability

ratio Ω1 / Ω 2 field [energy technique] field [time-integration] field
0.00 0.647 0.646 0.687

0.25 0.4004 0.4176 0.553
0.50 0.3687 0.3748 0.479
0.75 0.3362 0.3368 0.414
1.00 0.3045 0.303 0.358
Where c = L '2 / H '2 is a measure of the aspect ratio of the actuator.
These equations are integrated using the The present analysis suggests that the critical
ODE solvers available in MATLAB. The electric field sufficient to trigger the dynamic
critical electric field is identified as the one at instability is less than that corresponding to
which the response turns aperiodic. The the static instability. These observations can
dynamic instability fields predicted using the be useful in the design of DEAs subjected to
time-integration approach are listed in Table transient electrostatic loading.
1, which show close agreement with those
obtained using the energy-approach ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
described earlier. A representative plot The authors wish to thank Department of
showing the time-history response for Science and Technology, GoI for financial
various applied electric fields (corresponding assistance through Grant No: SER-774-MID
to the case Ω1 / Ω 2 =0.75 ) is shown in
REFERENCES
Figure. 2.
Pelrine R Kornbluh R Pei Q and Joseph J
2000 High-speed electrically
actuated elastomers with strain
greater than 100% Science 287
(5454) 836–839.
Xu B X Mueller R Theis A Klassen M
and Gross D 2012 Dynamic analysis
of dielectric elastomer actuators
Appl. Phys. Lett. 100(11) Art. No.
112903.
Joglekar M M 2014 An energy-based
approach to extract the dynamic
Figure 2. Time-history response of the instability parameters of dielectric
stretch induced in DEA for different elastomer actuators ASME J. Appl.
dimensionless electric fields Mech. 81(9) Art. No. 091010.
[ Ω1 / Ω 2 = 0.75].
1082
An Energy-Based Approach for Extracting the Dynamic Instability Parameters of Dielectric Elastomer
Actuators with Unequal Biaxial Prestress
Joglekar M M 2015Dynamic instability

parameters of dielectric elastomer
actuators with equal biaxial prestress
AIAA J. 53 (10) 3129-3133.
1083
ICCMS2016
RADIAL AND THICKNESS MODE CALCULATIONS OF PZT-5H DISC

BY USING AMBIENT VIBRATIONS
VISHVANATH ALLAMRAJU K.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, NIT Warangal, India.
Abstract: In this paper presented a calculations of lead zirconate titanate (PZT) disc
at different resonance frequencies such as frequency constant, capacitance, static
displacement and static voltages under variable forces. These are the basics for
analytical studies and the design of a energy harvesters by using ambient vibrations.
The static displacement is very small for PZT-5H when the voltage is applied. It
comes under inverse piezoelectric effect. If the applied voltage is 94 mV for the disc
of 32 mm diameter and 2 mm thickness the change in displacement is 59.22X10-
12
m.And also concluded with the effect of voltage constant (g33) in generating the
static voltage which plays very important key role.
Keywords: PZT; frequency constant; capacitance; static voltage.
INTRODUCTION generator. The world energy production

The process of acquiring the energy sector is in transition and is nowadays called
surrounding a system and converting it into to face great challenges in a context in which
usable electrical energy is termed power the fossil fuel reserves are running out, while
harvesting. At present, next-generation the energy demand steadily increases. On the
energy technology is a technology to harvest other hand, the rising cost and the related
electrical energy using piezoelectric ceramics environmental issues make the use of
based on piezoelectric effect. Piezoelectric conventional energy resources more and
effect is the phenomenon where electrical more difficult. The increment of the world
energy is obtained when mechanical energy energy demand, mainly fulfilled by fossil
is applied to piezoelectric ceramic. fuels has brought to an increment in
Technologies are developed because of a greenhouse gas emissions with serious
shortage of energy in the world. One of the consequences on our environment.
next-generation energy technologies is Energy harvesting allows the recovery of the
piezoelectric energy harvesting technology. mechanical energy from environmental
Piezoelectric energy harvesting technology is vibrations and is obtained through the
very eco-friendly and useful because of the piezoelectric materials according to the direct
use of discarded physical energy around our piezoelectric effect. More in detail, it implies
living atmosphere. For example, electrical the generation of an electric field across the
energy is harvested from a vibration of a road material corresponding to a mechanical
when people and cars pass the road. For this strain. Since past this technology found
method, the piezoelectric energy harvesting interesting applications in the framework of
technology needs proper piezoelectric wireless sensor systems in order to make the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:_akvn87@gmail.com 1084

Allamraju K.V.
transmission and acquisition units self- capable of harvesting energy from the
powered. ambient vibration. By properly designing the
parameters, such as the length, diameter and
LITERATURE REVIEW
mass of the shell and hitting masses, we can
This review only shows the devices which increase energy generated. For finding these
are made by the past researchers in the area parameters we carried out parametric analysis
of energy harvesting by using ambient in SIMULINK. The main aim of the project
vibrations but the output of those devices are is to get maximum voltage & power.
only in micro watts because not availing the Analysis is carried out by varying the
tools which are available at present such as geometry, mass of a shell & stiffness of
Matlab, Catia, Ansys etc. Authors are spring. Ki Hwan described a method for
focusing on Piezo electric generation by man efficient piezoelectric energy harvesting from
powered and impact coupled devices. Power impacts using an array of piezoelectric
may be recovered passively from body heat, modules. He showed that rectifying the
breathing, blood pressure, arm motion, output of each module separately affords
typing, and walking or actively through user higher output voltage and faster charging
actions such as winding or pedalling. John than the use of a single rectifier. In addition,
Kymissis examined three different devices an increase in the rate of impacts produces an
that can be built into a shoe, and used for increase in output voltage and charging rate.
generating electrical power "parasitically" However, under real conditions, it may not be
while walking. One of these is piezoelectric practical to increase the rate of impacts.
in nature: a unimorph strip made from Piezo Instead, it is more practical to include a phase
ceramic composite material. The second is a difference. The inclusion of a phase
shoe-mounted rotary magnetic generator difference between impacts on individual
[Kymissis et al., 2012]. Later in 2002 Jose modules in the array has the same effect as an
Luis Gonzalez shown how it is feasible to use increase in the rate of impacts increase in the
the energy harvested from human body to charging rate. Another advantage of
power wearable units incorporating including a phase difference is that the forces
computing, communication and audio are distributed temporally. These methods
functions. Existing shoe mounted rotary can be used to realize more efficient
electromechanical generators can provide piezoelectric energy harvesting [Baek et al.,
enough power from walking to supply these 2012].
devices. The generators based on
piezoelectric effect are or will be also capable Later Kumar discussed the simulation studies
of powering wearable units. However more on a vibration based energy harvesting
investigation and development is necessary to system to convert the undesirable mechanical
raise the electrical output power for the vibration to useful green power. The design
existing prototypes to the power level that consists of a resonating proof mass and a
can be obtained theoretically [Gonzalez et al., spring system enclosed in housing and fixed
2012]. Spring-comprised Piezoelectric on the source of vibration. He proposed that
Energy Generator (SPEG) for random by using an array of such devices tuned to
vibration is modelled and analyzed in this slightly different frequencies, a wide
work. The work basically focuses a novel bandwidth response can be obtained [Kumar
spring comprised piezoelectric energy et al., 2012]. Shashank presented a patent as
harvester with hitting masses, which is “energy harvesting with plurality of
1085
Radial and Thickness Mode Calculations of PZT-5H Disc by using Ambient Vibrations
piezoelectric elements”. The invention 10 N. Figure 2 indicates the three different

pertain generally to a mechanism for trials of forces such as 0 to 1 insteps of 0.1 , 1
capturing mechanical energy and converting to 2 insteps of 0.1 and 2 to 3 insteps of 0.1
it to electrical, and is particularly useful for .By using Matlab coding the above figures
continually charging or providing emergency has been drawn. For thickness mode. The
power to mobile, battery powered devices frequency constant , capacitance, resonance
that are handheld or carried by persons. The frequency, static voltage and static
mechanism comprises a plurality of displacement of PZT-5H disc is recorded as
elongated piezoelectric elements for 2079 m/s, 11.744n Farads, 1.0395 MHz, 94
generating electric energy from mechanical mV and 59.22X10-12 m .
energy [Priya and Myer, 2012].
CONCLUSION
In this extended abstract only shown the
calculations of PZT-5H under thickness
mode such as the frequency constant ,
capacitance, resonance frequency, static
voltage and static displacement of PZT-5H
disc . In the full paper radial mode
calculations and its correlation with the
thickness mode can be mentioned. The static
displacement is very small for PZT-5H when
the voltage is applied. It comes under inverse
piezoelectric effect. If the applied voltage is
94 mV for the disc of 32 mm diameter and 2
mm thickness the change in displacement is
Figure .1 Voltage verses Static force 59.22X10-12m .
REFERENCES
John Kymissis Clyde Kendall Joseph
Paradiso and Neil Gershenfeld 2012
Parasitic Power Harvesting in Shoes
Physics and Media Group MIT Media
Laboratory E15-410 Cambridge MA
02139 USA.
Jose Luis Gonzalez, Antonio Rubio and
Francesc Moll 2012powered
piezoelectric batteries to supply power
Figure.2 Generation of voltage at different wearable electronic devices Universitat
trials of forces Politecnica de Catalunya C/ Jordi
Figures 1 and 2 describes the output static Girona1-3.
voltages at different applied forces. Figure 1
Ki Hwan BaekSeongKwang Hong Se Bin
indicates the values of output static voltage of
Kim Jeong Hun Kim and Tae Hyun
maximum 947 mV at the maximum force of
Sung 2012 Rectifier and structural
1086
Allamraju K.V.
design for efficient energy harvesting

system from impact-based piezoelectric
array IEEE.
Kumar M C B Prabhu D B Akila R Gupta A
Alagappan M Sundaram N M 2012
Design and Simulation of MEMS
Based Piezoelectric Vibration Energy
Harvesting System COMSOL
Conference in Bangalore.
Shashank Priya Robert D Myer 2012
Piezoelectric energy harvester United
state patent patent no. US 7 649305 B2.
JAN 19.
1087
ICCMS2016
VIBRATION BASED HYBRID ENERGY HARVESTER FOR

BROADBAND HARVESTING
RAJARATHINAM M.* and ALI S. F.
Department of Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Technology-Madras, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Linear harvester draws maximum energy when the natural frequency of the
device matches the input frequency. Off-resonance conditions, the output power falls
significantly. To increase the total power harvested and at multiple frequencies a
hybrid energy harvester is proposed. In the present idea, cantilevered beam with
piezoelectric unimorph configuration used to harvest energy from piezoelectric strain
and permanent magnets are hung in two different places at beam with a linear elastic
spring used to harvest electromagnetic energy out of motion in a magnetic field. Both
piezoelectric and electromagnetic energies are tapped in a single device making it a
hybrid harvesting device. This study analyses hybrid harvester power output and
compares them with the stand-alone piezoelectric and electromagnetic harvester under
harmonic base motions.
Keywords: Energy harvesting; piezoelectric; electromagnetic; hybrid
harvesters.
INTRODUCTION The PE harvester generates power when a

Sensor nodes and autonomous electronics use mechanical stress is applied to the PE
batteries to power themselves and send elements through external mechanical
measurement data to the acquisition system. vibrations. Erturk and Inman (2008, 2009)
Replacing batteries is a costly affair, sensors developed different models based on
may also be installed in inaccessible points, unimorph and bimorph cantilever with
leading to safety concerns while replacing /without tip mass. The EM harvester
batteries. Energy harvesting provides an generates power due to relative motion
alternative way to power up the sensors. between magnets and electric circuit [Beeby
Ambient energy harvesting is the process of et al., 2007]. Most of the standalone linear
converting the energy available in energy harvesters give better power at
environment into useful electrical energy and resonance. Its power output will be reduced
stored for use in small autonomous drastically for even a small difference
electronics applications. Sources available for between the frequency of input vibration and
energy harvesting include solar, wind, tidal, the natural frequency of the harvester system.
thermal gradients, acoustic and vibration and To overcome this drawback, the researchers
many more. Among these energy harvesting focused different approaches for increasing
sources, vibration based energy harvesting bandwidth of energy harvesters.
has attracted more attentions for various Ali and Adhikari (2013) investigated the
applications. Different concepts have been piezoelectric broadband energy harvesting by
proposed in vibration based energy considering dynamic vibration absorbers
harvesting technologies. PE and EM concept with two degree of freedom (DoF)
transduction mechanisms are the two major model. Shahruz (2006) developed a system to
techniques.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: rajmiitm@gmail.com 1088

Rajarathinam and Ali
increase the bandwidth by using multiple beam, and a tip mass is attached at the free
piezoelectric cantilevers with different end. A permanent magnet is suspended at its
dimensions and different tip masses are on end with a linear elastic spring. The copper
the same platform. However, these systems coil is placed in the axis of movement of the
significantly increase the volume and weight.
permanent magnet as shown in Figure 1.
Yang et al. (2010) developed an energy-
harvesting technique based on the Another magnet with spring and copper coil
electromagnetic method using simply also arranged similarly at a distance ′x′ from
supported beam with multiple magnets. the fixed end of the beam. The beam and
Using multiple independent transduction copper coils setup are mounted on source of
techniques in the same model is another vibration structure. This system generates the
solution for scavenging optimal power over a power from piezoelectricity and
multiple frequency. For this reason, a hybrid electromagnetism phenomena when
energy harvester is proposed. Challa et al. subjected to base excitation. To simplify the
(2009) and Yang et al. (2010) developed the analysis of this physical model, an equivalent
vibration based hybrid energy harvesting lumped mass model is used to represent the
technology based on coupled piezoelectric
harvester as shown in Figure 2.
and electromagnetic mechanisms. These
models consist a beam with piezoelectric
patches and permanent magnets rigidly
attached to the tip of the cantilever beam with
electrical circuit arrangement. It was found
that the electromagnetic system generates
high output power at low frequency, while
piezoelectric generates higher power at
higher frequency.
The proposed model is improvised from the
existing model. In the existing model the EM
part is directly attached to the tip of the
cantilever, whereas the improvised model, Figure 1. Schematic diagram of the
EM part is suspended through a spring. In proposed hybrid energy harvester.
this work, an improvised hybrid energy
harvester is modelled as a four degrees of
freedom lumped parameter model. The
hybrid system is analysed for harvested
power compared to that of stand-alone
devices. The standalone PE device consists
unimorph cantilever beam with tip mass and
the stand-alone EM device consists spring
with magnet and copper coil. Numerical
simulations are carried out to show the power
output under harmonic base motion.
MODELING OF ENERGY
Figure 2. An equivalent lumped
HARVESTER
mass model of the hybrid energy
Figure 1 illustrates the schematic diagram of harvester.
a hybrid energy harvesting device. MFC is
bonded on the upper surface of the cantilever
1089
Vibration based hybrid energy harvester for broadband harvesting
The equations of motion of the simplified | Vem 4 (ω ) / 2 |2

model are obtained using piezoelectric PEMsub2-HV EH ( )
ω = (10)
Rem
constitutive law and D’Alembert’s principle.
y1r + c1 y1r − c2 y 2 r − cm 4 y 4 r + k1 y1r
m1  The total hybrid power
(1)
− k 2 y2 r − k 4 y4 r − θ V p = −m1  PHV EH (ω ) PPEsub-HV EH (ω ) + ∑1 PEMsubi-HV EH (ω )
2
yg =
y2 r + c2 y 2 r − cm 3 y3r + k2 y2 r
m2  This section discusses the simulated results
−k3 y3r = − m2 (  y1r + yg ) obtained in this study. Numerical (2)
simulations are carried out with
y3r + cm 3 y3r + k3 y3r
m3  harmonic excitation at the base. Figure 3
(3)
=−m2 ( 
y2 r + y1r + 
yg ) shows the theoretical powers obtained from
y3r + cm 3 y3r + k3 y3r
m3  stand-alone PE, stand-alone EM and hybrid
(4) harvester (HVEH) under the consideration of
=−m2 ( 
y2 r + y1r + 
yg )
1mm base excited amplitude. Theoretical
Vp power plot clearly shows that the hybrid
θ y1r + C pVP + =
0 (5)
Rp harvester produce the high power in a
broader frequency range whereas the
where, k i 's and c i 's are stiffnesses and
standalone devices produces the maximum
damping coefficients. y i 's are the relative
power only at their own resonating
displacement of m i 's respectively. y g is the
frequency. Out of resonance, the stand-alone
base excited amplitude. Cp is the electrical
harvesters power reduced drastically.
capacitance of MFC. V p is voltage developed
by the MFC when subjected to mechanical RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
strain and θ is the electromechanical coupling 2
10
coefficient. The voltage generated by the 0

10
electromagnetic phenomenon is derived using
Lenz's law .
Power (mW)
-2
10
Vem 3 + Bm 3 L pc 3 + ( y3r + y 2 r + y1r ) =

0
(6) -4
10
Vem 4 + Bm 4 L pc 4 + ( y 4 r + y1r ) =
0
(7) -6 Stand-alone PE Power
10
Stand-alone EM1 Power
Where, Vem 3 and Vem 3 are voltages Stand-alone EM2 Power
-8 Hybrid Power
developed by the EM harvesters because of 10
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
change in magnetic flux. B m3 and B m4 are Frequency (Hz)
the flux density of the magnets. L pc3 and L pc4 Figure 3. Standalone PE, standalone EM
are practical length of the solenoids. and hybrid harvesters power as a
function of frequency.
These equations are converted into frequency
domain for finding harmonic power outputs. CONCLUSION
The power expressions are
A improvised design of a cantilever beam
| V p (ω ) / 2 |2
PPEsub-HV EH (ω ) = (8) hybrid energy harvester is proposed in this
Rp article. A simple 4-DoF model is developed
for the hybrid system for simulation studies.
| Vem 3 (ω ) / 2 |2 The simulated response show that the harvester
PEMsub1-HV EH (ω ) = (9)
Rem has broad range of frequency to harvest
sustained power with little variation.
1090
Rajarathinam and Ali
Therefore, a linear harvester is carried that has through damping matching Smart
broadband like nonlinear harvesters. Further, Materials and Structures 18 1-11.
parametric study for enhancing the bandwidth
and efficiency of the harvester will be
presented in full length paper.
REFERENCES
Erturk A and Inman D J 2008 On mechanical
modeling of cantilevered piezoelectric
vibration energy harvesters Journal of
Erturk A and Inman D J 2008 A distributed
parameter electromechanical model for
cantilevered piezoelectric energy
harvesters Journal of Vibration and
Acoustics 130 1-15.
Erturk A and Inman D J 2009 An
experimentally validated bimorph
cantilever model for piezoelectric energy
harvesting from base excitations Smart
Materials and Structures 18 1-18.
Beeby S P Torah R N Tudor M J Glynne-
Jones P O'Donnell T Saha C R and Roy
S 2007 A micro electromagnetic
generator for vibration energy harvesting
Journal of Micromechanics and
microengineering 17 1257-1265.
Ali S F and Adhikari S 2013 Energy
harvesting dynamic vibration absorbers
Journal of Applied Mechanics 80 1-9.
Shahruz S M 2006 Design of mechanical
band-pass filters for energy scavenging.
Journal of Sound and Vibration 292 987-
998.
Yang B Lee C Kee W L and Lim S P 2010
Hybrid energy harvester based on
piezoelectric and electromagnetic
mechanisms. Journal of
Micro/Nanolithography MEMS and
MOEMS 9 1-10.
Challa V R Prasad M G and Fisher F T 2009
A coupled piezoelectric-electromagnetic
energy harvesting technique for
achieving increased power output
1091
ICCMS2016
CORRELATIONS BETWEEN STIFFNESS AND MICROSTRUCTURE

OF A SPECIES OF BAMBOO
MANNAN S.*and BASU S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur, Kanpur (UP), India.
Abstract: Bamboo is a ubiquitous monocotyledonous flowering plant and a

member of the true grass family Poaceae. In many parts of the world, it is widely
used as a structural material especially in scaffoldings and buildings. In spite of its
wide use, there is no accepted methodology for standardising a species of bamboo
for a particular structural purpose. The task of developing structure property
correlations is complicated by the fact that bamboo is a hierarchical material whose
structure at the nanoscopic level is not very well explored. However, we show that
as far as stiffness is concerned, it is possible to obtain reliable estimates of
important structural properties like the axial modulus from the knowledge of certain
key elements of the microstructure. Strength of bamboo depends most sensitively
on the size and arrangement of the fiber sheaths surrounding the vascular bundles
and the arrangement of single crystalline cellulose microfibrils in their secondary
cell walls.
Keywords: Bamboo; Multiscale modelling; Functionally graded material.
INTRODUCTION steel and concrete structures) with bamboo

as the major structural element.
Bamboo, a member of the true grass family
Poaceae, is a ubiquitous monocotyledonous In their design, Bhallaet al. (2005) have
flowering plant, of which there are over 75 assumed that bamboo (in particular, the
genera and 1250 species (Liese, 1998). Out species DendrocallamusGiganteus) has a
of about 130 species of wild and cultivated Young’s modulus of 14 GPa, and tensile
bamboo occurring in India, 13 belonging to and compressive yield strengths of 120 and
7 genera have been recommended by the 55 MPa, respectively. While, these values
National Bamboo Mission for use in various are impressive for a structural material
traditional and industrial applications (especially given that the density is about
(http://nbm.nic.in/Achievement/Handbook 700 kg/m3 which results in a significantly
% 20on%20Bamboo.pdf). A major use of higher strength to weight ratio compared to,
some of these species is in construction and say, steel; see also Nogata and Takahashi
scaffolding. In fact, Bhallaet al. (2005) have (1995) for detailed comparisons), structure
demonstrated that modern structural property correlations for various species of
engineering principles can be utilised to bamboo are not very well developed.
design robust structures (eg. a large shed Detailed tests to determine mechanical
adhering to established design norms for properties of bamboo stem, which is known
as culm, have been reported (Amada et al.,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: mannan@iitk.ac.in 1092

Mannan and Basu
1997; Ray et al., 2005) but the essential those of the inner, middle and outer regions
features of the bamboo microstructure that of the transverse cross section. The third set
contribute to and determine its strength and of specimens (shown in Fig. 1(c)) was
stiffness have not been clearly identified. prepared to test the mechanical strength of
the sclerenchymatous fibers.
We show that in order to obtain a reliable
estimate of the axial mechanical properties
of a particular species of bamboo,
knowledge of a small set of key parameters
is sufficient. These include the areal
distribution of fibers, average orientation
angle of the cellulose microfibrils in the
fiber secondary cell walls and size
distribution of the fibers. Apparent
sweeping simplifications like ignoring the
Figure 1. A bamboo culm showing
amorphous nature of a part of the cellulose,
different test samples extracted from it.
assuming approximate values of the
stiffness of the amorphous non-cellulosic Tension tests have been conducted on either
polysaccharides in the microfibrils, size a Universal Testing machine fitted with a 10
distribution of the parenchyma cells etc, do kN load cell or, in cases where the
not seem to affect the stiffness estimate anticipated loads were small, on a micro-
significantly. tensile stage (Deben MICROTEST, UK)
with a 300 N load cell. In all cases, the
MATERIALS AND METHODS crosshead speeds were maintained at 1
mm/min. In addition, we have used a
A bamboo culm of local variety (species
nanoindentor (Hysitron Inc., USA) with in-
Dendrocalamus Strictus) was obtained from
situ imaging function capable of applying
botanical nursery, IIT Kanpur and aged in
indentation loads of the order of 1000 µN.
the open for eight weeks for natural
Digital image correlation (DIC) was used to
seasoning. The sixth internode from bottom
monitor strains on samples during some of
end of the culm (outer diameter 71.8, inner
the tensile tests. The commercial software
diameter 32.4 and length 270 mm) was
Vic-2D (Correlated Solutions, USA) was
selected for all experimental studies
used for image correlation. Further, an open
reported herein. Basically, three kinds of
source image processing software ImageJ
samples were prepared from the internode.
(National Institute of Health, USA) was
The cross section of the internode was
used to analyse micrographs obtained from
divided approximately into three regions:
the electron microscope. Also, results
inner, middle and outer. Semi-circular
involving electron microscopy were
transverse slices of 3 mm thickness were
obtained from a Field Emission Scanning
made from each region and polished with
Electron Microscope (FESEM, Sigma,
alumina for further use as shown in Fig.
Zeiss, Germany).
1(a). These were used mainly for electron
microscopic studies.As shown in Fig. 1(b), STIFFNESS OF A BAMBOO CULM
tensile specimens were prepared with the
length in the longitudinal direction and From the point of view of mechanical
properties along the thickness representing strength, the most important elements of the
1093
Correlations between Stiffness and Microstructure of a Species of Bamboo
vascular bundle are the fibers. The fibers approaches. The comparison is shown in
are multi-lamellar tubes arranged compactly Fig. 3.The average microfibril orientation
to form bundles (Liese, 1998). Fig. 2 shows has values between 5 and 20° in our
an idealised multi-lamellar fiber wall simulations (as also in reported experiments
structure. on wood (Abraham and Elbaum, 2013)).
Figure 2.An idealised multi-lamellar cell

wall structure showing the axes
definingthe orientations of the
microfibrils.
The fiber walls are made of mostly single
Figure 3.Comparison of the overall axial
crystalline cellulose chains (also called as Young's modulus of fiber.
microfibrils) embedded in lignin-
hemicellulose complex running around the With this, we eliminate the necessity of
walls oriented with fiber axis. This knowing the MFA in every layer. If we
orientation angle is called as microfibril know the mean MFA for the fiber, we can
angle (MFA). The fiber walls are arranged model fiber as monolayer structure and
in alternate thick and thin layers having estimate its axial Young’s modulus. The
MFA 0 to 10° in thick layers and 80 to 90° estimates for axial modulus obtained from
in thin layers. We treat fiber wall as this analysis is verified through experiments
transversely isotropic material. We have on bulk samples as experimental
determined the stiffness tensor for cellulose determination of the mechanical properties
from molecular simulations. Hashin (1979) of the cell wall is fraught with uncertainties
has derived bounds on the stiffness of (Burgert and Dunlop, 2011, for a discussion
transversely isotropic composites reinforced of the issues involved). The experiments
with transversely isotropic fibers. With this, conducted are:
we estimate the upper and lower bound for 1. Tensile tests on fiber bundles
the stiffness of fiber wall. Here, we take two The fiber bundles were extracted from
approaches. First we determine the Young’s bamboo and tested in micro-tensile UTM.
modulus by assigning each layer a The synthetic fiber bundles were
microfibril angle and transforming the constructed from various fiber sizes and
stiffness constants in respective frame of locations and stiffness values were
references by simple rule of mixture.In the obtained.
second approach, the overall stiffness is
calculated using thickness-averaged 2. Nano-indentation studies on fibers
microfibril angle for entire fiber wall. We In-situ nano-indentation experiments were
compare Young’s modulus from both the performed on various fiber cells and the
1094
Mannan and Basu
results were compared with the values strain across the cross section in bending,
suggested by the expressions given by thereby delaying local fracture and enabling
Vlassak (2004) and Vlasak and Nix (1994). the plant to withstand higher wind loads.
3. Tensile tests on bulk bamboo
REFERENCES
The tensile tests were carried out on bulk
Abraham Y Elbaum R 2013 Quantification
bamboo specimens and the results of overall of microfibril angle in secondarycell
Young’s modulus were compared with the walls at subcellular resolution by means
values obtained from simulations described of polarized lightmicroscopy New
earlier.Through all these experiments, the Phytologist 197(3) 1012-1019.
mechanical properties obtained from Amada S Ichikawa Y Munekata T Nagase
simulations were verified and it was found Y Shimizu H 1997 Fiber texture and
that these values match closely. mechanical graded structure of bamboo
Composites Part B: Engineering 28 13–
CONCLUSIONS 20.
We have studied the morphology and Bhalla S Gupta S Sudhakar P Suresh R
stiffness of a local variety of bamboo with a 2005 Bamboo- a functionally graded
view to establish an implementable method composite-correlation between
microstructure and mechanical
of linking the former to the latter. We have
strengthJournal of Materials Science
shown that 40(19) 5249–5253.
The axial modulus of a bamboo internode Burgert I Dunlop J 2011 Micromechanics of
can be estimated if we have reliable cell walls In: Wojtaszek P (Ed.)
measures- of (a) the average microfibril Mechanical Integration of Plant Cells
angle in the secondary cell walls of the and Plants 9 of Signalling and
sclerenchymatousfibers, (b) areal Communication in Plants Springer
Berlin Heidelberg 27–52.
distribution of the fibers and (c) size
distribution of the fibers. Hashin Z 1979 Analysis of properties of
fiber composites with anisotropic
The estimates of stiffness obtained using constituents Journal of Applied
simple ideas borrowed from the mechanics Mechanics 46 543–550.
of composite materials have been tested
Liese W 1998 The anatomy of bamboo
against experiments both on bundles of culms Tech. Rep. 18 International
fibers and samples drawn from the culm. Network for Bamboo and Rattan.
Several aspects of the bamboo Nogata F Takahashi H 1995 Intelligent
microstructure, some of which are poorly functionally graded material: Bamboo
understood, do not affect the stiffness Composites Engineering 5(7) 743–751.
estimates significantly. This is not to say Ray A Mondal S Das S and
that their knowledge is unnecessary. In fact, Ramachandrarao P 2005 Bamboo- a
they may have important role to play in the functionally graded composite-
control of fracture properties of bamboo. correlation between microstructure and
mechanical strength. Journal of
Bamboo is known to be a multiscale, Materials Science 40(19) 5249–5253.
hierarchical functionally graded material.
Vlassak J 2004 A model for chemical–
The advantage of the radial grading in mechanical polishing of a material
stiffness manifests in reducing the axial surface based on contact
1095
Correlations between Stiffness and Microstructure of a Species of Bamboo
mechanicsJournal of the Mechanics and

Physics of Solids 52(4) 847–873.
Vlassak J J Nix W 1994 Measuring the
elastic properties of anisotropic
materials by means of indentation
experiments Journal of the Mechanics
and Physics of Solids 42(8) 1223–1245.
1096
ICCMS2016
RAYLEIGH WAVE PROPAGATION IN LIQUID LAYER LYING

OVER A PRE-STRESSED ORTHOTROPIC HALF-SPACE
CHAUDHARY S.* and SAHU S. A.
Department of Applied Mathematics, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad India.
Abstract: In this paper we investigate the effect of initial stress on propagation of

Rayleigh waves. Geometry of the problem is consisting of a liquid layer lying over an
orthotropic half-space under initial stress. Frequency equation for Rayleigh wave has
been obtained. Obtained results have been shown through numerical illustrations. It is
found that the initial stress has notable effect on phase velocity of Rayleigh wave.
Keywords: Initial stress; Orthotropic; Rayleigh waves; Phase velocity.
INTRODUCTION Rayleigh waves in a thermoelastic granular

Problem of surface waves in an orthotropic medium under initial stress were investigated
elastic medium is very important for the by Ahmed (1999). Biot (1965) explained the
possibility of its extensive application in effect of gravity on Rayleigh wave
various branches of science and technology, propagation. Bouden and data (1984)
particularly in Optics, Earthquake science, explained Rayleigh waves in granular
Acoustics, Geophysics and Plasma physics. medium over an initially stressed elastic half-
The earth interior has layered structure and it space.
affects the propagation of elastic waves
GEOMETRY AND SOLUTION OF
significantly. The theoretical study and
THE PROBLEM
applications of elastic materials has become
an important task for solid mechanics. The SOLUTION FOR UPPER LAYER
study of Rayleigh waves is important for
seismologists because of its applications in
estimation of disaster caused by earthquake
and it is better for understanding of the earth
crust. Rayleigh waves have found
considerable application in the ultrasonic
range. A good amount of literature is
available on the problems of Rayleigh waves
in isotropic half-space with free surface.
Propagation of elastic waves in an orthotropic Figure 1. Solution for liquid layer
material is investigated by Abd-Alla (1999).
u1  ik  A1e 1kz  B1e  1kz  e
ik  x  ct 
The effect of rotation, magnetic field, initial
stress and gravity on Rayleigh waves in a
w1  1k  A1e 1kz  B1e  1kz  e
ik  x  ct 
homogeneous orthotropic elastic half-space
have been shown by Abd-Alla et al. (2010).
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:soniyachaudhary18@gmail.com
1097
Chaudhary and Sahu
SOLUTION FOR THE HALF-SPACE

6
H0 0, Ρ0 2
The solution for half-space P0 0.8

5
1.3
1.5
u2   Aeik2 z  ik  k 22 L1   Ceik3z  ik  k 23 L2   eik  xct  3
c
w2   Aeik2z  ik2  k 2 L1   Ceik3z  ik3  k 2 L2   eik xct  2
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS AND 0

0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
FREQUENCY EQUATION
k
(1) 0 20  0 at z   H (i.e. stress of the Figure 3. Variation of Rayleigh wave
velocity c with respect to wave number k
layer is zero at z  H
for effect of initial stress P0.
(2) u1  u2 , w1  w2 at z=0
(3) 0 20   13 + 33 + 13 + 33 at z=0, CONCLUSION
The problem of Rayleigh wave propagation
Using all boundary conditions, we get in liquid layer over orthotropic half-space has
been studied. The liquid layer has been
M 1k  MW  NZ  considered to be lying over orthotropic half-
tan  kHM 1   (1)
ik WQ  ZR   MR  QN space under initial stress. Frequency equation
where of Rayleigh wave has been obtained in
explicit form. Some numerical examples have
c2 been illustrated. The following are the
M1   1, M  k 2 2 L1  ik ,
2 conclusions:
N  k 2 3 L2  ik , Q  k 2 L1  ik 2 and
1. Velocity of Rayleigh waves increases
R  k 2 L2  ik 3 . with increment in wave number while
Eq. (1) is the frequency equation of Rayleigh it decreases with increasing value of
wave propagation in liquid layer lying over wave length.
an orthotropic half-space under initial stress. 2. Initial stress of the medium decreases
the velocity of Rayleigh waves.
H0 2, Ρ0 2
0.5
P0 1
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
0.0
Abd-Alla AM 1999 Propagation of Rayleigh

0.5
c
1.0
waves in an elastic half-space of
1.5
orthotropic materialAppl Math Comput
2.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
99(1) 61-69.
2Π
k
Abd-Alla A M Mahmoud S R Abo-Dahab
Figure 2. Variation of Rayleigh wave SM and Helmy M I 2010 Influence of
velocity c with respect to wave length for rotation, magnetic field initial stress and
 2 
gravity on Rayleigh waves in a
  P0 .
 k  effect of initial stress homogeneous orthotropic elastic half-
space Appl Math Sci 4 91-108.
1098
Rayleigh Wave Propagation in Liquid Layer Lying over a Pre-stressed Orthotropic Half-Space
Ahmed SM 1999 Rayleigh waves in a

thermoelastic granular medium under
stress Appl Math Comput 101 269-280.
Biot M A 1965 Mechanics of increment
deformation. Wiley New York.
Bouden M and Datta SK 1984 Rayleigh
waves in granular medium over an
initially stressed elastic half-space Rev
RoumaineSci Tech SerMecAppl 29 271-
285.
1099
ICCMS2016
THERMOSTRUCTURAL DESIGN OF AN UNCONVENTIONAL

SECTION WITH STIFFENED AND UNSTIFFENED PANELS
JAYANTHI G.* and JAIN P.C.
DRDL, DRDO, Hyderabad, India
Abstract: This paper reports the thermostructural design criteria for unconventional
section subjected to thermal and mechanical loads. A general approach of
thermostructural analysis and estimation of buckling load factor using commercial
finite element software ANSYS is discussed. Design of section is carried out
considering both stiffened and unstiffened panels. Parametric study by varying the
height and width of stiffeners for stiffened design and thickness variation for
unstiffened design are studied. Section with unstiffened panel evolved as Mass
optimum design.
Keywords - Thermo structural, Thermal Buckling, Stiffened panel
INTRODUCTION Thermo-mechanical behaviors of

functionally graded material panels are
Design of the section elaborated in this paper investigated in Chang-Yull Lee et al., 2013.
is part of a research vehicle airframe. Cross Thermal post buckling analysis of laminated
section of airframe is octagonal with eight composite and isotropic rectangular plates
panels connected by stringers along the are investigated Marco Amabili et al., 2012.
edges. Detailed view of a typical section is Failure and post buckling behavior of
shown in Figure 1. stiffened composite panel under coupled
Front Bulkhead (FBH) environment is elaborated Xiaopeng Shi et al,
Top Panel (TP) 2014. Detailed publication on thermo-
structural design of an unconventional
Stringers section is meager in open literature.
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
(A) DESIGN OBJECTIVE
Rear Bulkhead To evolve a mass optimum section design,
Side Panel (RBH) ensuring structural integrity and stability.
(SP) Bottom Panel (BP) (B) DESIGN LOADS
Figure 1. Detailed View of Section Airframe is subjected to Bending moment of

4.3 kNm and axial force 3.1 kN. Panel-wise
Airframe section is subjected to temperatures and materials selected are given
aerodynamic, inertia and thermal loads in Table.1.
during flight. (C) DESIGN REQUIREMENT
In literature thermo structural behavior of
Factor of safety on yield strength ≥1.25 and
conventional structures are published.
buckling load factor (BLF) ≥ 1.5. Lateral
_____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: Email: jayanthigdrdl@gmail.com

1100
Jayanthi and Jain
deformation of bottom panel has to be Grids for stiffened panel design are modeled
restricted to 4mm or less. as beam elements. Bottom panel is stiffened
bi directionally with grids. FE model of
(D) DESIGN METHODOLOGY
section with grid and grid details are shown
Design onsets with the development of finite in Figure 3 and Figure 4 respectively.
element (FE) model of the section. Structural Temperature dependent material properties
analysis is carried out with the applied loads are used in FE analysis.
and boundary conditions. Bottom panel
undergoes large deformation as it
experiences high temperature. Reduction of
these deformations can be achieved by two
methods
(i) Increasing the overall thickness of bottom
panel
(ii) Stiffening the 2.5mm bottom panel by
providing grids Figure 3. Finite Element Model of
Section with Stiffenedz Panel
Table 1 Panel Temperatures
Thick Temp
Panel Material
(mm) ( C)
Top Panel 2.5 AA2014 47
Bottom Panel 2.5 Ti6Al4V 505
Side panel-
2.5 Ti6Al4V 445
Bottom ramp
Side panel-
2.5 Ti6Al4V 89
Middle
Side panel- Figure 4. Typical Parameters of Grid
2.5 Ti6Al4V 82
Top ramp
Cross Section
FINITE ELEMENT MODEL SECTION DESIGN WITH
DEVELOPMENT UNSTIFFENED PANEL
Shell model with 4 noded shell element is
Design iteration is initiated with 2.5mm
created in ANSYS. FE model of section with
panel thickness. Temperatures are applied as
boundary condition, temperatures imposed
per Table.1. By analysis deformation (Figure
and Mechanical loads as forces at free end of
3) and buckling load factor (BLF) (Figure 4)
the section are shown in Figure 2.
are obtained.
Figure.2. Finite Element Model of

Figure 3. Lateral deformation (m) of 2.5
Section with unstiffened panel
mm thick Bottom Panel
1101
Thermostructural Design of an Unconventional Section with Stiffened and Unstiffened Panels
increasing the panel thickness, providing

stiffeners (grids) are observed to deliver mass
optimum product. So for the given section
grid stiffened panel approach is also studied
and presented in next section.
SECTION DESIGN WITH
STIFFENED PANEL
Figure 4. First Buckling mode shape In this study, the 2.5mm bottom panel is
stiffened with grids as discussed in section 3.
Maximum lateral deformation is 6mm and Analysis is carried out for different spacing
BLF is 0.1.Deformation and stability criteria and sizes of grid in order to contain the
are not met by 2.5mm thick Bottom Panel. lateral deformation to 4mm and BLF >=1.5.
Consolidation of the study is presented in
Section design is iterated with increased
Table.2.
bottom panel thickness (5 mm) and with
appropriate temperature (300 0C). Lateral Stiffened panel with T shaped Ortho grids of
spacing 100 x 60 mm and grid height of 18
deformation reduced to 1.2 mm. (Figure 5).
mm is meeting the design requirement with
Buckling load factor (BLF) improved to minimum mass. Maximum lateral
1.48. (Figure 6). Mass of the bottom panel is deformation is 3.7 mm as shown in Figure 7
10kg. and. BLF is 1.45 (Figure 8) Mass of the
bottom panel is 13.5kg.
Figure 5 Lateral deformation (m) of 5mm

thick Bottom Panel.
Figure 7. Lateral deformation Plot in
meters for Stiffened Section
Figure 6. First Buckling mode shape

Thus section with 5mm Ti6Al4V bottom
panel has met all the design requirements. Figure 8. First Buckling mode shape for
Stiffened Section
Generally for panel designs, instead of
1102
Jayanthi and Jain
Table 2. Design Iterations Varying Grid Spacing and Sizes
Grid cross section (mm)

Grid Spacing Max Def. Bottom Pane-l
BLF mass (Kg)
(mm) (mm)
100 x 100 w1= 18, t1=5, w2 =10, t2 =5 1.64 9.12 9.7

100 x 100 w1= 20, t1=5, w2 =20, t2 =5 1.69 7.9 12
60 x 60 w1= 10, t1=4, w2 =8, t2 =3 1.62 6.0 9
60 x 60 w1= 15, t1=4, w2 =10, t2 =3 1.67 4.8 11
60 x 60 w1= 16, t1=4, w2 =10, t2 =3 1.64 4.6 11.2
60 x 60 w1= 18, t1=4, w2 =12, t2 =5 1.55 3.9 13.5
100 x 60 w1= 18, t1=5, w2 =15, t2 =5 1.45 3.7 13.5
For the given loads, unstiffened panel design

DISCUSSION
has evolved as mass optimum design
Study is to compare two design approaches, compared to stiffened panel.
stiffened and unstiffened panel for It is known fact that for purely mechanical
thermostructural design. loads stiffened designs are generally mass
In stiffened design, panel thickness is 2.5mm optimum than unstiffened design.
and ortho grids are provided for improving However when thermal loads are
the thermal stability of panel. Grids act as predominant compared to mechanical loads
thermal boundaries and reduce the effective the unstiffened design evolves as the mass
panel area. Mass of the stiffened bottom optimum design.
panel achieved is 13.5kg.
In unstiffened design, panel thickness is REFERENCES
uniformly increased. By this thermal mass Chang-Yull Lee and Ji-Hwan Kim 2013
increases and panel temperature reduces. Thermal post-buckling and snap-through
Bottom panel of 5mm has met all design instabilities of FGM panels in hypersonic
requirements. Mass of the unstiffened bottom flow Aerospace Science and Technology
panel achieved is 10kg. 30 175-182
Even by optimally spacing and sizing the
grids, the grid stiffened panel design gives Marco Amabili and Mohammad reza Sareban
Tajahmadi 2012 Thermal post-buckling
35% heavier solution compared to
of laminated and isotropic rectangular
unstiffened panel design. plates with fixed edges: Comparison of
CONCLUSION experimental and numerical result
Journal of Mechanical Engineering
An unconventional cross section airframe is Science 226(10) 2393-2401.
designed for thermal and mechanical loads.
Bottom panel is critical in this section design Xiaopeng Shi Shulin Li Fei Chang and
because of high temperature. Design of other Dongliang Bian 2014 Postbuckling and
panels remains same for both the approach. failure analysis of stiffened composite
Approach is to compare two designs, panels subjected to
stiffened and unstiffened bottom panel. hydro/thermal/mechanical coupled
environment under axial compression
Composite Structures 118 600-606.
1103
ICCMS2016
AN EXPERIMENTAL STUDY ONSLENDER HOLLOW CIRCULAR

STAINLESS STEEL COLUMNS WITH SINGLE CIRCULAR
PERFORATION SUBJECTED TO AXIAL COMPRESSION
LALTHAZUALA R.* and KONJENGBAM D. SINGH
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India.
Abstract: An experimental study was performed on slender circular hollow stainless

steel columns subjected to axial compression to determine the structural behaviour
(load and failure pattern). The diameter, thickness and length considered for the study
were 38mm, 1.1mm and 500mm respectively. Material testing and compression
testing were carried out using Instron Universal Testing Machine. From the study, it
was observed that for slender columns, increase in diameter of centrally located
perforations decreased the ultimate load capacity; and increase in eccentricity (as
measured from mid length towards the end) of perforation increased the ultimate load.
Keywords: Circular slender column; single perforation; axial compression.
INTRODUCTION should a whole life cycle cost is calculated

(Gardner, 2005, Ashraf et al., 2006, Theofanous
Carbon steels have been used extensively in
and Gardner, 2011. Amongst the hollow
for construction purposes, and is one of the
tubular steel sections e.g. rectangular, square,
important structural materials for engineers
L-, T, +-, elliptical, circular, flat-oval etc.
and architects. This is primarily due to
presented in the literature (see Sachidananda
relatively low material cost, confidence due
and Singh, 2015, Patton and Singh,
to long experience, sufficiently large design
Theofanous et al., 2009, Theofanous and
guidelines, diverse strength options etc.
Gardner, 2009),circular hollow sections (or
However, its low corrosion resistance acts as
circular cylindrical shells) have attracted
deterrent which affects its durability,
considerable attention, especially from
especially for structures in corrosive
architects, due to its aesthetic appearance.
environment. In contrast, stainless steels can
Circular hollow shells are also widely used in
furnish interesting properties like improved
many engineering applications such as silos,
corrosion resistance, high strength/weight
pipelines, lighting poles, container tanks,
ratio, good aesthetic surface finish,
automobile, off-shore structures, aircrafts,
recyclability, lesser maintenance etc. As
missiles etc (see e.g. Shariati and Rokhi,
such, in the recent past there has been arise in
2008). In many occasions, such cylindrical
the consumption of stainless steel structural
structures needs to be perforated or cut-out
members especially for unconcealed
e.g. for electrical, instrumentation cables,
architectural constructions. However, its use
inspection, maintenance etc. These
is still limited vis-a-vis carbon steels,
perforations / cutouts can influence the load
essentially due to the need for more expanded
carrying capacity and buckling of the circular
understanding of its structural behaviour,
columns, when it is subjected to axial
although it certainly makes economic sense
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: ricky@iitg.ernet.in 1104

Lalthazuala and Singh
compression (e.g. Shariati and Rokhi, 2008, mm, 120 mm and 180 mm from the mid-
Han et al., 2006). In the literature, effects of height (i.e. 0 eccentricity). For comparision,
perforation on cylindrical shells under unperforated columns were also tested. For
compression have been reported, both each, parametric consideration, tests were
experimentally and numerically, especially conducted on three specimens. Thus in total,
for mild steel and aluminium (e.g. Shariati 27 specimens were loaded axially in
and Rokhi, 2008, Han et al., 2006, Jullien compression, using displacement control, for
and Limam, 1998, Umbarkaret al., 2013). the study. Schematic diagram showing the
However, to the best of authors’ knowledge, nomenclature and location of the perforation
there are limited studies on the effect of are shown in Figure 1.
perforation for stainless steel cylindrical
D
tubes, in particular for slender lengths.
Therefore, an experimental investigation on Perforation
the effect of single circular perforations on d t
the load capacity and buckling mode of
circular hollow columns have been presented, e
with an attention on the size of mid-height L D
located perforation, and longitudinally
located eccentric perforation.
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY
Stainless steel circular tubular pipes of

diameter (D) 38 mm and thickness (t) 1.1 Figure 1.Schematic diagram representing
mm, were used to conduct the present the geometry of circular hollow column
with single perforation.
experimental study. The pipes were cut and
finished to lengths of ~522 mm. Both the RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
ends of the test specimens were supported in
specially fabricated detachable circular Load (P) vs axial displacement (δ) curves
sleeves, to ensure fixed support conditions, were obtained for all the specimens tested.
leaving ~500 mm as unsupported column Typical P vs δ for a perforated column, with
length. Thus, D/t = 34.5 and L/D = 13.15 for perforation located at 120 mm (or e/L = 0.24)
the test specimen. Prior to testing, tensile is shown for perforation size of 24 mm (or
coupon tests as per ASTM (2007) were also d/D = 0.63) is shown in Figure 2a. The
conducted in Instron8802 100 kN capacity deformed shapes at peak or ultimate load (Pu)
UTM. Young’s modulus and yield’s stress and post peak are shown in Figure 2b. The
were found to be ~200 GPa and 610 MPa. appearance of local buckling at the
Circular perforation sizes (d) of 10, 15, 20, diametrical ends (perpendicular to the
24 and 28 mm diameter were made at the mid longitudinal axis) of the perforation and
height of the columns, to see the effect of flexural buckling with maximum lateral /
perforation size on the structural behaviour. transverse deformation with concave side
Longitudinal eccentricity effect of the located on the perforation side is seen at Pu.
perforation were also studied by considering Post-peak deformaed shape indicates more
a 15 mm diameter perforation and making the flattening of the perforation as a result of
perforation at eccentric distances (e) of 60
1105
Experimental Investigation of Hollow Stainless Steel Circular Slender Column with Single Perforation
under Axial Compression
increasing lateral deformation due to flexural e/L. A value of e/L = 0 indicates that the
buckling. perforation is located at the mid-height. It can
be seen that as the value of eccentricity
(a) 70 A increases or as the perforation moves closer
60 B to the support, the load carrying capacity of
Load, P (kN)
50
40 the column increases, suggesting that the
30 perforation located at mid-height provides the
20 most critical strength of the column. For the
10
0 farthest eccentricity considered i.e. e/L = 0.36
0 2 4 6 (or e = 180 mm), the column strength has
Axial Displacement, δ (mm) reached ~95% of the unperforated strength.
100
Pu/Puu (%)
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.5 1
d/D
Figure 3. Variation of Pu with d/D(e/L =
0.0).
A (peak-load)
B (post-peak load)
100
2 (b)
90
Pu/Puu (%)
Figure 2. (a) Variation of P with δ, and (b)

80
deformed shapes at A (peak-load) and B
70
(post-peak load) (d/D = 0.63, e/L=0.24).
60
In Figure 3, variation of Pu/Puu (Pu for 50
unperforated or solid column) with 0 0.2 0.4
perforation size i.e. d/D for perforation e/L
located at mid height of the column or e/L =
Figure 4. Variation of Pu with e/L (d/D =
0.0 is presented. It can be observed from 0.395).
Figure 3 that a nearly linear decrease (~36%)
in Pu/Puu can be seen for 180% increase in CONCLUSION
perforation size from 10 mm. The drop in Pu Based on the experimental study on steel
as compared to Puu for 10 mm perforation circular hollow column with single circular
size (d/D = 0.263) is observed to be ~7.7%. perforation under axial load, it can be
This is expected because, as the perforation concluded that increasing the perforation size
size is increased, the resistance to flexural decreases the ultimate load. Further, it was
buckling (or lateral bending) would decrease also observed for the same size of
with reduction in material cross section. perforation, mid-height located perforation
The effect of perforation eccentricity is resulted in the lowest ultimate load, but
presented in Figure 4 for a 15 mm perforation increased as the perforation was moved away
size (d/D = 0.395), as a plot of Pu/Puu with
1106
Lalthazuala and Singh
from the mid-height, along the longitudinal Umbarkar K R Patton M L and Singh K D
axis. 2013 Effect of single circular perforation
in lean duplex stainless steel (LDSS)
REFERENCES hollow circular stub columns under pure
Ashraf M Gardner L Nethercot D A 2006 axial compression Thin-Walled
Finite element modeling of structural Structures 68 18-25.
stainless steel cross-sections Thin- Sachidananda K H Singh K D Numerical
Walled Structures 441048-62. study of fixed ended Lean Duplex
ASTM E646 Standard test method for Stainless Steel (LDSS) flat oval hollow
Tensile Strain-Hardening Exponents (n- stub column under pure axial
Values) of Metallic Sheet Materials compression Thin-Walled Structures 96
American Society for Testing and 105-119.
Materials. Shariati M and Rokhi MM 2008 Numerical
Gardner L 2005 The use of stainless steel in and experimental investigation on
structures Progress in structural buckling of steel cylindrical shells with
engineering and materials 7 45-55. elliptical cutout subjected to axial
compression Thin-Walled structures 46
Jullien J F and Limam A 1998 Effects of 1251-1261.
openings of the buckling of cylindrical
shells subjected to axial compression Theofanous M Chan T M and Gardner L
Thin-Walled Structures 31 187-202. 2009 Structural response of stainless
steel oval hollow section compression
Han H Cheng J Taheri F and Pegg N members Engineering Structures 31 922-
Numerical and experimental 934.
investigations of the response of
aluminium cylinders with a cutout Theofanous M Gardner L 2009 Testing and
subject to axial compressionThin-Walled numerical modelling of lean duplex
Structures 44 254-270. stainless steel hollow section columns.
modelling of lean duplex stainless steel
hollow columns of square, L-, T-, and +-
shaped cross sections under pure axial
compression Thin-Walled Structures 53
1-8.
Theofanous M Chan T M and Gardner L
2009 Structural response of stainless
steel oval hollow section compression
members Engineering Structures 31 922-
934.
Theofanous M Gardner L 2011 Effect of
element interaction and material
nonlinearity on the ultimate capacity of
stainless steel cross-sections. Steel and
Composite Structures 12 73-92.
1107
ICCMS2016
GAUGEWIDENING/CONDEMNING OF PARABOLIC PROFILE

LOCOMOTIVE WHEELS WHILE BRAKING WITH COMPOSITE
BRAKE BLOCKS
VINEESH K P.*, VAKKALAGADDA M. R. K. and RACHERLA V.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur, India.
Abstract: Gauge change in parabolic profile locomotive wheel is studied using finite
element analysis. The study accounts for residual stresses generated during wheel
manufacturing and fitment of the wheel on locomotive wheel. A validated thermal
model accounting for heat loss to rail, brake blocks and ambient air is considered for
accurate prediction of wheel temperatures for a given train running and braking
history. Results are obtained for high friction K-type composite brake blocks used by
Indian railways for two limiting braking scenarios: (i) synchronised braking where
effort is uniformly distributed on all brake blocks and (ii) independent braking where
braking effort to decelerate a train is provided solely by locomotive brake blocks.
Bending at hub-disc and disc-rim interfaces is seen to primarily control axial
deflection of wheels. While gauge reduction is observed during braking, gauge
increase is seen during subsequent cooling. Maximum gauge increase occurs as the
wheels finally cool down to room temperature.
Keywords: railway wheel; braking; residual stress; wheel gauge.
INTRODUCTION manufacturing process. For broad gauge

Several hundreds of wheel failures from tracks used for almost all tracks in India,
gauge widening were reported in tread braked wheel gauge during assembly is set at 1596
locomotives in Indian railways from 2004- mm and failure from gauge widening is taken
2010. The problem had started with phased to occur when wheel gauge increases by
out replacement of cast iron with composite more than 3 mm, while failure from gauge
brake blocks in locomotives, wagons, and condemning is taken to occur when wheel
coaches (RDSO, 2011). The number of gauge reduces by over 0.5 mm. Indian
reported gauge widening cases had dropped railways using three kinds of brake blocks for
significantly from 2011 onwards with tread braking: Cast iron, high friction K-type
reduction in peak brake cylinder pressure, use composite and low friction L-type composite
of low friction cast iron or composite brake brake blocks. In this paper only K-type
blocks in locomotives and with bypassing of composite brake blocks are considered.
locomotive brakes in majority of braking Friction characteristics of these brake blocks
events. This paper analyse the gauge change under dry conditions, along with train
in parabolic wheel profile under different running model for estimating braking time,
kind of running and braking condition by braking distance, and heat dissipated during
considering the residual stresses during braking for any operations are presented in
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: vineesh2k1me@gmail.com 1108

Vineesh et al.
(Vakkalagaddaet al., 2015a).Vakkalagadda et fraction of heat generated at brake block

al. (2015b) present a validated, hybrid wheel interface entering wheel is taken as
approach for estimating net heat entering the 0.985 for K-type composite brake blocks.
wheel during tread braking, after accounting Rail chill effect is also considered. Train
for estimating heat loss to rail and brake speed and brake cylinder pressure history
blocks. were used as inputs to a train running model
to obtain the corresponding heat generation
HEAT TREATMENT AND BRAKING rates during braking. As confirmed by earlier
Railway wheels which are manufactured works (Tarafder et al., 2007), the rim region
either by casting or forging process is taken to be harder than the rest of the
undergoes heat treatment process to harden wheel. Rim region is assigned a yield stress
the rim region and induce compressive hoop and ultimate tensile strength 25% higher than
stresses in it. During heat treatment process, the rest of wheel. Temperature dependent
the wheel is initially heated to above 871°C elastic and plastic properties are reported in
to austenise the steel and relieves any (Vakkalagadda et al., 2015c). Properties for
residual stresses in it. Next, the wheel tread the axle are taken to be identical to that of
surface is water cooled to harden rim region disc region of wheel. In addition to elastic
and induce compressive hoop stresses in it. and plastic deformations, high temperature
After a dwell period at ambient temperature creep deformation is also considered as
for about 2 hours, the wheel is tempered at reported by (Gordon and Perlman, 1998).
500 °C to increase the rim toughness and to The following boundary conditions are used.
moderate the residual stresses. Lastly, the In line with Gordon and Perlman (1998)
wheel is air cooled to room temperature. The during heat treatment process, heat transfer
air cooled wheel is turned to required profile coefficient characterising convective heat
and press fit it on to the axle. An interference transfer to ambient air is taken as 28 W/m2 K
fit of 0.26-0.3 mm is imposed at wheel-axle and heat transfer coefficient characterising
interference. Loco pilots can use heat loss to water during quenching is taken
synchronised braking where the brakes are as 3066 W/m2 K. Based on works of
applied on all the wheels of train or (Vakkalagadda et al., 2015b) convective heat
independent braking where the brakes are transfer coefficient during train running
applied only on the locomotive wheels. period is taken as 12 W/m2 K. At all times,
emissivity for wheel surface is taken as 0.95.
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING
Perfect thermal contact is assumed between
Only thermal loading is considered in the wheel and axle. The axle surface is taken to
analysis. Mechanical loading which are be insulated as the axle casing isolates the
significant only for small depths from tread axle from ambient air. The ambient
surface, are neglected. Heat generation rate at temperature is taken to be 30 °C. An
rail-wheel and brake-wheel interface are interference of 0.2 mm is used for the press
estimated using the train running model fit between the wheel and the axle. The
presented in (Vakkalagadda et al., friction coefficient at wheel-axle interference
2015a).Rail chill effect and heat partitioning is taken as 0.1. The analyses start with wheel
at wheel-brake block interfaces are estimated being initially at 871 °C in stress free state.
using the approach presented in Heat generated during braking at brake
(Vakkalagadda et al., 2015b). As per this, block-wheel interface is computed using train
1109
Gauge Widening/Condemning of Parabolic Profile Locomotive Wheels while Braking with Composite
Brake Blocks
running model presented in (Vakkalagadda et Figure. 2 shows change in wheel gauge, for
al., 2015a). The problem at hand is analysed repeated synchronised braking of a passenger
using a 2-D axi-symmetric thermo train, using K type composite brake blocks,
mechanical model. The domain is discretised from 140 km/h. Results are shown for 8 stop
using 8- noded, axi-symmetric, temperature braking events followed by steady train
displacement biquadrate quadrilateral movement at 140 km/h until the wheels cools
elements. Reduced integration scheme is used down to room temperature. Train is taken to
to evaluate stiffness matrices. Wheel move at a constant speed of 140 km/h for 15
diameter for new wheel considered in this min between two braking events. Total
study is 1096 mm. simulation time is 6 hours. However the
results are shown only for 4 hours as the
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION results do not vary much beyond this point. It
Figure. 1 shows residual hoop stresses in can be seen that parabolic wheel profiles
parabolic profile locomotive wheels at the results in increase in wheel gauge at the end
end of heat treatment process. Disc rim of braking cycles, but still are within
interface has highest tensile residual stresses. allowable limit. But there is a significant
Tread region is experiencing a compressive reduction in wheel gauge during the braking
stresses of around 240 MPa. It can be shown events. Hence locomotive wheel failure from
that during fitment of wheel into axle, there is
gauge condemning occurs for parabolic
a reduction of 15% in compressive hoop
residual stresses in the tread region from the wheel profile. However, such a failure is
interference fit. typically not detected as it is transient in
nature and occurs for a short period that too
during service. It can be shown that
maximum gauge reduction coincides with
maximum tread region temperature. Details
of gauge widening/condemning of straight
plate wheel under different braking
conditions are reported by Vakkalagadda et
Figure 1.Residual hoop stress contours al. (2015c). Effects of different brake blocks
at the end of heat treatment process on different wheel profiles in gauge
widening/condemning are also reported
(Vakkalagadda et al., 2016)
Figure 2.Gauge change as a function of

train running time for a passenger train
braking from 140 km/h using K-type Figure3.Gauge change as a function of
brake blocks train running time for an empty goods
train braking from 80 km/h using K-type
brake blocks
1110
Vineesh et al.
Figure. 3 shows change in wheel gauge for Vakkalagadda M R K Vineesh K P Mishra A

parabolic wheel profile during independent, Racherla V 2016Locomotive wheel
stop braking from 80 km/h on an empty failure from gauge
goods train fitted with K type brake blocks. It widening/condemning: Effect of wheel
can be seen that parabolic wheel profiles
profile, brake block type, and braking
undergo failure from gauge widening after
four independent braking. Gauge reduction conditions Eng. Fail. Anal 591-16.
continues to increase with braking events. Vakkalagadda M R K Vineesh K P V
2015Estimation of railway wheel
CONCLUSION
running temperatures using a hybrid
Finite element simulations are used to approach Wear 328-329 537-551.
investigate effect of synchronous and Vakkalagadda M R K Vineesh K P Mishra A
independent braking on wheel gauge of Racherla V 2015 Locomotive wheel
parabolic locomotive wheel profile. failure from gauge
Independent braking can result in failure widening/condemning: finite element
from gauge widening and condemning while modelling and identification of
synchronous braking can result in wheel underlying mechanism Eng. Fail. Anal
failure from gauge condemning. 57 143-155.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Vakkalgadda M R K Srivastva D K Mishra A

Racherla V 2015 Performance analyses
The authors would like to thank Indian Railways of brake blocks used by Indian Railways
for the financial support for the project DGG Wear 328-329 64-76.
under Centre for Railways Research via the
sanction letter 2012/M(L)/466/2(2701) dated 09- NOTATION
01-2012
ttrain– train running time (h)
REFERENCES
Gordon J Perlman A B 1998 Estimation of
residual stresses in railroad commuter
car wheels following manufacture
International Mechanical Engineering
congress and exhibition CA ASME
RTD15.
RDSO 2011 An investigation report, failure
of broad gauge locomotive wheels due to
widening of wheel gauge Report No.
MP.INV.51.
Tarafder S Sivaprasad S Ranganath V R
2007 Comparative measurement of
fatigue and fracture behaviour of cast
and forged railway wheels Fatigue
Fract. Eng. Mat. Struct. 30 863-876.
1111
ICCMS2016
FLEXURE OF FIXED THICK BEAM USING TRIGONOMETRIC

SHEAR DEFORMATION THEORY
DAHAKE A. G.1*, MANAL S. S.2 and SAWANT R. M.2
1
Civil Engineering Department, Marathwada Institute of Technology, Aurangabad, India.
2
Civil Engineering Department, People Education Society’s College of Engineering, Aurangabad,
India.
Abstract: A trigonometric shear deformation theory for flexure of thick beam, taking
into account transverse shear deformation effects, is developed. The number of
variables in the present theory is same as that in the first order shear deformation
theory. The sinusoidal function is used in displacement field in terms of thickness
coordinate to represent the shear deformation effects. The noteworthy feature of this
theory is that the transverse shear stresses can be obtained directly from the use of
constitutive relations with excellent accuracy, satisfying the shear stress free
conditions on the top and bottom surfaces of the beam. Hence, the theory obviates the
need of shear correction factor. Governing differential equations and boundary
conditions are obtained by using the principle of virtual work. The thick fixed-fixed
isotropic beam is considered for the numerical study to demonstrate the efficacy of the
theory. Results obtained are discussed critically with those of other theories.
Keywords: Trigonometric shear deformation; thick beam; flexure; principle of
virtual work; equilibrium equations; stress.
INTRODUCTION Baluch et al. (1984), Bhimaraddi and

Chandrashekhara (1993) presented parabolic
It is well-known that elementary theory of
shear deformation theories assuming a higher
bending of beam based on Euler-Bernoulli
variation of axial displacement in terms of
hypothesis disregards the effects of the shear
thickness coordinate. These theories satisfy
deformation and stress concentration. The
shear stress free boundary conditions on top
theory is suitable for slender beams and is not
and bottom surfaces of beam and thus obviate
suitable for thick or deep beams since it is
the need of shear correction factor. Irretier
based on the assumption that the sections
(1986) studied the refined dynamical effects
normal to neutral axis before bending remain
in linear, homogenous beam according to
so during bending and after bending,
theories, which exceed the limits of the
implying that the transverse shear strain is
Euler-Bernoulli beam theory. These effects
zero. Since theory neglects the transverse
are rotary inertia, shear deformation, axial
shear deformation, it underestimates
pre-stress, twist and coupling between
deflections in case of thick beams where
bending and torsion.
shear deformation effects are significant.
Kant and Gupta (1984), Heyliger and Reddy
Levinson (1993), Bickford (1982), Rehfield
(1988) presented finite element models based
and Murty (1921), Krishna Murty (1981),
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:ajaydahake@gmail.com 1112

Dahake et al
on higher order shear deformation uniform displacement field given by Equation (1) are
rectangular beams. However, these as follows.
displacement based finite element models are Normal strain:
not free from phenomenon of shear locking
u d 2w h  z d
(Averill and Reddy (1992); Reddy (1982)).  x =   z 2  sin (2)
x dx  h dx
A study of literature by Ghugal and Shimpi
(2001) indicates that the research work Shear strain:
dealing with flexural analysis of thick beams u dw z
 zx    cos  (3)
using refined trigonometric and hyperbolic z dx h
shear deformation theories is very scarce and The stress-strain relationships used are as
is still in infancy. follows:
In this paper development of theory and its  x  E x ,  zx  G zx (4)
application to thick fixed beams is presented.
The beam under consideration as shown in GOVERNING EQUATIONS
Figure1 occupies in 0  x  y  z Cartesian Using the expressions for strains and stresses
coordinate system the region: (2) through (4) and using the principle of
h h virtual work, variationally consistent
0 x  L ; 0 y b ;   z 
2 2 governing differential equations and
Where x, y, z are Cartesian coordinates, L and boundary conditions for the beam under
b are the length and width of beam in the x consideration can be obtained. The principle
and y directions respectively, and h is the of virtual work when applied to the beam
thickness of the beam in the z-direction. The leads to:
beam is made up of homogeneous, linearly
 z   h / 2   x   zx  zx  dx dz
xL z h/2
elastic isotropic material. b
x0 x .
(5)
xL
 q ( x )  w dx  0
THE DISPLACEMENT FIELD x0
The displacement field of the present beam where, the symbol  denotes the variational
theory is of the form: operator. Employing Green’s theorem in Eqn.
dw h z (4) successively, we obtain the coupled
u ( x, z )   z  sin  ( x) Euler-Lagrange equations which are the
dx  h (1)
w( x, z )  w( x ) governing differential equations and
associated boundary conditions of the beam.
where u is the axial displacement in x The governing differential equations obtained
direction and w is the transverse displacement are as follows:
in z direction of the beam. The sinusoidal
d 4 w 24 d 3
function is assigned according to the shear EI  EI  q x (6)
dx 4 3 dx 3
stress distribution through the thickness of
the beam. The function  represents rotation 24 d 3w 6 d 2 GA
(7)
EI  EI   0
of the beam at neutral axis, which is an 3 dx 3  2 dx 2 2
unknown function to be determined. The Thus the boundary value problem of the
normal and shear strains obtained within the beam bending is given by the above
framework of linear theory of elasticity using variationally consistent governing differential
equations.
1113
Flexure of Fixed Thick Beam using Trigonometric Shear Deformation Theory
THE GENERAL SOLUTION OF C1 x3

EI w( x)      q dx dx dx dx 
GOVERNING EQUILIBRIUM 6
EQUATIONS OF THE BEAM   EI (12)
   2    3  C2sinh x  C3cosh x 
4 
The general solution for transverse 2
x
displacement w(x) and warping function  (x) C4  C5 x  C6
2
is obtained using Eqns. (6) and (7) using
where C1 , C2 , C3 , C4 , C5 and C6 are arbitrary
method of solution of linear differential
equations with constant coefficients. constants and can be obtained by imposing
Integrating and rearranging the first boundary conditions of beam.
governing Eqn. (6), we obtain the following
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE
equation
In order to prove the efficacy of the present
d 3 w 24 d 2 Q  x 
  (8) theory, the steel beam is considered.
dx 3  3 dx 2 EI
A fixed-fixed beam as shown in Fig. 1. The
where Q(x) is the generalized shear force for
x boundary conditions associated with this
beam and it is given by Q  x    qdx  C1 dw
0
beam at fixed ends are:    w = 0 at x
dx
.Now the second governing Eqn (7) is = 0 and L.
rearranged in the following form:
x
q ( x )  q0 cos
d 3 w  d 2 q0 2L
    (9)
dx 3 4 dx 2
A single equation in terms of  is now
obtained using Eqns (8) and (9) as:
d 2 Q( x) x, u
 2   (10)
dx 2
 EI
where constants  ,  and  in Eqns. (9) and L
(10) are as follows z,
Figure 1. Thick Fixed beam subjected to

  24    3 GA  
    3 ,     and  
2
cosine load.
4    48 EI  
The general solution of Eqn. (10) is as RESULTS
follows:
Q( x) The results for inplane displacement,
 ( x)  C2 cosh  x  C3 sinh  x  (11) transverse displacement, axial and transverse
 EI
stresses are presented in the following non
The equation of transverse displacement w(x)
dimensional form for the purpose of
is obtained by substituting the expression of
presenting the results in this paper.
 (x) in Eqn. (9) and then integrating it thrice
The numerical results for displacements and
with respect to x. The general solution for
stresses are obtained using FORTRAN
w(x)is obtained as follows:
programs developed based on the non-
dimensional expressions for these quantities.
1114
Dahake et al
The results and discussion will be presented Irretier H 1986 Refined effects in beam
in detailed paper. Paper will conclude with theories and their influence on natural
proper conclusions. frequencies of beam International
Proceeding of Euromech Colloquium
REFERENCES 219 on Refined Dynamical Theories of
Beam Plates and Shells and Their
Averill R C and Reddy J N 1992 An
Applications Edited by I Elishak off and
assessment of four-noded plate finite
H Irretier Springer-Verlag Berlin 163-
elements based on a generalized third
179.
order theory International Journal of
Numerical Methods in Kant T and Gupta A 1988 A finite element
Engineering331553-1572. model for higher order shears
deformable beam theory Journal of
Baluch M H Azad A K and Khidir M A 1984
Sound and Vibration125(2) 193-202.
Technical theory of beams with normal
strain ASCE Journal of Engineering Krishna Murthy A V 1984 Towards a
Mechanics 110(8)1233-1237 consistent beam theory AIAA Journal22
6811-816.
Bhimaraddi A and Chandrashekhara K 1993
Observations on higher order beam Levinson M1981 A new rectangular beam
Theory ASCE Journal of Aerospace theory Journal of Sound and
Engineering 6(4) 408-413. Vibration74 181-87.
Bickford W B 1982 A consistent higher order Reddy J N 1993An Introduction to Finite

beam theory International Proceeding of Element Method 2nd Edition McGraw-
Dev. in Theoretical and Applied HillInc. New York.
Mechanics (SECTAM) 11 137-150. Rehfield L W and Murthy P L N1982
Ghugal Y M and Sharma R 2009 A Toward a new engineering theory of
hyperbolic shear deformation theory for bending fundamentals AIAA Journal
flexure and vibration of thick isotropic 20(5)693-699.
beams International Journal of Timoshenko S P1921 On the correction for
Computational Methods 6(4)585-604. shear of the differential equation for
Ghugal Y M and Shmipi R P 2001 A review transverse vibrations of prismatic bars
of refined shear deformation theories for Philosophical Magazine 41(6) 742-746.
isotropic and anisotropic laminated
beams Journal of Reinforced Plastics
And Composites20 3255-272.
Heyliger P R and Reddy J N 1988 A higher
order beam finite element for bending
and vibration problems Journal of Sound
and Vibration 126(2) 309-326.
Hildebrand F B and Reissner E C 1942
Distribution of Stress in Built-In Beam
of Narrow Rectangular Cross Section
Journal of Applied Mechanics64109-
116.
1115
ICCMS2016
MICROMECHANICAL MODELLING OF SPIRAL WOUND GASKET

UNDER UNIAXIAL COMPRESSION
RINO NELSON N.1*, SIVA PRASAD N. 2 and SEKHAR A. S. 1
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Madras, India.
2
School of Technology, GITAM University, Hyderabad, India.
Abstract: The sealing performance of flange joint is highly dependent on gasket

behaviour. The compressive properties of spiral wound gasket with graphite filler is
determined using micromechanical analysis considering in-plane and bending
characteristics. The individual constituents in gasket are modelled using actual stress-
strain behaviour of flexible graphite and elasto-plastic model of spiral rings. The
micromechanical analysis is carried out using axisymmetric finite element approach.
The behaviour of gasket through micromechanical approach is found to be in good
agreement with experimental data. The contact stress distribution along radial
direction of gasket in micromechanical model is compared with interface model and
observed to be better in micromechanical model.
Keywords: Micromechanical; Spiral wound gasket; Flange joint; Contact stress;
Graphite
INTRODUCTION material to homogeneous material through

homogenization. Seidel et al. (2006) analysed
The sealing capability of flange joint with
the carbon nanotube composite using
gasket depends on gasket material and
micromechanical technique with in-plane
operating condition. In micromechanics, the
properties of grapheme sheet. In the present
individual constituents of the heterogeneous
study, micromechanical technique is used to
material are considered as separate entity and
analyse spiral wound gasket, considering the
involved in analysis. Micromechanical
individual constituents in it.
modelling is commonly used for composite
and other heterogeneous materials. MICROMECHANICAL MODEL
Spiral wound gasket (SWG) has many layers Micromechanical model of spiral wound
of filler and preformed ring wounded gasket with graphite filler is developed to
adjacent radially, under radial compressive consider the in-plane and bending behaviour
load. Waterland and Bouzid (2009) have in addition to axial behaviour. The spiral
worked on SWG considering the deformation wound gasket is modelled assuming, filler is
behaviour, along thickness direction to bonded with spiral ring in circular array.
analyse the effect of inner ring and machine Figure 1 shows the spiral wound gasket
compression. Khan et al. (2009) have model used in the present study. The filler is
investigated SWG considering different characterized using stress-strain response of the
elastic moduli for loading and unloading. flexible graphite under compression. Graphite is
Mathan and Siva Prasad (2010) have highly soft, expressing elastic instability under
evaluated the material behaviour of SWG by compression. The nonlinear deformation
effectively remodelling heterogeneous
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:nrinonelson@gamil.com 1116

Nelson et al.
behaviour of flexible graphite (Pollock (2002)) is METHOD

shown in Figure 2.
A 2D axisymmetric finite element tool is
used to model and analyse the spiral wound
gasket and flange joint. Commercial finite
element software ANSYS 14.5 is used in the
present study. The flange, bolt and metal
rings are discretized using PLANE42 element
Figure 1. Micromechanical model of
and filler by PLANE182 with axisymmetric
spiral wound gasket
option. The contact is established between
flange-bolt interface and flange-gasket
100 interface with 0.1 friction coefficient. The
80 bolt preload is applied using PRETS179
Stress (MPa)
60 element. Convergence study is performed in

40 gasket filler and metal ring regions.
20
0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6
Strain
Figure 2. Flexible graphite property

Figure 3. Boundary condition for gasket
Table 1. Material Properties model
Member The validation of uniaxial compressive
Property
behaviour is performed on micromechanical
E (GPa) 195 model with boundary condition shown in
Flange
 0.3 Figure 3. Due to geometric symmetry of
E (GPa) 203 gasket about thickness direction, half of the
Bolt
 0.3 gasket model is considered for analysis. The
E (GPa) 197 uniaxial load is applied on the top surface of
 0.29 the gasket.
Metal ring
ߪ௬ (MPa) 340
‫( ்ܧ‬MPa) 6850
The rings in spiral wound gasket used for
holding the filler material is modelled using
elasto-plastic behaviour in order to extract the
nonlinear hysteresis behaviour of gasket. The Figure 4. Boundary condition for 2D
elastic behaviour of metal ring is defined flange joint
using E and , whereas plastic behaviour by In 2D analysis of flange joint, the upper half
ߪ௬ and ‫ ்ܧ‬, using kinematic hardening model. of the joint (top flange and half of gasket
The material properties of flange joint geometry along thickness) is considered,
members are given in Table 1.The flange and taking symmetry about longitudinal axis.
bolt materials considered are SA105 and Symmetric boundary condition is applied on
SA193B7 respectively. The spiral rings are the bottom surface of the gasket as shown in
made of SS304. Figure 4.
1117
Micromechanical Modelling of Spiral Wound Gasket under Uniaxial Compression
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION stability purpose. The contact stress increases

towards the right (bolt side) due to the effect
UNIAXIAL BEHAVIOUR
of eccentric loading on gasket.
The compressive behaviour of gasket along
the thickness direction controls its sealing
capability. The micromechanical model of
gasket alone is loaded from stress level 0 to
90 MPa and unloaded from 90 to 0 MPa. The
deformation of gasket along thickness
direction is observed. The actual behaviour of
gasket is determined experimentally (Mathan
and Siva Prasad (2010)) by Load
Compression Mechanical Testing (LCMT).
Figure 5 show the comparison of uniaxial
gasket behaviour obtained from
micromechanical model with LCMT and Figure 6. Gasket contact stress at 15 kN
found to be in good agreement. The same bolt preload
micromechanical model of gasket is used to During pressurizing stage, the internal fluid
analyse the flange joint. pressure tends to separate the flange members
apart resulting in reduction in gasket stress.
GASKET STRESS DISTRIBUTION The flange joint is analysed for 0 and3 MPa
2D axisymmetric flange joint model has been internal pressure at 15 kN bolt preload. The
developed to obtain the contact stress variation in gasket stress with pressure along
distribution in flange and gasket interface. radial direction is shown in Figure 7. The
The preload applied on bolt gets transferred gasket stress decreases with pressure and
to gasket via flange member. The contact lower contact stress at 3 MPa indicates the
stress distribution on gasket for 15 kN bolt opening of joint members.
preload is shown in Figure 6.
90
100 0 MPa
Experiment 75 3 MPa
Contact Stress (MPa)
80 60
Stress (MPa)
60 45
40 30
15
20
0
0 51 53 55 57 59 61
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 Gasket Width (mm)
Axial deformation (mm)
Figure 5. Comparison of experimental Figure 7. Gasket contact stress

and micromechanical behaviour distribution for different internal pressure
In gasket, filler material alone helps in The gasket stress distribution obtained from
sealing whereas spiral rings are used for micromechanical analysis is compared with
1118
Nelson et al.
interface model and ASME residual stress Khan K A, M Abid and J AChattha2009
(Waterland and Bouzid (2009)) in Figure 8. Gasketed bolted flange joint’s
relaxationbehaviour under different bolt
80 up strategyP I Mech Eng E-J Pro223259-
Interface 263.
Micromechanical
Contact Stress (MPa)
60 MathanG and N S Prasad2010 Evaluation of

effective material properties of spiral
40 wound gasket through homogenization Int
P = 3 MPa J Pres Ves Pip87704-713.
20 Pollock M 2002 Grafoil flexible graphite:
Engineering Design Manual GRAFTECH
Ohio.
0
50 52 54 56 58 60 Rasmussen K 2001 Full-range Stress-strain
Gasket Width (mm) Curves for Stainless Steel Alloys PhD
Thesis The University of Sydney 10-24.
Figure 8. Comparison of interface and Seidel G D and D C
micromechanical modelling Lagoudas2006Micromechanical analysis
In interface modelling, the gasket is modelled of the effective elastic properties of
carbon nanotube reinforced composites
using special interface element INTER192 in
Mech Mater38884.
ANSYS, which considers gasket as a
homogenous material. Same boundary Waterland J and H Bouzid 2002 Analysis of
condition used for micromechanical model is the compressive behaviour of spiral
wound gaskets Proceeding of ASME
employed here. The interface modelling is
PVP2009July 26, Prague Czech Republic.
observed to provide averaged stress
distribution whereas, the actual stress NOTATION
distribution in filler and rings are obtained
E Young’s modulus of elasticity
from micromechanical model.
‫்ܧ‬ Tangent modulus
CONCLUSIONS P Internal pressure
 Poisson’s ratio
The micromechanical model of spiral wound ߪ௬ Yield stress
gasket has been developed and its uniaxial
behaviour from analysis is found to be in
good agreement with experimental values in
literature. Due to eccentric transfer of bolt
load to gasket in flange joint, the gasket
stress is more near bolt side. A realistic
gasket stress distribution is observed using
micromechanical model compared to
conventional interface gasket model.
REFERENCES
ANSYS 2012ANSYS Mechanical APDL
Element Reference ANSYS Inc. USA.
1119
ICCMS2016
ANALYSIS OF PRESTRESSED HOLLOWCORE SLABS

WITHOPENINGS: A NUMERICAL STUDY
SAMEER K., SARMA P. and SURIYA PRAKASH S.
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Hyderabad, India.
Abstract: Prestressed precast hollow core slabs are generally machine cast with
prestressing strands as the only reinforcement. Due to various mechanical, electrical
and plumbing service requirements openings are provided in these precast slabs.
Openings in hollow core slabs can coincide with the location of strands and may lead
to their curtailment. This may lead to significant loss in strength and stiffness of slab.
Numerical analysis of hollow core slabs with and without openings was performed
using commercial finite element package to evaluate the effect of openings. Two
shear span to depth ratios and a flexural opening were considered as variables for this
study. It was observed that the strength of slabs reduced up to 44% due to provision of
opening with 43% reduction in stiffness. Comparison of numerical results with
experimental results showed good agreement.
Keywords: Hollow core slabs; finite element method (FEM); openings; prestress
INTRODUCTION to shear force on the behavior of hollow core

slabs. Hollow core slabs will generally have a
Precast prestressed hollow core elements are
width of 1.2 m and are constructed as simply
generally used as slab elements in buildings.
supported elements. The boundary conditions
Both slabs and wall panels may require
and the width to length ratio makes the
provision of openings for various structural
hollow core slabs typically behave as one
purposes like provision of columns,
way slabs.
escalators, stair cases and for facilitating
other mechanical, electrical and plumbing The flexural strength and shear capacity of
services. In general, prestressing strands are hollow core slabs were studied by many
the only reinforcement in the hollow core researchers. Walraven and Mercx (1983),
slabs due to the limitation of its Becker and Buettner (1985), Pajari(1998),
manufacturing process. Openings in hollow Hawkins and Ghosh (2006), Palmer and
core slabs could coincide with the location of Schultz (2011) have studied the effect of
strand and this may lead to its curtailment. various parameters like shear span to depth
The size of these openings can range from ratio, prestressing force, depth of slab, shape
very small to large resulting in an adverse of voids on the strength of hollow core slabs.
effect on the structural behavior of the slab. Previous studies on the RCC and PSC
The present study tries to numerically structures using commercial finite element
evaluate the effect of opening in flexure packages have shown very good agreement
dominated zone at low and high a/d ratios to with the experimental results. Wang (2007)
simulate different levels of bending moment has evaluated the shear capacity of hollow
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:ce13p1007@iith.ac.in. 1120

Sameer et al.
core slabs using ANSYS (2012) package and tend to be off from experimental results after
found that the service load capacities of slabs large deflections. From the literature it can be
from numerical study match well with the concluded that commercial finite element
experimental results. The major observation packages can be used to predict the response
from the results was that the pre-cracking of various RCC and PSC structures with
stiffness of load deflection curves was higher reasonable accuracy.
using the finite element when compared with
experimental results. Barbosa and Riberio NUMERICAL MODELLING
[1998] have evaluated the consequences The effect of openings on the behaviour and
small changes in modelling of RCC beam strength of hollow core slabs was evaluated
using ANSYS (2012). They have utilised by modelling the slabs using commercial
various crushing and cracking models of finite element package ANSYS (2012). The
concrete along with the elastic and plastic cross sectional properties, material properties
properties of steel. They concluded that a and test setup were taken from the previous
good non-linear curve of concrete in work of the authors (Pachalla and Prakash
compression is very important in predicting 2015). The cross section of the slabs is shown
the response of the beams. Hegger et al. in Figure 1. Each slab had 9 cores and 6
(2010) have performed finite element prestressing strands of 9.53 mm diameter
analysis of slab assembly of hollow core each. The location of strands along with cross
slabs on slender beams. The observed that the sectional dimensions are shown in Figure 1.
initial stiffness matches well with the Two shear span to depth ratios (a/d) viz. 3.5
experimental results and also captures shear and 7.5 were chosen to simulate different
deformations of the section. Research (Gan flexure to shear ratios. Flexural opening of
2000, Jendle and Cervenka 2006) on bond dimensions 300 x 600 mm was provided in
between concrete and reinforcement has slabs and was evaluated with each a/d ratio.
shown that in small deflections the response The location of flexural opening in plan is
of the structures does not affect significantly given in Figure 1. The specimen details are
due to the bond-slip behaviour but the results given in Table 1.
Figure 1: Full cross section and plan view of slab (dimensions in mm)
The concrete and steel material properties prestressing strands were given as material
were taken from the material characterization inputs. The concrete was modelled using
tests done in the laboratory. Multi-linear SOLID65 element and prestressing strands
stress strain curve for concrete and were modelled using LINK180 element. The
1121
Analysis of Hollowcore Slabs with Openings: a Numerical Study
cracking and crushing properties of SOLID65 actual test boundary conditions. The load was
element were enabled to capture the exact applied in displacement control mode. The
behaviour of the slabs. The boundary isometric view of slabs with and without
conditions were modelled to replicate the openings is shown in Figure 2.
Table 1. Specimen details

Specimen Shear Span to
Label Opening Type
Number Depth (a/d) ratio
1 HCS-150-3.50-NO-C 3.5 No Opening
2 HCS-150-3.50-FO-C 3.5 Flexural Opening
3 HCS-150-7.50-NO-C 7.5 No Opening
4 HCS-150-7.50-FO-C 7.5 Flexural Opening
Figure 2. Isometric view of slabs in numerical models
Figure 3. Comparison of Load vs deflection Curves between FEM and Experimental

Results
RESULTS load of the slab with a/d ratio 7.5 was

reduced by 44%.
The load- deflection curves were plotted by
taking the vertical reaction at supports and CONCLUSIONS
vertical deflection of mid span node. The
numerical plots along with experimental Four numerical models were developed to
results are shown in Figure 3. It was observed evaluate the effect of openings in hollowcore
that due to provision of opening the peak slabs. From the comparison of results it can
1122
Sameer et al.
be concluded that the proposed modelling Pajari M 1998 Shear Resistance of PHC
procedure could capture the exact behaviour Slabs Supported on Beams II:
of the slabs with and without openings. AnalysisJournal of Structural
Engineering 124(9) 1062–1073.
REFERENCES
Palmer K D and Schultz A E 2011
ANSYS Inc. v 14.5 Documentation for Experimental investigation of the web-
ANSYS United States 2012. shear strength of deep hollow-core units
Barbosa A F and Ribeiro G O 1998 Analysis PCI Journal 56(4) 83–104.
of Reinforced Concrete Structures Using Walraven J C and Mercx W P M 1983 The
Ansys Nonlinear Concrete bearing capacity forprestressed hollow
ModelComputational Mechanics New core slabsHeron 28(3) 1–46.
Trends and Applications S. Idelsohn E.
Wang X 2007 Study on the Shear Behaviour
Oñate and E. Dvorkin (Eds.)Spain, 1–7.
of Prestressed Hollow core slabs by
Becker R J and Buettner D R 1985 Shear Nonlinear Finite Element Modelling
Tests of Extruded Hollow-Core Slabs Master’s Thesis 94 University
PCI Journal 30(2) 40–54. ofWindsor.
Gan Y 2000 Bond Stress and Slip Modeling
in Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of
Reinforced concrete structures Master’s
Thesis 269 University of Toronto.
Hawkins N M and Ghosh S K 2006 Shear
strength of Hollow-core slabsPCI
Journal 51(1) 110 – 114.
Hegger J Roggendorf T and Teworte F 2010
FE analyses of shear-loaded hollow-core
slabs on different supports Magazine of
Concrete Research 62(8) 531–541.
Jendele L andCervenka J 2006 Finite element
modelling of reinforcement with bond
Computers and Structures 84 1780–
1791.
Pachalla SK S and Prakash SS 2015 Effect of
Openings on the Behavior of PPHCS
Slabs under Low and Moderate Shear
ACI structural Journal (Under review)
PachallaS K S and Prakash S S2015Effect of
Openings on PrestressedHollow core
Slabs International conference on
Innovations in Structural Engineering,
December 14-15 2015Hyderabad India.
1123
ICCMS2016
HDMR BASED MODEL UPDATING IN STRUCTURAL DAMAGE

IDENTIFICATION
NAVEEN B.O.* and. BALU A.S.
Department of Civil Engineering, National Institute of Technology Karnataka, Surathkal, India.
Abstract: A finite element model of a structure is a highly idealized engineering

model that may or may not truly reflect the physical structure. The purpose of model
updating is to modify the finite element model of a structure in order to obtain better
agreement between the numerical and field-measured structure responses. The new
method called High Dimensional Model Representation (HDMR) was recently
proposed as an efficient tool developed in order to express input–output relationships
of complex, computationally burdensome models in terms of hierarchical correlated
function expansions. In this paper, a HDMR-based finite element model updating
procedure for civil engineering structures is presented. This method utilizes HDMR
for the best experimental design of the parameters to be updated, based on which
numerical analysis can be performed in order to obtain explicit relationships between
the structural responses and parameters from the simulation results. The parameters
are then updated using genetic algorithm by minimizing the objective function. The
study is extended for structural damage identification.
Keywords: Finite element model updating; High dimensional model
representation; Structural damage identification.
INTRODUCTION evolution of damage, so that it is possible to

produce post-earthquake scenarios and
Structural Health Monitoring (SHM) aims to
support rescue operations.
give a diagnosis of the state of the constituent
materials of different parts, and of the full HIGH DIMENSIONAL MODEL
assembly of these parts constituting the
REPRESENTATION
structure as a whole at every moment during
the life of a structure. The SHM is a new and In engineering design, spending excessive
improved way to make a Non-Destructive amount of time on physical experiments or
Evaluation. SHM involves the integration of expensive simulations makes the design
sensors, possibly smart materials, data costly and lengthy. The severity increases
transmission, computational power, and when the design problem has a large number
processing ability inside the structures. The of inputs, or of high dimension. High
implementation of SHM results in reduction dimensional model representation (HDMR) is
of inspection costs, research, with the one powerful method in approximating high
possibility to better understand the behaviour dimensional, expensive, and black-box
of structures under dynamic loads, seismic problems.
protection, observation, in real or near real- Rabitz et al. (1999) developed a family of
time of the structural response and of nonparametric multivariate approximation
**Author for Correspondence: E-mail: asbalu@nitk.ac.in 1124

Naveen and Balu
HDMR for functions in order to understand less expensive for the approximation of fuzzy
the hierarchy of correlations amongst the finite element response quantity.
input variables. A well-ordered mapping In inverse reliability analysis (Balu and Rao,
strategy has been developed among the inputs 2013), the HDMR is used to get the explicit
and outputs. It is recognised and concluded expressions without requiring the derivatives
from the various studies that, only lower of the response functions with respect to
order interaction effect between the input uncertain variables, and FFT techniques are
variables will have an effective impact upon used to obtain the unknown design
the output responses of a precise and explicit parameters. It was concluded that optimum
physical system. The HDMR can be applied number of sample points in approximating
for various well-defined physical system by the HDMR component functions is most
making use of this property to develop a important criteria, and to capture the
specific, ordered mapping between inputs and nonlinearity outside the domain of sample
outputs. HDMR approximation techniques points, very small number of sample points
are very useful in many domains if they can should be avoided during approximation and
represent the output to good accuracy at thereby affecting the estimated solution.
sufficiently low orders. Two specific HDMR
expansions are developed i.e., ANOVA- The area known as model updating is
HDMR for statistical applications and second concerned with the correction of finite
the cut-HDMR expansion. element models by processing records of
dynamic response from test structures
In the output domain of the physical system (Mottershead and Friswell, 1993). Levin and
Alis and Rabitz (2001) assumed that data is Lieven (1998) compared various
randomly scattered over the entire domain implementations of the two algorithms
and formulated HDMR expressions, and namely the genetic algorithm (GA) and
HDMR is applied from sensitivity analysis simulated annealing (SA) for model updating
and time series analysis. Their prediction is purposes. It was concluded that model
that the dimensionality of the function is not updating using these optimization algorithms
dependent on the number of samples needed is a promising and viable approach, but the
for representation to a given tolerance which appropriate choice of updating parameters is
is the efficient means to perform high of paramount importance.
dimensional interpolation.
The HDMR expansions introduced here are
In recent years, the application of HDMR is especially useful for the purpose of
extended to uncertainty analysis. When the representing the outputs of a physical system
uncertainties are represented in terms of when the number of input variables is large.
fuzzy membership functions, analysis of The notion of “high” dimensionality is
response of the structures is done using system-dependent, with some situations
HDMR based response surface models (Balu being considered high for practical reasons at
and Rao, 2012). Implicit and explicit fuzzy
n  3  5 , while others will only reach that
analysis procedures are developed using
level of complexity for n  10 or more.
integrated finite element modelling and
HDMR based response surface generation. It For a high dimensional system, an output
was concluded that HDMR approach is f  x is commonly a function of many input
mathematically elegant and computationally
variables x  {x1, x2, ..xn } with n  10 2 or
1125
HDMR Based Model Updating in Structural Damage Identification
larger. HDMR expresses the output f  x  as updated model is then used in structural
damage identification.
a hierarchical correlated function expansion
in terms of the input variables as: REFERENCES
f ij  xi , x j  
N
f  x   f 0   f i  xi    Alis O F and Rabitz H 2001 Efficient
i 1 1i  j  N
implementation of high dimensional
 f ijk  xi , x j , xk  .. (1) model representations Journal of
1i  j  k  N Mathematical Chemistry 29(2) 127–
 f12N  x1 , x2 ,, xN  142.
where, f0 denotes the mean response to f  x  Balu A S and Rao B N 2013 Confidence
bounds on design variables using high-
which is a constant. The function fi  xi  is a dimensional model representation.
first-order term expressing the effect of Journal of Structural Engineering
139(6) 985–996.
variable xi acting alone, although generally
Balu A S and Rao B N 2012 High
nonlinearly, upon the output f  x  . The
dimensional model representation based
function fij  xi , x j  is a second-order term Formulations for fuzzy finite element
analysis of structures Finite Elements in
that describes the cooperative effects of the Analysis and Design 50 217–230.
variables xi and x j upon the output f  x  . Levin R I and Lieven N A J 1998 Dynamic

The higher order terms give the cooperative finite element model updating using
effects of increasing numbers of input simulated annealing and genetic
variables acting together to influence the algorithm Mechanical Systems and
Signal Processing 12(1) 91–120.
output f  x  . The last term
Mottershead J E and Friswell M I 1993
f12N  x1, x2 ,, xN  contains any residual Model updating in structural dynamics:

dependence of all the input variables locked A Survey Journal of Sound and
Vibration 167(2) 347–375.
together in a cooperative way to influence the
Rabitz H Alis O F Shorter J and Shim K
output f  x  .
1999 Efficient input-output model
representations Computer Physics
CONCLUSIONS Communication 117 11–20.
The HDMR techniques can be effectively
applied for construction of a computational
model directly from laboratory or field data,
creating an efficient fully equivalent
operational model to replace an existing time-
consuming mathematical model,
identification of key model variables, global
uncertainty assessments, and efficient
quantitative risk assessments, etc. In this
work, it is proposed to apply HDMR in
updating a finite element model in
conjunction with genetic algorithm. The
1126
ICCMS2016
STATIC ANALYSIS OF DOUBLY CURVED FGM PANEL ON

RECTANGULAR PLAN-FORM
BAHADUR R., UPADHYAY A. K. and SHUKLA K. K.
Department of Applied Mechanics MNNIT, Allahabad, U.P, India.
Abstract: Doubly curved FGM panels on rectangular plan-form and subjected to

uniformly distributed transverse loading are investigated analytically in the present
work. All mechanical properties of the FGM panels are assumed to vary continuously
through the thickness according to the power law distribution in terms of the volume
fractions of the constituents Mathematical formulation is based on the higher order
shear deformation theory and principal of virtual work is applied to derive the
equations of equilibrium for small deformation. A solution methodology based on the
fast converging finite double Chebyshev series is used for spatial discretization of
displacement function and loadings. The set of governing partial differential equations
and boundary condition are reduced to a set of simultaneous algebraic equations.
Accuracy of the solution is established by detailed convergence study. The results
obtained in the present study are validated with the existing literature and found in the
good agreement. Numerical results are presented to find outthe effect of length to
thickness ratio, material property, boundary condition, panel curvature, FGM
constituent and power law index.
Keywords: Doubly curved FGM Panel; HSDT; double Chebyshev series.
INTRODUCTION Kiani et al. (2012) presented static and

dynamic response of the FGM doubly curved
Panel-type structures are one of the widely
panel on elastic foundation utilizing first
used structural components in various fields
order shear deformation theory. Oktem et al.
of civil engineering, aeronautical
(2012) presented an analytical solution to the
engineering, nuclear power plant, ocean
static analysis of functionally graded plates
engineering and petrochemical industries.
and doubly-curved shells. In the present work
Static and dynamic behavior of these type of
linear partial differential equations arising out
structures in single-layer or laminated
of the HSDT-based formulation for FGM
composites have the subject of study for a
doubly curved panels, is solved analytically
long period of time. Kabir and Al-Duaij
using the fast converging finite double
(1994) presented an analytical solution to
Chebyshev series. The primary focus is to
moderately-deep and-thick cylindrical panels
investigate the effect of curvature and
of rectangular plan-form, subjected to
thickness on the response of a FGM doubly
uniformly distributed transverse loads. Khare
curved panel subjected to different boundary
et al. (2003) analyzed the thermal and
conditions.
mechanical bending of laminated shallow
shells when all edges are simply-supported. MATHMATICAL FORMULATION
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:rajendramech@gmail.com
1127
Bahadur et al.
A functionally graded singly and doubly axes, respectively. The parameters

curved panel on rectangular plan-form u1 ,v1 ,x and y are the higher order terms in
consisting of a mixture of ceramic (c) at the the Taylor’s series expansion.
bottom and metal (m) at the top having a
thickness ‘h’ is considered in the present Strain-displacement relation are expressed as
analysis. Based on power law distribution, a
simple rule of mixture is used to obtain the  x   x 
o
 x    *x    *x 
 * 
0
effective properties of FGM panels. The    o     * 

 y   y   y   y 0
  y 
volume fractions of ceramic and metal at any    o    2  *  3  * 
  xy     xy   z   xy   z   xy 0
  z   xy 
point through the thickness are expressed as    o     *   * 
 yz    yz   yz    yz    yz 
(Kiani et al., 2012)   xz    o    xz  *
0
 * 
 xz   xz 0   xz 
 2z  h 
k
Vc ( z )    ; Vm ( z )  1  Vc ( z ) (1) Where
 2h 
where ‘k’ is the volume fraction exponent w0 o w
ox  u 0,x  ,  y  v0,y  0 , oxy  u 0,y  v0,x ,
which is always greater or equal to zero. A Rx Ry
zero value of ‘k’ implies that the panel is
v0 u
fully ceramic. The effective material property oyz  w 0,y    y , oxz  w 0,x  0   x
Ry Rx
of the panel is given by:
 x   x , x ,  y   y , y ,  xy   x , y   y , x ,
k
z 1 y
P ( z )  Pm  ( Pc  Pm )    (2) 
h 2  yz  2 v 1  ,  zx  2u 1  x
Ry Rx
Here, Pm and Pc are the corresponding
properties of metal and ceramic and ‘z’ is the  *x  u 1,x ,  *y  v 1, y ,  *xy  u 1, y  v 1,x ,
thickness coordinate (-h/2 ≤ z ≤ h/2). 0 0 0
Poisson’s ratio is assumed to be constant for v1 * u

 *yz  3 y  ,  xz  3 x  1
both the materials.
0
Ry 0
Rx
Based on HSDT with cubic variation of in-  *x   x ,x ,  *y   y , y ,  *xy   x , y   y ,x ,
plane displacements through the thickness
and constant transverse displacement, the y x
 *yz   ,  *xz  
displacement field at a point in the panel is Ry Rx
expressed as (Khare et al 2003);
GOVERNING EQUATIONS OF
u (x , y, z)  u 0 (x , y)  z  x (x , y) 
EQUILIBRIUM
z 2 u 1 (x , y)  z 3 x (x , y)
v(x , y, z)  v 0 (x , y)  z  y (x , y)  Assuming plane stress condition for FGM
panels the governing equations of
z 2 v 1 (x , y)  z 3 y (x , y)
equilibrium are obtained and expressed as:
w (x , y, z)  w 0 (x , y) (3)
Where, u 0 ,v0 are the in-plane N x N xy Qx
  0
x y Rx
displacements and w 0 is the transverse
N y N xy Qy
displacement of a point (x, y) on the middle   0
plane of the panel, respectively. The y x Ry
functions ψ x and ψ y are rotations of the
normal to the middle plane about y and x
1128
Static Analysis of Doubly Curved FGM Panel on Rectangular Plan-Form
 Q  Q  2w M N
  N u(r,s)   ij u i, j Ti  r  Tj  s  ;  1  r,s  1
x y
 x  y  x 2
x
i  0 j 0
 w 2
 2w
 N  2 N xy Where, M and N are the number of terms in
 y 2
 x  y
y
N N y finite degree double Chebyshev series. The

 x
  q  0
R x R y spatial derivatives of the function for e.g.
 M  M S u(r, s) are expressed as;
   Q  0
x x y x
 x  y
x
R
 m n u (r, s)
x
 M  M S 
y
 x y
 y
 Q  0
 y  x R y
y r ms n
Mm Nn
  mn u 
 N
 ij  m n  Ti  r  T j  s  ;  1  r, s  1
*
 N
 
* *
Q
   2 S  0
x x y x
 x  y   r s  ij
x
R x i  0 j 0
 N *
 N *
Q *
Where, ‘m and n’ are the orders of
   2 S  0
y x y y
 y  x
y
R y derivatives with respect to r and s,
 M *
 M *
S *
respectively.
x
 x y
 x
 3Q *
 0
 x  y
x
R x
 M *
 M *
S * The detailed solution methodology will be
y
 x y
 y
 3Q *
 0
 y  x R y
y
discussed in full length paper (Upadhyay and
Shukla 2013).
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Fully simply supported boundary conditions
have been used in the present work: Simply Numerical results are presented for simply
supported boundary conditions are given as: supported immovable doubly curved
(Rx=Ry=R), panels of square (a = b) plan-
u  v  w   u 1  v1   y  0
y form, subjected to uniformly distributed
& M x  M *
x  0 at x  1 transverse load. The material properties
u  v  w  x  u 1  v1   x  0 assumed in the present work are (Oktem et
& M  M *
 0 at y  1 al., 2012):
y y
Aluminum: Em= 70GPa, ZrO2: Ec= 151GPa,

SOLUTION METHODOLOGY ν=0.3
The equations of equilibrium along with the
CONVERGENCE AND VALIDATION
appropriate boundary conditions are solved
using fast converging double Chebyshev STUDY
series: Detailed convergence studies for present
th
The i term in a Chebyshev polynomial is analysis and validation with the available
given by results are carried out. Table-1 shows the
convergence of central deflection for
Ti (r)  Cos  i  ; Cos  r;  1  r  1
different a/h and R/a ratio of simply
The recurrence relation can be written as;
supported functionally graded spherical shell
T n 1 ( r )  T n 1 ( r )  2 r T n ( r )
(a/b=1, k=2) subjected to uniform distributed
The displacement functions u(x, y, t) and the transverse load.
loadings are approximated in the space Figure. 1 shows comparison of present results
domain and approximated as: with (Oktem2012) and found a good
agreement. Figure.2 shows variation of non-
dimensional central deflection with R/a ratio
1129
Bahadur et al.
for different a/h ratio and in Figure. 3 Exponent (k)=2

variation of non-dimensional central 0.006
deflection with a/h ratio for different R/a 0.005
ratio is shown. 0.004
R/a=10
w*
Table 1.convergence of central deflection 0.003 R/a=30
R/a=50
for simply supported spherical shell 0.002
0.001
R/a=10
a/h=10, 0
M,N a/h=10, a/h=20, R/a=30 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
a/h
6 0.0038516 0.00303 0.004241
igure 3. Variation of non dimentional centr
7 0.0038513 0.00303 0.004241 eflection with a/h ratio for different R/a rati
8 0.0038506 0.00302 0.004242

REFERENCES
9 0.0038518 0.00302 0.004243
Kabir HRH Al-Duaij J 1996Analysis of
10 0.0038511 0.00302 0.004242 simply supported shear-flexible
11 0.0038515 0.00302 0.004242 transversely isotropic (ATJ-graphite)
moderately-deep doubly curved panels
Computers & Structures 1025-1030.
Exponent (k)=2
Khare R K Kant T Garg A K 2003Closed-
0.006 form thermo-mechanical solutions of
0.005 Present R/a=10 higher-order theories of cross-ply
0.004 Present R/a=30 laminated shallow shells Composite
Oktem R/a=10
Structures 313-340.
w*
0.003
0.002 Oktem R/a=30 Kiani Y Akbarzadeh A H Chen Z T Eslami
M R 2012Static and dynamic analysis of
0.001
an FGM doubly curved panel resting on
0.000 the Pasternak-type elastic foundation
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Composite Structures 2474-2484.
a/h Oktem A S Mantari J L Soares C G 2012
Figure 1. Validation of present result with Static response of functionally graded
Oktem (2012) panels and doubly-curved shells based on
a higher order shear deformation theory
Exponent (k)=2 European Journal of Mechanics A/Solids
0.005 163-172.
0.004 Upadhyay A K Shukla K K 2013
a/h=10 Geometrically nonlinear static and
0.003
a/h=50
w*
0.002
dynamic analysis of functionally graded
skew plates Commun Nonlinear Sci
0.001
Numer Simulat 2252-2279.
0
0 20 R/a 40 60
1130
ICCMS2016
STATIC ANALAYSIS OF DOUBLY TAPERED THIN WALLED

COMPOSITE BOX BEAM UNDER AXIAL LOADING
TUSHAR SHARMA*, MURARI V. and SHUKLA K.K.
Department of Applied Mechanics, MNNIT Allahabad, U.P., India.
Abstract: The paper presents the static analysis of thin-walled composite box beam.
The model is developed for doubly tapered thin walled composite box beam subjected
to axial loading incorporating classical laminate theory. Governing equations are
derived using minimum total potential energy principle. Utilizing finite element
method, numerical results are obtained for thin-walled doubly tapered composite box
beam under axial loading. Effects of different taper ratio and laminate stacking
sequence on the tip deflection & twist are investigated.
Keywords: Thin walled composite beam; Classical lamination theory; FE
method.
INTRODUCTION conditions & stacking sequence are studied.

(Mitra et al., 2004) developed a generic
Thin walled laminated composite structures
composite thin walled beam element having
are being extensively used in aerospace
arbitrary cross-section of open and closed
industry and other high performance
contour. The element uses higher order
engineering structures. Thin walled
interpolating polynomials that are derived by
composite box beam is one of the important
solving the static homogeneous coupled
structural element being used in these
governing differential equation. Static and
structures and thus stimulating the interest of
free vibration analyses are performed for
reseachers working in this area. (Vlasov,
various beam configuration and for different
1961) was first to develop the theory of thin-
ply layup sequences which are compared
walled members made of isotropic materials
with experimental results. (Cardenas et al.,
for open & closed section beams. (Chandra et
2012) analysed static and dynamic behaviour
al., 1990) fabricated & tested thin walled
of a realistic composite wind turbine blade.
composite rectangular cross sections beams
The thin walled beam 1D FE model is
under bending, torsional and extensional
developed based on classical lamination
loads. The structural coupling effects on
theory. (Zhang et al., 2014) presented an
symmetric and anti-symmetric layup is
improved structural model for single-cell thin
discussed. (Kollar et al., 2002) presented
walled closed-section composite beams,
thin-walled composite beam theory for open
considering both axial warping and material
and closed section. The effect of arbitrary
anisotropy.
layups in each wall segment is studied. (Lee
et al., 2007) developed an analytical model In this paper, the analytical model developed
which is applicable to thin walled composite by (Lee et al., 2007) is extended for doubly
box beam section subjected to different type tapered thin-walled composite box beam
of loading. The model is based on CLT and section. The model is based on CLT &
governing equation is derived using governing equations are derived using
minimum total potential energy principle. minimum total potential energy principle.
The effects of fiber angle, boundary Numerical results are obtained for static
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:ram0213@mnnit.ac.in 1131

Sharma et al.
analysis of thin-walled doubly tapered u ( s, z , n )  u ( s, z )

composite box beam under axial loading with v( s, z , n)  v ( s, z )  n *u ( s, z ) s (3)
effect of different laminate stacking
sequence. w( s, z , n)  w( s, z )  n *u ( s, z ) z
y The resulting strains are;

s
n    o  ( x  n sin  )  ( y  n cos  )
z z y x
 (  nq ) (2)

 F
   n  
r P sz  2t  sz
o q
θ By using the minimum total potential energy
principle, the weak form is obtained as;
x l
0   (N z W   M y U   M x V 
0 (5)
Figure. 1. Thin-walled closed section  M   2 M t  q V  t V )dz
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION representing axial force ( N z ), bending
The coordinate systems for thin walled closed moment in x and y direction ( M x , M y ),
section are shown in Figure. 1. X & y axes
lie in plane of cross section and z axis lie warping moment ( M  ) and torsional moment
parallel to longitudinal axis of the beam. N & ( M t ) with respect to centroid, respectively.
s axes are normal and tangent to the middle The forces and Moments in the beam can be
surface of a plate element, respectively and expressed as:
directed along the contour line of the cross
 Nz   E11 E12 E13 E14 E15   zo 
section. The above coordinate systems are M    
E22 E23 E24 E25   y 
related with the angle of rotation θ as shown   
y
 
in Fig. 1. Point P is pole and axis parallel to z Mx    E33 E34 E35   x  (3)
M   
E45   
axis through P is pole axis.   
E44
 
 M  sym. E55  sz 
The mid-surface displacement field applied
to whole contour is expressed as (Lee et al., Where [Eij] is the stiffness of cross-section.
2007): The explicit form of coefficient of [Eij] can
u ( s, z )  U ( z ) sin  ( s )  V ( z ) cos  ( s )   ( z ) q ( s ) be found in (Lee et al., 2007)
v ( s , z )  U ( z ) cos  ( s )  V ( z ) sin  ( s )   ( z ) r ( s ) (1)
w( s, z )  W ( z )  U ( z ) x ( s )  V ( z ) y ( s )   ( z ) ( s ) FE FORMULATION
Where U, V, W are the displacements of a One dimensional displacement based finite
point in x, y & z directions, respectively. The element method is implemented for
warping function  is expressed as; describing thin-walled composite beam
model, considering combination of
s F (s)  interpolation function such as 1-D Lagrange
 (s)  s0 
 r ( s ) 
t ( s ) 
ds (2) interpolation function  j and hermite –cubic
interpolation function  j . Associated with
Deformation at any generic point on profile
node j and nodal values, the generalized
section is represented as u, v, and w in terms displacements over each element is expressed
of mid-surface displacement u , v & w as: as:
1132
Static Analaysis of Doubly Tapered Thin Walled Composite Box Beam under Axial Loading
n n
W   w j j ; U   u j  j Table 1. Material Properties
i 1 i 1
(4)
n n
V   v j j ;   j j E1 = 148 GPa E2 = 9.65 GPa
i 1 j 1
G12 = 4.55 Gpa ν12 = 0.34
Table 2. Tip displacement and tip angle of twist of a cantilever beam under axial load.
W (mm) θ (rad.)
Layup Ref. value Present Ref. value Present Reference
[010/4510] 0.603 6.00E-02 1.64E-02 1.62E-02 (Lee et al., 2007)
[012] 0.3378 0.33529 0 8.19E-16 (Kollar et al., 2002)
[06/456] 0.6182 0.60016 1.02E-04 1.62E-04 (Kollar et al., 2002)
[104/204/304] 1.0489 0.96611 6.47E-04 5.99E-04 (Kollar et al., 2002)
For validation purpose, a uniform cross

section cantilever composite box beam which
is subjected to axial loading at tip is chosen
as shown in Fig. 2. The present results are
compared with available results and are in
good agreement with the available results as
shown in Table 2. In order to investigate the
Figure 2. Cantilever composite box beam effect of taper, doubly tapered cantilever
under axial load composite box beam is considered which is
1m long in length and subjected to axial load
P= 24KN. The taper along the length in x & y
direction decreases as moving from fixed end
to free end as shown in Fig.3. Different
tapering ratio is considered i.e.
⁄ & ⁄ where & are height &
width at free end and & are height &
width at fixed end, respectively. The material
Figure 3. Schematic diagram for doubly
properties and cross sectional dimensions are
taper box beam
given in Table 1. Variation of the torsional
Substituting Eq. (4) into weak form in and axial displacement due to taper along the
Eq.Error! Reference source not found., the length in composite beam box at [010/4510]
finite element model for a distinctive element stacking sequence is shown in Fig. 4. It
can be written as;
shows that as the ⁄ ratio decreases, axial
 K    f  (8) displacement gradually increases but the
Where  K  is the elemental stiffness matrix, angle of twist increases sharply near the tip.
 is the nodal displacement vector and  f  Effect of taper on tip deflection and tip
twisting angle on different stacking sequence
is the element force vector.
is shown in Fig. 5. The [020] layup gives
NUMERICAL EXAMPLE minimum deflection at different taper ratio
among other layups, whereas, [010/4510]
layup gives highest twisting angle at tip.
1133
Sharma et al.
b2=1 For ratio b1=1 b2=1 For ratio b1=1

Dispalcement (m) 0.0008 0.04
b2=0.75 b2=0.75
0.0006 b2=0.50 0.03 b2=0.5
θ (rad)
b2=0.25 b2=0.25
0.0004 0.02 b2=0.1
b2=0.1
0.0002 0.01
0 0
0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1
Length (m) Length (m
Fig. 4 variation of (a) axial dispalcement & (b) angle of twist along the length at
different taper ratio
0.0014 For ratio b1=1 0.04 For ratio b1=1

Tip Displacement (m)
0.03
Tip θ (rad)
0.0009
0.02
0.0004
0.01
‐1E‐04 0
1 0.75 0.5 0.25 0.1 1 0.75 0.5 0.25 0.1
Ratio of b2 Ratio of b2
a b
Fig. 5 variation of (a) axial dispalcement & (b) angle of twist at tip for different
stacking sequence at different taper ratio.
CONCLUSION layupJournal of Reinforced Plastics

Composite 21(16) 1423-65.
The effect of taper with different stacking
sequence can be seen predominantly near the Lee J Lee S 2007 Flexural–torsional behavior
of thin-walled closed-section composite
tip of the beam and also variation in axial
box beamsThin-Walled Structures 42
displacement and twisting angle. 1293–305.
REFERENCES Mitra M Gopalakrishnan S Bhat M S 2004 A
new super convergent thin walled
Cardenas D Escarpita A A Elizalde H composite beam element for analysis of
Aguirre J J Ahuett H Marzocca P Probst box beam structures International
O 2012Numerical validation of a finite Journal of Solids and Structures 41
element thin-walled beam model of a 1491–518.
composite wind turbine blade Wind
Energy 15 203–23. Vlasov V 1961 Thin-walled elastic beams
2nd Ed Jerusalem Israel Israel Program
Chandra R Stemple AD Chopra I 1990 Thin- for Scientific Translation.
walled composite beams under bending,
torsional and extensional loadsJournal Zhang C Wang S 2014 Structure mechanical
of Aircraft 27 619–36. modeling of thin-walled closed-section
composite beams, Part 1: Single-cell
Kollar L P Pluzsik A 2002 Analaysis of thin- cross section Composite Structures 113
walled composite beams with arbitrary 12–22.
1134
ICCMS2016
STRENGTH AND VIBRATION ANALYSIS OF TRANSMISSION

HOUSING OF A TRACTOR
AHUJA M.*, DESHPANDE N. V. and PATI S.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, National Institute of Technology Silchar, India.
Abstract: The transmission housing is one of the important part in automobiles as it

protects the components of gearbox by providing the fluid tight casing to hold the
lubricants and by supporting the moving components. In the modern era, one of the
key problem facing by automobile industries is the transmission housing or gearbox
casing failure because of excessive weight, noise and vibration. It is therefore required
to assess the strength of gearbox casing and in turn to reduce the level of noise and
vibration. In this work, we perform linear static analysis and vibration analysis of
transmission housing of a tractor. The vibration pattern for first ten modes is
investigated. The transmission housing is statically analysed at high gears (H1, H2,
H3, H4), low gears (L1, L2, L3, L4) and reverse gears (RH, RL). It is found that
maximum stress and deformation is induced during reverse high (RH) gear loading
conditions. Our results reveal that that the natural frequency of vibration varies from
531.5 Hz to 1521.65 Hz. The present analysis provides an elegant way of improving
an in-depth understanding of optimum design of the gearbox casing.
Keywords: Deformation; gearbox; transmission; vibration.
INTRODUCTION lubricant inside and protect the gears from

dust and moisture. The Gearbox Casing is
With the advancement in technological
one of the most critical components of a
growth of automobiles, the requirements
power transmission system in an automobile.
placed on the load-bearing capacity and the
Therefore strength and vibration analysis
operational reliability of automobile
becomes vital for establishing optimum
transmission are increasingly high.
design of gearbox casing.
Automobile gearbox is an assembly of gears
to meet the torque variation for the varying A host of articles (Nigade et al. 2012; Babu et
speed conditions and it allows the vehicle to al. 2015, Kumar et al. 2014), has been
accelerate from rest to high speed by reported in the literature on the analysis of
changing gears while the engine operates automobile transmission gearbox. Main
within its most effective range. Heavy focuses of most of the works are to determine
vehicle transmission systems are subjected to the different modes and natural frequency of
noise and vibration under excitation the gearbox casing so as to avoid the
condition. Internal excitation forces, gear occurrence of resonance. In none of the
meshing forces, load and speed variation and above-mentioned works, both static and
gear defects are major sources of excitation. modal analysis have been reported.
This casing supports the shaft, hold the Moreover, there is no work on the analysis of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:ahujamayank0154@gmail.com 1135

Ahuja et al.
transmission system of tractor. Accordingly, Table 1. Mesh Details of Gearbox Casing

the aim of the present work is to analyse both
static and modal analysis of transmission Element Type 2nd order Tetrahedral
system of a tractor.
Number of 409498
METHODOLOGY OF MODELLING Elements
AND ANALYSIS Number of Nodes 691063
Figure 1 presents the pictorial representation Tetra Collapse 0.11
of the gearbox casing. The gearbox casing is
Jacobian 0.5
modeled in high end design software I-DEAS
NX. The FE model used in stress and modal
analysis is shown in figure 2. For Finite RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Element Analysis the IGES file of the solid The main focus of this work is to present the
model is imported to Hyper Mesh v13.0 static analysis of gearbox casing of a tractor.
software. Table 1 gives mesh details of The input parameters required for the
gearbox casing. simulation such as various dimensions and
the loading conditions have been taken from
industry. We analyse ten different mode
shapes of the casing and maximum stress &
deformation distribution plot by constraining
the bolting locations in 6 degree of freedom
and by applying bearing loads. Figures 3, 4
and 5 present the four different mode shapes
of the casing, deformation induced due to
Figure 1. CAD Model of Gearbox Casing loading and the distribution of the maximum
stress respectively. Table 2 presents the
deformation and the major principal stress for
10 gears. It is important to mention here that
maximum stress and deformation are induced
during reverse high (RH) gear loading
conditions. It is further observed that the
maximum principal stress is 57.29 MPa,
which is lesser than tensile strength (260
MPa) of grey cast iron (FG260). Vibration
pattern of first ten modes is also studied. It
shows that the natural frequency varies from
Figure 2. FE Model of Gearbox Casing
531.50 Hz to 1521.60 Hz. It is also observed
that gearbox casing is subjected to axial
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
bending vibration, torsional vibration and
The material used is Gray Cast Iron, Grade axial bending with torsional vibration.
FG 260. The properties of the material that
has been used for numerical simulation are
given below: Elastic modulus 1.28x 1011Pa,
Poisson ratio- 0.26, density-7200 kg/m3.
1136
Strength and Vibration Analysis of Transmission Housing of a Tractor
Mode 1 f1 = 531.50 Hz
Mode 3 f3 = 920.30
Mode 2 f2 = 780.90 Hz Mode 4 f4 = 998.80 Hz
Figure 3. Four different mode shapes of the Gearbox casing
Figure 4. Deformation Distribution
Figure 5. Maximum Principal Stress Distribution
1137
Ahuja et al.
Table 2. Simulation Results at 10 gear loading conditions
Gears Displacement (mm) Major Principal Stress (MPa)

H1 0.016 41.45
H2 0.013 30.73
H3 0.005 25.18
H4 0.003 20.26
L1 0.017 40.20
L2 0.017 40.22
L3 0.018 39.60
L4 0.004 20.0
RH 0.078 57.29
RL 0.031 33.81
CONCLUSION Kumar VShivaraju and Srikanth2014

Vibration Analysis for Gearbox Casing
In this work, we present strength and Using Finite Element Analysis The
vibration analysis of gearbox of a tractor. International Journal Of Engineering
From the numerical analysis, it reveals that And Science (IJES)3 18-36.
maximum stress and deformation is induced Nigade R V Jadhav T A and Bhide A M 2012
during reverse high (RH) gear loading Vibration Analysis of Gearbox Top
conditions. The maximum principal stress Cover International Journal of
obtained from linear stress analysis (57.29 Innovations in Engineering and
MPa) which is lesser than tensile strength Technology (IJIET)1 26-33.
(260 MPa) of grey cast iron (FG260).The Yu F Li Y Sun D Shen W and Xia W 2013
lowest natural frequency obtained from the Analysis for the Dynamic Characteristic
modal analysis (531.50 Hz) is greater than of the Automobile Transmission
excitation frequency of gearbox casing, so Gearbox Research Journal of Applied
there is no chance of resonance. The results Sciences Engineering and Technology 5
1449-14
of the present investigation may be helpful to
the design engineers at the initial stage of
design of gearbox and for structural
optimization of transmission housing.
REFERENCES
BabuM M and Reddy Y R 2015 Stress
Analysis of Gearbox Casing Using
ANSYS Workbench International
Journal of Science and Research
(IJSR)4 525-527.
Dai R Ma J and Zhang H 2011 Modal and
strength Analysis on a Gearbox Housing
Advanced Materials Research 154-155
1379-1383.
1138
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF RAYLEIGH WAVE IN ORTHOTROPIC LAYER LYING

OVER AN ORTHOTROPIC HALF-SPACE WITH INITIAL STRESS
SINGHAL A.* and SAHU S. A.
Department of Applied Mathematics, Indian School of Mines, Dhanbad, India.
Abstract The present paper studies the effect of initial stress on the propagation of
Rayleigh wave in orthotropic layer lying over an orthotropic half-space. Dispersion
equation has been obtained in closed form. It is observed that the initial stress has
significant effect on the phase velocity of Rayleigh waves. In particular initial stress
increases with the phase velocity of Rayleigh waves. Some particular cases have
been deduced. Results have been presented by the means of graph. Also the
findings are exhibited through graphical representation and surface plot.
Keywords: Rayleigh wave, orthotropic, initial stress, phases velocity.
INTRODUCTION anisotropic layer overlying a semi-infinite

sandy medium.
Recently, Rayleigh waves have found
considerable application in the ultrasonic In the present investigation, we have shown
range. They can be used to the the effect of initial stress on the propagation
diversifications of engineering materials of Rayleigh waves in an orthotropic layer
and to the operations at serve thermal lying over an orthotropic half-space with
environments, an orthotropic magneto- initial stress and gravity. The solution for
thermoelastic medium is very important for the layer and half-space are obtained
the possibility of its extensive application in analytically. The special cases have been
various branches Science and Technology, deduced.
particularly in Optics, Geophysics and
Plasma Physics. Elastic waves in a
GEOMETRY AND SOLUTION OF
cylindrical body made of isotropic and THE PROBLEM
transversely isotropic material have been Orthotropic Layer
illustrated by Abd-Alla (1995). Singh and
Kumar (2013) have analyzed the problem of Z= ‐H
Z= 0 H
propagation of Rayleigh waves due to a
finite rigid barrier in a shallow ocean. Gupta
(2013) studied the Propagation of Rayleigh Figure 1 Orthotropic half-space with
Waves in a Pre-stressed layer over a Pre- initial stress and gravity
stressed half-space. Vinh et al (2014) have
SOLUTION FOR ORTHOTROPIC
investigated the Rayleigh waves in an
isotropic elastic half-space coated by a thin
LAYER
isotropic elastic layer with smooth contact. u1  i  Ae  i1z 1  1i k1   Ce  i2 z 1  2i k2   ei ( x  ct )
Recently Pal et al (2014) have shown the
w1  i  Ae  i1z  1  i k1   Ce  i2 z  2  i k2   ei ( x  ct )
propagation of Rayleigh waves in
____________________________________
*Author to correspondence: E. mail: ism.abhinav@gmail.com 1139

Singhal and Sahu
SOLUTION FOR ORTHOTROPIC HALF-SPACE

u 2    i  A1 c o s m 1 z  B 1 s in m 1 z   m 2   A 2 sin m 2  z  B 2 c o s m 2  z   e i  x  ct 
w 2    m 1   A1 sin m 1 z  B 1 c o s m 1 z   i  A 2 c o s m 2  z  B 2 sin m 2  z   e i  x  ct 
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
(1)  zx 1  0 at Z   H (2)  zz 1  0 at Z   H
(3) u1  u2 at Z  0 (4) w1  w2 at Z  0
(5)  zx 1   zx 2 at Z  0 (6)  zz 1   zz 2 at Z  0
DISPERSION RELATION
L1 L2 0 0 0 0
L3 L4 0 0 0 0
i (1  1i k 1 ) i (1   2 i k 2 ) i 0 0 m2
0
i (   1  i k 1 ) i (   2  i k 2 ) 0  m1 i 0
L5 L6 0  2 m 1i (1  m 22 ) 0
L7 L8 c 13  m12 c33  0 0 im ( c 3 5  c1 3 )
Where
L1  c44 2  21  12i k1  i k1  ei1H e

i  x  ct 
L2  c44 2  22  12i k2  i k2  ei2 H ei  x ct 
L3   2  c13 1  1i k1   c331 ( 1  i k1 )  ei1H ei  x  ct 
L4   2  c13 1  2i k2   c332 ( 2  i k2 )  ei2 H ei  x  ct 
L5  21  12i k1  i k1
L6  22  2 2i k2  i k 2
L7  c13 1  1i k1   c331 (1  i k1 )
L8  c13 1  2i k2   c332 (2  i k2 )
1140
Study of Rayleigh Wave in Orthotropic Layer Lying over an Orthotropic Half-Space with Initial
Stress

3.5
3.0 P0 0.5
0.6
0.7
2.5
2.0
c
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
k
Figure 2.Variation of Rayleigh wave velocity c with respect to wave number k for
different values of initial stress.
CONCLUSION Prestressed Half-space Frontiers in

Geotechnical Engineering 2(1)
The effect of initial stress on the
propagation of Rayleigh waves has been Pal P C Kumar S Bose S 2014 Propagation
studied. The solution for layer and half- of Rayleigh waves in anisotropic
space are obtained analytically. Dispersion layer overlying a semi-infinite sandy
relation has been obtained. It is observed medium. Ain Shams Engineering
that the initial stress of the orthotropic Journal.
half-space has great impact on the phase Doi:10.1016/j.asej.2014.11.003
velocity of Rayleigh waves. Rayleigh
Singh J Kumar R 2013 Propagation of
wave velocity increases with respect to
Rayleigh waves due to the presence
wave number as we increases the initial
of a rigid barrier in a shallow ocean
stress and decreases with respect to wave
Int J Eng Technol.5(2) 917-24
length. Findings have been shown by the
means of graphs. The present study may be Vinh P C Anh V T N Thanh V P 2014
useful for seismologists and geologists. Rayleigh waves in an isotropic elastic
half-space coated by a thin isotropic
REFERENCES elastic layer with smooth contact. 51
A M Abd-Alla 1995 Thermal stress in a 496-504
transversely isotropic circular
cylinder due to an instantaneous heat
source Appl. Math. Comput.68 113–
124.
Gupta I S 2013 Propagation of Rayleigh
Waves in a Pre stressed Layer over a
1141
ICCMS2016
ENERGY ABSORPTION CHARACTERISTICS OF ALUMINIUM

ALLOY 6061 SQUARE CORRUGATED TUBES UNDER AXIAL AND
OBLIQUE IMPACT LOADING
RAWAT S.*, UPADHYAY A.K. and SHUKLA K.K.
Mechanical Engineering Dept, MNNIT Allahabad, U.P., India.
Abstract: Corrugated tubes are commonly used as energy absorbers to mitigate the
damage during impact collision. These, thin walled structures, can be of many shapes,
primarily, circular and square. In this study, the LS-DYNA dynamic simulation code
is used to study the effect of grading the corrugations on the energy absorption
characteristics of the square tubes made of aluminium alloy 6061. This study
incorporates axial as well as oblique impact loading. The wavelength and amplitude
of the corrugations are graded linearly as well as parabolic separately. Specific energy
absorption (SEA), crush force efficiency (CFE) and peak force are the major energy
absorption parameters. The simulation results show improvement in the
crashworthiness of the tube. Some of the structurally graded tubes show significantly
reduced force fluctuation and elimination of the initial peak force in square corrugated
tubes. In oblique impact, the corrugated tubes have higher energy absorption and less
force fluctuations at higher angles which is an advantage over normal tube. The
outcomes of the study are encouraging as most of the square corrugated tubes show an
improvement in CFE and SEA over the simple tube.
Keywords: Energy absorption; Crushing; Corrugated tubes; FEM; Impact;
Structural grading
INTRODUCTION type buckling leading to instability and the

A multi fold increase in the vehicle over the favourability of compact mode were reported
number of vehicles over the last decades is a (1993). In the book (2003), dependency of
testament to increasing dependence of non-compact and compact mode was
today’s society on transportation systems. In discussed on side to thickness ratio (2003).
view of this, an extensive research in the field The dependency of energy absorption
of energy absorbers to ensure the safety of characteristic on thickness of tube and angle
passengers during an unfortunate accident. of impactor was established (2003).
Karagiozova et al (2005) observed the
Abramowicz et al (1984) through their study, increase in the energy absorption and mean
revealed the relation between mean force and force on crushing the tube with high impact
different modes of deformation velocity numerically. El-Hage et al (2005)
experimentally. Compact and non-compact examined various trigger mechanisms and
modes in square cross-section tube were reported their influence on initial folding
classified. Non-compact made failed in Euler force. For simple tubes, increase in thickness
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sharadrawat.9@gmail.com; 1142

Rawat et al.
decrease the number of natural lobes during

deformation and higher impact velocities
leading to irregularities were reported (2006).
Grooved tubes were also studied as energy
absorbers, improvement in energy absorption
due to grooves and its influence of the size of
grooves was reported (2009) (2010). Strain
concentration during deformation of square
corrugated tubes was also studied (2009)
where proportional and inversely
proportional relation between thickness-strain
concentration and corner radius/side length –
strain concentration respectively. Figure 2. Different Corrugations profiles
studied
The aim of the present study to structurally
graded corrugations in square tubes to Figure2. shows the different corrugation
improve the progressive buckling mode to profiles studied and their respective
improve the crashworthiness and reduce the nomenclature used in the present study.
initial peak force in axial as well as oblique The specifications of all the tubes used in the
impact. Grading has been done on amplitude present study is as follows Length [L]=100 +
and wavelength of the corrugation function. 2.5 + 2.5 mm i.e. 105mm. Side Length
Explicit non-linear code LS-DYNA (2006) [D]=45mm and Thickness [t] =2mm.8
has been used to simulate and analyse corrugations were given to the tube of length
different tubes. of 105mm. The amplitude of these
corrugations are equal to 1mm. Parabolic and
MATERIAL AND METHODOLOGY
linear functions of wavelength (2λ) as well as
Figure1.schematically shows the amplitude (A) have been studied along with
configuration and boundary conditions of the the variation of corner radius (i.e. r/D ratio).
model and tube specifications pictorially. The tubes have undergone axial as well as
One end is constrained (DOFs 0) and impact oblique impact. A comparative study of all
has been done on the other end. the responses of the aforementioned tubes has
been done in the next section. The thin
walled square tubes in this study were made
of Aluminium Al 6061 because of its strength
to weight ratio. Properties of Al 6061 have
been and the stress-strain curve used for
Aluminium in the numerical simulation was
taken from ASM handbook (Vol.2) (1990). In
LS-DYNA, an imaginary rigid wall with
mass and velocity is made to impact on the
non-constrained end of the tube with the
` interface friction set to 0.1. The non-linear
Figure 1. Tube Specifications and code used in the present study has also been
boundary conditions validated with the work by Tarigopula et al
1143
Energy Absorption Characteristics of Aluminium Alloy 6061 Square Corrugated Tubes under Axial and
Oblique Impact Loading
(2006) and the results obtained were in good for convergence L=105mm, Side
agreement. Length=40mm, r/D=.1 and thickness=2mm.
The mass=60Kg and the velocity=15m/s is
CONVERGENCE used for the dynamic test. Mesh Convergence
In FEA model, the mesh element chosen is necessary to obtain a sufficient mesh
2mm after convergence. Refer to Table.1 for density for an accurate deformation process
the process of convergence. The tubes used analysis.
Table 1. Convergence
Mesh size 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.0
Mean Force (KN) 35.52 36.01 36.05 35.92

Peak Force (KN) 113.86 113.91 113.95 113.89
Energy (J) 2886.01 2945.28 2947.25 2941.50
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS a(p)_l(c) is above the tube a(c)_l(c).

AMPLITUDE GRADING Therefore, linear and parabolic variation in
amplitude of the corrugations brings an
Figure.3 represents the responses of the tube
improvement over the basic corrugated tube.
a(c)_l(c),a(l)_l(c) and a(p)_l(c) on axial
Figure.5 shows that although the force
loading. It can be seen that as the degree of
fluctuations are more for the tube a(p)_l(c)
amplitude of corrugation function is
but the initial peak force is in the vicinity of
increased the fluctuations increase but the the peak force of the tube a(c)_l(c) which is
initial peak force is comparable. Therefore,
significantly lower than the tube st.
the overall mean force increases while the
4.00
peak force is maintained. Hence an increase Oblique= 5°
in the energy absorbed. a(c)_l(c)
3.00
120 a(l)_l(c)
Energy (KJ)
a(c)_l(c) a(l)_l(c)
100 2.00 a(c)_l(c)
a(p)_l(c)
80
Force (KN)
60 1.00
40
0.00
20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Displacement (mm)
0
0 50 Figure 4.Energy absorption
Displacement (mm)
characteristics of amplitude graded tubes
Figure 3.Comparative load-deformation
curves of tubes with amplitude grading CONCLUSIONS
Energy absorption decreases on increasing In the present study, energy absorption
the angle of impact as can be seen by the characteristics of corrugated square tubes
figure.4. It can be pointed out that the energy with structural grading has been studied.
absorption for the tubes a(l)_l(c) and Numerical simulation has been carried out
1144
Rawat et al.
using the non-linear code LS-DYNA. A crush characteristics of square

comparative study has been carried out for aluminium tubes with chamfering and
axial as well as oblique impact loading by other triggering mechanisms
varying the amplitude and wavelength of the International Journal of
Crashworthiness 10(2) 183-195.
corrugation. Effect of the corner radius (r/D)
on the crash worthiness has also been studied. Karagiozova D Nurick G N Yuen SCK 2005
Introduction of the corrugations reduced the Thin Walled Structures 43 956–982
peak reaction force as well as the energy LS-DYNA 2006 Theoretical Manual 971
absorption of the square tubes. As the degree Livermore Software Technology
of amplitude function is increased, the Corporation Livermore CA USA.
characteristics of the tube in axial as well Lu Guoxing Yu Tongxi 2003 Energy
oblique angle increase. On increasing the r/D Absorption of Structures and Materials,
ratio, there’s a slight increment in both peak England, Woodhead Publishing
reaction force and energy absorption. The Limited.
current study can be of relevance for the Reid S R December 1993 Plastic deformation
future experimental works involving end mechanisms in axially compressed
analysis of the unfilled and foam filled tubes. metal tubes used as impact energy
absorbers International Journal of
100 Mechanical Sciences 35(12) 1035-1052
Oblique = 5°
80 a(c)_l(c)
Reyes A Langseth M Hopperstad OS 2003
a(p)_l(c) Square aluminium tubes subjected to
60 st oblique loading International Journal of
Force (KN)
Impact Engineering 281077–1106.

40 Salehghaffari S Tajdari M Panahi M
Mokhtarnezhad F 2010 Attempts to
20
improve energy absorption
characteristics of circular metal tubes
0
0 20 Displacement
40 60
(mm) 80
subjected to axial loading Thin-Walled
Figure 5. Load-deformation curves of Tarigopula V Langseth M Hopperstad OS
simple and amplitude graded tubes. Clausen A H 2006 Axial crushing of
thin-walled high-strength steel sections.
REFERENCES
International Journal of Impact
Abramowicz W Jones N 1984 Dynamic axial Engineering32 847–882.
crushing of square tubes International
Zhang X Huh H 2009Energy absorption of
Journal of Impact Engineering 2(2),
longitudinally grooved square tubes
179–208
under axial Compression Thin-Walled
ASM Metals1990 Handbook Vol. 2 10th Structures 47 1469–1477
edition.
Chen D H Ozaki S 2009 Circumferential
strain concentration in axial crushing of
cylindrical and square tubes with
corrugated surfaces. Thin-Walled
El-Hage H Mallick P K Zamani N 2005 A
numerical study on the quasi-static axial
1145
ICCMS2016
MOMENT-ROTATION BEHAVIOR OF STAINLESS STEEL BEAM-

COLUMN BOLTED CONNECTION
BHAVSAR V. S. 1* and DAWARI B. M.2
Department of Civil Engineering, College of Engineering Pune, Pune, India

Abstract: The scope of this paper is to study behavior of beam-column bolted
connection for stainless steel material. For steel structures semi rigid connections are
found to be efficient compared to rigid and pin connections. For design of semi rigid
connections moment rotation behavior is need to be known. The present study
considers stainless steel beam-column connection. Finite element models in Abaqus
are used to simulate numerical experiments.
Keywords: Stainless steel connections, moment-rotation behavior, Finite element
analysis
INTRODUCTION used for frames there is need to understand

connection behavior of stainless steel beam
Stainless steel is being increasingly used as a
column connection.
construction material in various structural
applications, taking advantage of its well The actual response characteristics of a frame
known corrosion resistance, fire resistance and its connections are nonlinear, and current
and material properties. Given the high initial studies of analysis and design methods aim to
material costs of stainless steel, associated incorporate such semi-rigid concepts into the
primarily with its alloying elements, it is models. A scheme was developed by
essential that it shall be fully utilized for Bjorhovde whereby connections can be
structural requirements. classified in terms of strength, stiffness, and
ductility, using tests and theoretical data.
In conventional analysis and design of steel
Some special cases are also considered, such
frames it is usually assumed that connections
as connections with softening-stiffening
joining the beams to columns are either fully
characteristics, connections with low
rigid or ideally pinned. In rigid joint
ductility, and connections with properties that
connection assumption is that full slope
vary as a function of the applied load sense.
continuity exists between beams and columns
This classification system is used in I.S. 800-
and full moment from beams is transferred to
2007: General Construction in Steel - Code
columns. Where as in an ideally pinned
of Practice.
connection beams are assumed to have
simple supports and columns do not carry The polynomial model is one of the most
any moment from the beam. A moment widely known mathematical models for
frame deforms by bending the beams and connections, and it is adopted by many
columns depending on the geometry of researchers due to its simplicity. The
connection. This beam column connection procedure of polynomial model was
behavior is represented by moment rotation extensively used in steel beam to column
relationship. As stainless steel is now being connections for the first time by Frye and
_____________________________________
*Author to correspondence: E-mail: bhavsarvs@gmail.com 1146

Bhavsar and Dawari
Morris. The formulation is expressed as column connections. Analysis consists of

follows following steps:
ɸ = C1(KM)1+C-(KM)3+C3(KM)5 a) Modelling of beam-column bolted
where K is the standardization parameter that connections.
depends on geometrical properties and b) Using appropriate stress-strain relationship
connection type. C1, C2 and C3 values are the of stainless steel for material modeling
curve fitting constants obtained from the c) Defining interaction between surfaces in
experimental data. contact
d) Analyze for rotations in beam with respect
METHODOLOGY to moment applied.
Finite element software Abaqus is to be used
to obtain moment rotation behavior of beam-
Table 1. Details of connections
Connection type Connection details in mm
Double angle connection da= angle depth = 300
ta = angle thickness = 10
la= length of angle = 250
tb = beam thickness = 20
g =gauge distance = 38.25
Top and Seat angle connection la= angle length= 140

tb = beam thickness = 20
d = depth of beam = 300
Top Angle: 90 x 60 x 6
Bottom angle: 150x115x12
MODELLING OF BEAM TO To make assembly of different parts Contact

COLUMN BOLTED CONNECTIONS properties are defined from constraint tool at
each two surfaces coming in contact with
For studying and validating procedure of FE
each other. Contacts defined are face to face
model of beam-column bolted connections
contact for plane surfaces which are in
Abaqus model is used for steel and verified
contact and coaxial contact for curved
with Frye-Morris model.
surfaces in contact i.e. bolts and bolt holes.
For interaction between surfaces general
contact function of Abaqus software is used.
1147
Moment-Rotation Behavior of Stainless Steel Beam-Column Bolted Connection
In general contact feature two contact 60

properties are given namely tangential which 50
Moment (kNm)
deals with friction between surfaces and 40 Frye
normal contact. For tangential property Morris
30 (1975)
penalty method is used with friction
20
coefficient of 0.3 and for normal ‘Hard’ Present
10 study
contact property is given. For meshing of the
parts 20 Node quadratic brick element 0
0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015
‘C3D20RH’ is chosen. Fixed boundary
Rotation (Rad)
conditions are given to column top and
bottom faces to ensure rigid column. For the
application of moment, forces are applied to Fig. 2.Moment-rotation for double angle
connection
the far end of the beam in opposite direction
to each other so as to create a couple about 60
neutral axis of the beam. The rotations are 50
Moment (kNm)
calculated based on nodal displacement with 40 Present
respect to a reference point on neutral axis. study
30
Point A: Displacement in X-dir = dXa 20
Frye
Displacement in Y-dir = dYa 10 Morris
(1975)
0
Point B: Displacementin X-dir = dXb 0.000 0.005 0.010
Displacementin Y-dir = dYb Rotation (Rad)
dx =dXa – dXb+ original distance AB Fig. 3. Moment-rotation for top and seat
dy = | dYb – dXa | angle connection
Rotation = tan-1(dy/dx) After getting satisfactory moment-rotation

curve for carbon steel the material of the
models is changed to stainless steel material.
The models are analyzed to get moment
rotation behavior for stainless steel beam-
column connection.
Table 2. Mechanical property of stainless

steel members
Stainless steel
Stainless
Property members (beam,
steel bolts
column, angle)
Modulus of 200 GPa
Figure 1. Calculation of joint rotation 200 GPa
elasticity
Poisson’s Ratio 0.29 0.29
Yield stress 215 MPa 450 MPa
1148
Bhavsar and Dawari
60 and supplementary rules for stainless

50 Double steels 2006
Moment (kNm)
40 Angle Subramanian N 2008 Design of Steel

connection
30 Structures. Oxford Higher Education.
20 Top and Frye M J Morris G A 1975 Analysis of
10 Seat angle Flexibly Connected Steel Frames
0 connection Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering
0.000 0.010 0.020 2(3) 280–291.
Rotations (rad)
Fig. 4. Moment-rotation for top and seat

angle connection for stainless steel
model
SUMMARY
Moment-Rotation behavior for beam-column
connection of double angle connection and
top and seat angle connection is studied for
steel material. Further the models are
analyzed for stainless steel material. The
connections are found to be more flexible in
stainless steel than in normal steel. A new
model is proposed for stainless steel to define
moment-rotation behavior.
REFERENCES
Bjorhovde R Andre C and Jacques B 1990
Classification system for beam-to-
column connections Journal of
Structural Engineering 116(11) 3059-
3076
Rasmussen K Jr. 2003 Full-range stress–
strain curves for stainless steel alloys
Journal of constructional steel
research 59(1) 47-61
Bouchair A Julien A Anis A 2008 Analysis
of the behaviour of stainless steel
bolted connections Journal of
Constructional Steel Research 64(11)
1264-1274
Pawar A 2011 Behaviour of steel beam to
column connection M. Tech Thesis
College of Engineering Pune, Pune.
EN 1993–1-4. Eurocode 3 2006 Design of
steel structures Part 1.4 General rules
1149
ICCMS2016
FRAGILITY BASED SEISMIC VULNERABILITY ASSESSMENT OF

REINFORCED CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES
VEERENDRA KUMAR P.* and SIVA KUMAR M. V. N.
Department of Civil Engineering, National Institute of Technology Warangal, Telangana State, India.
Abstract: This paper develops fragility curves for 3 RC frame buildings under
earthquake loading. Three models were created in SAP2000 for low, mid and high
rise buildings based on HAZUS code for analysis. Nonlinear time history analyses
were conducted using SAP2000. The maximum inter story drift ratio was considered
as the engineering damage parameter. Results were compared to show the variation of
fragilities with storey height.
Keywords: Fragility surfaces; Fragility curves; Seismic vulnerability; RC
buildings.
INTRODUCTION RC FRAME BUILDINGS

Earthquake shaking represents complex According to HAZUS code, models
loading to a structure. The general way of developed were categorized as
representing an earthquake force is in terms Table 1. Categorization of Models
of its characteristics like peak ground
acceleration (PGA) or peak ground velocity Category No. of storeys
(PGV) or peak ground displacement(PGD) Low rise 2
etc. fragility curves are the most common Mid rise 5
methods to assess the seismic vulnerability of High rise 8
structures. For a given ground motion
All the frames are designed as per Indian
severity, fragility curves are the conditional
standards. RC elements are designed as per
probability of exceedance of structural
IS456:2000 standards and seismic loads are
response. Fragility curves are commonly
considered as per IS1893:2002.Each model is
used for the probability estimation of
similar and symmetrical in plan dimensions.
structural damage due to earthquakes as a
M25 grade concrete and Fe415 steel are used
function of ground motion indices for a
in modelling. Bay width is considered as
particular damage state. Seismic vulnerability
3.0m and column height is taken as 3.5m for
is expressed in terms of predefined damage
all the buildings.
states which have some physical meaning in
terms of functionality levels. Current study is GROUND MOTION INPUTS
focused on developing analytical fragility Generation of fragility functions require a
curves for RC frame buildings under peak large set of time history data. 57 natural
ground acceleration (PGA) as the parameter accelerograms data ranging from magnitude
that represents ground motion. The effect of 5.0 to 7.0 is collected from COSMOS virtual
height of building on seismic vulnerability is data centre based on Magnitude-Radial
observed by considering three models with distance filter. In order to increase the dataset
different heights based on HAZUS manual
for analysis.
________________________________
*Author For Correspondence: Email: kumarveerendra.22@gmail.com 1150

Veerendra Kumar and Siva Kumar
size, 456 synthetic accelerograms data is

generated by using SEISMOARTIF software.
DAMAGE STATE DEFINITION

Table 2.Damage Limits With Various Structural
Performance Levels for RC Frames
Limit state Performance Inter Storey
designation level Drifts, Sc(%)
Immediate Light 1
occupancy (IO) repairable
Life safety (LS) Moderate 2 Figure 3. PSDM model for 5storey

repairable building
Collapse Near 4
prevention (CP) collapse
RESULTS
Power law model can be used to estimate the
median engineering demand parameter
(EDP), which is defined as
EDP  aIM b (1)

In this study, inter storey drift ratio is
considered as the engineering demand
parameter (EDP) and peak ground Figure 4. PSDM model for 8storey
acceleration (PGA) as the intensity measure building
(IM).
Fig 5. Fragility curves of 2storey building

Figure 2. PSDM model for 2storey
for different damage states.
building
1151
Fragility Based Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of Reinforced Concrete Framed Structures
Fig 6. Fragility curves of 5storey building

Fig 9. Fragility curves of different models
for different damage states.
for life safety damage state
Fig 7. Fragility curves of 8storey building Fig 10. Fragility curves of different
for different damage states models for collapse prevention damage
state
CONCLUSIONS
Based on the results obtained, the following
conclusions can be made:
1. Theoretically, if lesser the damaging
force, lesser is the chance to reach the
highest damage state i.e., damage is in
the order of IO < LS < CP.
2. More is the damage, more is the
Fig8. Fragility curves of different models probability to fail. So the order of
for immediate occupancy damage state failure probability is CP > LS > IO.
3. Same order of probability is observed
from the fragility curves also.
1152
Veerendra Kumar and Siva Kumar
4. From the comparison of fragility of Nonlinear Time History Analyses

different buildings for same damage Proceedings of the 15th world
state, it can be concluded that with conference on Earthquake Engineering
increase in number of storeys, the Lisbao 2012 September 24-29
probability of failure also increases. Multi-hazard Loss Estimation Methodology:
HAZUS MR4 Technical Manual
REFERENCES
IS 1893-1 (2002): Criteria for Earthquake
Chaudhari D J Raipure P T 2015 Fragility
Resistant Design of Structures
Analysis of Open Ground Storey RC
Buildings Designed Using Various
Multiplication factors International
Journal of Research in Engineering and
Technology 4 748-754
Hadi Faghihmaleki Gholamreza
Abdollahzadeh Hamed Hamidi Jamnani
2014 Effect of Structure Height in
Seismic Fragility Curve Applied
mathematics in Engineering,
Management and Technology 2(6) 498-
503
Koktong Tan et al.2014 Fragility Curves of a
RC Frame Building Subjected to
Seismic Ground Motions Journal of
Civil Engineering Research 4(3A) 159-
163
Marco Vona 2014 Fragility Curves of
Existing RC Buildings Based on
Specific Structural Performance Levels
Open Journal of Civil Engineering 4
120-134
Muhammed Tekin Ali Gurbuz Seismic
Fragility Curves for 1 and 2 stories R/C
Buildings International journal of
Engineering Technologies 1(2)
Robin Davis P et al. Seismic Fragility of
open ground story buildings in India
Proceedings of the 9th U.S. National
and 10th Canadian Conference on
Earthquake Engineering Canada 2010
July 25-29
Majd M. et al. Developing Fragility Curves
for Steel Building with X-Bracing by
1153
ICCMS2016
ON PLANE STRAIN PROBLEMS OF ECCENTRIC ELASTIC RINGS IN

BIPOLAR COORDINATE SYSTEMS
DESAI P.* and PANDYA V.
School of Science and Engineering, Navrachana University, Bhayli, Vadodara, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: Plane strain problems of elastic eccentric rings are studied in bipolar
coordinate system in the present work. Two dimensional elastic eccentric ring has
been defined initially in bipolar coordinate system which is a coordinate system
having two foci. Stress analysis of eccentric ring is carried out subjected to uniform
internal and external pressure using Airy’s stress function approach. Stresses are
obtained with various parameters such as eccentricity, angles between two foci and
natural logarithmic ratios of two foci. Effect of eccentricity is investigated on the
stresses of the eccentric rings.
Keywords: Eccentric rings; bipolar coordinate system; Airy’s stress function.
INTRODUCTION an eccentric circular hole is given in [Dragan

et. al., 2012] using complex variable method.
Rings or cylinders with eccentric hole are
Stresses induced in an infinite plate with two
widely used in engineering structure. These
unequal circular holes by remote uniform
holes are usually cause the change of stresses,
loadings and arbitrary internal pressures in
displacements and decrease the load carrying
the holes in [Radi, 2011] and stresses induced
capacity. Stress and strain fields of eccentric
in an elastic and isotropic disk by an
ring/cylinders are not studied by many in the
eccentric press-fitted circular inclusion is
past. The main reason for this is that the
given in [Radi and Strozzi, 2009]. The
elastic problems with concentric centers are
inclusion is assumed to be of the same
formulated in polar coordinates system,
material as the annular disk and both
widely used. The Cartesian and polar
elements are in a plane stress or plane strain
coordinates systems have limitations of
state [Radi and Strozzi, 2009].Mathematical
tackling the problems having eccentricity and
formulations for elastic stress fields in bipolar
geometric irregularities in the structures. The
coordinate systems are seen in [Desai and
eccentric problems can better be treated in
Kant, 2015]. Green’s functions of Laplace
bipolar coordinates system. This is mainly
problems containing circular boundaries are
because the shape of the boundary surface of
solved by using analytical and semi-
certain bodies can be expressed most
analytical approaches in [Chen et. al., 2011].
conveniently in certain curvilinear coordinate
[Chou and Pagano, 1967]. As a result, the PROBLEM FORMULATION
boundary conditions can be expressed in There are several ways to define bipolar
simple forms. Some analytical work has been coordinates. In this document, the
done in the past in bi polar coordinate
coordinates will be called 𝛽 and 𝛼 with
system. Identification of stresses in a
following ranges [Arfken, 2011],
homogeneous isotropic disc weakened with
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: payald@nuv.ac.in 1154

Desai and Pandya
−∞ ≤ 𝛽 ≤ ∞ , 0 ≤ 𝛼 ≤ 2𝜋 (1) Where, a is a positive length and e is an

centre to centre distance between outer circle
The Relation between the Cartesian and
and inner circle. Inner(r) and outer radius(R)
bipolar systems are given by
of the circle can be defined by following
a sin β equations,
x=
cosh α − cos β (2) 𝑎 𝑎
𝑟= 𝑅= (5)
sinh𝛽 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ𝛽
a sinh α
y= The problem is formulated using an Airy
cosh α − cos β
stress function 𝜑 , which satisfied the
The problem of eccentric rings subjected to biharmonic equation (Radiet. Al. (2009),
uniform internal and external pressure is Chen (2011)),
considered and shown in Figure 1. 𝛼 and 𝛽 𝛿 4 hx 𝛿 4 hx 𝛿 4 hx 𝛿 2 hx 𝛿 2 hx
defined as bi-polar coordinates. We assume +2 2 + + 2 − 2 +
𝛿𝛽4 δα2 𝛿𝛽 δα4 δβ2 δα2
rings are made up of elastic material. The hx = 0 (6)
elastic ring has inner radius r, outer radius R 𝜑
and eccentricity e, also both member are Where, ℎ𝑥 = ,
𝑎2 (𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ𝛼−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝛽)
subjected to the uniform pressure. The inner
Following stress function is chosen for the
and outer contours of the eccentric ring are
present work,
defined by 𝛽1 and 𝛽2 , respectively.
𝜑 = 𝐴 𝑙𝑜𝑔𝛽 + 𝐵𝛽2 𝑙𝑜𝑔𝛽 + 𝐶𝛽2 + 𝐷

(7)
The boundary conditions are given as per the
below mentioned equation,
(𝜎)𝛽1 = −𝑃𝑖 , (𝜎)𝛽2 = −𝑃0 (8)
P i and P o are the uniformly internal and
external pressures.
Figure 1 Bipolar coordinates systems for DISCUSSION
problem of a disk/ring of radius R
Substitution of Airy’s stress function (7) in bi
containing an eccentric circular hole of
harmonic equation, arriving from the detailed
radius r in a disk.
formulation, stresses in β and αdirection are
−1
[(𝑅2 ) − (𝑟 2 ) − (𝑒 2 )] obtained. Boundary conditions (8) are used
𝛽1 = cos ℎ 𝛽2
2𝑒𝑟 to find unknown constants. Numerical results
[(𝑅2 ) − (𝑟 2 ) + (𝑒 2 )] are obtained for the e/R = 0.6 ratio.
= cos −1 ℎ (3)
2𝑒𝑅 Variations of the stresses in β coordinate is
The length a and the thickness of the seen in Fig. 2, 3, 4, for α values ranges
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
ligament 𝜆 are given by from 𝛼 = , , , For the case when a =
3 6 2
1 0.25 m, 𝛽= 0.246 m for inner circle and 𝛽= 1
𝑎= �(𝑅2 + 𝑟 2 − 𝑒 2 ) − 4𝑟 2 𝑅2
2𝑒 m for outer circle. Result are obtained for R =
𝜆 =𝑅−𝑟−𝑒 (4) 1.008 m, r = 0.213 m, 𝛽1 = 1.51 m,𝛽2 = 0.436
𝜋 𝜋 𝜋
m and 𝛼 = , , radian. Value of inner
3 6 2
1155
On Plane Strain Problems of Eccentric Elastic Rings in Bipolar Coordinate Systems
and outer pressure is 1 psi or 6894.75 𝑁/

𝑚2 .When, β = β 2 , σ β = po It is found from 90000
. 80000 Sigma beta
Fig. 2 that value of σ α increases and σ β 70000 Sigma alpha
Stress in N/m2
decreases with β. It is found from Fig. 3 that 60000
50000
value of σ α increases and σ β decreases with 40000
β. It is found from Fig. 4 that value of σ α 30000
20000
increases and σ β decreases with β.Where β
10000
is the natural logarithmic ratio of two foci. 0
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
Minimum value of stresses are obtained when
𝛼 = 𝜋/6. β coordinate in m
16000
Figure 4 Variation of stresses σ α and σ β
14000
Sigma beta through the thickness and the bipolar
12000
Sigma alpha coordinate β for 𝛼 = 𝜋/2
Stress in N/m2
10000
8000 CONCLUSION
6000 The analytical solution has been carried out
4000 to investigate stresses in an eccentric plane
2000 strain ringof bipolar coordinate system
subjected to uniform internal and external
0
pressure. Airy’s stress functionis used which
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
satisfies the biharmonic equations and

β coordinate in m
boundary conditions in bipolar coordinate
Figure 2 Variation of stresses σ α and σ β system. The results are new and can be used
for designing eccentric rings subjected to
through the thickness and the bipolar
uniform internal and external pressure.
coordinateβ for 𝛼 = 𝜋/3
4500
REFERENCES
4000 Arfken G B 2011 Mathematical methods for
Sigma beta
3500 Sigma alpha physicists 6th edition Academic Press
Stress in N/m2
3000 San Diego.

2500
Chen J T Shieh H C Lee Y T and Lee T W
2000
2011 Bi polar coordinates image
1500
method and the method of fundamental
1000
solutions for Green’s functions of
500
0
Laplace problems containing circular
boundaries Engineering Analysis With
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
Boundary Elements 35 236 – 243.

β coordinate in m
Chou P C Pagano N J 1967 Elasticity: tensor
Figure 3 Variation of stresses σ α and σ β dyadic and engineering approaches
through the thickness and the bipolar Dover publications inc.New York.
coordinate β for 𝛼 = 𝜋/6
1156
Desai and Pandya
Desai P and Kant T 2015 On Derivation of

Stress Field in Bi-polar Coordinates
Systems Advances in Structural
Engineering Springer India.
Dragan P Milan B P and Zoran D 2012
Mathematical modeling of a disc
weakened by an eccentric circular
holeJournal of Theoretical and applied
mechanics 50(4) 1097 – 1108 Warsaw
50th anniversary of JTAM.
Radi E 2011 Path independent integrals
around two circular holes in an infinite
plate under bi axial loading conditions
Science 49 893 – 914.
Radi E Strozzi A 2009 Jeffery solution for an
elastic disk containing a sliding
eccentric circular inclusion assembled
by interference fit International Journal
of Solid and Structures 46 4515-4526.
NOTATION
𝛼 Bipolar coordinates
𝛽 Bipolar coordinates
𝛽1 Inner contours
𝛽2 Outer contours
R Outer Radius
r Inner Radius
𝜆 Thickness of ligament
e Eccentricity
1157
ICCMS2016
COMPARATIVE STUDY OF OUTRIGGER STRUCTURAL SYSTEM

SENGHANI J. S. and MISTRY P. B.
Department of Civil Engineering, CSPIT, Charusat, Anand, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: This paper studies the use of Outrigger Structural System with Belt-Truss
for high-rise RC building subjected to earthquake load and wind load. Outrigger
Structural System ties the core and peripheral columns of building which will act as a
single cantilever member against lateral load. RC building models of 30-Storey were
analysed by applying earthquake or wind load using ETABS 2015. The models
consists of Shear wall as a core of building and Outrigger systems at different levels
of building. Comparison of various parameters such as lateral displacement and base
shear of RC frame with and without Outrigger structural system, using different
materials for outrigger, providing it at more than one level. Based on this comparison,
optimum position of outrigger will be found out for higher resistance and effective
resistance against lateral forces.
Keywords: Outrigger system; Belt truss; Shear wall; ETABS 2015.
INTRODUCTION Outrigger system performance is affected by

outrigger location through the height of a
Outrigger system function by tying together
building, the number of levels of outrigger
two structural system, typically a core system
provided, their plan location, and the
and perimeter system – to yield whole
presence of belt trusses to engage adjacent
building structural behaviour that are much
perimeter columns versus stand-alone mega
better than those of the component system.
columns, outrigger truss depth, and the
They do this by creating a positive interaction
primary structural materials used. Tying
between the two tied systems. The beneficial
together core and perimeter structural
effect is most pronounced where the
systems with outrigger creates unique design
responses of the component systems under
and construction problem to resolve.
lateral loads are most disparate. Outrigger
find excellent use, for example, in tall A core-and-outrigger system is frequently
building that utilize dual lateral system selected for the lateral load resisting system
including a perimeter frame. The very of tall or slender buildings where overturning
different cantilever type deformation of core moment is large compared to shear, and
structures and the portal type deformation of where overall building flexural deformations
frame structure under lateral load are harness are major contributors to lateral deflections
to best effect at a given level to maximize such as story drift. In such situations,
benefit of outrigger systems in these outriggers reduce building drift and core
structures. Outrigger also prove beneficial wind moments. Because of the increased
when engaging perimeter columns that would stiffness they provide, outrigger systems are
otherwise be gravity-only elements. very efficient and cost-effective solutions to
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail jugalsenghani@gmail.com 1158

Senghani and Mistry
reduce building accelerations, which  Response Reduction Factor, R=5

improves occupant comfort during high (SMRF)
winds and earthquake load.  Method of Seismic Analysis =
Response Spectrum Method
The structural arrangement for this system
 Wind load =
consists of a main concrete core connected to
as per IS 875 (part 3) – 1987
exterior columns by relatively stiff horizontal
(Reaffirmed 1997)
members such as a one or two-story deep
 City = Bhuj
walls commonly referred to as outriggers.
 Basic Wind Speed = 50 m/s
The core may be centrally located with
 Terrain category = 3
outriggers extending on both sides or it may
 Structure class = c
be located on one side of the building with
 Risk coefficient (k1 factor) = 1.08
outriggers extending to the building columns
 Topography (k3 factor) = 1
on one side. In addition to those columns
located at the ends of the outriggers, it is
LOAD COMBINATIONS
usual to also mobilize other peripheral
columns to assist in restraining the rotation of 1. 1.5 DL
2. 1.5 DL +1.5 LL
outriggers. This is achieved by trying the
3. 1.2 DL + 1.2 LL + 1.2 WL
exterior columns with a one- or two-story 4. 1.2 DL + 1.2 LL - 1.2 WL
deep wall commonly referred to as a “belt 5. 1.5 DL + 1.5 WL
wall,” around the building. 6. 1.5 DL - 1.5 WL
7. 0.9 DL + 1.5 WL
8. 0.9 DL - 1.5 WL
9. 1.2 DL + 1.2 LL ± 1.2 EL
10. 1.5 DL ± 1.5 EL
11. 0.9 DL ± 1.5 EL
STUDY MODELS
In this study there are several models
considered for the comparisons which is as
follows,
Type I Bare Frame Structure
Type II Core Shear Wall at Center
Type III Core Shear wall at Center + L Type
Shear Wall at Corner Of Building
Type IV Core Shear Wall at Center + RCC
Outrigger at 10th Storey
Type V Core Shear Wall at Center + RCC
Type VI Core Shear Wall at Center + RCC
Figure 1. Deflected shape of outrigger Outrigger at 30th Storey
structural system Type VII Core Shear Wall at Center + Steel
Type VIII Core Shear Wall at Center + Steel
LOAD CONSIDERATION Outrigger at 20th Storey
Type IX Core Shear Wall at Center + Steel
 Seismic Load = As Per IS 1893:2002 Outrigger at 30th Storey
 Importance Factor, I = 1.5
 Zone Factor, Z = 0.36
1159
Comparative Study of Outrigger Structural System
RESULTS load calculation. Results shown in below

Comparison has been made for different table is for load combination no.10, which
structural system which is listed above. gives worst effect.
Response spectrum method is used of seismic
Table 1. Comparison of Results
Top Storey
Base Shear
Study Models Displacement Weight (kN)
(kN)
(mm)
Bare Frame 370.2 12134.65 413091.69
SW at core 310.5 13545.78 418132.60
SW at core + corner 262.3 17652.09 438265.06
RCC Outrigger at 10th storey 277.1 14182.55 419819.50
Steel Outrigger at 10th storey 281.9 13795.11 418457.37
RCC Outrigger at 20th + Belt Truss at
262.2 14070.25 419819.50
10th storey
400
Bare Frame
SW at core
Top Storey Displacement(mm)
370.2
350
SW at core + corner
RCC Outrigger at 10th storey

300 310.5
297.1 297.9 RCC Outrigger at 20th storey
277.1 281.9 277.1
270.8 RCC Outrigger at 30th storey
250 262.3 262.2
Steel Outrigger at 10th storey
200 Steel Outrigger at 20th storey
Steel Outrigger at 30th storey

150
Study Models RCC Outrigger at 20th + Belt Truss at
10th storey
Figure 2. Comparative Chart for Top Storey Displacement
CONCLUSION locations and patterns). Outrigger structural

Above results shows the comparison of system is effective when outrigger beam is
storey displacement for Bare Frame, Frame placed at its optimum location. In 30 storey
with shear wall (different location of shear building optimum position of outrigger was
wall) and outrigger systems (different found at 20th storey. Structure using shear
1160
Senghani and Mistry
wall at centre and corner gives the less IS 875 (Part-3) – 1987CodeofPractice
displacement than the structure with forDesignLoads(OtherThanEarthquake)
outrigger at its optimum position, but its base forBuildingsandStructuresCode Of
shear is very higher than structure with Practice Bureau of Indian Standard New
Delhi.
outrigger system. Therefore outrigger
structural system is more economical and Taranath Bungale S 2005 Wind and
effective than the shear wall. Earthquake Resistant Building Taylors
and Frnci Group.
Comparison has been made between RCC &
Steel Outrigger systems for 10th, 20th, 30th
storey locations in building, conclusion can
be made that RCC Outrigger gives less
displacement than steel outrigger. Therefore
RCC outrigger is more effective than Steel
outrigger Material for outrigger like RCC and
Steel does not give major difference in base
shear.
From the comparison between structure with
outrigger and belt truss at same location and
at different locations, Conclusion can be
made that if outrigger and belt truss provide
at different location, it shows better
performance than if it is provide at same
location. And also structure with outrigger
and belt truss provide at different location
gives less displacement than structure with
shear wall at centre + corner.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors are grateful to reviewers on this
paper. The work described in this paper was
carried out in the Department of Civil
Engineering, Charusat University.
REFERENCES
Chopra A K 2000 Dynamics of Structures

Second Edition Prentice Hall.
IS 1893 (Part-1) – 2002Criteria for
Earthquake ResistantDesign Of
StructuresCode of Practice Bureau of
Indian Standard New Delhi.
1161
ICCMS2016
DESIGN OF ACETONE VAPOUR SENSOR USING

MICROCANTILEVER
KAMBLE C.* and PANSE M.S.
Electronics Engineering, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute Mumbai, India
Abstract: Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are carbon containing chemicals that
have a high vapor pressure at ambient temperature. Human breath contains low level
acetone vapour which can be used as a biomarker for early diagnosis of diabetes.
Semiconducting Metal Oxides show better selectivity for a broad range of VOCs.
Tungsten trioxide (WO 3 ) has a very high selectivity towards acetone vapour. Thin
microcantilever structure has high sensitivity. A combination of a sensitive
microcantilever with metal oxides of high selectivity can be used for gas vapour
detection. Piezoresistive readout method offers many advantages while measuring the
microcantilever displacement. In this paper piezoresistive microcantilever with
tungsten trioxide as sensing material for acetone detection is designed and optimized
using finite element method.
Keywords: Piezoresistive, microcantilever, simulation, acetone, WO 3 .
INTRODUCTION purposes. There are several materials and

methods used for the gas detection as per the
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS)
requirements.
have shown a tremendous growth in sensing
research. Conventional biological and By using microcantilever gas sensing, it is
chemical sensors need extensive packaging, possible to improve sensitivity and selectivity
complex electronic interfacing, and regular at lower temperatures. Fe(III) porphyrin
maintenance. They are bulky and expensive, coated on a piezoresistive SU-8
hence they need to be replaced by microcantilever shows rapid detection of CO
microcantilever based bio/chemical sensor. down to 2 ppm (Reddy et al., 2012). Human
The features of microcantilever based sensors breath containing abnormal concentration of
are high sensitivity, low cost, simple volatile organic compounds are reported to
fabrication procedure, low analyte correlate with injurious or unhealthy body
requirement, non- hazardous procedure with conditions e.g. trimethylamine for uremic
fewer steps, quick response & high patients, ammonia gas for renal disease and
throughput screening. Piezoresistive method acetone gas for diabetes etc. Acetone vapor is
is comparatively better option than other produced through fatty acid oxidation in
readout techniques. It facilitates large array, diabetes and ketoacidosis due to lack of
requires low power and works in all media insulin. For healthy humans the acetone
(Boison et al., 2011). concentration is less than 0.8ppm, while more
than 1.7 ppm could be detected in breath of
Gas sensors are used for the detection of
those who are diabetic patients. Therefore,
various explosives, toxic and flammable
gas sensors with sub-ppm acetone detection
gases, such type of gas sensors are mostly
need to be developed for non-invasive
used in the industrial and commercial
monitoring or diagnosis of diabetes.
purposes for pollution control and safety
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: chetanpkamble@gmail.com 1162

Kamble and Panse
In this paper simulation of microcantilever is THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS

done for the detection of acetone vapour at
Using Stoney’s equation, the microcantilever
sub-ppm level (for 0 to 10 ppm). Optimized
displacement can be derived as a function of
geometry of cantilever is done and ΔR/R with
the differential surface stress. The deflection,
piezoresistive cantilever’s deflection is
Δz of a cantilever in static mode is described,
calculated.
3(1−𝑣)𝐿2
ACETONE-WO 3 SENSING 𝛥𝑧 = (𝜎1 − 𝜎2 ) (1)
𝐸ℎ2
MECHANISM
Where,
WO 3 nano crystal is an n-type (σ 1 -σ 2 ) = Differential surface stress,
semiconductor, because there are oxygen υ = Poisson’s ratio,
vacancies in the surface of WO 3 nanocrystal, E = Young’s modulus of the cantilever
which act as electron donors and provide material,
electron to the conduction band of WO 3 . L = Length of the cantilever,
When WO 3 nanocrystals are exposed to air, T = Thickness of the cantilever beam.
the oxygen molecules are adsorbed on the
surface of WO 3 nanocrystals, and they For applied force on the free end of the
capture electrons from the conduction band microcantilever, the resulting resistance
of WO 3 to form O-. When the sensors are change is given by
exposed to the reducing acetone gas, it reacts
with the adsorbed O-, so the trapped electrons 𝛥𝑅 3𝜋𝑙 (1−𝑣)
=𝛽 (𝜎1 − 𝜎2 ) (2)
are released back to the conduction band. The 𝑅 𝑡
reaction of the acetone vapor with the
chemisorbed oxygen is as shown below Where,
[Khadayate et al., 2007]. π l =longitudinal piezoresistive coefficient
of silicon at the operating temperature
and at a given doping,
β = Correction factor between 0 and 1.
Wheatstone bridge network is used for

measurement of resistance change in terms of
At an optimum temperature this reaction deflection. Bridge network is made up of four
occurs between acetone and WO 3 layer,
resistances R1, R2, R3, & R4 and one of
which leads to the deflection of the
microcantilever and it causes change in the these resistors is replaced by a micro
resistance of the Piezoresistor which is nearer cantilever. The differential voltage from the
to the anchor side. Relative change in Wheatstone bridge is proportional to the
resistance of the Piezoresitive cantilever is change in the resistivity of the cantilever.
proportional to the acetone adsorbed on the
surface of WO 3 . MODELING AND SIMULATION
The simulation was run by using COMSOL
Multiphysics with detail parameters and
materials properties listed in Table I.
Figure 1. Geometry of piezoresistive

microcantilever gas sensor
1163
Design of Acetone Vapour Sensor using Microcantilever
Table 1. The Parameters Used in the Calculation

No. Parameters Value
1 Thickness of Microcantilever 0.5 [µm]
2 Length of Microcantilever 200 [µm]
3 Width of Microcantilever 50 [µm]
4 Thickness of Piezoresistor 0.5 [µm]
5 Silicon Young’s moduli 170 [GPa]
6 Silicon Poisson Ratio 0.28
7 Silicon nitride young’s moduli 250 [GPa]
8 Silicon nitride Poisson Ratio 0.23
9 p-Silicon Young’s moduli 160 [GPa]
10 p-Silicon Poisson Ratio 0.22
11 Density of the WO3 7160 [Kg/m3]
2
12 Exposed Area surface of WO3 1000 [µm ]
the piezoresistive layer is placed close to the
region of maximum stress. Fig. 3 shows that
when the length of the piezoresistor is varied
by keeping other parameter constant, more
deflection is obtained for minimum
piezoresistor length. The sensing area’s
length at the free end of the cantilever is
inversely proportional to the cantilever’s
deflection as shown in Fig. 4.
At the optimized value of the cantilever's
Figure 2. Distribution of Von Mises
geometry, if acetone concentration is
stress in the beam
increased the deflection in cantilever
Silicon material is used as a structural layer increases as shown in Fig. 5. Cantilever
surface stress sensitivity is obtained by
for the microcantilever. P-Silicon
measuring the change in resistivity when a
(polycrystalline, lightly doped) is used as a load is applied on the cantilever with respect
Piezoresistive material. Fixed constraint was to no load condition as shown in Fig. 6.
applied to one end of cantilever and other end
was free to move. WO 3 thin film was
deposited on the free end of cantilever. Si 3 N 4
material of thickness 0.1µm is used as an
insulating layer. Gravity was applied to the
whole system. Added mass is selected for
WO 3 domain. Weight of the added mass
changes as acetone concentration (in ppm)
changes. Calculation for the conversion of
the acetone molecules from ppm to mg/m3 is
Figure 3. Piezoresistor length versus
done (Subhashini et al., 2015). Weight of the
deflection of microcantilever
acetone molecules present in one breath of
normal human being was determined.

Microcantilever works effectively only when
1164
Kamble and Panse
devices show high sensitivity and selectivity

for detection of volatile organic compounds.
WO 3 thin film has shown great selectivity
towards acetone gas sensing. At the
optimized cantilever's geometry, the
displacement Δz in cantilever and ΔR/R of
the cantilever is found to be linear with the
amount of acetone molecules interacting with
the WO 3 layer. Proposed method provides a
novel approach to develop portable
Figure 4. Length of sensing layer versus noninvasive diabetes sensors with
deflection of microcantilever applications in medical field.
REFERENCES
Boisen A Dohn S Keller S S Schmid S and
Tenje M 2011 Cantilever like
micromechanical sensors Rep. Prog.
Phys. 74 0-30
Reddy CVB Mrunal A Khaderbad Gandhi S
Kandpal M Patil S Narasaiah C K
Rajulu G K Chary PCK Ravikanth M
Figure 5. Total displacement of cantilever Rao VR 2012 Piezoresistive SU-8
versus Acetone concentration Cantilever With Fe(III) Porphyrin
Coating for CO Sensing IEEE
Transactions on Na notechnology 11
701-706
Khadayate RS Sali J V and Patil P P 2007
Acetone vapor sensing properties of
screen printed WO thick films Talanta
72 1077– 1081
Subhashini S and Juliet A V 2015 Analytical
investigations involved in a
Microcantilever for Gas detection
Figure 6. Relative change in resistance of Indian Journal of Emerging Electronics
cantilever versus acetone molecule in Computer Communications 2 301-
interacted on sensing part 305
Wang L Kalyanasundaram K Stanacevic M
CONCLUSION and Gouma P 2010 Nanosensor Device
The optimized value of the cantilever's for Breath Acetone Detection Sensor
geometry and promising material can be used Letters 8 1–4
to detect low level concentrations of gas Liu X Cheng S Liu H Hu S Zhang D and
vapour. Microcantilever’s deflection depends Ning H 2012 A Survey on Gas Sensing
upon the piezoresistor’s length and length of Technology Sensors 12 9635-9665
sensing layer. The tiny dimensions of the
cantilever show extremely high sensitivity.
Metal oxide embedded Microcantilever
1165
ICCMS2016
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS USING AFFINE ARITHMETIC

CH RAVEENDRA BABU*, AJAY KUMAR N. and BALU A. S.
Department of Civil Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Karnataka, Surathkal, India.
Abstract: Interval-based uncertainty models have proven to be well-suited for

structural safety engineering with few data at hand. The practical use of interval
analysis is hindered by the dependency problem, which leads to an overestimation of
the uncertainty on the results. Affine arithmetic is a generalization of interval
arithmetic that accounts for the relation between variables. By circumventing the
dependency problem, it yields more accurate results. The method to solve affine
systems of linear equations, which allows for the application of affine arithmetic in
finite element analysis, has been studied. The proposed procedure is illustrated with
applications of an interval perturbation finite element method (IPFEM) and a
modified interval perturbation finite element method (MIPFEM) for the uncertain
acoustic field prediction with uncertain-but bounded parameters. The interval matrix
and vector in both methods are expanded by the first-order Taylor series. The interval
matrix inverse in IPFEM is approximated by the first-order Neumann series; however,
the interval matrix inverse in MIPFEM is approximated by a modified Neumann
expansion in which the higher order terms of Neumann series are considered.
Numerical results demonstrate the accuracy of MIPFEM to evaluate the intervals of
sound pressure response in acoustic field.
Keywords: Affine arithmetic; interval analysis; perturbation technique;
Neumann series; acoustic field.
INTRODUCTION dependency between variables throughout

calculations.
This paper shows how interval analysis can
be used in the static analysis of structures by INTERVAL ARITHMETIC
means of the finite element method. In this
context, an important drawback of interval In interval analysis, an uncertain variable is
variables is that throughout calculations, the represented by a closed, finite interval. An
dependency between different variables interval variable  x  is fully characterized by
cannot be tracked and accounted for. As a
its lower bound  x  and its upper bound  x  :
 
consequence, the results of an interval
 x  x |  x  x   x 
analysis tend to be overly conservative. This  
(1)
is the so-called dependency problem. In order
to circumvent the dependency problem, For instance, interval independent entries
affine arithmetic has been proposed as an  x1  , ,  xn  are defined as:
enhancement of interval arithmetic
[Degrauwe et al., 2010]. Affine arithmetic
offers a possibility to keep track of the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: asbalu@nitk.ac.in 1166

Babu et al.
  x1  
n
  A  I   A i  i   A e *  e  (9)
interval vector    (2) i 1
 xn 
n
 B 0   B i  i   B e *  e 
1
A (10)
i 1
 1 1 
     
x / y  x   ,  
if 0   y  (3) Inserting Eqn. 10 in Eqn. 8 results in
  y   y  

n
 A   I   A i  i   A e *  e 
1
 x    y    z    x    z    y    z  (4) i 1
2
 n 
Dependency problem exists in interval    A i  i   A e *  e   (11)
analysis. The function  i 1 
 y   f  x   (1  x) / x does not yield the  n 
3
   A i  i   A e *  e   
same result as  y   f  x   1  1/ x . The  i 1 
appearance of x twice in the fraction is not Comparing Eq. 11 and Eq. 10
accounted for in the computation. Hence B0  A0  I
affine arithmetic is developed to overcome
this problem. Bi   Ai , i  1, ,n
 x    y     X   X  : X   y  (12)
AFFINE ARITHMETIC 2
 n 
Consider a problem with n uncertain input B e *   e   A e *  e     A i  i   A e *   e  
 i 1 
variables 1  , ,  n  .Without loss of 3
(13)
 n

generality; assume that  i   1,1 for    A i  i   A e *   e   
 i 1 
i  1 n . Affine arithmetic then represents n
all variables during the analysis as Setting Z   | A i | this equation simplifies to
 x   x0  x1 1    xn  n   xe  e  (5) i 1
n
where x0 is a constant term, xi  i  is linear  B   I   A i  i  

i 1 (14)
dependency of x on input interval variables,
xe  e  is error term, and i  1 n ,
 A   Z  A   I  Z  A   *  
e e
2
e
1
e
 i   1,1 , x  1. SECOND ORDER EXPANSION

An affine matrix is a matrix with one or more METHOD
entries that are affine variables: Representing the higher order terms with R to
  a11   a1k   account for contributions of constant and
 
A   (6) linear order terms
 am1   amk  1 n n
Be  A e    | Ai A j  A j Ai |
 A0  A1 1    An  n   Ae  e 
2 i 1 j i 1
(7)
  Z  Ae   Z2
2
(15)
FIRST ORDER EXPANSION METHOD
  Z  Ae    I  Z  Ae 
3 1
This section presents a method to calculate

the solution of an affine system of linear ANALYSIS OF A PLANE TRUSS
equations based on the Neumann expansionof Figure. 1 shows a plane truss, adopted from
a matrix inverse: the work of Raoand Reddy (2006). The truss
 I  X
1
 I  X  X2  X3  (8) is composed of 11 bars, has a height of 5 m
and a width of 20 m.
1167
Structural Analysis using Affine Arithmetic
N  8834  0.55211   8845  2   1731 e  N

N  18325,36016 N . This is much
wider than the result of affine arithmetic.
Table 1. Vertical Displacements of
node 2(10-5mm)
Figure 1 A plane truss
Material and
Height of truss = 5m, Width of truss =20m, Only
load
materialuncertainty
No of bars = 11, Area of a bar = 0.01 m2, uncertainty
 E   190; 210109 N/m2 , and Interval
[20.98,18.98] [41.99,0.02]
arithmetic
 F   0; 40 kN  E    E0   E1 1  ,
Affine
 F    F0   F2  2  arithmetic [20.98,18.88] [41.96,2.10]
first order
In which
Affine
E0  200 109 N/m 2 , E1  10 109 N/m 2 , arithmetic [20.98,18.93] [41.96,2.05]
F0  20 kN, F2  20 kN second order
(K )   K 0   K1 1  ACOUSTIC FIELD

E1
here K1  K0 The interval analysis is perfectly appropriate
E0 for the numerical analysis of non-
 K  U    F  deterministic models with uncertain
parameters whose lower and upper bounds
Axial force are well-defined but information about the
N  ( EAL) / L probability density function is missing [Xia
 E   0.01   0.8u2  0.4v2  0.8u4  0.4v4  /10 and Yu, 2012].
Affine arithmetic allows accounting for this The interval perturbation analysis, proposed
dependency and leads to more accurate post by Qiuand Elishakoff (1998), is adopted for
narrow parameter intervals due to the
processing results.
unpredictable effect of neglecting the higher
Displacements of plane structure: order terms of Taylor series and Neumann
Horizontal displacements (mm) series. In order to remove the higher order
 u2   0.000  0.0000 1   0.0000  2   0.0000  e  terms more safely, the subinterval
 u4   0.004  0.0002 1   0.0004  2   0.0004  e  perturbation method for largeparameter
 u5   0.000  0.0000 1   0.0000  2   0.0000  e  intervals was discussed detailed in the
 u6   0.004  0.0002 1   0.0002  2   0.0002  e  literature. There are two inherent
disadvantages in interval
Vertical displacements (mm) perturbationmethods one is the conservatism
 v2   0.200  0.0010 1   0.200  2   0.011 e  of interval analysis due to thedependency
 v4   0.010  0.0000 1   0.010  2   0.001 e  phenomenon of parameters and the other is
 v5   0.169  0.008 1   0.169  2   0.009  e  the unpredictable effect of neglecting the
 v6   0.010  0.0000 1   0.010  2   0.001 e  higher order terms of Taylorseries and
Neumann series. To track the dependency
phenomenon between different parameters,
Inserting the expression for the Young’s affine arithmetic was introduced into the
modulus and the affine displacements from interval analysis. To avoid the deterioration
Table 1 in the Eq. for the axial force yields: in theaccuracy of Taylor expansion for the
interval matrix and vector suffering from
1168
Babu et al.
neglecting the higher order terms of Taylor CONCLUSION

series, a new interval perturbation method
based on the second-orderTaylor series were This paper proposes two interval analysis
proposed. In linear algebra, the exact methods, named as IPFEM and MIPFEM, for
inversion of the non-singular matrix can be the uncertain acoustic field prediction with
obtained by the Sherman–Morrison– uncertain-but-bounded parameters. The
Woodbury (SMW) formula. Based on the interval matrices and vectors in both methods
SMW formula, an approximate interval-value are expanded by the first-order Taylor series.
SMW formula was proposed by Impollonia The inversion of the non-singular interval
and Muscolino (2011) for the interval matrix stiffness matrix in IPFEM is obtained by the
inverse. Unfortunately, the approximate first-order Neumann series; however, the
interval-value SMW formula is confined to interval matrix inverse in MIPFEM is
the specific non-singular interval matrix calculated by the modified Neumann
whose deviation interval matrix can be expansion in which the higher order terms of
factored into the dyadic product of a column Neumann series are considered. In IPFEM
vector and its transposed vector.The purpose and MIPFEM, the interval operations are
of this paper is to determine the response implemented at an element-by-element level
bounds of the acoustic field with uncertain- in the finite element framework, thus only the
but-bounded parameters. Based on the parameters which are related to the
acoustic finite element analysis and the corresponding element are used, hence the
interval definition,the interval dynamic calculation cost is reduced.
equilibrium equation for the uncertain
acoustic field prediction is established. To REFERENCES
solve the interval dynamic equilibrium Degrauwe D Lombaert G and De Roeck G
equation, two interval analysis methods are 2010 Improving interval analysis in
presented.The first one is IPFEM in which finite element calculations by means of
the interval matrix and vector are expanded affine arithmetic Computers and
by the first-order Taylor series and the Structures 88 247–254.
inversion of the non-singular interval matrix Impollonia N andMuscolino G 2011 Interval
is approximated by the first-orderNeumann analysis of structures with uncertain-
series. To overcome the shortcomings of butbounded axial stiffness. Computer
IPFEM, the other method called MIPFEM is Methods in Applied Mechanics and
proposed. Based on the Neumann expansion Engineering 220 1945–1962
and the work of Impollonia and Muscolino Qiu ZP and ElishakoffI 1998 Anti-
(2011) a modified Neumann expansion is optimization of structures with large
presented in MIPFEM to calculate the uncertain but non-random parameters
inversion of the non-singular interval matrix via interval analysis Computer Methods
whose deviation interval matrix cannot be in Applied Mechanics and Engineering,
factored into the dyadic product of a column 152361–372
vector and its transposed vector. In both Rao M V and Reddy R 2006 Fuzzy finite
methods, the lower and upper bounds of element analysis of structures with
sound pressure are evaluated at an element- uncertainty in load and material
by-element level in the finite element properties Journal of Structural
framework. Numerical results on a 2D Engineering 33 129–137
acoustic tube, the 2D acoustic cavity of a car Xia B and Yu D 2012 Interval analysis of
and a 3D acoustic cavity with uncertain-but- acoustic field with uncertain-but-
bounded parameters verify that the accuracy bounded parameters. Computers and
of MIPFEM is much higher than that of Structures 112 235–244
IPFEM.
1169
ICCMS2016
BUCKLING ANALYSIS OF FUNCTIONALLY GRADED PLATES USING

INVERSE HYPERBOLIC SHEAR DEFORMATION THEORY
KULKARNI K.*, SINGH B. N. and MAITI D. K.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur, India.
Abstract: Functionally graded materials have gained attention of many researchers

because of its applicability to the various challenging engineering fields. Functionally
graded plates are subjected to various loads which leads to the deformation of these
structures. The in-plane load is one of the prime importance. These loads tend to
buckle the plate and finding the behaviour of the structure under the action of such
loads is important for the design of functionally graded panels. The present work
focuses on the finding buckling load of the functionally graded plates using a recently
developed inverse hyperbolic shear deformation theory (IHSDT). Inverse hyperbolic
shear deformation theory which considers inverse sine hyperbolic shear strain
function has proven its applicability for the laminated composite and sandwich plates.
The governing equations are obtained by applying Hamilton’s principle and have been
solved analytically using Navier-type solution. The generated results are validated
with the results available in the literature and it is observed that IHSDT provides
fairly accurate results for functionally graded plates.
Keywords: Functionally graded materials; Analytical solution; Inverse
hyperbolic shear deformation theory; Buckling analysis.
INTRODUCTION variation of the material properties is may be

according to the either exponential law or the
Various emerging engineering fields demand
power law. Such functionally graded plates
more advanced materials to fulfil their
(FGPs), when under the action of external
requirement of efficient performance.
loads exhibit deformation in the structure.
Laminated composites and sandwich plates
The nature of response of the plate depends
can fulfil these requirements, but these
upon the type of loading acting on it. The in-
layered structures exhibit inter-laminar
plane loads is one kind of load acting on the
failure due to residual stresses. These
plate. When in-plane loads are acting on a
materials fail at the interfaces due to sudden
plate, the plate buckles under certain
change in the material properties across the
magnitude of load, the corresponding value
interface. To eliminate this limitation of
of external load is known as critical buckling
layered structures, a new class of material is
load. Determination of this critical buckling
developed and used successfully by the
load is very important for the design of
science community, known as functionally
functionally graded plates.
graded materials (FGMs). In these materials
the volume fraction of the two constituent The most accurate analysis of the buckling
phases vary continuously across the thickness problem is finding the elasticity solution; but,
of the plate. The continuous variation of the due to complex nature of material variation
material properties ensures the continuous across the thickness, the elasticity solution
variation in the strength of the plate. This for buckling problems of FGPs has not been
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:kam4aero@gmail.com 1170

Kulkarni et al.
reported in the literature. Hence, to analyse obtained and compared with the results
such kinds of structures, shear deformation available in the literature. The comparison
theories play an important role. According to shows the accuracy of IHSDT when applied
the kinematic assumption made to predict the to the buckling problems of FGPs. Finally,
deformations of the plate, the accuracy of the effect of aspect ratio, span-to-thickness ratio
shear deformation theory vary. Classical plate and type of loading is studied.
theory (CPT), first order shear deformation
theory (FSDT), third order shear deformation MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION
theory by Reddy (TSDT) and several other
modified two-dimensional polynomial and Typical functionally graded plate with
non-polynomial theories have been employed dimensions axbxh has been considered. The
for the various analyses of the FGPs. material properties of the plate vary across
Polynomial shear deformation theories the thickness either according to the
(PSDT) consider polynomial shear strain exponential law (Eq. 1) or by the power law
function whereas, non-polynomial shear (Eq. 2).
deformation theories (NPSDT) consider non-
Pe = P0 e ( 2 ) (1)
N z+ 1
polynomial shear strain functions. The non-
polynomial functions may trigonometric, Where, P e represents effective material
logarithmic, exponential, hyperbolicor properties at any section across thickness, P 0
inverse hyperbolic functions. These above represents the property at bottom surface.
mentioned shear deformation theories are
Pe = Pm + ( Pc − Pm )( z h + 1 2 ) (2)
N
essentially two-dimensional which assume
plane stress condition and have constant
value of transverse deflection across the Where, P m and P c represents the properties
thickness. Modified polynomialshear of metal and ceramic respectively. N is an
deformation theories are employed by Thai exponent which controls the distribution of
and Choi (2013), Sobhy (2013), Bateni et al. the variation across the thickness.
(2013), and Swaminathan and Naveenkumar
Displacement field. Inverse sine hyperbolic
(2014) whereas, non-polynomial shear
shear deformation theory [Grover et al.,
deformation theories have been employed by
2013] which satisfies the condition of zero
Zenkour and Sobhy(2010), Sobhy (2013),
transverse shear strains at the top and bottom
Nguyen (2014) and Kulkarni et al. (2015) to
of the plate has been given in the eq. (3).
find out the buckling response of FGPs either
by analytically or by numerical method. Governing Equations. Hamilton’s principle
In the present work, a recently developed (Eq. 4), which considered the variation of
inverse hyperbolic shear deformation theory strain energy stored in the plate (Eq. 5) and
(IHSDT) developed by Grover et al. (2013) variation of work done due to external loads
has been employed for the modelling of (Eq. 6), has been employed.
∂w
FGPs. IHSDT has proven its applicability for u ( x, y, z )= u0 ( x, y ) − z 0 + f ( z )θ x
laminated composites and sandwich ∂x
structures and extending it for FGMs is the ∂w
objective of the present study. The plates are v( x, y, z )= v0 ( x, y ) − z 0 + f ( z )θ y (3)
∂y
considered under the action of in-plane loads.
Hamilton’s principle is employed to obtain w( x, y, z ) = w0 ( x, y )
the governing equations. The obtained Where, f(z)=g(z)+Ωz such that g(z)=sinh-
equations are then solved analytically by 1
(rz/h) and Ω=-2r/[h(r2+4)0.5], r=3.
using Navier-type solution. Analytical
solution is free from any numerical errors and ∫ (δ U + δ W )dt =
0 (4)
ensures the accurate solution of the governing T
equations. The critical buckling load is

1171
Buckling Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates using Inverse Hyperbolic Shear Eformation Theory
Where, U and W are the strain energy stored The K matrix is the matrix of stiffness
in the system and work done due to external coefficients and G is the matrix containing
unit in-plane load. The vector Δ contains five
forces.
field variables. The above eigenvalue
σ xxδε xx + σ xxδε xx  problem is solved for the parameter λ to
 
h /2
δ U =∫ ∫  +τ xyδγ xy + τ yzδγ yz  dzdxdy (5) obtain the critical buckling load.
Φ − h /2  
 +τ xzδγ xz  RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
δ V = ∫ N δ w dxdy (6) Two phases of FGP are Aluminum (Al) and

Φ
Alumina (Al 2 O 3 ) and the material properties
   are given as; E m =70GPa, E c =380GPa and the
N =N xx w0, xx + 2 N xy w0, xy + N yy w0, yy Poisson’s ratio is 0.3 for both the materials.
  The non-dimensional parameter used for
N xx and N yy are the external in-plane, normal N a2
critical buckling load is; N cr = cr 3
loads in X and Y directions respectively Em h

whereas N xy is the external in-plane shear .Uniaxial and biaxial buckling analysis is
load. The governing differential equations in carried out for different power law indices
terms of resultant forces and moments and in and for various aspect and span to thickness
terms of generalized displacements have been ratios. Non-dimensional critical buckling
obtained by simple mathematical operations. loads obtained in the present analysis are
compared with those with obtained using
Solution Technique: The solution of the
modified two-dimensional theories by Thai
governing differential equations is obtained
and Choi (2013), Nguyen (2014) and
by adopting Navier-type analytical solution
Kulkarni et al. (2015). The results are shown
technique. The FGP is assumed simply
in Table (1). The comparison shows that the
supported at all four edges (SSSS). Field
present theory generates results which are in
variables are,
∞ ∞ good agreement with these theories. Effect of
{u0 ( x, y );θ x ( x, y )} = ∑∑ {U mn ; X mn
} cos(β x) sin(β
x y y) aspect ratio, span-to-thickness ratio have also
=
m 1=
n 1
∞ ∞ been studied.
{v ( x, y);θ
0 y ( x, y )} = ∑∑ {V mn ; Y mn } sin( β x x) cos( β y y )
=
m 1=
n 1
∞ ∞ CONCLUSIONS
w0 ( x, y ) = ∑∑ W mn sin( β x x) sin( β y y )
=
m 1=
n 1 Buckling analysis of various functionally
Where, mπ nπ graded plates using inverse hyperbolic shear
= βx = and β y
a b deformation theory has been done. Inverse

A unit load is applied in X-direction ( N xx ) sine hyperbolic theory has five variables as
  
and N yy α=
= N xx ; N xy 0 . Where α is the that of FSDT, but produces results much
better than FSDT. Hence IHSDT is very
ratio of in-plane load in Y-direction to the in-
accurate and computationally efficient. It
plane load in X-direction such that when α=0
satisfies the condition of zero transverse
it’s a case of uniaxial compression, α=1 for
shear strains at the top and bottom surfaces
equal biaxial compression and α>1 for
and does not require any shear correction
unequal biaxial compression. A final
factor. Analytical solution ensures the
equation in terms of buckling load factor λ
accurate solution for the governing
can be obtained given in Eq. (7).
differential equations. The exponent N plays
  K  − λ [G ] {∆} =0 (7) very important role in the analysis of
  functionally graded plates.
1172
Kulkarni et al.
Table 1: Validation for the non-dimensional critical buckling load for functionally graded
plate (b/a=1, Uniaxial in-plane load)
Power Index (N)
a/h Theory
0 0.5 1 2 5 10
5 Thai and Choi (2013) 16.0211 10.6254 8.2245 6.3432 5.0531 4.4807
Nguyen (2014) 16.1003 10.667 8.2597 6.3631 5.0459 4.4981
Kulkarni et al. (2015) 16.0837 10.6624 8.2524 6.3578 5.0432 4.4919
Present 16.1003 10.6722 8.2597 6.3631 5.0459 4.4974
10 Thai and Choi (2013) 18.5785 12.1229 9.3391 7.2631 6.0353 5.4528
Nguyen (2014) 18.603 12.1317 9.3496 7.2687 6.0316 5.4587
Kulkarni et al. (2015) 18.5977 12.134 9.3473 7.2671 6.0307 5.456
Present 18.603 12.137 9.3496 7.2687 6.0316 5.4579
20 Thai and Choi (2013) 19.3528 12.5668 9.6675 7.5371 6.3448 5.7668
Nguyen (2014) 19.3593 12.5652 9.6702 7.5386 6.3437 5.7689
Kulkarni et al. (2015) 19.3579 12.5697 9.6696 7.5382 6.3434 5.7676
Present 19.3593 12.5705 9.6702 7.5386 6.3436 5.7681
resting on elastic foundations under

REFERENCES various boundary conditions Composite
Bateni M Kiani YEslami M R 2013 A
comprehensive study onstability of Swaminathan K Naveenkumar D T 2014
FGM plates International Journal of Higher order refined computational
Mechanical Sciences 75 134–144. models for the stability analysis of FGM
plates Analytical solutions European
Grover N Maiti D K Singh B N 2013 New
Journal of Mechanics A/Solids 47
non-polynomial shear–deformation
349e361.
theories for the structural behavior of
laminated-composite and sandwich Thai H T Choi D H 2013 A simple first-order
plates AIAA J 95 667–675. shear deformation theory for the
bending and free vibration analysis of
Kulkarni K Singh B N Maiti D K 2015
functionally graded plates Composite
Analytical solution for bending and
buckling analysis of functionally graded
plates using inverse trigonometric shear Zenkour A M Sobhy M 2010 Thermal
deformation theory Composite buckling of various types of FGM
Structures 134 147-157. sandwich plates Composite Structures
93 93–102.
Nguyen T A 2014 higher order hyperbolic
shear deformation plate model for
analysis of functionally graded materials
Int J. Mech Materials Des DOI
10.1007/s10999-014-9260-3.
Sobhy M 2013 Buckling and free vibration of
exponentially graded sandwich plates
1173
ICCMS2016
EVALUATION OF COUPLED PARTIAL MODELS USING GRAPH

THEORY AND SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
NAIK A.* and BALU A. S.
Department of Civil Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Karnataka, Surathkal, India.
Abstract: Long-term monitoring system has become very important tool which
enables to obtain basic information about actual structural behaviour in time about
stress and deformation level. This process of analysis and design in structural
engineering requires the consideration of different partial models of loading, structural
material, structural elements and analysis type. All of these, need an adequate
modelling as individuals and as coupled sets to catch a behaviour of interest. This
paper proposes an innovative algorithm to facilitate quantitative measures to evaluate
coupled partial models in structural engineering. Adapting graph theory and utilising
variance based sensitivity analysis enable evaluation and drawing conclusions
regarding the combinations of partial models. The algorithm is applied in bridge
engineering, analysing bridge behaviour considering dynamic loading, creep and
shrinkage material models and temperature influence which significantly affect
structural behaviour considering geometric nonlinear effects.
Keywords: Partial model; Model choice; Graph theory; Sensitivity analysis.
INTRODUCTION In order to identify which classes of partial

models are relevant for a specific goal
Structural engineering uses different partial quantity, first a discrete parameter is used to
models of materials, structural elements, activate and deactivate a class of PM Mi.
loading, to represent real structures. These Second, different PMs within a class Mi are
models used in structural engineering to introduced in the sensitivity analyses as
design for serviceability and ultimate limit discrete parameter sets. The sensitivity of the
state, are composed of several partial models result regarding different models is used as a
(PM). A partial model describes a component measure, to identify, which model choice is
of the global model, e.g. loading, material, or of importance for a specific goal quantity.
the level of abstraction. For one class of PMs, [Babuska and Oden (2004)].
the material behaviour of concrete, several
possibilities of modelling are available. If the The quality of the coupled models will be
material model is relevant to the structural evaluated using concepts of graph theory.
problem, the structural engineer needs to The interest of this paper is towards the
decide, whether a linear or a non-linear application of this algorithm in the analysis
material model should be used and whether of an existing highway bridge. As heavier
effects of creep, shrinkage or cracking have vehicles travel nowadays on road networks,
to be considered. The intention of this project existing highway bridges are checked for
is, to combine assessments of partial models their adequacy to handle such new loading
to analyse and in particular to design global conditions. Projects for upgrading and
models of high quality. strengthening bridges demand reasonable

Naik and Balu
measures to draw recommendations. Further, SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

a global model of the bridge is needed to
compute these reasonable measures. The The influence of a class of a partial model Mi
quality of the prognosis of the global model on the global response can be identified using
is of practical relevance to the reliability of sensitivity indices. According to [Saltelli et
the response measures and is of significance al. 2008] sensitivity analysis it examines how
in the decision making process. This is where output uncertainty of a model is apportioned
the proposed algorithm is of importance. The to the model's input uncertainties. The
project is organized as the first part describes estimated first order 𝑆𝑖𝑀 and total effect
the proposed algorithm, in general, based on 𝑆𝑖𝑀𝑇 indices indicate the influence of a class
graph theory and sensitivity analysis. The of a partial model on the uncertainty of the
second part illustrates the application of the global behavior. The sensitivity analysis
proposed algorithm in structural engineering, detects and quantifies the interrelation
an existing highway bridge. between the partial model classes S M  S MT .
ASSESSMENT METHOD
The proposed assessment method addresses
global models, consisting of several coupled
partial models. The assessment approach
used extends the concepts of sensitivity
analysis and graph theory. The individual
quality of the PMs and their influence on the
global response are taken into account during
the assessment. In general, the quality of the
coupling of the PMs also affects the global
quality. As the method is based on graph
theory, a future extension to consider data
coupling quality is possible. Figure.1. Example of a graph with seven
partial models
GRAPH THEORY
S
Each M i are described using an uncorrelated,
A graph is used to map the combinations of
partial models for an engineering problem uniformly distributed, discrete random
[Kaveh, 2006]. By definition, a graph is a parameter as
collection of finite sets of vertices V and X iM 0,1 , with i  1,..., nM (2)
edges E, i.e. G  V , E  . Thus, the vertices of The values of Xi are either 0 or 1, where 0
a graph correspond to the partial models and indicates a deactivated model class and 1
the edges correspond to the coupling of the indicates an activated model class. The model
partial models as shown in Figure 1. The path output of each of these combinations is
is indicated by the shaded vertices and their retrieved and the terms
solid line edges in Figure 1. The global, V  E Y / X i   ,V  E Y / X i   and V Y  can
complex and coupled model, which is a
collection of partial models and their be calculated directly without the need for the
couplings is represented by a so called path full sensitivity scheme.
through the graph π.
QUALITY OF COUPLED PARTIAL
MODELS
  v0 , e1 ,..., vi 1 , ei , vi ,..., ep , v p  (1)
The weighting factor of the vertex  bij  is
denoted as the quality of the partial model
1175
Evaluation of Coupled Partial Models using Graph Theory and Sensitivity Analysis
PM ij within the global coupled model. This Shrinkage models simulate the time-
dependent shortening of concrete. All
factor is computed as follows
shrinkage models used in this paper assume a
STiMC .MQPM i , j constant shrinkage strain along the cross
bij  nM , with PMi , j  M i (3)
section, which is in general calculated as
 STi
MC
i 1
 c,sh   c,sh   t , td  (6)
nM
The sum of the total effect indices Si 1
MC
Ti
may be larger than one for a non-additive

global model, and this may affect the
computation of the quality of the global
nM
model, a normalizing constant of S
i 1
MC
Ti is
used in the calculation of bij. Accordingly, the

global model quality MQGM can be
determined as follows:
nM STiMC .MQPM i , j
MQGM   nM
, with PMi , j  M i (4)
i 1
S
i 1
MC
Ti
MQGM is a quantitative measure for the

quality of the global model, which has a
value of between 0 and 1, with 1 representing Figure.2.Flow chart of numerical analysis
the best quality.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF BRIDGE
NUMERICAL EXAMPLE AND HEAVY VEHICLE MODEL
As mentioned in the introduction, due to the
The system of the multi-span continuous
travelling of heavier vehicles on road
bridge and the two degree of freedom vehicle
networks nowadays, the analysis of existing
model are used in the analysis. The following
highway bridges is modelled as in Figure 2.
is an analysis sample of the dynamic
Thus, the influence of the long-term
displacement of the bridge when the bridge-
behaviour of concrete on the dynamic and
vehicle interaction is considered with long-
static responses of a bridge is investigated.
term deflections and road unevenness. The
Creep and shrinkage are considered for the
numerical estimates for the Dynamic
long-term behaviour of the material, models
Incremental factor [Kawatani et al. 1993]
of bridge vehicle interaction simulate the
defined as ratio of maximum dynamic
heavy vehicles and geometric non-linearity is
response to static one within a cycle of
taken into account to study the effects of load
dynamic response
increase on bridge column.
Creep and shrinkage in this study are The combination of these excitations
considered as material partial models. The constitutes the dynamic response and
creep models describe the time-dependent analysed for four schemes like a perfect
increase of the creep compliance over time. smooth road, long term deflection only, road
In general, Cc ,cr is defined for constant unevenness, long term deflection and road
unevenness as in Figure 3.
stresses only. The creep strain  c ,cr becomes
GL2000 [Gardner and Lockman, 2001] creep
 c,cr   cCc,cr  t , t0  (5) model is used to find deflection at a vehicle
1176
Naik and Balu
speed of 90 kmph and the frequency response of model choice on the global response. It
is examined. first identifies the influence of the partial
models on a specific response and detects
interactions that may exist between the partial
models classes. And second it estimates a
quantified measure for the dependency of the
response quality on the descriptions of the
partial model.
REFERENCES
ACI 209 1992 Prediction of creep, shrinkage,
Figure 3. First mid span displacement for and temperature effects in concrete
diff. schemes structures American Concrete Institute.
The conclusion that could be drawn after AIAA (AIAA-G-077-1998) Guide for the
investigating the amplitude spectra of the verification and validation of
dynamic response is that the initial state of computational fluid dynamics
the bridge when the vehicle traverses a bridge simulations Tech representations
is of importance, not only because of road American Institute of Aeronautics and
unevenness but also due to long term Astronautics.
deflection. Now the sensitivity indices for Babuska I and Oden J 2004 Verification and
𝑀𝐶
DIF are calculated with 𝑆𝑇𝑖 = 0.14. Thus, the validation in computational engineering
quality of the global model depends on the and science: basic concepts.
quality of the chosen loading and creep Computational Methods in Applied
models and graphed as in Figure 4. Mechanics and Engineering 193 4057–
4066.
Gardner N and Lockman M 2001 Design
provisions for drying shrinkage and
creep of normal strength concrete ACI
Material Journal 98159–167.
Kaveh A 2006 Optimal Structural
AnalysisJohn Wiley Chichester.
Kawatani M Nishiyama S and Yamada Y
1993 Dynamic response analysis of
highway girder bridges under moving
vehicles Technical Representation 2137
Osaka University.
SaltelliARatto M Andres T Campolongo F
Fig. 4. Graph of significant model classes Cariboni J Gatelli D Saisana M and
Tarantola S 2008 Global Sensitivity
CONCLUSION Analysis-The primer John Wiley
Chichester.
The dynamic effects due to the bridge-vehicle
interaction are influenced by the creep
deformations. The two partial models with
their plausible descriptions of the dynamic
loading and material are interrelated. The
assessment procedure extends the use of
sensitivity analysis to quantify the influence
1177
ICCMS2016
DAMAGE DETECTION OF STRUCTURES USING WAVELET

ANALYSIS
SRINIVAS P.* and BALU A. S.
Department of Civil Engineering, National Institute of Technology, Karnataka, Surathkal, Mangalore
India.
Abstract: This paper presents crack detection in framed structures using wavelet
analysis. The main purpose of this paper is to analyse the structure using two forms of
wavelet transforms viz., continuous wavelet transform (CWT), discrete wavelet
transform (DWT) and their types. This paper includes the brief description of the
types of wavelets and well demonstrated .The procedure is carried out by analysing
the response signal using software such as Mat Lab, SAP2000, ANSYS and
demonstrated by numerical examples. The results show the effectiveness of method of
wavelet transforms compared to other rigorous methods if a suitable wavelet is
selected.
Keywords: Wavelet Analysis; Wavelet transforms; Crack detection; Damage
detection; Continuous wavelet transform; Discrete wavelet
transform.
INTRODUCTION Fourier analysis miss. This rather new

method has been applied to various fields
Over the last few decades, the damage including civil, mechanical and aerospace
identification methods of civil and engineering, especially for damage detection
mechanical structures have been drawing and structural health monitoring (SHM).
much interest from various fields. Damage
detection is the first level of the more general The wavelet transform, like the STFT, is a
problem of damage identification [Kim and two-parameter transform. For time signals,
Melhem,2003]. The other levels of damage the two domains of the wavelet transform are
detection are classification, location, failure time t and scale a. The scale a can be
prediction and assessment of remaining approximately related to the frequency ω. For
service life. There are a large number of non- the applications we are interested in, the
destructive methods for crack detection that signals to be analysed are function of space
are based on the changes in the dynamic and the two parameters of the wavelet
properties of the structure such as transform are space and scale [Gurley and
frequencies, mode shapes caused by the Kareem, 1999].
damage. This paper presents a new method The objective of this paper is to show the
for structural damage detection and structural ability of the wavelet transform to detect
health monitoring. cracks by applying the technique to a number
Wavelet analysis, a relatively new of structural members and simple structures
mathematical and signal processing tool, is under different loading conditions. The
one of such methods that have been studied damage identification is implemented by
recently. It is a time–frequency analysis that means of numerical simulations.
provides more detailed information about
non-stationary signals which traditional

Srinivas and Balu
WAVELET TRANSFORMS frequencies. This property helps to overcome

the limitation of Short Time Fourier
The detection of damage is based directly on Transforms (STFT) in which the time–
the examination of the response signals. Most frequency resolution is fixed.
of these methods are based on the use of the
Fourier transform, which breaks down a The main concept of DWT is the same as that
signal into different frequencies. The Fourier of CWT [Liew and Wang, 1998]. While the
analysis transforms the signal from a time- CWT requires much calculation eff ort to find
based or space-based domain to a frequency- the coefficients at every single value of the
based one. But in transforming to the scale parameter, DWT adopts dyadic scales
frequency domain, the time or space and translations (i.e. scales and translations
information is lost and it is impossible to based on powers of two) in order to reduce
determine when or where a particular event the amount of computation, which results in
took place. This problem is solved by the better efficiency of calculation. Filters of
method known as the short-time Fourier different cut-off frequencies are used for the
transforms (STFT) [Gurley and Kareem, analysis of the signal at diff erent scales. The
1999]. This method analyses only a small signal is passed through a series of high-pass
section of the signal at a time. The STFT filters to analyse the high frequencies, and
maps a signal into a 2-D function of time or through a series of low-pass filters to analyse
space and frequency. The disadvantage is that the low frequencies.
the information about time or space and D j   a j ,k  j , k  t  (3)
frequency can be obtained with a limited kZ
precision that is determined by the size of the The approximation at level J is defined as
window. Aj   D j (4)
jJ
A more flexible method with a variable size
window is required to determine with greater The main difference between CWT and DWT
precision any particular features of a signal in is only a wavelet function is used in CWT but
time or space as a function of frequency. The whereas in DWT, a scaling function is used,
wavelet transform is precisely a new way to in addition to the wavelet function. These are
analyse signals that overcomes the problems related to low-pass and high-pass filters,
of STFT. Wavelets are localized waves, in respectively. The scaling function ф (t) must
other words signals with a zero average value satisfy the following three conditions:
that drop to zero after a few oscillations. i. It integrates to one:

Wavelet transforms are of two forms viz.,
continuous wavelet transform and discrete
   t  dt  1

wavelet transform [Ovanesova and Suarez, ii. It has unit energy

2004].The CWT is defined as
  t 
2
dt  1
1 t q
W  p, q    f  t  .* 

dt (1)
iii. The set consisting of ф (t)and its
p  p 
integer translates is orthogonal
Where p and q are scale and translation
parameters, respectively and * is the  t  , t  n     n 
complex conjugate of  . The basis function
Only orthogonal wavelets have their scaling
 is represented as functions. This DWT can be very useful for
2 t  k 
j
 j ,k  t   2 2 j
(2) on-line health monitoring of structures, since
it can efficiently detect the time of a
The time resolution becomes arbitrarily good frequency change caused by stiff ness
at high frequencies, while the frequency degradation.
resolution becomes arbitrarily good at low
1179
Damage Detection of Structures using Wavelet Analysis
Many types of wavelets vary based on their WAVELET METHODOLOGY

associated properties. Some of the most
relevant properties are regularity, support, The use of wavelets for structural
number of vanishing moments and symmetry. identification purposes is based on the fact
1. Regularity is defined as follows: if y is an that the presence of cracks introduces small
integer and a function is y-time continuously discontinuities in the structural response at
differentiable at x0, then the regularity is y. the damaged sites (Liew and Wang,
1998).Often these discontinuities cannot be
2. The support of a function is the smallest observed from the examination of the
space-set (or time-set) outside of which structural response, but they are detectable
function is identically zero. from the distribution of the wavelet
coefficients obtained by the CWT or the
3. The number of vanishing moments of
detail signals form the DWT.
wavelets determines the order of the
1.The signal associated with the static or
polynomial that can be approximated and is
dynamic structural response, usually the
useful for compression purposes
transverse displacements is calculate
4. The wavelet symmetry relates to the
symmetry of the filters and helps to avoid de- 2.Compute continuous wavelet coefficients or
phasing in image processing. the detail signals associated with the discrete
transform using measured signal.
CRACK DETECTION PROCEDURE 3.Plot and examine the wavelet coefficients
To analyse the response signals, the optimal for the CWT or the detail signals in the case
wavelet was chosen according to the of the DWT.
following criteria:
NUMERICAL EXAMPLE
1. Elimination of those that do not allow
carrying out a FWT. They are the Gaussian, An example of one-story, one-bay plane
Mexican Hat, Morlet, Shannon and Meyer frame subjected to a single static load at
wavelets. different positions is chosen as a case of
study. The frame dimensions are: column
2. The orthogonal and bi-orthogonal wavelets
height Lcolumn = 1.75 m, beam’s length Lbeam
remain after the first elimination. Both permit
= 2.5 m, and the crack depth is d = 1.25 ×
to apply the FWT using filter banks.
10-3m. The cross-sectional area and the
3. The requirement of satisfying symmetry moment of inertia of all the members are A =
and exact reconstruction of the analysed 0.030625 m2 and I = 7.8 × 10-5 m4. The crack
signal limits the choice to the Haar wavelet is introduced at various locations into the
and bi-orthogonal wavelets. column and beam.
4. Regularity is the last property that singles In the example, the effect of changes in the
out the wavelet to perform the analyses. The geometry on the wavelet performance is
irregularity of the Haar wavelet leaves the bi- examined. To obtain the structural response
orthogonal wavelets as the choice for the numerically, beam element and each element
analyses. of the frame is subdivided using Ansys and
5. The regularity of the different bi- Staad pro (Quila et al., 2014). Then applying
orthogonal wavelets increase with the the CWT and DWT the response signal is
wavelet order N. The wavelet available with measured and crack detection is to be done.
the highest Nr , Nd is selected as the most
suitable. CONCLUSION
Wavelet-based methods can be applied not
only to structural members but also to full
structures. The damage can be detected using
1180
Srinivas and Balu
the static response of the structures and this

method is easier measure the static response
compared to the dynamic one. The wavelet-
based methodology can be used for structural
monitoring at the expected areas of damage
only. Real signals obtained by measuring the
structural response should be analysed by the
wavelet transform in order to demonstrate the
reliability and effectiveness of the technique.
REFERENCES
Gurley K and Kareem A 1999 Application of
wavelet transforms in earthquake wind
and ocean engineering, Engineering
Structures 21 149167.
Kim H and Melhem H 2003 Damage
detection of structures by wavelet
analysis Engineering Structures 26
347362.
Lee Y Y and Liew K M 2001 Detection of
damage locations in beam using the
wavelet analysis, International Journal
of Structural Stability and Dynamics 1
455465.
Liew K M and Wang Q 1998 Application of
wavelet theory for crack identification
in structures Journal of Engineering
Mechanics 124 152157.
Ovanesova A V and Suarez L E 2004
Applications of wavelet transforms to
damage detection in frame structures
Engineering Structures 26 3949.
Quila M Mondal S and Sarkar S 2014 Free
vibration analysis of an un-cracked and
cracked fixed beam IOSR Journal of
Mechanical and Civil Engineering
7683.
1181
ICCMS2016
ADAPTIVE REFINEMENT STRATEGY FOR CRACK

PROPAGATION ANALYSIS USING EFG METHOD
BHAVANA S. S. P.*, BABU K. S. N. and KATTA V.
National Institute of Technology Karnataka, Surathkal, Mangalore, India.
Abstract: Modelling high stress gradients like crack propagation are still a challenge
to numerical methods. This paper is an attempt to address such problems using
Element Free Galerkin (EFG) method, one of the most popular MeshFree techniques.
Computation of Stress Intensity Factor (SIF) employing strain energy release rate has
been explained and is adopted for crack propagation identification. Results of the
investigation have been compared, verified and validated with the study reported in
literature. Enhancement to computational capabilities by way of strain energy based
refinement of integration and triangular cells have been proposed with illustration to
demonstrate efficacy of the technique.
Keywords: Element free Galerkin; Crack propagation; Strain energy; Stress
gradients; Stress intensity factor
INTRODUCTION distribution by triangulation of problem

Tremendous progress and advancements in space. Nodes may be added or deleted as and
Finite Element Method (FEM) has greatly when required to study more
helped modelling and simulation of high comprehensively the stress concentration and
stress gradients and crack propagation crack propagation problems. The node based
analysis. Extended Finite Element Method approach of MeshFree methods permit
(XFEM) and MeshFree methods have employment of polynomials of any order as
evolved from FEM, further enhancing warranted by smoothness of the stress
modelling and simulation in crack formation- distribution desired.
propagation studies. It is well known and The paper discusses on arriving at smoother
understood that analysis results of FEM are stress distribution around the crack tip using
heavily influenced by discretization i.e. Element Free Galerkin (EFG) method.
meshing. MeshFree methods do away with MeshFree methods are known for their
requirement of a quality mesh. In MeshFree computational inefficiency, in order to
techniques shape functions are constructed at overcome that adaptive refinement of nodes
points of interest using neighbouring nodes and integration cells has been adopted. Stress
during the analysis stage by Moving Least Intensity Factor (SIF) has been computed by
Square (MLS) technique. Computed stresses using the strain energy release rate for
using neighbouring nodes in MeshFree identification of crack propagation path.
formulations will be much smoother across Further strain energy based adaptive
problem space, which is not accomplished in refinement of nodes and integration cells has
FEM at element boundaries. Further, the been carried out and the same has been
method is amenable for automating the nodal demonstrated on a numerical example in
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:bhavana8patel@gmail.com 1182

Patel et al.
comparison with the literature. The

developed method proves to be efficient in
reducing the computational efforts.
CRACK PROPAGATION
To verify the SIF computation, a plate fixed
on one of its shorter edges and uniformly
loaded on the other is considered for the
analysis. A pre-initiated vertical crack at the
centre of the plate has been created in the
geometric model and determination of SIF
has been attempted to arrive at nodal density
and distribution for convergence and
accuracy. The smooth distribution of results
is clearly evident in EFG method and SIF
value is in good agreement with closed-form.
The material properties of steel are
considered throughout the paper and the plate
is 2mm.
Crack propagation path identification
attempted by Patrıcio and Mattheij (2007)
using XFEM has been considered for
investigation by proposed technique. The
geometry of the plate is shown in Figure 1,
where the crack is inclined at an angle of
67.5deg to the edge of the plate. One of the
shorter edges of the plate is constrained and
on the other end uniformly distributed loaded
is applied. The crack propagation has been
simulated and SIF for crack growth has been
computed. Crack growth is indicated by SIF
being higher than critical SIF (KIc). The von
Mises stress distribution in the plate at
different iteration step of the crack growth is
presented in Figures 2. Crack propagation
obtained has been compared with the results
reported by Patrıcio and Mattheij (2007).
Figure 2. Von Mises stress distribution for

plate with inclined edge crack
Figure 1. Geometry of the plate with
inclined edge crack
1183
Adaptive Refinement Strategy for Crack Propagation Analysis using EFG Method
ADAPTIVE REFINEMENT The strain energy density in the triangular

STRATEGY cell from integration cells can be written as,
n
S
j 1
( j)
IC
( j)
ATC
(2)
(i )
STC 
ATC
wheren is the number of integration cells that

A
overlaps a given ith triangular cell; TC is the
area common to the jth integration cell and
the ith triangular cell.
Step 1
Figure 3. Strain energy in integration Step 3

cells for plate with inclined edge crack
The strain energy density in integration cell is
computed for the ith cell,
1
2 V( i )
 T  dVc(i )
t  j 1 w j Tj  j J (i )
n
(i )
S IC  c
 (1)
 t  j 1 w j J (i )
n
dVc(i )
Vc( i )
Step 6
where Vc is the volume of the ith cell;  and
 are the stresses and strains; n is the Figure 4. Displacement plot of adaptively
refined plate with inclined edge crack
number of Gauss points in the integration
cell, wj is Gauss weight in the numerical
integration of the cell energy.
1184
Patel et al.
The displacements and stresses are computed Analysis with the Element-Free
for very coarse density of nodes and Galerkin Method International Journal
integration cells in the initial iteration. This for Numerical Methods in Engg. 56
has been followed by the refinement of top 331–350
20% of the strain energy levels. The Haussler-Combe U and Korn C 1998 An
refinement of integration and triangular cells Adaptive Approach with the Element-
around the crack tip occurs after every Free-Galerkin Method Computer
iteration and the strain energy distribution for Methods in Applied Mechanics and
the same are carried out. Figure 3 shows the Engineering 162 203-222
strain energy in the integration cells in
iterations. About 75% reduction of nodes can LianYP X Zhang Y L 2012 An adaptive
be observed with acceptable accuracy. finite element material point method
Further Displacement distributions along and its application in extreme
with the refined nodes (Figure 4) are deformation problems Computer
presented. Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engg. 27 275–285
CONCLUSION
Liu G R 2009 Mesh Free Methods Moving
The crack propagation analysis in plate with beyond the Finite Element Method
angled edge crack using EFG method has Second edition, CRC press Taylor and
yielded results that are in very close Francis group New York
agreement with that reported in literature
(Patricio and Mattheij, 2007). 86% of Liu G R and Bernard B T Kee 2005 An
reduction in number of nodes and 56% of Adaptive Meshfree Least-Squares
integration cell reduction has been Method Report Centre for ACES
accomplished by the scheme suggested and Department of Mechanical
adopted has greatly reduce the computational Engineering, National University of
efforts without compromising on stability, Singapore
convergence and accuracy. Liu G R and Gu Y T 2005 An Introduction to
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Meshfree Methods and their
Programming Springer Netherlands
The authors are grateful to Technical
Education Quality Improvement Programme Liu G R and Tu Z H 2002 An Adaptive
(TEQIP) for funding this study. Procedure Based on Background Cells
for Meshless Methods Computer
REFERENCES Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Belytschko T Lu Y Y and Gu L 1994 Engg. 191 1923-1943
Element-free Galerkin method Patrıcio M & Mattheij R 2007 Crack
International Journal For Numerical propagation analysis CASA report 07-
Methods In Engineering 37229-256 03
Belytschko T Y Y Lu and L Gu 1995 Crack Yiqian H Haitian Y and Andrew J D 2014 A
propagation by element-free Galerkin Node-based Error Estimator for the
methods Engineering Fracture Element-free Galerkin (EFG) Method
Mechanics 51 2 295-315 International Journal of Computational
Gye-Hee L Heung-Jin C and Chang-Koon C Methods 11(4) 24
2003 Adaptive Crack Propagation
1185
ICCMS2016
STUDY ON ANALYSIS OF RC SLABS UNDER CONCENTRATED

LOADING
KATRODIYA D. G.*, CHAUHAN N. H. and CHAUHAN R. L.
M.S. Patel, Department of Civil Engineering, CSPIT, Charusat, Anand, Gujarat.
Abstract: Analysis of two way slab under concentrated load is one of the difficult
tasks in designing of structures. There is no certain method found in the design codes
or reference books for analysis of two-way slab subjected to concentrated load.
Moreover, the analysis of RC slab is done using yield line theory in order to carry out
the deflection, shear force, bending moment for different boundary conditions. In this
paper, RC slab subjected to uniformly distributed load is analyze in STAAD PRO v8i
having different boundary conditions and different span ratio in order to derive
relation between bending moment by STAAD PRO v8i and bending moment by IS
456:2000. Moreover for advanced study, the bending moment co-efficient for positive
and negative bending moment of slab is find out for particular location of
concentrated load by using different boundary conditions and different span ratio.
Keywords: Concentrated loading; RC two-way slab; Finite element method;
bending moment.
INTRODUCTION dimensional elements or three dimensional

elements.
Accurate analysis of two way slabs having
different boundary conditions is very difficult METHODOLOGY
and for practical purposes is almost
impossible. There are several simple methods Over time, there have been several analytical
for finding bending moment, shear force and methods that have been used in the analysis
deflection. The method used for analysis RC of slabs. Among these methods finite element
members are mostly based on elastic analysis method used in this paper. In this paper,
of the structure. The plastic method is most STAAD PRO v8i is use for analyzing RC
practical method for analysing RC slab slab having different boundary conditions by
subjected to concentrated load and also finite element method. This research focus on
known as yield line theory. There are some analysing RC slab for different span ration
other method for analysing RC slabs from 1 to 2 for particular type of slab. The
subjected to concentrated load such as finite different types of boundary conditions are as
elements, finite difference methods. The follows:
finite element method is based on the
Type 1: Interior panels (all edges fixes)
division of the structures into small elements
whose behaviours are formulated to capture Type 2: One short edge discontinuous
the local behaviour of the structure. These Type 3: One long edge discontinuous
elements can be in the form of two Type 4: Two adjacent edge discontinuous
*Author for correspondence Email : daxeshkatrodiya17@gmail.com

1186
Katrodiya D.G.
Type 5: Two short edges discontinuous Point Load

Type 6: Two long edges discontinuous
DISCUSSION
Type 7: Three edges discontinuous (one long
edge continuous) This study leads to the observation that
bending moment for RC slab subjected to
Type 8: Three edges discontinuous (one short concentrated load does not depend on span
edge continuous) but on span ratio and amount of concentrated
Type 9: Four edges discontinuous load. An equation for bending moment of
slab subjected to concentrated load having
RESULTS different boundary condition and different
location of point load using bending moment
Generally, the bending moment for slab co-efficient are given below:
subjected to uniformly distributed load is Bending moment (kNm) = bending moment
calculated from bending moment co-efficient co-efficient × concentrated load (kN).
Based upon the equation provided in this
given in IS 456:2000. For advanced study,
section, the value of bending moment are
the RC slab subjected to concentrated load is calculated for various span ratio of slab 1 to
model in STAAD pro and trials are made to 2, different boundary conditions and
find out an equation for bending moment and particular location of concentrated load.
their related bending moment co-efficient
tables for different boundary condition and CONCLUSION
different location of point load. Here Table 1
Earlier, as no method for analysis of two-way
represent the bending moment co-efficient of RC slabs subjected to concentrated load can
positive and negative bending moment for be found in publication codes and books,
RC slab having different boundary conditions using Staad Pro v8i analyze the slabs
and different span ratio for particular location subjected to concentrated load for different
of point load. edges conditions and various span ratio and
different application of point load over slab
Results for one location are similar for and develop moment co-efficient table. So
location on opposite side of centre line. For that one can be used such moment co-
example, the results for location (aLy, bLx) = efficient table and equation for designing RC
(0.1Ly, 0.1Lx) and (0.9Ly, 0.1Lx) are same. slabs practically at the engineering offices.
This study includes 45 different location of
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
point load on one side. Figure 1 shows layout
of different location of point load. The authors are grateful to reviewers on this
paper. The work described in this paper was
carried out in the M S Patel Department of
Civil Engineering, CSPIT, CHARUSAT,
Changa, Anand, and Arcon civil project
consultants, Surat, India.
REFERENCES
Akinyele J O 2011 Comparison of computer

base yield line theory with elastic theory
and finite element method for solid slab
Figure 1. Layout for Location of and Technology 3.
1187
Study on Analysis of RC Slabs under Concentrated Loading
Fadaee M Iranmanesh A and Fadaee M J IS 456 – 2000 Plain and Reinforced

2013 A simplified method for designing Concrete– Code of Practice. Bureau of
RC slabs under concentrated loading Indian Standard New Delhi.
and Technology 5.
Table 1 Bending Moment Co-efficient for Location (0.1, 0.1) and (0.9, 0.1)
For (0.1,0.1) and (0.9,0.1) of SPAN RATIO
SPAN 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2
Long Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.052 0.049 0.045 0.038 0.031
Long Span (-Ve) 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.024 0.023 0.021 0.018 0.014
TYPE 1
Short Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.065 0.066 0.067 0.067 0.066 0.064 0.06
Short Span (-Ve) 0.028 0.03 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.047
Long Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.052 0.049 0.045 0.038 0.031
Long Span (-Ve) 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.024 0.023 0.021 0.018 0.014
TYPE 2
Short Span (+Ve) 0.063 0.065 0.066 0.067 0.067 0.066 0.064 0.06
Short Span(-Ve) 0.028 0.03 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.047
Long Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.092 0.091 0.091 0.09 0.089 0.086 0.083
Long Span (-Ve) 0.058 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.051 0.049 0.046 0.042
TYPE 3
Short Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.1 0.102 0.104 0.106 0.107 0.11 0.114
Short Span (-Ve) 0.019 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.019 0.016 0.014
Long Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.092 0.09 0.091 0.09 0.089 0.086 0.083
Long Span (-Ve) 0.059 0.055 0.052 0.052 0.051 0.049 0.046 0.042
TYPE 4
Short Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.099 0.099 0.104 0.106 0.107 0.11 0.114
Short Span (-Ve) 0.019 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.019 0.016 0.014
Long Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.089 0.083 0.078 0.072 0.067 0.056 0.046
Long Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
TYPE 5
Short Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.091 0.09 0.088 0.086 0.084 0.079 0.072
Short Span (-Ve) 0.058 0.062 0.065 0.067 0.069 0.07 0.072 0.071
Long Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.092 0.09 0.091 0.09 0.089 0.086 0.082
Long Span (-Ve) 0.058 0.055 0.052 0.052 0.051 0.047 0.047 0.043
TYPE 6
Short Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.099 0.099 0.104 0.106 0.109 0.109 0.114
Short Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
Long Span (+Ve) 0.094 0.089 0.083 0.078 0.072 0.067 0.056 0.046
Long Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
TYPE 7
Short Span (+Ve) 0.092 0.091 0.09 0.088 0.086 0.084 0.078 0.072
Short Span (-Ve) 0.059 0.062 0.065 0.068 0.07 0.071 0.073 0.073
Long Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.138 0.135 0.131 0.128 0.125 0.117 0.109
Long Span (-Ve) 0.015 0.013 0.015 0.018 0.021 0.023 0.026 0.028
TYPE 8
Short Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.143 0.145 0.147 0.15 0.152 0.155 0.155
Short Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
Long Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.138 0.135 0.131 0.128 0.125 0.117 0.109
Long Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
TYPE 9
Short Span (+Ve) 0.141 0.143 0.145 0.147 0.15 0.152 0.155 0.155
Short Span (-Ve) - - - - - - - -
1188
Katrodiya D.G.
1189
ICCMS2016
EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OF HOLLOW STAINLESS STEEL

SQUARE STUB COLUMN WITH SINGLE PERFORATION UNDER
AXIAL COMPRESSION
SANASAM VIPEJ DEVI* and KONJENGBAM DARUNKUMAR SINGH
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India
Abstract: An experimental investigation on stainless steel square hollow stub
columns with single circular perforation under axial compression was carried out to
assess its structural behaviour. A total of 27 stub columns each having length, width,
thickness of 140, 50 and 1.5 mm respectively, were tested. The effects of perforation
size and transverse eccentricity were studied, using perforation sizes ranging from 10-
30 mm. Based on the experimental results, it was observed that the ultimate load
decreases with increase in perforation size, for centrally located perforations.
However, for the parameters considered, no significant change in the ultimate load
was observed with respect to transverse eccentricity, for the perforation size of 10
mm.
Keywords: Square stub column; single perforation; axial compression.
INTRODUCTION Rasmussen, 2013, Saliba and Gardner, 2013,

Hassenien and Kharoob, 2013, Sachidananda
Steel structural members offer considerable and Singh, 2015). Although, open steel
attractive option in the construction industry sections e.g. I- C-, Z- sections are used for a
owing to several key advantages viz., faster variety of structural applications, the use of
construction, lighter sections, higher salvage closed or hollow sections (e.g. circular,
value, vis-a-vis concrete. Hence, they are rectangular, oval, elliptical) have also gained
widely used in the construction of airports, popularity especially because of its superior
skyscrapers, warehouses etc. Generally, such torsional resistance and enhanced aesthetics
steel constructions are dominated by the (e.g. Sachidananda and Singh, 2015).
traditional carbon steels. However, with the Perforations in such hollow sections become
availability of stainless steel alloy and an alternative for a variety of reasons such as
significant benefits of stainless steel over electrical and instrumental cables, inspection
carbon steel such as high strength, high and maintenance work, etc. In the literature,
resistance to corrosion, pleasing smooth and the effect of perforation (or cut out) on square
shiny surface finish, good impact resistance, steel plate (e.g. Narayanan and Chow, 1984),
improved ductility etc., architects and lipped channel section steel column
engineers have started using stainless steel (Kulatunga et al., 2014), cylindrical steel
sections for structural applications (especially shells (Jullian and Liman, 1998, Umbarkar et
for exposed architectural constructions) (see al., 2013), square aluminium stub columns
Theofanous and Gardner, 2009). As such, in (Feng and Young, 2015) were reported. To
the recent literature, several researches have the best of authors’ knowledge, detailed
been focussed on both open and closed systematic study on the effects of circular
sections pertaining to stainless steel (e.g. perforation on stainless steel stub columns
Gardner and Nethercot, 2004; Theofanous et under axial compression has not been
al., 2009; Patton and Singh, 2012, Rossi and
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: d.sanasam@iitg.ernet.in 1190

Sanasam Vipej Devi
presented so far. Hence in this study, an devised for: 1) centrally located perforation
attempt has been made to assess the structural with perforation size (diameter, d p ) varying
behaviour of stainless steel square hollow from 10-30 mm and 2) mid-height located 10
sections with single circular perforation of mm size perforation at different transverse
different sizes at mid height of the column eccentricities (e t = 0-15 mm) from the face
and with varying eccentricity (from the face centre-line. In order to compare the
centre) of the perforation along transverse perforated results with that of unperforated
axis of the column through an experimental column, tests on unperforated specimens
investigation. were also conducted. For each data point,
three tests were performed, thus resulting in
EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION 27 tests in all. The results of the tests are
reported in the form of ultimate load capacity
Square hollow sections of 50 x 50 x 1.5 mm (P u ) shown as a variation of the perforation
(width (B) x depth (D) x thickness (t)) cross size (d p ) and eccentricity (e t ).
section were procured from the local market;
cut and ends prepared into lengths each with
150 mm. In order to determine the 150 Pu C1
mechanical properties of the stainless steel C2
material, tensile coupon tests were performed 100
P (kN)
in a 100 kN capacity Instron UTM, as per

ASTM E646-07 (ASTM, 2007) guidelines. 50
Based on the tensile coupon test, Young’s
modulus (E) and yield stress (σ 0.2 ) were
0
obtained as ~200 GPa and 550 MPa.
0 1 2 3 4
Fixed-support sleeve
δ (mm)
(a)
B Local buckling
L t D
C1 C2
dp
et b
B (b)
Figure 2. a) P vs δ curve and b)
Figure 1. Typical specimen with a deformation pattern at Pu (C1) and post-
centrally located circular perforation. Pu (C2) for centrally located perforation
(dp/b=0.64).
The test specimen ends were inserted for 5
mm in specially prepared steel support
sleeves, to simulate fixed end conditions, and RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
tested in a 1000 kN capacity UTM. The net
unsupported length (L) is taken as ~140 mm. Load (P) vs axial displacement/shortening (δ)
Thus the length/depth ratio considered for the curves were obtained for all the specimens
tests is ~ 2.8. This ratio agrees with similar tested. A typical variation of P vs δ and
values (~3.0) taken for stub column tests in deformation pattern corresponding to P u and
the literature (see Theofanous and Gardner, post-P u are shown in Figure 2, for a centrally
2009, Patton and Singh, 2012). Typical located perforation of size d p /b = 0.64 or d p =
specimen with a centrally located perforation 30 mm (where b=inner width). From Figure
is presented in Figure 1. Two test sets were 2b, an initiation of the local buckling at mid-
1191
Experimental investigation of hollow stainless steel square stub column with single perforation under
axial compression
height of the column can be seen at P u . At C2 160

(i.e. at post-P u ), a significant increase in the 120
Pu (kN)
local buckling (and lateral / transverse
displacement) with apparently a localised 80
buckling near the diametrical ends (at mid- 40
height) of the perforation can be seen. Signs
of local buckling can also be seen near the 0
support as a result of the fixed end conditions 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
imposed, this however, appears to have dp/b (a)
remained unchanged for the rest of the 1.5
experiment (see Figure 2b).
Pu/Puu
1
A) EFFECT OF PERFORATION SIZE
(D P ) 0.5
Variation of P u and P u /P uu (P uu = P u
corresponding to unperforated column) with 0
d p /b are plotted in Figures 3a and 3b 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
respectively. A decrease in the ultimate load dp/b (b)
capacity can be seen for increasing the
perforation size, with 200% increase in Figure 3. a) Pu with dp/b and b) Pu/Puu
perforation from 10 mm, a near linear with dp/b.
reduction of~11.6% in P u can be observed
(Figure 3a). At first this may be associated
with the reduction in the material area due to
perforation. From Figure 3b, it can be 200
inferred that with a perforation size of 64% of 150
Pu (kN)
the inner width, the decrease in load capacity

is ~14% as compared to that of the 100
unperforated column, whereas it is ~2% for 50
the smallest (d p = 21% of b) perforation.
Thus, it can be seen that for small 0
perforations, say d p ~≤ 20% of width, the 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
reduction in P u is not very significant, for a et/(b/2) (a)
centrally located circular perforation.
B) EFFECT OF TRANSVERSE
ECCENTRICITY (ET) 1.5
Figure 4 shows the variation of P u and P u /P uc 1
Pu/Puc
(P uc is the P u corresponding to the centrally

located perforation) with e t /(b/2), for a 10 0.5
mm size perforation. It can be seen from
Figure 4a, that there appears to have little 0
effect of the transverse eccentricity on the 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
load capacity, although lowest is seen for 0%
et/(b/2) (b)
eccentricity or centrally located perforation
(Figure 4b). However, it must be noted that in Figure 4. a) P u with e t /(b/2) and b) P u /P uc
order to have more data points, a small with e t /(b/2).
perforation size (d p /b = 0.1) was considered.
CONCLUSION
1192
Sanasam Vipej Devi
Based on the experimental study, it can be simulation and test results Thin-Walled
concluded that increase in perforation size Structures 80 1-12
reduces the load carrying capacity of the Narayanan R and Chow F Y 1984 Ultimate
column. With 200% increase in perforation capacity of uniaxially compressed
from 10 mm, a near linear reduction of perforated plates Thin-Walled Structures
~11.6% in P u can be observed corresponding 34 241-264
to centrally located perforation. For the
smallest perforation (d p /b = 0.21) considered Patton M L and Singh K D 2012 Numerical
the reduction in P u is found to be very small modelling of lean duplex stainless steel
(~2%). No significant change in the load hollow columns of square, L-, T-, and +-
capacity could be seen for the transverse shaped cross sections under pure axial
variation of perforation eccentricity, for the compression Thin-Walled Structures 53
perforation size considered. 1-8
REFERENCES Rossi B and Rasmussen K 2013 Carrying

capacity of stainless steel columns in the
ASTM E646 Standard test method for low slenderness range Journal of
Tensile Strain-Hardening Exponents (n- Structural Engineering 139 1088-1092
Values) of Metallic Sheet Materials
American Society for Testing and Sachidananda K Singh K D 2015 Numerical
Materials study of fixed ended Lean Duplex
Stainless Steel (LDSS) flat oval hollow
Feng R and Young B 2015 Experimental stub column under pure axial
investigation of aluminium alloy stub compression Thin-Walled Structures 96
columns with circular openings Journal 105-119
of Structural Engineering 141 04015031
1-10 Saliba N Gardner L 2013 Experimental study
of the shear response of lean duplex
Gardner L and Nethercot D A 2004 stainless steel plate girders Engineering
Experiments on stainless steel hollow Structures 46 375-391
sections - Part 1: Material and cross-
sectional behaviour Journal of Theofanous M Chan T M and Gardner L
Constructional Steel Research 60 1291- 2009 Structural response of stainless
1318 steel oval hollow section compression
members Engineering Structures 31 922-
Hassanein M F and Kharoob O F 2013 Shear 934
capacity of stiffened plate girders with
compression tubular flanges and slender Theofanous M Gardner L 2009 Testing and
webs Thin-Walled Structures 70 81-92 numerical modelling of lean duplex
stainless steel hollow section columns
Jullien J F and Limam A 1998 Effects of Engineering Structures 31 3047-3058
openings of the buckling of cylindrical
shells subjected to axial compression Umbarkar K R Patton M L and Singh K D
Thin-Walled Structures 31 187-202 2013 Effect of single circular perforation
in lean duplex stainless steel (LDSS)
Kulatunga M P Macdonald M Rhodes J and hollow circular stub columns under pure
Harrison D K 2014 Load capacity of axial compression Thin-Walled
cold-formed members of lipped channel Structures 68 18-25
cross-section with perforations subjected
to compression loading Part I: FE
1193
ICCMS2016
LARGE DEFORMATION ANALYSIS OF POINT SUPPORTED

CONOIDAL SHELLS USING ELEMENT FREE GALERKIN METHOD
WATTS G., PRADYUMNA S.* and SINGHA M. K.
Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi, India.
Abstract: Element free Galerkin method with moving kriging shape function is
employed to investigate linear and geometrically nonlinear bending behaviour of
uniformly loaded point supported conoidal shells. First order shear deformation theory
is employed here along with Marguerre's strain-displacement relations for shallow
shells and von Kármán's assumptions for geometric nonlinearity. The nonlinear
equations of equilibrium are solved using Newton-Raphson iterative technique. The
efficiency of the method is illustrated through various numerical examples. Results of
large deflection analysis of point supported conoidal shells, hitherto not found in
literature are presented for the first time.
Keywords: Conoidal Shell; Point Supported; Meshfree; Element free Galerkin
INTRODUCTION is not an interpolant, imposition of boundary

Conoidal shell, being a singly ruled surface conditions in conventional EFG requires
offers simplicity in construction and is used in additional techniques. To resolve this issue,
roofing units and large entrance canopies due Gu (2003) proposed a new interpolation
to its great aesthetic appeal. Moreover, function based on geostatistical technique
simulation of roofing units with large column- called moving kriging (MK). The
free areas, car sheds and solar panels may effectiveness of EFG based on MK has been
require solution of shell structures supported studied largely on small deflection problems
on discrete points. Traditional numerical of plates [Bui et al. 2009]. To the best of
techniques like finite element method (FEM) author’s knowledge, there is scarcity of
has been used in the past to study the linear literature on solution of large deformation
static behaviour of conoidal shells resting on problems using Galerkin meshfree methods.
edge supports [Choi 1984, Dey et al. 1992] or In addition to that, literature on nonlinear
point supports [Das and Chakravorty 2010]. bending behaviour of point supported
However, FEM suffers from mesh distortion structures is not easily available.
problems in simulating the large deformation In the present work, EFG method based on
behaviour of structures. MK shape function is employed to investigate
Meshfree methods which are based on linear and nonlinear bending behaviour of
scattered nodes have advantage in handling point supported shallow truncated conoidal
large deformation problems due to their ease shell. The nonlinear equations of equilibrium
of adaptivity. Standard element free Galerkin based on Mindlin formulation using
(EFG) method employs Galerkin weak form Marguerre’s strain displacement relations and
and moving least squares (MLS) based shape von Karman assumptions are solved using
function [Belytschko et al. 1994]. Since MLS Newton-Raphson iteration technique.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: pradyum@am.iitd.ac.in 1194

Watts et al.
MOVING KRIGING SHAPE  rij 2

cor ( xi , x j )  e
FUNCTION
(6)
The approximation of a field variable using
xi  x j
shape function based on moving kriging (MK) where rij  , d is the size of support
interpolation is given by [Gu 2003]: d
n domain. “  ” is the correlation parameter
u h ( x)  [pT ( x)M  r T ( x)N] u   I ( x)u I (1) which has an influence over the smoothness of
I
the interpolation function and accuracy of the
where p(x) is a polynomial basis. Quadratic
solution. The value of  is taken as 3 after
basis {1 x y x 2 y 2 xy} has been used in the
conducting detailed study of the effect of
present work. The matrices M, N and r are kriging parameter on results.
given by:
M = (PT R -1P)1 P T R -1 , N = R -1 (I - PM) (2) GOVERNING EQUATIONS
rT ( x)  {cor(s1, x) ... ... ... cor (sn , x)} (3) Meshfree formulation is derived using
Mindlin formulation with strain displacement
rT (x) is a vector of correlation between the relations based on Marguerre’s shallow shell
given nodes and point of interest. theory and von Kármán's assumptions. The
nonlinear algebraic equations for the system
are given by:
P and R in eq. (2) are given by:
[K L + K NL (δ)]δ = F (7)
 p1 ( s1 ) ... pm ( s1 ) 
P   ... ... ...  (4) K T Δδ = ΔF (8)
 p1 ( sn ) ... pm ( sn )  The tangent stiffness matrix K T may be
written as:
 cor ( s1 , s1 ) ... cor ( s1 , sn ) 
K T = K L + K NLT + K σ (9)
R   ... ... ... 

(5) where K L and K NL are linear and nonlinear
cor ( sn , s1 ) ... cor ( sn , sn )  stiffness matrices, respectively. F is the load
vector and K σ is the geometric stiffness
cor is the correlation between the given nodes matrix. Rectangular background mesh with 4
and point of interest. In the present × 4 Gaussian quadrature is employed in all the
formulation, Gaussian correlation function is examples for numerical integration of weak
used which is given by: form.
Figure 1. Geometry and Nodal Distribution in a conoidal shell
1195
Large Deformation Analysis of Point Supported Conoidal Shells Using Element Free Galerkin Method
20
Dey et al. (1992)

15 Present
Deflection(  10 inches)
10
-3
0 Geometry: a = 72 in; b = 99 in; t = 0.5 in

hl = 9 in; hh = 18 in;
6
Material: Isotropic: E = 5.62  10 psi,  = 0.15
-5 Load: Uniform Load, q0 = 0.417 psi (60 psf)
Boundary Condition: Clamped at all edges
-10
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
x/b
Figure 2. Deflection along x axis Figure 3. Non-uniform nodal

distribution for corner supported
shell
Table 1. Convergence of maximum transverse deflection for corner supported
laminated composite conoidal shell subjected to uniform load
Lamination Number of Nodes Das and

Scheme 441 529 625 729 841 961 1089 Chakravorty (2010)
[00 900] 34.86 36.63 38.33 39.15 39.38 39.47 39.70 40.52
[00 900 00] 22.47 23.72 24.05 24.58 24.74 24.72 24.86 24.67
[450 – 450] 27.06 28.06 28.96 29.43 29.63 29.84 30.05 30.03
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION from Table 1 that a very fine distribution of

The present formulation is first validated for nodes is required for convergence of
linear bending analysis of a clamped isotropic deflection for corner supported shell.
conoidal shell subjected to uniform transverse Further, the nonlinear formulation is validated
load. Geometrical parameters and uniform by comparing the authors’ results for a
nodal distribution for the conoidal shell are clamped laminated composite shallow
shown in Fig. 1. Variation of transverse cylindrical shell subjected to uniform load
deflection along x-axis (at y/a = 0.5) is shown along with that of Kim and Lee (1988).
in Fig. 2. It is found that present results are in Variation of nonlinear deflection with load is
good agreement with the finite element shown in Fig. 4. After confirming the validity
solutions of Dey et al. (1992). Thereafter, a of the present method, it is extended to study
linear elastic conoidal shell simply supported the nonlinear behaviour of conoidal shells.
(u0 = v0 = w0 = 0) at four corners subjected to Variation of nonlinear deflection with load for
uniform load is considered. A non-uniform isotropic corner supported conoidal shell is
distribution of nodes as shown in Fig. 3 is used plotted in Fig. 5. For comparison purpose,
for modelling the corner supported shell. nonlinear deflection for a simply supported (at
Convergence of maximum deflection for a all edges: un = ut = w0 = 0) isotropic conoidal
laminated composite conoidal shell with shell is also included in Fig. 5. ut and un are
different lamination schemes is given in Table deflections tangential and normal to the edge,
1. It is observed that the converged results respectively. Further, nonlinear results for a
match well with finite element solutions of laminated composite corner supported
Das and Chakravorty (2010). It is also seen
1196
Watts et al.
conoidal shell with different lamination CONCLUSIONS

schemes are shown in Fig. 6. The efficacy of the element free Galerkin
method with MK shape function is studied for
2.5 linear and geometrically nonlinear bending
Kim and Lee (1988)
Present
analyses of point supported conoidal shells.
2.0
Results obtained are found to be in good
2
Load, q0 = q0R /E2h
agreement with the published results. The

2
1.5
present method exhibits good convergence

1.0
Geometry : R/a = 5, t = a/200
and therefore can be used to solve complex
Material : Orthotropic : E1 / E2 = 25, G12 / E2 = G13 / E2 = 0.5,
G23 / E2 = 0.2 and 12 = 0.25.
nonlinear problems to overcome the
0.5
Laminate Scheme: [0 90 ]
0 0
Boundary Condition: Clamped at all edges

limitations of conventional numerical
0.0 methods.
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Deflection, w = wc/h
REFERENCES
Figure 4. Nonlinear central deflection Belytschko T Lu Y Y and Gu L 1994 Element
versus load for clamped cylindrical free Galerkin methods. International
shell Journal for Numerical Methods in
Engineering 37(2) 229–256
1600
Corner Supported Bui T Q Nguyen T N and Nguyen-Dang H
1400
Simply Supported
2009 A moving kriging interpolation
4
Load, q0 = q0a /Eh
1200
based meshless method for numerical
4
1000 simulation of Kirchhoff plate problems

800 International Journal for Numerical
600 Methods in Engineering 77(10) 1371
Geometry: a/b = 1 ; t = a/100;
400
a/hh = 5; hl/hh = 0.25 Choi C-K 1984 A conoidal shell analysis by
Material : Isotropic:  = 0.3
200
Load: Uniform Vertical Load
modified isoparametric element
0 Computers & Structures 18(5) 921–924
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Das H S and Chakravorty D 2010 A finite
Figure 5. Variation of nonlinear central element application in the analysis and
deflection versus load for isotropic design of point-supported composite
conoidal shell conoidal shell roofs: suggesting selection
guidelines The Journal of Strain Analysis
3000
0
[ 0 90 ]
0
for Engineering Design 45(3) 165–177
0 0 0
[ 0 90 0 ]
2500 Dey A Bandyopadhyay J N and Sinha P K
4
Load, q0 = q0a /E2h
1992 Finite element analysis of laminated

4
2000
composite conoidal shell structures
1500 Computers & Structures 43(3) 469–476
1000 Geometry: a/b = 1 ; t = a/100; Gu L 2003 Moving kriging interpolation and
a/hh = 5; hl/hh = 0.25
Material :Orthotropic element-free Galerkin method
500 E1 / E2 = 25, G12 / E2 = G13 / E2 = 0.5,
G23 / E2 = 0.2 and 12 = 0.25. International Journal for Numerical
0 Methods in Engineering 56(1) 1–11
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00
Kim Y H and Lee S W 1988 A solid element
Figure 6. Nonlinear central deflection formulation for large deflection analysis
versus load for laminated composite of composite shell structures Computers
conoidal shell & Structures 30(1) 269-274
1197
ICCMS2016
NON-LINEAR FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ESP HOPPER

PATEL P.*, JADHAV S., and KUSHWAHA R.
Engineering & Technology Department, L&T Power, Vadodara, Gujarat, India.
Abstract: Hoppers are tall structures used to store large quantity of ash. They are
subjected to different static and dynamic loading due to the unique characteristic of
the stored material. It is very difficult to identify the magnitude and distribution of
stresses and deformations. High collapse rate of hoppers and lack of adequate
remedial measures to counter it pushes forth the importance of a detailed study in the
matter. Conventional methods of analysis are insufficient to handle the complexity of
such a structure. Finite Element (FE) analysis tool is used to obtain detailed insight
and structural behaviour of hoppers. Non-linear FE analysis is performed using
commercial software ANSYS Mechanical (R16) to calculate the stresses and
deformations in the plates and stiffeners of hopper. Design methodology is developed
to carry out non-linear FE analysis of hopper and same is presented here. In addition
to this the weight of hopper is predicted by finalising the size and space of the
stiffeners for different plate thicknesses.
Key Words: Flue Gas; ESP; Finite Element; Ash.
INTRODUCTION is carried out considering shear and bending

load [Kharrazi, 2004]. There is no past work
High velocity flue gas from boiler duct enters
found on stress and deformation perdition for
ESP nozzle, the electric field produced due to
large size hoppers. In the present study, non-
high voltage discharge, electrodes introduces
linear FE analysis of hopper is carried out
a charge on the particles, which are then
using commercial software ANSYS
attracted to the collecting plates. The
Mechanical (R16) to ensure the stresses and
collected ash is removed periodically from
deformation levels of hoppers are within
the collecting plates by a hammering
allowable limits. In addition to this the
mechanism which falls in hopper for storage
weight of hoppers is predicted by finalising
and removal. Hopper plates are supported
the size and space of the stiffeners for
externally with the stiffeners to reduce the
different plate thicknesses.
thickness of the plate. Figure. 1(a)
schematically shows the ESP nozzles and
hoppers, Figure. 1(b) shows loads acting on
the hopper plates.
It is found from literature that lot of work is
done to study the effect of wall pressure on
large diameter silo [Rotter, 1998; Jianbao Fu,
2010]. Deformation and failure analysis of
rectangular plate subjected to impulsive load Figure 1. Schematic of ESP with inlet
[Yuan and Tan, 2013] is carried out to study nozzle, hoppers and ash acting on
modes of deformation and maximum hopper plates
deformation in the plates. Also, similar study
______________________________
*Author to correspondence: E-mail: priteshkumar.patel@lntpower.com 1198

Patel et al
DESIGN INPUTS AND MATERIAL  Allowable deformation for the

PROPERTIES stiffeners is L/325 (as per IS: 800,
1984, CL.3.13.1.2)
i. Design temperature, plate thickness
and ash density considered for  Stress reduction factor due to
structural analysis is 200°C, 6 mm temperature for structural steel (IS:
and 1350 kg/m3 respectively. 2062) at 200°C is 1 (as per IS
800:1984).
ii. Material of the plates and stiffeners is
structural steel (IS 2062) with As per ASME Section VIII Division 2 there
modulus of elasticity, Poisson’s ratio is different allowable stress limits for
and yield strength 1.99e5 MPa, 0.3 primary membrane stress (also known as
and 250 MPa respectively. direct stress), primary membrane + bending
stress and primary membrane + bending +
LOAD CONSIDERATION secondary stresses. The secondary stresses
are highly localized stresses and are observed
Following loads are considered for carrying
mostly at geometric discontinuities.
out FE analysis.
Allowable stress limits as ASME standard is
i. Dead weight or gravity load of plates given in the following Table 1
and stiffeners
iv. To capture large deformation and
ii. Hoppers are analysed considering ash high concentrated stresses accurately
load only. Ash load acting on the non-linear analysis FE analysis is
hopper is calculated using Rankine or performed.
Earth pressure theory [Rankine, 1857].
Table 1. Allowable stresses as per
iii. Wind load is not considered since it is
ASME Section VIII Division 2
very small as compared to dust load.
Sr. Stress Allowable Stress
iv. Live load is not considered since it is
No classification stress (σ) Value
not directly acting on hopper
Membrane/Direc
v. Earthquake loads is not considered 1 σ 165
t stress
since it is considered in hopper girder
design. Membrane +
2 1.5 σ 247.5
Bending stresses
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Membrane +
METHODOLOGY Bending +
3 3σ 495
Following design methodology is followed to Secondary
perform FE analysis. stresses
i. Hopper is considered to be fixed at
top and free to expand from bottom. MODEL DESCRIPTION AND
ii. Standard stiffener section like
MESHING
MB350, MB300, MB250, MB225, Hopper is modelled using ANSYS design
MB200, MB175, MB150, MB125 modeller. For FE analysis, plates are
and MB100 are used. modelled as shell element (element-181) and
stiffeners are modelled as beam element
iii. Following acceptance criteria is
(element-88). Modelled geometry of hopper
considered for stress and deformation
and nozzle is shown in Figure 1. Meshing or
limits for plate and deformations.
discretisation of the domain into number of
finite elements is done using ANSYS
1199
Non-Linear Finite Element Analysis of ESP Hopper
Meshing tool. Details of mesh are shown in respectively which is well below the
Figure 2. allowable limits as per IS:800 standard.
The same analysis is repeated for hopper
plate of 5mm thickness and stiffeners. The
predicted weight the two cases i.e. 6mm plate
thickness and 5mm plate thickness is shown
in Table 2.
Figure 2. Geometry Modelled
Figure 4. Stresses in hopper plates
Figure 3. Mesh
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS Figure 5. Stresses in hopper stiffeners

Figure 4 and Figure 5 shows the stress
contour of hopper plate of 6mm thickness
and stiffeners. Various stiffeners sizes and
shapes are analysed and optimum stiffeners
are selected to keep deflection and maximum
stress within limit. Detailed categorisation of
stresses is done as per stress classification
given in Table 1. Very high stresses are
observed at the corners which are stress
singularities errors and can be neglected.
Figure 6 and Figure 7 shows the deformation
contour for hopper plates and stiffeners. It is
clear from the Figure 6 and Figure 7 that
maximum deformation in the plates and
Figure 6. Deformation in hopper plates
stiffeners is 13.32 mm and 10.47mm
1200
Patel et al
Journal of Convergence Information

Technology 5(7).
Kharrazi H K 2004 Bending and shear
analysis & design of ductile steel plate
walls 13th world conference on
Earthquake Engineering Vancounver,
B.C, Canada, Paper No.77.
Rankine W 1857On the stability of loose
earth. Philosophical Transactions of the
Royal Society of London147.
Rotter J M 1998 Soil pressure predictions
using discrete element and FE analysis
Figure 7. Deformation in hopper Philosophical Transactions of the Royal
stiffeners Society of London356 2685-2712.
Structural design criteria for ESP by Institute
of Clean Air Companies (ICAC)
Table 2: Total weight of hopper
ICAC-EP 8 1993
Plate Total weight of
Case Yuan Ye and Tan P J 2013 Deformation and
thickness hopper (Tons)
failure of rectangular plate subjected to
1 6mm 10.203 impulsive loading International Journal
2 5mm 9.712 of Impact Engineering59 46-59.
CONCLUSIONS
Design methodology is developed to carry
out FE analysis of large size hopper of
trapezoidal shape. The same design
methodology is employed to evaluate hopper
design with different plate thickness and
stiffener size. Stresses and deformations in
the plates and stiffeners are predicted and
they are found to be within allowable limits.
Weight of hopper is also predicted by
finalising the stiffeners size and spacing for
different plate thickness. This method can be
used as ready reference for the design of
large hoppers.
REFERENCES
ASME code for pressure vessel design:
ASME section VIII Division 2.
General construction in steel- Code of
practice: IS: 800, 1984 & 2007.
Jianbao Fu 2010 3D Finite element analysis
of wall pressure on large diameter silos
1201
ICCMS2016
B-SPLINE WAVELET FINITE ELEMENT METHOD FOR 1D BI-

MATERIAL PROBLEMS IN ELASTO-STATICS
VADLAMANI S.* and ARUN C. O.
Indian Institute of Space Science and Technology, Thiruvananthapuram
Abstract: The current paper briefly discusses about the formulation of B-Spline
wavelet based finite element formulation for bi-material interface problems.
Numerical examples based on 1D bi-material interface problems are solved and the
results are analysed and validated against the available analytical solutions.
Convergence study is also performed on a bar using wavelet finite element method
(WFEM) for different resolutions and order of scaling functions of B-spline wavelets.
B-spline WFEM is able to accurately capture the strain jump at the interface, along
with stress continuity.
Keywords: B-spline wavelet on the interval; scaling function; wavelet function
INTRODUCTION that instead of using the traditional

polynomial interpolation, scaling and
Finite element procedures are employed
wavelet functions of wavelets are used to
extensively in the analysis of solids and
form the shape function.
structures. The effectiveness and general
applicability in engineering analysis are the B-spline wavelets are defined on the whole
two inherent properties of finite element square integrable real space L2(R). However,
method (FEM) (Bathe 2010). However, if wavelets defined on L2(R) are used as
FEM also has difficulty in properly capturing interpolating functions, it will lead to
the high stress gradients in the vicinity of the numerical instability (Bertoluzza et al. 1994).
hole, around loading points and supports. A (Chui and Quak 1992) addressed this issue by
finer mesh or higher-order elements would constructing B-spline wavelet on the interval
result in a value closer to the analytical [0, 1] (BSWI). Fast decomposition and
solution but this would also result in a higher reconstruction algorithm of BSWI was given
computational effort, thereby increasing the by (Quak and Weyrich 1994). (Goswami et
overall cost of the analysis. Hence, an al. 1995) used BSWI scaling and wavelet
efficient mechanism is needed to accurately functions to solve the first-kind integral
represent the solution without compromising equations.
on the efficiency and this is where wavelet (Han et al. 2006) used the B-spline wavelets
finite element method (WFEM) serves as the for the construction of the element
motivation. displacement interpolation functions. This
During the past two decades, the theories of was extended to multi-variable wavelet-based
wavelet based numerical methods have been finite element formulation to solve the
developed in a variety of directions (Li B. and bending problems of thick plates based on the
Chen X. 2014). The prominent idea behind the
Hellinger Reissner generalized variational
formulation of wavelet based finite element is
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shashankvadlamani.15@res.iist.ac.in 1202

Vadlamani and Arun
principle with two kinds of independent is expressed in terms of the interpolation

variables (Han et al. 2007). Adopting the functions and the transformation matrix as:
scaling functions of BSWI as trial functions,
ui(ξ ) =ϕTeue=Neue (i=1,2..) (2)
a new FEM based on BSWI was presented by Where T is the transformation matrix, U is
(Xiang et al. 2007). the nodal displacement vector and N is the
shape function matrix.
WFEM FORMULATION FOR 1D BI-
MATERIAL The bi-material bar is divided into 2 sub-
domains Ω1 and Ω2. 1 BSWI element is used
In WFEM, the problem domain Ω is divided
for each sub-domain. The displacement field
into sub-domains Ωi (i=1, 2...). Each Ωi is
ui(ξ ) is substituted into the weak form and
then mapped into the standard element
element solving equations Kiui=Fi (i=1,2..)
solving domain Ωs = {ξ |ξ ∈ [0, 1]}, where ξ
are obtained for each sub-domain. The
is the local co-ordinate used for solving
element stiffness matrices K1, K2 and force
BSWI on [0, 1]. BSWI scaling functions are
vectors F1, F2 are then assembled at the
employed as interpolating functions to
interface node of the bi-material to obtain the
construct elements Ωe. Each Ωe can be
global stiffness matrix equations, which are
divided into n = 2j +m−2 segments and n+1
then solved for the nodal displacements.
nodes, where m is the order of the scaling
function and j is the scale/resolution. For 1D NUMERICAL EXAMPLES
bi-material 2 BSWI elements are used of
The B-spline WFEM adopted in this paper is used
order m=2 and scaling j=1. This gives 3
to perform the analysis of a 1D axially loaded bi-
nodes per element. The layout of element material bar consisting of two materials with
nodes is shown below: elastic modulii as 100Gpa and 50Gpa. End node
displacement of 1mm is applied. Cross-section
area of the bar is 1mm2. Length of the bar is
10mm. Two cases are studied: (a) No body force
applied; (b) A linear body force applied b(x) =x.
EXAMPLE 1: 1D AXIALLY LOADED

BI-MATERIAL BAR
Figure 1. BSWI nodes layout
The unknown field function u(ξ) can be
expressed by BSWI scaling functions as
2j-1
u(ξ ) = Σ ajm,k φjm,k(ξ ) = ϕae (1)
k=−m+1 Figure 2. axially loaded bi-material
j
Where a m,k are the wavelet coefficients to be bar
determined and φjm,k denotes the BSWI
scaling functions. WFEM is always (a) NO BODY FORCE APPLIED
constructed in wavelet space. Hence, a WFEM approximation is compared with the
transformation matrix is needed to address analytic solution (Arun et al. 2009) for
the physical boundary conditions. Upon displacement and strain when no body force
further manipulations the displacement field is applied.
1203
B-Spline Wavelet Finite Element Method and Its Application to Elastic Bi-materials
displacement and strain when a linear body

force b(x) = x is applied.
Figure 3. Displacement vs. Distance

along the bar
Figure 6. Displacement vs. Distance

along the bar
Figure 4. Strain vs. Distance along the

bar
Figure 7. Strain vs. Distance along the
The analytical strain jump was found out to be bar
from 0.066 to 0.1333 at the material interface
which is the same as obtained by WFEM from
Figure 4. Figure 5 shows the continuity of
stresses and it can be seen that WFEM shows
high accuracy.
Figure 8. Stress vs. Distance along the

bar
It can be seen from the Figure 6, Figure 7 and
Figure 8 that the values of displacements,
strains and stresses from WFEM are in good
agreement with those obtained from the
Figure 5. Stress vs. Distance along the analytical solution.
bar
REFERENCES
(b) LINEAR BODY FORCE APPLIED
Arun C O Rao B N and Sivakumar S M
WFEM approximation is compared with the 2009 On material discontinuity modeling
analytic solution (Arun et al. 2009) for in element free Galerkin method Journal
of Structural Engineering 36(3) 182–194.
1204
Vadlamani and Arun
Bathe K J 2010 Finite element procedures

PHI learning private limited New Delhi
1-2.
Bertoluzza S Naldi G Ravel J C 1994
Wavelet methods for the numerical
solution of boundary value problems on
the interval In Chui CK Montefusco L
Puccio L (eds) Wavelets theory
algorithms and applications Academic
New York 425–448.
Chui C K and Quak E 1992 Wavelets on a
Bounded Interval Numerical Methods of
Approximation Theory 1 53–57.
Goswami J C Chan A K Chui C K 1995 On
solving first kind integral equations using
wavelets on a bounded interval IEEE
Transactions on Antennas and
Propagation 43 614–622.
Han J G Ren W X and Huang Y 2006 A
spline wavelet finite-element method in
structural mechanics International
Han J G Ren W X and Huang Y 2007 A
wavelet-based stochastic finite element
method of thin plate bending Applied
Mathematical Modelling 31 181-193.
Li B and Chen X 2014 Wavelet-based
numerical analysis a review and
classification Finite Elements in Analysis
and Design 8 14-31.
Quak E and Weyrich N 1994 Decomposition
and reconstruction algorithms for spline
wavelets on a Bounded interval Applied
and Computational Harmonic Analysis
1(3) 217–231.
Xiang J Chen X He Z and Dong H 2007 The
construction of 1D wavelet finite
elements for structural analysis
Computational Mechanics 40 325-339.
1205
ICCMS2016
FLOOR RESPONSE SPECTRA CONSIDERING STRUCTURAL

NONLINEARITY EFFECT: EXPERIMENTS AND ANALYSIS
KOTHARI P.*, PARULEKAR Y. M., REDDY G. R. and SHENAI G. V.
Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: The Past devastating earthquakes have revealed that there is urgent need
to ensure the safety and integrity of nonstructural components and equipment
especially in nuclear safety related structures. Qualification of these equipment for
beyond the design basis level earthquake necessitates consideration of the structural
nonlinearity for generation of the Floor Response Spectra (FRS). This paper
addresses the experimental and analytical work on generation of floor response
spectrum. Push over and shake table experiments were performed on 3 storeyed
RCC framed structure. A simplified analytical approach is explained to derive
earthquake-induced floor spectra in a RCC structure deforming beyond elastic
limits. In this approach, initially, the performance of the structure is evaluated using
pushover analysis. Floor spectra of the structure is then obtained considering the
degraded stiffness and increased damping evaluated at each performance level from
pushover curve. The floor spectra for nonlinear structure generated using this
method is validated by experimental results.
Keywords: Equivalent damping; Pushover analysis; Shake table test; Floor
response spectra; linear time history analysis
INTRODUCTION nowadays performance based design

approach is used for RC structures. In
Seismic design of components and systems
performance based seismic design approach
supported on RCC structures requires
(FEMA-273, 1997), the failure event occurs
generation of accurate floor response
when the structure fails to satisfy the
spectrum. When subjected to ground
requirements of a prescribed performance
shaking, structures will amplify the base
level e.g.; immediate occupancy, life safety
motion causing floor motions that are
or collapse prevention. Thus the structure is
typically stronger than base. Components
expected to undergo considerable amount of
and systems mounted on the floors will thus
nonlinear deformation. In such cases,
be subjected to significant forces. For
nonlinear behaviour of structure will
structures deforming within elastic limit the
influence the FRS which in turn will affect
floor response spectra generated by
the response of the floor mounted
assuming linear structures will be accurate.
components and systems. ASCE 4 (1998)
However, all industrial structures are
procedure of ±15 % peak broadening will
designed for design basis earthquakes (IS
account for uncertainties in soil structure
1893, 2002) in which the structure will be
interaction, components structure
undergoing nonlinear deformations for
interaction, numerical modelling and
higher earthquake excitations. Furthermore,
_____________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: pareshk@barc.gov.in 1206

Kothari et. al.
analysis of the structure. The structural EXPERIMENTAL PROGRAMME

nonlinearity effect is not considered in the
The model to be tested is a three storeys,
peak broadening. Hence evaluation of floor
two-bay, and Reinforced Cement Concrete
response spectra considering structural
(R.C.C.) framed structure. Floor to floor
nonlinearity is essential for accurate
height of the model is 1.8m and plan area is
analysis of equipment for high seismic
3m x3m. Both beam and column sections
excitations.
are 150mm x 200mm in size with 2-12Φ
Response of equipment mounted on bars at top and bottom in beam and 4-16Φ
structures subjected to dynamic excitation bars in columns. RCC slab is 50 mm thick.
has received much attention in past The design material properties for the
literature. This literature was initially structure were Concrete M20 grade and
related to response of elastic equipment Reinforcement Grade HYSD (Fe415).
supported on elastic structures. Effect of However, the average strength of concrete
structural nonlinearity on FRS was obtained from actual cube tests was
considered way back in 1978 [Kelly, 1978]. obtained as 34 MPa and average
Analysis was carried out considering elasto- reinforcement yield stress obtained from
plastic strain hardening model and it was tests on rebars was 478 MPa. The average
concluded that for yielding structures higher reinforcement ultimate stress was obtained
mode effects are more pronounced. In 1986, as 665 MPa.
Investigation of effects of structural
Pushover tests and shake table tests were
nonlinearity on equipment response
conducted on 2 numbers of 3D reinforced
[Sewell, 1986] was carried out. It was
concrete (RC) framed structures
observed that for SDOF structure inelastic
respectively. These structures were detailed
deformations tend to reduce the floor
according to non-seismic detailing
response spectra at and below the
provisions [IS 13920, 1993] without
fundamental period of vibration. However,
considering ductile detailing as they
analysis of nonlinear MDOF steel framed
represented the already existing old
structures lead to the facts that there were
structure. Static pushover curve was
amplifications in equipment response at
obtained for one structure (Figure. 1(a)) by
high frequencies. Later, through a
loading it with actuators using displacement
comprehensive parametric study of MDOF
controlled tests. Another structure was
system [Singh et. al., 1996] concluded that
tested on shake table under dynamic loads
FRS of yielding structure can be higher in
shown in Figure.1(c) to obtain dynamic
high frequency range than elastic spectra
pushover curve.
due to internal resonance if higher mode
frequencies are odd multiples of
fundamental frequencies. In 2006,
responses of a variety of stiff and flexible
frame structures subjected to a set of 40
ground motions [Medina et. al., 2006]
analytically obtained and concluded that
current seismic code provisions will not Figure 1. Experimental set-up
provide an adequate characterization of
The base shear v/s roof displacement curve
peak component accelerations.
is obtained from the static pushover test and
1207
Floor Response Spectra considering Structural nonlinearity effect: Experiments and Analysis
is plotted in Figure. 2. The results obtained history analysis is carried out. Nonlinear
from the shake table tests were also used in response spectra can be obtained by two
plotting the dynamic pushover curve. The methods viz., direct time integration
peak floor acceleration for each base technique by considering nonlinear
excitation was noted and base shear was characteristics of the structural elements or
calculated as sum of product of the mass of equivalent linear analysis considering
each floor and peak floor acceleration of equivalent damping and stiffness reduction
each floor. The relative displacement of due to nonlinearity. The former method
each floor with respect to table is obtained being time consuming, the later method is
from the displacement transducers attached used in this project work to generate the
to each floor. The pushover curve in terms nonlinear spectra.
of peak floor displacement v/s base shear
was plotted for 0.025g, 0.05g, 0.9g, 0.9g
repeat, 0.95g and 1g (repeated 3 times) peak
base excitation.
ANALYTICAL SIMULATION
Analytical simulation of the structure is
carried out using linear analysis and Figure 3. Comparative pushover curves
nonlinear analysis. Initially, free vibration
analysis is carried out. Then pushover PROPOSED METHOD
analysis is performed in SAP2000 using
user defined hinge properties derived An accurate method to generate floor
considering Kent and Park concrete stress response spectrum is evolved in this report.
strain model (Kent and Park, 1971) and It is named as equivalent linear method.
bilinear steel stress strain model. Analytical This method utilises the pushover curve to
pushover curve is shown in figure 2. generate floor response spectrum using
linear time history analysis. This method
needs accurate modelling of damping and
stiffness in order to achieve good results.
The equivalent stiffness Ke (Figure. 3) is
calculated in terms of initial stiffness Ki at
each ductility value. Where Ki is the
stiffness of the structure before cracking
occurs. The stiffness value of 0.5Ki is
obtained as the stiffness at the yielding of
Figure 2. Stiffness with ductility
the structure.
Generation of response spectra is carried
out using time history analysis of the The nonlinear behaviour is also to be
structure. Time history analysis can be done represented by equivalent viscous damping
using modal time history analysis and also factor, ζ eq consisting of elastic and
using direct time integration method. In hysteretic energy dissipation [Jacobsen,
order to obtain linear floor spectra mode 1930]. The equivalent viscous damping is
superposition technique with modal time divided into two parts as given by the
equation given below.
1208
Kothari et. al.
ζ𝑒𝑞 = ζ0 + ζℎ𝑦𝑠𝑡 (1) R

There is a significant shift in the
fundamental frequency from linearly elastic
The equivalent damping calculated from
structure to inelastic structure at different
various formulas [Priestly, 2003; Kowalsky,
performance level. It is also observed that
1994; Gulkan sozen, 1974] available in past
as the ductility increases first mode
is shown in Figure. 4.
frequency reduces, when the structure is in
linear range, first mode frequency 6.5 Hz
which gets reduced to 2.2 Hz at μ=3.57.
Thus, when the structure goes into non-
linear range, and the equipment frequency is
less than and greater than linear structural
frequency then the equipment/component
would not be safe in this case. So for higher
earthquake like beyond design basis care
Figure 4. Equivalent damping verses should be taken to consider the effect of
Ductility structural nonlinearity in equipment design.
RESULTS REFERENCES
Floor response spectra are generated for two ASCE Standard 4 1998 Seismic analysis of
linear cases (0.025g and 0.05g) and two safety – related nuclear structures
nonlinear cases (0.9g; ductility 1.57 and 1g; FEMA 273 1997 NEHRP Guidelines for
ductility 3.57). The comparative FRS for 1g Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings
base excitation is shown in Figure. 5. Building Seismic Safety Council
Washington D C
Gulkan P and Sozen M 1974 Inelastic
Response of Reinforced Concrete
Structures to Earthquake Motion ACI
Journal 71 604-610
Jacobsen L S 1930 Steady Forced
(a) First Floor (b) Second Floor
Vibrations as Influenced by Damping
ASME Transaction 52(1) 169-181
Kelly T E 1978 Floor Response of Yielding
Structures Bull NZNSEE 114
Kent D C and Park R 1971 Flexural
Mechanics with Confined Concrete
(c) Roof Journal of the Structural Division
ASCE 97 ST7 1969-1990
Figure5. Comparison of Experimental
and Analytical floor spectra for 1g base Medina R A Sankaranarayanan R and
excitation (3.57 ductility) Kingston K M 2006 Floor response
spectra for light components mounted
CONCLUSION on regular moment-resisting frame
1209
Floor Response Spectra considering Structural nonlinearity effect: Experiments and Analysis
structures Engineering structures
28(14) 1927-1940
Priestley M J N 2003 Myths and Fallacies
in Earthquake Engineering Revisited
The Mallet Milne Lecture IUSS Press
Pavia Italy
Sewell R T Cornell C A Toro G R and
McGuire R K 1986 A study of factors
influencing floor response spectra in
nonlinear multi-degree of freedom
structures The John Blumo Earthquake
Engineering Center Stanford
University Report No. 82
1210
ICCMS2016
PROBABILISTIC FLUTTER ANALYSIS: A PERTURBATION

APPROACH
KUMAR S.1,2, KUMAR ONKAR A.1,2* and MANJUPRASAD M. 1,2
1
Academy of Scientific and Innovative Research (AcSIR), CSIR – NAL, Bengaluru, India
2
CSIR – National Aerospace Laboratories, Bengaluru, India.
Abstract: This paper deals with the investigation of parametric uncertainties in

structural and aerodynamic parameters on aeroelastic flutter of a two degrees freedom
airfoil. For aerodynamic modelling Theodorsen’s Unsteady Thin-Airfoil Theory is
used. The probabilistic flutter analysis is carried out by first order perturbation
technique. The result obtained from the perturbation technique is compared with
Monte Carlo simulation.
Keywords: Aeroelastic; Adjoint eigenvector; Probabilistic flutter; Perturbation.
INTRODUCTION
Since last one decade uncertainty
Flutter is a dynamic aeroelastic instability quantification in aeroelasticity has become
phenomena caused by self-excitation leading active research area. The main goal of
to catastrophic failure of aircraft structure. uncertainty quantification is selection of risk
The physical reason for instability in based design criteria over conventional
structure is the pumping of aerodynamic margin of safety based design criteria for
power to the aeroelastic system, at the point aeroelastic qualification of aircraft structures.
where aerodynamic power is equal to Pettit (2004) demonstrated the importance of
dissipated power of structural system, called uncertainty quantification in aeroelasticity.
stability boundary (Flutter point) and the Uncertainty quantification of an airfoil in
resulting oscillation is simple harmonic in LCO was carried out by Beran et al. (2006)
nature. In the case where aerodynamic power using torsional stiffness (nonlinear) and
is greater than the dissipated power then initial pitch angle with Gaussian
oscillation is continuously diverging leading characteristics. Ueda (2006) carried out the
to failure. sensitivity analysis of an airfoil in steady
flow regime. Castravete and Ibrahim (2008)
For flutter prediction, various methods have
investigated the effect of stiffness
been reported in the literature. 𝑘 method was
uncertainties on flutter of cantilever beam
attributed to Theodorsen (1935), in which
using Monte Carlo simulation and first order
artificial damping was introduced and the
perturbation technique. Li and Yang (2010)
flutter point was obtained where artificial
showed the effect of uncertainties in airfoil
damping is zero. 𝑝𝑘 method was proposed by
parameters on flutter using Monte Carlo
Hassig (1971), where both 𝑝 type and 𝑘 type
simulation. From the literature reviewed it is
analyses were carried out and the
observed that no studies have been reported
aerodynamic loads were assumed to be
on probabilistic flutter analysis of airfoil
simple harmonic in nature. Irani and Sazesh
using modal approach considering unsteady
(2013) proposed a new method called
aerodynamics. It is also noted that there are
stochastic approach, in which additional
no such studies reported using perturbation
white noise is added in lift force and the
techniques.
flutter velocity is obtained at a point where
the variance of response is maximum.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: aeroamit@nal.res.in 1211

Kumar et al.
In this paper, the effect of structural and moment of inertia about reference point and
aerodynamic uncertainty on flutter semi chord respectively.
characteristics of 2DoFs airfoil system in Now, using Theodorsen’s Unsteady Thin-
unsteady flow regime is carried out using
Airfoil Theory, the lift ( 𝐿 ) and moment
modal approach and first order perturbation
(𝑀1⁄4 ) can be expressed as:
technique. The statistics of frequency and
damping obtained at critical flow velocity are 𝐿 = 2𝜋𝜌∞ 𝑈𝑏𝐶(𝑘)�ℎ̇ + 𝑈𝛼 + 𝑏� 12 −𝑓�𝛼̇ � +
also compared with those obtained using 𝜋𝜌∞ 𝑏 2 (ℎ̈ + 𝑈𝛼̇ − 𝑏𝑓𝛼̈ ) (2𝑎)
Monte Carlo simulation.
𝑀1�
4
MATHEMATICAL MODEL 1
= −𝜋𝜌∞ 𝑏 3 �2 ℎ̈ + 𝑈𝛼̇
DESCRIPTIONS 1
+ 𝑏 �8
HEAVE AND PITCH AIRFOIL 𝑓
− 2� 𝛼̈ � (2𝑏)
The airfoil model having two degrees of
freedom namely heave ( ℎ ) and pitch ( α ) where, Theodorsen function 𝐶(𝑘) is a
considered for aeroelastic analysis is shown complex valued function of reduced
in Figure.1. Here, P, Q, R and S are the frequency (𝑘 = 𝑏𝜈⁄𝑈). Equation (1) can be
aerodynamic center, middle of the chord, written in matrix form as:
reference point (i.e., where the heave
𝑀𝑆 {𝑞̈ } + 𝐾𝑆 {𝑞} = 𝑀𝐴 {𝑞̈ } + 𝐶𝐴 {𝑞̇ } + 𝐾𝐴 {𝑞}
displacement (h) is measured) and center of
mass respectively. The dimensionless (3)
parameters f and g ( −1 ≤ 𝑓 ≤ 1 and where 𝑀𝑆, 𝐾𝑆 , 𝑀𝐴 , 𝐶𝐴 and 𝐾𝐴 are structural
−1 ≤ 𝑔 ≤ 1 ) determine the locations of the inertia, structural stiffness, aerodynamic
points R and S respectively. inertia, aerodynamic damping and
aerodynamic stiffness matrices respectively
and 𝑞 is time dependent displacement matrix.
Substituting {𝑞} = {𝑞�} exp(𝑝𝜏) where
𝜏 = 𝑈𝑡⁄𝑏 in equation (3) and expressing
𝑝 = 𝑖𝑘 (i.e. simple harmonic motion in
excitation) in the coefficient of aerodynamic
inertia and aerodynamic damping matrices,
equation (3) can be reduced as:
2
�𝑝2 𝑀𝑆 + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴 + 𝑈𝑏 (−𝑖𝑘)𝐶𝐴 + 𝑈𝑏 2(𝐾𝑆 −
Figure 1. Schematic of an airfoil system 𝐾𝐴 )�{𝑞�} ={0} (4)
The Lagrange’s equations with virtual work The coefficient of {𝑞�} in equation (4) is
principle are used to derive the equation of called flutter determinant (i.e. eigenvalue
motion of an aeroelastic system. The problem with 𝑝 as complex eigenvalue and
equation of motion can be written as: {𝑞�} as eigenvector).
𝑚ℎ̈ + 𝑚𝑏𝑥𝛼 𝛼̈ + 𝐾ℎ ℎ = −𝐿 (1𝑎) PERTURBATION APPROACH
𝐼_𝛼 𝛼 ̈ + 𝑚𝑏𝑥_𝛼 ℎ ̈ + 𝐾_𝛼 𝛼 The mathematical stochastic model of an
= 𝑀_(1 ⁄ 4) + 𝐿(□(1/2 airfoil is generated by using first order
+ 𝑓))𝑏 (1𝑏) perturbation method. In perturbation
where 𝑥𝛼 = 𝑔 − 𝑓 . 𝐾ℎ and 𝐾𝛼 are linear approach the field variables are expanded via
heave and pitch stiffness respectively. Taylor series which can be written as:
𝑚, 𝐼𝛼 and b are the mass of an airfoil, mass 𝜕𝛽
𝛽 = 𝛽0 + | 𝛿𝑟 (5)
𝜕𝑟 𝑟=𝑟0
1212
Probabilistic Flutter Analysis: A Perturbation Approach
where 𝛽0 , 𝑟 are the mean field quantities and 𝑎 = 𝑓. 𝑏. Table 1 gives the descriptions of all
random parameters respectively. The the random parameters considered in this
derivatives of the field quantity are evaluated analysis with their mean and standard
at the mean value of the random variables. deviation values.
Now applying first order perturbation
The variation of mean frequency and
technique to equation (4) via Taylor series
damping (𝑝0 𝑉 = 𝜔Γ𝛼+𝑖𝜔Ω𝛼 ) with various flow
expansion considering parameters
𝑝, 𝑀𝑆 , 𝐾𝑆 , 𝑀𝐴 , 𝐶𝑆 , 𝐾𝐴 and 𝑏 and separate speed is shown in Figure. (2). Here, negative
zeroth order and first order term, the of Γ is called modal damping and Ω is modal
equations are obtained as follows: frequency. The dimensionless mean flutter
0
speed ( 𝑉 ) and the corresponding reduced
�(𝑝0 )2 𝑀𝑆0 + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴0 + 𝑏𝑈 (−𝑖𝑘)𝐶𝐴0 + frequency (𝑘) obtained from the analysis are
�𝑏0 �
2 7.998 and 0.0626 respectively. The present
𝑈2
(𝐾𝑆0 − 𝐾𝐴0 )� {𝑞� 0 } = {0} (6) results are found to be very close to those
0 reported by Li and Yang (2010).
�(𝑝0 )2 𝑀𝑆0 + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴0 + 𝑏𝑈 (−𝑖𝑘)𝐶𝐴0 +
2
�𝑏0 � 𝑟 𝑟
𝑈 2 (𝐾𝑆0 − 𝐾𝐴0 )� �𝑞� ′ � + 2(𝑝)′ 𝑝0 𝑀𝑆0 {𝑞� 0 } =
𝑟 𝑟
− �(𝑝0 )2 𝑀𝑆′ + 𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴′ +
𝑟 𝑟
(𝑏)′ 𝑟
𝑈
(−𝑖𝑘)�(𝑏)′ 𝐶𝐴0 + 𝑏 0 𝐶𝐴′ � +
𝑟 𝑟 𝑟
1
𝑈2
�(𝑏 0 )2 �𝐾𝑆′ − 𝐾𝐴′ � + 2𝑏 0 (𝑏)′ {𝐾𝑆0 −
𝐾𝐴0 }�� {𝑞� 0 } (7)
Multiplying equation (7) by adjoint

eigenvector [Ji-ming and Wei, 1987], {𝑋� 0 }𝑇 ,
𝑟
the derivative of eigen value (𝑝)′ can be Figure 2. Dimensionless mean frequency
obtained as: and modal damping at various
𝑟 dimensionless speed
(𝑝)′ =
2 𝑟 𝑟
(𝑏) ′𝑟 𝑟 𝑟 VALIDATION
𝑇 �𝑝0 � 𝑀𝑆′ +𝑘 2 𝑀𝐴
′
+ 𝑈 (−𝑖𝑘)�(𝑏)′ 𝐶𝐴0 +𝑏 0 𝐶𝐴′ �+ 0
�𝑋� 0 � � ��𝑞� �
1 0 2 ′𝑟 ′𝑟 0 ′𝑟 0 0 Figure (3) shows the effect of C.O.V of mass
𝑈 2 ��𝑏 � �𝐾𝑆 −𝐾𝐴 �+2𝑏 (𝑏) �𝐾𝑆 −𝐾𝐴 ��
− on the frequency and damping at V = 6.
2𝑝0 {𝑋� 0 }𝑇 𝑀𝑆0 {𝑞� 0 }
Figure (3) shows that the COV of frequency
(8) and damping obtained from the perturbation
The mean and variance of the eigenvalue can approach are in close agreement those
be expressed by assuming random parameters obtained from MCS approach.
to be independent as:
𝑟 2
𝑝 = 𝑝0 and 𝑉𝑎𝑟 (𝑝) = �(𝑝)′ � × 𝑉𝑎𝑟(𝑟)
(9)

The values of dimensionless parameters for
the analysis are taken as 𝑥𝛼 = 0.25, 𝑓 =
−0.5, 𝑟𝛼 = 0.5 (radius of gyration), 𝜔�= Figure 3. The effect of variation in COV
𝜔ℎ 𝑚 of mass on (a.) the real and (b.)
0.2 = 𝜔𝛼, 𝜇 = 100 = 𝜋𝜌 𝑏2 (at sea level),
∞ imaginary part of p at V = 6
𝑏 = 0.25𝑚, 𝐼𝛼 = 0.3756 𝐾𝑔. 𝑚2 , 𝑥 = 𝑥𝛼 . 𝑏,
1213
Kumar et al.
Table 1 Various random parameters and their uncertain values [Li and Yang, 2010]
𝜎
Parameters Distribution �)
Mean (𝜇 𝐶𝑉 = 𝜎
�
𝜇
𝑏 normal 0.25 0.2 % 0.0005
𝑥 normal 0.0625 2% 0.00125
𝑚 normal 24.04 0.2% 0.04808
𝜌∞ normal 0.7364 (H = 5 km) 1.5% 0.011046
𝑎 normal -0.125 1% 0.00125
Pettit C L 2004 Uncertainty quantification in
CONCLUSION
aeroelasticity: recent results and research
In this paper, the probabilistic flutter analysis challenges Journal of Aircraft 41(5)
of an airfoil (with structural mass as 1217-1229.
uncertain) has been performed using Beran S P Pettit C L and Millman D R 2006
Perturbation approach and MCS considering Uncertainty quantification of limit-cycle
unsteady aerodynamics and modal flutter oscillations Journal of Computational
analysis method. The results obtained from Physics 217 217-247.
the Perturbation approach is found to be quite Ueda T 2005 Aeroelastic analysis
close to those obtained from MCS. considering structural uncertainty
Aviation 9(1) 3-7
REFERENCES Castravete S C and Ibrahim R A 2008 Effect
Theodorsen T 1935 General theory of of stiffness uncertainties on the flutter of
aerodynamic Instability and the a cantilever beam AIAA Journal 46(4)
mechanism of flutter NACA TR 496. 925-935.
Hassig H J 1971 An approximate true Li Y and Yang Z 2010 Probabilistic flutter
damping solution of the flutter equation analysis and risk assessment of an airfoil
by determinant iteration Journal of 27TH International Congress of The
Aircraft 8 885-889. Aeronautical Sciences (ICAS 2010) 1-6.
Irani S and Sazesh S 2013 A new flutter Ji-ming L and Wei W 1987 First order
speed analysis method using stochastic perturbation solution to the complex
approach Journal of Fluids and eigen values Applied Mathematics and
Structures 40 105-115. Mechanics (English Edition) 8(6) June
1987.
1214
ICCMS2016
LAYERWISE SOLUTION FOR NONLINEAR STATIC AND DYNAMIC

STABILITY OF LAMINATED COMPOSITE PLATES USING B-SPLINE
SUSMITA MONDAL* and RAMACHANDRA L. S.
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur, India.
Abstract: A simple layer wise finite element formulation based on B-spline basis
function is presented in this paper. Here, the variation of out of plane displacements is
modeled by linear Lagrange interpolation and inplane variation of displacements is
interpolated by B-spline scaling function. The geometric nonlinearity and proportional
damping are considered in the model. The buckling and postbuckling response of
symmetric cross ply laminated composite plate subjected to uniform and concentrated
inplane mechanical edge loadings are reported. The dynamic instability regions are
traced by the periodic solutions with periods T and 2T to Mathieu type differential
equations. Moreover, the nature of linear and nonlinear response in stable and unstable
regions is studied.
Keywords: Buckling; Postbuckling; Dynamic instability; Layerwise finite element.
INTRODUCTION (3D) problems. In the present formulation,

spline based finite elements are used to
For efficient use of composite laminates, a
study the nonlinear static and dynamic
good understanding of their response under
stability of laminated composite plates. The
various loadings and boundary conditions
structural model is based on the generalized
are essential. Modeling of laminated
layer wise plate theory of Reddy (1987)
composites with equivalent single layer
where variation of out of plane
(ESL) theory is suitable for analyzing thin
displacements are modeled by linear
laminates to determine their global response
Lagrange interpolation functions and inplane
but not adequate for thick layered plates.
variation is interpolated by B-spline scaling
Moreover, ESL theories results in a
function. The Von Kármán type geometric
continuous transverse strains across
nonlinearity and Rayleigh damping are
thickness, which should be discontinuous at
considered in the model. Employing Fourier
the interfaces between layers of dissimilar
series, the dynamic instability regions are
materials. Hence, for the improved
computed.
representation of inplane and transverse
shear deformations and layerwise MATERIALS AND METHODS
representation of inplane displacements, a
layerwise plate theory is required. Spline B-spline or basis spline functions are
based finite elements with fewer degrees of constructed in a closed interval [0, 1]. The
freedoms are observed to possess higher knot sequence in a standard interval for B-
accuracy and good convergence properties spline scaling function of order m and scale j
than traditional finite elements for two is formed by dividing the interval [0, 1] into
dimensional (2D) and three dimensional 2𝑗 segments and adding (m-1) virtual knots
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: susmitamondal21@gmail.com 1215

Mondal and Ramchandra
at each of the two end points 0 and 1. These Considering inextensibility in transverse
results in a group of (2𝑗 + 2𝑚 − 1) knots normal direction, the displacement
𝑗
𝑗 2 +𝑚−1 components(𝑢1 , 𝑢2 , 𝑢3 ) along global
arranged in a sequence of {𝜉𝑘 }𝑘=−𝑚+1 with coordinate directions (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) at any generic
m-tuple knots at 0 and 1. Now, B-spline point in the laminate can be expressed as
functions can be generated by mth order
𝑁
divided difference of the function (𝜉 𝑗 −
𝑚−1 𝑢1 (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑢(𝑥, 𝑦) + ∑ 𝑢𝐼 (𝑥, 𝑦)Ф𝐼 (𝑧)
𝜉)+ with respect to 𝜉 𝑗 as, 𝐼=1
𝑁
𝒋 𝒋 𝒋
𝑩𝒎,𝒌 = (𝝃𝒌+𝒎 − 𝝃𝒌 ) ×
𝒋 𝒋 𝒋
𝑢2 (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑣(𝑥, 𝑦) + ∑ 𝑣 𝐼 (𝑥, 𝑦)Ф𝐼 (𝑧)
[𝝃𝒌 , 𝝃𝒌+𝟏 , … … . . , 𝝃𝒌+𝒎 ]𝝃𝒋 (𝝃𝒋 − 𝝃)𝒎−𝟏
+ (1) 𝐼=1
𝑗 𝑢3 (𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑤(𝑥, 𝑦) (3)

B-spline functions𝐵𝑚,𝑘 (𝜉) constructed in the
interval [0, 1] gives the basis function
𝑗
𝛹𝑚,𝑘 (𝜉) for the compactly supported B-
spline wavelet on interval. 2D B-spline basis
function constructed by using kronecker
product of 1D B-spline basis function along
two perpendicular directions [Figure 1] can
be expressed as,
𝛹 = 𝛹1 ⨂𝛹2 (2)
Figure 2. Typical laminated composite

plate
Where, (𝑢, 𝑣, 𝑤) denotes the displacement

components of a point (𝑥, 𝑦, 0) on the
middle plane of the laminate, 𝑢𝐼 and 𝑣 𝐼 are
its relative value at Ith numerical layer
compared to the middle plane and Ф𝐼 is the
interpolation function along transverse
direction, which is considered in the present
case as linear Lagrange interpolation
Figure 1. 2D cubic B-spline basis
function.
functions of scale j=2
The finite element model is developed by
In the present study laminated composite
interpolating field variables (𝑢, 𝑣, 𝑤) and
plate composed of n orthotropic layers are
(𝑢𝐼 , 𝑣 𝐼 )by using B-spline scaling functions
considered as shown in Figure 2. Nodes
along thickness direction are located at each in the inplane direction and Lagrange
layer interfaces, denoted by numerical layer, interpolation function for out of plane
resulting in number of numerical layers N to direction as,
be equal to (n+1).
1216
Layerwise Solution for Nonlinear Static and Dynamic Stability of Laminated Composite Plates using B-
Spline Finite Element Method
𝑚
concentrated inplane edge loading [Figure
∑ 𝑢𝑖 𝛹𝑖 𝑚 3]. The nondimensional critical buckling
𝑖=1
∑ 𝑢𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 load 𝜆𝑐𝑟 = 𝑃𝑎/𝐷 of a thin (𝑎/ℎ = 100)
𝑢 𝑚
𝐼 simply supported isotropic plate subjected to
{𝑣} = ∑ 𝑣𝑖 𝛹𝑖 ; {𝑢 𝐼 } = 𝑖=1
𝑚 central concentrated load is obtained from
𝑤 𝑣
𝑖=1
∑ 𝑣𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 present formulation as 25.134, which
𝑚
{ 𝑖=1 } compares well with reference [Daripa and
∑ 𝑤𝑖 𝛹𝑖 Singha, 2009] value of 25.674.
{ 𝑖=1 }
𝑚 A thick (𝑎/ℎ = 10)simply supported
∑ 𝑈𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 laminated plate [0/90/0/90/0] subjected to a
𝑖=1 pair of compressive edge load P at a
𝑚
𝑈𝐼 distance c from bottom edge is analyzed and
{ 𝑉𝐼 } = ∑ 𝑉𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 non-dimensional critical buckling loads 𝑃̅ =
𝑊𝐼 𝑖=1 𝑃𝑐𝑟 𝑎/𝐸2 ℎ3 are presented in Table 1 for
𝑚
different positions of concentrated load.
∑ 𝑊𝑖𝐼 𝛹𝑖 Material properties considered for the
{ 𝑖=1 } present analysis are,𝐸1 = 3𝐸2 , 𝐺12 = 0.6𝐸2 ,
(4) 𝐺13 = 𝐺23 = 0.5𝐸2 , 𝛾12 = 0.25.
RESULTS
In the first part, convergence study and
accuracy of the present element is validated
by comparing results with the following
benchmark problems, (i) static analysis of
laminated plate to determine stress
distribution across thickness of plate, (ii)
computation of critical buckling loads.
Distributions of stresses are determined
along transverse direction of a thick
composite plate using present method which
are found to be in good agreement with 3D
elasticity solutions of Pagano, 1967. The Figure 3. Plate subjected to
validation results are not presented here for concentrated inplane loading
the sake of brevity. The, convergence study Table 1. Non-dimensional critical buckling
is done with increasing element number as load 𝑃̅ = 𝑃𝑐𝑟 𝑎/𝐸2 ℎ3 for various positions of
well as scale of spline element. The point load
numerical studies show that only a single
element with 2×2 scale of cubic B-spline 𝑐/𝑎
𝑏/𝑎
function gives converged results. The effects 1/6 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6
of various inplane loadings and boundary 0.5 2.572 2.319 1.802 2.319 2.572
conditions on critical buckling loads and 1 5.474 3.749 3.063 3.749 5.474
post buckling equilibrium paths of a 1.5 7.073 4.063 3.636 4.063 7.073
laminated composite plate are examined. 2 7.240 4.938 4.695 4.938 7.240
Two types of loading condition are
considered here, uniformly distributed Postbuckling equilibrium paths of the cross
compressive in-plane loading and ply [0˚/90˚/0˚/90˚/0˚] laminated composite
1217
Mondal and Ramchandra
plate (𝑎/ℎ = 100) subjected to uniformly CONCLUSION

distributed and point loads are reported
A layerwise finite element formulation with
using present method. The transverse and
B-spline basis function has been presented
inplane stress distributions of cross ply
for the static and dynamic stability analysis
composite plate under two different inplane
of laminated composite plate. The method is
loading are reported. Variation of non-
capable of capturing exact stress distribution
dimensional maximum out of plane
across plate thickness. The present method
displacement (wmax/h) with non-dimensional
gives converged results for buckling loads
load parameter (𝜆 = 𝑁𝑎2 /𝐸2 ℎ3 )for
and post-buckling path with only one
distributed load is plotted in Figure 4 (a) and
element.
with non-dimensional load parameter 𝜆 =
𝑃𝑐𝑟 𝑎/𝐸2 ℎ3 for point load is plotted in Figure REFERENCES
4 (b).
Cetkovic M and Vuksanovic D 2009
Bending free vibrations and buckling of
laminated composite and sandwich
plates using a layerwise displacement
model Composite Structures 88 219–
227.
Daripa R and Singha M K 2009 Stability
analysis of composite plates under
localized in-plane load Thin-Walled
(a) Postbuckling path for distributed loading composite laminates in cylindrical
bending Journal of Composite
Materials 3 398–411.
Reddy JN 1987A generalization of two-
dimensional theories of laminated
composite plates Commun Appl Numer
Methods 3 173–180.
Reddy JN 1989 A plate bending element
based on a generalized laminated plate
theory Int. Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering 28 2275–2292.
Yang Z Chen X Zhang X and He Z 2013
Free vibration and buckling analysis of
(b) Postbuckling path for concentrated load
plates using B-spline wavelet on the
interval Mindlin element Applied
Figure 4.Effect of boundary conditions Mathematical Modelling 37 3449–
on Postbuckling equilibrium path 3466.
1218
ICCMS2016
STRENGTH OF FIXED ENDED CIRCULAR, SQUARE, AND FLAT

OVAL HOLLOW LDSS SLENDER COLUMNS UNDER AXIAL
COMPRESSION
SACHIDANANDA K.* and SINGH D.K.
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India.
Abstract: Finite element (FE) analyses were performed using ABAQUS, to compare
the strength of Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS) fixed ended circular, square and
flat oval (with semi-circular curves) hollow slender columns, keeping the material
cross-sectional areas same. The dimensions considered were l (flat length) of 50 mm,
r (curvature radius) of 50 mm, w (distance between flat plates) of 100 mm; radius of
65.89 mm; and breadth of 103.5 mm for the flat-oval, circular and square cross
sections respectively; and thickness of 20 mm. The heights of the columns were
varied from 1000-3500 mm. Based on the FE study, it was observed that load capacity
or strength of the columns are in the order circular > square > flat oval sections for all
the heights modelled. It was also seen that the difference between values of load
capacity between flat-oval and circular or square increases with increasing column
height.
Keywords: ABAQUS; Slender; Flat oval; Circle; Square; fixed; LDSS.
INTRODUCTION ~1.5% (e.g. grade EN 1.4162) and improved

mechanical strength as compared to ferritic
In the construction industry, the use of
and austenitic stainless steel, it is now
stainless steel structural members has seen an
possible to economise the stainless steel
increase, due to several interesting properties
construction [Theofanous and Gardner, 2009;
viz., good corrosion resistance, higher
Patton and Singh, 2013]. As such, increasing
strength to weight ratio, high ductility, good
research interests (although limited) on LDSS
impact resistance, good fire resistance,
structural members can be seen in the recent
durability, recyclability etc. in comparison to
past. Many of the studies were made on
the traditional carbon steel. In addition, its
hollow tubular sections of square
aesthetic appearance due to smooth, uniform
[Theofanous and Gardner, 2009, Patton and
and glossy finish has prompted architects and
Singh, 2013], oval [Zhu and Young, 2012;
engineers to adopt stainless steel for exposed
Sachidananda and Singh, 2014, Sachidananda
structures. Still, the use to stainless steel can
and Singh, 2015], circular [Ashraf et al.,
be observed to be limited and not very
2008]. However, a comparison of the strength
widespread. This restrain is mainly due to
of these three LDSS cross-sections viz.,
higher initial material cost, although it has
circular, square and flat-oval appears to be
been demonstrated that the whole life cycle
lacking, especially for slender columns.
cost of stainless steel can be economical as
Hence in this paper, the load capacities of
compared to carbon steel [Gardner, 2005;
LDSS circular, square and flat-oval hollow
Theofanous and Gardner; 2009]. However,
slender columns under axial compression
with the introduction of a new breed of
have been presented using FE analyses.
stainless steel called Lean duplex stainless
steel (LDSS) with lower nickel content of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: khwairakpam@iitg.ernet.in 1219

Sachidananda and Singh
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING and t represent flat plate length, curvature

radius, width between flat plates, height and
FE modelling of the slender hollow LDSS
thickness of column, respectively. It may be
columns was accomplished using the general
noted that, all those cross-sections that were
purpose FE software, Abaqus (2009). The
considered fall under Class I section (EN
dimensions considered were l (flat length) of
1993-1-4, 2006).
50 mm, r (curvature radius) of 50 mm, w
(distance between flat plates) of 100 mm; P
radius of 65.89 mm; and breadth of 103.5
mm for the flat-oval, circular and square
cross sections respectively; and thickness of
20 mm. The cross sectional dimensions were δ
so chosen to enforce same material cross
sectional area. The heights of the columns
were varied from 1000-3500 mm. Typical S4R
boundary condition of the fixed ended elements
column is shown in Figure 1, where the h
column ends was fixed except for the vertical
displacement of the loaded end. The FE
modelling adopted here followed those
widely adopted and verified procedures
[Patton and Singh, 2013, Ellobody and
Young, 2007, Zhu and Young, 2012]. Four
noded shell elements (S4R) were used to
mesh the geometry (Figure 1). Typical mesh
size of 10 x 10 mm with an aspect ratio of 1
was used for the FE modelling. Local as well
as global imperfections were incroporated Figure 1. Typical boundary conditions
with an imperfection magnitudes of t/100 and and FE mesh.
h/1500 respectively [Theofanous and
Gardner, 2009; Patton and Singh, 2013]. The
material properties of LDSS were taken as Pu h
Young's modulus (E) = 197200 MPa, and Exp, h =1200
800 (Theofanous and
yield stress (σ0.2) = 657 MPa, based on an
,h = Gardner, 2009)
earlier study [Theofanous and Gardner, 600
2009]. Figure 2 shows a comparison of the
P (kN)
present FE and experimental results from 400

Theofanous and Gardner (2009). A good
agreement can be seen between the present 200
FE modelling approach and the experimental
results, and hence the validation. 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
PARAMETRIC STUDY
A total of 12 FE models have been analysed δlat (mm)
with different cross-sectional shapes viz.,
circular, square and flat oval, maintaining l/r Figure 2. Validation of P (load) vs δlat
= 1. The nomenclatures of the specimens (lateral displacement at mid-height) for
follow the patterns, l103.5h2000t20, square 80x80x4 (h = 1200 mm,
r65.89h2000t20 and l50w100r50h2000t20 for Theofanous & Gardner, 2009).
square, circle and flat oval, where l, r, w, h
1220
Strength of Fixed Ended Square, Flat Oval and Circular Tubular LDSS Slender Columns Under Axial
Compression
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Pu/Pufo is ~16%, while it is ~2% at h = 1000

mm.
Variation of P (load) with δ (axial
displacement) are shown in Figure 3 for
r65.89 (circular), l103.5 (square) and
l50w100r50 (flat oval) sections (h = 2500).
6000 Pu r65.89
r65.89
(a) l103.5
l103.5
5000 l50w100r50
l50w100r50
4000
P (kN)
3000
2000
1000 δu
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 (a) (b) (c)
δ (mm)
Figure 3. P vs δ for (h = 2500 mm) (Circular) (Square) (Flat oval)
It is seen that load capacity (Pu) decreases in Figure 4. Von-Mises superimposed on

the order: circular > square > flat oval deformed shape for a) circle, b) square
sections, so also the axial displacement at Pu and c) flat oval for h = 2500 mm (at Pu).
(i.e. δu). At first, this can be related to the
order of moment of inertia of the cross- 7500 r65.89t20
r65.89t20
section about weaker axis viz., circular > l130.5t20
l103.5t20
square > flat oval sections, thereby l50w100r50t20
l50w100r50t20
influencing the flexural behaviour. The plots 5500
Pu (kN)
of von-Mises contour superimposed on

deformed shape are shown in Figure 4, at
3500
ultimate load for h = 2500 mm. From Figure
4, it can be seen that the highly stressed
region (or yielded region) is of the order: 1500
circular > square > flat oval sections, 0 2000 4000
agreeing with the load capacity depicted in h (mm)
that order. Pu is found to decrease with
increase in height as shown in Figure 5, but Figure 5. Pu vs h.
the decrease rate differs for different sections
showing ~36 % for circular and square CONCLUSION
sections, while it is ~44% for oval section as
The following conclusions have been derived
h changes from 1000 to 3500 mm. Variation
based on the comparison of LDSS slender
of Pu/Pufo (Pufo is Pu for flat-oval section)
hollow columns of flat oval, square and
with h is shown in Figure 6. From Figure 6, it
circular sections having the same material
can be observed that the value of Pu/Pufo
consumption.
increases as the height increases, indicating
that the difference of load capacity between 1) The load capacity (Pu) decreases in the
flat-oval with circular or square increases order: circular > square > flat oval
with increasing column height. At the highest sections.
length considered (h =3500 mm), the value of
1221
Sachidananda and Singh
2) Pu is found to decrease with increase in Sachidananda K and Singh K D 2014

height. Strength comparison of fixed ended
3) The difference in Pu values between flat- square, flat oval and circular stub LDSS
oval and circular or square increases with columns Proceeding of 9th Biennial
increasing column height. Conference on Structural Engineering
Convention (SEC 2014) 2417-2423 IIT
1.20 Delhi India December 2014
r65.89t20
r65.89t20 Sachidananda K and Singh K D 2015
1.16
l130.5t20
l130.5t20 Numerical study of fixed ended lean
1.12 duplex stainless steel (LDSS) flat oval
Pu / Pufo
hollow stub column under pure axial

1.08 compression Thin Walled Structures 96
1.04 105–119
Theofanous M and Gardner L 2009 Testing
1.00 and numerical modelling of lean duplex
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 stainless steel hollow section columns.
h (mm) Engineering Structures 31 12 3047–
3058
Figure 6. Pu/Pufo vs h.
Zhu J and Young B 2012 Design of cold-
REFERENCES formed steel oval hollow section
columns Journal of Constructional Steel
Ashraf M Gardner L and Nethercot D A 2008 Research 71 26-37
Resistance of stainless steel CHS
columns based on cross-section
deformation capacity Journal of
Constructional Steel Research 64 962–
970
ABAQUS 2009 Version 6.9-EF1 Hibbitt
Karlsson and Sorensen Inc USA
EN 1993-1-4 Eurocode 3 2006 Design of
steel structures-Part 1.4 General rules-
Supplementary rules for stainless steel
Ellobody E and Young B 2007 Investigation
of cold-formed stainless steel non-
slender circular hollow section columns
Steel and Composite Structures 7 321-
337
Gardner L 2005 The use of stainless steel in
structures. Progress in structural
engineering and materials, 7 45-55
Patton M L and Singh K D 2013 Buckling of
fixed-ended lean duplex stainless steel
hollow columns of square , L- , T- , and
þ -shaped sections under pure axial
compression — a finite element study
Thin Walled Structures 63 106–116
1222
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF CROSS-SECTIONAL SHAPE ON COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH OF LDSS STUB COLUMNS
BRAHMA J.1, SINGH T.G.*2and SINGH K. D.2
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Central Institute of Technology, Kokrajhar, India
2
Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, India
Abstract: Numerical analyses were performed using Finite Element (FE) package
Abaqus, to estimate the load carrying capacity of Lean Duplex Stainless Steel (LDSS)
stub columns of various regular polygonal cross-sectional shapes viz., triangle, square,
pentagon, hexagon, heptagon, octagon, Nonagon and Decagon, considering same
material consumption. The geometrical parameters used in the analyses were height =
600 mm, thickness = 5 mm, and cross sectional perimeter = 800 mm. Based on the FE
study, it was observed that, the ultimate load capacity increased with increasing
number of sides from 3 (or triangle) to 7 (or heptagon), beyond which there appeared
to be plateauing effect from 8 (or octagon) on wards. The predictions from EN 1993-
1-4 (2006) were found to be conservative and hence applicable for LDSS stub
columns.
Keywords: Abaqus; Stub column; Polygon; LDSS; Codal Comparison.
INTRODUCTION In addition, LDSS also offers good

weldability, fracture properties in addition to
Stainless steel structural members have
its enhanced strength, as compared to ferritic
attracted special attention, from engineers
and austenitic stainless steels(e.g. Theofanous
and architects, particularly for exposed
and Gardner, 2009; Patton and Singh, 2013,
architectural applications. This attraction has
Sachidananda and Singh, 2015).Recent
primarily been due to their augmented
reports on LDSS include studies on hollow
properties such as improved corrosion
tubular column sections of square
resistance, strength to weight ratio, impact
(Theofanous and Gardner, 2009), oval (Zhu
response, fire resistance, recyclability etc.
and Young, 2012; Sachidananda and Singh,
Despite such enhanced properties, their use in
2014, Sachidananda and Singh, 2015),
the construction industry has always been
circular (Ashraf and Gardner, 2008), L-, T-,
limited, as compared to the traditional carbon
+- sections (Patton and Singh, 2013),
steels. Main reason for this hold back, is their
subjected to axial compression. In this study,
high initial material cost, due to its high
the effects of cross-sectional shapes on the
nickel content (~8%). However, due to the
structural behaviour of LDSS stub columns
production of Lean Duplex Stainless Steel
subjected to axial compression are presented
(LDSS) with nickel content as low as ~1.5%
using finite element (FE) analyses,
(e.g. EN 1.4162 grade), it has now become
considering regular polygonal shapes such as
viable to cut down cost significantly on the
triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon,
stainless steel construction, if LDSS is opted.
heptagon, octagon, nonagon, decagon,
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: tekcham@iitg.ernet.in 1223

Brahma et al.
keeping same material cross sectional area 0.2% proof strength, σ cr is the elastic
(or material consumption). For comparison, buckling stress.Young’s modulus (E) =
results of circular LDSS cross section are 197200 MPa, and σ 0.2 = 657 MPa were
also included. FE results are then compared
considered for the LDSS material modelling
with EN 1993-1-4 (2006).
(Theofanous and Gardner, 2009). The present
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING FE modelling procedure was validated
against the experimental data (Theofanous
Numerical analyses of the stub polygonal and and Gardner, 2009) obtained for a similar
circular LDSS hollow columns were study on square hollow stub column. Figure 2
performed with the help of general purpose shows typical cross-sectional shapes used in
FE package, Abaqus (2009).9 stub columns the analyses and nomenclature used were
of thickness (t) 5 mm and height (H) 600 mm TRI, SQR, PEN, HEX, HEP, OCT, NAN,
were considered for the study. Eight regular DEC, CIR for triangle, square, pentagon,
polygons (viz., triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon, heptagon, octagon, nonagon,
hexagon, heptagon, octagon, nonagon and decagon and circular cross-sections
decagon) and one circular cross sections were respectively.
considered, such that the perimeters are equal
P (load)
(=800 mm), and hence the same material
cross-section. This condition was achieved by
considering side lengths of 266.6 mm,
200mm, 160 mm, 133.3 mm, 114.2 mm, 100
mm, 88.8 mm and 80mm for triangular,
square, pentagonal, hexagonal, heptagonal,
octagonal, nonagonal and decagonal; and
radius of 127.3 mm for circular sections
respectively. The FE modelling procedure
adopted herein follows those widely accepted
shell finite element modelling for similar type Figure 1. Typical boundary conditions
of studies (see e.g. Zhu and Young, 2012, and FE mess (triangular cross section)
Patton and Singh, 2012, Young and
A B C
Ellobody, 2007). Typical boundary
conditions of the numerical model with FE
mesh are shown in Figure 1. The bottom end
of the column was fixed supported while only
D E F
longitudinal translation was allowed at the
loaded end. Four nodded shell elements
(S4R) were selected for meshing the
geometry. Typical mesh size consisted of ~10
x 10 mm to 10 x 15 with aspect ratio of ~1 to
G H I
1.5, and was decided based on mesh
convergence analyses. Local imperfections
were incorporated into the model based on
imperfection amplitude
Figure 2. Typical cross-sectional
Wo = (0.023 * σ 0.2 * t ) / σ cr ,where σ 0.2 is the
shapes.
1224
Effect of Cross-Sectional Shape on Compressive Strength of LDSS Stub Columns
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION which there appears to be plateauing

effect from 8 (or octagon) on wards.
Variation of load (P) with axial shortening or
2) P u calculated using EN 1993-1-4, 2006
deformation (δ) is presented in Figure 3. It
is found to be conservative.
can be seen from Figure 3 that the ultimate
load capacity (P u ) increases with increasing
NAN OCT DEC
number of sides from 3 (or triangle) to 7 (or CIR HEP HEX
heptagon), beyond which there appears to be PEN SQR TRI
3500
plateauing effect from 8 (or octagon) on Pu
3000
wards. Further, the rate of increase appears to
2500
be stronger when the number of sides is
Load, Pu (kN)
2000
lesser (~≤ 7). The deformation at P u , i.e. δ u
1500
also increases with increasing number of
polygonal sides until octagon, and for higher 1000
number of sides (e.g. nonagon and decagon), 500

δu
there appears to be no significant change in 0
the value of δ u (including the post-P u load- 0 5 10 15
Displacement, δ (mm)
deformation behaviour).In Figure 4, variation
of P u with number of sides is shown. The Figure 3. Load vs axial deformation
corresponding predictions from EN 1993-1-4
(2006) are also plotted for comparison. It can
be seen from Figure 4 that, the prediction 3500
from EN 1993-1-4 (2006) are conservative 3000
and applicable for LDSS stub columns. As 2500
Load, Pu (KN)
per EN 1993-1-4 (2006), nonagon and 2000

decagon fall under Class 3 sections (making 1500 EN 1993-1-4
the full cross sectional areas fully effective), 1000
FE Euro
hence, nonagon and decagon predicted same 500 circle
values of P u , however, the circular section is 0

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
found to be in Class 4, and hence the lower
No. of sides
predicted value of P u . From Figure 4, it can
be observed that significant enhancement in
P u can be obtained by increasing the number
Figure 4.Load vs the no. of polygonal
of sides for Class 4 sections.
sides
CONCLUSION
REFERENCES
Based on the FE analyses of LDSS hollow
ABAQUS 2009 Version 6.9-EF1 Hibbitt
sections of regular polygonal shapes,
Karlsson and Sorensen Inc USA
considering same material consumption,
under axial compression, the following Ashraf M Gardner L and Nethercot D A 2008
conclusions have been obtained: Resistance of stainless steel CHS
columns based on cross-section
1) Ultimate load capacity (P u ) increases deformation capacity Journal of
with increasing number of sides from 3 Constructional Steel Research64 962–
(or triangle) to 7 (or heptagon), beyond 970
1225
Brahma et al.
EN 1993-1-4 Eurocode 3 2006 Design of columns Journal of Constructional Steel

steel structures-Part 1.4 General rules- Research71 26-37.
Supplementary rules for stainless steel.
Gardner L 2005 The use of stainless steel in
structures Progress in structural
engineering and materials7 45-55.
modelling of lean duplex stainless steel
hollow columns of Square L- T- and +-
shaped cross sections under pure axial
compression Thin Walled Structures53
1-8.
Patton M L and Singh K D 2013 Buckling of
fixed-ended lean duplex stainless steel
hollow columns of square L- T- and +-
shaped sections under pure axial
compression — a finite element study
Thin Walled Structures63 106–116.
Sachidananda K and Singh K D 2014
Strength comparison of fixed ended
square, flat oval and circular stub LDSS
columns Proceeding of 9th Biennial
Conference on Structural Engineering
Convention (SEC 2014) 2417-2423 IIT
Delhi India December 2014.
Theofanous M and Gardner L 2009 Testing
and numerical modelling of lean duplex
stainless steel hollow section columns
Engineering Structures31 12 3047–
3058.
Theofanous M and Gardner L 2010
Experimental and numerical studies of
lean duplex stainless steel beams
Journal of Constructional Steel
Research 66816–825.
Trahair N S Bradford M A Nethercot D A
Gardner L 2010 The Behaviour and
Design of Steel Structures to EC3Taylor
& FrancisOxon UK.
Young B and Ellobody E 2007 Design of
cold-formed steel unequal angle
compression members Thin Walled
Structures45 330-338.
Zhu J and Young B 2012 Design of cold-
formed steel oval hollow section
1226
ICCMS2016
STATIC AND FREE VIBRATION ANALYSIS OF FUNCTIONALLY

GRADED PLATES: MECHANICAL, THERMAL AND
HYGROTHERMAL LOADING
DHINDE* M. and DESAI Y. M.
Civil engineering, IIT Bombay, India.
Abstract: Current paper considers functionally graded plates having mechanical

properties varying along the depth. The solutions are given for static mechanical,
hygrothermal loading conditions and free vibration. The closed form solutions are
obtained by using Navier’s technique. The boundary conditions and equations of
equilibrium are derived using principle of virtual work. The loading for static analysis
is simplified using Fourier series. Higher order shear and normal deformation theories
are used to incorporate approximately desired transverse shear stress profile.
Comparison of results using CPT, FSDT and HOST is done.
Key words: FGM; power law; exponential law; Navier’s Method; HSDT;
vibrational analysis.
INTRODUCTION which can consist of combination of ceramic

rich upper surface and metal rich lower
Functionally Graded Materials (FGM) were
surface and desired variation of properties in
first introduced as a mechanics concept in
between. The ceramic provide better thermal
1970’s, though their first practical use was
resistance resulting from its low thermal
not until 1984, when used in a space plane
conductivity whereas metal acts as
project. [Javaheri and Eslami, 2002] These
supporting agent and provides better
are formed by continuously varying the
adhesion with surface beneath.
structure and composition throughout the
volume. This helps in avoiding formation of MODELLING OF PROPERTY
distinguishable interfaces where sudden
GRADIENT
change in properties leading to failures can
occur. The property gradient in the material To simplify production processes as well as
can be produced by a position-dependent the analysis procedure we consider only
chemical composition, microstructure or varying along depth. This helps in obtaining
atomic order [Kieback et al., 2003]. closed form solution for given model also.
Majorly two patterns of property variations
FGMs are advancements over isotropic
are considered-
structures, alloys and composite structures.
As FGMs consist diverse properties, these POWER LAW
have high performance and are multi-
functional. Property gradient causes FGMs are considered to be formed by
reduction in stresses i.e., thermal stress, varying the volume content of constitutive
residual stress, stress concentration. Cracking materials continuously along depth. Thus the
or delamination is also avoided. Most properties are obtained by using Halpin-Tsai
common use of FGMs is as thermal barrier, rule of mixture.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: dhindemonica0@gmail.com 1227

Dhinde and Desai
𝑧 1 𝑘 (1) to the use of FGM. These also improve

𝑃(𝑧) = �(𝑃𝑐 − 𝑃𝑚 ) × � + � � + 𝑃𝑚
ℎ 2 thermo-mechanical characteristics of
materials while giving reduction in weight.
EXPONENTIAL LAW These can also delay initiation of plastic
yielding and failure.
This type of variation is considered mostly
while doing the fracture analysis. It considers GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND
the properties to vary according to the ANALYTICAL SOLUTION
exponential variation in relative depth,
2𝑧
The plate analysis is basically 3D analysis
(−𝜆(1−� �) (2)
𝑃(𝑧) = 𝑃𝑚 ∗ 𝑒 ℎ which is converted into 2D by considering
1 𝑃𝑐 assumptions regarding the thickness of plate.
(3)
𝜆= ln( ) Thus the thick plates are analysed as per 3D
2 𝑃𝑚
but thin plates can be approximated to be 2D.
P is mechanical property such as modulus of For thin plates we are using Fourier series
elasticity, density, thermal conductivity (K), expansion method to denote the displacement
mass diffusivity (D), and hygrothermal field for HOST 12.
expansion coefficients (α,β), whereas ‘k’ is
power law index. The subscript ‘m’ depicts The strain-displacement relations are
bottom surface properties and ‘c’ shows top obtained as per the theory of elasticity.
surface properties. Constitutive relations for isotropic
functionally graded plates are used to find the
For thermal analysis, we have also equilibrium equations by considering the
considered here that mechanical properties principle of minimum potential energy or
may also vary with respect to temperature. virtual work for static problem. Formulation
For example, is done in terms of stress resultants and stress
𝑃−1 (4) couples.
𝑃𝑇 = 𝑃0 � + 1 + 𝑃1 𝑇 + 𝑃2 𝑇 2 + 𝑃3 𝑇 3 �
𝑇
The through-depth displacements are
where, P -1 , P 0 , P 1 , P 2 , P 3 are constants and T
considered as,
is the temperature
𝑢(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑢0 (𝑥, 𝑦) + 𝑧𝜙𝑥 (𝑥, 𝑦) + (5)
𝑧 2 𝑢∗ (𝑥, 𝑦) + 𝑧 3 ∅∗𝑥 (𝑥, 𝑦)
𝑣(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑣0 (𝑥, 𝑦) + 𝑧𝜙𝑦 (𝑥, 𝑦) + (6)
𝑧 2 𝑣 ∗ (𝑥, 𝑦) + 𝑧 3 ∅∗𝑦 (𝑥, 𝑦)
𝑤(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑤0 (𝑥, 𝑦) + 𝑧𝜙𝑧 (𝑥, 𝑦) + (7)
𝑧 2 𝑤 ∗ (𝑥, 𝑦) + 𝑧 3 ∅∗𝑧 (𝑥, 𝑦)
Figure 1 (a) Continuous and (b) stepwise By considering diaphragm supporting
graded structures conditions and using Navier’s approach to
define double trigonometric solutions
Many structures are subjected to dynamic satisfying boundary conditions,
loads at least once in their lifetime. As these
materials are high performance and are (u 0 ,ϕ x ,u*,∅ x *)(x,y)=∑∑〖(U mn ,∅ x,mn , ( 8)
multi-functional, these have numerous U* mn ,∅ x,mn *) cos α m x sin β n y e-iωt
practical applications. These can be used for
(v 0 ,ϕ y ,v*,∅ y *)(x,y)=∑∑〖(V mn ,∅ y,mn , ( 9)
sticking two different materials in same
V* mn ,∅ y , mn *) sin α m x cos β n y e-iωt
system, but subjected to different loads.
Cracking or delamination is also avoided due (w 0 ,ϕ z ,w*,∅ z *)(x,y)=∑∑〖 (10)
1228
Static and Free Vibration Analysis of Functionally Graded Plates: Mechanical, Thermal and
Hygrothermal Loading
(W mn ,∅ z,mn , W* mn ,∅ z , mn *) sin α m x sin The equilibrium equations are derived using

β n y e-iωt principal of virtual work, i. e.,
𝜕(𝜋 − 𝐾) = 0 (18)
The temperature variation throughout depth
is considered by using three types of 𝜎𝑥𝑥 (19)
⎧𝜎𝑦𝑦 ⎫
functions. It is considered as constant ⎪𝜎 ⎪
𝑧𝑧
throughout the depth, linearly varying across 𝜏𝑦𝑧
⎨ ⎬
the depth. ⎪ 𝜏𝑥𝑧 ⎪
⎩ 𝜏𝑥𝑦 ⎭
∆𝑇(𝑧) = ∆𝑇 (11) 𝜀𝑥𝑥
𝑄11 𝑄12 𝑄13 0 0 0
2𝑧 ⎡𝑄 𝑄 𝑄 0 ⎤ ⎧𝜀 ⎫
(12) 0 0 𝑦𝑦
∆𝑇(𝑧) = ∆𝑇 ∗ ⎢ 12 22 23 ⎥ ⎛⎪ 𝜀 ⎪
𝑄 𝑄 𝑄 0
ℎ = ⎢ 13 23 33 0 0 0
⎥ ⎜ 𝛾𝑧𝑧
⎢ 0 0 0 𝑄44 0 ⎥ ⎜⎨ 𝑦𝑧 ⎬
The thermal conductivity is assumed to vary ⎢ 0 0 0 0 𝑄55 0 ⎥ ⎪ 𝛾𝑥𝑧 ⎪
as per power law as well as exponential law, ⎣ 0 0 0 0 0 𝑄66 ⎦ ⎝⎩𝛾𝑥𝑦 ⎭
and using the steady state heat conduction 1 1
⎧1⎫ ⎧1⎫
equation and boundary conditions given ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎞
temperature variation can be found out. − 1 𝛼∆𝑇 − 1 𝛽𝑐 ⎟
0
⎨ ⎬ ⎨0⎬ ⎟
𝜕 𝜕𝑇 (13) ⎪0⎪ ⎪0⎪
�𝐾(𝑧) � = 0 ⎩0⎭ ⎩0⎭ ⎠
𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧
𝑇𝑐𝑚 𝑧 1 (14) So the equation of motion can be written as,
∆𝑇(𝑧) = (𝑇𝑚 − 𝑇0 ) + �� + � −
𝐶 ℎ 2 [𝑋]{𝑈} = {𝑄} (20)
𝐾𝑐𝑚 𝑧 1 𝑘+1 𝐾𝑐𝑚 2 𝑧
� + � + � + 𝐴4𝑥4 𝐵4𝑥4 𝐶4𝑥4 (21)
(𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 ℎ 2 (2𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 2 ℎ
1 2𝑘+1 𝐾𝑐𝑚 3
𝑧 1 3𝑘+1
[𝑋] = � 𝐵4𝑥4 𝐷4𝑥4 𝐸4𝑥4 �
� − � + � + 𝐶 ′ 4𝑥4 𝐸 ′ 4𝑥4 𝐹4𝑥4
2 (3𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 3 ℎ 2
𝐾𝑐𝑚 4
𝑧 1 4𝑘+1 𝐾𝑐𝑚 5
𝑧 𝑈4𝑥1 𝑞1 4𝑥1
� + � − � +
(4𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 4 ℎ 2 (5𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 5 ℎ {𝑈} = � 𝑉4𝑥1 � [𝑄] = �𝑞2 4𝑥1 �
1 5𝑘+1 𝑊4𝑥1 𝑞3 4𝑥1
� �
2
Where,
𝐾𝑐𝑚 𝐾𝑐𝑚 2 (15)
𝐶 =1− + −
(𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 (2𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 2 {𝑈 } (22)
3 4
𝐾𝑐𝑚 𝐾𝑐𝑚 𝐾𝑐𝑚 5 ′
+ − 𝑈𝑚𝑛 , ∅𝑥,𝑚𝑛 , 𝑈 𝑚𝑛 , ∅∗𝑥,𝑚𝑛 , 𝑉𝑚𝑛 , ∅𝑦,𝑚𝑛 ,
∗
(3𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 3 (4𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 4 (5𝑘+1)𝐾𝑚 5 = � ∗ �
𝑉 𝑚𝑛 , ∅∗𝑦,𝑚𝑛 , 𝑊𝑚𝑛 , ∅𝑧,𝑚𝑛 , 𝑊 ∗ 𝑚𝑛 , ∅∗𝑧,𝑚𝑛
𝑇𝑐𝑚 𝐾𝑚 𝐾𝑐 (16)
∆𝑇(𝑧) = (𝑇𝑚 − 𝑇0 ) + � − (1 − 𝜐)(𝛼𝑚 , 𝛽𝑛 )2 𝐸𝑖+𝑗−1 (23)
𝐾𝑐𝑚 𝐾𝑚
(𝐴𝑖𝑗 , 𝐷𝑖𝑗 ) =
1
(1 − 2𝜈 2 − 𝜈)
1 𝑧 � (𝛽𝑛 , 𝛼𝑚 )2 𝐸𝑖+𝑗−1
� − �
(𝐾𝑚 ⁄𝐾𝑐 ) 2 ℎ +
2(1 + 𝜈)
The temperature is also considered to be (𝑖
+ − 1)(𝑗 − 1)𝐸𝑖+𝑗−3
varying in plain of plate.
𝜐𝛼𝑚 𝛽𝑛 𝐸𝑖+𝑗−1 𝛼𝑚 𝛽𝑛 𝐸𝑖+𝑗−1 (24)
∆𝑇(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = ∆𝑇(𝑧) ∗ sin 𝛼𝑚 𝑥 sin 𝛽𝑛 𝑦 (17) 𝐵𝑖𝑗 = +
(1 − 2𝜈 2 − 𝜈) 2(1 + 𝜈)
To obtain the moisture content variation,
−(𝑗 − 1)𝜐𝐸(𝑖+𝑗−2) (25)
similar process repeated. The steady state �𝐶𝑖𝑗 , 𝐸𝑖𝑗 � = (𝛼𝑚 , 𝛽𝑛 ) �
(1 − 2𝜈 2 − 𝜈)
moisture conduction formula is same as that
(𝑖 − 1)𝐸(𝑖+𝑗−2)
for heat conduction and moisture + �
conductivity is also assumed to vary as per 2(1 + 𝜈)
the gradation. So, α~β & K~D.
1229
Dhinde and Desai
𝐹𝑖𝑗 (26) introduction of shear and normal deformation

2 2
(𝛼𝑚 + 𝛽𝑛 )𝐸𝑖+𝑗−1 coefficients. Whereas even though the CPT
= and FSDT have lesser computation efforts as
2(1 + 𝜈)
(1 − 𝜐)(𝑖 − 1)(𝑗 − 1)𝐸𝑖+𝑗−3 compared to HOST12 results also vary.
+
2(1 + 𝜈)
(𝑞1 , 𝑞2 ) = −[(𝛼𝑚 , 𝛽𝑛 )[𝑁𝑇 + 𝑁𝑐 𝑀𝑇 (27) Table 2 Exponential law,
+ 𝑀𝑐 𝐿 𝑇 + 𝐿𝑐 𝑃𝑇 + 𝑃𝑐 ] ]ʹ
E c =70 GPa, ρ c =2707 kg/m3; E m =151
𝑞ℎ 𝑞ℎ2 (28)
𝑞3 = �𝑞 −𝑁𝑇 + 𝑁𝑐 − 2𝑀𝑇 − GPa, ρ m = 3000 kg/m3.
2 4
′
𝑞ℎ3
2𝑀𝑐 −3𝐿 𝑇 − 3𝐿𝑐 � Theory u 0 /a w 0 /h
ω
8
(*10-3) (*10-1)
�𝑁𝑇,𝑐 , 𝑀𝑇,𝑐 , 𝐿 𝑇,𝑐 , 𝑃𝑇,𝑐 � (29)
Exact 3D 1.6281 2.9077
ℎ/2 -
elasticity#
=� (𝑄11 + 𝑄12
−ℎ/2 HOST 12 1.62 2.91 0.035
+ 𝑄13 ) (𝛼∆𝑇, 𝛽𝑐)(1, 𝑧, 𝑧 2 , 𝑧 3 ) 𝑑𝑧
FSDT 1.632 2.911 0.0328
For free vibration response [Jha et al., 2013], CPT 1.632 2.8 0.0305
2[
{[𝑋]12𝑥12 − 𝜔 𝑀]12𝑥12 }{𝑈}12𝑥1 = 0; (30) #Jha et al., 2013
(𝐸1−7 , 𝐼1−7 ) (31)

ℎ/2 REFERENCES
=� (𝐸, 𝜌)(1, 𝑧 , 𝑧 2 , 𝑧 3 , 𝑧 4 , 𝑧 5 , 𝑧 6 )𝑑𝑧
−ℎ/2
Kieback B Neubrand A Riedel H 2003
Processing techniques for functionally
𝑀𝑖𝑗 = 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑔(𝜌4𝑥4 , 𝜌4𝑥4 , 𝜌4𝑥4 ) (32)
graded materials Materials Science and
𝜌𝑖𝑗 = 𝐼𝑖+𝑗−1 (33) Engineering A36281–105.
Jha D K Tarun Kant Singh D K 2013 An
RESULTS accurate higher order displacement
U,W=(u 0, w 0 )/ α c *ΔT c *h a=b=1; a/h=10; model with shear and normal
deformations effects for functionally
Table 1 Power law, thermal analysis graded plates, Fusion Engineering and
E c =380 GPa, α c =0.0000074; E m =70 Design 88 3199-3204.
GPa, α m = 0.000023; k=1, K c =38.5 W/m-
K; K m =205.0 W/m-K, ρ c =3890 kg/m3, Hiroyuki Matsunaga 2009 Stress analysis of
ρ m = 2707 kg/m3. functionally graded plates subjected to
thermal and mechanical
Temp
U W ω loadings, Composite Structures 87(4)
Variation
344–357.
Constant# -4.278 -13.795
Reddy J N 1984 A Refined Nonlinear Theory
#
Linear 0.6153 24.1247 0.0360 of Plates with Transverse Shear
Steady state -1.575 7.5638 Deformation Int. J. Solid Structures 20
881-896.
#Hiroyuki Matsunaga, 2009
Koizumi M 1997 FGM activities in Japan
CONCLUSIONS Composites Part B 28B 1-4.
Above results show that HOST 12 gives Javaheri R Eslami M R 2002 Thermal
results approximately equal to the exact Buckling of Functionally Graded Plates
results. Thus proves efficiency of AIAA Journal 40.
1230
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF INDENTATION OF AN ELASTIC LAYER SUBSTRATE

SYSTEM BY A RIGID WEDGE INDENTER UNDER PLANE STRAIN
CONDITIONS
KARURIYA A. N. and BHANDAKKAR T.K.*
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Bombay, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: Contact between a rigid wedge indenter and an elastic layer-substrate

system is studied semi-analytically under plane strain conditions by formulating
the problem as an integral equation in terms of the unknown contact pressure using
Green’s function obtained through a combination of Airy stress functions and
Fourier transforms. Numerical solution of the integral equation is presented to bring
forth the effect of layer thickness and mismatch in elastic properties of layer and
substrate on the contact pressure and contact size. Most importantly, the present
solution is compared with the results of indentation by a smoother cylindrical rigid
indenter and it is found that under comparable conditions, the maximum contact
pressure is greater while the contact size is smaller in the former.
Keywords: Contact; Coating; Indenter; Layer thickness; Elastic mismatch
INTRODUCTION (1974) were one of the first to carry out a

detailed study of the plane strain problem of
Coatings made up of one or more layers of contact of an elastic layer substrate system by
dissimilar materials stacked on to a substrate a cylindrical indenter and studied the
form an important engineering system due to influence of layer thickness and mismatch in
their wide ranging applications such as semi- elastic properties of layer and substrate on the
conductor, energy storage, micromechanical contact pressure and contact size. In the work
(MEMS) devices. As the layer thickness of Yu and Sanday (1990), an axisymmetric
approaches micrometre range or below, the problem of contact of spherical, conical and
mechanical response of such layer coatings is flat ended indenter with layered coating solid
obtained through micro or nano indentation was undertaken. In order to study the effect
tests [Tsui and Pharr, 1999]. Hence it is of the indenter shape on the indentation
important to be able to simulate the measurement and influence of finite indenter
indentation process to understand the effect tip radius on the property of thin films,
of layer dimensions, mismatch in properties Korsunsky and Constantinescu (2009)
during indentation. studied the indentation of a homogeneous
elastic half space by different indenters.
In terms of modelling, contact problems have
a long history starting with the pioneering The present study extends the calculation of
work of Hertz and in the present context, Gupta and Walowit (1974) based on rigid
many analytical and numerical studies can be cylindrical indenter to a rigid wedge indenter
found devoted to the solution of contact of indenting a linear elastic layer substrate
layered materials with different material system under plane strain deformation. The
response undergoing axisymmetric or plane study has two aims. Firstly to the best of
strain deformation. Gupta and Walowit author’s knowledge, a study of contact of
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:tbhanda2@iitb.ac.in 1231

Karuriya et. al.
layer-substrate system with wedge indenter continuity of displacement and traction

has not been carried out and secondly a implies,
comparison of the results from present
𝜎𝑥1 (𝑡, 𝑦) = 𝜎𝑥0 (𝑡, 𝑦); 𝜏𝑥𝑦1 (𝑡, 𝑦) = 𝜏𝑥𝑦0 (𝑡, 𝑦) (4)
study with the results of cylindrical indenter
(Gupta and Walowit, 1974) will reveal the
influence of sharpness of indenter profile on
the contact response.
PROBLEM FORMULATION
Figure 1 shows a rigid symmetric indenter

with its axis in out-of plane direction
subjected to a quasi-static line force 𝑃 and
indenting a layer-substrate system leading to
a contact zone of size 2ɑ. The layer having
thickness t is perfectly bonded to the
Figure 1.Indentation of a layer substrate
infinitely thick substrate. The material for
system consisting of a linear elastic layer
layer and substrate are assumed to be
(𝐸1 , 𝜈1 ) of thickness t perfectly bonded
isotropic, homogeneous linear elastic solid
to an infinitely long linear elastic
with elastic properties ( 𝐸𝑖 , 𝜈𝑖 ) where the
substrate (𝐸2 , 𝜈2 ) by a rigid indenter
subscript 𝑖 = 0 and 1 corresponds to substrate
subjected to force 𝑃 leading to a contact
and layer respectively. The deformation in
zone of length 2ɑ.
layer and substrate due to indentation are
assumed to be infinitesimal and obeying
𝑢1 (𝑡, 𝑦) = 𝑢0 (𝑡, 𝑦); 𝑣1 (𝑡, 𝑦) = 𝑣0 (𝑡, 𝑦), (5)
plane strain condition. Normal and shear
components of stresses are denoted by 𝜎𝑎𝑖 The displacement and stresses in the substrate
and 𝜏𝑎𝑏𝑖 ( ɑ ≠ b) respectively where ɑ and b should decay as √𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 → ∞.The pressure
correspond to the position co-ordinate x or y. p(y) in the contact region|𝑦| < ɑis related to
The displacement component in x and y the normal component of surface
direction is denoted by 𝑢𝑖 and 𝑣𝑖 respectively. displacement 𝑢1 as,
Assuming the layer and indenter surfaces as −2 𝑎 ∞
frictionless, the boundary conditions on the 𝑢1 (0, 𝑦) = 𝜋
∫−𝑎 ∫0 𝑝(𝑦 ′ ) 𝐺(𝑦 − 𝑦 ′ , 𝜉) cos[(𝑦 −
surface of the layer (x = 0) are, 𝑦 ′ )𝜉] 𝑑𝜉𝑑𝑦 (6)
′
𝑢1 (0, 𝑦) = 𝛿 − 𝑓(𝑦), |𝑦| ≤ ɑ , (1) where 𝐺(𝑦 − 𝑦 ′ , 𝜉) is the Green’s function

relating surface displacement to surface load
𝜎𝑥1 (0, 𝑦) = 0, |𝑦| > ɑ . (2) calculated using the combination of Airy
stress function and Fourier transforms [Vasu
𝜏𝑥𝑦1 = 0, −∞ < 𝑦 < ∞ (3)
and Bhandakkar, 2015]. Force balance in the
where 𝛿 is the penetration of the indenter y-direction relates the pressure p(y) and
under the action of force 𝑃 and f(y) is the applied force𝑃as
ɑ
mathematical representation of indenter ∫−ɑ 𝑝(𝑦′ )𝑑𝑦′ = 𝑃, (7)
profile. For cylinder indenter,𝑓(𝑦) = 𝑦 2 ⁄(2𝑅)
and for wedge indenter,𝑓(𝑦)= |𝑦|𝑐𝑜𝑡(𝜃), where Due to indeterminacy of normal displacement
R is the radius of the cylindrical indenter and in case of surface loading on an elastic half –
𝜃 is the semi angle of the wedge indenter. space in two-dimensional elasticity (Johnson,
Along the interface (x = t), due to perfect 1985), 𝛿 in Equation (1) remains
bonding between layer and substrate, undetermined. Hence Equations (1) and (6)
are combined and differentiated with respect
to y to provide,
1232
Study of Indentation of an Elastic Layer Substrate by A Rigid Wedge Indenter under Plane
Strain Conditions
1 ∞
1 Figure. 3 compares the variation of maximum
∫ ∫ 𝐺1 (𝑌, 𝜂) sin[(𝑌 − 𝑊)𝜂] 𝑝(𝑎𝑊)𝑑𝜂𝑑𝑊 pressure 𝑝𝑚𝑎𝑥 normalized by 𝑃/𝑎0 𝑐 and
𝜋
−1 0 contact size 𝑎/𝑎0 𝑐 with respect to layer
= 𝑑𝑢1 (0, 𝑌)⁄𝑑𝑌 (8)
where Y = y/𝑎, W = 𝑦 ′ /𝑎, 𝜂=𝜉𝑎 , 𝜇1 is the
rigidity modulus of the layer, 𝐺1 (𝑌, 𝜂 ) is the
modified Green’s function obtained after
differentiating 𝐺(𝑦, 𝜉) with respect to y and
normalizing. Equations (7) and (8) are
converted into a system of linear equations in
the unknown pressure through Gauss-
Chebyshev quadrature. As the semi contact
size ɑ is not known apriori, the solution is
obtained iteratively by guessing ɑ and Figure 2.Effect of layer thicknesst on the
solving for the unknown pressure. By pressure distribution in the contact region
monitoring the pressure at the contact edge y 0 < 𝑦 < 𝑎during wedge indentation of
= ± ɑ which should be zero for the correct layer-substrate system
solution, the value of ɑ is appropriately
modified and the steps are repeated. thickness t /𝑎0 𝑐 for wedge and cylindrical
indentation when the layer is softer( 𝛼 =
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 1/10).
In the results that follow, total load 𝑃 = 𝑎0 𝑐 = √2(1 − 𝜈1 )𝑅𝑃⁄(𝜋𝜇1 ) (Johnson,

0.01N/m, cylindrical indenter radius R = 1
𝜇 m, semi angle of the wedge 1985) is the classical Hertzian semi-contact
indenter𝜃=75.963756𝑜 , rigidity modulus of size for cylindrical indenter. As seen in
layer 𝜇1 =1 MPa and Poisson’s ratios for layer Figure. 3, for both wedge and cylindrical
indenter, as the layer thickness increases
and substrate are 𝜈1 = 0.25 and 𝜈0 =
initially, the maximum pressure decreases
0.25 respectively. The semi angle of the
while the contact size increases before both
wedge is assumed by making diameter of
of them stabilize to the solution
cylindrical indenter equal to the width of
corresponding to wedge indentation of a
wedge indenter.
homogeneous elastic half space made up of
In Figure 2, variation of pressure p(y) layer properties. Thus the substrate influences
normalized by the central pressure 𝑝𝑚 = the maximum pressure and contact size only
p(y=0) over the contact region 0 < 𝑦 < 𝑎 for smaller layer thickness.
for wedge indenter is shown as a function of
For sufficiently large layer thickness, the
the varying layer-thickness t/ ɑ for rigidity
layer substrate system behaves as if it is
modulus ratio 𝛼 = 𝜇1 /𝜇0 equal to 4. 𝑎0 𝑤 =
homogeneous and consequently contact
𝑃(1 − 𝜈1 )⁄(2𝜇1 cot 𝛼) (Johnson, 1985)is the response becomes independent of layer
classical Hertzian semi-contact size for thickness. Due to the sharpness of the profile
wedge indenter. In Figure. 2, black line at y = 0, the pressure is more and contact size
shows the classical Hertzian pressure𝑝0 (𝑦)= less for wedge indenter as compared to
1
𝜇1 (𝑎2 − 𝑦 2 ) ⁄2 ⁄(1 − 𝜈1 )𝑅 obtained if the cylindrical indenter. For stiffer layer 𝛼 = 10,
material was homogeneous and made up of the results are exactly opposite of what has
layer only(Johnson, 1985).It can be seen that been observed for the case of 𝛼 = 1/10.
the contact pressure p(y) is deviates Figure 4 shows the variation in normalized
significantly from𝑝0 (𝑦)for the case of layer maximum pressure 𝑡𝑝𝑚𝑎𝑥 ⁄𝑃and contact size
thickness ratio 𝑡/𝑎0 𝑤 = 1/2,1/ 4. 𝑎/𝑎0 𝑐 with the change in rigidity modulus
1233
Karuriya et. al.
ratio (𝛼) when the layer thickness is constant

t/𝑎0 𝑐 = 1. For a given layer thickness, as 𝛼
Figure 4.Dependence of maximum

pressure 𝑝𝑚𝑎𝑥 and contact size𝑎/𝑎0 𝑐 on
Figure 3.Variation of maximum pressure the shear modulus ratio𝛼
𝑝𝑚𝑎𝑥 and contact size 𝑎/𝑎0 𝑐 with respect pressure is higher while the contact size is
to layer thickness t smaller for wedge indenter compared to
is increased, the maximum contact pressure cylindrical indenter having equivalent
continually decreases while the contact size dimensions.
continually increases. This is because with
increasing 𝛼, the substrate transitions from REFERENCES
being stiff to soft compared to the layer and A M Korsunsky and A Constantinescu 2009
thus enhancing role of the substrate in the The influence of indenter bluntness on
indentation response. Comparing the wedge the apparent contact stiffness of thin
and cylindrical indentation response in coatings Thin Solid Films 517 4835-
Figure. 4, for a given rigidity modulus 4844.
ratio 𝛼 and layer thickness t, the maximum Gupta PK and Walowit J A 1974 Contact
pressure is higher and contact size is smaller stresses between an elastic cylinder and
in former, an observation consistent with a layered elastic solid Journal of
Figure. 3. Lubrication Technology95250-257.
Johnson K L 1985 Contact Mechanics
CONCLUSION Cambridge Univ. Pr. London.
Plane strain contact of rigid indenter having Tsui TY and Pharr G M 1999 Indenter
wedge and cylindrical profile with layer geometry effects on the measurement of
substrate system made up of elastic, isotropic mechanical properties by nano
material is analysed semi-analytically to indentation with sharp indenters J Mater
investigate the effect of layer thickness, Res 14 292.
rigidity modulus ratio and indenter profile. Vasu TS and Bhandakkar TK 2015 Semi-
For layer softer than substrate, the maximum analytical solution to plane strain
contact pressure decreases and contact size loading of elastic layered coating on an
increases as the layer thickness is increased. elastic substrate Sadhna 40 2221–2238.
For a given layer thickness, as the rigidity Yu H Y Sanday SC and Rath BB 1990 The
modulus ratio increases, the maximum effect of substrate on the elastic
contact pressure decreases while contact size properties of the films determined by the
increase. For a given layer thickness and indentation test- axisymmetric
layer-substrate system, the maximum contact boussinesq problem J Mech Phys Solids
38 745.
1234
ICCMS2016
SECOND GRADIENT APPROACH FOR MODELLING DAMAGE

KAKARLA S.S.* and RAJAGOPAL A.
Abstract: Boundary value problems for a softening material suffer from loss of
uniqueness in the post-peak regime. Numerical solutions to such problems shows
mesh dependency due to lack of internal length. So a regularisation method which
introduces a characteristic length is required to get mesh independent results. A
second gradient model introduces a characteristic length by taking into account the
second gradient of the displacement in the principle of virtual work and subsequently
regularising the solution of the boundary value problem. In this context a second
gradient finite element code is developed in MATLAB for both one dimensional and
two dimensional problems and results show mesh independency. Even though unique
solution is not achieved a finite number of solutions are achievable.
Keywords: Localisation; Regularisation Method; Second Gradient Model.
INTRODUCTION behaviour law another idea is to refine the

kinematics of the continuum using theory of
Strain softening is the characteristic
materials with micro structure Aifantis
behaviour of concrete and rock materials
(1984). de Borst (1991) refined the classical
during which the material shows decrease in
continuum using Cosserat models and
stress with increase in strain or the material
achieved mesh independent results. Recently
tangent stiffness matrix ceases to be positive.
a new trend in this idea was proposed by
These softening models lead to loss of
Chambon et al., Fernandes (2008) called
uniqueness of the response which leads to the
local second gradient models. The advantage
loss of ellipticity of the corresponding
of these models is second gradient of the
boundary value problem [Hill, 1958].
displacement field is introduced in to the
This leads in the context of fracture or kinematics of the continuum but not as a
damage mechanics to failure with zero thermodynamic variable as done in gradient
energy dissipation which is not physical models by Peerlings (1999). So we can use
[Bazant, 1976]. If we try to solve numerically the algorithms for classical constitutive laws
the boundary value problem the results are to model second gradient models [Kotronis et
mesh dependent [Needlemann, 1988]. The al., 2008].
introduction of characteristic length will
In this paper the local second gradient finite
provide a numerical solution which is
element is presented and the regularisation
independent of mesh [Jirasek, 2002].
property of the method is studied for
In order to solve this problem Bazant elastoplastic and damage constitutive laws.
introduced energy based approach and later The mesh dependency is studied using the
[Pijaudier-Cabot and Bazant, 1987] he distribution of the state variable (   ) in case
proposed non-local models. Gradient of elastoplastic constitutive law and the
plasticity models are also proposed by damage variable for the case of damage
Vordoulakis and Aifantis (1984), Fleck and constitutive law.
Hutchinson (1997) refining the constitutive
behaviour. Instead of refining the constitutive
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: kakarlasantosh22@gmail.com 1235

Santosh and Rajagopal
SECOND GRADIENT MODEL u

3. If  elim
x
Second gradient theory can be derived from
the theory of continua with microstructure  0 (4)
which is derived first by Mindlin (1965). where A1 , A2 and elim are material
Later Germain (1973) developed a parameters.
framework taking in to account the
microstucture in the principle of virtual work. Damage Mechanics framework
In micromorphic continuum theory the u
  (1  D)
microscopic structure of the continuum is x (5)
taken in to account along with the
macroscopic structure thus enhancing the where,
kinematic field. D  0 if f  0

The key feature of the second gradient theory D  1  d 0 (1 - A) - Aexp(-B( eq -  d0 )) if f  0
that enables it to introduce length scale is the  eq
additional degrees freedom that are added to
the classical kinematic field. In this paper the where,
work of Chambon is followed and a full
f   eq   d 0
decoupling between classical part and the (6)
second gradient part is considered. u
Neglecting the double body forces the  eq 
x (7)
equilibrium equations and boundary
conditions for a second gradient model can where,  d 0 ,A,B are the material parameters.
be derived as,
FOR THE SECOND GRADE PART
 ijk
 ( ij  )
x k  2u
0 B
x j x 2 (8)
(1)
 ij n j  p i and  ijk n j nk  Pi NUMERICAL RESULTS
p i and Pi are the imposed boundary USING ELASTOPLASTIC
conditions. CONSTITUTIVE LAW
CONSTITUTIVE LAWS A simple bar of length 1 m in traction is

studied using second gradient model. Finite
FOR THE FIRST GRADE PART element calculations are done using
Elastoplastic framework MATLAB. The parameters of the
constitutive equation chosen are
u A1  150 A2  75 d  0.8 and elim  0.01.
1. If  elim
x
Mesh independency is studied using
u
  A1 50,100,150,200 elements for an applied
x (2) displacement U = 15.0E-3 m which is in
contrast to figure 1 which illustrates the mesh
u
2.If elim   elim (1  ( A1 A2 )) dependency of the classical finite element
x method. In all the cases an imperfection
u length of 0.2 m is introduced and
  A2  ( A1  A2 )elim
x (3) corresponding localised solution obtained is
hard-soft-hard. Figure 2 demonstrates clearly
1236
Second Gradient Finite Element Method
the mesh independency of the second USING DAMAGE CONSTITUTIVE

gradient model. LAW
Here Mazars law with parameters as
 d 0  1.0 E  4 , At  0.5 , Bt  2.0 E  05 are
used as constitutive driver for the first
gradient part and for second gradient part d =
200 is used figure 3 shows the mesh
independent damage distribution for 50 and
100 elements for applied displacement U =
15E-05 m.
CONCLUSION
A second gradient model does not ensures
uniqueness of the corresponding boundary
value problem solution but instead of infinite
Figure 1. Mesh Dependency number of solutions by using a classical
model we get finite number of solutions for a
second gradient model. The characteristic
length introduced using material properties
can regularise the solution and mesh
independency can be achieved.
REFERENCES
Aifantis E C 1984 On the microstructural
origin of certain inelastic models
Journal of Engineering Materials and
Technology ASME 106326–330.
Aifantis E C 1984 On the microstructural
Figure2. Mesh Independency origin of certain inelastic models
Journal of Engineering Materials and
TechnologyASME 106326–330.
Bazant Z P 1976 Instability, ductility and
size effect in strain softening concrete
Journal of Engineering Mechanics
ASCE 331-344
Besuelle P Chambon R 2006 Modelling the
Post-Localisation regime with Local-
Second Gradient Models: Non-
uniqueness of Solutions and Non-
persistent Shear Bands Springer
Proceedings in Physics 106 209-221.
Figure3. Mesh Independency Borst R D 1991 Numerical Modelling of
Bifurcation and Localisation in
1237
Santosh and Rajagopal
Cohesive-Frictional Materials Pure and Modelling the evolution of the width of

Applied Geophysics. 137 367-390. the shear zone Acta Geotechnica 3 85–
97.
Chambon R Caillerie D and EL Hassan N
1998 One-dimensional localization Matsushima T Chambon R and Caillerie D
studied with a second grade model 2002 Large strain finite element
European Journal of Mechanics analysis of a local second gradient
A/Solids 17 637-656. model: application to localization
Fernandes R Clement Chavant B Chambon R
Methods in Engineering 54 499-521.
2008 A simplified second gradient
model for dilatant materials: Theory and Mindlin R D 1965 Second gradient of strain
numerical implementation International and surface-tension in linear elasticity
Journal of Solids and Structures 45 International Journal Solids and
5289-5307. Structures 1 417–738.
Fleck N A and Hutchinson J W 1997 Strain Needlemann A 1988 Material rate
Gradient Plasticity Advances in Applied dependence and mesh sensitivity in
Mechanics 33 295-358. localisation problems Computational
Germain 1973 The Method of Virtual Power Methods in Applied Mechanics and
in Continuum Mechanics. Part 2: Engineering 67 69-86.
Microstructure SIAM Journal on Peerlings R J 1999 Enhanced damage
Applied Mathematics25 556-575. modelling for fracture and fatigue PhD
Hill R 1958 A general theory of uniqueness Thesis- Technische Universitei
and stability in elastic-plastic solids Eindhoven.
Journal of mechanics of physics and Pijaudier-Cabot G Bazant Z P 1987 Nonlocal
solids6 236-249. damage theory ASCE Journal of
Jirasek M 2002 Objective modelling of strain Engineering Mechanics 113 1512–1533.
localization Revue francaise de genie Vardoulakis I Aifantis E 1991 A gradient
civil 6 1190-1132. flow theory of plasticity for granular
materials Acta Mechanica 87 197–217.
Kotronis P Al Holo S Besuelle P Chambon R
2008Shear softening and localization:
1238
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF DAMPING ON THE DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF A BEAM

WITH NON-IDEAL BOUNDARY SUPPORTS
MAHAPATRA KAVIKANT, PANIGRAHI S. K *, and GAUR ABHISHEK
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Defence Institute of Advanced Technology (DU), Pune,
Maharashtra, India.
Abstract: While doing vibration analysis in terms of the dynamic response of a beam,
the end conditions, in most of the cases, are assumed to be fixed, simply supported,
free or sliding imposing an ideal condition of end support displacement. But, in real
engineering structures the end supports are non-ideal (for example welded, riveted etc)
and allow certain degree of translational or rotational motion of the load at the
boundaries. This paper presents a methodology to represent the real engineering
boundary conditions in terms of translational and rotational stiffnesses and formulate a
general free vibration equation that can be universally applied for all possible
boundary conditions. Fourier sine series approximation of modal displacement has
been assumed for initial frequency analysis and effect of variation in stiffness values
on the vibration characteristics has been presented both for free and forced vibration
conditions for undamped and damped beam. Numerical assessment considering an I-
beam has been presented for validation and acceptance of the outcome. The results
have been presented both for theoretical assessment and simulated results in
ABAQUS for validation. The results indicate considerable effects on the vibration
characteristics and dynamic response for a non ideal boundary condition at lower
values of boundary spring stiffnesses. This technique provides a simplified and
convenient tool for obtaining vibration response for real engineering boundary
supports. Further, the beam model can be extended for analysis of plate structures
considering non-ideal boundary conditions.
Key Words: Beam structures; Boundary conditions; ideal; non-ideal; rotational

and translational stiffness; Fourier Sine series; Dynamic response;
damping ratio; Vibration Characteristics.
INTRODUCTION when put to real time engineering use. This

paper presents the variation in free and forced
Boundary conditions for structures such as vibration response of a undamped and
beams used in engineering applications (both damped beam restrained with two
land, air based and marine) are not ideal in translational and two rotational elastic
nature. Many such examples including springs of varying stiffnesses, which
welded, clamped and riveted beam structures represents a general boundary condition. The
can be analyzed with non-ideal boundary boundary conditions can be varied from ideal
conditions. These boundary conditions also to non-ideal condition by randomly varying
exhibit variation in their physical and
material properties over a period of time
__________________________________________
* Author for Correspondence: Email: panigrahi.sk@gmail.com

1239
Mahapatra et al.
the spring stifnesses at both ends of the damped forced condition as a function of
beam. non-ideal boundary conditions.
Many of the earlier analysis on dynamic
THEORETICAL ANLAYSIS
response of a forced beam system have
mostly considered simplified and ideal end FREE VIBRATION OF UNDAMPED
conditions as pinned and fixed (infinite BEAM
translational stiffness, hence lateral
displacement=0) These end conditions are Representation of beam with general
convenient for theoretical computation for boundary condition is presented in Figure.1
derivation of frequency and mode shape
equation and further can easily be extended
to response of beam system with different
loading conditions.
But these simplifications may lead to
generation of errors and can deviate the
response from actual practical analysis.
Considerable research publications can be Figure 1. Representation of Beam with
traced in respect of the problem of free approximation of real end joints (welded/
vibrations of beams with elastic restraints clamped/bolted/pinned) between load
using Fourier series approximation [Wang bearing beam and its support structure to a
and Lin 1996, Li 2000] using Fourier sine combination of translational and rotational
and cosine series. Further, on the similar springs.
method, studies on the use of the concept of
arbitrary support using linear and torsional In Figure 1 above the spring stiffness ‘ K R ’
springs have been reported investigating the and ‘ K ’ represent rotational and translational
T
free vibration of beams on elastic foundations spring constants respectively and the second
Wang (2011).Again all the above methods subscript 0 and L represent the end positions
have resorted to demonstrating the relevance along the beam length (x=0 and x=L).
and accuracy with respect of degenerated w( x, t ) is the lateral displacement of the
cases of ideal boundary conditions. This beam at a distance x from x=0 position and at
analysis have also presented variation of only time t.
the natural frequency and the efficacy of
change in mode shape characteristics has The equation of motion for free flexural
been neglected. vibrations of a uniform elastic beam ignoring
shear deformation and rotary inertia effects is
A recent publication has [Mahapatra et al (in
 4 w ( x, t )  2 w ( x, t ) (1)
press)] has presented the effect of non-ideal EI  A 0
x 4
t 2
boundary conditions on the free vibration
response of an undamped beam. The where w ( x, t ) is the lateral displacement at
presented results indicate considerable effects distance x along the length of the beam and
on the vibration characteristics of the beam in at a time t, EI is the flexural rigidity of the
terms of frequency and mode shape Also, the beam,  is the mass density and A is the
effect of translational stiffness change has a mass density of the beam.
larger effect in changing the vibrational
characteristics in comparison to rotational Complete solution to Eq (1) can be written in
stiffness The model presented in the paper the form
has been utilises in this paper to further w( x, t )  X ( x) Cos t (2)
analyse the beam response in forced and
X (x) being the modal displacement function
and  is the natural frequency.
1240
Effect of Damping on The Dynamic Response of a Beam with Non-Ideal Boundary Supports
Assuming Fourier sine series approximation with Eq (7) and Eq (6) the steady state
of modal displacement as [Mahapatra et al (in response for forced vibration response of an
press)] undamped beam is given by

X 0  1 t 

x0 (3) w( x, t )     Qi ( )Sin i (t   )d  X i ( x) (8)

X ( x)   X L x L 1  i 0 

m   Where X i (x) is obtained from Eq(6).
  Am sin  m x 0 xL
 m 1
FORCED VIBRATION OF DAMPED
m
m  BEAM
L
The the equation of free vibration of a free- The equation of motion for forced vibration
free beam is given by the equation of a damped beam is given by
  X   
  
2 m

2
w( x, t )    3    1m X L   1m X L  X 0  m 2  sin  m x Cos t

 m 1  m 
L  2
 m 2
0 
 EI
 4 w ( x, t )
 CV
w ( x, t )
 CS
w 5 ( x, t )
 A
 2 w ( x, t )
 f ( x, t )
x 4 t (9) w 4 t t 2
(4)
 EI   EI  2 and  Where CV is the viscous damping and CS is
where  m    m2 and   
  structural damping [Hilal et al 2000].
 A   A 
is the frequency parameter. The boundary CV  A , C S  EI
conditions for an elastically restrained beam Using modal superposition method and
is given below:- principle of orthogonality of mode shapes
At x  0 :
K T 0 w0   EI
3w
, K R0
w 2w
 EI 2
with Eq (9) and Eq (6) the steady state
x 3 x x response for forced vibration response of a
At x  L : (5)
3w w 2w damped beam is given by
K TL wL  EI , K RL   EI 2
x 3 x x
  1 t 
Substituting Eq(4) into Eq(5) results in a w( x, t )     Qi ( ) e  (t  ) Sin d (t   )d  X i ( x)

 d 0 
matrix Equation , comprising of four 1
(10)
simultaneous homogeneous equations that
where
forms the basis of determining the natural     
2
frequencies (  ) of the beam system with 

2 is the damping ratio and
general boundary conditions.
d   1   2 is the damping frequency.
The corresponding ith mode shape for ith
natural frequency is denoted by NUMERICAL ASSESSMENT
(6)
 

w( x)    3 4
2mL2    
  1   1m X L    1m X L  X 0   2
 
 sin  x   Numerical analysis has been undertaken on
m 

 m1    m
4
      m  
 X 0   X 0 X 0    an I- beam as shown in Figure. 2. With the
The expressions for X L , XL , and X0 can be following material and physical properties:
X 0 X 0 X 0
A-36 steel (ρ= 7800 kg/m3, E= 200GPa)
obtained for a specified natural frequency
from frequency matrix equation . Area of Section ‘A’ = 0.007425m2
Moment of Inertia ‘I’ = 3.767e-5m4 (along y
FORCED VIBRATION OF DAMPED
axis ie width of flange)
BEAM
Length of beam ‘L’ = 1.21m
The equation of motion for forced vibration
of an undamped beam is given by
 4 w ( x, t )  2 w ( x, t ) (7)
EI  A  f ( x, t )
x 4
t 2
Using modal superposition method and
principle of orthogonality of mode shapes
1241
Mahapatra et al.
100000 (b) Second Mode Shape for K T0,

K TL, K R0=100000 and K RL varying from
0 to 100000.
Figure 2. Beam having I-Section with non

ideal boundary condition considered for
numerical evaluation.
RESULTS
Figure 7. Effect of variation of force for
rotational stiffness= 0 a acting at x=0.2 with
forcing frequency = 100rpm and in a time
span of 0-0.03sec in an undamped beam
Figure 3. Variation of Natural Frequencies of

undamped beam (ω1,ω2 and ω3) with
Rotational Stiffness at x=L ( K RL) for a fixed
K R0=100000, K T0=100000 and K Figure 8. Effect of variation of KRL on
TL=100000. undamped beam span deflection with first
natural frequency and forcing frequency =
100rpm having magnitude of force= 1ton and
at time=0.001sec
Figure 4. Variation of Natural Frequencies of

undamped beam (ω1, ω2 and ω3) with
Translational Stiffness at x=L ( K TL) for a
Figure 9. Variation of response of the point
fixed K T0=100000, K R0=100000 and K x=0.2 of a damped beam with varying
RL=100000. damping constant and KRL=0 and for first
natural frequency for a time span from 0-
0.00019sec
Figure 5. Comparison of First and Second

Mode Shapes of undamped beam with
Varied Rotational stiffness (KRL) at x=L: (a)
First Mode Shape for K T0, K TL, K
R0=100000 and K RL varying from 0 to
1242
Effect of Damping on The Dynamic Response of a Beam with Non-Ideal Boundary Supports
Figure 10. Variation of response of the CONCLUSION

damped beam span with varying damping
ratio and KRL=0 and for first natural The vibration characteristics of a beam shows
frequency and a force of 1Ton acting at a marked variation in terms of frequency and
x=0.2 at the intant t=0.00019sec mode shapes and dynamic displacement
when end supports are varying both in
damped and undamped condition. Also, the
effect of inherent damping in structures tends
to bring the system into a steady state
condition as against an undamped system.
Thus engineering structures always exhibit a
steady state response when subjected to a
Figure 11. Variation of response of a point of force. The use of Fourier Sine series analysis
a damped beam with varying rotational
presented in the study has been found
stiffness, with damping ratio=0.001 for first
suitably apt for frequency analysis of the free
natural frequency and with magnitude of
force =1 ton for a time span from 0- vibrations of a beam with varying end
0.00019sec conditions. The approach is found to be
straightforward for the cases with general
DISCUSSIONS boundary conditions as against the modal
A reduction in natural frequency occurs with superposition method involving hyperbolic
decrease in rotational / translational stiffness functions.
at the end support. (Figure 3 and Figure 4) REFERENCES
The effect of reduced translational stiffness
dominates over the reduction in rotational Hilal M Abu and Zibdesh HS 2000 Vibration
stiffness in lowering the natural frequency. Analysis of Beams with General
The mode shapes exhibited for vaying Boundary Conditions Traversed by a
stiffnesses are also modified showing a shift Moving Force J. of Sound and
towards the support where stiffness has been Vibration 229(2) 377-388.
decreased (Figure 5 and Figure. 6). Also at Li WL 2000 Free Vibrations of Beams with
very low values of translational stiffness General Boundary Conditions J. of
(KTL<100) the mode shape becomes unstable. Sound and Vibration 237(4) 709-725.
In forced condition, the peak displacement
Mahapatra KK and Panigrahi SK (in Press)
reduces as support stiffness is increased
Vibration Characteristics of a beam
(Figure 8) and exhibits a shift away from the
with generalised end supports Int J. of
support end where the variation is taking
Structural Engineering
place. The effect of damping (Figure. 9)
brings a point deflection with respect to time Wang D 2011 Optimal Design of an
to steady state as against undamped beam in Intermediate Support for a Beam with
forced condition (Figure. 7). Also as the Elastically Restrained Boundaries J.
damping ratio as increased the oscillatory Vib. Acoust. 133(3) 031014-1-031014-
behaviour of the point deflection vanishes 8.
and the steady state condition is achieved Wang JTS Lin CC 1996 Dynamic Analysis
faster and at a lower displacement value of Generally Supported Beams Using
(Figure. 9). Fourier Series J. of Sound and
Vibration 196(3) 285-293.
1243
ICCMS2016
RETROFITTING AND REHABILITATION OF ELEVATED WATER

TANK AFTER INVESTIGATION OF CORROSION STATUS BY USING
NONDESTRUCTIVE TECHNIQUES
NAYAK C. B.1* and THAKARE S. B.2
1
D. Y. Patil Institute of Engineering & Technology, Pimpri, Pune, Maharashtra, India.
2
Anantrao Pawar College of Engineering & Research, Parvati, Pune.
Abstract: Concrete elevated water tank degradation has been observed in several
water tank located in Baramati, Pune. In this study a survey was conducted to collect
and document instances of deterioration in concrete ESR’s located throughout the
district. The main causes of deterioration were observed to be corrosion,
efflorescence, and scaling. A guideline for identifying the basic causes of
deterioration in the district of Pune and a guideline for the selection of suitable
condition assessment of reinforced concrete ESRs by using various non-destructive
techniques and strengthening by various retrofitting methods were proposed.
Preliminary work was conducted to evaluate the corrosion of elevated water tank
using various non-destructive methods in Baramati region. The investigation showed
that a better and more reliable prediction of corrosion could be obtained by analyzing
the data from above measurements jointly by considering the effects of environmental
conditions.
Keywords: Concrete; Corrosion; Reinforcing steel; Elevated Water Tank.
INTRODUCTION corrosion in elevated water tank and seismic

analysis method for analysis of building after
Many of the existing reinforced concrete
and before retrofitting.
structures throughout the world are in urgent
need of strengthening, repair or CORROSION INVESTIGATION
reconstruction because of damages of METHODS
structural members due to various reasons.
Direct observation of these damaged A study on the assessment of corrosion
structures has shown that damage occurs affected water tank structure is carried out to
usually to beams, columns and the failure is evaluate the condition of the structure. The
mainly due to increase in stress levels of the corrosion assessment of RCC ESR’s includes
members [Gaikwad et al., 2013]. The main the evaluation of causes of damage, degree of
object of this project is to rehabilitate the damage, amount of damage and expected
existing damaged Elevated Storage Reservoir progress of damage with time and effect of
situated at Baramati, Pune. damage on structural behaviours
[Karthikeyan and Balasubramaian, 2014]. For
METHODOLOGY this as corrosion assessment of structure
using different NDT method and several
The methodology of this research work techniques are now available for
divided into two sub parts i.e. corrosion investigation of reinforced concrete structure.
investigation methods for investigation of Some methods are listed below.
*Mr. C. B. Nayak E-mail: cbnnayak@gmail.com 1244

Nayak and Thakare
1) Half cell potential method calculated with the help of resistivity meter
2) Resistivity method then find out corrosion of component of RCC
3) Cover depth measure ESR’s is 75%. These all factor helped the
4) Carbonation test deterioration of the structure at a faster rate.
5) Chloride content test. Hence to meet up the requirements of
advance infra-structure and any natural
SEISMIC ANALYSIS METHODS calamities new innovative materials/
Elevated water tanks consist of hugewater technologies in civil engineering society has
mass at the top of a slender staging which are started to the function of the various
most critical consideration for the failure of structures. With structures becoming old and
the tank during earthquakes. Elevated water the increasing bar for the constructed ESR’s
tanks are critical and strategic structures and the old ESR’s have started to show a serious
damage of these structures during need of additional retrofits to increase their
earthquakes may endanger drinking water durability and life.
supply, cause to fail in preventing large fires The water tank is modelled using the finite
and substantial economic loss. Since, the element software SAP 2000. When a tank
elevated tanks are frequently used in seismic containing liquid vibrates, the liquid exerts
active regions also hence; seismic behaviour impulsive and convective hydrodynamic
of them has to be investigated in detail pressure on the tank wall and the tank base in
[Waghmare and Madhekar, 2013]. Seismic addition to the hydrostatic pressure. In order
analysis of elevated water tank involved two to include the effect of hydrodynamic
types of analysis. Equivalent static analysis pressure in the analysis; tank can be idealized
and Dynamic analysis. For dynamic analysis by an equivalent spring mass model, which
there are again two sub types: Response includes the effect of tank wall-liquid
Spectrum Analysis and Time History interaction. The parameters of this model
Analysis depend upon on geometry of the tank and its
flexibility. When a tank containing liquid
CORROSION INVESTIGATION, with the free surface is subjected to
MODELLING AND ANALYSIS OF horizontal earthquake ground motion, tank
WATER TANK wall and liquid are subjected to horizontal
To evaluate the corrosion status in the RCC acceleration. The liquid in the lower region of
ESRs, the study on the assessment of the tank behaves like a mass that is rigidity
corrosion affected structure of concrete water connected to tank wall. This mass is termed
tanks is carried out. Systematic investigation as impulsive liquid mass whish accelerate
is carried out as per methodology given along with the wall and include impulsive
above. The investigation involves visual hydrodynamic pressure on tank wall and
inspection, non-destructive test using half cell similarly on base. Liquid mass in the upper
measurement and cover depth measurement region of tank undergoes sloshing motion.
and resistivity measurement. The chemical This mass is termed as convective liquid
analysis is carried out to determine chloride mass and it exert convective hydrodynamic
content in the collected concrete powder pressure on the tank wall and base. Thus,
sample. On the basis of the results obtained total liquid mass gets divided into two part,
from various in-situ and laboratory tests we i.e. Impulsive mass and convective mass. In
can conclude that the water tanks at spring mass model of tank liquid system,
Baramati, Pune is suffering severe damage these two liquid masses are to be suitably
due to lack of cover over the reinforcements, represented.
carbonation, chloride attack, corrosion of
reinforcements and due to poor maintenance. CASE STUDY
The reinforcements in columns, braces and Elevated Steel Water tanks are designed for
dome are corroded up to 60%, 70% and 50% DL, LL, and WL (using provisions of IS 875
respectively. The resistivity of the concrete
1245
Retrofitting and Rehabilitation o f Elevated Water Tank After Investigation of Corrosion Status by Non
Destructive Techniques
Part 3 1987) and seismic loads using IS 1893- performance of Elevated water tank having
1984. In this work find out the capacity of different bracings configuration.
structure by using IS 1893-1984 and IS 1893-
2002. The tank is located in Baramati, Pune PUSHOVER ANALYSIS OF ELEVATED
district. The capacity of tank is 6.5 MLD. In WATER TANK IN FULL CONDITION
this project first comparison between the BEFORE AND AFTER RETROFITTING.
value of seismic force by both code. Find out The formation of hinges in the given
the performance point of both cases and find structure after the deformation is as show in
out required strength of structure to maintain figure 1.
tank in working condition or satisfy. The
structure is then checked for safety under the ANALYSIS OF ELEVATED WATER
design lateral force and vertical load. This TANK IN FULL CONDITION FOR
structure consists of 12 columns out of which BASE SHEAR
8 column of 500 mm dia. and remaining 4
column of 600mm dia. This tank also consist The values of base shear at different
rectangular beam of different size. Beam of condition when tank is full condition are as
size 250 x300mm provided and circular beam shown in figure 2.
of 750 mm provided at the base of tank.
Capacity: 650m3; F.S.L.: 541.00; L.D.L.:
536.00; GL: 521.00; Foundation Level:
Figure 2. Base shear at full Condition.
ANALYSIS OF ELEVATED WATER

2
519.00; SBC of soil-20 t/m ; Free board: TANK IN FULL CONDITION FOR
0.3m; Seismic Zone –IV. BASE SHEAR
Figure1. Modelling of water tank The values of base shear at different
condition when tank is empty condition are
RESULT AND DISCUSSION as shown in figure 3.
The Earthquake ranks as one of the most
destructive events recorded so far in India in
terms of death, damage to infrastructure and
devastation in last fifty years. The major
cities affected by the earthquake are Bhuj,
Gandhidham, Khandala port, Morbi,
Ahemdabad, Rajkot, Sundarnagar etc. where
majority of damages occurred. Every
earthquake leaves a trail of miseries by loss
of life and destruction, but it also provides a
lesson to human society particularly Figure 3. Base shear at empty Condition.
engineers, architects for improving designs
and construction practices. In this work CONCLUSION
analysis of different Elevated water tank From the above result it’s found that, due to
models is carried out for earthquake zone IV. provision of IS 1893-2002 the basic
Comparison of different performance parameter required for calculation of seismic
characteristics is made to check the force is different i.e. R, I, Z etc. IS 1893-2002
1246
Nayak and Thakare
provides the value of response factor (R) and required capacity of given structure is 226
importance factor (I) is different for different KN but at this condition capacity of given
types of structure. Seismic zone is divided structure is 160 kN. Retrofitting of given
into four categories which is five categories structure is carried out by provision of single
in IS 1893-1984. Due to changes in basic bracing on compression side. From the
value of seismic force the seismic force of analysis by providing single bracing the 60 %
given structure is different as compare to of story drift ratio is reduced as compare to
seismic force calculated by IS 1893-1984. In previous. By provision of single compression
the analysis of seismic force by IS 1893-2002 bracing capacity of given structure is increase
the effect of impulsive and convective by 380 KN which is satisfactory for given
pressure is consider which is not consider in structure.
old code.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
With
retrofiiting This paper has been undertaken as part of
6 Without improving awareness level project for
retrofitting
5 refineries towards corrosion, repair and
retrofitting method and for preventive
Storey level
4 inspection and maintenance plan of water

3 tanks.
2 REFERENCES
1 Karthikeyan B and Balasubramaian T M
0 0.002 0.004 0.006 0.008 2014 Corrosion and deterioration studies on
Storey drift ratio plain and reinforced concrete in aggressive
Figure 4. Comparison between the environment International Journal of Applied
values of story drift in full condition. Engineering Research ISSN 0973- 4562
9(16) 3393-3407.
With
retrofiiting Geraldine Villain, Mickael Thiery and Gérard
Without
6 retrofitting Platret 2007 Measurement methods of
IS
5 1893:2002
carbonation profiles in concrete
Storey level
4 thermogravimetry chemical analysis and

gammadensimetry Cement and Concrete
3
Research 37 1182–1192.
2
Ayazhussain M Jabar Patel H S 2006 Seismic
1
behaviour of RC Elevated Water Tank under
0 0.002 0.004 0.006
different staging pattern and earthquake
storey drift ratio
characteristics Asian Journal of Civil
Figure 5. Comparison between the Engineering (Building and Housing) 9(1) 75-
values of story drift in empty condition. 83.
Most of the water tank got failed due to Gaikwad Madhukar V Mangulkar Madhuri N
negligence of concept of sloshing effect of 2013 Comparison Between static and
the water tank. Given structure is not capable dynamic analysis of elevated water tank
to carry the seismic force calculated by International Journal of civil engineering
considering IS 1893-2002.For given demand and technology 4(3) 12-29.
of existing story drift ratio of water tank has Waghmare M V Madhekar S N 2013
not fulfilled the criteria of permissible drift as Behaviour of Elevated Water Tank under
IS 1893-2002, so it observe that there is need sloshing effect International Journal of
of increases stiffness of that staging frame to Advanced Technology in Civil Engineering,
get drift ratio within permissible. The ISSN: 2231 –5721 2(1).
1247
ICCMS2016
VALIDATION OF THEORETICAL STRESS CONCENTRATION

FACTOR FOR VARYING NOTCHED GEOMETRIES USING FEA
KHATAWATE V.H.1*, DHARAP M.A. 1 and MOORTHY R.I.K. 2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, V.J.T.I. Matunga, Mumbai, India.
2
PIIT, New-Panvel, Navimumbai, India.
Abstract: In this paper evaluation of stress concentration factor at notch root for three
different notched geometries using finite element analysis (FEA) is presented. All the
three specimens are subjected to uniaxial tension. In FEA selection of finite elements
and method used for meshing plays important role in obtaining accurate results. Two
types of methods used in preprocessing part of FEA viz., auto meshing and biased
meshing are thoroughly discussed. It is found that the biased meshing gives more
accurate results with less number of elements when compared to auto meshing. Finite
element analysis using biased mesh is carried out for all the three geometries to
evaluate theoretical stress concentration factor ( 𝐾𝑡 ) and validated using Roark’s
formulae.
Keywords: Notch; Stress concentration factor; Finite Element Analysis (FEA);

Convergence.
INTRODUCTION PROBLEM FORMULATION AND

Metal fatigue is a process which causes the MATERIAL PROPERTIES
failure of an engineering component Consider three specimens as shown in
subjected to repeated loading. Fatigue life Figure.1, 2 and 3. A tensile uniaxial loading
prediction methods required accurate is applied on all the three specimens. The
assessment of local stresses and strains. material used for the analysis is (Aluminium
Notch stress-strain conversion rules [Neuber, 6063T7) isotropic, homogeneous and elastic.
1961; Molski and Glinka, 1981; Glinka, For the given material, 𝐾𝑡 obtained by Linear
1985; Seeger et al., 1980] are extensively FEA for all the three specimens are validated
used to find local stresses and strains. And with 𝐾𝑡 obtained by Roark’s formulae.
these rules calls for accurate evaluation of
SPECIMEN-1: RECTANGULAR
theoretical or elastic stress concentration
SECTION PLATE WITH CIRCULAR
factor (𝐾𝑡 ).Therefore accurate evaluation of
HOLE AT THE CENTRE.
𝐾𝑡 is prerequisite for structural safety and
integrity. Approximate and accurate results
for 𝐾𝑡 can be found in reference books
[Young, 2002; Pilkey, 2008]. Literature on
this topic can be found in [Zheng, 1997;
Filippini, 2000].
The objective of this paper is to analyze
elastic stress concentration factor using finite Figure1.Rectangular section plate with
element analysis and validating by Roark’s circular Hole
formulae.
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: vkhatawate@mes.ac.in 1248

Khatawate et al.
2𝑟 2𝑟 2 2𝑟 3 For the specimen-1 and 2, the thickness is

𝐾𝑡 = 3.00 − 3.13 ( ) + 3.66 ( ) − 1.53 ( )
𝐷 𝐷 𝐷 smaller in comparison with length and width
For D=40mm,r=5mm therefore plane stress condition is assumed
𝐾𝑡 =2.42 and hence 2D elements are preferred. FEA
Results are strongly affected by the way of
SPECIMEN-2: SEMICIRCULAR
meshing the model. In FEA Proper meshing
NOTCHES AT OPPOSITE SIDE EDGES
i.e. selection of appropriate element, deciding
IN A RECTANGULAR SECTION.
mesh size and fine meshing in the vicinity of
notches is important and is most time
consuming job. With proper meshing, FEA
results get converged to accurate results.
Case study for specimen-1 is presented here
for convergence of results. The FEA is
carried out using HYPERWORKS finite
element program.
Figure2.Two semicircular notches in a
60
rectangular section plate.
2ℎ 2ℎ 2 2ℎ 3 50
𝐾𝑡 = 3.06 − 3.37 ( ) + 0.64 ( ) + 0.658 ( )

𝐷 𝐷 𝐷 40
% error
For D=40 and r=h=5mm 30

Auto Mesh
Biased Mesh
𝐾𝑡 =2.27
20
SPECIMEN-3: SEMICIRCULAR
GROOVE IN CYLINDRICAL BAR. 10
0
-5000 0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000
Number of elements
Figure4.Percentage error in 𝐾𝑡 Vs
number of elements.
As an initial step auto meshing is done with
2D elements with coarse mesh size of 5mm.
Figure3.Semicircular groove in cylindrical A four noded quadrilateral element is used.
bar. For the analysis a load of 2000N is applied at
single point constraint. For coarse and
2ℎ 2ℎ 2 2ℎ 3 automesh (mesh size = 5 mm) the percentage
𝐾𝑡 = 3.04 − 5.42 ( ) + 6.27 ( ) − 2.89 ( ) difference in error in 𝐾𝑡 is 51.77% when
𝐷 𝐷 𝐷
compared with Roark’s equation(theoretical)
For D=40 and r=h=5mm as shown in Figure.4.Further with automesh
𝐾𝑡 =2.03 option, mesh is made finer by gradually
MATERIAL PROPERTIES decreasing the element size up to mesh size
of 0.2 mm. Mesh size of 5 mm resulted into
Material used is Aluminium6063T7. 39 number of elements. Where as with 0.2
Modulus of elasticity :E=60400MPa mm, the number of elements are 24412
Poisson’s ratio :=0.33 (Figure. 5). The percentage difference in
Density :=2.7e-6 kg/mm3 error in 𝐾𝑡 is 2.47% with mesh size of 0.2
mm when compared with Roark.
LINEAR FEA OF SPECIMEN-1 FOR
CONVERGENCE OF RESULTS
WITH AUTOMESH OPTION
1249
Validation of Theoretical Stress Concentration Factor for Varying Notched Geometries using FEA
3.0
2.5
A linear FEA of three specimens with
2.0
varying notch geometry is performed. For
linear analysis the value of 𝐾𝑡 will remain
Kt
1.5
Roark
same irrespective of magnitude of axial load.
1.0
FEA (Auto Mesh) For specimen-1 and 2,an axial load of 2000N
FEA (Biased Mesh)
is applied and a load of 20000N is applied to
0.5
specimen-3.The convergence of 𝐾𝑡 value is
0.0
studied with respect to theoretical Roark’s
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000 formulae and Finite element analysis.
Number of Elements Figure.5 show variation of 𝐾𝑡 with number of
Figure 5.Convergence of stress elements. As number of elements increased,
concentration factor. the value of 𝐾𝑡 converged to approximately
exact value. Also as the number of elements
LINEAR FEA OF SPECIMEN-1 FOR increases, the percentage difference in error
CONVERGENCE OF RESULTS between Roark and FEA values decreases as
WITH BIASED MESH OPTION. shown in Figure.4. From the Figure.4 and 5,
Convergence can be achieved if biased it is also clear that better convergence is
meshing is employed in the critical region obtained with biased meshing without
(vicinity of notches). Biasing is one of the increasing the number of elements. Therefore
useful feature in commercial FEA for the analysis of all the specimens, biased
software.With this feature even without meshing is used.
increasing the number of elements one could
achieve better results by appropriate
arrangments of nodes and elements. For
convergence study using bias option,1mm
mesh size is selected and biasing is done in
critical region.Bias intensity in the steps of
0,5,10 and 20 is selected and the results for
specimen-1 as a case study is shown in
Figure.4 and 5.
For specimen-1, with mesh size of 1 mm for
all the 4 bias intensities, the number of Figure 6.Meshing of Specimen 1 with 2D
elements generated are 1100. With 0 (zero) elements.
bias intensity, the % difference in error of 𝐾𝑡 Figure.6, show meshing of specimen-1 using
between Roark and FEA is 11.15%. With 20 biased mesh. Owing to symmetry only one
bias intensity, the error is 1.23% (Table quarter of all the three models are meshed.
1).Since % error is less for bias intesity 20, it The specimens-1 and 2 are meshed with 2D,
is used for all the three specimens. 4 noded Quadrilateral element, which result
Table 1.Results for Linear Analysis. in 1100 number of elements with biased
mesh. Specimen-3 is meshed with 3D, 8
Specimen 𝐾𝑡 𝐾𝑡 % error noded brick elements, that result in 106880
(Roark) (FEA) number of elements. Appropriate boundary
condition constraints are placed at all planes
1 2.42 2.39 1.23 of symmetry. Figure.7,8 and 9 shows
2 2.27 2.16 4.84 maximum Von-Mises stresses in Specimens-
3 2.03 1.91 6.01 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
1250
Khatawate et al.
for all the three specimens to assess stress

concentration factor (𝐾𝑡 ) by FEA. For
specimens-1, 2 and 3, 𝐾𝑡 by FEA differ with
Roark’s formulae by 1.23%, 4.84% and
6.01% respectively. These values are
tabulated in Table 1.
REFERENCES
Flifilippini M 2000 Stress Gradient
Calculations at Notches International
Figure 7.Maximum stress in specimen-1.
Journal of Fatigue 22 397-409.
Glinka G 1985 Calculation of Inelastic
Notch-tip Strain-Stress Histories under
Cyclic Loading Engineering Fracture
Mechanics 22 839-854.
Molski K and Glinka G 1981 A Method of
Elastic-Plastic Stress and Strain
Calculation at a Notch Root Materials
Science and Engineering 50 93–100.
Neuber H 1961 Theory of Stress
Figure 8.Maximum stress in specimen-2.
Concentration for Shear-Strained
Prismatic Bodies with Arbitrary
Nonlinear Stress-Strain Law ASME
Journal of Applied Mechanics 28 544-
550.
Pilkey D Walter 2008 Peterson’s stress
concentration factors John Wiley & Sons
Inc Hoboken New Jersey 84.
Seeger Timm and Heuler Paul 1980
Generalised Application of Neuber’s
Figure 9.Maximum stress in Specimen-3 Rule Journal of Testing and Evaluation
8 199-204.
CONCLUSION
Young W C & BudynasR G 2002 Roark's
In this paper linear FEA of three different Formulas for Stress and Strain Mc.Graw
notch geometry is performed to assess stress
Hill Co. New York 781.
concentration factor (𝐾𝑡 ). The selection of
finite elements and method used for meshing Zheng M and Niemi E1997Analysis of the
the model plays important role in obtaining Stress Concentration Factor for a
the accurate results. For all the three Shallow Notch by the Slip-Line Field
specimens, two methods are used for Method Int. Journal of Fatigue 19191–
meshing, viz., auto and biased mesh. It is
194.
found that with biased meshing, FEA results
converged with Roark’s formulae with less
number of elements when compared to auto
meshing. Therefore biased meshing is used
1251
ICCMS2016
FORCE BASED LINEAR STATIC ANALYSIS OF2-D CURVED

TAPEREDTIMOSHENKO BEAM ELEMENTS
RAJAPAKSE R.M.C.M.*, WIJESUNDARA K.K. and DISSANAYAKE P. B. R.
Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, University of Peradeniya, Sri Lanka.
Abstract: This paper presents a force based finite element model for linear static
analysis of 2-D curved tapered Timoshenko beam elements having variable depth and
uniform width. The force interpolation functions are selected such that equilibrium of
bending moments, axial forces and shear forces are satisfied in the strong form at any
internal point, devoid of any additional assumption for variation of displacement.
Hence the derived element stiffness matrix is exact even for curved tapered members
with variable depth. Displacement based finite element approach that is commonly
used in commercial finite element packages, uses an assumption for the distribution of
displacement along the element, which do not satisfy the governing differential
equations of the Timoshenko element. Hence, such approaches do not provide closed
form exact solutions for the deflection of a tapered beam and requires discretization
using a large number of elements. The results of a linear static analysis of a 2-D
curved tapered cantilever Timoshenko beam obtained using the proposed model were
compared with those of discretized displacement based models to highlight the
accuracy and computational efficiency of the proposed force based finite element
model in analysing 2-D structures with complex geometries.
Keywords: Force based formulation; Timoshenko beam; Curved tapered
member
INTRODUCTION Force based finite element formulation is

based on the selection of force interpolation
Curved tapered members are widely used in
functions such that equilibrium is satisfied at
modern structures due to their structural
any internal point along the element, hence is
qualities and the architectural aesthetics. Not
exact even for curved tapered members.
only in modern structures, curved members
Therefore, force based approach offers a
such as arches were frequently present in
more accurate and computationally efficient
buildings and bridges throughout history.
method of analysis of structures containing
Traditional finite element methods of
curved tapered members.
analysis of structures follow a procedure that
Force based approach has been used by
utilizes the displacement based finite element
Spacone et al., (1996) for non-linear analysis
approach. Displacement based finite element
of reinforced concrete frames. Linear
formulations are based on the assumption of
dynamic analysis of complex structures with
displacement interpolation functions. Hence,
curved 3-D members has been performed by
analysis of structures composed of curved
Molins et al., (1998).
tapered members require discretization using
This paper presents a force based model for
a large number of elements.
linear static analysis of 2-D curved tapered
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:chaturarajapakse@gmail.com 1252

Rajapakse et al.
Timoshenko beam elements and investigates

the accuracy and computational efficiency of ( )
the proposed model with discretized
( )
displacement based finite element models. ( ) (5)
FORCE BASED FINITE ELEMENT ( ( ))

FORMULATION OF 2-D CURVED Force interpolation functions Np(x) are
TAPERED TIMOSHENKO BEAM selected such that equilibrium is satisfied in
STIFFNESS MATRIX the strong form at any interior point, without
Displacement based formulation of a the need for an approximation for
Timoshenko beam requires a parabolic displacements, stresses or strains.
assumption of displacement variation. Hence, Equilibrium can be expressed as in Eq. (6)
it is approximate even for linear elastic for the Timoshenko beam, where is the
material having prismatic cross sections. force differential operator.
Thus, the procedure presented by Fédération ( ) (6)
internationale du bétonTask Group 4.4,
2008for force based formulation of a
Timoshenko element is adopted for the case (7)
of a 2-D curved tapered Timoshenko beam
element. The element is formulated referring
a basic system, which is shown in Figure 1. ( )
Force interpolation functions are obtained
u, N solving Eq. (6).
θ1, M1 L θ2, M2
Figure 1: Basic system with nodal
( )
displacements and nodal forces ( ) (8)
In usual notation, nodal displacement vector
U, nodal force vector P, section force vector ( )
σ(x), section deformation vectorϵ(x) and Section forces are expressed as a function of
section flexibility matrix f(x)are given in Eq. nodal forces in Eq. (9).
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) respectively for a
( ) ( ) (9)
Timoshenko element. Axial force, bending
moment, shear force, axial deformation of the Section constitutive law is given in Eq. (10).
reference axis, curvature and shear
( ) ( ) ( ) (10)
deformationat a distance x along the element
are denoted by N(x), M(x), V(x), ( ) ( ) Compatibility is enforced in the weak form
and ( ) respectively. through principle of virtual forces, as
expressed in Eq. (11).
(1)
∫ ( ) ( ) (11)
(2)
A relationship among U and Pcan be
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (3) obtained combining Eq. (9), (10) and (11)
and is given in Eq. (12), where F is the
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (4) element flexibility matrix referring the basic
system.
(12)
1253
Force Based Linear Static Analysis of 2-D Curved Tapered Timoshenko Beam Elements
CASE STUDY
∫ ( ) ( ) ( ) (13)
Element stiffness matrix is formulated for a

2-D curved tapered Timoshenko beam
element with rectangular cross section of
uniform width b and varying depth according
to any smooth function h(x).
Section flexibility matrix for the said element
is presented in Eq. (14), where k denotes the
Timoshenko coefficient for a rectangular
section. Figure 2. Dimensions of the curved
tapered beam
( ) Consider a curved tapered cantilever beam
with rectangular cross section of uniform
( ) width and parabolic increase of depth along
( ) (14)
the element. Length (L) and width (b) are 2.0
( ( )) m and 0.4 m respectively. Depth increases
Element flexibility matrix F referring the from the free end to the fixed far end of the
basic system is computed by substituting in element according to Eq. (18).
Eq. (13). Numerical integration should be ( ) (18)
performed in this step. The authors have used Dimensions of the starting section and end
Gauss-Lobatto numerical integration section are as given in Figure 2. Mechanical
procedure. properties of reinforced concrete material are
modulus of elasticity (E) of 33 106 kN/m2
Element stiffness matrix K referring the basic and Poisson’s ratio (υ) of 0.15. A
system is computed by inverting F. concentrated load (P) of 10 kN is applied at
Formulation is performed for the basic the free end. It is important to note that this
system so that F is invertible. study is conducted neglecting the self-weight
Element stiffness matrix KL and element of the element.
force vector PL referring the local coordinate Displacement of the free end obtained from
system can be obtained by adding the rigid the proposed force based model and
body modes and are given in Eq. (15) and Eq. discretized displacement based models were
(16) respectively. Rigid body transformation examined.
matrix is denoted by .
(15)
(16)
In the linear elastic case, referring the local 0.54 Displacement
Tip displacement/ mm
coordinate system, element nodal based model

0.52
displacement vector UL can be computed as Proposed model
per Eq. (17). 0.5
(17) 0.48
0.46
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Number of elements
1254
Rajapakse et al.
Figure 3. Tip displacement variation with displacement based methods was illustrated
respect to number of elements using an example.
Figure (3) illustrates that displacement based
models require very fine discretization using ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
at least 32 elements for the convergence of
the displacement of the free end. The study was conducted with the financial
support of the National Research Council of
On the other hand, the proposed force based
model provides an exact answer under the Sri Lanka under grant 15-127.
assumptions of Timoshenko beam theory,
using just one element. The accuracy of the REFERENCES
results is only conditioned by the Gauss- Fédération internationale du béton Task
Lobatto numerical integration procedure. Group 4.4 2008 Practitioner’s guide to
This highlights the fact that the proposed finite element modelling of reinforced
force based model provides accurate results concrete structures Fédération
for the linear static analysis of 2-D curved internationale du béton 123-131.
tapered Timoshenko beam members. Molins C Roca P and Barbat A H1998
Furthermore, it is evident that the proposed Flexibility-based linear dynamic
force based model is computationally much analysis of complex structures with
more economical than the discretized curved-3D members Earthquake
displacement methods when it comes to the Engineering & Structural Dynamics
linear static analysis 2-D curved tapered 27(7) 731-747.
members. Spacone E FilippouF Cand TaucerF
1996Fibre beam-column model for non-
The proposed force based model can be
linear analysis of R/C frames: Part I
utilized for the linear static analysis of
Formulation Earthquake Engineering &
complex structures consisting of the
Structural Dynamics 25(7)711–725.
assembly of curved tapered members and
prismatic members. This could be useful in
performing linear static analysis of historical
structures consisting of curved members
(arches) as well for modern structures having
complex architecture.
CONCLUSION
A force based formulation was adopted for
the linear static analysis of 2-D curved
tapered Timoshenko beam elements with
uniform width and variable height. This
formulation permits 2-D modelling of any
structure consisting of such members and
provides accurate results for the linear static
analysis, where the numerical integration
technique used and the assumptions of
Timoshenko beam theory were the only
conditions on the accuracy of results.
The superior computational efficiency and
the accuracy of results of the proposed force
based model when compared with discretized
1255
ICCMS2016
EFFECT OF COVER TO LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT OF

SQUARE RC COLUMN FOR AXIALLY COMPRESSION TESTING
NARULE G.* and BAMBOLE A. N.
Structural Engineering Department, VJTI, Matunga, Mumbai India.
Abstract: In RC frame structure load is transfered from slab to beam and beam to
column. Column of reinforced concrete material shares the service load due to
bonding from concrete to steel received from concrete portion of beam. The main
focused of this paper is to study the effect of top and bottom concrete cover to vertical
reinforcement of square RC column on axial behavior of column. The experimental
program included six RC square column specimens which consisted with cover at top
and bottom to vertical reinforcement and without cover to reinforcement. The cover
effect study was caried out through the comparison of experimental results of cover
and without cover column sample testing in terms of the ultimate axial strength, axial
and lateral strain. The experimental results showed that for RC squre column
specimens with cover significantly affect on the axial compressive strength and global
axial strains when compared to without cover RC column specimens. The results of
axial compresion testing clearly demonstrate that the strength performance and
ductility behaviour of RC square columns are predominately influenced by concrete
cover to veritical reinforcement of column.
Keywords: Square column; Concrete cover; Strength; Ductility.
INTRODUCTION steel. In which three specimens were without

concrete cover RC square column and three
Concrete cover in reinforced concrete is the
of specimens were with top and bottom
least distance between the surface of
concrete cover of 25mm to vertical
embedded reinforcement and outer surface of
reinforcement of square column. Strain
the concrete. inrc structural member, concrete
gauges were pasted to measure strains in steel
cover has key roll to protect steel
and concrete. To find load and deflection,
reinforcement from corrosion, fire and also
load cell and LPs were installed. All the
enable them to be stressed with out slipping.
specimens were tested on a 300T
in this present work, the columns of with
compression testing machine with loading
concrete cover and without cover to vertical
rate of 2.5 KN/sec. Data acquisition (DAQ)
reinforcement were casted and tested to
system was used to measure the readings
establish relationship in between strength
from the instrumentation. The strain gauge
capacity, ductility and effect of cover.
readings were taken and established
relationship between effect of concrete cover
MATERIAL AND METHODOLOGY
and strength parameters of RC square
To verify effect of cover on RC square column.
column, six numbers of RC square columns
of size 200 x 200 x 500mm were cast as per
test matrix of concrete grade M20 and Fe415
*Author for Correspondence: Email: giridharnarule@yahoo.co.in 1256

Narule and Bambole
Fig 1: Testing of specimen Figure 2: Reinforcement for specimen
RESULTS
Table 1 Results of axial loading on RC Square columns with cover and without cover
Sr. Weight Gauge Maximum stress Corresponding

Specimen Max load
No. (Kg) length (mm) (MPa) strain
(ton)
1 C200x200x50 -4 52.7 350.0 89.34 22.336 0.000007622
2 C200x200x500-6 52.30 351.25 96.94 24.23 0.000007470
3 C200x200x500-1 52.00 349.83 82.706 20.676 0.000008531
4 WC200x200x500 -3 52.2 350.0 86.46 21.615 0.000007875
5 WC200x200x500 -5 52.20 350.50 82.039 20.509 -0.00001109
6 WC200x200x500 -2 52.2 352.0 92.135 23.03 -0.000009540
Table 2 Results of ductility of RC Square columns with cover and without cover
1257
Effect of Cover to Longitudinal Reinforcement of Square RC Column for Axially Compression Testing.
Sr.
Specimen Py (ton) Δy (mm) Pmax(ton) Δmax(mm) μ
No. μavg
1 C200x200x500-4 85.143 -0.001715 89.34 0.002668 1.55
2 C200x200x500-6 87.90 0.001142 96.94 0.002626 2.29 1.94
-
3 C200x200x500-1 79.21 -0.001492 82.706 2.0
0.002984
-
4 WC200x200x500 -3 78.91 -0.001487 86.46 1.85
0.002756
-
5 WC200x200x500 -5 77.043 0.002134 82.039 1.82
0.003887 1.8
-
6 WC200x200x500 -2 81.42 0.001935 92.135 1.73
0.003361
Figure 3 Combined Load VS Deflection
1258
Narule and Bambole
Figure 4 Combined Stress VS Strain (LP)
CONCLUSIONS
1) The ductility of without cover column conference on Earthquake
specimen is lesser than column with cover to EngineeringVancouver B C Canada
reinforcement at top and bottom August 2006.
2) Without cover specimens failed at mid Rochette P and Labossiere P 2000 Axial
height and were taken higher load than testing of rectangular columns models
specimens with cover confined with composites ASCE J
Compos Const 2000 4(3) 129–36.
3) The effect of top and bottom cover to
vertical reinforcement of square column G Wu Z S Wu and Z T Lu 2006 Design-
increases the global vertical deformation and oriented stress–strain model for concrete
also on stress-strain behaviour of column. prism confined FRPComposites
construction and building materials 21.
REFERENCES
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
Committee 440 2008 Guide for the design
and construction of externally bonded
FRP systems for strengthening concrete
structures ACI 440 2R 08.
Mander J B Priestley MJ N and Park R 1998
Theoretical stress–strain model for
confined concrete ASCE J Structural
Engg114(8)1804–26.
Xiao Y and Wu H 2000 Compressive
behavior of concrete confined by carbon
fiber composite jackets ASCE J Mater
Civil Engg12(2)139–46.
Daisuke Kato and L I Zhuzhen 2004 Effect of
reinforcing details on axial load capacity
of RC columns Proceeding of world
1259
ICCMS2016
NONLOCAL ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED PLATES USING THIRD

ORDER SHEAR DEFORMATION THEORY CONSIDERING SURFACE
STRESS EFFECTS
RAGHU P.* and RAJAGOPAL A.
Abstract: In this work, analytical solutions are presented for the analysis of laminated
composite plates using a nonlocal third order shear deformation theory considering
the surface stress effects. The nonlocal formulations are based on Eringen’s (1972)
theory of nonlocal continuum mechanics and the third order plate theory of Reddy
(1984; 2004). The mathematical formulations for surface stresses are taken from
Gurtin and Murdoch’s work (1975; 1978). In nonlocal theory size effects are taken
into account by assuming that stress at a point depends on strain at that point as well
as on the strain at neighbouring points. Analytical solutions of bending and vibration
of simply supported laminates and isotropic plates are presented using this theory to
illustrate the effect of nonlocality on deflection and vibration frequencies for various
span to thickness (a/h) ratios.
Keywords: Size effect; Nonlocal theory; surface stress; laminated composites;
third order shear deformation theory; analytical solutions.
INTRODUCTION within classical continuum mechanics in the

context of homogenization approaches.
When material size effects are prominent like
Nonlocality of the stress-strain relationship
in modelling the micro and nano structures,
introduces the length scale at which classical
conventional theories cannot model the
elasticity theories are inadequate in
material behaviour accurately. There has
modelling the response. Classical theory is
been continuum focus in recent years towards
inherently size independent. The nonlocal
the development of generalized continuum
formulations are of integral type formulations
theories that account for the inherent micro
with weighted spatial averaging or by
structure in natural and engineering materials
implicit gradient models which are
(Eringen, 1998).The notion of generalized
categorized as strongly nonlocal, while
continua unifies several extended continuum
weakly nonlocal theories include, for instance
theories that account for such size
explicit gradient models (2002). The
dependence due to the underlying micro
nonlocality arises due to discrete structure of
structure of the material.
matter and the fluctuations in the inter-atomic
A systematic overview and detailed forces. The two dominant physical
discussion of generalized continuum theories mechanisms that lead to size dependency of
has been given by Bazant and Jirasek (2002). elastic behaviour at the nano scale are surface
Recently, the higher order gradient theory for energy effects and nonlocal interactions
finite deformation has been elaborated (2002) (2007).
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: raghupiska@gmail.com 1260

Raghu and Rajagopal
NONLOCAL THEORY In the third-order shear deformation theory

(TSDT) of Reddy (2004) the assumptions of
Nonlocal theory invokes the length scale the straightness and normality of the
parameter in order to account for the size transverse normal after deformation are
effects (Eringen, 1972). Neglecting the size relaxed by expressing the displacements as
effects, when dealing with micro and nano cubic functions of thickness coordinate.
scale fields, may result in inaccurate Consequently the transverse shear strains and
solutions and hence resulting in wrong shear stresses vary quadratically through the
designs. So one must consider the small scale thickness of the laminate and avoids the need
effects and atomic forces to obtain the for shear correction factor. Here the Reddy’s
solution with acceptable accuracy. In third order theory is reformulated to account
nonlocal elasticity theory it is assumed that for the surface stress effect. These nonlocal
the stress at a point in a continuum body is a laminated plate theories allow for the small
function of the strain at all neighbour points scale effect which becomes significant when
of the continuum, hence the effects of small dealing with micro and nano plate like
scale and atomic forces are considered as structures (2007).
material parameters in the constitutive
Displacement field
equation. Following experimental
observations, Eringen proposed a constitutive The displacement field is based ona quadratic
model that expresses the nonlocal stress variation of transverse shear strains (hence
tensor σnl at point x as transverse shear stress on top and bottom of a
σnl =∫K(|x'-x|,τ)σ(x') dx' (1) general laminate composed of different
layers. The displacement field of Reddy’s
where σ(x) is the classical macroscopic stress third order theory is
tensor at a point x and K(|x'-x|,τ) is the u(x,y,z)=u 0 (x,y)+zϕ x -(4z3/3h2)(ϕ x+ ∂w 0 /∂x)
Kernel function which is normalized over the v(x,y,z)=v 0 (x,y)+zϕ y -(4z3/3h2)(ϕ y+ ∂w 0 /∂y)
volume of the body represents the nonlocal (4)
modulus. |x'-x| is the nonlocal distance and τ w(x,y,z)=w 0 (x,y)
is the material constant that depends on the
internal and external characteristic length. where u 0 , v 0 , w 0 are in plane displacements
of a point on the mid-plane (i.e z = 0), ϕ x , ϕ y
As per Hookes law we have denote the rotations of a transverse normal
σ(x) =C(x): ϵ(x) (2) line at the mid-plane (ϕ x = ∂u/∂z and ϕ y =
∂v/∂z ). The total thickness of the laminate is
where ϵ is the strain tensor C is the fourth given by h.
order elasticity tensor. Eq. (1) and Eq. (2)
together form the nonlocal constitutive Surface stress
equation for Hookean solid. Eq. (1) can be Because of interaction between the elastic
represented equivalently in differential form surface and bulk material, in plane forces in
as different directions act on the plate. The
(1-τ2l2∇2)σnl= σ (3) resulting in plane loads lead to surface
stresses. The general expression for surface
Where τ = (e 0 a)2/l2, e 0 is a material constant
stress as given by Gurtin and Murdoch (1975,
and a and l are internal and external
1978) is given by
characteristic lengths respectively. In general
σs αβ =τsδ αβ +2(μs-τs)ε αβ +(λs+τs)u γ,γ δ αβ +τsu α,β
∇2 is the three dimensional Laplace operator.
(5)
The nonlocal parameter μ can be taken as
σs 3β = τsu 3,β (6)
μ=τ2l2.
where α ,β ,γ =1, 2 and λs and μs are Lame’s
THIRD-ORDER SHEAR constants and τs is the surface stress
parameter.
DEFORMATION THEORY
1261
Nonlocal Analysis of Laminated Composite Plates using Third Order Shear Deformation Theory
Gurtin and Murdoch also gave the surface 1 1.7 0.86972 0.00921
equilibrium equation as 3 3.4 0.87006 0.00672
σs iα,α +σ i3 = ρs üi
(7) Table 1 shows that with increase in nonlocal
where ρs is the surface density. To satisfy this parameter by keeping the surface stress
equation we assume the linear variation of constant the value of w̅ increases and the
σ zz through the thickness. value of ω̅ decreases. For a fixed nonlocal
EXAMPLE: ANTISYMMETRIC parameter with increase in surface stress, the
value of w̅ increases and ω̅ decreases. It is
CROSS-PLY LAMINATED PLATE
also observed that the percent change in the
A simply supported antisymmetic cross-ply value of w̅ for a fixed value of surface stress
laminated plate subjected to a uniformly and with increase in nonlocal parameter
transverse distributed load is considered. decreases as the value of a/h increases. Figure
Both static bending and free vibration 1 clearly shows that the value of
analysis have been performed. The thickness nondimensional stress value increases as the
of all the layers are equal and each layer is value of nonlocal parameter increases.
orthotropic with following material
3
properties. E 1 = 175 ×10 Mpa, E 2 = 175
×103 Mpa, G 12 = 3.5 ×103 Mpa, G 13 = 3.5
×103 Mpa, G 23 = 1.4 ×103Mpa,
ν 12 =ν 13 =0.25,ν 21 =(E 2 /E 1 )ν 12 .The
dimensionless shear stress values are
calculated as follows. τ̅ yz = τ yz (a/2, 0, 0) (h/
(bq 0 ))and τ̅ xz = τ xz (0, b/2,0)(h/(bq 0 )).
The dimensionless maximum centre
deflection and fundamental frequency are
obtained as w̅ = w × (E 2 h3/q 0 a4) × 102 and ω̅
=ωh √(ρ/G 13 ) where a, b, h are the length,
width and thickness of the plate respectively.
Table1. Dimensionless maximum
deflections and fundamental natural
frequency in simply supported anti
symmetric crossply laminated plate under
sinusoidally distributed transverse load.
a/b a/h μ τs(N/m) w̅ ω̅
1 10 0 0 1.05268 0.02440
0 1.7 1.05271 0.02439
0 3.4 1.05273 0.02438
1 0 1.05314 0.01824
3 0 1.05405 0.01329
1 1.7 1.05316 0.01822
3 3.4 1.05409 0.01328
20 0 0 0.86949 0.01235
0 1.7 0.86963 0.01234
0 3.4 0.86976 0.01233
1 0 0.86959 0.00923
3 0 0.86979 0.00673
1262
Raghu and Rajagopal
Figure 1.Distribution of shear stress

predicted by both local and nonlocal
TSDT for a/h =10 (a) τ̅ yz (b) τ̅ xz
REFERENCES
Bazanth Z P and Jirasek M 2002 Nonlocal

integral formulations of plasticity and
damage. Journal of Engineering
Mechannics ASCE 1281119-1149.
Eringen A C 1998Microcontinuum field
theories-1 Foundations and solids
Springer-Verlag New York
Eringen A C and Edelen D G B 1972 On
nonlocal elasticity. International Journal
of Engineering Science 10233-248.
Geers M G D and Kouznetsova V and
Brekelmans W A M 2001Gradient
enhanced computational homogenization
for the macro micro scale transition
Journal of physics 11145-152.
Gurtin M E and Murdoch I A 1975A
continuum theory of elastic material
surfaces Archives of Rational Mechanics
and Analysis 57291-323.
Gurtin M E and Murdoch I A 1978Surface
stress in solids International Journal for
Solids and Structures 14431-440.
Maranganti R and Sharma P 2007Length
scales at which classical elasticity breaks
down for various materials Physical
Review Letters 98195-204.
Reddy J N 1984A simple higher order theory
for laminated composite plates Journal of
Applied Mechanics 51745-752.
Reddy J N 2004Mechanics of Laminated
Composite Plates and Shells Theory and
Analysis 2nd ed. CRC press.
Reddy J N 2007Nonlocal theories for
bending buckling and vibration of beams
Science 45288-307.
1263
ICCMS2016
NUMERICAL SIMULATION ON PERFORMANCE EVALUATION OF

CHEMICAL ANCHORS EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
SASMAL S.1, LIEBERUM K.H.2 and KOENDERS E.A.B.2
1
CSIR-Structural Engineering Research Centre, CSIR Campus, Taramani, Chennai India.
2
Institute of Construction and Building Materials, Technical University of Darmstadt, Darmstadt,
GERMANY.
Abstract: Concrete, a heterogeneous and quasi-brittle material, is significantly used

in construction. Many endeavours have been made to develop new classes of concrete
by improving microstructural shortcomings and/or by replacing parts of the cement
with industrial by-products to enhance its sustainability footprint. Though attempts
have opened up new possibilities for designing concretes with a better performance
and innovative properties, understanding the behaviour of newly developed concrete
is mandatory for effective applications. Generally, post installed anchors are used in
concrete structures for facilitating the retrofitting/strengthening of deficient structures,
alteration of existing structures or other types of post-construction requirements.
Performance of any anchor system significantly depend on the type of anchor and
properties of the embedment medium, i.e., concrete, and interface behaviour. In the
present paper, the inelastic damage process in concrete taken place during the pull out
of chemical anchors is studied through numerical simulations. FE models are
developed by suitably incorporating the compression softening and fracture behaviour
of concrete. Primary focus of the paper is on the behaviour of the chemical bond-
concrete interaction and concrete failure during pull out of the anchors when the
different material parameters are the tensile strength, tension retention factor, fracture
energy etc. of the simulated concrete.
Keywords: Concrete; Damage process; Chemical anchor; Pull out; Interface.
INTRODUCTION installed anchors are installed in a hole that is

Concrete anchors are often used to make drilled in hardened concrete. Mechanical
attachments to the concrete surface of bridges expansion anchor (MEA), bonded anchor and
and highways. Further, a great interest is resin capsule anchor are the types of mostly
found in retrofitting the structures using the used post installed anchors. Though the MEA
steel plate or bracings whether the steel is quick, easy and inexpensive, it is limited
elements are affixed to concrete using the by it‟s low tensile strength, ineffectiveness in
anchorage. To transfer loads to the reinforced tension zones and unsuitability for dynamic
concrete members, various types of anchors load. To overcome this, the bonded anchors
such as cast-in place anchors, post installed are being used.
anchors or bonded anchors are used. Post
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: saptarshi@serc.res.in 1264

Sasmal et al.
In bonded type anchorage, the load is and surfaces. In ATENA 3D, each macro-
transferred through the bond strength element has its own joints, lines and surfaces.
between the bonding agent (resin) and the Anchor bolt is considered as macro-elements
anchors. Holes are drilled and the bonding with rib. The micro-elements are surrounded
resin is inserted. Bonded type includes with epoxy as a filler material and the system
capsule type and injection type fasteners is embedded in concrete cube. All the
contacts are defined. A 3D interface element
Concrete anchors may fail due to either
tensile load or shear load. But both load acts has been defined in ATENA between epoxy
differently on the anchorage and may cause and anchor, and the contact between epoxy
different failure mechanism at different and concrete is made perfect. Brick meshing
situations. The transfer of load to the base was performed on the finite element model.
materials is either by friction or by bonding Half model was taken for analysis to reduce
strength of resin. the complexity in analysis. All the nodes
The failure that happen due to tensile loading were well merged before starting the
are, (i) Pull out failure, (ii) Anchor material analysis.
failure (steel failure), (iii) Concrete break out
failure and (iv) Concrete Blow out. Out of
these failure mode, the concrete breakout
failure is the most common one as the
strength of anchor rod and the resin is
generally well above the tensile strength of
concrete.
(a) (b)
Figure. 2. FE model for analysis
Smeared approach has been adopted to define
the material properties for material point of
view, which are valid within a certain
material volume. Material model for concrete
in ATENA has been included with the
following effects of the concrete behaviour:
(i) Non-linear behaviour of concrete in
compression including hardening and
A of concrete in tension
softening, (ii) Fracture
based on nonlinear fracture mechanics, (iii)
Biaxial strength failure criterion, (iv)
Reduction of compressive strength after
cracking, and (v)Tension stiffening effect.
Figure. 1. Concrete breakout failure in For concrete, complete equivalent uniaxial
chemical anchor during pull out stress-strain diagram as considered in the
present study.
FINITE ELEMENT MODELLING, In ATENA, a fictitious crack model based on
MATERIAL PROPERTIES, LOADING a crack-opening law and fracture energy is
AND ANALYSIS used for tension after cracking. It is used in
combination with the crack band. Since the
The geometrical model is composed of three-
previous research works showed that the
dimensional solid regions called “macro- exponential crack opening law, as shown in
elements”. Each macro-element is defined Figure. 3, is reasonably good for predicting
separately, and it is composed of joints, lines the response of reinforced concrete (Sasmal
1265
Numerical Simulations for Evaluation of Performance of Chemical Anchors Embedded in Concrete
et al. 2011), the same characteristic is used in 3D interface material

the present study where w is the crack A 3 dimensional interface element is defined
opening and wt is the maximum crack as a contact element in ATENA. It is a key
opening in concrete under tension. property that is needed to be given for
achieving the near to the accurate slip. This
contact element was defined in between
anchor bolt and epoxy. Interface behaviour of
anchor bolt to epoxy was simulated by
defining the interface material as „„contact
element”. In ATENA, the interface material
Figure. 3. Exponential crack opening law is based on Mohr–Coulomb criterion with
tension cut off. For interface material, elastic
The stress-strain behaviour, as shown in normal and shear stiffnesses were assigned
Figure. 4, demonstrates the compressive stress- for initial and post-peak state. The post-peak
strain relationship for concrete adopted for the stiffnesses are used only for numerical
present study. For the ascending branch of purposes after the failure of the element in
concrete stress-strain behaviour, order to preserve the positive definiteness of
recommendations as given in CEB-FIP the global system of equations.
(1990)is adopted. The slope of softening law is
Loading and Analysis
defined by softening modulus Ed. The later
part of strain is calculated from plastic Direct displacements were applied on the bar
displacement wd and band size during failure in in the vertical direction in the form of pull.
compression Lc. The concrete block element was restrained
against displacement at bottom, and all four
sides and top surface were without any
restraints. It is important to mention here that
an idealistic test condition is assumed in the
Figure. 4. Softening displacement present study. The specimen of 50 mm x 50
corresponding Stress-strain diagram in mmx 50mm size of concrete block is used for
compression numerical simulation with the mesh size of 2
mm (for concrete) or finer (for ribs and for
The plastic displacement wd defines the end connectivity). In case of non-coinciding
point of the softening curve in case of nodes, master-slave option is opted for
compression. In ATENA, the descending displacement compatibility.
branch of the compressive stress-strain
behaviour of concrete is defined by wd,max. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
The crack width is calculated as a total crack
displacement within the crack band. The damage pattern at various stages of
w = εcrLt (1) loading is shown in Figure. 5. It is found that
the damage initiated at the bottom of the
whereεcr is the crack opening strain, which is
anchor and it followed to the interface
the strain normal to the crack direction in the
delamination. Due to the presence of the ribs
cracked state after the complete stress release
in the anchor bolt and the chemical between
and Lt is the characteristic length (von Mier
the concrete and the steel anchor, a complex
1986). Anchor bolt is modeled as 3
failure mode is observed. The distribution of
dimensional elastic isotropic material.
1266
Sasmal et al.
principal strain in the anchor bolt system Hence, development of sustainable concrete
during progression of pull out load is shown by using various supplementary cementitious
in Figure. 6. materials (SCMs) needs a special and
dedicated study to evaluate the performance
of anchorage systems embedded in the
concrete.
(a) (b) REFERENCES
ATENA theory manual 2006 ATENA
Program Documentation- part 1 Theory
Cervenka Consulting Predvoje 22
(c) Czech Republic 207.
(d) Comite Euro-International du Beton (CEB)
Figure.5. Progression of damage at CEB Model Code 90 Bull
different stages of pull out loading d‟information No. 203 Paris France
1990.
Sasmal S Novák B and Ramanjaneyulu K
2011 Numerical analysis of fiber
composite-steel plate upgraded beam-
(a) (b) column sub-assemblages under cyclic
loading Journal of Composite
Structures93 599-610.
Van Mier JGM 1986 Multi-axial strain-
softening of concrete Part I fracture
(c) (d) Materials and Structures RILEM
Figure.6. Principal strain distribution at 19(111) 179-90.
different stages of pull out loading
The load-slip behaviour of the anchor bolt
embedded in concrete (with compressive
strength of 25 MPa and 50 MPa) is studied.
These two strengths are typically the
minimum strength for normal strength and
high strength concrete being used by
structural engineers. It is found that the
increase in the compressive strength and the
corresponding improvement in the other
properties such as tensile strength and
fracture behaviour, has significant influence
in the pull out behaviour and damage
sequence. The influence of other material
characteristics on the pull out performance
and damage process is being studied. The
results indicate that the performance of
anchorage system greatly depend on the
improved/newer properties of the medium.
1267
ICCMS2016
GROWTH OF YIELD FRONT IN STATICALLY INDETERMINATE

BAR BY USING DOMAIN DECOMPOSTION METHOD
NAYAK P.* and SAHA K. N.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, India.
Abstract: The present paper investigates the growth of elastic-plastic front of a

statically indeterminate non-uniform bar in post-elastic regime. It is observed that
due to the presence of singularity points in domain, the solution of statically
indeterminate bar problem becomes critical in defining its plastic front location. In
the present bar problem only one such singularity is considered, arising from the
application of a concentrated load. The computational domain is divided into two
sub-domains based on the location of singularity point within the domain. The
problem is solved through an extension of a variational method in elasto-plastic
regime. The formulation is based on von-Mises yield criterion and linear strain
hardening material behaviour. Solution of the governing equation is obtained by
using Galerkin’s approximation principle. This approximation is carried out by a
linear combination of sets of orthogonal co-ordinate functions which satisfy
prescribed conditions at three points. The three conditions comprise of two
boundary conditions and another condition at the point of application of
concentrated load. The solution algorithm is implemented with the help of
MATLAB® computational simulation software. The approximate solution further
needs an iterative method to locate the growth in the yield front. The validation of
the formulation is carried out successfully for some reduced problems. The effect of
bar aspect ratio (ratio of difference in diameters to length) on the post-elastic
performance of the bar is investigated and the relevant results are obtained in
dimensionless form.
Keywords: Variational method; Plastic front; Statically indeterminate;
Deformation theory; Domain Decomposition method.
INTRODUCTION into its non-linear range of behavior if the

yield limit load is exceeded. The non-
Axially loaded solid slender bar is a widely
linearity associated with the study of stresses
used machine element found in almost every
in elastic-plastic regimes is complicated as
application of structural engineering. In the
the analysis requires advanced and efficient
arena of mechanical, civil and aeronautical
computational techniques, developed during
engineering also, such an element is often
the last two decades.
used to model machine components,
elements of a building, aeronautical The prediction of the elasto-plastic behaviour
structures, etc. During a heavy external of solid slender bars of various types of
loading an axially loaded bar material goes geometry as well as loading is an interesting
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: priyambada53@gmail.com 1268

Nayak P
area of work for the designers (Hill, 1950).

The load deflection behaviour of a uniform Figure 1. Taper bar with domain 1 and
bar under body force loading in the post- domain 2
elastic region is found in the textbook of
Owen and Hinton (1980) as an example The whole domain is decomposed into two
problem. Das et al. (2009) presented a sub-domains about the point of application of
simulation study of the dynamic behavior of the load as shown in Figure 1.
non-uniform taper bars of circular and Total length, lengths of domain 1 and 2 are
rectangular cross-section under body force denoted by L , L f and Lb respectively. ξ is
loading due to gravity. The loading is
the normalized global coordinate
controlled statically to take the bar to its post-
corresponding to x and 1 and  2 are
elastic state so as to predict its dynamic
behavior in the presence of plastic normalized local coordinates in domain 1 and
deformation. domain 2 respectively. Thus,   x L ,
In the present study, a numerical method 1    f 
and  2     f  b , where
based on variational principle for elasto-  f  Lf L and  b  Lb L . Uniform
tapered bars of circular d  cross-section are
plastic analysis of statically indeterminate
non-uniform taper bar has been proposed. A
solution algorithm using von-Mises yield taken for the present analysis. Diameter of
criterion has been developed to obtain an the bar at axial location x is given by
approximate solution of the unknown d0   d0  d1  , where, d 0 is the diameter at
displacement field from the governing the left fixed end of the bar and d 1 is the
equation in an iterative manner. The results diameter at the right fixed end of the bar.
furnish initiation of yield front and its growth Expressions of U and V under elastic
with the increase in external load for various conditions is given by
bar aspect ratio.
1 K 1  2 2 2G1   2  A   u 2
MATHEMAICAL FORMULATION U       d
 2 3  L    (1)
0 
The solution for the elasto-plastic
displacement field of a body under
equilibrium is obtained from the application
of minimum potential energy principle V   F u(  )   (2)
 U  V   0  in Hencky’s total f
deformation theory. U is the strain energy In Eq. (1), K is the bulk’s modulus and G is
stored in the bar and V is the potential the modulus of rigidity.
energy developed by the external forces. It is The global displacement function u   is
assumed that principle of minimum potential approximated by u    cii , i=1, 2,…,nf,
energy remains valid for bilinear elastic
where  i is the set of orthogonal functions
material, unless one considers a cyclic
loading problem. developed through Gram–Schmidt scheme.
The necessary starting function to generate
the higher order orthogonal functions is
selected by satisfying the relevant geometric
boundary conditions, i.e. u  0 at   0 ,
du
u  0 at   1 and  0 at    f .
d
1269
Growth Of Yield Front In Statically Indeterminate Bar By Using Domain Decompostion Method
SOLUTION FOR ELASTIC DOMAIN Let Lbe and Lbp be the lengths of the elastic
When domain 1 and domain 2 as fully elastic, and the post-elastic regions of domain 2 and
displacement functions can be expressed as the local normalized coordinates in these two
u1    cii1 and u2    cii 2 regions are  2 and  2p respectively. Hence,
e
respectively. Substituting these assumed  2e  x  L f  Lbe and  2p  x  L f  Lbe Lbp 

displacement functions in Eqs. 1, 2 and
replacing operator δ by  c j in Eq. Displacement functions for domain 1 (fully
elastic) and domain 2 (elasto-plasti c) can
 U  V   0 , the governing equation is be expressed as u1    cii1 ,
obtained as
 K 1  2 2 2G1   2  n n  2 1  
u 2e   ciie2 and  
u 2p   ciip2

 2

3
  
i 1 j 1  L f 0
 
A1 i'1'j1 d1
respectively.
  
(3)

2 1
   
 A 2 i 2 j 2 d2 ci   F . j  
' '


f 
Lb 0 
In the above equation   indicates

'
differentiation with respect to the domain

specific normalized coordinates.
For statically indeterminate bar, yielding may
initiate at the fixed end of domain 2 and
gradually proceed towards domain 1 with (a)
increasing load intensity, thereby giving rise
to three-region formulation. With further
increase in loading, yielding may initiate in
both the domains simultaneously (four-region
formulation), depending on the geometry of
the bar. It is obvious that yielding initiates at
the heavily stressed region and hence for Figure 2. Graphical representation of
(b)
some combination of system parameter nomenclatures: (a) Three region and (b)
values, initial yielding may occur in domain Four region.
1 also. The interface between elastic and Substituting these assumed displacement
plastic region is termed as plastic front functions, the governing equation is obtained
location. In view of the differences in the as
location of initiation of yielding and the  K 1  2 2 2G1   2  2 1
 A  '  ' d
n n
 c   
behavior in the growth of post-elastic region, i 1 j 1
i
 2 3  L f 0 1 i1 j 1 1
  
mathematical formulations have been
reported in two different sections. In both the
cases, location(s) of plastic front at any load
 K 1  2 2 2G1   2  2 1

 2

3

 Lbe   2 i2 j 2 2  
 A  e  e'  e' d e 
  0
is obtained numerically by an iterative
(4)
method.  K 1  2 2 2 g   1   p
 
 2  2 
THREE REGION FORMULATION  2 3  L 
  bp 
In this analysis it is assumed that the yielding
initiates at domain 2. So, the whole bar has
1
  p 
 A  2 i 2  j 2 d 2  =  F . j
p p' p'
f

,
now three regions with fully elastic domain 1 0   
where g   is the modulus of plasticity

and elasto-plastic domain 2. The notations for
a statically indeterminate taper bar for this
case have been indicated in Figure 2a. which is set equal to modulus of rigidity G, at
1270
Nayak P
the zeroth approximation, and the problem is where the computational domain is divided
solved as an extension of elastic solution. In into two sub-domains based on the location
subsequent approximations the value of of singularity point within the domain
g   is updated until a final convergence is assuming linear strain hardening material
achieved, following the iterative scheme of behavior following von-Mises yield criterion.
Kachanov (1971). The effect of bar aspect ratio on the plastic
front location of the statically indeterminate
FOUR REGION FORMULATION bar has also been reported. The proposed
In this case, at a certain load, yielding occurs method has been validated successfully and
in both the domains 1 and 2 simultaneously. also tested for the stability of its iterative
So, the whole bar now has four regions with scheme. The method has the potential of
domain 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b, out of which 1a application in many other structural
and 2a are elastic regions whereas 1b and 2b mechanics problems involving material non-
are elasto-plastic. linearity. A sample result obtained from
Let L fe and L fp be the lengths of the elastic solution is given in Figure. 3.
and the post-elastic regions of domain 1
respectively, and hence the corresponding
normalized local coordinates are  1e  x L fe
and  1p  x  L fe  L fp . Displacement
functions of elastic and post-elastic regions
for domain 1 and domain 2 can be expressed
as u 1e   ciie1  ; u 1p   ciip1  
 
u 2e   ciie2 and 2
p p
i i2 u     c 
respectively. Substituting these assumed
displacement functions, the governing Figure 3. Growth of elastic-plastic front
equation is obtained as with load for different aspect ratios (AR).
REFERENCES
n n  K 1  2 2 2G1  2  2 
  c i     Hill R (1950) The Mathematical Theory of
i 1 j 1  2 3  L fe 
   Plasticity Oxford University Press
 K 1  2 2 2 g  1   2 
 
1 Oxford
 A1 i1 j1 d1    
' ' e 1
2 3  Owen D R J and Hinton E (1980) Finite
0  
 A ' ' d p   K 1  2   2G1   

 
 2 1  2 2  Elements in Plasticity: Theory and
 
 L fp 0 1 i1 j 1 1  
(5) Practice Pineridge Press Limited U.K.
   2 3 
 K 1  2 2 2 g  1   2  Das D Sahoo P and Saha K N 2009 Dynamic
 2 1

L   
  A2 i' 2'j 2 d2e  

 2 
 analysis of non-uniform taper bars in
 be 0  2 3  post-elastic regime under body force
 2 1
 
 Lbp 0 2 i2 j2 
 A ' ' d p   F .
2 j 
 loading Applied Mathematical Modeling
    f  vol. 33 4163-4183
where g 1  and g 2  are the modulus of Kachanov L M 1971 Foundations of the
plasticity for domain 1 and domain 2. theory of plasticity North-Holland
Publication Co. Amsterdam
CONCLUSION
The investigation of yield front propagation
of statically indeterminate taper bar is
formulated through a variational method
1271
ICCMS2016
BEHAVIOUR OF RC SHEAR WALL WITH AND WITHOUT OPENING

USING CONCEALED BRACING
MAHADIK S. N.* and BHAGAT S. R.
Department of Civil Engineering Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Technological University, Lonere India
Abstract: Shear wall is a structural element provided in multi-storeyed structures to resist

wind and seismic forces which acts parallel to the plane of wall. Many times a core wall
constructed around lift or a staircase acts as a shear wall. Generally, openings are
provided in shear walls to meet functional requirement. Openings are also required to be
provided for building services. Strength of any structural member decreases with a
provision of opening in it, and it is equally true to shear walls. Provisions of
reinforcement around the openings in most of the codes are found to be inadequate. As
per IS 13920: 1993, around the openings of the shear walls, the area of the vertical and
horizontal bars should be such as to equal that of the respective interrupted bars.
However, no consideration has been given for effect of size and position of openings in
shear walls. In the present work an attempt has been made to provide some practicable
solution which will improve performance of shear wall during earthquake. Behaviour of
RC shear wall with and without opening has been studied to know its seismic resistant
and improvement in its performance using diagonal concealed braces. These concealed
braces are formed by joining opposite corners of plain wall or joining corners of wall with
corners of opening by diagonal reinforcement. It is found from the analysis carried using
ETABS that the seismic capacity of RC shear wall increased by 20% under the effect of
concealed braces.
Keywords: Shear wall; seismic resistance; opening; concealed brace.
INTRODUCTION properties which ultimately affects the society.

In view of improving the seismic behaviour of
Many buildings worldwide collapsed during
RC shear wall designed and detailed as per
strong earthquakes in recent past. Buildings
present code of practice, it is proposed to study
with reinforced concrete (RC) shear walls have
the behaviour of such walls subjected to lateral
recorded several failure modes during such
load.
earthquakes [Wallace et.al. 2012]. Most of the
failures are not yet understood and many In this paper a new type of shear wall with or
researchers suggest that there are deficiencies without opening and with concealed braces has
in the current design provisions [Wallace and been studied. These concealed braces are
Moehle, 2012]. Causes of failure may be formed by joining opposite corners of plain
different but this yields in loss of lives and wall or joining corners of wall with corners of
_______________________________________________
1272
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sanjivanmahadik@gmail.com
Mahadik and Bhagat
opening in case of wall with opening by Table – 1. M20 Concrete, Steel Fe 415 with
diagonal reinforcement. Attempt has been poisons ratio 0.20 is used.
made to study improvement in behaviour of
RC shear wall with and without opening and ANALYSIS
concealed diagonal braces by analysing with Analysis of shear wall model of six 1000 x
FEM software ETAB. 1000 x 100 mm was done by applying quasi -
Many researchers have tried to study behaviour static lateral load to observe structural
of reinforced concrete wall with or without behaviour including shear stresses and load
openings. Observations of failure mode, carrying capacity of the shear wall at
mechanism and effect of staggered opening maximum permissible stresses (τ c max. ).
recorded after strong earthquake shows that,
From the observed shear stresses in wall cross
shear walls with staggered openings are more
section, maximum shear stress for each
seismic resistant than shear wall with regular
increment of load was obtained and same are
openings [Mosoarca Marius, 2014].
plotted against the loads. From these plots load
Investigations on the structural behaviour like
carrying capacity of plain wall and plain wall
deformation, stress distribution and dynamic
with braces was obtained. Also the load
characteristics are presented and discussed
carrying capacity of shear wall with opening
using FEM software StaadPro and concluded
and wall with opening and braces were
that, distribution of stress varies with location
obtained. Figure –1, 2, 3 and 4 shows the
and number of openings [Potty et. al., 2008].
graphical representation of maximum stresses
Axial force and bending moment varies with
against gradually increasing loads. Load
the height of shear wall. Deflection of shear
carrying capacity of plain wall was increased
wall increases when openings are introduced.
by 22.50 % and load carrying capacity of wall
Similar response is experienced by
with opening increased by 24.19 % when
[Chowdhury et. al. 2012] in study carried out
braces were provided.
on 6 - story frame shear wall buildings with the
help of FEM software ETABS under Table: 1. Geometry of model
earthquake load. From this study it was
concluded that equivalent static analysis shows
Sr.no. Member Size (mm)
that stiffness as well as seismic response was
affected by size of openings as well as their
location and there was reduction in drift in 1 Beam 200 x 300
shear wall with increase in thickness around
2 Brace 100 x 200
openings.
3 Plain Wall 1000 x1000
MATERIAL AND METHODS
In this paper FEM analysis and study of Wall with opening 1000 x
4
behaviour of RC shear wall with and without 400 x 400 mm 1000x100
openings and improvement in its behaviour by
using concealed braces are proposed. The
details of geometry of RC shear wall model
and top and bottom members are given in
1273
Behaviour of RC Shear Wall with and without Opening using Concealed Bracing
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION For τ c max. = 1.8 N/mm2, Load = 156.52 kN

From FEM analysis of plain wall and wall with
opening and after addition of diagonal braces
following conclusions can be drawn:
1. Critical section carrying maximum
stresses can be identified by
observation of stress distribution
diagrams.
2. Load carrying capacity of plain wall
increased by 22.50 % by providing
braces.
3. Load carrying capacity of wall with
Figure: 2 - Variation of shear stress
opening increased by. 24.19 % by
providing braces. against load for plain wall with braces.
4. Diagonal braces are useful to improve
seismic resistance of reinforced For τ c max. = 1.8 N/mm2, Load = 53.90 kN
concrete shear walls. Figure: 3 - Variation of shear stress
against load for wall with opening.
For τ c max. = 1.8 N/mm2, Load = 127.78 kN

Figure: 1. Variation of shear stress against
load for plain wall
For τ c max. = 1.8 N/mm2, Load = 65.93 kN
Figure: 4 - Variation of shear stress
against load for wall with opening and wall
with opening and brace.
REFERENCES
Alavi Erfan and Nateghi Fariborz 2013

Experimental study on diagonally
stiffened steel plate shear walls with
central perforation Journal of
construction steel research 89 9-20.
1274
Mahadik and Bhagat
Cao W L Jianwei Zhang Hongying Dong and Farzad Hatami Ali Ghamari Alireza Rahai
Min Wang 2011 Research on seismic 2012 Investigating the properties of steel
performance of shear walls with concrete shear walls reinforced with Carbon Fiber
filled steel tube columns and concealed Polymers (CFRP) Journal of
steel trusses Earthquake engineering and Constructional Steel Research 70 36–42.
engineering vibration 10 535-546. Mosoarca Marius 2013 Seismic behaviour of
CAO Wanlin Jianwei Zhang, Jingna Zhang, reinforced concrete shear walls with
Min Wang 2009 Experimental study on regular and staggered openings after the
seismic behavior of mid-rise RC shear strong earthquakes between 2009 and
wall with concealed truss Front. Archit. 2011 Engineering Failure Analysis 34
Civ. Eng. 3 370–377. 537–565.
Cao W L Xue S D and and Zhang J W 2003 Mosoarca Marius 2014 Failure analysis of RC
Seismic Performance of RC Shear Walls shear walls with staggered openings
with Concealed Bracing Advances in under seismic loads Engineering failure
Structural Engineering 6 1-13. analysis 41 48-64.
Chowdhury Sharmin Reza Rahmn M A Islam Potty N S Thanoon W A Hamzah H. H
M J and Das A K 2012 Effects of Hamadelnil A M M 2008 Practical
openings in shear wall on seismic Modelling Aspects for Analysis of Shear
response of structures International Walls Using Finite Element Method 08
Journal of Computer Applications 59 10- 89-98.
13. Wallace John and Moehle Jack 2012
Dan D Fabian A Stoian V 2011 Theoretical Behaviour and design of structural walls –
and experimental study on composite lessons from recent laboratory tests &
steel–concrete shear walls with vertical earthquakes Proceedings of international
steel encased profiles Journal of symposium on engineering lesion learned
Constructional Steel Research 67 800- from the 2011 Great East Japan
813. Earthquake 1132-1144.
1275
ICCMS2016
DESIGNING AND TESTING OF COMPRESSOR MAPPING TEST

CELL FOR HIGH HORSE POWER TURBOCHARGER
KUMBHALKAR S.* and KHAIRNAR H. P.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: In Automotive industry the major technological drivers are emission

reduction, energy efficiency and size. One of the component which is capable of
driving all the above factors is turbocharger. So it is necessary to develop an
accurate and efficient turbocharger testing system. Upgradeability, intuitive use and
high productivity in testing business are crucial for designing any system. Engine
downsizing is undertaken in the automotive industry in order to reduce the
emissions and the fuel consumption of the vehicle. Turbocharging is one of the
important methods to enable downsizing of the engine; however, increased noise is
the side-effect of this introduction.
Keywords: Turbo Matching; Test Rig Design; Compressor Mapping; Engine
Simulation.
INTRODUCTION predetermined points whilst logging data.

Turbo Charger testing cell is for
There is continuous effort in the automotive
turbocharger mapping and thermodynamic
industry to downsize the engine, i.e. to
characterization purposes.
increase the power to weight ratio of the
engine or to increase the power to volume TURBOCHARGER TEST RIG
ratio. The major goal of downsizing is
carried out along with other goals such as In order to operate, a turbocharger must be
achieving higher overall efficiency, lower coupled to an internal combustion engine.
fuel consumption and lower emissions of However, for experimental purposes,
the engine. Downsizing is achieved by acquiring and running an engine inside a
increasing the power of engine for a given laboratory has several drawbacks. It is
engine weight or by reducing the weight of necessary to buy and maintain the engine
engine for a given power. The weight to and modify a room with proper
power ratio has approximately halved over soundproofing, ventilation, etc. One has
the last 25 years for both petrol and diesel devised a way to replace a true engine by a
engine. mathematical model while maintaining a
real turbocharger.
The main function of the test cell is to build
compressor mapping cell for a turbocharger The test rig has all necessary arrangements
which extract performance data from the for simulation of engine condition for
compressor and turbine by controlling the testing the turbocharger. It is used for
flow rate of compressed air, compressor and testing the High horse power (HHP)
turbine inlet temperature, fuel flow rate and turbocharger for diesel engine. The test rig
shaft speed of the turbocharger to requires main connections like compressed
__________________________
*Author for correspondence: E-mail: sarang.kumbhalkar@gmail.com 1276

Kumbhalkar and Khairnar
air, oil lubricating system, water cooling

system, electricity and diesel or fuel system.
Other auxiliary system that are necessary in
the test rig are Lightening system, fire
extinguisher, CCTV and ventilation system.
Figure 1 shows the test rig model in CREO.
The major components of test rig are
Lubrication system and Plenum chamber.
Figure 1. Test Rig model in CREO. Figure 2. Lubrication system.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM The Plenum chamber is designed in such a

way that the air mass flow rate is constant
The lubrication system provides a regulated throughout the testing of the turbocharger.
oil supply for the turbocharger bearings. Different circular discs are attached in such
The oil pressure can be accurately a way that by changing the orientation of
maintained via the computer controlled disc the flow rate can be varied.
system to any pressure up to the maximum
pre-set pressure and oil is heated by oil
heater which is controlled by thermostat.
Additional heater is provided in line for
maintaining oil temperature at the desired
value. Flow meter and filter is provided so
that desired flow and clean oil is reused in
the system respectively. Figure 2 shows
CREO model of lubrication system.
PLENUM CHAMBER
A plenum chamber is a housing containing a
gas or fluid (typically air) at positive Figure 3. Plenum Chamber
pressure (In this case pressure lower than
atmospheric pressure). One function of the CALCULATIONS
plenum is to equalize pressure for more Estimating of required Air Mass Flow and
even distribution, because of irregular Boost Pressures to reach a desired
supply or demand. A plenum chamber can horsepower. Air mass flow and boost
also work as an acoustic silencer device. pressure are calculated for required horse
1277
Designing and Testing of Compressor Mapping Test Cell for High Horse Power Turbocharger
power. This data is essential for selecting ΔPloss = Pressure Loss between the
the appropriate compressor and turbo Compressor and the Manifold (psi).
charger. To plot the compressor operation
point following calculations are carried out. 𝑃1𝑐 = 𝑃𝑎𝑚𝑏 + Δploss (4)
Calculation of mass flow rate. Where,
𝐴 𝑏𝑠𝑓𝑐
𝑚̇ = 𝑃 ∗ ∗ (1) P1c = Compressor Inlet Pressure
𝐹 60
Where, (psi)
𝑙𝑏 Pamb = Ambient Air pressure (psi)
𝑚̇ = 𝐴𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑖𝑛 . ΔPloss = Pressure Loss due to Air
𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑃 = 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑘𝑤. Filter/Piping (psi).
𝐴
= 𝐴𝑖𝑟 𝑡𝑜 𝑓𝑢𝑒𝑙 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜. 𝑃2𝐶
𝐹 𝑃𝑟 =
𝑃1𝐶
(5)
bsfc= Fuel consumption in lb/ min*hp
RESULTS
Calculation of required manifold pressure to
meet the power. Compressor map were plotted using test rig.
𝑚̇∗𝑅∗(460+𝑇𝑚) For two turbocharger operating points were
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑁 (2) plotted for 2L and 5 L engines from the
𝑉𝑒∗𝑉𝑑∗ 2
above calculation.
N = RPM
Ve = Volumetric efficiency.
Vd = Engine displacement in cubic inches.
Preq = Manifold pressure in psi.
R = Universal gas constant =639.6
Tm = Intake manifold pressure in
Fahrenheit
Depending upon flow rate, charge air cooler
characteristics, piping size, number/quality
of the bends, throttle body restriction, etc.,
the plumbing pressure drop can be Figure 4. Compressor map
estimated. This can be 1 psi or less for a
very well designed system. On certain Red point in the figure 4 shows the
restrictive OEM setups, especially those that operation point of the 2L and 5L engine for
have now higher-than-stock airflow levels, turbocharger 1. It is clearly seen that both
the pressure drop can be 4 psi or greater the points lie on the right side of the choke
line. Which implies that the compressor is
𝑃2𝑐 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑞 + Δploss (3) too small for the engine. So larger
Where, compressor is required to maintain desired
𝑃2𝑐 = Compressor Discharge flow rate for the engine. Figure 5 shows the
Pressure (psi). compressor map for turbocharger 2.
Preq = Manifold Absolute Pressure For 2L engine the point is in a very efficient
(psi). area of the map, but since it is in the centre
of the map on the top end there would be
1278
Kumbhalkar and Khairnar
concern that at a lower engine speeds that it REFERENCES

would be near or over the surge line. This
Kunze R 2004-05 The environmental
type of turbocharger is suitable for high
challenge for the automotive industry,
speed racing application.
MSc in Automotive Systems
Engineering Course Notes,
Loughborough University.
Cunha J B 2012 Experimental setup for
turbocharger control Proceeding of
10th Portuguese Conference on
Automatic Control Funchal Portugal
July 2012.
Cheng K Ren T. Sun S Y and Yang S. K.
1992 Studies on the Pressure Pulsation
of Plenum Chamber in Reciprocating
Compressor Using Recognition
Technique International Compressor
Engineering Conference School of
Mechanical Engineering Purdue
University 1992.
Figure 5.Compressor map

For the 5L engine, the operation lies with
the lower engine speeds passing through the
highest efficiency zone on the map, and
plenty of margin to stay clear of surge. One
area of concern would be turbo over speed
when revving the engine past peak power.
A larger compressor would place the
operating point nearer to the center of the
map and would give some additional benefit
to a high-rpm-biased power band.
For the 5L engine, the operation lies with
the lower engine speeds passing through the
highest efficiency zone on the map, and
plenty of margin to stay clear of surge. One
area of concern would be turbo over speed
when revving the engine past peak power. A
larger compressor would place the operating
point nearer to the center of the map and
would give some additional benefit to a
high-rpm-biased power band.
1279
ICCMS2016
ACCEPTABLE EXTERNAL LOADS ON NOZZLE OF A PRESSURE

VESSEL BY NON-LINEAR FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
PRANITHA PRABHAKARAN*1, JADHAV P. A.2
1
SIES Graduate School of Technology, Nerul, Navi Mumbai, India.
2
Reactor Safety Division, Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Trombay, Mumbai, India.
Abstract: In pressure vessel (PV) design, piping to vessel nozzle interface is a cause
of concern for vessel and piping designers. This interface causes the pipeline to exert
additional forces and moments (termed as external loads) on to the vessel shell
through nozzles. The origin of the load may be self weight, thermal expansion,
seismic excitation etc. A vessel that is inadequately designed may lead to failure and
thus cause a safety hazard. So PV designer needs to know these external loads at
design stage itself. Accurate estimation of maximum acceptable external loads on
PV/tanks/equipments is not available in literature. To address this, many design
companies have adopted a nominal convention that are followed by both vessel and
piping designers. These are in the form of thumb rule, empirical formulae or in tables
without giving the basis. In most of the cases, these values differed quite substantially.
In the present study, non-linear elasto-plastic finite element analyses were performed
on a typical nozzle located on a dished end of a pressure vessel. The nozzle was
subjected to 3 forces (FA, VC and VL) and 3 moments (MT, MC and ML) for which the
limit loads were evaluated using ASME Section VIII division 2 procedure. The results
were compared and conclusions were drawn. From this study, it was observed that
using the limit load procedure, the nozzles can take much more loads than that are
presently used in PV industry. The details of analysis performed along with results are
presented in this paper.
Keywords: Local Loads; Limit Load; Non-Linear FEA; Pressure Vessel;

Nozzles.
INTRODUCTION itself. Accurate estimation of maximum

acceptable external loads on
Pressure vessels are connected to other
PV/tanks/equipments is not available in
equipments by piping through nozzles. This
literature. To address this, many design
interface causes the pipeline to exert
companies have adopted a nominal
additional forces and moments (termed as
convention that are followed by both vessel
external loads) on to the vessel shell through
and piping designers. These are in the form
nozzle. The origin of the load may be self
of thumb rule, empirical formulae or in tables
weight, thermal expansion, seismic excitation
without giving the basis. In most of the cases,
etc. A vessel that is inadequately designed
these values differed quite substantially.
may lead to failure and thus cause a safety
Some of the methods employed in industry
hazard. So pressure vessel designer needs to
are (1) Thump Rule called 40/60 (2) API-650
know these external loads at the design stage
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: pranitha_prabhakaran@yahoo.com 1280

Prabhakaran and Jadhav
Appendix-P (2007) (3) Piping Handbook Method (Victor Helguero, 1986) Loads in
Tabular form etc. The nomenclature of the Young’s modulus = 202204.1 MPa
forces and moments that can act on a nozzle Poisons ratio = 0.3
is shown in Figure. 1.
General purpose (FE) software COSMOS/M,
(1999) was used for the present study. Based
on the objective of the analysis, the three
dimensional model of the pressure vessel was
generated with 4-node quadrilateral shell
element comprising cylinder, head and
nozzle. Full 360-degree was modelled A cap
Figure 1. Forces and moments in an on the nozzle was provided to apply the
attachment to a vessel forces and moments. The cap was made as a
stiff one by using very high youngs modulus
OBJECTIVE OF THE STUDY (1000 times). This will cause the force and
As mentioned above, even though there are moments directly applied on to the
some crude ways of calculating the external nozzle/vessel without having any local
loads, their basis is not very clear or yielding. The aspect ratio (length to width
unknown. Also in most cases, these values ratio) was maintained to less than 2 at the
differ quite substantially among themselves. locations of interest. The final model consists
The objective of the present study is to of 2033 nodes and 2144 elements are shown
estimate the maximum external load that can in Figure. 2.
exert on a nozzle and compare it with Small deformation theory was assumed and
methods being used in the present pressure the material is assumed to behave as elastic-
vessel industry. This is achieved by perfectly plastic model. Von-Mises yield
performing a non-linear limit load analysis criterion with isotropic hardening rules of the
using the procedure mentioned in the material model has been used in the study. In
pressure vessel design code ASME section the numerical procedure of the calculation
VIII division-2. The details of the study along force control solution techniques were used.
with the method used and the conclusions Modified Newton-Raphson method for
drawn are presented in this paper. equilibrium iterations schemes were
PROBLEM DEFINITION employed in the analysis.
A cylindrical pressure vessel of ID 2000 mm DISCUSSION & CONCLUSIONS
and thickness 60 mm have a hemispherical Non-linear elasto-plastic finite element
head (t=30 mm) and nozzle which are analysis was performed for the pressure
subjected to 3 forces FA, VL, VC and 3 vessel for incremental applied load. The non-
moments MT, MC and ML. The limit loads are linear FE analysis gets aborted when the
evaluated for each of the 6 loads mentioned convergence is not achieved. As per ASME
above. Section VIII division-2 Part-5, the load up to
Height of cylindrical shell 3000 mm which it converges in the finite element
Dished end type = Hemispherical analysis is defined as limit load. A factor of
Dished end thickness = 30 mm safety of 1.5 shall be provided to estimate the
Nozzle location = Middle of the dished end maximum permissible load/moment
ID of the nozzle = 600 mm, t=30 mm
Height of the nozzle = 276 mm The variation of axial displacement with
Nozzle to dished end weld leg size = 30 mm incremental axial load (FA) is shown in
Material = ASME SA 516 g 70 (carbon steel) Figure.3. From this the last converged load is
Specified minimum yield strength = 260 MPa
1281
Acceptable External Loads on Nozzle of a Pressure Vessel by Non-Linear Finite Element Method
4819163 N. The deformed shape at this load N. The deformed shape at this load is shown
is shown in Figure.4. n Figure.7. The variation of rotation with
torsion (MT) is shown in Figure.8. From this,
the torsion limit load is 142736 N-m. The
variation of rotation with circumferential
moment is shown in Figure.9. From this the
limit circumferential moment (MC) is 949118
N-m.
5.0
4.0
Circ. Shear Force (Vc), MN

3.0
Figure. 2 FE Model of the Pressure Vessel Limit Load is the Last converged Load
= 4182739 N
2.0
6.0
1.0
5.0
0.0
4.0 0 2 4 6 8 10
axial Push (FA) , MN
Displacement, mm
Limit Load is the
3.0 Last converged Load
= 4819163 N
Figure.6 Variation of Displacement with
2.0
Circumferential Shear Force (VC)
1.0
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
F Displacement, mm
igure.3 Variation of Displacement with Axial

Push (FA)
Figure.7 Deformed shape at Limit Load for

Nozzle under Circumferential Shear Force
(VC) (x 45)
0.160
Axial Torsion (MT), MN-m
0.120
Figure.4 Deformed shape at Limit Load for

Limit Load is the Last converged Load
Nozzle under Axial Push (FA) (x 74) 0.080
= 142736 N-m
0.040
0.000
0.000 0.003 0.006 0.009 0.012 0.015
Rotation, Radian
Figure.8 Variation of Rotation with Axial

Torsion (MT)
1.00
0.80
Circ. Moment (Mc), MN-m
Figure.5 Von-Mises stress distribution (on 0.60 Limit Load is the Last converged Load
= 949118 N-m
deformed shape x 30) of the pressure vessel 0.40
at Limit Load condition under FA 0.20
At this load the von-Mises stress distribution 0.00

0.000 0.002 0.004 0.006 0.008 0.010
is shown in Figure.5. The variation of Rotation, Radian
displacement with circumferential shear force Figure.9 Variation of Rotation with

(VC) is shown n Figure.6. From this the limit Circumferential Moment (MC).
circumferential shear force is 4182739
1282
Prabhakaran and Jadhav
The results of the limit loads predicted by Bhabha Atomic Research Centre. I am
FEA along with the maximum allowable thankful to Shri Vivek Bhasin, Head, Reactor
load/moment (as per ASME) are shown Structures Section, who gave me the
inTable-1. Table-2 shows the comparison of opportunity to work in the prestigious section
the predicted FEA results with the methods of BARC.
that are being used in the industry. Vast
REFERENCES
difference can be observed in the values
calculated by different methods. ASME 2010 Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code Section VIII Division-2,
As can be seen from Table-2, the allowable
external loads based on different methods American Society of Mechanical
presently being used in the pressure vessel Engineers, New York, NY.
industry are highly conservative. It can be API-650 2007 American Petroleum
seen that in reality, these vessels can take Institute code API 650 Appendix P
much more loads than the loads that are being Washington DC 10th Edn.
used now. These lower loads restrict the COSMOS/M 1999 Finite Element
piping designers to more stringent condition Software Version 2.5 SRAC
in their design. If one follows the present California, USA.
industry practise, wherein lower loads are Victor Helguero M 1986 Piping Stress
used for design will make the piping design Handbook, Chapter 8, "Design Criteria
and its support costlier. for Allowable Loads Moments, and
Stresses 2nd edition.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This work is the outcome of the summer
training I had at Reactor Structures Section,
of Reactor Design & Development Group of
Table 1.Results of Limit Loads predicted by Non-Linear FEA.
Predicted Limit Load, Required Safety Max. Allowable
Load Type based on Non-linear Margin as per the Nozzle Load= Limit
FEM ASME Code Load/1.5
Axial Push, FA (N) 4819163 1.5 3212775
Longitudinal Shear, VL (N) 4182739 1.5 2788493
Circumferential Shear, VC (N) 4182739 1.5 2788493
Torsion, MT (N-m) 142736 1.5 95157
Circumferential Moment, MC (N-m) 949118 1.5 632745
Longitudinal Moment, ML (N-m) 949118 1.5 632745
Table 2. Comparison of Maximum Acceptable Loads/Moments by Different Methods
Max Acceptable Load/Moment by

Load Type different Methods
40.60 API-650 Handbook 40.60 API 650 HandBook
Axial Push, FA (N) 24000 33600 16200 0.00747 0.01045 0.0050
Longitudinal Shear, VL (N) 24000 33600 24000 0.0086 0.01205 0.0086
Circumferential Shear, VC (N) 24000 25200 24000 0.0086 0.00903 0.0086
Torsion, MT (N-m) 36000 60480 72000 0.3783 0.63558 0.7566
Circumferential Moment, MC (N-m) 36000 40320 43200 0.0568 0.063722 0.0682
Longitudinal Moment, ML (N-m) 36000 52416 57600 0.0568 0.082839 0.0910
1283
ICCMS2016
SIMPLIFIED APPROACH FOR SEISMIC ANALYSIS OF BASE

ISOLATED MULTI-STOREYED STRUCTURE
NAGENDER T. *, PARULEKAR Y. M. and REDDY G. R.
Reactor Safety Division, BARC, Mumbai, India
Abstract: The necessity of constructing seismic resistant structure using advanced

and innovative technology has increased in order to mitigate the effect of earthquake
on building. The base isolation technique is one of the best methods used for
designing seismic resistant structure. In this paper, a nuclear safety related building
which is a 4 storied framed RC shear wall structure is studied with and without base
isolators. Elaborate design and modelling of Lead Rubber Bearing isolation system is
explained.
Keywords: base isolation; horizontal acceleration; base shear; storey drift.
INTRODUCTION Research in lead rubber bearing (LRB) and

high damping rubber bearing (HDRB) gives
Conventional seismic design approach
a new dimension to the seismic base
attempts to design buildings that do not
isolation design as these bearings provide
collapse under strong earthquake shaking,
higher damping then other isolators
but may sustain damage to non-structural
[Dall’Asta, 2008, Providakis, 2008]. In this
elements and to some structural members in
work, a nuclear safety related structure is
the building. This may render the building
considered for the analysis and design
non-functional after the earthquake, which
which should remain functional, essentially
may not be acceptable in some important
elastic even after major earth quakes.
structures, like nuclear safety related
Elaborate design of Lead rubber bearing
structures and hospitals. Hence it is essential
type isolation system is discussed in details.
to design such structures using base
Moreover the comparative study of seismic
isolation techniques. Base isolated building
response of the base isolated building with
performs better than a conventional building
that of fixed base structure is carried out.
in moderate and strong earthquake because
Response spectrum analysis is carried out
it reduces the seismic forces transmitted to
which is based on an effective stiffness
the superstructure and reduces the floor
formulation and damping evaluation and is
acceleration induced by the earthquake. A
an iterative process. It is concluded that
thorough historical perspective and
base isolation helps in reducing the design
chronology of seismic isolation can be
parameters like base shear and forces in
found in Naiem and Kelly (1999).Skinner et
members of the structure. It reduces the
al. (1993) indicated that a base isolator with
forces and displacements in the structure by
hysteretic force-displacement characteristics
up to 75%.
can provide the desired properties of isolator
flexibility, high damping and force DESCRIPTION OF BUILDING
limitation under horizontal earthquake
MODEL
loads, together with sufficient stiffness for
horizontal wind loads. The nuclear structure considered for design
is a Reinforced Concrete four storey
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: nagender@barc.gov.in 1284

Nagender et al.
structure. The super structure of the three types of isolators are with vertical
Building is of conventional RCC beams and capacity W=2000 kN (type I), W=2500 kN
columns with tie beams at intermediate (type II) and W=3000 kN (Type III). There
levels. The outer wall of RCC with are 12 numbers of Type I isolators, numbers
minimum thickness of 250mm. The floor is on 4 of type II isolators and 2 numbers of
supported on base isolation system type III isolators.
foundation. The base isolators are connected
between columns base and the pedestals. FIXED BASE ANALYSIS
The pedestals are connected with raft at the The analysis is carried out for fixed base of
bottom. the structure initially and modal analysis is
performed. The frequencies and mass
participated in dominant modes for fixed
base system and isolated base system are
given in table 1 and table 2 respectively.
Response spectrum analysis is then carried
out considering the two horizontal and the
vertical excitation inputs of OBE and SSE
motions separately.
ANALYSIS WITH BASE ISOLATORS

Figure.1 3D model The base isolator modelled with three
translational springs along two horizontal
METHODOLOGY and one vertical directions. Analysis is
DESIGN BASIS GROUND MOTION carried out for two levels earthquakes OBE
and SSE. In the present work the response
The seismic criteria adopted in the design of spectrum procedure is used which is based
the Building with Base Isolation System on an effective stiffness formulation and is
involve two levels of approach to seismic an iterative process. The effective stiffness
hazard, viz., OBE corresponds to is estimated, based on estimated
“Operating Basis Earthquake” and SSE displacements and then adjusted depending
corresponds to “Safe Shutdown on the results of the analysis. If the analysis
Earthquake”. The peak ground accelerations produces a displacement which varies from
for SSE and OBE levels have been that assumed to calculate stiffness
determined to be 0.2g and 0.1g respectively. properties, the effective stiffness must be
adjusted and the analysis is repeated. Lead-
METHODOLOGY TO OBTAIN plug bearings are bilinear elements, with
ISOLATOR DESIGN PARAMETERS their characteristics based on three
The design of isolators is then carried out parameters: K1, K2 and Q as shown in
based on the following methodology. The Figure.2. The elastic stiffness K1 is usually
total seismic mass computed using static taken to be 10 times of K2, the post yield
analysis considering dead load, equipment stiffness, is estimated from the shear
load and 50 % live load is first obtained and modulus of the rubber and the bearing
reaction at the columns due to this load is design. Three separate steps of analyses for
obtained. The isolators are grouped in three the calculation of the dynamic response of a
types based on the vertical reaction at each base-isolated structure is presented in this
column location. The isolators are grouped study. The first step of analysis for the
such that and the stiffness centre of the structure assumes a fully linear response, in
system of building with isolators coincides which the bearings remain in the initial
with the mass centre to avoid torsion. The linear range with initial stiffness k1 and the
superstructure remains in elastic range.
1285
Simplified Approach for Seismic analysis of Base Isolated Multi-storeyed Structure
Response spectrum analysis is performed

with 4% damping for OBE spectra and 7%
damping for OBE spectra. The
displacements of the structure are checked
for this analysis such that it exceeds yield
limit of isolator for the design basis
earthquake excitation. The second step
analysis allows for a non-linear response
from the bearings, in which each individual
isolator with effective nonlinear stiffness is
modelled and maximum displacement of Figure. 3 Load-Deflection of isolator
structure is obtained. In the third step of
analysis equivalent damping evaluated from
the earlier analysis is incorporated. It is also
checked whether the displacement due to
wind load is below the yield limit of isolator
by calculating total wind load and checking
if it is less than the added characteristics
strength of all isolators.
CONCLUSION
A detailed methodology of design
calculations for base isolators is presented in
this paper and proper grouping of isolators
is done in three groups to prevent torsional
mode of the structure during earthquake Mode III (X direction Freq=7.16 Hz)
excitation. The frequency of the structure is Figure. 4 Mode shapes of Fixed Base
reduced from 3.2 Hz in Z direction and 7.17 system
Hz in X direction to 0.497 Hz and 0.505 in
X and Z directions. Thus peak acceleration
is reduced from 0.508 g to 0.105g for SSE
earthquake and there is 62 % reduction in
base shear and thus the forces in the
members. The fixed base building has 8
mm peak lateral displacement at the top of
the structure while the base isolated
structure has peak lateral displacement of
102 mm in SSE.
Mode II (X direction Freq=0.505 Hz)

Figure. 5 Mode shapes of Isolated Base
system
So enough gap should be given between

base isolated and adjacent structures in
Figure. 2 Isolator characteristics order to avoid pounding.
1286
Nagender et al.
Table 1. Frequencies and Mass participation of Fixed base system

Cumulative Mass participation
Mode time Mass participation %
frequency %
number period X Y Z X Y Z
1 3.234 0.30918 0.01 0 50.8 0.008 0.002 50.797
3 7.162 0.13963 51.29 0 0.01 51.314 0.003 55.835
4 7.883 0.12686 0.05 20.54 0.23 51.363 20.544 56.065
107 25.436 0.03931 21.85 0 5.8 86.87 63.985 68.088
108 25.476 0.03925 5.87 0 22 92.739 63.985 90.087
116 26.676 0.03749 0 27.31 0 92.97 92.302 90.546
Table 2. Frequencies and Mass participation of base isolated system

Cumulative Mass participation
Mode time Mass participation %
frequency %
number period X Y Z X Y Z
1 0.497 2.01084 0 0 72.08 0 0 72.075
2 0.505 1.98019 72.11 0 0 72.107 0 72.076
6 7.381 0.13548 0 36.51 0 72.107 36.718 72.107
110 25.436 0.03931 21.84 0 5.79 93.95 70.611 77.901
111 25.476 0.03925 5.87 0 21.99 99.816 70.611 99.889
120 26.676 0.03749 0 27.3 0 99.816 98.098 99.889
REFERENCES Dall’Asta A Ragni L 2008 Nonlinear
behavior of dynamic systems with high
Skinner R I Robinson W H McVerry G H
damping rubber devices J. Eng. Struct
1993 An Introduction to Seismic
30 3610-3618
Isolation. John Wiley and Sons Inc. New
York NY USA Providakis C P 2008 Effect of LRB isolators
and supplemental viscous dampers on
Naeim F Kelly J M 1999 Design of Seismic
seismic isolated buildings under near-
Isolated Structures. From Theory to
fault excitations. J. Eng. Struct. 30
Practice 1st ed. John Wiley and Sons
1187-1198.
Hoboken NJ USA
1287
ICCMS2016
FREE VIBRATION ANALYSIS OF ISOTROPIC SKEW PLATE

MOHD ABRAR ABDUL ALIM* and BHATTACHARYYA B.
Department of Aerospace Engineering and Applied Mechanics, Indian Institute of Engineering
Science and Technology, Shibpur, West Bengal, India.
Abstract: Finite element analysis of free vibration of isotropic skew plates with
different edge conditions has been considered. The analysis has been performed for the
edge conditions SSSS, SCSC, CCCC and CFFF. The variations in natural frequency
of the plate using aspect ratio as 1 i.e. rhombic plate with different skew angles have
been explored using ANSYS 15.0 software. An 8-noded shell element (SHELL 281) is
employed and mesh size has been taken as per convergence study. For the ease of
comparison of results with the existing literature, the natural frequencies obtained are
converted into non-dimensional frequency parameter. The results are found in good
agreement with the available ones. The dependence of frequency on aspect ratio has
also been studied for SSSS and CCCC boundary conditions.
Keywords: ANSYS; Free vibration; Boundary condition; Finite element method

INTRODUCTION based on approximate methods. The skew
coordinate’s ξ, η of a point P are shown in
The prediction of modal characteristics of
figure 1. The skew coordinates are related to
different structures is of considerable
rectangular coordinate by
interest in various branches of engineering.
𝜉 = 𝑥 − 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝛼
It provides the basic dynamic properties of 𝑦 } (1)
structure under vibrational response. Skew 𝜂=
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝛼
plates find their applications in the modern
swept-wing aircraft, skew bridges, ship hulls
and parallelogram slabs in buildings. In
practical applications, only the lateral
vibration is of major interest, and the effects
of extensional vibrations in the middle plane
may be neglected. The dynamics of plates,
Figure 1: Skew Co-ordinate system
which are continuous elastic systems, can be
modeled mathematically either by partial FORMULATION OF PROBLEM IN
differential equations based on Newton’s ANSYS
laws or by integral equations based on the The equations of motion for free un-damped
considerations of virtual work. vibration of an elastic system undergoing
There is no exact solution for dynamic large displacements can be expressed in the
analysis of skew plates and hence most of following matrix form.
the solutions available in the literature are [𝐾]{𝛿} + [𝑀]{𝛿̈ } = {0} (2)
*Author for correspondence: Email: mohd.abr07@gmail.com 1288

Alim and Bhattacharyya
[K] and [M] are overall stiffness & mass effect of the skew angle and aspect ratio on
matrix and {δ} is displacement vector. the non-dimensional frequency parameter is
FEA involves three stages of activity: studied in particular.
1. Preprocessing,
2. Processing and CONCLUSION AND DISCUSSION
3. Post processing.
The study of free vibration analysis of a thin
In this study, finite element analysis is rectangular isotropic skew plate shows
conducted using ANSYS software. An 8 following conclusions:
noded shell element (specified as SHELL  The present solutions agree very well
281 in ANSYS) with no of element division with the results obtained by using the
taken as 100 is used. The element has eight new version of the differential
nodes with six degrees of freedom at each quadrature method. When the skew
node: translations in the x, y, and z axes, and angles are low such as0 and
rotations about the x, y, and z-axes. Thus 15𝑜 excellent agreement between the
each element has 48 degree of freedom in present results and the results of
total. SHELL281 is well-suited for linear, Wang is obtained. However, when
large rotation, and large strain nonlinear the skew angles are increased a
applications. The modal analysis is maximum of 2.5% discrepancy is
performed by using different edge observed from the comparison
conditions of the plate as SSSS, CCCC,
 The effect of boundary conditions
SCSC and CFFF. Where S, C and F stands
(B.C) on natural frequencies in each
for simply supported, clamped and free edge
mode is studied. The natural
conditions.
frequency is more in case of any
The details of the isotropic rectangular
edge clamped when compared to
plates are as follows:
simply supported condition.
 Material: Steel.  Natural frequency increases with
 Modulus of Elasticity: 2×1011 N/m2. increase in the skew angle and is
 Poisson’s ratio: 0.3. different for different mode shapes.
 Density: 7800 kg/ m3. Increase in skew angle increases the
 Thickness: 0.02m internal stiffness of the skew plate
and the mass of the plate decreases.
RESULTS  The frequency of the first five modes
The natural frequencies are expressed in all increases with increasing aspect
terms of the non-dimensional frequency ratio. The skew angle45𝑜 makes the
parameter λ curve distinct for comparison of the
frequency parameter.
𝜌ℎ  Since it is rare for all three of these
𝜆 = 𝜔𝑎2 √ (3)
𝐷 parameters to be prescribed in a
Six typical rhombic plates with different given design, this paper has shown
support conditions have been analyzed. The that there is considerable scope for
avoiding unwanted resonances.
1289
Free Vibration Analysis of Isotropic Skew Plate
REFERENCES
Bardell N S 1992 The Free Vibration of
Skew Plates using the Hierarchical
Finite Element Method Computers and
Structures 4(5/6) 841-874.
Leissa A W 1973 The free vibration of
Rectangular plates Journal of Sound
and Vibration 31(3) 257-293.
Srinivasa C V Suresh Y J and Kumar Prema
W P 2014Free flexural vibration on
laminated composite skew plates
Science and Technology 4(4) 13-24.
Wang Xinwei Wang Yongliang and Yuan
Zhangxian 2014 Accurate vibration
analysis of skew plates by the new
version of the differential quadrature
method Applied Mathematical
Modeling 38 926-937.
Zhou L and Zheng W X 2008Vibration of
skew plates by the MLS-Ritz method
Sciences 50 1133-114.
1290
ICCMS2016
LARGE DEFLECTION ANALYSIS OF LEAF SPRING UNDER THREE

POINT BENDING
GHUKU S.* and SAHA K. N.
Mechanical Engineering Department, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, India
Abstract: Due to its simple type of construction, leaf spring is commonly used in
vehicles and in many other machinery suspension systems. Several researchers have
studied the different aspects of leaf spring design and an extensive review work is
done. It is observed that in theoretical research work, the constituent bundle of
prismatic beams is usually modeled as a single beam under three point loading.
However, there is insufficiency in modeling of roller support mounting at the two eye
ends and in addition, the asymmetry in the geometry of the leaf spring have not been
addressed properly. In the present paper large deflection profiles of leaf spring
corresponding to different loading conditions is analyzed theoretically, by considering
it as a beam with initial curvature. The boundary conditions of the system are
identified and system governing equation is derived through appropriate satisfaction
of kinetic and kinematic constitutive relations. The very nonlinear nature of the
problem requires continuous geometry updation with corresponding changes in
boundary conditions. Solution of the geometrically nonlinear governing differential
equation is obtained by using an iterative variational method. Numerical computation
is done on MATLAB® computational platform and validation is carried through some
dedicated experimentation.
Keywords: Leaf spring; Three point bending; Large deflection; Variational
Method.
INTRODUCTION under static loading is also a function of

different parameters of the particular
Details of beam bending problem can be
problem, for example, boundary conditions,
found in several textbooks and in case of
loading pattern, initial geometry of the beam,
small deflection analysis, it is assumed that
etc.
the slope of the elastic curve is small.
Numerous beam like mechanical parts are not Stress and displacement fields in curved
initially straight, e.g., elements like hooks, elastic beams are usually evaluated under
leaf springs, etc. and they are called initially simplified boundary conditions. A few other
curved beams. Large deflection of initially works have dealt with modeling the behavior
curved beams under static loading give rise to of axially restrained and unrestrained beams.
geometric nonlinearity, as manifested Lacarbonara and Yabuno (2006) studied
through the nonlinear curvature-slope and theoretically and experimentally on elastic
strain-displacement relations. When the first beams undergoing large in-plane motions
type of nonlinearity is present, the analysis is having hinged–hinged (axially restrained)
usually carried out through some geometry and simply supported (axially unrestrained)
updation technique. The response of a beam boundary conditions. In the literature, there
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: info.sghuku@gmail.com 1291

Ghuku and Saha
have been various implementations of load W is apparent in all applications, but

computational mechanics, e.g., variational horizontal force F is absent in many cases
principles, different finite element and even when it is there, its presence is not
formulations, etc. to address geometrically manifested directly. The eye end supports are
nonlinear static beam problem. Besides modeled through rollers and reaction forces
computational approaches, analytical in left and right roller supports are RxL , RyL
treatments through elliptic integrals, methods
and RxR , RyR respectively.
based on perturbation techniques, etc. have
also been used (Ahmed et al., 2014; Almeida
et al., 2011; Ghuku and Saha, 2015).
In spite of the widespread studies available in
this area, there seems to be a lack of
mathematical consistency in the way the
nonlinear beam models are obtained.
Moreover, there is a lack of experimental
fidelity in the ensuing models and often they
are based on ad hoc kinematic
approximations. Hence, a rigorous model is
Figure 1. Free body diagram of the leaf
proposed in the present work that accurately
spring system.
describes planar motions of beam with
appropriate boundary conditions. In this
paper, the model of elastic curved beams
undergoing large displacement is discussed
theoretically, employing the geometrically
consistent kinematic and kinetic conditions.
Inextensible beam model is considered
theoretically to predict the beam
configurations under static loading. The
theoretically obtained results are compared
with experimentally obtained ones, and
sufficiently accurate agreement is found.
PROBLEM FORMULATION
In actual applications leaf springs are
clamped centrally and load is supported at the
two eye ends. One of the eye is hinged on
frame and the other end is fitted with the
frame through a shackle. Hence, the end
supports of the spring are essentially roller
supports which allow free planar movement.
To determine the load-deflection behaviour
of the master leaf spring, we focus on free
body diagrams of an equivalent curved beam
system as shown in Fig. 1. The free body
diagram is drawn in equilibrium position,
attained after application of load in a
particular load step. The particular Figure 2. Schematic diagram of (a) left
configuration is a function of its previous roller and (b) its free body diagram
geometry and locked-up stress field. Vertical
1292
Large Deflection Analysis of Leaf Spring under Three Point Bending
From force equilibrium conditions, the deflection curve at point A1 and it is the
W  RyL  RyR and F  RxL  RxR . The eccentri- origin of Oxyz and Osnz coordinate systems.
city of load W , with respect to the mid-span At point A1 , RL has normal and tangential
vertical line is eW (  ve towards x axis). The
components N L and TL along ‘ s  n ’
centre distance between the two rollers is L ,
coordinates and horizontal and vertical
measured in Ox ' y ' z ' coordinate. To describe
components PxL and PyL , along‘ x  y ’
the spring support system in greater detail,
schematic diagram of the left end roller is coordinates. The coordinate systems Oxyz and
shown in Fig. 2(a). It is apparent from the Ox ' y ' z ' are related by the transformation
figures that points A , B are roller centres, equations x  x'eL cos  L and y  y'
whereas points A0 , B0 are contact points of the
eL sin  L . Now it is easy to compute the
rollers with frame. Point A1 is the virtual bending moment induced in the beam, as
contact point between the roller and the leaf given below,
spring. It is assumed that at this point the
slope of the beam is tangential to pitch circle
of the roller and hence the radial line AA1 is M x  PyL x  PxLw , 0  x  xW (2a)
normal to the beam centre line. At a M x  PyL x  PxL w  W ( x  xW )
particular load step i , applied load W i is  F ( w x  w) , xW  x  L (2b)
known (= W i 1  W ), but F and L are W
unknown. Hence with known values of W

Governing equation of the curved beam
and eW , moment of all the forces about point problem is obtained by using moment
A0 is balanced and this yields, curvature relation M x EI (s)  1  .
L  
RyR L  WxW  F w x , xW   eW (1) w"
W 2 PyL x  PxLw  EI ( s)  2 3/ 2 
[1  ( w' ) ] 
In Eq. (1), xW is the location of load , 0  x  xW (3a)
application point and w x is the correspond-
W
PyL x  PxLw  W ( x  xW )  F ( w x  w)
ing y coordinate. Besides deflection w other W
unknown quantities in Eq. (1) are R yR and L

 w" 
. Now to explore kinetic details, free body  EI ( s)  2 3/ 2 
, xW  x  L (3b)
diagram of the left roller is presented in Fig. [1  ( w' ) ] 
2(b). Direction of resultant reaction force RL
[ ( RxL2  RyL2 )(1 / 2) ] , acting along line A0 A1 SOLUTION ALGORITHM
is indicated by angle  L ' and the force
components acting at the points A0 and A1 The deflection w(x) is assumed by the usual
are also shown. The relation between angles series approximation w   cii , where ci is
 L ' and  L (tan( L ' )  (eL cos  L ) /[eL (1  unknown coefficient vector and i is a known
sin  L )]) leads to the kinetic relation set of orthogonal functions, either in
RxL RyL  cos  L /(1  sin  L ) .Similarly the dimensional i (x) or in normalized i ( )
relation between the force components of form. In this particular case, we need to use
right roller is RxR RyR  cos  R /(1  sin  R ) . i ( ) because final length L is unknown
here. This set of coordinate functions are
We note that force RL is not perpendicular to
obtained from the previous deflection curve
1293
Ghuku and Saha
for a given Li 1 . The unknown vector ci  tion is based on a variational principle using
carries the length dimension and it is Galerkin’s assumed mode method. The
computed by the application of variational displacement functions are approximated by
principle. Eq. (3) is expressed in variational linear combination of sets of orthogonal
coordinate functions, developed through
form, by using deflection field w as the
Gram-Schmidt scheme and substituted in the
weight function.
governing equilibrium equation. The final
L    w"  

solution of the large displacement geometric
  wEI ( s)  2 3/ 2 
 ( PyL x  PxL w)  nonlinear problem is obtained iteratively with
 0 
 [1  ( w' ) ]  
 the help of MATLAB® computational
 simulation. For the purpose of validation, a
dx   0, 0  x  xW (4a) dedicated experimental set-up is made, and
 good agreement is found. The present paper
L   

  wEI ( s) 
w"
2 3/ 2 

 PyL x  PxLw
paves the way following which, the problem
can be extended in the domain of nonlinear
 0 
 [1  ( w' ) ] 
material behaviour.
W
 
 

 W ( x  xW )  F ( w x  w) dx 
REFERENCES
 0, xW  x  L (4b)
Ahmed S R Mamun A A and Modak P 2014
Analysis of stresses in a simply-
In Eq. (4), assumed series solution of w(x) is supported composite beam with
substituted and it is expressed in matrix form, stiffened lateral ends using displacement
[ K ]ci   R , which is solved for the - potential field. International Journal of
unknown coefficient ci through an iterative Mechanical Sciences 78 140-153.
scheme as detailed in the next section. Almeida C A Albino J C Menezes I F and
Paulino G H (2011) Geometric
The Iterative scheme
nonlinear analyses of functionally
We note that in the current domain 0  x  L , graded beams using a tailored
s Lagrangian formulation Mechanics
0 ds cos   L whereas for the previous
Research Communications 38(8) 553-
s
0 ds cos   L
i 1 559.
domain, we had . The
iteration at each load step starts with an Ghuku S and Saha K N 2015A theoretical
and experimental study on geometric
assumed value of L( Li 1  L) and the
nonlinearity of initially curved
problem domain is validated by using cantilever beams Engineering Science
kinematic relation L'eL cos  L  eR sin  R  and Technology An International
s
0 ds cos  . In addition, the solution is Journal
10.1016/j.jestch.2015.07.006.
doi:
checked and validated for force and

displacement boundary conditions and Lacarbonara W and Yabuno H 2006 Refined
models of elastic beams undergoing
updated for L till convergence is achieved.
large in-plane motions: theory and
CONCLUSION experiment International Journal of
Solids and Structures 43(17) 5066-5084.
The present study deals with the numerical
analysis of large deflection of initially curved
roller supported beams, to study the static
displacement response of leaf springs under
transverse load. The mathematical formula-
1294
ICCMS2016
LINEAR STATIC ANALYSIS OF A STRUCTURAL MEMBER BY

BANDGAR S. P.* and KSHIRSAGAR S. D.
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Yeshwantrao Chavan College of Engineering, Nagpur, India.
Abstract: In this paper, an efficient finite element model for structural analysis of
lifting beam with arbitrary cross-section is presented for the purpose of understanding
of variation in the analysis results and the stresses produced due to use of various
meshing attributes and also analysis results are discussed. Objective is to find out the
efficient way for discretization of the problem and minimise the errors in analysis
besides the basic thumb rules. The study starts with the geometry study of lifting
beam, load cases acting on structure and conventional guidelines for meshing,
particularly for NASTRAN solver tool.
Lifting beam is used to assist in the hoisting process of an aero-engine variant. Lifting
beam is a solid or fabricated metal beam, suspended from hoist designed to provide
multiple lifting points. Beam is made up of five big sub-assemblies. This paper also
includes the discussion about meshing approach for structure in static analysis with
subassemblies having line, sliding contacts between. Hypermesh, a tool from
‘Hyperworks’ is used to mesh the components and NASTRAN is a solver. The results
of analysis are shown in pictorial forms for stress induces with the use of Hyperview
tool form Hyperworks. The advantages, disadvantages and the potential application of
the method for discretization of structural members as compared with conventional
approach are also discussed.
Keywords: Linear Static analysis; Finite Element Analysis; Lifting Beam;
Meshing; Hyperworks; NASTRAN
INTRODUCTION Trolley has four wheels, rolling on guides on

beam. Trolley is moved by a motor and a
Beam structures have been widely used in
guided shaft, mounted together on welded
mechanical, civil and aerospace industries.
beam. All three mounts are slides on guides
The lifting beam enables the user to attach
on welded beam and locking pin is used to
the load at more than one point therein
position the mounts.
securing and controlling the load’s
movement. The beam analysed in this paper While lifting the engine form truck, trolley is
is used for aero-engines for maintenance, used to lower down the beam with help of the
repairing and overhauling (MRO) purpose. steel rope, and overhead crane. Then engine
Three mounts, one trolley and one welded is attached to respective mounts by use of
beam are assembled together to form total fasteners and beam along with engine is lifted
beam. by crane and rest on the overhead gantry.
_______________________________
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: swapnil.p.bandgar@gmail.com 1295

Bandgar and Kshirsagar
Welded beam has four parking positions to After studying eight load cases, first load
park the beam on gantry. Engine is made up case i.e. when beam is lifting whole engine,
of eight different modules. According to is found as critical load case with weight
stripping sequence of the engine, at a time 6311 kg. In this case front and rear mounts
engine is attached to maximum two mounts are connected to the engine.
and whole weight is supported through that
DISCRETIZATION OF MODEL
two mounts.
Geometry study and load case study is
In this paper a beam, supported at four
important activity before proceeding for
parking positions and mounts and trolley are
meshing of any model. As the beam is made
locked at their respective position, is
up of five different sub-assemblies and it is
analysed. So this case is under linear static
required to position them as per load cases.
analysis.
So sub-assemblies are meshed separately.
PROBLEM DEFINITION Before creating IGES files all standard
Objective of the project is to analyse the components e.g. nuts, bolts, washers, shafts,
beam as a structural member for weight of gears, racks, couplings, some supporting
6311 kg i.e. for total engine weight, and also members, and hand wheels, etc. are removed.
effective way to discretization the model to Geometry is categorised as 1-d, 2-d, or 3-d based
make FEA model closer to the realism. on dominant dimensions and type of element is
Create a 3D model as per the existing selected accordingly.
drawing of the model in CATIA. Perform the
1-d elements are used as; Rigid (yellow
structural analysis on meshed model for
critical loading case of engine stripping steps. colour elements in figure 1) for nuts, bolts
Project also deals with evaluating the and washer arrangements, loading the beam
meshing approaches for such fabricated with concentrated masses and to apply the
models. common constraint condition to a set of
element nodes, also BEAM can be used with
METHODOLOGY the additional input i.e. area of cross section
 Create the 3D model of the beam 2-d elements are used sheet metal parts
using CATIA as per the design having width to thickness ratio greater than
drawings. 20 e.g. C-channels, supporting plates,
 Convert 3D model to IGES/STEP rectangular tubes (blue colour elements in
format and import to HyperMesh for Figure. 1), etc.
meshing. Study the load cases and
find out the critical cases and apply
them to meshed model.
 Export the meshed model into .bdf
format i.e. input file for NASTRAN
and perform structural analysis.
 Find out high stress concentrated
Figure 1. 1-d, 2-d and 3-d Elements
areas and review localised meshing
and correct it if required. 3-d elements are used when all the three
dimensions are comparable i.e. mounting
LOAD CASE STUDY
1296
Linear Static Analysis of A Structural Member by Finite Element Method
blocks (grey colour elements in Figure 1),

parking position blocks, etc.
Other element types are used as; CONMASS
for concentrated mass at CG of the engine;
SPC to apply constraints at single point;
FORCE to apply various forces acting on
members 10 mm element size is selected.
Quadrilaterals and hexagonal elements are
preferred over triangular and tetrahedron Figure 2. RBE2 elements sliding contact
elements.1-d components are used for bolts
and washers also use to load the model with
engine weight. All the 2-d components are
meshed at their mid-surfaces then assigned
respective geometry and material properties
to them. 3-d components are meshed and
connected to 2-d elements with the help of
null 2-d elements with thickness 0.01mm.
All the welding are meshed by using 2-d
Figure 3. Line contact
elements as per the weld size, with direct
connections as shown in Figure 3, blue plate ANALYSIS RESULTS OF LIFTING
is welded (green) to red plate. Sliding contact BEAM
between mounts and welded beam attended
Results of analysis are plotted in HyperView.
with the help of the rigid elements having
Maximum VonMises of 167 MPa is observed
degree of freedom 2, i.e. free in X and Y
at locking pin area as shown in figure 4.
direction as sliding plane and restricted in Z
direction, perpendicular to sliding plane as
shown in Figure. 3, RBE2 elements in sky
blue colour. Line contact between rollers and
its guide is attained with help inline rigid
elements with zero degree of freedom as
shown in Figure. 4
Thus the meshing is completed and
engine weight and mass of removed Figure 4. Maximum VonMises stress plot
components are applied as concentrated
masses. Output requests for stress and
displacement plot are given. Meshed model
is exported to NASTRAN for analysis.
Figure 5. Stress location on CAD model

1297
Bandgar and Kshirsagar
And maximum deflection is 0.21mm at front

mount at bottom most position where engine
is attached to mounts.
CONCLUSION
After review the area of maximum VonMises
it is found that the rigid element is used for
locking pin (red colour pin in figure 5). In
real world such pins can share the stresses, Figure 7. guide for mounts (top plate) is
but rigid elements never share the stresses. So supported on two members
BEAM, stress sharing element must be used
at such critical position (Figure 6). And also
in actual model a solid block is used to guide
the pin, which may also contribute in sharing
the stresses.
Some plates are used as reinforcement as
shown in figure 7, as per conventional rule
such plates should be meshed with 2-d
elements. In such cases welds plays the role
to support the member on outer peripheral Figure 8. stresses in locking pin
elements only, and all the elements laying The welding technique discussed in this
inside-portion of the member will be left paper is on conservative side and also saves
hanging with no physical support. Reaction about 20% of total meshing time.
loads will come on outer member only and
produces the errors in the results. So such REFERENCES
components must be meshed with 3-d M R Shirazizadeh H Shahverdi 2015 An
elements as sown in figure 6. (brown colour) extended finite element model for
structural analysis of cracked beam-
Considering all above corrections, model is columns with arbitrary cross-section
re-meshed and analysed again. Stress at International Journal of Mechanical
critical area is reduced to 58.5 MPa and stress Sciences 99 1–9.
in locking pin is 47 MPa. (figure 8), Tian-ji li Si-Wei Liu Siu-Lai Chan 2015
maximum deflection value is remained as it Direct analysis for high-strength steel
is. frames with explicit-model of residual
stresses Engineering Structures 100 342-
355.
Nitin Gokhale Sanjay Deshpande Sanjeev
Bedekar Anand Thite 2008 Practical
Finite Element Analysis Finite to Infinite
Publication Pune.
T R Chandrupatla & A D Belegundu 4th
edition, Introduction to Finite Elements
in Engineering Pearson Higher
Education Inc Upper Saddle River NJ
07458.
Figure 6. Re-meshed model
1298
ICCMS2016
CRASHWORTHINESS AND MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION OF

AXIALLY LOADED ALUMINIUM ELLIPTICAL TAPERED HOLLOW
SECTIONS
NARAYANAN A.1*, RAWAT S.1, UPADHYAY A.K. 2
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, MNNIT Allahabad, U.P., India.
2
Applied Mechanics Department, MNNIT Allahabad, U.P., India.
Abstract: Crashworthiness of the vehicles is major concern as it directly affects the

passenger safety in automobiles. In this study, the efficacy and potential of Elliptical
Tapered Hollow Sections (ETHS) for use as energy absorbing structures is analysed. The
numerical study in this work is conducted using nonlinear code LS-Dyna to observe the
response of the elliptical tubes loaded axially. Non-linear regression, on the obtained
results, is carried out using MATLAB's native non-linear regression tool fitnlm. Multi
objective optimization techniques are applied to find the optimal design of a tube that
satisfies the requirement of having maximum Specific Energy Absorption (SEA) and
minimum Peak Crushing Force (PCF). The design variables chosen are the ellipse aspect
ratio, tube wall thickness and semi-apical angle. The optimization algorithm used in this
study is the Multi objective Genetic Algorithm and using this, the Pareto fronts are
obtained which give the required values of the design variables.
Keywords: Energy absorption; Crushing; Elliptical tubes; FEM; Impact; Multi
objective optimization.
INTRODUCTION characteristics of tapered circular steel tubes

with functionally graded thickness under a
Crashworthiness is a field of study which has quasi-static axial load using universal testing
crucial importance in this day and age. machine. Further, numerical analyses were
According to the Association for Safe used to compare the results and also for
International Road Travel (ASIRT) nearly 1.3 conducting analyses of tubes under dynamic
million people die in road crashes each year, loading conditions.
with an additional 20-50 million people who
end up injured or disabled. It is, therefore, Yang and Qi (2013) performed multiobjective
imperative that the safety of passengers in optimization with the design objectives of
vehicles is ensured. This work aims to tackle maximizing SEA and minimizing PCF for
the problem by studying the energy absorption empty and foam-filled square thin-walled
characteristics of elliptical tapered hollow columns under oblique impact loading. The
sections. problem was formulated with respect to the
tube wall thickness, sectional width, density of
Abdul-Latif et al. (2006), through experiments, the alumnium foam-filler and the wall material
proposed two different structural solutions for yield stress. Zarei and Kroeger (2006)
maximizing the absorbed energy in performed multiobjective optimization of
axisymmetric mode of deformation. Zhang et al circular aluminium tubes, both empty and
(2015) studied the energy absorption
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail anirudh.narayan1994@gmail.com 1299

Upadhyay et al.
foam-filled, by using conventional Tsay 4 node shell elements with reduced

optimization algorithms provided in integration are used to mesh the tubes. The
MATLAB. Qi and Yang (2014) carried out coefficient of friction between rigid wall and
numerical investigation and multi objective the tube is set as 0.1.
optimization of thin-walled conical tubes under
oblique loading conditions, to maximize the
SEA and minimize the PCF. Silvestre and
Gardner (2011) investigated the post-buckling
behavior of elliptical hollow sections. The
dominance of the local, distortional and global
buckling modes of EHS tubes for controlling
the stability of tubes with varying lengths was
presented. Inausti and Gardner (2011)
examined the local plastic collapse
mechanisms in the compression of elliptical
hollow sections. Gao et al (2016) proposed a
novel foam-filled elliptical tube with
applications as energy absorbing elements.
The Specific Energy Absorbed (SEA) and peak
reaction force (F max ) are key indicators of the
crashworthiness of an energy absorbing Figure 1. Configuration for impact on
element. It is always desired to maximize the ETHS with 0° semi-apical angle
energy absorbed by the tube and minimize the
peak reaction force. In this study, the aspect Convergence
ratio of the ellipse, the tubewall thickness and
the semi-apical angle are chosen as the design The final mesh size chosen was 1.8 mm after a
variables. The design objectives are to – a) process of convergence as shown in Table 1.
maximize the SEA and b) minimize the PCF. The tube specifications were: Length of the
The aim is to obtaina Pareto curve of all the major axis (2a) = 116 mm, Length of the minor
optimal points and arrive at a set of points axis (2b) = 80 mm, Tube wall thickness (t) = 2
which give us the best (within the set bounds mm and deformation was again only upto 175
of the present study) configurations of the tube mm.
that satisfy the aforementioned design criteria. Validation
The non-linear code used in this study was
METHODOLOGY
validated with the available results and the
NUMERICAL STUDY results obtained are in good agreement as
Figure.1 depicts the thin walled elliptical shown in Table 1. The values of the rigid body
sections, which are made of Aluminium alloy used for dynamic loading on the tube were
used in the work by Gao et al (Density = 2700 Mass = 200 Kg and Velocity= 10 m/s and the
Kg/m3, Young's Modulus = 68GPa and tube specifications used were: Length of the
Poisson’s ratio = 0.3), under the loading major axis(2a) = 116 mm, Length of the minor
conditions. As shown, one end is constrained axis (2b) = 80 mm, Tube wall thickness (t) = 2
to have 0 Degrees of freedom and an mm and deformation up to 175 mm.
imaginary rigid wall strikes the other end of
MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION
the tube axially. In LS-DYNA, Balytschko-
1300
Crashworthiness and Multiobjective Optimization of Axially Loaded Aluminium Elliptical Tapered Hollow
Sections
Each factor (i.e, each of the 3 design variables) Mean Squared Error (RMSE) metrics were
is given 4 levels (discrete values) and this used and the values are displayed in Table 2.
gives us a total of 64(43) possible Genetic algorithm is used to solve this multi
combinations. Analyses are carried out on objective optimization problem. It is a
nonlinear code LS-DYNA in order to get the technique used to generate solutions for
data points. optimization and search problems. The
Using the obtained data, nonlinear regression algorithm itself is based on the evolutionary
is performed using MATLAB’s ‘fitnlm’ process of natural selection and uses processes
function for each of the objectives. The like reproduction, crossover, mutation and
objective functions thus obtained are shown in selection to arrive at a set of ‘optimal’ points in
table 2. In order to check the fitting accuracy the solution space of the problem.
of these functions, the R-squared and Root
Table 1. Validation & Convergence
Validation Convergence
F avg (kN) E absorbption (J) Mesh 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4

Gao et al
30.72 5.376 F avg (kN) 27.92 27.84 27.80 27.83
(2016)
Present 33.49 5.861 E absorbption (J) 2236.1 2227.2 2235.6 2230.5
Table 2. Obtained functions
Table 3. Optimum points of the individual objectives

Single Aspect Thickness Semi-Apical Energy
Mass (kg) PCF (kN)
objective Ratio (AR) t (mm) Angle θ (°) Absorbed (J)
Ideal max EA 2.344048 2.799995 7.864687 0.208153554 4193.6831 112.7959
Ideal min PCF 1.000081 1.200055 7.372802 0.067316915 1006.9059 27.41531
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION optimization problems.

Using the obtained objective functions, the The optimal tube configurations for the
multi objective optimization problem defined individual design objectives are summarized in
earlier was solved using Genetic algorithm. table 3 and the corresponding points, each
The initial population size was set at 90. lying at the end of the Pareto curve, have been
Crossover probability was kept as 0.75 and the marked in red on the Pareto front shown in
mutation function was chosen as ‘Adaptive figure 2. From table 3, it can be surmised that:
feasible’ as is recommended for constrained a higher aspect ratio is more beneficial for
1301
Upadhyay et al.
increasing the energy absorption whereas a Cylinders International Journal of Solids

lower aspect ratio is better for lowering the and Structures 43 (6): 1543–60.
PCF, thinner tube wall thickness is better for Zhang Xiong Hui Zhang and Zhuzhu Wen
reducing the PCF while a thicker tube 2015 International Journal of Mechanical
generally has better energy absorption Sciences International Journal of
characteristics, and a higher value of semi- Mechanical Sciences 92. Elsevier:12–23.
apical angle is beneficial for both objectives.
This sort of conflict justifies the use of Multi LS-DYNA keyword user's manual, Livemore
objective optimization in the current problem. Software Technology Corporation (LSTC)
Shu Yang Chang Qi. Multiobjective 2013
120 Pareto front Otimization for empty and foam-filled
Peak Crushing Force (Objective 2)
square columns under oblique impact

100 loading. Int J of Impact Engineering 54
80 Zarei HR Kroeger M 2006 Multiobjective

crashworthiness optimization of circular
60 aluminum tubes. Thin-Walled Struct 44
Chang Qi Shu Yang 2014 Crashworthiness and
40
lightweight optimisation of thinwalled
conical tubes subjected to an oblique
20
impact. Int J of Crashworthiness 19(4)
0
334-35
-4500 -3500 -2500 -1500 Silvestre N Gardner L 2011 Elastic local post-
-Energy absorbed (Objective 1) buckling of elliptical tubes. Journal of
Constructional Steel Research 67
Figure 2. Pareto front with end points Insausti A Gardner L 2011 Analytical
corresponding to optimums of individual modelling of plastic collapse in
objectives compressed elliptical hollow sections.
Journal of Constructional Steel Research
Moreover, it can be observed that minimum
67
PCF is achieved when the aspect ratio of the
ellipse is at unity, that is, when the cross- Qiang Gao, Liangmo Wang, Yuanlong Wang,
section is circular. It is known that during Chenzhi Wang 2016 Crushing analysis
actual crash events, the energy absorbing and multiobjective crashworthiness
members are loaded in such a way that they optimization of foam-filled ellipse tubes
undergo bending mode of deformation. Thus,
under oblique impact loading. Thin-
in order to fully evaluate the crashworthiness
performance of Elliptical Tapered Hollow Walled Structures 100.
Sections, further study for oblique loading
conditions would be required.
REFERENCES
Abdul-Latif Baleh A R Aboura Z 2006 Some
Improvements on the Energy Absorbed in
Axial Plastic Collapse of Hollow
1302
ICCMS2016
SEMI-ANALYTICAL SOLUTIONS FOR FUNCTIONALLY GRADED

SMART PLATE IN CYLINDRICAL BENDING
SAWARKAR S.1*, PENDHARI S.2 and DESAI Y.M.1
1
Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Bombay, Mumbai, India.
2
Abstract: Two dimensional (2D) stress and displacement analysis of simply

supported functionally graded piezoelectric material (FGPM) plate subjected to
electro-mechanical loading has been carried out with Semi-analytical model.
Formulation has been developed using elasticity approach and the method is free from
any a-priory assumptions in thickness direction. The mathematical model is a set of
mixed first ordered ordinary differential equations (ODEs). The solution has been
obtained using numerical integration in thickness direction. Accuracy of the proposed
model is assessed by comparing numerical results for a single layer FGPM plate with
exact solutions available in literature and are found to be in good agreement with the
same.
Keywords: semi-analytical method; piezoelectricity; cylindrical bending;
functionally graded material.
INTRODUCTION subjected to electro-mechanical loading in

In piezoelectric material, the elastic and 2D domain. Lu et.al. (2006) have also
electric fields are coupled. Piezo-materials provided elasticity solutions for an all-round
have the ability to convert mechanical energy simply supported FGPM plate. Lim and He
into electric energy and vice-versa, which (2001), Reddy and Cheng (2001), Zhong and
may be used judiciously in designing self- Shang (2003) too have provided exact
governing smart materials to control solutions for FGPM plate. In equivalent
deflection and vibrations in structural single layer approximate analysis of FGPM,
members. A functionally graded piezoelectric significant contributions have come from
material (FGPM) is the piezo-material in Almajid et.al. (2001), Joshi et.al. (2003) and
which, the material electric and mechanical Taya et.al. (2004).
properties vary gradually, usually in In the present work, semi-analytical model
thickness direction. Due to the continuous proposed by Kant et.al. (2007) is developed
variation in properties, all the benefits of a for the static analysis of an FGPM plate in
composite are gained, yet avoiding cylindrical bending. Displacements,
discontinuity in stresses at interfaces transverse normal stress, transverse shear
typically observed in layered composites. stresses, electric potential and transverse
Several studies have been carried out to electric displacement are the primary
understand behaviour of FGPM. Lu et.al. variables. A simply supported FGPM plate
(2006) have proposed an elasticity solution subjected to electro-mechanical loading is
for functionally gradient piezoelectric plate formulated as a mixed two-point BVP in the
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: sawarkar@iitb.ac.in 1303

Sawarkar et al.
interval –h/2 ≤ z ≤ h/2 with half of the ∂σ x ∂τ zx

+ + Bx = 0
variables specified at the edges z = ± h/2. ∂x ∂z
(3)
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION ∂τ xz ∂σ z
+ + Bz = 0
∂x ∂z
An FGPM plate simply supported along the
∂u ∂w ∂u ∂w
edges at x = 0, a is considered (Figure 1). εx = , εz = , γ xz = + (4)
∂x ∂z ∂z ∂x
Longitudinal edges at x = 0, a are grounded ∂Dx ∂Dz
with zero potential. The plate is subjected to + =0 (5)
∂x ∂z
transverse mechanical and electrical loading Eq. (2)-(5) have a total of 11 inter-dependent
at the top surface. If b<<h, the plate may be
unknowns; u, w, ε x , ε z , γ xz , σ x , σ z , τ xz , D x , D z
regarded to be in plane stress condition of
and φ in 11 equations. After some algebraic
elasticity. If b>>h, the plate is in plane strain
manipulation of the above sets of equations, a
condition.
set of PDEs involving only six primary
variables; u, w, σ z , τ xz , D z and φ is obtained.
z
Displacement field and stress field are
expressed in the form of single Fourier series,
x satisfying the BCs at x = 0, a as;
h
 u ( x, z )   um ( z ) 
  = ∑  cos α m x
a τ xz ( x, z ) m τ xzm ( z )
 w(x, z )   wm (z ) 
(6)
   
Figure 1. Simply supported FGPM plate σ z (x, z ) = ∑ σ zm (z ) sin α m x
in cylindrical bending.  D (x, z ) m  D (z )
 z   zm 
Let the elastic, electric and dielectric mπ
where α m =
properties of FGPM vary in thickness a
direction as; Applied transverse mechanical load p and
electrostatic potential φ are expressed in the
C ij = f (z )C ij0 , eij = f (z )eij0 ,
(1) form of single Fourier series as;
g ij = f ( z )g ij0
 p(x, z )  p0 m (z )
 =  sin α m x
φ (x, z ) φ0 m (z ) 
(7)
where, C ij , e ij and g ij are the values at any
arbitrary depth and Cij0 , eij0 and g ij0 are the
Substituting Eq. (6), (7) and the derivatives
available reference values. The gradation rule
into the PDEs, a set of first-order ODEs
f(z) is either exponential law or power law.
involving primary dependent variables; u, v,
Coupled elastic and electric field equations in w, σ z , τ y z , τ xz , D z and φ is obtained as;
piezoelectric medium due to Tirsten (1969),
du m ( z )  1 
2D elasticity equilibrium equations, 2D = −α m wm ( z ) +  τ xzm

 f ( z )C 55
0
strain-displacement equations and 2D charge dz 
equilibrium equation due to Maxwell (1865)  e150 
−  0 α mφ m ( z ) (8)
are respectively;  C 55 
{ σ } = [ C ]{ ε } – [ e ]{ E } dwm ( z )  g 33
0
C 310
+ e33 e31 
0 0
(2)  α u ( z )
{ D } = [ e ]T{ ε } + [ g ]{ E } = 0 0 0 0  m m
dz  33 33
C g + e 33 33 
e
1304
Semi-analytical Solutions for Functionally Graded Smart Plate in Cylindrical Bending
1  g0  considered with material elastic as well as

+  0 0 33 0 0 σ zm ( z )

f ( z )  C 33 g 33 + e33 e33  electric properties varying exponentially.
Material gradation constant β = -1, 0, 1. PZT-
1  e0 
+  0 0 33 0 0  D zm ( z ) 4 material properties are; E10 = 81.3 GPa, E30

f (z )  C 33 g 33 + e33 e33 
= 64.5 GPa, G50 = 25.6 GPa, e31
0
= -5.2 C/m2,
dφ m ( z )  C 0 e310
− e33
0 0
C 31 
= − 33 α u ( z )
0 0  m m
0
= 15.08 C/m2, e150 = 12.72 C/m2, ε110 ε 0 =
 C 33 g 33 + e33 e33 
dz 0 0 e33
1  e330
 1475, ε 33
0
ε 0 = 1300. FGPM sensory plate is
+  σ ( z )
0 0  zm
f ( z )  C 33
0 0
g 33 + e33 e33  subjected to mechanical load; p = 1sin(πx/a),
1  C0  FGPM actuating plate is subjected to electric
−  0 0 33 0 0  D zm ( z ) load; φ = 1sin(πx/a). Results obtained at a
f ( z )  C 33 g 33 + e33 e33 
section (x, y) = (0.25a, 0.25b) using present
dτ xzm ( z )
= formulation are compared with exact results
dz
given by Lu et.al. (2006) and are depicted in
 0 C0 g0 C0 
 C11 − 0 130 33 031 0  Figures 2 and 3.
 C 33 g 33 + e33 e33 
 
e0 C 0 e0 α 2 u ( z ) CONCLUSION
f ( z ) − 0 330 13 310 0
 C 33 g 33 + e33 e33  m m Semi-analytical model for static analysis of a
 
 e31C 33 e31 − e31C 31e33 
0 0 0 0 0 0
simply supported FGPM plate has been
 + C 0 g 0 + e0 e0  developed, which is simple, efficient and
 33 33 33 33 
 C130 g 33
0
+ e31
0 0
e33  accurate. The primary variables are so chosen
−  0 0 α σ ( z )
0 0  m zm that their continuity in through-thickness
 C 33 g 33 + e33 e33  direction is implicitly satisfied. Stresses and
 C 0 e0 − e0 C 0  displacements are found simultaneously and
−  130 330 310 330 α m D zm ( z ) + B x
 C 33 g 33 + e33 e33  with same degree of accuracy. Results
dσ zm ( z ) obtained by present formulation are in very
= α mτ xzm ( z ) + Bz good agreement with the exact results
dz
available in literature.
dD zm ( z )  e150 
=  0 α mτ xzm ( z )
dz  C 55  REFERENCES
e e
0 0

− f (z )
Almajid A Taya M Hudnut S 2001 Analysis
+ g110 α m2 φ m ( z )
15 15
0 of out-of-plane displacement and stress
 C 55 
field in a piezocomposite plate with
functionally graded microstructure Int J
The above Equations (8) represent the
of Solids & Structures 38 3377-3391.
governing two-point BVP in the domain -h/2
≤ z ≤ h/2, with electric potential and stress Joshi S Mukherjee A Schmauder S 2003
components known at the top and bottom Exact solutions for characterization of
electro-elastically graded materials
surfaces of the laminate. Solution to the
Comp Materials Science 28 548-555.
above Eq. (8) is obtained by numerical
integration. Kant T Pendhari S Desai Y 2007 On
Accurate Stress Analysis of Composite
NUMERICAL INVESTIGATION and Sandwich Narrow Beams Int J for
Comp Methods in Engineering Science
A simply supported PZT-4 based single layer and Mechanics 8(165) 165-177.
FGPM plate in cylindrical bending is
1305
Sawarkar et al.
Lim C W and He L H 2001 Exact solution of 1

a compositionally graded piezoelectric
layer under uniform stretch, bending 0.8
and twisting Int Journal of Mechanical
Sciences 43 2479-2492. 0.6
Lu P Lee H P Lu C 2006 An exact solutions 0.4

for functionally graded piezoelectric
laminates in cylindrical bending 0.2
0
Sciences 47(3) 437-458.
-4 -2 0 2 4
Lu P Lee H P Lu C 2006 Exact solutions for
simply supported functionally graded 1 z (b)
piezoelectric laminates by Stroh-like
formalism Composite Structures 72(3) 0.8 Present
352-363. β=-1
0.6 β=0
Maxwell J C 1865 A dynamical theory of the β=1
electromagnetic field Royal Society 0.4 Exact
Transactions 155 459-512. 0.2
w×10-11
Reddy J N and Cheng Z Q 2001 Three
0
dimensional solutions of smart
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
functionally graded plates ASME J of
Applied Mechanics 68 234-241.
Taya M Almajid A A Dunn M Takahashi S Figure 2. Through thickness variation in
2004 Design of bimorph piezo- (a) in-plane displacement, (b) transverse
composite actuators with functionally displacement in a sensory plate.
graded microstructure Sensors & z
Actuators A 107 248-260. (a) 1
Tiersten H F (1969) Linear piezoelectric 0.8

Present
plate vibrations Plenum Press New β=-1
York. 0.6
β=0
Zhong Z and Shang E T 2003 Three 0.4 β=1
dimensional exact analysis of a simply Exact
0.2
supported functionally gradient τxz
piezoelectric plate Int J of Solids &
0
-2 -1 0 1 2 3
z (a) (b) z
Present
β=-1 Present
β=0 β=-1
β=1 β=0
Exact β=1
Exact
u×10-12 Dz×10-7
1306
Semi-analytical Solutions for Functionally Graded Smart Plate in Cylindrical Bending
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-1 -0.8 -0.6 -0.4 -0.2 0
Figure 3. Through thickness variation in

(a) transverse shear stress, (b) electric
displacement in an actuating plate.
1307
ICCMS2016
INCREMENTAL DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF RC BUILDING FRAMES

SABHARANJAK K. G. and DAWARI B. M.
Department of Civil Engineering, College of Engineering Pune, Pune, India
Abstract: Incremental Dynamic Analysis is becoming extremely popular in the

performance based earthquake engineering to study the nonlinear behavior of
structure. In this work, a nonlinear finite element 3D model of 3-story reinforced
concrete building framed structure is developed. A set of 14 different time history
data are used to carry out the incremental dynamic analysis. Each time history is
scaled and corresponding values of maximum inter story drift ratio are noted down.
IDA curve of PGA and maximum inter story drift ratio for each time history are
plotted. Probability of yield and probability of collapse are found out by using
fragility equation.
Keywords: Incremental Dynamic Analysis, Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis

INTRODUCTION analysis are useful for retrofitting decisions,

damage estimation, loss estimation and
Incremental dynamic analyses have recently
disaster response planning with suitable
emerged as a powerful tool to study the
retrofitting schemes.
overall behavior of structures, from their
elastic response through yielding and ANALYSIS
nonlinear response and all the way to global
dynamic instability. An incremental dynamic Incremental dynamic analysis involves
analysis involves performing a series of following steps:
nonlinear dynamic analyses in which the 1) Appropriate modeling
intensity of the ground motion selected for 2) Selection of intensity measure of
the collapse investigation is incrementally earthquake
increased until the global collapse capacity of
3) Selection of response measure
the structure is reached. When the slope of
the IDA curve changes from linear to 4) Selection and scaling of ground motions
nonlinear, yield stage is considered to be 5) Generation of IDA curves by
reached. Collapse capacity of the structure is interpolation
considered to be reached when the IDA curve 6) Plotting of Fragility Curves
becomes significantly flat or nonlinear slope For plotting fragility curves, following
is less than 20% of elastic slope equation has been given FEMA:
[Vamvatsikos and Cornell, 2002].

Incremental dynamic analysis yields a Ф (1)
distribution of results at varying intensities Where,
that can be used to generate the collapse Ф = Standard Normal Distribution
fragility. X = Lognormal distributed ground motion
Seismic vulnerability and hazard assessment index
calculated through incremental dynamic ζ= Mean of ln(X)
β=Standard Deviation of ln(X)
______________________________
*Author to correspondence: E-mail: sabharanjakkg14.civil@coep.ac.in 1308

Sabharanjak and Dawari
DESCRIPTION OF BUILDING as collapse points. Values of PGA in Table 2

FRAME are defined for collapse stage. Where the
slope of the IDA curve changes from linear
A RCC frame of 3story with three bays of
to nonlinear, yield condition is reached and
3.00m each in both the directions and 3m
corresponding values of PGA are also noted
floor height is considered for validation of
down.
results with Maniyar (2009). Building is
assumed to be situated in earthquake zone IV
in India. Column frames are assumed as
fixed on ground. All columns are 300 x
300mm in size and 3.00m high with steel
reinforcement of 8 bars of diameter 12mm.
All beams are 200 x 300mm with steel
reinforcement of 4 bars of diameter 12mm.
The concrete considered is having grade of
25N/mm2 and the reinforcement is of grade
Fe415. Finite element program used for the
analysis is SeismoStruct version 7.0.3.
Figure1 shows the model of the building and
Table1 shows the modal analysis of building. Figure 1. 3-Story RCC Building Frame
Incremental dynamic analysis is carried out Table1. Modal Analysis

and peak ground acceleration (PGA) values Time Period Frequency
Mode
are noted down at which IDA curve is (sec) (cyc/sec)
becoming flat i.e for small amount of 1 0.38 2.63
increase in the ground motion; there is a 2 0.38 2.63
Considerable increase in the building 3 0.32 3.13
response. These PGA values are considered
0.9
Uttarkashi_Bhatwari
0.8 Chamoli_JosimathT
Uttarkashi_GhansialiL
0.7
Uttarkashi_RudraprayagL
0.6 Uttarkashi_TehriT
PGA (g)
0.5 Uttarkashi_UttrarkashiT
Dharmshala_BandlakhasL
0.4
India Burma Border_DolooT
0.3 India Burma Border_KatakhalL
India Burma Border_KatakhalT
0.2
India Burma Border_PynurslaL
0.1 India Burma Border_SilcharL
0 India Burma Border_SilcharT

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 Dharmshala_SihuntaT
Maximum inter story drift ratio (%)
Figure 2. IDA curves from present work
1309
Incremental Dynamic Analysis of RC Building Frames
Table2. Maximum Inter Story Drift Ratio

Maniyar (2009) Present Work
Earthquake Station Maximum Maximum

PGA PGA
inter story inter story
(g) (g)
drift ratio (%) drift ratio (%)
1991 Uttarkashi Bhatwari T 0.17 1.66 0.17 1.61
1999 Chamoli Joshimath T 0.16 1.87 0.16 1.72
1992 Uttarkashi Ghansiali L 0.12 0.62 0.12 0.79
1992 Uttarkashi Rudraprayag L 0.29 0.65 0.29 0.73
2001 Uttarkashi Tehri T 0.08 1.09 0.08 0.95
2003 Uttarkashi Uttarkashi T 0.27 0.77 0.27 0.81
1986 Dharmshala Bandlakhas L 0.79 1.29 0.79 1.16
1997 India-burma border Doloo T 0.21 0.93 0.21 0.83
1997 India-burma border Katakhal L 0.12 0.91 0.12 0.84
1997 India-burma border Katakhal T 0.15 1.14 0.15 1.05
1997 India-burma border Pynursla L 0.6 0.75 0.59 0.65
1997 India-burma border Silchar L 0.17 0.76 0.28 0.71
1997 India-burma border Silchar T 0.17 1.69 0.17 1.65
1995 Dharmshala Sihunta T 0.15 0.76 0.15 0.72
Median 0.17 0.92 0.17 0.84
1.0
Probability of yielding
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
PGA (g)
Figure 3. IDA curves from Maniyar

Fragility curves are plotted as follows from
equation (1)
Figure 4. Probability of yielding of

present work and Maniyar
1310
Sabharanjak and Dawari
1.0 FEMA P-58-1 Vol 1 – Methodology

Seismic Performance Assessment of
Probability of collapse
0.9
0.8
0.7 Buildings 2012.
0.6
0.5 FEMA P-58-2 Vol 2 – Implementation
0.4 Guide Seismic Performance
0.3
0.2
Assessment of Building 2012.
0.1
0.0 Mander J Dhakal R 2007 Incremental
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 dynamic analysis applied to seismic
PGA (g) financial risk assessment of bridges
Maniyar M 2009 Incremental Dynamic
analysis of 3 story RCC building
Ph.D. Thesis SGSITS Indore.
Mwafy A Elnashai A 2003 Static pushover
versus dynamic collapse analysis of
RC building Engineering Structures 23
407-424.
Nicknam A Mahadavi N A 2008
Figure 5. Probability of collapse of comparative study of the traditional
present work and Maniyar performance and the incremental
dynamic analysis approaches14th
SUMMARY World Conference on Earthquake
Engineering, Beijing China.
From the IDA curve, we can understand the
behavior of building under a particular Ramamurti V Rajarajan S Rao G 2002 An
earthquake and define the performance incremental approach for large
stages of the structure such as yield and displacement response of structures
collapse. In this study, the methodology for subjected to dynamic loads Finite
obtaining seismic collapse capacity is Elements in Analysis and Design 38
defined. A set of 14 different time history 823-833.
data is used to assess the seismic capacity of Vamvatsikos D Cornell A 2002 Incremental
the structure. From the fragility curves, 50% dynamic analysis Earthquake
yielding occurs at PGA of 0.1g and building Engineering and Structural Dynamics
completely yields at PGA of 0.4g. Also, 31(3) 491–514.
50% collapse occurs at PGA of 0.2g, a
complete collapse occurs at PGA of 0.9g. Vamvatsikos D Cornell A 2002 The
incremental dynamic analysis and its
REFERENCES application to performance-based
earthquake engineering 12th European
Asgarian B Sadrinezhad A Alanjari P 2010
Conference on Earthquake
Seismic performance evaluation of
Engineering 479.
steel moment resisting frames through
incremental dynamic analysis Journal
of Constructional Steel Research 66
178-190.
1311
ICCMS2016
INVERSE PROBLEM ON A TIMOSHENKO BEAM USING TIME

DOMAIN SPECTRAL FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
KULKARNI R.B.1, GOPALAKRISHNAN S.2* and TRIKHA M.1
1
ISRO satellite centre, Bengaluru, India.
2
Department of Aerospace engineering, Indian institute of science, Bengaluru, India.
Abstract: There are different methods for force identification from the responses on a
structure. In this paper, a time domain spectral finite element method using an eight
noded element having Gauss-Lobatto Legendre (GLL) points as nodes are formulated
using Timoshenko beam theory. The mass, damping and stiffness matrices are
formulated. Then this is solved using Newmark time integration technique. A forward
problem i.e, predicting the response from the force input on a cantilever beam is
solved. This is compared with experiment to validate the algorithm. Experiments are
conducted using modal hammer to excite a beam to measure the acceleration
responses. The numerical and experimental methods are compared and results are
discussed. Then the same technique is used to solve the force identification problem
or inverse problem numerically. It is seen that there is a close match between the
numerical simulation and the force. Further, force reconstruction will be carried out
from the experimental response data.
Keywords: spectral element; time domain; force reconstruction.
INTRODUCTION in the literature. One may easily find the

inverse problem solution by just inverting
In many applications, the force identification
the forward problem. Then, it is easily seen
and reconstruction becomes very important
that all the forward problem solving
as the response to an unknown force is
techniques can be used to calculate the
known while the forces causing these
inverse problem. However, this is not so
responses are unknown. This may be due to
easy due to the following reasons.
the inaccessibility to mount the sensors.
These kinds of problems are also called as Noise in the response data
inverse problems in contrast with the forward 1. Ill posedness due to the unknowns
problem where the input force is known and more than the equations
responses are predicted. In this paper, time 2. Error amplification during the
domain spectral element method is used to calculation of inverse
reconstruct a transient force on a These reasons call for separate techniques
Timoshenko beam knowing the velocity and to solve such kind of problem.
acceleration responses. For a high frequency response, the inverse
problem becomes very difficult using
SPECTRAL FINITE ELEMENT
conventional finite element method as the
METHOD element size should be as small in
There are many methods to determine the comparison with the wave length of the
force from the responses which are reported frequency under consideration. Hence
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: krishnan@aero.iisc.ernet.in 1312

Kulkarni et al.
alternate methods which are accurate and used in formulating the spectral finite
computationally effective should be used. element formulation
One of the methods used is the spectral finite
Step1: Placement of nodes
element method. There are two different
kinds of spectral finite element approaches, (1 − 𝜉)𝑃𝑁′ (𝜉) = 0 (1)
one is based on frequency approach where Where 𝜉 ∈ [1, −1] are the roots of the
fast Fourier transform (FFT) [Martin and Legendre polynomial and 𝑃𝑁′ (𝜉) denotes
Doyle, 1996] is used and another is based on the first derivative of the Legendre
time domain where orthogonal functions like polynomial of degree N.
Legendre and Chebyshev is used along with
discretisation typical for the FEM [Kudela et Step2: Displacement field approximation for
al., 2007] This results in its high accuracy the node placement as per equation (1)
and excellent convergence properties. The Step3: B matrix formulation which is
use of these polynomials, the nodes is placed differentiation of displacement field
not equidistant and these functions are
Step4: Arriving at the mass, damping,
orthogonal leading to the inertia matrix to be
stiffness and force matrices
diagonal and computationally easy and
accurate. The FFT methods provide excellent Step5: Solve using Newmark integration
convergence and using single element, one
can calculate the force from response.
However, this method requires the use of
throw off elements due to the periodic nature
of FFT. For complex geometries, this
becomes more complicated. Hence some
other methods using Laplace transforms are
also described in literature [Igawa et al.,
2004]. However, all these work well for
Figure-1 cantilever beam with tip
simple geometries. In this paper, time
transient force
domain approach is followed where complex
geometries can also be solved taking A cantilever beam is shown in Figure-1 is
advantage of finite element techniques. solved using this technique. A triangular
pulse is simulated at the tip of cantilever and
ELEMENT FORMULATION
response is calculated at the tip using spectral
A spectrally formulated eight noded finite element method. To evaluate the
Timoshenko beam with Gauss Lobatto computer program, an experiment is
Legendre points as nodes is used. The conducted in which the tip of cantilever is
stiffness, mass and damping matrices are excited using a modal hammer and response
derived using Gauss Lobatto Legendre at the beam tip is measured using
weighing functions. The individual matrices accelerometers. The same input is fed in the
are assembled and the resulting equation computer program and predicted responses
containing stiffness matrix along with mass are compared. The force history in Newton is
and damping matrices are then solved using shown in Figure-2and the corresponding
time integration methods. Here Newmark responses along with the comparison with the
integration scheme is used as it gives good spectral finite element method are shown in
stability while solving. Following steps are Figure-3.
1313
Inverse Problem on a Timoshenko Beam using Time Domain Spectral Finite Element Method
solid mechanics International journal of

structural changes in solids 3(2) 11-21.
Hollandsworth P E Busby H R 1989 Impact
force identification using the general
inverse technique Int. J. Impact Engg
8(4) 315-322.
Martin M T and Doyle J F 1996 Impact force
identification from wave propagation
responses Int. J. Impact Engg 18(1) 65-
77.
Mira Mitra and Gopalakrishnan S 2005
Spectral formulated wavelet finite
Figure 2. Force time history
element for wave propagation and
impact force identification in connected
1-D waveguides Int. J. of solids and
structures 42 4695-4721.
Igawa H Komasu K Yamaguchi I Kasai T
2004 Wavepropagation analysis of
frame structures using the spectral
element method Journal of sound and
vibration 277 1071-1081.
Kudela P Krawczuk M Ostachowicz W 2007
Wave propagation modelling in 1D
structures using spectral finite elements
Journal of soundand vibration 300 88-
100.
Figure 3. Comparison of measured and
prediction using spectral finite element
method
CONCLUSION
The time domain spectral finite element
gives a very good match with experiment
with fewer numbers of elements. There is a
good match between the experiment and the
calculated values. Further, the challenge lies
in force reconstruction from the measured
experimental response data.
REFERENCES
Dennis B H Weiya Jin G S Dulikravich Jovo
Jaric June 2011Application of the finite
element method to inverse problems in
1314
ICCMS2016
STUDY OF THERMAL BEHAVIOUR OF BRAKE DISC MATERIALS

PANDA D.* and TIMMARAJU M. V.
Indian Institute of Information Technology Design and Manufacturing Kancheepuram, Chennai, India.
Abstract: Braking system is essential part of automobiles. Disc brakes are being used
in automobiles due to its high braking capacity. However in disc braking system a
huge amount of heat generation occurs, since all the kinetic energy of the vehicle gets
converted into heat at the disc pad interface due to friction with in a very short span of
time. Thermal analysis is carried out to estimate the amount of temperature generation
with respect to time in disc brakes of both four wheelers and two wheelers. ANSYS
software has been used to do this time varying transient thermal analysis on the brake
disc system. A mathematical modelling has been done with suitable assumptions to
calculate the amount of heat generation in each time step. Appropriate boundary
conditions are applied to simulate the models. The amount of temperature generation
with respect to material properties, thickness of the disc and time of braking are
studied.
Keywords: transient thermal analysis; friction; heat generation
INTRODUCTION temperatures can lead to the overheating of

Brakes are one of the most important and the brake fluid, seals, and other components,
essential parts in automobiles. Thus design the stopping capability of a brake increases
for improving the efficiency and performance with the rate at which heat is dissipated due
of braking should be undertaken. In recent to forced convection and thermal capacity of
scenario of automobile industry disc brakes the system. Rajagopal et al. 2014. A.
are used instead of drum brakes since the area Belhocine et.al 2014 analyzed the thermal
of contact increases for disc brakes. But behavior of ventilated and full disc brake
along with increase in performance of rotors with frictional heat generation using
braking the temperature of brake system also ANSYS Multiphysics. This paper explain the
rises significantly. Due to rise in temperature modelling of the brake disc and method of
quality degradation of material may occur. application of thermal load on the disc
Thus a thermal analysis on disc brake is surface. Guru Murthy Nathi et.al 2012
highly essential. coupled the structural and the thermal
analysis of brake disc by converting it into a
LITERATURE REVIEW 2D case. The heat generation is being
calculated by energy conservation principle
In the process of designing a disc brake
i.e. the total kinetic energy of the vehicle is
system first one should consider the critical
converted to heat at the brake disc and pad
parameters for the failure of the system. The
interface. Zagrodzki et.al 2009 analyzed
major parameters include wear rate,
sliding systems with frictional heating, which
temperature, noise level etc. High
exhibit thermo elastic instability in friction
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:deepakmechiter@gmail.com 1315

Panda and Timmaraju
clutches and brakes when the sliding speed Initial velocity, U and final Velocity, V in
exceeds a critical value. Zhu et al. 2009 each time step are calculated assuming a
established the theoretical model of a three- linear variation of velocity.
dimensional (3D) transient temperature field Kinetic energy in that time domain is
to predict the change of brake shoe’s
temperature field during hoist’s emergency KE  1 / 2 M (U 2  V 2 ) (4)
braking. Heat flux in that time domain is
Q  KE (5)
2 At
ASSUMPTIONS where, A is Area of contact and t is the time
All kinetic energy of the vehicle at disc brake period of the substep.
rotor surface is converted into frictional heat
or heat flux.Thermal conductivity and ANSYS MODELLING
specific heat is assumed to be constant in all Transient thermal analysis for brake discs has
temperatures.The disc material is considered been performed using ANSYS 14. Ten node
as homogeneous and isotropic.The domain is tetrahedral elements are being used for meshing
considered symmetric about z-plane. Bike is the entire disc into finite number of segments
undergoing constant deceleration Analysis is with an element edge length of 0.01m. The
done considering two wheel braking system material properties such as thermal
for cars and one wheel braking system for conductivity, specific heat, density are
bikes. applied on the material through material
model tab in the pre-processor as given in
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING table 1.
Mass of car, m = 1800 kg Table 1. Material properties
Velocity of the vehicle, V = 112 km per hour Thermal Specific
i.e., 31.29 m/s Density
Material conductivity heat
(kg/m3)
Kinetic energy possessed by the body = (W/m.k) (J/kg.k)
881157.69 J Cast iron 50 438 7150
Deceleration produced in the vehicle due to Carbon 100 1000 1750
braking = -7.82 m/s2 (considering 4 sec SiC/Al 180 800 2800
braking) MMC
Distance travelled by the vehicle during these Ceramic 120 750 3100
4 sec = 62.6 m
Diameter of wheel of a Toyota innova car, d In the solution tab first transient analysis has
= 647.5 mm (courtesy Toyota) been selected. In the settings option the initial
temperature of the material is set to be 40
For one rotation of the wheel the vehicle will degree Celsius. Heat flux is being applied to
move = πd = 2.034 m one surface of the disc in all time domains
Number of rotations before stopping of the one by one as given in table 2. Table 2 shows
vehicle = 32 (approx.) four time domains, but in the analysis for cars
32 time domains were used.
Total kinetic energy and total time are
divided into 32 sub divisions.
1316
Study Of Thermal Behaviour Of Brake Disc Materials
Table 2. Heat flux in each time disc is very thin and unlike the car disc there
domain for cars is no hub present here.
Time Mass Velocity Kinetic Heat

(sec) (kg) (m/s) energy flux
(joule) (W/m2)
0.125 1800 30.31 54194.8 471259
1
0.25 1800 29.33 52474.89 456303
4
0.375 1800 28.35 50754.98 441347
6
Figure 2. Temperature profile at 12 sec
0.5 1800 27.38 49035.07 426391
for Cast-iron bike disc for 2 sec braking
9

The temperature varies along the cross
section of the disc at a particular time as
shown in figure 1. Temperature in the disc
gradually increases from near the hub to
outer periphery of the disc. As there is no
heat generation in the hub, it acts as a sink for
the disc.
Figure 3. Temperature variation for Cast-

iron, Carbon composite, Al-Sic composite
and Silicon carbide car brake disc with
respect to time after braking
Figure 3 illustrates variation of the

temperature distribution with time for four
most widely used materials in disc brakes for
the four wheelers. For carbon composites a
maximum temperature of 460 degree Celsius
is obtained which is the highest among all
other materials. Whereas for silicon
Figure 1. Temperature variation for cast reinforced aluminium metal matrix composite
iron car brake a maximum temperature of 340 degree
Celsius is obtained which is least among all.
There is very negligible change in The Silicon carbide exhibits similar
temperature across the cross section of the temperature distribution as Aluminium metal
cast iron disc used for two wheelers as shown matrix composite. Whereas, the peak
in figure 2. The temperature at 12 seconds on temperature in case of the other two materials
the disc is 146.962 degree celsius. The is 100 degree Celsius more.
temperature is not varying with time since the
1317
Panda and Timmaraju
Nathi G M Charyulu T N Gowtham K Satish

P Reddy 2012 Coupled structural and
thermal analysis of disc brake,
international journal of Research in
Engineering and Technology, ISSN
2319-1163
Rajagopal T K R Ramachandran R James M
Gatlewar S Ch 2014 Numerical
investigation of fluid flow and heat
transfer characteristics on the
Figure 4. Influence of thickness for Cast-
iron bike brake disc on temperature aerodynamics of ventilated disc
variation brakerotor using CFD, Thermal Science
18 (2) 667–675
Figure 4 shows influence of brake disc
thickness on temperature generation. With Zagrodzki P 2009 Thermo elastic instability
increase in thickness of the material it is in friction clutches and brakes-transient
being observed that the temperature modal analysis revealing mechanisms of
generation reduces. excitation of unstable modes,
CONCLUSION International Journal of Solids and
Structures 46 2463–2 476.
Four wheelers produce approximately 3 times
more temperature than the two wheeler discs Zhu Z C Peng U X Shi Z Y Chen G A 2009
even 5 times more thickness. In case of cast iron Three-dimensional transient temperature
discs for four wheelers with 30 mm thickness field of brake shoe during hoist’s
maximum temperature is 450 ºC (approximately), emergency braking, Applied Thermal
whereas for two wheelers with 6 mm thickness Engineering 29 932–937.
the maximum temperature is 150 ºC. The
difference in maximum temperature and steady
state temperature is more in case of four wheelers
compared with two wheelers. As the thickness of
the material increases, the difference between
maximum temperature and steady state
temperature increases. With increase in thickness
of the disc the temperature generation in the disc
is reducing as the heat dissipation rate is high.
The highest maximum temperature is obtained for
carbon composite whereas the lowest maximum
temperature is obtained for silicon carbide
reinforced aluminium metal matrix composite.
REFERENCES
Belhocine A chao D Nouby M Yi Y B Abu
Bakar 2014 Thermal analysis of both
ventilated and full disc brake rotors with
frictional heat generation Applied and
Computational Mechanics 8 5–24
1318
ICCMS2016
INSPECTION OF ADHESIVELY BONDED LAP JOINTS USING

SPECTRAL FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
PAUNIKAR S.* and GOPALAKRISHNAN S.
Department of Aerospace Engineering, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India
Abstract: The use of adhesive bonds over mechanical joints is increasing, especially
in the aerospace industry. This work aims to inspect the health of adhesively bonded
lap joints with the help of wave propagation studies carried out using Spectral Finite
Element Method (SFEM). SFEM is tailor made technique formulated in frequency
domain to study wave propagation problems. Ultrasonic guided waves are used for
inspection. The joint is modelled using two beams representing the adherands and a
double beam representing the lap joint. The double beam is formulated as a
combination of two beams and continuously distributed elastic spring foundation. The
elastic foundation basically models the adhesive bonding between the two adherands.
The wavenumbers corresponding to incident and reflected components of axial,
bending and shear modes are obtained in the spectral domain. The spectrum relation
shows that the shear mode starts propagating only after a certain frequency called the
cut-off frequency. For the beam on elastic foundation, there is an additional cut-off
frequency depending on the value of foundation stiffness called the foundation cut-
off. As the value of foundation stiffness goes on increasing, the foundation cut-off
approaches the shear cut-off and at a particular value of foundation stiffness, the two
cut-off frequencies have same value. By varying the value of foundation stiffness, the
bond quality can be inspected.
Keywords: Adhesively bonded lap joint; Wave propagation; Spectral Finite
Element Method.
INTRODUCTION study is carried out using SFEM, which is

basically like Finite Element Method (FEM)
Adhesive bonds are increasingly considered but only formulated infrequency domain to
as an alternative to mechanical joints. study wave propagation problems. Unlike
Occurrence of defects and degradation of FEM, by usage of exact interpolating
material properties over time are common functions SFEM ensures that the system size
problems associated with adhesive joints. for analysis is small (Doyle, 1997;
Here we study the feasibility of using Gopalakrishnan et. al., 2008).
ultrasonic guided waves for studying the
adhesively bonded lap-joint between a pair of MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION
Aluminium plate substrates. Guided waves
are used since they can interrogate the entire A schematic of the lap joint studied in this
thickness and travel over a long distance paper is shown in Figure 1. The adherands
when excited from a single location. The are modelled using spectral beam elements.
A spectral double beam element is
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail: shweta.paunikar@aero.iisc.ernet.in 1319

Paunikar and Gopalkrishnan
formulated to model the lap joint-the  2 w0   2 w0  

adherands with adhesive. The double beam is  I0   A55     KF  0
t 2  x
2
x 
formulated as a combination of two beams
and continuously distributed elastic spring u0 
N xx  A11  B11 ,
foundation (Samaratunga et. al., 2014). The x x
elastic foundation basically models the u 
M xx   B11 0  D11 ,
adhesive bonding between the two adherands. x x
By varying the stiffness of the foundation,  w 
Vx   A55  0   
various cases (varying health) of lap joint can  x  (2)
be studied. The equations of motion (EOM) where
for the overlapping region of the bond are
 I0   1   A11  1
derived using Hamilton’s principle. The  
h
    E
h
 
EOM for each adherands can be obtained  I1    b   z dz ,  B11   b   z dz
  1   h  z 2 
2
I  h  2 
from the EOM of the bonded region by  2  z   D11   
setting the value of foundation spring
stiffness (KF) as zero. Transverse shear in the The EOM and boundary conditions are then
adhesive layer is assumed to be negligible transformed to frequency (ω) domain using
since its thickness is much smaller than the Fast Fourier Transform, which reduces the
adherands. The axial displacement (u) and partial differentials equations to ordinary
transverse displacement (w) are assumed to differential equations (ODEs). The ODEs are
be based on First Order Shear Deformation constant coefficient linear equations, so the
Theory as, solutions for the variables are assumed to be
u  x , z , t   u0  x , t   z  x , t  of the form
(1) N 1
w  x , z , t   w0  x , t  u0   uˆ 0  x ,  n e in t ,
n0
where u0 and w0 are the mid-plane
N 1
displacements of the beam and ϕ is the    ˆ  x ,  n e i t , n (3)
anticlockwise rotation of the beam about Y- n0
axis. N 1
w0   wˆ 0  x ,  n e in t
n0
On substituting the Eq. (3) in Eq. (2), a

matrix vector equation is obtained as
W n U 0 n  0 (4)
where
W (1,1)  k 2 A11  I 0 n2 ,
Figure 1. Lap Joint W (1, 2)  k 2 B11  I1 n2 ,
W ( 2,1)  W (1, 2),
Using these displacements the total kinetic
W ( 2, 2)  k 2 D11  I 2 n2   A55 ,
and potential energy for the beam are
W ( 2, 3)  ik A55 ,
obtained, which on substitution in the
Hamilton’s principle yield the following W (3, 2)  W ( 2, 3),
EOM and natural boundary conditions W (3, 3)  k 2 A55  I 0 n2  KF
(Reddy, 2004):
This is a second order polynomial eigenvalue
 2u  2  2 u0  2 problem in 3 variables. On equating the
 I 0 20  I1 2  A11  B 11  0,
t t x 2 x 2 determinant of wave matrix (W) to zero, a
 2u  2  2 u0  2  w  polynomial (called spectrum relation) having
I1 20  I 2 2  B11  D 11   A55  0     0,
t t x 2
x 2
 x  6 roots is obtained. The roots are the
eigenvalues of W and are of the form ±k1,
1320
Inspection of Adhesively Bonded Lap Joints Using Spectral Finite Element Method
±k2, ±k3 corresponding to the incident and RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

reflected axial, bending and shear modes. The
The adherands are assumed to metallic
eigenvectors of W, calculated using Singular
isotropic plates of aluminium having
Value Decomposition are the wave
Young’s Modulus of 70 GPa, Poisson’s ratio
amplitudes. The group speeds of each mode
of 0.33 and density of 2700 kg/m3. The cross-
as a function of frequency (i.e. dispersion
section of the beam is taken to be 10mm х
relation) are calculated numerically from
10mm. Figure 2 and 3 show the spectrum and
spectrum relation. At each frequency, the
dispersion relation plots for a beam with KF
force boundary conditions applied at the two
= 0 and 1e11 N/m respectively.
nodes of an element yield,
 K n U 0 n  F n (5)
The dynamic stiffness matrix [K] is a 6 х 6

matrix. The Eq. (5) is solved for {U0} at the
two nodes at each frequency and time domain
response of the displacements is then
calculated using Inverse Fast Fourier
Transform.
By establishing connectivity between the
nodes of different element, the lap joint can (a) Spectrum Relation
be modelled. By varying the value of KF,
defect in the joint can also be modelled.
(b) Dispersion Relation

Figure 3. Plots for beam on elastic
(a) Spectrum Relation foundation of KF = 1e11 N/m
From Figure 3, it can be seen that there are
two cut-off frequencies, namely the shear
cut-off and the foundation cut-off. By
varying the value of this stiffness, adhesive
bonds of varying bond quality can be studied.
Figure 4 shows the spectrum and dispersion
relation for a double beam with the
foundation modulus of 1e11 N/m. Figure (4)
shows the additional modes propagating in
(b) Dispersion Relation the double beam. These additional modes
arise due to the coupling between the two
Figure 2. Plots for beam (with KF = 0) beams of a double beam.
1321
Paunikar and Gopalkrishnan
applied first in axial direction and then in

transverse direction. The load pulse peaks at
0.249millisecond. Figure (5) shows the
response of the beam to the modulated pulse
after propagating for 4metre. The group
speeds are caxial = 5394 m/s, cbending = 3012
m/s and cshear = 3465 m/s. So, the time taken
by each mode to travel 4metre – taxial = 0.741
millisecond, tbending = 1.328millisecond and
(a) Spectrum Relation tshear = 1.154millisecond. These values are
comparable with the time of arrival of the
modes in the velocity responses shown in
Figure (5).
CONCLUSION
The SFEM formulation correctly predicts the
spectrum relation and the group speeds for
the beams. All the modes are also captured
(b) Dispersion Relation for a standalone beam configuration. Further,
Figure 4. Plots for double beam KF = the wave propagation behaviour for the single
1e11 N/m lap joint will be obtained by establishing
connectivity in different elements. Various
cases of bonding will be studied by changing
the values of foundation spring stiffness of
the double beam.
REFERENCES
Doyle J F 1997 Wave Propagation in
Structures Spectral Analysis Using Fast
Figure 5(a): Velocity history for a 200 kHz Discrete Fourier Transform Springer-
pulse applied axially at the load tip of an Verlag New York Inc 74-91
infinite beam capturing the axial mode
Gopalakrishnan S Chakraborty A and
Mahapatra D R 2007 Spectral Finite
Element Method Wave Propagation,
Diagnostics and Control in Anisotropic
and Inhomogeneous Structures
Springer-Verlag London Limited 40-54
Reddy J N 2004 Mechanics of Laminated
Composite Plates and Shells Boca
Raton: CRC Press
Figure 5(b): Velocity history for a 200 kHz Samaratunga D Jha R Gopalakrishnan S
pulse applied transversely at the load tip 2014 Wave propagation analysis in
of an infinite beam capturing the shear adhesively bonded composite joints
and bending modes using the wavelet spectral finite element
method Composite Structures 122 271-
An infinite beam with KF = 0 is subjected to 283
a modulated pulse of 200 kHz. The load is
1322
ICCMS2016
RESPONSE ANALYSIS OF ADJACENT STRUCTURES CONNECTED

BY FRICTION DAMPER
PATEL C. C.*
Department of Civil Engineering, Marwadi Education Foundation Group of Institute, Rajkot, India
Abstract: Dynamic response of two adjacent structures modelled as single-degree-of-

freedom structure connected by friction damper under base excitation modelled as
non-stationary random process is investigated. The response quantities are obtained
considering friction damper force exhibits Coulomb friction characteristics, velocity
dependent coefficient of friction, equivalent linear coefficient by statistical
linearization techniques and hysteretic model. To study the influence of non-
stationary characteristics of earthquake excitation, the non-stationary response of the
connected structure is compared with corresponding stationary response. The
responses are obtained and analysed, considering 10000 ground motion realization
using Monte Carlo simulation.
Keywords: Friction damper; Passive control; Random process; Seismic response
INTRODUCTION powerful energy dissipation capacity as

compared to other passive dampers. The
To implement energy dissipation devices and
friction damper nearly unaffected by the
control system into structure for seismic
number of applied loading cycles, loading
protection is another alternate to conventional
amplitude and temperature, exhibits non-
design approach of designing a structure with
linear behaviour
sufficient strength to withstand natural forces,
adequate ductility to absorb excessive energy Among the various control technique,
during natural disturbances and appropriate connecting adjacent structures by passive
stiffens to maintain structural integrity and energy dissipation devices is effective
serviceability. The additional energy added to alternate to protect the civil engineering
the structures during earthquake event is structures against the natural disturbances. It
dissipated by energy dissipation devices is working on the concept to allow two
either by transforming into heat or dynamically dissimilar structures to exert
transforming it directly to any connected control forces upon one another to reduce the
structure or mass damper, prevent overall response of the coupled system. This
catastrophic structural failure. Passive control system can reduce the chances of pounding,
system utilizes the motion of the structure to but alters the dynamic characteristics of the
develop the control forces, and at the location unconnected buildings, enhances undesirable
of passive control system as a function of torsional response if the buildings have
response of the structure. asymmetric geometry and increases the base
shear of the stiffer buildings. Bhaskararao
Friction dampers, displacement dependent
and Jangid (2006) found that the harmonic
control device, dissipate input energy through
response of two adjacent SDOF structures
frictional work; have advantages such as low
connected with a friction damper, to be
cost, less maintenance, simple mechanism,
periodic, occurring under three different
*Author for Correspondence: E-mail:ccstruct@gmail.com 1323

Patel C. C.
modes of vibration. The objectives of the damping coefficient of the Structure 1 and 2,
study is to analyse the response of connected respectively. Let ω1 = k1 m1 and
structure considering various model of
friction force of friction damper, namely ω2 = k2 m2 be the circular frequencies and
(model 1) Coulomb friction characteristics, ξ1 = c1 / 2m1ω1 and ξ 2 = c2 / 2m2ω2 be the
(model 2) velocity dependent coefficient of damping ratios of Structures 1 and 2,
friction, (model 3) equivalent linear respectively. Let α and λ be the mass and
coefficient by statistical linearization frequency ratio of two structures,
technique and (model 4) viso-plasticity respectively, expressed as
model, subjected to stationary as well non-
m1
stationary random process using Monte Carlo α= (1)
simulation. m2
ω2
ADJACENT STRUCTURES COUPLED λ= (2)
ω1
BY FRICITON DAMPER
Let f s be the limiting force in friction
Considering two adjacent SDOF structures damper also termed as slip force. The couple
connected with friction damper as shown in system remains in the non-slip mode until the
Fig. 1(a) and corresponding mathematical frictional force in the damper is less than the
model shown in Fig. 1(b). limiting friction force. The force in friction
Friction damper attains to the limiting slip force, the
Damper condition for slippage will be initiated.
Structure 1 Structure2 Considering the coupled system subjected to
ground motion, the equations of equilibrium
can be written as
x1 (t ) + c1 x1 (t ) + k1 x1 (t ) + f s =
m1  −m1 
xg (t ) (3)
x2 (t ) + c2 x2 (t ) + k2 x2 (t ) − f s =
m2  − m2 
xg (t ) (4)
x1 (t ) (a)
x2 (t ) where x1 (t ) and x2 (t ) are the displacement
fs
m1 m2 response relative to the ground of Structure 1
and 2, respectively (as shown in Fig.1); 
xg (t )
k1 c1 k2 c2
is the ground acceleration; x (t ) and 
x(t ) are
the first and second derivative with respect to
time of the displacement response.
xg MODELING OF FRICTION DAMPER

FORCE
(b)
Various models have been proposed by many
Figure 1. Two adjacent structures
researchers for the mathematical description
coupled by friction damper and its
of friction which mostly differ in the way the
mathematical model
stick phase modelled.
The adjacent structures are idealized as two
SDOF coupled system and referred as DAMPER FORCE BY COULOMB
Structure 1 and 2, respectively. Let m1 , k 1 , c1 FRICTION CHARACTERISTICS
and m2 , k 2 , c2 be the mass, stiffness and (MODEL 1)
1324
Response Analysis of Adjacent Structures Connected by Friction Damper
The simplest form of Coulomb friction with x1 (t ) + c1 x1 (t ) + k1 x1 (t )

m1 
(9)
equal static and dynamic friction coefficients + ce ( x1 (t ) − x2 (t )) =−m1 
xg (t )
is given by
x2 (t ) + c2 x2 (t ) + k2 x2 (t )
m2 
fs = µ R (5) (10)
− ce ( x1 (t ) − x2 (t )) =
−m2 
xg (t )
where µ is co-efficient of friction and R is
normal reaction to frictional interface. where ce is the equivalent constant, obtained
by minimizing the mean square error between
DAMPER FORCE BY VELOCITY linear and non-linear terms of Eqs. (7) and
DEPENDENT COEFFICIENT OF (9). The equivalent constant ce is given by
FRICTION (MODEL 2)
2 fs
The experimental investigations found that ce = (11)
π σ x
the coefficient of friction of Teflon-steel r
interfaces exhibits a significant dependence The relationship between equivalent constant

on the bearing pressure, sliding velocity and and slip force of friction damper can be given
condition of interface. The coefficient of as
sliding friction of Teflon-steel interfaces can 2 f s2  α 
ce =  
be approximated by the equation m1π 2 S0  1 + α 
(12)
µ ( xr ) =
f max − Df .exp(−a xr ) 1+ α
(6) f s = ce m1π S0
2
2α
where f max is the maximum value of friction
coefficient attained at large value of sliding VISCO-PLASTICITY MODEL (MODEL 4)
velocities; f=
min f max − Df represent the friction
The Visco-plasticity model also called as
coefficient value at essentially zero velocity, xr is hysteretic model, is based on the principles of
the relative velocity of damper ends and a is theory of visco-plasticity, which makes use
constant. The equation of motion of the two of a model that accounts for sticking and
connected structures in the slip mode are sliding by itself. The frictional force
given by mobilized in the damper is given by
x1 (t ) + c1 x1 (t ) + k1 x1 (t )
m1  f1 = µ RZ (13)
(7)
+ f s sgn( x1 (t ) − x2 (t )) = −m1 
xg (t ) and corresponding equation of motion of two
x2 (t ) + c2 x2 (t ) + k2 x2 (t )
m2  connected structure is given by
(8)
− f s sgn( x1 (t ) − x2 (t )) =−m2 
xg (t ) y1 (t ) + c1 y1 (t ) + k1 y1 (t ) + f1 =
m1  −m1 
y g (t ) (14)
where sgn denotes the signum function. y2 (t ) + c2 y 2 (t ) + k2 y2 (t ) − f1 =
m2  −m2 
y g (t )
(15)
DAMPER FORCE BY EQUIVALENT
where Z is a non-dimensional hysteretic
LINEAR COEFFICIENT BY
component satisfying the following non-
STATISTICAL LINEARIZATION
linear first order differential equation, which
TECHNIQUE (MODEL 3)
is given by
The equations of motion of structures
dZ
connected with friction damper, damper force =
q B ( x1 (t ) − x2 (t))
dt
by Coulomb friction model, are non-linear η −1 (16)
− γ x1 (t ) − x2 (t) Z Z
and the corresponding equivalent linearized η
equations is given by − A1 ( x1 (t ) − x2 (t)) Z
1325
Patel C. C.
where q is the yield displacement, B , γ and NUMERICAL STUDY

A1 are non-dimensional parameters of the All numerical solutions are based on the
hysteresis loop, control the shape of the loop solution of equations (3) to (19) which
The condition of reattachment and separation properly account for the stick-slip conditions.
are accounted for by Eq. (24). The non-stationary response of the system is
obtained using modulating function. The
MODEL OF GROUND MOTION response is also investigated for A(t ) = 1 at all
EXCITATION value of time t .
The time variation of root mean square
For small time duration of an earthquake, the (RMS) relative displacement and RMS
response is non-stationary and depends on absolute acceleration of Structure 1and 2 for
initial conditions, whereas for reasonably non-stationary ground excitation is shown in
large time duration of an earthquake, the Fig.2.
response become stationary and ground
model 1
motion can be modelled as stationary model 2
0.1 0.1 model 3
process. The earthquake excitation  xg (t ) is model 4
RMS x2
RMS x1
expressed as
0.0 0.0
xg (t ) = 
 x f (t ) (17) 0.3 0.3
RMS xa2
RMS xa1
..
..
The random process 

x f (t ) is considered as
the response of two linear filters subjected to
0.0 0.0
white-noise excitation as 0 10 20
Time (sec)
30 40 0 10 20
Time (sec)
30 40
x f (t ) + 2ξ f2ω f x f (t ) + ω 2f x f (t ) =
 −( 
xs (t ) + 
x0 (t )) Figure 2. Time variation of nonstationary
(18) RMS responses of adjacent structures
xs (t ) + 2ξ ωs xs (t ) + ω x (t ) =
 2 2
− 
x0 (t ) (19) connected by friction damper
s s s
where 
y0 (t ) input white-noise random process CONCLUSIONS
with constant intensity of the PSPD S0 . The
It is observed that nonstationary response for
ωs and ξs generally represent the velocity dependent friction coefficient (model
predominant frequency and damping ratio of 2) is in very good agreement with that of
soil strata, respectively. visco-plasticity model. The Coulomb friction
In present study the nonstationary earthquake model (model 1) little-bit overestimate the
excitation  xg (t ) is nonstationary random responses, whereas, equivalent linearize
model (model 3) underestimate the responses.
process 
x f (t ) to be obtained considering the
The response quantities due to non-stationary
input white-noise random process 
x0 (t ) , and stationary random excitations show
multiplied by modulating function A(t ) . almost similar trends in the results.
The extensive Monto Carle simulations
which are based on the equation of motion REFERENCES
with condition of separation and reattachment Bhaskararao A V and Jangid R S 2006
is to be used to compare the degree of Harmonic response of adjacent structures
accuracy of each of above four damper force connected with a friction damper Journal
model. of Sound and Vibration 292 710-725.
1326
ICCMS2016
SIMULATION OF QUARTER CAR MODEL FOR THE SHOCK

ABSORBER COMPLIANCE WITH RUBBER BUSH AND WASHERS
BARETHIYE V M*, POHIT G and MITRA A
Mechanical Engineering Department, Jadavpur University, Kolkata, India
Abstract: Shock absorber is the important, most complex and nonlinear part of the
vehicle suspension system. Some researcher shows the influence of rubber bush on
vehicle suspension movement. The rubber bush and washers is the important role in
vehicle suspension to reduce the vertical vibration of the vehicle. The objectives of
the paper to develop and simulate the quarter car model with shock absorber
compliance with rubber bush and washers subject to two bump road profile by using
MATLAB/SIMULINK software. Simulated results of proposed quarter car system
show that the model can be use for full car modelling.
Keywords: Shock absorber; rubber bush; washers; simulink; quarter car.
INTRODUCTION validated using experimental data generated

Suspension system is a mechanism consists test bench. The effect of shock absorber
of shock absorber which is mainly designed models on a vehicle’s vertical dynamic
to isolate the mass of the body of vehicle behavior has been analyzed.
from the vibration of unsprung mass Nonlinear dynamic responses of twin tube
produced by the road irregularities. Shock hydraulic shock absorber were carried out by
absorber is one of the most important parts of (Yanqing Liu and Jianwu Zhang, 2001), and
vehicle suspension system. It is also the least developed the virtual prototype of shock
understood and most confusing part of the absorber model was built in Adams
suspension because of its non-linear and environment for the bench test.
complex behaviour. When the vehicle passes
SHOCK ABSORBER MODELLING
over a bump, the suspension and vibration
dampers are compressed. The resulting shock Shock absorber prevents or isolates the
of the vehicle is absorbed by the suspension. vehicle from vertical vibration due to road
unevenness and provides the road comfort.
Now a days a simulation based model are
The rubber bush and rubber bearings are used
used to study the dynamic behavior of the
to attach the shock absorber with unsprung
vehicle. (Calvo et. al., 2008) studied the
mass and sprung mass respectively, in most
influence of a shock absorber models on
of the vehicles. As per (Blundell, 1998) the
vehicle dynamic simulation. From the
primary role of bushes in suspension system
damper’s real behavior, three mathematical
is to isolate the vehicle from road inputs or to
models were generated, increasing the
improve the ride quality. The (Yanqing Liu
c

ICCMS Proceeding

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ICCMS Proceeding

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROCEEDINGS

SIXTH INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS ON

Organizers Under the Aegis of

IIT BOMBAY VJTI

Indian Institute of Technology Veermata Jijabai Technological

The aim of ICCMS2016 is to provide a forum for scientists, academicians, analysts,

We wish to extend our heartfelt acknowledgment to the authors, peer-reviewers and

I wish the congress great success.

Computational Mechanics which makes use of Physics, Mechanics, Mathematics,

I wish the congress the great success.

2 Parallel Partitioned Simulations of Real World's Coupled Problems 2

3 Multiscale Modeling of Failure in Composite Materials 3

4 St Venant Torsion and Bending of Prismatic Composite Shafts 4

1 Long Waves in Lattice Waveguides 5

2 Three-Dimensional Numerical Study of Conjugate Heat Transfer in Diverging 6

3 Solidification With Buoyancy Induced Convection: Evaluation of Different Mushy 7

4 Physics Based Finite Element Interpolation Functions for Rotating Beams 8

6 Finite Element Computations of Complex Flows 10

7 Tuned Sloshing damper in Response Control of Tall Building Structure 11

8 Advanced Methodologies for Fracture Analysis and Damage Tolerant Evaluation 12

9 Atomistic and Continuum Modelling of Fracture Strength and Adhesion Properties of 13

12 Two-Temperature Continuum Model for Metal Plasticity 16

13 Microstructure Evolution in Metal Nanostructures Under Extreme Conditions of 17

14 Nonlinear Stability Characteristics of Composite Cylindrical Panel Subjected to Non- 18

16 Multi-fidelity Design Optimization: Challenges in Complex Physics-based 20

17 An Overview Of Computational Modeling At Material Chemistry And Micro Scales In 21

001 Vibrational Characteristics of Femur Bone 22

002 Analysis of Implants Used for Stabilization of Fractured Bone 25

003 Influence of Drilling Effect on Bone Stresses by Finite Element Analysis 29

005 A Novel Computer Model for Bone’s Adaptation to Mechanical Environment 36

006 Fabric Based Characterization of Microstructural Anisotropy of Trabecular Bone 40

007 Analysis of Internal Fixation Plates 44

008 A Study on Accidental Injury & Human Biomechanics in Bangladesh: An Approach to 47

011 Expert System for Bridge Truss Design 58

012 Free Vibration Analysis of a Simply Supported Beam 62

013 Finite Element Modeling of Functionally Graded Material Plates: An Assessment of a 66

014 Experimental and Numerical Simulation Of ECC Strengthened Masonry Structures in 70

015 Two-Dimensional Static Analysis of Composite Plate Subjected to Arbitrary Boundary 75

020 Steel-Concrete Composite Structure- An Advanced Material 95

021 Orthogonal Cutting Process Modeling of Idealised CFRPs 99

022 Numerical Studies on Flange Buckling Behaviour of FRP Box-Beams 103

026 Coating Effect on Engine Piston Thermal Behaviour 120

028 Optimization of Sandwich Core FRP Bridge Deck 128

029 Slenderness Effect on Behaviour of CFRP Wrapped RC Circular Column 132

030 Modal Analysis of Composite Beam Using Abaqus (FEA) 136

036 Prediction of Spring-in Deformation for L-Shaped CFRP Components 161

Computational Fluid Dynamics

047 Unsteady Flow in a Rectangular Lid-Driven Cavity 205

050 Numerical Simulation of Mixed Convection in a Complicated Porous Enclosure 216

054 GPU Implementation of DSMC Simulation Using DSMCFOAM Solver 232

055 CFD Simulation of Hydrogen Distribution in Dry/Steam Condensing Environment in 235

057 Numerical Simulation of an Amphibian Aircraft: Estimation of Hydrodynamic Forces 243

069 Flow Modelling Around an Amphibian Aircraft Using Openfoam 287

079 Thermohydraulic Transport Characteristics of Inclined Ribs in Micro Channel 328

084 Numerical Study of Flow Distribution in a Parallel Channel Manifold 348

087 Heat Transfer Augmentation of Helixchanger Using CFD 360

089 Investigation of Acceleration Effects on Rocket Aerodynamics 368

098 On Bubble and Spike Evolution in Rayleigh-Taylor Instability 404

100 Noise Radiation from Compressible Reacting Mixing Layers 411

105 Investigation of Vibration Transmission in Cantilevered Structures Submerged in Fluid 432

107 Effect of Heat Transfer in Supersonic Flow Reattachment 440

109 Aeroelastic Stability of Delta Wing Configuration 449

Fracture and Damage Mechanics

110 Sequential Experimental Design Based Uncertainty Quantification 453